Tube Fittings Swagelog

www.swagelok.
com
Actuate d Ball Valve Se le ction Guide

ISO 5211- C omplia nt Actuator Mounting Bracket K its
40 G, 40, 6 0, 8 3, H 8 3, a n d S K S e r i e s Val ve s A FS B a l l Val ve s

Calculate valve operating torque Choose actuators and related components Select mounting bracket kits
Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Valve Operating Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 40G Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 40 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 60 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 83 and H83 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 AFS Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SK Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Actuated Ball Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Mounting Bracket Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
40G Series Valves
Swagelok 43G series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
Introduction
This guide enables the user to:
determine the operating torque for Swagelok 40G,
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 40G series ball valve is influenced by:
packing material system pressure system temperature system media.
40, 60, 83, H83, and SK series valves and AFS ball valves in a variety of operating conditions
select and size actuators, based on valve operating
torque
choose Swagelok ISO 5211 dimensionally compliant
mounting bracket kits, based on calculated operating torque values and actuator manufacturers literature.
The tables and calculations on page 3 can be used for 2- and 3-way stainless steel 40G series valves.
Valve Operating Torque

Start (break) torque is the torque required to begin actuation of a valve. The actuator start torque must be greater than the valve start torque. End (run) torque is the torque required to complete the actuation. The actuator end torque must be greater than the valve end torque.
Seat or Packing Material

In some ball valve designs, friction between ball and seat or packing affects operating torque, which varies with material and lubricant.
System Pressure
Higher pressures cause greater contact forces and friction, resulting in higher operating torque.
Factors that Affect Operating Torque

Frequency of Use
Operating torque typically increases as the time interval between cycles increases. For applications in which valves are cycled less frequently than noted in the Calculating Operating Torque instructions, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
System Temperature
The values given in the tables that follow were generated at room temperature. Lower or higher temperatures, depending on the valve design, can cause increased operating torque.
System Media
The values given in the tables that follow were generated with clean, dry nitrogen gas. Different system fluids have varying viscosities, bringing about different levels of friction and affecting operating torque. Some lightweight oils may reduce operating torque. Dirty, abrasive, or highly viscous fluids may increase operating torque.
Cycle Wear
Contacting surfacesvalve ball, seat, and body, for examplegradually wear as valves are actuated repeatedly, resulting in increased friction and operating torque. Actuation speed may influence the rate of valve wear as well. For applications in which valves are actuated rapidly or repeatedlymore often than once per hourcontact your authorized Swagelok representative.
40G Series Valves

Calculating Operating Torque
1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 1. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 2. 3. Select the media factor from Table 3. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 1) temperature factor (Table 2) media factor (Table 3). Example: A 43G valve with modified PTFE packing is operated with nitrogen at 2500 psig and 70F (20C). 1. According to Table 1, the base start torque is 37 in.lb and the base end torque is 11 in.lb. 2. According to Table 2, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. According to Table 3, the media factor is 1.0. 4. Start torque = 37 in.lb = 37 in.lb End torque = 11 in.lb = 11 in.lb 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Ordering Information
1. Select the desired 40G series valve and packing material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number based on valve series, flange size, and coupling size.
Table 1Base Start and End Torque

Use linear interpolation to obtain torque values for system pressures not listed.
System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 to 1000 (68.9, 6.89) Valve Series 41G/42G 41GE/42GE 41G-1466/42G-1466 43G 43GE 43G-1466 Start 13 10 13 32 23 28
(1.5, 15) (1.2, 12) (1.5, 15) (3.7, 37) (2.6, 27) (3.2, 33)
1500 (103, 10.3) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 11 (1.3, 13) 33 (3.8, 39) 25 (2.9, 29) End 7 (0.8, 8.1) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 10 (1.2, 12) 11 (1.3, 13)
2500 (172, 17.2) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 12 (1.4, 14) 37 (4.2, 43) 27 (3.1, 32) End 8 (0.9, 9.3) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 11 (1.3, 13) 12 (1.4, 14)
3000 (206, 20.6) Start 40 (4.6, 47) 30 (3.4, 35) End 11 (1.3, 13) 13 (1.5, 15)
Base Torque, in.lb (Nm, cmkg) End 7 7 7 9 10 16

(0.8, 8.1) (0.8, 8.1) (0.8, 8.1) (1.1, 11) (1.2, 12) (1.9, 19)
Table 2Temperature Factors

Use linear interpolation to obtain factors for system temperatures not listed.
Temperature, F (C) 65 50 to 300 (53) (10 to 148) 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

Valve Series ISO 5211 Flange Size F03 Coupling Cap Screw Size Type 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 14 mm ISO Metric 14 mm ISO Fractional 14 mm DIN Metric 14 mm DIN Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-41G-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-41G-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F05-14DIN-F
Valve Series 41G/42G 41GE/42GE 41G-1466/42G-1466 43G 43GE 43G-1466
41G/ 42G F04
Table 3Media Factors

MediumWeight Oil 0.85 Clean Water 1.0 Nitrogen Gas 1.0 F03
40G Series Valve Designators

Nonestandard, modified PTFE packing EUHMWPE packing -1466modified PTFE packing, assembled without lubricant and cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63 43G
F04
F05
See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
40 Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 40 series ball valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency packing material system pressure system temperature system media.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per 3 days, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 4. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 5. 3. Select the media factor from Table 6. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 4) temperature factor (Table 5) media factor (Table 6). Example: A 43 series valve with PTFE packing is operated with nitrogen at 1500 psig and 70F (20C) and cycled every 3 days.
1. According to Table 4, the base start torque is 33 in.lb and the base end torque is 10 in.lb. 2. According to Table 5, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. According to Table 6, the media factor is 1.0. 4. Start torque = 33 in.lb = 33 in.lb End torque = 10 in.lb = 10 in.lb. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 2- and 3-way 40 series valves in stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 materials.
If the valve will be cycled less frequently than once per 3 days or more frequently than once per hour, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 to 1000 (68.9, 6.89) 1500 (103, 10.3) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start End Start End 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 15 (1.7, 18) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 15 (1.7, 18) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 10 (1.2, 12) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 11 (1.3, 13) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 32 (3.7, 37) 9 (1.1, 11) 33 (3.8, 39) 10 (1.2, 12) 36 (4.1, 42) 15 (1.7, 18) 38 (4.3, 44) 16 (1.9, 19) 23 (2.6, 27) 10 (1.2, 12) 25 (2.9, 29) 11 (1.3, 13) 28 (3.2, 33) 16 (1.9, 19) 37 (4.2, 43) 20 (2.3, 24) 40 (4.6, 47) 22 (2.5, 26) 48 (5.5, 56) 22 (2.5, 26) 52 (5.9, 60) 23 (2.6, 27) 70 (8.0, 81) 33 (3.8, 39) 75 (8.5, 87) 35 (4.0, 41) 60 (6.8, 70) 40 (4.6, 47) 80 (9.1, 93) 30 (3.4, 35) 85 (9.7, 98) 32 (3.7, 37) 80 (9.1, 93) 35 (4.0, 41) 85 (9.7, 98) 37 (4.2, 43) 130 (14.7, 150) 46 (5.2, 53) 135 (15.3, 156) 50 (5.7, 58) 135 (15.3, 156) 95 (10.8, 110) System Pressure, psig (Bar, MPa) 2500 (172, 17.2) 3000 (206, 20.6) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start End Start End 15 (1.7, 18) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 15 (1.7, 18) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 12 (1.4, 14) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 37 (4.2, 43) 11 (1.3, 13) 40 (4.6, 47) 11 (1.3, 13) 42 (4.8, 49) 18 (2.1, 21) 45 (5.1, 52) 20 (2.3, 24) 27 (3.1, 32) 12 (1.4, 14) 30 (3.4, 35) 13 (1.5, 15) 44 (5.0, 51) 25 (2.9, 29) 57 (6.5, 66) 26 (3.0, 30) 83 (9.4, 96) 40 (4.6, 47) 95 (10.8, 110) 35 (4.0, 41) 95 (10.8, 110) 42 (4.8,49) 150 (17.0, 173) 55 (6.3, 64)

Use linear interpolation to obtain factors for temperatures from 65 to 50F (53 to 10C).
Temperature, F (C) (65) 50 to 150
(53) (10 to 65)
Valve Series 41/42 41T/42T 41E/42E 41-1466/42-1466 43 43T 43E 43-1466 44 44T 44E 44-1466 45 45T 45E 45-1466
1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.5 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

MediumWeight Oil 0.85 Clean Water 1.0 Nitrogen Gas 1.0
40 Series Valve Designators

Nonestandard, PTFE packing Tlow-temperature, PFA packing Elow-temperature, UHMWPE packing -1466PTFE packing, assembled without lubricant and cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63
40 Series Valves
1. Select the desired 40 series valve and packing material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 40 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 valves with K-style, double-flat stems. To order a 40 series valve with a K-style, double-flat stem and without a handle, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-41S1-K-NH See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
Swagelok 45 series valve with El-O-Matic actuator and Westlock limit switch.

ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size F03 ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size F03
Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN
Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional
Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-41-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-41-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-41-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-41-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-41-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-41-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-41-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-41-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-41-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-43-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-43-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-43-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-43-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-43-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-43-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-43-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-43-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-43-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-43-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-43-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-43-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-43-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-43-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-43-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-43-F05-14DIN-F
Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN
41/42 F04
F04 44
F05
F03
F04 43
F05 45
14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN
F05
F07
17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN
60 Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 60 series valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency seat material system pressure system temperature system media.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per day, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 7. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 8. 3. Select the media factor from Table 9. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 7) temperature factor (Table 8) media factor (Table 9). Example: A 63 series valve with reinforced PTFE seat is operated with nitrogen at 1500 psig and 70F (20C) and cycled once per day.
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 2- and 3-way 60 series valves in stainless steel, carbon steel, and brass materials.
If the valve will be cycled less frequently than once per day or more frequently than once per hour, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P Start 18 (2.1, 21) 25 (2.9, 29) 52 (5.9, 60) 50 (5.7, 58) 125 (14.2, 144) 90 (10.2, 104) 250 (28.3, 288) 190 (21.5, 219) 290 (32.8, 335) 280 (31.7, 323) End 16 (1.9, 19) 16 (1.9, 19) 28 (3.2, 33) 40 (4.6, 47) 60 (6.8, 70) 75 (8.5, 87) 120 (13.6, 139) 160 (18.1, 185) 135 (15.3, 156) 230 (26.0, 265) 1000 (68.9, 6.89) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start 22 (2.5, 26) 25 (2.9, 29) 58 (6.6, 67) 50 (5.7, 58) 160 (18.1, 185) 90 (10.2, 104) 290 (32.8, 335) 190 (21.5, 219) 370 (41.9, 427) 280 (31.7, 323) End 20 (2.3, 24) 16 (1.9, 19) 35 (4.0, 41) 40 (4.6, 47) 100 (11.3, 116) 75 (8.5, 87) 140 (15.9, 162) 160 (18.1, 185) 200 (22.6, 231) 230 (26.0, 265) Start 25 (2.9, 29) 30 (3.4, 35) 62 (7.1, 72) 65 (7.4, 75) 180 (20.4, 208) 150 (17.0, 173) 310 (35.1, 358) 275 (31.1, 317) 500 (56.5, 576) 360 (40.7, 415) End 22 (2.5, 26) 20 (2.3, 24) 37 (4.2, 43) 50 (5.7, 58) 120 (13.6, 139) 125 (14.2, 144) 145 (16.4, 168) 230 (26.0, 265) 235 (26.6, 271) 295 (33.4, 340) 1500 (103, 10.3)

Temperature, F (C) 20 to 100 450
(28 to 37) (232)
Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1.9 1.0 3.0 1.0 2.3 1.2 2.0 1.0 2.8 1.0
System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 2200 (151, 15.1) Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P Start 26 (3.0, 30) 37 (4.2, 43) 67 (7.6, 78) 100 (11.3, 116) 205 (23.2, 237) 230 (26.0, 265) 335 (37.9, 386) 405 (45.8, 467) 500 (56.5, 576) 485 (54.9, 559) End 2500 (172, 17.2) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) 23 (2.6, 27) 23 (2.6, 27) 40 (4.6, 47) 25 (2.9, 29) 42 (4.8, 49) 75 (8.5, 85) 110 (12.5, 127) 85 (9.7, 98) 150 (17.0, 173) 190 (21.5, 219) 260 (29.4, 300) 215 (24.3, 248) 160 (18.1, 185) 340 (38.5, 392) 280 (31.7, 323) 400 (45.2, 461) Start End Start 45 (5.1, 52) End 30 (3.4, 35) Seat Material PTFE PEEK 3000 (206, 20.6)

MediumWeight Oil 0.9 1.0 Clean Water 1.0 1.0 Nitrogen Gas 1.0 1.0

Treinforced PTFE seat and packing PPEEK seat and packing
60 Series Valves
1. Select the desired 4-bolt 60 series valve and seat material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end operating torque. For 60 series valves with encased 8-bolt construction, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 60 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel, carbon steel, and alloy 400 valves. To order bracket kits for brass valves, insert -B into the bracket kit ordering number. Example: SS-MB-62-B-F03-9ISO-M See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator to 4-Bolt 60 Series Valves, MS-INS-4B60NM.
Swagelok 63 series valve with ISO 5211-compliant actuator, ASCO solenoid, and Pepperl+Fuchs proximity sensor.

ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size
Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN
Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional
Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-62-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-62-F03-11ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-11ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-11DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-11DIN-F SS-MB-62-F03-14ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-14ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-14DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-14DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-14ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-14ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-14DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-14DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-17ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-17ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-17DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-17DIN-F
F03
11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN
F05
65
62
F07
F04
67
F07
63
F05
68
F07
83 and H83 Series Valves

Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 83 or H83 series valve is influenced by:
system pressure cycle frequency system media.

If the valve will be cycled no more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 10. 2. Select the media factor from Table 11. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 10) media factor (Table 11). Example: An 83 series 3-way valve is operated with medium-weight oil at 1500 psig and cycled once per day.
1. According to Table 10, the base start torque is 25 in.lb and the base end torque is 15 in.lb. 2. According to Table 11, the media factor is 0.9. 3. Start torque = 25 in.lb = 22.5 in.lb End torque = 15 in.lb = 13.5 in.lb. 0.9 0.9
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 83 and H83 series valves of stainless steel and alloy 400 with any seat material.
If the valve will be cycled more frequently than once per hour, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 Valve Series 83 2-way 83 3-way All H83 Start 15 (1.7, 18) 25 (2.9, 29) 25 (2.9, 29) End 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 1500 (103, 10.3) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 25 (2.9, 29) 25 (2.9, 29) End 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 3000 (206, 20.6) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start 17 (2.0, 20) 27 (3.1, 32) 27 (3.1, 32) End 17 (2.0, 20) 17 (2.0, 20) 17 (2.0, 20) Start 20 (2.3, 24) 30 (3.4, 35) 30 (3.4, 35) End 20 (2.3, 24) 20 (2.3, 24) 20 (2.3, 24) Start 35 (4.0, 41) End 20 (2.3, 24) 6000 (413, 41.3) 10 000 (689, 68.9)


ISO 5211 Flange Size F03 Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-83-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-83-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-83-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-83-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-83-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-83-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-83-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-83-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-83-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-83-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-83-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-83-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-83-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-83-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-83-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-83-F05-14DIN-F
Swagelok 83 series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
1. Select the desired 83 or H83 series valve. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions above, calculate the valve start and end operating torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 83 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel and alloy 400 valves. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
F04
F05
AFS Ball Valves

Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok AFS ball valve is influenced by:
system pressure system temperature.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per day, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 12. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 13. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 12) temperature factor (Table 13). Example: AFS valve is operated with nitrogen at 4500 psig and 70F (20C).
1. According to Table 12, the base start torque is 61 in. lb and the base end torque is 36 in. lb. 2. According to Table 13, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 61 in. lb = 61 in. lb End torque = 36 in. lb = 36 in. lb. 1.0 1.0

Torque values based on the valves remaining closed for one day at pressure. Use linear interpolation to obtain torque values for system pressures not listed.
System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 1000 4500 Valve Torque Start End 0 13 (1.5, 15) 12 (1.4, 14)
(68.9, 6.89) (310, 31.0)

Temperature factors based 6000 psig (413 bar) system pressure and on the valves remaining closed for one day at pressure. Use linear interpolation to obtain factors for system temperatures not listed.
Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 2.9 76 (8.6, 88) 41 (4.7, 48) 70 (20) 1.0 185 (85) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0
6000
(413, 41.3)
Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) 23 (2.6, 27) 18 (2.1, 21) 61 (6.9, 71) 36 (4.1, 42)

ISO 5211 Flange Size Coupling Size 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN F05 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN
Swagelok AFS ball valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional
Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-F SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-F
F07
1. Select the desired AFS valve. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at right, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
10
SK Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok SK series valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency system pressure system temperature.

1. Determine the base start and base
end torque at system pressure from Table 14.

2. Determine the temperature factor
1. According to Table 14, the base start torque is 21 in. lb and the base end torque is 10 in. lb. 2. According to Table 15, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 21 in.lb = 21 in.lb End torque = 10 in.lb = 10 in.lb. 1.0 1.0
from Table 15.

3. Calculate the start and end operating
torque: Base torque (Table 14) temperature factor (Table 15). Example: SK series valve is operated with nitrogen at 3000 psig and 70F (20C).

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) Valve Torque Start End 0 14 (1.6, 17) 10 (1.2, 12) 3000 (206, 20.6) 21 (2.4, 25) 10 (1.2. 12) 6000 (413, 41.3) 26 (3.0, 30) 10 (1.2. 12)

Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 2.0 0 (17) 2.0 70 (20) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0 302 (150) 1.0
Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg)

ISO 5211 Flange Size F04 Coupling Size 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-4SK-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-4SK-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-4SK-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-4SK-F04-11DIN-F
Swagelok SK series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
1. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 2. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
11
Actuated Ball Valve Assemblies

In addition to bracket kits, Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assembliesincluding valves, actuators, sensors, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 standards. Electrical components meet North American NEMA and European CE/CENELEC requirements. Assemblies are based on:
maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F
Position sensor
[10 to 37C])
a design margin of 20 % for
calculated operating torque Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for assemblies built for other system conditions. See the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-02-337, for more information. Wall mounting bracket Actuator Solenoid
Mounting bracket Hex bolts
Hex nuts
Lock washers
Mounting bracket
Cap screws Grounding springs
Panel nut
Coupling
Set screw
Coupling
Stem nut Lock tab
Valve Valve 40G, 40, 83, H83, SK Series AFS Ball Valves 60 Series 4-Bold Cast Stainless Steel
Swagelok-Stocked Components
Actuators
Swagelok El-O-Matic
Sensors
Pepperl+Fuchs (proximity sensors) Westlock (limit switches)
Solenoids
ASCO Caution: Actuated assemblies must be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
Additional components and manufacturers available on request.
Mounting Bracket Kits

Kits for Swagelok 40G, 40, 83, H83, and SK series and AFS ball valves contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket that meets ISO 5211
Kits for Swagelok 60 series valves contain:

dimensional specifications
four 316 stainless steel socket head cap screws for
fractional sizes, or A4 stainless steel for metric sizes (A4 is approximately equivalent to AISI 316.)
Coupling 40G and SK seriespowdered metal 300 series stainless
316 stainless steel coupling 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket two 316 stainless steel lock washers 302 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs 316 stainless steel lock tab two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts lubricant and MSDS instructions.
steel
40, 83, and H83 series and AFS ball valves316
stainless steel
A4 stainless steel set screw instructions.
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange valve components with those of other manufacturers.
Warranty Information
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company ASCO, El-O-MaticTM Emerson 2002, 2004, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2007, R4 MS-02-136
www.swagelok.com
Actuate d Ball Valve Se le ction Guide

ISO 5211- C omplia nt Actuator Mounting Bracket K its
40 G, 40, 6 0, 8 3, H 8 3, a n d S K S e r i e s Val ve s A FS B a l l Val ve s

Calculate valve operating torque Choose actuators and related components Select mounting bracket kits
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Valve Operating Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 40G Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 40 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 60 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 83 and H83 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 AFS Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SK Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Actuated Ball Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Mounting Bracket Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
40G Series Valves
Swagelok 43G series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
Introduction
This guide enables the user to:
determine the operating torque for Swagelok 40G,
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 40G series ball valve is influenced by:
packing material system pressure system temperature system media.
40, 60, 83, H83, and SK series valves and AFS ball valves in a variety of operating conditions
select and size actuators, based on valve operating
torque
choose Swagelok ISO 5211 dimensionally compliant
mounting bracket kits, based on calculated operating torque values and actuator manufacturers literature.
The tables and calculations on page 3 can be used for 2- and 3-way stainless steel 40G series valves.
Valve Operating Torque

Start (break) torque is the torque required to begin actuation of a valve. The actuator start torque must be greater than the valve start torque. End (run) torque is the torque required to complete the actuation. The actuator end torque must be greater than the valve end torque.
Seat or Packing Material

In some ball valve designs, friction between ball and seat or packing affects operating torque, which varies with material and lubricant.
System Pressure
Higher pressures cause greater contact forces and friction, resulting in higher operating torque.
Factors that Affect Operating Torque

Frequency of Use
Operating torque typically increases as the time interval between cycles increases. For applications in which valves are cycled less frequently than noted in the Calculating Operating Torque instructions, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
System Temperature
The values given in the tables that follow were generated at room temperature. Lower or higher temperatures, depending on the valve design, can cause increased operating torque.
System Media
The values given in the tables that follow were generated with clean, dry nitrogen gas. Different system fluids have varying viscosities, bringing about different levels of friction and affecting operating torque. Some lightweight oils may reduce operating torque. Dirty, abrasive, or highly viscous fluids may increase operating torque.
Cycle Wear
Contacting surfacesvalve ball, seat, and body, for examplegradually wear as valves are actuated repeatedly, resulting in increased friction and operating torque. Actuation speed may influence the rate of valve wear as well. For applications in which valves are actuated rapidly or repeatedlymore often than once per hourcontact your authorized Swagelok representative.
40G Series Valves

1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 1. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 2. 3. Select the media factor from Table 3. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 1) temperature factor (Table 2) media factor (Table 3). Example: A 43G valve with modified PTFE packing is operated with nitrogen at 2500 psig and 70F (20C). 1. According to Table 1, the base start torque is 37 in.lb and the base end torque is 11 in.lb. 2. According to Table 2, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. According to Table 3, the media factor is 1.0. 4. Start torque = 37 in.lb = 37 in.lb End torque = 11 in.lb = 11 in.lb 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1. Select the desired 40G series valve and packing material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number based on valve series, flange size, and coupling size.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 to 1000 (68.9, 6.89) Valve Series 41G/42G 41GE/42GE 41G-1466/42G-1466 43G 43GE 43G-1466 Start 13 10 13 32 23 28
(1.5, 15) (1.2, 12) (1.5, 15) (3.7, 37) (2.6, 27) (3.2, 33)
1500 (103, 10.3) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 11 (1.3, 13) 33 (3.8, 39) 25 (2.9, 29) End 7 (0.8, 8.1) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 10 (1.2, 12) 11 (1.3, 13)
2500 (172, 17.2) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 12 (1.4, 14) 37 (4.2, 43) 27 (3.1, 32) End 8 (0.9, 9.3) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 11 (1.3, 13) 12 (1.4, 14)
3000 (206, 20.6) Start 40 (4.6, 47) 30 (3.4, 35) End 11 (1.3, 13) 13 (1.5, 15)
Base Torque, in.lb (Nm, cmkg) End 7 7 7 9 10 16

(0.8, 8.1) (0.8, 8.1) (0.8, 8.1) (1.1, 11) (1.2, 12) (1.9, 19)

Temperature, F (C) 65 50 to 300 (53) (10 to 148) 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0

Valve Series ISO 5211 Flange Size F03 Coupling Cap Screw Size Type 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 9 mm ISO Metric 9 mm ISO Fractional 9 mm DIN Metric 9 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 11 mm ISO Metric 11 mm ISO Fractional 11 mm DIN Metric 11 mm DIN Fractional 14 mm ISO Metric 14 mm ISO Fractional 14 mm DIN Metric 14 mm DIN Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-41G-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-41G-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-43G-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-43G-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-43G-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F05-14DIN-F
Valve Series 41G/42G 41GE/42GE 41G-1466/42G-1466 43G 43GE 43G-1466
41G/ 42G F04

MediumWeight Oil 0.85 Clean Water 1.0 Nitrogen Gas 1.0 F03
40G Series Valve Designators

Nonestandard, modified PTFE packing EUHMWPE packing -1466modified PTFE packing, assembled without lubricant and cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63 43G
F04
F05
See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
40 Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 40 series ball valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency packing material system pressure system temperature system media.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per 3 days, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 4. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 5. 3. Select the media factor from Table 6. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 4) temperature factor (Table 5) media factor (Table 6). Example: A 43 series valve with PTFE packing is operated with nitrogen at 1500 psig and 70F (20C) and cycled every 3 days.
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 2- and 3-way 40 series valves in stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 materials.
If the valve will be cycled less frequently than once per 3 days or more frequently than once per hour, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 to 1000 (68.9, 6.89) 1500 (103, 10.3) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start End Start End 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 15 (1.7, 18) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 15 (1.7, 18) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 10 (1.2, 12) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 11 (1.3, 13) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 13 (1.5, 15) 7 (0.8, 8.1) 32 (3.7, 37) 9 (1.1, 11) 33 (3.8, 39) 10 (1.2, 12) 36 (4.1, 42) 15 (1.7, 18) 38 (4.3, 44) 16 (1.9, 19) 23 (2.6, 27) 10 (1.2, 12) 25 (2.9, 29) 11 (1.3, 13) 28 (3.2, 33) 16 (1.9, 19) 37 (4.2, 43) 20 (2.3, 24) 40 (4.6, 47) 22 (2.5, 26) 48 (5.5, 56) 22 (2.5, 26) 52 (5.9, 60) 23 (2.6, 27) 70 (8.0, 81) 33 (3.8, 39) 75 (8.5, 87) 35 (4.0, 41) 60 (6.8, 70) 40 (4.6, 47) 80 (9.1, 93) 30 (3.4, 35) 85 (9.7, 98) 32 (3.7, 37) 80 (9.1, 93) 35 (4.0, 41) 85 (9.7, 98) 37 (4.2, 43) 130 (14.7, 150) 46 (5.2, 53) 135 (15.3, 156) 50 (5.7, 58) 135 (15.3, 156) 95 (10.8, 110) System Pressure, psig (Bar, MPa) 2500 (172, 17.2) 3000 (206, 20.6) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start End Start End 15 (1.7, 18) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 15 (1.7, 18) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 12 (1.4, 14) 8 (0.9, 9.3) 37 (4.2, 43) 11 (1.3, 13) 40 (4.6, 47) 11 (1.3, 13) 42 (4.8, 49) 18 (2.1, 21) 45 (5.1, 52) 20 (2.3, 24) 27 (3.1, 32) 12 (1.4, 14) 30 (3.4, 35) 13 (1.5, 15) 44 (5.0, 51) 25 (2.9, 29) 57 (6.5, 66) 26 (3.0, 30) 83 (9.4, 96) 40 (4.6, 47) 95 (10.8, 110) 35 (4.0, 41) 95 (10.8, 110) 42 (4.8,49) 150 (17.0, 173) 55 (6.3, 64)

Temperature, F (C) (65) 50 to 150
(53) (10 to 65)
1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.5 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0


Nonestandard, PTFE packing Tlow-temperature, PFA packing Elow-temperature, UHMWPE packing -1466PTFE packing, assembled without lubricant and cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63
40 Series Valves
1. Select the desired 40 series valve and packing material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 40 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 valves with K-style, double-flat stems. To order a 40 series valve with a K-style, double-flat stem and without a handle, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-41S1-K-NH See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
Swagelok 45 series valve with El-O-Matic actuator and Westlock limit switch.

ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size F03 ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size F03
Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN
41/42 F04
F04 44
F05
F03
F04 43
F05 45
F05
F07
60 Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 60 series valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency seat material system pressure system temperature system media.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per day, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 7. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 8. 3. Select the media factor from Table 9. 4. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 7) temperature factor (Table 8) media factor (Table 9). Example: A 63 series valve with reinforced PTFE seat is operated with nitrogen at 1500 psig and 70F (20C) and cycled once per day.
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 2- and 3-way 60 series valves in stainless steel, carbon steel, and brass materials.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P Start 18 (2.1, 21) 25 (2.9, 29) 52 (5.9, 60) 50 (5.7, 58) 125 (14.2, 144) 90 (10.2, 104) 250 (28.3, 288) 190 (21.5, 219) 290 (32.8, 335) 280 (31.7, 323) End 16 (1.9, 19) 16 (1.9, 19) 28 (3.2, 33) 40 (4.6, 47) 60 (6.8, 70) 75 (8.5, 87) 120 (13.6, 139) 160 (18.1, 185) 135 (15.3, 156) 230 (26.0, 265) 1000 (68.9, 6.89) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start 22 (2.5, 26) 25 (2.9, 29) 58 (6.6, 67) 50 (5.7, 58) 160 (18.1, 185) 90 (10.2, 104) 290 (32.8, 335) 190 (21.5, 219) 370 (41.9, 427) 280 (31.7, 323) End 20 (2.3, 24) 16 (1.9, 19) 35 (4.0, 41) 40 (4.6, 47) 100 (11.3, 116) 75 (8.5, 87) 140 (15.9, 162) 160 (18.1, 185) 200 (22.6, 231) 230 (26.0, 265) Start 25 (2.9, 29) 30 (3.4, 35) 62 (7.1, 72) 65 (7.4, 75) 180 (20.4, 208) 150 (17.0, 173) 310 (35.1, 358) 275 (31.1, 317) 500 (56.5, 576) 360 (40.7, 415) End 22 (2.5, 26) 20 (2.3, 24) 37 (4.2, 43) 50 (5.7, 58) 120 (13.6, 139) 125 (14.2, 144) 145 (16.4, 168) 230 (26.0, 265) 235 (26.6, 271) 295 (33.4, 340) 1500 (103, 10.3)

Temperature, F (C) 20 to 100 450
(28 to 37) (232)
Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1.9 1.0 3.0 1.0 2.3 1.2 2.0 1.0 2.8 1.0
System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 2200 (151, 15.1) Valve Series 62T 62P 63T 63P 65T 65P 67T 67P 68T 68P Start 26 (3.0, 30) 37 (4.2, 43) 67 (7.6, 78) 100 (11.3, 116) 205 (23.2, 237) 230 (26.0, 265) 335 (37.9, 386) 405 (45.8, 467) 500 (56.5, 576) 485 (54.9, 559) End 2500 (172, 17.2) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) 23 (2.6, 27) 23 (2.6, 27) 40 (4.6, 47) 25 (2.9, 29) 42 (4.8, 49) 75 (8.5, 85) 110 (12.5, 127) 85 (9.7, 98) 150 (17.0, 173) 190 (21.5, 219) 260 (29.4, 300) 215 (24.3, 248) 160 (18.1, 185) 340 (38.5, 392) 280 (31.7, 323) 400 (45.2, 461) Start End Start 45 (5.1, 52) End 30 (3.4, 35) Seat Material PTFE PEEK 3000 (206, 20.6)

MediumWeight Oil 0.9 1.0 Clean Water 1.0 1.0 Nitrogen Gas 1.0 1.0

Treinforced PTFE seat and packing PPEEK seat and packing
60 Series Valves
1. Select the desired 4-bolt 60 series valve and seat material. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at left, calculate the valve start and end operating torque. For 60 series valves with encased 8-bolt construction, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 60 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel, carbon steel, and alloy 400 valves. To order bracket kits for brass valves, insert -B into the bracket kit ordering number. Example: SS-MB-62-B-F03-9ISO-M See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator to 4-Bolt 60 Series Valves, MS-INS-4B60NM.
Swagelok 63 series valve with ISO 5211-compliant actuator, ASCO solenoid, and Pepperl+Fuchs proximity sensor.

ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size ISO 5211 Valve Flange Series Size
Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN
Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional
Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-62-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-62-F03-11ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-11ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-11DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-11DIN-F SS-MB-62-F03-14ISO-M SS-MB-62-F03-14ISO-F SS-MB-62-F03-14DIN-M SS-MB-62-F03-14DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-62-F04-14ISO-M SS-MB-62-F04-14ISO-F SS-MB-62-F04-14DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-14DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-F SS-MB-63-F05-17ISO-M SS-MB-63-F05-17ISO-F SS-MB-63-F05-17DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-17DIN-F
F03
F05
65
62
F07
F04
67
F07
63
F05
68
F07
83 and H83 Series Valves

Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok 83 or H83 series valve is influenced by:
system pressure cycle frequency system media.

If the valve will be cycled no more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 10. 2. Select the media factor from Table 11. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 10) media factor (Table 11). Example: An 83 series 3-way valve is operated with medium-weight oil at 1500 psig and cycled once per day.
1. According to Table 10, the base start torque is 25 in.lb and the base end torque is 15 in.lb. 2. According to Table 11, the media factor is 0.9. 3. Start torque = 25 in.lb = 22.5 in.lb End torque = 15 in.lb = 13.5 in.lb. 0.9 0.9
The tables and calculations on this page can be used for 83 and H83 series valves of stainless steel and alloy 400 with any seat material.
If the valve will be cycled more frequently than once per hour, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 0 Valve Series 83 2-way 83 3-way All H83 Start 15 (1.7, 18) 25 (2.9, 29) 25 (2.9, 29) End 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 1500 (103, 10.3) Start 15 (1.7, 18) 25 (2.9, 29) 25 (2.9, 29) End 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 15 (1.7, 18) 3000 (206, 20.6) Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) Start 17 (2.0, 20) 27 (3.1, 32) 27 (3.1, 32) End 17 (2.0, 20) 17 (2.0, 20) 17 (2.0, 20) Start 20 (2.3, 24) 30 (3.4, 35) 30 (3.4, 35) End 20 (2.3, 24) 20 (2.3, 24) 20 (2.3, 24) Start 35 (4.0, 41) End 20 (2.3, 24) 6000 (413, 41.3) 10 000 (689, 68.9)


ISO 5211 Flange Size F03 Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-83-F03-9ISO-M SS-MB-83-F03-9ISO-F SS-MB-83-F03-9DIN-M SS-MB-83-F03-9DIN-F SS-MB-83-F04-9ISO-M SS-MB-83-F04-9ISO-F SS-MB-83-F04-9DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-9DIN-F SS-MB-83-F04-11ISO-M SS-MB-83-F04-11ISO-F SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-F SS-MB-83-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-83-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-83-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-83-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-83-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-83-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-83-F05-14DIN-F
Swagelok 83 series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
1. Select the desired 83 or H83 series valve. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions above, calculate the valve start and end operating torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a Swagelok 83 series bracket kit ordering number. Bracket kits can be used with stainless steel and alloy 400 valves. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
F04
F05
AFS Ball Valves

Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok AFS ball valve is influenced by:
system pressure system temperature.

If the valve will be cycled at least once per day, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 12. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 13. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque (Table 12) temperature factor (Table 13). Example: AFS valve is operated with nitrogen at 4500 psig and 70F (20C).
1. According to Table 12, the base start torque is 61 in. lb and the base end torque is 36 in. lb. 2. According to Table 13, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 61 in. lb = 61 in. lb End torque = 36 in. lb = 36 in. lb. 1.0 1.0

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) 1000 4500 Valve Torque Start End 0 13 (1.5, 15) 12 (1.4, 14)
(68.9, 6.89) (310, 31.0)

Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 2.9 76 (8.6, 88) 41 (4.7, 48) 70 (20) 1.0 185 (85) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0
6000
(413, 41.3)
Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg) 23 (2.6, 27) 18 (2.1, 21) 61 (6.9, 71) 36 (4.1, 42)

ISO 5211 Flange Size Coupling Size 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN F05 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN
Swagelok AFS ball valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional
Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-F SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-F
F07
1. Select the desired AFS valve. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at right, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
10
SK Series Valves
Operating Torque
Operating torque for a Swagelok SK series valve is influenced by:
cycle frequency system pressure system temperature.

1. Determine the base start and base
end torque at system pressure from Table 14.

2. Determine the temperature factor
1. According to Table 14, the base start torque is 21 in. lb and the base end torque is 10 in. lb. 2. According to Table 15, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 21 in.lb = 21 in.lb End torque = 10 in.lb = 10 in.lb. 1.0 1.0
from Table 15.

3. Calculate the start and end operating
torque: Base torque (Table 14) temperature factor (Table 15). Example: SK series valve is operated with nitrogen at 3000 psig and 70F (20C).

System Pressure, psig (bar, MPa) Valve Torque Start End 0 14 (1.6, 17) 10 (1.2, 12) 3000 (206, 20.6) 21 (2.4, 25) 10 (1.2. 12) 6000 (413, 41.3) 26 (3.0, 30) 10 (1.2. 12)

Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 2.0 0 (17) 2.0 70 (20) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0 302 (150) 1.0
Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg)

Swagelok SK series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.
1. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 2. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number. See Mounting Instructions, ISO 5211 Dimensionally Compliant Bracket, Coupling, and Actuator, MS-INS-4080-NAMUR.
11
Actuated Ball Valve Assemblies

In addition to bracket kits, Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assembliesincluding valves, actuators, sensors, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 standards. Electrical components meet North American NEMA and European CE/CENELEC requirements. Assemblies are based on:
Position sensor
[10 to 37C])
calculated operating torque Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for assemblies built for other system conditions. See the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-02-337, for more information. Wall mounting bracket Actuator Solenoid
Hex nuts
Lock washers
Mounting bracket
Cap screws Grounding springs
Panel nut
Coupling
Set screw
Coupling
Stem nut Lock tab
Valve Valve 40G, 40, 83, H83, SK Series AFS Ball Valves 60 Series 4-Bold Cast Stainless Steel
Swagelok-Stocked Components
Actuators
Swagelok El-O-Matic
Sensors
Pepperl+Fuchs (proximity sensors) Westlock (limit switches)
Solenoids
ASCO Caution: Actuated assemblies must be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
Additional components and manufacturers available on request.

Kits for Swagelok 40G, 40, 83, H83, and SK series and AFS ball valves contain:
Kits for Swagelok 60 series valves contain:

Coupling 40G and SK seriespowdered metal 300 series stainless
316 stainless steel coupling 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket two 316 stainless steel lock washers 302 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs 316 stainless steel lock tab two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts lubricant and MSDS instructions.
steel
40, 83, and H83 series and AFS ball valves316
stainless steel
A4 stainless steel set screw instructions.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company ASCO, El-O-MaticTM Emerson 2002, 2004, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2007, R4 MS-02-136
www.swagelok.com
A ll-Metal Hose
Medium-Pre ssure
FJ Se r ie s
316L stainless steel core with 304 stainless steel overbraid For vacuum and positive pressure service up to 1600 psig (110 bar) End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Wide variety of fractional and metric end connections from 1/4 to 2 in. and 6 to 38 mm Custom options and assemblies available
All-Metal Hose, FJ Series
Features
Overbraid304 SS Core316L SS End connections316 SS
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.5) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/4 (31.8) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8) Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24 FJ32 Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 0.75 (1.90) 0.87 (2.21) 1.04 (2.64) 1.61 (4.09) 1.89 (4.80) 2.16 (5.49) 2.33 (5.92) 3.10 (7.87) Dynamic 4.33 (11.0) 5.91 (15.0) 6.50 (16.5) 8.86 (22.5) 10.2 (26.0) 11.8 (30.0) 13.4 (34.0) 15.4 (39.1) 325 to 800
(200 to 426)
Temperature Range (200 to 148C) F (C) psig (bar) 1600 (110) 1470 (101) 1110 (76.4) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 680 (46.8) 520 (35.8) 450 (31.0)
Working Pressure at 325 to 300F
Minimum Burst at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6400 (440) 5880 (405) 4440 (305) 3440 (237) 2720 (187) 2720 (187) 2080 (143) 1800 (124)
DO NOT SUBJECT METAL FLEXIBLE HOSE TO SYSTEM PRESSURE SURGES, SHOCK, OR PULSATIONS GREATER THAN 50 % OF THE WORKING PRESSURE RATING.
Measured to center line of bend. Working pressure ratings based on ISO 10380.
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
To determine pressure-temperature ratings at elevated temperatures, follow these steps: 1. Find the working pressure in the Technical Data table. 2. Multiply the working pressure by the appropriate factor listed in the Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors table. Example: 1/4 in. hose at 500F (260C) 1. The working pressure rating is 1600 psig (110 bar). 2. The temperature factor for 500F (260C) is 0.86: 1600 (110) 0.86 = 1376 psig (94.8 bar) The 1/4 in. hose pressure rating at 500F (260C) is 1376 psig (94.8 bar).
Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors Factors are based on ASME B31.3 Process Piping.
Temperature F (C) 325 to 300
(200 to 148)
Testing
Every Swagelok FJ series hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 10 5 std cm3/s. For additional testing, see Options and Accessories, page 6.
Factor 1.00 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.77 0.75 0.74
400 (204) 500 (260) 600 (315) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (426)
Cleaning and Packaging

Swagelok FJ series medium-pressure hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed or crated.
Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
Custom Assemblies
Typical Ordering Number
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
SS - FJ4 TA4 SL4 - 28

End Connection Material 316 stainless steel Hose Series and Size See following tables. 1st 2nd End Connections
or
71CM
For Options and Accessories, see page 6.
in. cm Overall Length
See following tables.
Must be in whole number increments.
Swagelok Tube Adapters

Tube OD
A
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA12 TA16 TA20 TA24 TA32 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM12 TM18 TM25 TM32 TM38
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24 FJ32 FJ4 FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24
A 1.52 (38.6) 1.81 (46.0) 2.16 (54.9) 2.50 (63.5) 2.99 (75.9) 3.91 (99.3) 4.47 (114) 5.45 (138) 38.9 (1.53) 39.4 (1.55) 64.8 (2.55) 65.8 (2.59) 61.0 (2.40) 75.9 (2.99) 87.4 (3.44) 97.3 (3.83)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.17 (4.3) 0.26 (6.6) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.79 (20.1) 1.02 (25.9) 1.24 (31.5) 1.71 (43.4) 4.1 (0.16) 5.6 (0.22) 8.6 (0.34) 11.9 (0.47) 14.7 (0.58) 19.8 (0.78) 26.4 (1.04) 31.5 (1.24)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 0.93 (23.6) 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4) 1 7/8 hex flat 2 1/4 hex flat 3 hex flat 13.7 (0.54) 13.7 (0.54) 18 mm hex flat 22 mm hex flat 33.5 (1.32) 41.4 (1.63) 50 mm hex flat 50 mm hex flat
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/2 End Connections with Hex Flat 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
A
Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 8 10 12 18 25 32 38
Preswaged Nuts and Ferrules Over 1 in. and 25 mm
Furnished with nut, preswaged silver-plated front ferrule, and uncoated back ferrule.
Tube Butt Welds

Tube OD
A 0.75
(19.0)
End Connection Designator TB4 TB6 TB8 TB12 TB16
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16
A 1.64 (41.7) 1.72 (43.7) 2.04 (51.8) 2.14 (54.4) 2.46 (62.5)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.31 (7.9) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.87 (22.1)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 0.93 (23.6) 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
All-Metal Hose, FJ Series Swagelok Tube Fittings

Tube OD
A
End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8 SL12 SL16 SL20 SL24 SL32 SM6 SM8 SM10 SM12 SM18 SM25 SM32 SM38
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24 FJ32 FJ4 FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24
A 1.87 (47.5) 2.00 (50.8) 2.43 (61.7) 2.62 (66.5) 3.20 (81.3) 3.79 (96.3) 4.25 (108) 5.22 (133) 47.5 (1.87) 46.0 (1.81) 53.6 (2.11) 61.7 (2.43) 66.5 (2.62) 81.3 (3.20) 98.8 (3.89) 111 (4.36)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.63 (16.0) 0.87 (22.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.34 (34.0) 1.81 (46.0) 4.8 (0.19) 6.4 (0.25) 7.9 (0.31) 9.4 (0.37) 15.0 (0.59) 21.6 (0.85) 28.4 (1.12) 33.5 (1.32)
Maximum Outside Dimension 9/16 hex flat 11/16 hex flat 7/8 hex flat 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4) 1 3/4 hex flat 2 1/8 hex flat 2 3/4 hex flat 14 mm hex flat 15 mm hex flat 18 mm hex flat 22 mm hex flat 1 1/16 hex flat 1 3/8 hex flat 46 mm hex flat 55 mm hex flat
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 6 8 10 12 18 25 32 38
Dimensions, mm (in.)
Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule
Male Pipe Threads, NPT

Pipe Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
End Connection Designator PM4 PM6 PM8 PM12 PM16 PM20 PM24 PM32
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24 FJ32
A 1.70 (43.2) 1.91 (48.5) 2.32 (58.9) 2.46 (62.3) 3.05 (77.5) 3.14 (79.8) 3.38 (85.9) 3.63 (92.2)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (22.4) 1.09 (27.7) 1.34 (34.0) 1.81 (46.0)
Maximum Outside Dimension 9/16 hex flat 11/16 hex flat 7/8 hex flat 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4) 1 3/4 hex flat 2 1/8 hex flat 2 3/8 hex flat
Dimensions, in. (mm)

A
Male Pipe Threads BSP/ISO Tapered
Pipe Size 1/4
End Connection Designator MT4 MT6 MT8 MT12 MT16 MT20 MT24
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ20 FJ24
A 1.70 (43.2) 1.91 (48.5) 2.32 (58.9) 2.46 (62.3) 3.05 (77.5) 3.14 (79.8) 3.38 (85.9)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (22.4) 1.09 (27.7) 1.34 (34.0)
Maximum Outside Dimension 9/16 hex flat 11/16 hex flat 7/8 hex flat 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4) 1 3/4 hex flat 2 1/8 hex flat

A
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2

Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 3/4 11/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 2 3/8
Female Pipe Threads, NPT

Pipe Size
A
End Connection Designator PF4 PF6 PF8 PF12 PF16 PF24
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16 FJ24
A 1.60 (46.0) 1.84 (46.7) 2.45 (62.2) 2.41 (61.2) 2.92 (74.2) 3.28 (83.3)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.58 (14.7) 0.74 (18.8) 0.95 (24.1) 1.50 (38.1)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings

VCR Size 1/4
A
SWAGELOK
End Connection Designator RF4 RF8 RF12 RF16
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16
A 1.69 (42.9) 2.00 (50.8) 2.63 (66.8) 2.97 (75.4)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (22.4)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 3/4 1 1/16 1 1/2 1 3/4
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/2 3/4 1
Rotatable Male VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings

VCR Size 1/4
A
End Connection Designator RM4 RM8 RM12 RM16
A 1.69 (42.9) 2.00 (50.8) 2.63 (66.8) 2.97 (75.4)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 5/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
JIC (AN) 37, Female Swivel

Fitting Size
A
End Connection Designator AS4 AS6 AS8 AS12 AS16
Hose Series and Size Designator FJ4 FJ6 FJ8 FJ12 FJ16
A 2.13 (54.1) 2.36 (59.9) 2.50 (63.5) 1.94 (49.3) 2.75 (69.9)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.39 (10.0) 0.61 (15.5) 0.84 (21.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Female VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings

VCO Size 1/4
A
End Connection Designator VF4 VF8 VF12 VF16
A 1.15 (29.2) 1.31 (33.3) 1.57 (39.9) 1.73 (43.9)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 1 1 1/2 1 3/4
Options and Accessories

Silicone-Coated Fiberglass Cover
Provides mechanical and environmental
Test Options
Helium Leak Testing
Inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of
protection.
Resists many hydraulic fluids and
10 9 std cm3/s
Test certification available upon request
lubricating oils
Operating temperature: 65 to 500F (53 to 260C)
Hydrostatic Testing
Hydrostatic pressure test to 1.5 times the rated working
with short-term flame exposure to 2000F (1093C)
pressure of the hose at 70F (20C) with no visible leakage
Acryl-Saturated Fiberglass Cover

Creates a barrier that prevents direct
Test certification available upon request
contact with the hose

Resists mechanical abrasion Operating temperature: Up to 1000F (537C)
Nitrogen Pressure Testing

Nitrogen gas bubble leak test at 100 psig (6.8 bar) or
316L Stainless Steel Overbraid Material

Provides greater corrosion resistance Replaces the standard 304 stainless steel overbraid
customer-specifed test pressure, not to exceed 1.5 times the rated working pressure of the hose at 70F (20C) with no visible leakage
Test certification provided.
To order, add the selected designator(s) to the ordering number.
Hose Overall Length Measurement Inches Description Silicone-coated fiberglass cover Acryl-saturated fiberglass cover Identification tag 316L SS overbraid material Helium leak testing Hydrostatic testing Nitrogen pressure testing F F1 T Z H W N3 Centimeters -F -F1 -T -Z -H -W -N3 Designator
Identification Tag
Stainless steel tag with customer-specified text, such
as ordering number, purchase order number, and date of manufacture

Attached to the hose with a
stainless steel lanyard and aluminum clamp
Examples: SS-FJ4TA4SL4-28F SS-FJ4TA4SL4-100CM-F
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2007 Swagelok Company October 2007, R2 MS-02-322-E
www.swagelok.com
A l l - Welded Check Valves

CW Series
Features
All-welded design provides reliable containment of system
fluid.
Forward flow starts at less than 2 psig (0.14 bar) pressure
differential.
Valve closes with less than 2 psig (0.14 bar) back pressure. 316L SS body offers enhanced material purity. Choice of standard or high-purity wetted surface finishes. Processing in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity
Process Specification (SC-01) is available.

Tube butt weld, female VCR fitting, integral male VCR
Technical Data
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) Maximum Maximum Back Pressure Pressure Drop psig (bar) psi (bar) Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) Flow Coefficients (Cv) 0.55 (1/4 in., 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting and tube butt weld ends) 0.70 (1/4 and 1/2 in. VCR fittings, 3/8 and 1/2 in. tube butt weld ends)
fitting, rotatable male VCR fitting, and Swagelok tube fitting end connections are available.
Less than 2 (0.14)
Full pressure rating
145
(10.0)
12 000
(826)
For valves not actuated for a period of time, initial

2 4
cracking pressure may be higher than the set cracking pressure.
Material Name Temperature F (C) 10 (23) to 100 200 300 400
(37) (93) (148) (204)
Materials of Construction
Component 1 Body 2 Poppet 3 Guidance wafer 4 Poppet stop Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316L SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM-bonded 316 SS/A479 Alloy X-750/B637 316L SS/A240
316L SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 3000 2530 2270 2065

(206) (174) (156) (142)
Flow Data at 70F (20C)

Pressure Drop psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 0.55 Cv 6.2 (170) 16 (450) 29 (820) 0.70 Cv 7.9 (220) 21 (590) 37 (1040)
All components are wetted. Bodies with tube butt weld ends are 316L VAR SS/SEMI F20-0305 HighPurity, 20 % minimum elongation allowed. Aflas, Buna N, ethylene propylene, and neoprene also available; see Options. Material Safety Data Sheet for bonding agent available on request.
Check valves are designed for directional flow
control only. Swagelok check valves should never be used as code safety relief devices.
Process Specifications
See Swagelok process specifications for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Cleaning Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Assembly and Packaging Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged Performed in ISO Class 4 work areas; valves are double bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags Process Designator None Process Specification Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra ) 20 in. (0.51 m) average, machine finished 8 in. (0.20 m) average, machine finished and electropolished Testing
Factory tested for crack and reseal performance

Select an ordering number. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
B hex flat B hex flat
Options
Seal Materials
Fluorocarbon FKM is standard. For an optional seal material, add a designator to the valve ordering number.
Seal Material Aflas Buna N Ethylene propylene Neoprene Designator -AF -BU -EP -NE
Tube butt weld ends

B hex flat
Female VCR fittings

B hex flat
Example: 6LV-CW4BW4-AF
Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01)

Swagelok CW series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for valves with VCR or tube butt weld end connections, add -P to the valve ordering number. Example: 6LV-CW4BW4-P
1.24 (31.5) 7/8 2.43 (61.7) 1.80 (45.7) 2.06 (52.3) 2.12 (53.8) 2.87 (72.9) 1.96 (49.8) 7/8 1
Swagelok tube fittings End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size
Male VCR fittings Dimensions, in. (mm) A B
Ordering Number
1/4 in. 6LV-CW4BW4 Tube butt welds 3/8 in. 6LV-CW4BW6 1/2 in. 6LV-CW4BW8 6 mm 6LV-CW4BW6M Female VCR fittings Integral male VCR fittings Female/integral male VCR fitting Rotatable male VCR fittings Swagelok tube fittings 1/4 in. 6L-CW4FR4 1/2 in. 6L-CW4FR8 1/4 in. 6L-CW4VR4 1/2 in. 6L-CW4VR8 1/4 in. 6L-CW4FR4-VR4 1/4 in. 6L-CW4MR4 1/4 in. 6L-CW4S4 6 mm 6L-CW4S6M
Oxygen Service Hazards

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygenenriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13.
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user.
Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.

Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company AflasTM Asahi Glass 2002, 2003, 2005, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 2008, R7 MS-02-89
Duplex Stainless Steel
SAF 2304, 2205, SAF 2507
STEEL GRADES
AvestaPolarit SAF 2304 2205 SAF 2507
EN 1.4362 1.4462 1.4410
ASTM S32304 S32205 S31803 S32750
CHARACTERISTIC PROPERTIES
High strength High resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion High resistance to stress corrosion cracking and corrosion fatigue High resistance to uniform corrosion Good erosion resistance Good fatigue resistance High energy absorption Low thermal expansion Good weldability
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Duplex stainless steels, also referred to as ferriticaustenitic steels, combine many of the beneficial properties of ferritic and austenitic steels. Due to their high content of chromium and nitrogen, and often also molybdenum, these steels offer good resistance to pitting and uniform corrosion. The duplex microstructure contributes to their high strength and high resistance to stress corrosion cracking. Duplex steels also have good weldability.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
APPLICATIONS
Heat exchangers Water heaters Pressure vessels Tanks Rotors, impellers and shafts Firewalls and blast walls on offshore platforms Digesters and other equipment in the pulp and paper industry Cargo tanks and pipe systems in chemical tankers Desalination plants Flue-gas cleaning Seawater systems
The chemical composition of a specific steel grade may vary slightly between different national standards. The required standard will be fully met as specified on the order.
Table 1. Chemical composition
AvestaPolarit steel name
International steel No EN ASTM 304 316L 316 N08904 S31254 S31500 329 S32304 S32205* S32750 C 0.04 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
Typical composition, % N 0.05 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.2 0.09 0.10 0.17 0.27 Cr 18.1 17.2 16.9 20 20 18.5 25.2 23 22 25 Ni 8.3 10.2 10.7 25 18 5 5.6 4.8 5.7 7 2.1 2.6 4.5 6.1 2.7 1.4 0.3 3.1 4 Mo BS 304S31 316S11 316S33 904S13 318S13
National steel designations, superseded by EN DIN 1.4301 1.4404 1.4436 1.4539 1.4417 1.4460 1.4362 1.4462 NF Z7 CN 18-09 Z3 CND 17-11-02 Z7 CND 18-12-03 Z2 NCDU 25-20 Z5 CND 27-05 Az Z3 CN 23-04 Az Z3 CND 22-05 Az Z3 CND 25-06 Az SS 2333 2348 2343 2562 2378 2376 2324 2327 2377 2328
4301 4404 4436 904L 254 SMO 3RE60 4460 SAF 2304 2205 SAF 2507

1.4301 1.4404 1.4436 1.4539 1.4547 1.4417 1.4460 1.4362 1.4462 1.4410
* Exists also as S31803. SAF 2304 and SAF 2507 are made on licence from AB Sandvik Steel.
MICROSTRUCTURE
The chemical composition of duplex steels is balanced to give approximately equal amounts of ferrite and austenite in solution-annealed condition. The higher the annealing temperature the higher the ferrite content. However, the steel must be heated to an extremely high temperature to become completely ferritic. Duplex steels are more prone than austenitic steels to precipitation of phases causing embrittlement and reduced corrosion resistance. The formation of intermetallic phases such as sigma phase occurs in the temperature range 600-950C and reformation of ferrite occurs in the range 350-525C (475C embrittlement). Exposures at these temperatures should therefore be avoided. In normal welding and heat-treatment operations the risk of embrittlement is low. However, certain risks exist, for example in heat treatment of thick sections, especially if the cooling is slow. Figure 1 illustrates the relation between time and temperature that leads to embrittlement due to intermetallic phase formation and to 475C embrittlement.
Fig. 1. Curves for reduction of impact strength to 50% compared to solution annealed condition.
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Tables 2-6 show the mechanical properties of the duplex steels. Data according to EN 10088 when applicable. Permitted design values can vary
Table 2. Minimum values at 20C
between different product forms. See the relevant norm for correct values.
P Proof strength Tensile strength Elongation Rp0.2 Rm A5 MPa MPa % 400 630 25
SAF 2304 H 400 600 20
C 420 600 20
P 460 640 25
2205 H 460 660 25
C 480 660 20
P 530 730 20
SAF 2507 H 530 750 15
C 550 750 15
P = Hot rolled plate. H = Hot rolled strip. C = Cold rolled strip
Table 3. Typical values at 20C
P Proof strength Tensile strength Elongation Hardness Rp0.2 Rm A5 HB MPa MPa % 430 660 35 210
SAF 2304 H 480 685 35 220
C 545 735 35 225
P 510 750 35 250
2205 H 565 790 35 250
C 605 835 35 250
P 665 800 35 250
SAF 2507 H 590 830 35 250
C 665 895 33 255
P = hot rolled plate. H = hot rolled strip. C = cold rolled strip
Table 4. Impact toughness. Minimum value1) for sheet/plate up to 30 mm, Charpy-V, J
SAF 2304 20C -20C -40C

1)
2205 100 100 80
SAF 2507 100 100 80
100 100 80
Mean value of 3 full-size test bars
Table 5. Tensile properties at elevated temperatures. Minimum values, MPa
SAF 2304 Rp0.2 Rm 100C 150C 200C 250C 330 300 280 265 540 520 500 490
2205 Rp0.2 360 335 315 300 Rm 590 570 550 540
SAF 2507 Rp0.2 Rm 450 420 400 380 680 660 640 630
Fatigue The high tensile strength of duplex steels also implies high fatigue strength. Table 6 shows the result of pulsating tensile fatigue tests (R=0.1) in air at room temperature. The fatigue strength has been evaluated at 2 million cycles and probability of rupture 50%. Since the test was made using round polished test bars
Table 6.
from hot rolled plate, correction factors for surface roughness, notches, etc, are required in accordance with classical theory relating to fatigue failure. As shown by the table the fatigue strength of the duplex steels corresponds approximately to the proof stress of the material.
SAF 2304 Rp0.2 MPa Rm MPa Fatigue strength, MPa 446 689 450
2205 540 767 510
SAF 2507 565 802 550
1.4404 280 578 360
Standard deviation of fatigue strength ~ 30 MPa
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Physical data according to EN 10088 apply for all three duplex steels.
Table 7. Typical values
20C Density Modulus of elasticity Linear expansion at (RT Thermal conductivity Thermal capacity Electric resistivity
RT = Room temperature
100C
200C
300C
kg/dm3 GPa T)C X10 /C W/mC J/kgC m

-6
7,8 200 15 500 0.80 194 13.0 16 530 0.85 186 13.5 17 560 0.90 180 14.0 18 590 1.00
CORROSION RESISTANCE
The duplex steels cover a wide range of corrosion performance in various environments. For a more detailed description of their resistance, please refer to the AvestaPolarit Corrosion Handbook. A brief description follows below regarding their resistance in different types of environment.
Uniform corrosion
Uniform corrosion is characterised by a uniform attack on the steel surface that has come into contact with a corrosive medium. The corrosion resistance is generally considered good if the corrosion rate is less than 0.1 mm/year. Due to their high chromium content, duplex steels offer excellent corrosion resistance in many media. SAF 2304 is in most cases equivalent to 1.4436, and the other more highly-alloyed duplex steels show even better resistance, see Figure 2, an isocorrosion diagram in dilute sulphuric acid. In sulphuric acid contaminated by chloride ions, 2205 shows much better resistance than 1.4436 and a similar resistance to that of 904L, as shown in Figure 3. Stainless steel grades such as 1.4301 and 1.4436 have very limited use in hydrochloric acid because of the risk of uniform and local corrosion. High-alloyed steels such as SAF 2507 and to some extent also 2205 can be used in dilute hydrochloric acid, see Figure 4. Pitting is normally not a problem in the area below the boundary line but crevices should be avoided. Phosphoric acid produced according to the wet process always contains corrosive contaminations,
Fig. 3. Isocorrosion curves, 0,1 mm/year, in sulphuric acid containing 2000 ppm chloride ions. Fig. 2. Isocorrosion curves, 0.1 mm/year, in sulphuric acid.
e.g. in the form of chlorides and fluorides. 2205 offers very good resistance even in acids that have a fairly high halide content. See Figure 5. In very strongly oxidising acids, e.g. nitric acid, non-molybdenum alloyed steels are often more resistant than the molybdenum-alloyed steels. SAF 2304 is a good alternative here, because of its high chromium content in combination with low molybdenum content.
with conventional molybdenum-alloyed steels of the 1.4401 type, while 2205 is on a level with 904L and SAF 2507 with 6Mo steels. There are different methods for comparing the resistance of stainless steels to pitting corrosion in chloride solutions. The electro-chemical method, used by AvestaPolarit, makes it possible to measure the resistance to pitting without interference from crevice corrosion (ASTM G-150). The results are given as the critical pitting temperature, CPT, at which pitting is initiated. The pitting corrosion resistance of the steels is shown in Figure 6.
Fig. 4. Isocorrosion curves 0.1mm/year, in hydrochloric acid.
Fig. 6. Critical pitting corrosion temperatures (CPT) in 1M NaCl measured with the Avesta Cell. Typical values.
When ranking the resistance to crevice corrosion it is common to measure a critical temperature at which corrosion occurs in a well-defined solution. The critical crevice corrosion temperature (CCT) measured in 6% FeCl3 in conformance to a modified variant of ASTM G48 (MTI-2) is presented in Figure 7.
* Inhibitors: iron- +aluminium-oxides Fig. 5. Uniform corrosion in wet process phosphoric acid. Maximum acceptable chloride contents at various inhibitor levels. The diagram shows limit values for three AvestaPolarit grades used for chemical tankers.
Pitting and crevice corrosion
The resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion increases with the content of chromium, molybdenum and nitrogen in the steel. Due to their different alloying levels, the three duplex steels show considerable differences in this respect. SAF 2304 is on a level
Fig. 7. Critical crevice corrosion temperature (CCT) in 6% FeCl3 according to MTI Manual No. 3 Method MTI-2.
Stress corrosion cracking
Sulphide stress corrosion cracking
Standard austenitic stainless steel can be attacked by stress corrosion cracking (SCC) in a chloride environment at high temperatures. Stainless steels of the duplex type, due to a continuous ferritic phase, are much less sensitive to this type of corrosion. Different methods are used to rank the different grades of steel with regard to their resistance to SCC. The result can vary depending on the method and testing environment. The resistance to stress corrosion cracking in a chloride solution under strong evaporative conditions can be determined according to the drop evaporation method. This means that a salt solution is allowed to slowly drip onto a heated specimen, while it is being subjected to tensile stress. In this manner the threshold value is determined for the stress leading to rupture after 500 hours testing at 100C. The threshold value is usually expressed as a percentage of the proof strength of the steel at 200C. Figure 8 shows the results of such a test. It is evident that duplex steels are superior to steels of the 1.4436 type.
In the presence of hydrogen sulphide and chloride solutions the risk of stress corrosion cracking increases at lower temperatures. Such environments can exist, for example, in boreholes for oil and gas wells. Steel of the 2205 and SAF 2507 types have demonstrated good resistance, while 13% chromium steels have shown a tendency towards stress corrosion cracking. However, caution should be observed regarding conditions with high partial pressure of hydrogen sulphide and where the steel is subjected to high internal stress. 2205 and SAF 2507 are both included in NACEs list of approved materials in hydrogen sulphide environments MR0175 (Sulphide Stress Cracking Resistant Metallic Materials for Oilfield Equipment). According to NACE MR0175, wrought 2205 in the solution-annealed condition is acceptable in sour service if its hardness does not exceed 28 HRC. Solution annealed and cold worked 2205 may be used at all temperatures up to 232C (450F) in sour environments, if the partial pressure for hydrogen sulphide does not exceed 0.002MPa (0.3psia), i.e., provided the yield strength of the material is not greater than 1100 MPa (160 ksi) and provided its hardness is not greater than 36 HRC. Solution annealed SAF 2507 may be used to a maximum of 32HRC in sour environments up to a temperature of 232C (450F) if the hydrogen sulphide partial pressure does not exceed 0.01MPa (1.5psia).
Fig. 8. Threshold values for the relative stress leading to rupture after up to 500 h under strong evaporative conditions.
Corrosion fatigue
FABRICATION Hot forming
The combination of high mechanical strength and very good resistance to corrosion gives duplex steels a high corrosion fatigue strength. S-N curves for 2205 and 1.4436 in synthetic seawater are shown in Figure 9. The corrosion fatigue strength of 2205 is considerably higher than that of the other tested steel.
Hot working is performed at the temperatures illustrated in Table 8. It should, however, be observed that the strength of the duplex materials is low at high temperatures. Quench annealing should normally be carried out following hot working.
Table 8. Characteristic temperatures, C
SAF 2304 Hot forming Quench annealing Stress relief annealing 1100 - 900 950 - 1050 950 - 1050
2205 1150 - 950 1020 - 1100 1020 - 1100
SAF 2507 1200 - 1025 1040 - 1120 1040 - 1120
Cold forming
Due to the high proof strength of duplex material, greater working forces than those required for austenitic steel are usually needed for cold forming duplex steel. Figures 10 and 11 show diagrams of the work hardening of SAF 2304 and 2205 respectively.
Fig. 9. Corrosion fatigue of stainless steel in synthetic seawater. Rotating bending test, 1500 r/min, with smooth specimens from 15 mm plate.
Intercrystalline corrosion
Due to the duplex microstructure and low carbon content, these steels have very good resistance to intercrystalline corrosion. The composition of the steel ensures that austenite is reformed in the heat-affected zone after welding. The risk of undesirable precipitation of carbides and nitrides in the grain boundaries is thus minimised.
Fig. 10. Mechanical properties of SAF 2304 after cold working.
Duplex steels are suitable for most forming operations used in stainless steel fabrication. However, due to the higher mechanical strength and lower toughness, operations such as deep drawing, stretch forming and spinning are more difficult to perform than with austenitic steel. One must be prepared for a relatively high spring back because of the high yield point. Quench annealing is normally recommended after more than 10% cold deformation.
Heat treatment
Heat treatment is advisable at certain temperatures, as illustrated in Table 8, with subsequent rapid cooling in water or air. This treatment applies for both solution annealing and stress relieving. The latter can in special cases be done at 550-600C. Further information concerning these operations is available from AvestaPolarit.
Machining
Duplex steels are generally more difficult to machine than conventional austenitic stainless steel such as 1.4436, and have different machining properties than those of high-alloyed austenitic steels. The main difference is that duplex steels are relatively easier to machine with high-speed steel tools than with cemented carbide tools compared to austenitic stainless steels with similar alloy content. The machinability can be illustrated by a machinability index, as illustrated in Figure 12. This index, which increases with improved machinability, is based on a combination of test data from several different machining operations. It provides a good description of machinability in relation to 1.4436. Note, however, that the machinability index does not describe the relative difficulty between high-speed steel and carbide tools. Further information is provided in Machining Guidelines that are available for all SAF 2304, 2205 and SAF 2507 steels.
Fig. 11. Mechanical properties of 2205 after cold working.
Fig. 12. Machinability index for duplex and some other stainless steels.
Welding
The recommended arc energy should be kept within certain limits to achieve a good balance between ferrite and austenite in the weld. The heat input should be adapted to the steel grade and be adjusted in proportion to the thickness of the material to be welded. Post-weld annealing after welding with filler is not necessary. In cases where heat treatment is considered, e.g., for stress relieving, it should be carried out in accordance with the temperatures stated in Table 8. To ensure optimum pitting resistance when using GTAW and PAW methods, an addition of nitrogen in the shielding/purging gas is recommended. AvestaPolarit Welding AB manufactures specially adapted welding consumables for duplex steels in the form of covered welding electrodes, flux-cored welding wire, MIG and TIG wires and wire for submerged arc welding (Table 9). These filler metals ensure weld properties comparable to those of the parent metal. For more detailed information concerning the welding of duplex steels, please refer to AvestaPolarit Weldings special leaflets How to weld AvestaPolarit 2205, which is applicable for both 2205 and SAF 2304, and also in How to weld AvestaPolarit SAF 2507.
Duplex steels generally have good weldability and can be welded using most of the welding methods used for stainless steel: Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) Gas tungsten arc welding TIG (GTAW) Gas metal arc welding MIG (GMAW) Flux-cored arc welding (FCW) Plasma arc welding (PAW) Submerged arc welding (SAW) Due to the balanced composition, the heat-affected zone in a properly made weld obtains a sufficiently high content of austenite to avoid the risk of localised corrosion. The individual duplex steels have slightly different welding characteristics. For more detailed information regarding the welding of individual grades, please refer to the relevant welding leaflet issued by AvestaPolarit Welding. The following general instructions should be followed: The material should be welded without preheating. The material should be allowed to cool between passes, preferably to below 150C. To obtain good weld metal properties in as welded condition, filler material shall be used.
Table 9. Welding consumables
Product form
Designation AvestaPolarit AWS C
Typical composition, % Cr Ni Mo N
Ferrite, FN WRC-92
For welding SAF 2304 Electrode 2304 AC/DC 0.02 24.5 9.0 0.12 30
For welding 2205 and SAF 2304 Electrode 2205 AC/DC 2205 PW 2205 Basic Wire Flux cored wire 2205 2205 2205-H 2205-PW For welding SAF 2507 Electrode Wire 2507/P100 2507/P100 0.03 0.02 25.5 25.0 10.0 9.5 3.6 4.0 0.23 0.25 30 50 E2209-17 E2209-17 E2209-15 ER2209 E2209T0-4 E2209T0-4 E2209-T1-4 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.5 23.0 9.5 9.5 9.5 8.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.4 3.5 0.15 0.17 0.16 0.17 0.13 0.14 0.16 30 30 30 50 50 50 45
PRODUCTS
Table 10.
Hot rolled plate, sheet and strip Cold rolled sheet and strip Bars and forging Tube and Pipe Pipe fittings
Dimensions according to AvestaPolarit product program. Dimensions according to AvestaPolarit product program. Supplied by AvestaPolarit Valbruna AB, Karlstad. Welded tubes and pipes are supplied by Avesta Sandvik Tube AB. www.asttube.com Threaded pipe fittings and flanges are manufactured by Calamo Nords AB, Molkom. Welded pipe fittings are supplied by AvestaPolarit ABE AB, rnskldsvik, and Calamo Nords AB, Molkom. Filler material in the form of covered electrodes of AC/DC type, MIG, TIG, FCW and SAW wire and also welding flux are supplied by AvestaPolarit Welding AB, Avesta. Welding consumables are manufactured to conform to the requirements of the nuclear power industry.
Welding consumables
10
MATERIAL STANDARDS
Table 11.
EN 10028-7 EN 10088-2 EN 10088-3 prEN 10217-7 EN 10272 ASTM A182 / ASME SA-182 ASTM A240 / ASME SA-240 ASTM A276 ASTM A479 / ASME SA-479 ASTM A789 / ASME SA-789 ASTM A790 / ASME SA-790 ASTM A815 / ASME SA-815 ASTM A928 VdTV WB 418 VdTV WB 496 NACE MR0175 Norsok M-CR 630, MDS D45
Flat products for pressure purposes Stainless steels Stainless steels Corrosion resisting sheet/plate/strip for general and construction purposes Stainless steels Corrosion resisting semi-finished products/bars/rods/wire/sections for general and construction purposes Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes Stainless steels Stainless steel bars for pressure purposes Forged or rolled alloy-steel pipe flanges, forged fittings etc for high temperature service Heat-resisting Cr and Cr-Ni stainless steel plate/sheet/strip for pressure purposes Stainless and heat-resisting steel bars/shapes Stainless steel bars for boilers and other pressure vessels Seamless and welded duplex stainless steel tubing for general purposes Seamless and welded duplex stainless steel pipe Wrought ferritic, duplex, martensitic stainless steel piping fittings Duplex stainless steel pipe welded with addition of filler metal Ferritisch-austenitischer Walz- und Schmiedestahl Ferritisch-austenitischer Walz- und Schmiedestahl Sulphide stress cracking resistant material for oil field equipment
AvestaPolarit 2205 corresponds in American Standards to two different steel designations; UNS S31803 and UNS S32205. The latter has closer tolerance limits for some alloying elements to further optimise properties such as corrosion resistance and strength.
11
SAF 2304 and SAF 2507 are made on licence from AB Sandvik Steel. Information given in this brochure may be subject to alterations without notice. Care has been taken to ensure that the contents of this publication are accurate but AvestaPolarit and its affiliated companies do not accept responsibility for errors or for information which is found to be misleading. Suggestions for or descriptions of the end use or application of products or methods of working are for information only and AvestaPolarit and its affiliated companies accept no liability in respect thereof. Before using products supplied or manufactured by the company the customer should satisfy himself of their suitability.
Information 212901GB. 03-2002. Kundskaparna
AvestaPolarit AB
R&D Centre Avesta SE-774 80 Avesta, Sweden Tel: +46 (0)226 810 00 Fax: +46 (0)226 813 05 www.avestapolarit.com
www.swagelok.com
B Type VCO L -Ring Face Seal Fittings
For Applicati ons in Bi ote chnology and Pharmaceutics

The B Type VCO tting uses an L-ring seal that eliminates concavity at the bore. This feature reduces the potential for media entrapment. The L-ring seal should be used only with the B Type VCO body. Applications include steam cleaning lines, sampling, research and development, and process feed lines.
Features
Reduced internal entrapment Lubricant-free L-ring seal Specially cleaned and packaged bodies and glands 20 in. (0.51 m) maximum R a electropolished internal
L-ring seal Nut Gland
Body
surface finish
Tube butt weld end connections Controlled L-ring extrusionno overtightening
Materials
Body, gland: 316L stainless steel Nut: 316 stainless steel L-ring seal
EPDM Virgin PTFE21 CFR 177.1550-compliant Silicone Fluorocarbon FKM
Pressure Ratings at 100F (37C)

Tube OD 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 12 mm Wrench-Tight Assembly Working Pressure psig (bar) 2500 2000 1500 2000
(172) (137) (103) (137)
Assembly Instructions
Place L-ring seal in body seal groove with stepped side down.
One-eighth turn past finger-tight.
Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on material manufacturers recommendations.
Ethylene propylene: 300F (148C) PTFE and silicone: 450F (232C) Fluorocarbon FKM: 400F (204C)
Assemble nut and gland to body. Tighten wrenchtight (one-eighth turn past nger-tight).

Female Nut
H
Ordering Number SS-4-BVCO-4 SS-8-BVCO-4 SS-12-BVCO-4 SS-16-BVCO-4

F
F Hex Flat 11/16 1 1 1/2 1 3/4
Dimensions, in. (mm) H 0.75 (19.1) 0.84 (21.3) 0.90 (22.9) Tx 0.39 (9.9) 0.61 (15.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.25 (31.8)
Tx
Tube Butt Weld Gland

H
T Tube OD Fractional 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Metric 12 mm
Ordering Number 316L-4-BVCO-3 316L-4-BVCO-3-4TB7 316L-8-BVCO-3 316L-8-BVCO-3-065 316L-12-BVCO-3 316L-16-BVCO-3 316L-12M-BVCO-3
Dimensions, in. (mm) B 0.25 (6.4) E H 0.67 (17.0) 1.17 (29.7) 1.24 (31.5) 1.45 (36.8) 1.17 (29.7)
Wall Thickness
T B
0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 0.39 (10.0)
0.035 0.049 0.065
0.75 (19.1)
0.96 (24.4) 0.75 (19.1)
1 mm
NOTE: -12M-BVCO gland and body use -8-BVCO L-ring seal and female nut.
L-Ring Seal
Tx
Basic Ordering Number -4-BVCO-2 -8-BVCO-2 -12-BVCO-2 -16-BVCO-2
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) H 0.07 (1.8) 0.10 (2.5) 0.14 (3.6) Tx 0.38 (9.6) 0.64 (16.2) 0.92 (23.4) 1.30 (33.0)
Add EP for ethylene propylene,

VT for fluorocarbon FKM, T for PTFE, or SI for silicone to the basic ordering number. Example: EP-4-BVCO-2
Tube Butt Weld Body

H F
T Tube OD Fractional
T B
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) B E H 1.03 (26.2) 1.53 (38.9)
F Wall Hex Flat Thickness
1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Metric 12 mm
316L-4-BVCO-1 0.25 (6.4) 316L-4-BVCO-1-4TB7 316L-8-BVCO-1 0.75 (19.1) 316L-8-BVCO-1-065 316L-12-BVCO-1 316L-16-BVCO-1 0.96 (24.4) 316L-12M-BVCO-1
0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2)
5/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 15/16
0.035 0.049 0.065
1.65 (41.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 1.75 (44.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1.99 (50.5)
0.75 (19.1) 0.39 (10.0) 1.65 (41.9)
1 mm
Swagelok, VCOTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2004, 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2005, R6 MS-02-40
www.swagelok.com
Ball Valve s
G e ne ral Pur pose a nd Spe cial A pplic ation
6 0 Se r ie s
1/8 to 2 in. and 6 to 25 mm sizes Stainless steel, carbon steel, brass, and special alloy materials On-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) valves Compensating seat design Live-loaded, two-piece stem packing
60 Series Ball Valves
Contents
Important Information About Swagelok Process Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Dimensions Swagelok Tube Fitting End Connections . . . . . . . . . 9 Female Pipe Thread End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tube and Pipe Socket Weld Connections . . . . . . . . . 11 Pipe Butt Weld Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tube Extension End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 VCO and VCR Face Seal Fitting End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Sanitary Fitting End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mixed End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Special Application Valves Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chlorine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 All Welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Low Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Rapid-Cycle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ISO 511-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . 8 Options for Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Features
Quarter-turn actuation Stainless steel, carbon steel, brass, and special alloys Wide selection of seat materials Variety of end connections in 1/8 to in . and 6 to 5 mm sizes Pneumatic and electric actuators Optional vent porting
On-Off (2-Way) Valve
Unique coned-disc spring-loaded seat compensates for seat wear, pressure, and temperature changes reduces seat wear from pressure surges seals regardless of flow direction Coned-disc spring
Ball Seat
Important Information About Swagelok Process Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are designed to be operated in
a fully open or fully closed position. valves service life.
Flange seal provides leak-tight seal between flange and center body
Packing adjustment may be required during the
Support ring contains the seat and protects against seat bulge, premature wear, and deformation
Features
Directional stem flats show open or closed position Stem springs compensate for changes in pressure and temperature, and wear Grounding spring grounds stem to provide continuity for antistatic protection Live-loaded, 2-piece chevron stem packing requires less operating torque improves performance compensates for stem wear High-strength stem bearings provide smooth actuation eliminate galling between valve stem and body resist wear Bottom-loaded stem prevents stem blowout enhances system safety
Flexing seat design ensures leak-tight seal in both lowand high-pressure systems Under low pressure, seals are created by the coned-disc spring-loaded seats pushing against the ball . Pressure is not required to create a seal .
Flow
Under high pressure, the ball is forced downstream, flexing the downstream seat and creating a seal . The upstream seat also flexes with the ball movement and maintains a seal .
Flow
Switching (3-Way) Valve

All stainless steel switching ball valves incorporate many of the features of the on-off (-way) design . The one-piece center body uses no welding and allows 180 actuation . The switching design allows the user to:
divert flow from a common inlet to one of two outlets block flow from one inlet port and bleed out the opposite port .
Valve Body Materials Stainless Steel Component 1 Stem nut 2 Stem spring 3 Stop plate 4 Handle 5 Handle sleeve 6 Grounding spring 7 Stem nut 8 Stem springs () 9 Gland 10 Packing support 11 Top packing 12 Bottom packing 13 Body 14 Stem bearing(s) 15 Stem 16 Ball 17 Support rings (2) 18 Seats (2) 19 Coned-disc springs (2) 20 Flange seals (2) 21 Flanges (2) 22 Body fasteners (4) 23 Body hex nuts (8 or 4) Lubricants 316L SS/A479 or CF3M/A351 316 SS gr B8M cl /A193 316 SS gr 8M str hd/A194 316 SS/A479 or CF3M/A351 W60316L SS/A479 Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 316 SS/A276 or A479 316 SS/A276 or A479 316 SS/A240, A276, or A479 Reinforced PTFE Strain-hardened 316 SS/A167 or A240 Fluorocarbon FKM WCB /A216 Brass CDA 360/B16 Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/SAE J49 Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/SAE J995 62 series316 SS/A276; 63, 65 seriesbrass CDA 360/B16 316 SS PTFE-coated 316 SS/B783 Polyetheretherketone (PEEK) Reinforced PTFE WCB /A216 Brass CDA 360/B16 PEEK 316 SS Carbon Steel Material Grade/ASTM Specification Low-alloy steel grade 7/A194 Strain-hardened 316 SS/A40 304 SS/A40 or 316 SS/A40 Vinyl 30 SS/A313 Low-alloy steel grade 7/A194 Strain-hardened 316 SS/A40 Brass CDA 360/B16 Brass
Silicone-based and PTFE-based; other lubricants available
Wetted components listed in italics. Special alloy materials available include alloy 400, alloy C-76, alloy 0, alloy 600, and titanium . Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative . 6 seriesno upper stem spring and stop plate integral with handle . Valves assembled with pneumatic actuators contain a lock tab (not shown) to secure the nut to the stem . Additional materials available; see Additional Seat Materials, below . Coated with hydrocarbon rust-preventive compound . Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder . Alloy X-750 bearings; PEEK1 bearing . Additional materials available; see Additional Flange Seal Materials, page 8 . 6 seriesmaterial specification is ASTM A574 . 6 seriesnuts are grade 4130 or 4140/ASTM A3 or A331 .
Additional Seat Materials

Valves with Seats of... Alloy X-750 Carbon/glass PTFE PEEK And These Lubricants Silicone-based, fluorinated S17400 SS ball tungsten disulfide-based, and 316 SS back seats and PTFE-based Same as valves with PTFE seats PEEK stem bearing and packing UHMWPE packing, PEEK stem bearing, ethylene propylene O-rings, and uncoated packing gland Virgin PTFE packing PTFE-based Hydrocarbon-based and silicone-based Silicone-based and PTFE-based Also Contain...
UHMWPE Virgin PTFE
Molybdenum disulfide coated . 6 and 65 seriesGrafoil -lined coned-disc springs; 67 and 68 seriesPEEK-lined coned-disc springs .
1 2 3 5 4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 13 20 19 18 17 16
14
22
23
15
Testing
Plastic-Seated Valves
Every 60 series ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) . Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0 .1 std cm3/min . Shell testing with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or the maximum rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector . Shell testing at 1 .5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on CEmarked 67 and 68 series valves .
Metal-Seated Valves and 3-Way PEEK-Seated Valves

Every 60 series ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 psig (3 .4 bar) for leak-tight integrity of the seats as specified by FCI 70- Specification Class VI . Shell testing with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or the maximum rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector . Shell testing at 1 .5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on CE-marked, stainless steel 67 and 68 series valves .
Special-Application Valves
Certain valves may have different testing requirements, as described in Special-Application Valves.

Every 60 series ball valve is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6 . Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C is available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information .
Pressure-temperature ratings are based on standard materials of construction, as listed on page 4 and in the table notes below . Ratings for valves with alternative materials of construction may not match those shown . For example, -way, stainless steel 67 and 68 series valves with reinforced PTFE seats are rated at 00 psig at 100F (151 bar at 37C) when assembled with optional cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8 fasteners .
Reinforced PTFE Seats (60T Series)

Flow Pattern Series Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 150 00 50 300 350 400 450
(37) (65) (93) (11) (148) (176) (04) (3)
62, 63, 65, W63, W65
67, 68
On-Off (2-Way) 62, 63, 65, 67, 68 Steel 00 1850 1500 1150 800 560 330 100
(151) (17) (103) (79 .) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
Switching (3-Way) 62 Brass 000 1680 1360 1050

(137) (115) (93 .7) (7 .3)
63, 65
62, 63, 65
67, 68
Stainless Steel 00 1850 1500 1150 800 560 330 100
(151) (17) (103) (79 .) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
Stainless Steel
(103) (86 .8) (70 .9) (55 .1)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 1500 110 930 880 780 560 330 100
(103) (83 .3) (64 .0) (60 .6) (53 .7) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
1500 160 1030 800
1000 1000 1000 1000 800 560 330 100
(68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
500 500 500 500 500 500 330 100
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) ( .7) (6 .8)
780 (53 .7) 410 (8 .) 100 (6 .8)
560 (38 .5) 330 ( .7) 100 (6 .8)
Ratings based on reinforced PTFE seats and packings and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel, PEEK stem bearings on brass, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Alloy X-750 Seats (60M Series)

Flow Pattern Series Material 63, 65 On-Off (2-Way) 67, 68 63, 65 Steel 67, 68 Stainless Steel
Temperature, F (C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) 0 (8) to 350 (176) 1000 (68 .9) 500 (34 .4) 1000 (68 .9) 500 (34 .4) 400 (04) 970 (66 .8) 500 (34 .4) 1000 (68 .9) 500 (34 .4) 450 (3) 800 (55 .1) 500 (34 .4) 800 (55 .1) 500 (34 .4)
Ratings based on alloy X-750 seats and stem bearings, reinforced PTFE packings, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Carbon/Glass PTFE Seats (60C Series)

(37) (65) (93) (11)
On-Off (2-Way) 62 W63, W65 63, 65 67, 68 62, 63, 65 Steel Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 430 1870 160
(17) (167) (18) (111)
Switching (3-Way) 67, 68 62 63, 65 Brass

(151) (135) (11) (108)
62, 63, 65
67, 68
Stainless Steel 500 500 000 160

(17) (17) (137) (111)
Stainless Steel 500 500 500 500 500 500 480 100
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (33 .0) (6 .8)
500 030 1560 1480
(17) (139) (107) (101)
1500 110 930 880 780 680 480 100
(103) (83 .3) (64 .0) (60 .6)
500 50 000 160
(17) (155) (137) (111)
00 1960 1760 1570
000 1680 1360 1050
(137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68 .9) (115) 160 (86 .8) 1000 (68 .9) (93 .7) 1030 (70 .9) 1000 (68 .9) (7 .3) 800 (55 .1) 1000 (68 .9)
(148) 140 (85 .4) 140 (85 .4) 140 (85 .4) (176) 860 (59 .) 860 (59 .) 860 (59 .) (04) 480 (33 .0) 480 (33 .0) 480 (33 .0) (3) 100 (6 .8) 100 (6 .8) 100 (6 .8)
(53 .7) 140 (85 .4) 140 (85 .4) (46 .8) 860 (59 .) 860 (59 .) (33 .0) 480 (33 .0) 480 (33 .0) (6 .8) 100 (6 .8) 100 (6 .8)
730 (50 .) 410 (8 .) 100 (6 .8)
560 (38 .5) 1000 (68 .9) 330 ( .7) 860 (59 .) 100 (6 .8) 480 (33 .0) 100 (6 .8)
Ratings based on carbon/glass PTFE seats, reinforced PTFE packings, and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel; PEEK stem bearings on brass; and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
PEEK Seats (60P Series)
(37) (65) (93) (11)
On-Off (2-Way) 62 63, 65 Stainless Steel 3000 40 1870 1770

(06) (166) (18) (11)
Switching (3-Way) 63, 65 Steel 67, 68 62 63, 65 Stainless Steel 00 1960 1760 1570
(151) (135) (11) (108)
67, 68
62
67, 68
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 030 1560 1480

(17) (139) (107) (101)
1500 110 930 880 780 690 590 500
(103) (83 .3) (64 .0) (60 .6)
3000 50 010 1770
(06) (155) (138) (11)
500 50 010 1770
(17) (155) (138) (11)
1000 1000 1000 1000
(68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9)
1000 1000 1000 1000
(68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9)
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4)
(148) 1600 (110) 1310 (90 .) (176) 1430 (98 .5) 1140 (78 .5) (04) 160 (86 .8) 970 (66 .8) (3) 800 (55 .1) 800 (55 .1)
(53 .7) 150 (104) 150 (104) 1370 (94 .3) 1000 (68 .9) 1000 (68 .9) (47 .5) 180 (88 .1) 180 (88 .1) 1180 (81 .3) 1000 (68 .9) 1000 (68 .9) (40 .6) 1040 (71 .6) 1040 (71 .6) 990 (68 .) 1000 (68 .9) 970 (66 .8) (34 .4) 800 (55 .1) 800 (55 .1) 800 (55 .1) 800 (55 .1) 800 (55 .1)
Ratings based on PEEK seats, packings, and stem bearings, and fluorocarbon FKM quad-seal flange seals . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Polyethylene Seats (60E Series)

Flow Pattern Series Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 150 00 50 62, W63, W65 63, 65 67, 68 On-Off (2-Way) 62 63, 65 Steel Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 500 500 50
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (17 .)
Switching (3-Way) 67, 68 62 63, 65 Brass 62, 63, 65 67, 68
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
(37) 3000 (06) 500 (17) 1500 (103) 3000 (06) 500 (17) 00 (151) 000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68 .9) (65) 080 (143) 030 (139) 110 (83 .3) 080 (143) 030 (139) 1960 (135) 1680 (115) 160 (86 .8) 1000 (68 .9) (93) 1160 (79 .9) 1160 (79 .9) 930 (64 .0) 1160 (79 .9) 1160 (79 .9) 1160 (79 .9) 1160 (79 .9) 1030 (70 .9) 1000 (68 .9) (11) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .) 50 (17 .)
Ratings based on UHMWPE seats and packings, PEEK stem bearings, and ethylene propylene O-rings . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Virgin PTFE Seats (60V Series)

(37) (65) (93) (11) (148) (176) (04) (3)
62, 63, 65, W63, W65
67, 68
On-Off (2-Way) 62, 63, 65, 67, 68 Steel 1500 1500 1500 1150 800 560 330 100
(103) (103) (103) (79 .) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
Switching (3-Way) 62 Brass 1500 1500 1360 1050

(103) (103) (93 .7) (7 .3)
63, 65
62, 63, 65
67, 68
Stainless Steel 1500 1500 1500 1150 800 560 330 100
(103) (103) (103) (79 .) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
Stainless Steel
(103) (86 .8) (70 .9) (55 .1)
(103) (83 .3) (64 .0) (60 .6) (53 .7) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
1500 160 1030 800
1000 1000 1000 1000 800 560 330 100
(68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (55 .1) (38 .5) ( .7) (6 .8)
500 500 500 500 500 500 330 100
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) ( .7) (6 .8)
730 (50 .) 410 (8 .) 100 (6 .8)
560 (38 .5) 330 ( .7) 100 (6 .8)
Ratings based on virgin PTFE seats and packings and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel, PEEK stem bearings on brass, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings . Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
On-Off (2-Way) Valves
Select an ordering number from the Dimensions tables starting on page 9 . See the table at right for availability of other valve body materials . To order, replace SS with B or S. Examples: B-6TS4 S-6TS4
Valve Body Material Designator 316 SS Brass SS B Availability Not available in chlorine series -way 6, 63, 65 series only; not available in steam, thermal, fire, chlorine, all-welded, PEEK-seated, or rapid-cycle service valves -way only; required in chlorine series
Carbon steel
Additional Seat Materials

Most valve ordering numbers specify reinforced PTFE seat material . For other seat materials, replace T with the desired designator . Not all seat material and flange seal combinations are available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative . Examples: SS-6PS4 S-6ES4
Seat Material Reinforced PTFE Alloy X-750 Carbon/glass PTFE PEEK UHMWPE Virgin PTFE Designator T M C P E V Availability Not available in steam, thermal, or chlorine series Not available in steam, fire, chlorine, or all-welded series; required in thermal series Not available in steam, thermal, or chlorine series Not available in fire, thermal, chlorine, brass, or all-welded series; required in steam series Not available in steam, fire, thermal, or chlorine series Not available in steam, fire, or thermal series; required in chlorine series
Additional Flange Seal Materials

Fluorocarbon FKM is standard . For other materials, add a flange seal material designator to the valve ordering number . Not all flange seal and seat material combinations are available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative . Examples: SS-6TS4-B S-6ES4-IN
Flange Seal Material Alloy X-750, PTFE coated Buna N Buna C Ethylene propylene Neoprene PTFE Designator IN B BC E N T Temperature Range F (C) 65 to 450 (53 to 3) 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 65 to 50 (53 to 11) 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 50 to 150 (10 to 65)
6, 63, and 65 series valves only .
Switching (3-Way) Valves

Switching (3-way) valves are available with:
stainless steel valve body material standard or low-temperature service all seat materials except alloy X-750 bottom end connections shown below at right .
L
To order a switching (3-way) valve with three of the same end connections, insert X into the valve ordering number . Example: SS-6XTF4 To order a switching (3-way) valve with a different bottom end connection, insert X into the valve ordering number and add a bottom end connection designator . Example: SS-6XTF4-S4 To order three different end connections, contact your authorized Swagelok representative . To order a switching (3-way) valve with an L flow pattern, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Valve Series 6 Bottom End Connection 1/4 in . female NPT 1/4 in . female ISO tapered 1/4 in . Swagelok tube fitting 3/8 in . Swagelok tube fitting 1/ in . female NPT 1/ in . female ISO tapered 1/ in . Swagelok tube fitting 3/4 in . female NPT 3/4 in . female ISO tapered 1 in . female NPT 1 in . female ISO tapered 1 1/ in . female NPT in . female NPT Designator -F4 -F4RT -S4 -S6 -F8 -F8RT -S8 -F1 -F1RT -F16 -F16RT -F4 -F3 L in . (mm) 3 .1 (79 .) 3 .1 (79 .) 3 .35 (85 .1) 4 .37 4 .19 4 .19 4 .48
(111) (106) (106) (114)
63
Cross-Port Mixing of Fluids

A spherical ball is available in valves with UHMWPE or PEEK seats to prevent cross-port mixing of fluids . To order, insert O into the ordering number . Example: SS-6XOPF4
65 67 68
5 .45 (138) 6 .86 (174) 7 .1 (183)
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change .
Swagelok Tube Fitting End Connections

Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
H
F J G C D
Size 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in . 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm 18 mm 5 mm
Ordering Number SS-6TS4 SS-6TS6 SS-63TS8 SS-63TS1 SS-65TS16 SS-67TS4 SS-68TS3 SS-6TS6MM SS-6TS8MM SS-6TS10MM SS-63TS1MM SS-63TS18MM SS-65TS5MM
Orifice in . (mm) 0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .406 (10 .3) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1) 0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .50 (6 .4) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .375 (9 .5) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 . 3 .8 7 .5 13 .6 40 100 130 1 . .5 3 .8 7 .5 13 .6 40 C 3 .17 (80 .5) 3 .17 (80 .5) 4 .04 (103) 4 .04 (103) 5 .36 (136) 7 .59 (193) 9 .95 (53) 3 .17 (80 .5) 3 .17 (80 .5) 3 .0 (81 .3) 4 .04 (103) 4 .04 (103) 5 .36 (136) D 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .59 (40 .4) .0 (51 .3) .0 (51 .3) .68 (68 .1) 3 .79 (96 .3) 4 .97 (16) 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .60 (40 .6) .0 (51 .3) .0 (51 .3) .68 (68 .1) E 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .66 (4 .) .35 (59 .7) .35 (59 .7) .94 (74 .7) 4 .03 (10) 4 .16 (106) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .66 (4 .) .35 (59 .7) .35 (59 .7) .94 (74 .7) F 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .79 (45 .5) .5 (64 .0) 3 .14 (79 .8) 3 .36 (85 .3) 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .79 (45 .5) .5 (64 .0) G 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .89 ( .6) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .5 (31 .8) 1 .53 (38 .9) 1 .74 (44 .) 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .89 ( .6) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .5 (31 .8) H .37 (60 .) .37 (60 .) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 6 .00 (15) 9 .14 (3) 9 .14 (3) .37 (60 .) .37 (60 .) .37 (60 .) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 6 .00 (15) J 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .78 (45 .) 1 .78 (45 .) .50 (63 .5) 3 .06 (77 .7) 3 .47 (88 .1) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .78 (45 .) 1 .78 (45 .) .50 (63 .5)
All 67 and 68 stainless steel steam and thermal series valves and 67 and 68 series valves with UHMWPE seats are assembled with silver-plated front ferrules . All other 67 and 68 series stainless steel valves are assembled with PFA-coated front ferrules . Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges . Height of 6 series flange is 1 .59 in . (40 .4 mm); width is J dimension .
Swagelok Hydraulic Swaging Unit

When installing a Swagelok 60 series ball valve with tube fittings larger than 1 in ., the Swagelok MHSU hydraulic swaging unit is needed . The unit swages the ferrules onto the tubing without applying stress to fitting body threads . See the Swagelok Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit catalog, MS-0-154, for more information .
10
Dimensions
Female Pipe Thread End Connections
Female NPT pipe thread dimensions conform to ASME B1 .0 .1 . ISO tapered thread dimensions conform to ISO 7/1, EN 106-1, DIN 999, and JIS B003 . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
H H
F J G C D
F J G D1 C D
Size 1/8 in . 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/4 in . 1 1/ in . in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in . 1/ to 1/ in . 3/4 to 1/ in .
Ordering Number SS-6TF SS-6TF4 SS-63TF6 SS-63TF8 SS-65TF1 SS-65TF16 SS-67TF0 SS-67TF4 SS-68TF3 SS-6TF4RT SS-63TF8RT SS-65TF1RT SS-65TF16RT SS-67TF4RT SS-68TF3RT
Orifice in . (mm) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 3 .8 3 .8 1 1 31 38 90 100 130 3 .8 1 31 38 100 130 C D Female NPT .16 (54 .9) 1 .08 (7 .4) .16 (54 .9) 1 .08 (7 .4) .70 (68 .6) 1 .35 (34 .3) .70 (68 .6) 1 .35 (34 .3) 3 .59 (91 .) 1 .80 (45 .7) 3 .59 (91 .) 1 .80 (45 .7) 4 .39 (11) .19 (55 .6) 4 .39 (11) .19 (55 .6) 4 .94 (15) .47 (6 .7) .16 (54 .9) 1 .08 (7 .4) .70 (68 .6) 1 .35 (34 .3) 3 .59 (91 .) 1 .80 (45 .7) 4 .45 (113) .3 (56 .6) 5 .45 (138) .7 (69 .1) 7 .00 (178) 3 .50 (88 .9) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .6 (3 .0) 0 .68 (17 .3) .37 (60 .) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .6 (3 .0) 0 .68 (17 .3) .37 (60 .) 1 .35 (34 .3) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 4 .50 (114) 1 .78 (45 .) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 4 .50 (114) 1 .78 (45 .) .94 (74 .7) .5 (64 .0) 1 .5 (31 .8) 6 .00 (15) .50 (63 .5) .94 (74 .7) .5 (64 .0) 1 .5 (31 .8) 6 .00 (15) .50 (63 .5) 4 .03 (10) 3 .14 (79 .8) 1 .53 (38 .9) 9 .14 (3) 3 .06 (77 .7) 4 .03 (10) 3 .14 (79 .8) 1 .53 (38 .9) 9 .14 (3) 3 .06 (77 .7) 4 .16 (106) 3 .36 (85 .3) 1 .74 (44 .) 9 .14 (3) 3 .47 (88 .1) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .6 (3 .0) 0 .68 (17 .3) .37 (60 .) 1 .35 (34 .3) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 4 .50 (114) 1 .78 (45 .) .94 (74 .7) .5 (64 .0) 1 .5 (31 .8) 6 .00 (15) .50 (63 .5) .94 (74 .7) .5 (64 .0) 1 .5 (31 .8) 6 .00 (15) .50 (63 .5) 4 .03 (10) 3 .14 (79 .8) 1 .53 (38 .9) 9 .14 (3) 3 .06 (77 .7) 4 .9 (109) 3 .36 (85 .3) 1 .74 (44 .) 9 .14 (3) 3 .47 (88 .1) D1 E F G H J
Female ISO Tapered
Male Lagging Extension to Female NPT with Gauge Ports SS-63TM8L-GF8 SS-63TM1L-GF8 0 .411 (10 .4) 0 .500 (1 .7) 7 .5 11 .3 5 .44 (138) .34 (59 .4) 3 .09 (78 .5) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 4 .50 (114) 1 .78 (45 .) 5 .44 (138) .34 (59 .4) 3 .09 (78 .5) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 4 .50 (114) 1 .78 (45 .)
Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges . Height of 6 series flange is 1 .59 in . (40 .4 mm); width is J dimension .
Steam Trap Test Assembly

Designed for use with saturated steam systems, the Swagelok TVA series integrated test valve assembly consists of two 63 series ball valves and a universal mount for use with a customer-supplied steam trap . The test assembly offers fast visual monitoring of condensate removal with a simple quarter turn of the test valve . See the Swagelok Integrated Test Valve Assembly with Universal Mount catalog, MS-0-1, for more information .
11
Dimensions
Tube and Pipe Socket Weld End Connections
Pipe socket diameter and depth conform to ASME B16 .11 . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
F J G C D
K A B
A B
Tube Socket Weld
Pipe Socket Weld
Size 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/4 in . 1 1/ in . in .
Ordering Number SS-6TSW4T SS-6TSW6T SS-63TSW8T SS-63TSW1T SS-65TSW16T SS-67TSW0T SS-67TSW4T SS-68TSW3T
Orifice in . (mm)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 . 3 .8 7 .5 13 .6 40 80 100 130 A 0 .57

(6 .5)
E 1 .66
(4 .)
F 1 .6
(3 .0)
G 0 .68
(17 .3)
H .37
(60 .)
J 1 .35
(34 .3)
K 0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .411 (10 .4) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .15 (8 .6) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
Tube Socket Weld 0 .540 .16 1 .08

(13 .7) (54 .9) (7 .4)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .675
(17 .1)
.16
(54 .9)
1 .08
(7 .4)
1 .66
(4 .)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .68
(17 .3)
.37
(60 .)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .507
(1 .9)
0 .840
(1 .3)
.70
(68 .6)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .757
(19 .)
1 .050
(6 .7)
.70
(68 .6)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .44
(11 .)
1 .009
(5 .6)
1 .315
(33 .4)
3 .59
(91 .)
1 .80
(45 .7)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 .59
(3 .0)
1 .660
(4 .)
4 .39
(11)
.19
(55 .6)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 .509
(38 .3)
.450
(6 .)
4 .39
(11)
.19
(55 .6)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
0 .75
(19 .1)
.01
(51 .1)
.760
(70 .1)
4 .94
(15)
.47
(6 .7)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
0 .75
(19 .1)
1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/4 in . 1 1/ in . in .
SS-63TSW8P SS-65TSW1P SS-65TSW16P SS-67TSW0P SS-67TSW4P SS-68TSW3P
0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
15 36 4 90 100 130
0 .860
(1 .8)
Pipe Socket Weld 1 .8 .70 1 .34

(31 .) (68 .6) (34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .38
(9 .7)
1 .070
(7 .)
1 .660
(4 .)
3 .59
(91 .)
1 .80
(45 .7)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
0 .50
(1 .7)
1 .335
(33 .9)
1 .783
(45 .3)
3 .59
(91 .)
1 .80
(45 .7)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
0 .50
(1 .7)
1 .680
(4 .7)
.450
(6 .)
4 .51
(115)
.5
(57 .)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
0 .50
(1 .7)
1 .90
(48 .8)
.450
(6 .)
4 .57
(116)
.9
(58 .)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
0 .50
(1 .7)
.411
(61 .)
.957
(75 .1)
4 .94
(15)
.47
(6 .7)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .70
(43 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .41
(86 .6)
0 .63
(16 .0)
Swagelok Welding System

The Swagelok welding system offers consistent, repeatable orbital gas tungsten arc welds (GTAW) . It can be used to weld a variety of weld end connections available on Swagelok 60 series ball valves . See the Swagelok Orbital Welding System Quick Reference Guide, MS-0-143, for more information .
1
Dimensions
Pipe Butt Weld End Connections
Pipe butt weld end connections conform to ASME B16 .5 . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
F J G C D
A B
Size 1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in .
Ordering Number SS-6TW4P10 SS-63TW8P10 SS-65TW1P10 SS-65TW16P10 SS-67TW4P10 SS-68TW3P10
Orifice in . (mm)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 . 15 36 40 100 130 A 0 .410

(10 .4)
D 1 .04
(6 .4)
E 1 .66
(4 .)
F 1 .6
(3 .0)
G 0 .68
(17 .3)
H .37
(60 .)
J 1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
Schedule 10 0 .540 .08

(13 .7) (5 .8)
0 .674
(17 .1)
0 .840
(1 .3)
.69
(68 .3)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .884
( .5)
1 .050
(6 .7)
3 .59
(91 .)
1 .80
(45 .7)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .097
(7 .9)
1 .315
(33 .4)
3 .46
(87 .9)
1 .73
(43 .9)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .68
(4 .7)
1 .900
(48 .3)
4 .47
(114)
.3
(56 .6)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
.157
(54 .8)
.375
(60 .3)
4 .78
(11)
.39
(60 .7)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in .
SS-6TW4P40 SS-63TW8P40 SS-65TW1P40 SS-65TW16P40 SS-67TW4P40 SS-68TW3P40
0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .84 (0 .9) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
1 . 15 36 90 100 130
0 .364
(9 .)
Schedule 40 0 .540 .08

(13 .7) (5 .8)
1 .04
(6 .4)
1 .66
(4 .)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .68
(17 .3)
.37
(60 .)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .6
(15 .8)
0 .840
(1 .3)
.69
(68 .3)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .84
(0 .9)
1 .050
(6 .7)
3 .59
(91 .)
1 .80
(45 .7)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .049
(6 .6)
1 .315
(33 .4)
3 .46
(87 .9)
1 .73
(43 .9)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .610
(40 .9)
1 .900
(48 .3)
4 .47
(114)
.3
(56 .6)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
.067
(5 .5)
.375
(60 .3)
4 .86
(13)
.43 (61 .7) 1 .04

(6 .4)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/4 in . 1 1/ in . in .
SS-6TW4P80 SS-6TW6P80 SS-63TW8P80 SS-63TW1P80 SS-65TW16P80 SS-67TW0P80 SS-67TW4P80 SS-68TW3P80
0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .) 1 .15 (8 .6) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1)
1 . 3 .8 6 .8 13 .6 40 80 100 130
0 .30
(7 .7)
Schedule 80 0 .540 .08

(13 .7) (5 .8)
1 .66
(4 .)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .68
(17 .3)
.37
(60 .)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .43
(10 .7)
0 .675
(17 .1)
.08
(5 .8)
1 .04
(6 .4)
1 .66
(4 .)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .68
(17 .3)
.37
(60 .)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .546
(13 .9)
0 .840
(1 .3)
.69
(68 .3)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .74
(18 .8)
1 .050
(6 .7)
.69
(68 .3)
1 .34
(34 .0)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .94
(3 .9)
1 .315
(33 .4)
3 .46
(87 .9)
1 .73
(43 .9)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .81
(3 .5)
1 .660
(4 .)
4 .57
(116)
.8
(57 .9)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
1 .500
(38 .1)
1 .900
(48 .3)
4 .57
(116)
.8
(57 .9)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
1 .939
(49 .3)
.375
(60 .3)
5 .09
(19)
.55
(64 .8)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
13
Dimensions
Tube Extension End Connections
Tube extensions are available on stainless steel valves only . Tube extension material is 316L SS . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
H
F J G C D
Size 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in .
Wall Thickness 0 .035 in . 0 .035 in . 0 .049 in . 0 .065 in . 0 .065 in . 0 .065 in . 0 .065 in . 0 .065 in .
Ordering Number SS-6TW4T35-3 SS-6TW6T35-3 SS-63TW8T49-3 SS-63TW8T65-3 SS-65TW1T65-3 SS-65TW16T65-3 SS-67TW4T65-3 SS-68TW3T65-3
Orifice in . (mm) 0 .180

(4 .6)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 .1 3 .8 7 . 6 .1 18 36 100 130 B 0 .50

(6 .4)
C 8 .1
(06)
D 4 .05
(103)
E 1 .66
(4 .)
F 1 .6
(3 .0)
G 0 .68
(17 .3)
H .37
(60 .)
J 1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .81
(7 .1)
0 .375
(9 .5)
8 .1
(06)
4 .05
(103)
1 .66
(4 .)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .68
(17 .3)
.37
(60 .)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .500
(1 .7)
8 .51
(16)
4 .6
(108)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .370
(9 .4)
0 .500
(1 .7)
8 .51
(16)
4 .6
(108)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .60
(15 .7)
0 .750
(19 .1)
9 .53
(4)
4 .77
(11)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
0 .870
( .1)
1 .000
(5 .4)
9 .53
(4)
4 .77
(11)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .50
(31 .8)
1 .500
(38 .1)
10 .5
(67)
5 .7
(134)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
1 .500
(38 .1)
.000
(50 .8)
11 .3
(87)
5 .65
(144)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
VCO O-Ring Face Seal and VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting End Connections
Face seal fitting end connections require minimal axial clearance for ease of installation and service . VCO fitting contains fluorocarbon FKM O-ring . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
H
F J G C D
VCO Fitting
VCR Fitting
Size 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/ in .
Ordering Number SS-6TVCO4 SS-63TVCO8 SS-6TVCR4 SS-63TVCR8
Orifice in . (mm) 0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .406 (10 .3) 0 .188 (4 .8) 0 .406 (10 .3)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 . 7 .5 1 . 7 .5 D E VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting .60 (66 .0) 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .66 (4 .) 3 .5 (8 .6) 1 .6 (41 .1) .35 (59 .7) C F 1 .6 (3 .0) 1 .79 (45 .5) G 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .89 ( .6) 0 .68 (17 .3) 0 .89 ( .6) H .37 (60 .) 4 .50 (114) .37 (60 .) 4 .50 (114) J 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .78 (45 .) 1 .3 (33 .5) 1 .75 (44 .5)
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting .47 (6 .7) 1 .3 (31 .) 1 .66 (4 .) 1 .6 (3 .0) 3 .63 (9 .) 1 .81 (46 .0) .35 (59 .7) 1 .79 (45 .5)
Ratings of valves with VCR or VCO fitting end connections are affected by the ratings of the mating fitting; see the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings and Swagelok VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings catalogs, MS-01-4 and MS-01-8 . Height and width of 63 series flange . Height of 6 series flange is 1 .59 in . (40 .4 mm); width is J dimension .
14
Dimensions
Sanitary Fitting End Connections
Valves with Swagelok TS and SC sanitary fitting end connections are available in stainless steel only . The maximum pressure rating is 300 psig (0 .6 bar); working pressure and temperature ratings of these valves may be limited by the gasket material and clamp used . TS sanitary fitting end connections have a machined surface finish roughness average (Ra) of 0 in . (0 .51 m) . For more information, see the Swagelok Biopharm FittingsTS Series catalog, MS-03-13 . SC sanitary clamp end connections are ISO 85 compatible . See Ordering Information, page 8 .
H
F J G C D B A
To order a valve with a ball inside diameter surface roughness average (Ra) of 15 in . (0 .38 m), add -RB to the valve ordering number . Example: SS-63TTS8-RB
TS Sanitary Fittings
Size 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in . Ordering Number SS-63TTS8 SS-63TTS1 SS-65TTS16 SS-67TTS4 SS-68TTS3 Orifice in . (mm) 0 .370 (9 .4) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .873 ( .) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1) Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 7 .5 15 4 100 130 A 0 .99
(5 .1)
0 .99
(5 .1)
B 0 .37 (9 .4) 0 .6

(15 .7)
C 3 .50
(88 .9)
D 1 .75
(44 .4)
E .35
(59 .7)
F 1 .79
(45 .5)
G 0 .89
( .6)
H 4 .50
(114)
J 1 .78
(45 .)
3 .50
(88 .9)
1 .75
(44 .4)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
1 .99
(50 .5)
0 .87
( .1)
4 .50
(114)
.5
(57 .)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .99
(50 .5)
1 .37
(34 .8)
5 .50
(140)
.75
(69 .9)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .87
(47 .5)
6 .5
(159)
3 .1
(79 .)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
SC Sanitary Clamp Fittings

Size 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1 1/ in . in . Ordering Number SS-6TSC8 SS-63TSC1 SS-65TSC16 SS-67TSC4 SS-68TSC3 Orifice in . (mm) 0 .81 (7 .1) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .87 ( .1) 1 .50 (31 .8) 1 .500 (38 .1) Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 7 .1 13 . 4 100 130 A 0 .99
(5 .1)
0 .99
(5 .1)
B 0 .37 (9 .4) 0 .6

(15 .7)
C 3 .56
(90 .4)
D 1 .78
(45 .)
E 1 .66
(4 .)
F 1 .6
(3 .0)
G 0 .68
(17 .3)
H .37
(60 .)
J 1 .35
(34 .3)
4 .06
(103)
.03
(51 .5)
.35
(59 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .89
( .6)
4 .50
(114)
1 .78
(45 .)
1 .99
(50 .5)
0 .87
( .1)
4 .50
(114)
.5
(57 .)
.94
(74 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .5
(31 .8)
6 .00
(15)
.50
(63 .5)
1 .98
(50 .3)
1 .37
(34 .8)
5 .50
(140)
.75
(69 .9)
4 .03
(10)
3 .14
(79 .8)
1 .53
(38 .9)
9 .14
(3)
3 .06
(77 .7)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .87
(47 .5)
6 .5
(159)
3 .1
(79 .)
4 .16
(106)
3 .36
(85 .3)
1 .74
(44 .)
9 .14
(3)
3 .47
(88 .1)
Mixed End Connections

60 series valves can be ordered with two different end connections . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for ordering information .
15
Steam Service (S60P Series)
Steam service ball valves can reduce lost energy, downtime, and safety hazards associated with leaking valves in a steam system . Unlike conventional sealing methods, the patented designs of the seats and stem packing in the steam series ball valves resist the erosive nature of steam, thus improving performance and enhancing safety .
Grafoil flange seals maintain leak-tight integrity at high temperatures
Features
Stainless steel or carbon steel materials . PEEK (polyetheretherketone) seats and stem seals resist absorption of water resist erosive damage of steam .
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel Component Packings, stem bearing, seats (2) Back sheets (2) Flange seals (2) Body fasteners (8) Lubricant Steel Encased 8-bolt construction resists differential thermal expansion of body components during rapid temperature cycling Material Grade/ASTM Specification Molybdenum disulfide-coated PEEK S62P, S65P, S67P, S68P seriesGrafoil; S63P seriesN/A Grafoil with 316 SS Grade B8M class / A193 Zinc phosphatecoated grade B7/A193
PTFE-based
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 . S6P and S65P seriesimpregnated with hydrocarbon-based lubricant; RTV silicone sealant . S63P seriescontains no 316 SS .
Valve Series Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 150 00 50 300 350 400 450
(37) (65) (93) (11) (148) (176) (04) (3)
Saturated Steam Ratings

63, 65 67, 68 62, 63, 65 Steel 000 190 1830 1750 1670 1600 1530 1460
(137) (13) (16) (10) (115) (110) (105) (100)
62
67, 68
Stainless Steel Valves 1050 psig at 550F (7 .3 bar at 87C) Carbon Steel Valves
Stainless Steel Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 40 350 80 00 10 050 1980
(17) (166) (161) (157) (151) (146) (141) (136)
500 30 150 1980 1910 1840 1770 1700
(17) (159) (148) (136) (131) (16) (11) (117)
500 50 010 1770 150 180 1040 800
(17) (155) (138) (11) (104) (88 .1) (71 .6) (55 .1)
000 180 1650 1480 1310 1140 970 800
(137) (15) (113) (101) (90 .) (78 .5) (66 .8) (55 .1)
680 psig at 500F (46 .8 bar at 60C)
500 (60) 550 (87) 600 (315)
1910 (131) 1100 (75 .7) 00 (13 .7)
1660 (114) 1100 (75 .7) 00 (13 .7)
1410 (97 .1) 1100 (75 .7) 00 (13 .7)
710 (48 .9) 60 (4 .7) 00 (13 .7)
710 (48 .9) 60 (4 .7) 00 (13 .7)
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
To order, insert S before the series designator and replace T with P. Example: SS-S6PS4 To order steel valve body material, replace SS with S. Example: S-S6PS4
Seal Kits
Seal kits contain stem springs, gland, packing support, packings, stem bearing, seats, seat springs, back sheets, flange seals, lubricant, sealant, and instructions . Kit components are the same materials and grades listed in Materials of Construction. Select a kit ordering number .
Valve Series S6P S63P S65P S67P S68P
Kit Ordering Number SS-91K-S6P SS-91K-S63P SS-91K-S65P SS-91K-S67P SS-91K-S68P
16
Thermal Service (T60M Series)
The Swagelok thermal service ball valve, with its unique, spring-like metal seat, is designed to maintain a seal with a minimum seat load against the ball .
Smooth, quarterturn rotary operation resists outside contaminants provides reliable containment of thermal liquids
Features
316 SS or carbon steel material with Grafoil packing
and alloy X-750 seats

Resists contamination of the thermal liquid . Enhances safety in thermal liquid systems . Meets or exceeds FCI 70- Class VI for leak-tight shutoff . Exceeds performance requirements of Fire Test
Standard API 607, 4th edition .
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel Component Packing bearing Packing supports (2), back seats (2) Packing, flange seals (2) Ball Seats Body fasteners (8) Lubricant Steel Unique, spring-loaded metal seats
provide positive leak-tight
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 316 SS/A276 Grafoil with 316 SS S17400 SS/A564 Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 Grade B8M class / A193 Zinc phosphatecoated grade B7/A193
sealing at temperatures up to 850F (454C) work equally well in lowand high-pressure systems .
Encased 8-bolt construction resists differential thermal expansion of body components during rapid temperature cycling
Testing
Fluorinated tungsten disulfide
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 . Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder . Impregnated with fluorocarbon-based lubricant . Impregnated with anaerobic adhesive T63M and T65M seriesRTV . silicone sealant .
All thermal service ball valves Allowable Seat Valve Leak Rate are tested with pure nitrogen Series std cm3/min at 50 psig (3 .4 bar) for leakT63M, T65M 0 .15 tight integrity of the ball seats T67M 0 .30 as specified by FCI 70- Class VI . Stem packing and T68M 0 .45 body seals are tested for no visible leakage using a liquid leak detector .
Maximum
Series Material Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850
(04) (3) (60) (87) (315) (343) (371) (398) (46) (454)
63, 65
67, 68
63, 65 Steel
67, 68
Thermal service ball valves are available in 63, 65, 67, and 68 series sizes . To order, insert T before the series designator and replace the second T with M. Example: SS-T63MS8 To order steel valve body material, replace SS with S. Example: S-T63MS8
Stainless Steel 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
(68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9) (68 .9)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
(34 .4) 1000 (68 .9) (34 .4) 800 (55 .1) (34 .4) 710 (48 .9) (34 .4) 60 (4 .7) (34 .4) 540 (37 .) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4)
500 500 500 500 500
(34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4) (34 .4)
450 (31 .0) 370 (5 .4) 80 (19 .) 00 (13 .7)
450 (31 .0) 370 (5 .4) 80 (19 .) 00 (13 .7)
Seal Kits
Seal kits contain ball, seats, packing, flange seals, stem bearings, back seats, packing supports, stem springs, lubricant, sealant, and instructions .
Valve Series T63M T65M T67M T68M
Kit Ordering Number SS-91K-T63M SS-91K-T65M SS-91K-T67M SS-91K-T68M
Steel valve ratings limited to 0F (8C) . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Kit components are the same materials and grades listed in Materials of Construction. Select a kit ordering number .
17
Fire Series (A60T Series)
Compensating seat design live loads the seat to compensate for wear and changes in temperature or pressure during normal conditions and reduces distortion of seats from pressure surges
Live-loaded Grafoil stem packing provides a reliable stem seal during normal conditions and maintains a seal in the event of fire High-strength metal stem bearings provide smooth actuation, resist wear and extrusion, and maintain packing load in the event of fire
Grafoil weir ring provides seat seal against the ball during fire conditions, even if only a portion of the seat is destroyed
Grafoil flange seals provide leak-tight containment under normal and fire conditions, eliminating the need for a secondary flange seal
Vented ball allows pressure to equalize between valve body and upstream port, preventing overpressurization and potential seal blowout under fire conditions
Encased 8-bolt construction maintains body integrity and body seals during rapid temperature changes resulting from fire exposure and water quenching
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel Component Packing supports (2) Packing, flange seals (2) Seats with integral weir rings (2) Coned-disc springs (2) Body fasteners (8) Lubricants Polyimide Grafoil with 316 SS wire Glass-filled reinforced PTFE; Grafoil with 316 SS wire Grafoil-lined 316 SS/A167 Grade B8M class / Zinc phosphateA193 coated grade B7/A193 Fluorinated tungsten disulfide; molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder; nickel antiseize in hydrocarbon carrier Steel Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Series Material Name Temperature F (C) 40 (40) to 100 150 00 50
(37) (65) (93) (11)
63, 65
67, 68
Stainless Steel, Steel Working Pressure, psig (bar) 00 1600 1000 400
(151) (110) (68 .9) (7 .5)
000 1600 1000 400
(137) (110) (68 .9) (7 .5)
300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (04)
300 (0 .6) 00 (13 .7) 100 (6 .8)
300 (0 .6) 00 (13 .7) 100 (6 .8)
Steel valve ratings limited to 0F (8C) . Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375F (190C) max .
Fire series ball valves are available in 63, 65, 67, and 68 series sizes . To order, insert A into the ordering number . Example: SS-A63TS8 To order steel valve body material, replace SS with S. Example: S-A63TS8
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 . RTV silicone sealant on flange seals .
Testing
In addition to the requirements given in Testing, page 5, fire series ball valves meet those of API Standard 607, 4th edition, and Swagelok fire test specification SEI-00334 . See the Swagelok Fire Series Ball ValvesA60T Series catalog, MS-0-47, for more details .
Seal Kits
Seal kits contain stem springs, gland, packing, packing supports, stem bearings, seats with integral weir rings, seat springs, flange seals, and instructions . Select a kit ordering number .
Valve Series A63T A65T A67T A68T
Kit Ordering Number SS-91K-A63T SS-91K-A65T SS-91K-A67T SS-91K-A68T
18
Chlorine Series (C60V Series)
Features
Materials include carbon steel valve body with virgin PTFE
seats and packing, in accordance with the guidelines of the Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine.
Upstream ball vent prevents overpressurization in ball
and body when valve is closed .
Component Lower stem nut Packing support Stem bearing Packing Vented ball Support rings (2) Seats (2) Coned-disc springs (2) Flanges (2) Body fasteners (4) Lubricant Material Grade/ASTM Specification Alloy 400 ECTFE ECTFE Virgin PTFE/ASTM D1710 Alloy 400/B164 62, 63 seriesalloy 400/B127 65, 67, 68 series316 SS/A167 Virgin PTFE Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 WCB/A216 Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/ SAE J49 Fluorinated-based with PTFE
300 psig at 0 to 50F (0 .6 bar at 8 to 11C) .

C60V series valve bodies and flanges are cleaned in mineral spirits followed by an aqueous cleaning solution containing a surfactant . All other wetted components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63 . C60V series ball valves are capped and sealed individually in desiccant packaging and are tagged for chlorine service .
Testing
Every chlorine series valve is factory seat and shell tested with nitrogen at 300 psig (0 .6 bar) . Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0 .04 std cm3/min .
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 .
Select an ordering number from the Dimensions tables for Swagelok tube fitting, female NPT, or tube and pipe socket weld end connections . Insert C before the series designator . Replace SS and T with S and V, respectively . Example: S-C6VS4
Seal Kits
Seal kits contain stem springs, gland, packing support, packings, stem bearing, seat subassemblies, flange seals, lubricant, and instructions . Select a kit ordering number .
Valve Series C6V C63V C65V C67V C68V
Kit Ordering Number S-91K-C6V S-91K-C63V S-91K-C65V S-91K-C67V S-91K-C68V
19
All-Welded Valves (W60T Series)
Features
All-welded ball valves incorporate the proven design features of the on-off (-way) ball valve, all-welded body construction, and live-loaded packing to ensure total system fluid containment .
Full penetration weld provides one-piece body construction for leaktight fluid containment
Testing
In addition to the requirements given in Testing, page 5, a hydrostatic shell test is performed with pure water at 1 .5 times the working pressure .
Dimensions and Ordering Information

Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change . Select an ordering number from the table below . To order other seat materials, replace T with C for carbon/glass PTFE, E for UHMWPE, or V for virgin PTFE . Example: SS-W63CF8
C D J G H
Size 1/ in . 1 in .
Ordering Number SS-W63TF8 SS-W65TF16
Orifice in . (mm) 0 .516 (13 .1) 0 .875 ( .)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Cv 1 38 C .69 (68 .3) 3 .59 (91 .) D 1 .34 (34 .0) 1 .79 (45 .5) E .3 (58 .9) .93 (74 .4) F 1 .79 (45 .5) .5 (64 .0) G 0 .96 (4 .4) 1 .6 (3 .0) H 4 .50 (114) 6 .00 (15) J 1 .60 (40 .6) .4 (56 .9) Female NPT End Connections
0
Special-Application Valve
Valves for Low-Temperature Service (L60 Series)
Features
Temperature rating 65 to 50F (53 to 11C) . Available in on-off (-way) and switching (3-way) 6, 63,
and 65 series sizes in stainless steel and in on-off (-way) 6, 63, and 65 series sizes in brass .
Available with seat materials shown in the Pressure-
Temperature Ratings table below .
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel Component Stem nut Stem bearing Flange seals Body fasteners (4) Body hex nuts (8 or 4) 316 SS Molybdenum disulfide-coated PEEK Buna C 316 SS gr B8M cl /A193 316 SS gr 8M str hd/A194 Brass Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 .
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel Brass Reinforced PTFE, Carbon/ Glass PTFE, Polyethylene
Seat Material Temperature F (C) Valve Series 6 63 65
Reinforced PTFE
Carbon/ Glass PTFE
Polyethylene
Virgin PTFE
Virgin PTFE
Working Pressure, psig (bar) On-Off (2-Way) 00 (151) 00 (151) 00 (151) 500 (17) 500 (17) 500 (17) 3000 (06) 500 (17) 500 (17) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 000 (137) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103)
65 (53) to 100 (37)
Switching (3-Way) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 6, 63, 65 1000 (68 .9) 1000 (68 .9) 1000 (68 .9) 1000 (68 .9)
See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page 6, for ratings from 100 to 50F (37 to 11C) .
To order, insert L in the ordering number . Examples: SS-L6TS4 SS-L6XTS4
Seal Kits
Seal kit components are the same materials and grades listed in Materials of Construction. See Seal Kits, page 3, for ordering information .
1
Valves for Rapid-Cycle Service (R60T Series)
The ball valve with an O-ring stem seal may be more effective in applications requiring rapid cycling of a valve or when packing adjustments may be difficult .
Component Packing bolt, spacer ring Top O-ring support Stem bearing Bottom O-ring support Flange seal, stem O-ring Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A76 PEEK PEEK Reinforced PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM
Valve Series R6T, R63T, R65T R67T, R68T Pressure Rating at 0 to 100F
(17 to 37C)
Pressure Rating at 400F

(04C)
00 psig (151 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar)
330 psig ( .7 bar)
Wetted components listed in italics. All other components same as shown on page 4 . Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder .
To order, insert R before the series designator in the valve ordering number . Example: SS-R63TS8
Seal Kits
Seal kits contain stem spring, stem O-ring supports, spacer ring, stem O-ring, stem bearing, seats, seat springs, flange seals, lubricant, and instructions . Kit components are the same materials and grades listed in Materials of Construction. Select a kit ordering number .
Valve Series R6T R63T R65T R67T R68T Kit Ordering Number SS-91K-R6T SS-91K-R63T SS-91K-R65T SS-91K-R67T SS-91K-R68T


Handles Vented Valves
Vent Passage
Locking Lever Bracket Handle
Oval Handle
Vent Passage
External Vent Option
Internal Vent Option
A variety of handle options is available for use with 60 series ball valves . To order a locking lever bracket handle, add -JL to the ordering number . To order an oval handle, add -JK to the ordering number . For additional information and dimensions, see the Swagelok Process Ball Valves Handle Options catalog, MS-01-137 .
On-off (-way) ball valves are available with either an internal or an external vent . These vents are available for either upstream or downstream service . For details and ordering information, see the Swagelok Process Ball Valve Vent Options catalog, MS-0-8 .
Low Dead Space Inserts
Panel Mount Kits

Allow vertical or horizontal
mounting .
Can be installed on panels
up to 3/16 in . (4 .8 mm) for 6 series and 1/4 in . (6 .4 mm) thick for 63, 65, 67, and 68 series .
Fit oval and lever handle . Reduce fluid entrapment around the ball, stem, and seats Provide template for drilling
while the valve is in the open or closed position .

For use in select ball valves; not for use on steam, thermal,
holes .
or fire series valves .

Made from carbon/glass reinforced PTFE .
O rdering Information
Select an ordering number . For 4-Bolt Valves Assembled with Carbon Steel or Stainless Steel Bolts Kits include self-cinching nut, cover plate, cap screws, panel mount brackets, two stainless and two carbon steel bolts, and instructions . For 4-Bolt Valves Assembled with Stainless Steel Studs and All 8-Bolt Valves Kits include self-cinching nut, cover plate, cap screws, panel mount brackets, and instructions .
Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68 Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68 Kit Ordering Number MS-PMK-6 MS-PMK-63 MS-PMK-65 MS-PMK-67 MS-PMK-68 Kit Ordering Number MS-PMK-S6 MS-PMK-S63 MS-PMK-S65 MS-PMK-S67 MS-PMK-S68
To order, add -LD to the valve ordering number . Examples: SS-6TS4-LD; SS-6XTS4-F8-LD
Kits for Field Assembly

Select an ordering number .
Kit Ordering Numbers Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68 6 63 65 67 68 Low Temperature On-Off (2-Way) Valves TGC-91K-L6-LD TGC-91K-L63-LD TGC-91K-L65-LD TGC-91K-L67-LD TGC-91K-L68-LD Switching (3-Way) Valves TGC-91K-L6X-LD TGC-91K-L63X-LD TGC-91K-L65X-LD TGC-91K-L67X-LD TGC-91K-L68X-LD TGC-91K-6X-LD TGC-91K-63X-LD TGC-91K-65X-LD TGC-91K-67X-LD TGC-91K-68X-LD TGC-91K-6-LD TGC-91K-63-LD TGC-91K-65-LD TGC-91K-67-LD TGC-91K-68-LD All Other
3

Seal Kits
The swing-out design of 4-bolt valves allows fast and easy maintenance with the valve inline . Kits contain:
gland packing support packings stem bearings stem springs (not included in
Flange Seal Kits

Each 4-bolt valve kit contains two flange seals, lubricant, and instructions . To order, add a flange seal material designator and a uniform size number to basic ordering number -91K- . Example: VA70-91K-121
Flange Seal Temperature Range Uniform Size Material Designator F (C) Number Alloy X-750, INCX 65 to 450 (53 to 3) PTFE coated Buna N Buna C Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Neoprene PTFE BN70 BC70 EP70 VA70 NE70 T 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 017 6 series 65 to 50 (53 to 11) 121 63 series 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 129 65 series 0 to 450 (8 to 3) 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 50 to 150 (10 to 65) 141 67 series 147 68 series
6 series seal kits)

seat subassemblies flange seals ball (alloy X-750 seal kit only) lubricant appropriate to seat
material, shown on page 4

instructions .
To order a seal kit for a stainless steel or steel valve, add a seat material designator to the basic ordering number . Example: SS-91K-6T To order a seal kit for a brass valve, replace SS with B. Example: B-91K-6T To order a seal kit for a low-temperature service valves, insert L before the series designator . Example: SS-91K-L6T
Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68 Basic Ordering Number SS-91K-6 SS-91K-63 SS-91K-65 SS-91K-67 SS-91K-68 T M C P E V Seat Material Designator Reinforced PTFE Alloy X-750 Carbon/glass reinforced PTFE PEEK UHMWPE Virgin PTFE
6, 63, and 65 series valves only .
Fastener Kits
Each 4-bolt valve kit contains stem nuts, body fasteners, and body nuts . Select an ordering number .
Valve Body Material Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68 Stainless Steel 316-61K-6 316-61K-63 316-61K-65 316-61K-67 316-61K-68 Brass, Steel S-61K-6 S-61K-63 S-61K-65 S-61K-67 S-61K-68 Fastener Kit Ordering Number
4
Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Service Designator HT LT NF Maximum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) At At Maximum 100F (37C) Temperature 165 (11 .3) 00 (13 .7) 100 (6 .8) 165 (11 .3) 165 (11 .3)
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature Nonfluorocarbon
Temperature Range F (C) 0 to 00 (8 to 93) 0 to 400 (17 to 04) 40 to 00 (40 to 93) 0 to 00 (8 to 93)
Actuator Pressure at System PressureOn-Off (2-Way) Valves

Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen . Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air . They are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes . On-off (-way) valves require 90 actuation; switching (3-way) valves require 180 actuation . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are:
for standard 4-bolt cast stainless Actuation Mode Spring Return Double Acting Single Dual Single Dual Seat System Actuator Valve Material Pressure Actuator Model Minimum Actuator Pressure Series Designator psig (bar) Model Designator psig (bar) -31 75 (5 .) 45 (3 .) 80 (5 .6) Maximum 31 (90) C, E, T, V valve rating 33 (90) -33 70 (4 .9) 80 (5 .6) 15 (1 .1) 0 (1 .4) 1050 (7 .3) 31 (90) -31 75 (5 .) 50 (3 .5) 85 (5 .9) 6 1500 (103) 31 (90) -31 55 (3 .8) 100 (6 .9) P 500 (17) 31 (90) -31 70 (4 .9) 1050 (7 .3) 33 (90) -33 70 (4 .9) 80 (5 .6) 0 (1 .4) 35 ( .5) 500 (17) 33 (90) -33 80 (5 .6) 90 (6 .3) 5 (1 .8) 45 (3 .) 31 (90) -31 100 (6 .9) C, E, T, V Maximum 33 (90) -33 80 (5 .6) 40 ( .8) 70 (4 .9) valve rating M 33 (90) -33 90 (6 .3) 31 (90) -31 100 (6 .9) 1050 (7 .3) 33 (90) -33 80 (5 .6) 35 ( .5) 60 (4 .) 63 P 1500 (103) 33 (90) -33 85 (5 .9) 45 (3 .) 75 (5 .) 000 (137) 33 (90) -33 95 (6 .6) 55 (3 .8) 100 (6 .9) 500 (17) 33 (90) -33 70 (4 .9) Maximum T (fire) 33 (90) -33 70 (4 .9) valve rating 33 (90) -33 100 (6 .9) C, E, T, V Maximum 35 (90) -35 75 (5 .) 80 (5 .6) 40 ( .8) 70 (4 .9) valve rating M 35 (90) -35 60 (4 .) 1050 (7 .3) 33 (90) -33 95 (6 .6) 50 (3 .5) 90 (6 .3) 65 1500 (103) 33 (90) -33 85 (5 .9) P 1050 (7 .3) 35 (90) -35 65 (4 .5) 80 (5 .6) 5 (1 .8) 40 ( .8) 1500 (103) 35 (90) -35 75 (5 .) 35 ( .5) 60 (4 .) 500 (17) 35 (90) -35 80 (5 .6) 50 (3 .5) 90 (6 .3) T (fire) Maximum 35 (90) -35 70 (4 .9) C, E, T, V Maximum 35 (90) -35 90 (6 .3) 50 (3 .5) 90 (6 .3) valve rating 35 (90) M -35 80 (5 .6) 1050 (7 .3) 35 (90) -35 80 (5 .6) 45 (3 .) 70 (4 .9) 67 P 1500 (103) 35 (90) -35 90 (6 .3) 60 (4 .) 100 (6 .9) 000 (137) 35 (90) -35 75 (5 .) Maximum T (fire) 35 (90) -35 80 (5 .6) valve rating C, E, T, V Maximum 35 (90) -35 85 (5 .9) valve rating 35 (90) M -35 100 (6 .9) 68 1050 (7 .3) 35 (90) -35 90 (6 .3) 60 (4 .) 100 (6 .9) P 1500 (103) 35 (90) -35 75 (5 .) 000 (137) 35 (90) -35 90 (6 .3)
steel valve bodies with seat materials shown

based on a 0 to 100F (8 to
37C) system temperature and the valve cycling at least once per day but not more than once per hour . For other valve body materials or if your application falls outside of this scope, contact your authorized Swagelok representative . Low-pressure spring-return actuators for applications with lower-pressure actuator air supply are available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative . For technical data, including actuator materials of construction, air displacement, and weight, see the Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-06-87 .
Caution: Actuated assemblies
must be properly aligned and supported. Inadequate alignment or improper support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
5
Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Pressure at System PressureSwitching (3-Way) Valves
Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen .
Actuation Mode Spring Return Double Acting Single Dual Single Dual Seat System Actuator Valve Material Pressure Actuator Model Minimum Actuator Pressure Series Designator psig (bar) Model Designator psig (bar) 51 (180) -51 75 (5 .) 45 (3 .) 70 (4 .9) C, E, T, V 53 (180) -53 75 (5 .) 80 (5 .6) 15 (1 .1) 5 (1 .8) Maximum 6 valve rating 51 (180) -51 50 (3 .5) 85 (5 .9) P 53 (180) -53 65 (4 .5) 75 (5 .) 0 (1 .4) 35 ( .5) 51 (180) -51 95 (6 .6) C, E, T, V 53 (180) -53 80 (5 .6) 40 ( .8) 70 (4 .9) Maximum 63 valve rating 51 (180) -51 85 (5 .9) P 53 (180) -53 80 (5 .6) 30 ( .1) 60 (4 .) 53 (180) -53 85 (5 .9) C, E, T, V 55 (180) -55 80 (5 .6) 30 ( .1) 50 (3 .5) Maximum 65 valve rating 53 (180) -53 50 (3 .5) 90 (6 .3) P 55 (180) -55 75 (5 .) 85 (5 .9) 0 (1 .4) 30 ( .1) C, E, T, V Maximum 55 (180) -55 85 (5 .9) 50 (3 .5) 80 (5 .6) 67 valve rating 55 (180) P -55 60 (4 .) 35 ( .5) 65 (4 .5) C, E, T, V Maximum 55 (180) -55 90 (6 .3) 60 (4 .) 100 (6 .9) 68 valve rating 55 (180) P -55 55 (3 .8) 100 (6 .9)
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
SS-63TS8 - 33 D HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
Based on valve series and seat material, select actuator designator . See Actuator Pressure at System Pressure tables, page 4 for on-off (-way) valves and on this page for switching (3-way) valves . 31 = 90 actuation 33 = 90 actuation 35 = 90 actuation 51 = 180 actuation 53 = 180 actuation 55 = 180 actuation
C = Spring return, normally closed D = Double acting O = Spring return, normally open S = Spring return, switching (3-way) valves
FP = Fusible plug HT = High temperature LT = Low temperature NF = Nonfluorocarbon None = Standard

Available for fire series valves: a fail-safe pneumatic actuator that contains a Swagelok fusible plug and a Swagelok mud-dauber fitting . The fusible plug melts if the external temperature reaches 80F (137C), relieving pressure in the actuator and allowing the valve to cycle closed . Suggested for steam service and thermal service valves . Suggested for factory-assembled valves with UHMWPE seats and packing .
For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one actuator), add DM to the ordering number. Example: SS-63TS8-33DDM
See next page for Kits for Field Assembly.
6
Pneumatic Actuators
Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve . Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number
MS - 1 31 - DA -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Actuator Service
Based on valve series and seat material, select actuator designator . See Actuator Pressure at System Pressure tables, page 4 for onoff (-way) valves and page 5 for switching (3-way) valves . 31 = 90 actuation 33 = 90 actuation 35 = 90 actuation 51 = 180 actuation 53 = 180 actuation 55 = 180 actuation Mounting Bracket Kits
DA = Double acting SR = Spring return
-FP = Fusible plug -HT = High temperature -LT = Low temperature -NF = Nonfluorocarbon None = Standard
Available for fire series valves: a fail-safe pneumatic actuator that contains a Swagelok fusible plug and a Swagelok mud-dauber fitting . The fusible plug melts if the external temperature reaches 80F (137C), relieving pressure in the actuator and allowing the valve to cycle closed . Suggested for steam service and thermal service valves .
Mounting bracket kits for standard 4-bolt cast stainless steel valves contain: 304 stainless steel mounting bracket 40 stainless steel actuator roll pin (31, 33, 51, and 53 actuators) or cadmium-plated carbon steel shoulder screw and lock nut (35 and 55 actuators) cadmium-plated carbon steel coupling 316 stainless steel lock tab two cadmium-plated carbon steel socket head cap screws two 316 SS gr 8M body hex nuts two 316 SS gr B8M cl body fasteners two cadmium-plated carbon steel gr 8 body fasteners instructions . Mounting bracket kits for all-welded (W60T series) valves contain: 304 stainless steel top plate two 304 stainless steel side plates cadmium-plated carbon steel shoulder screw and lock nut (35 and 55 actuator models) 304 stainless steel coupling (W63T series) or cadmium plated carbon steel coupling (W65T series) two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or two 18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) hex bolts two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or two 18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) hex nuts two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or two 18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) lock washers two 18-8 stainless steel socket head cap screws 304 stainless steel wall mount (33 actuator with W63T series only) instructions .
Valve Series
Actuator Model 31 (90), 51 (180)
Flow Pattern or Valve Type On-off, switching Steam On-off, switching Steam On-off, switching, steam All welded
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number MS-MB-6 MS-MB-S6 MS-MB-6-133 MS-MB-S6-133 MS-MB-63-131 MS-MB-73-131
6 33 (90), 53 (180)
63
31 (90), 51 (180)
63
65
On-off, switching, MS-MB-63 33 (90), 53 (180) fire, steam, thermal All welded MS-MB-73-133 On-off, switching, MS-MB-65 steam, thermal 33 (90), 53 (180) All welded MS-MB-75-133 On-off, switching, MS-MB-65-135 35 (90), 55 (180) fire, steam, thermal All welded MS-MB-75-135 35 (90), 55 (180) 35 (90), 55 (180) All All MS-MB-67 MS-MB-68
65 67 68
7
Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions
O N K P mounting holes C B C A P mounting holes 6 series mounting bracket for 31 and 51 model actuators G R Q C A P mounting holes C B C L M J G H E F L M N K P mounting holes D D O
All Welded
Valve Series 6
Flow Pattern or Valve Type On-off, switching On-off, switching All welded On-off, switching On-off, switching All welded On-off, switching All welded On-off, switching All welded On-off, switching On-off, switching
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 3 .08

(78 .)
N (D) O (S)
Q 1 .75
(44 .4)
R 1 .41
(35 .8)
31 and 51 Models
3 .55
(90 .)
63
0 .34 1/8 in . 1 .75 (8 .6) NPT (44 .4)
3 .04
(77 .)
1 .73
(43 .9)
1 .31
(33 .3)
0 .60
(15 .)
0 .5
(13 .)
0 .31
(7 .9)
1 .46
(37 .1)
1 .5
(31 .8)
4 .09
(104)
4 .91
(15)
0 .34
(8 .6)
1 .6
(41 .1)
3 .6
(91 .9)
1 .65
(41 .9)
33 and 53 Models 6 3 .5

(89 .4)
.31
(58 .7)
1 .41
(35 .8)
3 .95
(100)
.31
(58 .7) (1 .)
63
4 .06
(103)
0 .48 1/8 in . .31 NPT (58 .7)
4 .07
(103)
.3
(58 .9)
1 .75
(44 .5)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .81
(0 .6 )
0 .44
(11 .)
.16
(54 .9)
1 .56
(39 .6)
5 .89
(150)
7 .86
(00)
0 .34
(8 .6)
.09
(53 .1)
.31 4 .85
(13) (58 .7)
1 .7
(43 .7)
65
.38
(60 .5)
35 and 55 Models 1 .69 6 .10

(155) (4 .9)
.13
(54 .1)
65
67 68
6 .6
(168)
0 .60 1/ in . 3 .06 (15 .) NPT (77 .7)
5 .15
(131)
3 .7
(83 .1)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .97
(4 .6)
1 .
(31 .0)
1 .44
(36 .6)
3 .15
(80 .0)
4 .00
(10)
8 .41
(14)
11 .9
(30)
0 .53
(13 .5)
(88 .1)
3 .47
1 .69
(4 .9)
6 .89
(175)
1 .69
(4 .9)
(D) = double acting; (S) = spring return .
8
ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8 .0 bar) . See Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum actuator pressures .
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature Actuator Service Designator HT LT Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176
(0 to 80)
5 to 30
(15 to 150)
40 to 176
(40 to 80)
Swagelok 63 series valve with actuator, solenoid, and proximity sensor .
Minimum Actuator Pressure

Spring Return Model Designators Normally Normally Closed Open -A15C4 -A30C4 -A60C5 -A100C5 -A150C4 -A150C5 -A0C4 -A15O4 -A30O4 -A60O5 -A100O5 -A150O4 -A150O5 -A0O4 Double Acting Actuator Model Model Designator A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 -A15D -A30D -A60D -A100D -A100D Actuation Mode Spring Double Return Acting Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 7 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0)
These Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are ISO 511 compliant and are suitable for general applications . They are available in spring-return and double-acting modes . On-off (-way) valves require 90 actuation; switching (3-way) valves require 180 actuation (90 actuation for valves with L flow pattern) . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are:
for standard 4-bolt cast stainless
Valve Series 6 63 65 67 68
Actuator Model A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A0 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A0
steel valve bodies with reinforced PTFE seats and packings

based on a 0 to 100F (8 to
37C) system temperature and the valve cycling at least once per day but not more than once per hour . For other valve body and seat materials or if your application falls outside of this scope, contact your Swagelok sales and service representative . For technical data, including actuator materials of construction and weight, see the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves, MS-0-337 . For more information on actuated ball valves and torque, see the Swagelok Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide, ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-0-136 .
Switching (3-Way) Valves 6 63 65 67 68 6 63 65 67 68 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 -A15S4 -A30S4 -A60S5 -A100S5 -A150S4 -A150S5 -A0S4 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 -A15XD -A30XD -A60XD -A100XD -A100XD -A15D -A30D -A60D -A100D -A100D 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 7 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0)
Switching (3-Way) Valves with L Flow Pattern
must be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
9

SS-63TS8 -A30D HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, actuation mode, and flow pattern, select actuator designator . See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 8 .
HT = High temperature LT = Low temperature None = Standard

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve . Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number
MS - A30-4 - DIN -HT

A Actuator Model B Coupling Drive Type C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, actuation mode, and flow pattern, select actuator designator . See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 8, and Actuator Model Designators table below . Actuator Model Designators
DIN
-HT = High temperature -LT = Low temperature None = Standard
Mounting Bracket Kits Swagelok ISO 511 mounting bracket kits for 4-bolt cast stainless steel valves contain: 316 stainless steel Valve Mounting Bracket Kit mounting bracket Series Ordering Number four A4 stainless 6 SS-MB-6-F04-11DIN-M steel socket head 63 SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M cap screws (A4 65 SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M is approximately 67 SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M equivalent to AISI 316 .) 316 stainless steel 68 SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M coupling 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket two 316 stainless steel lock washers 30 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs 316 stainless steel lock tab two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts lubricant and MSDS instructions . For 60 series valves with other body materials and for 8-bolt 60 series valves, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Valve Series
Spring Spring Double Return Return Double Acting Actuator Model Acting Model Model Designator Model Designator On-Off (2-Way) Valves and Switching (3-Way) Valves with L Flow Pattern A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A0 A15 A30 A60 A100 A15-4 A30-4 A60-5 A100-5 A150-4 A150-4 A0-4 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A15-DA A30-DA A60-DA A100-DA A100-DA
6 63 65 67 68
Switching (3-Way) Valves 6 63 65 67, 68 A15 A30 A60 A100 A15-XDA A30-XDA A60-XDA A100-XDA
30

Dimensions
(40 .0)
D 1 .57
F G
L A
mounting holes 0 .34 (8 .6) dia
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
B A0 model: .56 (65 .0) . J K
Valve Series 6 63 65 67
Actuator Model A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A150 A100 A150 A0
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 3 .73 (94 .7) 4 .1 (105) 5 .80 (147) 6 .06 (154) 6 .55 (166) 6 .79 (17) 6 .70 (170) 6 .93 (176) 7 .14 (181) 3 .73 (94 .7) 4 .1 (105) 5 .80 (147) 6 .55 (166) 6 .93 (176) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) B 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) C .15 (54 .5) .46 (6 .5) .80 (71 .1) 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .9 (83 .5) 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .9 (83 .5) 4 .0 (10) .15 (54 .5) .46 (6 .5) .80 (71 .1) 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .05 (77 .5) D 5 .51 (140) 6 . (158) 8 .7 (10) 9 .76 (48) 9 .76 (48) 10 .6 (68) 9 .76 (48) 10 .6 (68) 1 .4 (315) 7 .76 (197) 8 .70 (1) 11 .7 (98) 13 .7 (348) 13 .7 (348) E .78 (70 .5) 3 .7 (83 .0) 3 .7 (94 .5) 4 .17 (106) 4 .17 (106) 4 .84 (13) 4 .17 (106) 4 .84 (13) 5 .55 (141) .78 (70 .5) 3 .7 (83 .0) 3 .7 (94 .5) 4 .17 (106) 4 .17 (106) F .3 (59 .0) .83 (7 .0) 3 .33 (84 .5) 3 .84 (97 .5) 3 .84 (97 .5) 4 .37 (111) 3 .84 (97 .5) 4 .37 (111) 5 .00 (17) .3 (59 .0) .83 (7 .0) 3 .33 (84 .5) 3 .84 (97 .5) 3 .84 (97 .5) G 1 .14 (9 .0) 1 .4 (36 .0) 1 .67 (4 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .0 (56 .0) 1 .95 (49 .5) .0 (56 .0) .5 (64 .0) 1 .14 (9 .0) 1 .4 (36 .0) 1 .67 (4 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) J .90 (73 .7) .9 (74 .) 3 .30 (83 .8) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) .90 (73 .7) .9 (74 .) 3 .30 (83 .8) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) K 4 .61 (117) 4 .77 (11) 5 .41 (137) 5 .98 (15) 6 .1 (158) 5 .81 (148) 6 .1 (158) 6 .61 (168) 4 .61 (117) 4 .77 (11) 5 .41 (137) 5 .98 (15) 5 .98 (15) L .18 (55 .4) .50 (63 .5) 3 .6 (91 .9) 3 .88 (98 .6) 4 .1 (105) 4 .36 (111) 4 .1 (105) 4 .36 (111) 4 .71 (10) .18 (55 .4) .50 (63 .5) 3 .6 (91 .9) 4 .1 (105) 4 .1 (105) On-Off (2-Way) Valves
68
Switching (3-Way) Valves 6 63 65 67 68 A15XD A30XD A60XD A100XD A100XD
31
Options for Pneumatic Actuators

For Field Assembly or Factory Assembly
Solenoid Valves
Electric Actuators
are rugged and lightweight, and connect alternating- or direct-current power sources . For more information, see the Swagelok Electric Actuators141 and 142 Series catalog, MS-01-35 .
attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly . For more information, see the Swagelok Solenoid Valves for Electropneumatically Actuated Ball Valves catalog, MS-0-41 .
Position Indicators
provide visual status of a valve . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Limit Switches
indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal . They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof) . For more information, see the Swagelok Limit Switches catalog, MS-06-39 .

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygenenriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13 .
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty . For a copy, visit swagelok .com or contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc . 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., MI November 008, R1 MS-01-146
www.swagelok.com
Bellows- and Diaphragm-Sealed Multipor t and Elbow Valves

Se le ction Guide
HB, DL, and DS Series

Choose a valve type from individual product catalogs. Follow the instructions to build a valve ordering number for the multiport valve that
meets your system requirements.

See product catalogs for materials of construction, pressure-temperature ratings,
options, and accessories.
Bellows- and Diaphragm-Sealed Multiport and Elbow Valves
Multiport and Elbow Valves

To order a valve, select designators for:
Valve type. See these Swagelok catalogs: Diaphragm ValvesDL and DS Series, MS-01-73 High-Pressure, Pneumatically Actuated Bellows-Sealed Flow path4, 3, or 2 ports End connections for each port Process.
ValvesHB Series, MS-01-76
Flow Path
Select a flow path as viewed from the top of the valve. Insert the flow path designator in the valve ordering number, as shown on page 4.
An a next to the port number in the Flow Path column
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Insert the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected, as shown on page 4.
End Connection 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Designator 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall Designator
indicates a port above the valve seat.

A b next to the port number in the Flow Path column
indicates a port below the valve seat.

Flow Path Ports Schematic Closed Open
D 4 E
Process
3 C
See individual product catalogs for process specifications.

Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Body and End Connections

2 mounting holes, 10-32 or M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.25 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (25.4) dia bolt circle L Port 1 L L L Port 5 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 M 1.06
(26.9)
Port 4
0.45
(11.4)
1.13 Port 2
(28.7)
End Connections 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall
Dimensions, in. (mm) L 1.38

(35.1)
M 1.27
(32.3)
1.74
(44.2)
1.63
(41.4)
(22.1)
0.87
0.76
(19.3)
L = 0.95 in. (24.1 mm) for ports 1 and 2 if the

opposite port has a female or male VCR fitting end connection.
Top
Front
Bottom
Bodies with L or R flow
path designators have mounting holes reversed from the pattern shown. Bodies with N flow path designator have no mounting holes.
Body and Actuators

2.12
(53.8)
1.74
(44.2)
1.87
(47.5)
3.90 3.12
(79.2)
3.19
(81.0)
(99.4)
DL Series Lever Handle
DS Series Rotary Handle
HB Series Pneumatic Actuator

Build a valve ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
6LV H B A 1 1 1 P 1 C
Material 316L VAR stainless steel Valve Type Bellows Sealed HB = HB series (pneumatic actuator) Diaphragm Sealed DL = DL series (lever handle) DS = DS series (rotary handle) Flow Path See page 2. End Connections See page 2. Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5 Pneumatic Actuation (HB Series Only) C = Normally closed O = Normally open CM = Normally closed with indicator switch Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.20 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.20 m) average
Example Ordering Numbers

Ordering Number Material Valve type Flow path Port 1 end connection Port 2 end connection Port 3 end connection Port 4 end connection Port 5 end connection Process Actuator DS series 2-port, R pattern 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Rotary handle 6LV-DSR33P 6LV-DLD2121P1 316L VAR stainless steel DL series 4-port, D pattern 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Lever handle HB series 2-port, L pattern 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally closed 6LV-HBL11P-C
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI June 2007, R4 MS-02-85
www.swagelok.com
Bellows- and Diaphragm-Sealed Multipor t and Elbow Valves

Se le ction Guide
HB, DL, and DS Series

Choose a valve type from individual product catalogs. Follow the instructions to build a valve ordering number for the multiport valve that
meets your system requirements.

See product catalogs for materials of construction, pressure-temperature ratings,
options, and accessories.

Valve type. See these Swagelok catalogs: Diaphragm ValvesDL and DS Series, MS-01-73 High-Pressure, Pneumatically Actuated Bellows-Sealed Flow path4, 3, or 2 ports End connections for each port Process.
ValvesHB Series, MS-01-76
Flow Path
End Connections
End Connection 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Designator 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall Designator


D 4 E
Process
3 C
See individual product catalogs for process specifications.

Dimensions
Body and End Connections

2 mounting holes, 10-32 or M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.25 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (25.4) dia bolt circle L Port 1 L L L Port 5 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 M 1.06
(26.9)
Port 4
0.45
(11.4)
1.13 Port 2
(28.7)
Dimensions, in. (mm) L 1.38

(35.1)
M 1.27
(32.3)
1.74
(44.2)
1.63
(41.4)
(22.1)
0.87
0.76
(19.3)
L = 0.95 in. (24.1 mm) for ports 1 and 2 if the

Top
Front
Bottom
Body and Actuators

2.12
(53.8)
1.74
(44.2)
1.87
(47.5)
3.90 3.12
(79.2)
3.19
(81.0)
(99.4)
DL Series Lever Handle
DS Series Rotary Handle
HB Series Pneumatic Actuator

6LV H B A 1 1 1 P 1 C
Material 316L VAR stainless steel Valve Type Bellows Sealed HB = HB series (pneumatic actuator) Diaphragm Sealed DL = DL series (lever handle) DS = DS series (rotary handle) Flow Path See page 2. End Connections See page 2. Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5 Pneumatic Actuation (HB Series Only) C = Normally closed O = Normally open CM = Normally closed with indicator switch Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.20 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.20 m) average

Ordering Number Material Valve type Flow path Port 1 end connection Port 2 end connection Port 3 end connection Port 4 end connection Port 5 end connection Process Actuator DS series 2-port, R pattern 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Rotary handle 6LV-DSR33P 6LV-DLD2121P1 316L VAR stainless steel DL series 4-port, D pattern 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Lever handle HB series 2-port, L pattern 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally closed 6LV-HBL11P-C
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI June 2007, R4 MS-02-85
www.swagelok.com
Be llows-Se aled 3-Valve Manifolds

V3 Se r ie s
The Swagelok 3-valve manifold uses bellows-sealed valves for systems with difficult fluid containment requirements.
Features
316 stainless steel bodies Swagelok B or U series bellows
valves for general or severe service

Gasketed or welded body-to-
bonnet seals
Cobalt-based alloy stem tips Pipe fitting, flange, and Swagelok
tube fitting manifold end connections
Technical Data
For component technical data, including materials of construction and dimensions, see the following Swagelok catalogs: Bellows-Sealed ValvesB Series, MS-01-22 Bellows-Sealed ValvesU Series, MS-01-38 Instrument ManifoldsV, VB, and VL Series, MS-01-178.
Valve Series BG BW UG UW Pressure Rating at 100F (37C) psig (bar) 1000 (68.9) 2500 (172) Temperature Rating F (C) 600 (315) 900 (482) 650 (343) 1200 (648) Cobalt-based alloy Stem Tip Material
Testing
Every Swagelok bellows-sealed 3-valve manifold is factory vacuum tested with helium at room temperature to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 9 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals.
For a complete ordering number, insert the valve series into the basic ordering number.
Manifold End Connections Type Female NPT Female Swagelok tube fitting Flange Female NPT to flange Female Swagelok tube fitting to flange Size 1/2 in. 1/2 in. Basic Ordering Number SS-V3_ _F8 SS-V3_ _FS8 SS-V3_ _FL SS-V3_ _F8-FL SS-V3_ _FS8-FL

Every Swagelok bellows-sealed 3-valve manifold assembled with BG, BW, UG, or UW series valves is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Examples: SS-V3UGF8 SS-V3BWFL Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2000, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company, December 2007, R4, MS-02-07-E
www.swagelok.com
Bellows-Sealed Mete ring Valves
BM Series
Micrometer handle for precise, repeatable flow settings Working pressures up to 700 psig (48.2 bar) Temperatures up to 900F (482C) 316 stainless steel construction
BM Series Metering Valves Handle dead stop protects needle tip from damage by overtightening Stainless steel actuator is hardened for strength and wear resistance
Features
Flow coefficients: 0.019 with metering stem tip 0.30 with regulating stem tip Micrometer handles measure stem
position in 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) increments.

Valves open to maximum flow in six
Actuator backstop enhances bellows life
Actuator threads are protected from system contaminants
turns.
Slotted handle tops enable
adjustments with a screwdriver.

Panel and bottom mounting are
Ball and double-pin design ensures positive stem retraction
Lock screw locks in flow settings
standard.
Swagelok tube fitting, tube socket
weld, tube butt weld, and Swagelok VCR fitting end connections are available.
Precision-formed metal bellows provides reliable service
Gasket body-tobellows seal shown; welded seal available
Technical Data
Body-toBellows Seal Gasket Welded Stem Tip Metering Regulating Metering Regulating Stem Taper 3 20 3 20 Cv 0.019 0.30 0.019 0.30 Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.07 (1.1) 0.11 (1.6) 0.07 (1.1) 0.11 (1.6) Series BMG BMRG BMW BMRW
Metering stem tip shown; regulating stem tip available
1
1 2 Component Handle Set screw Bushing Set screw Barrel Set screw 4 5 6 7 8 Panel mount nut Bonnet nut Bonnet Lock screw Actuator Actuator pins Bearing Stem Bellows Weld ring 10 Stem adapter 11 Stem tip BMRG, BMRW All BMG, BMRG All All All 9 Series All All All All All All All All Material Grade/ASTM Specification Silver-mist chrome-plated 313 SS/A582 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 303 SS/A582 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Silver-mist chrome-plated 313 SS/A582 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 316 SS/B783 Silver-plated 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 416 SS/A582 420 SS/A276 420C SS 316 SS/A479 321 SS/A269 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Hard chrome-plated 316 SS/A479 Silver-plated 316 SS/A580 316 SS/A479 Molybdenum disulfide-based dry film and paste
2 3 4 5
9
Metering
9 10
12 Gasket 13 Body Lubricants

Regulating
11 12
11
Wetted components listed in italics.
13
BM Series Metering Valves
Material Series Temperature, F (C) 20 (28) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
(260) (315) (343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482)
Testing
BMG, BMRG 700 610 530 450
(48.2) (42.0) (36.5) (31.0)
316 SS BMW, BMRW 700 610 530 450 375 300 260 230 200 160 130 100
(48.2) (42.0) (36.5) (31.0) (25.8) (20.6) (17.9) (15.8) (13.7) (11.0) (8.9) (6.8)
Every BM series metering valve is helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s at the envelope and body seal.
Working Pressure, psig (bar)

Swagelok BM series metering valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok BM series metering valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
375 (25.8) 300 (20.6)
Handle Temperature Gradient

When Valve Seat Is 600F (315C) 900F (482C) Valve Handle Is 250F (121C) 325F (162C)


BMG, BMW Cv BMRG, BMRW Cv 0.005 0.05 0.010 0.10 0.019 0.20 0.30
Air
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
Water Flow, L/min
Inlet Pressure, psig
Inlet Pressure, bar
Air Flow, std ft3/min
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min
Flow Coefficient at Turns Open

BMG, BMW Flow Coefficient (Cv) BMRG, BMRW Flow Coefficient (Cv)
Factory Flow Settings

BMG and BMW Series
With 10 psig (0.68 bar) inlet pressure and the flow rate from 10 to 15 cm3/min, the handle is set at 0. BMG and BMW series valves are not intended for shutoff service.
BMRG, BMRW
BMG, BMW
BMRG and BMRW Series

Following a helium leak test and the valve seat to a maximum leak rate of 7 10 7 std cm3/s, the handle is set at 0. BMRW series valves are not recommended for shutoff above 600F (315C).
Number of Turns Open
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi

Select an ordering number. Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
1.02
(25.9)
End Connections Type Size Series BMG Fractional Swagelok tube fitting BMRG 1/4 in. BMW BMRW
Ordering Number SS-4BMG SS-4BMRG SS-4BMW SS-4BMRW SS-6BMG-MM SS-6BMRG-MM SS-6BMW-MM SS-6BMRW-MM SS-4BMG-TW SS-4BMRG-TW SS-4BMW-TW SS-4BMRW-TW SS-4BMG-VCR SS-4BMRG-VCR SS-4BMW-VCR SS-4BMRW-VCR
Dimensions, in. (mm) Orifice 0.057

(1.4)
A 5.24
(133)
B 1.45
(36.8)
0.166
(4.2)
5.22
(133)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
0.057
(1.4)
5.17
(131)
1.42
(36.1)
0.166
(4.2)
5.15
(131)
0.38 0.77 (19.6) panel hole
A (9.7) open max
BMG Metric Swagelok tube fitting BMRG 6 mm BMW BMRW
0.057
(1.4)
5.24
(133)
1.45
(36.8)
0.166
(4.2)
5.22
(133)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
Swagelok tube fittings
0.057
(1.4)
5.17
(131)
B C 2.46
(62.5)
1.42
(36.1)
0.166
(4.2)
5.15
(131)
BMG
3/8 in. butt weld dia
0.057
(1.4)
5.24
(133)
1/4 in. socket weld dia
1.45
(36.8)
Tube socket weld and tube butt weld ends

1.68
(42.7)
Tube socket 1/4 in. and tube and butt weld 3/8 in.
BMRG BMW BMRW BMG
0.166
(4.2)
5.22
(133)
0.56
(14.2)
1.00
(25.4)
0.057
(1.4)
5.17
(131)
1.42
(36.1)
0.166
(4.2)
5.15
(131)
Integral male VCR fittings

2.24
(56.9)
0.057
(1.4)
5.24
(133)
1.45
(36.8)
10-32 UNF tapped holes 0.25 (6.4) deep
Integral male VCR fitting
BMRG 1/4 in BMW BMRW
0.166
(4.2)
5.22
(133)
0.44
(11.2)
1.00
(25.4)
0.057
(1.4)
5.17
(131)
1.42
(36.1)
Bottom
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.166
(4.2)
5.15
(131)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. D
Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)

Swagelok BM series metering valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for BM series valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BMG-SC11
Welded Female VCR Face Seal Fittings

Factory welded to valves with tube
Special Alloys
Many BM series valves are available in brass and alloy 400 materials. BMW and BMRW series valves are not available in brass. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
butt weld end connections

316 SS fittings on stainless steel valves
To order, add a designator to the ordering number for a valve with fractional Swagelok tube fitting end connections.
Fitting Size 1/4 in. 1/2 in. Designator -V51 -V16 Overall Length in. (mm) 2.76 (70.1) 4.60 (117)
Maintenance Kits
Bellows, stem tip/adapter, and gasket kits are available for BMG and BMRG series valves. See the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-02-66.
Example: SS-4BMG-V51
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 2007, R6 MS-01-23
www.swagelok.com
Be llows-Se aled Valve for Switching Se r vice

BY Se r ie s
Features
Compact, packless valve switches flow from one line to
another.
Torlon stem guide ensures proper alignment for consistent
shutoff performance.
Manual and spring-return and double-acting pneumatic
actuators are available.

End connections include 1/4 in. Swagelok VCR metal
gasket face seal fittings and 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings. Other end connections are available; contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for information.
Operation
With pressure to the miniature springreturn pneumatic actuator, the stem tip seals the upper port, allowing flow through the lower port.
Testing
Every BY series valve is factory vacuum tested with helium at room temperature for five seconds to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 9 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals.

When there is no pressure to the actuator, the stem tip seals the lower port, allowing flow through the upper port. Swagelok BY series switching valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. BY series switching valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Oxygen Service Hazards Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Valve Ratings Pressure Temperature psig (bar) F (C) Vacuum to 0 to 200 150 (10.3) (18 to 93) Actuator Ratings Pressure Temperature psig (bar) F (C) 65 to 150 10 to 300
(4.5 to 10.3) (23 to 148)
Valve
Component Bonnet nut, bonnet Stem, weld ring, stem extension, spool, body Bellows Gasket Guide Stem tip O-rings Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/ A276 and A479 316 SS/ A276 and A479 321 SS/A240 PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240 Torlon Fluorocarbon FKMbonded 316 SS/A276 and A479 Fluorocarbon FKM

Pneumatic Actuator shown
(43.8)
1.73
1/8 in. female NPT (double acting)
1/8 in. female NPT A open 2.30
(58.4)
Wetted components listed in italics. Material Safety Data Sheet for bonding agent available on request. 1.08
(39.3)
10-32 UNF tapped holes, 0.25 (6.4) deep, on a 1.00 (25.4) dia bolt circle 1.55
45
Pneumatic Actuator
Component Housing External hardware O-rings Material Aluminum Stainless steel Fluorocarbon FKM
(27.3)
(25.4)
1.00
0.49
(12.3)
(25.4)
1.00
VCR Fittings shown End Connections Type VCR fitting Swagelok tube fitting VCR fitting Swagelok tube fitting VCR fitting Swagelok tube fitting Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Ordering Number SS-4BY-V35 SS-4BY-W4 SS-4BY-V35-1C SS-4BY-W4-1C SS-4BY-V35-1D SS-4BY-W4-1D Manual actuator (not shown)
Bottom
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 3.27 (83.1) 3.93 (99.8) 3.27 (83.1) 3.93 (99.8) 3.27 (83.1) 3.93 (99.8)
4.81 (122)
Spring-return pneumatic actuator 4.75 (121)
Double-acting pneumatic actuator 4.75 (121)
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company TorlonTM Amoco Performance Products, Inc. 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI January 2008, R8 MS-02-58
www.swagelok.com
Be llows-Se aled Valve s

Mainte na nce K its
Bellows Kits
BG, BK, BKT, BMG, BMRG, BRG, UG, and UK Series
Manual Valves and Valves with 5, 6, and 8 Series Pneumatic Actuators
Kits include welded subassembly (stem, bellows, and weld ring), pin(s), and instructions.
Kit Ordering Number Stainless Steel and Brass Valves Alloy 400 Valves SS-4BK-K1 SS-4BM-K1 SS-4BMR-K1 SS-8B-K1 SS-4U-K1 SS-12U-K1 M-4B-K1 M-4BM-K1 M-4BMR-K1 M-8B-K1
Stem Tip/Adapter Kits

Kits include stem tip/adapter subassembly and instructions. Ordering numbers specify stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BR-K5
BG, BM, BMRG, BRG, UG, and UK Series

Valve Series 4BG, 4UG BMRG, 4BRG, 4URG 4UK 6UK, 8UK 6BG, 8BG, 8BG, 8UG 12UG 12UK Kit Ordering Number SS-4B-ST-K5 SS-4BR-K5 SS-4BA-K5 SS-8BA-K5 SS-8B-K5 SS-12U-ST-K5 SS-12UK-K5
Valve Series 4BG, 4BK, 4BKT BMG BMRG 4BRG, 6BK, 8BK, 6BG, 8BG 4UG, 4UK, 6UG, 6UK, 8UG, 8UK 12UG, 12UK
BK Series with 1 Series Pneumatic Actuators
For alloy 400 valves, replace SS with M and ST

with M5. Example: M-4B-M5-K5
BK and BKT Series

Kit Ordering Number Manual Valves and Valves with 5 Series Valves with 1 Series Pneumatic Actuators Pneumatic Actuators SS-4BA-K5 SS-4BK-K5 SS-8BA-K5 SS-4BK-K5 SS-8BK-K5
Valve Series 4BK 4BKT 6BK, 8BK
Kits include welded subassembly (stem, bellows, weld ring), piston and stem O-rings, lock nut, washer, and instructions. The ordering number species stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BA-K1
Valve Series 4BK, 6BK, 8BK Kit Ordering Number SS-4BA-K1
Manual BN Series
Valve Series BN4 BN8 Kit Ordering Number KF-BN4-K5 KF-BN8-K5
Bellows/Stem/Stem Tip/ Adapter Kits

BN, HB, and HK Series
Kits include bellows/stem tip/adapter subassembly, and gasket of the original materials specied in the product catalog and instructions.
Not included for HG and HK series;
not required for BN series.
Gasket Kits
BG, BK, BKT, BMG, BMRG, BRG, HB, HK, UG, and UK Series
Kits include body-to-bonnet gasket of the original material specied in the product catalog and instructions. Ordering numbers specify stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BGO-K5-T
Valve Series BG, BRG, BMG, BMRG, 4UG, 6UG, 8UG BK, BKT, 4UK, 6UK, 8UK HB HK HK with copper stem tip 12UG, 12UK Kit Ordering Number SS-4BGO-K5-SV SS-4BGO-K5-T 6L-HB-K28 CU-4HG-K12T CU-4HG-K12 SS-12UGO-K5-SV
Valve Series BN4 BN8 HB HK HK with copper stem tip
Kit Ordering Number Pneumatically Manual Valves Actuated Valves SS-BN4-KF-K6 SS-BN8-KF-K6 SS-BN4-K1 SS-BN8-K1 SS-HB-KF-K5 B-4HK-KA B-4HG-KA
For brass valves, replace SV with T.

Example: SS-4BGO-K5-T
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2006, R3 MS-02-66
www.swagelok.com

Mainte na nce K its
Bellows Kits
BG, BK, BKT, BMG, BMRG, BRG, UG, and UK Series
Manual Valves and Valves with 5, 6, and 8 Series Pneumatic Actuators
Kits include welded subassembly (stem, bellows, and weld ring), pin(s), and instructions.
Kit Ordering Number Stainless Steel and Brass Valves Alloy 400 Valves SS-4BK-K1 SS-4BM-K1 SS-4BMR-K1 SS-8B-K1 SS-4U-K1 SS-12U-K1 M-4B-K1 M-4BM-K1 M-4BMR-K1 M-8B-K1
Stem Tip/Adapter Kits

Kits include stem tip/adapter subassembly and instructions. Ordering numbers specify stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BR-K5
BG, BM, BMRG, BRG, UG, and UK Series

Valve Series 4BG, 4UG BMRG, 4BRG, 4URG 4UK 6UK, 8UK 6BG, 8BG, 8BG, 8UG 12UG 12UK Kit Ordering Number SS-4B-ST-K5 SS-4BR-K5 SS-4BA-K5 SS-8BA-K5 SS-8B-K5 SS-12U-ST-K5 SS-12UK-K5
Valve Series 4BG, 4BK, 4BKT BMG BMRG 4BRG, 6BK, 8BK, 6BG, 8BG 4UG, 4UK, 6UG, 6UK, 8UG, 8UK 12UG, 12UK
BK Series with 1 Series Pneumatic Actuators
For alloy 400 valves, replace SS with M and ST

with M5. Example: M-4B-M5-K5
BK and BKT Series

Kit Ordering Number Manual Valves and Valves with 5 Series Valves with 1 Series Pneumatic Actuators Pneumatic Actuators SS-4BA-K5 SS-4BK-K5 SS-8BA-K5 SS-4BK-K5 SS-8BK-K5
Valve Series 4BK 4BKT 6BK, 8BK
Kits include welded subassembly (stem, bellows, weld ring), piston and stem O-rings, lock nut, washer, and instructions. The ordering number species stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BA-K1
Valve Series 4BK, 6BK, 8BK Kit Ordering Number SS-4BA-K1
Manual BN Series
Valve Series BN4 BN8 Kit Ordering Number KF-BN4-K5 KF-BN8-K5
Bellows/Stem/Stem Tip/ Adapter Kits

BN, HB, and HK Series
Kits include bellows/stem tip/adapter subassembly, and gasket of the original materials specied in the product catalog and instructions.
Not included for HG and HK series;
not required for BN series.
Gasket Kits
BG, BK, BKT, BMG, BMRG, BRG, HB, HK, UG, and UK Series
Kits include body-to-bonnet gasket of the original material specied in the product catalog and instructions. Ordering numbers specify stainless steel (SS) for stainless steel and brass valves. For alloy 400 valve kits, replace SS with M. Example: M-4BGO-K5-T
Valve Series BG, BRG, BMG, BMRG, 4UG, 6UG, 8UG BK, BKT, 4UK, 6UK, 8UK HB HK HK with copper stem tip 12UG, 12UK Kit Ordering Number SS-4BGO-K5-SV SS-4BGO-K5-T 6L-HB-K28 CU-4HG-K12T CU-4HG-K12 SS-12UGO-K5-SV
Valve Series BN4 BN8 HB HK HK with copper stem tip
Kit Ordering Number Pneumatically Manual Valves Actuated Valves SS-BN4-KF-K6 SS-BN8-KF-K6 SS-BN4-K1 SS-BN8-K1 SS-HB-KF-K5 B-4HK-KA B-4HG-KA
For brass valves, replace SV with T.

Example: SS-4BGO-K5-T
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2006, R3 MS-02-66
www.swagelok.com
B Se r ie s
Working pressures up to 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperatures up to 900F (482C) 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in.; 6, 10, and 12 mm end connections Brass, stainless steel, and alloy 400 materials
B Series Bellows-Sealed Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Data at 70F (0C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 5 5 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 8
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pneumatic Actuator Options and Accessories . . . . . . . 11
Bar, round, or toggle handle; pneumatic actuation also available. Stainless steel actuator is hardened for strength and wear resistance. Actuator-stem coupling design ensures positive stem retraction. Precision-formed metal bellows provides reliable seal to atmosphere. Actuator threads are protected from system contaminants. Actuator backstop enhances bellows life.
Gasket body-to-bellows seal shown; welded seal available.
Nonrotating spherical stem tip shown; conical and regulating stem tips available.
Features
Swagelok B series bellows-sealed valves are available in a variety of models for system versatility.
Gasketed or welded body-to-bellows
Technical Data
Body-toBellows Seal Valve Body Materials Stem Tip Metal (regulating) Handle Type Round Bar Toggle Metal (spherical in brass and 316 SS; conical in alloy 400) Metal (regulating) Weld 316 SS, alloy 400 Metal (spherical in 316 SS; conical in alloy 400) Round Bar Round Bar Cv 0.0 0.36 1.0 1. 0.36 0.36 1.0 1. 0.1 0.33 1.0 1.1 Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.16 (.6) 0.10 (1.6) 0.4 (3.9) 0.6 (4.3) 0.11 (1.8) 0.10 (1.6) 0.4 (3.9) 0.6 (4.3) 0.16 (.6) 0.10 (1.6) 0.4 (3.9) 0.6 (4.3) Series 4BRG 4BK 6BK 8BK 4BKT 4BG 6BG 8BG 4BRW 4BW 6BW 8BW
seals
Stem tips for shutoff or regulating
service
Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.1 to 1. Variety of end connections: Swagelok tube fittings1/4 to
Gasket
Brass, 316 SS, alloy 400
PCTFE (conical)
1/ in. and 6 to 1 mm

Tube socket weld ends1/4 to
1/ in.
Tube butt weld ends1/4 to 3/4 in. Female
VCR
face seal fittings
1/4 and 1/ in.

Integral male VCR face seal
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections. R designates regulating stem tip; G designates gasket body-to-bellows seal; K designates PCTFE
stem tip (conical); T designates toggle handle; W designates welded body-to-bellows seal.
fittings1/4 and 1/ in.

Panel and bottom mounting
Brass
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Green phenolic Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Green anodized aluminum 04-T4/B11 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Black nylon 30 SS Brass/B16 Brass/B16 Silver-plated brass/B16 Brass/B16 Silver-plated 316 SS/A479 Nylon 316 SS/A479 S17700/AMS 5678 416 SS/A58 303 SS/A58 40 SS 316 SS/A479 321 SS/A269 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 (regulating) Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B165 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy K-500/AMS 4676 (regulating) 316 SS/B783 Alloy 400 Component 1a Handle Set screws 1b Handle Set screw 1c Handle Handle pin 2 Panel mount nut Bonnet nut Washer Bonnet Spring Actuator Actuator pin 8 Stem Bellows Weld ring Series 4BG, 4BRG, 4BK, 4BW, 4BRW 6BG, 8BG, 6BK, 8BK, 6BW, 8BW 4BKT All All except 4BKT Material Grade/ASTM Specification
1a
1b 1c 2 3 4
3 4 5 6 7
4BKT 4BKT All 4BKT All except 4BKT 4BKT All All All All All 4BRG, 4BRW
5 6
9 tem S adapter
10 Stem tip
4BK, 6BK, 8BK, 4BKT 4BG, 6BG, 8BG, 4BW, 6BW, 8BW 4BG, 6BG, 8BG, 4BRG 4BK, 6BK, 8BK, 4BKT All 4BG, 6BG, 8BG, 4BW, 6BW, 8BW All
PCTFE/D1430 (conical) Cobalt-based alloy (spherical) Silver-plated 316 SS/A580 PTFE-coated 316 SS/A580 Brass/B16 316 SS/A479 Alloy K-500/AMS 4676 (conical) Silver-plated alloy 400/AMS 4730 PTFE-coated alloy 400/AMS 4730 Alloy 400/B164
11 Gasket
8
12 Body Wetted lubricant
Fluorinated-based (spherical stem tip, pneumatically actuated valves) Molybdenum disulfide-based
Nonwetted lubricant
10
Regulating
Wetted components listed in italics. Additional stem tip options available. See Options, page 10. Valves with welded body-to-bellows seal (4BRW, 4BW, 6BW, 8BW) not available in brass.
Conical Spherical
Gasket Seal
BG Series BK Series
316 SS gasket body-tobellows seal
Welded Seal
BW Series
Welded body-tobellows seal
11
12
Spherical stem tip shown; regulating stem tip available
PCTFE stem tip for soft-seat shutoff
Regulating stem tip shown; spherical stem tip available
BG, BRG, BW, and BRW Series
G designates gasket body-to-bellows seal; R designates regulating stem tip; W designates welded body-to-bellows seal. BRW series valves are not recommended for shutoff above 600F (315C). Ratings apply to manual valves and to valves with 5 series pneumatic actuators. For actuator ratings, see page 8.
Material Series Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 00 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
(37) (93) (148) (04) (60) (315) (343) (371) (398) (46) (454) (48)
Brass BG 1000 710 430 150

(68.9) (48.9) (9.6) (10.3)
BRG 450 350 50 150

(31.0) (4.1) (17.) (10.3)
316 SS BRW, BG, BW BRG 1000 830 660 500 450 400 360 330 300 60 30 00
(68.9) (57.1) (45.4) (34.4) (31.0) (7.5) (4.8) (.7) (0.6) (17.9) (15.8) (13.7)
Alloy 400 BW, BRW, BG, BRG 700 610 530 450
(48.) (4.0) (36.5) (31.0)

(68.9) (57.1) (45.4) (34.4)
450 (31.0) 400 (7.5)
375 (5.8)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Due to the brass bonnet threads, cycle life of brass valves may be reduced when operated frequently at pressures above 450 psig (31.0 bar). Brass valves only available with manual or 1 series pneumatic actuators.

316 SS Valves
When Valve Seat Is 600F (315C) 900F (48C) Valve Handle Is 195F (90C) 75F (135C)
BK Series
K designates PCTFE stem tip. Ratings apply to manual valves and to valves with 1 series or 5 series pneumatic actuators. For actuator ratings, see page 8.
1 Series Pneumatic Actuators Actuation Mode Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 (37) 00 (93) Manual and 5 Series Pneumatic Actuators Brass 1000 (68.9) 710 (48.9) 316 SS 1000 (68.9) 830 (57.1) Alloy 400 Working Pressure, psig (bar) 700 (48.) 15 (8.6) 610 (4.0) 15 (8.6) Normally Closed Normally Open Double Acting Brass, 316 SS, Alloy 400 500 (34.4) 500 (34.4) 700 (48.) 700 (48.)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Due to the brass bonnet threads, cycle life of brass valves may be reduced when operated frequently at pressures above 450 psig (31.0 bar). Brass valves only available with manual or 1 series pneumatic actuators. 610 psig (4.0 bar) for alloy 400 valves with double-acting pneumatic actuators.
BKT Series
K designates PCTFE stem tip; T designates toggle handle.
100 psig (6.8 bar) at 0 to 00F (8 to 93C).

R designates regulating stem tip; G designates gasket body-to-bellows seal; W designates welded body-to-bellows seal; K designates PCTFE stem tip; T designates toggle handle.
4BRG, 4BRW 4BKT 4BG, 4BW, 4BK 6BG, 6BW, 6BK 8BG, 8BW, 8BK
Air
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
Water Flow, L/min
6 4 2 1

Maximum number of turns open for valves with welded bodyto-bellows seal:
4BRW, 4BW1.5 turns 6BW, 8BW3 turns
Flow Coefficient (Cv)
6 4 2 1
Testing
Every B series valve is factory tested with helium for 5 s to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 9 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals.

Swagelok B series valves with VCR end connections and all BK series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok B series valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
Pressure Drop, bar
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, psi

Stainless Steel Valves
Select an ordering number.
Brass and Alloy 400 Valves

Replace SS with B for brass or M for alloy 400. Example: B-4BG Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
4BG, 4BK 4BW, 4BRG 4BRW
4BKT
0.38 (9.7) max panel thickness; 0.76 (19.3) hole 0.38 (9.7) max panel thickness; A 0.76 (19.3) open hole
A open
End Connections Type Size
Ordering Number SS-4BG SS-4BK SS-4BW SS-4BRG SS-4BRW SS-4BKT SS-6BG
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series Orifice 4BG 4BK 4BW 4BRG 4BRW 4BKT 6BG 6BK 6BW 8BG 8BK 8BW 4BG 4BK 4BW 4BKT 6BG 6BK 6BW 8BG 8BK 8BW 4BG 4BK 4BW 4BKT 6BG 6BK 6BW 8BG 8BK 8BW 0.19
(4.8)
A 3.64
(9.5)
1/4 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fitting
0.16
(4.1)
0.56 4.18
(106) (14.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
.46
(6.5)
1.06
(6.9)
1.00
(5.4)
4.50 (114) 0.6 port 0.30

(7.6) (6.6)
0.50
(1.7)
3.09
(78.5)
3/8 in. SS-6BK SS-6BW SS-8BG 1/ in. SS-8BK SS-8BW SS-6BG-MM 6 mm SS-6BK-MM SS-6BW-MM SS-6BKT-MM 10 mm SS-10BG-MM SS-10BK-MM SS-10BW-MM SS-1BG-MM SS-1BK-MM SS-1BW-MM SS-4BG-BW4 1/4 in. SS-4BK-BW4 SS-4BW-BW4 SS-4BKT-BW4
4.19
(106)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
3.30
(83.8)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
0.16
(4.1)
3.64
(9.5)
0.56
(14.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
.46
(6.5)
1.06
(6.9)
1.00
(5.4)
Metric Swagelok tube fitting
4.50 (114) 0.8 port 0.30

(7.6) (7.1)
0.50
(1.7)
4.19
(106)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
3.11
(79.0)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
1 mm
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
3.30
(83.8)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
0.10
(.5)
3.64
(9.5)
0.56
(14.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1.68
(4.7)
1.00 (5.4)
0.5
(6.4)
4.50 (114) 4.19

(106)
0.50
(1.7)
SS-6BG-BW6 Tube butt weld 3/8 in. SS-6BK-BW6 SS-6BW-BW6 SS-8BG-BW8 1/ in. SS-8BK-BW8 SS-8BW-BW8
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
.18
(55.4)
1.50
(38.1)
1.13
(8.7)
0.38
(9.7)
0.6
(6.6)
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
.18
(55.4)
1.50
(38.1)
1.13
(8.7)
0.50
(1.7)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. J = tube butt weld diameter; K = tube socket weld diameter.

6BG, 6BK 6BW, 8BG 8BK, 8BW
E
Tube Socket Weld and Tube Butt Weld Ends

K 0.38 (9.7) max panel thickness; 0.76 (19.3) hole J
F A open
Bottom Butt Welded Female VCR Fitting Ends

10-3 UNF tapped holes 0.5 (6.4) deep
C D F B F B G H
Ordering Number SS-4BG-TW
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series Orifice 4BG 4BK 4BW 4BRG 4BRW 6BG 6BK 6BW 8BG 8BK 8BW 4BG 4BK 4BW 6BG 6BK 6BW 8BK 8BG 8BK 8BW 4BK 8BK 0.16
(4.1)
A 3.64
Tube socket weld and 3/8 tube butt and weld 1/ in.
1/4 SS-4BK-TW and SS-4BW-TW 3/8 in. SS-4BRG-TW SS-4BRW-TW SS-6BG-TW SS-6BK-TW SS-6BW-TW
0.16
(4.1)
(9.5)
0.56
(14.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1.68
(4.7)
1.00 (5.4)
0.38
(9.7)
0.5
(6.4)
4.18
(106)
0.8 port 0.30

(7.6) (7.1)
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
.7
(57.7)
1.51
(38.4)
1.13
(8.7)
0.50
(1.7)
0.38
(9.7)
1/ SS-8BG-TW and SS-8BK-TW 3/4 in. SS-8BW-TW SS-4BG-V51 1/4 in. SS-4BK-V51 SS-4BW-V51 Butt welded female VCR fitting SS-6BG-V19 SS-6BK-V19 SS-6BW-V19 1/ in. SS-8BK-V19 SS-8BG-V47 SS-8BK-V47 SS-8BW-V47 1/4 in. SS-4BK-VCR Integral male VCR SS-8BG-VCR fitting 1/ in. SS-8BK-VCR
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
.7
(57.7)
1.50
(38.1)
1.13
(8.7)
0.75
(19.1)
0.50
(1.7)
0.16
(4.1)
3.64
(9.5)
0.56
(14.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
.76
(70.1)
1.00 (5.4)
5.19
(13)
1.51
(38.4)
1.13
(8.7)
0.30
(7.6)
4.19
(106)
0.50
(1.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
4.49 (114) 1.50 38.1) 3.1

(79.)
1.5
(31.8)
3.64
(9.5)
0.44
(11.)
1.45
(36.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.88
(47.8)
.4
(56.9)
1.00 (5.4) 1.50

(38.1)
0.9 port
(7.4)
4.19
(106)
0.46
(11.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.)
1.13
(8.7)
J = tube butt weld diameter; K = tube socket weld diameter.
Pneumatic Actuators
Features
Reliable piston design for enhanced
cycle life
Low actuation pressures Aluminum and stainless steel
components
1 Series
5 Series
Actuator Series
1 series actuator for BK series valves
Actuation Modes
Normally closedair opens, spring closes Normally openair closes, spring opens Double actingair opens and closes
Actuator Series 1 Component Housing External hardware O-rings Material Aluminum Cast aluminum 5
with brass, stainless steel, and alloy 400 bodies

5 series actuator for BG, BK, and BW
series valves with stainless steel and alloy 400 bodiesnot for valves with brass bodies
Stainless steel Fluorocarbon FKM
Technical Data
Valve Series 4BK 6BK 8BK 4BK, 4BG 4BW 6BK, 6BG, 6BW 8BK, 8BG 8BW Valve Cv 0.30 0.86 0.96 0.36 0.33 1.0 1. 1.1 5 50 to 150
(3.4 to 10.3)
Actuator Series 1
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 40 to 150

(.7 to 10.3)
Temperature Air Rating Displacement F (C) in.3 (cm3) 0.068 (1.11)
Weight lb (kg) N/A
10 to 300
(3 to 148)
C6.7 (3.0) 0.83 (13.6) O4.6 (.1) D4.5 (.0)
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections.
Actuators with Stainless Steel Valves
Add an actuator series designator, then an actuation mode designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BG-5C
Actuator Series 1 5 Designator -1 -5 Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open Double acting Designator C O D
Actuators with Alloy 400 or Brass Valves

Replace SS with M for alloy 400 or B for brass. Example: M-4BG-5C 5 series actuators cannot be used with brass valves.
Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions
1 Series
(44.5)
5 Series
1.75 5.05
(18)
5.05
(18)
1/8 in. NPT A B 4.6

(117) (10.4)
(56.1)
.1
1/4 in. female NPT
(9.9) (10.4)
1.18 0.41
0.41
1/4 in. female NPT
Normally Closed and Double Acting

1.75 1/8 in. NPT mounting holes, A 0.34 (8.6) dia
1/4 in. female NPT

(9.7)
(44.5)
3.65
Normally Open and Double Acting, Side

A
(69.9) (9.7)
.75
3.65
Normally Closed, Side Normally Open
1 Series
Valve Series 4BK 6BK, 8BK Dimensions, in. (mm) A 3.65 (9.7) 3.76 (95.5) B 1.7 (43.7) 1.90 (48.3)
5 Series
Valve Series 4BG, 4BK, 4BW 6BG, 6BK, 6BW, 8BG, 8BK, 8BW A in. (mm) 4.87 (14) 5.05 (18)
mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia
Normally Open and Double Acting, Back
Pneumatic Actuator Performance

1 Series Normally Closed and Double Acting
System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
6BK, 8BK Normally Closed Double Acting
1 Series Normally Open

System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
6BK, 8BK 4BK
4BK Normally Closed Double Acting
System Pressure, psig
5 Series
The minimum actuation pressure for normally closed, normally open, and double-acting actuators is 50 psig (3.5 bar).
10

Swagelok B series valves with VCR end connections and all BK series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for B series valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BG-SC11
Bellows-Sealed 3-Valve Manifolds

The Swagelok 3-valve manifold uses B or U series bellows-sealed valves for systems with difficult fluid containment requirements. For more information, see the Swagelok BellowsSealed 3-Valve Manifolds V3 Series catalog, MS-0-07.
BG, BK, and BW Series

Vacuum Stem Tip/Adapters
Vacuum stem tip/adapters help eliminate gas pockets or trapped volumes. Features include:
Slotted adapter threads Vented adapter cavity Copper stem tip on BG and BW series PCTFE stem tip on BK series Pressure rating equal to that of the standard valve Temperature rating of 00F (93C) for BK series Temperature rating of 400F (04C) for BG and BW series.
BG and BK Series
Polyimide Stem Tips
Provide soft-seat shutoff for temperatures up to 400F (04C)
or where PCTFE is not compatible with the system fluid

Are available in manually or pneumatically actuated BG and
BK series valves
Are rated to the same pressure as the standard valve.
To order, add -VP to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BG-VP
Copper Stem Tips

Provide metal soft-seat shutoff for temperatures up to
To order, add an adapter designator to the valve ordering number.

Valve Series BG, BW BK Vacuum Stem Tip/Adapter Designator -VD -VA
400F (04C) or where PCTFE is not compatible with the system fluid
Are available in manually or pneumatically actuated BG and
BK series valves
Are rated to the same pressure as the standard valve.
To order, add -CU to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BG-CU
Example: B-4BG-VD
4BKT Series
Colored Toggle Handles
Black handles are standard for toggle-operated 4BKT series valves. For other colors, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BKT-BL
Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -WH -YW
11
Pneumatic Actuator Options and Accessories

1 Series (BK Series)
Indicator Switches
Transmit a signal to an
5 Series (BG, BK, and BW Series)

Microswitches
Signal OPEN or CLOSED
electrical device indicating either the open or closed position of a pneumatically actuated valve.
Feature single-pole, single-
position of valve to panel or process controller

Feature single-pole, double-
throw switch
Meet NEMA standard for
throw switch rated at 1/ A for 115 V (ac) resistivity.

Include a 4 in. (61 cm) wire
type 1 and type 3 enclosures

Include stainless steel
lead with an inline clip.

Are available factory
mounting bracket
assembled on normally closed BK series valves with 1 series pneumatic actuators or in kits for field assembly. Factory-Assembled Indicator Switches To order a valve with an indicator switch, add M for a normally open switch or M-2 for a normally closed switch to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-4BK-1CM SS-4BK-1CM-2 Indicator Switch Kits for Field Assembly To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-ISK-BK-1CM for a normally open switch or MS-ISK-BK-1CM-2 for a normally closed switch.
assembled on BG, BK, and BW series valves with 5 series pneumatic actuators or in kits for field assembly. Factory-Assembled Microswitches To order a valve with a microswitch, add M to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4BG-5CM Microswitch Kits for Field Assembly To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-5CMK-4B for 4B series valves or MS-5CMK-8B for 6B and 8B series valves.
Actuator Conversion Kits

The actuator conversion kit converts a B series valve with a Swagelok 3 series pneumatic actuator to a valve with a 5 series pneumatic actuator.
Valve Series 4BG, 4BK, 4BW Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open Double acting 6BG, 6BK, 6BW, 8BG, 8BK, 8BW Normally closed Normally open Double acting Actuator Conversion Kit Ordering Number MS-5CK-4B MS-5OK-4B MS-5DK-4B MS-5CK-8B MS-5OK-8B MS-5DK-8B
Maintenance Kits
Stem tip/adapter kits, bellows kits, and gasket kits are available for BG, BRG, BK, and BKT series valves. See the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-0-66.

Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 00, 003, 005, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI August 008, R9 MS-01-
www.swagelok.com
BN Se r ie s
Packless valves with all-metal seal to atmosphere Working pressures up to 500 psig (34.4 bar) Temperatures up to 200F (93C) 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm end connections
BN Series Bellows-Sealed Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Data at 70F (0C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiport and Elbow Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 7 8
Multivalve Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Features
Rotary or toggle handle Union bonnet construction for safety Stem guiding outside of system fluid for clean operation Bonnet seals to body without gasket Precision-formed metal bellows for reliability Nonrotating stem tip for increased shutoff cycle life Threaded inlet and exhaust ports to accommodate piping system
Actuator-stem coupling design for positive stem retraction and smooth actuation
Reliable piston design for enhanced cycle life
Panel mounting and bottom mounting
Bottom mounting
Valve
316L stainless steel construction316L VAR for bodies
Pneumatic Actuator
Normally closed (C) model requires air to open and spring
with butt weld end connections

Flow coefficients (Cv): 0.30 and 0.70 Swagelok tube fitting, weld, and VCR and VCO fitting
to close.
Normally open (O) model requires air to close and spring
to open.
Pneumatic actuator rotates 360 for ease of installation. Green cap identifies normally open model.
end connections
Butt-weld ended valves are weldable with the Swagelok
welding system
Full pressure rating in either flow direction for system
versatility
Easily purged to maintain clean operation
Technical Data
Valve Ratings Valve Series BN4 BN8 Orifice in. (mm) 0.157
(4.0)
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.30 0.70
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.18 (.9) 0.7 (4.4)
Pressure vacuum to...psig (bar) Rotary handle500 Toggle handle100 Normally closed15 Normally open400
(34.4) (6.8) (8.6) (7.5)

(40 to 93)
Pressure psig (bar) 45 to 10

(3.1 to 8.)
Actuator Ratings Air Displacement Temperature (Actual Volume) F (C) in.3 (cm3) 10 to 300
(3 to 148)
0.313
(8.0)
0.045 (0.73)
Determined using valves with male VCR fitting end connections.
Valve
Component 1a Toggle handle Handle pin 1b Rotary handle Set screw 1c Pneumatic actuator 2 Panel mount nut 3 Bonnet nut 4 Stem guide 5 Bonnet 6 Stem wiper 7 Spring 8 Washer 9 Actuator Bearings (3) 10 Retaining ring 11 Spring 12 Ball bearing 13 Bearing retainer 14 Stem Bushing Weld ring Bellows 15 Gasket 16 Adapter 17 Stem insert 18 Body Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Black nylon 30 SS Green phenolic Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 See table below 316 SS/A479 Silver-plated 316 SS/A479 6/6 nylon/D4066 316 SS/A479 PTFE/AMS 3656 S17700 SS/AMS 5678 304 SS/A76 S17400 SS/A564 Chrome steel 30 SS or 15-7 PH SS 30 SS/A313 440C SS 316 SS/A479 316L SS/A479 Phosphor bronze C54400/B139 316L SS/A479 300 series SS/A269 or A240 PCTFE/AMS 3650 316L SS/A479 PCTFE/AMS 3650 316L SS/A479
1a 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Welded Assembly
1b 2 3 1c
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 8 10
Welded Assembly
14
Wetted components listed in italics. Molybdenum disulfide-based lubricant. Petroleum-based lubricant. Bodies with butt weld ends are 316L VAR SS/SEMI F0-0305 High-Purity, 0 % minimum elongation allowed.
17
17
17
18
18
18
Pneumatic Actuator
Component Cap, piston, cylinder O-rings Spring washer Flat washers Retaining ring Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Aluminum Fluorocarbon FKM 301 SS 304 SS/A40 15-7 PH SS
See Swagelok process specifications Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, and Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Cleaning Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals Assembly and Packaging Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged Process Designator None Process Specification Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) 0 in. (0.51 m) average, machine finished 8 in. (0.0 m) average, machine finished and electropolished Testing Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 4 109 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals
Ultrahigh-purity cleaning Performed in ISO Class 4 with a continuously work areas; valves are monitored, deionized water, double bagged and vacuum ultrasonic cleaning system sealed in cleanroom bags

BN4 Series BN8 Series Toggle Handle Rotary Handle and Pneumatic Actuator Toggle Handle Rotary Handle and Pneumatic Actuator

Select an ordering number from the table at right. Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
Rotary Handle Toggle Handle
(3.5) (47.8)
Air
Air Flow, std L/min
1.8
1.88
(3.9)
0.94
Inlet Pressure, bar
panel hole
(19.6)
0.77 0.38 max

(9.7)
A open

H F H F
Water
Water Flow, L/min
Swagelok Tube Fittings
Male VCR Fittings
Pneumatic Actuator Pressure Drop, bar

(31.5)
1.4
Pressure Drop, psi
10-3 UNF air inlet (O)
10-3 UNF air inlet (C)
C D N (butt weld dia)
0.5
(6.4)
Rotary Model Flow Coefficient at Turns Open
W H F H
Female VCR Fittings Flow Coefficient (Cv)
Weld Body
BN8 Series
Bottom
10-3 UNF mounting holes 0.5 (6.4) deep
BN4 Series
(5.4)
1.00
(8.7)
1.13
(6.9)
1.06
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 in. Butt weld ends 3/8 in. 6 mm Tube weld ends Integral male VCR fittings Integral male VCO fittings Female VCR fittings Female/male VCR fitting 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Ordering Number SS-BNS4 SS-BNS6 SS-BNS6MM SS-BNS8MM 6LV-BNBW4 6LV-BNBW6 6LV-BNBW6MM SS-BNTW4 SS-BNVCR4 SS-BNVCO4 SS-BNV51 SS-BNV51-VCR4 BN8 Series 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings 1/ in. 10 mm 1 mm 3/8 in. Butt weld ends 1/ in. Tube extension ends Integral male VCR fittings Female VCR fittings
MS-06-61.
Rotary A
Toggle B BN4 Series
Pneumatic C D E
All Models F H .46

(6.5)
Weld Bodies N W
.58
(65.5)
.46
(6.5)
.53
(64.3)
0.5
(6.4)
0.035
(0.89)
1.74 4.33
(110)
0.38
(9.6) (6)
3.85
(97.8)
3.67
(93.)
.31
(58.7)
1.7
(43.7)
0.45
(11.4)
(44.)
(1)
1.75
(44.4)
0.38
(9.6)
0.060
(1.5)
.30
(58.4)
.00
(50.8)
.76
(70.1)
.54
(64.5)
SS-BN8S6 SS-BN8S8 SS-BN8S10MM SS-BN8S1MM 6LV-BN8BW6 6LV-BN8BW8 SS-BN8T8A SS-BN8VCR8 SS-BN8FR8 4.60
(117)
.58
(65.5)
.80
(71.1)
.60
(66.0)
4.4
(11)
3.93
(99.8)
3.76
(95.5)
.40
(61.0)
1.81
(46.0)
0.53
(13.5)
.80
(71.1)
0.38 1.74
(44.) (9.6)
0.035
(0.89)
0.50
(1.7)
0.049
(1.)
1/ in. 1/ in. 1/ in.
3.40
(86.4)
4.11
(104)
3.93
(99.8)
.58
(65.5)
1.99
(50.5)
.58 0.66
(16.8) (65.5)
4.54
(115)
4.06
(103)
3.88
(98.6)
.53
(64.3)
1.93
(49.0)
3.15
(80.0)
Use ordering number SS-BNFR4-P to obtain processing and surface finish in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01),
Pneumatic Actuators
To order a pneumatically actuated valve, add -C for normally closed or -O for normally open to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-BNS4-C SS-BNS4-O
Bonnet Sniffer Tubes

Bonnet sniffer tubes allow monitoring of bellows integrity.
3/16 in. (4.7 mm) outside

Actuator Pressure at System Pressure
BN4 Series BN8 Series Normally Open Normally Open System Pressure, bar Normally Closed Normally Closed
diameter, 1.38 in. (34.9 mm) long.

316 stainless steel
Sniffer Tube
material with fluorocarbon FKM O-ring.

Threads to test port of
bonnet.
Actuator Pressure, psig Pneumatically actuated Actuator Pressure, bar
valves only. To order, add -T to the valve ordering-number. Example: 6LV-BNBW4-C-T
Indicator Switches
Transmits a signal to an electrical
device indicating either the open or closed position of a pneumatically actuated valve.
Features single-pole, single-throw
Optional Pneumatic Actuator Inlet Port

Standard inlet port is 10-3 UNF. A 1/8-7 NPT inlet port is available. The normally closed model has a cylinder extension to accommodate the larger port. To order, insert 2 in the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-BNS4-2C SS-BNS4-2O
switch rated at 1/ A for 115 V (ac) resistivity.

Includes a 4 in. (61 cm) wire lead
with an inline clip.

Is available assembled on any
normally closed BN series or for field assembly.
Hose Adapter Kits

Allows for use of soft plastic or rubber tubing at the inlet of the pneumatic actuator.
Adapts pneumatic actuator port from the 10-3 UNF thread
Factory-Assembled Indicator Switches

To order a valve with an indicator switch, add M for a normally open switch or M-2 for a normally closed switch to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-BNS4-CM SS-BNS4-CM-2
to 1/8 in. hose barb.

Includes a nickel-plated brass hose barb fitting and Buna N
gasket. Kit ordering number: B-BN4-K62
Indicator Switch Kits

To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-ISK-BN-CM for a normally open switch or MS-ISK-BN-CM-2 for a normally closed switch.

Polyimide Stem Tips
A PCTFE stem tip is standard. Polyimide stem tips are available in BN4 series valves, for temperatures up to 400F (04C) or where PCTFE is not compatible with the system fluid. To order, insert V in the valve ordering number. Example: SS-BNVS4-C Replacement polyimide stem tips are available for manually operated valves. Replacement stem tips for pneumatically actuated valves are part of the bellows/stem/stem tip subassembly. See the Swagelok Bellows Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-0-66.
Maintenance Kits
Stem tip/adapter kits are available for manual BN series valves; bellows/stem/stem tip/adapter kits are available for manual and pneumatic BN series valves. See the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-0-66.
Polyimide Stem Tip
(Manually operated valve stem tip shown)

Toggle Handles
Ordering numbers specify rotary handle valves. To order a toggle-operated valve, insert T in the valve ordering number. Example: SS-BNTS4 Black handles are standard for toggle-operated BN series valves. To order a colored toggle handle, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-BNTS4-BL
Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -WH -YW

Swagelok BN series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for valves with VCR or weld end connections, add -P to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-BNVCR4-P-C 6LV-BNBW4-P Exception: Use ordering number SS-BNFR4-P to obtain SC-01 processing and surface finish for SS-BNV51.

To customize a valve to meet your system requirements, select designators for:
multiport or elbow flow path end connections for each port process specification pneumatic actuation, if desired.
Flow Path
End Connections
End Connection 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Designator D 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall Designator


4 E 1
Process Specification and Actuation

See Ordering Information, page 9, for selection details.

Dimensions
mounting holes, 10-3 or M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) dia bolt circle L Port 1 L L Port 3 L Port 2 Port 1
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connections 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall L 1.38
(35.1)
Port 4
M 1.7
(3.3)
(11.4)
0.45
1.74
(44.)
1.63
(41.4)
Port 2 M Port 5 1.06
(8.7)
1.13
(.1)
0.87
0.76
(19.3)
(6.9)
L = 0.95 in. (4.1 mm) for ports 1 and if the
Top
Front
Bottom
6LV BN D 3 2 2 3 P C
Material 316L VAR stainless steel Series BN = BN (rotary handle or pneumatic actuator) BNT = BNT (toggle handle) Flow Path See page 8. End Connections See page 8. Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5 Pneumatic Actuation C = Normally closed O = Normally open CM = Normally closed with indicator switch Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.0 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.0 m) average

Ordering Number Material Series Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Process Actuator BN 3-port, C pattern 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Rotary handle 6LV-BNC111P 6LV-BNG111P-C 316L VAR stainless steel BN 3-port, G pattern 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally closed pneumatic BNT 3-port, C pattern 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Toggle handle 6LV-BNTC333P
10
Multivalve Manifolds
To customize a multivalve manifold to meet your system requirements, select designators for:
flow path end connections for each port process actuation (manual or pneumatic).
Flow Path
Select an internal flow path. Insert the flow path designator in the manifold ordering number, as shown on page 11.
P1, P, and P3 designate port numbers. V1 and V designate valve numbers. Manifold Schematic
P2 V1 V2
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Place the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected, as shown on page 11.
End Connection 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Designator
Flow Path
V1 P3 P1 P2 V2
Designator
M3V
P3
-valve, 3-port monoblock
P1
P2 V1 V2
V1 P3 P1
P2
V2 P3
P1
M4V
1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall
V1 P1 V2 V1 P3 P2 P1 V2 V1 P1 V2 V1 P2 P1 V2 P2 P3 P2 P3
V1
M1D
V2 V1
-valve, 3-port double pattern
MD
V2
P3
Process Specification and Actuation

See Ordering Information, page 11, for selection details.
Dimensions
M3V and M4V Monoblock Valves

Front
C B Port 2 mounting holes, 10-3 or M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) dia bolt circle C
Dimensions, in. (mm) Bottom Actuator Rotary handle Toggle handle Pneumatic actuator A 4.53
(115)
B 1.88
(47.8)
C 3.33
(84.6)
4.60
(117)
1.4
(31.5)
3.38
(85.9)
3.76
(95.5)
.68
(68.1)
A L Port 1 Port 3
(51.3)
.0
(8.7)
1.13
L1
L1
0.45
(11.4)
(61.)
.41
Dimensions, in. (mm) L1 .03

(51.6)
L2 .66
(67.6)
.39
(60.7)
3.35
(85.1)
1.81
(46.0)
.79
(70.9)
11
M1D and M2D Double-Pattern Valves
Front
B
Side
Back Actuator Rotary handle

mounting holes, 10-3 or M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) dia bolt circle
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 8.0

(04)
B 1.88
(47.8)
C 4.01
(10)
Toggle handle Pneumatic actuator
8.9
(7)
1.4
(31.5)
4.46
(113)
C
(50.5)
6.70
(170)
3.35
(85.1)
1.99
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3 A 1.13
(8.7)
End Connections L, in. (mm) 1/4 in. female 1.41 VCR fitting (35.8) 1/4 in. rotatable 1.77 male VCR fitting (45.0) 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.035 in. wall 0.87 (.1) 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall
Normally closed pneumatic actuator.
6L M3V 222 P GG
Material 316L stainless steel Flow Path M3V = -valve, M4V = -valve, M1D = -valve, M2D = -valve, Actuation Add a designator for each valve. H = Rotary handle G = Toggle handle I = Normally closed pneumatic J = Normally open pneumatic Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.0 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 8 in. (0.0 m) average
3-port 3-port 3-port 3-port
monoblock monoblock double pattern double pattern Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
End Connections See page 10.

Ordering Number Material Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Process Valve 1 actuator Valve actuator -valve, 3-port monoblock, M4V 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally closed pneumatic Normally closed pneumatic 6L-M4V-222P-II 6L-M1D-122P-IJ 316L stainless steel -valve, 3-port double pattern, M1D 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally closed pneumatic Normally open pneumatic -valve, 3-port monoblock, M3v 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Normally closed pneumatic Normally closed pneumatic 6L-M3V-222P1-II
Swagelok, VCR, VCOTM Swagelok Company 15-7 PHTM AK Steel Corp. 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI August 008, R10 MS-01-94
www.swagelok.com
Bel lo ws - S eal ed Valv es
H and HK Series
Compact size Working pressures up to 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperatures up to 600F (315C)
H and HK Series Bellows-Sealed Valves H Series HK Series
Features
Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.11
to 0.28
Precision-formed metal bellows
and nonrotating stem tip for reliable, repetitive shutoff

Variety of end connections
Swagelok tube fittings, female and male NPT, integral male and welded female VCR fittings, tube socket and tube butt weld ends, and tube extensions
Panel and bottom mounting Pneumatic actuator for HK series
Welded body-tobonnet seal
Gasket body-tobonnet seal
Replaceable bellows/ stem/stem tip assembly
available 316 SS body material Brass body material
Technical Data
Body-toBellows Seal Weld Gasket Valve Body Material 316 SS Brass Stem Tip Stainless steel PCTFE Cv 0.11 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.10 (1.6) 0.08 (1.3) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) Series 2H 2H2 4H HK
Material Series Temperature, F (C) 80 (62) to 40 (40) 20 (28) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 500 (260) 600 (315) 316 SS H 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
(68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.9)
Brass HK 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections.
H Series Component 1 Handle 2 Panel mount nut 3 Retaining ring 4 Washer 5 Spring 6 Stem 7 Bellows 8 Bonnet adapter 9 Stem tip 10 Stem pin 11 Gasket 12 Body Nonwetted lubricant Wetted lubricant
H Series HK Series
1 2 3 4
HK Series
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Green-anodized aluminum/B211 316 SS/A479 S15700 316 SS/A240 Brass 360/B16 Beryllium copper Phosphor bronze C51000/B103 Phosphor bronze C51000/B139 Phosphor bronze C51000/B103 Phosphor bronze C51000/B139 PCTFE 6060/ D1430 PTFE-coated copper 110/B152 Brass 360/B16 Fluorinated-based
1 2
Welded assembly
S17700/AMS 5678 316 SS/A479 321 SS/A269 316 SS/A479 S17400/A564 420 SS 316 SS/A479
5 3 4 5 8 7 7 6
Molybdenum disulfide-based paste
8 9 10
9 11
Lubricate threads on bonnet and handle periodically for increased valve life.
12
12
H and HK Series Bellows-Sealed Valves

Air
Inlet Pressure, psig Air Flow, std L/min
Testing
Every H and HK series valve is helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals.
Inlet Pressure, bar
0.11 Cv 0.20 0.28

Swagelok H series valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok H series valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option. All Swagelok HK series valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Water
Pressure Drop, psi
Water Flow, L/min
0.11 Cv 0.20 0.28
Pressure Drop, bar


H Series
1.38
(35.1)
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connections Type Size Cv Ordering Number H series 1/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. 6 mm
0.34
(8.6)
Orifice Series Body Port 0.082

(2.1)
A 2.09
(53.1)
0.11 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.28
SS-2H SS-4H SS-6H-MM SS-4H4 SS-2H2 SS-4H2 SS-4H-VCR SS-4H-V13
2H 4H 4H 4H 2H2 4H 4H 4H 0.148
(3.8)
0.88
(22.3)
2.27 0.156
(4.0) (57.7)
Female NPT
2.38
(60.5)
1/4 in. 1/8 in.
1.94
(49.3)
1.04
(26.4)
0.64
(16.3)
panel hole
max
0.125
(3.2)
1.57
(39.9)
0.81
(20.6)
Male NPT 1/4 in. Integral male VCR fitting Socket welded female VCR fitting Butt welded female VCR fitting Tube socket and tube butt weld Tube extension, 3 in. (76.3 mm) long
1.94
(49.3)
0.82
(20.8)
0.80
(20.3)
1/4 in. 1/4 in.
2.12
(53.8)
0.88
(22.3)
0.41 (10.4)
3.68
(93.5)
HK Series
1.38
(35.1)
0.156 1/4 in. 1/4 and 3/8 in. 1/4 0.049 in. 3/8 0.065 in. 1/4 in. 6 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 SS-4H-V51 SS-4H-TW SS-4H-TH3 SS-4H-TN3 HK series 4H 4H 4H 4H
(4.0)
2.57
(65.3)
0.77
(19.6)
0.19
(4.8)
0.82 1.50
(38.1) (20.8)
panel hole
max
2.30
(58.4)
7.06
(179)
0.80
(20.3)
7.47
(190)
0.38 (9.7)
Bottom
45
10-32 UNF mounting holes, 0.25 (6.4) deep 0.81

(20.6)
Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Male NPT
0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
B-4HK B-6HK-MM B-4HK4 B-4HK2
HK HK HK HK 0.168
(4.3)
2.26 0.156
(4.0) (57.4)
0.87
(22.1)
1.94
(49.3)
0.82
(20.8)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. 0.75 (19.0) B

H Series
Cobalt-Based Alloy Stem Tip
For severe service applications Spherical stem tip is welded to stem Fluorinated-based lubricant is

Swagelok H series valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for H series valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2H-SC11
applied to stem tip To order, add S to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2HS
HK Series
Copper Stem Tip
For temperatures up to 400F (204C) at
Special Alloy Material

HK series valves are available in alloy 400 body material for system compatibility. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
150 psig (10.3 bar)

Includes copper gasket for body-to-bonnet seal
To order, replace K in the valve ordering number with G. Example: B-4HG2
Pneumatic Actuators
Features
Two modes of operation: normally
Technical Data
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 45 to 150
(3.1 to 10.3)
Air Displacement in.3 (cm3) 0.068
(1.11)
closed and normally open

Low actuation pressure Available factory-assembled or as a
Temperature Rating F (C) 10 to 300

(23 to 148)
Component Housing External hardware O-rings
Material Aluminum Stainless steel Fluorocarbon FKM
kit for field assembly Pneumatic Actuator Performance Use the minimum air pressure required for a given system to reduce air consumption and increase valve life. Increase air pressure to speed up response time.
System Pressure, bar
Ordering Information and Dimensions Add an actuator designator to an HK series valve ordering number. Example: B-4HK-1O
Actuator Model Normally open Normally closed Designator -1O -1C
To order a pneumatic actuator kit, use ordering number MS-HK-1C for the normally closed model or MS-HK-1O for the normally open model.
Actuator Pressure, bar
Actuator Pressure, psig
Normally Closed
1.73
(43.9)
1.73
(43.9)
1/8-27 NPT
Normally Open
1/8-27 NPT
3.81
(96.7)
3.81
(96.7)
2.44
(62.0)
0.38
(9.7)
0.38
(9.7)
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2007, R10 MS-01-36
www.swagelok.com
U Se r ie s
Secondary containment system above the bellows Working pressures up to 2500 psig (172 bar) Temperatures up to 1200F (648C) 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in.; 6, 10, and 12 mm end connections Stainless steel material
U Series Bellows-Sealed Valves Bar handle shown; pneumatic actuation also available.
Stainless steel actuator is hardened for strength and wear resistance.
Acme power transmission threads enable low operating torque.
Upper packing provides secondary containment as backup to primary seal.
Ball and double pin design ensures positive stem retraction. Welded body-tobellows seal shown; gasket seal available. 4U, 6U, and 8U series contain conventional bellows (system pressure acts on inside of bellows); 1U and 1UA series contain inverted bellows (system pressure acts on outside of bellows). Straight-pattern valve body shown; angle-pattern body available.
Nonrotating spherical stem tip shown; conical and regulating stem tips available.
Features
Swagelok U series bellows-sealed valves enhance reliability, versatility, and safetywith a secondary containment system that prevents leaks to atmosphere even if the primary seal fails.
Gasketed or welded body-to-bellows
Technical Data
Body-toBellows Seal Stem Tip Metal (regulating) Flow Pattern Cv 0.36 Straight Metal (spherical) Gasket Angle 0.36 1.0 1. 3.1 5.3 0.36 PCTFE (conical) Straight 1.0 1. 3.1 Angle 5.3 0.36 Straight Metal (spherical) Angle 0.36 1.0 1. 3.1 5.3 Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.11 (1.8) 0.11 (1.8) 0.5 (4.1) 0.7 (4.4) 1.46 (3.9) 1. (0.0) 0.11 (1.8) 0.5 (4.1) 0.7 (4.4) 1.46 (3.9) 1. (0.0) 0.11 (1.8) 0.11 (1.8) 0.5 (4.1) 0.7 (4.4) 1.46 (3.9) 1. (0.0) Series 4URG 4UG 6UG 8UG 1UG 1UAG 4UK 6UK 8UK 1UK 1UAK 4URW 4UW 6UW 8UW 1UW 1UAW
seals
Stem tips for shutoff or regulating
service
Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.36 to 5.3 Variety of end connections: Swagelok tube fittings1/4 to
1/ in. and 6 to 1 mm

Tube socket weld ends1/4 to
3/4 in.
Tube butt weld ends3/8 to 1 in. Female
VCR
face seal fittings

Weld
Metal (regulating)
1/4 and 1/ in.

Panel, bottom, and side mounting
available
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections. R designates regulating stem tip; G designates gasket body-to-bellows seal; A designates angle pattern; K designates PCTFE stem tip (conical); W designates welded body-to-bellows seal.
U Series Bellows-Sealed Valves
1a 1b
Component 1a Handle Set screw 1b Handle Cap nut 2 3 Gland nut Gland Packing (3) Spacer Jam nut Panel mount nut Bonnet nut Bonnet Lower seal O-ring Actuator Actuator pin () 12 13 Ball bearing Stem extension Series All 4U, 6U, 8U All 1U, 1UA All All UK, UAK All UG, UAG, UW, UAW All All All All All All All All All 4U, 6U, 8U All All 4U, 6U, 8U All 12U, 12UA All All 4URG, 4URW 16 Stem tip All UK, UAK All UG, UAG, UW, UAW 17 Gasket 18 Body All UK, UAK All UG, UAG All All UG, UAG, UW, UAW All
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Green-anodized aluminum/B11 Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Green-painted aluminum/B11 18-8 SS 316 SS/A479 PTFE/D1710 Grafoil 316 SS/A40 316 SS/A479 Silver-plated 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A580 440C SS/A76 416 SS 440C SS 440C SS/A76 316 SS/A479 347 SS/A269 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 (regulating) PCTFE/D1430 (conical) Cobalt-based alloy (spherical) PTFE-coated 316 SS/A580 Silver-plated 316 SS/A580 316 SS/A479 Fluorinated-based (spherical stem tip, pneumatically actuated valves) Molybdenum disulfide based; silicone based;
2 3 4 6 5 7 8
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
14 Stem
Bellows Weld ring
15 Stem adapter
10
11
Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics. 4U, 6U, 8U 12U
13
12 14
12
Gasket Seal
UG Series
Welded Seal
UK Series
UW Series
Welded body-tobellows seal
14
15 16
Regulating
Conical Spherical
17
Spherical stem tip shown; regulating stem tip available
PCTFE stem tip for soft-seat shutoff
Regulating stem tip shown; spherical stem tip available
18
UW, URW, UG, and URG Series
W designates welded body-to-bellows seal; R designates regulating stem tip; G designates gasket body-to-bellows seal. Ratings limited to 1000F (537C) for valves with VCR fitting end connections. Ratings apply to manual valves and to valves with 6 series or 8 series pneumatic actuators. For actuator ratings, see page 6.

A designates angle pattern.
4U 6U 8U 12U 12UA
Air
Air Flow, std L/min-
Material Series Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 650 (343) 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 100
(371) (398) (46) (454) (48)
316 SS UW, URW Standard Model 500 (17) 10 (146) 1740 (119) 1360 (93.7) 980 (67.5) 600 (41.3) 540 480 45 360 300 50
(37.) (33.0) (9.) (4.8) (0.6) (17.)
UG, URG
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 500 (17)
UW High-Temperature Model
(510) (537) (565) (593) (61) (648)
Water
Water Flow, L/min

When Valve Seat Is 600F (315C) 900F (48C) 100F (648C) Valve Handle Is 135F (57C) 140F (60C) 150F (65C)
UK Series
K designates PCTFE stem tip. 500 psig (17 bar) at 0 to 00F (8 to 93C).
Testing
Every U series valve is factory vacuum tested with helium at room temperature for 5 s to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 9 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals.

Swagelok U series valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok U series valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Inlet Pressure, bar

Tube Socket Weld and Tube Butt Weld Ends
J H
(69.9)
.75
UW Series Valves
UG and UK Series Valves

Replace W with G or K. Example: SS-4UG
Butt Welded Female VCR Fitting Ends
0.38 (9.7) max panel thickness A 0.77 (19.6) open hole
Bottom
10-3 UNF tapped holes, 0.5 (6.4) deep
D F
4U, 6U, and 8U Series

End Connections Type Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. 6 mm Ordering Number SS-4UW SS-6UW SS-8UW SS-6UW-MM SS-10UW-MM SS-1UW-MM Series 4U 6U 8U 4U 6U 8U 4U 6U 8U 4U 6U 8U Orifice 0.17
(4.37)

(165)
B 0.56
(14.)
C 1.49
(37.8)
D 1.00
(5.4)
E .46
(6.5)
F 1.06
(6.9)
G 1.00 (5.4) 1.13

(8.7)
0.65
(6.73)
3.09 6.59
(167)
0.50
(1.7)
1.61
(40.9)
1.13
(8.7)
(78.5)
1.57
(39.9)
0.31
(7.9)
3.30
(83.8)
0.17
(4.37)
6.48
(165)
0.56
(14.)
1.49
(37.8)
1.00
(5.4)
Metric Swagelok 10 mm tube fitting 1 mm
0.81
(7.14)
.46 (6.5) 3.11

(79.0)
1.06
(6.9)
1.00
(5.4)
6.59
(167)
0.50
(1.7)
1.61
(40.9)
1.13
(8.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.13
(8.7)
0.81
(7.14)
3.30
(83.8)
1/4 and SS-4UW-TW 3/8 in. Tube socket 3/8 and SS-6UW-TW and tube 1/ in. butt weld 1/ and SS-8UW-TW 3/4 in. Butt welded female VCR fitting 1/4 in. SS-4UW-V51 SS-6UW-V19 1/ in. SS-8UW-V47
0.156
(3.96)
6.48
(165)
0.56
(14.)
1.49
(37.8)
1.00
(5.4)
1.68
(4.7)
1.00
(5.4)
1.00
(5.4)
0.38
(9.7)
0.5
(6.4)
0.81
(7.14)
0.50 6.59
(167)
0.38
(9.7)
0.50
(1.7)
1.61
(40.9)
1.13
(8.7)
.7
(57.7)
1.5
(38.6)
1.13
(8.7)
(1.7)
0.31
(7.9)
0.75
(19.1)
0.50
(1.7)
0.156
(3.96)
6.48
(165)
0.56
(14.)
1.49
(37.8)
1.00
(5.4)
.76
(70.1)
1.00
(5.4)
1.00
(5.4)
0.81
(7.14)
5.19 6.59
(167)
1.5
(38.6)
0.50
(1.7)
1.61
(40.9)
1.13
(8.7)
(13)
1.13
(8.7)
0.97
(7.54)
3.1
(79.)
1.5
(31.8)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. H = butt weld diameter; J = socket weld diameter.
4.00
(10)
4.00
(10)
12U Series
End Connections Ordering Number Orifice in. (mm) 0.500
(1.7)
12U
12UA
3/4 in. tube SS-1UW-TW socket weld, 3/4 in. pipe butt weld, and 1 in. SS-1UAW-TW tube butt weld
0.610
(15.5)
0.59 (14.9) max panel thickness; 1.19 (30.) hole
open 4 side mounting holes, 0.7 (6.9) dia 1.05 0.76 side mounting holes, 0.7 (6.9) dia 0.6 (6.6)
(69.3)
(95)
11.6
0.59 (14.9) max panel thickness; 1.19 (30.) 11.6 hole
open
(95)
1.5
(31.8)
0.4
(6.1)
4.88
(14)
(6.7)
(19.3)
4.88
(14) (79.)
.73
3.1
1.60
(40.6)
(36.6)
1.44
0.5
(6.4) (6.0)
.44
(5.4)
1.00
0.38
(9.7)
(63.)
.49
0.38 (9.7) 1.4 (36.1)
Pneumatic Actuators
Features
Reliable piston design for enhanced
Component Housing External hardware O-rings Material Cast aluminum Stainless steel Fluorocarbon FKM
cycle life
Low actuation pressures Cast construction Aluminum and stainless steel
components
Actuator Series
6 series actuator for 4U, 6U, and 8U
Technical Data
Valve Series 4U, 6U, 8U Actuator Series 6 Pressure Rating psig (bar) 65 to 150
(4.4 to 10.3)
series valves
8 series actuator for 1U series valves
Temperature Air Rating Displacement F (C) in.3 (cm3) 0.88 (14.4) 10 to 300
(3 to 148)
Weight lb (kg) C7.3 (3.3) O4.9 (.) D4.8 (.1) C4 (10.9) O13 (5.9) D11.5 (5.)
Actuation Modes
Normally closedair opens, spring closes Normally openair closes, spring opens Double actingair opens and closes
1U, 1UA
40 to 150
(.7 to 10.3)
C.9 (47.5) O3.0 (49.) D.4 (39.3)

6 Series
The minimum actuation pressure for normally closed, normally open, and double-acting actuators is 65 psig (4.5 bar).
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig
8 Series Normally Open

8 Series Normally Closed

PCTFE Stem Tip
All Stem Tips
Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
8 Series Double-Acting
PCTFE Stem Tip
Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Add an actuator series designator, then an actuation mode designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4UW-6C
Actuator Series 6 8 Designator -6 -8 Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open Double acting Designator C O D
6 Series
5.05
(18)
Side
4.6
(117) (10.4)
Back
(69.9)
Side
5.05
(18)
.75
0.41
(56.1)
.1
1/4 in. female NPT
mounting holes, A 0.34 (8.6) dia
1/4 in. female NPT
(9.9) (10.4)
1.18 0.41
mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia
1/4 in. female NPT
(9.7)
3.65
(9.7)
3.65
Normally Closed
Normally Open and Double Acting
8 Series
5.95
(151)
Valve Series 4U 6U, 8U

8.19
Actuator Series 6 8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 6.60 (168) 6.76 (17) 10.5 (67) 10.0 (54) B O.75 (69.9) D.56 (65.0) C D1.88 (47.8) O1.75 (44.5)
5.50
(140)
(1.7)
0.50
(08)
1U 1UA
1/4 in. NPT (O)
1/4 in. NPT (D)
1/4 in. NPT
(1.7)
0.50
4 mounting holes, 0.6 (6.6) dia, 90 spacing tapped 5/16-18, 0.50 (1.7) deep
Normally Open And Double Acting
Normally Closed

Swagelok U series valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for U series valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4UW-SC11
Bellows-Sealed 3-Valve Manifolds

The Swagelok 3-valve manifold uses B or U series bellows-sealed valves for systems with difficult fluid containment requirements. For more information, see the Swagelok BellowsSealed 3-Valve Manifolds V3 Series catalog, MS-0-07.
UW High-Temperature Model
Nickel-based lubricant prevents seizing of actuator
6 Series Pneumatic Actuator Microswitches

Signal OPEN or CLOSED
threads.
Valve rating extends to: 1000F (537C) for valves with VCR fittings. 100F (648C) for valves with Swagelok tube fittings.
position of valve to panel or process controller

Feature single-pole, double-
throw switch
Meet NEMA standard for
To order, add -HT to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-4UW-HT SS-4UW-HT-6C
type 1 and type 3 enclosures

Include stainless steel
mounting bracket
UG, UW Series Low-Temperature Model

For temperatures from 35 to 400F (00 to 04C).
assembled on 4U, 6U, and 8U series valves with 6 series pneumatic actuator or in kits for field assembly.
To order a UG or UW series valve with PTFE secondary packing, add -TF to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-4UW-TF SS-4UW-TF-6C
Factory-Assembled Microswitches
To order a valve with a microswitch, add M to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4UW-6CM
4U, 6U, and 8U Alloy 600 Bellows

To order, add -IN to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-4UW-IN SS-4UW-IN-6C
Microswitch Kits for Field Assembly

To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-6CMK-U.
Actuator Conversion Kits

The actuator conversion kit converts a U series valve with a Swagelok 4 series pneumatic actuator to a valve with a 6 series pneumatic actuator.
Valve Series 4U, 6U, 8U Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open Double acting Actuator Conversion Kit Ordering Number MS-6CK MS-6OK MS-6DK
Maintenance Kits
Stem tip/adapter kits, bellows kits, and gasket kits are available for UG, URG, and UK series valves. See the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-0-66.

Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 008, R6 MS-01-38
Bench Top Tube Bender

Users Manual
Electric and manual units Bends fractional and metric tubing CE compliant
Bench Top Bender Users Manual
Contents
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tubing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Bender Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloading the Bender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Bender Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Unloading the Bender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 6 7 8 9 3 3 4 Measuring the Bend Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Bend Data Tables Fractional Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Metric Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractional Tubing with Metric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . 8 Minimum Length of Last Leg Fractional Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Metric Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fractional Tubing with Metric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . 35 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety Instructions
READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING THE BENCH TOP TUBE BENDER.
WARNING Statements that identify conditions or practices that could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Statements that identify conditions or practices that could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
CAUTION - EYE PROTECTION Eye protection must be worn while operating or working near equipment.
CAUTION - PINCH POINTS Keep hands, loose clothing, and long hair away from moving parts. Injury can occur.
Technical Data
Bending Range
1 to 180. Do not bend tube in excess of 180.
Dimensions (tube bender in case)

Width1 in. (53 cm) Depth11 in. (8 cm) Height14.5 in. (37 cm)
Weight (tube bender in case, excluding tooling)

Manual unit75 lb (34 kg) Electric unit79 lb (36 kg)
Power Requirements (electric unit)

MS-BTB-1110 V (ac) 50/60 Hz; maximum current: 10 A MS-BTB-30 V (ac) 50/60 Hz; maximum current: 5 A
Tubing Data
The Swagelok bench top tube bender bends 1/4, 3/8, 1/, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, 1 in., and 1 1/4 in. and 6, 10, 1, 14, 15, 16, 18, 0,
, 5, 8, and 30 mm outside diameter tubing in a variety of wall thicknesses.
Tubing should be free of scratches and suitable for bending and flaring.
Fractional Tubing
Medium-Pressure Tubing Heavy-Wall Cold Drawn Annealed 1/8 Hard Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Wall Thickness Wall Thickness Min/Max Min/Max 0.065/0.095 0.083/0.134 0.083/0.188 0.08/0.065 0.035/0.083 0.049/0.109
Suggested Tubing Ordering Information

High-quality, soft-annealed, seamless carbon steel hydraulic tubing ASTM A179 or equivalent. Hardness 7 HRB (130 HV) or less. Fully annealed, high-quality (Type 304, 316, etc.) (seamless or welded and drawn) stainless steel hydraulic tubing ASTM A69 or A13, or equivalent. Hardness 80 HRB (180 HV) or less.
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4
Approx Bend Radius
Carbon Steel Wall Thickness Min/Max
Stainless Steel Wall Thickness Min/Max Dimensions, in.
0.08/0.065 1.4 .0 1.81 .0 .64 3.3 4.41 0.035/0.065 0.035/0.083 0.035/0.083 0.035/0.065 0.035/0.095 0.049/0.095 0.049/0.109 0.049/0.109 0.049/0.10 0.065/0.10 0.065/0.10 0.083/0.10
Metric Tubing
Tube OD 6 10 1 14 15 16 18 0 5 8 30 Approx Bend Radius 36 36 36 46 46 46 56 67 67 8 11 11 1./ 3.0 1.8/3.0 .0/3.0 1.0/.5 1./.5 1./.8 1./.8 1.8/3.0 1.8/3.0 1.0/. 1.0/. 1.0/. 1.0/. Carbon Steel Wall Thickness Min/Max Dimensions, mm 0.8/1. 1.0/1.5 1.0/.0 Stainless Steel Wall Thickness Min/Max
Suggested Tubing Ordering Information

High-quality, soft-annealed, carbon steel hydraulic tubing DIN-391 or equivalent. Hardness 130 HV (7 HRB) or less. Fully annealed, high-quality (Type 304, 316, etc.) stainless steel tubing EN ISO 117 or equivalent. Hardness 180 HV (80 HRB) or less.
Bend Layout
This bender can be used to form single, offset, and other bends. This section contains information for measuring and marking the tube prior to bending. Note: Make all marks 360 around the tube. First 90
Single Bend
Bend.eps
1. Place a reference mark at the end of the tube from which you are beginning the measurements. . Measure from the reference mark and make a measurement mark on the tube at a distance equal to the desired bend length. This mark is the vertex of the bend. 3. Measure the bend deduction distance for the angle being bent from the measurement mark (see Bend Data Tables beginning on page 17) and make a bend mark on the tube. If the bend deduction is positive, place the bend mark toward the reference mark. If the bend deduction is negative, place the bend mark away from the reference mark. 4. Refer to the appropriate Operation section to bend the tube.
Desired bend length
Measurement mark
Second 90 Bend.eps
Reference mark Bend mark Single Bend Bend deduction
Multiple Bends
The Measure-Bend Method 1. Follow Single Bend steps 1 through 4. . Using the vertex of the previous bend as the reference mark, repeat steps through 4 for the next bend. (The vertex is where the center lines of the two legs of the angle intersect.) Example: Using 5/8 in. OD tube and an aluminum bend shoe, make a 90 bend 1 inches from the reference mark followed by a 45 bend with 1 inches between bends. 1. Place a reference mark at the end of the tube from which you are beginning the measurements. . Measure 1 inches from the reference mark and make a measurement mark to indicate the first desired bend length. 3. The bend deduction in the Fractional Tubing Bend Data table for a 90 bend using 5/8 in. tubing and an aluminum bend shoe is 1 3/4 in. 4. Place the bend mark 1 3/4 in. from the measurement mark going towards the reference mark. 5. Bend tube 90 according to the appropriate Operation section. 6. Measure 1 inches from the vertex of the 90 bend and make a second measurement mark, away from the reference mark. 7. The bend deduction distance in the Fractional Tubing Bend Data table for a 45 bend using 5/8 in. tubing and an aluminum bend shoe is 11/16 in. 8. Place a second bend mark 11/16 in. from the second measurement mark going towards the first bend. 9. Bend tube according to the appropriate Operation section.
Second Bend (45) Reference mark 5/8 in. OD tube First Bend (90) Bend mark First desired bend length 1 in. Bend deduction 1 3/4 in.
Center line Vertex
Bend mark
Bend deduction 11/16 in.
Second desired bend length 1 in.
Vertex
45
Reverse Bends
The Measure-Bend Method Sometimes a multiple bend layout will require that a bend be made in reverse. A reverse bend is made with the end of the tube opposite the reference mark inserted into the bend shoe rather than the end with the reference mark. 1. Measure from the vertex of the preceding bend and place a second measurement mark farther down the tube at a distance equal to the desired length of the leg. . Measuring from that measurement mark, place a bend mark on the tube at the bend allowance for the angle being bent. (See Bend Data tables beginning on page 17). If the bend allowance is positive, place the bend mark away from the preceding bend.
If the bend allowance is negative, place the bend mark in the direction towards the preceding bend.
3. Bend tube according to the appropriate Operation section. Note: When loading the tube into the bender to make a reverse bend, ensure that the end with the reference mark is not inserted into the bend shoe.
Offset Calculations
O L E
When offset exists, determine the length of offset (L) before calculating for the adjustment from the tube bend. To determine the length of offset, select the offset angle (E). Then, multiply the offset dimension (O) by the offset bend allowance. Angle (E) .5 30 45 60 Offset Bend Allowance .613 .000 1.414 1.154 3 3 3 3 Offset (O) ________ ________ ________ ________ = = = = Length of Offset (L) _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________

Roller bracket assembly Roller pins
Manual Bender
Product Information
Bend shoe
Roller bracket lever
Carrying handle
Roller knob
Bend degree wheel ( 1/ increments) Medium bendspeed selector Low bendspeed selector
High bendspeed selector Drill yoke support Bend shoe Zero reference mark Hand crank
Hex drive shaft
D pin D roller G pin G roller Reference mark Clamp arm Support bracket Bracket pin Bracket post Bracket assembly stop
Aluminum only, recommended when using 1 in. or 5 mm bend shoe.
Roller bracket assembly
Roller bracket lever Bracket post stop Roller knob
CAUTION When lifting the bender, first place one hand under the bender, then pick up the unit by grabbing the carrying handle with your other hand.
5. Install the roller bracket assembly on the bracket post. Note: The roller bracket assembly stop must be to the right of the bracket post stop.
Roller bracket assembly Bracket post Roller bracket assembly stop
Setup
1. Place the hand crank on the high bend-speed selector. . Rotate the hand crank until the zero reference mark on the hex drive shaft is between the and 3 oclock position, when viewed from the operating position.
oclock Hex drive shaft Zero reference mark 3 oclock
Bracket post stop
6. Place the roller bracket lever on the bracket pin. Note: The lever must be fully bottomed on the pin. 7. Lift the roller pins, place the appropriate rollers in the marked locations on the roller bracket, and replace the roller pins.
G roller pin D roller pin D roller
3. Rotate the roller knob counterclockwise until it stops.
Roller knob
G roller Roller bracket lever Roller bracket
4. Place the appropriate bend shoe on the hex drive shaft, aligning the zero reference marks on the shoe and the shaft. The bend shoe must be fully bottomed on the hex drive shaft.
Zero reference marks
Note: The roller pins must be fully engaged with the roller bracket assembly. 8. Mark tube according to Bend Layout. 9. Carefully insert the tube into the bend shoe, past the clamp arm.
Bend shoe Hex drive shaft
Caution The end of the tube must extend past the right edge of the clamp arm to prevent potential damage to the tube during bending.
Tube Bend shoe
Clamp arm
Right edge
Bench Top Bender Users Manual To decrease clearance: Rotate the roller knob clockwise while slowly rotating the hand crank counterclockwise. Note: The roller knob must be tight. Note: Do not turn the roller knob after this point or bend consistency will be affected.
10. Align the bend mark on the tube with the reference mark on the bend shoe.
Bend shoe Tube
Reference mark Bend mark
11. Turn the roller bracket lever clockwise until the roller bracket assembly stop makes contact with the bracket post stop.
Bracket post stop
Roller bracket assembly stop Hand crank
Contact
Calibration
Calibration is the process of positioning the bend degree wheel to accurately display the angle being generated by the bender. Calibration accounts for tube variables and mechanical play in the bender, which is typically observed as springback. Different materials, different lots of the same material, and different wall thicknesses of the same material may exhibit different bend characteristics. Once the bender has been calibrated, recalibration is recommended whenever:

1. Hold the tube and turn the roller knob clockwise until the G and D rollers both make contact with the tube and the roller knob is tight. Note: The rollers may need to be guided onto smaller diameter tubing. 13. Ensure there is approximately 3/8 in. or 10 mm clearance between the D roller and the clamp arm of the bend shoe.
Clamp arm
OD or wall thickness of tube being bent is changed. The roller knob has been turned after Calibration completed. The bend degree wheel does not accurately display the bend angle.
D roller
3/8 in.
1. Place the hand crank on the desired speed selector for the tube being bent.
Low bend-speed selector (1) is suggested for large diameter or heavy-wall tube. Medium bend-speed selector () is suggested for intermediate size and medium-wall tube. High bend-speed selector (3) is suggested for small diameter and thin-wall tube.
To increase clearance: Rotate the roller knob counterclockwise while slowly rotating the hand crank clockwise and maintaining straight tube.
. Slowly rotate the hand crank until the tube begins to deflect or bend (looking to the right of the rollers).
On low (1) and high (3) bend speeds, rotate the hand crank clockwise. On medium () bend speed, rotate the hand crank counter-clockwise.
Bench Top Bender Users Manual 3. Keep the hand crank still and rotate the bend degree wheel to zero. The bend angle indicated on the bend degree wheel will now be very close to the bend angle produced. If further adjustment is desired repeat steps 6 through 10.
Caution Releasing the hand crank while tube is under load may cause the hand crank to spin, possibly leading to injury.
4. Rotate the hand crank until the bend wheel displays 5 less than the desired bend angle. This will prevent setup scrap due to overbending. Example: For a desired bend angle of 90, rotate the hand crank until the bend degree wheel reads 85.
Note: Tube springback is cumulative. Depending on the tube variables, a smaller bend angle builds up less tube springback during the bending process than a larger bend angle. For example, if a 30 bend is attempted using a bender that was calibrated to make a 90 bend, the resulting bend may be larger than desired. Conversely, if a 150 bend is attempted on the same bender, the resulting bend may be smaller than desired. It is advised to verify each bend angle.
Unloading the Bender

Note: Do not turn the roller knob to unload the bender. Doing so will affect bend consistency.
5. Unload the bender (see Unloading the Bender) and measure the bend angle of the tube (see Measuring the Bend Angle). Make note of this measurement as it is likely to be different than the angle displayed on the bend wheel. 6. Reload the tube into the bender, lining up the bend mark and the reference mark. 7. Rotate the hand crank until the bend degree wheel reads the angle from step 4 (in example: 85).
Caution Releasing the hand crank while the tube is under load may cause the hand crank to spin, possibly leading to injury.
1. Rotate the hand crank in the direction opposite that used to bend the tube. . As the hand crank is rotated, gently push the roller bracket lever counter-clockwise until the rollers swing away from the tube and the tube can be removed from the bender. Note: Do not force the roller bracket lever.
Hand crank
8. Keep the hand crank still and rotate the bend degree wheel to the measurement noted in step 5 (in example: 88). This calibrates the bend degree wheel by setting it to display the actual bend angle being produced.
9. Continue to rotate the hand crank until the bend degree wheel reads the desired bend angle.
10. Unload the bender (see Unloading the Bender) and measure the bend angle of the tube.
10
Bench Top Bender Users Manual Note: If the rollers touch the tube and prevent the stops from making contact, gently turn the roller bracket lever clockwise while rotating the hand crank.
Operation
Before operating the bender mark the tube (see Bend Layout) and follow the Setup and Calibration procedures. CAUTION - PINCH POINTS 1. With the zero reference mark between the and 3 oclock position, place the hand crank on the desired speed selector.
Hand crank
Low bend-speed selector (1) is suggested for large diameter or heavy-wall tube. Medium bend-speed selector () is suggested for intermediate size and medium wall tube. High bend-speed selector (3) is suggested for small diameter and thin-wall tube.
. Insert the tube carefully into the grooved section of the bend shoe, past the clamp arm.
CAUTION The end of the tube must extend past the right edge of the clamp arm to prevent potential damage to the tube during bending.
5. Check the following before continuing:
The bend mark remains aligned with the reference mark on the bend shoe. The tube is positioned in the correct plane for bend. tube will not contact the bender housing during the bend operation (for a multiple bend).
he T
Tube Bend shoe
Right edge Clamp arm
Undesired tube contact
3. Align the bend mark on the tube with the reference mark on the bend shoe.
Reference mark Bend mark
6. Rotate the hand crank until you reach the desired bend angle on the bend degree wheel.
On low (1) and high (3) bend speeds, rotate the hand crank clockwise to bend the tube. On medium () bend speed, rotate the hand crank counter-clockwise to bend the tube.
7. Unload the tube from the bender. See Unloading the Bender. 4. Turn the roller bracket lever clockwise until the roller bracket assembly stop and the bracket post stop make contact. 8. Verify the bend angle (see Measuring the Bend Angle). Make adjustments if necessary (see Calibration). 9. Use the hand crank on the high bend-speed selector (3) to return the bend shoe to the starting position.
Bracket post stop
Roller bracket assembly stop
Contact
Note: Do not turn the roller knob or bend consistency will be affected.
11
Electric Bender
Product Information
Bend shoe
Roller pins
Rollerbracket assembly Roller bracket lever
Carrying handle
Roller knob
Power cord Foot switch receptacle Toggle switch
Bend angle thumb wheels
LED display Overload indicator
Hex drive shaft
Zero reference mark
D pin D roller G pin G roller
Bend shoe
Reference mark Bracket pin Roller bracket Bracket post Bracket assembly stop Bracket post stop Clamp arm
Support bracket
Aluminum only, recommended when using 1 in. or 5 mm bend shoe.
Roller bracket lever Roller knob
1
Bench Top Bender Users Manual 3. Rotate the roller knob counterclockwise until it stops.
Electric bender must be operated in a safe environment to avoid risk of fire, explosion, or electric shock.
WARNING Voltage greater than 30 V (ac) is present. WARNING - KEEP DRY. Do not expose the equipment to water or wet locations.
Roller knob
WARNING - FIRE OR EXPLOSION. Do not use equipment in a combustible or explosive atmosphere. Flammable liquids or gases could ignite. 4. Place the appropriate bend shoe on the hex drive shaft, aligning the zero reference marks on the shoe and the shaft. The bend shoe must be fully bottomed on the hex drive shaft.
Zero reference marks Bend shoe Hex drive shaft
Grounding and Extension Cord Information
WARNING Electric bender must be grounded against electrical shock. It is equipped with a three-wire conductor and three-prong plug to fit a grounded receptacle. Never connect the green or green/yellow wire to a live terminal. WARNING For safe operation of the electric bender, the extension cord wire size must meet the following specifications: For 0 to 25 ft (0 to 7.5 m), the recommended minimum wire gauge is 14 AWG or 1.5 mm. For 25 to 50 ft (7.5 to 15 m), the recommended minimum wire gauge is 12 AWG or 2.5 mm. CAUTION When lifting the bender, first place one hand under the bender, then pick up the unit by grabbing the carrying handle with your other hand.
5. Install the roller bracket assembly on the bracket post. Note: The roller bracket assembly stop must be to the right of the bracket post stop.
Bracket post Bracket post stop
Setup
It is recommended that scrap tube be used during setup and calibration of the Electric Bench Top Tube Bender. 1. Plug in the power cord. . Hold the toggle switch in the unload direction until the motor stops. The zero reference mark on the hex drive shaft should now be between the and 3 oclock position. Note: The toggle switch is programmed to have a safety time delay of approximately two seconds between operations.
oclock Hex drive shaft Zero reference mark 3 oclock
6. Place the roller bracket lever on the bracket pin. Note: The lever must be fully bottomed on the pin. 7. Lift the roller pins, place the G and D rollers in the marked locations on the roller bracket, and replace the roller pins. Note: The roller pins must be fully engaged into the roller bracket assembly.
G roller pin D roller pin D roller G roller Roller bracket lever Bracket pin Roller bracket assembly
Bench Top Bender Users Manual 8. Carefully insert the tube into the bend shoe, past the clamp arm.
13
If all three conditions are met, make note of the value appearing on the three right bend angle thumb wheels and proceed to Calibration. If all three conditions are not met: a. b. Turn the roller knob counter-clockwise until the tube can be removed. Remove tube. Advance the right-most bend angle thumb wheel one digit.
Bend angle thumb wheel
Tube Bend shoe
Right edge Clamp arm
c.
Hold the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops.
Bracket post stop
Contact
10. Hold the tube in the bend shoe and turn the roller knob clockwise until both the G and D rollers make contact with the tube. Note: Smaller diameter tube may need to be guided into the rollers. 11. Once the roller knob is tight, the following conditions must be met:
The roller bracket assembly stop and the bracket post
d.
Repeat steps 9 through 11 until all three conditions are met.
1. Make note of the value on the right-most bend angle thumb wheel.
Bend angle thumb wheel
stop must maintain contact.

Both rollers must make contact with the tube. There must be approximately 3/8 in. or 10 mm
clearance between the D roller and the clamp arm of the bend shoe.
Example only
13. Turn the roller knob counter-clockwise until the tube can be removed. Remove tube.
Clamp arm
14. Advance the two right-most bend angle thumb wheels until they display 010 or higher. 15. Hold the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops. Wait two seconds, then hold the toggle switch in the unload direction until the motor stops. 16. Proceed to Calibration.
3/8 in. D roller
14
Bench Top Bender Users Manual 5. Set the bend angle thumb wheels to the desired bend angle. 6. Hold the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops (do not jog the switch). CAUTION - PINCH POINT 7. Unload the bender (see Unloading the Bender) and measure the bend angle of the tube (see Measuring the Bend Angle). If the actual bend is smaller than the desired bend angle: Subtract the actual bend angle from the desired bend angle. The difference is the amount that must be added to the desired bend angle when setting the bend angle thumb wheels for all subsequent bends made with this tube. For example: The desired bend angle entered is 90. The resulting calibration sample measures 86. 90 86 = 4. The bend angle thumb wheels must be set 4 more than the desired bend angle for subsequent bends with this size tube, i.e. for a 90 bend, the bend angle thumb wheels must be set at 94.
Bend angle thumb wheels Tube
Calibration
Calibration is the process of accurately accounting for tube variables and mechanical play in the bender, which is typically observed as springback. Different materials, different lots of the same material, and different wall thicknesses of the same material may exhibit different bend characteristics. Once the bender has been calibrated, recalibration is recommended whenever:

OD or wall thickness of tube being bent is changed. The roller knob has been turned after Calibration has been completed.
1. Set the right-most bend angle thumb wheel to the value noted in step 1 of Setup. Hold the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops (do not jog the switch). . Carefully insert the tube into the bend shoe, past the clamp arm.
Bend shoe
Clamp arm
Right edge
Bracket post stop
If the actual bend is larger than the desired bend angle: Subtract the desired bend angle from the actual bend angle. The difference is the amount that must be subtracted from the desired bend angle for all subsequent bends made with this tube. For example: The desired bend angle entered is 90. The resulting calibration sample measures 9. 9 90 = . The bend angle thumb wheels must be set less than the desired bend angle for subsequent bends with this size tube, i.e. for a 90 bend, the bend angle thumb wheels must be set at 88. 8. Make note of this amount. Note: Tube springback is cumulative. Depending on the tube variables, a smaller bend angle builds up less tube springback during the bending process than a larger bend angle. For example, if a 30 bend is attempted using a bender that was calibrated to make a 90 bend, the resulting bend may be larger than desired. Conversely, if a 150 bend is attempted on the same bender, the resulting bend may be smaller than desired. It is advised to verify each bend angle.
Contact
4. Hold the tube in the bend shoe and turn the roller knob clockwise until the G and D rollers both make contact with the tube. Note: The rollers may need to be guided onto smaller diameter tubing. Note: The clearance between the D roller and the clamp arm will now be approximately 1/4 in. Note: Do not turn the roller knob after this point or bend consistency will be affected.
Unloading the Bender

Note: Do not turn the roller knob to unload the bender. Doing so will affect bend consistency. 1. Hold the toggle switch in the unload position until the motor stops. While holding the toggle switch, gently turn the roller bracket lever counter-clockwise until the
Bench Top Bender Users Manual rollers swing away from the tube. Note: Do not force the roller bracket lever.
Roller bracket lever Reference mark Bend mark Toggle switch
15
5. Align the bend mark on the tube with the reference mark on the bend shoe (see Bend Layout for marking tube).
. Hold the tube until the motor stops and the tube can be removed from the bender.
Operation
Before operating the bender mark the tube (see Bend Layout) and follow the Setup and Calbration procedures. CAUTION - PINCH POINTS 1. Set the bend angle thumb wheels to the value noted in step 1 of Setup.
6. Rotate the roller bracket lever clockwise until the roller bracket assembly stop and the bracket post stop make contact.
Bracket post stop
Contact Example only
Note: The clearance between the D roller and the clamp arm will now be approximately 1/4 in. 7. Check the following before continuing:
. Hold the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops (do not jog the switch). 3. Set the bend angle thumb wheels to the desired bend angle plus or minus the amount noted in step 8 of Calibration.
The bend mark remains aligned with the reference mark on the bend shoe. The tube is positioned in the correct plane. tube will not contact the bender housing during the bend operation (for a multiple bend).
he T
Example only
4. Carefully insert the tube into the bend shoe, past the clamp arm.
Caution The end of the tube must extend past the right edge of the tube clamp support area to prevent potential damage to the tube during bending.
Tube
Undesired tube contact
8. Hold the tube and push the toggle switch in the bend direction until the motor stops (do not jog the switch). 9. Unload the tube. See Unloading the Bender. 10. Verify the bend angle (see Measuring the Bend Angle).
Bend shoe
Clamp arm
Right edge
16
Measuring the Bend Angle

This is one of many methods that may be used to measure the bend angle. A protractor will be needed for this method. 1. Place the bent tube on a piece of paper with the vertex of the bend on the paper.
Tube Vertex
. Hold the tube against the paper, and mark the paper along one edge of each leg of the bend with a pencil.
3. Align a ruler or other straight edge on one of the marks, and extend it past the point where it will intersect with the second mark when it is extended. 4. Repeat step 3 with the second mark. The intersection point of the two marks represents the vertex of the bend.
5. Place the origin of the protractor on the intersection of the line. Rotate the protractor so the baseline of the protractor is aligned with one of the marks and the second mark intersects the scale on the protractor (extend the marks with a pencil if necessary).
Origin
6. The second mark indicates the bend angle. Note: The protractor will contain two scales. Read the appropriate scale.
17
Bend Data Tables

The bend data provided reflects results achieved using the Swagelok bench top tube bender. Bend deduction the distance from the vertex of the angle back to the point where the tube breaks tangent and the bend actually begins. Sometimes referred to as setback, take-up or take-off. Bend length the actual amount of tube consumed by the bend as measured along the centerline of the bend. Adjustment (gain) the difference between the actual length of tube used in a bend and the theoretical distance around a sharp corner. The information provided in these tables accounts for adjustment (gain). Bend allowance the bend mark distance for reverse bends. The adjustment (gain) is pushed towards the reference mark or previous bend during reverse bends.
Fractional Tubing
Dimensions are in inches. 1/4 in. OD, 1.42 in. Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe
Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Tubing Bend Angle
Degrees
MediumPressure Tubing Bend Allowance 3/8 7/16 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 15/16 7/8 5/8 1/16 1 9/16 6 3/4 3 3/16 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Deduction 3/8 1/ 9/16 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 5/8 1/16 11/16 3 11/16 5 5/8 11 1/8 1 5/8 Bend Length 3/4 15/16 1 1/8 1 1/ 1 13/16 3/16 9/16 15/16 3 5/16 3 11/16 4 1/16 4 7/16 4 3/4
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1/16 1/16 1/8 1/8 3/16 5/16 3/16 1/4 1/ 3/8 7/16 13/16 1/ 11/16 1 3/16 9/16 15/16 1 9/16 5/8 1 5/16 1 15/16 9/16 1 11/16 1/4 3/8 5/16 5/8 1/4 3 1/4 3 1 3/4 5 1/16 3 3/8 6 13/16 10 9/16 3 3/4 13/16 1 5/16 4 1/16
Bend Allowance 5/16 3/8 7/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 7/8 13/16 1/ 1/8 1 5/8 6 13/16 3 1/16
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 5/16 5/8 7/16 13/16 1/ 1 11/16 1 5/16 15/16 1 11/16 1 3/16 1/16 1 9/16 7/16 3/4 5/8 3 1/8 3 5/8 3 1/ 5 1/ 3 7/8 11 4 1/4 1 9/16 4 9/16
3/8 in. OD, 1.42 in. Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe

Degrees
Medium-Pressure Tubing Bend Length 1/8 5/16 1/ 7/8 1 3/16 1 9/16 1 15/16 5/16 11/16 3 1/16 3 7/16 3 13/16 4 1/8 Bend Allowance 5/16 3/8 7/16 5/8 3/4 13/16 13/16 3/4 1/ 3/16 1 11/16 6 7/8 3 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 5/16 5/8 7/16 13/16 1/ 15/16 11/16 1 5/16 15/16 1 11/16 1 3/16 1 9/16 3/8 3/4 5/8 3 1/8 3 5/8 3 7/16 5 1/ 3 13/16 11 4 3/16 1 9/16 4 1/
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1/16 1/16 1/16 0 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 5/16 1/4 5/16 11/16 7/16 9/16 1 1/ 13/16 1 3/8 9/16 1 3/16 1 3/4 9/16 1 9/16 1/8 3/8 1/8 1/ 3/16 3 1/16 7/8 1 11/16 4 7/8 3 1/4 6 3/4 10 5/16 3 5/8 13/16 1 3/16 3 15/16
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Allowance Deduction 1/16 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/4 3/8 7/16 1/ 11/16 5/8 15/16 5/8 1 5/16 5/8 1 11/16 3/8 5/16 3/16 3 1/4 1 11/16 5 1/16 6 3/4 10 9/16 7/8 1 5/16
18
Fractional Tubing continued

Degrees
Medium-Pressure Tubing Bend Allowance 1/16 3/16 1/4 3/8 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/8 1/4 1 11/16 6 13/16 13/16 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 1/16 3/16 3/16 3/8 5/16 9/16 1/ 7/8 3/4 1 1/4 1 1 5/8 1 5/16 1 3/4 5/16 5/16 11/16 3 5/16 3 1/16 5 1/8 3 7/16 10 5/8 1 5/16 3 13/16 4 1/8
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1/16 1/16 1/8 0 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 9/16 3/8 9/16 15/16 7/16 13/16 1 1/4 7/16 1 3/16 1 5/8 7/16 1 9/16 1/4 1/8 3/8 3/8 3 1/16 11/16 1 13/16 4 7/8 3 1/16 6 15/16 5/8 10 5/16 1 3/16 3 7/16 3 3/4
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/16 1/4 7/16 1/4 5/16 9/16 7/16 1/ 15/16 9/16 3/4 1 5/16 5/8 1 1 5/8 5/8 1 3/8 9/16 1 3/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/4 1/4 3 5/16 3 1/16 1 3/4 5 3/16 3 7/16 6 7/8 13/16 10 11/16 1 3/8 3 13/16 4 1/8

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 7/16 1 1/ 1 5/16 7/8 1/8 1/ 10 1/ 4 7/8
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 5/8 1 1/4 13/16 1 1/ 15/16 1 13/16 1 1/4 3/8 1 5/8 15/16 1/16 3 1/ 9/16 4 1/16 3 1/4 4 5/8 4 1/4 5 3/16 5 13/16 5 3/4 8 13/16 6 5/16 17 5/16 6 7/8 9/16 7 7/16
19

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 3/16 3/16 3/8 5/16 5/16 5/8 3/8 7/16 7/8 9/16 11/16 1 5/16 3/4 1 1 3/4 7/8 1 3/8 1/4 15/16 1 3/4 11/16 13/16 5/16 3 1/8 1/ 3 1/16 3 5/8 1/4 4 5/16 4 1/16 3/16 6 11/16 4 1/ 8 11/16 3 11/16 13 11/16 1 3/4 5 5 7/16
Bend Allowance 3/8 1/ 9/16 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 15/16 9/16 3/16 3/16 8 3/4 3 13/16
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Deduction 3/8 1/ 5/8 7/8 1 3/16 1 9/16 1 15/16 9/16 3 5/16 4 5/8 7 14 1/16 1 15/16
Bend Length 3/4 1 1 3/16 1 11/16 1/8 9/16 3 3 1/ 3 15/16 4 3/8 4 13/16 5 5/16 5 3/4

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 3/8 3/8 3/4 1/ 9/16 1 5/8 11/16 1 5/16 7/8 1 1 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 7/16 1 3/16 1 13/16 15/16 1 1/4 5/16 3 1/ 1 1/8 3 4 1/16 11/16 3 15/16 4 5/8 1/4 5 7/16 5 3/16 5/8 8 3/8 5 3/4 10 9/16 16 7/8 6 5/16 4 9/16 5/16 6 7/8
Bend Allowance 1/ 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 7/16 1 1/4 13/16 1/8 1/ 10 1/ 4 3/4
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 9/16 1 1/16 11/16 1 5/16 13/16 1 5/8 1 3/16 3/16 1 1/ 3/4 1 15/16 3 5/16 7/16 3 7/8 3 3/16 4 7/16 4 1/8 5 5 11/16 5 9/16 8 5/8 6 1/8 17 3/16 6 11/16 7/16 7 1/4
0

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1/4 1/4 1/ 3/8 7/16 13/16 9/16 5/8 1 3/16 7/8 1 1 7/8 1 1/8 1 7/16 9/16 1 5/16 1 15/16 3 3/16 1 3/8 9/16 3 7/8 1 1/4 3 5/16 4 9/16 13/16 4 7/16 5 1/4 5/16 6 1/4 5 15/16 3 1/16 9 11/16 6 5/8 1 9/16 5 7/16 19 7/8 9/16 7 5/16 8
Bend Allowance 0 1/8 5/16 9/16 13/16 1 1 1/16 1 5/8 7/16 3 3/16 1 11/16 5 1/8
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 0 0 3/16 5/16 3/8 11/16 3/4 1 5/16 1 3/16 1 11/16 11/16 5/16 3 3/8 3 1/16 4 1/16 4 1/8 4 11/16 5 7/8 5 3/8 9 1/4 6 1/16 19 7/16 5/16 6 3/4 7 7/16
1 in. OD, 3.23 in. Bend Radius, 82 mm Bend Shoe

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 15/16 15/16 1 13/16 1 1/8 1 1/8 1/4 1 5/16 1 3/8 11/16 1 11/16 1 13/16 3 1/ 3/8 4 3/8 1/4 3 5 1/4 5/16 3 3/4 6 1/16 1/8 4 13/16 6 15/16 1 1/ 6 1/4 7 3/4 1/16 8 9/16 8 5/8 3 7/16 1 7/8 9 7/16 15 1/8 5 7/16 10 5/16 7 7/16 3 3/4 11 1/8
Bend Allowance 1/ 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 9/16 1 3/4 1 13/16 1 11/16 1 1/8 1/4 3 11/16 15 5/16 6 7/8
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 1/ 15/16 11/16 1 3/8 15/16 1 13/16 1 3/8 5/8 1 15/16 3 7/16 9/16 4 5/16 3 5/16 5 1/8 4 5/16 6 5 11/16 6 13/16 7 7/8 7 5/8 1 3/16 8 1/ 4 5/8 9 5/16 3 5/16 10 1/8
1

Dimensions are in inches. 1 1/4 in. OD, 4.41 in. Bend Radius, 112 mm Bend Shoe
Standard Tubing Bend Angle
Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Tubing Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 13/16 7/8 1 11/16 1 1/16 1 3/16 3/16 1 5/16 1 7/16 3/4 1 3/4 1/8 3 7/8 1/8 13/16 5 7/16 3 11/16 6 1/16 1/ 4 11/16 7 3/16 3/16 6 1/16 8 1/4 1 3/8 8 9 3/8 9/16 11 1/16 10 1/ 5 5/16 16 15/16 11 9/16 1 5/16 9 1/8 34 4 11/16 1 11/16 13 13/16

Metric Tubing
Dimensions are in millimeters. 6 mm OD, 36 mm Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe
Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1 0 1 1 4 4 5 8 7 10 17 11 16 6 13 3 35 14 31 45 13 41 54 7 56 63 8 79 7 45 16 81 174 68 64 31 90 99
Bend Allowance 8 10 13 16 0 3 0 13 3 4 173 77
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 9 17 11 14 6 19 35 5 44 3 53 40 63 5 7 68 81 93 90 141 99 81 40 108 117
10 mm OD, 36 mm Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 4 6 8 11 14 16 17 14 8 8 47 177 69
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 5 9 7 13 10 18 15 6 1 35 8 44 36 53 47 61 6 70 87 79 134 88 73 96 36 105
3
Metric Tubing continued

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length -3 - -5 -1 0 0 3 4 5 8 13 9 14 11 1 31 1 9 41 11 39 50 6 53 59 -9 76 68 -46 13 77 -175 66 61 9 86 95
Bend Allowance 1 3 5 9 1 14 15 14 8 -7 -45 -175 69

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 5 6 11 8 9 17 11 1 3 16 19 35 0 6 47 4 35 58 5 46 70 3 59 8 15 79 94 4 110 106 53 171 118 19 348 130 96 46 14
Bend Allowance 8 11 13 18 5 5 13 7 57 4 94
4

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 8 11 14 19 3 7 8 5 17 3 5 18 99

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 5 6 11 8 9 16 10 1 15 19 34 19 6 46 35 57 3 46 69 1 59 80 13 79 9 7 110 104 56 171 115 348 17 93 46 139
Bend Allowance 6 8 11 16 0 3 4 14 6 55 1 95
5

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 14 17 0 7 3 35 36 33 3 64 68 1

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 1 5 9 17 3 8 9 7 17 10 80 31 13
6

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 7 11 15 9 33 35 3 1 8 78 30 138

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 1 16 1 9 37 41 43 38 3 13 101 397 166
7

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 11 18 4 36 46 53 55 50 30 17 136 541 4

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 9 15 34 44 51 53 48 9 18 136 540 3
8
Fractional Tubing with Metric Dimensions

Tube OD is in inches. Bend radius, bend shoe, and bend dimensions are in millimeters. 1/4 in. OD, 36 mm Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe
Degrees
Medium-Pressure Tubing Bend Allowance 9 1 14 18 1 4 5 15 1 40 171 81 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 10 19 1 4 14 8 0 38 6 47 33 56 41 66 53 75 69 84 94 93 143 103 83 41 11 11
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 8 8 16 10 10 0 1 13 5 16 18 34 19 4 43 1 31 5 39 6 0 51 71 13 67 80 3 9 89 4 140 98 173 77 80 39 107 117
3/8 in. OD, 36 mm Bend Radius, 36 mm Bend Shoe

Degrees
Medium-Pressure Tubing Bend Allowance 7 10 1 15 19 1 1 19 1 4 43 174 76 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 8 15 10 0 13 5 18 34 4 43 31 5 39 61 51 70 67 79 9 88 140 97 80 106 39 115
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 1 3 4 4 8 6 6 1 10 1 13 18 31 16 5 40 17 33 50 16 43 59 10 58 68 5 8 77 43 19 87 17 68 96 73 33 105
9
Fractional Tubing with Metric Dimensions continued

Degrees
Medium-Pressure Tubing Bend Allowance 4 6 10 13 16 17 15 9 6 44 174 7 Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Deduction Length 4 5 9 7 14 13 3 18 3 5 41 34 50 44 59 59 69 84 78 131 87 70 34 96 105
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Steel Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 3 3 6 5 6 10 7 8 15 11 13 4 14 19 33 16 6 4 17 35 51 15 45 60 9 60 69 6 85 78 45 13 87 175 71 71 35 96 105

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 16 19 8 33 37 38 34 3 63 67 14
30

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Aluminum Bend Shoe Bend Bend Bend Allowance Deduction Length 6 6 10 8 8 16 10 1 15 18 33 19 6 45 34 57 3 45 68 1 59 80 13 79 9 7 110 103 56 170 115 1 93 348 45 16 138
Bend Allowance 9 1 15 19 3 6 7 4 15 5 55 96

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 13 17 0 6 31 35 36 3 1 4 64 67 11
31

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 0 4 8 15 1 6 7 5 15 1 8 3 130
1 in. OD, 82 mm Bend Radius, 82 mm Bend Shoe

Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 1 17 31 39 45 47 43 9 6 93 389 174
3

Tube OD is in inches. Bend radius, bend shoe, and bend dimensions are in millimeters. 1 1/4 in. OD, 112 mm Bend Radius, 112 mm Bend Shoe
Degrees
15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
Bend Allowance 0 7 33 45 54 61 63 56 35 15 136 154 31
33
Minimum Length of Last Leg

During bending, both rollers must remain on the tube until the desired bend angle is achieved. If the length of tube is too short, the bend may not reach its desired angle or the end of the tube may be damaged. Specifying a final leg length equal to or greater than the minimum length of last leg length in the following tables will ensure a sufficient amount of tube exists to allow the final bend to be made correctly.
Minimum Length of Last Leg Tables Fractional Tubing

Dimensions are in inches. Aluminum Bend Shoe
Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 1/4 1.42 9/16 11/16 3/4 15/16 3 3/16 3 7/16 3 13/16 4 3/16 4 13/16 5 3/4 7 9/16 13 1/16 3 13/16 3/8 1.42 1/ 5/8 3/4 15/16 3 3/16 3 7/16 3 3/4 4 3/16 4 3/4 5 11/16 7 1/ 1 15/16 3 3/4 1/2 1.42 11/16 13/16 7/8 3 1/16 3 5/16 3 9/16 3 15/16 4 5/16 4 7/8 5 13/16 7 5/8 13 1/16 3 15/16 5/8 1.81 3 1/ 3 5/8 3 3/4 4 4 5/16 4 11/16 5 1/16 5 5/8 6 3/8 7 5/8 10 17 5 1/16 3/4 2.20 4 1/4 4 7/16 4 9/16 4 7/8 5 1/4 5 11/16 6 3/16 6 7/8 7 13/16 9 5/16 1 1/4 0 3/4 6 3/16 7/8 2.64 3 11/16 3 7/8 4 1/16 4 7/16 4 7/8 5 3/8 6 6 3/4 7 7/8 9 11/16 13 1/8 3 5/16 6 1 3.23 4 11/16 4 7/8 5 1/8 5 9/16 6 1/8 6 3/4 7 1/ 8 9/16 10 1 5/16 16 5/8 9 3/16 7 1/
Steel Bend Shoe

1/4 Medium Pressure 1.42 3 1/ 3 5/8 3 11/16 3 7/8 4 1/8 4 3/8 4 3/4 5 3/16 5 13/16 6 13/16 8 3/4 14 1/4 4 3/4 3/8 Medium Pressure 1.42 3 1/ 3 5/8 3 11/16 3 7/8 4 1/8 4 3/8 4 3/4 5 3/16 5 13/16 6 13/16 8 11/16 14 3/16 4 3/4 1/2 Medium Pressure 1.42 3 5/16 3 7/16 3 9/16 3 3/4 4 4 1/4 4 9/16 5 5 9/16 6 9/16 8 3/8 13 7/8 4 9/16
Bend Angle, Degrees
Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Bend Angle, Degrees
1/4 1.42 3 7/16 3 9/16 3 5/8 3 13/16 4 1/16 4 5/16 4 11/16 5 1/8 5 3/4 6 3/4 8 5/8 14 1/8 4 11/16
3/8 1.42 3 5/8 3 3/4 3 13/16 4 4 1/4 4 1/ 4 7/8 5 1/4 5 7/8 6 13/16 8 5/8 14 1/8 4 7/8
1/2 1.42 3 3/8 3 1/ 3 9/16 3 3/4 4 4 1/4 4 5/8 5 5 5/8 6 9/16 8 7/16 13 15/16 4 5/8
1/2 2.20 4 1/4 4 7/16 4 9/16 4 7/8 5 1/4 5 11/16 6 3/16 6 7/8 7 7/8 9 7/16 1 7/16 0 15/16 6 3/16
5/8 1.81 3 11/16 3 13/16 3 15/16 4 3/16 4 1/ 4 7/8 5 1/4 5 7/8 6 5/8 7 15/16 10 5/16 17 3/8 5 1/4
3/4
7/8
1 1/4
2.20 2.64 3.23 4.41 4 5/16 4 7/16 5 1/4 5 3/4 4 7/16 4 5/8 5 7/16 6 1/16 4 9/16 4 13/16 5 11/16 6 5/16 4 15/16 5 3/16 6 1/8 7 5 1/4 5 5/8 6 11/16 7 11/16 5 11/16 6 1/8 7 5/16 8 9/16 6 3/16 6 3/4 8 1/16 9 9/16 6 15/16 7 1/ 9 1/16 10 15/16 7 7/8 8 9/16 10 7/16 1 7/8 9 7/16 10 5/16 1 5/8 15 15/16 1 3/8 13 11/16 16 15/16 1 13/16 0 15/16 3 7/8 9 3/8 38 7/8 6 3/16 6 3/4 8 1/16 9 9/16
34
Minimum Length of Last Leg Tables

Metric Tubing
Dimensions are in millimeters. Aluminum Bend Shoe
Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Bend Angle, Degrees 6 36 63 65 68 73 79 86 94 104 119 14 189 37 94 10 36 65 67 70 75 81 88 96 106 11 144 191 39 96 12 36 69 71 74 79 85 9 100 110 14 147 194 33 100 14 46 88 91 94 101 108 117 18 141 161 19 53 430 18 15 46 87 90 93 100 108 116 17 141 160 191 5 49 17 16 46 89 9 95 10 109 118 19 14 16 193 54 431 19 18 56 10 106 110 118 17 138 151 168 19 31 305 51 151 20 67 89 93 98 108 119 131 147 166 194 39 37 585 147 22 67 96 100 105 115 16 138 154 174 03 49 338 597 154 25 82 1 18 133 145 159 174 194 1 58 316 47 746 194
Steel Bend Shoe

Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Bend Angle, Degrees 6 36 87 89 9 97 103 110 118 130 146 171 19 359 118 10 36 80 8 85 90 96 103 111 1 137 16 09 348 111 12 36 83 85 88 93 99 106 114 14 139 163 10 349 114 14 46 91 94 97 104 11 10 131 145 166 198 59 437 131 15 46 91 94 97 104 11 10 131 145 166 197 58 436 131 16 46 89 9 95 10 110 118 19 143 163 194 55 43 19 18 56 108 11 116 14 133 144 157 175 00 40 315 53 157 20 67 11 116 11 131 14 154 170 189 17 61 348 606 170 22 67 118 13 17 137 148 161 177 197 5 71 359 617 177 25 82 130 136 141 153 167 18 0 7 6 318 47 744 0 28 112 141 149 157 173 191 1 39 7 30 396 543 975 39 30 112 140 147 155 171 190 11 37 70 317 393 540 97 37
35
Minimum Length of Last Leg Tables

Fractional Tubing with Metric Dimensions
Tube OD is in inches. Bend radius and length are in millimeters. Aluminum Bend Shoe
Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 Bend Angle, Degrees 165 180 1/4 36 65 67 70 75 81 88 96 107 11 146 193 33 96 3/8 36 64 66 69 74 80 87 95 105 10 144 190 39 95 1/2 36 69 71 74 79 85 9 100 110 14 148 194 333 100 5/8 46 89 9 95 10 110 118 19 143 163 194 54 43 19 3/4 56 108 11 116 14 133 144 157 174 199 37 311 58 157 7/8 67 94 98 103 11 13 136 15 17 00 45 334 59 15 1 82 119 15 130 14 156 171 190 17 55 313 43 74 190
Steel Bend Shoe

1/4 Medium Pressure 36 89 91 94 99 105 11 10 13 148 174 36 10 3/8 Medium Pressure 36 89 91 94 99 105 11 10 13 148 173 1 361 10 1/2 Medium Pressure 36 85 87 90 95 101 108 116 17 14 166 13 35 116
Tube OD Bend Radius 15 22 1/2 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Bend Angle, Degrees
1/4 36 87 90 9 97 103 110 119 130 146 171 19 359 119
3/8 36 9 95 97 103 108 115 14 134 149 173 0 359 14
1/2 36 85 88 90 96 10 108 117 18 143 167 14 354 117
1/2 56 108 11 116 14 133 144 157 175 01 41 316 534 157
5/8 46 94 97 100 107 115 13 134 149 169 01 6 441 134
3/4 56 109 113 117 15 134 145 158 176 01 40 315 53 158
7/8 67 113 118 1 13 143 156 17 190 18 6 349 607 17
1 82 133 139 144 156 170 185 04 9 65 31 49 746 04
1 1/4 112 146 153 161 177 196 17 43 78 37 405 554 988 43
36
Bench Top Bender Users Manual 3. Using a flat screwdriver or a similar tool, rotate the spring away from the motor brush and remove the motor brush from the housing. Note: Complete replacement of one brush, then replace the second brush.
Spring Releasing motor brush
Maintenance
All Models
Using the supplied grease gun, grease the two points on the upper gearbox of the bender after every 4 hours of operation. Grease points
The grease must be a high-grade, multipurpose grease meeting Castrol Molub-Alloy-860/0-1 ES or Tribol 400/0-1 specifications. Electric bender motor brush replacements are available for use in the field. Any other repairs to the electric or manual tube bender are to be made by a Swagelok authorized service center. Swagelok reserves the right not to make repairs in situations where the bender has been altered.
Removing motor brush
Electric Models
Inspect components for wear or damage periodically. Motor Brush Inspection, Removal, and Replacement The motor brushes should be inspected for wear after every 800 hours of operation, or every six months, and replaced when their length is 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or less.
4. Inspect the brushes for wear. Replace when the length is 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or less.
1/4 in.
WARNING Remove unit from power source. CAUTION The motor brushes are under spring tension. CAUTION Serious damage may occur to the motor if brushes are not replaced when worn.
Replace brush New brush
1. Turn the bender over. Remove the four socket-head cap screws using a 5 mm hex key.
5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to install the new motor brush. Ensure that the brush spring is secured properly in the housing.
Socket-head cap screws
Socket-head cap screws
Proper brush installation
. Remove the bottom cover.

Motor brushes Improper brush installation
37
Replacement Parts
Tube Bender Components
Ordering Number MS-BTB-CC-M MS-BTB-CC-E MS-BTB-RS MS-BTB-GR-PIN MS-BTB-DR-PIN MS-BTB-RAH MS-BTB-B-SB MS-BTB-HC MS-BTB-A-GG MS-BTB-CORD- Motor brushes (electric models only) 16750 Tooling kit carrying case MS-BTT-CC (aluminum bend shoes only) Description Metal box with trays (manual model) Metal box with trays (electric model) Roller bracket G pin D pin Roller-bracket lever Support bracket Hand crank (manual models only) Grease gun Power cord (electric models only) Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MS-BTB-M Basic Manual Model
MS-BTB-1 or MS-BTB-2 Basic Electric Model
Does not include pin and pivot. ee Tools and Accessories, MS-01-169, for country and voltage designators. S
Order in quantities of .
Tooling Sets
Ordering Number Description Bend shoe set Guide/deformation rollers set Bend shoes and guide/deformation rollers kit Bend shoes and guide/ deformation rollers kit with carrying case Fractional (1/2 to 1 in.) MS-BTT-B-FSET MS-BTT-R-FSET MS-BTT-K-F MS-BTT-K-F-CASE Metric (12 to 25 mm) MS-BTT-B-MSET MS-BTT-R-MSET MS-BTT-K-M MS-BTT-K-M-CASE
Fractional set sizes: 1/, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, and 1 in. Metric set sizes: 1, 16, 18, 0, , and 5 mm.
Individual Tools Ordering Information

1. Select a basic ordering number Example: MS-BTT-B-XX . Replace XX with a size designator. Example: MS-BTT-B-8
Description G roller D roller Bend shoe and guide/ deformation roller set Fractional Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 Fractional and Metric Sizes Basic Ordering Number MS-BTT-R-XXG MS-BTT-R-XXD MS-BTT-K-XX (aluminum) MS-BTT-K-SXX (steel) Metric Size mm 6 10 1 14 15 16 18 0 5 8 30
Bend Shoe Ordering Information

Material Aluminum Steel
Fractional and Metric Sizes Basic Ordering Number MS-BTT-B-XX MS-BTT-B-SXX
The following sizes require an additional designator be added to the basic ordering number:
Designator -R36 -R36 -R46 -R46 -R56 -R11
Size Designator 4 6 8 10 1 14 16 0
Size Designator 6M 10M 1M 14M 15M 16M 18M 0M M 5M 8M 30M
Size 6 mm 10 mm 14 mm 15 mm 1/ in. OD, 56 mm bend radius (steel only) 1 1/4 in. (steel only)
Example: MS-BTT-B-10M-R36 Steel bend shoes are required for bending the following:
Tube Material Carbon steel, stainless Carbon steel, stainless Carbon steel, stainless Carbon steel, stainless Carbon steel, stainless Tube OD 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 5 mm 8 mm 30 mm All Wall Thickness > 0.095 in. All > .4 mm All All All
steel steel steel steel steel
Heavy-walled stainless steel, cold drawn 1/8 hard stainless steel, SAF 507, alloy 65
38
Accessories
Manual Model
MS-BTB-A-TC Torque Clutch: Allows 1/ in. electric or pneumatic drill motor to be used in place of hand crank on manual bender.
MS-BTB-A-SA Support Arm: Must be used with torque clutch to support drill motor.
Electric Model
All Models
MS-BTB-A-FS Foot Switch Operates the electric bender in place of the toggle switch.
MS-BTB-A-TP Collapsible Tripod
Description Tripod Torque clutch Support arm Foot pedal
Ordering Number MS-BTB-A-TP MS-BTB-A-TC MS-BTB-A-SA MS-BTB-A-FS
Manual bender using torque clutch, support arm, and collapsible tripod with customer electric drill motor.
CAUTION Torque clutch and support arm must be used together for safe operation.
39
Achieving Quality Bends

Always use the correct size bend shoes and rollers for the tube you are bending. Make sure the correct radius bend shoe is used for the wall thickness of the tube that you are bending. Tube with
less than the recommended wall thickness can be bent properly using a bend shoe with a larger radius.
The pressure between the bend shoe and the rollers must be correct. You must apply sufficient pressure to avoid
wrinkles on the inside bend of the tube, but too much will leave heavy roller forming marks on the back of the bend.
Troubleshooting
Problem Wrinkles occur on inside surface of the bend. Cause Forming pressure is insufficient. Solution Apply more pressure on the tube by turning the roller knob clockwise, then recalibrate. Bend shoe may be worn. Rollers or bend shoe may be the wrong size for the tube. Change to a larger-radius bend shoe. Reduce forming pressure by turning the roller knob counterclockwise, then recalibrate. Do not rotate the roller knob after Setup is completed. Adjust the pressure to achieve proper results by turning the roller adjustment knob. Check bend shoe for proper size. Check bend shoe for excessive wear. Tube kinks. Excessive gap between the clamp arm and rollers. Bend with gap of approximately 3/8 in. or 10 mm between clamp arm and rollers.
Bend shoe is contacting roller. Bend shoe radius may be too small. Excessive tube deformation occurs on back surface of the bend Bend angle is not consistent from bend to bend. Tube ovality is not acceptable. Forming pressure is either too high or too low. Forming pressure is excessive.
Roller knob has been rotated between bends.
Machine fails to bend tube; overload indicator illuminates. (electric model only)
Tube wall thickness or hardness is beyond the capacity of the machine. Tube wall thickness is beyond the capacity of the machine. Gearbox requires lubrication.
Use suitable material for proper machine operation. Use suitable material for proper machine operation. Lubricate gearbox. See Minimum Length of Last Leg
Machine makes excessive noise.
Both rollers do not remain on tube or end of tube is damaged during last bend.
Last leg of bend is too short
SWAGELOK COMPANY
9500 Solon Road, Solon, Ohio 44139-349 U.S.A. Telephone: +1.440.48.4600 FAX: +1.440.349.5970 The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty Swagelok and its authorized distributors hereby warrant to the purchaser of their Products that the nonelectrical components shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for the life of the Products. All electrical components installed in or on the Product are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for twelve months from the date of purchase. The purchasers remedies shall be limited to replacement and installation of any parts that fail through a defect in material or workmanship. All customer-specified components carry the applicable manufacturers warranty. ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WARRANTY, OR LIABILITY RELATING TO THE CONDITION OR USE OF THE PRODUCT ARE SPECIFICALLY DISAVOWED, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL SWAGELOK AND ITS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER, OR ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company Castrol TM BP Lubricants USA Inc. 007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., OM December 007, R6 MS-13-145
www.swagelok.com
Bl e e d Val ves and Purge Valves
B l e e d Val ve s
Working pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) Temperatures up to 850F (454C) 316 stainless steel, carbon steel, or alloy R-405
materials
Purge Val ve s
Working pressures up to 4000 psig (275 bar) Temperatures up to 600F (315C) 316 stainless steel, brass, or carbon steel materials
Bleed Valves and Purge Valves
Bleed Valves
Swagelok bleed valves can be used on instrumentation devices such as multivalve manifolds or gauge valves to vent signal line pressure to atmosphere before removal of an instrument or to assist in calibration of control devices.
Compact for convenient installation Male NPT and SAE end connections Orifice of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm); flow coefficient (Cv) of 0.25
Back stop screw prevents accidental stem disassembly
Vent tube directs excess liquid or gas from system lines
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Component Stem Body Back stop screw Vent tube Lubricant Steel Alloy R-405 Alloy R-405/ B164 Alloy R-405 Alloy 400/B165 Material Grade/ASTM Specification Chrome-plated 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 1018/A108 316 SS 316 SS/A269
Chrome-plated stem threads and tip enhance valve life
Dimensions
7/16 in. hex 0.81 Outlet 3/16 (4.7) OD tube stub
(20.6)
Nickel antiseize, hydrocarbon carrier
Wetted components listed in italics. Male SAE body has fluorocarbon FKM O-ring. Carbon steel bodies are plated with cadmium yellow dichromate for corrosion resistance.
open
Material Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 200 300 400 450 500 600 650 700 750 800 850
(37) (93) (148) (204) (232) (260) (315) (343) (371) (398) (426) (454)
316 SS 10 9 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 000 290 390 705 435 165 770 660 480 335 230 085
(689) (640) (578) (530) (512) (493) (466) (458) (446) (436) (429) (419)
Steel 10 9 8 8 000 110 860 555

(689) (627) (610) (589)
Alloy R-405 10 8 8 7 000 800 240 960

D (689) (606) (567) (548) C A B
8 315 (572)
7 940 (547) 7 920 (545)
Inlet End Connection Type Male NPT Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. Male SAE 1/4 in., 7/16-20 1/2 in., 3/4-16 1/4 in. 1/2 in.
Ordering Number SS-BVM2 SS-BVM4 SS-BVM6 SS-BVM8 SS-BVST4 SS-BVST8 SS-BVM4RT SS-BVM8RT

(34.0)
B 0.94
(23.9)
C 0.41
(10.4)
D 0.75
(19.1)
Ratings based on all metal seals. Ratings limited to:

20F (28C) min with steel. 450F (232C) max with SAE end connections using fluorocarbon FKM O-rings. 9100 psig (626 bar) max with 316 SS or steel and SAE end connections. 8000 psig (551 bar) max with alloy R-405 and SAE end connections.
1.47
(37.3)
1.03
(26.2)
0.44
(11.2)
0.88
(22.4)
1.34
(34.0)
0.94
(23.9)
0.41
(10.4)
0.69
(17.5)
1.47
(37.3)
1.03
(26.2)
0.44
(11.2)
0.63
(16.0)
Testing
Every Swagelok bleed valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Male ISO
1.34
(34.0)
0.94
(23.9)
0.41
(10.4)
0.75
(19.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.06
(26.9)
0.44
(11.2)
0.92
(23.4)
Adapts to SAE straight thread boss and SAE J1926/1 boss. See specifications ISO7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
When installing a Swagelok bleed valve, position the vent tube to direct system uid away from operating personnel. Always open bleed valves slowly. These valves contain no packing, so some uid weepage will occur when the valves are opened. Operating personnel must protect themselves from exposure to system uids. Select an ordering number. To order other valve body materials, replace SS in the ordering number with S for carbon steel or M for alloy R-405. Example: S-BVM2
Bleed Valves and Purge Valves
Purge Valves
Swagelok purge valves are manual bleed, vent, or drain valves. The knurled cap is permanently assembled to the valve body for safety. One-quarter turn with a wrench from finger-tight obtains leaktight closure on first makeup. Snugging with a wrench ensures closure to the rated pressure with subsequent makeups.
Compact for convenient installation NPT, SAE, Swagelok tube fitting, and tube adapter end
Cap is crimped to valve body to prevent accidental disassembly
connections
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Component Cap Body Poppet, ball Spring Lubricant Brass Steel Material Grade/ASTM Specification Cadmium-plated 12L14/A108 316 SS/A479 Brass 360/B16 Zinc-plated 12L14/A108 316 SS/A276 302 SS/A313 Molybdenum disulfide-based paste
Vent hole bleeds excess liquid or gas from system lines
Dimensions
A open 1.03 (26.2) open B
Wetted components listed in italics. Male SAE body has fluorocarbon FKM O-ring. 316 SS valves contain a poppet; brass and carbon steel valves contain a ball.
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 150 200 300 350 400 450 500 600
Ratings limited to:
20F (28C) min with steel. 450F (232C) max with SAE end connections using fluorocarbon FKM
1660 2.2 316 SS 4000 3720 3440 3105 2975 2850 2750 2650 2500
(275) (256) (237) (213) (204) (196) (189) (182) (172)
N/A N/A Brass 3000 2800 2600 2210 1480 (206) (192) (179) (152) (101) Steel 3000 3000 3000 3000 2985
(206) (206) (206) (206) (205)
(37) (65) (93) (148) (176) (204) (232) (260) (315)
740 (50.9)
O-rings.
Ordering Type Size Number 1/8 in. SS-4PF2 1/4 in. SS-4P-4F Female NPT 3/8 in. SS-4PF6 1/2 in. SS-4PF8 1/8 in. SS-4P-2M 1/4 in. SS-4P-4M Male NPT 3/8 in. SS-4P-6M 1/2 in. SS-4PM8 1/4 in., 7/16-20 SS-4PST4 Male SAE 1/2 in., 3/4-16 SS-4PST8 Male ISO 1/8 in. SS-4PM2RT 1/8 in. SS-4P-2 1/4 in. SS-4P-4 Swagelok 3/8 in. SS-4PS6 tube 1/2 in. SS-4PS8 fitting 6 mm SS-4PS6MM 8 mm SS-4PS8MM 1/4 in. SS-4P-4T Tube 3/8 in. SS-4P-6T adapter 1/2 in. SS-4PT8
Inlet End Connection
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.56 (39.6) 1.75 (44.4) 1.81 (46.0) 1.98 (50.3) 1.62 (41.1) 1.81 (46.0) 1.84 (46.7) 2.09 (53.1) 1.69 (42.9) 1.81 (46.0) 1.62 (41.1) 1.84 (46.7) 1.94 (49.3) 2.03 (51.6) 2.19 (55.6) 1.94 (49.3) 2.00 (50.8) 1.87 (47.5) 1.94 (49.3) 2.15 (54.6) B 0.53 (13.5) 0.72 (18.3) 0.78 (19.8) 0.97 (24.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 0.38 0.44 0.38 0.59 0.69 0.75 0.88 0.69 0.72 0.63 0.69 0.91
(19.1) (9.7) (11.2) (9.7) (15.0) (17.5) (19.1) (22.4) (17.5) (18.3) (16.0) (17.5) (23.1)
When installing a Swagelok purge valve, position the vent hole to direct system uid away from operating personnel. The vent hole rotates with the cap, changing the direction of discharge as the cap is turned. Always open purge valves slowly. These valves contain no packing, so some uid weepage will occur when the valves are opened. Operating personnel must protect themselves from exposure to system uids.
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight, where applicable. Adapts to SAE straight thread boss and SAE J1926/1 boss. See specifications ISO7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
Select an ordering number. To order other valve body materials, replace SS in the ordering number with B for brass or S for carbon steel. Example: B-4P-2F

Every Swagelok bleed valve and purge valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Options
Bleed Valve
Handle
To order a Swagelok bleed valve with 316 SS/ASTM A276 or A479 bar handle, add -SH to the ordering number. Example: SS-BVM4-SH
2 in. (50.8 mm)
Purge Valve
PTFE Ball
3/16 in.
(4.7 mm)
OD
The Swagelok purge valve with PTFE ball provides leaktight shutoff with finger pressure and features a removable cap for easy ball replacement. Pressure Rating: 200 psig at 100F (13.7 bar at 37C) Temperature Rating: 350F (176C). To order a Swagelok purge valve with PTFE ball, add -TFE to the ordering number. Example: SS-4P-2F-TFE
Barbed Vent Tube

The barbed vent tube enables use of soft plastic or rubber tubing at the valve outlet. Tube material is 316 SS/ASTM A269. To order, add -C3 to the ordering number. Example: SS-BVM2-C3
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI March 2007, R8 MS-01-62
www.swagelok.com
Che ck Valve s
C, CA , CH, CP, a nd CPA Se r ie s

Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Adjustable and fixed cracking pressures Variety of end connections 316 stainless steel and brass materials
Check Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cracking and Reseal Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 5 7 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Maintenance Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Features
Fixed Cracking Pressures
From 1/3 to 5 psi (0 .03 to 1 .8 bar)
Adjustable Cracking Pressures

From 3 to 600 psi (0 .1 to 41 .4 bar)
C Series
CA Series
Locking screw maintains settings
O-ring seals body halves
Spring Poppet
Fully contained O-ring seal
Adjustable spring
Adjusting screw sets cracking pressure
CH Series
Poppet with bonded elastomer seal Poppet stop
CPA Series
Adjustable spring
Adjusting screw sets cracking pressure
Locking screw maintains setting
O-ring seals body halves
Backup ring supports O-ring
Compact, one-piece body
CP Series
Compact, one-piece body
Check Valves
Technical Data
Cracking pressurethe upstream pressure at which the first indication of flow occurs . Reseal pressurethe pressure at which there is no indication of flow .
Maximum Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0 .10 0 .47 1 .47 1 .68 4 .48 0 .67 1 .8 4 .7 0 .35 1 .0 0 .37 0 .35 1 .0 1/3, 1, 5, 10 and 5
(0 .03, 0 .07, 0 .35 0 .69, and 1 .8)

Series C 4C 6C 8C 1C, 16C CH4 CH8 CH16 4CP 8CP CA 4CPA 8CPA
Nominal Cracking Pressure psi (bar) Fixed Cracking Pressure
Downstream Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar)
1000 (68 .9) 1/3, 1, 10 and 5

(0 .03, 0 .07, 0 .69, and 1 .8)
00 (13 .7)
6000 (413) 5000 (344) 3000 (06)
1/3, 1, 10 and 5 (0 .03, 0 .07, 0 .69, and 1 .8) Adjustable Cracking Pressure 3 to 50 (0 .1 to 3 .5) 50 to 150 (3 .5 to 10 .4) 150 to 350 (10 .4 to 4 .) 350 to 600 (4 . to 41 .4)
3000 (06)
For cracking pressure of 5 psi (1 .8 bar), downstream pressure is 3000 psig (06 bar) .
C (2C, 4C, 6C, and 8C), CA, CP, and CPA Series
Ratings based on fluorocarbon FKM O-rings in 316 stainless steel valves and Buna N O-rings in brass valves .
Material Temperature, F (C) 10 (3) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 375 (190) 316 SS Brass
C Series (12C and 16C)

Ratings based on fluorocarbon FKM O-rings in 316 stainless steel valves and Buna N O-rings in brass valves .
Material Temperature, F (C) 10 (3) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 375 (190) 316 SS Working Pressure, 000 (137) 1715 (118) 1630 (11) 1545 (106) 1450 (99 .9) Brass psig (bar) 1500 (103) 1300 (89 .5) 100 (8 .6)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 3000 (06) 3000 (06) 575 (177) 600 (179) 450 (168) 405 (165) 35 (160) 185 (150)
To reduce the possibility of dislodging the O-ring in systems where
pressure surges, shock, or pulses occur, for all C and 4C series valves and for 6C and 8C series valves with cracking pressures lower than 50 psi (3 .5 bar), an optional inlet gasket is available . See page 14 for ordering information . Cracking and reseal pressures may decrease slightly from the ranges listed in this catalog . Alternatively, CH or CP series valves should be considered .
CH Series
Ratings based on fluorocarbon FKM seals .
Material Series Temperature, F (C) 10 (3) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 400 (04) CH4, CH8 316 SS CH16 Working Pressure, psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 5160 (355) 490 (95) 4910 (338) 4080 (81) 4660 (31) 3875 (66) 480 (94) 3560 (45)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107 . Pressure ratings may be limited by the end connection See . Dimensions, page 1 .
Check Valves
Cracking and Reseal Pressures at 70F (20C)

Cracking pressurethe upstream pressure at which the first indication of flow occurs . Reseal pressurethe pressure at which there is no indication of flow .

C Series
Nominal Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Cracking Pressure Range psi (bar) Up to 3 (0 .1) Up to 4 (0 .8) 7 to 15
(0 .49 to 1 .1)
CH Series
Reseal Pressure psi (bar) Up to 6 (0 .4) downstream pressure Up to 6 (0 .4) downstream pressure 3 (0 .1) or more upstream pressure 17 (1 .) or more upstream pressure Nominal Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 5 (0 .35) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Cracking Pressure Range psi (bar) Up to 3 (0 .1) Up to 4 (0 .8) 3 to 9
(0 .1 to 0 .63)
0 to 30
(1 .4 to .1)
7 to 15
(0 .49 to 1 .1)
0 to 30
(1 .4 to .1)
Reseal Pressure psi (bar) Up to 6 (0 .4) back pressure Up to 5 (0 .35) back pressure Up to (0 .14) back pressure 3 (0 .1) or more upstream pressure 17 (1 .) or more upstream pressure
CP Series
Nominal Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Cracking Pressure Range psi (bar) Up to 3 (0 .1) Up to 4 (0 .8) 7 to 13
(0 .49 to 0 .90)
CA and CPA Series

Reseal Pressure psi (bar) 6 to 0 (0 .4 to 1 .4) downstream pressure 5 to 0 (0 .35 to 1 .4) downstream pressure 3 to 10 (0 .1 to 0 .69) downstream pressure 5 (0 .35) or more upstream pressure Cracking Pressure, bar
1 to 9
(1 .5 to .0)
Back Pressure
Cracking Pressure, psi
Reseal Pressure, bar
Reseal Pressure, psi
Check Valves
C and CA Series
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Component 1 Inlet body 2 Inlet gasket (CA series) Inlet gasket (standard for 6C and 8C series with 50 psi [3.5 bar] spring; optional for 2C and 4C series and all other 6C and 8C series) Inlet gasket (12C and 16C series) 3 Insert (CA series) 4 O-ring 5 Poppet 6 Spring 7 Center body (CA series) 8 Adjusting screw (CA series) 9 Locking screw (CA series) 10 Outlet gasket (CA series) 11 Outlet body 316 SS/A479 Brass Brass 360/B16
Material Grade/ASTM Specification PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240
2 4 3 4 5
PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240
PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479
PTFE-coated aluminum/B209 Naval brass 485/ B21 Buna N Brass 360/B16 Brass 360/B16
6 6
302 SS/A313
316 SS/A276 PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 Silicone-based and molybdenum disulfide-based (C series); PTFE-based and molybdenum disulfide-based (CA series) Brass 360/B16
Lubricants
Silicone-based (C series); PTFE-based (CA series)
11
8 9 10
12C Series shown
11
CH Series
Component 1 Inlet body 2 Poppet 3 Poppet stop 4 Spring 5 O-ring 6 Backup ring 7 Outlet body Lubricant Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKMbonded 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A240 302 SS/A313 Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 PTFE-based
CA Series
6 5 7 3 4
Wetted components listed in italics. Material Safety Data Sheet for bonding agent available on request .
Check Valves
CP Series
1 2 3 4 5 6
CPA Series
1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8
Valve Body Materials Brass 316 SS Component 1 Insert lock screw 2 Insert 3 O-ring 4 Poppet 5 Spring 6 Body 7 Adjusting screw (CPA series) 8 Locking screw (CPA series) Lubricants
Wetted components listed in italics. Adjusting screw in valve with 150 or 350 psi (10 .4 or 4 . bar) spring is 316 SS .
4CP Brass 485/ B21
8CP Brass 360/ B16
4CPA Brass 485/ B21
8CPA Brass 360/ B16
Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316 SS/A276 or A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 PTFE-based 302 SS/A313 Brass 360/B16 316 SS/A276 Brass 360/ B16
Buna N Brass 360/B16
Check Valves

C Series
Nominal Cracking Pressures
2C, 6C, 16C Series 4C, 8C Series 1 psi (0.07 bar) 1 psi (0.07 bar) 10 psi (0.69 bar) 10 psi (0.69 bar) 25 psi (1.8 bar) 25 psi (1.8 bar)
Air
2C, 4C Series
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
2C, 4C Series
Water Flow, L/min
2C Series
2C Series
4C Series
4C Series
Water Flow, U .S . gal/min
6C, 8C Series
Air Flow, std L/min
6C, 8C Series
Water Flow, L/min
6C Series
6C Series
16C Series
Air Flow, std L/min
16C Series
Water Flow, L/min
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
8C Series
8C Series
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Check Valves

CH Series
1 psi (0.07 bar) 10 psi (0.69 bar) 25 psi (1.8 bar)
Air
CH4 Series
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
CH4 Series
Water Flow, L/min
CH8 Series
Air Flow, std L/min
CH8 Series
Water Flow, L/min
CH16 Series
Air Flow, std L/min
CH16 Series
Water Flow, L/min
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Check Valves

CA and CPA Series
3 psi (0.21 bar) 50 psi (3.5 bar) 150 psi (10.4 bar) 350 psi (24.2) bar)
Air
CA Series
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
CA Series
Water Flow, L/min
4CPA Series
Air Flow, std L/min
4CPA Series
Water Flow, L/min
8CPA Series
Air Flow, std L/min
8CPA Series
Water Flow, L/min
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
10
Check Valves

CP Series
1 psi (0.07 bar) 10 psi (0.69 bar) 25 psi (1.8 bar)
Air
4CP Series
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
4CP Series
Water Flow, L/min
8CP Series
Air Flow, std L/min
8CP Series
Water Flow, L/min
Testing
Every C, CA, CH, CP, and CPA series check valve is factory tested for crack and reseal performance with a liquid leak detector . Check valves with fixed cracking pressures, C, CP, and CH series, are cycled six times prior to testing . Every valve is tested to ensure it seals within 5 s at the appropriate reseal pressure . Check valves with adjustable cracking pressures, CA and CPA series, are tested at two pressure points . Every valve is tested at a low-pressure setting and at a high-pressure setting . All valves must seal within 5 s at the appropriate reseal pressure .

Every C, CA, and CH series check valve with VCR or VCO end connections is processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements as stated in ASTM G93 Level C . All other C, CA, and CH series check valves, as well as every CP and CPA series check valve, are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6 .
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Check Valves
11
Dimensions
Dimensions, shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight, are for reference only and are subject to change .
C Series
A B flat
CA Series
A B flat
C flat
C flat
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in . 1/4 in . Fractional Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . Metric Swagelok tube fittings 6 mm 10 mm 1 mm 1/8 in . 1/4 in . Female NPT 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/8 in . 1/4 in . Male NPT 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male VCR fittings 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/4 in . 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 in . 1/4 in .
Basic Ordering Number SS-CSS-4CSS-6CSS-8CSS-1CSS-16CSS-6C-MMSS-10C-MMSS-1C-MMSS-C4SS-4C4SS-6C4SS-8C4SS-1C4SS-16C4SS-CSS-4CSS-6CSS-8CSS-1CSS-16CSS-4C1SS-4C-VCRSS-8C-VCRSS-1C-VCRSS-16C-VCRSS-4CASS-6CA-MMSS-8CA-MMSS-4CA1SS-4CA-VCR-
Dimensions, in . (mm) Series C 4C 6C 8C 1C 16C 4C 8C C 4C 6C 8C 1C 16C C 4C 6C 8C 1C 16C 4C 4C 8C 1C 16C A .14 (54 .3) .35 (59 .7) 3 .17 (80 .5) 3 .4 (86 .9) 4 .3 (110) 4 .74 (10) .36 (59 .9) 3 .3 (84 .3) 3 .4 (86 .9) 1 .89 (48 .0) .15 (54 .6) .98 (75 .7) 3 .58 (90 .9) 4 .08 (104) 4 .84 (13) 1 .71 (43 .4) .09 (53 .1) .78 (70 .6) 3 .16 (80 .3) 4 .08 (104) 4 .5 (115) . (56 .4) .1 (56 .1) 3 .56 (90 .4) 4 .64 (118) 4 .76 (11) B C 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/
(14) (19) ()
Basic ordering numbers specify stainless steel material . To order brass, replace SS with B in the basic ordering number . Example: B-C-
Fixed Cracking Pressure, C Series 5/8 7/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 5/8 7/8 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/4 1 5/8 5/8 7/8 1 1/4 1 5/8 5/8 5/8 15/16 1 5/8 9/16
C Series
To order, add a cracking pressure designator to the basic ordering number .
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Designator 1/3 1 10 5
Example: SS-C-1/3
CA Series
To order, add a cracking pressure range designator to the basic ordering number .
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 3 to 50 (0 .1 to 3 .5) 50 to 150 (3 .5 to 10 .4) 150 to 350 (10 .4 to 4 .) 350 to 600 (4 . to 41 .4) Designator 3 50 150 350
Example: SS-4CA-3
Adjustable Cracking Pressure, CA Series Swagelok tube fittings Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male VCR fittings 3 .3 (8 .0) 3 .3 (84 .3) CA 3 .1 (79 .) 3 .09 (78 .5) 5/8 9/16
(14) (16)
Check valves are designed for
9/16
directional flow control only. Swagelok check valves should never be used as code safety relief devices.
1
Check Valves
Dimensions
Pressure Rating at 100F (37C) psig (bar)
End Connections Type Size 1/8 in . 1/4 in . Fractional Swagelok tube fitting 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 6 mm 8 mm Metric Swagelok tube fitting 10 mm 1 mm mm 5 mm 1/4 in . Female NPT 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/8 in . 1/4 in . Male NPT 3/8 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/4 in . Female ISO 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/4 in . Male ISO Female SAE/MS Male SAE/MS Male VCO fitting 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . 1/ in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in . 1 in . Male VCR fitting 1/4 in . 1/ in . 3/4 in .
Basic Ordering Number SS-CHSSS-CHS4SS-CHS6SS-CHS8SS-CHS1SS-CHS16SS-CHS6MMSS-CHS8MMSS-CHS10MMSS-CHS1MMSS-CHSMMSS-CHS5MMSS-CHF4SS-CHF6SS-CHF8SS-CHF1SS-CHF16SS-CHMSS-CHM4SS-CHM6SS-CHM8SS-CHM1SS-CHM16SS-CHF4RTSS-CHF8RTSS-CHF1RTSS-CHF16RTSS-CHM4RTSS-CHM8RTSS-CHM1RTSS-CHM16RTSS-CHF8ST-
Dimensions in . (mm) Series CH4 CH8 CH16 CH4 CH8 A .7 (57 .7) .43 (61 .7) .75 (69 .9) .96 (75 .) 3 .5 (89 .4) 3 .88 (98 .6) .43 (61 .7) .70 (68 .6) .80 (71 .1) .96 (75 .) CH16 CH4 CH8 CH16 CH4 CH8 CH16 CH4 CH8 CH16 CH4 CH8 CH16 3 .48 (88 .4) 3 .88 (98 .6) .13 (54 .1) .55 (64 .8) 3 .03 (77 .0) 3 .3 (8 .0) 3 .83 (97 .3) 1 .79 (45 .5) .17 (55 .1) .36 (59 .9) .73 (69 .3) 3 .9 (83 .6) 3 .67 (93 .) .8 (57 .9) 3 .9 (83 .6) 3 .55 (90 .) 3 .83 (97 .3) .17 (55 .1) .73 (69 .3) 3 .35 (85 .1) 3 .67 (93 .) .74 (69 .6) CH8 1 .48 (63 .0) CH4 CH8 CH16 CH4 CH8 CH16 1 .98 (50 .3) .35 (59 .7) .90 (73 .7) .8 (57 .9) .73 (69 .3) 3 .78 (96 .0) 11/16 1 1 5/8 11/16 1 1 5/8 1 5/8 11/16 1 1 1/16 1 5/8 11/16 1 1 5/8 11/16 1 1/16 1 5/8 11/16 1 1 5/8 1 B 11/16 1 1 5/8 11/16
CH Series
A B flat
6000 (413)
5000 (344) 4700 (33)
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 5 (0 .35) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Designator 1/3 1 5 10 5
6000 (413)
4900 (337) 4600 (316) 6000 (413) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) 4600 (316) 4400 (303)
Example: SS-CHS-1/3
6000 (413)
5000 (344) 6000 (413) 5100 (351) 4800 (330) 4400 (303) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 4600 (316) 4600 (316) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 6000 (413) 4300 (96) 3700 (54)
Check valves are designed for
directional flow control only. Swagelok check valves should never be used as code safety relief devices.
SS-CHM8STSS-CHVCO4SS-CHVCO8SS-CHVCO1SS-CHVCO16SS-CHVCR4SS-CHVCR8SS-CHVCR1-
See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 106-1, DIN 999, JIS B003 .
Check Valves
13
Dimensions
CP and CPA Series

A D flat
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/ in .
Basic Ordering Number SS-4CP4SS-8CP4SS-4CPSS-8CPSS-4CP6SS-4CP5SS-8CP5SS-4CP4-RTSS-4CP-RTSS-4CPA4SS-4CPASS-8CPASS-4CPA-RTSS-8CPA-RT-
Dimensions, in . (mm) Series 4CP 8CP 4CP 8CP 4CP 8CP 4CP A .41 (61 .) 3 .71 (94 .) 1 .6 (41 .1) .8 (57 .9) .9 (58 .) 1 .75 (44 .4) .83 (71 .9) .54 (64 .5) 1 .6 (41 .1) .98 (75 .7) 1 .6 (41 .1) .56 (65 .0) 1 .6 (41 .1) .56 (65 .0) D 3/4 1 1/16 9/16 7/8 3/4 3/4 1 1/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 9/16 7/8 9/16 7/8
Basic ordering numbers specify stainless steel material . To order brass, replace SS with B in the basic ordering number . Example: B-4CP4-
Fixed Cracking Pressure, CP Series Female NPT Male NPT Female/male NPT Male/female NPT Female ISO Male ISO Female NPT Male NPT Male ISO
CP Series
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Designator 1/3 1 10 5
Adjustable Cracking Pressure, CPA Series 4CPA 8CPA 4CPA 8CPA
Example: B-4CP4-1/3
See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 106-1, DIN 999, and JIS B003 .
CPA Series
To order, add a cracking pressure range designator to the basic ordering number .
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 3 to 50 (0 .1 to 3 .5) 50 to 150 (3 .5 to 10 .4) 150 to 350 (10 .4 to 4 .) 350 to 600 (4 . to 41 .4) Designator 3 50 150 350
Example: SS-4CPA4-3
Check valves are designed
for directional flow control only. Swagelok check valves should never be used as code safety relief devices.
14
Check Valves

Seal Materials (All Series)
Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard in 316 stainless steel valves; Buna N O-rings are standard in brass valves . Other elastomer seals (poppet bonding material and O-ring) are available . To order, insert the seal material designator into the valve ordering number .
Seal Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Neoprene Designator -BU -EP -VI -NE Temperature Rating F (C) 10 to 50 (3 to 11) 50 to 300 (45 to 148) 10 to 375 (3 to 190) 40 to 50 (40 to 11)
Sour Gas Valves (CH Series)

CH series valves are available for sour gas service . Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 .
Technical Data
Pressure Rating at 70F (20C) 5000 psig (344 bar) Temperature Rating 50 to 300F (45 to 148C) Nominal Cracking Pressures 1/3, 1, and 5 psi (0 .03, 0 .07, and 0 .35 bar) End Connections 1/4, 3/8, and 1/ in . Swagelok tube fittings Materials of Construction Body, poppetalloy 400/B164 Sealsethylene propylene Backup ringPTFE Springalloy X-750/AMS 5699 All other materials and lubricant same as standard product . See Materials of Construction, page 5 .
10 to 400F (3 to 04C) for CH series .
Example: B-C-VI-1/3 Additional seal materials are available . Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for details .
Special Alloys (All Series)

Springs of alloy 400 or alloy C-76 are available in some sizes . Valve bodies of alloy 400, carbon steel, aluminum, or other alloys are available in some sizes . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information .
To order, replace SS with M and insert -SG into the ordering number . Example: M-CHS4-SG-1/3
PTFE-Coated Springs (C, CA, CP, and CPA Series)

Springs with PTFE coating are available in some sizes . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information .
Valves With ECE R110-Type Approval (CH Series)

Stainless steel CH series check valves with Buna C seals are available with ECE R110-type approval for use in alternative fuel service .
Temperature rating: 40 to 185F (40 to 85C) Pressure rating within the range: 3770 psig (60 bar)
Inlet Gaskets (2C, 4C, 6C, and 8C Series)

PTFE-coated 316 stainless steel inlet gaskets are available for C, 4C, 6C, and 8C series valves to reduce the possibility of dislodging the O-ring in systems where pressure surges, shock, or pulses occur . Gaskets are standard in 6C and 8C series valves with cracking pressures greater than 50 psi (3 .5 bar) . To order an inlet gasket, if it is not standard, insert -FG into the valve ordering number . Example: SS-4C-FG -1
To order, add -11670 to a standard valve ordering number . Example: SS-CHS8-1/3-11670

Every C, CA, and CH series check valve with VCR or VCO end connections is processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C . To order special cleaning and packaging for C, CA, and CH series check valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the ordering number . Example: SS-C-1/3-SC11
Deflector Cap (CP and CPA Series)

A polyethylene deflector cap is available for CP and CPA series valves with male NPT end connections . The deflector cap deflects flow from direct contact with personnel and prevents atmospheric contaminants from entering the valve . The deflector cap screws easily onto the male NPT outlet end of the valve . Maximum rating is 300 psig at 100F (0 .6 bar at 37C) . To order, insert -DG for a green cap or -DR for a red cap into the ordering number . Example: SS-4CPA-DR-3

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygenenriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13 .
Check Valves
15
Maintenance Kits
C, CP, CA, and CPA Series Seal Kits
Kits contain O-ring and instructions. Select a basic kit ordering number and add an O-ring material designator. Uniform O-ring size and durometer are provided for reference only. Example: VI70-4C-K4
Uniform Basic Kit Valve O-ring Ordering Series Size Durometer Number Fixed Cracking Pressures: 1/3, 1, 10, and 25 psi
(0.03, 0.07, 0.69, and 1.8 bar)
CH Series Seal Kits

Kits contain bonded poppet, body seal O-ring, PTFE backup ring, and instructions. Select a basic kit ordering number and add a seal material designator. Example: SS-3K-CH4-VI
Valve Series CH4 CH8 CH16 Seal Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Neoprene Valve Body Material 316 SS Alloy 400 316 SS Alloy 400 316 SS Basic Kit Ordering Number SS-3K-CH4M-3K-CH4SS-3K-CH8M-3K-CH8SS-3K-CH16Designator BN EP VI NE
2C, 4C, 4CP 6C, 8C 8CP 12C, 16C CA, 4CPA 8CPA CA, 4CPA 8CPA
009 111 110 114 009 110 009 110 70
70-4C-K4 70-8C-K4 70-8CP-K4 70-14C-K4 70-4C-K4 70-8CP-K4 90-4C-K4 90-8CP-K4
Adjustable Cracking Pressures: 3 to 150 psi (0.21 to 10.4 bar) 70
Adjustable Cracking Pressures: 150 to 600 psi (10.4 to 41.4 bar) 90
Not applicable to PTFE O-rings. To order PTFE seal kits, omit the
durometer number. Example: T-4C-K4
Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings have a durometer of 75. Silicone O-rings size 009 have a durometer of 80; silicone O-rings size 110
have a durometer of 70.
O-ring Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Neoprene
Designator BU EP VI NEO
Additional seal materials are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
CA, 8C, and 16C Series Metal Gasket Kits

Kits contain PTFE-coated gasket(s) and instructions. Select a basic kit ordering number and add a gasket material designator. Example: SS-8C-K6
Valve Series 2C, 4C (1 gasket) 6C, 8C (1 gasket) 12C, 16C (1 gasket) CA (1 inlet gasket, 1 outlet gasket) Basic Kit Ordering Number -4C-K6 -8C-K6 -14C-K6 -4CA-K6 Gasket Material 316 SS Alloy 400 Aluminum Designator SS M A
Not available for 6C, 8C, and CA series valves. Not available for 2C, 4C, 6C, 8C, and CA series
valves.
Gasket is available for 2C, 4C, 6C, and
8C series valves for use in systems where pressure surges, shock, or pulses occur and is required in 6C and 8C series valves with 50 psi (3.5 bar) or higher spring cracking pressure.
Maintenance Kits
C, CP, CA, and CPA Series Spring Kits
Kits contain spring, two cracking pressure labels, and instructions . Select a basic kit ordering number and add a spring material designator . Example: 302-4C-K-1/3 To order a kit with a PTFE-coated spring, add T to the kit ordering number . Example: 30-4C-K-1/3T
Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) C, 4C 4CP 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) 1/3 (0 .03) 6C, 8C, 8CP 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) 1/3 (0 .03) 1C, 16C 1 (0 .07) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Basic Kit Ordering Number -4C-K-1/3 -4C-K-1 -4C-K-10 -4C-K-5 -8C-K-1/3 -8C-K-1 -8C-K-10 -8C-K-5 -14C-K-1/3 -14C-K-1 -14C-K-10 -14C-K-5 8CPA CA, 4CPA Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 3 to 50
(0 .1 to 3 .5)
Valve Series
Valve Series
Basic Kit Ordering Number -4CA-K-3 -4CA-K-50 -4CA-K-150 -4CA-K-350 -8CA-K-3 -8CA-K-50 -8CA-K-150 -8CA-K-350
Spring Material 30 SS Alloy 400
Designator 30 M
Not available for CA or CPA series valves .
50 to 150
(3 .5 to 10 .4)
150 to 350
(10 .4 to 4 .)
350 to 600
(4 . to 41 .4)
3 to 50
(0 .1 to 3 .5)
50 to 150
(3 .5 to 10 .4)
150 to 350
(10 .4 to 4 .)
350 to 600
(4 . to 41 .4)
CH Series Spring Kits

Kits contain spring, two cracking pressure labels, and instructions . Select a basic kit ordering number and add a cracking pressure designator . Example: 30-13K-CH4-1/3
Valve Series CH4 CH8 CH16 Valve Body Material 316 SS Alloy 400 316 SS Alloy 400 316 SS Basic Kit Ordering Number 30-13K-CH4M-13K-CH430-13K-CH8M-13K-CH830-13K-CH16Cracking Pressure psi (bar) 1/3 (0 .03) 1 (0 .07) 5 (0 .35) 10 (0 .69) 5 (1 .8) Male NPT
CP and CPA Series Deflector Cap Kits

Each kit contains five polyethylene deflector caps in red or green .
Kit Ordering Number Red Green
Designator 1/3 1 5 10 5
1/4 in . P-4CP4-K1-RD P-4CP4-K1-GR 1/ in . P-8CP4-K1-RD P-8CP4-K1-GR
VCR, VCO, SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., MI August 008, R7 MS-01-176
www.swagelok.com
Compact, High-Flow Gas Re gulators
HF Se r ie s
Precise pressure control Tamper-free design High-purity design Preset and adjustable dome-loaded models
Compact, High-Flow Gas Regulators
Features
Compact, high-flow design Less than half the size of conventional diaphragm Ultrahigh-purity design Tied poppet for clean operation and positive shutoff All-welded designno seals to atmosphere 5 in. Ra electropolished finish 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body Choice of end connection/mounting styles 1/4 in. VCR split-nut connections 1/4 and 3/8 in. butt weld connections IGC II surface-mount
pressure regulators
Flows up to 300 std L/min Innovative gas-actuated pressure-sensing assembly Low supply-pressure effect ensures precise pressure
control
Low droop eliminates the need for adjustment in many
systems
Outlet tolerates maximum rated inlet pressure without
damage
Self-centering poppet Minimizes outlet pressure creep Tamper-free design Reduces potential of improper adjustment Simplifies installation
Swagelok HF series gas pressure regulators use a gasactuated pressure-sensing assembly to precisely control outlet pressure. A slight decrease or increase in the outlet pressure causes the pressure-sensing assembly to expand or contract, respectively. The expansion or contraction of the pressure-sensing assembly moves the poppet to provide precise pressure control.
Models
Preset Pressure Regulators
Preset pressure models are factory-charged with an inert gas mix to deliver 10, 20, 30, 50, or 80 psig (0.68, 1.3, 2.0, 3.4, or 5.5 bar) outlet pressures.
Dome-Loaded Pressure Regulators

Dome-loaded regulators may be adjusted during operation using a pilot regulator or can be factory-charged to deliver 10, 20, 30, or 50 psig (0.68, 1.3, 2.0, or 3.4 bar) outlet pressures.
Point-of-Use Models (HFD3B and MSM-HFD3B Models) Cylinder Model (HFS4A Model)
HFD3B Model VCR split-nut option
Inline Point-of-Use Model (HFS4B Model)
MSM-HFD3B Model IGC II modular surface-mount
Compact Inline Point-of-Use Model (HFS3B Model)
Regulator Calibration
Preset pressure regulators are calibrated with filtered nitrogen at 1 std L/min flow rate.
For outlet pressures up to 85 psig (5.8 bar), the inlet
pressure is calibrated at 100 psig (6.8 bar).

For outlet pressures greater than 85 psig (5.8 bar), the inlet
pressure is calibrated at 160 psig (11 bar).
Technical Data
Pressure Rating psig (bar) Outlet Inlet (p2) (p1) Range Temperature Rating F (C) Operating Bakeout SupplyPressure Effect (SPE) Preset HFS4A HFS4B HFS3B Vacuum to 3000
(206)
Model Number
Flow Capacity std L/min
Internal Volume with 1/4 in. Butt Orifice Size Weld Ends in. (mm) in.3 (cm3)
Preset Outlet Pressure psig (bar)
0.4 Vacuum to 150

(10.3)
0.1
200 300
0.090 (2.3) 0.97 (15.9)
80 (5.5) 10 (0.68) 20 (1.3) 30 (2.0) 50 (3.4)
10 to 150
(23 to 65)
302 (150)
0.9 0.2 1.3
Vacuum to 1000
(68.9)
0.120 (3.0) 200 0.40 (6.6)
Adjustable Dome-Loaded HFD3B MSM-HFD3B Vacuum to 1000

(68.9)
Vacuum to 150
(10.3)
10 to 150
(23 to 65)
0.28 (4.7) 302 (150) 1.6 0.2 200 0.120 (3.0) 0.24 (3.9)
10 (0.68) 20 (1.3) 30 (2.0) 50 (3.4)
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information. Operating ranges for 10 and 20 psig (0.68 and 1.3 bar) preset HFS4B models are limited to 1000 and 2000 psig (70 and 137 bar) inlet pressure, respectively,
due to the calibration method specified on page 2. To increase the operating range, a special calibration is available.
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Assembly and Packaging Performed in Class 100 work areas; regulators are individually bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra)
Cleaning Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system
Testing
Inboard helium 5 in. (0.13 m) average, machine leak tested to a finished and rate of 1 109 electropolished std cm3/s
Wetted Component 1 Body (inlet, outlet) 2 Support housing 3 Face plate 4 Diaphragm 5 Fill screw 6 Fill screw gasket 7 Stem 8 Poppet-retaining wafer 9 Poppet Poppet port seal 10 (not shown) Alloy 625 / AMS 5879 316L SS / ASTM A479 Nickel 200 / ASTM B160 316L SS / ASTM A479 Alloy X-750 / ASTM B637 PCTFE / AMS 3650 Nickel 200 / ASTM B160 316L SS VIM-VAR / ASTM A479 Material / Specification
1 2 6
Flow
4 7 9 8
Flow Data
HFS4A Model HFS4B Model
100 psig Inlet Pressure
Outlet Pressure, psig
Inlet Pressure 100 psig 1000 psig 2000 psig
Air flow, std L/min
Outlet Pressure, bar
Air flow, std L/min
HFS3B, HFD3B, MSM-HFD3B Models

100 psig Inlet Pressure
Calculating Outlet Pressures for Other Inlet Pressures

A change in inlet pressure will have an inverse effect on the outlet pressure. The adjusted outlet pressure is a function of the supply-pressure effect (SPE) and can be calculated by the equation: p 4 = p3 + ([p1 p2]/100) SPE where: p 4 = adjusted outlet pressure p 3 = initial outlet pressure p 1 = initial inlet pressure p 2 = new inlet pressure
Air flow, std L/min
Dimensions
Preset Pressure Regulators

HFS4A and HFS4B Models
2.37
(60.2)
3.25
(82.6)
0.38
(9.5)
2.04
(51.8)
HFS3B Model
2.12
(53.8)
2.87
(72.9)
0.50 (12.7) 1.50 (38.1)
Dome-Loaded Pressure Regulators

1.34
(34.0)
HFD3B Model
M5 0.8-6H air inlet
Four mounting holes, M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) deep, located 45 from center line, on a 1.00 in. (25.4 mm) bolt circle. M5 0.8-6H holes are compatible with 10-32 mounting screws.
2.30
(58.4)
0.44
(11.2)
0.71 (18.0)
2.78
(70.6)
MSM-HFD3B Surface-Mount Model

1.88
(47.8)
M5 0.8-6H air inlet
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
Four through holes, 0.22 (5.6) dia
Create a regulator ordering number by adding the designators as shown below.
SS HFS4A
Body Material
316L VIM-VAR stainless steel
HVCR4 P 80
Preset Outlet Pressure
All models except HFS4A 10 = 10 psig (0.68 bar) 20 = 20 psig (1.3 bar) 30 = 30 psig (2.0 bar) 50 = 50 psig (3.4 bar) HFS4A model only 80 = 80 psig (5.5 bar)
Model
HFS4A HFS4B HFS3B HFD3B MSM-HFD3B = = = = = Preset cylinder Preset inline point-of-use Preset compact inline point-of-use Dome-loaded, point-of-use Dome-loaded, point-of-use surface-mount
Process
Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average
Poppet Material
None = PCTFE V = Polyimide
End Connections
HVCR4 = 1/4 in. high-flow VCR gland (all except HFD3B) VCR4 = 1/4 in. VCR gland (HFD3B only) BW4 = 1/4 in. tube butt weld BW6 = 3/8 in. tube butt weld (HFS4 only) None = C-seal surface-mount (MSM-HFD3B only)
Swagelok VCR split-nut assemblies must be ordered
separately. See below.
Swagelok VCR Split-Nut Assemblies

Swagelok VCR split-nut technology offers:
Flexibility of inventory Shorter end-to-end dimensions Rotatable, nonwelded end connections.
Male split-nut assembly ordering number: SS-4-VCR-4-SN
Female split-nut assembly ordering number: SS-4-VCR-1-SN
When ordering a regulator with VCR end connections, VCR split-nut assemblies must be ordered separately. VCR split-nut assemblies are field assembled. To order, select the ordering number for the male or female assemblies.
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company 1999, 2003, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI February 2007, R3 MS-01-156
www.swagelok.com
Convoluted-Bore PTFE Hose

Coref lex Se r ie s C - CON
Features
304 SS overbraid Convoluted PTFE core
65 to 450F (53 to 230C)
300 series stainless steel overbraid: Protects core from abrasion Enhances hose pressure rating. Optional silicone cover: Smooth, noncontaminating, easy Optional PET polyester film hose
temperature rating
Convoluted-bore PTFE core: Chemically inert Helical convolutions promote
identification tag:
Easy to read; includes hose
drainability
Low-profile design provides higher
to-clean surface
Provides insulation from internal
flow
Nonaging, nonstick surface Nonabsorbent; will not impart taste
system fluid temperature extremes.

316 stainless steel end connections
ordering number plus up to five lines of customer-specified text.

Can be autoclaved and sterilized;
or odor.
Drains easily Lightweight, easy to bend Can be autoclaved and sterilized Optional carbon black PTFE core
with 304 stainless steel radially crimped collars

Sanitary end connections: Heat traceable 316L stainless steel Surface finish not to exceed 15 in.
does not hinder hose flexibility.
Product/Material Approvals
FDA 21CFR Part 177.1550 USDA USP Class VI 3-A
(0.38 m) Ra
Internally chamferedsmooth
available for applications that require static dissipation
transition between hose and end connections.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8) Hose ID in. (mm) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) Hose OD in. (mm) 0.76 (19.3) 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5) 2.03 (51.6) 2.46 (62.5) Static Temperature Bend Radius Range in. (cm) F (C) 2.50 (6.35) 3.00 (7.62) 5.50 (14.0) 6.00 (15.2) 7.50 (19.0) 65 to 450
(53 to 230)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6) 700 (48.2) 525 (36.1)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6000 (413) 4400 (303) 3000 (206) 2800 (192) 2100 (144)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.19 (0.28) 0.27 (0.40) 0.39 (0.58) 0.75 (1.1) 0.98 (1.5)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for elevated pressure-temperature ratings.
Additional Considerations
PTFE is a permeable material. Gases, vapors, and liquids can migrate through the PTFE core. The rate of permeation is affected by many application-specific variables.
Thermal cycling of hose may
affect its ability to maintain a leak-tight seal. Testing should be performed to verify suitability in actual operating conditions.
Testing, Cleaning, and Packaging

Every C-CON hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature. Each hose is cleaned of any assembly debris and hand wiped clean. Silicone covers are wiped clean with a 50 % isopropyl alcohol / 50 % water mixture. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Certification of Compliance (Hose)FDA, USDA, USP
Class VI, and 3-A compliant, including PTFE lot number.

Material Test Report (End Connection)Certifies material
is type 316L or 316 stainless steel and lists bar stock chemical composition. Heat lot and ordering number are provided for full traceability.
Proof Pressure Test CertificateCertifies that each hose
passed pressure testing.
08 CC 11 EP 11 EP MT - 48
1 Nominal Hose Size, in.
08 12 16 24 32
= = = = =
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
3 1st End Connection 5 2nd End Connection
4 Electropolish 1st End Connection 6 Electropolish 2nd End Connection
2 Hose Series
CC = C-CON convoluted PTFE hose CB = C-CON convoluted PTFE hose with static dissipative core SJC = C-CON convoluted PTFE hose with silicone cover SJB = C-CON convoluted PTFE hose with static dissipative core and silicone cover
End connection size matches nominal hose size except as noted below. 02 = Female JIC 03 = Male NPT 06 = Female NPT 07 = Female NPT union 08 = Male NPT union 10 = Kwik-Clamp 10L = Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 10L45 = Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 10U = Step-up Kwik-Clamp 10UU = Step-up Kwik-Clamp, 1 in. barb 2 in. face 11 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 11L = Mini Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 11L45 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 11U = Step-up Kwik-Clamp 12 = 150 lb lap joint flange 16 = Female cam and groove 17 = Male cam and groove 32RNG = Tube stub, no hex or groove (annealed) 41 = Tube butt weld
1 in. for 1/2 and 3/4 in. hoses. 1 1/2 in. for 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. hoses; 2 in. for 1 1/2 in. hoses; 2 1/2 in. for 2 in. hoses. Not available for 1, 1 1/2, and 2 in. hoses. 3/4 in. for 1/2 in. hoses; not available for 3/4, 1, 1 1/2, and 2 in. hoses.
Omit for standard finish. EP = Electropolishing

7 Hose Identification Tag
Omit for no tag. MT = PET polyester film tag (available for CC and CB hose only) PT = PET polyester film hose tag encapsulated in platinum-cured silicone (available for SJC and SJB hose only) Specify color and text; see Hose Identification Tag, below.
8 Overall Length Add length in inches.
Hose Identification Tag

Example Tag Specification
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Color 08CC11EP11EPMT-48 ABC Company Process Line Building 2 DOM: 1/1/2008 Telephone Black
Qualified personnel should

perform welding.
PTFE core hose should not

exceed 450F (230C).
Standard colors: black, blue, gray, green, orange, red, white, yellow.
Swagelok, CoreflexTM Swagelok Company 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2008, R1 MS-02-351
www.swagelok.com
Copper Tubing
Features
1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. outside diameter seamless tubing ASTM B75 99.9 % pure 050 temper (light annealed)
Material Standards
UNS C12200/DHP ASTM B75
Chemical Composition
Element Copper Phosphorous Composition wt. % 99.90 min 0.015 to 0.040
Nominal OD, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 0.030 0.035 0.049 Ordering Number CU-T4-S-030-10 CU-T4-S-030-50 CU-T6-S-035-10 CU-T6-S-035-50 CU-T8-S-049-10 CU-T8-S-049-50 Nominal Length, ft 10 50 10 50 10 50 Product Form Straight Coil Straight Coil Straight Coil Weight lb/ft 0.080 0.145 0.269 Allowable Working Pressure, psig 1380 1160 1220
Pressure Ratings
See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107, for complete pressure ratings.
Tools and Accessories

See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169, for more information.
Tube Fittings
See the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140, for more information.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company, Printed in U.S.A., GLI, February 2007, R4, MS-01-160-SCS
www.swagelok.com
D iaphragm Valve s
for Atomic L aye r D e position
Atomic L aye r D e position (A LD) D ia phragm Val ve s

Ultrahigh cycle life with high-speed actuation Cv range from 0.27 to 0.62 Up to 392F (200C) capability with thermal actuators Electronic actuator position-sensing option Suitable for ultrahigh-purity applications with 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body VCR, tube butt weld, and modular surface-mount end connections
Diaphragm Valves for Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD)
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ordering Information and Dimensions Two-Port Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Modular Surface-Mount Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Multiport and Elbow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Multivalve Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Features
Normally closed and normally open
pneumatic actuation
Flow coefficients of 0 .7 to 0 .6
standard; custom flow coefficients available

Two-port straight and elbow
configurations
Two-, three- and four-port multiport
valves and multivalve manifolds

Two- and three-port modular surface-
mount valves in 1 .15 in . (ALD3 series only) and 1 .5 in . platforms

C-seal design (all valves) W-seal design (ALD3 series only) VCR, H Type VCR, and tube butt
weld end connections in 1/4, 3/8, and 1/ in . and 6, 10, and 1 mm sizes
Diaphragm
Elgiloy
Actuators
Standard
Pneumatic actuator for high-speed and repeatable actuation Capable of valve opening or closing time of less than 5 ms Factory-set flow adjusting mechanism ensures precise and
material for strength and corrosion resistance
Optimized, patent-pending design for ultrahigh cycle life
Seat
Fully contained seat design High-purity grade PFA, fully fluorinated Ultrahigh cycle life Broad range of chemical compatibility Excellent resistance to swelling and contamination High-integrity seat seal performance
consistent Cv from valve to valve

Optional electronic actuator-position sensor verifies open
position of pneumatically actuated valves

Optional solenoid pilot valve for electronic control of high-
speed actuation
Thermal
Same performance and options as standard actuator with the following additional features:
Includes thermal isolation coupling for thermal applications Limits conductive heat transfer from the body to the actuator Provides a more uniform valve body temperature to reduce
Body
Body seal provides ultrahigh cycle life 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body material for ultrahigh-
purity applications
Fully swept flow path minimizes entrapment areas facilitates purging maximizes flow capacity Optional body holes to accommodate heater cartridges
cold spots
Significantly reduces electrical power required to heat the valve Extends the life of the actuator in applications where the
body is heated
1 Component Pneumatic actuator assembly Cylinder, cap Pistons Base Flow adjusting mechanism Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Aluminum Powdered metal 300 series SSnormally open; aluminumnormally open and normally closed Powdered metal 300 series SSnormally open; nonenormally closed 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM S17700 316 SS/A479 Carbon-filled PTFE
O-rings Springs Button Bushing 2 Thermal isolation coupling 316 SS/A479 housing (thermal model only) 3 Thermal isolation coupling S17400 stem (thermal model only) 4 Bonnet nut 316 SS/A479 5 Bonnet S17400 6 Diaphragm Elgiloy/AMS 5876 7 Seat High-purity PFA Type II/D3307 8a Body 316L VIM-VAR SS/SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity 8b Welded VCR end connections 316L VAR SS/SEMI F20-0305 High-Purity Lubricant PTFE-based
Wetted components listed in italics. 0 % minimum elongation allowed .
2 3 5 7 4 6
8b 8a
Normally Closed Actuator Shown
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification .
Cleaning Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Assembly and Packaging Performed in ISO Class 4 work areas; valves are double bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags . Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) Electropolished and finished to an average of 5 in . (0 .13 m) Testing ALD3 normally closed: Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 1 109 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals . ALD3 and ALD6 normally open and ALD6 normally closed: Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 1 108 std cm3/s at the seat and to a rate of 1 109 std cm3/s at the envelope and all other seals .
Technical Data
Working Pressure psig (bar) Valve Series ALD3 ALD6 Operating Burst Temperature Rating Internal Volume F (C) in .3 (cm3) Operating ShortFlow Tube Butt 2-Port Standard Thermal Term Coefficient Orifice Weld SurfaceActuator Actuator Bakeout (Cv) in . (mm) Body Mount Normally Closed Actuation 0 .086 0 .048 0 .16 0 .7 39 (00) (4 .1) (1 .4) (0 .79) 3 to 48 3 to 39 (valve (0 to 10) (0 to 00) 0 .6 0 .084 0 .3 open) 0 .6
(5 .8) (4 .3) (1 .4)
Pneumatic Actuator Actuation Pressure psig (bar) Air Displacement in .3 (cm3) 0 .04 50 to 90
(3 .5 to 6 .) (0 .69)
Vacuum to 145 (10 .0)
>300
(0)
0 .075
(1 .)
ALD3 ALD6
Vacuum to 145 (10 .0)
>300
(0)
3 to 48
(0 to 10)
3 to 39
(0 to 00)
Normally Open Actuation 0 .16 0 .7 39 (00) (4 .1) (valve 0 .3 open) 0 .6
(5 .8)
0 .086
(1 .4)
0 .048
(0 .79)
0 .07 70 to 90
(4 .9 to 6 .) (0 .44)
0 .6
(4 .3)
0 .084
(1 .4)
0 .046
(0 .75)
Recommended operating pressure of less than 35 psig ( .4 bar) for optimal cycle life . Actuator temperature is limited to 48F (10C); valve body temperature is rated to 39F (00C) . See pages 11 and 1 for maximum operating temperatures for products with an electronic actuator-position sensor, solenoid pilot valve, or both . Custom flow coefficients available; contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information . ALD3 series 1 .15 in . platform surface-mount valve:
Internal volume for -port body: 0 .078 in .3 (1 .3 cm3) Actuation pressure: normally closed, 60 to 90 psig (4 . to 6 . bar); normally open, 70 to 90 psig (4 .9 to 6 . bar) . Air displacement: 0 .03 in .3 (0 .49 cm3) .

Two-Port Valves
For a complete ordering number, add C for a normally closed actuator or NO for a normally open actuator .
Normally Closed Standard Actuator Normally Closed Thermal Actuator
(37 .8) (37 .8)
Normally Open Standard Actuator

Air inlet
1/8-7 NPT
ALD3 Bottom
(6 .9)
1 .49
1 .06
1 .49
Air inlet
1/8-7 NPT
1 .15
(8 .6)
Air inlet
(6 .9)
1 .06
10-3 (M5)
A A A
Four mounting holes, M5 0 .8-6H thread, 0 .5 (6 .4) deep, located 45 from center line, on a 1 .00 (5 .4) bolt circle . M5 0 .8-6H holes are compatible with 10-3 mounting screws .
(31 .8)
1 .5
(11 .)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .44
(31 .8)
1 .5
Butt Weld End Connections
Female VCR Fitting End Connections
Integral Male VCR Fitting End Connections
ALD6 Bottom
Dimensions, in . (mm) End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female VCR fitting Integral male VCR fitting Rotatable male VCR fitting Tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . long Tube butt weld, 0 .6 in . long Tube butt weld, 7 .6 mm long Female VCR fitting Female H type VCR fitting Female/rotatable male H type VCR fitting Rotatable male VCR fitting Rotatable male H type VCR fitting Tube butt weld, 0 .50 in . long Tube butt weld, 1 .7 mm long Size 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/4 0 .035 in . 1/4 0 .035 in . 6 1 mm 1/ in . 1/4 in . 1/4 in . 1/ in . 1/4 in . 3/8 0 .035 in . 1/ 0 .035 in . 10 1 mm 1 1 mm A Standard Actuator Ordering Number ALD3 Series 6LVV-ALD3FR4-P6LVV-ALD3VR4-P6LVV-ALD3MR4-P6LVV-ALD3BW4-P6LVV-ALD3BW4S-P6LVV-ALD3BW6M-PALD6 Series 6LVV-ALD6FR8-P6LVV-ALD6HFR4-P6LVV-ALD6HFR4HMR4-P6LVV-ALD6MR8-P6LVV-ALD6HMR4-P6LVV-ALD6BW6-P6LVV-ALD6BW8-P6LVV-ALD6BW10M-P6LVV-ALD6BW1M-P6LVV-ALD6TFR8-P6LVV-ALD6THFR4-P4 .16 (106) .78 (70 .6) 6LVV-ALD3TFR4-P6LVV-ALD3TVR4-P6LVV-ALD3TMR4-P6LVV-ALD3TBW4-P6LVV-ALD3TBW4S-P6LVV-ALD3TBW6M-P .78 (70 .6) 3 .50 (88 .9) 3 . (81 .8) .30 (58 .4) (standard (standard actuator) actuator) .78 (70 .6) 4 .50 (114) (thermal actuator) 4 . (107) (thermal actuator) 1 .74 (44 .) 1 .61 (40 .9) 1 .74 (44 .) Thermal Actuator Ordering Number Normally Closed Normally Open B
6LVV-ALD6THFR4HMR4-P- 3 .76 (95 .5) 3 .48 (88 .4) .96 (75 .) (standard (standard 6LVV-ALD6TMR8-Pactuator) actuator) 4 .16 (106) 6LVV-ALD6THMR4-P6LVV-ALD6TBW6-P6LVV-ALD6TBW8-P6LVV-ALD6TBW10M-P6LVV-ALD6TBW1M-P4 .76 (11) (thermal actuator) 4 .48 (114) (thermal actuator) .96 (75 .)
.5 (57 .)

Modular Surface-Mount Valves

C-Seal Design
For a complete ordering number, add C for a normally closed actuator or NO for a normally open actuator . ALD series 1 .5 in . platform modular surface-mount valves with C-seals are IGC II compatible . For more information about IGC II integrated gas components, see the IGC II Integrated Gas ComponentsSubstrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, and Assembly Hardware catalog, MS-0-135 .
W-Seal Design
Insert W into an ALD3 series ordering number as shown . Examples:
6LVV-MSM-ALD3E-W-P-C
for a 1 .15 in . -port valve with standard actuator

6LVV-MSM-ALD3T-W3-P-C
for a 1 .5 in . 3-port valve with thermal actuator

Normally Closed Standard Actuator 1.5 in. Platform
1 .15
(8 .6) (37 .8)
Normally Open Standard Actuator 1.5 in. Platform

Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT 1 .15
(8 .6)
Normally Closed Thermal Actuator, 1.125 in. Platform

1 .15
(8 .6)
1 .49
1 .15 Air inlet 10-3 (M5)

(8 .6)
Air inlet 10-3 (M5)
Four through holes, 0 .17 (4 .4) dia
A A
1.125 in. C-Seal Platform Bottom

1 .15
(8 .6)
1 .15
(8 .6)
(38 .)
1 .50
(38 .)
1 .50
Four through holes, 0 .17 (4 .4) dia
(38 .)
1 .50
(38 .)
1 .50
1.125 in. W-Seal Platform Bottom
Four through holes, 0 . (5 .6) dia
Four through holes, 0 . (5 .6) dia
1.5 in. C-Seal Platform Bottom
1.5 in. W-Seal Platform Bottom A, in . (mm)
SurfaceMount Platform
Ports
Standard Actuator Ordering Number 6LVV-MSM-ALD3E--P6LVV-MSM-ALD3E-3-P6LVV-MSM-ALD3--P6LVV-MSM-ALD3-3-P-
Thermal Actuator Ordering Number ALD3 Series 6LVV-MSM-ALD3ET--P6LVV-MSM-ALD3ET-3-P6LVV-MSM-ALD3T--P6LVV-MSM-ALD3T-3-PALD6 Series
Normally Closed C-Seal 3 .40 (86 .4) (standard) 4 .40 (11) (thermal) 3 .0 (76 .7) (standard) 4 .0 (10) (thermal) 3 .15 (80 .0) (standard) 4 .15 (105) (thermal) W-Seal 3 .40 (86 .4) (standard) 4 .40 (11) (thermal) 3 .70 (94 .0) (standard) 4 .70 (119) (thermal)
Normally Open C-Seal 3 .45 (87 .6) (standard) 4 .45 (113) (thermal) .74 (69 .6) (standard) 3 .74 (95 .0) (thermal) .87 (7 .9) (standard) 3 .87 (98 .3) (thermal) W-Seal 3 .45 (87 .6) (standard) 4 .45 (113) (thermal) 3 .4 (86 .9) (standard) 4 .4 (11) (thermal)
1 .15 in . 3 1 .5 in . 3
1 .5 in . 3
6LVV-MSM-ALD6-HF-P6LVV-MSM-ALD6-HF3-P-
6LVV-MSM-ALD6T-HF-P6LVV-MSM-ALD6T-HF3-P-

multiport or elbow flow path end connections for each port
Flow Paths
Select a flow path as viewed from the top of the valve . Insert the flow path designator in the valve ordering number, as shown on the next page .
indicates a port above the valve seat .

indicates a port below the valve seat .

Flow Path Ports Schematic Closed Open Designator D 4 E End Connection ALD3 Series 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 3 Designator
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order . Insert the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected .
1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting B 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall 3 C 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .6 in . (6 .6 mm) short tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 7 .6 mm (0 .30 in .) tube stub, 1 mm wall ALD6 Series 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting L
1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting
1/ in . female VCR fitting
1/ in . rotatable male VCR fitting 3/8 in . tube butt weld, 0 .50 in . (1 .7 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall

Dimensions
Top
Port 4 ALD3: 1 .06 (6 .9) square ALD6: 1 .5 (31 .8) square L Port 2 L M Port 1 0 .44 (11 .) Port 2
Dimensions in . (mm) End Connections ALD3 Series 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in, rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .6 in . (6 .6 mm) tube stub 6 mm tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub ALD6 Series 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting 1/ in . female VCR fitting 1/ in . rotatable male VCR fitting 3/8 in . tube butt weld, 0 .50 in . (1 .7 mm) tube stub L 1 .39
(35 .3)
M 1 .8
(3 .5)
Side
1 .39
(35 .3)
1 .63
(41 .4)
0 .87
( .1)
0 .76
(19 .3)
Port 1
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .70
(17 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
0 .76
(19 .3)
1 .39
(35 .3)
1 .1
(30 .7)
L Port 3
Port 5 Not shown: 4 bottom mounting holes same as -port body, page 4 . Exception: Valve with bottom port (port 5, N body), no mounting holes .
1 .48
(37 .6)
1 .30
(33 .0)
.08
(5 .8)
1 .90
(48 .3)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .95
(4 .1)
For all other valve dimensions, see Two-Port Valves, page 4 .
Build a multiport or elbow valve ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown .
6LVV ALD3 C 1 1 3 P C
Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Series, Actuator ALD3 = ALD3, standard ALD3T = ALD3, thermal ALD6 = ALD6, standard ALD6T = ALD6, thermal Flow Path See page 6 . End Connections Select a designator for each port on the valve . See page 6 . Actuation C = Normally closed NO = Normally open Process Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in . (0 .13 m) average Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5

Designator Material Series, actuator Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Port 4 end connection Port 5 end connection Process Actuation Normally closed ALD3, standard actuator -port, R pattern 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 6LVV-ALD3R22P-C 6LVV-ALD3TD1313P-NO 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel ALD3, thermal actuator 4-port, D pattern 1/4 in . tube butt weld 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld 1/4 in . female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Normally open Normally closed ALD6, standard actuator 3-port, A pattern 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting 6LVV-ALD6ADEDP-C
To order a multivalve manifold, select designators for:
flow path end connections for each port
Flow Paths
Select a flow path . Insert the flow path designator in the manifold ordering number, as shown on page 10 .
P1, P, and P3 designate port numbers . V1 and V designate valve numbers . Manifold Series ALD3 ALD6 Schematic
P2 V1 V2
Flow Path
V1 P3 P1 P2 V2
Designator 1V
P3
P1
P2
V1 V2 P1
P2
V2
ALD3
P1
V1
V
P3 P3
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order . Place the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected .
End Connection ALD3 Series, All Ports ALD6 Series, Port 2 Designator
1-valve, 3-port ALD6 monoblock -valve, 3-port double pattern
P2 P1 V1 P3
V1 P1
P2 P3
5V
V1
V1 P2 P3
ALD3
P1
V2 V1 P3
P2
P1 V2
1D
Side
Front
V2
1/4 in . female VCR fitting
1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall ALD6 Series, Ports 1 and 3 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting
1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting 3/8 in . tube butt weld, 0 .50 in . (1 .7 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change . 1V and 2V Multivalve Manifolds
Normally Closed Standard Actuators
B Port 2
(37 .8)
5V Multivalve Manifolds
Normally Open Standard Actuator
1 .49
1 .15
(8 .6)
dia
Port 2
L
(64 .5)
.54
Port 1
Port 3
Port 1 Port 3
L1
L1
(11 .)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .44
L4
L3
Bottom
C Port 1 Port 3 D
(31 .8)
Bottom
(40 .1)
1 .58
1 .5
Port 1
Port 3
Dimensions, in . (mm) A End Connection 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting 3/8 in . tube butt weld, 0 .50 in . (1 .7 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall Actuator B C D L1 .03
(51 .6)
Normally Normally Normally Normally Closed Open Closed Open ALD3 Series
L2 .66
(67 .6)
L3
L4
Standard 3 .3 (84 .3) 3 .00 (76 .) .73 (69 .3) .44 (6 .0) Thermal Thermal 4 .18 (106) 4 .18 (106) 3 .87 (98 .3) 3 . (81 .8) .94 (74 .7) 3 .87 (98 .3) 3 . (81 .8) .94 (74 .7) .46
(6 .5)
Standard 3 .3 (84 .3) 3 .00 (76 .) .73 (69 .3) .44 (6 .0)
1 .06
(6 .9)
.39
(60 .7)
3 .35
(85 .1)
Standard 3 .3 (84 .3) 3 .00 (76 .) .73 (69 .3) .44 (6 .0) Thermal 4 .18 (106) 3 .87 (98 .3) 3 . (81 .8) .94 (74 .7) ALD6 Series Standard 3 .67 (93 .) 3 .37 (85 .6) .86 (7 .6) .58 (65 .6) Thermal Thermal 4 .53 (115) 4 .53 (115) 4 .3 (107) 4 .3 (107) 3 .36 (85 .3) 3 .08 (78 .) 3 .36 (85 .3) 3 .08 (78 .) Standard 3 .67 (93 .) 3 .37 (85 .6) .86 (7 .6) .58 (65 .6)
1 .81
(46 .0)
.79
(70 .9)
.66
(67 .6)
3 .35
(85 .1)
Standard 3 .67 (93 .) 3 .37 (85 .6) .86 (7 .6) .58 (65 .6) Thermal 4 .53 (115) 4 .3 (107) 3 .36 (85 .3) 3 .08 (78 .) .59
(65 .8)
.79
(70 .9)
Standard 3 .67 (93 .) 3 .37 (85 .6) .86 (7 .6) .58 (65 .6) Thermal 4 .53 (115) 4 .3 (107) 3 .36 (85 .3) 3 .08 (78 .)
1 .5
(31 .8)
.03
(51 .6)
1 .18
(30 .0)
.18
(55 .4)
.39
(60 .7)
0 .90
( .9)
1 .81
(46 .0)
1 .81
(46 .0)
10
Dimensions
1D Multivalve Manifolds Standard Actuators
A L1 A
Side
End Connection 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld, 0 .30 in . (7 .6 mm) tube stub, 0 .035 in . wall
(37 .8)
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 3 .16 (80 .3) (standard actuator) 4 .16 (106) (thermal actuator) L1 1 .39
(35 .3)
0 .87
( .1)
L1
Top
L1
1 .49
Bottom
Build a multivalve manifold ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown .
6LVV A3T 1V 3 3 3 P A A
Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Series, Actuator A3 = ALD3, standard A3T = ALD3, thermal A6 = ALD6, standard A6T = ALD6, thermal Flow Path 1V = -valve, 2V = -valve, 5V = 1-valve, 1D = -valve, 3-port 3-port 3-port 3-port monoblock (ALD3 and ALD6) monoblock (ALD3 only) monoblock (ALD6 only) double pattern (ALD3 only) Actuation Add the designator for valve 1 followed by the designator for valve , if applicable . A = Normally closed NO = Normally open Process Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in . (0 .13 m) average Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
End Connections Select a designator for each port on the valve . See page 8 .

Designator Material Series, actuator Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Process Valve 1 actuation Valve actuation Normally closed Normally closed ALD3, standard actuator valve, 3-port monoblock, V 1/4 in . tube butt weld 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . tube butt weld 6LVV-A32V323P-AA 6LVV-A3T1D212P-ASNO 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel ALD3, thermal actuator valve, 3-port double pattern, 1D 1/4 in . female VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . female VCR fitting Normally closed with sensor Normally open ALD6, thermal actuator 1 valve, 3-port monoblock, 5V 1/4 in . female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in . rotatable male H type VCR fitting Normally closed 6LVV-A6T5VD1EP-A
Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01)
11

Valves with electronic actuator-position sensors (right), solenoid pilot valve assemblies (page 1), and heater cartridge holes (page 1) are available .
Electronic actuatorposition sensor
Electronic Actuator-Position Sensors

Transmit a signal to an electrical device indicating the open position of pneumatically actuated valves . Sensors and electrical connectors described below are third-party products .
Sensor Technical Information

Output 3-wire V (dc)transistor (current-sourcing) Normally open 10 to 30 V (dc) polarity protectedpulsed SCP 3 to 70C (10 to 158F) Output Function Voltage Operating Temperature
Solenoid pilot valve
Wiring Diagram
BN BU BK Load +
Factory-Assembled Electronic Actuator-Position Sensors

To order an electronic actuatorposition sensor factory assembled to a valve, add a designator to the valve ordering number . Examples: 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CS 6LVV-MSM-ALD6-HF-P-CSL
Sensor Electrical Connector Short pigtail Long cable with flying leads
Dimensions
Dimensions, in . (mm) Actuator Normally open A 1 .14 (9 .0) B 0 .75 (19 .0) 0 .8 (0 .8) C 0 .60 (15 .) 1 .18 (30 .0) Normally closed 1 .8 (3 .5)
Designator S SL
To order one option, add a designator to the valve ordering number . To order two or more options, add the designators in the sequence shown below .
A mating direct-current M8
3-wire push-on straight female connector is available . Ordering number: MS-CS-BALF-1
6LVV ALD3BW4-P-C S V H
Electronic actuator-position sensor Heater cartridge holes
Solenoid pilot valve assembly Examples: 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CH for a valve with heater cartridge holes 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CS for a valve with electronic actuatorposition sensor with short pigtail electrical connector 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CSLH for a valve with electronic actuatorposition sensor with long cable with flying leads electrical connector and heater cartridge holes 6LVV-A3T1V333P-AAV for a multivalve manifold with solenoid pilot valve assembly on valve 6LVV-A31V333P-ASVASV for a multivalve manifold with electronic actuator-position sensor with short pigtail electrical connector and solenoid pilot valve assembly on both valves

Solenoid Pilot Valve Assemblies
Fast-acting, high-flow solenoid pilot valve enhances ALD series valve response time . Includes tubing, connectors, and rotatable mounting bracket for installation versatility .
See illustration on page 11 for Solenoid pilot valve
Heater Cartridge Holes

Valves are available with holes in the body to accommodate heater cartridges .
Hole size: 1/8 in . through holes
assembly dimensions .
See table below for
for two-port, three-port, and elbow bodies; 1/8 by 1 in . deep holes for monoblock bodies .
Two-port and monoblock
Heater cartridge holes
technical information . For additional technical information, see MAC valve part number 34B-AAA-GDFC-1KT .
bodies feature two body holes; three-port and elbow bodies feature one body hole . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Solenoid Pilot Valve Technical Information

Component MAC valve 34B-AAA 4 V, 4 W Solenoid Pilot Valve Temperature rating: 50C (1F) maximum, continuous use Porting: M5 0 .8-6H thread, compatible with 10-3 screws Material: glass-filled nylon and nickel-plated brass Temperature rating: 80C (176F) Material: polyurethane Temperature rating: 100C (1F)
Ordering Information.
To order a valve with heater cartridge holes, add H to the ordering number . Examples: 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CH 6LVV-MSM-ALD6--P-CH
Push-toConnect Fitting Tubing
Factory-Assembled Solenoid Pilot Valves

To order a solenoid pilot valve factory assembled, add V to the ordering number . Examples: 6LVV-ALD3BW4-P-CV 6LVV-MSM-ALD6--P-CV In modular surface-mount systems, the solenoid pilot valve may interfere with adjacent components.
Solenoid Pilot Valves for Field Assembly

Ordering number for a solenoid pilot valve component only: MS-PVK-ALD3-MAC34BA
IGC, Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Limited Partnership MACTM MAC Valves, Inc . 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A . GLI June 008, R6 MS-0-301
www.swagelok.com
D iap h ragm Val ves
DL and DS Series
Packless, all-metal containment Working pressures from vacuum to 3500 psig (241 bar) Temperatures from 100 to 250F (73 to 121C)
DL and DS Series Diaphragm Valves Repetitive shutoff with fully contained softseat stem tip VCR, weld, gaugeable Swagelok tube fitting, NPT, and VCO end connections Bottom mounting and panel mounting standard
Features
DL Series
DL series diaphragm valves require just one-quarter turn of
the handle to actuate the valve from fully open to closed.

Position indicator ring provides visual confirmation that the
valve is fully open or closed.

Splined handle and actuator prevent handle slippage and
assure positive valve actuation.
DS Series
DS series diaphragm valves require approximately one and
one-half turns to operate from fully open to closed.

Flow coefficient of 0.30 for high-flow requirements.
SS-DLV51 Shown
Technical Data
Differential Pressure Back Flow Rating at Pressure Orifice Coefficient 70F Max at Temperature Internal Series in. (mm) (Cv) (20C) 70F (20C) Rating Volume 0.18 in.3 DL 0.14 0.156 3500 psig 1500 psig 100 to 250F max (4.0) (241 bar) (103 bar) (73 to 121C) DS 0.30 (2.9 cm3)
A 17-7 PH spring is available to increase the rating to 2500 psig (172 bar). To order, add
-PS to the ordering number. Example: SS-DLS4-PS

Flow Coefficient (Cv )
DS Series
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections. Cv for 6LV-DSBW4 valve is 0.25.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 1
Component 1 Set screw (DS series) 2 Rotary handle (DS series) Lever handle (DL series) Handle center (DL series) Handle insert (DL series) Nut (DL series) Indicator ring (DL Series) 3 Bonnet nut 4 Panel mount nut 5 Bonnet 6 Wiper ring 7 Actuator 8 Actuator button 9 Diaphragms (3) 10 Stem 11 Stem plug 12 Stem container 13 Stem insert 14 Spring 15 Gasket 16 Guide 17 Body Swagelok tube fitting, integral tube butt weld, tube socket/tube butt weld, and VCO end connections VCR and NPT end connections 316L SS/A479 PCTFE/D1430 316 SS/A313 PTFE-coated 316L SS/A240 Electropolished 316 SS/A479 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Aluminum 6061-T6/B211 Aluminum 2024-T4/B211 Sintered 316 SS 66 nylon/D4066 18-8 SS 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 Sintered 316 SS 316 SS/A479 Glass-filled PTFE 416 SS/A582 Brass 360/B16 316 SS/A240 316L SS/A479
Temperature F (C) 100 (73) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) Working Pressure psig (bar) 3500 (241) 2950 (203) 2800 (192)
13
17
316 SS or 316L SS/A479
Epoxy coated. Silver-plated threads. Molybdenum disulfide-based lubricant. Chrome-plated (DL series only).
DL and DS Series Diaphragm Valves
See Swagelok process specifications Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, and Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Cleaning Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals Assembly and Packaging Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged Process Designator None Process Specification Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) 20 in. (0.51 m) average, machine finished Testing
Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with Performed in ISO Class 4 a continuously monitored, work areas; valves are double deionized water, ultrasonic bagged and vacuum sealed in cleaning system cleanroom bags
Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 4 109 std cm3/s at 8 in. (0.20 m) the seat, envelope, average, machine and all seals finished and electropolished

End Connections Inlet/Outlet Tube butt welds Tube socket and tube butt welds
0.90
(22.9)
Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in.
DL Series Ordering Number 6LV-DLBW4 6LV-DLBW6
DS Series Ordering Number 6LV-DSBW4 6LV-DSBW6 SS-DSTW4 SS-DSTW6 SS-DSS4 SS-DSS6 SS-DSS6MM SS-DSS8MM SS-DSV51 SS-DSV51-VCR4 SS-DSVCR4V51 SS-DSVCO4 SS-DSVCR4
A in. (mm) 1.74 (44.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.75 (44.4) 1.81 (46.0) 2.46 (62.5) 2.58 (65.5) 2.46 (62.5) 2.53 (64.3) 2.76 (70.1) 2.54 (64.5) 2.54 (64.5) 2.00 (50.8) 2.30 (58.4)
Straight Patterns
1/4 and 3/8 in. SS-DLTW4 3/8 and 1/2 in. SS-DLTW6 1/4 in. SS-DLS4 SS-DLS6 SS-DLS6MM SS-DLS8MM SS-DLV51 SS-DLV51-VCR4 SS-DLVCR4V51 SS-DLVCO4 SS-DLVCR4 3/8 in. 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in.

1.74
(44.2)
Female VCR fittings Female to male VCR fitting Male to female VCR fitting VCO O-ring fittings
0.78
(19.8)
Male VCR fittings
3.12 panel hole (79.2) 0.41 open

(10.4)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. 1.87 1.71
(43.4) (47.5)
max
Angle Patterns
1.06
(26.9)
0.78 0.45
(11.4) (19.8)
panel 3.19 hole (81.0) 0.41 open

(10.4)
2.98
(75.7)
3.06
(77.7)
1.57
(39.9)
1.57
(39.9)
0.26
(6.6)
0.25
(6.4)
max
1.71
(43.4)
0.035
(0.9)
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
1/4 in. Tube Butt Welds

0.16
(4.1)
0.45
(11.4)
0.68
(17.3)
0.68 0.95
(24.1) (17.3)
0.95
(24.1)
3/8 1.00
(25.4)
10-32 mounting hole, 0.25 (6.4) deep (2)all straight-pattern valves 1/4
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size
DL Series Ordering Number
DS Series Ordering Number
1.00
(25.4)
1.13
(28.7)
Male/female NPT 1/4 in. SS-DLM4F4A SS-DSM4F4A
0.34
(8.6)
1/4 in. Tube Socket/ 3/8 in. Tube Butt Welds

Optional Stem Tip Materials
To order a valve with an optional stem tip material, insert a stem tip material designator after the series designator in the ordering number.
Stem Tip Material PTFE Polyimide Designator T V
Colored Handles
To order colored handles, add a color designator to the valve ordering number. Green is standard and requires no designator.
Handle Color Black Blue Orange Red White Yellow Designator -BK -BL -OR -RD -WH -YW
Example: 6LV-DLTBW4
Stem Replacement Kit

A stem replacement kit includes a stem-tip assembly, spring, guide ring, and installation instructions.
Stem Replacement Kit Ordering Number 6L-3AK-DS-KF 6L-3AK-DS-T 6L-3AK-DS-VL
Example: 6LV-DLBW4-RD
Stem Tip Material PCTFE PTFE Polyimide

Swagelok DL and DS series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order a DL or DS series valve with special processing in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01) and with a surface finish of 8 in. (0.20 m) Ra , add -P to the valve ordering number. Example: 6LV-DLBW4-P
Diaphragm Seal Kits

A diaphragm seal kit includes three diaphragms (one set), one gasket, and installation instructions. Ordering number: SS-3DK-DS

Multiport and Elbow Valves and Multivalve Manifolds

DL and DS series valves are available in multiport and elbow configurations; see the Swagelok Bellows- and DiaphragmSealed Multiport and Elbow Valves catalog, MS-02-85. Multivalve manifolds are also available; contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Swagelok, VCR, VCOTM Swagelok Company 17-7 PHTM AK Steel Corp. 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI May 2007, R9 MS-01-73
www.swagelok.com
D iap h ragm Val ves
LD Series
Working pressures up to 300 psig (20.6 bar) Shutoff, bulk-gas distribution, and isolation service Cast, forged, and bar stock stainless steel body material 1/4 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm end connections
LD Series Diaphragm Valves
Features
No springs or threads in wetted areas enable cleaner
Body Construction
Cast (1/2 and 1 in. Sizes)
Machined wetted surfaces in body are finished to an
operation.
Contoured flow passages allow high flow. Tied diaphragm design provides positive stem retraction.
average of 20 in. (0.51 m) Ra.

Optional electropolished body exteriors (ELD series) are
Replaceable Diaphragm/Stem Subassembly
available.
Optional tube extension interiors electropolished to an
average of 10 in. (0.25 m) Ra are available.
Forged (1/2 in. Size)

PCTFE stem tip insert
Design results in compact size, lower internal volume. Wetted surfaces are electropolished to an average of 5 in.
Welded Diaphragm Construction

Diaphragms are welded to stem to prevent leakage. Three diaphragms offer optimum combination of strength,
(0.13 m) Ra.
Bar Stock (1/2 and 1 in. Sizes)

Valve and tubular shapes are combined into one integrated,
flexibility, and cycle life.

Design provides all-metal fluid containment.
compact component.
Block bodies permit compact layout of bulk gas systems. Wetted surfaces are electropolished to an average of 5 in.
Unique Stem Tip Design

PCTFE stem tip insert promotes leak-tight shutoff. Compensating stem tip helps prevent damage from
(0.13 m) Ra.
overtightening.
Upper stem position indicates if valve is open or closed

Open
Closed
Closed
Union bonnet design prevents accidental disassembly
Unique clamp ring design improves cycle life
Tied diaphragm provides positive stem retraction
1/2 in. Size
1 in. Size
Valve Body Cast Forged Bar Stock Component 1 Handle Handle set screw 2 Bonnet nut Material Grade/ASTM Specification Polyester with 316 SS insert Alloy steel Silver-plated 316 SS/A479 Bronze High-carbon chrome steel 416 SS/A582 Alloy steel 316 SS/A479 Bronze High-carbon chrome steel Bronze High-carbon chrome steel High-carbon chrome steel
2 3 4
3 Thrust washer Actuator bearing (1 in. size) 4 Actuator 5 Spring washer 6 Bonnet Thrust washer (1 in. size) Bonnet bearing (1 in. size)
5 6 9a 9b 7 9c 9d 9e 9f 9 10 11
7 Upper stem 8 Clamp ring 9 Diaphragm/stem subassembly 9a Diaphragms (3) 9b Stem 9c Compression ring 9d Inner ring 9e Stem tip insert 9f Outer ring 10 Gasket 11 Body Swagelok tube fitting and pipe end connections VCR fitting end connections Tube extensions CF3M/ A351 316 SS/ A479
316 SS/A479 Brass/B16 See individual components below 316L SS/A240 316L SS/A479 Virgin PTFE 316L SS/A479 PCTFE/AMS 3650 316L SS/A479 PTFE-coated 316L SS/A240 316L SS/ A182 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A269 Molybdenum disulfide-base paste and dry film, petroleum lubricating grease 316L SS/ A479
Cast-body 1/2 in. size shown.
Lubricant
Testing
SC-11 Process
Every LD series diaphragm valve processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, is helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s.

Cast-Body Valves
All LD series cast-body diaphragm valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61, is available as an option for ELD series cast-body valves.
SC-01 Process
Every LD series diaphragm valve processed in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61, is helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 10 9 std cm3/s.
Forged-Body and Bar Stock Valves

All LD series forged-body and bar stock diaphragm valves are manufactured, cleaned, and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61. Cleaning in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C is available as an option.
Valve Body Temperature, F (C) 20 (28) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) Cast Forged and Bar Stock
Series LD cast body Wetted Surface Roughness Average (Ra) in. (m) avg 20 (0.51)body machined surfaces Swagelok Process Specification SC-11 SC-11 SC-01 SC-01
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6) 265 (18.2) 255 (17.5) 240 (16.5) 230 (15.8)
20 (0.51)body machined surfaces; ELD cast body 10 (0.25)tube extensions Forged body Bar stock body 5 (0.13)P process 5 (0.13)P process

1/2 in. Size
0.500 in. (12.7 mm) orifice, 2.8 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere ( p) psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min
(std L/min)
1 in. Size
1.125 in. (28.6 mm) orifice, 13 Cv
Water Flow U.S. gal/min
(L/min)
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere ( p) psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8)
Air Flow std ft3/min

(std L/min)

(L/min)
31 (870) 84 (2300) 148 (4100)
9 (34) 20 (75) 28 (100)
140 (3900) 390 (11 000) 690 (19 500)
41 (150) 92 (340) 130 (490)

Cast-Body Valves
Select an ordering number. To order optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for ELD series valves, add -DU to the ordering number. Example: 6L-ELD8-BBXX-DU
LD8 Series
2.25
(57.2)
LD16 Series
4.00
(102)
2.41
(61.2)
2.95
(74.9)
4.35
(110)
5.12
(130)
End Connections Type Swagelok tube fitting 12 mm Male VCR fitting Female NPT Female ISO 1/2 Tube extension, 3 in. (76.2 mm) long 3/4 12 18 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 0.049 in. 0.065 in. 1 mm 1.5 mm Size 1/2 in.
Ordering Number 6L-LD8-BBXX 6L-ELD8-BBXX 6L-LD8-DDXX 6L-ELD8-DDXX 6L-ELD8-CCXX 6L-LD8-EEXX 6L-LD8-FFXX 6L-ELD8-11XX 6L-ELD8-22XX 6L-ELD8-33XX 6L-ELD8-55XX
A in. (mm) End Connections Type
5.30 (135)
Size 3/4 in.
Ordering Number 6L-LD16-AAXX 6L-ELD16-AAXX 6L-LD16-BBXX 6L-ELD16-BBXX 6L-LD16-EEXX 6L-LD16-55XX 6L-ELD16-11XX 6L-ELD16-33XX 6L-LD16-88XX
A in. (mm) 8.28 (210) 8.46 (215) 8.63 (219)
4.58 (116) 5.61 (142) 8.82 (224) 8.79 (223) 8.82 (224) 8.79 (223) Tube extension, 3 in. (76.2 mm) long 1 23 25 Swagelok tube fitting
1 in. 25 mm 0.065 in. 1.5 mm 1.5 mm
10.9 (277)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
Cast-Body Valves with Purge Ports

Replace XX with BB for 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting inlet and outlet purge ports. Example: 6L-ELD8-BBBB Replace XX with BX for 1/4 in. integral male VCR fiting inlet purge port and no outlet purge port. Example: 6L-ELD8-BBBX Replace XX with XB for no inlet purge port and 1/4 in. integral male VCR fiting outlet purge port. Example: 6L-ELD8-BBXB
Purge Ports
Purge Port End Connections None 1/4 in. male VCR fittings None 1/4 in. male VCR fittings 3.40 (86.4) 1.83 (46.5) LD16 Series 1.35 (34.3) Integral male VCR fittings 2.16 (54.9) Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 0.88 (22.4) 1.69 (42.9)
A
No purge ports
LD8 Series
B

Forged-Body Valves
Select an ordering number. To order optional cleaning in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, remove -P from the ordering number. Example: 6L-ELD8-VVX
Bar Stock-Body Distribution Valves

Valves eliminate need for tee and cross fittings. Branches contain shutoff valves. Main line and branches are in same plane. Purge ports are 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fittings.
Select an ordering number. To order optional cleaning in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, remove P from the ordering number. Example: 6L-LDE-2B1-A
2.25
(57.2)
2.54
(64.5)
3.03
(77.0)
Double Horizontal Tee

Terminates main line in body.
Branch
End Connections Type Tube butt weld Tube extension, 3 in. (76.2 mm) long Rotatable male VCR fitting Female VCR fitting 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 Size 0.049 in. 0.049 in. 0.049 in. 0.049 in. 0.065 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in.
Ordering Number 6L-ELD8-VVX-P 6L-ELD8-WWX-P 6L-ELD8-33X-P 6L-ELD8-11X-P 6L-ELD8-22X-P 6L-ELD8-66X-P 6L-ELD8-77X-P
A in. (mm)
Branch
2.88 (73.2)
Main 5.34
(136)
8.86 (225) 10.0 (254) 5.43 (138) 4.09 (104)
90 2.25
(57.2)
3.29
(83.6)
Forged-Body Valves with Purge Ports

Replace X with M for 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting inlet and outlet purge ports. Example: 6L-ELD8-11M-P Replace X with MX for 1/4 in. integral male VCR fiting inlet purge port and no outlet purge port. Example: 6L-ELD8-11MX-P Replace X with XM for no inlet purge port and 1/4 in. integral male VCR fiting outlet purge port. Example: 6L-ELD8-11XM-P
Main 1/2 3/4 0.065 in. Tubing Size Branch 0.049 in. LD8 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting Series
2.63
(66.8)
Rotatable male VCR fitting

0.76
(19.3)
3.42
(86.9)
1.35
(34.3)
0.62
(15.7)
Protective cap
2.45
(62.2)
1.63
(41.4)
1.98
(50.3)
3.79 2.00
(96.3)
(50.8)
9.38
(238)
Ordering Number 6L-LDE-2B1P-A 6L-LDE-2H1P-A
Length of main and branch line tubing is 3 in. (76.2 mm).
Single Horizontal Cross

Directs main line flow through body.
Double Horizontal Cross

Directs main line flow through body.
Branch Main Main
Branch Main 3.29

(83.6)
Branch Main
45
5.34
(136)
90 2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
3.29
(83.6)
3.29
(83.6)
2.33
(59.2)
3.42 0.62
(15.7) (86.9)
0.62
(15.7)
1.63
(41.4)
7.58
(193)
7.58
(193)
1.63
(41.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
1.31
(33.3)
2.63 4.69
(119) (66.8)
9.38
(238)
Tubing Size Main 1/4 1/2 1/2 0.049 in. Branch 0.035 in. 0.049 in. Series
Ordering Number 6L-LDA-1A1P-A 6L-LDA-1B1P-A 6L-LDA-1L1P-A 6L-LDA-1H1P-A 3/4 1/2
Tubing Size Main 1/2 0.049 in. Branch 0.049 in. 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/2 0.065 in. 0.049 in. LD8 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/2 1 0.065 in. 0.049 in. 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting Series
Ordering Number 6L-LDC-1B1P-A 6L-LDC-1H1P-A 6L-LDC-2B1P-A 6L-LDC-2H1P-A 6L-LDC-3B1P-A 6L-LDC-3H1P-A
1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/2 0.049 in. 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/2 0.049 in. 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting
LD8
6L-LDA-2B1P-A 6L-LDA-2H1P-A 6L-LDA-3B1P-A 6L-LDA-3H1P-A
3/4
0.065 in.
0.065 in.

Bar Stock-Body Isolation Valves

Valves provide shutoff service for
G 45
bulk gas distribution systems.

Purge ports are 1/4 in. rotatable
male VCR fittings. Select an ordering number. To order optional cleaning in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, remove P from the ordering number. Example: 6L-LDF-1B1-A
Tubing Size Inlet 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 0.049 in. 0.065 in. 0.065 in. 0.065 in. 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 Outlet 0.049 in. 0.065 in. 0.065 in. 0.065 in. Ordering Number 6L-LDF-1B1P-A LD8 6L-LDF-2C1P-A 6L-LDS-2C1P-Q 6L-LDS-3D1P-Q LD16
B
J D H E C
F A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series A 8.28

(210)
B 2.33
(59.2)
C 2.00
(50.8)
D 1.63
(41.4)
E 0.62
(15.7)
F 1.53
(38.9)
J 2.25
(57.2)
3.30 (83.8) 3.42 (86.9) 5.31 (135)
8.42
(214)
2.45
(62.2)
9.46
(240)
3.50
(88.9)
2.69
(68.3)
3.00
(76.2)
0.61
(15.5)
2.63
(66.8)
4.00
(102)
Accessories
Diaphragm/Stem Subassembly-Kit
Includes replacement diaphragm/stem subassembly, gasket, and instructions. Ordering numbers: 6L-3K-LD8 for LD8 series; 6L-3K-LD16 for LD16 series.
Colored Handles
Green handles are standard.
Designators Handle Color Blue Black Brown Gold Orange Pink Purple Red Silver White Yellow Cast and Forged Valves BL BK BW GD OG PN PR RD IV WH YW Bar Stock Valves LD8 C B J G L K F D M H E LD16 S R Y W 1 Z V T 2 X U
Cast-Body Valves
For colored handles, add a dash and a handle color designator to the ordering number. Example: 6L-LD8-BBXX-BL
Gasket Kit
Includes replacement gasket and instructions. Ordering numbers: 6L-8K-LD8 for LD8 series; 6L-8K-LD16 for LD16 series.
Forged-Body Valves
For colored handles, insert a handle color designator in the ordering number. Example: 6L-ELD8-VVXBL-P
Bar Stock-Body Valves

For colored handles, replace A or Q in the ordering number with a handle color designator. Examples: 6L-LDE-2B1P-C 6L-LDS-2C1P-S

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety Technical Report, MS-06-13.
Swagelok, Nupro, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 2007, R5 MS-01-172
www.swagelok.com
D i e l e c tric Fittings
Dielectric ttings isolate monitoring instruments from the effects of electrical current. Installed on impulse lines ahead of monitoring stations in natural gas pipelines, the ttings interrupt cathodic current ow while permitting full uid ow. The tting design is unique in that it separates the two primary functions of electrical insulation and uid containment. Thermoplastic insulators provide high dielectric strength over a wide range of operating and climatic conditions. A uorocarbon FKM quad seal contained in the tting provides the primary uid seal.
Fluorocarbon FKM quad seal Thermoplastic insulators PTFE backup ring
Features
Metal components are machined from 316 stainless steel
Materials
Body: 316 stainless steel Insulators: Polyamide-imide Quad Seal: 70 durometer fluorocarbon FKM Backup Ring: Virgin PTFE
for use in rugged environments.

Molded thermoplastic insulation with excellent electrical,
chemical, and ultraviolet resistance and low water absorption maintains dielectric strength and integrity over a wide range of operating and climatic conditions.
Gaugeable
Technical Data
Electrical Resistance of Insulators at 70F (20C): 10 10 6 at 10 V (dc) Pressure Rating: 5000 psig (344 bar) Temperature Rating: 40 to 200F ( 40 to 93C)
tube tting or tapered pipe thread end connections (NPT/BSP) provide direct connection to tubing or piping system.
Swagelok

A
C
G flat
F flat
Fx flat
NPT/BSP tapered pipe thread
Caution: Do not disassemble the insulating connection. It must not be broken or used as a disconnection point.
E minimum opening
End Connections Tube Size Inlet/Outlet 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 12 mm
Dimensions, in. (mm) Pipe Size Ordering Number SS-4-DE-6 SS-6-DE-6 SS-8-DE-6 SS-12-MDE-6 SS-6-DE-1-4 A 3.77 (95.8) 3.92 (99.6) 4.17 (106) 4.23 (107) 3.73 (94.7) B 2.57 (65.3) 2.59 (65.8) 2.37 (60.2) 2.43 (61.7) C 0.60 (15.2) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 5/8 E 0.19 (4.8) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 22 mm 7/8 11/16 Fx 13/16 G 9/16 11/16 7/8
Swagelok tube fitting/ 3/8 in. 1/4 in. male NPT
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2000, 2002, 2005 Swagelok Company, Printed in U.S.A., GLI, August 2005, R4, MS-02-36-SCS
www.swagelok.com
D i e l e c tric Fittings
Dielectric ttings isolate monitoring instruments from the effects of electrical current. Installed on impulse lines ahead of monitoring stations in natural gas pipelines, the ttings interrupt cathodic current ow while permitting full uid ow. The tting design is unique in that it separates the two primary functions of electrical insulation and uid containment. Thermoplastic insulators provide high dielectric strength over a wide range of operating and climatic conditions. A uorocarbon FKM quad seal contained in the tting provides the primary uid seal.
Fluorocarbon FKM quad seal Thermoplastic insulators PTFE backup ring
Features
Metal components are machined from 316 stainless steel
Materials
Body: 316 stainless steel Insulators: Polyamide-imide Quad Seal: 70 durometer fluorocarbon FKM Backup Ring: Virgin PTFE
for use in rugged environments.

Molded thermoplastic insulation with excellent electrical,
chemical, and ultraviolet resistance and low water absorption maintains dielectric strength and integrity over a wide range of operating and climatic conditions.
Gaugeable
Technical Data
Electrical Resistance of Insulators at 70F (20C): 10 10 6 at 10 V (dc) Pressure Rating: 5000 psig (344 bar) Temperature Rating: 40 to 200F ( 40 to 93C)
tube tting or tapered pipe thread end connections (NPT/BSP) provide direct connection to tubing or piping system.
Swagelok

A
C
G flat
F flat
Fx flat
NPT/BSP tapered pipe thread
Caution: Do not disassemble the insulating connection. It must not be broken or used as a disconnection point.
E minimum opening
End Connections Tube Size Inlet/Outlet 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 12 mm
Dimensions, in. (mm) Pipe Size Ordering Number SS-4-DE-6 SS-6-DE-6 SS-8-DE-6 SS-12-MDE-6 SS-6-DE-1-4 A 3.77 (95.8) 3.92 (99.6) 4.17 (106) 4.23 (107) 3.73 (94.7) B 2.57 (65.3) 2.59 (65.8) 2.37 (60.2) 2.43 (61.7) C 0.60 (15.2) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 5/8 E 0.19 (4.8) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 22 mm 7/8 11/16 Fx 13/16 G 9/16 11/16 7/8
Swagelok tube fitting/ 3/8 in. 1/4 in. male NPT
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2000, 2002, 2005 Swagelok Company, Printed in U.S.A., GLI, August 2005, R4, MS-02-36-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Distribution Block Valves

D60 Series
Features
Integrated Distribution Block Valves eliminate the need to fabricate assemblies from separate components are stronger than brazed assemblies, enhancing system structural integrity offer lower internal volume provide flexibility for different system layouts. Main Line Tubing is available in a range of sizes to match commonly used headers provides straight, unrestricted flow through block can be welded directly to header without disassembling valves. Gaugeable Swagelok Tube Fitting Branch Connections provide a leak-tight seal without system shutdown and prefabrication expenses associated with brazing are available in a range of sizes to match branch tubing.
Wetted Component Main line tubing Block Seat, top and bottom stem packing Body Stem bearings (2) Stem, ball Support rings (2) Coned-disc springs (2) Flange seals (2) Flanges (2) Lubricants Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316L SS welded/A269 (4 in. OD); 316L SS seamless/A213 (1/2 to 2 in. OD) 316L SS/A276 Reinforced PTFE; other materials available 316 SS/A479 or CF3M/A351 Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A240 Strain-hardened 316 SS/A240 Fluorocarbon FKM 316L SS/A479 or CF3M/A351 Silicone-based and PTFE-based; other lubricants available
Main Line Tubing Size, in. Series Temperature, F (C) 20 (28) to 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
(37) (65) (93) (121) (148) (176) (204) (232)
4 0.083 D67T, D68T 530 480 440 420 400 380 330 100
(36.5) (33.0) (30.3) (28.9) (27.5) (26.1) (22.7) (6.8)
2 0.065
1 1/2 0.065 D63T
1 0.065
3/4 1/2
0.065 0.049
D62T 2000 1850 1500 1150 800 560 330 100

(137) (127) (103) (79.2) (55.1) (38.5) (22.7) (6.8)
(68.2) (62.6) (57.1) (54.4) (51.6) (38.5) (22.7) (6.8)
1300 1190 1090 1040 800 560 330 100
(89.5) (81.9) (75.1) (71.6) (55.1) (38.5) (22.7) (6.8)
2200 1850 1500 1150 800 560 330 100
(151) (127) (103) (79.2) (55.1) (38.5) (22.7) (6.8)
Pressure ratings may be limited by the main line tubing.
Testing
Every Swagelok D60 series distribution block valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All Swagelok D60 series distribution block valves are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13.
For detailed product data, including additional seat materials and nonwetted materials of construction, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146.

Select an ordering number. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for valve dimensions. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
Double Horizontal Cross

B
Main Line Tubing Size in. 4 2 1 1/2

A
0.083 0.065 0.065
1 3/4 1/2
0.065 0.065 0.049
Branch Swagelok Tube Fitting Size 2 in. 1 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/4 in. Branch Swagelok Tube Fitting Size 2 in. 1 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 in. 3/4 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/4 in.
Orifice in. (mm) 1.500 (38.1) 1.250 (31.8) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.281 (7.1) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.281 (7.1) 0.281 (7.1) 0.187 (4.8) 0.281 (7.1) 0.187 (4.8)
Ordering Number SS-D68TTE16S32 SS-D67TTE16S24 SS-D63TTE8S12 SS-D63TTE8S8 SS-D63TTE6S12 SS-D63TTE6S8 SS-D63TTE6S6 SS-D63TTE4S12 SS-D63TTE4S8 SS-D63TTE4S6 SS-D62TTE3S6 SS-D62TTE3S4 SS-D62TTE2S6 SS-D62TTE2S4
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 23.0 (584) 13.0 (330) 13.0 (330) B 17.2 (437) 14.4 (365) 8.19 (208) 7.13 (181) 6.94 (176) 13.0 (330) 9.00 (229) 7.00 (178) 6.88 (175) 6.69 (170) 5.19 (132) 5.19 (132)
Single Horizontal Cross

B C
Main Line Tubing Size in. 4 2 1 1/2

A
0.083 0.065 0.065
1 3/4 1/2
0.065 0.065 0.049
Orifice in. (mm) 1.500 (38.1) 1.250 (31.8) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.281 (7.1) 0.516 (13.1) 0.411 (10.4) 0.281 (7.1) 0.281 (7.1) 0.187 (4.8) 0.281 (7.1) 0.187 (4.8)
Ordering Number SS-D68TAA16S32 SS-D67TAA16S24 SS-D63TAA8S12 SS-D63TAA8S8 SS-D63TAA6S12 SS-D63TAA6S8 SS-D63TAA6S6 SS-D63TAA4S12 SS-D63TAA4S8 SS-D63TAA4S6 SS-D62TAA3S6 SS-D62TAA3S4 SS-D62TAA2S6 SS-D62TAA2S4
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 23.0 (584) 13.0 (330) 13.0 (330) B 11.6 (295) 10.2 (259) 5.97 (152) 4.69 (119) 4.56 (116)) 13.0 (330) 9.00 (229) 7.00 (178) 4.44 (113) 4.31 (109) 3.31 (84.1) 3.31 (84.1) C 8.63 (219) 7.19 (183) 4.06 (103) 6.56 (90.4) 3.44 (87.4) 3.44 (87.4) 3.31 (84.1) 2.56 (65.0) 2.56 (65.0)

Valve Handles
For information on locking handles, oval handles, and colored handle sleeves, see the Swagelok Process Ball Valve Handle Options catalog, MS-01-137.

To order D60 series valves with optional cleaning and packaging accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-D68TTE16S32-SC11
Tube Stubs and Metric Tubing

Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for information about valves with metric tubing and valves with branch line tube stub end connections.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2004, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 2007, R6 MS-02-02
www.swagelok.com
Distribution Manifold
J6 Series
Extruded stainless steel body rated for
6000 psig (413 bar) working pressure

Compact, versatile manifold for gas
and liquid applications

Fewer potential leak points than
conventional distribution manifolds

Four to eighteen needle valves and
outlet connections
Mounting holes through the manifold
Nonrotating hardened needle for positive shutoff
to reduce stress on the piping system
Two-piece knuckle joint enables nonrotating needle; joint is above packing, protected from system media
Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and lock nut to ensure positive actuation
Shroud protects stem threads against ingress of dirt and dust
Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation; stem threads above packing are protected from system media Choice of packing and bonnet seal materials Safety back-seating needle seals in fully open position
One-piece, integral body for less weight, fewer leak points, and more strength
Component Body, bonnets Needles Packing, bonnet seals Lubricant Bonnet seal rings, gland nuts, shrouds, stems, glands, handles, handle lock nuts, handle washers, locking pins, gland lock nuts
Testing
Every valve is hydrostatically tested at ambient temperature.
316/316L SS/A479 S17400 SS/A564 condition H1150D PTFE or graphite
Grade/ASTM Specification

Flanged inlet connections available Antitamper feature available Bleed/drain valve available Hydrostatic test certificates complete with full chemical
Molybdenum disulfide in hydrocarbon carrier 316 SS
and physical material certifications available For these and other options and accessories, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
End Connection Size, in. 1/2 and 3/4 1 PTFE Seals Temperature Working Pressure F (C) psig (bar) 200 (93) 400 (204) 200 (93) 400 (204) 6000 (413) 4000 (275) 3000 (206) 2000 (137) Graphite Seals Temperature Working Pressure F (C) psig (bar) 200 (93) 850 (454) 200 (93) 850 (454) 6000 (413) 3000 (206) 2000 (137) 1500 (103)

2.36
(60.0)
4 holes to suit 1/4 by 1 1/2 in. long socket head screws
Number of Outlet Connections 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
A in. (mm) 5.35 (136) 7.72 (196) 10.1 (256) 12.4 (316) 14.8 (376) 17.2 (436) 19.6 (496) 21.9 (556)
Inlet
4.33
(110)
0.63
(16.0)
1.75
(44.5)
Drain
2.36
(60.0)
Outlet
2.68
(68.0)
5.51
(140)
Valve orifice0.157 in. (4.0 mm) Inlet1/2, 3/4, or 1 in. female NPT Outlets1/4 in. female NPT Drain1/2 in. female NPT
Ordering Number
Build a distribution manifold ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
J S 4N 2N A T - 10
Series Body Material
316, 316L stainless steel
Number of Outlet Valves and Outlets

Specify a number from 4 to 18. Example: 10 = 10 valves and outlets
Inlet Connection 4N = 1/2 in. female NPT 6N = 3/4 in. female NPT 8N = 1 in. female NPT Outlet Connections
1/4 in. female NPT
Handle
Bar handle
Packing and Bonnet Seal Material

A = PTFE C = Graphite
Packing adjustment may be required during the service life of the valve. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2004, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 2007, R2 MS-02-214
www.swagelok.com
Ele ctr ic Actuators

141 a nd 142 Se r ie s
Swagelok electric actuators can be used to control the position of many Swagelok ball valves; alternating- and direct-current models are available. An electrical signal is used to change valve position from remote locations. Integral limit switches provide an output signal of the valve position, even between positions.
Features
Compact actuator can be mounted in any orientation and is
available for on-off (2-way), switching (3- and 5-way), and crossover (4-way) valve actuation.
Enclosure meets NEMA 4X (NPT conduit) or IP66 (G 1/2
conduit) specifications.
Conduit connection allows wiring to be done with actuator
mounted and cover removed.

Wiring diagrams are located inside
the actuator cover and in user manual shipped with actuator or assembly.
Wiring can be completed without
soldering or crimping of connectors.

Integral limit switches provide output signal of valve
position.
Testing
Every 141 and 142 series electric actuator is factory tested for actuation within rated cycle times and for proper output signal at all positions.
Component Base, cover Bushing O-rings Fasteners, drive shaft Material Cast aluminum with baked polyester coating Nylon Buna N Stainless steel
Electric Actuators
Technical Data
Operating Temperature Range
20 to 150F (7 to 65C)
Actuator Specifications
Voltage/ Frequency/ Conduit Connection 120 V (ac)/ 60 Hz/ 1/2 in. NPT 220/230/240 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 60 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 24 V (dc)/ 1/2 in. NPT Valve Flow Path 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2 and 4 way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way Operating Current amperes 90 Actuation Time, Approx seconds Duty Cycle at 70F (20C)
Output Torque
141 series: 25 in.lb (2.8 Nm) 142 series: 100 in.lb (11.3 Nm)
Actuator Designator -41AC -41ACX -41ACZ -41ACE -41ACXE -41ACZE -41ACJ -41ACXJ -41ACZJ -41ACN -41ACXN -41ACZN -41DC -41DCX -41DCZ -41DCE -41DCXE -41DCZE
141 series actuators 1.1 2.5 40 %
0.5
2.5
220 V40 % 230 V35 % 240 V30 %
1.2
2.5
35 %
1.1
3.0
45 %
0.3
2.5
100 %
24 V (dc)/ G 1/2
0.3
2.5
100 %
142 series actuators 120 V (ac)/ 60 Hz/ 1/2 in. NPT 220/230/240 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 60 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 24 V (dc)/ 1/2 in. NPT -42AC -42ACX -42ACZ -42ACE -42ACXE -42ACZE -42ACJ -42ACXJ -42ACZJ -42ACN -42ACXN -42ACZN -42DC -42DCX -42DCZ -42DCE -42DCXE -42DCZE 0.9 4.0 100 % 0.9 4.0 100 % 1.6 4.5 30 % 2.0 4.0 25 % 0.7 4.0 220 V30 % 230 V25 % 240 V20 % 1.7 4.0 25 %
24 V (dc)/ G 1/2
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LISTED DUTY CYCLE. ALTERNATING-CURRENT MODELS
CONTAIN THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SWITCH THAT CUTS POWER TO THE MOTOR TO PREVENT OVERHEATING. IF PROTECTION SWITCH IS ENGAGED, VALVE WILL NOT CYCLE. SWITCH RESETS AUTOMATICALLY WHEN MOTOR COOLS. Actuators used on 5-way ball valves switch only to the next port in clockwise rotation.
Dimensions
(90.4)
3.56
141 series, 4.12

(105);
142 series, 5.25

(133)
DO NOT USE THESE ACTUATORS ON VENTED BALL VALVES. THE DRIVE SHAFT OF THESE ACTUATORS ROTATES IN ONE DIRECTION. Not CE marked.
0.20 0.47 0.36 (9.1) 2.34 (59.4) 4.78

(121)
1 1/8 hex 0.96

(14.2)
(11.9)
0.17 (11.2)
(4.3)
0.44
(5.1)
(32.0)
1.26
0.56
(24.4)
Factory-Assembled Valve and Actuator
1. Select a valve ordering number from an individual product catalog. Example: SS-63TS8 2. Choose the actuator that corresponds with the selected valve series.
Valve Series 33, 41, 41T, 42, 42T, 62C, 62E, 62T, 62V, PFA-43, 83 (2-way) 83 (3-way), H83 43, 43T, 44, 44T, 62P, 63C, 63E, 63T, 63P, S62P, S63P, W63, 83 (2- and 3-way), H83 Actuator Series 141
Actuator Kits for Field Assembly

1. Identify the valve series. 2. Follow steps 2 through 4 in the Factory-Assembled Valve and Actuator ordering instructions. 3. Replace the dash in the actuator designator with MS-1. Example: MS-141AC 4. Select the mounting bracket kit ordering number from the table below. Kits include mounting brackets, cap screws, coupling, and instructions.
Valve Series 33 41, 41T, 42, 42T 43 (2- and 3-way), 43T 43 (4- and 5-way) 44, 44T 62C, 62E, 62P, 62T, 62V, S62P 63C, 63E, 63P, 63T, S63P PFA-43 W63 83, H83 Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number MS-MB-33 MS-MB-41 MS-MB-43 MS-MB-43Y MS-MB-44-131 MS-MB-62 MS-MB-63-131 MS-MB-P43-141 MS-MB-73-131 MS-MB-83-131
142
System pressure not to exceed 3000 psig (206 bar). System pressure not to exceed 2000 psig (137 bar).
Example: A 63T series valve requires a 142 series actuator. See the Actuator Specifications table on page 2. 3. Select the preferred voltage/frequency/conduit connection for the required actuator. Example: 120 V (ac)/60 Hz/1/2 in. NPT 4. Identify the valve flow path. Example: 2-way 5. Add the actuator designator to the valve ordering number. Example SS-63TS8-42AC
For information about use on ball valves with special ow paths, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1991, 1995, 2002, 2005 Swagelok Company November 2005, R5 MS-01-35-E
www.swagelok.com
Ele ctr ic Actuators

141 a nd 142 Se r ie s
Swagelok electric actuators can be used to control the position of many Swagelok ball valves; alternating- and direct-current models are available. An electrical signal is used to change valve position from remote locations. Integral limit switches provide an output signal of the valve position, even between positions.
Features
Compact actuator can be mounted in any orientation and is
available for on-off (2-way), switching (3- and 5-way), and crossover (4-way) valve actuation.
Enclosure meets NEMA 4X (NPT conduit) or IP66 (G 1/2
conduit) specifications.
Conduit connection allows wiring to be done with actuator
mounted and cover removed.

Wiring diagrams are located inside
the actuator cover and in user manual shipped with actuator or assembly.
Wiring can be completed without
soldering or crimping of connectors.

Integral limit switches provide output signal of valve
position.
Testing
Every 141 and 142 series electric actuator is factory tested for actuation within rated cycle times and for proper output signal at all positions.
Component Base, cover Bushing O-rings Fasteners, drive shaft Material Cast aluminum with baked polyester coating Nylon Buna N Stainless steel
Electric Actuators
Technical Data
Operating Temperature Range
20 to 150F (7 to 65C)
Actuator Specifications
Voltage/ Frequency/ Conduit Connection 120 V (ac)/ 60 Hz/ 1/2 in. NPT 220/230/240 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 60 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 24 V (dc)/ 1/2 in. NPT Valve Flow Path 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2 and 4 way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way 2- and 4-way 3-way 5-way Operating Current amperes 90 Actuation Time, Approx seconds Duty Cycle at 70F (20C)
Output Torque
141 series: 25 in.lb (2.8 Nm) 142 series: 100 in.lb (11.3 Nm)
Actuator Designator -41AC -41ACX -41ACZ -41ACE -41ACXE -41ACZE -41ACJ -41ACXJ -41ACZJ -41ACN -41ACXN -41ACZN -41DC -41DCX -41DCZ -41DCE -41DCXE -41DCZE
141 series actuators 1.1 2.5 40 %
0.5
2.5
220 V40 % 230 V35 % 240 V30 %
1.2
2.5
35 %
1.1
3.0
45 %
0.3
2.5
100 %
24 V (dc)/ G 1/2
0.3
2.5
100 %
142 series actuators 120 V (ac)/ 60 Hz/ 1/2 in. NPT 220/230/240 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 60 Hz G 1/2 100 V (ac)/ 50 Hz G 1/2 24 V (dc)/ 1/2 in. NPT -42AC -42ACX -42ACZ -42ACE -42ACXE -42ACZE -42ACJ -42ACXJ -42ACZJ -42ACN -42ACXN -42ACZN -42DC -42DCX -42DCZ -42DCE -42DCXE -42DCZE 0.9 4.0 100 % 0.9 4.0 100 % 1.6 4.5 30 % 2.0 4.0 25 % 0.7 4.0 220 V30 % 230 V25 % 240 V20 % 1.7 4.0 25 %
24 V (dc)/ G 1/2
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED LISTED DUTY CYCLE. ALTERNATING-CURRENT MODELS
CONTAIN THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SWITCH THAT CUTS POWER TO THE MOTOR TO PREVENT OVERHEATING. IF PROTECTION SWITCH IS ENGAGED, VALVE WILL NOT CYCLE. SWITCH RESETS AUTOMATICALLY WHEN MOTOR COOLS. Actuators used on 5-way ball valves switch only to the next port in clockwise rotation.
Dimensions
(90.4)
3.56
141 series, 4.12

(105);
142 series, 5.25

(133)
DO NOT USE THESE ACTUATORS ON VENTED BALL VALVES. THE DRIVE SHAFT OF THESE ACTUATORS ROTATES IN ONE DIRECTION. Not CE marked.
0.20 0.47 0.36 (9.1) 2.34 (59.4) 4.78

(121)
1 1/8 hex 0.96

(14.2)
(11.9)
0.17 (11.2)
(4.3)
0.44
(5.1)
(32.0)
1.26
0.56
(24.4)
1. Select a valve ordering number from an individual product catalog. Example: SS-63TS8 2. Choose the actuator that corresponds with the selected valve series.
Valve Series 33, 41, 41T, 42, 42T, 62C, 62E, 62T, 62V, PFA-43, 83 (2-way) 83 (3-way), H83 43, 43T, 44, 44T, 62P, 63C, 63E, 63T, 63P, S62P, S63P, W63, 83 (2- and 3-way), H83 Actuator Series 141

1. Identify the valve series. 2. Follow steps 2 through 4 in the Factory-Assembled Valve and Actuator ordering instructions. 3. Replace the dash in the actuator designator with MS-1. Example: MS-141AC 4. Select the mounting bracket kit ordering number from the table below. Kits include mounting brackets, cap screws, coupling, and instructions.
Valve Series 33 41, 41T, 42, 42T 43 (2- and 3-way), 43T 43 (4- and 5-way) 44, 44T 62C, 62E, 62P, 62T, 62V, S62P 63C, 63E, 63P, 63T, S63P PFA-43 W63 83, H83 Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number MS-MB-33 MS-MB-41 MS-MB-43 MS-MB-43Y MS-MB-44-131 MS-MB-62 MS-MB-63-131 MS-MB-P43-141 MS-MB-73-131 MS-MB-83-131
142
System pressure not to exceed 3000 psig (206 bar). System pressure not to exceed 2000 psig (137 bar).
Example: A 63T series valve requires a 142 series actuator. See the Actuator Specifications table on page 2. 3. Select the preferred voltage/frequency/conduit connection for the required actuator. Example: 120 V (ac)/60 Hz/1/2 in. NPT 4. Identify the valve flow path. Example: 2-way 5. Add the actuator designator to the valve ordering number. Example SS-63TS8-42AC
For information about use on ball valves with special ow paths, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1991, 1995, 2002, 2005 Swagelok Company November 2005, R5 MS-01-35-E
www.swagelok.com
Ele ctr ical Powe r Cord and Plug O ptions

Optional electrical power cords and plugs can be used on the Swagelok welding power supply, tube benders, and tube facing tool.
Electrical Service 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz North America PlugNEMA 5-15 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 1 Electrical Service 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz North America PlugNEMA 6-15 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 2 Continental Europe/Korea PlugCEE 7/7 WireHarmonized cord Designator 7
Japan/Taiwan (not pictured) PlugNEMA 5-15 with ground wire adapter WireHarmonized cord Designator 3 North America PlugNEMA 5-20 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 9
Japan/Taiwan PlugNEMA L6-20 WireHarmonized cord Designator 4
Australia/New Zealand PlugAS 3112 WireHarmonized cord Designator 8
United Kingdom PlugBS 1363 WireHarmonized cord Designator 6
United Kingdom PlugIEC-309 WireHarmonized cord Designator 5
To order an optional power cord and plug, see the following Swagelok catalogs: Tools and Accessories, MS-01-169 Orbital Welding System, Tube Facing Tool, MS-02-104-SCS Orbital Welding System, M100 Power Supply, MS-02-102 Orbital Welding System, M100 High-Purity Power Supply, MS-02-305 Some power cords are not available with the Swagelok tube facing tool. For more information, see the Orbital Welding System, Tube Facing Tool catalog, MS-02-104-SCS.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2001, 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company, April 2006, R4, MS-02-79-E
www.swagelok.com
F il t ers
FW, F, and TF Series

Remove system particulate contaminants Gas and liquid service 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 3 to 12 mm end connections Stainless steel and brass materials
Filters
Features
All-Welded Inline Filters (FW Series)
All-welded construction provides reliable fluid containment. Inline filters are for use where space is limited. Filter is easily cleaned by backflushing. Sintered element is available in 0.5 m nominal pore size;
Full-penetration weld between body and element prevents bypass flow
pleated mesh elements are available in 2, 7, and 15 m nominal pore sizes.

End connections include Swagelok tube fittings, NPT, and
male VCR face seal fittings.
Pleated element shown; sintered element available
Inline Filters (F Series)

Inline filters are for use where space is limited. Replaceable sintered elements are available in 0.5, 2, 7,
15, 60, and 90 m nominal pore sizes; replaceable strainer elements are available in 40, 140, 230, and 440 m nominal pore sizes.
End connections include Swagelok tube fittings, NPT, tube
adapter, and male VCR face seal fittings.
Sintered element shown; strainer element available
Tee-Type Filters (TF Series)

Filter element can be replaced without removing body from
system.
Replaceable sintered elements are available in 0.5, 2, 7,
15, 60, and 90 m nominal pore sizes; replaceable strainer elements are available in 40, 140, 230, and 440 m nominal pore sizes.
End connections include Swagelok tube fittings, NPT, and
tube socket or tube butt weld ends.

Select TF series filters are available with ECE R110-type
Sintered element shown; strainer element available
approval for use in alternative fuel service. See Options and Accessories, page 8.
Bypass port available; see page 8
Filter Elements
FW Series
Sintered Pleated Mesh
F and TF Series
Sintered Strainer
Magnified 13 Traps particles as small Retainer screen Pleated mesh element Retainer screen Traps fine particles in a
Magnified 2 Removes larger particles 316 SS construction
as 0.5 m in diameter
316L SS construction
Offers larger filtration area Stainless steel construction
dense matrix
316 SS construction
Filters
Ratings are based on standard materials of construction. Ratings for TF series filters with PCTFE gaskets are limited to 200F and 3000 psig (93C and 206 bar). See page 8.
Filter Series Material Temperature, F (C) 20 (28) to 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
(37) (93) (148) (204) (260) (315) (343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482)
FW, TF
2F, 4F 316 SS
6F, 8F
F Brass
TF
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 6000 5160 4660 4280 3980 3760 3700 2600 3520 3460 3380 3280
(413) (355) (321) (294) (274) (259) (254) (248) (242) (238) (232) (225)
3000 2580 2330 2140 1990 1880 1845 1800 1760 1725 1690 1640
(206) (177) (160) (147) (137) (129) (127) (124) (121) (118) (116) (112)
2500 2150 1940 1780 1660 1560 1540 1500 1460 1440 1410 1360
(172) (148) (133) (122) (114) (107) (106) (103) (100) (99.2) (97.1) (93.7)
1000 (68.9) 780 (53.7) 680 (46.8)
2000 (137) 1730 (119) 1470 (101)
Differential Pressure Ratings

Maximum Differential Pressure psig (bar) Sintered Strainer Pleated Element Element Element 600 (41.3) 100 (6.8) 1000 (68.9)
Filter Series FW F, TF
Filter Body Materials Component Bonnet nut Bonnet Retainer screens (2) Filter Series TF TF FW Brass Brass/B16 Brass/B16 316 SS 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 316 SS 0.5 m size 316L SS 2, 7, and 15 m size 316 SS Sintered316 SS Strainer316 SS with silver solder 302 SS Aluminum/B209 Brass/B16 Silver-plated 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Filtration Area
Filter Series FW 2F 4F, 2TF, 4TF 6F, 8F, 6TF, 8TF Sintered Element in.2 (mm2) 0.44 (283) 0.55 (350) 1.3 (830) 2.0 (1280) Strainer Element in.2 (mm2) 1.0 (640) 1.7 (1090) Pleated Element in.2 (mm2) 2.25 (1450)
FW Element F, TF Spring Gasket Body Retaining ring Lubricant F, TF F, TF All TF F
PH 15-7 Mo SS Silicone-based
Wetted components listed in italics. FW series filters not available in brass.
Filters

FW Series
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size Swagelok tube fittings, 1/4 in., male VCR fittings 6 mm Female NPT Male NPT, male/female NPT 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Element Nominal Pore Size m 0.5 2, 7, 15 2, 7, 15 2, 7, 15 5.6
(150)
Inlet Pressure, psig (bar) 5 (0.34) 0.04 (1.1) 10 (0.68) 0.06 (1.7) 15 (1.0) 0.12 (3.4) 10 (0.68) 0.01 (0.03) 1.7 (6.4) 10 (280) 14 (390) 4.5 (17) 3.5 (13) Air Flow, std ft3/min (std L/min)
Pressure Drop, psi (bar) 50 (3.4) 0.04 (0.15) 5.5 (20) 14 (52) 11 (41) 100 (6.8) 0.12 (0.45) 8.3 (31) 18 (68) 14 (52) Water Flow, U.S. gal/min (L/min)
Outlet is discharged to atmosphere.
F Series
Element Nominal Pore Size m 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 40, 140, 230, 440 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 40, 140, 230, 440 Inlet Pressure, psig (bar) 5 (0.34) 10 (0.68) 15 (1.0) 2F Series 0.04 (1.1) 0.20 (5.6) 0.50 (14) 0.80 (22) 1.7 1.8
(48) (51)
Pressure Drop, psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Water Flow, U.S. gal/min (L/min) 0.01 (0.03) 0.08 (0.30) 0.10 (0.37) 0.12 (0.45) 0.15 (0.56) 0.20 (0.75) 0.04 (0.15) 0.24 (0.90) 0.40 (1.5) 0.50 (1.8) 0.90 (3.4) 1.2 1.7
(4.5) (6.4)
Air Flow, std ft3/min (std L/min) 0.06 (1.7) 0.40 (11) 0.90 (25) 1.3 2.2 2.2
(36) (62) (62)
0.12 (3.4) 0.60 (17) 1.2 1.5 2.4 2.6

(34) (42) (68) (73)
0.04 (0.15) 0.24 (0.91) 0.30 (1.1) 0.36 (1.3) 0.50 (1.8) 0.50 (1.8) 0.17 (0.64) 0.86 (3.2) 1.3 1.3 3.3 4.2 5.6
(4.9) (4.9) (12) (15) (21)
0.12 (0.45) 0.40 (1.5) 0.48 (1.8) 0.58 (2.1) 0.70 (2.6) 0.60 (2.2) 0.29 (1.0) 1.3 2.0 2.1 4.6 6.1 7.8
(4.9) (7.5) (7.9) (17) (23) (29)
4F Series 0.12 (3.4) 0.60 (17) 1.4 1.2 3.1 4.1 4.7
(39) (34) (87) (110) (130)
0.26 (7.3) 1.4 2.9 2.9 5.9 7.5 8.8

(39) (82)
0.48 (13) 2.3 4.7 4.7 8.5 10 12 1.6 4.0 6.8 7.9 15 16 20
(65) (130) (130) (240) (280) (340)
(82)
(160) (210) (250)
6F and 8F Series 0.36 (10) 1.4 1.8 1.8 5.1 6.1 7.2
(39) (51) (51) (140) (170)
0.86 (24) 2.8 4.2 4.9 10 11 14

(79) (119) (130) (280) (310) (390)
(45) (110) (190) (220) (420) (450) (560)
0.09 (0.34) 0.26 (0.98) 0.64 (2.4) 0.84 (3.1) 2.0 2.3 4.8
(7.5) (8.7) (18)
0.40 (1.5) 1.1 2.2 2.6 6.7 7.6 15

(4.1) (8.3) (9.8) (25) (28) (56)
0.76 (2.8) 1.6 3.5 4.1 10 11 19

(6.0) (13) (15) (37) (41) (71)
(200)
Filters

TF Series
Element Nominal Pore Size m 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 40, 140, 230, 440 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 40, 140, 230, 440 0.5 2 7 15 60 90 40, 140, 230, 440 Inlet Pressure, psig (bar) 5 (0.34) 10 (0.68) 15 (1.0) 2TF Series 0.04 (1.1) 0.20 (5.6) 0.50 (14) 0.80 (22) 1.7 1.8 1.8
(48) (51) (51)
Pressure Drop, psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Water Flow, U.S. gal/min (L/min) 0.04 (0.15) 0.08 (0.30) 0.10 (0.37) 0.12 (0.45) 0.15 (0.56) 0.20 (0.75) 0.20 (0.75) 0.04 (0.15) 0.24 (0.90) 0.40 (1.5) 0.50 (1.8) 0.80 (3.0) 1.1 1.2
(4.1) (4.5)
Air Flow, std ft3/min (std L/min) 0.06 (1.7) 0.40 (11) 0.90 (25) 1.3 2.2 2.2 2.3
(36) (62) (62) (65)
0.12 (3.4) 0.60 (17) 1.2 1.5 2.4 2.6 2.6

(34) (42) (68) (73) (73)
0.17 (0.64) 0.24 (0.91) 0.30 (1.1) 0.36 (1.3) 0.50 (1.8) 0.50 (1.8) 0.50 (1.8) 0.17 (0.64) 0.86 (3.2) 1.3 1.3 2.7 3.4 4.2
(4.9) (4.9) (10) (12) (15)
0.29 (1.0) 0.40 (1.5) 0.48 (1.8) 0.58 (2.1) 0.70 (2.6) 0.60 (2.2) 0.60 (2.2) 0.29 (1.0) 1.3 2.0 2.1 3.9 4.9 5.6
(4.9) (7.5) (7.9) (14) (18) (21)
4TF Series 0.12 (3.4) 0.60 (17) 1.4 1.2 3.1 4.1 4.7
(39) (34) (87) (110) (130)
0.26 (7.3) 1.4 2.9 2.9 5.9 7.5 8.8

(39) (82)
0.48 (13) 2.3 4.7 4.7 8.5 10 12 1.6 4.0 6.8 7.9 15 16 20
(65) (130) (130) (240) (280) (340)
(82)
(160) (210) (250)
6TF and 8TF Series 0.36 (10) 1.4 1.8 1.8 5.1 6.1 7.2
(39) (51) (51) (140) (170)
0.86 (24) 2.8 4.2 4.9 10 11 14

(79) (119) (130) (280) (310) (390)
(45) (110) (190) (220) (420) (450) (560)
0.09 (0.34) 0.26 (0.98) 0.64 (2.4) 0.84 (3.1) 1.5 1.7 2.4
(5.6) (6.4) (9.0)
0.40 (1.5) 1.1 2.2 2.6 4.8 5.5 7.2

(4.1) (8.3) (9.8) (18) (20) (27)
0.76 (2.8) 1.6 3.5 4.1 6.7 7.6 10

(6.0) (13) (15) (25) (28) (37)
(200)
Testing
Every Swagelok filter is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

Swagelok filters with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok filters with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
Filters

FW Series
Add an element designator to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-4FWS-05
1 in. (25.4 mm) flat
F Series and TF Series

Stainless Steel Filters
Add an element designator to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2F-2
Brass Filters
A
Replace SS with B in the ordering number. Example: B-2F-2 Filters with VCR fitting end connections are not available in brass.
FW Series
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Swagelok tube fittings Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 6 mm 6 mm Female NPT Male NPT Male/ female NPT Male VCR fittings 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 0.5 2, 7, 15 2, 7, 15 Element Nominal Pore Size m 0.5 2, 7, 15 0.5 2, 7, 15 Basic Ordering Number SS-4FWSSS-4FWSS-6FWS-MMSS-6FW-MMSS-4FW4SS-4FW2SS-4FW5SS-4FWS-VCRSS-4FW-VCR0.453 (11.5) 0.281 (7.14) 0.281 (7.14) 0.187 (4.75) 0.187 (4.75) Dimensions, in. (mm) Orifice A 2.09 (53.1) 2.15 (54.6) 2.13 (54.1) 2.15 (54.6) 1.57 (39.9) 1.89 (48.0) 1.72 (43.7) 1.95 (49.5) 2.04 (51.8)
F and TF Series Elements

Elements remove 95 % of particles larger than the nominal pore size.
Nominal Pore Size Pore Size Range Element Element m m Type Designator 0.5 2 7 15 40 60 90 0.5 to 2 1 to 4 5 to 10 11 to 25 50 to 75 75 to 100 Strainer Strainer Sintered Sintered 05 2 7 15 40 60 90 140 230 440
FW Series Elements
Elements remove 95 % of particles larger than the nominal pore size.
Nominal Pore Size Pore Size Range Element Element m m Type Designator 0.5 2 7 15 0.5 to 2 Pleated Sintered 05 2 7 15
140 230 440
Not available for 2F series.
Filters

F Series
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 3 mm 6 mm Female NPT Male NPT Male VCR fittings Swagelok tube fitting/ tube adapter 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/8 in. 1/4 in. Basic Ordering Number SS-2FSS-4FSS-6FSS-8FSS-3F-MMSS-6F-MMSS-2F4SS-4F4SS-4F2SS-4F-VCRSS-2F-T7SS-4F-T7Filter Series 2F 4F 6F 8F 2F 4F 2F 4F 4F 4F 2F 4F 0.094 (2.39) 0.187 (4.75) 0.187 (4.75) Dimensions, in. (mm) Orifice 0.094 (2.39) 0.187 (4.75) 0.281 (7.14) 0.406 (10.3) 0.094 (2.39) 0.187 (4.75) 0.094 (2.39) A 2.35 (59.7) 2.95 (74.9) 3.21 (81.5) 3.49 (88.6) 2.38 (60.5) 2.96 (75.2) 2.16 (54.9) 2.87 (72.9) 2.69 (68.3) 2.82 (71.6) 2.29 (58.2) 2.91 (73.9) 9/16 (14.3) 3/4 (19.0) 3/4 (19.0) B 9/16 (14.3) 3/4 (19.0)
A B flat
1 (25.4) 9/16 (14.3) 3/4 (19.0) 9/16 (14.3)
TF Series
A B 3/8 in. butt weld dia 1/4 in. socket weld dia 2 mounting holes, M5 0.8-6H threads, 0.25 (6.4) deep
C D E F flat Tube socket and tube butt weld end connections Bolt circle: 1.00 (25.4) for 2TF, 4TF; 1.13 (28.7) for 6TF, 8TF Top
End Connections Type Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm Female NPT 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Male NPT Tube socket weld and tube butt weld 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 and 3/8 in.
Basic Ordering Number SS-2TFSS-4TFSS-6TFSS-8TFSS-6TF-MMSS-8TF-MMSS-10TF-MMSS-12TF-MMSS-2TF4SS-4TF4SS-4TF2SS-6TF2SS-8TF2SS-4TF-TW-
Filter Series 2TF 4TF 6TF 8TF 4TF 6TF 8TF 8TF 2TF 4TF 4TF 6TF 8TF 4TF
Dimensions, in. (mm) Orifice 0.094 (2.39) 0.174 (4.41) 0.213 (5.41) 0.250 (6.35) 0.172 (4.36) 0.213 (5.41) 0.250 (6.35) 0.174 (4.41) 0.174 (4.41) 0.250 (6.35) A 2.27 (57.7) 2.47 (62.7) 2.84 (72.1) 3.04 (77.2) 2.46 (62.5) 2.84 (72.1) 2.86 (72.6) 3.04 (77.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.13 (54.1) 2.13 (54.1) 2.38 (60.5) 2.75 (69.9) 1.68 (42.7) B 1.07 (27.2) 1.06 (26.9) 1.32 (33.5) 1.31 (33.3) 1.06 (26.9) 1.38 (35.1) 1.32 (33.5) 1.31 (33.3) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.13 (28.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.46 (11.7) 1.87 (47.5) 1.87 (47.5) 2.20 (55.9) 1 (25.4) 1 (25.4) 1 1/8 (28.6) 1.13 (28.7) 0.46 (11.7) 2.20 (55.9) 1 1/8 (28.6) C 1.00 (25.4) 1.13 (28.7) 1.00 (25.4) D 0.38 (9.7) 0.46 (11.7) 0.38 (9.7) E 1.87 (47.5) 2.20 (55.9) 1.87 (47.5) F 1 (25.4) 1 1/8 (28.6) 1 (25.4)
0.174 (4.41)
1.00 (25.4)
1.00 (25.4)
0.38 (9.7)
1.87 (47.5)
1 (25.4)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. Mounting holes not available with 1/4 in. female NPT end connections.

All Filters
Swagelok filters with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for filters with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4FWS-05-SC11
F Series
Special Alloys
Filters of alloy C-276 are available in some sizes. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
TF Series
Bypass Port
The bypass port at the filter bottom enables sampling or purging. To order, insert a designator into the filter ordering number. Example: SS-2TF-F1-05
Filter Series Bypass Port Overall End Height Connection Designator in. (mm) 1/8 in. Swagelok 2.36 -F1 tube fitting (59.9) 1/8 in. female 2.09 -F2 NPT (53.1) 1/4 in. Swagelok 2.82 -F3 tube fitting (71.6) 1/4 in. tube 2.21 -F8 socket weld (56.1) 1/8 in. female 2.46 -F4 (62.5) NPT 1/4 in. Swagelok 3.14 -F5 tube fitting (79.8) 3/8 in. Swagelok 3.20 -F6 tube fitting (81.3) 1/2 in. Swagelok 3.42 -F7 tube fitting (86.9)
F and TF Series
Element Kits
Kits include element and instructions. Select a basic kit ordering number and add an element designator. Example: SS-2F-K4-05
Filter Series 2F 4F, 2TF, 4TF 6F, 8F, 6TF, 8TF
series information.
Basic Kit Ordering Number SS-2F-K4SS-4F-K4SS-8F-K4-
2TF, 4TF
See Dimensions tables, page 7, for filter
Nominal Pore Size Pore Size Range Element Element m m Type Designator 0.5 2 7 15 40 60 90 140 230 440 0.5 to 2 1 to 4 5 to 10 11 to 25 50 to 75 75 to 100 Strainer Strainer Sintered Sintered 05 2 7 15 40 60 90 140 230 440
6TF, 8TF
Filters Without Elements

TF series filters can be ordered without elements. Add LE to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2TF-LE
Filters With ECE R110-Type Approval

Stainless steel TF series filters with stainless steel sintered or strainer elements are available tested with ECE R110-type approval for use in alternative fuel service.
Not available for 2F series.
Gasket Kits
Kits include gasket and instructions. To order a stainless steel gasket kit, select a kit ordering number. For other gasket materials, replace SS with A for aluminum or KF for PCTFE (TF series only). Example: A-2F-K3
Filter Series 2F 4F 6F, 8F 2TF, 4TF 6TF, 8TF
Kit Ordering Number SS-2F-K3 SS-4F-K3 SS-8F-K3 SS-4TF-K2 SS-8TF-K2
To order, add -12463 to a standard TF series filter ordering number. Example: SS-2TF-05-12463

See Dimensions tables, page 7,

for filter series information.
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company PH 15-7 MoTM AK Steel Corp. 1998, 2000, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 2007, R7 MS-01-92
www.swagelok.com
Fire Se rie s Ball Valve s

A6 0T Se r ie s
Features
Operating temperatures up to 400F (204C) Working pressures up to 2200 psig (151 bar) Stainless steel or carbon steel construction Meet API Standard 607, 4th edition, and Swagelok fire test
specification SEI-00334. See Fire Test Standards, next page.

Available in 63, 65, 67, and 68 series valve sizes.
See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for materials of construction, pressure-temperature ratings, testing, cleaning and packaging, ordering information, dimensions, options, accessories, and actuators.
Actuator accessories are not re-test rated.
Fire Test Standards

Industry standards do not address situations in which a valve seat is only partially destroyed. Yet this condition can occur when a valve is heated unevenly during a re.
Fire Test Data

Fire Test Specification Fire test objective Valve position Flow media Fire test valve pressure Fuel for fire Flame temperature Fire duration Heat flux Allowable leakage during fire, cool down Cycle after burn API 607 4th Edition Exposure to fire of specified time, temperature, and heat flux Closed Water 1650 psig (113 bar)1/2 to 1 in. 1500 psig (103 bar)1 1/2 to 2 in. Not specified 1400 to 1800F (760 to 982C) 30 min Fuel, temperature, time, and water are altered to achieve a partially destroyed soft seat Swagelok SEI-00334 Exposure to fire and water, producing specified partially destroyed seat Closed Water 100 to 130 psig (6.8 to 8.9 bar)
As a result, Swagelok developed test specication SEI-00334. This procedure qualies the performance of valves subjected to uneven heating. Fire series ball valves are tested in the Swagelok re-test laboratory and meet SEI-00334 test specications.
Allowable leakage after cycle
Calorimeter cubes reach 1200F (648C) within 15 min 100 mL/min/NPSseat 95 mL/min or 40 mL/min/NPS, 25 mL/min/NPSexternal whichever is greaterseat 1 cycleopen or close under test None pressure 20 mL/min/NPSseat 25 mL/min/NPSexternal
NPS = inch of nominal pipe size.
Typical Fire Test
Pneumatically actuated re series ball valve set up for burn.
Test is in progress; fail-safe actuator feature cycles the ball valve to closed position.
Actuator lubricants begin to burn off, and actuator begins to melt.
Actuator melted away.
Valve quenched with water.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2000, 2003, 2004, 2006 Swagelok Company April 2006, R5 MS-02-47-E
www.swagelok.com
F lan g e A dap ters
Threadless, weldless transition from flanged piping systems to tubing systems Flange types meet ASME, DIN, EN, and JIS standards One-piece integrally machined forged body Available with Swagelok tube fitting end connections up to 50 mm and 2 in.
Flange Adapters
Features
Flange types meet ASME, DIN, EN, and JIS standards Range of flange sizes and pressure classes Full range of sealing faces including flat face, raised face,
RTJ, and tongue-and-groove

316 stainless steel material standard; optional materials
Wrench flats
include alloy 20, alloy 400, alloy 600, and alloy C-276
Wrench flats for ease of tube fitting assembly Gaugeability on initial installation using Swagelok gap
inspection gauges
End Connections
Metric and fractional Swagelok tube fittings from
Sealing face
3 to 50 mm and 1/16 to 2 in.

Metric and fractional Swagelok tube adapter fittings from
6 to 50 mm and 1/4 to 2 in.
Flange Connections
ASME B16.5 Nominal flange sizes from NPS 1/2 to 2 in. Pressure class ratings from 150 to 2500 DIN EN 1092-1 Nominal flange sizes from DN 15 to 50 Pressure class ratings from PN 40 to 320 EN 1092-1 Nominal flange sizes from DN 15 to 50 Pressure class ratings from PN 40 to 100 JIS B2220 Nominal flange sizes from DN 15 to 50 Pressure class ratings from 10 to 63K Flange adapters to meet additional standards,
One-piece forged body
Flange Materials
Material 316 stainless steel Alloy 20 Alloy 400 Alloy 600 Alloy C-276
Over 1 in. and over 25 mm stainless steel fittings
use stainless steel ferrules with PFA coating. Applications above 450F (232C) require silver-plated front ferrules and uncoated back ferrules. To order fittings with silver-plated ferrules and uncoated back ferrules, add -BM to the ordering number. Example: SS-6M0-F25M-40-C-BM
ASTM Specification A182 B462 B564
such as API and ISO, are available upon request.
Regulatory Compliance
Stainless flange adapters with EN, DIN (up to PN 160), and ANSI flanges have been shown through type-test approval T/TV A/AR 278-03 to comply with the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and the leakage requirement of TA-LUFT 2002. According to the PED, flange adapters are classified as piping components and may not bear the CE-marking.

All Swagelok flange adapters are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Flange Adapters

ANSI Flanges
D A F, flat H
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8

E J B
ANSI Flange Ordering Number NPS Class Raised Face Flange 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 2 1 1 2 2 150 150 300 SS-400-F8-150 SS-600-F8-300 SS-810-F8-150 SS-810-F16-150 SS-810-F32-150 SS-1210-F16-150 SS-1610-F16-150 SS-2400-F32-150 SS-3200-F32-150
Dimensions, in. A 1.61 1.79 1.78 1.90 2.09 1.98 2.38 3.40 4.11 B 3.50 3.75 3.50 4.25 6.00 4.25 4.25 6.00 6.00 0.96 1.23 1.97 2.66 0.62 0.88 1.34 1.81 1 1/4 1 3/8 2 1/8 2 3/4 0.90 0.41 13/16 D 0.60 0.66 E 0.19 0.28 F 13/16 13/16 H 1.32 1.50 1.38 1.50 1.69 1.58 1.90 2.33 2.64 J 2.38 2.62 2.38 3.12 4.75 3.12 3.12 4.75 4.75
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ratings are taken from ASME B16.5-2003, Table 2-2.2 and Table F2-2.2. Pressure ratings for fittings with a flange end connection and another end connection are determined by the connection with the lower pressure rating.
Working Pressures by Classes, psig

Temperature F 20 to 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 ASME Class 150 275 235 215 195 170 140 125 110 95 80 65 50 35 20 300 720 620 560 515 480 450 440 435 425 420 420 415 385 365 400 960 825 745 685 635 600 590 580 570 565 555 555 515 485 600 1440 1240 1120 1025 955 900 885 870 855 845 835 830 775 725 900 2160 1860 1680 1540 1435 1355 1325 1305 1280 1265 1255 1245 1160 1090 1500 3600 3095 2795 2570 2390 2255 2210 2170 2135 2110 2090 2075 1930 1820 2500 6000 5160 4660 4280 3980 3760 3680 3620 3560 3520 3480 3460 3220 3030
Working Pressures by Classes, bar

Temperature C 29 to 38 50 100 150 200 250 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 538 ASME Class 150 19.0 18.4 16.2 14.8 13.7 12.1 10.2 9.3 8.4 7.4 6.5 5.5 4.6 3.7 2.8 1.4 300 49.6 48.1 42.2 38.5 35.7 33.4 31.6 30.9 30.3 29.9 29.4 29.1 28.8 28.7 28.2 25.2 400 66.2 64.2 56.3 51.3 47.6 44.5 42.2 41.2 40.4 39.8 39.3 38.9 38.5 38.2 37.6 33.4 600 99.3 96.2 84.4 77.0 71.3 66.8 63.2 61.8 60.7 59.8 58.9 58.3 57.7 57.3 56.5 50.0 900 148.9 144.3 126.6 115.5 107.0 100.1 94.9 92.7 91.0 89.6 88.3 87.4 86.5 86.0 84.7 75.2 1500 248.2 240.6 211.0 192.5 178.3 166.9 158.1 154.4 151.6 149.4 147.2 145.7 144.2 143.4 140.9 125.5 2500 413.7 400.9 351.6 320.8 297.2 278.1 263.5 257.4 252.7 249.0 245.3 242.9 240.4 238.9 235.0 208.9
Flange Adapters

DIN Flanges, Pressure Class PN 40

D A F, flat H
Tube OD mm 6 12
DIN Flange Size DN 25 15 25 50 15 25 25 50 50
Ordering Number Raised Face Flange SS-6M0-F25M-40-C SS-12M0-F15M-40-C SS-12M0-F25M-40-C SS-12M0-F50M-40-C SS-18M0-F15M-40-C SS-18M0-F25M-40-C SS-25M0-F25M-40-C SS-38M0-F50M-40-C SS-50M0-F50M-40-C
Dimensions mm A 47.5 48.5 50.5 55.3 51.8 53.8 64.0 90.4 103 B 115 95.0 115 165 95.0 115 115 165 165 24.4 31.3 49.4 65.0 15.1 21.8 33.7 45.2 32 35 55 70 22.8 9.5 20 D 15.3 E 4.8 F 20 H 40.1 38.4 40.4 45.2 41.7 43.7 51.8 62.7 66.3 J 85.0 65.0 85.0 125 65.0 85.0 85.0 125 125
E J B
18 25 38 50
EN Flanges, Pressure Class PN 40

D A F, flat H
Tube OD mm 6
EN Flange Size DN 25 15 25 50 15 25 25 50 50
Ordering Number Raised Face Flange SS-6M0-F25E-40-B1 SS-12M0-F15E-40-B1 SS-12M0-F25E-40-B1 SS-12M0-F50E-40-B1 SS-18M0-F15E-40-B1 SS-18M0-F25E-40-B1 SS-25M0-F25E-40-B1 SS-38M0-F50E-40-B1 SS-50M0-F50E-40-B1
Dimensions mm A 47.5 48.5 50.5 55.3 51.8 53.8 64.0 90.4 103 B 115 95.0 115 165 95.0 115 115 165 165 24.4 31.3 49.4 65.0 15.1 21.8 33.7 45.2 32 35 55 70 22.8 9.5 20 D 15.3 E 4.8 F 20 H 40.1 38.4 40.4 45.2 41.7 43.7 51.8 62.7 66.3 J 85.0 65.0 85.0 125 65.0 85.0 85.0 125 125
E J B
12
18 25 38 50
JIS Flanges, Pressure Class 10K

D A F, flat H
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 2 12 18 25
JIS Flange Size DN
Ordering Number Raised Face Flange SS-400-F15A-10K-RF
Dimensions A 1.66 1.72 1.83 1.91 2.40 4.01 4.92 6.10 95.0 95.0 125 3.74 B D 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 2.66 22.8 24.4 31.3 E 0.19 0.28 13/16 0.41 F H 1.37 1.43 2.76 J
Dimensions, in.
E J B
15
SS-600-F15A-10K-RF SS-810-F15A-10K-RF SS-1210-F15A-10K-RF SS-1610-F25A-10K-RF SS-3200-F50A-10K-RF
0.62 1 1/4 1.51 0.88 1 3/8 1.92 1.81 2 3/4 2.54 9.5 15.1 21.8 20 32 35 36.3 38.4 48.8 3.54 4.72 70.0 70.0 90.0
25 50 15 15 25
Dimensions, mm SS-12M0-F15A-10K-RF 46.5 SS-18M0-F15A-10K-RF 48.5 SS-25M0-F25A-10K-RF 61.0
Flange Adapters
Ordering Information, Special-Order Flange Adapters

For standard stainless steel flange adapters, select an ordering number from the tables on page 3 and 4. Build a special-order flange adapter by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
SS - 6M0 - F25 M - 40 - C
Flange Material
SS = 316 stainless steel C20 = Alloy 20 M = Alloy 400 INC = Alloy 600 HC = Alloy C-276
Over 1 in. and over 25 mm stainless steel fittings
use stainless steel ferrules with PFA coating. Applications above 450F (232C) require silverplated front ferrules and uncoated back ferrules. To order fittings with silver-plated ferrules and uncoated back ferrules, add -BM to the ordering number. Example: SS-6M0-F25M-40-C-BM
End Connection Size

Swagelok Tube Fitting Fractional Metric 100 = 1/16 in. 3M0 = 3 mm 200 = 1/8 in. 6M0 = 6 mm 400 = 1/4 in. 8M0 = 8 mm 600 = 3/8 in. 10M0 = 10 mm 810 = 1/2 in. 12M0 = 12 mm 1210 = 3/4 in. 18M0 = 18 mm 1610 = 1 in. 20M0 = 20 mm 2400 = 1 1/2 in. 22M0 = 22 mm 3200 = 2 in. 25M0 = 25 mm 28M0 = 28 mm 32M0 = 32 mm 38M0 = 38 mm 50M0 = 50 mm Swagelok Tube Adapter Fractional Metric 4-TA = 1/4 in. 6-MTA = 6 mm 6-TA = 3/8 in. 8-MTA = 8 mm 8-TA = 1/2 in. 10-MTA = 10 mm 12-TA = 3/4 in. 12-MTA = 12 mm 16-TA = 1 in. 18-MTA = 18 mm 24-TA = 1 1/2 in. 20-MTA = 20 mm 32-TA = 2 in. 22-MTA = 22 mm 25-MTA = 25 mm 28-MTA = 28 mm 32-MTA = 32 mm 38-MTA = 38 mm 50-MTA = 50 mm
Over 1 in. and over 25 mm tube adapter fittings
are furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.
Sealing Face (Raised Face Standard) ANSI (no designator) DIN C See DIN EN 1092-1 for D surface finish details E EN B1 See EN 1092-1 for B2 surface finish details JIS RF For other sealing faces, including flat face, RTJ, and tongue-and-groove, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information. Pressure Class
ANSI 150 = 150 900 = 900 300 = 300 1500 = 1500 600 = 600 2500 = 2500 DIN 40 = PN 40 160 = PN 160 63 = PN 63 250 = PN 250 100 = PN 100 320 = PN 320 EN 40 = PN 40 63 = PN 63 100 = PN 100 JIS 10K = 10 kg/cm2 30K = 30 kg/cm2 16K = 16 kg/cm2 40K = 40 kg/cm2 20K = 20 kg/cm2 63K = 63 kg/cm2
Flange Standard
A = JIS E = EN M = DIN No designator = ANSI
Nominal Flange Size

Fractional (ANSI) Metric (DIN, EN, JIS) F8 = NPS 1/2 in. F15 = DN 15 F12 = NPS 3/4 in. F20 = DN 20 F16 = NPS 1 in. F25 = DN 25 F24 = NPS 1 1/2 in. F50 = DN 50 F32 = NPS 2 in.
Options
Bored-Through Flange Adapters for Thermocouples and Dip Tubes
Swagelok bored-through flange adapters with Swagelok tube fitting ends accommodate thermocouples or dip tubes. To order, add BT to the ordering number. Example: SS-6M0-F25M-40-CBT
Tube Fitting Lap Joint Stubs

Stainless steel lap joint connectors are available for use with 1/2 in. lap joint pipe flange adapters. Select an ordering number.
Tube Sealing Surface OD Finish (Ra) 3/8 in. 10 mm Ordering Number
125 to 250 in. SS-600-1-0151 (3.2 to 6.4 m) SS-10M0-1-0005

Tube Benders
See the Swagelok Tubing Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-179, for more information.
Tubing Products
Swagelok also offers a wide variety of tubing products. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
Tubing Data
See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107, for more information on tubing data.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2009, R4 MS-02-200
www.swagelok.com
F o r g e d - B o d y N e e d l e Va l v e s
10 000 psig (690 bar)
F10 Series
Working pressures up to 10 000 psig (690 bar) Straight, angle, and oblique configurations Temperatures up to 400F (204C) with PTFE packing;
up to 850F (454C) with graphite packing

F316/F316L stainless steel forged body Non-rotating, back-seated needle design Stem threads above packing protected from system media Hydrostatic test certificates complete with full chemical and physical
material certifications available
Forged-Body Needle Valves10 000 psig (690 bar)
Features
Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and locknut Shroud protects stem threads against ingress of dirt and dust Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation Stem threads above packing protected from system media Safety back seating needle seals in fully open position
Choice of packing materials
Non-rotating, hardened needle for positive shutoff
One-piece stainless steel forged body
Packing Temperature, F (C) 0 (17) to 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 850
(93) (148) (204) (260) (315) (371) (426) (454)
Testing
Every Swagelok F10 series valve assembly is factory tested hydrostatically; a shell test at 1.5 times maximum rated working pressure and a seat test at 1.1 times maximum rated working pressure, in accordance with BS EN 12266-1 (formerly BS 6755 part 1).
PTFE
Graphite
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 10 000 (690) 8 000 (551) 6 000 (413)

10 9 8 7 6 6 5 5
000 050 150 380 666 000 333 000
(690) (623) (561) (508) (459) (413) (367) (344)
Component Body Stem Needle Packing Gland nut Gland Shroud Gland ring Handle Handle lock nut S17400 SS / A564 316 SS Material / ASTM F316 / F316L SS / A182 316 SS S17400 SS / A564 Condition H1150D PTFE or graphite 316 SS
Straight Pattern Needle Valve
Flow Data
Straight Pattern
1.0
Dimensions
3.00
(76.0)
0.8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) Factor
0.6
0.4
0.2
0 0 1
4.33 (110) valve fully open
3.03
(77.0)

Orifice = 0.27 (7.0)
FS4NAT
Basic Series Number Body Material and Pattern
316 stainless steel forging, straight pattern
Handle
Bar handle
Packing
End Connection
1/2 in. NPT female inlet and outlet
Angle Needle Valve
Flow Data
Angle Pattern
1.0
Dimensions
3.00
(76.0)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
(47.5)
1.87
3.78 (96.0) valve fully open
1.51
(36.5)
Orifice = 0.27 (7.0)
FGN44NAT
316 stainless steel forging, angle pattern
Handle
Bar handle
Packing
End Connection
1/2 in. NPT male inlet / female outlet
Oblique Needle Valve
Flow Data
Oblique Pattern
1.0
Dimensions
4.80
(122)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2

Orifice = 0.27 (7.0)
FYN44NAT
316 stainless steel forging, oblique pattern
Handle
Bar handle
Packing
End Connection
1/2 in. NPT male inlet / female outlet
(92.0)
3.63

Carbon steel is available upon request. For this and other options and accessories, contact your independent Swagelok sales and service representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2004 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL May 2004, R2 MS-02-215
www.swagelok.com
G a s Filters
FC Series
Coalescing or particle filtration Designed for on-line process analyzers Easy element replacement 1/8 in., 1/4 in., and 6 mm end connections
FC Series Gas Filters
Features
Horizontal mounting reduces panel space requirements. Drain connection port located on body eliminates need to
Particulate Efficiency
99.99 % (all elements)
disconnect line when changing elements.

Stainless steel construction enhances system cleanliness.
Internal Volume
1. in.3 (19.7 cm3)
Captured bowl nut can be assembled hand-tight or wrench-tight
Bowl-to-body O-ring seal is available in fluorocarbon FKM, PTFE, and Kalrez for a broad range of chemical compatibility Perforated sleeve provides rigid support for filter element allows unobstructed fluid flow
Element-to-bowl seal centers element prevents bypass flow minimizes element deformation
Mounting bracket eases installation Ports available with female Swagelok tube fitting, NPT, and ISO connections. Sizes include 1/8 in., 1/4 in., and 6 mm
Borosilicate glass fiber filter element is available with epoxy or silica binder in 0.1, 0.3, and 1.0 m pore sizes
Component Body, bowl Bowl nut O-ring Filter element Sleeve Retaining ring, mounting bracket Mounting bracket bolt ()
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM
Ratings are based on bowl nut tightened to 45 in.lb (5 Nm). Ratings are limited to 50F (11C) with epoxy binder. Ratings extend to 400F (04C) with silica binder. Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard; for optional O-ring materials and ratings, see Options, page 4.
Material Temperature F (C) 0 (17) to 100 150 00 50
(37) (65) (93) (11)
Borosilicate glass fiber with epoxy or silica binder 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A40 316 SS
316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 1000 955 915 870

(68.9) (65.7) (63.0) (59.9)
300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (04)
85 (56.8) 795 (54.7) 760 (5.3)
FC Series Gas Filters
Operation
Coalescing Filtration
Orientation of the filter housing is critical for proper operation. The drain port must face down.
Dry, filtered gas exits through top port and flows to process analyzer
2 1
Gas stream enters side port and moves through filter element from inside to outside
Filter element captures fine liquid droplets suspended in the gas forcing them to coalesce (form large drops) within filter element
3 4
Particle Filtration
Orientation of the filter is not critical for proper operation. Liquid exits out drain port
Large drops are forced to outside of element by gas flow. Gravity forces the drops to fall away from the element
Gas stream enters top port and moves through filter element from outside to inside
Filtered gas exits side port and flows to the process analyzer
Filter element captures any particulate suspended in gas. Only a small volume of gas passes through the element
Most gas bypasses filter element, exits through bottom port, and returns to process line
Air Flow Data at 70F (20C)

psi (0.13 bar) pressure differential
Pore Size m 0.1, 0.3 1.0 Inlet Pressure, psig (bar) 5 (0.34) 1.7 (48) .8 (79) 10 (0.68) 1.9 (53) 3. (90) 20 (1.3) .5 (70) 3.8 (100) 40 (2.7) 3.4 (96) 4.8 (130) 100 (6.8) 250 (17.2) 500 (34.4) 1000 (68.9) 6.0 (160) 7.3 (00) 10 (80) 15 (40) 5 (700) Air Flow, std ft3/min (std L/min)

All FC series filters are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.

Select a filter ordering number and an element ordering number.
End Connections Type Female Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Female ISO Size 1/4 in. 6 mm 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Filter Ordering Number SS-FCB SS-FCC SS-FCD SS-FCE SS-FCG 0.1 0.3 1.0 0.1 Nominal Pore Size m Filtration Service Epoxy Binder Particle Coalescing and particle Particle Particle GE-15K-FC-01 GE-15K-FC-03 GE-15K-FC-10 GS-15K-FC-01 Element Ordering Number
See specifications ISO7/1, BS EN 10 6-1, DIN 999, JIS B003.
Silica Binder
Side
1.31
Top
NPT and ISO ports
(33.3) (57.)
Bottom
.5 1.00
(5.4)
45
(76.)
3.00
(95.3)
3.75
(39.4)
1.55
(8.7)
1.13
1.41
(35.8)
bolt circle 3.09 M6 3 1-6H, 0.5 (6.4) deep mounting holes () 1.75 0.8 (7.1) bracket mounting holes (4)
(16.8)
0.66
(5.7)
1.01
(78.5) (97.0)
(44.5)
3.8
Tube fitting ports
Options
To order FC series filters with optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the filter ordering number. Example: SS-FCB-SC11
O-ring Materials
Fluorocarbon FKM is standard. PTFE and Kalrez are available. To order an FC series filter with an optional O-ring, add a designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-FCB-KZ
O-ring Kits
Select a kit ordering number.

O-ring Material Kalrez PTFE
Temperature Rating, F (C) 3 to 350 (0 to 176) 0 to 400 (17 to 04)
Designator -KZ -TR
Kit Ordering Number VT-9K-FC KZ-9K-FC T-9K-FC
Fluorocarbon FKM 0 to 400 (17 to 04)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont Co. 00, 004, 005, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI February 008, R6 MS-0-8
www.swagelok.com
G a ug e Val ves
Features
Stainless steel construction Nonrotating ball-tip and plug-tip
stem designs
Roddable (plug-tip design) Lagging extension body available for
insulation clearance
1/2 and 3/4 in. male to 1/2 in.
NPT female end connections

1/2 in. female gauge ports standard Schedule 160 pipe wall or heavier on
valve inlet fitting for strength

Bonnet lock plate standard
Component Handle pin, set screw Packing bolt Packing supports (2) Packing Seat (plug-tip design) Handle, gland, lock nut, washer, lock plate, cap screw (3/16 in. hex key) Stem (ball- and plugtip design), ball (ball-tip design) Body, bonnet Material Grade/ ASTM Specification S17400 SS/A564 416 SS/A582 Reinforced PTFE PTFE/D1710, D1708, D792 Acetal/D4181 316 SS
Stem Design Seat Material Packing Material Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (204) 450 (232) 500 (260) 550 (287) 600 (315) 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
(343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482) (510) (537) (565) (593) (621) (648)
Ball Tip 316 SS PTFE 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4470 (307) 4280 (294) 4130 (284) Grafoil Working 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4470 (307) 4280 (294) 4130 (284) 3980 (274) 3870 (266) 3760 (259) 3700 3600 3520 3460 3380 3280 3220 3030 3000 2685 2285 1715
(254) (248) (242) (235) (232) (225) (221) (208) (206) (184) (157) (118)
Plug Tip PFA PTFE Pressure, psig (bar) 750 (51.6) 6000 (413) 625 (43.0) 2650 (182) 450 (31.0) 1000 (68.9) 300 (20.6) 200 (13.7) 100 (6.8) Acetal PEEK PEEK 6000 3000 1600 1300 1200 1000 800 600 400 200
(413) (206) (110) (89.5) (82.6) (68.9) (55.1) (41.3) (27.5) (13.7)
316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 Fluorinated-, PTFE, and tungsten disulfide-based, nickel antiseize in a hydrocarbon carrier, and hydrocarbonbased (all packing materials); molybdenum disulfide-based (PEEK packing material)
Lubricants
Acetal is rated to 250F (121C) for general service and to 200F (93C) for water and steam service.
Testing
Every gauge valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

Every gauge valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Packing adjustment may be required during the valves service life.

2.50
(63.5)
Options
Packing Material
PTFE packing is standard. Grafoil packing is available for the ball-tip design, extending the hightemperature pressure rating to 1715 psig at 1200F (118 bar at 648C).
A open 2 gauge ports, 1/2 female NPT
To order, add -G to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6PNBGM8-F8-G PEEK packing is available. To order, add -PK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6PNBGM8-F8-PK UHMWPE packing is available. The temperature rating for UHMWPE packing is 65 to 250F (56 to 121C) . To order, add -P to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6PNBGM8-F8-P
1/2 or 3/4 male NPT
1.25
(31.8)
square
B C
1.50
(38.1)
1/2 female 0.63 NPT

(16.0)
Ball-Tip Design Valve with Lagging Extension Body Inlet/Outlet (Male to Stem Female NPT) Design in. 1/2 Lagging 1/2 to 1/2 3/4 to 1/2 Lagging 3/4 to 1/2 1/2 to 1/2 3/4 to 1/2 Plug 1/2 to 1/2 3/4 to 1/2 1/2 to 1/2 3/4 to 1/2 Acetal PFA PEEK
Dimensions in. (mm) Seat Ordering Number SS-6PNBGM8-F8 SS-6PNBGM8L-F8 316 SS SS-6PNBGM12-F8 SS-6PNBGM12L-F8 SS-6PNDGM8-F8 SS-6PNDGM12-F8 SS-6PNTGM8-F8 SS-6PNTGM12-F8 SS-6PNPGM8-F8 SS-6PNPGM12-F8 0.250
(6.4)
Ball-Tip Material
C 5.38
(137)
Orifice
B 2.97
(75.4)
An optional cobalt-based alloy ball tip is available. To order, add -STE to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6PNBGM8-F8-STE
4.84 0.156
(4.0)
7.25
(184)
Ball tip
3.88
(98.6)
(123)
2.97
(75.4)
5.38
(137)
4.84
(123)
7.25
(184)
Sour Gas Service

Valves for sour gas service are available. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. Stems are alloy R-405, and wetted stainless steel parts are annealed. To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6PNBGM8-F8-SG
3.54
(89.9)
2.97
(75.4)
5.38
(137)
Accessories
Seat Maintenance Kit (Plug-Tip Design)
Kits contain one seat, lubricant, and instructions.
Seat Material Acetal PFA PEEK Ordering Number DL-9K-5P TF-9K-5P PK-9K-5P
Stem Packing Maintenance Kit

Kits contain packing, lubricant, instructions, and packing supports as required.
Packing Material PTFE Grafoil PEEK UHMWPE
Ordering Number T-9K-6N G-9K-6N PK-9K-6N PE-9K-6N
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 2001, 2002, 2003, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A.,MI July 2007, R6 MS-01-52
www.swagelok.com
G a u g eable Alloy 400/R-405 M e c h anically Attached P i p e and Tube Fittings
For use with MIL-T-16420K 70/30 and 90/10 copper-nickel tubing and pipe Excellent corrosion resistance in chloride-containing environments ASTM F1387-qualified for shipboard use Easy installation using hand tools Available in sizes for 1/8 to 1/2 in. pipe and 1/4 to 1 in. tubing
Gaugeable Alloy 400/R-405 Mechanically Attached Pipe and Tube Fittings
Features
Swagelok Company has qualied the Swagelok alloy 400/ R-405 tting product line in sizes from 1/8 to 1/2 in. pipe and 1/4 to 1 in. tubing based on ASTM F1387, Standard Specication for Performance of Piping and Tubing Mechanically Attached Fittings and received U.S. Navy approval for use on surface ships (see table footnote , below). This standard establishes the performance characteristics required for mechanically attached ttings (MAF), such as the Swagelok tube tting. The Swagelok alloy 400/R-405 mechanically attached pipe and tube ttings are rated for use to the working pressures listed in the table below. The ASTM F1387 qualication tests included:
Examination of Specimen
Material Specification Component 1 Nut 2 Back ferrule 3 Front ferrule 4 Body
Wetted components listed in italics. For improved performance, fitting components of alloy 400 are coated with a hydrocarbon film.
Pneumatic Proof Impulse Tensile Repeated Assembly Thermal Cycling Stress Corrosion Shock Vibration
Material Alloy 400/ R-405
Bar Stock ASTM B164, ASME SB164
Forgings ASTM B564, ASME SB564
Hydrostatic Proof Flexure Fatigue Hydrostatic Burst Rotary Flexure Elevated Temperature Soak Torsion Fire
Pressure Ratings
Pressure ratings listed in the tables below are in accordance with the pressure classes listed in MIL-T-16420K, Military Specications, Tube, Copper-Nickel Alloy, Seamless and Welded (Copper Alloy Numbers 715 and 706) for the applicable copper-nickel alloy tubing and pipe grades. Swagelok alloy 400/R-405 mechanically attached pipe and tube ttings, used with MIL-T-16420K copper-nickel alloy tubing and pipe, are rated for general use to these pressures.
Temperature Rating
65 to 600F (53 to 315C)
Suggested Allowable Working Pressures for Swagelok Alloy 400/R-405 Tube Fittings
With Copper-Nickel Alloy 715 (70/30) Tubing
Outside Diameter in. 0.405 0.540 0.675 0.840 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.750 1.00 Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 3300 (227) 0.049 3300 (227) 0.058 3300 (227) 6000 (413) 0.065 700 (48.2) 200 (13.7) 700 (48.2) 0.072 3300 (227) 700 (48.2) 700 (48.2) 3300 (227) 0.095 3300 (227) 0.109 3300 (227) 0.120 3300 (227) 0.134 3300 (227) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
Fitting 1/8 in. pipe 1/4 in. pipe 3/8 in. pipe 1/2 in. pipe 1/4 in. tube 3/8 in. tube 1/2 in. tube 3/4 in. tube 1 in. tube
With Copper-Nickel Alloy 706 (90/10) Tubing

Copper-nickel alloy 706 (90/10) purchased to MIL-T-16420K may be used up to 200 psig (13.7 bar).
Swagelok alloy 400/R-405 tube fittings have been qualified for use on surface ships by the U.S. Navy as Type IV, Grade C, Class 8 (Class 10 for 1/4 in. size),
600F, separable, 70/30 NiCu fittings, 3750 psig (6000 psig for 1/4 in. size) pressure ratings when used with 70/30 CuNi or 90/10 CuNi (400 psig max) tubing in accordance with MIL-T-16420K, Type 1, Grade 2, alloy 715, for size ranges 1/4 to 1 in. OD (0.035 to 0.134 in. wall thickness). Nonfire-hardened applications only. Pressure ratings in the tables above are in accordance with MIL-T-16420K pressure classes. Specified to Table III of MIL-T-16420K. Specified to paragraph 1.2.1. of MIL-T-16420K.
Male Connectors
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 Ordering Number M-400-1-2 M-400-1-4 M-600-1-4 M-600-1-8 M-810-1-4 M-810-1-8 M-1010-1-8 M-1210-1-12 M-1410-1-12 M-1610-1-16
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 Ordering Number M-2P0-1-2 M-4P0-1-2 M-4P0-1-4 M-6P0-1-4 M-6P0-1-8 M-8P0-1-4 M-8P0-1-8
Unions
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number M-400-6 M-600-6 M-810-6 M-1010-6 M-1210-6 M-1410-6 M-1610-6
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number M-2P0-6 M-4P0-6 M-6P0-6 M-8P0-6
Reducing Unions
Tube
Tube OD, in. T 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Tx 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 Ordering Number M-600-6-4 M-810-6-4 M-810-6-6 M-1010-6-8 M-1210-6-8 M-1610-6-12
Pipe
Pipe Size, in. P 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Px 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 Ordering Number M-4P0-6-2P M-6P0-6-4P M-8P0-6-4P M-8P0-6-6P
T or P
Tx or Px
90 Union Elbows
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Ordering Number M-400-9 M-600-9 M-810-9 M-1010-9 M-1210-9 M-1610-9
Pipe
Union Tees
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Ordering Number M-400-3 M-600-3 M-810-3 M-1010-3 M-1210-3 M-1610-3
Pipe
Union Branch Reducing Tees
Tube
Tube OD, in. Main 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 Branch 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 Ordering Number M-600-3-6-4 M-810-3-8-4 M-810-3-8-6 M-1010-3-10-6 M-1210-3-12-8 M-1610-3-16-12
Pipe
Pipe Size, in. Main 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Branch 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 Ordering Number M-4P0-3-4P-2P M-6P0-3-6P-4P M-8P0-3-8P-4P M-8P0-3-8P-6P
Male Adapters
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 NPT Size in. 1/4 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Ordering Number M-4-TA-1-4 M-6-TA-1-4 M-8-TA-1-8 M-12-TA-1-12 M-16-TA-1-16
Female ISO Parallel (RG, Gauge) Thread
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 ISO Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 ISO Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number M-400-7-4RG M-600-7-6RG M-810-7-8RG
Ordering Number M-2P0-7-4RG M-4P0-7-4RG M-6P0-7-6RG M-8P0-7-8RG
Female VCO Fittings
Tube
1/4 in. size only; uorocarbon FKM O-ring standard (other O-ring materials available). Ordering number: M-4-FVCO-6-400
Caps
Plugs
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number M-400-C M-600-C M-810-C M-1010-C M-1210-C M-1410-C M-1610-C
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number M-2P0-C M-4P0-C M-6P0-C M-8P0-C
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number M-400-P M-600-P M-810-P M-1010-P M-1210-P M-1410-P M-1610-P
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number M-2P0-P M-4P0-P M-6P0-P M-8P0-P
Back Ferrules
Front Ferrules
Tube
Pipe
Tube
Pipe
Nuts
Additional Products
Other Swagelok pipe and tube tting congurations and adapters, such as tailpiece adapters in accordance with MIL-F-1183, Military Specications, Fittings, Pipe, Cast Bronze, Silver Brazing, are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Tube
Pipe

Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok standard cleaning and packaging specication (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Gaugeability
On initial installation, the Swagelok gap inspection gauge assures the installer or inspector that a tting has been sufciently tightened.
Position the Swagelok gap inspection gauge next to the gap between the nut and body.
Tools for Use with Alloy 400/R-405 Tube Fittings

Gap Inspection Gauges
Swagelok gap inspection gauges assure the installer or inspector that the tting has been sufciently pulled up on initial installation.
Tube
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number MS-IG-400 MS-IG-600 MS-IG-810 MS-IG-1010 MS-IG-1210 MS-IG-1410 MS-IG-1610
Pipe
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number MS-IG-810 MS-IG-1010 MS-IG-1210 MS-IG-1410 If the gauge will not enter the gap, the tting is sufciently tightened. If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is required.
Always depressurize a system before adjusting the tightness of a tube tting connection.
Interchangeability
Intermixing and interchanging tube tting components of different manufacturers can be dangerous. Leak-tight seals that will withstand high pressure, vibration, vacuum, and temperature changes depend on close tolerances and consistent, exacting quality control in conjunction with good design principles. Components of other manufacturers may look like Swagelok tube tting componentsbut they cannot be manufactured in accordance with Swagelok engineering standards, nor do they benet from innovations in design and manufacture dened by active Swagelok tube tting patents.
Pre-Swaging Tool
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 Ordering Number MS-ST-400 MS-ST-600 MS-ST-810 MS-ST-1010 MS-ST-1210
For Swagelok tube tting installations in close quarters, the Swagelok preswaging tool is a convenient accessory.
Installation Instructions
Swagelok alloy 400/R-405 tube ttings can be installed quickly, easily, and reliably.
Depth Marking Tool

Swagelok depth marking tools help ensure that tubing is bottomed on the shoulder inside the Swagelok tube tting body.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number MS-DMT-400 MS-DMT-600 MS-DMT-810 MS-DMT-1010 MS-DMT-1210 MS-DMT-1410 MS-DMT-1610
Safety Precautions
Do not bleed system by loosening tting nut or tting plug. Do not make up and tighten ttings when system is
pressurized.
Make sure that the tubing rests rmly on the shoulder of
the tube tting body before tightening the nut.

Use Swagelok gap inspection gauge to ensure sufcient
pull-up upon initial installation.

Always use proper thread sealants on tapered pipe
threads.
Do not mix materials or tting components from various
manufacturersferrules, nuts, and tting bodies.

Never turn tting body. Instead, hold tting body and turn nut. Avoid unnecessary disassembly of unused ttings. Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end connections.
Swagelok Mechanically Attached Pipe and Tube Fittings
Fully insert the tubing or pipe into the tting and against the shoulder; rotate the nut nger-tight.
Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.
While holding the tting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ttings, tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position
Installation in High-Pressure Applications and High Safety-Factor Systems

1. Fully insert the tubing or pipe into the tting and against the shoulder; rotate the nut nger-tight. 2. Due to the variations of tubing and pipe diameters, a common starting point is desirable. Therefore, tighten the nut until the tubing will not turn by hand or move axially in the tting. 3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 4. While holding tting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ttings, tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube ttings many times. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1. Insert tubing or pipe with preswaged ferrules into the tting body until the front ferrule seats (Fig. 1). 2. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position; at this point, a signicant increase in resistance will be encountered.
3. Tighten slightly with a wrench (Fig. 2). Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with reassembled ttings.
Caps and Plugs

Caps
See Swagelok tube tting installation and reassembly, above.
Plugs
While holding tting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from the nger-tight position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ttings, tighten the plug one-eighth turn. Reassembly You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
Tube Adapters
Fig. 1
1. Install the end opposite the tube adapter end (Fig. 1). Female pipe port on existing equipment 2. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube tting. Make sure that the tube adapter rests rmly on the shoulder of the tube tting body and that the nut is nger-tight (Fig. 2). 3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.
4. While holding tting body steady, tighten the nut one and onequarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ttings, tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Fig. 2
Reassembly
See Swagelok tube tting reassembly, page 7.
Depth Marking Tool

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred tubing into the depth marking tool (DMT) until the tubing is fully bottomed into the tool. Using a pen or pencil, mark the tubing at the top of the DMT (Fig. 1). 2. Remove the tubing from the DMT and insert it into the Swagelok
tting until it is bottomed inside the tting body (Fig. 2). If any portion of the mark on the tubing can be seen above the tting nut, the tubing is not fully bottomed inside the tting. 3. While holding the tting body steady, follow Swagelok tube tting installation instructions, page 7.
Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1
1. Install the Swagelok nut and ferrules onto the preswaging tool. 2. Insert tubing into the preswaging tool. 3. Make sure that the tubing rests rmly on the shoulder of the preswaging tool body and that the nut is nger-tight.
6. Loosen the nut. 7. Remove the tubing with preswaged ferrules from the preswaging tool. If the tubing sticks in the preswaging tool, remove the tubing by gently rocking it back and forth. Do not turn the tubing (Fig. 2). 8. Insert tubing with preswaged ferrules into the tting body until the front ferrule seats. 9. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position; at this point, a signicant increase in resistance will be encountered. 10. Tighten slightly with a wrench (Fig. 3) Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with ttings that were assembled using the preswaging tool.
Fig. 2
4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding the preswaging tool steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position.
Fig. 3
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ttings, tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position (Fig. 1).
Swagelok, VCO, SnoopTM Swagelok Company 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL January 2006, R0 MS-02-332
www.swagelok.com
Gauge able Chromatograph and Column End Fit tings

Features
Suitable for liquid or gas chromatography 316 stainless steel construction Offered in sizes from 1/16 to 1/2 in.
Swagelok chromatograph and column end fittings are rated to the working pressure of tubing as listed in Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Careful selection of high-quality tubing is important when installing safe, leak-tight systems.
Material 316 stainless steel Bar Stock ASTM A276 ASME SA479 Forgings ASTM A182 ASME SA182
Cleaning
Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Includes straight configurations. Includes all elbows, crosses, and tees.

Chromatograph Fittings
E D
UnionLow Dead Volume

Tube OD 1/16 Ordering Number SS-1F0-6GC Dimensions A 1.26 D 0.61 E 0.013 Dimensions, in. 6.6 3 105 cm3 Dead Volume
F flat
Union TeeLow Dead Volume

Tube OD Ordering Number SS-1F0-3GC Dimensions A 1.32 Ax 0.66 D 0.61 E 0.013 F 3/8 Dimensions, in. 1/16 2.8 3 104 cm3 Dead Volume
Ax
Ax
Column End Fittings

E Tx T D Dx
Female Swagelok Union

T Tube OD Tx Tube OD Ordering Number SS-400-6-1FGC SS-600-6-1FGC Dimensions A 1.24 1.30 D 0.60 0.66 Dx E Dimensions, in. 1/4 3/8 1/16 0.61 0.013 6.8 3 105 cm3 Dead Volume
Reducing Union
Low Volume
E Tx T Frit Dx A
T Tube OD
Tx Tube OD
Dimensions Ordering Number A D Dx E Frit Thickness Dead Volume
Dimensions, in. Low Volume 1/8 SS-200-6-1LV 1/16 SS-400-6-1LV SS-600-6-1LV SS-200-6-1ZV 1/16 SS-400-6-1ZV SS-600-6-1ZV SS-810-6-1ZV 1.22 1.35 1.44 1.22 1.35 1.44 1.58 0.72 0.82 0.91 0.73 0.82 0.92 1.04 0.06 0.34 0.052 0.062 0.125 5.4 3 103 cm3 6.7 3 103 cm3 6.5 3 103 cm3 1/4 3/8 Zero Volume 1/8 0.062 0.125 0 1/4 3/8 1/2
Zero Volume
E Tx T Frit
The dead volume in the low-volume fitting is equal to the volume of the 0.052 in. bore. The tubing in the zero-volume fitting is inserted to the frit. Both low- and zero-volume column end fittings are available with stainless steel sintered frits. Frits are loosely installed to facilitate removal and replacement. To order, add a frit designator to the ordering number.
Nominal Pore Size m 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 Nominal Pore Size m 5 7 10 15 20 25
Frit Designator S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4
Frit Designator SA SB SD SE SF SG
Example: SS-200-6-1LVS9 For other nominal pore sizes, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2004, 2005, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 2008, R3 MS-02-173
www.swagelok.com
Gauge able SAF 2507 Supe r D uplex Tube Fit tings
Excellent corrosion resistance in chloride-containing environments Advanced-geometry back ferrule design enhances sealing action Same gaugeability as traditional Swagelok tube fittings Easy installation using hand tools Available in sizes from 1/4 to 3/4 in.
Gaugeable SAF 507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings
Features
Swagelok Company has worked with Sandvik Steel, the makers of SAF 507 super duplex stainless steel, to create a tube fitting design for connecting SAF 507 tube systems. This fitting combines a patented, advanced-geometry shape for the back ferrule and a patented ferrule hardening process. The result is a Swagelok tube fitting that can reliably grip and seal on exceptionally hard SAF 507 tube. Swagelok SAF 507 tube fittings are available in sizes from 1/4 to 3/4 in. and can be installed using simple hand tools. All SAF 507 and 6-moly tube fitting components are manufactured from controlled chemistry material with a minimum pitting resistance equivalent (PRE) value of 4.5. Each Swagelok SAF 507 tube fitting component is stamped with its material type.
Component
1 Nut 2 Back ferrule 3 Front ferrule 4 Body
Material SAF 507 super duplex SS
2 3
Marking Notched hex, SAF 507 on face 54 or 6XN 6-moly on outer rim SAF 2507 super 2507 duplex SS on outer rim SAF 2507 super duplex SS 2507 on neck
Wetted components listed in italics. Alloy 54UNS S3154; alloy AL-6XNUNS N08367.
Do not mix components of other
materials with SAF 2507 tube fittings.
Pressure Ratings
Pressure ratings for a fluid system are determined by the end connection or system component with the lowest pressure rating. Ratings for the end connections listed in this catalog are discussed below.

Swagelok tube fittings listed in this catalog are rated to the pressure rating of the tubing (see table below).
Pressure Ratings for Swagelok SAF 2507 Tube Fittings Used with SAF 2507 Tubing
Pressure ratings are calculated from S values (38 700 psi [66 MPa]), in accordance with ASME B31.3, Process Piping. Pressure ratings are for metal temperatures from 0 to 100F (8 to 37C). SAF 507 tubing, fully annealed, meets ASTM A789 or equivalent. Hardness value is HRC 3 or less. For gas service, use tube wall thicknesses outside the shaded area.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 10 000 (690) 6 500 (450) 5 000 (350) 0.049 15 000 (1040) 10 100 (700) 7 00 (500) 5 800 (400) 4 700 (330) 0.065 1 700 (880) 10 100
(700)
0.083 1 900 (890) 10 100 (700) 8 500 (590)
0.095 10 000 (690)
7 600 (530) 6 300 (440)
Pressure ratings based on special wall thickness tolerance for Swagelok SAF 507 tubing.
Male NPT End Connections

Male NPT pipe end connections up to 1/ in. are rated to 15 000 psig (1040 bar); sizes over 1/ in. are rated to 10 000 psig (690 bar).
Elevated Temperature Ratings

Swagelok 2507 Tube Fitting and NPT End Connections
Multiply working pressure from the table above by the appropriate factor to obtain working pressure at elevated temperatures. Example: 1/4 in. tubing with 0.035 in. wall at 300F (148C):
Temperature F (C) 00 (93) 300 (148) 400 (04) 500 (60) 600 (316) Factor 0.90 0.85 0.8 0.81 0.80
SAE/MS End Connections

SAE/MS end connections up to 1/ in. are rated to 4500 psig (310 bar); sizes over 1/ in. are rated to 3600 psig (50 bar), in accordance with SAE J196.
Cone-and-Thread End Connections

Cone-and-thread end connections listed in this catalog are manufactured to API-6A Specification for Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment tolerances, Autoclave Engineers, and Butech Pressure Systems catalog dimensions. Sizes up to 9/16 in. are rated to 0 000 psig (1380 bar); sizes over 9/16 in. are rated to 10 000 psig (690 bar).
The working pressure at 100F (37C) is 10 000 psig (690 bar). The temperature factor for 300F (148C) is 0.85. 10 000 psig (690 bar) 0.85 is 8500 (585). The working pressure for 1/4 in. tubing with 0.035 in. wall at 300F (148C) is 8500 psig (585 bar).

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions are shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. For Swagelok nut dimensions, see page 6. The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. CAD templates are available on www.swagelok.com.
Straight Fittings
Unions
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
D E A D
Ordering Number 507-400-6 507-600-6 507-810-6 507-1010-6 507-110-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.61 (40.9) 1.77 (45.0) .0 (51.3) .11 (53.5) .11 (53.5) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (15.9)
1/ 5/8 3/4
Bulkhead Unions
F flat F flat
Dimensions, in. (mm) Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 Ordering Number 507-400-61 507-600-61 507-810-61 507-1010-61 507-110-61 Panel Hole Size 9/64 37/64 49/64 1 1/64 1 9/64 Max Panel Thickness 0.40 (10.) 0.44 (11.) 0.50 (1.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.75 (19.0)
A .7 (57.7) .45 (6.) .80 (71.1) 3.11 (78.9) 3.33 (84.5)
D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4)
E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (15.9)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 3/8
1/ 5/8 3/4
Male Connectors
F flat E D
NPT
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 NPT Size 1/4 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 Ordering Number 507-400-1-4 507-400-1-8 507-600-1-4 507-600-1-6 507-600-1-8 507-810-1-4 507-810-1-6 507-810-1-8 507-1010-1-8 507-110-1-1 507-110-1-16 Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.49 (37.8) 1.76 (44.7) 1.57 (39.9) 1.57 (39.9) 1.8 (46.) 1.71 (43.4) 1.71 (43.4) 1.93 (49.0) 1.99 (50.5) 1.99 (50.5) .5 (57.1) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.8 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.41 (10.4) 0.47 (11.9) 0.6 (15.9) F 9/16 7/8 5/8 11/16 7/8 13/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 3/8
1/ 5/8 3/4
0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4)
SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

F flat O-ring
Tube OD in. 1/4
SAE/MS Thread Ordering Size Number 7/16-0 507-400-1-4ST 9/16-18 507-400-1-6ST 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 507-600-1-6ST 507-810-1-6ST 507-810-1-8ST 507-1010-1-10ST
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.34 (34.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.46 (37.1) 1.54 (39.1) 1.65 (41.9) 1.77 (44.9) 1.93 (49.0) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.3) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (15.6) F 9/16 11/16 11/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8
Uniform O-ring Size 904 906 906 906 908 910 91
3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
1 1/16-1 507-110-1-1ST
May be back drilled to larger ID at straight thread end. Standard O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat E 9
Cone-and-Thread
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 MediumPressure Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 9/16 3/4 Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.6
(41.1)
Ordering Number 507-400-1-4MP 507-600-1-6MP 507-810-1-9MP 507-1010-1-9MP 507-110-1-1MP
G D A
D 0.60
(15.)
E 0.11
(.8)
F 1/ 5/8 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/16
G 0.14
(3.6)
Thread Size 7/16-0 UNF- 9/16-18 UNF- 13/16-16 UN- 13/16-16 UN- 3/4-14 NPSM-
1.9
(48.8)
0.66
(16.8)
0.1
(5.3)
0.5
(6.4)
.15
(54.6)
0.90
(.9)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
.4
(56.8)
0.96
(4.4)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
.53
(64.)
0.96
(4.4)
0.45
(11.5)
0.56
(14.)
Cone-and-Thread Female Connectors

Weep hole F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
MediumPressure Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number 507-400-7-4MP 507-600-7-6MP 507-810-7-9MP

(34.8)
D 0.60
(15.)
E 0.11
(.8)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/16
Thread Size 7/16-0 UNF- 9/16-18 UNF- 13/16-16 UN-
1.57
(39.9)
0.66
(16.8)
0.0
(5.1)
1/
1.96
(49.8)
0.90
(.9)
0.36
(9.1)
Reducers
F flat T D E A Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 Tx 3/8 1/ 1/4 1/ 1/4 3/8 3/4 1/
Ordering Number 507-400-R-6 507-400-R-8 507-600-R-4 507-600-R-8 507-810-R-4 507-810-R-6 507-810-R-1 507-110-R-8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.60 (40.6) 1.8 (46.) 1.63 (41.4) 1.91 (48.5) 1.77 (45.0) 1.84 (46.7) .1 (53.8) .0 (55.8) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.17 0.8 0.17 0.7 0.41
(4.3) (7.1) (4.3) (6.9) (10.3)
0.37 (9.3)
Port Connectors
E H
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number 507-401-PC 507-601-PC 507-811-PC 507-1011-PC 507-111-PC
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.17 (4.3) 0.7 (6.9) 0.37 (9.3) 0.47 (1.0) 0.58 (14.7) H 0.98 (4.9) 1.05 (6.7) 1.43 (36.3) 1.49 (37.8) 1.49 (37.8)
Caps
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8

D
Ordering Number 507-400-C 507-600-C 507-810-C 507-1010-C 507-110-C
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.9 (3.4) 1.01 (5.7) 1.15 (9.) 1.4 (31.5) 1.34 (34.0) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4)
Plugs
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number 507-400-P 507-600-P 507-810-P 507-1010-P 507-110-P
1/
A
5/8 3/4
Union Elbows
E F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number 507-400-9 507-600-9 507-810-9 507-1010-9 507-110-9
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.06 (6.9) 1.0 (30.5) 1.4 (36.1) 1.57 (39.8) 1.70 (43.1) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (15.9) F 1/ 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/16
Union Tees
E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number 507-400-3 507-600-3 507-810-3 507-1010-3 507-110-3
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .1 (53.8) .40 (61.0) .84 (7.1) 3.14 (79.6) 3.40 (86.) Ax 1.06 (6.9) 1.0 (30.5) 1.4 (36.1) 1.57 (39.8) 1.70 (43.1) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) 0.96 (4.4) 0.96 (4.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (15.9) F 1/ 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/16
Ax
F flat
Ax
Union Crosses
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/
Ordering Number 507-400-4 507-600-4 507-810-4
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .1 (53.8) .40 (61.0) .84 (7.1) D 0.60 (15.) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (.9) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/ 5/8 13/16
E A F flat D
Tube Adapters
Male Adapters
F flat E A
NPT
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 NPT Size in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 Ordering Number 507-4-TA-1-4 507-6-TA-1-4 507-6-TA-1-6 507-6-TA-1-8 507-8-TA-1-4 507-8-TA-1-8 507-10-TA-1-8 507-1-TA-1-1 Dimensions A 1.46 (37.1) 1.53 1.56 1.78 1.75 .00 .06
(38.9) (39.6) (45.) (44.4) (50.8) (5.3)
E 0.17 (4.3) 0.7 (6.9) 0.8 (7.1) 0.37 (9.4) 0.47 (11.9) 0.58 (14.7)
F 9/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 9/16 7/8 7/8 1 1/16
.06 (5.3)
Tube Adapters
Male Adapters
F flat O-ring E

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 SAE/MS Thread Size 7/16-0 7/16-0 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-1 Basic Ordering Number 507-4-TA-1-4ST 507-6-TA-1-4ST 507-6-TA-1-6ST 507-8-TA-1-6ST 507-8-TA-1-8ST 507-1-TA-1-1ST Dimensions A 1.39 (35.3) 1.46 (37.1) 1.5 (38.6)) 1.74 (44.) 1.8 (46.) .10 (53.3) E 0.17 (4.3) 0.0 0.7 0.8 0.37 0.58
(5.1) (6.9) (7.1) (9.4) (14.7)
F 9/16 9/16 11/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
Uniform O-ring Size 904 904 906 906 908 91
tandard O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM. S
Cone-and-Thread Fitting
F flat E 9
Tube OD in.
G
MediumPressure Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 9/16 3/4
Ordering Number 507-4-TA-1-4MP 507-6-TA-1-6MP 507-8-TA-1-9MP 507-10-TA-1-9MP 507-1-TA-1-1MP

(39.6)
1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
E 0.11
(.8)
F 1/ 5/8 7/8 7/8 1 1/8
G 0.14
(3.6)
Thread Size 7/16-0 UNF- 9/16-18 UNF- 13/16-16 UN- 13/16-16 UN- 3/4-14 NPSM-
1.86
(47.)
0.1
(5.3)
0.5
(6.4)
.4
(56.9)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
.40
(61.0)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
.68
(68.1)
0.45
(11.5)
0.56
(14.)
Cone-and-Thread Female Adapters

F flat Weep hole
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number 507-4-TA-7-4MP 507-6-TA-7-6MP 507-8-TA-7-9MP

(33.3)
E 0.11
(.8)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/16
Thread Size 7/16-0 UNF- 9/16-18 UNF- 13/16-16 UN-
1.51
(38.4)
0.0
(5.1)
E A
1/
.05
(5.1)
0.36
(9.1)
Replacement Parts
Nuts
G flat
SWAGELOK FRONT FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
C-PH-0056-BDM
SWAGELOK BACK FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
C-PH-0056-ADM
Ferrules
Front
Tube OD in. 1/4 Ordering Number 507-403-1 507-603-1 507-813-1 507-1013-1 507-113-1
Back
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 Ordering Number 6ML-404-1A 6ML-604-1A 6ML-814-1A 6ML-1014-1A 6ML-114-1A
3/8 1/ Dimensions in. (mm) G 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/4 L 0.50 (1.7) 0.56 (14.) 0.69 (17.4) 0.69 (17.4) 0.69 (17.4) 5/8 3/4
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number 507-40-1 507-60-1 507-81-1 507-101-1 507-11-1

Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.
Tools for Use with SAF 2507 Tube Fittings

Swagelok gap inspection gauges assure the installer or inspector that the fitting has been sufficiently pulled up on initial installation, whether using a multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU) or wrench tightening.
Preswaging Tools
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ Ordering Number MS-ST-400 MS-ST-600 MS-ST-810 MS-ST-507-1010 MS-ST-507-110
For Installation Using a Wrench
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number MS-IG-400 MS-IG-600 MS-IG-810 MS-IG-507-1010 MS-IG-507-110
For Swagelok tube fitting installations in close quarters, the Swagelok preswaging tool is a convenient accessory.
5/8 3/4
Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU)
For Installation Using the MHSU
Tube OD in. 5/8 3/4
Ordering Number MS-MHSU-IG-507-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-507-110
Depth Marking Tools

Swagelok depth marking tools help ensure that tubing is bottomed on the shoulder inside the Swagelok tube fitting body.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 Ordering Number MS-DMT-400 MS-DMT-600 MS-DMT-810 MS-DMT-1010 MS-DMT-110 Preswages Swagelok ferrules onto 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 507
tubing. For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 507 tubing, order the 1 in./5 mm and over unit and SAF 507 tooling. The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 507 tubing 1/ in. and under.
Provides Swagelok tube fittings that are 100 % gaugeable
when installed
Places no initial strain on nut or fitting body threads or on
body seal surfaces

Is standard with a tube marking feature to indicate when
tube is properly bottomed

Description Ordering Number MHSU only (1 in. and over unit) MS-MHSU-O-E 5/8 in. tooling 3/4 in. tooling MS-MHSUT-O-507-1010-M MS-MHSUT-O-507-11-M
For additional information, see the Swagelok Hydraulic Swaging UnitsMultihead (MHSU) catalog, MS-0-154. For instructions, see Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU) Setup and Operation Instructions, MS-1-37.
Gaugeability
On initial installation, the Swagelok gap inspection gauge assures the installer or inspector that a fitting has been sufficiently tightened.
Interchangeability
Intermixing and interchanging tube fitting components of different manufacturers can be dangerous. Leak-tight seals that will withstand high pressure, vibration, vacuum, and temperature changes depend on close tolerances and consistent, exacting quality control in conjunction with good design principles. The critical interaction of precision parts is essential for reliability and safety. Components of other manufacturers may look like Swagelok tube fitting componentsbut they cannot be manufactured in accordance with Swagelok engineering standards, nor do they benefit from innovations in design and manufacture defined by active Swagelok tube fitting patents.
If the gauge will not enter the gap, the fitting is sufficiently tightened. If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is required.
Swagelok SAF 2507 super duplex tube fittings can be installed quickly, easily, and reliably.
Safety Precautions
Do not bleed system by loosening fitting nut or fitting plug. Do not assemble or tighten fittings when system is
Always depressurize the system before adjusting the tightness of a tube fitting connection.
pressurized.
Make sure that the tube rests firmly on the shoulder of the
tube fitting body before tightening the nut.

Use the correct Swagelok gap inspection gauge to ensure
sufficient pull-up upon initial installation.

threads.
Do not mix materials or fitting components from various
manufacturersferrules, nuts, and fitting bodies.

Never turn fitting body. Instead, hold fitting body and turn nut. Avoid unnecessary disassembly of unused fittings.
Fully insert the tube into the fitting and against the shoulder; rotate the nut finger-tight. High-pressure applications and high safety-factor systems: Further tighten the nut until the tube will not turn by hand or move axially in the fitting.
While holding the fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position.
Connections Preswaged with the MHSU

1. Preswage the ferrules onto the tube using a Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU). . Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body; rotate the nut finger-tight. 3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 4. While holding the fitting body steady, tight the nut onehalf turn to the 1 oclock position. Use the Swagelok MHSU gap inspection gauge to ensure that the fitting has been tightened sufficiently.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube fittings many times.
Always depressurize the system before disassembling a Swagelok tube fitting.
Prior to disassembly, mark the tube at the back of the nut; mark a line along the nut and fitting body flats. Use these marks to ensure that you return the nut to the previously pulled-up position.
Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body.
While holding the fitting body steady, rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position, as indicated by the marks on the tube and the flats. At this point, you will feel a significant increase in resistance. Tighten the nut slightly.
Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with reassembled fittings.
Caps and Plugs

Caps
See Swagelok tube fitting installation and reassembly, above.
Plugs
While holding fitting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from the finger-tight position. Reassembly You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
10
Port Connectors
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Machined Ferrule End

While holding fitting body steady, tighten the port connector one-quarter turn from the finger-tight position. Reassembly You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok port connectors many times. Make subsequent connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
Tube Adapter End

1. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting. Make sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the shoulder of the tube fitting body and that the nut is finger-tight (Fig. 3). . Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. Reassembly See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 9.
Tube Adapters
Fig. 1
1. Install the end opposite the tube adapter end (Fig. 1). Female pipe port on existing equipment . Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting. Make sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the shoulder of the tube fitting body and that the nut is finger-tight (Fig. ). 3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position.
4. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and onequarter turns to the 9 oclock position.
Reassembly
See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 9.
Fig. 2
11
Depth Marking Tool
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred tube into the depth marking tool (DMT) until the tube is against the shoulder of the tool. Using a pen or pencil, mark the tube at the top of the DMT (Fig. 1). . Remove the tube from the DMT and insert it into the Swagelok fitting until it is against the shoulder of the fitting body (Fig. ). Rotate the nut finger-tight. If any portion of the mark on the tube can be seen above the fitting nut, the tube is not fully inserted into the fitting.
3. While holding the fitting body steady, follow Swagelok tube fitting installation instructions, page 9.
Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1
1. Install the Swagelok nut and ferrules onto the preswaging tool. . Insert the tube into the preswaging tool. 3. Make sure that the tube rests firmly on the shoulder of the preswaging tool body and that the nut is fingertight. 4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding the preswaging tool steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position (Fig. 1). 6. Loosen the nut.
7. Remove the tube with preswaged ferrules from the preswaging tool. If the tube sticks in the preswaging tool, remove the tube by gently rocking it back and forth. Do not turn the tube (Fig. ). 8. Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body. 9. While holding the fitting body steady, rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position; at this point, you will feel a significant increase in resistance. 10. Tighten the nut slightly (Fig. 3).
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Do not use the Swagelok gap
inspection gauge with fittings that were assembled using the preswaging tool.
SAF 2507 Tubing

Swagelok offers SAF 507 tubing in sizes of 1/4 to 1 in. outside diameter. See the Swagelok SAF 2507 Seamless Super Duplex TubingFractional Sizes catalog, MS-0-151, for more information.

For tube benders, wrenches, cutters, liquid leak detectors, and more, see the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169.
Weld Fittings
See the Swagelok SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings catalog, MS-01-173, for more information.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company AL-6XNTM Allegheny Ludlum Corporation Sandvik, SAF 507TM Sandvik AB 00, 004, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 008, R5 MS-01-174
www.swagelok.com
G auge able Tube Fit tings and Adapte r Fit tings
Available in tube sizes from 1/16 to 2 in. and 2 to 50 mm Consistent gaugeability upon initial installation Easy to disconnect and retighten Wide variety of materials and configurations
Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings
Features
Live-loaded, two-ferrule design. Easy to install. No torque is transmitted to tubing during installation. Swagelok gap inspection gauge ensures sufficient pull-up upon initial installation.
Back ferrule Hinge point
Tubing
Nut Front ferrule
Fitting body
During assembly of the advanced-geometry design (above), the front ferrule is driven into the fitting body and the tubing to create primary seals, while the back ferrule hinges inward to create a strong grip on the tubing. The back ferrule geometry allows for an improved engineering hinging-colleting action that translates axial motion into radial swaging action on the tube, yet operates with a low assembly torque requirement.
Two-Ferrule, Mechanical Grip Design

The two ferrules separate sealing and tube gripping functions; each ferrule is optimized for its function. The front ferrule creates a seal:
against the fitting body on the tubing outside diameter.
Advanced-Geometry, HingingColleting Back Ferrule Design

This design is standard on all 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm Swagelok stainless steel tube fittings to help installers make more consistent, leak-tight tube connections. In these sizes, a patented case hardening process and patented recessed and contoured geometry provide unique engineering to the Swagelok back ferrule. The hinging-colleting back ferrule design expands on the already robust performance of the traditional ferrule design and provides:
excellent gas-tight sealing and tube-gripping action easily achieved proper installation consistent remakes excellent vibration fatigue resistance and tube
As the nut is turned, the back ferrule:

axially advances the front ferrule radially applies an effective tube grip.
support
full compatibility with original Swagelok stainless
steel tube fittings of identical sizes. For additional information, see the 316 Stainless Steel Swagelok Tube Fittings with Advanced Geometry Back Ferrules technical report, MS-06-16.
Contents Features, 2 The Swagelok Tube Fitting Advantage, 6 Materials, 8 Alternative Fuels-Type Approval, 8 Thread Specifications, 8 O-Rings, 8 Cleaning and Packaging, 8 Metric Swagelok Tube Fittings, 9 Pressure Ratings, 9 Ordering Numbers and Dimensions, 10 Straight Fittings
Unions
Union, 10 Reducing Union, 11 Male Pipe, 21 Bulkhead Union and Bulkhead Reducing Union, 12 Tube Socket, 20
Weld Connectors
Female Connectors
NPT, 22 ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT), ISO/ BSP Parallel Thread (RJ and RP), 23 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge), 24
Male Connectors
NPT, 13 ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT), 14 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS), 15 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP), 16 Bulkhead NPT, 17 SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST) and Long SAE/ MS Straight Thread (ST), 17 O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread and NPT), 18 AN and AN Bulkhead Fitting, 19 10-32 Thread, M5 0.8 Thread, and Metric Thread (RS), 20
Bulkhead NPT, 24
Reducers
Reducer, 25 Long Reducer, 26
Additional Products
For SAF 2507 super duplex
tube fittings, see the Swagelok Gaugeable SAF 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-174.
For alloy 400 tube fittings,
see the Swagelok Gaugeable Alloy 400/R-405 Mechanically Attached Pipe and Tube Fittings catalog, MS-02-332.
For PFA tube fittings, see the
Bulkhead Reducer, 26
Port Connectors
Port Connector and Reducing Port Connector, 27
Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-05.

For medium-pressure tube
fittings, see the Swagelok Medium-Pressure, Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-02-335.
For heavy-wall tube fittings,
see the Swagelok HighPressure Fittings catalog, MS-01-34.
Contents
Caps and Plugs
Cap, 28
45 Elbows
Male
Female
Run, NPT (TFT), 39 NPT, 34
Plug, 28 Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST), 34 Branch, NPT (TTF), 40
Vent Protectors
Mud Dauber, 28
Tees
Unions
Cross
Union, 40 Union and Reducing Union, 35
90 Elbows
Unions
Union, 29
Sanitary Flange Fittings

Male
Kwik-Clamp Flange to Swagelok Tube Fitting, 41
Male
NPT, 30 ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT), 31
Branch, NPT (TTM), 37
Run, NPT (TMT), 37
Tube Adapters
Tube Adapter Information, 42
Reducing, 31
Positionable, ISO/ BSP Parallel Thread (PR) and Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST), 32
Positionable Branch, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TTS) and Positionable Branch, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TTR), 38 Positionable Run, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TST), 38 Positionable Run, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TRT), 39
Male
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT), 43 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS and RP), 44 SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST) and O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread), 45
Weld
Tube Socket, 33
Male Pipe, 33
AN Thread, 45
Female
Pipe Weld, 46 NPT, 33
Contents
Female
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT), 46 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP and RJ), and ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge), 47
ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets

Steel (RS Fitting), Copper (RP Fitting), Copper (RG, Gauge Fitting), and PTFE (RJ Fitting), 53
For tube benders, tube preparation tools, and tube support systems, see the Swagelok Tubing Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-179.
Gaugeability, 62 Installation Instructions, 62 Bored-Through Fittings

For thermocouples, dip tubes, and heat exchanger tees, 16
O-Rings
Buna N (O-Seal Straight Threads and O-Seal Pipe Threads) and Fluorocarbon FKM (ISO/BSP Parallel Threads and SAE/MS Straight Threads), 54
AN Thread, 47
Additional Ordering Information, 48 Replacement Parts

Nuts
Female, 50
Chromatograph Fittings
See the Swagelok Gaugeable Chromatograph and Column End Fittings catalog, MS-02-173.

Hydraulic Swaging Units, 55
Dielectric Fittings
See the Swagelok Dielectric Fittings catalog, MS-02-36-SCS. Preswaging Tools, 57
Knurled Female, 50
Flanges
For ANSI, DIN, and JIS flanges, see the Swagelok Flange Adapters catalog, MS-02-200.
Wrenches, 58 Male, 50 Gap Inspection Gauges and Depth Marking Tools, 60 Front, 51
Ferrules
VCO and VCR Face Seal Fittings

See the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings and VCO O-Rings Face Seal Fittings catalogs, MS-01-24 and MS-01-28.
Bulkhead Retainers, 61
Back, 51 Nut-Ferrule Set and Package and Ferrule Set and Ferrule-Pak Package, 52
Inserts for Soft Plastic Tubing, 61
For liquid leak detectors, lubricants, and sealants, see the Swagelok Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants catalog, MS-01-91.
The Swagelok Tube Fitting Advantage

Over 10 000 fittings and not a single leak.
That is the message one customer wanted to share, crediting Swagelok components and tube fittings along with Swagelok distributor support, as having played a major role in completingand obtaining independent, third-party certification fortwo 12 000 ton oil rigs. And that is part of the ongoing story behind the continuous improvement efforts that Swagelok has initiated and sustained since the development and patent of the original two-ferrule tube fitting more than 50 years ago. Today, as everyone is being called on to do more with less and to recognize value, Swagelok continues to improve the leak-tight design of the tube fitting for use in thousands of diverse applicationsincluding research, analytical and process instrumentation, bioprocessing, oil and gas, power, petrochemical, and semiconductor industriesand addressing such critical issues as:
leakage vibration (tube grip) thermal shock compliance with industry standards installation corrosion intermix/interchange.
Leakage
Excellent gas-tight sealing and consistent reassembly help ensure accurate measurements of process parametersair, steam, fuel, and waterto keep your plant operating efficiently. Moreover, Swagelok tube fittings minimize fugitive emissions, as well as process fluid leakage and operation costs. From 1999 through 2004, more than 250 000 fittings in gas service at more than 400 different process installations were leak tested with Swagelok Snoop liquid leak detector. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information about Swagelok Energy Emissions Surveys or to schedule a survey.
the gripping part of assembly. The colleting portion of the back ferrule allows more material to contact the tube, for additional support. This colleting action enhances gripping performance and provides both direct and axial support to the gripping function. This design minimizes the effects of bending deflection at the point of grip on the tubing. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information about vibration test reports.
Vibration (Tube Grip)

The patented case-hardening process and back-ferrule geometry provide excellent vibration fatigue resistance and tube supporteven in harsh or stressful environments, such as fuel processing or rotary equipment applications. Swagelok has conducted rotary flex tests, which show that the Swagelok tube fitting with advanced geometry hinging-colleting back ferrule isolates and protects the stress riser that is generated along the tube during
Thermal Shock
The elastic, live-loaded two-ferrule design compensates for changes in temperature during system start-up and shutdown and helps eliminate leakage related to rapid thermal expansion or contraction. Swagelok has conducted tests that demonstrated the capability of Swagelok tube fittings to withstand thermal shock and high temperature. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information about thermal shock test reports.
Corrosion
Swagelok tube fittings are available in a variety of materials, including controlled-chemistry 316 stainless steel and many other alloys for enhanced corrosion resistance in a variety of applications, including sour gas and subsea systems.
Installation
The Swagelok tube fitting installation advantages:
Easy to install No torque is transmitted to tubing
Swagelok has conducted tests in accordance with ASTM B117-95 to evaluate the corrosion resistance of Swagelok tube fittings. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information about corrosion resistance test reports.
during installation
Swagelok gap inspection gauge
Compliance with Industry Standards

Swagelok Company works with standards organizations around the world to provide you with products that address your needs. See Materials, page 8; Thread Specifications, page 8; and Pressure Ratings, page 9ection 09, for more information about the specifications to which Swagelok tube fittings are manufactured. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information about Swagelok tube fitting certifications.
assures sufficient pull-up upon initial installation. Swagelok tube fitting components provide exceptional dimensional, metallurgical, and mechanical uniformity that allow predictable, repeatable installation. Swagelok authorized sales and service centers offer installation training seminars that provide additional information on:
The requirements for making safe,
Intermix/Interchange
This practice can be dangerous. Leak-tight seals that will withstand high pressure, vibration, vacuum, and temperature changes depend on close tolerances and consistent, exacting quality control in conjunction with good design principles. The critical interaction of precision parts is essential for reliability and safety. Components of other manufacturers may look like Swagelok tube fitting componentsbut they cannot be manufactured in accordance with Swagelok engineering standards, nor do they benefit from innovations in design and manufacture defined by 36 active Swagelok tube fitting patents issued since 1989.
leak-tight connections
A variety of tools and accessories
designed for use with Swagelok tube fittings.
Materials
Materials Standards
Material 316 stainless steel Alloy 20 Alloy 400 Alloy 600 Alloy 625 Alloy 825 Alloy C-276 Aluminum Brass Carbon steel Nylon PFA PTFE SAF 2507 Titanium (grade 4) Bar Stock ASTM A276, ASME SA479, EN 1.4401 ASTM B473 ASTM B164 ASTM B446 ASTM B425 ASTM B574 ASTM B211 ASTM B16, ASTM B453 ASTM A108 ASTM D4066 ASTM D1710 ASTM A479 ASTM B348 Forgings ASTM A182, ASME SA182, EN 1.4401 ASTM B462 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 ASTM B564 ASTM B247 ASTM B283 ASTM D3307 Type I ASTM D3294 ASTM A182 ASTM B381
Thread Specifications
Thread Type (End Connection) NPT ISO/BSP (parallel) (Based on DIN 3852) (Swagelok PR, RP, and RS fittings) ISO/BSP (tapered) (Based on DIN 3852) (Swagelok RT fittings) ISO/BSP (gauge) (Based on EN 837-1 and 837-3) (Swagelok RG and RJ fittings) Unified (SAE) (Swagelok ST fittings) Reference Specification ASME B1.20.1, SAE AS71051 ISO 228, JIS B0202 ISO 7, BS EN 10226-1, JIS B0203 ISO 228, JIS B0202 ASME B1.1
ASTM B166, ASME SB166 ASTM B564, ASME SB564
Pipe Thread Sealants

A thread sealant should always be used when assembling tapered threads. SWAK anaerobic pipe thread sealant and Swagelok PTFE tape are available. For more information, see the Swagelok Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants catalog, MS-01-91.
Straight fittings and tube adapters. Elbows, crosses, and tees. All straight fittings and tube adapters and 1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
elbows, crosses, and tees.
O-Rings
O-seal fittings include a 70 durometer Buna N O-ring. Other straight-thread fittings with O-rings include a 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM O-ring. Other O-ring materials are available upon request. O-rings are coated with a thin film of silicone-based lubricant. Removal of factory-applied lubricants may alter performance.
Elbows, crosses, and tees larger than 3/8 in. and 10 mm. See the Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-05. See the Swagelok Gaugeable SAF 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings
catalog, MS-01-174.
Additional Processing
Fitting bodies are processed for improved performance, as listed below. No additional processing is required for alloy 625, alloy 825, brass, nylon, 316 stainless steel, and PTFE materials.
Fitting Body Material Aluminum Alloy 400, alloy 20, alloy C-276, alloy 600 Carbon steel (except weld bodies) Carbon steel (weld bodies) Titanium Process Anodized, hydrocarbon film Hydrocarbon film Zinc plating Hydrocarbon film chemical conversion coating Anodized

Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Fittings are available individually bagged; add CP to the ordering number. Example: SS-200-6CP On request, fittings can be cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, with front ferrules silver plated and Krytox 240 AC applied to the internal surface of the nut. To order, add BQ to the ordering number. Example: SS-400-1-4BQ
Over 1 in./25 mm fittings are supplied with a package of
fluorinated-base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide lubricant for use in fitting assembly.
Over 1 in./25 mm stainless steel fittings use stainless

steel ferrules with PFA coating. Applications above 450F (232C) require silver-plated front ferrules and uncoated back ferrules. To order fittings with silver-plated front ferrules and uncoated back ferrules, add -BM to the fitting ordering number.
Example: SS-2400-6-BM All carbon steel Swagelok tube fittings are supplied with
Alternative Fuels-Type Approval

Stainless steel Swagelok Tube OD Wall Thickness tube fittings used with 3 to 16 mm 0.7 to 2.5 mm 316 stainless steel and 316 Ti 1/8 to 5/8 in. 0.028 to 0.095 in. stainless steel alloy tubing as shown in the table have been tested to the requirements of ECE R110, EIHP Draft, and ECE R67.
316 stainless steel back ferrules.
Metric Swagelok Tube Fittings

Metric tube fittings have a stepped shoulder on the body hex. Shaped fittings, such as elbows, crosses, and tees, are stamped MM for metric tubing and have no step on the forging.
Swagelok metric tube end
Swagelok fractional tube stub
Swagelok metric tube ends
Stepped identification shoulders
No shoulder
Stepped identification shoulders
Pressure Ratings
Swagelok Tube Fitting Pressure Ratings
Swagelok tube fitting ends are rated to the working pressure of tubing as listed in Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Careful selection of high-quality tubing is important when installing safe, leak-tight systems.
Pipe End (NPT and ISO 7) Pressure Ratings Basis

Pressure ratings for fittings with both tube fitting and pipe thread ends are determined by the end connection with the lower pressure rating. The table lists pressure ratings for male and female tapered pipe thread ends. For female and male pipe threads to have the same pressure rating in the same nominal pipe size, the female thread would require a heavier wall, resulting in a fitting too large and bulky to be practical.
SAE/MS Fittings Pressure Ratings Basis

Pressure ratings are based on SAE J1926/3 at ambient temperature.
316 SS and Carbon Steel SAE/MS Thread Size 5/16-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1 1/16-12 1 3/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12 Nonpositionable Designator 2ST 4ST 5ST 6ST 8ST 10ST 12ST 14ST 16ST 20ST 24ST 32ST 3626 2900 2320 1813 250 200 160 125 4568 315 3626 2900 2320 1813 1450 250 200 160 125 100 4568 315 psig bar Positionable psig bar
Allowable Stress
Stress values are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
Allowable Stress Material 316 SS Brass Steel psi 20 000 10 000 20 000 bar 1378 689 1378
Pressure Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
NPT/ ISO 316 SS and Carbon Steel Pipe Male Female Size in. psig bar psig bar 1/16 11 000 760 6700 460 1/8 10 000 690 6500 440 1/4 8 000 550 6600 450 3/8 7 800 540 5300 360 1/2 7 700 530 4900 330 3/4 7 300 500 4600 320 1 5 300 370 4400 300 1 1/4 6 000 410 5000 350 1 1/2 5 000 340 4600 310 2 3 900 270 3900 270 Brass Male psig 5500 5000 4000 3900 3800 3600 2600 3000 2500 1900 bar 380 340 270 270 260 250 180 200 170 130 Female psig 3300 3200 3300 2600 2400 2300 2200 2500 2300 1900 bar 230 220 220 180 160 160 150 170 150 130
Some fittings with AN, O-seal, and SAE/MS ends may have lower ratings. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
O-Seal Pressure Ratings

Stainless steel and carbon steel O-seal fittings up to 1 in. and 25 mm are rated to 3000 psig (206 bar).
Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR) Pressure Ratings

Pressure ratings are at ambient temperature.
ISO/BSP Male Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 2320 160 4568 315 316 SS and Carbon Steel psig bar
To determine pressure ratings in accordance with
ASME B31.1, Power Piping:

carbon steel materialmultiply by 0.85. Stainless steel and brass material ratings remain the same. To determine MPa, multiply bar by 0.10.
10
Ordering Numbers and Dimensions

See How to Order, below. Minimum order quantities may apply to certain materials and configurations. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight.
For Swagelok nut dimensions, see page 50.

CAD templates are available on www.swagelok.com.
Straight Fittings
Unions
F flat Tx T D E A D D E A Dx
Union
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D Dimensions, in. -100-6 0.99 0.34 -200-6 1.40 0.50 -300-6 1.47 0.54 -400-6 1.61 0.60 -500-6 1.69 0.64 -600-6 1.77 0.66 -810-6 2.02 0.90 4.30 -810-6-0030 -1010-6 2.05 0.96 -1210-6 2.11 -1410-6 2.17 1.02 -1610-6 2.55 1.23 -1810-6 -2000-6 3.63 1.62 -2400-6 4.25 1.97 -3200-6 5.88 2.66 Dimensions, mm -2M0-6 35.6 -3M0-6 35.3 -4M0-6 37.3 -6M0-6 41.0 -8M0-6 43.2 -10M0-6 46.2 -12M0-6 51.2 -14M0-6 -15M0-6 52.0 -16M0-6 -18M0-6 53.5 -20M0-6 55.0 -22M0-6 -25M0-6 65.0 -28M0-6 85.0 -30M0-6 92.7 -32M0-6 97.3 -38M0-6 114 -50M0-6 146
Union (Metric to Fractional)

Tube OD E 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.25 0.28 0.41 0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88 0.97 1.09 1.34 1.81 1.7 2.4 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 11.1 11.9 12.7 15.1 15.9 18.3 21.8 26.2 28.6 33.7 45.2 8 T 2 3 4 Tx, in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 1/2 1 1 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions Dx 12.8 15.3 12.8 12.8 15.3 8.6 12.8 15.3 16.2 16.8 15.3 16.9 12.8 15.3 16.2 16.9 15.3 16.2 16.9 22.8 22.8 24.4 24.4 22.8 31.3 31.3 E 1.7 2.4 2.4 1.3 2.4 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 6.4 2.4 4.8 6.4 7.1 4.8 6.4 7.1 9.5 10.3 12.7 15.1 10.3 15.9 21.8 F 12 14 12 12 14 14 14 14 14 16 15 16 18
A D Dimensions, mm -2M0-6-2 35.2 12.9 -2M0-6-4 38.6 -3M0-6-2 -4M0-6-2 -4M0-6-4 -6M0-6-1 -6M0-6-2 -6M0-6-4 -6M0-6-5 -6M0-6-6 -8M0-6-4 -8M0-6-6 -10M0-6-2 -10M0-6-4 -10M0-6-5 -10M0-6-6 -12M0-6-4 -12M0-6-5 -12M0-6-6 -12M0-6-8 -15M0-6-8 -16M0-6-10 -18M0-6-12 -20M0-6-8 -20M0-6-16 -25M0-6-16 35.2 36.5 39.4 34.3 38.5 41.0 42.3 43.2 42.3 44.3 41.8 44.5 45.1 45.9 47.0 47.8 48.4 51.2 52.0 52.0 53.5 55.0 62.8 65.0 12.9 13.7
15.3
16.2
10
17.2
12 15 16 18 20 25
22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 31.3
22 24 24 27 30 35 35
12.9 13.7 15.3 16.2 17.2 22.8
How to Order
Select a basic ordering number. Example -100-6 Add a material designator. Example: SS-100-6
Material 316 SS Aluminum Alloy 20 Alloy 400 Alloy 600 Alloy 625 Alloy 825 Designator SS A C20 M INC 625 825 Material Alloy C-276 Brass Carbon steel Nylon PTFE Titanium (grade 4) Designator HC B S NY T TI
24.4
26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4 65.0
Bored through.
11
Straight Fittings
Unions
Tx T D E A Dx
Reducing Union
Tube OD T 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 Tx 1/16 1/16 1/8 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 5/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 1/2 3/4 2 2 3 4 6 6 8 6 8 10 10 12 12 18 20 18 20 25 18 20 25 20 25 30 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -200-6-1 1.22 -300-6-1 -300-6-2 -400-6-1 -400-6-2 -400-6-3 -500-6-2 -500-6-4 -600-6-1 -600-6-2 -600-6-4 -600-6-5 -810-6-2 -810-6-4 -810-6-6 -1010-6-6 -1010-6-8 -1210-6-4 -1210-6-6 -1210-6-8 -1210-6-10 -1610-6-8 -1610-6-12 1.27 1.44 1.35 1.52 1.55 1.56 1.66 1.44 1.61 1.70 1.74 1.78 1.85 1.91 1.94 2.05 1.94 2.00 2.11 2.11 2.38 Dimensions D 0.50 0.54 0.60 0.64 Dx 0.34 0.34 0.50 0.34 0.50 0.54 0.50 0.60 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.64 0.50 0.60 0.66 0.66 0.90 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.90 0.96 12.9 12.9 12.9 13.7 15.3 15.3 16.2 15.3 16.2 17.2 17.2 22.8 22.8 24.4 26.0 24.4 26.0 31.3 24.4 26.0 31.3 26.0 31.3 39.6 E 0.05 0.05 0.09 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.09 0.19 0.05 0.09 0.19 0.25 0.09 0.19 0.28 0.28 0.41 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.50 0.41 0.62 1.7 1.7 2.4 2.4 4.8 4.8 6.4 4.8 6.4 7.9 7.9 9.5 9.5 15.1 15.9 15.1 15.9 21.8 15.1 15.9 21.8 15.9 21.8 26.2
3/8
0.66
1/2 5/8
0.90 0.96
3/4
0.96
1 3 6 8 10 12 16 18 25 30
1.23 12.9 15.3 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4 24.4 31.3 39.6
Dimensions, mm -3M0-6-2M 35.3 -6M0-6-2M 38.6 -6M0-6-3M 38.6 -6M0-6-4M 39.4 -8M0-6-6M 42.3 -10M0-6-6M -10M0-6-8M -12M0-6-6M -12M0-6-8M -12M0-6-10M -16M0-6-10M -16M0-6-12M -18M0-6-12M -25M0-6-18M -25M0-6-20M -30M0-6-18M -30M0-6-20M -30M0-6-25M -32M0-6-18M -32M0-6-20M -32M0-6-25M -38M0-6-20M -38M0-6-25M -38M0-6-30M 44.5 45.1 47.0 47.8 48.7 45.9 52.0 53.5 61.0 62.3 75.4 75.4 80.1 77.8 77.8 82.3 87.5 92.0 105
32
42.0
38
49.4
12
Straight Fittings
Unions
F flat F flat
Bulkhead Union
Dimensions Tube OD Basic Ordering Number -100-61 -200-61 -300-61 -400-61 -500-61 -600-61 -810-61 -1010-61 -1210-61 -1610-61 -2000-61 -2400-61 -3200-61 -3M0-61 -4M0-61 -6M0-61 -8M0-61 -10M0-61 -12M0-61 -14M0-61 -15M0-61 -16M0-61 -18M0-61 -20M0-61 -25M0-61 -30M0-61 -32M0-61 -38M0-61 Panel Hole Size 13/64 21/64 25/64 29/64 33/64 37/64 49/64 57/64 1 1/64 1 21/64 1 41/64 1 61/64 2 41/64 8.3 9.9 11.5 13.1 16.3 19.5 22.5 22.8 26.0 29.0 34.0 40.5 42.5 50.5 16.8 Max Panel Thickness 0.12 0.50 0.40 0.44 0.50 0.66
A 1.24 2.02 2.11 2.27 2.39 2.45 2.80 2.86 3.11 3.77 4.85 5.48 7.10 51.3 53.6 57.7 61.0 63.7 71.0 72.5 72.5 72.5 78.9 84.5 96.0 124 128 145
1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 25 30 32 38
D E Dimensions, in. 0.34 0.05 0.50 0.09 0.54 0.12 0.60 0.19 0.64 0.25 0.66 0.28 0.90 0.41 0.96 0.50 0.96 0.62 1.23 0.88 1.62 1.09 1.97 1.34 2.66 1.81 Dimensions, mm 12.9 2.4 13.7 2.4 15.3 4.8 16.2 6.4 17.2 7.9 22.8 9.5 24.4 11.1 24.4 11.9 24.4 12.7 24.4 15.1 26.0 15.9 31.3 21.8 39.6 26.2 42.0 28.6 49.4 33.7
F 5/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 5/8 1 7/8 2 1/4 2 3/4
0.75
14 16 18 22 24 27 30 35 41 50 60
12.7 10.2 11.2
12.7
19.0
Minimum panel thickness is 0.06 in.
Bulkhead Reducing Union

F flat F flat Tx T
Tube OD Basic Ordering Number -200-61-1 -400-61-2 -600-61-4 -810-61-4
Dimensions Panel Hole Size 21/64 29/64 37/64 49/64 Max Panel Thickness 0.50 0.40 0.44 0.50
T
D A E Dx
Tx 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/4
A 1.85 2.17 2.39 2.63
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
D Dx Dimensions, in. 0.50 0.34 0.60 0.50 0.66 0.60 0.90
E 0.05 0.09 0.19
F 1/2 5/8 3/4 15/16
Bulkhead Reducing Union (Metric to Fractional)

Tube OD Basic Ordering Number -6M0-61-2 Dimensions Panel Hole Size 11.5 Max Panel Thickness 10.2
T 6
Tx, in. 1/8
A 55.1
D Dx Dimensions, mm 15.3 12.7
E 2.4
F 16
13
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat E D
NPT
Tube OD NPT Size 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -100-1-1 0.94 -100-1-2 1.03 0.34 0.05 -100-1-4 1.22 -200-1-1 1.17 -200-1-2 1.20 -200-1-4 1.40 0.50 0.09 -200-1-6 1.41 -200-1-8 1.66 -300-1-2 -300-1-4 -400-1-1 -400-1-2 -400-1-4 -400-1-6 -400-1-8 -400-1-12 -500-1-2 -500-1-4 -500-1-6 -600-1-2 -600-1-4 -600-1-6 -600-1-8 -600-1-12 -600-1-16 -810-1-2 -810-1-4 -810-1-6 -810-1-8 -810-1-12 -810-1-16 -1010-1-4 -1010-1-6 -1010-1-8 -1010-1-12 -1210-1-6 -1210-1-8 -1210-1-12 -1210-1-16 -1410-1-8 -1410-1-12 -1410-1-16 -1610-1-8 -1610-1-12 -1610-1-16 -1810-1-16 -2000-1-16 -2000-1-20 -2400-1-24 -3200-1-32 1.23 1.43 1.29 1.29 1.49 1.51 1.76 1.82 1.34 1.52 1.54 1.39 1.57 1.57 1.82 1.88 2.14 1.53 1.71 1.71 1.93 1.99 2.25 1.74 1.74 1.93 1.99 1.80 1.99 1.99 2.25 1.99 1.99 2.25 2.26 2.26 2.45 2.45 3.04 3.50 4.47 0.54 0.12 0.12 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.19 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.19 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.28 0.38 0.47 0.50 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.62 0.47 0.62 0.72 0.47 0.62 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 Tube OD 2 3 4 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -2M0-1-2 30.5 12.9 1.7 -3M0-1-2 -3M0-1-4 -4M0-1-2 -4M0-1-4 -6M0-1-2 -6M0-1-4 -6M0-1-6 -6M0-1-8 -8M0-1-2 -8M0-1-4 -8M0-1-6 -8M0-1-8 -10M0-1-2 -10M0-1-4 -10M0-1-6 -10M0-1-8 -10M0-1-12 -12M0-1-2 -12M0-1-4 -12M0-1-6 -12M0-1-8 -12M0-1-12 -14M0-1-4 -14M0-1-6 -14M0-1-8 -15M0-1-8 -16M0-1-6 -16M0-1-8 -16M0-1-12 -18M0-1-8 -18M0-1-12 -20M0-1-8 -20M0-1-12 -22M0-1-12 -22M0-1-16 -25M0-1-8 -25M0-1-12 -25M0-1-16 -28M0-1-16 -28M0-1-20 -30M0-1-20 -32M0-1-20 -38M0-1-24 30.5 35.6 31.2 36.3 32.8 37.9 38.4 44.7 34.2 38.7 39.3 45.6 36.3 40.9 40.9 46.5 48.0 38.8 43.4 43.4 49.0 50.5 44.1 44.1 49.0 49.0 44.1 49.0 50.5 50.5 52.3 52.3 57.1 57.5 57.5 62.3 72.4 73.1 77.2 79.6 91.6 12.9 13.7 2.4 2.4
F 5/16 7/16 9/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/16 9/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 5/8 5/8 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 13/16 13/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/16 1 3/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 3/4 2 1/8 2 3/4
F 12 12 14 12 14 14 14 18 22 15 15 18 22 18 18 18 22 27 22 22 22 22 27 24 24 24 24 27 27 30 30 35 35 41 46 46 46 55
1/16
1/8
15.3
4.8 4.8 6.4 6.4 6.4 4.8 7.1 7.9 7.9 7.9 4.8 7.1 9.5 9.5 9.5 7.1 9.5 11.1 11.9 9.5 11.9 12.7 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 11.9 15.9 21.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 33.7
3/16
16.2
1/4
0.60
10
17.2
5/16
0.64
12
22.8
3/8
0.66
14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38
24.4 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4
1/2
0.90
5/8
0.96
3/4
0.96
7/8
1.02
1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
1.23 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
14
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat E D See page 8 for thread specifications.
ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

Tube OD 1/8 ISO Thread Size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1/4 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -200-1-2RT 1.20 -200-1-4RT 1.40 -400-1-2RT -400-1-4RT -400-1-6RT -400-1-8RT -500-1-2RT -500-1-4RT -600-1-2RT -600-1-4RT -600-1-6RT -600-1-8RT -600-1-12RT -810-1-4RT -810-1-6RT -810-1-8RT -810-1-12RT -1010-1-8RT -1210-1-12RT -1210-1-16RT -1610-1-12RT -1610-1-16RT -2000-1-20RT 1.29 1.49 1.51 1.76 1.34 1.52 1.39 1.57 1.57 1.82 1.88 1.71 1.71 1.93 1.99 1.93 1.99 2.25 2.26 2.45 3.04 Dimensions D 0.50 E 0.09 F 7/16 9/16 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 9/16 5/8 5/8 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 13/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/4 14 15 16 12 Tube OD 2 3 4 ISO Thread Size, in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -2M0-1-2RT 30.5 12.9 1.7 -3M0-1-2RT -3M0-1-4RT -4M0-1-2RT -4M0-1-4RT -6M0-1-2RT -6M0-1-4RT -6M0-1-6RT -6M0-1-8RT -8M0-1-2RT -8M0-1-4RT -8M0-1-6RT -8M0-1-8RT -10M0-1-2RT -10M0-1-4RT -10M0-1-6RT -10M0-1-8RT -10M0-1-12RT -12M0-1-4RT -12M0-1-6RT -12M0-1-8RT -12M0-1-12RT -14M0-1-4RT -14M0-1-6RT -15M0-1-8RT -16M0-1-4RT -16M0-1-6RT -16M0-1-8RT -16M0-1-12RT -18M0-1-8RT -18M0-1-12RT -20M0-1-8RT -20M0-1-12RT -22M0-1-12RT -22M0-1-16RT -25M0-1-8RT -25M0-1-12RT -25M0-1-16RT -28M0-1-16RT -28M0-1-20RT -30M0-1-20RT -32M0-1-20RT -38M0-1-24RT 30.5 35.6 31.2 36.3 32.8 37.9 38.4 44.7 34.2 38.7 39.2 45.6 36.3 40.9 40.9 46.5 48.0 43.4 43.4 49.0 50.5 44.1 44.1 49.0 44.1 44.1 49.0 50.5 50.5 52.3 52.3 57.1 57.5 57.5 62.3 72.4 73.1 77.2 79.6 91.6 12.9 13.7 2.4 2.4
F 12 12 14 12 14 14 14 18 22 15 15 18 22 18 18 18 22 27 22 22 22 27 24 24 24 24 24 27 27 30 30 35 35 41 46 46 46 55
1/4
0.60
0.19 0.19 0.25 0.19 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.63 0.88 1.09
5/16
0.64
15.3
4.8 4.8 6.4 6.4 6.4 4.8 7.1 7.9 7.9 7.9 7.1 9.5 9.5 9.5 7.1 9.5 11.9 7.1 9.5 11.9 12.7 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 11.9 15.9 21.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 33.7
3/8
0.66
16.2
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4
0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 1.62
10
17.2
22.8
24.4 24.4 24.4
18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38
24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4
15
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat E See page 8 for thread specifications. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 53. D A
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS)

Tube OD ISO Thread Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -200-1-2RS 1.31 -200-1-4RS 1.50 -200-1-6RS 1.53 -400-1-2RS -400-1-4RS -400-1-6RS -400-1-8RS -600-1-2RS -600-1-4RS -600-1-6RS -600-1-8RS -810-1-4RS -810-1-6RS -810-1-8RS -1210-1-8RS -1210-1-12RS -1610-1-8RS -1610-1-12RS -1610-1-16RS 1.40 1.59 1.62 1.70 1.49 1.65 1.68 1.76 1.76 1.79 1.87 1.92 2.05 2.19 2.27 2.35 Dimensions D E F 9/16 3/4 7/8 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 Tube OD 2 3 4 6 ISO Thread Size, in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions A D E 1.7 2.4 2.4 4.0 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.0 5.9 6.4 6.4 5.9 7.9 7.9 5.9 7.9 9.5 9.5 7.9 11.1 7.9 11.9 11.9 7.9 11.9 12.7 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 15.9 19.8 19.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 31.8 F 14 14 19 14 14 19 22 27 15 19 22 27 19 22 27 22 22 27 35 24 27 24 27 35 24 27 35 27 35 30 35 35 41 35 41 41 50 50 50 55
1/8
0.50
0.09 0.16 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.16 0.23 0.28 0.28 0.23 0.31 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.47 0.63 0.78
Dimensions, mm -2M0-1-2RS 33.3 12.9 -3M0-1-2RS -3M0-1-4RS -4M0-1-2RS -6M0-1-2RS -6M0-1-4RS -6M0-1-6RS -6M0-1-8RS -8M0-1-2RS -8M0-1-4RS -8M0-1-6RS -8M0-1-8RS -10M0-1-4RS -10M0-1-6RS -10M0-1-8RS -12M0-1-4RS -12M0-1-6RS -12M0-1-8RS -12M0-1-12RS -14M0-1-6RS -14M0-1-8RS -15M0-1-6RS -15M0-1-8RS -15M0-1-12RS -16M0-1-6RS -16M0-1-8RS -16M0-1-12RS -18M0-1-8RS -18M0-1-12RS -20M0-1-8RS -20M0-1-12RS -22M0-1-12RS -22M0-1-16RS -25M0-1-12RS -25M0-1-16RS -28M0-1-16RS -28M0-1-20RS -30M0-1-20RS -32M0-1-20RS -38M0-1-24RS 33.3 38.1 34.0 35.6 40.4 41.1 43.2 36.6 41.4 42.2 44.2 42.2 42.9 45.0 44.5 45.5 47.5 52.1 43.9 47.5 45.5 47.5 52.8 45.5 47.5 52.8 48.8 52.1 50.5 52.6 52.6 54.9 57.7 59.7 69.9 72.9 76.7 79.2 90.9 12.9 13.7 15.3
1/4
0.60
3/8
0.66
16.2
1/2 3/4 1
0.90 0.96 1.23
10
17.2
12
22.8
14 15
24.4 24.4
16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38
24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4
16
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat
E D
See page 8 for thread specifications. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 53.
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)

Tube OD 1/8 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 ISO Thread Size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -200-1-2RP 1.31 -200-1-4RP 1.50 -400-1-2RP -400-1-4RP -810-1-6RP -810-1-8RP -1210-1-8RP -1210-1-12RP -1610-1-16RP 1.40 1.59 1.79 1.87 1.92 2.05 2.35 Dimensions D 0.50 0.60 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.09 0.16 0.19 0.31 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.78 F 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 Tube OD 3 4 6 ISO Thread Size, in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -3M0-1-2RP 33.3 12.9 2.4 -3M0-1-4RP 38.1 -4M0-1-2RP -6M0-1-2RP -6M0-1-4RP -6M0-1-6RP -6M0-1-8RP -8M0-1-2RP -8M0-1-4RP -8M0-1-6RP -8M0-1-8RP -10M0-1-4RP -10M0-1-6RP -10M0-1-8RP -12M0-1-4RP -12M0-1-6RP -12M0-1-8RP -12M0-1-12RP -15M0-1-8RP -16M0-1-6RP -16M0-1-8RP -18M0-1-8RP -18M0-1-12RP -20M0-1-8RP -20M0-1-12RP -22M0-1-12RP -22M0-1-16RP -25M0-1-12RP -25M0-1-16RP -28M0-1-16RP -28M0-1-20RP -30M0-1-20RP -32M0-1-20RP -38M0-1-24RP 34.0 35.6 40.4 41.2 43.2 36.5 41.3 41.9 44.1 42.2 42.9 45.0 45.4 45.4 47.5 52.1 47.5 45.4 47.5 49.0 52.3 50.5 52.5 52.8 54.5 57.8 59.8 69.8 72.9 76.8 79.2 92.1 13.7 15.3 2.4 4.0 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.0 5.9 6.4 6.4 5.9 7.9 7.9 5.9 7.9 9.5 9.5 11.9 7.9 11.9 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 15.9 19.8 19.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 31.8
F 14 19 14 14 19 22 27 15 19 22 27 19 22 27 22 22 27 35 27 24 27 27 35 30 35 35 41 35 41 41 50 50 50 55
16.2
10
17.2
Bored-Through Fittings for Thermocouples, Dip Tubes, and Heat Exchanger Tees
12 15 16 18 20 22 25 28
22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4
Swagelok bored-through male connectors accommodate thermocouples or dip tubes. Most male connectors are available as a bored-through fitting, but male connectors whose pipe thread end is small relative to the tube fitting endsuch as -600-1-2 or -8M0-1-2RTcannot be bored through. Swagelok bored-through reducers and standard Swagelok tees can be used to create a heat exchanger tee. To order bored-through fittings, add BT to the ordering number. Example: SS-400-1-4BT Bored-through fittings have a reduced pressure rating. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
30 32 38
17
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat
Bulkhead NPT
Dimensions
E
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 6 12
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -200-11-2 -400-11-2 -400-11-4 -600-11-4 -600-11-6 -600-11-8 -810-11-6 -810-11-8 -1210-11-12 -1610-11-16 -6M0-11-2 -6M0-11-4 -12M0-11-8
A D E Dimensions, in. 1.83 0.50 0.09 1.95 2.13 2.26 2.26 2.51 2.49 2.71 3.00 3.67 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 0.19 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.62 0.88
F 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 15/16
Panel Hole Size 21/64 29/64 37/64 49/64
Max Panel Thickness 0.50 0.40 0.44 0.50 0.66 0.75 10.2 12.7
1 3/16 1 1/64 1 5/8 1 21/64 16 24 11.5 19.5
Dimensions, mm 49.5 15.3 4.8 53.6 68.8 22.8 9.5
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.
F flat
O-ring Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.

Tube OD SAE/MS Thread Size 5/16-24 7/16-20 9/16-18 5/16-24 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1/2-20 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1 1/16-12 3/4-16 7/8-14 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 3/16-12 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -200-1-2ST 1.18 -200-1-4ST 1.24 -200-1-6ST 1.31 -400-1-2ST 1.27 -400-1-4ST 1.34 -400-1-6ST 1.40 -400-1-8ST 1.48 -400-1-10ST 1.60 -500-1-5ST 1.37 -600-1-4ST -600-1-6ST -600-1-8ST -600-1-10ST -810-1-6ST -810-1-8ST -810-1-10ST -810-1-12ST -1010-1-8ST -1010-1-10ST -1210-1-8ST -1210-1-12ST -1210-1-16ST -1410-1-14ST 1.40 1.46 1.54 1.66 1.54 1.65 1.77 1.93 1.65 1.78 1.81 1.93 1.96 1.93 2.10 2.14 2.69 3.06 4.00 Dimensions D E F 7/16 9/16 11/16 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 5/8 5/8 11/16 7/8 1 13/16 7/8 1 1 1/4 15/16 1 1 1/16 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/8 1 1 1 2 2 3/8 1/2 7/8 1/8 3/4 Tube OD 6 10 12 SAE/MS Thread Size 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, mm -6M0-1-6ST 35.6 -10M0-1-6ST -10M0-1-8ST -12M0-1-4ST -12M0-1-6ST -12M0-1-8ST 37.3 39.4 40.6 39.9 41.9 Dimensions D 15.3 17.2 22.8 E 4.8 7.1 7.9 5.2 7.1 9.5 F 18 22 22
1/8
0.50
0.09 0.09 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.18 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.42 0.50 0.42 0.62 0.63 0.72 0.66 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81
1/4
0.60
5/16 3/8
0.64 0.66
Long SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

Basic Ordering Number A Long SAE/MS Straight Thread in. Dimensions, 1/4 7/16-20 -400-1L-4ST 2.26 1/2 3/4-16 -810-1L-8ST 3.01 Tube OD
1/2
0.90
SAE/MS Thread Size
Dimensions D 0.60 0.90 E 0.19 0.41 F 9/16 7/8
5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
1 1/16-12 -1610-1-12ST 1 5/16-12 -1610-1-16ST 1 5/8-12 -2000-1-20ST 1 7/8-12 -2400-1-24ST 2 1/2-12 -3200-1-32ST
The E dimension is the minimum
nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
18
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat F flat O-ring E D D O-ring E
O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread)

Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. 5/16-24 -100-1-OR 1.05 5/16-24 -200-1-OR 1.29 3/8-24 -300-1-OR 1.35 7/16-20 -400-1-OR 1.51 1/2-20 -500-1-OR 1.60 9/16-18 -600-1-OR 1.67 3/4-16 -810-1-OR 1.81 1 1/16-12 -1210-1-OR 2.06 1 5/16-12 -1610-1-OR 2.29 SAE/MS Thread Size Dimensions D 0.34 0.50 0.54 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.25 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 F 9/16 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 15/16 1 1/8 1 1/2 1 3/4
O-Seal (NPT)
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 NPT Size 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-1-2-OR 1.29 0.50 0.09 -400-1-2-OR -400-1-4-OR -600-1-4-OR -600-1-6-OR -600-1-8-OR -810-1-8-OR 1.38 1.51 1.57 1.63 1.85 1.96 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.19 0.28 0.41
F 3/4 3/4 15/16 15/16 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 5/16
Mounting Dimensions for O-Seal Fittings

For a raised surface, see Fig. 1. The minimum diameter allows metal-to-metal contact outside of the O-ring sealing diameter to prevent O-ring extrusion. For a recessed hole that allows the round shoulder of the O-seal fitting into the recess, see Fig. 2. For a recessed hole that allows the hex of the O-seal fitting into the recess, see Fig. 3.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 SAE/MS Thread Size
D
NPT Size
A B C Min Min Min Dia Dia Dia Dimensions, in. 0.50 0.69 0.56 0.69 0.87 0.75 0.81 0.87 1.00 1.22 1.00 1.22 1.41 1.69 0.59 0.78 0.66 0.78 0.97 0.91 0.97 1.16 1.34 1.16 1.34 1.53 1.78 0.66 0.88 0.75 0.88 1.09 1.03 1.09 1.31 1.53 1.31 1.53 1.75 2.03
D Max Depth
E Max Depth 0.16 0.22 0.28 0.22 0.28
Fig. 3
1/8 in.
Allow clearance for full thread.
5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12
1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
0.09 0.16 0.09
0.16
0.31
0.22 0.16 0.22
0.34 0.44 0.34 0.44 0.50 0.56
19
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat 37 E D S A
AN Fitting
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 AN Tube Flare Size 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 5/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number -100-6-2AN -200-6-2AN -200-6-4AN -400-6-4AN -500-6-5AN -600-6-4AN -600-6-6AN -810-6-8AN -1210-6-12AN -1610-6-16AN Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 1.07 0.34 1.27 1.38 1.48 1.51 1.56 1.81 2.10 2.42 0.50 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.05 0.06 0.09 0.17 0.23 0.17 0.28 0.39 0.61 0.84 F 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 9/16 5/8 13/16 1 1/8 1 3/8 S 5/16-24UNJF-3 5/16-24UNJF-3 7/16-20UNJF-3 7/16-20UNJF-3 1/2-20UNJF-3 7/16-20UNJF-3 9/16-18UNJF-3 3/4-16UNJF-3 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 1 5/16-12UNJ-3
AN Bulkhead Fitting
F flat F flat 37 E D S A
AN Tube Tube Flare OD Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Dimensions Basic Ordering Number -400-61-4AN -600-61-6AN -810-61-8AN -1210-61-12AN -1610-61-16AN Panel Hole Size Max Panel Thickness 0.40 0.44 0.50 0.66 0.75
A 2.12 2.25 2.59 3.11 3.64
D E F Dimensions, in. 0.60 0.17 5/8 0.66 0.28 3/4 0.90 0.39 15/16 0.96 0.61 1 3/16 1.23 0.84 1 5/8
7/16-20UNJF-3 29/64 9/16-18UNJF-3 37/64 3/4-16UNJF-3 49/64 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 1 1/64 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 1 21/64
20
Straight Fittings
Male Connectors
F flat Gasket E
10-32 Thread
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions E F 7/16 9/16
A D Dimensions, in. -200-1-0157 0.95 0.50 -400-1-0256 1.08 0.60
0.09
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings

may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
M5 0.8 Thread
F flat E
Tube OD 6
A D Dimensions, mm -6M0-1-0046 29.2 15.3
Basic Ordering Number
Dimensions E 2.0 F 14
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings

may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Metric Thread (RS)

F flat E E
Tube OD 6
A D Dimensions, mm -6M0-1-M10X1.0RS 36.3 15.3 -6M0-1-M12X1.0RS 40.4 -12M0-1-M16X1.5RS 45.5 22.8
Dimensions E 3.2 4.8 9.5 F 14 22
12
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may

have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Weld Connectors
J D E B
Tube Socket Weld

Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Socket Weld Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions B in. 0.10 0.28 0.31 0.38 0.44 0.62 D 0.50 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.09 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 J 0.29 0.48 0.60 0.73 1.04 1.36
A Dimensions, -200-6-2W 1.14 -400-6-4W 1.32 -600-6-6W 1.48 -810-6-8W 1.62 -1210-6-12W 1.71 -1610-6-16W 2.07

SWAGELOK MALE PIPE WELD CONNECTOR CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
21
Straight Fittings
Weld Connectors
F flat
C-PH-0364-DIM
Male Pipe Weld (Fractional)

37.5
E J D
Tube OD 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16
Pipe Weld Size 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Basic Ordering Number -200-1-2W -300-1-2W -400-1-2W -400-1-4W -500-1-2W -500-1-4W -600-1-4W -600-1-6W -600-1-8W -600-1-12W -810-1-6W -810-1-8W -810-1-12W -810-1-16W -1010-1-8W -1210-1-8W -1210-1-12W -1610-1-16W -2000-1-20W -2400-1-24W -3200-1-32W
Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 1.20 0.50 1.23 0.54 1.29 1.49 1.34 1.52 1.57 1.57 1.82 1.88 1.71 1.93 1.99 2.25 1.93 1.99 2.45 3.04 3.50 4.47 0.60 0.64 E 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.21 0.25 0.28 F 7/16 7/16 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 11/16 7/8 1 1/6 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 15/16 1 1/16 1 1 2 2 3/8 3/4 1/8 3/4 J 0.405 0.405 0.405 0.540 0.405 0.540 0.540 0.675 0.840 1.050 0.675 0.840 1.050 1.315 0.840 0.840 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375
3/8
0.66
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
0.41 0.50 0.55 0.62 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Male Pipe Weld (Metric to Fractional)

Pipe Weld Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -3M0-1-2W -4M0-1-2W -6M0-1-2W -6M0-1-4W -8M0-1-2W -8M0-1-4W -8M0-1-8W -10M0-1-4W -10M0-1-6W -10M0-1-8W -12M0-1-4W -12M0-1-6W -12M0-1-8W -12M0-1-12W -14M0-1-6W -15M0-1-8W -16M0-1-8W -18M0-1-8W -30M0-1-20W -32M0-1-20W -38M0-1-24W
Tube OD 3 4 6 8
Dimensions A D Dimensions, mm 30.5 12.9 31.2 13.7 32.8 37.9 34.2 38.7 45.6 40.9 40.9 46.5 43.4 43.4 49.0 50.5 44.1 49.0 49.0 50.5 77.2 79.6 91.6 15.3 16.2 E 2.4 2.4 4.8 5.4 6.4 6.4 7.5 7.9 7.9 7.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 10.7 11.9 12.7 13.9 26.2 28.6 33.7 F 12 12 14 15 15 22 18 18 22 22 22 22 27 24 24 24 27 46 46 55 F, in. 1/2 1/2 1/2 9/16 9/16 9/16 7/8 11/16 11/16 7/8 13/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 46 mm 46 mm 55 mm J 10.3 10.3 10.3 13.7 10.3 13.7 21.3 13.7 17.1 21.3 13.7 17.1 21.3 26.7 17.1 21.3 21.3 21.3 42.2 42.2 48.3
10
17.2
12 14 15 16 18 30 32 38
22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 24.4 39.6 42.0 49.4
weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
This dimension is for steel and aluminum fittings.
22
Straight Fittings
Female Connectors
F flat E
NPT
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 NPT Size 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -100-7-1 0.93 0.34 0.05 -100-7-2 0.96 -200-7-2 -200-7-4 -300-7-2 -400-7-2 -400-7-4 -400-7-6 -400-7-8 -500-7-2 -500-7-4 -600-7-2 -600-7-4 -600-7-6 -600-7-8 -600-7-12 -810-7-4 -810-7-6 -810-7-8 -810-7-12 -1010-7-6 -1010-7-8 -1010-7-12 -1210-7-8 -1210-7-12 -1410-7-12 -1610-7-12 -1610-7-16 -2000-7-20 -2400-7-24 -3200-7-32 1.13 1.32 1.17 1.23 1.41 1.48 1.67 1.26 1.45 1.29 1.48 1.54 1.73 1.88 1.59 1.65 1.84 1.90 1.65 1.84 1.90 1.84 1.90 1.96 2.10 2.45 2.94 3.28 4.00 0.50 0.54 0.60 0.09 0.12 0.19 Tube OD 3 4 6 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -3M0-7-2 28.7 12.9 2.4 -3M0-7-4 33.5 -4M0-7-2 -6M0-7-2 -6M0-7-4 -6M0-7-6 -6M0-7-8 -8M0-7-2 -8M0-7-4 -8M0-7-6 -8M0-7-8 -10M0-7-4 -10M0-7-6 -10M0-7-8 -12M0-7-4 -12M0-7-6 -12M0-7-8 -15M0-7-8 -16M0-7-8 -20M0-7-8 -20M0-7-12 -22M0-7-12 -22M0-7-16 -25M0-7-12 -25M0-7-16 29.7 31.3 35.8 37.6 42.5 32.1 37.0 38.5 43.3 37.8 39.4 44.2 40.3 41.9 46.7 46.7 46.9 47.9 49.7 49.7 57.9 53.4 62.3 13.7 15.3 2.4 4.8
F 7/16 9/16 9/16 3/4 9/16 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 9/16 3/4 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 1 2 2 2 3/8 5/8 1/8 3/8 7/8
F 14 19 14 14 19 22 27 15 19 22 27 19 22 27 22 22 27 27 27 30 35 35 41 35 41
16.2
6.4
5/16
0.64
0.25
10
17.2
7.9
3/8
0.66
0.28
12 15 16 20 22 25
22.8 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3
9.5 11.9 12.7 15.9 18.3 21.8
1/2
0.90
0.41
5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81
23
Straight Fittings
Female Connectors
E F flat E See page 8 for thread specifications. D A D F flat ISO/BSP parallel thread (RJ) fittings are available in stainless steel only. See page 8 for thread specifications. A

ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-7-2RT 1.13 0.50 0.09 -400-7-2RT -400-7-4RT -400-7-6RT -400-7-8RT -600-7-4RT -600-7-6RT -600-7-8RT -810-7-4RT -810-7-6RT -810-7-8RT 1.23 1.41 1.48 1.67 1.48 1.54 1.73 1.59 1.65 1.84 0.60 0.19
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)

ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 Dimensions D E 0.18 0.19 0.19 0.22 0.28 0.22 0.26 0.28 0.22 0.26 0.28 F 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 3/4 1 1/16 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 19 24 27 19 24 27 19 24 27 22 24 27
F 9/16 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 13/16 7/8 1 1/16 14 14 19 22 27 15 19 22 27 18 19 22 27 22 22 22 27 35 24 27 30 35 35 41 35 41
1/4 5/16 3/8
Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. SS-400-7-4RJ 1.48 SS-400-7-6RJ 1.48 SS-400-7-8RJ 1.71 SS-500-7-4RJ SS-500-7-8RJ SS-600-7-4RJ SS-600-7-6RJ SS-600-7-8RJ SS-810-7-4RJ SS-810-7-6RJ SS-810-7-8RJ 1.51 1.61 1.54 1.52 1.65 1.65 1.75 1.90
0.60 0.64 0.66
3/8
0.66
0.28
1/2
0.90
0.41
1/2
0.90
3 6
Dimensions, mm -3M0-7-2RT 28.7 12.9 -6M0-7-2RT -6M0-7-4RT -6M0-7-6RT -6M0-7-8RT -8M0-7-2RT -8M0-7-4RT -8M0-7-6RT -8M0-7-8RT -10M0-7-2RT -10M0-7-4RT -10M0-7-6RT -10M0-7-8RT -12M0-7-2RT -12M0-7-4RT -12M0-7-6RT -12M0-7-8RT -12M0-7-12RT -15M0-7-6RT -15M0-7-8RT -20M0-7-8RT -20M0-7-12RT -22M0-7-12RT -22M0-7-16RT -25M0-7-12RT -25M0-7-16RT 31.3 35.8 37.6 42.5 32.1 37.0 38.5 43.3 33.0 37.8 39.4 44.2 35.5 40.3 41.9 46.7 49.0 41.9 46.7 47.9 49.7 49.7 57.9 53.4 62.3 15.3
2.4 4.8
16.2
6.4
10
10
17.2
7.9 8.3 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.9 15.9 18.3 21.8
12
Dimensions, mm SS-6M0-7-4RJ 37.6 SS-6M0-7-6RJ 37.6 SS-6M0-7-8RJ 43.5 SS-8M0-7-4RJ 38.5 SS-8M0-7-6RJ 36.2 SS-8M0-7-8RJ 41.0 SS-10M0-7-4RJ 39.4 SS-10M0-7-6RJ 38.8 SS-10M0-7-8RJ 42.1 SS-12M0-7-4RJ 41.9 SS-12M0-7-6RJ 44.4 SS-12M0-7-8RJ 48.2
15.3
4.8 5.5 6.5 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.0
16.2
17.2
22.8
12
22.8
F flat E See page 8 for thread specifications. D
15 20 22 25
24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3

ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 6 22 25 1/8 1/4 3/4 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -6M0-7-2RP 33.5 15.3 4.8 -6M0-7-4RP 39.4 -22M0-7-12RP -25M0-7-16RP 53.3 63.9 26.0 26.5 18.3 21.8
F 14 19 35 40
24
Straight Fittings
Female Connectors
E F flat
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)

ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-7-4RG 1.39 0.59 0.09 -400-7-2RG -400-7-4RG -400-7-6RG -400-7-8RG -500-7-4RG -500-7-8RG -600-7-4RG -600-7-6RG -600-7-8RG -810-7-6RG -810-7-8RG 1.26 1.48 1.48 1.71 1.51 1.61 1.54 1.52 1.65 1.75 1.90 0.60 0.18 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.22 0.28 0.22 0.26 0.28 0.26 0.28 2.4 4.5 4.8 4.8 4.8 5.5 6.5 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 7.0
F 3/4 9/16 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 3/4 1 1/16 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 15/16 1 1/16 19 14 19 24 27 19 24 27 19 24 27 22 24 27 30 30
See page 8 for thread specifications. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 53.
1/4
5/16 3/8 1/2 3 6
0.64 0.66 0.90
Dimensions, mm -3M0-7-4RG 35.3 12.9 -6M0-7-2RG -6M0-7-4RG -6M0-7-6RG -6M0-7-8RG -8M0-7-4RG -8M0-7-6RG -8M0-7-8RG -10M0-7-4RG -10M0-7-6RG -10M0-7-8RG -12M0-7-4RG -12M0-7-6RG -12M0-7-8RG -20M0-7-8RG -22M0-7-8RG 32.0 37.6 37.6 43.5 38.5 36.2 41.0 39.4 38.8 42.1 41.9 44.4 48.2 54.3 54.3 15.3
16.2
10
17.2
12 20 22
22.8 26.0 26.0
Bulkhead NPT
F flat E
Dimensions Tube OD NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -200-71-2 -400-71-2 -400-71-4 -600-71-4 -810-71-6 -810-71-8 -6M0-71-4 -12M0-71-8 Panel Hole Size 21/64 29/64 37/64 49/64 11.5 19.5 Max Panel Thickness 0.50 0.40 0.44 0.50 10.2 12.7
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 6 12
D E Dimensions, in. 1.76 0.50 0.09 1.85 2.04 2.17 2.43 2.62 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.19 0.28 0.41
F 9/16 5/8 3/4 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 19 27
Dimensions, mm 51.8 15.3 4.8 66.5 22.8 9.5
25
Straight Fittings
Reducers
F flat T D E A
SWAGELOK OVER 1" REDUCER CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
C-PH-0475-DIM
G flat F flat F flat Tx T D A E A Tx
Tx
1 in. and Under
Over 1 in.
25 mm and Under
Reducer (Fractional)
Tube OD T 1/16 Tx 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 3/4 7/8 1 1/2 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E F Dimensions, in. -100-R-2 1.15 0.34 0.05 5/16 -100-R-4 1.24 0.03 7/16 -200-R-1 1.14 0.08 7/16 -200-R-2 1.32 0.09 7/16 -200-R-3 1.35 0.50 0.09 7/16 -200-R-4 1.42 0.09 7/16 -200-R-6 1.48 0.09 9/16 -200-R-8 1.74 -300-R-2 1.37 0.08 0.54 7/16 -300-R-4 1.46 0.12 -400-R-2 -400-R-3 -400-R-4 -400-R-5 -400-R-6 -400-R-8 -400-R-10 -400-R-12 -500-R-6 -500-R-8 -600-R-4 -600-R-6 -600-R-8 -600-R-10 -600-R-12 -810-R-4 -810-R-6 -810-R-8 -810-R-10 -810-R-12 -810-R-16 -1010-R-12 -1010-R-14 -1010-R-16 -1210-R-8 -1210-R-16 -1610-R-20 -1610-R-24 -1610-R-32 -2000-R-24 -2000-R-32 -2400-R-32 1.45 1.48 1.54 1.57 1.60 1.82 1.89 1.88 1.65 1.87 1.63 1.70 1.91 1.98 1.98 1.77 1.84 2.06 2.12 2.12 2.37 2.15 2.21 2.40 2.15 2.46 3.17 3.51 4.43 4.10 4.93 5.17 0.08 0.12 0.17 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.17 0.27 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.17 0.27 0.37 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.50 0.37 0.62 0.88 1.09 1.34 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 9/16 11/16 13/16 9/16 5/8 5/8 5/8 11/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8 1 3/4 2 1/8 2 1/8
Reducer (Metric)
Tube OD G T 2 3 4 Tx 3 4 6 10 6 3 8 10 12 18 6 10 12 6 8 12 15 18 6 8 10 16 18 20 22 25 12 12 16 20 22 25 16 18 22 25 18 20 25 18 20 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, mm -2M0-R-3M 33.5 -3M0-R-4M 35.0 -3M0-R-6M 36.1 -3M0-R-10M 38.4 -4M0-R-6M 37.1 -6M0-R-3M 36.9 -6M0-R-8M 39.9 -6M0-R-10M 40.7 -6M0-R-12M 46.3 -6M0-R-18M 49.6 -8M0-R-6M 40.3 -8M0-R-10M 42.0 -8M0-R-12M 47.6 -10M0-R-6M 42.4 -10M0-R-8M 43.4 -10M0-R-12M 49.8 -10M0-R-15M 51.3 -10M0-R-18M 51.3 -12M0-R-6M -12M0-R-8M -12M0-R-10M -12M0-R-16M -12M0-R-18M -12M0-R-20M -12M0-R-22M -12M0-R-25M -16M0-R-12M -18M0-R-12M -18M0-R-16M -18M0-R-20M -18M0-R-22M -18M0-R-25M -20M0-R-16M -20M0-R-18M -20M0-R-22M -20M0-R-25M -22M0-R-18M -22M0-R-20M -22M0-R-25M -25M0-R-18M -25M0-R-20M 44.9 45.9 46.7 53.8 53.8 56.1 56.1 62.4 53.0 54.6 56.1 57.6 57.6 62.4 57.9 57.9 59.4 64.2 57.9 59.4 64.2 63.1 64.6 Dimensions D 12.9 12.9 13.7 E 1.7 2.4 2.4 1.9 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.1 6.4 6.4 4.1 5.6 7.9 7.9 7.9 4.1 5.6 7.1 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 8.8 8.8 12.0 15.1 15.1 15.1 12.0 13.9 15.9 15.9 13.9 15.5 18.3 13.9 15.5 F 12 12 12 14 12 14 14 14 14 22 15 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 24 27 24
1/8
6 8 10
15.3
3/16
16.2
1/4
0.60
17.2
5/16
0.64
3/8
0.66
12
22.8
16 18 1 7/8 2 1/4 3 2 1/4 3 3 20
24.4
1/2
0.90
24.4
27
5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2
0.96 0.96 1.23 1.62 1.97
26.0
30
22 25
26.0 31.3
30 35
Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
26
Straight Fittings
Reducers
F flat T D E A Tx T D E A F flat Tx
Reducer (Metric to Fractional)

Tube OD T 2 3 4 Basic Dimensions Ordering Tx, in. Number A D E Dimensions, mm 1/8 -2M0-R-2 33.5 12.9 1.7 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 -3M0-R-2 -3M0-R-4 -4M0-R-4 -6M0-R-2 -6M0-R-4 -6M0-R-5 -6M0-R-6 -6M0-R-8 -8M0-R-4 -8M0-R-6 -8M0-R-8 -10M0-R-6 -10M0-R-8 -12M0-R-8 -12M0-R-12 -18M0-R-12 -18M0-R-16 -25M0-R-16 33.5 36.1 37.1 36.9 39.2 39.9 40.7 46.3 40.3 42.0 47.6 44.2 49.8 52.3 53.8 56.1 62.4 69.5 12.9 13.7 2.0 2.4 2.4 2.0 4.4 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.4 6.4 6.4 6.8 7.9 9.3 9.5 14.7 15.1 20.2
Reducer (Fractional to Metric)

Tube OD F 12 12 12 T 1/8 Tx, mm 6 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-R-6M 1.42 0.50 0.09
F 7/16
15.3
14
8 10 12 18 25
16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4 31.3
15 18 22 27 35
Long Reducer
F flat T D E Tx
Tube OD T 3/8
A
Tx 1/2
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -600-RF-8 2.57 0.66 0.25
F 5/8
Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end connections.
Bulkhead Reducer
F flat F flat
Dimensions
E
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1
Basic Ordering Number -200-R1-2 -400-R1-4 -600-R1-6 -810-R1-8 -1010-R1-10 -1210-R1-12 -1610-R1-16
A 1.95 2.20 2.41 2.87 2.96 3.21 3.95
D E Dimensions, in. 0.50 0.08 0.60 0.17 0.66 0.27 0.90 0.37 0.96 0.47 0.96 0.58 1.23 0.80
Panel Hole Size
Max Panel Thickness 0.50 0.40 0.44 0.50 0.50 0.66 0.75
1/2 21/64 5/8 29/64 3/4 37/64 15/16 49/64 1 1/16 57/64 1 3/16 1 1/64 1 5/8 1 21/64
27
Straight Fittings
Port Connectors
Port Connector
Tube OD
H
1 in./25 mm and under
Over 1 in./25mm
1/16 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, in. -101-PC 0.03 0.54 -201-PC 0.08 0.88 -401-PC 0.17 0.98 -501-PC 0.22 1.02 -601-PC 0.27 1.05 -811-PC 0.37 1.43 -1011-PC 0.47 1.49 -1211-PC 0.58 1.49 -1611-PC 0.80 1.94 -2000-PC 1.02 2.72 -2400-PC 1.25 3.31 -3200-PC 1.72 4.56
Tube OD 3 6 8 10 12 15 16 18 20 25 28 30 32 38
Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.
Basic Ordering Number Dimensions, -3M1-PC -6M1-PC -8M1-PC -10M1-PC -12M1-PC -15M1-PC -16M1-PC -18M1-PC -20M1-PC -25M1-PC -28M0-PC -30M0-PC -32M0-PC -38M0-PC
Dimensions E mm 1.9 4.1 5.6 7.1 8.8 11.2 12.0 13.9 15.5 19.9 22.5 24.3 26.5 31.6 H 22.2 25.0 26.0 27.1 36.2 37.8 37.8 37.8 39.4 49.3 63.5 67.6 69.7 81.9
Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.
Reducing Port Connector

Tube OD T Tx
T H E Tx
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1/16 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, in. -201-PC-1 0.03 0.72 -401-PC-1 -401-PC-2 -601-PC-2 -601-PC-4 -811-PC-4 -811-PC-6 -1211-PC-8 -1611-PC-8 -1611-PC-12 0.03 0.08 0.08 0.17 0.17 0.27 0.37 0.37 0.58 0.75 0.90 0.92 1.00 1.17 1.21 1.49 1.69 1.72
Tube OD T 6 8 10 12 16 28 32 38 Tx 3 6 6 8 6 8 10 12 25 25 25
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, mm -6M1-PC-3M 1.9 22.9 -8M1-PC-6M 4.1 25.4 -10M1-PC-6M -10M1-PC-8M -12M1-PC-6M -12M1-PC-8M -12M1-PC-10M -16M1-PC-12M -28M1-PC-25M -32M1-PC-25M -38M1-PC-25M 4.1 5.6 4.1 5.6 7.1 8.8 19.8 19.8 19.8 25.8 26.3 29.6 30.1 30.6 37.5 56.5 60.3 65.8
28
Straight Fittings
Caps and Plugs
Cap
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, in. -100-C 0.59 -200-C 0.79 -300-C 0.84 -400-C 0.92 -500-C 0.96 -600-C 1.01 -810-C 1.21 -1010-C 1.24 -1210-C 1.27 -1410-C 1.37 -1610-C 1.61 -1810-C 1.61 -2000-C 2.10 -2400-C 2.54 -3200-C 3.41 Tube OD 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, mm -2M0-C 20.1 -3M0-C 20.1 -4M0-C 21.3 -6M0-C 23.1 -8M0-C 24.5 -10M0-C 26.6 -12M0-C 30.6 -14M0-C 31.4 -15M0-C 31.4 -16M0-C 31.4 -18M0-C 32.2 -20M0-C 34.8 -22M0-C 34.8 -25M0-C 41.0 -28M0-C 48.5 -30M0-C 53.4 -32M0-C 55.8 -38M0-C 65.4
Plug
Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/16 -100-P 1/8 -200-P 3/16 -300-P 1/4 -400-P 5/16 -500-P 3/8 -600-P 1/2 -810-P 5/8 -1010-P 3/4 -1210-P 7/8 -1410-P 1 -1610-P 1 1/4 -2000-P 1 1/2 -2400-P 2 -3200-P Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, mm 2 -2M0-P 3 -3M0-P 4 -4M0-P 6 -6M0-P 8 -8M0-P 10 -10M0-P 12 -12M0-P 15 -15M0-P 16 -16M0-P 18 -18M0-P 20 -20M0-P 22 -22M0-P 25 -25M0-P 28 -28M0-P 30 -30M0-P 32 -32M0-P 38 -38M0-P
D 0.34 0.50 0.54 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
D 12.9 12.9 13.7 15.3 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6 39.6 42.0 49.4
Vent Protectors
F flat 40 mesh wire screen
Mud Dauber
Swagelok vent protectors, more commonly known as mud dauber fittings, protect open ends of instruments, tubing, outlet vents, and bleed-off lines. The mesh wire screen prevents foreign objects, such as mud dauber insects, from entering and clogging various systems and causing damage. Vent protectors are available in stainless steel and brass. To order brass, replace SS in the ordering number with B. Example: B-MD-2
NPT Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Ordering Number A E Dimensions, in. SS-MD-2 0.56 0.19 SS-MD-4 0.78 0.28 SS-MD-6 0.81 0.41 SS-MD-8 1.03 0.50 SS-MD-12 1.06 0.72 F 1/2 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16
E A
40 mesh 300 series stainless steel wire screen assembly
29
90 Elbows
Unions
E F flat
Tube ports are identical.
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Basic Ordering Number -100-9 -200-9 -300-9 -400-9 -500-9 -600-9 -810-9 -1010-9 -1210-9 -1410-9 -1610-9 -1810-9 -2000-9 -2400-9 -3200-9
Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 0.70 0.34 0.88 0.50 1.00 0.54 1.06 0.60 1.13 0.64 1.20 0.66 1.42 0.90 1.50 0.96 1.57 0.96 1.76 1.02 1.93 1.23 2.17 1.23 2.67 1.62 3.10 1.97 4.22 2.66 E 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.25 0.28 0.41 0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88 0.97 1.09 1.34 1.81 F 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 9/16 5/8 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 1 11/16 2 2 3/4
Tube OD 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50
Basic Ordering Number -3M0-9 -4M0-9 -6M0-9 -8M0-9 -10M0-9 -12M0-9 -14M0-9 -15M0-9 -16M0-9 -18M0-9 -20M0-9 -22M0-9 -25M0-9 -28M0-9 -30M0-9 -32M0-9 -38M0-9 -50M0-9
Dimensions A D Dimensions, mm 22.3 12.9 25.4 13.7 27.0 15.3 28.8 16.2 31.5 17.2 36.0 22.8 38.0 24.4 38.0 24.4 38.0 24.4 39.8 24.4 44.6 26.0 44.6 26.0 49.1 31.3 64.0 36.6 69.9 39.6 72.3 42.0 84.0 49.4 106 65.0 E 2.4 2.4 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 11.1 11.9 12.7 15.1 15.9 18.3 21.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 33.7 45.2 F, in. 3/8 1/2 1/2 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 41 mm 46 mm 46 mm 55 mm 2 3/4
30
90 Elbows
Male
E F flat
See page 8 for thread specifications. D
NPT
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 NPT Size 1/16 1/8 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -100-2-1 0.75 0.34 0.05 -100-2-2 -200-2-1 -200-2-2 -200-2-4 -300-2-2 -300-2-4 -400-2-1 -400-2-2 -400-2-4 -400-2-6 -400-2-8 -500-2-2 -500-2-4 -500-2-6 -600-2-2 -600-2-4 -600-2-6 -600-2-8 -600-2-12 -810-2-4 -810-2-6 -810-2-8 -810-2-12 -1010-2-6 -1010-2-8 -1010-2-12 -1210-2-8 -1210-2-12 -1410-2-12 -1610-2-12 -1610-2-16 -2000-2-20 -2400-2-24 -3200-2-32 0.93 0.93 0.97 1.00 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.17 1.25 1.13 1.13 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.23 1.31 1.46 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.57 1.50 1.50 1.57 1.57 1.76 1.93 2.67 3.10 4.22 0.50 0.54 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25 0.19 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.41 0.38 0.47 0.50 0.47 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 Tube OD 3 4 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -3M0-2-2 23.6 12.9 2.4 -3M0-2-4 24.6 -4M0-2-2 -4M0-2-4 -6M0-2-2 -6M0-2-4 -6M0-2-6 -6M0-2-8 -8M0-2-2 -8M0-2-4 -8M0-2-6 -8M0-2-8 -10M0-2-2 -10M0-2-4 -10M0-2-6 -10M0-2-8 -12M0-2-4 -12M0-2-6 -12M0-2-8 -12M0-2-12 -15M0-2-8 -16M0-2-6 -16M0-2-8 -16M0-2-12 -18M0-2-8 -18M0-2-12 -20M0-2-8 -20M0-2-12 -22M0-2-12 -22M0-2-16 -25M0-2-12 -25M0-2-16 -30M0-2-20 -32M0-2-20 -38M0-2-24 25.4 27.0 27.0 29.8 31.8 28.8 28.8 30.6 32.6 31.5 31.5 31.5 33.5 36.0 36.0 36.0 39.8 38.0 38.0 38.0 39.8 39.8 44.6 44.6 49.1 69.9 72.3 84.0 13.7 2.4
F 7/16 7/16 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 11/16 13/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 5/8 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 1/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 2 3/4
F, in. 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 11/16 13/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 13/16 11/16 11/16 11/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 46 mm 46 mm 55 mm
15.3
4.8 4.8 6.4 6.4 6.4 4.8 7.1 7.9 7.9 7.1 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.9 9.5 11.9 12.7 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 15.9 21.8 26.2 27.8 33.7
1/4
0.60
16.2
5/16
0.64
10
17.2
3/8
0.66
12 15 16 18 20 22 25 30 32 38
22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 39.6 42.0 49.4
1/2
0.90
5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66
31
90 Elbows
Male
E F flat
See page 8 for thread specifications. D

ISO Tube Thread OD Size 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-2-2RT 0.83 0.50 0.09 -200-2-4RT 0.97 -400-2-2RT -400-2-4RT -400-2-6RT -400-2-8RT -500-2-4RT -600-2-2RT -600-2-4RT -600-2-6RT -810-2-4RT -810-2-6RT -810-2-8RT -1210-2-8RT -1610-2-16RT 1.06 1.06 1.17 1.25 1.13 1.20 1.20 1.23 1.42 1.57 1.93 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.19 0.25 0.28 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.47 0.88 ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 3 4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -3M0-2-2RT 23.6 12.9 2.4 -3M0-2-4RT 24.6 -4M0-2-2RT -4M0-2-4RT -6M0-2-2RT -6M0-2-4RT -6M0-2-6RT -6M0-2-8RT -8M0-2-2RT -8M0-2-4RT -8M0-2-6RT -8M0-2-8RT -10M0-2-4RT -10M0-2-6RT -10M0-2-8RT -12M0-2-2RT -12M0-2-4RT -12M0-2-6RT -12M0-2-8RT -12M0-2-12RT -14M0-2-8RT -15M0-2-8RT -16M0-2-6RT -16M0-2-8RT -18M0-2-8RT -18M0-2-12RT -20M0-2-8RT -20M0-2-12RT -22M0-2-12RT -22M0-2-16RT -25M0-2-12RT -25M0-2-16RT -28M0-2-16RT 25.4 27.0 27.0 29.8 31.8 28.8 28.8 30.6 32.6 31.5 31.5 33.5 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 39.8 38.1 38.1 38.0 39.8 44.6 44.6 49.1 64.0 13.7 2.4
F 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 11/16 13/16 9/16 5/8 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 3/8 1 3/8
F 7/16 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 11/16 13/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 13/16 11/16 11/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 41 mm
1/4 5/16 3/8
15.3
4.8 4.8 6.4 6.4 6.4 7.1 7.9 7.9 4.8 7.1 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.1 11.9 9.5 11.9 11.9 15.1 11.9 15.9 15.9 18.3 15.9 21.8 21.8
1/2 3/4 1
0.90 0.96 1.23
16.2
10
17.2
12
22.8
14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28
24.4 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 26.0 31.3 36.6
Reducing
E T F flat
Tube OD T Tx 6 12
6 12
A
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -6M0-2R-6M 27.0 15.3 4.6 -12M0-2R-12M 38.1 22.8 8.8
F, in. 1/2 15/16
Tx
32
90 Elbows
Male
A F flat
Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Basic Ordering Number -400-2-2PR -400-2-4PR -600-2-4PR -600-2-6PR -810-2-4PR -810-2-6PR -810-2-8PR -1010-2-8PR -1210-2-8PR -1210-2-12PR -1610-2-12PR -1610-2-16PR -6M0-2-2PR -6M0-2-4PR -8M0-2-2PR -8M0-2-4PR -10M0-2-4PR -10M0-2-6PR -12M0-2-4PR -12M0-2-6PR -12M0-2-8PR -12M0-2-12PR Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 1.06 0.60 1.14 1.20 1.31 1.42 1.42 1.50 1.50 1.57 1.93 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 E 0.16 0.19 0.23 0.28 0.23 0.31 0.41 0.47 0.47 0.62 0.62 0.78 4.0 4.8 4.0 5.9 5.9 7.9 5.9 7.9 9.5 9.5 F, in. 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 13/16 13/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1/2 5/8 9/16 5/8 13/16 13/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 Fx, in. 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 U 0.60 0.80 0.80 0.96 0.80 0.96 1.16 1.16 1.16 1.43 1.43 1.82 15.2 20.3 15.2 20.3 20.3 24.4 20.3 24.4 29.5 36.3
Tube OD
D E Fx flat O-ring U retainer OD
1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1
6 8 10
Dimensions, mm 27.0 15.3 29.0 28.8 29.9 33.5 36.0 36.0 38.0 39.8 16.2 17.2
12
22.8
Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A E F flat
Tube OD 1/4
SAE/MS Thread Size 7/16-20 9/16-18 1/2-20 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1 1/16-12 1 3/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12
Basic Ordering Number -400-2-4ST -400-2-6ST -500-2-5ST -600-2-4ST -600-2-6ST -600-2-8ST -810-2-6ST -810-2-8ST -1010-2-10ST -1210-2-12ST -1410-2-14ST -1610-2-16ST -2000-2-20ST -2400-2-24ST -3200-2-32ST
Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 1.12 0.60 1.20 1.19 1.26 1.26 1.37 1.48 1.56 1.63 1.70 1.99 2.67 3.07 4.22 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66 E 0.19 0.23 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.41 0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 F, in. 1/2 5/8 9/16 5/8 5/8 13/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 2 3/4 Fx, in. 9/16 11/16 5/8 9/16 11/16 7/8 11/16 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 7/8 2 1/8 2 3/4 U 0.65 0.79 0.72 0.65 0.79 1.01 0.79 1.01 1.16 1.44 1.59 1.73 2.16 2.45 3.16
D Fx flat O-ring U washer OD SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in carbon steel and stainless steel only. Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.
5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
33
90 Elbows
Weld
A E F flat
Tube Socket Weld

Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Socket Weld Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number -400-9-4W -600-9-6W -810-9-8W -1210-9-12W -1610-9-16W Dimensions A B Dimensions, in. 1.06 0.28 1.20 0.31 1.42 0.38 1.57 0.44 1.93 0.62 D 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 K 0.50 0.63 0.81 1.06 1.38
D K
Male Pipe Weld

A E F flat
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
Pipe Weld Size 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/2 3/4
Basic Ordering Number -400-2-2W -400-2-4W -600-2-4W -810-2-8W
Dimensions A D Dimensions, in. 1.06 1.20 1.42 1.57 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 E 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 J 0.405 0.540 0.540 0.840 1.050
D 37.5 J
3/4
-1210-2-12W
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Female
E F flat
NPT
Tube OD 1/8 3/16 1/4 NPT Size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-8-2 0.97 0.50 0.09 -200-8-4 1.08 -300-8-2 -400-8-2 -400-8-4 -400-8-6 -400-8-8 -500-8-2 -500-8-4 -600-8-2 -600-8-4 -600-8-6 -600-8-8 -810-8-4 -810-8-6 -810-8-8 -1010-8-6 -1010-8-8 -1210-8-8 -1210-8-12 -1410-8-12 -1610-8-12 -1610-8-16 1.00 1.06 1.17 1.25 1.36 1.13 1.20 1.20 1.23 1.31 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.53 1.50 1.57 1.57 1.76 1.76 1.93 2.11 0.54 0.60 0.12 0.19 Tube OD NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, mm -6M0-8-2 27.0 -6M0-8-4 29.8 15.3 4.8 -6M0-8-8 34.6 -8M0-8-4 30.6 16.2 6.4 -10M0-8-2 -10M0-8-4 -12M0-8-4 -12M0-8-8 -16M0-8-8 31.5 33.5 36.0 38.8 39.5 17.2 22.8 24.4 7.9 9.5 12.7
F 1/2 11/16 1/2 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 9/16 11/16 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 13/16 13/16 1 15/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16
F, in. 1/2 11/16 1 11/16 11/16 13/16 13/16 1 1 1/16
6 8 10 12 16
5/16
0.64
0.25
3/8
0.66
0.28
1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
0.90 0.96 0.96 1.02 1.23
0.41 0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88
34
45 Elbows
Male
A F flat
NPT
Tube OD 1/4
E
NPT Size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -400-5-2 0.97 0.60 0.19 -400-5-4 -600-5-2 1.10 0.19 -600-5-4 1.10 0.66 0.28 -600-5-6 1.15 0.28 -810-5-6 -810-5-8 -1210-5-12 -1610-5-16 1.26 1.33 1.59 0.90 0.96 1.23 0.38 0.41 0.62 0.88
F 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8

Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A F flat
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
SAE/MS Thread Size 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12
as U he rO
O-ring
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E F Dimensions, in. -400-5-4ST 1.01 0.60 0.19 1/2 -600-5-6ST 1.10 0.66 0.28 5/8 -810-5-8ST 1.26 0.90 0.41 13/16 -1210-5-12ST 1.33 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 -1610-5-16ST 1.59 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
U 0.65 0.79 1.01 1.44 1.73
opening at the pipe/straight thread end. SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in carbon steel and stainless steel only. Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.
35
Tees
Unions
E
Ax
F flat
Ax
Union
Tube OD 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Basic Ordering Number -100-3 -200-3 -300-3 -400-3 -500-3 -600-3 -810-3 -1010-3 -1210-3 -1410-3 -1610-3 -1810-3 -2000-3 -2400-3 -3200-3 Dimensions A Ax D Dimensions, in. 1.40 0.70 0.34 1.76 0.88 0.50 1.92 0.96 0.54 2.12 1.06 0.60 2.34 1.17 0.64 2.40 1.20 0.66 2.84 1.42 0.90 3.06 1.53 0.96 3.14 1.57 0.96 3.52 1.76 1.02 3.86 1.93 1.23 4.34 2.17 1.23 5.34 2.67 1.62 6.20 3.10 1.97 8.44 4.22 2.66 E 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.25 0.28 0.41 0.50 0.62 0.72 0.88 0.97 1.09 1.34 1.81 F 3/8 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 1 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 1 11/16 2 2 3/4 Tube OD 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 Basic Ordering Number -2M0-3 -3M0-3 -4M0-3 -6M0-3 -8M0-3 -10M0-3 -12M0-3 -14M0-3 -15M0-3 -16M0-3 -18M0-3 -20M0-3 -22M0-3 -25M0-3 -28M0-3 -30M0-3 -32M0-3 -38M0-3 -50M0-3 Dimensions A Ax D Dimensions, mm 44.7 22.3 12.9 44.7 22.3 12.9 50.8 25.4 13.7 53.9 27.0 15.3 59.7 29.9 16.2 63.0 31.5 17.2 72.0 36.0 22.8 77.6 38.8 24.4 77.6 38.8 24.4 77.6 38.8 24.4 79.6 39.8 24.4 89.3 44.6 26.0 89.3 44.6 26.0 98.3 49.1 31.3 128 64.0 36.6 140 69.9 39.6 145 72.3 42.0 168 84.0 49.4 211 106 65.0 E 1.7 2.4 2.4 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 11.1 11.9 12.7 15.1 15.9 18.3 21.8 21.8 26.2 28.6 33.7 45.2 F, in. 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 1 1 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 41 mm 46 mm 46 mm 55 mm 2 3/4
Reducing Union (Fractional)

Tube OD
T Ax D E Dx Tx A F flat
T 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Tx 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1
Basic Ordering Number -600-3-6-4 -810-3-8-4 -810-3-8-6 -1010-3-10-6 -1210-3-12-6 -1210-3-12-8 -1610-3-16-6 -1610-3-16-8 -1610-3-16-12 -2000-3-20-16 -2400-3-24-16 -3200-3-32-16
Dimensions A Ax Dimensions, in. 2.40 1.14 2.84 3.06 3.14 3.86 5.34 6.20 8.44 1.25 1.31 1.42 1.46 1.57 1.65 1.76 1.76 2.17 2.36 2.79 D 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 1.62 1.97 2.66 Dx 0.60 0.60 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.90 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 1.23 1.23 E 0.19 0.19 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.41 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 0.88 0.88 F 5/8 13/16 1 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 2 3/4
36
Tees
Unions
Reducing Union (Metric)
Tube OD
T Ax D E Dx Tx A F flat
T 3 8 10 12 15 16 18 22 25
Tx
12
A Ax Dimensions, mm -3M0-3-3M-6M 49.3 26.9 -8M0-3-8M-6M 59.9 29.0 -10M0-3-10M-6M 63.0 29.7 -12M0-3-12M-6M 72.0 31.8 -15M0-3-15M-12M 77.7 38.9 -16M0-3-16M-12M 77.6 38.9 -18M0-3-18M-12M 79.8 39.9 -22M0-3-22M-12M 89.4 44.7 -25M0-3-25M-12M 98.0 44.7
Dimensions D 12.9 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4 24.4 24.4 26.0 31.3 Dx 15.3 15.3 15.3 15.3 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 22.8 E 2.4 4.8 4.8 4.8 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 F, in. 1/2 5/8 11/16 13/16 1 1 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8
Reducing Union
E T Ax D Dx F flat
Tube OD
Tx
T 3/8
Tx 1/4
Basic Ordering Number -600-3-4-6
Dimensions Ax Ay Dimensions, in. 2.34 1.20 1.14 A D 0.66 Dx 0.60 E 0.19 F 5/8
Ax
T A E
Ay
F flat Tx Dx
Tube OD T 1/2 5/8 3/4 Tx
Basic Ordering Number -810-3-6-6 -1010-3-6-6 -1210-3-6-6
Dimensions Ax Dimensions, 2.73 1.42 2.95 1.53 3.03 1.57 A Ay in. 1.31 1.42 1.46 D 0.90 0.96 0.96 Dx 0.66 0.66 0.66 E 0.28 0.28 0.28 F 13/16 1 1 1/16
Ay
3/8
Tx Ax A Ay
F flat
Dx
Tube OD
T E Dx1 Tx1 A Tx
T 5/8 3/4 1
Tx 1/2 1/2 3/4
Tx1
Basic Ordering Number -1010-3-8-6 -1210-3-8-6 -1610-3-12-6
Dimensions A 3.06 3.14 3.69 Ax Ay Dimensions, 1.53 1.53 1.57 1.57 1.93 1.76 Ay1 in. 1.42 1.46 1.65 D 0.96 0.96 1.23 Dx 0.90 0.90 0.96 Dx1 E F
Ay1
3/8
0.66
1 0.28 1 1/16 1 3/8
Ax
Ay
37
Tees
Male
E
Branch, NPT (TTM)

Tube OD 1/8 3/16
A
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 1/2 1/2
F flat
A D Dimensions, in. -200-3TTM 1.86 0.50 -200-3-4TTM 1.94 -300-3TTM -400-3TTM -400-3-4TTM -500-3TTM -600-3TTM -600-3-6TTM -810-3TTM -810-3-8TTM -1010-3TTM -1210-3TTM 1.92 2.12 2.34 2.40 2.62 2.84 3.06 3.14 0.54 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96
Dimensions E 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.19 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.47 0.62 4.8 4.8 6.4 7.1 9.5 7.1 9.5 11.9 F, in. 7/16 1/2 7/16 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 13/16 1 1 1/16 1/2 5/8 13/16 13/16 1 H 0.70 0.92 0.70 0.74 0.92 0.82 1.00 1.11 1.11 1.30 1.41 1.45 18.8 23.4 20.8 25.4 26.2 28.2 28.2 33.0 35.8
1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 6 8 10 12 16
Dimensions, mm -6M0-3TTM 53.9 15.3 -6M0-3-4TTM -8M0-3TTM -8M0-3-4TTM -10M0-3TTM -12M0-3TTM -12M0-3-4TTM -12M0-3-8TTM -16M0-3TTM 59.7 67.0 72.0 77.6 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4
opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Run, NPT (TMT)

Tube OD 1/8 3/16
Ax
E D
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2
Ax
F flat
A Ax Dimensions, in. -200-3TMT 1.63 0.93 -200-3-4TMT 1.89 0.97 -300-3TMT -400-3TMT -400-3-4TMT -500-3TMT -600-3TMT -600-3-6TMT -810-3TMT -810-3-8TMT -1010-3TMT -1210-3TMT 1.66 1.80 1.98 1.99 2.20 2.42 2.53 2.72 2.88 3.02 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.20 1.31 1.42 1.50 1.57
Dimensions D 0.50 0.54 0.60 0.64 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 15.3 16.2 22.8 24.4 E 0.09 0.12 0.19 0.19 0.28 0.38 0.41 0.47 0.62 4.8 6.4 7.1 9.5 11.9 F, in. 7/16 1/2 7/16 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 1/2 5/8 13/16 15/16
1/4
A
5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 6 8 12 16
Dimensions, mm -6M0-3TMT 45.8 27.0 -6M0-3-4TMT 50.3 -8M0-3-4TMT -12M0-3-4TMT -12M0-3-8TMT -16M0-3TMT 55.3 64.2 69.0 73.1 29.9 36.0 38.0
38
Tees
Male
E F flat
Positionable Branch, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TTS)

Tube OD
D Fx flat
SAE/MS Thread Size
Basic Ordering Number -400-3TTS -600-3TTS -810-3TTS -1210-3TTS -1610-3TTS -2000-3TTS -2400-3TTS -3200-3TTS
Dimensions A 2.24 2.52 2.96 3.26 3.98 5.34 6.14 8.44 Ax D Dimensions, in. 1.12 0.60 1.26 0.66 1.48 0.90 1.63 0.96 1.99 1.23 2.67 1.62 3.07 1.97 4.22 2.66 E 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 2 3/4 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8 11/4 1 1/2 1 7/8 2 1/8 2 3/4 H 1.12 1.27 1.49 1.92 2.11 2.29 2.45 2.77 U 0.65 0.79 1.01 1.44 1.73 2.16 2.45 3.16
O-ring U washer OD A
Ax
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in carbon steel and stainless steel only. Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.
1/4 7/16-20 3/8 9/16-18 1/2 3/4-16 3/4 1 1/16-12 1 1 5/16-12 1 1/4 1 5/8-12 1 1/2 1 7/8-12 2 2 1/2-12
straight thread end.
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
Positionable Branch, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TTR)

E F flat
ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 1 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -400-3TTR -400-3-4TTR -600-3TTR -810-3TTR -810-3-8TTR -1010-3TTR -1210-3TTR -1210-3-8TTR -1610-3TTR -6M0-3TTR -6M0-3-4TTR -8M0-3TTR -8M0-3-4TTR -10M0-3TTR -12M0-3TTR -12M0-3-8TTR
Dimensions A 2.12 2.28 2.40 2.84 3.00 3.00 3.14 3.86 Ax D Dimensions, in. 1.06 0.60 1.14 1.20 1.42 1.50 1.50 1.57 1.93 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 E 0.16 0.19 0.23 0.31 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.47 0.78 F, in. 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1/2 5/8 9/16 5/8 13/16 13/16 5/16 Fx, in. 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 1/16 1 5/8 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 H 1.04 1.27 1.27 1.46 1.71 1.71 1.92 1.78 2.11 26.4 32.2 28.4 32.3 35.1 37.1 43.4 U 0.60 0.80 0.80 0.96 1.16 1.16 1.43 1.16 1.92 15.2 20.3 15.2 20.3 20.3 24.4 29.5
D Fx flat O-ring U retainer OD A
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 6 8 10 12
Ax
Tube ports are identical. See page 8 for thread specifications.
Dimensions, mm 53.9 27.0 4.0 15.3 58.0 29.0 4.8 57.7 59.7 67.0 72.0 76.1 30.0 33.5 36.1 38.1 16.2 17.2 22.8 4.0 5.9 5.9 7.9 9.5
The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
straight thread end.
Positionable Run, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TST)

E F flat Fx flat U washer OD Ax D O-ring
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
SAE/MS Thread Size 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12
Basic Ordering Number -400-3TST -600-3TST -810-3TST -1210-3TST -1610-3TST -2000-3TST -2400-3TST -3200-3TST
Dimensions A Ax D Dimensions, in. 2.24 1.12 0.60 2.53 1.26 0.66 2.97 1.48 0.90 3.55 1.63 0.96 4.10 1.99 1.23 4.96 2.67 1.62 5.45 3.07 1.97 7.04 4.22 2.66 E 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 2 3/4 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 7/8 2 1/8 2 3/4 U 0.65 0.79 1.01 1.44 1.73 2.16 2.45 3.16
Ax
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in carbon steel and stainless steel only. Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.
39
Tees
Male
E F flat Fx flat U retainer OD Ax D O-ring
Positionable Run, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TRT)

ISO Thread Tube Size OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ax A
Basic Ordering Number -400-3TRT -400-3-4TRT -600-3TRT -810-3TRT -810-3-8TRT -1010-3TRT -1210-3TRT -1210-3-8TRT -1610-3TRT -6M0-3TRT -6M0-3-4TRT -8M0-3TRT -8M0-3-4TRT -10M0-3TRT -12M0-3TRT -12M0-3-8TRT
Dimensions A Ax D Dimensions, in. 2.10 1.06 0.60 2.41 1.14 2.47 2.88 3.21 3.21 3.49 3.35 4.04 1.20 1.42 1.50 1.50 1.57 1.93 0.66 0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23 E 0.16 0.19 0.23 0.31 0.41 0.47 0.62 0.47 0.78 4.0 4.8 4.0 6.4 5.9 7.9 9.5 F, in. 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1/2 5/8 9/16 5/8 13/16 13/16 15/16 Fx, in. 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 1/16 1 5/8 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 U 0.60 0.80 0.80 0.96 1.16 1.16 1.43 1.16 1.82 15.2 20.3 15.2 20.3 20.3 24.4 29.5
1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 1 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 6 8 10 12
See page 8 for thread specifications.
Dimensions, mm 53.4 27.0 15.3 61.2 29.0 56.3 62.1 68.6 73.1 81.5 28.8 29.9 33.5 36.0 38.0 16.2 17.2 22.8
Female
F flat
Run, NPT (TFT)

Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8
Ax A
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
Ax
Basic Ordering Number A Dimensions, -200-3TFT 1.72 -400-3TFT 1.81 -400-3-4TFT 2.05 -600-3TFT 2.11 -810-3TFT -810-3-8TFT -1210-3TFT -1610-3-12TFT -1610-3TFT 2.30 2.69 3.01 3.18 3.61
Dimensions Ax in. 0.97 1.06 1.17 1.23 1.42 1.57 1.76 1.93 2.11 D 0.50 0.60 0.66 0.90 0.96 1.23 E 0.09 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88 F, in. 1/2 1/2 11/16 11/16 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 1/2 11/16 5/8 11/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1/16 1 1/16
1/2 3/4 1
Tube ports are identical.
6 8 10 12 16
Dimensions, mm -6M0-3TFT 46.0 27.0 -6M0-3-4TFT 52.1 29.8 -8M0-3TFT -8M0-3-4TFT -10M0-3TFT -12M0-3-4TFT -12M0-3TFT -12M0-3-8TFT -16M0-3TFT 48.9 53.0 55.9 58.4 58.4 68.3 68.2 29.9 30.6 33.5 36.0 36.0 39.8 39.8
15.3 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4
4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 10.3 9.5 12.7
40
Tees
Female
E
Branch, NPT (TTF)

Tube OD 1/8 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E F, in. Dimensions, in. -200-3TTF 1.94 0.50 0.09 1/2 -400-3TTF -400-3-4TTF -600-3TTF -600-3-6TTF -600-3-8TTF -810-3-4TTF -810-3TTF -810-3-8TTF -1010-3TTF -1210-3TTF -1610-3-12TTF -1610-3TTF 2.12 2.34 2.46 2.62 2.84 2.84 2.84 3.06 3.06 3.52 3.86 4.22 0.60 0.66 0.19 0.28 1/2 11/16 11/16 13/16 1 13/16 13/16 1 1 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 1/2 11/16 5/8 11/16 13/16 13/16 13/16 1 1
H 0.75 0.75 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.12 0.88 0.88 1.12 1.12 1.25 1.25 1.50 19.0 22.4 19.0 22.4 22.4 22.4 22.4 28.4 28.4
D A
F flat
1/4 3/8
1/2 5/8 3/4 1
0.90 0.96 0.96 1.23
0.41 0.50 0.62 0.88
6 8 10 12 16
Dimensions, mm -6M0-3TTF 53.9 15.3 -6M0-3-4TTF 59.5 -8M0-3TTF -8M0-3-4TTF -10M0-3TTF -12M0-3-4TTF -12M0-3TTF -12M0-3-8TTF -16M0-3TTF 59.7 61.2 67.0 72.0 72.0 77.7 77.6 16.2 17.2 22.8 24.4
4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 12.7
Cross
Union
Tube OD
E A F flat D
1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 3 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 22 25
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A D E Dimensions, in. -200-4 1.76 0.50 0.09 -400-4 2.12 0.60 0.19 -500-4 2.34 0.64 0.25 -600-4 2.40 0.66 0.28 -810-4 2.84 0.90 0.41 -1210-4 3.14 0.96 0.62 -1610-4 3.86 1.23 0.88 Dimensions, mm -3M0-4 44.7 12.9 -6M0-4 53.9 15.3 -8M0-4 59.7 16.2 -10M0-4 67.0 17.2 -12M0-4 72.0 22.8 -16M0-4 74.0 24.4 -18M0-4 76.6 24.4 -20M0-4 89.3 26.0 -22M0-4 89.4 26.0 -25M0-4 98.3 31.3 2.4 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 12.7 15.1 15.9 18.3 21.8
F, in. 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 13/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 13/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 5/8 1 3/8
41
Sanitary Flange Fittings

E minimum opening F flat
B G
C A
Kwik-Clamp Flange To Swagelok Tube Fitting

Tube OD in. Flange Size in. 1/2 1/4 3/4 1 1 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/4 1 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 1 1 2 Ordering Number SS-400-SC-8 SS-400-SC-12 SS-400-SC-16 SS-400-SC-24 SS-600-SC-8 SS-600-SC-12 SS-600-SC-16 SS-600-SC-24 SS-810-SC-8 SS-810-SC-12 SS-810-SC-16 SS-810-SC-24 SS-1610-SC-16 SS-1610-SC-32 1.91 (48.5) 2.49 (63.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.63 (41.4) 1.57 (39.9) Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 1.23 (31.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.88 (22.4) 0.90 (22.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.41 (10.4) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 3/8 1 1 3/8 1 3/8 2 3/4 1.98 (50.3) 0.98 (24.9) 1.98 (50.3) 1.98 (50.3) 2.52 (64.0) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 3/8 1 1.98 (50.3) 0.98 (24.9) C E F 1 G 0.98 (24.9)
42
Tube Adapters
100 50
5
Solve Alignment Problems and Reduce Inventories

Swagelok tube adapters can help eliminate difficult alignment problems and reduce inventories. Swagelok tube adapters can be used with any Swagelok tube fittings in this catalog. So, stocking union elbows and union tees in various sizes - BW and materialsalong with commonly used Swagelok adapterseliminates the need for stocking special elbows and tees.
10 14
150
200
Typical Alignment Problem

When installing pipe elbows or tees, it is often difficult to align the fitting with the desired run.
1. In this example, the installation requires connecting tubing to a female end connection.
2. When the pipe connection is tightened, the male elbow points in the wrong direction for the desired run. Loosening the pipe connection could mean leakage at the pipe thread.
Swagelok Solution
By using a Swagelok tube adapter in conjunction with a union elbow or tee, these difficulties can be avoided.
3. Tighten the pipe connection of a Swagelok male adapter into the female end connection.
4. Connect a Swagelok union elbow or tee to the adapter by tightening the Swagelok tube fitting with a wrench, while holding the elbow or tee in the desired direction. Insert the tubing into the other end of the Swagelok elbow or tee and install the fitting.
Swagelok tube adapters are to be used ONLY in Swagelok tube fittings.

Use in fittings made by other manufacturers may result in leakage or slippage.
43
Tube Adapters
Male
F flat F flat E A A E
Over 1 in./25 mm
NPT
Tube OD 1/8 3/16 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2 1 1 1/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-1-2 1.16 7/16 0.08 -2-TA-1-4 1.37 9/16 -3-TA-1-2 -3-TA-1-4 -4-TA-1-2 -4-TA-1-4 -4-TA-1-6 -4-TA-1-8 -5-TA-1-2 -5-TA-1-4 -6-TA-1-2 -6-TA-1-4 -6-TA-1-6 -6-TA-1-8 -8-TA-1-4 -8-TA-1-6 -8-TA-1-8 -10-TA-1-8 -12-TA-1-8 -12-TA-1-12 -16-TA-1-12 -16-TA-1-16 -20-TA-1-20 -24-TA-1-24 -32-TA-1-32 1.19 1.40 1.25 1.46 1.49 1.71 1.29 1.50 1.32 1.53 1.56 1.78 1.75 1.78 2.00 2.06 2.06 2.31 2.60 3.16 3.72 4.70 0.12 0.17 7/16 9/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/16 9/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/4 2 1/8 2 3/4 12 14 14 19 14 18 22 16 22 35 46 41 46 46 55

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1 1 1 1 1 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-1-2RT 1.16 7/16 0.08 -2-TA-1-4RT 1.37 9/16 -4-TA-1-2RT -4-TA-1-4RT -6-TA-1-4RT -6-TA-1-6RT -6-TA-1-8RT -8-TA-1-4RT -8-TA-1-6RT -8-TA-1-8RT -12-TA-1-12RT -16-TA-1-16RT 1.25 1.46 1.53 1.56 1.78 1.75 1.78 2.00 2.06 2.60 0.17 0.27 0.28 0.37 0.37 0.58 0.80 4.1 5.6 7.1 7.1 8.8 8.8 22.2 22.5 24.3 26.5 31.6 7/16 9/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 12 14 14 14 18 16 18 22 35 46 46 46 55
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8
1/4
5/16
0.19 0.22 0.19 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.28 0.37 0.37 0.47 0.47 0.58 0.62 0.80 1.02 1.25 1.72 4.1 5.6 7.1 7.1 8.8 22.2 22.5 22.2 24.3 26.5 31.6
1/2 3/4 1 6 8 10 12 28 30 32 38
3/8
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 6 8 10 12 28 30 32 38
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-1-2RT 32.8 -6-MTA-1-4RT 38.1 -8-MTA-1-4RT -10-MTA-1-4RT -10-MTA-1-6RT -12-MTA-1-4RT -12-MTA-1-6RT -12-MTA-1-8RT -28-MTA-1-16RT -28-MTA-1-20RT -30-MTA-1-20RT -32-MTA-1-20RT -38-MTA-1-24RT 39.1 39.9 40.6 46.5 46.2 51.8 74.7 76.2 80.0 81.0 92.2
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-1-2 32.8 -6-MTA-1-4 38.1 -8-MTA-1-4 -8-MTA-1-6 -10-MTA-1-4 -10-MTA-1-6 -10-MTA-1-8 -12-MTA-1-4 -12-MTA-1-8 -28-MTA-1-16 -28-MTA-1-20 -30-MTA-1-16 -30-MTA-1-20 -32-MTA-1-20 -38-MTA-1-24 39.1 39.9 39.9 40.6 46.2 46.5 52.1 74.7 76.2 79.2 80.0 81.0 92.2


44

C-PH-1061A-DIM
Tube Adapters
SWAGELOK MALE TUBE ADAPTER ISO PARALLEL THREADS (RP) CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
Male
F flat F flat F flat
Over 1 in./25 mm
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 53.
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 53.
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-1-2RS 1.25 9/16 0.08 -2-TA-1-4RS 1.43 3/4 -4-TA-1-2RS -4-TA-1-4RS -6-TA-1-4RS -6-TA-1-6RS -8-TA-1-4RS -8-TA-1-6RS -8-TA-1-8RS -12-TA-1-12RS -16-TA-1-16RS 1.35 1.53 1.59 1.62 1.85 1.88 1.96 2.20 2.59 0.16 0.17 0.23 0.27 0.23 0.31 0.37 0.58 0.80 4.0 4.1 5.6 5.9 7.1 7.1 5.9 7.9 8.8 11.9 13.9 19.8 22.5 24.3 26.5 31.6 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 14 19 19 19 22 27 19 22 27 27 35 41 50 50 50 55

ISO Thread Size in. 1 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, mm 72.7 19.8 41 -28-MTA-1-16RP -28-MTA-1-20RP 77.3 22.5 50 -30-MTA-1-20RP 81.1 24.3 50 -32-MTA-1-20RP 82.1 26.5 50 -38-MTA-1-24RP 94.5 31.8 55
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 6 8 10
Tube OD 28 30 32 38
1 1 1 1

12 18 28 30 32 38
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-1-2RS 34.3 -6-MTA-1-4RS 38.9 -8-MTA-1-4RS 39.6 -10-MTA-1-4RS 40.4 -10-MTA-1-6RS 41.1 -10-MTA-1-8RS 43.2 -12-MTA-1-4RS 47.0 -12-MTA-1-6RS 47.8 -12-MTA-1-8RS 49.8 -18-MTA-1-8RS -18-MTA-1-12RS -28-MTA-1-16RS -28-MTA-1-20RS -30-MTA-1-20RS -32-MTA-1-20RS -38-MTA-1-24RS 51.3 55.9 71.9 75.4 79.8 80.8 91.9

45
Tube Adapters
Male
F flat F flat O-ring E E O-ring F flat O-ring E
A A
A See page 18 for mounting dimensions.
Over 1 in./25 mm
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.

Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 SAE/MS Thread Size 5/16-24 7/16-20 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-1-2ST 1.20 0.08 7/16 -4-TA-1-4ST 1.39 0.17 9/16 -6-TA-1-4ST 1.46 0.20 9/16 -6-TA-1-6ST 1.52 0.27 11/16 -6-TA-1-8ST 1.60 0.27 7/8 -8-TA-1-6ST -8-TA-1-8ST -10-TA-1-10ST -12-TA-1-12ST -16-TA-1-16ST -20-TA-1-20ST -24-TA-1-24ST -32-TA-1-32ST 1.74 1.82 1.94 2.10 2.41 2.81 3.28 4.23 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.58 0.80 1.02 1.25 1.72 11/16 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 7/8 2 1/8 2 3/4
O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread)

Tube OD 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 SAE/MS Thread Size 5/16-24 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E Dimensions, in. -2-TA-1-OR -3-TA-1-OR -4-TA-1-OR -5-TA-1-OR -6-TA-1-OR -8-TA-1-OR 1.28 1.38 1.54 1.64 1.70 1.95 0.08 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.27 0.37
F 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 15/16 1 1/8

F flat
37 E
AN Thread
AN Tube Flare Size 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions, in. 7/16-20UNJF-3 -4-TA-1-4AN Thread Size 7/16-20UNJF-3 9/16-18UNJF-3 3/4-16UNJF-3 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 -6-TA-1-4AN -6-TA-1-6AN -8-TA-1-8AN -12-TA-1-12AN -16-TA-1-16AN Dimensions A 1.46 1.53 1.56 1.91 2.21 2.58 E 0.17 0.17 0.27 0.37 0.58 0.80 F 1/2 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 1/8 1 3/8
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
46
Tube Adapters
Male
37.5
Pipe Weld
Tube OD
E J
Pipe Weld Size 1/4 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E J Dimensions, in. -4-TA-1-4W 1.14 0.17 0.540 -6-TA-1-8W 1.46 0.27 0.840 -8-TA-1-8W -8-TA-1-12W -12-TA-1-12W 1.66 1.68 1.87 0.37 0.58 0.840 1.050 1.050
Wall thickness at weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Female
F flat
F flat
Over 1 in./25 mm
NPT
Tube OD 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-7-2 1.24 9/16 0.08 -2-TA-7-4 1.39 3/4 -3-TA-7-4 1.41 0.12 3/4 -4-TA-7-2 -4-TA-7-4 -4-TA-7-6 -4-TA-7-8 -5-TA-7-4 -6-TA-7-2 -6-TA-7-4 -6-TA-7-6 -6-TA-7-8 -8-TA-7-4 -8-TA-7-6 -8-TA-7-8 -10-TA-7-8 -12-TA-7-8 -12-TA-7-12 -12-TA-7-16 -16-TA-7-12 -16-TA-7-16 -20-TA-7-20 -24-TA-7-24 -32-TA-7-32 1.30 1.46 1.55 1.79 1.48 1.35 1.50 1.59 1.84 1.71 1.79 2.05 2.09 2.08 2.16 2.30 2.39 2.53 3.06 3.50 4.23 0.17 0.22 0.27 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 1 5/16 1 5/8 2 1/8 2 3/8 2 7/8 14 19 19 19 22 27 19 27

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/4 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -4-TA-7-2RT 1.30 9/16 0.17 -4-TA-7-4RT 1.45 3/4 -6-TA-7-4RT -6-TA-7-6RT -8-TA-7-4RT -8-TA-7-6RT -8-TA-7-8RT 1.50 1.59 1.71 1.80 2.05 0.27 0.37 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 14 19 19
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
6 8 10
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-7-2RT 33.0 -8-MTA-7-4RT 37.6 -10-MTA-7-4RT 38.1
4.1 5.6 7.1
1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 6 8 10 12
0.37 0.47 0.58 0.80 1.02 1.25 1.72 4.1 5.6 7.1 8.8
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-7-2 32.5 -6-MTA-7-4 37.1 -8-MTA-7-4 -10-MTA-7-4 -10-MTA-7-6 -10-MTA-7-8 -12-MTA-7-4 -12-MTA-7-8 37.6 38.1 40.1 46.7 43.7 52.3
47
Tube Adapters
Female
F flat F flat
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets and O-rings are available. See page 53. A
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets and O-rings are available. See page 53. A

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -2-TA-7-2RP 1.17 0.08 9/16 -4-TA-7-2RP -4-TA-7-4RP -6-TA-7-4RP -6-TA-7-6RP -8-TA-7-6RP -8-TA-7-8RP 1.25 1.50 1.55 1.57 1.78 2.02 0.17 0.27 0.38 9/16 3/4 3/4 15/16 15/16 1 1/16 14 19 27
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. -4-TA-7-4RG 1.39 0.17 3/4 -6-TA-7-6RG 1.55 0.26 15/16 -8-TA-7-8RG 1.80 0.28 1 1/16 Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-7-4RG 35.3 -6-MTA-7-6RG 38.4 -6-MTA-7-8RG 42.9 -8-MTA-7-4RG 33.0 -8-MTA-7-6RG 38.9 -8-MTA-7-8RG 43.7 -10-MTA-7-4RG 34.5 -10-MTA-7-6RG 36.1 -10-MTA-7-8RG 41.1 -12-MTA-7-4RG 40.1 -12-MTA-7-6RG 44.7 -12-MTA-7-8RG 48.8 -16-MTA-7-8RG 49.0 -18-MTA-7-8RG 49.3 19 24 27 19 24 27 19 24 27 19 24 27 27 27
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
4.1 5.5 5.6 5.6 5.5 6.5 7.1 5.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 7.0
6 12
Dimensions, mm -6-MTA-7-2RP 32.0 -6-MTA-7-4RP 37.8 -12-MTA-7-8RP 49.8
4.1 8.8
10
F flat ISO/BSP parallel thread (RJ) fittings are available in stainless steel only. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets and O-rings are available. See page 53. A
12 16 18
74
F flat
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 Dimensions Ordering Number A E F Dimensions, in. SS-4-TA-7-4RJ 1.39 0.17 3/4 SS-6-TA-7-6RJ 1.55 0.26 15/16 SS-8-TA-7-8RJ 1.94 0.28 1 1/16 Dimensions, mm SS-6-MTA-7-4RJ 35.3 19 SS-6-MTA-7-6RJ 38.6 4.1 24 SS-6-MTA-7-8RJ 42.9 27 SS-8-MTA-7-4RJ 33.0 5.5 19 SS-8-MTA-7-6RJ 39.4 5.6 24 SS-8-MTA-7-8RJ 43.7 5.6 27 SS-10-MTA-7-4RJ 34.5 5.5 19 SS-10-MTA-7-6RJ 36.1 6.5 24 SS-10-MTA-7-8RJ 41.1 7.1 27 SS-12-MTA-7-4RJ 40.1 5.5 19 SS-12-MTA-7-6RJ 44.7 6.5 24 SS-12-MTA-7-8RJ 48.8 7.0 27
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
AN Thread
AN Tube Basic Flare Ordering Size Number Dimensions, in. 1/8 -200-A-2ANF 1/4 -200-A-4ANF 1/4 -400-A-4ANF 3/8 -600-A-6ANF 1/2 -810-A-8ANF 3/4 -1210-A-12ANF
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
F 3/8 9/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
10
12
48
Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube fitting ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.
A B 0 0 E F G SS - 2 C D - 1 - 2 RT SS - 2 0 0 - 1 - 2 RT
A Material C Series
A B C20 HC INC M NY S SS T TI 625 825
= = = = = = = = = = = = =
Aluminum Brass Alloy 20 Alloy C-276 Alloy 600 Alloy 400 Nylon Carbon steel 316 stainless steel PTFE Titanium Alloy 625 Alloy 825
0 = Fractional 1/16 to 3/8 in. and 1 1/4 to 2 in. 1 = Fractional 1/2 to 1 1/8 in. M = Millimeter tube size
To order a female Swagelok tube fitting, add F. Example: SS-100F-1-1.
F Second End Connection Size Add a size designator from the list at left for the second end connection or if the fitting is a reducing union. G Second End Connection Type Add a second end connection type designator as needed. AN = 37 male AN flare ANF = 37 female AN flare BT = Bored-through fitting F = Female thread KN = Knurled nut, nylon ferrules KT = Knurled nut, PTFE ferrules M = Metric tube end OR = O-seal connection PR = ISO/BSP positionable parallel pipe thread RG = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread (gauge) RJ = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread (Japanese gauge) RP = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread RS = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread RT = ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread ST = Straight thread with O-ring (for SAE/MS) W = Male pipe weld/ tube socket weld
D Component
0 = Fitting 1 = Body
E Fitting Type
B Size (Tube OD) Metric, mm Fractional, in. 2=2 1 = 1/16 3=3 2 = 1/8 4=4 3 = 3/16 6=6 4 = 1/4 8=8 5 = 5/16 10 = 10 6 = 3/8 12 = 12 8 = 1/2 14 = 14 10 = 5/8 15 = 15 12 = 3/4 16 = 16 14 = 7/8 18 = 18 16 = 1 20 = 20 18 = 1 1/8 22 = 22 20 = 1 1/4 25 = 25 24 = 1 1/2 28 = 28 32 = 2 32 = 32 38 = 38 50 = 50
1 = Male connector 2 = 90 male elbow 3 = Tee, union 4 = Cross, union 5 = 45 male elbow 6 = Union 7 = Female connector 8 = Female elbow 9 = Elbow, union 11 = Bulkhead male connector 61 = Bulkhead union 71 = Bulkhead female connector A = Adapter C = Cap P = Plug PC = Port connector R = Reducer R1 = Bulkhead reducer 2R = Reducing elbow TFT = Tee, female run TMT = Tee, male run TRT = Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male positionable run TST = Tee, straight thread with O-ring male positionable run TTF = Tee, female branch TTM = Tee, male branch TTR = Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male positionable branch TTS = Tee, straight thread with O-ring male positionable branch
Tees and Crosses

Ordering numbers for tees and crosses indicate first the size of the run (1 to 2) and then the size of the branch (3 for tees and 3 to 4 for crosses). Example: SS-6M0-3-4TTF for a 316 SS female tee for 6 mm tube with 1/4 in. female NPT branch
4 1 3 2
Additional Sizes and Materials

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for information about additional sizes and special alloys.
49
Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube adapter ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.
A C SS - B - TA - D - E RT 2 1 4 F SS - 2 - TA - 1 - 4 RT
A Material
A B C20 HC INC M NY S SS T TI 625 825
= = = = = = = = = = = = =
Aluminum Brass Alloy 20 Alloy C-276 Alloy 600 Alloy 400 Nylon Carbon steel 316 stainless steel PTFE Titanium Alloy 625 Alloy 825
C Component
TA = Fractional tube adapter MTA = Metric tube adapter

D Adapter Type
E Second End Connection Size Add a size designator from the list at left for the second end connection. F Second End Connection Type Add a second end connection type designator as needed. AN = 37 male AN flare ANF = 37 female AN flare RG = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread (gauge) RJ = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread (Japanese gauge) RP = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread RS = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread RT = ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread ST = Straight thread with O-ring (for SAE/MS) W = Male pipe weld/ tube socket weld
1 = Male adapter 7 = Female adapter
B Size (Tube OD) Metric, mm Fractional, in. 2=2 1 = 1/16 3=3 2 = 1/8 4=4 3 = 3/16 6=6 4 = 1/4 8=8 5 = 5/16 10 = 10 6 = 3/8 12 = 12 8 = 1/2 14 = 14 10 = 5/8 15 = 15 12 = 3/4 16 = 16 14 = 7/8 18 = 18 16 = 1 20 = 20 18 = 1 1/8 22 = 22 20 = 1 1/4 25 = 25 24 = 1 1/2 28 = 28 32 = 2 32 = 32 38 = 38 50 = 50
50
Replacement Parts
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 10.
Nuts
G flat
Female
Tube OD
L
1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number G L Dimensions, in. -102-1 5/16 0.31 -202-1 7/16 0.47 -302-1 1/2 0.47 -402-1 9/16 0.50 -502-1 5/8 0.53 -602-1 11/16 0.56 -812-1 7/8 0.69 -1012-1 1 0.69 -1212-1 1 1/8 0.69 -1412-1 1 1/4 0.69 -1612-1 1 1/2 0.81 -2002-1 1 7/8 1.25 -2402-1 2 1/4 1.50 -3202-1 3 2.06
Tube OD 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number G L Dimensions, mm -2M2-1 12 11.9 -3M2-1 12 11.9 -4M2-1 12 11.9 -6M2-1 14 12.7 -8M2-1 16 13.5 -10M2-1 19 15.1 -12M2-1 22 17.4 -14M2-1 25 17.4 -15M2-1 25 17.4 -16M2-1 25 17.4 -18M2-1 30 17.4 -20M2-1 32 17.4 -22M2-1 32 17.4 -25M2-1 38 20.6 -28M2-1 46 30.6 -30M2-1 50 32.7 -32M2-1 50 34.4 -38M2-1 50 40.6 -50M2-1 3 in. 52.3
G flat
Knurled Female
The Swagelok knurled nut tube fitting provides a leak-tight seal without the use of inserts on most wall thicknesses of polyethylene tubing. Inserts may be required for larger sizes.
To set the ferrules on the tubing, initial connections must be made with a wrench, tightening the nut one and one-quarter turns from finger-tight (threequarter turn for 1/16, 1/8 and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm fittings). Leak-tight connections may be reassembled with finger-tight assembly. To order a knurled nut, add K to the female nut basic ordering number. Example: B-402-1K To order a knurled nut on an assembled fitting with nylon ferrules, add KN to the fitting ordering number. Example: SS-400-1-2KN To order a knurled nut on an assembled fitting with PTFE ferrules, add KT to the fitting ordering number. Example: SS-400-1-2KT
G flat
Male
Tube OD Basic Dimensions Ordering Number G L Dimensions, in. -1F2-1GC 1/4 0.38 -2F2-1GC 3/8 0.53 -4F2-1 1/2 0.62 -8F2-1 15/16 0.87 Tube OD 10 12 Basic Dimensions Ordering Number G L Dimensions, mm -10MF2-1 22 22.1 -12MF2-1 24 22.1
L For use in female Swagelok end connections.
1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
51
Replacement Parts
SWAGELOK FRONT FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 10.
SWAGELOK BACK FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
C-PH-0056-BDM
C-PH-0056-ADM
Ferrules
Front
Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/16 -103-1 1/8 -203-1 3/16 -303-1 1/4 -403-1 5/16 -503-1 3/8 -603-1 1/2 -813-1 5/8 -1013-1 3/4 -1213-1 7/8 -1413-1 1 -1613-1 1 1/4 -2003-1 1 1/2 -2403-1 2 -3203-1
Over 1 in. and over
25 mm stainless steel front ferrules are PFA coated. To order silverplated front ferrules, add -BL to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2003-1-BL
Back
Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, mm 2 -2M3-1 3 -3M3-1 4 -4M3-1 6 -6M3-1 8 -8M3-1 10 -10M3-1 12 -12M3-1 14 -14M3-1 15 -15M3-1 16 -16M3-1 18 -18M3-1 20 -20M3-1 22 -22M3-1 25 -25M3-1 28 -28M3-1 30 32 38 50 -30M3-1 -32M3-1 -38M3-1 -50M3-1 Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/16 -104-1 1/8 -204-1 3/16 -304-1 1/4 -404-1 5/16 -504-1 3/8 -604-1 1/2 -814-1 5/8 -1014-1 3/4 -1214-1 7/8 -1414-1 1 -1614-1 1 1/4 -2004-1 1 1/2 -2404-1 2 -3204-1
Over 1 in. and over
25 mm stainless steel back ferrules are PFA coated. To order back ferrules without PFA coating, add -WC to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2004-1-WC
Basic Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, mm 2 -2M4-1 3 -3M4-1 4 -4M4-1 6 -6M4-1 8 -8M4-1 10 -10M4-1 12 -12M4-1 14 -14M4-1 15 -15M4-1 16 -16M4-1 18 -18M4-1 20 -20M4-1 22 -22M4-1 25 -25M4-1 28 -28M4-1 30 32 38 50 -30M4-1 -32M4-1 -38M4-1 -50M4-1
52
Replacement Parts
Nut-Ferrule Set and Ferrule Set
Use of Nuts and Ferrules
Using Swagelok nuts and ferrules on tube fittings or valves with tube end connections requires critical interaction of precision parts. Swagelok nuts and ferrules are sold as replacement parts for use with only Swagelok bodies, fittings, valves, and hose products. Sets are shown with arbors. One arbor holds five nut-ferrule sets or ten ferrule sets.
Nut-Ferrule Set
Ferrule Set
The nut-ferrule set contains one nut, one back ferrule, and one front ferrule. To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number. Please order nut-ferrule sets in multiples of five. Example: SS-400-NFSET
Material Brass Carbon steel 316 stainless steel Designator B S SS Tube Basic Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/4 -400-NFSET 3/8 -600-NFSET 1/2 -810-NFSET 6 8 10 12 Dimensions, mm -6M0-NFSET -8M0-NFSET -10M0-NFSET -12M0-NFSET
The ferrule set contains one front ferrule and one back ferrule. To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number. Please order ferrule sets in multiples of ten. Example: SS-100-SET
Material Alloy 400 Aluminum Brass Carbon steel Nylon PTFE 316 stainless steel
Designator M A B S NY T SS
Tube Basic Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/16 -100-SET 1/8 -200-SET 3/16 -300-SET 1/4 -400-SET 5/16 -500-SET 3/8 -600-SET 1/2 -810-SET 6 8 10 12 Dimensions, mm -6M0-SET -8M0-SET -10M0-SET -12M0-SET
Nut-Ferrule Package and Ferrule-Pak Package

To order the nut-ferrule package (50 nut-ferrule sets) or ferrule-pak package (100 front and back sets), contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Nut-Ferrule Package Ferrule-Pak Package
53
Replacement Parts
ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets
Steel (RS Fitting)
E Tx
H Gasket
The RS fitting steel gasket provides a seal with male ISO/BSP parallel threads. The gasket consists of a fluorocarbon FKM or Buna inner ring bonded to a carbon steel outer ring. To order, add V for fluorocarbon FKM or B for Buna to the basic ordering number. Example: S-2-RS-2B For use only with Swagelok RS fittings.
ISO Thread Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Basic Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, in. S-2-RS-2 0.41 S-4-RS-2 0.54 0.08 S-6-RS-2 0.68 S-8-RS-2 0.85 S-12-RS-2 1.06 0.10 S-16-RS-2 1.33
Tx 0.63 0.81 0.94 1.13 1.38 1.69
Also available with fluorocarbon FKM inner ring
bonded to a stainless steel outer ring. To order, replace S with SS in the basic ordering number. Example: SS-8-RS-2V
Copper (RP Fitting)

E Tx
The RP fitting copper gasket provides a seal with male ISO/BSP parallel threads. May be used with a Swagelok RS fitting.
ISO Thread Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
H Gasket
Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, in. CU-2-RP-2 0.39 0.04 CU-4-RP-2 0.52 CU-6-RP-2 0.66 0.06 CU-8-RP-2 0.83 CU-12-RP-2 1.05 0.08 CU-16-RP-2 1.31
Tx 0.59 0.75 0.91 1.06 1.30 1.58
SWAGELOK RG FITTING GASKET CUTAWAY-MS-01-140
CA-PH-1120-BDM
Copper (RG, Gauge Fitting)

E Tx
PTFE (RJ Fitting)

The RJ fitting PTFE gasket provides a seal with ISO/BSP parallel male threads.
The RG fitting copper gasket provides a seal on pressure gauges equipped with ISO/BSP parallel male threads.
ISO Thread Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, in. CU-4-RG-2 0.30 0.07 CU-6-RG-2 0.34 0.09 CU-8-RG-2 0.36 0.10
H Gasket
Tx 0.42 0.56 0.70
ISO Thread Size in.
1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions Ordering Number E H Dimensions, mm Regular Gaskets T-4-RJ-2 T-6-RJ-2 5.6 1.0 T-8-RJ-2 Thick Gaskets T-4-RJ-2-T 4.1 T-6-RJ-2-T 5.6 4.6 T-8-RJ-2-T 5.1
Tx
10.9 13.9 17.8 10.9 13.9 17.8
54
Replacement Parts
O-Rings
Buna N (O-Seal Straight Threads)
O-ring hardness is 70 durometer.
Thread Size in. 5/16-24 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 Uniform Size Number 011 012 013 112 113 116 121 125
Buna N (O-Seal Pipe Threads)

NPT/ISO Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Uniform Size Number 013 113 116 118
Ordering Number BN7-OR-0011 BN7-OR-0012 BN7-OR-0013 BN7-OR-0112 BN7-OR-0113 BN7-OR-0116 BN7-OR-0121 BN7-OR-0125
Ordering Number BN7-OR-0013 BN7-OR-0113 BN7-OR-0116 BN7-OR-0118
Fluorocarbon FKM (Positionable Fittings, ISO/BSP Parallel Threads)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Fluorocarbon FKM (SAE/MS Straight Threads)

SAE/MS Thread Size in. 5/16-24 3/8-24 7/16-20 1/2-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 7/8-14 1 1/16-12 1 3/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12
Uniform Size Number 502 111 113 508 119 217
Ordering Number VI9-OR-0502 VI9-OR-0111 VI9-OR-0113 VI9-OR-0508 VI9-OR-0119 VI9-OR-0217
Not a uniform O-ring size.
Uniform Size Number 902 903 904 905 906 908 910 912 914 916 920 924 932
Ordering Number VI9-OR-0902 VI9-OR-0903 VI9-OR-0904 VI9-OR-0905 VI9-OR-0906 VI9-OR-0908 VI9-OR-0910 VI9-OR-0912 VI9-OR-0914 VI9-OR-0916 VI9-OR-0920 VI9-OR-0924 VI9-OR-0932
55

Hydraulic Swaging Units
Swagelok hydraulic swaging units preswage Swagelok ferrules onto tubing prior to assembly and provide Swagelok tube fitting connections that are 100 % gaugeable upon initial installation. Multihead hydraulic and air-actuated hydraulic swaging units:
Place no initial strain on nut or fitting body threads or on body seal surfaces Are available with interchangeable fractional and metric tooling Fit neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case Reduce assembly and installation time and operator error.

Is available in two unit sizes, with
tooling for:
1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing
and tube adapters

1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing
and tube adapters

Must be used to install 1 1/4, 1 1/2,
and 2 in. and 28, 30, 32, 38, and 50 mm Swagelok tube fittings
Is standard with a tube marking
feature to indicate when tube is properly bottomed in the unit

Is available with a support base (as
MHSU Unit Components

Multihead hydraulic swaging unit Hydraulic hose2 ft (0.6 m) with all
Tooling Kit Components

Die head sets for Swagelok tube
shown). See Ordering Information, page 56.

Is available with stainless steel
fitting sizes:
Fractional, up to 1 in.1/2, 5/8, 3/4,
connection tubing in place of hydraulic hose; support base is required. See Ordering Information, page 56. The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under or for medium-pressure tubing. For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in./25 mm and over unit and SAF 2507 tooling kit and gap inspection gauges.
units except 1 in./25 mm and over unit without support base, which contains 6 ft (1.8 m) hose
Retaining ring pliers Safety glasses Operating instructions Carrying case
7/8, and 1 in.

ractional, 1 in. and over1, 1 1/4, F
1 1/2, and 2 in.

etric, up to 25 mm12, 14, 15, M
16, 18, 20, 22, and 25 mm

etric, 25 mm and over25, 28, M
30, 32, and 38 mm

50 mm tooling available separately Gap inspection gauges Chamfer block (up to 1 in./25 mm
Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU
Tooling Size 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 0.083 0.095 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 Steel Stainless Steel Tooling Size 12 0.065 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.8 1.5 Steel Stainless Steel
sizes only) Technical Data

DimensionsMHSU case 22 in. (55.9 cm) high, 24 in. (61.0 cm)
Tubing Wall Dimensions, in. 0.049
Tubing Wall Dimensions, mm
wide, 8.75 in. (22.2 cm) deep

Weight Up to 1 in./25 mm MHSU in case with
tooling kit and support base40 lb (18.1 kg)

1 in./25 mm and over MHSU in case
with tooling kit and support base 55 lb (24.9 kg)

Construction High-strength stainless steel tooling
Use of tubing below the recommended minimum wall thickness may result in the tube sticking in the die head.
for durability and corrosion resistance See next page for Ordering Information.
56

MHSU Ordering Information
Ordering Numberss MHSU Unit Up to 1 in./ 25 mm sizes 1 in./25 mm and over sizes MS-MHSU-U-E MS-MHSU-O-E
Tooling Kits Up to 1 in./25 mm

Tube OD 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 5/8 3/4 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. MS-MHSUT-U-810-M MS-MHSUT-U-1010-M MS-MHSUT-U-1210-M MS-MHSUT-U-1410-M MS-MHSUT-U-1610-M SAF 2507 Tubing MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1010-M MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1210-M Dimensions, mm MS-MHSUT-U-12M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-14M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-15M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-16M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-18M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-20M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-22M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-25M0-M
Air-Actuated Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU)
MHSU Unit with Tooling Kit Fractional MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M up to 1 in. sizes Fractional 1 in. and over sizes Metric up to 25 mm sizes MS-MHSU-O-E-FKIT-M MS-MHSU-U-E-MKIT-M
Requires only one unit with
interchangeable tooling to swage 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm Swagelok tube fitting ferrule sizes
Requires no threading of nut on or off
Metric 25 to MS-MHSU-O-E-MKIT-M 38 mm sizes

50 mm tooling available separately.
the tooling The AHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing or for mediumpressure tubing. AHSU Unit Components
Air-actuated hydraulic swaging unit Hex key Adapter platesfor tube fittings
Support Base Add -B to the ordering number. Examples: MS-MHSU-U-E-B MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M-B Stainless Steel Connection Tubing Add -T to the ordering number for an MHSU with support base. Examples: MS-MHSU-U-E-B-T MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M-B-T Operating Instructions MHSU ordering numbers include English-language instructions. For other languages, visit swagelok.com. Accessories Additional and replacement gap inspection gauges are available. See page 60. See the table below for replacement retaining rings and pliers.
MNSU Unit Up to 1 in./ 25 mm sizes Ordering Number Retaining Ring MS-MHSU-N5000-200-H
smaller than 1/2 in. or 12 mm

Safety glasses Gap inspection gauges Operating instructions Carrying case
1 in./25 mm and Over

Tube OD 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 25 28 30 32 38 50 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. MS-MHSUT-O-1610-M MS-MHSUT-O-2000-M MS-MHSUT-O-2400-M MS-MHSUT-O-3200-M Dimensions, mm MS-MHSUT-O-25M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-28M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-30M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-32M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-38M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-50M0-M
Tooling Kit Components

Die head sets and gap inspection
gauges for Swagelok tube fitting sizes:

Fractional1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. Metric6, 8, 10, and 12 mm
Technical Data
DimensionsAHSU case 9 in. (48.3 cm) high, 15.5 in. (39.4 cm) 1
wide, 7.5 in. (19.0 cm) deep

Weight HSU in case with tooling kit28 lb A
(12.7 kg)
Power requirements 20 to 70 psig (1.3 to 4.9 bar)
1 in./25 mm MS-MHSU-N5000-315-H and over sizes Retaining Ring Pliers Up to 1 in./ MS-MHSU-0504 25 mm sizes 1 in./25 mm MS-MHSU-0700 and over sizes
See the Swagelok Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU) Setup and Operating Instructions, MS-12-37, for information about using the MHSU.
regulated shop air, depending on fitting size and material

Construction High-strength stainless steel
tooling for durability and corrosion resistance

Air inlet port 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting
57

AHSU Ordering Information
Ordering Numbers AHSU Unit AHSU only MS-AHSU-E AHSU Unit with Tooling Kit 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 in. MS-AHSU-E-FKIT sizes 6, 8, 10, 12 mm sizes MS-AHSU-E-MKIT
Preswaging Tools
Features
Preswages ferrules onto the tube Enables the installer to work in a more open, safe area Makes it possible to complete the installation by following
retightening instructions for Swagelok tube fittings.

Tube OD Ordering Number Dimensions, in. Female Nut 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1/16 1/4 (mediumpressure) 3/8 (mediumpressure) 1/2 1/2 (mediumpressure) MS-ST-100 MS-ST-200 MS-ST-300 MS-ST-400 MS-ST-500 MS-ST-600 MS-ST-810 MS-ST-1010 MS-ST-2507-1010 MS-ST-1210 MS-ST-2507-1210 MS-ST-1410 MS-ST-1610 Male Nut MS-ST-1F0 MS-ST-4FK0 MS-ST-6FK0 MS-ST-8F0 MS-ST-8FK0 Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, mm Female Nut 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 MS-ST-3M0 MS-ST-4M0 MS-ST-6M0 MS-ST-8M0 MS-ST-10M0 MS-ST-12M0 MS-ST-14M0 MS-ST-15M0 MS-ST-16M0 MS-ST-18M0 MS-ST-20M0 MS-ST-22M0 MS-ST-25M0
Tooling Kits
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 6 8 10 12 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. MS-AHSUT-400-1 MS-AHSUT-600-1 MS-AHSUT-810-1 Dimensions, mm MS-AHSUT-6M0-1 MS-AHSUT-8M0-1 MS-AHSUT-10M0-1 MS-AHSUT-12M0-1
Operating Instructions AHSU ordering numbers include English-language instructions. For other languages, visit swagelok.com. Accessories Additional and replacement gap inspection gauges are available. See page 60.
See the Swagelok Air-Actuated Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU) Setup and Operating Instructions, MS-12-38, for information about using the AHSU.
For SAF 2507 tubing, use the preswaging tool

for the appropriate tube OD and with 2507 in the ordering number. For medium-pressure tubing, use the preswaging tool for the appropriate tube OD and with FK0 in the ordering number.
58

Wrenches
Tee Wrench
The tee wrench provides positive backup support when installing Swagelok union tees and crosses.
Ratchet Wrench
The ratchet wrench is designed for use on Swagelok nuts for fitting installation.
Features
Allows user to hold fitting body firmly and precisely Is available in a variety of sizes Fits and carries easily in tool box, pouch, or belt Head and handle constructed of stainless steel Features a cushioned vinyl grip and generous gripping area
Features
11 fractional and metric sizes are available. 1/12 turn ratchet facilitates use in close quarters. Heavy-duty construction includes: heat-treated, black oxide-plated steel handle black-oxide plated steel jaws stainless steel spring and fasteners.
for handle
Holds tee in various orientations
For Swagelok Gaugeable Union Tees and Crosses Tube OD 1/4 in. and 6 mm 5/16 and 3/8 in. and 8 mm 10 mm 1/2 in. and 12 mm Ordering Number MS-TW-4 MS-TW-6 MS-TW-10M MS-TW-8 Tee Cross
Tube OD 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 3 6 8 10 12 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. MS-RW-200 MS-RW-300 MS-RW-400 MS-RW-500 MS-RW-600 MS-RW-810 Dimensions, mm MS-RW-3M0 MS-RW-6M0 MS-RW-8M0 MS-RW-10M0 MS-RW-12M0 257 184 136 10.1 7.25 5.38 Wrench Length
Use MS-TW-8 on 10 mm Swagelok crosses.
Ratchet Wrench Pouch A heavy-duty pouch is available for holding up to six Swagelok ratchet wrenches. Ordering Number: MS-RWP
59

Wrenches
Open-End Wrenches
Features
Swagelok open-end wrenches are available in body and
nut styles.
These wrenches are designed to install Swagelok tube
fittings (1 1/4, 1 1/2, and 2 in.; 32, 38, and 50 mm sizes) after assembly using the Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU), page 55.
The body wrench is box ended and can be used with
Body Wrench
shapes or hex bodies.

The nut wrench has a multiple internal hex to allow easy
fixturing of the nut when space is limited.

The hole in the wrench head enables wrenches to be
secured by a lanyard for installations in elevated areas.

The telescoping feature of the knurled handle provides
Nut Wrench
additional leverage when needed.
Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Nut Wrench
Tube OD 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 32 38 50 Dimensions Ordering Number MS-NW-20(1.88) MS-NW-24(2.25) MS-NW-32(3.00) MS-NW-32M(50M) MS-NW-38M(60M) MS-NW-32(3.00) A Dimensions, in. 3.16 3.88 5.06 Dimensions, cm 8.53 10.1 12.9 46.2 66.6 82.6 58.4 84.6 107 1.85 2.51 3.18 18.0 26.1 32.5 22.8 33.2 42.0 0.73 0.99 1.25 C D E Weight lb 3 6 11 kg 1.4 3.2 5.0
Body Wrench
Tube OD Flat Size 1 11/16 1 3/4 2 2 1/8 2 3/4 46 50 60 2 3/4 in. Dimensions Ordering Number MS-BW-20(1.69) MS-BW-20(1.75) MS-BW-24(2.00) MS-BW-24(2.13) MS-BW-32(2.75) MS-BW-32M(46M) MS-BW-32M(50M) MS-BW-38M(55M) MS-BW-32(2.75) A C D E Weight lb 18.0 26.1 32.5 22.8 33.2 42.0 0.73 0.99 1.25 3 6 11 kg 46.2 66.6 82.6 58.4 84.6 107 1.85 2.51 3.18 1.4 3.2 5.0 Dimensions, in. 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3.16 3.88 5.06
Dimensions, cm 32 38 50 8.53 10.1 12.9
60

Swagelok gap inspection gauges assure the installer or inspector that the fitting has been sufficiently pulled up on initial installation, whether using a Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU), page 55, or air-actuated hydraulic swaging unit (AHSU), page 56, or wrench tightening. All metal Swagelok tube fittings are gaugeable, with the exception of a few forged bodies in aluminum.
For Installation Using the AHSU

Fitting Size in. 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 mm Ordering Number Female Nut MS-AHSU-IG-468 6, 8, 10, 12 MS-AHSU-IG-612M

Fitting Size in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 1/4, 1/2 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1/16 1/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 (mediumpressure) mm Female Nut 2, 3 4 6 6, 12 6, 8, 10, 12 8 10 12 14, 15, 16 18 20, 22 25 Male Nut 2, 3 MS-IG-1F0 MS-IG-2F0 MS-IG-FK0 MS-IG-100 MS-IG-200 MS-IG-300 MS-IG-400 MS-IG-468 MS-IG-612M MS-IG-500 MS-IG-600 MS-IG-10M0 MS-IG-810 MS-IG-1010 MS-IG-2507-1010 MS-IG-1210 MS-IG-2507-1210 MS-IG-1410 MS-IG-1610 Ordering Number

Fitting Size in. 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 mm Ordering Number Female Nut 12 MS-MHSU-IG-810 14, 15, 16 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1010 18 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1210 20, 22 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 25 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 28 MS-MHSU-IG-28M0-1 30 MS-MHSU-IG-30M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2000-2 32 MS-MHSU-IG-32M0-1 38 MS-MHSU-IG-38M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2400-1 50 MS-MHSU-IG-50M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-3200-1
The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under
or for medium pressure tubing.
For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in. (25 mm) and
over unit and SAF 2507 tooling and gauge.
Depth Marking Tools

Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, in. 1/4 MS-DMT-400 3/8 MS-DMT-600 1/2 MS-DMT-810 5/8 MS-DMT-1010 3/4 MS-DMT-1210 7/8 MS-DMT-1410 1 MS-DMT-1610 Tube Ordering OD Number Dimensions, mm 6 MS-DMT-6M0 8 MS-DMT-8M0 10 MS-DMT-10M0 12 MS-DMT-12M0 16 MS-DMT-16M0 18 MS-DMT-18M0
61

Bulkhead Retainers
By using the bulkhead retainer, one person can tighten the jam nut on side A for initial bulkhead fitting installation. Now tubing can be connected to side A and B by one person with one wrench, because the bulkhead retainer acts as a backup wrench.
F "U" drive screw (included) E U drive screw Bulkhead retainer
A Side A D B 1/8 in. Jam nut Body hex Side B
Bulkhead fitting installation utilizing bulkhead retainer
Fitting Size in. mm 1/16 1/8 3/16 3, 4 1/4 6 5/16 8 3/8 10 1/2 12 5/8 15, 16 3/4 18 7/8 1
Dimensions, in. Ordering Number SS-102-61F SS-202-61F SS-302-61F SS-402-61F SS-502-61F SS-8M2-61F SS-602-61F SS-10M2-61F SS-812-61F SS-1012-61F SS-1212-61F SS-1412-61F SS-1612-61F Drill Hole Dia
A 3/8 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 11/16 3/4 15/16 15/16 1 1 1/16 1 1/8 1 9/32
B 5/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 18 mm 3/4 22 mm 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
D 5/16 13/32 15/32 1/2 9/16 9/16 5/8 3/4 3/4 13/16 29/32 1 1/32 1 5/32
E 5/32 7/32 1/4 9/32 5/16 5/16 11/32 13/32 13/32 13/32 15/32 17/32 9/16
U Drive Screw Size
Drill Number
5/32
0.120
6-3/8
31
7/32
0.144
10-1/2
27
Inserts for Soft Plastic Tubing

ID of bore Tube ID Tube OD
Tube OD 3/16 1/4
Swagelok inserts help secure soft plastic tubing being used with standard Swagelok tube fittings. To determine the correct size of the Swagelok insert to be used, check both outside diameter and inside diameter of the plastic tubing. For a complete line of hose connectors for soft plastic tubing, see the Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing catalog, MS-01-180.
5/16
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 6 8 10 12
Add the insert material designator to the basic ordering number. Example: B-305-2
Material Alloy 400 Aluminum Brass Carbon steel Nylon Stainless steel
Designator M A B S NY SS
Tube Bore ID ID Dimensions, 1/8 0.09 1/8 0.09 0.17 0.11 3/16 0.14 1/8 0.09 3/16 0.12 1/4 0.19 3/16 0.12 1/4 0.19 1/4 0.19 3/8 0.31 3/8 0.31 1/2 0.44 1/2 0.44 5/8 0.56 3/4 0.69 Dimensions, 4 2.8 6 4.4 8 6.4 8 6.4 10 8.3
Basic Ordering Number in. -305-2 -405-2 -405-170 -405-3 -505-2 -505-3 -505-4 -605-3 -605-4 -815-4 -815-6 -1015-6 -1015-8 -1215-8 -1215-10 -1615-12
mm -6M5-4M -8M5-6M -10M5-8M -12M5-8M -12M5-10M
62
Gaugeability
If the gauge will not enter the gap, the fitting is sufficiently tightened.
If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is required.
Always depressurize a system before adjusting the tightness of a tube fitting connection.
Swagelok tube fittings 1 in./25 mm and smaller can be installed quickly, easily, and reliably with simple hand tools. Over 1 in./25 mm sizes require use of a hydraulic swaging unit to swage the ferrules onto the tubing.
Safety Precautions
Do not bleed system by loosening fitting nut or fitting plug. Do not assemble or tighten fittings when system is
Tubing Considerations
Metal tubing material should be softer than fitting material.
pressurized.
Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the shoulder of the
For example, stainless steel tubing should not be used with brass fittings.
When tubing and fittings are made of the same material,
tube fitting body before tightening the nut.

Use the correct Swagelok gap inspection gauge to ensure
tubing must be fully annealed.

Always use an insert with extremely soft or pliable plastic
sufficient pull-up upon initial installation.

tubing.
Extremes of wall thickness should always be checked
threads.
Do not mix materials or fitting components from various
against the suggested minimum and maximum wall thickness limitations.

Surface finish is very important to proper sealing. Tubing
manufacturerstubing, ferrules, nuts, and fitting bodies.

Never turn fitting body. Instead, hold fitting body and turn
nut.
Avoid unnecessary disassembly of unused fittings. Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end
with any kind of depression, scratch, raised portion, or other surface defect will be difficult to seal, particularly in gas service.
Tubing that is oval and will not easily fit through fitting nuts,
connections. See the instructions starting on the next page for installation of Swagelok tube fittings, O-seal male connectors, caps and plugs, port connectors, tube adapters, positionable elbows and tees, weld fittings, depth marking tool, and preswaging tool.
ferrules, and bodies should never be forced into the fitting. See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107, for more information about tubing selection.
63
Swagelok Tube Fittings Up to 1 in./25 mm
These instructions apply both to traditional fittings and to fittings with the advanced back-ferrule geometry.
Fully insert the tube into the fitting and against the shoulder; rotate the nut finger-tight. High-pressure applications and high safety-factor systems: Further tighten the nut until the tube will not turn by hand or move axially in the fitting.
While holding the fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut only three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Swagelok Tube Fittings Over 1 in./25 mm

1. Preswage the ferrules onto the tube using a Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU). 2. Apply the lubricant packaged with the fitting lightly to the body threads and the rear surface of the back ferrule. 3. Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body; rotate the nut finger-tight. 4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding the fitting body steady, tighten the nut one-half turn to the 12 oclock position. Use the Swagelok MHSU gap inspection gauge to ensure that the fitting has been tightened sufficiently.
ReassemblyAll Sizes
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube fittings many times.
Always depressurize the system before disassembling a Swagelok tube fitting.
Prior to disassembly, mark the tube at the back of the nut; mark a line along the nut and fitting body flats. Use these marks to ensure that you return the nut to the previously pulledup position.
Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body. Over 1 in./25 mm sizes: If needed, reapply lubricant lightly to the body threads and the rear surface of the back ferrule.
While holding the fitting body steady, rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position, as indicated by the marks on the tube and flats. At this point, you will feel a significant increase in resistance. Tighten the nut slightly.
Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with reassembled fittings.
O-Seal Male Connectors
1. Turn the O-seal connector into the female end until it is finger-tight. 2. Tighten the O-seal connector until it makes metal-to-metal contact with the face of the female end. 3. Tighten slightly with a wrench.
64
Caps and Plugs
Caps
See Swagelok tube fitting installation and reassembly, page 63.
Plugs
While holding fitting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from the finger-tight position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-eighth turn. For over 1 in./25 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-quarter turn. Reassembly You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
Port Connectors
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Machined Ferrule End

While holding fitting body steady, tighten the port connector one-quarter turn from the finger-tight position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the port connector one-eighth turn. For over 1 in. and over 25 mm tube fittings, tighten the port connector one-quarter turn. Reassembly You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok port connectors many times. Make subsequent connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
Tube Adapter End

1. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting. Make sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the shoulder of the tube fitting body and that the nut is finger-tight (Fig. 3). 2. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut only three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position. Reassembly See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 63.
Tube Adapters
Fig. 1
Up to 1 in./25 mm
1. Install the end opposite the tube adapter end (Fig. 1). Female pipe port on existing equipment 2. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting. Make sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the shoulder of the tube fitting body and that the nut is finger-tight (Fig. 2). 3. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 4. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and onequarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut only three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position.
Over 1 in./25 mm
Swagelok tube adapters over 1 in./ 25 mm are furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules. To assemble, follow steps 2 through 5 of the Swagelok tube fittings over 1 in./25 mm assembly instructions, page 63.
Fig. 2
inspection gauge with preswaged tube adapter connections over 1 in./25 mm.
Reassembly
See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 63.
65
Positionable Elbows and Tees
1. Turn the positionable end into the female fitting until the metal backup washer contacts the face of the fitting.
Lock nut Backup washer
2. Turn the positionable end out of the female fitting (not more than one turn) until the Swagelok tube fitting end is positioned properly. 3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the lock nut until the metal backup washer contacts the face of the fitting.
Weld Fittings
Welding Precautions for Swagelok Tube Fittings with Weld End Connections
1. Remove the nut and ferrules. 2. Turn a Swagelok tube fitting plug or another nut onto the fitting so that it is finger-tight. This protects the threads and sealing components. 3. Provide a suitable heat sink to dissipate the heat. 4. Tack weld at four positions 90 apart to hold the fitting in place and to ensure alignment and concentricity of the components. 5. Complete the weld. 6. Remove the plug or nut and replace the nut and ferrules.
Caution: When welding carbon steel fittings, the heat

often removes the protective oil from the threads. It is important to apply another lubricant, such as Goop thread lubricant.
Depth Marking Tool

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred tube into the depth marking tool (DMT) until the tube is against the shoulder of the tool. Using a pen or pencil, mark the tube at the top of the DMT (Fig. 1). 2. Remove the tube from the DMT and insert it into the Swagelok fitting until it is against the shoulder
of the fitting body (Fig. 2). Rotate the nut finger-tight. If any portion of the mark on the tube can be seen above the fitting nut, the tube is not fully inserted into the fitting. 3. While holding the fitting body steady, follow Swagelok tube fitting installation instructions, page 63.
Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1
1. Install the Swagelok nut and ferrules onto the preswaging tool. 2. Insert the tube into the preswaging tool. 3. Make sure that the tube rests firmly on the shoulder of the preswaging tool body and that the nut is fingertight. 4. Mark the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding the preswaging tool steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter turns to the 9 oclock position. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut only three-quarters turn to the 3 oclock position (Fig. 1). 6. Loosen the nut.
7. Remove the tube with preswaged ferrules from the preswaging tool. If the tube sticks in the preswaging tool, remove the tube by gently rocking it back and forth. Do not turn the tube (Fig. 2). 8. Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules into the fitting until the front ferrule seats against the fitting body. 9. While holding the fitting body steady, rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position; at this point, you will feel a significant increase in resistance. 10. Tighten the nut slightly (Fig. 3).
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
inspection gauge with fittings that were assembled using the preswaging tool.
Tubing Tools and Accessories

For tube benders, tube preparation tools, and tube support systems, see the Swagelok Tubing Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-179.
Tubing Products
Swagelok offers a wide variety of tubing products. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see these Swagelok catalogs for more information:
Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing, Fractional Sizes,
MS-01-153-SCS
Stainless Steel Welded Tubing, MS-01-161-SCS
Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants

For liquid leak detectors, lubricants, and sealants, see the Swagelok Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants catalog, MS-01-91.
Stainless Steel Tubing, Metric Sizes, MS-01-157-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Imperial Sizes, MS-01-159-SCS
Swagelok, VCR, VCO, Snoop, Goop, SWAK, Ferrule-PakTM Swagelok Company KrytoxTM DuPont SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 2009, R11 MS-01-140
www.swagelok.com
G e ne ral Utilit y Se r vice Ne e dle Valve s
GU Series
Straight and angle patterns Pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures up to 450F (232C) with PTFE packing Stem threads above packing, protected from system media Nonrotating, hardened needle design for leak-tight shutoff
and long service life
Safety back-seating needle design seals in fully open position
General Utility Service Needle Valves
Features
GU series needle valves are for use in general purpose applications to isolate or vent system media. The hardened stainless steel, nonrotating needle promotes leak-tight shutoff and long service life. The valve stem threads are isolated from the media.
Compact design Stainless steel stop pin Antitamper and lockable handle features available Suitable for sour gas service; materials are selected in
accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156.
Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and lock nut to ensure positive actuation Shroud protects stem threads against ingress of dirt and dust Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation Two-piece knuckle joint provides nonrotating needle feature. Joint is located above the packing, protected from system media Stem threads above packing, protected from system media
Nonrotating, hardened needle for positive shutoff
Safety back-seating needle seals in fully open position
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Component Body Bonnet Needle Packing Bonnet seals Lubricant Bonnet seal ring Gland nut Shroud Stem Gland Handle Handle lock nut Handle washer Locking pin Gland lock nut Stainless Steel 316 SS/ A479 Carbon Steel Zinc plated carbon steel/ AISI 1018 316 SS/A479 S17400 SS/A564 Condition H1150D PTFE Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide
Ratings are based on PTFE packing.
Working Pressure psig (bar) 316/316L SS 6000 (41) 4000 (75) Carbon Steel 6000 (41) 4000 (75)
Temperature F (C) 0 to 00 (17 to 9) 450 ()
Testing
Every Swagelok GU series needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
16 SS

Every Swagelok GU series needle valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.
Wetted components listed in italics. Bodies with weld end connections receive a rust-preventive coating instead of zinc plating.
Flow Data
Angle Pattern Straight Pattern
16GU Series
8GU Series
8GU Series
4GU Series
4GU Series

service life of the valve to prevent leakage to atmosphere.
Valves that have not been cycled for a period of

time may have a higher initial actuation torque.

A A
Angle Pattern
Straight Pattern
C open
C open
B B D E D
Angle Pattern
End Connections Type Size 1/4 in. /8 in. Female NPT 1/ in. 1/ in. /4 in. 1 in. 1.60 0.55 Cv Orifice in. (mm) 0.0
(5.0)
Ordering Number Stainless Steel SS-4GUF4-A SS-4GUF6-A SS-4GUF8-A SS-8GUF8-A SS-8GUF1-A SS-8GUF16-A Carbon Steel S-4GUF4-A S-4GUF6-A S-4GUF8-A S-8GUF8-A S-8GUF1-A S-8GUF16-A .00 (51.0) 1.75 (44.5) A B
Dimensions, in. (mm) C .0 (81.) . (84.6) .87 (98.) .98 (101) 4.5 (108) D 1.50 (8.1) 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .50 (6.5) .76 (70.0) E 1.00 (5.4) 1.5 (1.8) 1.1 (.) 1.8 (5.1) 1.50 (8.1) 1.75 (44.5) 0.85 (1.6) 1.10 (7.9) 1. (1.) 1. (1.) 1.60 (40.6)
0.1
(8.0)

Straight Pattern
End Connections Type Size 1/4 in. /8 in. 1/ in. Female NPT /4 in. 1 in. 1/4 in. /8 in. Male NPT/ female NPT 1/ in. /4 in. 1 in. 1/4 in. /8 in. Fractional tube socket weld 1/ in. /4 in. 1 in. 1/4 in. /8 in. Fractional pipe socket weld 1/ in. /4 in. 1 in. 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm Metric tube socket weld 14 mm 16 mm 18 mm 5 mm 0.45 1.0 1.0 .5 1.0 .5 .5 0.0 (5.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.45 0.0 (5.0) Cv 0.45 0.45 1.0 1.0 .5 1.0 .5 0.45 0.45 1.0 1.0 .5 1.0 .5 0.45 0.45 1.0 1.0 .5 1.0 .5 0.45 0.45 1.0 1.0 .5 1.0 .5 Orifice in. (mm) 0.0 (5.0) 0.0 (5.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) Ordering Number Stainless Steel SS-4GUF4 SS-4GUF6 SS-4GUF8 SS-8GUF8 SS-8GUF1 SS-8GUF16 SS-4GUM4-F4 SS-4GUM6-F6 SS-4GUM8-F8 SS-8GUM8-F8 SS-8GUM1-F1 SS-8GUM16-F16 SS-4GUSW4T SS-4GUSW6T SS-4GUSW8T SS-8GUSW8T SS-8GUSW1T SS-8GUSW16T Carbon Steel S-4GUF4 S-4GUF6 S-4GUF8 S-8GUF8 S-8GUF1 S-16GUF1 S-8GUF16 S-16GUF16 S-4GUM4-F4 S-4GUM6-F6 S-4GUM8-F8 S-8GUM8-F8 S-8GUM1-F1 S-16GUM1-F1 S-8GUM16-F16 S-16GUM16-F16 S-4GUSW4T S-4GUSW6T S-4GUSW8T S-8GUSW8T S-8GUSW1T S-16GUSW1T S-8GUSW16T S-16GUSW16T S-4GUSW4P S-4GUSW6P S-4GUSW8P S-8GUSW8P S-8GUSW1P S-16GUSW1P S-8GUSW16P S-16GUSW16P SS-4GUSW6MMT SS-4GUSW8MMT SS-4GUSW10MMT SS-4GUSW1MMT SS-8GUSW1MMT SS-8GUSW14MMT SS-8GUSW16MMT SS-16GUSW18MMT SS-16GUSW5MMT 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (76.) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.6 (16.0) 0.88 (.4) 0.6 (16.0) 0.88 (.4) 0.88 (.4) .0 (81.) .87 (98.) .87 (98.) 5.4 (1) .87 (98.) 5.4 (1) 5.4 (1) 1.75 (44.5) 0.50 (1.7) .0 (81.) A 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) .00 (51.0) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) .00 (51.0) .00 (76.) Dimensions, in. (mm) B 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.88 (.4) 1.00 (5.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.88 (.4) 1.00 (5.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.6 (16.0) 0.88 (.4) 0.75 (19.1) 0.88 (.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.6 (16.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.88 (.4) 1.00 (5.4) C .0 (81.) . (84.6) .87 (98.) .98 (101) 5.4 (1) 4.5 (108) 5.5 (16) .0 (81.) . (84.6) .87 (98.) .98 (101) 5.4 (1) 4.5 (108) 5.5 (16) .0 (81.) .0 (81.) .87 (98.) .87 (98.) 5.4 (1) .98 (101) 5.4 (1) .0 (81.) . (84.6) .45 (87.6) .98 (101) 4.1 (105) 5.4 (1) 4.5 (108) 5.5 (16) D .1 (54.1) .5 (57.) .6 (66.8) .76 (70.0) .00 (76.) .5 (8.6) .50 (88.9) 4.0 (10) .8 (60.5) .76 (70.0) .00 (76.) .1 (79.6) .50 (88.9) .50 (88.9) 4.0 (10) .00 (50.8) .5 (57.) .6 (66.8) .6 (66.8) .5 (8.6) .6 (66.8) .5 (8.6) .5 (57.) .50 (6.5) .6 (66.8) .5 (8.6) .50 (88.9) .50 (88.9) .8 (60.5) .00 (51.0) .5 (57.) .6 (66.8) .6 (66.8) .75 (95.) .6 (66.8) .50 (88.9) .5 (8.6)
0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUF1 0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUF16 0.0 (5.0) 0.0 (5.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0)
0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUM1-F1 0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUM16-F16 0.0 (5.0) 0.0 (5.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0)
0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUSW1T 0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUSW16T 0.0 (5.0) 0.0 (5.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.4 (11.0) 0.1 (8.0) 0.4 (11.0)
0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUSW14MMT 0.4 (11.0) SS-16GUSW16MMT 0.4 (11.0)
Options
To order valves with multiple options, add the appropriate designator in alphabetical order.
Accessories
Antitamper Key
Fits all vent valves
Antitamper Handle
The antitamper handle reduces the risk of human error and deliberate tampering. The valve can be operated with the antitamper key, sold separately. To order valves with antitamper handles, add -AT to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4GUF4-AT
within the system

Order separately Valve Series 4GU 8GU 16GU Ordering Number S004468 S00740
Round Lockable Handles

The lockable handles can lock the valve in any position. These round handles accommodate shackle diameters smaller than 0. in. (5.7 mm) for 4GU and 8GU series valves and 0.8 in. (7.0 mm) for 16GU series valves.
Handle Kits
Standard stainless steel bar handle kits contain a handle, washer, lock nut, and instructions. Optional round lockable nylon or stainless steel handle kits contains a handle, lock shield, retaining ring, label, washer, lock nut, and instructions.
Handle Style Stainless steel bar Round lockable nylon Round lockable stainless steel Valve Series 4GU 8GU 16GU 4GU 8GU 16GU 4GU 8GU 16GU Kit Ordering Number SS-5K-4GU SS-5K-8GU SS-5K-16GU SS-5K-4GU-NLH SS-5K-8GU-NLH SS-5K-16GU-NLH SS-5K-4GU-SLH SS-5K-8GU-SLH SS-5K-16GU-SLH
Nylon
A nylon lockable handle is available for ambient temperatures up to 50F (11C) and process temperatures up to 450F (C). To order, add -NLH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4GUF8-NLH
Stainless Steel
A stainless steel lockable handle is available for marine service. To order, add -SLH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4GUF8-SLH
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 008, R MS-0-1
Swagelok Thermoplastic Hose Hand Swager Users Manual
Thermoplastic Hose Hand Swager Users Manual
Contents
Hand Swager Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Swager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swager Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 5 WARNING Pinch Points Keep hands, loose clothing, and long hair away from rotating or moving parts . Serious injury can occur .
End Connections and Pushers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING THE HAND SWAGER.
WARNING
Use the Swagelok hand swager only for swaging Swagelok end connections and hose using the appropriate Swagelok dies and pushers. Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
Thermoplastic Hose Hand Swager Components

Handle
Ball screw housing
Pusher holder Pusher retaining screw Pusher Reaction arm
Die Housing Die clamp
Setup
Swager
CAUTION
5 . Tighten the set screw fingertight . Note: Perform steps through 5 at least once a month . 6 . Insert the pusher into the pusher holder . Tighten the pusher retaining screw until fingertight . The pusher should rotate freely in the pusher holder .
Do not lift or move the swager by its handle or reaction arm. Damage to the swager could result.
Hose Series 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 8R, 7P 8R 7P Die Set Ordering Number MS7R8R4 MS7R8R6 MS7R8R8 MS8R1 MS8R16 MS7P16
1 . Select the appropriate die set from the table below .

Hose Size in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1
Pusher holder Pusher retaining screw Pusher
CAUTION
Use matching die halves, each of which is stamped with the same identification number. Failure to identify and use matching die halves may result in improper swaging and hose failure.
7 . Lubricate the entire swaging surface of both die halves with a light coating of MSTPLUBE (must be ordered separately) .
Swaging surface
. Select the appropriate pusher based on the hose end connection type and size . See the End Connections and Pushers table, page 8 . 3 . Using a 1/8 in . hex key, loosen the set screw at the top of the housing .
Housing
Set screw
8 . Insert one die into the taper at the base of the housing . Do not secure the die clamp at this time .
Die clamp Die
4 . Insert the handle and turn counterclockwise until handtight . This seats the ball screw housing firmly against the housing .
Handle
Housing
Ball screw housing Housing
Hose
1 . Determine the length of bulk hose needed using this formula: Overall length of completed hose assembly cutoff length of first end connection cutoff length of second end connection = length of bulk hose Cutoff length can be found in the End Connection and Pushers table on page 8, and as dimension B in the Swagelok Hose - Hose Assemblies, Bulk Hose, and End Connections catalog, MS-01-167 . Example: Determine the bulk hose length required for the following assembly: SS7R8TA8TA860 60 .00 in . 1 .79 in . 1 .79 in . = 56 .4 in . or approximately 56 7/16 in . of bulk hose . Measure, mark, and cut the bulk hose using a Swagelok hand cutter for thermoplastic hose (MSHCSC1, must be ordered separately .)
Mark the hose with a sharp grease pencil as close to the gauge as possible . Note: The bottom of the mark should line up with the top of the insertion gauge .
C-ELD-526A
Proper mark position
Improper mark position
C-ELD-526B
5 . Apply a thin coat of SAE 0 weight lubricating oil to approximately the first 1/ in . (1 mm) depth of the hose ID, if system compatible . 6 . Insert the hose into the end connection up to the insertion depth mark . Note: The bottom of the mark should line up with the edge of the end connection shell .
C-ELD-527A
Proper insertion
SWAGELOK 316
Shell
Use the following procedure if insertion is difficult: 3 .C-ELD-525A square . Cut hose Proper cut
C-ELD-0525B
Improper cut
1 . Clamp a vise block slot around the hose, leaving at least twice the distance of the insertion depth mark exposed . Vise block part numbers (must be ordered separately):
MSVB1 for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/ in . hose, MSVB for 3/4 and 1 in . hose
. Insert the end connection into the hose . 3 . Place a pusher over the end connection shell . 4 . Place one end of the hose into the appropriate hole on a depth insertion gauge (must be ordered separately), until it bottoms out . Gauge part numbers: MSIGB1 for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/ in . hose . MSIGB for 3/4 and 1 in . hose . 4 . Tap the pusher with a rubber mallet to insert the hose into the end connection up to the insertion depth mark .
Pusher
End connection
Hose
Vise block
Swager Operating Instructions

Note: Bench mounting is recommended . The reaction arm can be used for stability when the hand swager cannot to bolted to a bench or placed in a vise . 1 . Lubricate the shell with MSTPLUBE . . Insert the hose and end connection assembly up through the bottom of the housing and into the pusher . Seat the end connection properly in the pusher . Note: The hose and end connection assembly must be held inside the pusher until after step 3 .
4 . Secure both dies with the die clamps . Note: The die faces must be flush with each other .
Die clamp Die
Pusher
5 . Push down on the die clamps firmly and evenly until there is no movement .
Shell
WARNING Pinch Points Note: The dies must remain flush with each other .
Hose and end connection assembly Die clamp Housing
3 . Insert the second die . The parting line of the dies should be parallel to the die clamps . WARNING Pinch Points
6 . Position the end connection shell against the dies .
End connection shell
Die clamp Die Parting line Die
7 . Slowly turn the swager handle clockwise to lower the pusher . Guide the end connection into the pusher .
CAUTION
9 . Rotate the handle counterclockwise until the pusher has reached the top of the housing .
Handle
Do not allow the pusher to descend uncontrolled. Injury from handle spinning could result.
Housing Pusher End connection
Pusher
10 . Loosen the die clamps using a hammer .

Die clamps
8 . Continue to turn the handle clockwise until the pusher makes contact with the dies . The swaging action is finished when the handle will no longer turn .
Handle
11 . Push up on the hose to release the assembly from the dies . Maintain control of the dies .
Pusher Dies
CAUTION
WARNING Pinch Points Failure to maintain control of the dies may allow a die to drop out of the housing causing injury to the user or damage to the dies.
1 . Remove one die from the housing while holding the swaged assembly . Remove the swaged assembly through the bottom of the housing .
General Maintenance
After use, clean dies, pusher, and other hose swager components with isopropyl alcohol to remove lubricant .
Die Swaged assembly
Housing
Inspect the first swaged assembly to ensure it is within tolerance prior to swaging additional end connections of the same hose size and type .
CAUTION
Failure to verify the swaged assembly is within tolerance may result in leakage and hose failure.
C-PH-1459-DIM
Measuring Swage Diameter Begin at a point between 1/4 to 1/ in . (6 to 13 mm) from the end of the shell and measure 360 around the shell . Do not measure at the parting line . Measuring Bell Length Measure from behind the hex to the point where the bell stops or where the swage diameter ends .
A
Parting line Swage diameter
Bell length
Hose Size in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1
Hose Type 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P
Swage Diameter in . (mm) 0 .563 to 0 .573

(14 .3 to 14 .6)
Bell Length in . (mm) 0 .66 to 0 .7

(16 .8 to 18 .3)
0 .689 to 0 .699
(17 .5 to 17 .8)
0 .843 to 0 .853
(1 .4 to 1 .7)
0 .7 to 0 .78
(18 .3 to 19 .8)
8R, 7P 8R 7P
1 .155 to 1 .170
(9 .3 to 9 .7)
1 .483 to 1 .493
(37 .7 to 37 .9)
0 .91 to 0 .97
(3 .1 to 4 .6)
1 .450 to 1 .460
(36 .8 to 37 .1)
0 .78 to 0 .84
(19 .8 to 1 .3)
For a complete ordering number, add SS for 316 stainless steel or S for
steel as a prefix to the basic ordering number .
End Connections and Pushers
To determine the length to cut the bulk hose, subtract the cutoff length for
each end connection from the desired overall assembly length . Lengths are for reference only, subject to change .
End Connection Type Swagelok tube adapter fractional Size 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 5/8 in . 3/4 in . 1 in . metric 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1mm Swagelok tube fitting fractional 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . metric 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm SAE 37 female swivel 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 60 male cone, female swivel (ISO/BSP parallel thread) 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . 30 female cone, female swivel (ISO/BSP parallel thread) 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . Universal globe seal, metric female swivel nut 14 mm 18 mm mm Male pipe threads, NPT 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . Male pipe threads, ISO/BSP tapered 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in . Male pipe threads, ISO/BSP parallel 1/4 in . 3/8 in . 1/ in .
Hose Size in . 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/
Basic Ordering Number TP4TA4 TP4TA6 TP6TA6 TP8TA8 TP8TA10 TP1TP1 TP16TP16 TP4TM6 TP4TM8 TP6TM10 TP8TM1 TP4SL4 TP6SL6 TP8SL8 TP4SM6 TP4SM8 TP4SM10 TP6SM10 P8SM1 TP4AS4 TP6AS6 TP8AS8 TP4BM4 TP6BM6 TP8BM8 TP4BS4 TP6BS6 TP8BS8 TP4MC14 TP6MC18 TP8MC TP4PM4 TP6PM4 TP6PM6 TP8PM8 TP4MT4 TP6MT6 TP8MT8 TP4MS4 TP6MS6 TP8MS8
Cutoff Length in . (mm) 1 .43 (36 .3) 1 .43 (36 .3) 1 .50 (38 .1) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .89 (48 .0) .18 (55 .4) 1 .43 (36 .3) 1 .43 (36 .3) 1 .50 (38 .1) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .54 (39 .1) 1 .63 (41 .4) 1 .7 (43 .7) 1 .54 (39 .1) 1 .55 (39 .4) 1 .80 (45 .7) 1 .64 (41 .7) 1 .74 (44 .) 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .71 (43 .4) 1 .77 (45 .0) 1 .4 (36 .1) 1 .57 (39 .9) 1 .67 (4 .4) 1 .53 (38 .9) 1 .69 (4 .9) 1 .81 (46 .0) 1 .35 (34 .3) 1 .46 (37 .1) 1 .5 (38 .6) 1 .5 (31 .8) 1 .34 (34 .0) 1 .34 (34 .0) 1 .53 (38 .9) 1 .5 (31 .8) 1 .34 (34 .0) 1 .53 (38 .9) 1 .50 (38 .1) 1 .38 (35 .1) 1 .44 (36 .6)
Pusher Ordering Number MSPTA4 MSP4TA6 MSPTA6 MSPSLTA8 MSP8TA10 MSPTA1 MSPTA16 MSPTA4 MSP4TM8 MSPTA6 MSPSLTA8 MSPSL4 MSPSL6 MSPSLTA8 MSPSL4 MSP4SM8 MSP4SM10 MSPSL6 MSPSLTA8 MSPAS4 MSPAS6 MSPAS8 MSPBM4 MSPBM6 MSPBM8 MSPBS4 MSPBS6 MSPBS8 MSPMC14 MSPMC18 MSPMC MSPPM4 MSPPM6 MSPPM6 MSPPM8 MSPPM4 MSPPM6 MSPPM8 MSPMS4 MSPMS6 MSPMS8
www.swagelok.com
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 007 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A . March 007, R0 MS1311
www.swagelok.com
High-Pre ssure Fit tings
Fe ature s
Pressures to 60 000 psi (4134 bar) Weep holes for instant leak detection
High-Pressure Fittings
Features
Fittings are machined from 316 stainless steel. Back ferrule is manufactured from S17400 hardened
stainless steel to ensure a secure grip on hardened or annealed tubing.

Weep holes allow instant leak detection. Unique ferrule action helps prevent excessive deformation
Weep hole
of the seal area of tube end and body.

Fitting does not reduce tube wall thickness. Fittings can be made, disconnected, and remade easily to
provide a reliable leak-tight seal.

Bleed slot on male thread connectors facilitates purging of
Bleed slot
fluid before operation.
Pressure Ratings
High-Pressure Fitting
The rating for high-pressure tube fittings and threaded
connectors is determined with Swagelok hardened tubing at room temperature.

Component Back ferrule All other components Material S17400 SS 316 SS
connectors with annealed tubing is 30 000 psig (2067 bar) at room temperature.
Pipe Fitting
Pipe thread pressure rating is based on laboratory testing
with both male and female threads manufactured by Swagelok Company.

High-Pressure Tube Fitting to High-Pressure Male Thread Connectors

F flat G E D A Bleed slot
Tube OD in. 1/4
Uniform Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-440-1-44M SS-440-1-64M SS-640-1-44M SS-640-1-64M SS-940-1-64M SS-940-1-94M

(49.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8
G 3/4
Pressure Rating psig (bar)
2.32
(58.9)
13/16 60 000
(4134)
2.24
(56.9)
0.09 1.04
(26.4) (2.3)
3/8 3/4-16 3/4-16 9/16 1 1/8-12
2.41
(61.2)
0.12
(3.0)
13/16
15/16
3.01
(76.5)
0.12 1.45
(36.8) (3.0)
3.19
(81.0)
0.19
(4.8)
1 1/4
1 3/8
Union Tees
F flat G D E D
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number SS-440-3 SS-640-3 SS-940-3

(70.6)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
3.48
(88.4)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
5.04
(128)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

Unions
F flat G D E A
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(57.2)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.70
(68.6)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
3.69
(93.7)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Reducing Unions
Tube OD, in.
F flat
T
TxGx
Tx 1/4 1/4
Ordering Number SS-640-6-440 SS-940-6-440 SS-940-6-640

(66.3)
D 1.04
(26.4)
Dx 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
Gx 3/4 3/4
G T
3/8
13/16 15/16
3.22
(81.8)
0.82 1.45
(36.8) (20.8)
0.09
(2.3)
60 000
(4134)
E A
Dx
9/16 3/8
3.42
(86.9)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
1 1/4
1 3/8 15/16
Bulkhead Unions
F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4
Dimensions in. (mm) A 3.30

(83.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 15/16
G 3/4
Hole Drill Size 0.78

(19.8)
Panel Thickness Max in. (mm)
G D E A D
3/8 9/16
3.72
(94.5)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
1 1/16 15/16 1 5/8 1 3/8
0.91
(23.1)
0.50
(12.7)
60 000
(4134)
5.07
(129)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
1.34
(34.0)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to High-Pressure Female Thread Connectors

F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Uniform Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/8-12
Ordering Number SS-440-7-44F SS-640-7-64F SS-940-7-94F

(47.5)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.26
(57.4)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
G D E A
3.13
(79.5)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Union Elbows
F flat G D E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(35.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.74
(44.2)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Male Thread to Coned Tube Stub Adapters

Bleed slot F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-441 SS-64M-A-641 SS-94M-A-941

(51.1)
D 1.00
(25.4)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 60 000

(4134)
2.47
(62.7)
1.25
(31.8)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
E D A
9/16
3.34
(84.8)
1.76
(44.7)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
High-Pressure Male Thread Unions

Bleed slot F flat Bleed slot
Uniform Thread Size 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-44M-6

(43.4)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8

(4134)
Caps
F flat G D A E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number SS-440-C SS-640-C SS-940-C

(34.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.80
(45.7)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Port Connectors
E D
Tube OD in. 1/4
Ordering Number SS-441-PC SS-641-PC SS-941-PC

(47.0)
D 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.06
(1.5)

(4134)
3/8 9/16
2.33
(59.2)
0.68
(17.3)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
3.41
(86.6)
1.06
(26.9)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Coned Tube Stub Reducers

F flat E1 GT D E Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 3/8 9/16 3/8
Ordering Number SS-440-R-641 SS-640-R-941 SS-940-R-641

(64.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
E1 0.12
(3.0)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8

(4134)
3.28
(83.3)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
3.31
(84.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)

Plugs
G
Tube OD in. 1/4

A
Ordering Number SS-440-P SS-640-P SS-940-P

(24.1)
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
3/8 9/16
1.18
(30.0)
60 000
(4134)
1.66
(42.2)
Nuts
G
Tube OD in. 1/4

A

(20.6)
Front Ferrules
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Back Ferrules
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number 174PH-444-1 174PH-644-1 174PH-944-1
3/8 9/16
0.97
(24.6)
1.44
(36.6)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Male Pipe Thread Connectors

F flat G D E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Male NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2

(46.7)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.09
(53.1)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
2.80
(71.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Male Pipe Thread Elbows

A G E D F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(38.1)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.74
(44.2)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Female Pipe Thread Connectors

F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Female NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2

(52.6)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.36
(59.9)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
9/16
D E A
2.99
(75.9)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Swagelok Tube Fitting Unions

F flat G T D E A Dx Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 1/8 1/4 3/8

(47.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
Dx 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8

(751)
2.21
(56.1)
1.04
(26.4)
0.60
(15.2)
0.12
(3.0)
10 200
(702)
2.80
(71.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.66
(16.8)
0.19
(4.8)
7 500
(516)
Coned Tube Stub to Male Pipe Thread Adapters

F flat E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-441-A-4 SS-641-A-6 SS-941-A-8

(46.7)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 9/16 11/16 7/8
2.12
(53.8)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
9/16
2.85
(72.4)
0.19
(4.8)
Coned Tube Stub to Swagelok Tube Fitting Adapters

F flat E T D Tx G
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 1/4 3/8 1/2

(50.0)
D 0.60
(15.2)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 1/2 5/8 13/16
G 9/16 11/16 7/8

(702)
2.31
(58.7)
0.66
(16.8)
0.12
(3.0)
7 500
(516)
2.96
(75.2)
0.90
(22.9)
0.19
(4.8)
6 700
(461)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Male Pipe Connectors

Bleed slot F flat
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16
Ordering Number SS-44M-1-4 SS-64M-1-6 SS-94M-1-8

(39.4)
D 0.56
(14.2)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
1.78
(45.2)
0.56
(14.2)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
E A
1 1/8-12
2.30
(58.4)
0.75
(19.0)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Female Pipe Connectors

Bleed slot F flat
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16

(42.2)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1 1/4
1.94
(49.3)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
E A
1 1/8-12
2.48
(63.0)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Male Thread to Swagelok Tube Fitting Adapters

Bleed slot F flat
Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4

G
Thread Size 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/8-12
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-200 SS-44M-A-400 SS-64M-A-600 SS-94M-A-810

(40.8)
D 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8

(751)
1.70
(43.1)
0.60
(15.2)
0.09
(2.3)
10 200
(702)
E A D
3/8 1/2
1.97
(50.0)
0.66
(16.7)
0.12
(3.0)
7 500
(516)
2.41
(61.2)
0.90
(22.9)
0.19
(4.8)
6 700
(461)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Tube Socket Weld Adapters

Bleed slot F flat T Tx E A D
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tx 1/2 5/8 3/4
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/8-12
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-4TSW SS-64M-A-6TSW SS-94M-A-8TSW

(33.0)
D 0.28
(7.1)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4

(1378)
1.60
(40.6)
0.31
(7.9)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
1.99
(50.5)
0.38
(9.7)
0.19
(4.8)
15 000
(1033)
Instructions for High-Pressure Cone and Ferrule Tube Fittings

InstallationHardened Tubing
The pre-setting tool (see page 8) must be used for proper initial installation of high-pressure tube ttings with hardened tubing. 1. Install the nut and ferrules onto the pre-setting tool. 2. Insert the coned tubing into the pre-setting tool. 3. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the tapered shoulder of the pre-setting tool body. 4. Tighten the nut until the tubing cannot be turned by hand. 5. Scribe the nut at the 6 oclock position. 6. While holding the pre-setting tool steady, tighten the nut one and one-fourth turns to the 9 oclock position. 7. Loosen the nut and remove the tubing with pre-set ferrules from the pre-setting tool. 8. Insert tubing with pre-set ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats. 9. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 10. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut three-eighths turn for 3/8 and 9/16 in. tubing and one-fourth turn for 1/4 in. tubing.
InstallationAnnealed Tubing
The pre-setting tool is suggested for proper installation of high-pressure tube fittings with annealed tubing. When the pre-setting tool is used, use the instructions for hardened tubing. When the pre-setting tool is not used, use the following instructions: 1. Insert coned tubing into the tube fitting. 2. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the tapered shoulder of the tube fitting body. 3. Tighten the nut until the tubing cannot be turned by hand. 4. Scribe the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut one and one-fourth turns to the 9 oclock position.
InstallationHigh-Pressure Male and Female Threads

1. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 2. Tighten the nut one-eighth turn.
Reassembly Instructions
You may disassemble and reassemble a Swagelok highpressure tube fitting. 1. Insert tubing with pre-set ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats. 2. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 3. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut three-eighths turn for 3/8 and 9/16 in. tubing and one-fourth turn for 1/4 in. tubing.

Pre-Setting Tool
The pre-setting tool is suggested for initial assembly of Swagelok highpressure tube fittings when used with annealed tubing. The pre-setting tool must be used for initial assembly of these tube fittings when used with Swagelok hardened tubing.
Tube OD/ Tool Size, in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 Ordering Number MS-440-PT MS-640-PT MS-940-PT Minimum OD Required, in. 0.250 0.375 0.562
N
Visual Tube Inspection

A proper cone has ends that are faced and smooth. The cone should be free of any scratches and
leave-off marks.
Tube Preparation T, in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 N, in. 1/8 7/32 9/32
56 to 59 T
For tubing tolerance requirements, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Pre-Coned Tubing
Pre-coned tube lengths of hardened or annealed tubing are available from 2 to 120 in. (5 to 305 cm) in length. Tube lengths are precisely coned with a high-quality finish. Annealed tubing is rated to 30 000 psig (2067 bar). Hardened tubing is rated to 60 000 psig (4134 bar).
Tube OD in. Ordering Numbers Hardened Annealed Tubing Tubing SS-483-T-2 SS-483-T-4 SS-483-T-8 SS-483-T-12 SS-495-T-4 SS-495-T-8 SS-495-T-12 SS-612-T-3 SS-612-T-4 SS-612-T-8 SS-612-T-12 SS-918-T-4 SS-918-T-8 SS-918-T-12 SS-483-A-2 SS-483-A-4 SS-483-A-8 SS-483-A-12 SS-495-A-4 SS-495-A-8 SS-495-A-12 SS-612-A-3 SS-612-A-4 SS-612-A-8 SS-612-A-12 SS-918-A-4 SS-918-A-8 SS-918-A-12 0.187
(4.7)
Coning Tool
High-pressure tubing used with Swagelok high-pressure tube fittings should be prepared with a Swagelok coning tool. The Swagelok coning tool cuts a smooth, concentric cone on the tube end to help ensure reliable sealing in the fitting body. It is designed to prepare 1/4, 3/8, and 9/16 in. outside diameter heavy wall tubing. Each coning tool comes in a carrying case with Rapid Tap cutting lubricant; 1/4, 3/8, and 9/16 in. collets and tool bits; and inside-diameter deburring tool. Ordering number: MS-469-CT For operating instructions, see the Coning Tool Users Manual, MS-CRD-CONING.
Length in. (cm) 2 (5.0) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3)
Wall Thickness in. (mm)
0.083
(2.1)
1/4
12 (30.5) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3) 12 (30.5) 3 (7.6) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3) 12 (30.5) 4 (10.2)
0.095
(2.4)
3/8
0.125
(3.2)
Replacement Parts
To order additional items separately, select an ordering number.
Description Cutting lubricant 1/4 in. collet 1/4 in. tool bit 3/8 in. collet 3/8 in. tool bit 9/16 in. collet 9/16 in. tool bit Deburring tool
Ordering Number MS-469CT-LUBE MS-469CT-2-4 MS-469CT-7-4 MS-469CT-2-6 MS-469CT-7-6 MS-469CT-2-9 MS-469CT-7-9 MS-44CT-27 9/16
8 (20.3) 12 (30.5)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company Rapid TapTM Relton Corporation 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI December 2006, R3 MS-01-34
www.swagelok.com
H i g h - Flow, Manu al G a s Pressure Regulators
HF Series
Compact size with flow rates up to 200 std L/min Maximum inlet pressures up to 500 psig (34.4 bar) Manually adjustable outlet pressure up to 150 psig (10.3 bar) 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body for ultrahigh-purity applications 1/4 in. VCR metal face seal; 1/4 in. tube butt weld; 1.5 in. and 1.125 in.
C-seal modular surface-mount end connections
High-Flow, Manual Gas Pressure Regulators
Features
The Swagelok HF series manual gas pressure regulator features a load spring which interacts with a unique pressure-sensing assembly to precisely control outlet pressure. Outlet pressure is easily adjusted by turning the handle.
Compact, high-flow design allows
close spacing of system components and process lines.

Innovative, pressure-sensing assembly
with welded diaphragm results in low droop, which eliminates the need for adjustment in many systems.
High-purity design features tied
poppet for positive shutoff and metal-to-metal seal to atmosphere and 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body internally electropolished and finished to 5 in. (0.13 m) Ra.
1.5 in. Modular Surface-Mount Model
Inline Model with Tube Butt Weld End Connections
Inline and 1.5 in. Modular Surface-Mount Models

Provide flow rates up to 00 std L/min Are available in outlet pressures ranging from vacuum to

Is designed for 1.15 in. C-seal integrated gas systems Provide flow rates up to 160 std L/min Is available in two ranges: vacuum to 30 psig (.0 bar)
150 psig (10.3 bar) with four interchangeable, color-coded load springs
Modular surface-mount regulator is IGC compatible.
and vacuum to 60 psig (4.1 bar).
Self-Centering Poppet
Minimizes creep Is offered in PCTFE for leak-tight shutoff.
Pressure-Sensing Assembly
Provides excellent lockup performance with
perfluoroelastomer poppet.
Adjustable Outlet Pressure

Is achieved by fine handle adjustment. Optional tamper-resistant handle allows user to set and
Narrow-Profile Handle
Permits easy access for pressure adjustments when
system components and process lines are closely spaced

Features both a finger-tip grip and knurled diameter for
seal outlet pressure.
positive actuation.
Technical Data
Pressure Rating psig (bar) Model Inline and 1.5 in. modular surface mount 1.15 in. modular surface mount Inlet Vacuum to 500 (34.4) Vacuum to 150 (10.3) Outlet Vacuum to 150 (10.3) Vacuum to 60 ( 4.1) Temperature Rating F (C) Operating 10 to 150
(3 to 65)
Bakeout 30
(150)
SupplyPressure Effect (SPE) 1.6
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.
Flow Rate std L/min 00
Orifice in. (mm) 0.10 (3.0) 0.090

(.3)
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.3 (5.) with VCR end connections 0.17 (.8)
3 to 30
(0 to 150)
3 to 30
(0 to 150)
1.5
0.1
160
The ratio of the change in outlet pressure for every 100 psi change in the inlet pressure. With inlet pressure at 100 psig (6.8 bar) and outlet pressure at 30 psig (.0 bar)
See Swagelok specifications Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, and Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Cleaning Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals Assembly and Packaging Performed in ISO Class 4 work areas; regulators are double bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags Performed in specially cleaned areas; regulators are individually bagged Process Designator P Process Specification UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01) Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) 5 in. (0.13 m) average, machine finished and electropolished Testing
Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 1 109 std cm3/s
P1
1
Component 1 Label (not shown) 2 Standard handle Optional handle Set screw (not shown) 3 Load disk 4 Load spring
2 3 4
Material Grade / ASTM Specification Polypropylene Aluminum (tamper-resistant handle) Blue nylon Aluminum 6061-T6 / B11 S17400 SS / A564 Aluminum 6061-T6 / B11 Alloy steel / ANSI 18.3 (tamper-resistant handle) Polyetherimide / D505 S17700 SS / A313 Silver-plated 316 SS / A479 S17700 SS / A313 316 SS / A479 Fluorocarbon FKM Brass 360 / B16 S17400 SS / A564 Brass 360 / B16 316L SS VIM-VAR / SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity Alloy X-750 /B637 316L SS / A479 PCTFE / AMS 3650 Alloy C-276 / B574 316 SS / A479 Perfluoroelastomer FFKM 316L SS / A479 Alloy 625 / AMS 5879 Polyetherimide / D505
5 10 11 13 14 15 6 7 8 9 16 17 22 19 20 1 2 3 4 12 6 13 16 21 17 18 5 8 10
5 Bonnet nut 6 Balance spring 7 Damper shaft 8 O-ring 9 O-ring catch 10 Bonnet 11 Backup ring 12 Return disk 13 Diaphragm 14 Face plate 15 Poppet-retaining wafer 16 Stem 17 Poppet 18 Poppet core 19 Poppet port seal 20 Poppet port plug 21 Body 22 Welded end connections
21
316L SS VIM-VAR / SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity 316L SS VIM-VAR / SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity
Wetted components listed in italics. 0 % minimum elongation allowed.
Operating Performance
Load Spring Range at Maximum Inlet and Outlet Pressures
The operating range for each load spring includes the area below each line.
Inlet Pressure, bar
32.0 31.8 2.20 2,20 2,18

Average Lockup Pressure
Example: For a flow rate of 00 std cm3/min, after downstream flow is shut off, the change in outlet pressure is approximately 0.9 psi (0.06 bar).
31.4 31.2 31.0 30.8 30.6 30.4 30.2 30.0 29.8 0 4 10 20 30 40 50 60
0.9 psi 00 std cm3/min
2.16 2.14 2.12
31.6
500 std cm3/min
2.18
2,16 2,14 2,12 2,10 2,08 2,06 0 4
10 std
cm3/min
2.10 2.08 2.06
Inlet Pressure, psig Outlet Pressure Range psig (bar) Vacuum to 5 (1.7) 5 to 50 (0.34 to 3.4) 10 to 100 (0.68 to 6.8) 0 to 150 (1.3 to 10.3)
0.220 0.218 0.216 0.214 0.212 0.210
Downstream shutoff point
Time, seconds
USA
Load Spring A B C D
Spring Color Red White Blue Yellow
2.24 2.22 2.20 2.18 2.16 2.14 2.12 2.10 0 4
Flow Data
Inlet Pressure
80
0.208 0.206
The graphs illustrate the change or droop in outlet pressure as the flow rate increases and the inlet pressure decreases.
0 4 10 20 30 40 50
60

Example: For an outlet pressure of 30 psig as the flow rate JAPAN increases from 10 to 60 std L/min, the differential outlet 5,5 pressure, or droop, is approximately 3.5 psi (0.4 bar). 80
5,0 70 4,5 60 4,0 70
500 psig (34.4 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar)

5.5 5.0 4.5
70
60
4.0
Inlet Pressure 100 psig (6.8 bar)
4.5 60 4.0 3.5 50 3.0 40 2.5 30 2.0 1.5 20 1.0 10 0.5 00 200 100
4,5 4,0
3.0 40 2.5 30 2.0 1.5 1.0 10 0.5 0 0 50 100 150 200
3,0 40 2,5 30 2,0 1,5 20 1.0 10 0,5 00 00 20 50 40 100 60
3.5 psi
20
50
3.5
3,5 50
3,5 3,0 2,5 2,0 1,5 1,0 0,5 0 0 20
150 80
Air Flow, std L/min
Air Flow, std L/min

USA
0.55 0.50
5.5 5.0
0.55 0.50
Dimensions
Inline Models
Low-Torque Handle Standard Handle
.00 dia
(50.8)
Bottom
1.00 (5.4) bolt circle
(37.6)
1.48 dia
4.1 max
(105)
max
(106)
4.17
Four mounting holes, M5 0.8 thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep. M5 0.8 holes are compatible with 10-3 mounting screws.
End Connection Butt weld

A 0.44
(11.)
A, in. (mm) .15 (54.6) .78 (70.6) 3.70 (94.0)
0.44
(11.)
VCR, short gland VCR, long gland
Butt Weld End Connections
VCR End Connections
Modular Surface-Mount Models
Bottom
3.97 max
(101) (38.)
1.50
Bottom
A max 1.50 1.15
(8.6)
(38.)
1.15
(8.6)
Handle 1.50 in. Platform

Four through holes, 0. (5.6) dia
A, in. (mm) 3.66 (93.0) 3.57 (90.7)
1.125 in. Platform
Four through holes, 0.17 (4.4) dia
Standard Tamper resistant
To order a complete assembly, order a regulator and a spring kit. Regulators are stocked with narrow-profile blue nylon handles and without spring kits.
SS HFM3B VCR4 P
Body Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Model HFM3B = inline MSM-HFM3B = modular surface-mount End Connections VCR4 = 1/4 in. VCR short gland VCR4L = 1/4 in. VCR long gland BW4 = 1/4 in. tube butt weld None = C-seal surface-mount (MSM-HFHM3B only)
wagelok VCR split-nut assemblies must be ordered separately. See below. S
Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average
Spring Kits
Spring kits include a load spring, load disk, label, and installation instructions. To order, select the spring kit ordering number based on the desired outlet pressure range of the regulator.
Outlet Pressure Range psig (bar) Vacuum to 5 (1.7) 5 to 50 (0.34 to 3.4) 10 to 100 (0.68 to 6.8) 0 to 150 (1.3 to 10.3) Spring Kit Ordering Number 177-13K-HFM-A 177-13K-HFM-B 177-13K-HFM-C 177-13K-HFM-D
Swagelok VCR Split-Nut Assemblies

Swagelok VCR split-nut technology offers:
Flexibility of inventory Shorter end-to-end dimensions Rotatable, nonwelded end connections.
When ordering a regulator with VCR end connections, VCR split-nut assemblies must be ordered separately. VCR split-nut assemblies are field assembled. To order, select the ordering number for the male or female assemblies. Male split-nut assembly ordering number: SS-4-VCR-4-SN Female split-nut assembly ordering number: SS-4-VCR-1-SN
See Low-Torque Handle, page 7.

Build a regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown.
SS MSM-HFE
Body Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Model Manual gas pressure regulator, 1.15 in. modular suface-mount Handle -TR = Tamper-resistant handle (see next page) None = Standard handle Process Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average
P A
Handle Color -BK = Black -GR = Green -OR = Orange -WH = White -YW = Yellow None = Blue
Outlet Pressure Range

A = Vacuum to 30 psig (.0 bar) B = Vacuum to 60 psig (4.1 bar)

Factory-Installed Load Springs
Regulators can be ordered with a factoryinstalled load spring. To order, add the spring designator to the regulator ordering number. Example: SS-HFM3B-VCR4-P-A
Outlet Pressure Range psig (bar) Vacuum to 5 (1.7) 5 to 50 (0.34 to 3.4) 10 to 100 (0.68 to 6.8) 0 to 150 (1.3 to 10.3) Spring Designator -A -B -C -D

Tamper-Resistant Handle
Setoutlet pressure
is adjusted using a set screw in the top of the handle.

Sealhandle sticker
Set
Seal
is applied to prevent access to the set screw.
Aluminum Handles
Narrow-Profile Handle The standard, narrow-profile handle is also available in aluminum with a choice of seven epoxy-coated colors. To order a factory-installed narrow-profile aluminum handle on an HF series manual regulator, add the handle color designator to the regulator ordering number. Example: SS-HFM3B-VCR4-P-BK Low-Torque Handle An optional six-lobed handle is available to provide a lower actuation torque. The low-torque handle is epoxy-coated aluminum and is available in seven colors. The low-torque handle is suitable for use with the 0 to 150 psig (1.3 to 10.3 bar) spring kit. The handle has a diameter of .00 in. (50.8 mm), as shown on page 5, and is not recommended for use with modular surface-mount regulators. To order a factory-installed low-torque aluminum handle, insert L and add the color designator to the regulator ordering number as shown. Example: SS-HFML3B-VCR4-P-BK
Handle Color Black Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow Designator -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -WH -YW
Maintenance Kits
Poppet Kits
A poppet kit includes one poppet, poppet port seal, and installation instructions. Ordering number: MS-3K-HFM3

Poppet Tool
A poppet replacement tool is needed for poppet installation. Ordering number: MS-TOOL-HFM3
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 008, R4 MS-0-157
www.swagelok.com
H i g h - F l o w, S p r i n g l e s s D i a p h r a g m Va l v e s
DF Series
316L VAR stainless steel body Working pressures up to 300 psig (20.6 bar) 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in.; 10 and 12 mm end connections
DF Series Diaphragm Valves
Features
Valve
Flow coefficient of 0.62 meets high-flow requirements. No springs or threads in wetted areas improves cleanliness. Fully swept flow path enhances purging and gas replacement. Minimal PCTFE volume minimizes gas adsorption and desorption. Fully contained seat insert increases cycle life. High-flow Swagelok H Type VCR fittings, Swagelok VCR
fittings, and tube butt weld end connections are available.
Pneumatic Actuators
Normally closed and normally open models are available for remote
actuation.
Actuators require low actuation pressure. Construction is lightweight aluminum.
Manual Actuators
Three-quarter turn actuation Choice of seven handle colors
Round Handle
Window handle provides visual indication of open and closed
positions.
Integral Lockout Handle

Standard padlock or lockout device secures handle in closed
position.
Handle orientation provides visual indication of open and closed
Technical Data
Working Pressure psig (bar) Model Manual Pneumatic Operating Vacuum to 300 (20.6) Vacuum to 125 (8.6) Burst 3200 (220) Temperature Rating F (C) Operating 10 to 150
(23 to 65)
Bakeout 302 (150) (valve open)
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.62
Orifice in. (mm) 0.23 (5.8)
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.27 (4.4) body with HVCR fittings
Pneumatic Actuator Actuation Air Pressure Displacement psig (bar) in.3 (cm3) 70 to 100
(4.9 to 6.8)
0.13
(2.1)
See Polyimide Seat Material, page 8, for operating temperatures up to 270F (132C).
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, and Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging, MS-06-63, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Assembly and Packaging Performed in ISO Class 4 work areas; valves are doubled bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged Process Designator P Process Wetted Surface Specification Roughness (Ra) UltrahighPurity Process Specification Electropolished (SC-01) and finished to an average of 5 in. Special (0.13 m) Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)
Cleaning Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals
Testing Inboard and internal helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 109 std cm3/s in accordance with SEMI F1
P1
Performance Specifications
See the DF Series Diaphragm Valve Technical Report, MS-06-14, for more information on particle counting, moisture analysis, hydrocarbon analysis, ionic cleanliness, and lab cycle testing data.
Component Valve Body Seat Diaphragms 316L VAR SS/A479 PCTFE/AMS 3650 Elgiloy /AMS 5876 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Integral Lockout
Pneumatic Actuator
1.50
(38.1)
Handle Round Handle

1.50
(38.1)
1/8 NPT inlet
1.49
(37.8)
0.33 (8.3) max, 0.18 (4.6) min shank diameter
Pneumatic Actuator Cylinder, cap, pistons O-rings Springs Round Handle Handle Actuator, bonnet nut Bonnet Handle Set screws Retaining ring O-rings Sleeve Base
Aluminum Buna N S17700 SS

3.71
(94.2)
3.18
(80.8)
4.31
(109)
Polyester with stainless steel insert 316 SS

A 0.44
(11.1)
closed, locked out A 0.44

(11.1)
S17400 SS Glass-filled nylon Alloy steel/F912 PH 15-7 Mo SS
Rotatable Male H Type VCR Fittings End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female H type VCR fittings Rotatable male H type VCR fittings Female/rotatable male H type VCR fitting Female VCR fittings Rotatable male VCR fittings Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 3/8 0.035 in. 1/2 0.035 in. 10 1 mm 12 1 mm
Tube Butt Welds
Basic Ordering Number 6LV-DFHFR46LV-DFHMR46LV-DFHFR4HMR46LV-DFFR86LV-DFMR86LV-DFBW66LV-DFBW86LV-DFBW10M6LV-DFBW12M-
Fluorocarbon FKM Powdered metal stainless steel/B783
A in. (mm) 2.78

(70.6)
2.96
(75.2)
Female VCR Fittings 2.96

(75.2)
Bottom
1.25
(31.8)

0.23 in. (5.8 mm) orifice, 0.62 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Water Flow U.S. gal/min
(L/min)
4.16
(106)
1.25
(31.8)

(std L/min)
Tube butt welds
2.25
(57.1)
2.0 (7.4) 4.4 (17) 6.2 (23)
7.0 (200) 19 33
(530) (930)
4 mounting holes, M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.25 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (25.4) dia bolt circle
Valves with Round Handles or Pneumatic Actuators

Select a basic ordering number, add a process designator (see page 2), then add a pneumatic actuator or handle color designator. Examples: 6LV-DFHFR4-P-BK 6LV-DFHMR4-P1-C P process, black handle P1 process, normally closed pneumatic actuator
Pneumatic Actuator Normally closed Normally open Normally closed with indicator switch Handle Color Black Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow
Designator -C -O
-CM
Valves with Integral Lockout Handles

Insert L into a basic ordering number, add a process designator (see page 2), then add a handle color designator. Examples: 6LV-DFLHFR4-P-BK P process, black handle 6LV-DFLHMR4-P1-BL P1 process, blue handle
Designator -BK -BL -GR -OR -RD -WH -YW

multiport or elbow flow path end connections for each port process manual or pneumatic actuation.
Flow Path
Select a flow path as viewed from the top of the valve. Insert the flow path designator in the valve ordering number, as shown on the next page.


Flow Path Ports Schematic
4 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 1b 3b 1b 3a 4a 2b 1b 3b
End Connections
Designator D End Connection 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male H type VCR fitting 1/2 in. female VCR fitting Designator
4a
Closed
4a 2b 1b
Open
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Insert the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected.
2b 3a 4a 2b
1 3 4 1
1b 3b 4b
2a
1b 3b 4b
2a
1b
2a
1b
2a
1 3
1b 3a
2b
1b 3a
2b
1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 3/8 in. tube butt weld, 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall
1 3
1a 3b
2a
1a 3b
2a
1 3 4 1
1b 3a 4a 1b
2a
1b 3a 4a 1b
2a
Process Specification and Actuator

See Ordering Information, next page, for selection details.
L
5
Bottom port
2 5b
2a
2a 5b
1 3
1b 3a
1b 3a
Dimensions
Top
Port 4 0.44 0.61 (15.5) (11.1) (1/2 in. female VCR only) Port 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male H type VCR fitting 1/2 in. female VCR fitting 1/2 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 3/8 in. tube butt weld, 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) tube stub L 1.39
(35.3)
Side
M 1.21
(30.7)
1.25
(31.8)
1.48
(37.6)
1.30
(33.0)
Port 1
square
Port 1
2.08
(52.8)
1.90
(48.3)
Port 2
1.12
(28.4)
0.95
(24.1)
L Port 3
Port 5 Not shown: 4 bottom mounting holes same as 2-port body, page 4. Exception: Valve with bottom port (port 5, N body), no mounting holes.
6LV D F C
Material 316L VAR stainless steel Series DF = DF series high-flow springless diaphragm valve DFL = DF series high-flow springless diaphragm valve with integral lockout handle Flow Path See page 4. Seat Material None = PCTFE V = Polyimide (See page 8.) End Connections See page 4. Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5
D D D P GR PM
Option PM = Panel mount (Manual actuator only; see page 8.) Actuation Pneumatic C = Normally closed O = Normally open CM = Normally closed with indicator switch Manual (Handle Color) BK = Black RD = Red BL = Blue WH = White GR = Green YW = Yellow OR = Orange Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average

Designator Material Series Flow path Seat 1 end connection 2 end connection 3 end connection 4 end connection 5 end connection Process Actuator 6LV-DFLEEP-RD 6LV-DFCV999P1-O 6LV DF C Polyimide 3/8 in. tube butt weld 3/8 in. tube butt weld 3/8 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Normally open 6LV-DFLADDDP1-BK
L PCTFE 1/4 in. rotatable male H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male H type VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Red round handle
A PCTFE 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Black integral lockout handle
Port Port Port Port Port
To order a multivalve manifold, select designators for:
1- or 2-valve flow path end connections for each port process manual or pneumatic actuation.
Flow Path
Select a flow path. Insert the flow path designator in the manifold ordering number, as shown on the next page.
P1, P2, and P3 designate port numbers. V1 and V2 designate valve numbers. Manifold 2-valve, 3-port Schematic
P2 V1 V2 P3 P2 P1 V1 P1 P3
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Place the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected.
Ports 1 and 3
Designator 1V End Connection 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 3/8 in. tube butt weld, 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall Designator
Flow Path
V1 P2 V2
P1
1-valve, 3-port
P2
P1
V1
5V
P3 P3
Port 2
End Connection 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Designator
1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall

Dimensions
2 Valve, 3 Port Front
5.67
(144)
1 Valve, 3 Port Front

2.52
(64.0)
Ports 1 and 3
Port 2
Port 2
2-Valve, 3-Port
1-Valve, 3-Port
4.07
(103)
3.59 L2 Port 3 0.44

(11.1) (91.2)
L2
End Connection L1, L3 L1 L3 3/8 in. tube butt weld, 0.50 in. 1.81 (46.0) 1.81 (46.0) 0.90 (22.9) (12.7 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 2.03 (51.6) 1/4 in. rotatable male H type VCR fitting 2.18 (55.4) 1.18 (30.0)
Port 1
Port 1 Port 3
2.39 (60.7)
L1
L3
L1
L3
Bottom
2.59
(65.8)
1.25
(31.8)
Bottom
1.58
(40.1)
Port 2
2-Valve, 3-Port 1-Valve, 3-Port
Port 3
Port 1
Port 3
Port 1
4 mounting holes, M5 0.8-6H thread, 0.25 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (25.4) dia bolt circle
End Connection 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting
L2, in. (mm) 2.79 (70.9) 2.66 (67.6) 3.35 (85.1) 2.54 (64.5)
6LV F 1V
Material 316L VAR stainless steel Series F = DF series high-flow diaphragm valve FL = DF series high-flow diaphragm valve with integral lockout handle Flow Path 1V = 2-valve, 3-port body 5V = 1-valve, 3-port body Seat Material None = PCTFE V = Polyimide (See page 8.) End Connections See page 6. Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
D 2 D P A A
Actuation Add a designator for each valve. Pneumatic A = Normally closed B = Normally open C = Normally closed with indicator switch Manual (Handle Color) T = Black W = Red U = Blue X = White S = Green Y = Yellow V = Orange Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average
6LV-F5VD1EP-S

Designator Material Series Flow path Seat Port 1 end connection Port 2 end connection Port 3 end connection Process Valve 1 actuator Valve 2 actuator 6LV-F1V939P1-AB 6LV DF 1V PCTFE 3/8 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld 3/8 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Normally closed Normally open 5V PCTFE
1/4 in. female H type VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Green round handle

Polyimide Seat Material
DF series valves with polyimide seats are rated for
Panel Mounting
Is available for round-handle valves. Includes threaded bonnet nut and
operating temperatures from 50 to 270F (10 to 132C).

Pneumatic actuators contain fluorocarbon FKM O-rings. All other materials and ratings remain the same.
1 1/8 in. hex panel mount nut.

Requires 0.96 in. (24.4 mm)
To order, insert V into the valve ordering number. Example: 6LV-DFLVBW8-P-C
diameter hole. To order, add -PM to the valve ordering number. Example: 6LV-DFHFR4-BK-PM
Indicator Switch
Features single-pole, single-
Maintenance Kits
Diaphragm Replacement Kits
Kits include two diaphragms and replacement instructions. Ordering number: E-3DK-DF
throw switch rated at 1/2 A for 115 V (ac) resistivity.

Includes a 24 in. (61 cm) wire
lead with an in-line clip.

Is available assembled on
any normally closed, pneumatically actuated DF series valve or for field assembly.
Actuator Replacement Kits

Kits include all components except body, seat, and diaphragms. Select a kit ordering number.
Actuator Kit Green round handle Green integral lockout handle Normally closed pneumatic with Buna N O-rings Normally open pneumatic with Buna N O-rings Normally closed pneumatic with fluorocarbon FKM O-rings, for use with polyimide seat option Normally open pneumatic with fluorocarbon FKM O-rings, for use with polyimide seat option Ordering Number PY-DF-K1-GR NY-DFL-K1-GR A-DF-K1-C A-DF-K1-O A-DFV-K1-C A-DFV-K1-O

To order a valve with an indicator switch, add M for a normally open switch or M-2 for a normally closed switch to the valve ordering number. Examples: 6LV-DFHFR4-P-CM 6LV-DFBW8-P-CM-2

To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-ISK-DF-CM for a normally open switch or MS-ISK-DF-CM-2 for a normally closed switch. Kits include actuator and switch.

To order a kit with a round handle or integral lockout handle of another color, replace GR with a handle color designator. Example: PY-DF-K1-BK
Handle Color Black Blue Orange Red White Yellow
Designator BK BL OR RD WH YW
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals PH 15-7 MoTM AK Steel Corp. 1997, 2003, 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI August 2005, R4 MS-02-24
www.swagelok.com
High-Pre ssure Ne e dle Valve s
Working pressures up to 45 000 psig (3100 bar) Temperatures up to 450F (232C) Weep holes for leak detection Packing below stem threads Nonrotating stem design Straight thread high-pressure female or female NPT end connections
High-Pressure Needle Valves
Features
Top- or side-mounting panel holes Rolled threads on stem shank Cold-worked body is standard; annealed body is available for sour gas service. Weep holes provide leak detection. Glass-filled PTFE packing is standard; optional Grafoil packing is available. Design enables external adjustment without removing valve from line. Threads are isolated from system fluid. Outlet
Bonnet lock plate helps prevent accidental removal of bonnet.
Replaceable, nonrotating stem design:

provides easy valve maintenance helps prevent galling or damage
to valve seat.
Inlet
Easily replaceable seat in angle-pattern valve
410 series ratings are based on Grafoil packing. Ratings are
limited to 450F (3C) with glass-filled PTFE packing. PTFE packing. Ratings with Grafoil packing are equal to 410 series ratings.
Series Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 00 300 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850
(37) (93) (148) (04) (3) (60) (87) (315) (343) (371) (398) (46) (454)
410 10 9 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 000 90 390 705 435 165 970 770 660 480 335 30 085
(689) (640) (578) (530) (51) (493) (480) (466) (458) (446) (436) (49) (419)
445, 645, 945 45 41 37 34 33 000 800 700 600 400

(310) (88) (599) (385) (30)
445, 645, and 945 series ratings are based on glass-filled
410 and 445 series straight pattern 645 and 945 series straight pattern 410 and 445 series angle pattern 645 and 945 series angle pattern
Operating Torque
Torque required for shutoff at maximum pressure rating is 50 in.lb (5.7 Nm) . Overtightening of valve will result in reduced seat life.
System Pressure, bar Torque Required to Close Valve, Nm System Pressure, psig Torque Required to Close Valve, in.lb
Testing
Every Swagelok high-pressure needle valve is factory tested with water up to its maximum pressure rating to a requirement of no detectable leakage at the seat and packing. Leak testing with gas is available; see page 4.
1 2 3

3.00 (76.) 3.00 (76.)
10-3 straight thread
1.38
(35.1)
0.8
(7.1) (16.0)
H open
10-3 straight thread 0.8

(7.1)
1.38
(35.1)
H open
0.63
(16.0)
0.63
5 6
B B
(35.6)
1.40
7 8 9 9
Straight Pattern
Straight thread high-pressure female or female NPT end connections
Straight thread high-pressure female or female NPT end connections
Angle Pattern
10
Valve Size in.
Port Thread Size 1/4 in. female NPT 9/16-18
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series Cv Orifice B C H Straight Pattern
11
1/4
SS-410-FP SS-445-FP SS-645-FP
410 445 645
0.1 0.093
(.4)
1.07
(7.)
.0
(51.3)
4.91
(15)
3/8 9/16
3/4-16
1.39
(35.3)
.7
(57.7)
5.16
(131)
0.14 1 1/8-1 SS-945-FP 945 Angle Pattern
1.39
(35.3)
.58
(65.5)
5.47
(139)
12
1/4 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Red anodized aluminum 04-T4/B11 Black anodized aluminum 04-T4/B11 Cadmium-plated carbon steel Phosphor bronze 544/B139 455 SS/A564 316 SS 316 SS/A40 440C SS/A276 316 SS/A76 316 SS/A276 Glass-filled PTFE 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 with silver-plated threads Copper/molybdenum disulfide
1/4 in. female NPT 9/16-18
SS-410-FPAR SS-445-FPAR SS-645-FPAR
410 0.15 445 645 0.19 945 0.093

(.4)
.7
(57.7)
5.47
(139)
1.39
(35.3)
.0
(51.3)
4.91
(15)
Component 1 Handle (410) (445, 645, 945) 2 Handle screw 3 Bonnet nut 4 Stem shank 5 Lock screw 6 Lock plate 7 Stem 8 Spacer 9 Gland 10 Packing 11 Body 12 eplaceable seat R (angle pattern) Lubricant
3/8 9/16
3/4-16
.7
(57.7)
5.16
(131)
1 1/8-1 SS-945-FPAR
.58
(65.5)
5.47
(139)

Stem Options
Valves are standard with 440C stainless steel stems. To order valves with optional stems, add a stem material designator to the valve ordering number.
Stem Material 440C SS with cobaltbased alloy tip S17400 SS Designator -STE -174
Stainless Steel Bar Handles

To order valves with factory-assembled 316 stainless steel bar handles, add -SH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-410-FP-SH
Spare Handles
To order handles as spare parts, select an ordering number.
Handle Ordering Numbers Valve Series Aluminum Bar 316 SS Bar 410 445 645 945 A-5K-410-RD A-5K-445-BK SS-51S-6B
Example: SS-410-FP-STE
High-Temperature Stem Packing

Grafoil stem packing is available for temperatures up to 850F (454C). To order valves with factory-assembled Grafoil packing, add -G to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-410-FP-G
Sour Gas Valves

Valves for sour gas service are available. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. The valves have annealed bodies and S17400 stems. The 410 series valve maintains its 10 000 psig (689 bar) rating. The 445, 645, and 945 series valves are rated to 18 000 psig at 100F (140 bar at 37C) with high-pressure ports. To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-410-FP-SG For more information on valves for sour gas service, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Stem Packing Kits

PTFE and Grafoil stem packing kits are available for all series. Kits contain glands, packing, lubricants, and instructions.
Stem Packing PTFE Grafoil Kit Ordering Number T-91K-445 G-91K-445
Replaceable Seats
Angle-pattern valves have a one-piece replaceable seat with an integral female NPT or female straight thread high-pressure end connection. Seats are manufactured from 316 stainless steel and have silver-plated threads. To order a replaceable seat, select an ordering number.
Valve SS-410-FPAR SS-445-FPAR SS-645-FPAR SS-945-FPAR Replaceable Seat Ordering Number SS-410-RS-4F SS-445-RS-44F SS-645-RS-64F SS-945-RS-94F
For proper assembly of a replaceable seat, tighten one-eighth turn past finger-tight with a wrench.
Optional Gas Seat Test

Leak testing with nitrogen at 5000 psig (344 bar) is available. Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.5 std cm3/min. To order, add -PU to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-410-FP-PU
Pneumatically Actuated Valves

Pneumatically actuated valves are designed for remote actuation where manual actuation is difficult or impractical. Pneumatic actuators are available in normally open, normally closed, and double acting modes.
To prolong valve life, actuators should be operated at minimum required pneumatic actuator pressures. Ratings for high-pressure valve actuators are:
00 psig at 100F (13.7 bar at 37C) 150 psig at 300F (10.3 bar at 148C)
Component Cylinder, cover, piston, mounting plate, tie rods, tie rod nuts Piston rod, stem adjustment nut, stem lock nut Piston rod nut, bonnet nut Cover screws O-rings Springs (-O, -C) Double Acting (-D) and Normally Normally Open (-O) Closed (-C) Black-anodized aluminum
Actuator Pressure at System Pressure

Normally open actuators require a minimum system pressure of 500 psig (17 bar).
416 SS 316 SS Cadmium-plated steel 30 SS Bronze 30 SS
Fluorocarbon FKM
Actuator Pressure, psig
Normally Open Double Acting
Actuator Pressure, bar
Normally Closed
Piston rod bushing

Double Acting and Normally Open Normally Closed
4.5
(108)
The pressure values shown above are based on the following valve criteria:
Valve contains glass-filled PTFE packing. Other
4.5
(108)
packing materials may substantially alter the force required to actuate the stem.
Proper bonnet nut adjustment. If the bonnet nut
8.06 1/8 in. NPT 4.88

(14)
1/8 in. NPT
(05)
is overtightened, the actuating pressure cannot overcome the frictional force between the packing and the stem. Sufficient bonnet nut torque should be maintained to prevent packing leakage while allowing proper actuation.
Liquid systems. While high-pressure gas service
(88.9)
3.50
4.31
(109)
(88.9)
3.50
generally requires the packing to be tightened, overtightening will prevent proper operation of the actuator.
Proper stem nut adjustment. Stem position affects
Double-acting actuator only.
the spring force on the normally closed and normally open models. Detailed service and adjustment instructions are included with each pneumatically actuated valve.
To order valves with a factory-assembled pneumatic actuator, add the actuator mode designator to a valve ordering number.
Actuation Mode Normally closed Double acting Normally open Designator -C -D -O
Caution: Actuated assemblies must be properly

supported. Inadequate or improper support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
Example: SS-410-FP-C
See the Swagelok High-Pressure Fittings catalog, MS-01-34, for more information.
Tube Fittings
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company, Inc. 2002, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2008, R1 MS-02-160
www.swagelok.com
High-Pre ssure, Pneumatically Actuated Bellows-Se aled Valve s
HB Se r ie s
Packless valves with all-metal seal to atmosphere Working pressures up to 3500 psig (241 bar) Temperatures up to 400F (204C) VCR face seal fitting, Swagelok tube fitting, and weld end connections
HB Series Bellows-Sealed Valves
Features
Valve
Flow coefficient (Cv) of 0.30 Full pressure rating in either flow Bellows Subassembly Replaceable for easy maintenance
direction for system versatility

Easily purged to maintain clean
operation
Pneumatic Actuator
models
Actuation pressure as low as 30 psig
(2.1 bar)
Stem guiding outside of system fluid for cleanliness Inverted bellows design for strength
Technical Data
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.30 Orifice in. (mm) 0.15 (3.8) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.27 (4.4)
Determined using valves with Swagelok tube

fitting end connections.
PCTFE stem tip standard for leak-tight, repetitive shutoff; polyimide available
Valve
Component Body, stem, weld ring, end connections Bellows Gasket Stem tip Bonnet, bonnet nut Bushing Backstop washer Lubricant Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316L SS/A479 316L SS/A269 PTFE-coated 316L SS/A240 PCTFE/D1430 316 SS/A479 Bronze/B139 303 SS/A582 Petroleum-based
Valve
Body Material Stem Tip Material Temperature F (C) 40 (40) to100 150 200 300 400 316 SS PCTFE Polyimide Working Pressure psig (bar)

0.15 in. (3.8 mm) orifice, 0.30 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Water Flow U.S. gal/min
(L/min)

(std L/min)
0.95 (3.6) 2.1 (7.9) 3.0 (11)
3.4 (96) 9.0 (250) 16 (450)
(37) 3500 (241) 3500 (241) (65) 3220 (221) 3220 (221) (93) 2950 (203) (148) 2640 (181) (204) 2400 (165)
Pneumatic Actuator
Pressure Rating at 70F (20C) 30 to 110 psig
(2.1 to 7.5 bar)
Pneumatic Actuator
Component Cylinder, base O-rings Material 2024-T4 aluminum/ B211 Fluorocarbon FKM

(20 to 204)
For optimum valve performance, the normally open pneumatic actuator should be limited to 30 psi (2.1 bar) above the pressures shown in the graph.
Normally Closed
Normally Open
HB Series Bellows-Sealed Valves
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, Swagelok Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06), MS-06-64, and Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06 -63, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification. See Cleaning Process Availability, page 4, for ordering information.
Cleaning Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals High-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system High-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Assembly and Packaging Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged. Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged. Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged. Process Designator None Process Specification Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06) Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06) UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) 20 in. (0.51 m) average, machine finished 20 in. (0.51 m) average, machine finished 8 in. (0.20 m) average, machine finished and electropolished 8 in. (0.20 m) average, machine finished and electropolished Testing
-SC06
Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 4 109 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals Pneumatic actuator leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 std cm3/min
-P6
Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with Performed in ISO Class 4 a continuously monitored, work areas; valves are double deionized water, ultrasonic bagged and vacuum sealed cleaning system in cleanroom bags.
-P
See the HB Series Diaphragm Valve Technical Report, MS-06-04, for more information on surface finish specifications, particle counting, moisture analysis, hydrocarbon analysis, ionic cleanliness, and lab cycle testing data.

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. For a complete ordering number, add C for a normally closed pneumatic actuator or O for a normally open pneumatic actuator to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-HBS4-C
(53.8)
2.12
1/8-27 NPT inlet
0.25
(6.4)
0.25 (6.4) 0.035

(0.9)
Tube Butt Weld

(99.1)
3.90
0.16 (4.1) 3/8

(25.4)
1/4 1.00
Polyimide Stem Tip

To order a valve with a polyimide stem tip, insert V into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-HBVS4-C
0.34
(8.6)
(26.9)
1.06 A
1/4 in. Tube Socket/ 3/8 in. Tube Butt Weld

(11.4)
0.45
0.19 (4.8) 1/2

(25.4)
Female VCR Fitting End Connections Type Swagelok tube fitting Female VCR fitting Male VCR fitting Tube butt weld Tube socket and tube butt weld Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 and 3/8 in. 3/8 and 1/2 in. Basic Ordering Number SS-HBS4SS-HBS6SS-HBS6MMSS-HBV51SS-HBVCR46LV-HBBW4SS-HBTW4SS-HBTW6-
3/8 1.00
in. (mm) 2.46 (62.5) 2.58 (65.5) 2.46 (62.5) 2.76 (70.1) 2.30 (58.4) 1.75 (44.4) 1.81 (46.0) Bottom
0.38
(9.6)
3/8 in. Tube Socket/ 1/2 in. Tube Butt Weld

10-32 UNF tapped holes 0.25 (6.4) deep (2)all valves
45 1.00 (25.4)
(28.7)
1.13
Cleaning Process Availability

See Process Specifications, page 3, for more information about Swagelok cleaning and packaging processes.

Indicator Switch
Standard (SC-11)
Swagelok HB series valves are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements as stated in ASTM G93 Level C.
Features single-pole, single-throw
Photovoltaic (SC-06)
Swagelok HB series valves with VCR or weld end connections are available cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06), MS-06-64, to meet the process requirements of solar cell production. To order, insert -SC06 into the ordering number. Example: SS-HBBW4-SC06-C SC-06cleaned HB series valves with VCR or weld end connections are available with controlled wetted surface finishes and electropolishing. To order, insert -P6 into the ordering number. Example: SS-HBVCR4-P6-O
switch rated at 1/2 A for 115 V (ac) resistivity.

Includes a 24 in. (61 cm) wire lead
with an inline clip.

Is available assembled on any
normally closed or normally open, pneumatically actuated HB series valve or for field assembly.

To order a valve with an indicator switch, add:
M for a normally open switch M-2 for a normally closed switch or M2 for a switch that indicates open and closed
Ultrahigh-Purity (SC-01)
Swagelok HB series valves with VCR or weld end connections are available with wetted surface finishing, cleaning, and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61. To order, insert -P into the ordering number. Example: SS-HBBW4-P-C
to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-HBS4-CM SS-HBS4-CM-2 SS-HBS4-OM2

Actuator with Indicator Switch Kits for Field Assembly

To order a kit for an existing HB series valve, select an ordering number from the table below.
Actuator Position Indicated Open Closed Open and closed Closed Open Open and closed Actuator/Switch Retrofit Kit Ordering Number MS-ISK-HB-CM MS-ISK-HB-CM-2 MS-ISK-HB-CM2 MS-ISK-HB-OM MS-ISK-HB-OM-2 MS-ISK-HB-OM2
Maintenance Kits
Bellows, stem tip/adapter, and gasket kits are available. See the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Valve Maintenance Kits catalog, MS-02-66.
Normally Closed Valves
Multiport and Elbow Valves and Multivalve Manifolds

HB series valves are available in multiport and elbow configurations; see the Swagelok Bellows- and DiaphragmSealed Multiport and Elbow Valves catalog, MS-02-85. Multivalve manifolds are also available; contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Normally Open Valves
Swagelok, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2010 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI January 2010, R7 MS-01-76
www.swagelok.com
H o s e an d F l ex i b l e Tubing
Hose Assemblies, Bulk Hose, Flexible Tubing, and End Connections

Core materials include metal, PTFE, PFA, vinyl, nylon, polyethylene, and rubber Nominal hose sizes 1/8 to 2 in. Wide range of fractional and metric end connections Custom lengths available Optional covers, tagging, and testing
Hose and Flexible Tubing
Contents
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature, 4 Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Selection Guide, 6 Considerations for Selecting a Hose Assembly Solution, 8 Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Installation and Use Guide, 9
FL Series Metal Hose, 21 X Series PTFE Hose, 38
Metal Hose and Tubing

FM Series Metal Hose, 10
PTFE Hose
T Series PTFE Hose, 30
FJ Series Metal Hose, 16
B Series PTFE Hose, 36
CT Series Convoluted Metal Tubing, 25
S Series PTFE Hose, 40
C Series PTFE Hose, 42
N Series PTFE Hose, 44
W Series PTFE Hose, 46
F Series PTFE Hose, 48
Contents
PFA Hose and Tubing
U Series PFA Hose, 59
Nylon Hose
NG Series Nylon Hose, 67
Options
Covers, 83
Testing, 83
PFA Series PFA Tubing, 61
7R and 8R Series Nylon Hose, 71
Tags, 84
Approvals, 84
Tools and Accessories Vinyl Tubing

LT Series Vinyl Tubing, 63 7N and 8N Series Nylon Hose, 72 Cutting Tools for Hose and Soft Tubing, 85
Polyethylene Hose Hose Connectors

HC SeriesEnd Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose, 64 7P Series Polyethylene Hose, 77
Assembly Tools for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose, 86
Accessories for Hand and Power Swagers, 86
Pushers and Swage Dies for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose, 87
Rubber Hose
PB Series Rubber Hose, 79
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. For Swagelok nut dimensions, see the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140.
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature

Hose A multiple-layered flexible conduit through which fluid is conveyed from one point to another. Nominal Hose Size An approximation of the hose inside diameter. Flexible Tubing A single-layered flexible conduit through which fluid is conveyed from one point to another. Bend Radius The radius of the bent section of hose, measured to the center line or inside of the curved section. Minimum Dynamic Bend Radius The smallest bend radius that a hose is rated to perform in a dynamic application. Minimum Static Bend Radius The smallest bend radius that a hose is rated to perform in a static application. Flexibility The relative ease or difficulty of bending a nonpressurized hose or tubing assembly. Burst Pressure The pressure at which leakage occurs when exposed to a laboratory burst test.
SWAGELOK
Dynamic Application An application in which the hose flexes or changes position. Static Application An application in which the hose is stationary and does not move in any plane.
SW AG ELO K
SWAGELOK
Static Dissipation The ability of a material to conduct an electrical charge to ground. Conductive The ability of a material to transmit or conduct an electrical charge. Permeation The movement of a liquid, gas, or vapor through a solid. All materials are permeable to a degree, and should be tested for application compatibility prior to installation.
Inside bend radius
Center line bend radius
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature
Maximum Outside Dimension The largest nominal outside dimension of the hose assembly.
Live Length (L) The flexible length of a hose or tubing assembly. Live Length (L)
End Connection The fitting that is assembled onto each end of the hose to provide a means of installation into a fluid system.
Overall Length (OAL) Braid (Overbraid) A flexible, woven reinforcement. Overall Length (OAL) The distance from end to end for a hose or tubing assembly.
End Connection Length (A) Overall length of the end connection.
Core The innermost material of the hose that carries the system media, often referred to as the wetted surface. Spring Guard A helical metal spring used to protect the hose from abrasion, overbending, and kinking. Reinforcement Material used to reinforce the core and increase its pressure-containing capacity.
Cover The outermost material of a hose, used to protect the reinforcement and core from environmental conditions and wear.
Minimum Inside Diameter The smallest inside diameter of the hose prior to assembly.
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Selection Guide

See individual hose series sections for additional technical information.
Materials of Construction Series FM FJ FL CT Core Convoluted 316L SS Convoluted 316L SS Convoluted 316L SS Convoluted 321 SS Reinforcement Metal Hose and Flexible Tubing 316L SS braid 304 SS braid standard; 316L SS braid available 321 SS braid PTFE Hose T B X S C N W F Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PTFE Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PTFE Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PTFE Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PTFE Convoluted DuPont Teflon PTFE Convoluted, carbon black-filled DuPont Teflon PTFE Smooth-bore, carbon black-filled DuPont Teflon PTFE Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PTFE
Cover
Page 10 16 21 25
316 SS braid standard; alloy 400 braid available 304 SS braid Fiber braid with 304 SS braid Fiber braid with 304 SS braid 300 SS braid Insulating wrap and aramid fiber braid Fiber braid with insulating wrap and 304 SS braid Fiberglass braid PFA Hose and Flexible Tubing
Silicone No cover standard; silicone cover available Silicone
30 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
U PFA
Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PFA Smooth-bore DuPont Teflon PFA
302 SS braid Vinyl Tubing
Silicone
59 61
LT
Smooth-bore clear vinyl
Nylon Hose
63
NG 7R 8R 7N 8N
Smooth-bore static dissipative nylon Smooth-bore nylon Smooth-bore nylon Smooth-bore nonconductive nylon Smooth-bore nonconductive nylon
Fiber braid Fiber braid Fiber braid Fiber braid Fiber braid Polyethylene Hose
Perforated black polyurethane with blue stripe Perforated black polyurethane Perforated black polyurethane Nonperforated orange polyurethane Nonperforated orange polyurethane
67 71 71 72 72
7P
Smooth-bore polyethylene
Fiber braid Rubber Hose
Nonperforated blue polyurethane
77
PB
Smooth-bore Buna N
Rayon fiber braid
Blue Buna N (other colors available)
79
Carbon black-filled DuPont Teflon PTFE core is available for applications that require static dissipation. Carbon black-filled PFA core is available for applications that require static dissipation.
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Selection Guide

See individual hose series sections for additional technical information.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Working Pressure at 70F (20C), psig (bar) Series FM FJ FL CT 1/8 3/16 1/4 3100
(213)
3/8 2000
(137)
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 Metal Hose and Flexible Tubing 1800
(124)
2 500
(34.4)
Temperature Range F (C) 325 to 850

(200 to 454)
Page 10 16 21 25
1500
(103)
1200
(82.6)
950
(65.4)
900
(62.0)
1600
(110)
1470
(101)
1110
(76.4)
860
(59.2)
680
(46.8)
680
(46.8)
520
(35.8)
450
(31.0)
325 to 800
(200 to 426)
1500
(103)
25
(1.7)
1200
(82.6)
25
(1.7)
25
(1.7)
25
(1.7)
325 to 850
(200 to 454)
100
(6.8)
25
(1.7)
70 to 1000
(20 to 537)
PTFE Hose T B X S C N W F 3000

(206)
3000
(206)
2500
(172)
2000
(137)
1500
(103)
1000
(68.9)
700
(48.2)
525
(36.1)
30 36 38 65 to 450
(53 to 230)
3500
(241)
3000
(206)
1800
(124)
1250
(86.1)
1000
(68.9)
3000
(206)
3500
(241)
3000
(206)
1800
(124)
1250
(86.1)
1000
(68.9
40 42 44 46 48
800
(55.1)
800
(55.1)
1500
(103)
1100
(75.7)
750
(51.6)
1250
(86.1)
750
(51.6)
375
(25.8)
1000
(68.9)
1000
(68.9)
325
(22.4)
650
(44.7)
450
(31.0)
PFA Hose and Flexible Tubing U PFA 275

(18.9)
300
(20.6)
300
(20.6)
250
(17.2)
200
(13.7)
150
(10.3)
275
(18.9)
180
(12.4)
125
(8.6)
83
(5.7)
61
(4.2)
65 to 450 (53 to 230) 70 to 400

(20 to 204)
59 61
Vinyl Tubing LT 40
(2.7)
30
(2.0)
25
(1.7)
15
(1.0)
10
(0.68)
40 to 165
(40 to 73)
63
Nylon Hose NG 7R 8R 7N 8N 5000

(344)
5000
(344)
2000
(137)
40 to 150
(40 to 65)
67 71 71 72 72
2750
(189)
2250
(155)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
5000
(344)
4000
(275)
3500
(241)
2250
(155)
2000
(137)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
2750
(189)
2250
(155)
2000
(137)
2250
(155)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
Polyethylene Hose 7P 2750

(189)
2250
(155)
2000
(137)
1500
(103)
1500
(103)
10 to 150
(23 to 65)
77
Rubber Hose PB 350

(24.1)
300
(20.6)
300
(20.6)
300
(20.6)
300
(20.6)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
79
C series hose is rated from 20 to 340F (28 to 171C) in the 1 1/2 and 2 in. nominal hose sizes.
Considerations for Selecting a Hose Assembly Solution

Temperature Identify the minimum and maximum temperatures the hose assembly will be exposed to with regard to the system media and the environment. Pressure Identify the minimum and maximum pressures (or vacuum) within and outside the hose assembly. Material Identify the system media and the environment to which the hose assembly will be exposed. This will help determine the materials of construction best suited to the application demands and whether the hose requires a static dissipative core. Movement Confirm whether the hose assembly will be installed in dynamic applications as this will require different considerations than a static application. Length Determine the most likely route for installation of the hose, and use this to identify length requirements. Orientation Clarify space constraint concerns. Hose assemblies with elbows and union ball joints may help resolve space constraint issues. Desired Flow Consider desired flow. Hose connection size, core tube construction, and routed installation may impact flow. Drainability Consider core construction as this will impact drainability. Test Reports Identify the need for documentation in the form of test reports. Special Marking Discuss special marking requirements; there are different options available to readily identify hose assemblies. Documentation and Regulatory Requirements Identify the need for special regulatory approvals or documentation. Additional Protection and Covers Identify whether covers are necessary for additional protection of the hose assemblies or surrounding systems.
PTFE and PFA are permeable materials. Gases vapors,
and liquids can migrate through a PTFE or PFA core. The rate of permeation is affected by many application-specific variables.
Use of hose and tubing within applications and handling
practices will affect how it performs over time. Catalog performance claims such as burst pressure, working pressure, static dissipation, moisture content, permeation rates, and cycle life apply to never-used products. For this reason, system maintenance and replacement schedules should be considered.
Cautions
Thermal cycling of any nonmetal hose may affect
its ability to maintain a positive seal. Testing should be performed to verify suitability in actual operating conditions. static dissipation and help to prevent static sparking. they contain conductive fluids. Verify the conductive properties of the system media prior to use.
All equipment must be properly grounded to allow

Cleanliness Identify the need for cleanliness. Ease of cleaning the internal surfaces of the hose, as well as maintaining outside cleanliness may be of concern. End Connections Identify the type of end connections which are most compatible with the system requirements. End connections differ with regard to materials of construction and pressure ratings.
Nonconductive hoses can be conduits for electricity if Nonperforated covers may blister in gas service.
Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Installation and Use Guide

Inspection Establish an inspection schedule based on system application and replacement history. Static Electricity Static electricity can be generated by fluid passing through the hose. Select hose with sufficient conductivity to ground the static electric charge. Vibration Evaluate amount of system vibration when selecting hose. Metal hose may not be appropriate for systems with constant or severe vibration. Length Take into consideration hose movement, system pressurization, and thermal expansion when determining hose length. Installing hose that does not have sufficient length to accommodate these factors may reduce hose life. Minimum Bend Radius Follow minimum bend radius requirements for your hose. Installing hose with smaller bends may kink hose and reduce hose life.
Correct Incorrect
Motion Absorption Distribute movement and prevent bends smaller than the hoses minimum bend radius by providing sufficient hose length.
Machine Tolerance Allow for changes in length resulting from machine motion and tolerances.
Correct
Incorrect
Minimum straight length
Bend radius
System Pressure Changes Allow sufficient hose length to accommodate changing system pressures. Do not connect high- and low pressure motion absorption hoses.
Lengthen Incorrect
Correct
Hose rupture or leakage may result from bending too close to the hose/fitting connection.
Shorten
Correct
Incorrect
Bending in One Plane Avoid twisting the hose by bending it in one plane only. For a machine pressure changes compound bend, use multiple hose pieces or other isolation methods.
Hose Strain Elbows and adapters can be used to relieve hose strain.
minimum bend radius
minimum bend radius
system pressure changes
Correct
Incorrect Correct Incorrect
For additional information, see SAE J1273, Recommended Practices for Hydraulic Hose Assemblies.
Images on this page reprinted with permission from SAE J1273. 2009 SAE International.
bending in one plane r2
10
FM Series Metal Hose

Features
METAL All-metal hose promotes corrosion resistance. 316L series stainless steel annular convoluted core. Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. and working pressures from End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum applications
vacuum to 3100 psig (213 bar).

Single braid layer of 316L stainless steel promotes hose
and medium-pressure corrosive environments, or where permeation is undesirable.

Standard and custom assemblies available. Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
pressure containment and exhibits strong performance in dynamic cycling applications.
helium leak testing. See page 83 for details. Weld 316 SS end connections
316L SS braid
316L SS core
Technical Data
Minimum Center Line Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 2.25 (5.72) 3.00 (7.62) 4.50 (11.4) 6.00 (15.2) 6.75 (17.1) 4.50 (11.4) 5.25 (13.3) 6.75 (17.1) Dynamic 10.0 (25.4) 12.0 (30.5) 16.0 (40.6) 17.0 (43.2) 20.0 (50.8) 23.0 (58.4) 26.0 (66.0) 32.0 (81.3) 325 to 850
(200 to 454)
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/4 (31.8) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8)
Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.28 (7.1) 0.42 (10.6) 0.53 (13.5) 0.80 (20.3) 1.03 (26.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.53 (38.9) 2.05 (52.1)
Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.53 (13.5) 0.69 (17.5) 0.85 (21.6) 1.15 (29.1) 1.45 (36.9) 1.75 (44.5) 2.02 (51.3) 2.57 (65.3)
Temperature Range F (C)
Working Pressure at 325 to 100F Vacuum to ... psig (bar) 3100 (213) 2000 (137) 1800 (124) 1500 (103) 1200 (82.6) 950 (65.4) 900 (62.0) 500 (34.4)
(200 to 37C)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 12 400 (854) 8 000 (551) 7 200 (496) 6 000 (413) 4 800 (330) 3 800 (261) 3 600 (248) 2 000 (137)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.33 (0.49) 0.29 (0.43) 0.45 (0.67) 0.62 (0.92) 0.77 (1.15) 1.05 (1.56) 1.18 (1.76) 1.66 (2.47)
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1 Power Piping, and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature, F (C) 325 (200) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 500 (260) 600 700 800 850
(315) (371) (426) (454)
1/4 3100 2604 2356 2170 2015 1922 1829 1767 1736
(213) (179) (162) (149) (138) (132) (126) (121) (119)
3/8 2000 (137) 1680 (115) 1520 (104) 1400 (96.4) 1300 (89.5) 1240 1180 1140 1120
(85.4) (81.3) (78.5) (77.1)
1/2 1800 1512 1368 1260 1170 1116 1062 1026 1008
(124) (104) (94.2) (86.8) (80.6) (76.8) (73.1) (70.6) (69.4)
3/4
1 1/4 950 798 722 665 618 589 561 542 532
(65.4) (54.9) (49.7) (45.8) (42.5) (40.5) (38.6) (37.3) (36.6)
1 1/2 900 (62.0) 756 (52.0) 684 (47.1) 630 (43.4) 585 (40.3) 558 (38.4) 531 (36.5) 513 (35.3) 504 (34.7) 500 420 380 350 325 310 295 285 280
2
(34.4) (28.9) (26.1) (24.1) (22.3) (21.3) (20.3) (19.6) (19.2)
Working Pressure, Vacuum to ... psig (bar) 1500 (103) 1200 (82.6) 1260 (86.8) 1008 (69.4) 1140 (86.8) 912 (62.8) 1050 (78.5) 840 (57.8) 975 (72.3) 780 (53.7) 930 (67.1) 885 (64.0) 855 (58.9) 840 (57.8) 744 708 684 672
(51.2) (47.8) (47.1) (46.3)
11

Testing
Every Swagelok FM series hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 5 std cm3/s. For additional testing, see Testing, page 83.

Swagelok FM series hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Do not subject flexible metal
hose to pressure surges, shock, or pulsations, where the peak pressure is greater than 50 % of the working pressure rating.

Standard Length Hose Assemblies
OAL L
Swagelok Tube Fitting to Male NPT End Connection

Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19
(4.8)
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Tube Fitting Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Overall Length OAL in. (cm) 12.0 (30.5) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (122) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (122) 24.0 (61.0) 60.0 (152)
Ordering Number SS-FM4SL4PM4-12 SS-FM4SL4PM4-36 SS-FM6SL6PM6-18 SS-FM6SL6PM6-36 SS-FM8SL8PM8-18 SS-FM8SL8PM8-48 SS-FM12SL12PM12-18 SS-FM12SL12PM12-48 SS-FM16SL16PM16-24 SS-FM16SL16PM16-60
Live Length L in. (cm) 8.26 (21.0) 32.3 (82.0) 14.2 (36.1) 32.2 (81.8) 13.6 (34.5) 43.6 (111) 13.4 (34.0) 43.4 (110) 18.8 (47.8) 54.8 (139)
Maximum Outside Dimension in. 0.95 (24.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.23 (31.3) 1.74 (44.2) 2.03 (51.6)
0.28
(7.1)
0.41
(10.4)
0.66
(16.0)
0.88
(22.4)

Dimensions Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Tube Fitting Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Overall Length OAL in. (cm) 12.0 (30.5) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (122) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (122) 24.0 (61.0) 60.0 (152) Live Length L in. (cm) 8.12 (20.6) 32.1 (81.5) 14.0 (35.6) 32.0 (81.3) 13.5 (34.3) 43.5 (110) 13.3 (33.8) 43.3 (110) 18.7 (47.5) 54.7 (139) Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19
(4.8)
Ordering Number SS-FM4SL4SL4-12 SS-FM4SL4SL4-36 SS-FM6SL6SL6-18 SS-FM6SL6SL6-36 SS-FM8SL8SL8-18 SS-FM8SL8SL8-48 SS-FM12SL12SL12-18 SS-FM12SL12SL12-48 SS-FM16SL16SL16-24 SS-FM16SL16SL16-60
Maximum Outside Dimension in. 0.95 (24.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.23 (31.3) 1.74 (44.2) 2.03 (51.6)
0.28
(7.1)
0.41
(10.4)
0.66
(16.0)
0.88
(22.4)
See next page for more hose assemblies.
METAL
12

Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connections
METAL Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16
(4.1)
Nominal Tube Hose Adapter Size Size in. in.
Overall Length OAL in. (cm) 12.0 (30.5) 24.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (122)
Ordering Number SS-FM4TA4TA4-12 SS-FM4TA4TA4-24 SS-FM4TA4TA4-36 SS-FM4TA4TA4-48
Live Length L in. (cm) 8.48 (21.5) 20.5 (52.1) 32.5 (82.6) 44.5 (113)
Maximum Outside Dimension in. (mm) 0.75

(19.1)
1/4
A
1/4
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below. Typical Ordering Number
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - FM 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 F
1 Material 4 End Connections
71CM-F
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve H = Helium leak test (1 3 109 std cm3/s) N3 = Nitrogen pressure test S = 302 SS spring guard, hose-length T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two lanyard tags W = Hydrostatic test Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 84. Se page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel

2 Hose
See End Connection Designator column in tables on next page. Add designators in reverse alphanumeric order.
5 Overall Length
FM = FM series metal hose

4 6 8 12
= = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
16 20 24 32
= = = =
1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Include CM as shown for centimeter lengths.
13

End Connections
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 1 16 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 10 6 12 8 End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA12 TA16 TM6 TM10 TM12 1.76 1.82 2.22 2.35 2.69 Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 0.27 0.37 0.58 0.80
(4.1) (6.9) (9.4) (14.7) (20.3)
A
(44.7) (46.2) (56.4) (59.7) (68.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.75 0.93 1.05 1.38 1.69

(19.1) (23.6) (26.7) (35.1) (42.9)
44.4 (1.75) 47.0 (1.85) 57.2 (2.25)
4.1 (0.16) 7.1 (0.28) 8.9 (0.35)
19.1 (0.75) 23.5 (0.93) 26.7 (1.05)

Cap Weld Style 1 in. and Under Tube Nominal Fitting Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 5/8 8 3/4 12 1 16 1 1/4 20 1 1/2 24 2 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 8 4 10 6 12 8 End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL6 SL8 SL10 SL12 SL16 SL20 SL24 SL32 SM6 SM8 SM10 SM12
A 1.94 (49.3) 2.00 (50.8) 2.02 (51.3) 2.24 (56.9) 2.27 (57.7) 2.35 (59.7) 2.64 (67.1) 4.04 (103) 4.75 (121) 5.72 (145) 62.2 63.2 51.6 56.9
(2.45) (2.49) (2.03) (2.24)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 0.50 0.63 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.88 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.7
(10.4) (12.7) (16.0) (22.4) (27.7) (34.0) (47.8) (0.19) (0.25) (0.31) (0.38)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.95 0.95 1.09 1.23 0.95 1.74 2.03 2.23 2.61 3.48
(24.1) (24.1) (27.7) (31.3) (24.1) (44.2) (51.6) (58.9) (66.3) (88.4)
Manual Weld Style Over 1 in.
0.20.6 (0.81) 0.20.6 (0.81) 1.10 (27.9) 1.23 (31.3)
Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance above 450F (232C).
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 12 16
A 2.60 2.83 4.19 4.80

(66.0) (71.9) (106) (122)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.18 (4.6) 0.73 (18.4) 0.40 (10.2) 1.09 (27.7) 0.65 (16.5) 1.52 (38.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.89 (47.9)
See next page for more end connections.
METAL
14

METAL
Rotatable Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings
Dimensions, in. (mm) VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 12 16 End Connection Designator RF4 RF8 RF12 RF16 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.87 (22.1) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.23 (31.3) 1.74 (44.2) 2.03 (51.6)
A 2.00 2.16 4.19 4.80

(50.8) (54.9) (106) (122)

VCO Size in. 1/4 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 End Connection Designator VF4 VF8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.80 (20.3) 1.16 (29.5)
A 2.11 (53.6) 2.14 (54.4)
SAE 37 (JIC) Female Swivel

Swivel Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 End Connection Designator AS4 AS6 AS8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.17 (4.3) 0.28 (7.1) 0.42 (10.7) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.94 (23.9) 1.09 (27.7) 1.23 (31.3)
A 1.87 (47.5) 1.98 (50.3) 2.25 (57.2)

NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 End Connection Designator PF4 PF6 PF8 PF12 A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.72 (18.3) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.94 (23.9) 1.09 (27.7) 1.23 (31.3) 1.74 (44.2)
in. (mm) 1.81 (46.0) 1.87 (47.5) 2.18 (55.4) 2.21 (56.1)
15

METAL
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered

Cap Weld Style 1 in. and Under
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Size in.
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 6 4 8 12 16 20 24 32 4 8 End Connection Designator PM4 PM4 PM6 PM8 PM8 PM12 PM16 PM20 PM24 PM32 MT4 MT8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 0.28 0.38 0.47 0.47 0.63 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81
(7.1) (7.1) (9.7) (11.9) (11.9) (16.0) (22.4) (27.7) (34.0) (46.0)
1/4
A
3/8 1/2
Manual Weld Style Over 1 in.
3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1/4 1/2
A NPT 1.80 (45.7) 1.81 (46.0) 1.81 (46.0) 1.99 (50.6) 2.15 (54.6) 2.22 (56.4) 2.54 (64.5) 3.06 (77.7) 3.72 (94.5) 4.19 (106)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.94 (23.9) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.02 (25.8) 1.23 (31.3) 1.74 (44.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.03 (51.6) 2.47 (62.6) 3.19 (81.0) 0.94 (23.9) 1.23 (31.3)
ISO/BSP Tapered 1.80 (45.7) 2.16 (54.9)
0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9)
16
FJ Series Metal Hose

Features
METAL General purpose all-metal hose. 316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. and working pressures from Optional 316 stainless steel braid available to provide
greater corrosion resistance.

Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum or general
vacuum to 1600 psig (110 bar).

Single braid layer of 304 stainless steel promotes hose
purpose applications where permeation is undesirable.

Standard assemblies available. Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
pressure containment.
End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
helium leak testing. See page 83 for details.
304 SS braid
316L SS core
Weld
316 SS end connections
304 SS weld collar
Technical Data
Minimum Center Line Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 0.75 (1.90) 0.87 (2.21) 1.04 (2.64) 1.61 (4.09) 1.89 (4.80) 2.16 (5.49) 2.33 (5.92) 3.10 (7.87) Dynamic 4.33 (11.0) 5.91 (15.0) 6.50 (16.5) 8.86 (22.5) 10.2 (25.9) 11.8 (30.0) 13.4 (34.0) 15.4 (39.1) 325 to 800
(200 to 426)
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/4 (31.8) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8)
Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.5) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8)
Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.47 (11.9) 0.68 (17.3) 0.81 (20.5) 1.20 (30.5) 1.50 (38.0) 1.80 (45.7) 2.13 (54.0) 2.66 (67.5)
Working Pressure at 325 to 100F Vacuum to ... psig (bar) 1600 (110) 1470 (101) 1110 (76.4) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 680 (46.8) 520 (35.8) 450 (31.0)
(200 to 37C)
Burst at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6400 (440) 6000 (413) 4500 (310) 3500 (241) 2680 (184) 2600 (179) 2200 (151) 1800 (124)
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 325 (200) to 300 (148) 400 (204) 500 (260) 600 (315) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (426) 1600 1488 1376 1296 1232
(110) (102) (94.8) (89.2) (84.8)
1/4
3/8 1470 1367 1264 1191 1132

(101) (94.1) (87.1) (82.0) (77.9)
1/2 1110 1032 955 899 855

(76.4) (71.1) (65.7) (61.9) (58.8)
3/4 860 (59.2) 800 (55.1) 740 (50.9) 697 (47.9) 662 (45.6) 645 (44.4) 636 (43.8)
1 680 632 585 551 524

(46.8) (43.5) (40.2) (37.9) (36.0)
1 1/4 680 632 585 551 524

(46.8) (43.5) (40.2) (37.9) (36.0)
1 1/2 520 (35.8) 484 (33.3) 447 (30.8) 421 (29.0) 400 (27.5) 390 (26.8) 385 (26.5)
2 450 419 387 365 347

(31.0) (28.8) (26.6) (25.1) (23.8)
Working Pressure, Vacuum to ... psig (bar)
1200 (82.6) 1103 (75.9) 1184 (81.5) 1088 (74.9)
833 (57.3) 821 (56.5)
510 (35.1) 503 (34.6)
510 (35.1) 503 (34.6)
338 (23.2) 333 (22.9)
17

Testing
Every Swagelok FJ series hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 5 std cm3/s. For additional testing, see Testing, page 83.

Swagelok FJ series hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Do not subject flexible metal
hose to pressure surges, shock, or pulsations, where the peak pressure is greater than 50 % of the working pressure rating.
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
SS - FJ 4 TA4 PM4 1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel 2 Hose
28 F
71CM-F
6 Options For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator.
4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables on next page.
Add designators in reverse alphanumeric order.

5 Overall Length
Add designators in alphanumeric order. CRN F F1 H N3 T T2 T5 W Z = = = = = = = = = = Lanyard tag with CRN Fire jacket Thermosleeve Helium leak test (1 3 109 std cm3/s) Nitrogen pressure test Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags Clamp tag Hydrostatic test 316L SS braid material
FJ = FJ series metal hose

4 6 8 12
= = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
16 20 24 32
= = = =
1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 81. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
See next page for end connection designators and dimensions.
METAL
18

End Connections
METAL

Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 1 16 1 1/4 20 1 1/2 24 2 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 8 4 10 6 12 8 18 12 25 16 32 20 38 24 End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA12 TA16 TA20 TA24 TA32 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM12 TM18 TM25 TM32 TM38
A 1.52 (38.6) 1.81 (46.0) 2.16 (54.9) 2.50 (63.5) 2.99 (75.9) 3.91 (99.3) 4.47 (114) 5.45 (138) 39.0 39.2 53.3 64.8 61.0 75.9 87.4 97.3
(1.54) (1.54) (2.10) (2.55) (2.40) (2.99) (3.44) (3.83)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 0.27 0.37 0.58 0.80 1.02 1.25 1.72 4.1 5.6 7.1 8.9 14.0 19.8 26.4 31.8
(4.6) (6.9) (9.4) (14.7) (20.3) (25.9) (31.8) (43.7) (0.16) (0.22) (0.28) (0.35) (0.55) (0.78) (1.04) (1.25)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.54 0.78 0.93 1.32 1.63 2.18 2.61 3.48 13.7 13.7 19.8 23.6 33.5 41.4 57.9 69.6
(13.7) (19.8) (23.6) (33.5) (41.4) (55.2) (66.3) (88.4) (0.54) (0.54) (0.78) (0.93) (1.32) (1.63) (2.28) (2.74)
End Connections with Hex Flat
Preswaged Nuts and Ferrules Over 1 in. / 25 mm
Furnished with nut, preswaged silver-plated front ferrule, and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance above 450F (232C).

Tube Nominal Fitting Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 1 16 1 1/4 20 1 1/2 24 2 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 8 4 10 6 12 8 18 12 25 16 32 20 38 24 End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8 SL12 SL16 SL20 SL24 SL32 SM6 SM8 SM10 SM12 SM18 SM25 SM32 SM38
A 1.87 (47.5) 2.07 (52.6) 2.43 (61.7) 2.62 (66.6) 3.20 (81.3) 3.79 (96.3) 4.25 (108) 5.22 (133) 47.5 (1.87) 48.3 (1.90) 53.3 (2.10) 61.7 (2.43) 66.5 (2.62) 81.3 (3.20) 97.8 (3.85) 110 (4.33)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 0.28 0.41 0.63 0.88 1.09 1.35
(4.8) (7.1) (10.4) (16.0) (22.4) (27.7) (34.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.65 0.80 1.02 1.32 1.63 2.03 2.47
(16.6) (20.3) (25.8) (33.5) (41.4) (51.6) (65.6)
1.82 (46.2) 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.7 15.0 21.8 28.7 33.8
(0.19) (0.25) (0.31) (0.38) (0.59) (0.86) (1.13) (1.33)
3.19 (81.0) 16.3 13.7 19.8 23.6 33.5 41.4 57.9 69.6
(0.64) (0.69) (0.82) (1.00) (1.23) (1.60) (2.10) (2.51)
Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance above 450F (232C).
19

VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 12 16 End Connection Designator RM4 RM8 RM12 RM16 METAL
A 1.69 2.00 2.63 2.97

(42.9) (50.8) (66.8) (75.4)

SWAGELOK
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
A 1.69 2.00 2.63 2.97

(42.9) (50.8) (66.8) (75.4)
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
A 1.15 1.31 1.57 1.73

(29.2) (33.3) (39.9) (43.9)
Swivel Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16
End Connection Designator AS4 AS6 AS8 AS12 AS16
A 2.13 2.36 2.50 1.94 2.15

(54.1) (59.9) (63.5) (49.3) (54.6)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.19 (4.8) 0.65 (16.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3) 0.39 (9.9) 1.02 (25.8) 0.61 (15.5) 1.45 (36.8) 0.84 (21.3) 1.74 (44.2)
NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 24
End Connection Designator PF4 PF6 PF8 PF12 PF16 PF24
A 1.60 1.84 2.45 2.41 2.92 3.28

(46.0) (46.7) (62.2) (61.2) (74.2) (83.3)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.30 (7.6) 0.87 (22.1) 0.42 (10.7) 1.02 (25.8) 0.58 (14.7) 1.23 (31.3) 0.73 (18.5) 1.52 (38.7) 0.95 (24.1) 1.89 (47.9) 1.50 (38.1) 2.76 (70.0)
20

METAL
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 32 4 6 8 12 16 20 24 End Connection Designator PM4 PM6 PM8 PM12 PM16 PM20 PM24 PM32 NPT 1.70 1.91 2.32 2.45 3.05 3.14 3.38 3.63 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 0.38 0.47 0.63 0.88 1.09 1.34 1.81 0.28 0.38 0.47 0.63 0.88 1.09 1.34
(7.1) (9.7) (11.9) (16.0) (22.4) (27.7) (34.0) (46.0) (7.1) (9.7) (11.9) (16.0) (22.4) (27.7) (34.0)
A
(43.2) (48.5) (58.9) (62.2) (77.5) (79.8) (85.9) (92.2)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.65 (16.6) 0.80 (20.3) 1.02 (25.8) 1.32 (33.5) 1.63 (41.4) 2.03 (51.6) 2.47 (62.6) 2.76 (70.0) 16.6 20.3 25.8 33.5 41.4 51.6 62.6
(0.65) (0.80) (1.02) (1.32) (1.63) (2.03) (2.47)
ISO/BSP Tapered MT4 1.70 (43.2) MT6 1.91 (48.5) MT8 2.32 (58.9) MT12 2.45 (62.2) MT16 3.05 (77.5) MT20 3.14 (79.8) MT24 3.38 (85.9)
Tube Butt Welds
A
(19.0 mm)
0.75 in.
Tube Butt Weld Wall Size Thickness in. in. 1/4 0.035 3/8 0.035 1/2 0.049 3/4 0.049 1 0.065
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16
End Connection Designator TB4 TB6 TB8 TB12 TB16
A 1.64 1.82 2.04 2.14 2.46

(41.7) (46.2) (51.8) (54.4) (62.5)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.31 (7.9) 0.78 (19.8) 0.40 (10.2) 0.93 (23.6) 0.65 (16.5) 1.32 (33.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.63 (41.4)
21
FL Series Metal Hose

Features
316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. 1/4 and 1/2 in. sizes and working pressures from vacuum to METAL Highly flexible all-metal hose. Exhibits strong performance in dynamic cycling
applications.
Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum and general
1500 psig (103 bar).

Single braid layer of 321 stainless steel ensures hose
purpose dynamic-cycling applications.

Standard and custom assemblies available. Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
pressure containment.
End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
helium leak testing. See page 83 for details.
321 SS braid
316L SS core
Weld
Technical Data
Minimum Center Line Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.00 (25.4) 1.75 (44.5) Dynamic 5.50 (14.0) 7.00 (17.8) Working Pressure at 325 to 100F Vacuum to ... psig (bar) 1500 (103) 1200 (82.6)
(200 to 37C)
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 1/2 (12.7)
Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.24 (6.1) 0.47 (11.9)
Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.39 (9.8) 0.73 (18.6)
Temperature Range F (C) 325 to 850

(200 to 454)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6000 (413) 4800 (330)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.12 (0.18) 0.24 (0.36)
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1 Power Piping, and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 325 (200) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 500 (260) 600 700 800 850
(315) (371) (426) (454)
Testing
Every Swagelok FL series hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 5 std cm3/s. For additional testing, see Testing, page 83.
1/4
1/2

Swagelok FL series hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Working Pressure Vacuum to ... psig (bar) 1500 1260 1140 1050 975 930 885 855 840
(103) (86.8) (78.5) (72.3) (67.1) (64.0) (60.9) (58.9) (57.8)
1200 1008 912 840 780 744 708 684 672
(124) (104) (62.8) (57.8) (53.7) (51.2) (48.7) (47.1) (46.3)
Do not subject flexible metal hose to pressure

surges, shock, or pulsations, where the peak pressure is greater than 50 % of the working pressure rating.
See next page for ordering information and dimensions.
22

METAL

L
OAL

Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter
Nominal Hose Size
Tube Adapter Size
Overall Length OAL in. (cm) 12.0 (30.5)
Ordering Number SS-FL4TA4TA4-12 SS-FL4TA4TA4-24 SS-FL4TA4TA4-36 SS-FL4TA4TA4-48 SS-FL8TA8TA8-12 SS-FL8TA8TA8-24 SS-FL8TA8TA8-36 SS-FL8TA8TA8-48 SS-FL4TM6TM6-50CM SS-FL4TM6TM6-100CM SS-FL4TM6TM6-150CM SS-FL8TM12TM12-50CM SS-FL8TM12TM12-100CM SS-FL8TM12TM12-150CM
Live Length L in. (cm) 8.48 (21.5) 20.5 (52.1) 32.5 (82.6) 44.5 (113) 7.50 (19.1) 19.5 (49.5) 31.5 (80.0) 43.5 (110) cm (in.) 41.1 (16.2) 91.2 (35.9) 141 (55.6) 38.6 (15.2) 88.6 (34.9) 139 (54.7)
Maximum Outside Diameter
in. (mm) 0.16

(4.1)
1/4
1/4
24.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (122) 12.0 (30.5) 24.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (122) cm (in.) 50.0 (19.7) 100 (39.4) 150 (59.1) 50.0 (19.7)
0.66
(16.8)
1/2
1/2
0.37
(9.4)
1.01
(25.7)
Dimensions, mm (in.) 1/4 in. 6
mm (in.) 4.1
(0.16)
16.8
(0.66)
1/2 in.
12
100 (39.4) 150 (59.1)
8.9
(0.35)
25.7
(1.01)
23

METAL
6
or
SS - FL 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 F
1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel 2 Hose 4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables below.
71CM-F

5 Overall Length
Add designators in alphanumeric order. CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve H = Helium leak test (1 3 109 std cm3/s) N3 = Nitrogen pressure test S = 302 SS spring guard, hose-length S2 = 302 SS spring guard, 6 in.-length T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two lanyard tags W = Hydrostatic test Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 81.
FL = FL series metal hose

4 = 1/4 8 = 1/2
End Connections
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 4 3/8 8 1/2 8 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 8 4 4 10 8 12 8 End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA6 TA8 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM10 TM12 End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8 SM6 SM10 SM12 1.76 1.79 2.03 2.25 44.4 45.2 45.2 51.3 57.4
See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.

Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.1) 0.27 (6.9) 0.37 (9.4) 4.1 (0.16) 5.6 (0.22) 7.1 (0.28) 8.9 (0.35) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 4.8 (0.19) 7.9 (0.31) 9.7 (0.38) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.66 0.66 1.01 1.01
(16.8) (16.8) (25.7) (25.7)
A
(44.7) (45.5) (51.6) (57.2) (1.75) (1.78) (1.78) (2.02) (2.26)
16.8 (0.66) 16.8 (0.66) 16.8 (0.66) 25.7 (1.01) 25.7 (1.01) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.80 (20.3) 1.23 (31.3) 1.23 (31.3) 20.3 (0.80) 31.3 (1.23) 31.3 (1.23)
Tube Nominal Fitting Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 3/8 8 1/2 8 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 10 8 12 8
A 1.94 (49.3) 2.22 (56.4) 2.33 (59.2) 49.3 (1.94) 56.4 (2.22) 59.2 (2.33)
24

METAL
Dimensions, in. (mm) VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 End Connection Designator RM4 RM8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.2) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.66 (16.8) 1.01 (25.7)
A 2.60 (66.0) 2.88 (73.2)
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8
End Connection Designator RF4 RF8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside A Diameter Dimension 2.00 (50.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1) 2.21 (56.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.3)
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/2
End Connection Designator VF4 VF8
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 8 8 4 8 End Connection Designator PM4 PM6 PM8 MT4 MT8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.80 (20.3) 1.23 (31.3) 1.23 (31.3) 0.80 (20.3) 1.23 (31.3)
A NPT 1.80 (45.7) 2.02 (51.3) 2.21 (56.1)
ISO/BSP Tapered 1.80 (45.7) 2.21 (56.1)
Tube Butt Welds
A
(19.0 mm)
0.75 in.
Tube Butt Weld Wall Size Thickness in. in. 1/4 0.035 1/2 0.049
End Connection Designator TB4 TB8
25
CT Series Convoluted Metal Tubing

Features
321 stainless steel annular convoluted core. Size range of 1/4 through 1 1/2 in. and working pressures up METAL Form-fit-and-stay, flexible, all-metal tubing. Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum or low-
pressure static applications.

Standard and custom tubing lengths, custom tubing
to 100 psig (6.8 bar).

Annealed material enables tubing to be compressed by
assemblies, and adapters for field assembly are available.

Options include additional helium leak testing and tubing
at least 15 % and extended up to 50 % of manufactured length.

Form-fit-and-stay capability of convoluted tubing can
tags. See page 83 for details.
compensate for misalignment and system reroutes between static connections in vacuum or low-pressure static applications. 321 SS core 321 SS cuff Weld 316 SS end connections and 304 SS adapters
Technical DataCT Series Convoluted Metal Tubing

Nominal Tubing Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.5) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.38 (9.5) 0.58 (14.7) 0.71 (17.9) 1.08 (27.4) 1.36 (34.5) 1.92 (48.7) Temperature Range F (C) Working Pressure 109 torr to ... psig (bar) 100 (6.8) Nominal Tubing Wall Thickness in. (mm) Tubing Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.04 (0.06) 0.07 (0.10) 0.09 (0.13) 0.19 (0.28) 0.23 (0.34) 0.34 (0.51)
Form-fit-and-stay
70 to 1000
(20 to 537)
25 (1.7)
0.006 (0.15)
Technical DataEnd Connections and Adapters

End Connection Type VCR Male and female VCO Male and female XBA adapter XOA adapter Material 316 SS 316 SS 304 SS 304 SS Temperature Range F (C) 70 to 400
(20 to 204)
Availability Factory welded Factory welded or field assembly Field assembly
70 to 1000
(20 to 537)
70 to 1000
(20 to 537)
70 to 400
(20 to 204)
Testing
Every Swagelok CT series tubing assembly with factory-welded end connections is inboard helium leak tested to maximum leak rate of 1.8 3 10 7 std cm3/s. For additional testing, see Testing, page 83.

Swagelok CT series tubing assemblies and adapters are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each item is individually packaged for cleanliness and protection.
Not suitable for dynamic flexing

applications.
26

METAL
Standard Tubing
B T A L
Nominal Tube Size T in.
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 321-4-X-2 321-4-X-4 321-4-X-6 321-4-X-12 321-4-X-24 321-6-X-1 321-6-X-3 321-6-X-6 321-6-X-12 321-6-X-24 321-8-X-1 321-8-X-3 321-8-X-6 321-8-X-12 321-8-X-24 321-8-X-36 321-12-X-1 321-12-X-3 321-12-X-6 321-12-X-12 321-12-X-24 321-12-X-36 321-16-X-1 321-16-X-3 321-16-X-6 321-16-X-12 321-16-X-24 321-16-X-36 321-24-X-1 321-24-X-3 321-24-X-6 321-24-X-12 321-24-X-24 321-24-X-36 Cuff Length A Maximum Outside Diameter B Live Length, L Compressed 1.50 (38.1) 3.25 (82.6) 4.75 (121) 9.00 (229) 18.0 0.75 2.50 4.75 9.00 18.0 0.75 2.50 4.75 9.00 18.0 24.0 0.75 2.50 4.75 9.00 18.0 24.0 0.75 2.50 4.75 9.00 18.0 24.0 0.75 2.50 4.75 9.00 18.0 24.0
(457) (19.1) (63.5) (121) (229) (457) (19.1) (63.5) (121) (229) (457) (610) (19.1) (63.5) (121) (229) (457) (610) (19.1) (63.5) (121) (229) (457) (610) (19.1) (63.5) (121) (229) (457) (610)
1/4
0.75
(19.1)
0.38
(9.7)
Manufactured 2.00 (50.8) 4.00 (102) 6.00 (152) 12.0 (305) 24.0 1.00 3.00 6.00 12.0 24.0 1.00 3.00 6.00 12.0 24.0 36.0 1.00 3.00 6.00 12.0 24.0 36.0 1.00 3.00 6.00 12.0 24.0 36.0 1.00 3.00 6.00 12.0 24.0 36.0
(610) (25.4) (76.2) (152) (305) (610) (25.4) (76.2) (152) (305) (610) (914) (25.4) (76.2) (152) (305) (610) (914) (25.4) (76.2) (152) (305) (610) (914) (25.4) (76.2) (152) (305) (610) (914)
Extended 3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 1.50 4.50 9.00 18.0 36.0 1.50 4.50 9.00 18.0 36.0 54.0 1.50 4.50 9.00 18.0 36.0 54.0 1.50 4.50 9.00 18.0 36.0 54.0 1.50 4.50 9.00 18.0 36.0 54.0
(914) (38.1) (114) (229) (457) (914) (38.1) (114) (229) (457) (914) (1370) (38.1) (114) (229) (457) (914) (1370) (38.1) (114) (229) (457) (914) (1370) (38.1) (114) (229) (457) (914) (1370)
Maximum Angular Displacement 180
360
3/8
0.75
(19.1)
0.58
(14.7)
90 225 360 45 180
1/2
1.00
(25.4)
0.71
(18.0)
360
3/4
1.00
(25.4)
1.08
(27.4)
30 90 180 360 20 90 180 360 15 60 120 240 360
1.00
(25.4)
1.36
(34.5)
1 1/2
1.00
(25.4)
1.92
(48.8)
Angular displacement based on nominal live length, as manufactured. Angular displacement is not recommended for
applications involving pressure surges.
27

Custom Tubing and Tubing Assemblies
Build a custom tubing or tubing assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below. Typical Ordering Number
METAL
3 2 1 - 4 - X - 36 F M R - H L T
1 Material Tubing 321 = 321 stainless steel 2 Tube OD, in. 4 Manufactured Live Length Insert length in inches, in whole numbers. 1/4 in. tubing size: 1 to 120 in. All other tubing sizes: 1 to 96 in. 6 Options
For tubing assemblies Add designators in alphanumeric order. -CRN -HLT -T -T2 = = = = Lanyard tag with CRN Helium leak test Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
4 6 8 12 16 24
= = = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Manufactured lengths over 48 in. but less than 120 in. are spliced from two pieces; manufactured lengths of 120 in. are spliced from three pieces. To calculate the overall length of the custom tubing assembly, add the manufactured live length (L) and two times the cuff length (A) for the appropriate sized hose.
5 End Connections For tubing assemblies First End Connection Second End Connection None XBA adapter Female VCR Male VCR Female VCO None Female VCR Male VCR Male VCO None Male VCR None Female VCO Male VCR Male VCO None Male VCO
3 Tubing
X = CT series convoluted metal tubing
XBA adapter
Female VCR
Male VCR
Female VCO
Male VCO
Designator -B1 -B2 FRB MRB FOB FR DFR FMR FRMO MR DMR FO DFO FOMR FMO MO DMO
See next page for factorywelded end connections.
28

Factory-Welded End Connections
METAL
VCR Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside A Diameter Dimension 1.95 (49.5) 0.13 (3.3) 0.87 (22.1) 2.06 (52.3) 0.23 (5.8) 1.23 (31.3) 2.25 (57.2) 0.33 (8.4) 1.23 (31.3)
VCR Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
VCO Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Male VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings
VCO Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
XBA Adapter
Adapter Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
A 1.55 1.58 1.94 2.03 2.31 3.06

(39.4) (40.1) (49.3) (51.6) (58.7) (77.7)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.18 (4.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.31 (7.9) 0.58 (14.7) 0.39 (9.9) 1.08 (27.4) 0.61 (15.5) 1.08 (27.4) 0.86 (21.8) 1.36 (34.5) 1.36 (34.5) 1.92 (48.8)
29

End Connections for Field Assembly XBA Adapters
Brazing material XBA adapter
Convoluted tubing ID 0.25 in. A B C T

Select an adapter ordering number.
XBA adapters are brazed or soldered to convoluted
(6.4 mm)
vacuum tubing.
XBA adapters allow for connecting to socket and butt weld
fittings, Swagelok tube fittings, and Ultra-Torr vacuum fittings.

Material is 304 stainless steel.
T in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number 304-4-XBA 304-6-XBA 304-8-XBA 304-12-XBA 304-16-XBA 304-24-XBA
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.94 (23.9) 1.00 (25.4) 1.19 (30.2) 1.28 (32.5) 1.56 (39.6) 2.31 (58.7) B 0.69 (17.5) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.03 (26.2) 1.31 (33.3) 2.06 (52.3) C 0.16 (4.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.85 (21.6) 1.35 (34.3)
Not recommended for gas service with Swagelok tube fitting.
XOA Adapters
Ultra-Torr vacuum fitting

XOA adapter
Convoluted tubing ID C T
XOA adapters support the tubing cuff when using
0.12 in. A
(3.1 mm)
convoluted vacuum tubing products with Ultra-Torr vacuum fittings.

XOA adapters provide a leak-tight connection and are
reusable.
Material is 304 stainless steel.
T in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number 304-4-XOA 304-6-XOA 304-8-XOA 304-12-XOA 304-16-XOA 304-24-XOA
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.75 (19.1) C 0.16 (4.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 1.00 (25.4) 0.60 (15.2) 0.85 (21.6) 1.35 (34.3)
Ultra-Torr Vacuum Fittings

See the Swagelok UltraTorr Vacuum Fittings catalog, MS-01-32, for more information.
METAL
30
T Series PTFE Hose

Features
PTFE hose with permeation-resistant features. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. Size range of 1/4 through 1 in. and working pressures up to Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
applications that require static dissipation.

Select static dissipative hose assemblies are ECE R110
3000 psig (206 bar).

Single braid layer of 304 stainless steel (316L SS and alloy
approved; see page 84 for more information.

Commonly used where chemical compatibility and
400 available) ensures hose pressure containment and protects the core from abrasion.
PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part PTFE
permeation resistance is desired.

Standard and custom assemblies available. Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 83
177.1550 USDA 3A for contact with water, food, and beverage. 304 SS braid, standard PTFE core
for details.
303 SS collar
316 SS and other alloy end connections
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.5) 1/2
(12.7)
Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19 (4.8) 0.31 (7.9) 0.41 (10.3) 0.63 (15.9) 0.88 (22.2)
Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.31 (7.9) 0.44 (11.1) 0.56 (14.3) 0.81 (20.6) 1.03 (26.2)
Minimum Center Line Working Bend Radius Temperature Pressure at in. (cm) Range 70F (20C) Static Dynamic F (C) psig (bar) 304 SS Braid (TH and TC) 1.50 (3.81) 3.50 (8.89) 4.50 (11.4) 6.00 (15.2) 9.00 (22.9) 2.00 (5.08) 5.00 (12.7) 6.00 (15.2) 7.50 (19.1) 11.3 (28.7) Alloy 400 Braid (TL4) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 12 000 (826) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 6 000 (413) 4 000 (275)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.08 (0.12) 0.12 (0.17) 0.15 (0.22) 0.28 (0.41) 0.39 (0.58)
3000 (206) 65 to 450

(53 to 232)
2500 (172) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9)
3/4 (19.1) 1 (25.4)
1/4 (6.4)
0.19 (4.8)
0.31 (7.9)
1.50 (3.81)
2.00 (5.08)
1500 (103)
6 000 (413)
0.08 (0.12)
Ratings are base on burst testing.
Braid Material Nominal Hose Size in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (230) 1/4 2250 3000 1740 1560 1440 1380
(155) (206) (119)
Testing
304 SS (TH and TC) Alloy 400 (TL4) 3/4 1 1/4
3/8
1/2
Every Swagelok PTFE hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1.5 times the working pressure to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 1875 (129) 1500 (103) 1125 (77.5) 750 2500 (172) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 1450 (99.9) 1160 (79.9) 870 (59.9) 580 (107) 1300 (89.5) 1040 (71.6) 780 (53.7) 520 (99.2) 1200 (82.6) 960 (66.1) 720 (49.6) 480 (95.0) 1150 (79.2) 920 (63.3) 690 (47.5) 460
(51.6) 1500 (103) (68.9) 1500 (103) (39.9) 1305 (89.9) (35.8) 1215 (83.7) (33.0) 1185 (81.6) (31.6) 1170 (80.6)

Swagelok PTFE hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
31
T Series PTFE Hose

OAL

Dimensions Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension in. (mm)
Nominal Tube Hose Adapter Size Size Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
3/4 1
3/4 1
Overall Length OAL in. (cm) 8.00 (20.3) 14.0 (35.6) 20.0 (50.8) 26.0 (66.0) 38.0 (96.5) 50.0 (127) 62.0 (157) 74.0 (188) 122 (310) 14.0 (35.6) 20.0 (50.8) 26.0 (66.0) 38.0 (96.5) 50.0 (127) 62.0 (157) 74.0 (188) 14.5 (36.8) 26.5 (67.3) 38.5 (97.8) 50.5 (128) 62.5 (159) 74.5 (189) 26.5 (67.3) 38.5 (97.8) 39.5 (100) 51.5 (131) cm 35.6 66.0 96.5 67.3 97.8
(in.) (14.0) (26.0) (38.0) (26.5) (38.5)
Ordering Number SS-4BHT-6 SS-4BHT-12 SS-4BHT-18 SS-4BHT-24 SS-4BHT-36 SS-4BHT-48 SS-4BHT-60 SS-4BHT-72 SS-4BHT-120 SS-6BHT-12 SS-6BHT-18 SS-6BHT-24 SS-6BHT-36 SS-6BHT-48 SS-6BHT-60 SS-6BHT-72 SS-8BHT-12 SS-8BHT-24 SS-8BHT-36 SS-8BHT-48 SS-8BHT-60 SS-8BHT-72 SS-12BHT-24 SS-12BHT-36 SS-16BHT-36 SS-16BHT-48 SS-4MBHT-12 SS-4MBHT-24 SS-4MBHT-36 SS-8MBHT-24 SS-8MBHT-36
Live Length L in. (cm) 4.72 (12.0) 10.7 (27.2) 16.7 (42.4) 22.7 (57.7) 34.7 (88.1) 46.7 (119) 58.7 (149) 70.7 (180) 119 (302) 10.4 (26.4) 16.4 (41.7) 22.4 (56.9) 34.4 (87.4) 46.4 (118) 58.4 (148) 70.4 (179) 10.0 (25.4) 22.0 (55.9) 34.0 (86.4) 46.0 (117) 58.0 (147) 70.0 (178) 21.0 (53.3) 33.1 (84.1) 32.3 (82.0) 44.3 (113) cm 27.2 57.6 88.1 54.2 84.7
(in.) (10.7) (22.7) (34.7) (21.3) (33.3)
0.16
(4.1)
0.54
(13.7 )
0.27
(6.9)
0.73
(18.5)
0.36
(9.1)
0.86
(21.8)
0.53
(13.5)
1.04
(26.4)
0.80
(20.3)
1.36
(34.5)
Dimensions, mm (in.) 1/4 in. 6
mm (in.) 4.1
(0.16)
13.7
(0.54)
1/2 in.
12
8.4
(0.33)
21.8
(0.86)
See next page for more hose assemblies.
PTFE
32
T Series PTFE Hose

Female VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting End Connections
Dimensions Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 VCO Size in. 1/4 Overall Length OAL cm (in.) 13.5 (34.3) 25.5 (64.8) 37.5 (95.3) 13.5 (34.3) 25.5 (64.8) 37.5 (95.3) 49.5 (126) Live Length L cm (in.) 10.1 (25.7) 22.1 (56.1) 34.1 (86.6) 9.5 (24.1) 21.5 (54.6) 33.5 (85.1) 45.5 (116) Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16
(4.1)
1/2
1/2
Ordering Number SS-4BHO-12 SS-4BHO-24 SS-4BHO-36 SS-8BHO-12 SS-8BHO-24 SS-8BHO-36 SS-8BHO-48
Maximum Outside Dimension 80.0 (20.3)
PTFE
0.36
(9.1)
1.16 (29.5)
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - TH 4 TA4 SL2 - 28 Z
1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel C20 = Alloy 20 M = Alloy 400 INC = Alloy 600 HC = Alloy C-276 TI = Titanium, grade 4 2 Hose 4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables on next page.
71CM-Z

5 Overall Length Insert length in inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Include CM as shown for centimeter lengths.
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve N3 = Nitrogen pressure test S = 302 SS spring guard, hose-length T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two lanyard tags W = Hydrostatic test Z = 316L SS braid material (1/4 and 3/8 in. hoses only) 093 = ECE R110 approval Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag Text table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
TH = T series PTFE hose with 304 SS braid TC = T series carbon black-filled PTFE hose with 304 SS braid TL = T series PTFE hose with alloy 400 braid (1/4 in. hose size only)
4 6 8 12 16
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
33
T Series PTFE Hose

End Connections
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 4 6 3/8 8 1/2 8 12 3/4 16 12 1 16 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 8 4 10 6 12 8 18 12 25 16 End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA6 TA8 TA12 TA12 TA16 TA16 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM12 TM18 TM25 1.64 1.74 2.34 2.26 2.66 3.33 2.93 3.61 42.2 50.5 54.1 65.3 67.6 89.7 Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.1) 0.27 (6.9) 0.36 0.53 0.56 0.58 0.80 4.1 4.1 6.9 8.4 13.5 19.0
(9.1) (13.5) (14.2) (14.7) (20.3) (0.16) (0.16) (0.27) (0.33) (0.53) (0.75)
A
(41.7) (44.2) (59.4) (57.4) (67.6) (84.6) (74.4) (91.7) (1.66) (1.99) (2.13) (2.57) (2.66) (3.53)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.54 (13.7) 0.73 (18.5) 0.86 1.04 1.36 1.34 1.36 13.7 13.7 15.5 20.1 26.4 34.5 PTFE
(21.8) (26.4) (34.5) (34.0) (34.5) (0.54) (0.54) (0.61) (0.79) (1.04) (1.36)
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/2
3/4 1
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 16
End Connection Designator VF4 VF8 VF8 VF12 VF12 VF16
A 1.69 1.83 2.02 2.15 2.75 2.72

(42.9) (46.5) (51.3) (54.6) (69.9) (69.1)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.16 (4.1) 80.0 (20.3) 0.27 (6.9) 1.16 (29.5) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 1.26 (31.9) 0.63 (16.0) 0.80 (20.3) 2.03 (51.6)
Tube Fitting Nominal Size Hose Size in. Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8 4 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4 10 6 12 8 18 12
End Connection Designator SL2 SL4 SL6 SL8 SL12 SM6 SM10 SM12 SM18
A 1.93 1.97 2.20 2.50 2.81 50.0 35.3 53.3 61.2

(49.0) (50.0) (55.9) (63.5) (71.4) (1.97) (1.39) (2.10) (2.41)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.09 0.16 0.27 0.36 0.58 4.1 6.9 9.1 14.7
(2.3) (4.1) (6.9) (9.1) (14.7) (0.16) (0.27) (0.36) (0.58)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.65 0.65 0.87 1.09 1.31 16.6 22.1 27.6 33.1
(16.6) (16.6) (22.1) (27.6) (33.1) (0.65) (0.87) (1.09) (1.31)
34
T Series PTFE Hose

Female Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)
Female NPT and ISO/BSO Tapered Size in. Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 6 8 12 4 8 End Connection Designator Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 0.27 0.27 0.36 0.58
(4.1) (6.9) (6.9) (9.1) (14.7)
1/4
A
PTFE
3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 1/2
A NPT PF4 1.88 (47.8) PF4 1.84 (46.7) PF6 1.95 (49.5) PF8 2.49 (63.3) PF12 2.51 (63.8) ISO/BSP Tapered FT4 1.88 (47.8) FT8 2.49 (63.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension
0.87 (22.1) 1.02 (25.8) 1.23 (31.3) 1.52 (38.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.23 (31.3)
0.16 (4.1) 0.36 (9.1)
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)
Male NPT and ISO/BSO Tapered Size in.
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 6 8 8 12 12 16 16 4 8 12 16 End Connection Designator PM4 PM4 PM4 PM6 PM6 PM8 PM8 PM12 PM12 PM16 NPT 1.88 1.91 2.17 1.91 2.17 2.39 2.41 2.41 3.00 3.26 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 0.27 0.28 0.27 0.36 0.36 0.47 0.58 0.63 0.80 0.16 0.36 0.58 0.80
(4.1) (6.9) (7.1) (6.9) (9.1) (9.1) (11.9) (14.7) (16.0) (20.3) (4.1) (9.1) (14.7) (20.3)
A
(47.8) (48.5) (55.1) (48.5) (55.1) (60.7) (61.2) (61.2) (76.2) (82.8)
1/4
0.80 (20.3)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
0.80 (20.3) 1.02 1.23 1.23 1.31 1.60 0.80 1.02 1.23 1.60
(25.8) (31.3) (31.3) (33.1) (40.5) (20.3) (25.8) (31.3) (40.5)
ISO/BSP Tapered MT4 1.88 (47.8) MT8 2.39 (60.7) MT12 2.41 (61.2) MT16 3.26 (82.8)
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
A 1.84 2.24 2.46 3.39

(46.7) (56.9) (62.5) (86.1)
35
T Series PTFE Hose

SAE 37 (JIC) Male Flare
JIC Flare Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 End Connection Designator AN4 AN6 AN8 Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Outside A Diameter Dimension 1.88 (47.8) 0.16 (4.1) 0.80 (20.3) 1.91 (48.5) 0.27 (6.9) 0.73 (18.4) 2.32 (58.9) 0.36 (9.1) 1.02 (25.8)
PTFE hose image update with dimension lines AS
JIC Swivel Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8
End Connection Designator AS4 AS6 AS8
Sanitary Flanges
Flange Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 12 16 16 End Connection Designator SC8 SC12 SC16 SC24
A 2.15 2.17 2.95 2.39

(54.6) (55.1) (74.9) (60.7)
Working pressure and temperature ratings of hoses with sanitary flange end connections may be limited by the gasket material and clamp. Maximum pressure rating is 300 psig (20.6 bar).
PTFE
36
Coreflex B Series PTFE Hose

Features
General purpose PTFE hose. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. 1/8 in. size and working pressure of 3000 psig (206 bar). 304 stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure Commonly used where chemical compatibility is desired. Custom hose lengths and end connections available. Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 83
for details.
containment and protects the core from abrasion.

PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
177.1550, USDA, and USP <88> Class VI.

PTFE
304 SS braid
PTFE core
300 series SS collar
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/8 (3.2) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.12 (3.2) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.50 (3.81) Dynamic 3.75 (9.52) Working Pressure at Temperature 65 to 450F Range (53 to 232C) F (C) psig (bar) 65 to 450 3000 (206)
(53 to 232)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 12 000 (826)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.05 (0.07)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.
Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 450 (232) Working Pressure psig (bar) 3000 (206)
Testing
Every Swagelok B series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok B series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Certification of Compliance (Hose)
FDA, USDA, and USP Class VI, including PTFE lot number.
Material Test Report (End
Connection)Certifies material is type 316L or 316 stainless steel and lists bar stock chemical composition. Heat lot and ordering number are provided for full traceability.
Proof Pressure Test Certificate
Certifies that each hose passed pressure testing.
37
Coreflex B Series PTFE Hose

5
in.
6
or
5
cm
SS - BT 2 PM2 TA2 - 28 MB
1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel 2 Hose 4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables on pages 50 to 58.
71CM - MB

5 Overall Length
Add designators in alphanumeric order. A F G6 G7 G8 MB MG MR MW MY T T2 = = = = = = = = = = = = Armor guard Fire jacket Spiral guard, black Spiral guard, blue Spiral guard, yellow Mat tag, blue Mat tag, green Mat tag, red Mat tag, white Mat tag, yellow Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
BT = B series PTFE hose

2 = 1/8
PTFE
38
Coreflex X Series PTFE Hose

Features
Highly flexible PTFE hose. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. Size range of 1/4 through 1 in. and working pressures up to PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
177.1550, USDA, USP <88> Class VI, and 3-A.

Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
3500 psig (241 bar).

Fiber braid bonded to the core with a patent-pending

Commonly used where flexibility and chemical
process supports core to resist kinking.

304 stainless steel braid protects the core from abrasion
compatibility are desired.

Custom hose lengths and end connections available. Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 83
and enhances hose pressure rating.

PTFE
for details.
304 SS braid
Fiber braid
PTFE core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.25 (3.18) 1.75 (4.44) 2.50 (6.35) 3.50 (8.89) 5.50 (14.0) Dynamic 4.20 (10.7) 4.40 (11.2) 6.38 (16.2) 4.55 (11.6) 7.15 (18.2) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Hose ID in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4)
Hose OD in. (mm) 0.46 (11.7) 0.57 (14.5) 0.76 (19.3) 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 14 000 (964) 12 000 (826) 7 200 (496) 5 000 (344) 4 000 (275)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.13 (0.19) 0.17 (0.25) 0.24 (0.36) 0.36 (0.54) 1.1 (1.6)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections. Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiber braid reinforcement.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (232) 1/4 3/8 1/2 Working Pressure psig (bar) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9) 3/4 1
Testing pendingcontact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for additional information.
39
Coreflex X Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok X series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok X series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for additional information.
FDA, USDA, USP Class VI, and 3-A compliant, including PTFE lot number. 3-A compliance is only applicable to 1 in. and over hose sizes and select end connections.
Connection)Certifies material is type 316L or 316 stainless steel and lists bar stock chemical composition. Heat lot and ordering number are provided for full traceability. Certifies that each hose passed pressure testing.
PTFE Proof Pressure Test Certificate
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - XT 8
1 Material
TA8 KC16 - 28 MB
4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables on pages 50 to 58.
71CM - MB

2 Hose

5 Overall Length
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. A F G6 G7 G8 MB MG MR MW MY T T2 = = = = = = = = = = = = Armor guard Fire jacket Spiral guard, black Spiral guard, blue Spiral guard, yellow Mat tag, blue Mat tag, green Mat tag, red Mat tag, white Mat tag, yellow Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
XT = X series PTFE hose XC = X series carbon black-filled PTFE hose

4 6 8 12 16
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Specify text for tags. See Hose Text Tag table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
40
Coreflex S Series PTFE Hose

Features
Highly flexible, silicone-covered, PTFE hose. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. Size range of 1/8 through 1 in. and working pressures up to PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part

3500 psig (241 bar).


Commonly used where flexibility and chemical
process aids hose hoop strength to resist kinking.

304 stainless steel braid protects the core from abrasion

and enhances hose pressure rating.

PTFE Silicone cover provides smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
for details.
to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid temperature extremes.
Silicone cover
304 SS braid
Fiber braid
PTFE core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.50 (3.81) 1.25 (3.18) 1.75 (4.44) 2.50 (6.35) 3.50 (8.89) 5.50 (14.0) Dynamic 3.75 (9.52) 4.20 (10.7) 4.40 (11.2) 6.38 (16.2) 4.55 (11.6) 7.15 (18.2) Temperature Range F (C) Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3000 (206) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9) Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 12 000 (826) 14 000 (964) 12 000 (826) 7 200 (496) 5 000 (344) 4 000 (275) Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.09 (0.13) 0.19 (0.28) 0.25 (0.37) 0.34 (0.51) 0.47 (0.70) 1.8
(2.7)
Hose ID in. (mm) 0.125 (3.2) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4)
Hose OD in. (mm) 0.42 (10.7) 0.55 (14.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.86 (21.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.55 (39.4)
65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections. Constructed with no fiber braid reinforcement. Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiber braid reinforcement.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (232) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Working Pressure psig (bar) 2580 (206) 1800 (124) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 2400 (165) 1800 (124) 2130 (146) 1800 (124) 1800 (124) 1800 (124) 1500 (103) 1800 (124)
3000 3000 3000 2610 2550 1850
(206) (206) (206) (179) (175) (127)
3500 3500 3500 3150 2570 2570
(241) (241) (241) (217) (189) (189)
1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1100
(86.1) (86.1) (86.1) (86.1) (86.1) (75.7)
1000 1000 1000 1000 720 720
(68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (49.6) (49.6)
41
Coreflex S Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok S series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok S series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
SS - ST 8
1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel 2 Hose
TA8 KC16 - 28 PB
71CM - PB

5 Overall Length
Add designators in alphanumeric order. A F G6 G7 G8 MB MG MR MW MY PA PB PC PG PK PP PN PR PW PY T T2 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Armor guard Fire jacket Spiral guard, black Spiral guard, blue Spiral guard, yellow Mat tag, blue Mat tag, green Mat tag, red Mat tag, white Mat tag, yellow Perma tag, gray Perma tag, blue Perma tag, brown Perma tag, green Perma tag, black Perma tag, purple Perma tag, pink Perma tag, red Perma tag, white Perma tag, yellow Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
ST = S series PTFE hose with silicone-cover SC = S series carbon black-filled PTFE hose with silicone cover (not available in 1/8 in. hose size)
2 4 6 8 12 16
= = = = = =
1/8 (ST series only) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
PTFE
42
Coreflex C Series PTFE Hose

Features
Low-weight, highly flexible PTFE hose. Convoluted bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. Size range of 1/2 through 2 in. and working pressures up to PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part

1500 psig (103 bar).

300 series stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure

Commonly used where high flexibility and chemical

Optional silicone cover provides smooth, PTFE

noncontaminating, easy-to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid temperature extremes.
for details. 316 SS end connections
300 series SS braid
Convoluted PTFE core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
(12.7) (19.0) (25.4) (38.1) (50.8)
Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.00

(12.7) (19.0) (25.4) (38.1) (50.8)
Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.76 1.00 1.32 2.03 2.46

(19.3) (25.4) (33.5) (51.6) (62.5)
1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4)
0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4)
0.88 (22.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.47 (37.3)
Working Pressure Temperature at Range 70F (20C) Static Dynamic F (C) psig (bar) Without Silicone Cover 2.50 (6.35) 3.75 (9.52) 1500 (103) 65 to 450 3.00 (7.62) 3.90 (9.91) 1100 (75.7) (53 to 232) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 750 (51.6) 6.00 (15.2) 7.80 (19.8) 700 (48.2) 20 to 340 (28 to 171) 7.50 (19.0) 9.75 (24.8) 525 (36.1) With Silicone Cover 2.50 (6.35) 3.75 (9.52) 1500 (103) 65 to 450 3.00 (7.62) 3.90 (9.91) 1100 (75.7) (53 to 232) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 750 (51.6) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6000 4400 3000 2800 2100
(413) (303) (206) (192) (144)
6000 (413) 4400 (303) 3000 (206)
Hose Style Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 20 (28) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 340 (171) 400 (204) 450 (232) Without Silicone Cover 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1/2 With Silicone Cover 3/4 1
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
(103) (103) (103) (103) (103) (103) (103) (103)
1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1030 960 900
(75.7) (75.7) (75.7) (75.7) (75.7) (70.9) (66.1) (62.0)
750 750 750 620 580 540 480 410
(51.6) (51.6) (51.6) (42.7) (39.9) (37.2) (33.0) (28.2)
Working Pressure psig (bar) 675 (46.5) 525 (36.1) 700 (48.2) 525 (36.1) 420 (28.9) 525 (36.1) 380 (26.1) 495 (34.1) 320 (22.0) 485 (33.4)
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1485
1100 (75.7) 1100 (75.7) 1100 (75.7) 1100 (75.7) 1095 (75.4) (103) 1075 (74.0) (103) 1050 (72.3) (102) 925 (63.7)
(103) (103) (103) (103) (103)
750 750 750 430 325 295 250 145
(51.6) (51.6) (51.6) (29.6) (22.3) (20.3) (17.2) (9.9)
43
Coreflex C Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok C series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok C series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Connection)Certifies material is type 316L or 316 stainless steel and lists bar stock chemical composition. Heat lot and ordering number are provided for full traceability. Certifies that each hose passed pressure testing.
PTFE Proof Pressure Test Certificate
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - CT 8
1 Material
TA8 KC16 - 28 MB
71CM -MB

2 Hose

5 Overall Length
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. A F G6 G7 G8 MB MG MR MW MY PA PB PC PG PK PP PN PR PW PY T T2 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Armor guard Fire jacket Spiral guard, black Spiral guard, blue Spiral guard, yellow Mat tag, blue Mat tag, green Mat tag, red Mat tag, white Mat tag, yellow Perma tag, gray (JT only) Perma tag, blue (JT only) Perma tag, brown (JT only) Perma tag, green (JT only) Perma tag, black (JT only) Perma tag, purple (JT only) Perma tag, pink (JT only) Perma tag, red (JT only) Perma tag, white (JT only) Perma tag, yellow (JT only) Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
CT = C series convoluted PTFE hose CC = C series convoluted, carbon black-filled PTFE hose JT = C series convoluted PTFE hose with silicone cover (1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. sizes only).
8 12 16 24 32
= = = = =
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
44
Coreflex N Series PTFE Hose

Features
Thermally insulated, nonmetallic, PTFE hose. Convoluted bore, carbon black-filled DuPont Teflon PTFE PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part

Commonly used where flexibility, chemical compatibility,
62 core for applications that require static dissipation. 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. sizes and working pressures up to 1250 psig (86.1 bar).
Internal insulating wrap eliminates need for external
and a nonconductive braid are desired.

PTFE
insulation in many applications. Aramid fiber braid aids pressure containment and maintains flexibility while reducing weight.
for details.
Aramid fiber braid
Insulating wrap
Convoluted bore, carbon black-filled PTFE core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.41 (10.4) 0.53 (13.5) 0.75 (19.0) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.73 (18.5) 0.86 (21.8) 1.12 (28.4) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 2.50 (6.35) 3.50 (8.89) 4.50 (11.4) Dynamic 4.00 (10.2) 5.25 (13.3) 5.85 (14.9) Temperature Range F (C) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1250 (86.1) 750 (51.7) 375 (25.8)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 5000 (344) 3000 (206) 1500 (103)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.12 (0.18) 0.15 (0.22) 0.19 (0.28)
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (232) 3/8 1/2 3/4
1250 1250 500 365 165 140
Working Pressure psig (bar) (86.1) 720 (49.6) 375 (86.1) 750 (51.6) 375 (34.4) 340 (23.4) 275 (25.1) 235 (16.1) 165 (11.3) 160 (11.0) 85.0 (9.6) 130 (8.9) 80.0
(25.8) (25.8) (18.9) (11.3) (5.8) (5.5)
45
Coreflex N Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok N series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok N series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Certification of Compliance (Hose) Material Test Report (End

PTFE
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - NC 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 MB
1 Material 4 End Connections See End Connection Designator column in tables on pages 50 to 58.
71CM - MB

2 Hose Series

5 Overall Length
NC = N series convoluted-bore, carbon black-filled PTFE hose with insulating wrap

6 = 3/8 8 = 1/2 12 = 3/4
46
Coreflex W Series PTFE Hose

Features
Thermally insulated, PTFE hose. Smooth-bore, carbon black-filled DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 Silicone cover provides smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
core for applications that require static dissipation. 3/8 and 1/2 in. sizes and working pressures of 1000 psig (68.9 bar).
to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid temperature extremes. PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part 177.1550, USDA, and USP <88> Class VI.
process aids hose hoop strength to reduce kinking.

Internal insulating wrap eliminates need for external PTFE
and exterior insulating (hot/cold) cover are desired.

insulation in many applications.

304 stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure
for details.
Silicone cover
Insulating wrap
Carbon black-filled PTFE core
304 SS braid
Fiber braid
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.35 (8.9) 0.50 (12.7) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.75 (19.0) 0.92 (23.4) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.75 (4.44) 2.50 (6.35) Dynamic 4.40 (11.2) 6.38 (16.2) Temperature Range F (C) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 4000 (275) 4000 (275)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.29 (0.43) 0.35 (0.52)
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 3/8 1/2
Working Pressure psig (bar) 1000 1000 1000 940 840

(68.9) (68.9) (68.9) (64.7) (57.8)
65 (53) to 100 (37) 1000 (68.9) 200 (93) 940 (64.7) 300 (148) 840 (57.8) 400 (204) 810 (55.8) 450 (232) 590 (40.6)
47
Coreflex W Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok W series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok W series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:

PTFE
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
7 Options
SS - WC 8
1 Material
TA8 KC16 - 28 - BL
71CM - BL -PG

2 Hose Series
Add designators in alphanumeric order. -A -F -G6 -G7 -G8 -MB -MG -MR -MW -MY -PA -PB -PC -PG -PK -PP -PN -PR -PW -PY -T -T2 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Armor guard Fire jacket Spiral guard, black Spiral guard, blue Spiral guard, yellow Mat tag, blue Mat tag, green Mat tag, red Mat tag, white Mat tag, yellow Perma tag, gray Perma tag, blue Perma tag, brown Perma tag, green Perma tag, black Perma tag, purple Perma tag, pink Perma tag, red Perma tag, white Perma tag, yellow Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags

5 Overall Length Inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Include CM as shown for centimeter lengths. 6 Silicone Cover Color
WC = W series carbon black-filled PTFE hose with silicone-cover and insulating wrap
6 = 3/8 8 = 1/2
BK BL RD WH
= = = =
Black Blue Red White
48
Coreflex F Series PTFE Hose

Features
Nometallic, PTFE hose. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PTFE 62 core. Size range of 1/8 through 3/4 in. and working pressures up Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for

to 800 psig (55.1 bar).

Fiberglass braid bonded to the core adds further bending
and a nonconductive braid are desired.

capability to the hose.

PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
for details.

PTFE
Fiberglass braid
PTFE core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.12 (3.2) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.41 (10.4) 0.55 (14.0) 0.70 (17.8) 0.94 (23.9) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.75 (4.44) 2.75 (6.99) 3.25 (8.26) 5.25 (13.3) 6.50 (16.5) Dynamic 4.38 (11.1) 5.50 (14.0) 5.20 (13.2) 7.88 (20.0) 8.45 (21.5) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 650 (44.7) 450 (31.0) 325 (22.4)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3200 (220) 3200 (220) 2600 (179) 1800 (124) 1300 (89.6)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.03 (0.04) 0.06 (0.09) 0.09 (0.13) 0.13 (0.19) 0.18 (0.27)
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (232) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Working Pressure psig (bar) 455 (31.3) 480 (33.0) 450 800 (55.1) 650 (44.7) 450 700 (241) 490 (33.7) 450 330 (22.7) 490 (33.7) 315 160 (11.0) 170 (11.7) 310 160 (11.0) 170 (11.7) 295
160 800 375 290 200 200
(11.0) (55.1) (25.8) (19.9) (13.7) (13.7)
(31.0) (31.0) (31.0) (21.7) (21.3) (20.3)
325 325 185 175 175 160
(22.3) (22.3) (12.7) (12.0) (12.0) (11.0)
49
Coreflex F Series PTFE Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok F series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok F series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:

PTFE
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
SS - FT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 MB
71CM - MB
6 Options
End Connections SS = 316 series stainless steel

2 Hose Series

5 Overall Length
FT = F series PTFE hose FC = F series carbon black-filled PTFE hose (not available in 1/8 in. hose size
2 4 6 8 12
= = = = =
1/8 (FT series only) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
50
Coreflex Series HoseEnd Connections

End Connections
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8 2 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 1 16 1 1/2 24 2 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 3 2 6 4 10 6 12 8 18 12 25 16 38 24 50 32 End Connection Designator TA2 TA4 TA6 TA8 TA12 TA16 TA24 TA32 TM3 TM6 TM10 TM12 TM18 TM25 TM38 TM50 A Max 1.90 2.00 2.45 2.94 3.19 3.81 5.25 6.84 48.3 51.1 57.4 67.6 81.5 97.3 133 174
(48.3) (50.8) (62.2) (74.7) (81.0) (96.8) (133) (174) (1.90) (2.01) (2.26) (2.66) (3.21) (3.83) (5.25) (6.86)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.070 0.16 0.26 0.34 0.54 0.78 1.24 1.68 1.7 4.0 6.6 8.6 13.7 19.8 31.4 42.6
(1.7) (4.0) (6.6) (8.6) (13.7) (19.8) (31.4) (42.6) (0.070) (0.16) (0.26) (0.34) (0.54) (0.78) (1.24) (1.68)
(14.0) (15.0) (20.8) (26.4) (34.3) (44.5) (55.9) (69.6) (0.55) (0.59) (0.82) (0.91) (1.35) (1.75) (2.20) (2.74)
Determined by hose
PTFE
Determined by hose

Tube Nominal Fitting Hose Size Size Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8 2 1/4 4 3/8 6 1/2 8 3/4 12 1 16 1 1/2 24 2 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 3 2 6 4 10 6 12 8 18 12 25 16 38 24 50 32 End Connection Designator SL2 SL4 SL6 SL8 SL12 SL16 SL24 SL32 SM3 SM6 SM10 SM12 SM18 SM25 SM38 SM50 A Max 1.93 2.06 2.51 2.86 3.01 3.57 4.99 6.53 49.3 52.6 64.5 73.4 77.0 91.2 130 165
(49.0) (52.3) (63.8) (72.6) (76.5) (90.7) (127) (166) (1.94) (2.07) (2.54) (2.89) (3.03) (3.59) (5.13) (6.50)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.070 (1.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) 1.7 4.0 6.6 8.6 13.7 19.8 31.4 42.6
(0.070) (0.16) (0.26) (0.34) (0.54) (0.78) (1.24) (1.68)
(14.0) (15.0) (20.8) (26.4) (34.3) (44.5) (62.5) (80.8) (0.55) (0.64) (0.82) (1.04) (1.35) (1.75) (2.50) (3.18)
Determined by hose
Determined by hose
51

NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 2 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator PF2 PF4 PF6 PF8 PF12 PF16 PF24 PF32 Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 1.78 (45.2) 0.070 (1.7) 0.65 (16.5) 1.88 (47.8) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1) 2.35 (59.7) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7) 2.68 (68.1) 0.34 (8.6) 1.30 (33.0) 3.02 (76.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.6) 3.47 (88.1) 0.78 (19.8) 1.88 (47.8) 4.28 (109) 1.24 (31.4) 2.75 (69.9) 5.02 (128) 1.68 (42.6) 3.18 (80.8) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
Determined by hose PTFE Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose
Female Pipe Threads, NPT, with JIC (AN) 37 Union
NPT with JIC Union Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 2 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator FU2 FU4 FU6 FU8 FU12 FU16 FU24 FU32 A Max 2.40 (61.0) 2.66 (67.6) 3.14 (79.8) 3.58 (90.9) 4.30 (109) 5.14 (131) 6.29 (160) 7.27 (185) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.070 (1.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.65 (16.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.01 (25.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.52 (38.6) 2.02 (51.3) 2.75 (69.9) 3.46 (87.9)
Male Pipe Threads, NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 2 4 6 8 12 16 24 32
End Connection Designator PM2 PM4 PM6 PM8 PM12 PM16 PM24 PM32
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 1.70 (43.2) 0.077 (1.9) 0.55 (14.0) 1.94 (49.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.65 (16.5) 2.34 (59.4) 0.28 (7.1) 0.82 (20.8) 2.75 (69.9) 0.37 (9.3) 1.04 (26.4) 2.94 (74.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.35 (34.3) 3.47 (88.1) 0.87 (22.0) 1.75 (44.5) 4.26 (108) 1.36 (34.5) 2.31 (58.7) 5.14 (131) 1.84 (46.7) 2.89 (73.4)
Male Pipe Threads, NPT, with JIC (AN) 37 Union
NPT with JIC Union Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 2 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator MU2 MU4 MU6 MU8 MU12 MU16 MU24 MU32 A Max 2.39 (60.7) 2.75 (69.9) 3.25 (82.6) 3.91 (99.3) 4.38 (111) 5.16 (131) 6.09 (155) 7.28 (185) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.070 (1.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.55 (14.0) 0.65 (16.5) 0.82 (20.8) 1.04 (26.4) 1.45 (36.8) 1.75 (44.5) 2.60 (66.0) 3.32 (84.3)
52

Sanitary Kwik-Clamps
KwikClamp Size in. 1/2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 12 2 4 6 8 12 16 2 4 6 8 12 16 16 24 32 24 32 End Connection Designator Standard Surface KC8 KC8 KC8 KC12 KC12 KC12 KC12 KC12 KC16 KC16 KC16 KC16 KC16 KC16 KC24 KC24 KC24 KC24 KC24 KC24 KC32 KC32 KC32 KC40 KC40 Electropolished KE8 KE8 KE8 KE12 KE12 KE12 KE12 KE12 KE16 KE16 KE16 KE16 KE16 KE16 KE24 KE24 KE24 KE24 KE24 KE24 KE32 KE32 KE32 KE40 KE40 Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 1.64 (41.7) 0.16 (4.0) 2.00 (50.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.99 (25.1) 2.34 (59.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.63 (41.4) 0.070 (1.7) 1.64 (41.7) 0.16 (4.0) 2.00 (50.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.99 (25.1) 2.19 (55.6) 0.34 (8.6) 2.50 (63.5) 0.54 (13.7) 1.64 (41.7) 0.070 (1.7) 1.63 (41.4) 0.16 (4.0) 2.00 (50.8) 0.26 (6.6) 1.99 (50.5) 2.19 (55.6) 0.34 (8.6) 2.35 (59.7) 0.54 (13.7) 2.78 (70.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.81 1.64 2.00 2.19 2.35 2.62 2.62 3.17 3.99 3.17 3.83
(46.0) (41.7) (50.8) (55.6) (59.7) (66.5) (66.5) (80.5) (101) (80.5) (97.3)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 1500 (103)
3/4 PTFE
1500 (103)
500 (34.5)
1 1/2
2 1/2
0.070 (1.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6)
1.99 (50.5)
500 (34.5)
2.53 (64.3)
450 (31.0)
3.06 (77.7)
400 (27.5)
316L SS material with a 15 in. (0.38 m) Ra max surface finish prior to crimp.
Sanitary Kwik-Clamp 90 Elbows

B
KwikClamp Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
End Connection Designator Nominal Hose Size Standard ElectroDesignator Surface polished 8 KR8 RE8 12 KR12 RE12 16 KR16 RE16 24 KR24 RE24 32 KR32 RE32
A Max` 2.93 (74.4) 3.47 (88.1) 4.12 (105) 5.92 (150) 7.58 (193)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.27 (32.3) 0.34 (8.6) 1.63 (41.4) 0.54 (13.7) 2.02 (51.3) 0.78 (19.8) 2.77 (70.4) 1.24 (31.4) 3.51 (89.2) 1.68 (42.6)
Maximum Pressure Outside Rating Diameter psig (bar) 0.99 (25.1) 1500 (103) 0.99 (25.1) 1500 (103) 1.99 (50.5) 500 (34.5) 2.53 (64.3) 500 (34.5) 3.06 (77.7) 450 (31.0)
Sanitary Kwik-Clamp 45 Elbows
KwikClamp Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Nominal Hose Size Standard ElectroDesignator Surface polished 8 KA8 AE8 12 KA12 AE12 16 KA16 AE16 24 KA24 AE24 32 KA32 AE32
End Connection Designator
A Max 3.34 (84.8) 3.50 (88.9) 4.04 (103) 5.27 (134) 7.08 (180)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Pressure Inside Outside Rating B Diameter Dimension psig (bar) 0.70 (17.8) 0.34 (8.6) 0.99 (25.1) 1500 (103) 0.69 (17.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.99 (25.1) 1500 (103) 0.81 (20.5) 0.78 (19.8) 1.99 (50.5) 500 (34.5) 1.03 (26.2) 1.24 (31.4) 2.53 (64.3) 500 (34.5) 1.27 (32.3) 1.68 (42.6) 3.06 (77.7) 450 (31.0)
53

Tube Butt Welds
Tube Butt Weld Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 Dimensions, in. (mm) Wall Nominal Thickness Hose Size in. Designator 0.049 8 0.049 12 0.065 16 0.095 24 0.109 32 End Connection Designator TB8 TB12 TB16 TB24 TB32 A Max 2.72 (69.1) 2.91 (73.9) 3.28 (83.3) 4.67 (119) 5.58 (142) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 1.04 (26.4) 1.35 (34.3) 1.75 (44.5) 2.20 (55.9) 2.75 (69.9) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
Determined by hose
SAE 37 (JIC) Female Swivel Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 2 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator AS2 AS4 AS6 AS8 AS12 AS16 AS24 AS32 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.070 (1.7) 0.16 0.26 0.34 0.54 0.78 1.24 1.68
(4.0) (6.6) (8.6) (13.7) (19.8) (31.4) (42.6)
A Max 1.45 (36.8) 1.53 2.00 2.30 2.52 2.95 3.74 4.73
(38.9) (50.8) (58.4) (64.0) (74.9) (95.0) (120)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.55 (14.0) 0.66 (16.8) 0.82 (20.8) 1.04 (26.4) 1.35 (34.3) 1.75 (44.5) 2.61 (66.3) 3.33 (84.6)
Determined by hose
Female Cam and Groove
Female Cam and Groove Size in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator GF12 GF16 GF24 GF32 A Max 4.03 (102) 4.53 (115) 5.39 (137) 6.30 (160) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 3.27 (83.1) 3.50 (88.9) 4.44 (113) 4.82 (122) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
250 (17.2)
Male Cam and Groove
Male Cam and Groove Size in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator GM12 GM16 GM24 GM32 A Max 2.93 (74.4) 3.55 (90.2) 4.41 (112) 5.17 (131) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 1.27 (32.3) 1.45 (36.8) 2.11 (53.6) 2.47 (62.7) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
250 (17.2)
PTFE
54

Tube Stubs
Tube Nominal Stub Wall Hose Size Size Thickness Designator Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8 0.035 2 1/4 0.035 4 3/8 0.049 6 1/2 0.065 8 3/4 0.075 12 1 0.095 16 1 1/2 0.134 24 2 0.188 32 Dimensions, mm (in.) 3 0.80 6 0.80 8 1.8 8 0.90 10 1.3 12 2.0 12 1.5 18 2.0 25 2.5 38 3.5 50 5.0 2 4 4 6 6 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator TN2 TN4 TN6 TN8 TN12 TN16 TN24 TN32 TE3 TE6 TE8 TE8 TE10 TE12 TE12 TE18 TE25 TE38 TE50 A Max 1.87 1.98 2.40 2.90 3.12 3.67 4.99 6.34 39.4 47.8 47.8 57.7 59.2 65.0 73.7 76.7 94.5 119 148
(47.5) (50.3) (61.0) (73.7) (79.2) (93.2) (127) (161) (1.22) (1.48) (1.48) (1.79) (1.83) (2.01) (2.28) (2.38) (2.93) (3.67) (4.59)
Dimensions Minimum Inside Diameter 0.050 (1.2) 0.17 (4.3) 0.27 (6.8) 0.34 (8.6) 0.59 (14.9) 0.80 (20.3) 1.22 (30.9) 1.62 (41.1) 1.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 7.1 7.9 8.9 13.7 19.6 30.7 39.9
(0.051) (0.17) (0.21) (0.24) (0.28) (0.31) (0.35) (0.54) (0.77) (1.21) (1.57)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.55 (14.0) 0.59 (15.0) 0.82 (20.8) 1.04 (26.4) 1.35 (34.3) 1.75 (44.5) 2.20 (55.9) 2.74 (69.6) 14.0 15.0 15.0 20.8 21.8 21.8 26.4 34.3 44.5 55.9 69.6
(0.55) (0.59) (0.59) (0.82) (0.86) (0.86) (1.04) (1.35) (1.75) (2.20) (2.74)
Determined by hose
PTFE
Determined by hose
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 1.64 (41.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.80 (20.3) 2.22 (56.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.16 (29.5) 2.51 (63.8) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (44.2) 2.78 (70.6) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/2 3/4 1
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 0.91 (23.1) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1) 1.44 (36.6) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2) 1.54 (39.1) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (44.2) 1.81 (46.0) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)
55

TS Series Sanitary Clamp
Sanitary Clamp Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator TS8 TS12 TS16 TS24 TS32 Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 2.22 (56.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) 2.35 (59.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3) 2.82 (71.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5) 3.37 (85.6) 1.24 (31.4) 2.20 (55.9) 4.03 (102) 1.68 (42.6) 2.74 (69.6) Pressure Rating psig (bar) 3100 (213) 2800 (192) 1200 (82.6) 1200 (82.6) 650 (44.7) PTFE Maximum Outside Dimension 0.66 (16.8) 0.82 (20.8) 1.04 (26.4) 1.35 (34.3) 1.75 (44.5) 2.31 (58.7) 2.89 (73.4) Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.01 (25.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.52 (38.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2.53 (64.3) 3.18 (80.8) Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.01 (25.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.52 (38.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2.75 (69.9) 3.32 (84.3) Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose
Male Pipe Threads, ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)
Male Pipe Threads, ISO/BSP Tapered Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator MT4 MT6 MT8 MT12 MT16 MT24 MT32 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6)
A Max 1.95 (49.5) 2.34 (59.4) 2.80 (71.1) 2.91 (73.9) 3.47 (88.1) 4.26 (108) 5.14 (131)
Male ISO/BSP Straight Thread with 60 Male Cone (ISO 228)
ISO/BSP Straight, 60 Male Cone Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator MS4 MS6 MS8 MS12 MS16 MS24 MS32 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6)
A Max 2.02 (51.3) 2.41 (61.2) 1.78 (45.2) 3.02 (76.7) 3.40 (86.4) 4.23 (107) 5.18 (132)
Female Pipe Threads, ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)
Female Pipe Thread ISO/BSP Tapered Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 24 32
End Connection Designator FT4 FT6 FT8 FT12 FT16 FT24 FT32
A Max 1.88 (47.8) 2.35 (59.7) 2.69 (68.3) 3.02 (76.7) 3.47 (88.1) 4.17 (106) 5.01 (127)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 0.78 1.24 1.68
(13.7) (19.8) (31.4) (42.6)
56

Female ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (ISO 228)
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 1 Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator FS4 FS6 FS8 FS12 FS16 FS24 FS32 A Max 2.14 (54.4) 2.54 (64.5) 2.87 (72.9) 2.99 (75.9) 3.27 (83.1) 4.31 (109) 4.97 (126) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.59 (40.4) 1.88 (47.8) 2.60 (66.0) 3.18 (80.8) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
Determined by hose
PTFE
Female Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread with 30 Cone
Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread, 30 Cone Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8
End Connection Designator BS4 BS6 BS8
A Max 2.24 (56.9) 2.77 (70.4) 3.14 (79.8)
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.01 (25.7) 1.23 (31.2)
Female Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread with 60 Cone
60
Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread, 60 Cone Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 End Connection Designator BM4 BM6 BM8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.34 (8.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.01 (25.7) 1.23 (31.2) Pressure Rating psig (bar) Determined by hose
A Max 1.49 (37.8) 1.91 (48.5) 2.09 (53.1)
JIS(A)/ISO 2852 Sanitary
JIS/ISO 2852 Sanitary Size mm 8 10 15
Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 6 8 12 End Connection Designator JS8 JS10 JS15 A Max 55.4 (2.18) 60.2 (2.37) 64.3 (2.53) Minimum Inside Diameter 6.6 (0.26) 8.6 (0.34) 13.7 (0.54) Maximum Outside Dimension 34.0 (1.34) 34.0 (1.34) 34.3 (1.35) Pressure Rating bar (psig) 34.5 (500)
ISO-KF Vacuum Flange
ISO-KF Vacuum Flange Size in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator KF12 KF16 KF24 KF32 A Max 2.45 (62.2) 2.72 (69.1) 3.52 (89.4) 4.18 (106) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Diameter 1.35 (34.3) 1.75 (44.5) 2.20 (55.9) 2.96 (75.2) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
145 (10.0)
57

Sanitary DIN 11864-3 Form A
Sanitary DIN 11864-3 Form A Size mm 10 15 15 20 25 40 50 Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 6 8 12 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator DB10 DB15 DB15 DB20 DB25 DB40 DB50 A Max 52.6 (2.07) 57.4 (2.26) 61.5 (2.42) 61.0 (2.40) 67.8 (2.67) 81.5 (3.21) 101 (3.99) Minimum Inside Diameter 6.6 (0.26) 8.6 (0.34) 13.7 (0.54) 13.7 (0.54) 19.8 (0.78) 31.4 (1.24) 42.6 (1.68) Maximum Outside Dimension 34.0 (1.34) 34.0 (1.34) 34.3 (1.35) 50.5 (1.99) 50.5 (1.99) 64.3 (2.53) 77.7 (3.06) Pressure Rating bar (psig)
40.0 (580)
Female DIN 11851 with Nut
Female DIN 11851 with Nut Size mm 15 20 25 40 50
Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator DF15 DF20 DF25 DF40 DF50 A Max 65.0 (2.56) 71.4 (2.81) 84.1 (3.31) 99.8 (3.93) 118 (4.66) Minimum Inside Diameter 8.6 (0.34) 13.7 (0.54) 19.8 (0.78) 31.4 (1.24) 42.6 (1.68) Maximum Outside Dimension 44.2 (1.74) 54.4 (2.14) 63.2 (2.49) 78.2 (3.08) 92.2 (3.63) Pressure Rating bar (psig)
40.0 (580)
24.8 (360)
ANSI 150 lb Lap Joint Flange
ANSI 150 lb Lap Joint Flange Size in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator GA12 GA16 GA24 GA32 A Max 3.06 (77.7) 3.40 (86.4) 4.11 (104) 5.08 (129) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 3.91 (99.3) 4.28 (109) 5.03 (128) 6.03 (153) Pressure Rating psig (bar)
275 (18.9)
JIS 10K Lap Joint Flange
JIS 10K Lap Joint Flange Size mm 15 20 25 40 50
Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator HA15 HA20 HA25 HA40 HA50 A Max 70.6 (2.78) 77.7 (3.06) 86.4 (3.40) 104 (4.11) 124 (4.88) Minimum Inside Diameter 8.6 (0.34) 13.7 (0.54) 19.8 (0.78) 31.4 (1.24) 42.6 (1.68) Maximum Outside Dimension 95.3 (3.75) 100 (3.95) 125 (4.93) 140 (5.52) 155 (6.11) Pressure Rating bar (psig)
9.7 (142)
DIN PN10 Lap Joint Flange
DIN PN10 Lap Joint Flange Size mm 15 20 25 40 50
Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 12 16 24 32 End Connection Designator FA15 FA20 FA25 FA40 FA50 A Max 70.6 (2.78) 77.7 (3.06) 86.4 (3.40) 104 (4.11) 124 (4.88) Minimum Inside Diameter 8.6 (0.34) 13.7 (0.54) 19.8 (0.78) 31.4 (1.24) 42.6 (1.68) Maximum Outside Dimension 95.3 (3.75) 105 (4.14) 115 (4.54) 150 (5.92) 165 (6.51) Pressure Rating bar (psig)
10.0 (145)
PTFE
24.8 (360)
58

Sanitary I-Line Male
Sanitary I-line Male Size in. 1 1 1/2 2 Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 16 24 32 End Connection Designator MD16 MD24 MD32 A Max 3.01 (76.5) 3.72 (94.5) 4.48 (114) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 2.01 (51.1) 2.20 (55.9) 2.74 (69.6) Pressure Rating psig (bar) 1220 (84.0) 1220 (84.0) 900 (62.0)
PTFE
Sanitary I-Line Female
Sanitary I-line Female Size in. 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Size Designator 16 24 32 End Connection Designator FD16 FD24 FD32 A Max 3.01 (76.5) 3.71 (94.2) 4.47 (114) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.78 (19.8) 1.24 (31.4) 1.68 (42.6) Maximum Outside Dimension 2.01 (51.1) 2.20 (55.9) 2.74 (69.6) Pressure Rating psig (bar) 1220 (84.0) 1220 (84.0) 900 (62.0)
Sanitary (DIN 32676)
Sanitary (DIN 32676) Size mm 10 10 10 15 15 20 25 32 40 50
Dimensions, mm (in.) Nominal Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 8 12 12 16 16 24 32 End Connection Designator DA10 DA10 DA10 DA15 DA15 DA20 DA25 DA32 DA40 DA50 A Max 47.0 (1.85) 52.3 (2.06) 59.7 (2.35) 59.7 (2.35) 63.8 (2.51) 63.8 (2.51) 72.9 (2.87) 72.9 (2.87) 90.2 (3.55) 103 (4.04) Minimum Inside Diameter 4.0 (0.16) 6.6 (0.26) 8.6 (0.34) 11.1 (0.44) 13.7 (0.54) 13.7 (0.54) 19.8 (0.78) 19.8 (0.78) 31.4 (1.24) 42.6 (1.68) Maximum Outside Dimension 34.3 (1.35) 34.3 (1.35) 34.3 (1.35) 34.3 (1.35) 34.3 (1.35) 34.3 (1.35) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 55.9 (2.20) 69.6 (2.74) Pressure Rating bar (psig)
15.8 (230)
Sanitary (ISO 2852)
Sanitary (ISO 2852) Size mm 12 13 20 26 25 40 50
Nominal Hose Size Designator 8 6 12 12 16 24 32
End Connection Designator ES12 ES13 ES20 ES26 ES25 ES40 ES50
Dimensions, mm (in.) Minimum Maximum A Inside Outside Max Diameter Dimension 59.7 (2.35) 8.6 (0.34) 34.3 (1.35) 54.9 (2.16) 6.6 (0.26) 34.3 (1.35) 63.8 (2.51) 13.7 (0.54) 34.3 (1.35) 65.0 (2.56) 13.7 (0.54) 50.8 (2.00) 72.9 (2.87) 19.8 (0.78) 50.8 (2.00) 91.7 (3.61) 31.4 (1.24) 64.3 (2.53) 106 (4.18) 42.6 (1.68) 69.6 (2.74)
Pressure Rating bar (psig)
103 (1500)
34.5 (500) 34.5 (500) 31.0 (450)
59
Coreflex U Series PFA Hose

Features
Highly flexible PFA hose. Smooth-bore, DuPont Teflon PFA core. Size range of 1/2 through 2 in. and working pressures up to PFA material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
177.1550, USDA, USP <87, 88> Class VI, and 3-A.

Optional carbon black-filled PFA core is available for
300 psig (20.6 bar).

302 stainless steel reinforcement ensures hose pressure

Commonly used where high flexibility, chemical
containment and supports core to resist kinking.

Silicone cover provides a smooth, noncontaminating,
compatibility, and a smooth exterior cover are desired.

easy-to-clean surface and reduces internal system fluid temperature transfer. Hose layers are encapsulated together without adhesives or cements with a patent-pending process, providing high flexibility and outstanding kink resistance.
for details.
Silicone cover
302 SS braid
PFA core

PFA
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.50 (3.81) 2.50 (6.35) 4.00 (10.2) 7.00 (17.8) 7.00 (17.8) Dynamic 4.50 (11.4) 6.50 (16.5) 5.20 (13.2) 9.10 (23.1) 9.10 (23.1) 65 to 450
(53 to 232)
Hose ID in. (mm) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8)
Hose OD in. (mm) 0.80 (20.3) 1.24 (31.5) 1.52 (38.6) 1.93 (49.0) 2.57 (65.3)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1200 (82.6) 1200 (82.6) 1000 (68.9) 800 (55.1) 600 (41.3)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.20 (0.30) 0.38 (0.57) 0.63 (0.94) 0.88 (1.3) 1.3
(1.9)
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) 450 (232) 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
160 300 280 210 160 140
(11.0) (20.6) (19.2) (14.4) (11.0) (9.6)
110 300 300 270 110 110
Working Pressure psig (bar) (7.5) 250 (17.2) 200 (20.6) 250 (17.2) 200 (20.6) 250 (17.2) 200 (18.6) 230 (15.8) 200 (7.5) 175 (12.0) 200 (7.5) 150 (10.3) 190
(13.7) (13.7) (13.7) (13.7) (13.7) (13.0)
150 150 150 150 150 150
(10.3) (10.3) (10.3) (10.3) (10.3) (10.3)
60
Coreflex U Series PFA Hose

Testing
Every Swagelok U series hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 225 psig (15.5 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 225 psig (15.5 bar) for 30 to 60 seconds to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.

Every Swagelok U series hose component is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged with the following:
PFA
5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - UT 8
1 Material
TA8 KC16 - 28 PB
71CM - PB

2 Hose Series
UT = U series PFA hose with silicone cover UC = U series carbon black-filled PFA hose with silicone cover

5 Overall Length
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. A = Armor guard F = Fire jacket G6 = Spiral guard, black G7 = Spiral guard, blue G8 = Spiral guard, yellow MB = Mat tag, blue MG = Mat tag, green MR = Mat tag, red MW = Mat tag, white MY = Mat tag, yellow PA = Perma tag, gray PB = Perma tag, blue PC = Perma tag, brown PG = Perma tag, green PK = Perma tag, black PP = Perma tag, purple PN = Perma tag, pink PR = Perma tag, red PW = Perma tag, white PY = Perma tag, yellow T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two lanyard tags Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
8 12 16 24 32
= = = = =
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
61
PFA Series PFA Tubing

Features
Chemically resistant, translucent, PFA flexible tubing. Smooth-bore, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) material. Size range of 1/8 through 1 in. and 6 through 12 mm and Bulk hose and end connections available for field
assembly; custom assemblies also available.

Designed for use with both Swagelok PFA tube fittings and
working pressures up to 275 psig (18.9 bar).

PFA tubing material in accordance with ASTM D3307,
metal Swagelok tube fittings.

Groove cutter required for installation of Swagelok PFA
Type II.
Flexible tubing commonly used where chemical
tube fittings. See page 62.

Tubing cutter tool is available. See page 83 for details.
compatibility is desired.
Pressure ratings are for properly grooved Swagelok PFA tubing used with Swagelok PFA tube fittings and for Swagelok PFA tubing used with metal Swagelok tube fittings.
Fractional Tubing
Tubing Wall, in. 0.030 0.047 Nominal Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 Temperature F (C) 275 200 70 (20)
(18.9) (13.7)
Metric Tubing
0.062 Tubing Wall, mm Nominal Tube Size mm Temperature C (F) 20 (70) 50 (122) 100 (212) 150 (302) 200 (392) 1 1.5
1/4 3/8 1/2 Working Pressure psig (bar) 275 180 125
(18.9) (12.4) (8.6)
3/4
83
(5.7)
61
(4.2)
12
(174)
8.9
(129)
10 12 6 8 Working Pressure bar (psig) 7.0 5.7 19 14

(101) (82) (275) (203)
10
12
11
(159)
8.9
(129)
100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204)
245
(16.8)
180
(12.4)
245
(16.8)
155
(10.6)
115
(7.9)
73
(5.0)
54
(3.7)
9.7
(140)
7.1
(103)
5.5
(79)
4.6
(66)
15
(217)
11
(159)
8.7
(126)
7.1
(103)
145
(9.9)
110
(7.5)
145
(9.9)
93
(6.4)
68
(4.6)
43
(2.9)
32
(2.2)
6.1
(88)
4.4
(63)
3.4
(49)
2.8
(40)
9.5
(137)
6.9
(100)
5.3
(76)
4.4
(63)
87
(5.9)
64
(4.4)
87
(5.9)
48
(3.3)
32
(2.2)
19
(1.3)
13
(0.89)
3.8
(55)
2.5
(36)
1.8
(26)
1.4
(20)
5.9
(85)
4.0
(58)
2.9
(42)
2.2
(31)
47
(3.2)
34
(2.3)
47
(3.2)
11
(0.75)
11
(0.75)
5.0
(0.34)
3.0
(0.20)
2.2
(31)
1.3
(18)
0.8
(11)
0.6
(8.7)
3.4
(49)
2.0
(29)
1.3
(18)
0.9
(13)

Swagelok PFA tubing is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each tube length is bagged individually and boxed.
See next page for ordering information.
PFA
Technical Data
62
PFA Series PFA Tubing

Nominal Tube Size Dimensions 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Dimensions PFA 6 8 30 (98.4) 10 12 Length ft (m) 100 (30.5) 500 (152) 100 (30.5) 50 (15.2) 100 (30.5) 50 (15.2) 100 (30.5) 50 (15.2) 50 (15.2) m (ft) PFA-T6M-1M-30M PFA-T6M-1.5M-30M PFA-T8M-1M-30M PFA-T8M-1.5M-30M PFA-T10M-1M-30M PFA-T10M-1.5M-30M PFA-T12M-1M-30M PFA-T12M-1.5M-30M Ordering Number PFA-T2-030-100 PFA-T2-030-500 PFA-T4-047-100 PFA-T4-062-100 PFA-T6-062-50 PFA-T6-062-100 PFA-T8-062-50 PFA-T8-062-100 PFA-T12-062-50 PFA-T16-062-50 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.030 0.047 0.062 0.062 0.062 0.062 0.062 mm 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5
Custom sizes, wall thickness, and lengths are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Groove Cutter
PFA Tube Fittings

Swagelok PFA tube fittings in sizes from 1/8 to 1/2 in. are available for use with PFA tubing. For more information on Swagelok PFA tube fittings, see the Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-05.
PFA tubing MUST be grooved for use with PFA tube

fittings. Use the Swagelok groove cutter tool. It is not necessary to groove tubing for use with metal fittings.
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 For 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. tubing For 1/8 in. tubing 1/2
Groove PFA tubing for use with Swagelok PFA tube fittings.
Ordering Number MS-GC-2 MS-GC-4 MS-GC-6 MS-GC-8
Ultrahigh-Purity PFA Tubing (PFA4 and PFA9D)

Swagelok PFA tubing is available in ultrahigh-purity (PFA4) and advanced (fluorosurfactant resistant) ultrahigh-purity (PFA9D) grades. For more information, see the Swagelok UltrahighPurity PFA TubingPFA4 and PFA9D catalog, MS-02-196.
63
LT Series Vinyl Tubing

Features
General purpose, clear vinyl, flexible tubing. Smooth-bore, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. Size range of 1/8 through 1/2 in. and working pressures Good for a variety of applications where system
transparency is desired.
Bulk hose and end connections available for field assembly. Thick-wall tubing available in 1/4 and 3/8 in. sizes for
from vacuum up to 40 psig (2.7 bar).

Can be used with Swagelok tube fitting and metal insert.
vacuum-service applications.
Clear vinyl material
HC series end connection
Tubing insert
Swagelok tube fitting
Hose clamp
Technical Data and Ordering Information

Pressure ratings are based on tubing used with a HC series end connection
secured by a clamp or with a Swagelok tube fitting and metal insert.

Tubing is sold in 50 ft (15.2 m) rolls. Select an ordering number. Nominal Nominal Inside Outside Temperature Diameter Diameter Range in. in. F (C) 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 7/8 40 to 165
(40 to 73)
Standard Wall 40 (2.7) 40 to 165

(40 to 73)
0.02 (0.03) 0.03 (0.04) 0.04 (0.05) 0.05 (0.07) 0.06 (0.08)
LT-2-4 LT-3-5 LT-4-6 LT-6-8 LT-8-10 LT-4-10V LT-6-14V
30 (2.0) 25 (1.7) 15 (1.0) 10 (0.68)
Thick-Wall Vacuum 0.13 (0.20) Vacuum service over entire temperature range 0.27 (0.41)
Nominal Tubing Size in. Temperature F (C) 40 (40 ) to 70 (20) 80 (26) 100 (37) 120 (93) 140 (148) 160 (204) 165 (230) 40 38 32 24 16
(2.7) (2.6) (2.2) (1.6) (1.1)

Standard Wall 1/4 25 24 20 15 10
(1.7) (1.6) (1.3) (1.0) (0.68)
1/8
3/16 30 29 24 18 12
(2.0) (1.9) (1.6) (1.6) (0.82)
3/8 15 14 12 9.0 6.0

(1.0) (1.0) (0.82) (0.82) (0.43)
1/2 10 10 8.0 6.0 4.0

(0.68) (0.68) (0.55) (0.41) (0.27)
Swagelok vinyl tubing is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each roll of tubing is coiled individually and boxed.
8.4 (0.57) 6.4 (0.44)
6.3 (0.43) 4.8 (0.33)
5.3 (0.36) 4.0 (0.27)
3.2 (0.21) 2.4 (0.16)
2.1 (0.14) 1.6 (0.11)
See next page for connectors, sleeves, hose clamps, and tubing inserts.
VINYL
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar)
Bulk Hose Weight lb/ft (kg/m)
Ordering Number
64
HC SeriesEnd Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose

Features
HC series end connections allow for easy installation of Reusable on other assemblies. May be used without a hose clamp or sleeve in low-
soft plastic or rubber tubing.

316 stainless steel or brass material. Size range of 1/8 to 1 in.
pressure applications.
Use of a hose clamp or sleeve may be required in higher-
pressure applications.
Add SS for 316 stainless steel or B for brass to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2-HC-1-2 To determine the cut length of bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall length. Male Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered
B
Nominal Tubing ID in. 1/8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-1-2 -3-HC-1-2 -4-HC-1-2 -5-HC-1-2 -2-HC-1-4 -3-HC-1-4 -4-HC-1-4 -5-HC-1-4 -6-HC-1-4 -8-HC-1-4 -4-HC-1-6 -5-HC-1-6 -6-HC-1-6 -8-HC-1-6 -10-HC-1-6 -4-HC-1-8 -5-HC-1-8 -6-HC-1-8 -8-HC-1-8 -10-HC-1-8 -12-HC-1-8 -10-HC-1-12 -12-HC-1-12 -16-HC-1-12 -12-HC-1-16 -16-HC-1-16 -2-HC-1-2RT -4-HC-1-2RT -4-HC-1-4RT -6-HC-1-4RT -4-HC-1-6RT -6-HC-1-6RT -6-HC-1-8RT -8-HC-1-8RT Minimum Inside Diameter 0.13 (3.3) 0.68 (17.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.08 (2.0) 0.13 (3.3) 0.86 (21.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.87 (22.1) 0.87 (22.1) 0.87 (22.1) 0.87 (22.1) 0.90 (22.9) 1.06 (26.9) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 1.19 (30.2) 1.38 (35.1) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.50 (12.7) 0.63 (16.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (22.4) 0.08 (2.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.30 (7.6) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 1.23 (31.3) 1.23 (31.3) 1.60 (40.5) 1.60 (40.5) 1.02 (25.8) 1.23 (31.3) 0.80 (20.3) 0.80 (20.3) 0.65 (16.6) 0.51 (12.9) Maximum Outside Dimension
A NPT 1.08 (27.4) 1.27 (32.2) 1.47 (37.3) 1.55 (39.4) 1.26 (32.0) 1.45 (36.8) 1.65 (41.9) 1.73 (43.9) 1.73 (43.9) 1.80 (45.7) 1.66 (42.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.81 (46.0) 1.88 (47.8) 1.85 (47.0) 1.96 (49.8) 1.96 (49.8) 2.03 (51.6) 2.07 (52.6) 2.14 (54.4) 2.07 (52.6) 2.14 (54.4) 2.38 (60.5) 2.43 (61.7) 2.57 (65.3) 1.28 (32.5) 1.47 (37.3) 1.65 (41.9) 1.73 (43.9) 1.66 (42.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.96 (49.8) 2.03 (51.6)
1/8
3/16 1/4 5/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 1/4 5/16
1/4 Vinyl
3/8
3/8 1/2 5/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 5/8
1/2
3/4
3/4 1 3/4 1 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
ISO/BSP Tapered 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.88 (22.4) 0.68 (17.3) 0.86 (21.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.09 (27.7) 0.51 (12.9) 0.65 (16.6) 0.80 (20.3) 1.02 (25.8)
65
HC SeriesEnd Connections Soft Tubing and Hose

B
Dimensions, in. (mm) NPT Size in. 1/8 Nominal Tubing ID in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/4 3/8 5/16 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-7-2 -3-HC-7-2 -4-HC-7-2 -2-HC-7-4 -3-HC-7-4 -4-HC-7-4 -5-HC-7-4 -6-HC-7-4 -4-HC-7-6 -5-HC-7-6 -6-HC-7-6 -6-HC-7-8 -8-HC-7-8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.08 (2.0) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.08 (2.0) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 1.23 (31.3) 1.02 (25.8) 0.87 (22.1) 0.65 (16.6) Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat
A 1.11 (28.2) 1.29 (32.8) 1.47 (37.3) 1.26 (32.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.64 (41.7) 1.73 (43.9) 1.69 (42.9) 1.71 (43.4) 1.82 (46.2) 1.78 (45.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.13 (54.1)
B 0.71 (18.0) 0.70 (17.8) 0.68 (17.3) 0.86 (21.8) 0.85 (21.6) 0.85 (21.6) 0.86 (21.8) 0.82 (20.8) 0.92 (23.4) 0.95 (24.1) 0.91 (23.1) 1.16 (29.5) 1.19 (30.2)

B
Tube Nominal Adapter Tubing Size ID Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8

A
Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-A-201 -2-HC-A-401 -4-HC-A-401 -5-HC-A-401 -6-HC-A-401 -4-HC-A-601 -6-HC-A-601 -8-HC-A-601 -6-HC-A-811 -8-HC-A-811 -12-HC-A-1211 -16-HC-A-1611 -4-HC-A-6MTA
A 1.36 (34.5) 1.45 (36.8) 1.85 (47.0) 1.93 (49.0) 1.93 (49.0) 1.91 (48.5) 1.99 (50.5) 2.06 (52.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.32 (58.9) 2.49 (63.3) 3.05 (77.5) 47.8 (1.88)
Dimensions Minimum Inside B Diameter 0.96 (24.4) 1.05 (26.7) 1.06 (26.9) 0.08 (2.0) 0.08 (2.0) 0.16 (4.1) 0.19 (4.8) 1.12 (28.4) 0.27 (6.9) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (20.3) 4.1 (0.16)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.36 (9.2) 0.44 (11.0) 0.51 (12.9) 0.51 (12.9) 0.65 (16.6) 0.51 (12.9) 0.65 (16.6) 0.80 (20.3) 0.73 (18.4) 0.80 (20.3) 1.23 (31.3) 1.60 (40.5) 12.9 (0.51) Vinyl
1/8 1/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/4
1/4
3/8
3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 in.
1/2 3/4 1 6
1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6) 1.86 (47.2) 27.7 (1.09)
Swagelok tube adapters are to be used only with Swagelok tube fittings.

B
Tube Fitting Size in. 1/8
Nominal Tubing ID in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-1-200 -4-HC-1-200 -4-HC-1-400 -6-HC-1-400 -6-HC-1-600 -8-HC-1-810
A 1.42 (36.1) 1.81 (46.0) 1.92 (48.8) 1.99 (50.6) 2.06 (52.3) 2.24 (56.9)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.02 (25.9) 1.13 (28.7) 1.12 (28.5) 1.19 (30.2) 1.30 (33.0) 0.08 (2.0) 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.51 (12.9) 0.65 (16.6) 0.87 (22.1) 1.02 (25.8)
1/4 3/8 1/2
See next page for more hose connectors.
66
HC SeriesEnd Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose

Sanitary Flanges
Smooth internal finish (20 in. Ra) Clamp Size in. Hose Size in. 3/16 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/16 1
A
and tapered orifice reduce entrapment and facilitate cleaning.
Ordering Number SS-3-HC-8SC SS-4-HC-8SC SS-6-HC-8SC SS-8-HC-8SC SS-3-HC-16SC SS-4-HC-16SC SS-6-HC-16SC SS-8-HC-16SC
A 1.10 (27.9) 1.28 (32.5 1.36 (34.5) 1.44 (36.6)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Maximum Inside Ouside Diameter Diameter 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.13 (3.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.30 (7.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.99 (25.2)
1/4 3/8 1/2
1.50 (38.1)
1.98 (50.3)
Sleeves, Clamps, and Inserts

Hose Connector Sleeves
E
Hose OD in. 1/4 3/8

A
Hose ID in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 1/2 3/4
Ordering Number A-2-L-4 A-4-L-6 A-4-L-7 A-4-L-8 A-5-L-7 A-6-L-8 A-6-L-9 A-7-L-10 A-8-L-11 A-12-L-16
Dimensions, in. Maximum Outside E Dimension 0.26 (6.6) 0.41 (10.4) 0.46 (11.7) 0.52 (13.2) 0.48 (12.2) 0.44 (11.0) 0.65 (16.6) 0.73 (18.4) 0.80 (20.3) 0.73 (18.4) 0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.02 (25.8) 1.45 (36.8)
0.40 (10.2) 0.79 (20.1)
7/16 1/2 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 1
Used to secure soft plastic or rubber
tubing to hose connectors.

Constructed of aluminum. Vinyl Helically grooved ID and outer hex allow
0.87 (22.1)
0.55 (14.0) 0.61 (15.5) 0.69 (17.5) 0.76 (19.3) 1.10 (27.9)
for easy installation with a wrench.

Reusable for other assemblies.
0.94 (23.9) 1.07 (27.2)
Hose Clamps
Material:
Band, saddle, housing: 304 SS Screw: 304 SS / 305 SS

4-corner clinched saddle and
Min Max Hose OD Hose OD in. in. 7/16 1/2 9/16 11/16 13/16 25/32 29/32 1 1/16 1 1/4 1 1/2
Ordering Number MS-HCC-6 MS-HCC-8 MS-HCC-10 MS-HCC-12 MS-HCC-16
Band Marking 6 8 10 12 16
housing with no spot welds to corrode or break.

Smooth inside diameter surface
provides high sealing pressure and reduces torque on screw.
Tubing Inserts
Tubing inserts help secure soft plastic
tubing used with standard Swagelok tube fittings.

Available in a variety of materials. Some tubing inserts may be
non-barbed depending on size and material.

For ordering information and
dimensions, see the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140.
67
NG Series Nylon Hose

Features
Electrically conductive nylon hose for CNG. Static dissipative, smooth-bore nylon core. Size range of 1/4 and 3/8 in. and working pressures up to Single, twin bonded, and vent bonded hoses are available in
custom assemblies.
Single hose
5000 psig (344 bar).

Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. Cover includes a blue stripe which provides an easily
visible indicator of the static dissipative core.

Polyurethane cover resists abrasion. Designed for use with natural gas where static dissipation
Twin hose (high-pressure vent)
is required.
Vent hose (low-pressure vent)
302 SS spring guard
Fiber reinforcement
Polyurethane cover
Static dissipative core
Technical Data
Hose Nominal Style Hose Size (Series) in. (mm) Single (NGS) Twin (NGT) Vent (NGV) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.26 (6.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.38 (9.6) Fill 0.26 (6.6) Vent 0.26 (6.6) Fill 0.38 (9.6) Vent 0.26 (6.6) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.63 (16.0) 0.77 (19.6) 0.63 (16.0) 0.77 (19.6) Fill 0.63 (16.0) Vent 0.63 (16.0) Fill 0.38 (9.6) Vent 0.63 (16.0) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) 2.00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.2) 2.00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.2) 2.00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.2) 40 to 150
(40 to 65)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 5000 (344) Fill and vent 5000 (344) Fill 5000 (344) Vent 1500 (103)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 20 000 (1378) Fill and vent 20 000 (1378) Fill 20 000 (1378) Vent 6 000 (413)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.12 (0.17) 0.15 (0.22) 0.25 (0.37) 0.30 (0.44) 0.15 (0.22) 0.25 (0.37) NYLON
ow-pressure vent line does not have static dissipative core. L
Testing
Every Swagelok NG series hose assembly is factory tested for electrical conductivity.
Warning: All equipment must be properly grounded to allow
static dissipation and help to prevent static sparking. Periodic inspection of hose assembly is recommended. End-to-end electrical resistance of the hose assembly must not exceed 5 M.

Swagelok conductive core hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
68

Custom Hose AssembliesSingle Hose
SS - NGS 4 - A C - 40 X - F
1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Spring Guards

2 Hose
See End Connection Designator column in tables on page 70. For fitting dimensions, see End Connection tables, page 70.
5 Overall Length Insert length in inches.
6 in. spring guards at each end are standard. X = No spring guards

This option should only be used in static bend applications.
NGS = NG series single nylon hose

7 Options
4 = 1/4 6 = 3/8
Hose Length in Inches F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
NYLON
69

Custom Hose AssembliesTwin and Vent Hoses
Nozzle end
6
Fill hose
Dispenser end
7
Vent hose
10
11
12
SS - NGV 6 - D A
1 Material End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel 2 Hose NGT = NG series twin nylon hose NGV = NG series vent nylon hose 3 Nominal Fill Hose Size, in.
C M - 24
- N1
Adjustment Positive DX = None D1 = 2 in. D2 = 4 in. D3 = 6 in. D4 = 8 in. D5 = 10 in. D6 = 12 in. D7 = 15 in. D8 = 18 in. D9 = 21 in. D0 = 24 in.
D3 F
8 Overall Length (Fill and Vent) Insert length in inches. 9 Spring Guards
11 Vent Hose Dispenser End Length
6 in. spring guards at each end are standard. X = No spring guard

This option should only be used in static bend applications.
4 = 1/4 6 = 3/8
4 5 6 7
10 Vent Hose Nozzle End Length
Fill Hose Nozzle End Connection Fill Hose Dispenser End Connection Vent Hose Nozzle End Connection Vent Hose Dispenser End Connection
For fitting dimensions, see End Connection tables, page 70.
F F1 T T2
= = = =
Fire jacket Thermosleeve Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags
Illustration shows N1 adjustment.
See next page for end connections.
NYLON
See End Connection Designator column in tables, page 70.
Adjustment Positive NX = None N1 = 2 in. N2 = 4 in. N3 = 6 in. N4 = 8 in. N5 = 10 in. N6 = 12 in. N7 = 15 in. N8 = 18 in. N9 = 21 in. N0 = 24 in.
Negative NX = None NA = 2 in. NB = 4 in. NC = 6 in. ND = 8 in. NE = 10 in. NF = 12 in. NG = 15 in. NH = 18 in. NJ = 21 in. NK = 24 in.
Negative DX = None DA = 2 in. DB = 4 in. DC = 6 in. DD = 8 in. DE = 10 in. DF = 12 in. DG = 15 in. DH = 18 in. DJ = 21 in. DK = 24 in.
Illustration shows D3 adjustment.

12 Options
70

End Connections
Tube Fitting Size
A
Nominal Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/4 in. 3/8 in.
End Connection Designator C D G H
A 2.57 (65.3) 2.94 (74.7) 65.5 (2.58) 74.9 (2.95)
Dimensions Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 3.8 (0.15) 6.1 (0.24) 0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 20.3 (0.80) 22.1 (0.87)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 8 10

Tube Adapter Size
A
Nominal Hose Size 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 in. 3/8 in.
End Connection Designator B A A E F
A 2.48 (63.0) 2.47 (62.7) 2.82 (71.6) 62.7 (2.47) 71.6 (2.82)
Dimensions Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter Dimension 0.15 (3.8) 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 3.8 (0.15) 6.1 (0.24) 0.80 (20.3) 0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 20.3 (0.80) 22.1 (0.87)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8
Dimensions, mm (in.) 8 10
Nominal Hose Size in.
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection Designator Minimum Inside Diameter Maximum Outside Dimension
NYLON
NPT 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 M N K L 2.28 (57.9) 2.65 (67.3) 2.28 (57.9) 2.65 (67.3) 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 20.3 (0.80) 22.1 (0.87)
ISO/BSP Tapered
71
7R and 8R Series Nylon Hose

Features
SAE general-purpose, hydraulic, nylon hose. Smooth-bore, nylon core. Size range of 1/4 to 1 in. and working pressures up to Select 8R series hose assemblies have alternative fuel-type
approval according to ECE R110; see page 84 for more information.

Designed for use in hydraulic applications where outgassing
5000 psig (344 bar).

Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. Smooth black polyurethane cover is perforated to prevent
is a concern.
Bulk hose and end connections available for field assembly;
blistering.
Polyurethane cover resists abrasion.
custom assemblies also available.

Options include hose covers and spring guard. See page 83
for details. 316 SS and carbon steel end connections
Polyurethane cover
Fiber reinforcement
Nylon core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.8) 0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.8) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.52 (13.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.82 (20.8) 0.53 (13.5) 0.67 (17.0) 0.84 (21.3) 1.15 (29.2) 1.48 (37.6) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.62) 2.00 (5.08) 2.50 (6.35) 4.00 (10.2) 6.50 (16.5) 10.0 (25.4) Temperature Range F (C) 40 to 200
(40 to 93)
Specification (Series) SAE J517 100R7 (7R series)
SAE J517 100R8 (8R series)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)

Swagelok nylon hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.

For bulk hose for field assembly, see table below. For end connections for field assembly, see page 73. For custom hose assemblies, see page for 76 for hose sizes, end connections,
lengths, and options.

For tools for field assembly, see page 86.
Bulk Hose
Hose Series 7R Nominal Hose Ordering Size, in. Number 1/4 7R-4 3/8 7R-6 1/2 7R-8 1/4 8R-4 3/8 8R-6 1/2 8R-8 3/4 8R-12 1 8R-16 Reel Length ft (m) 250 (76)
250 (76) 125 (38) 50 (15)
8R
Coils of nominal hose sizes smaller than 1 in. may contain up to three pieces of hose.
NYLON
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 2750 (189) 2250 (155) 2000 (137) 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3500 (241) 2250 (155) 2000 (137)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (620) 8 000 (551) 20 000 (1378) 16 000 (1102) 14 000 (964) 9 000 (620) 8 000 (551)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.07 (0.10) 0.10 (0.15) 0.14 (0.21) 0.19 (0.28) 0.11 (0.16) 0.15 (0.22) 0.26 (0.39) 0.39 (0.58)
72
7N and 8N Series Nylon Hose

Features
SAE nonconductive, nylon hose. Smooth-bore, nylon core. Size range of 1/4 to 3/4 in. and working pressures up to Hose passes electrical conductivity test of SAE J343/
SAE J517. Hose is not intended for exposure to continuous electrical current.
Designed for use with petroleum-based and synthetic
2750 psig (189 bar).

Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. Smooth orange polyurethane cover is nonperforated to
hydraulic fluids where SAE nonconductive properties are desired.

prevent moisture from entering hose.

Polyurethane cover resists abrasion.

Options include hose covers and spring guards. See page 83
for details. Polyurethane cover Fiber reinforcement 316 SS and carbon steel end conections
SAE nonconductive nylon core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.26 (6.5) 0.38 (9.8) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.49 (12.4) 0.65 (16.5) 0.80 (20.3) 1.15 (29.2) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.62) 6.50 (16.5) Temperature Range F (C) 40 to 200
(40 to 93)
Specification (Series) SAE J517 100R7 (7N series) SAE J517 100R8 (8N series) NYLON
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 2750 (189) 2250 (155) 2000 (137) 2250 (155)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (620) 8 000 (551) 9 000 (620)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.07 (0.10) 0.10 (0.15) 0.14 (0.21) 0.26 (0.39)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)

Swagelok nylon hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.


For tools for field assembly, see page 86.
Caution: System media can be conduits Nonperforated covers may

blister in gas service.
Bulk Hose
Hose Series 7N 8N
for electricity. Consider system media properties prior to use.
Nominal Hose Ordering Size, in. Number 1/4 7N-4 3/8 7N-6 1/2 7N-8 3/4 8N-12
Reel Length ft (m) 250 (76) 125 (38)
73
7R, 8R, 7N, and 8N Series Nylon Hose and 7P Series Polyethylene Hose
End Connections for Field Assembly
Select an ordering number and add SS for 316 stainless steel or S for carbon steel. Example: SS-TP4-TA4 To determine the cut length of bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall length. For field assembly, also select the corresponding pusher and die ordering numbers. See tables on page 87. Examples: MS-P-TA4 and MS-7R8R-4
B

B
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size

A
A 2.48 2.47 2.82 3.40 3.40 3.70 4.47 63.0 62.7 71.6 86.4
(63.0) (62.7) (71.6) (86.4) (86.4) (94.0) (113) (2.48) (2.47) (2.82) (3.40)
Dimensions Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.45 1.44 1.51 1.84 1.84 1.95 2.26 36.8 36.6 38.4 46.7
(36.8) (36.6) (38.4) (46.7) (46.7) (49.5) (57.4) (1.45) (1.44) (1.51) (1.84)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.80 0.80 0.87 1.09 1.09 1.31 1.60 20.3 20.3 22.1 27.6
(20.3) (20.3) (22.1) (27.6) (27.6) (33.1) (40.5) (0.80) (0.80) (0.87) (1.09)
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA6 TA8 TA10 TA12 TA16 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM12
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 1/4 -TP4-TA4 1/4 -TP4-TA6 3/8 3/8 -TP6-TA6 1/2 1/2 -TP8-TA8 5/8 1/2 -TP8-TA10 3/4 3/4 -TP12-TA12 1 1 -TP16-TA16 Dimensions, mm 6 1/4 in. 8 1/4 in. 10 3/8 in. 12 1/2 in.
(in.)
0.15 0.15 0.24 0.36 0.39 0.56 0.76 3.8 3.8 6.1 9.1
(3.8) (3.8) (6.1) (9.1) (9.9) (14.2) (19.3)
-TP4-TM6 -TP4-TM8 -TP6-TM10 -TP8-TM12
(0.15) (0.15) (0.24) (0.36)

B
Tube Nominal Basic Fitting Hose Ordering Size Size Number Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 1/4 -TP4-SL4 3/8 3/8 -TP6-SL6 1/2 1/2 -TP8-SL8 Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 8 10 12 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. -TP4-SM6 -TP4-SM8 -TP4-SM10 -TP6-SM10 -TP8-SM12
A 2.57 (65.3) 2.94 (74.7) 3.30 (83.8) 65.3 (2.57) 65.5 (2.58) 71.9 (2.83) 74.9 (2.95) 83.8 (3.30)
1.54 (39.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.74 (44.2) 39.1 (1.54) 39.4 (1.55) 45.7 (1.80) 41.7 (1.64) 44.2 (1.74)
0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.36 (9.1) 3.8 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15) 6.1 (0.24) 9.1 (0.36)
0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 1.09 (27.6) 20.3 (0.80) 20.3 (0.80) 22.1 (0.87) 22.1 (0.87) 27.6 (1.09)
SL4 SL6 SL8 SM6 SM8 SM10 SM10 SM12
NYLON
Dimensions Minimum Inside B Diameter
74
Male Pipe Threads, NPT, ISO/BSP Tapered
B
NPT, ISO/BSP Nominal Tapered Hose Size Size in. in. 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) Basic Ordering Number -TP4-PM4 -TP6-PM4 -TP6-PM6 -TP8-PM8 -TP4-MT4 -TP6-MT6 -TP8-MT8 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.15 0.24 0.24 0.36
(3.8) (6.1) (6.1) (9.1)
A 2.28 2.65 2.65 3.09

(57.9) (67.3) (67.3) (78.5)
1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
B NPT 1.25 (31.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.53 (38.9)
Maximum Outside Dimension 0.80 0.87 0.87 1.09

(20.3) (22.1) (22.1) (27.6)
End Connection Designator PM4 PM4 PM6 PM8 MT4 MT6 MT8
ISO/BSP Tapered 2.28 (57.9) 1.25 (31.8) 2.65 (67.3) 1.34 (34.0) 3.09 (78.5) 1.53 (38.9)
3.8 (0.15) 6.1 (0.24) 9.1 (0.36)
0.80 (20.3) 0.87 (22.1) 1.09 (27.6)
Male Pipe Threads, ISO/BSP Parallel

B
ISO/BSP Nominal Tapered Hose Basic Size Size Ordering in. in. Number 1/4 1/4 -TP4-MS4 3/8 3/8 -TP6-MS6 1/2 1/2 -TP8-MS8
A 2.53 (64.3) 2.73 (69.3) 3.00 (76.2)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.50 (38.1) 0.15 (3.8) 1.42 (36.1) 0.24 (6.1) 1.44 (36.6) 0.36 (9.1)
End Connection Designator MS4 MS6 MS8

B
Swivel Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Nominal Hose Basic Size Ordering in. Number 1/4 -TP4-AS4 3/8 -TP6-AS6 1/2 -TP8-AS8
A 2.62 (66.6) 2.68 (68.1) 3.34 (84.8)
Dimensions shown with swivel nut pushed toward hex.
NYLON
60 Male Cone, Female Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread

B
60 Male Cone, Female Swivel ISO/BSP Nominal Parallel Hose Basic Thread Size Size Ordering in. in. Number 1/4 1/4 -TP4-BM4 3/8 3/8 -TP6-BM6 1/2 1/2 -TP8-BM8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside Diameter 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.36 (9.1) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.02 (25.8) 1.23 (31.3) End Connection Designator BM4 BM6 BM8
A 2.45 (62.2) 2.37 (60.2) 3.23 (82.0)
B 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.67 (42.4)
75
30 Female Cone, Female Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread
B
30 Female Cone, Female Swivel ISO/BSP Nominal Parallel Hose Basic Thread Size Size Ordering in. in. Number 1/4 1/4 -TP4-BS4 3/8 3/8 -TP6-BS6 1/2 1/2 -TP8-BS8
A 2.56 (65.0) 2.62 (66.6) 3.38 (85.9)
End Connection Designator BS4 BS6 BS8
Universal Globe Seal, Metric Female Swivel Nut

B
Universal Globe Seal, Metric Female Swivel Nut Size mm 14 18 22
Dimensions, in. (mm) Nominal Hose Basic Size Ordering in. Number 1/4 -TP4-MC14 3/8 -TP6-MC18 1/2 -TP8-MC22 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.36 (9.1) Maximum Outside Dimension 0.87 (22.1) 1.02 (25.8) 0.80 (20.3) End Connection Designator MC14 MC18 MC22
A 2.38 (60.5) 2.23 (56.6) 3.08 (78.2)
B 1.35 (34.3) 1.46 (37.1) 1.51 (38.4)
See next page for custom hose asemblies.
NYLON
76
7R, 8R, 7N, 8N Series Nylon Hose

5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - 7R 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 F
71CM-F
End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel S = Carbon steel

2 Hose

5 Overall Length
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve S = 302 SS spring guard, hose-length S2 = 302 SS spring guard, 6 in.-length T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two Lanyard tags W = Hydrostratic test 093 = ECE R110 approval Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
7R = 7R series SAE 100R7 nylon hose 8R = 8R series SAE 100R8 nylon hose 7N = 7N series SAE 100R7 nonconductive nylon hose 8N = 8N series SAE 100R8 nonconductive nylon hose
4 6 8 12 16
NYLON
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
77
7P SeriesPolyethylene Hose
Features
Polyethylene hose designed for use in food, dairy, and water Polyurethane cover resists abrasion. Polyethylene core material is compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part
applications.
Static dissipative, smooth-bore, polyethylene core. Size range of 1/4 to 1 in. and working pressures up to
177.1520 and NSF-51, for use with food, dairy, and water.
2750 psig (189 bar).

Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. Smooth, polyurethane blue cover is nonperforated to

Options include hose covers and spring guards. See page 83
for details.
prevent moisture entrapment and system contamination.
Polyurethane cover
Fiber reinforcement
316 SS and carbon steel end connections
Polyethylene core
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.1) 1 (25.4) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (9.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.52 (13.2) 0.66 (16.8) 0.81 (20.6) 1.14 (29.0) 1.48 (37.6) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.62) 5.00 (12.7) 8.00 (20.3) Temperature Range F (C) Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 2750 (189) 2250 (155) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (620) 8 000 (551) 6 000 (413) 6 000 (413)
10 to 150
(23 to 65)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.06 (0.09) 0.09 (0.13) 0.12 (0.18) 0.25 (0.37) 0.37 (0.55)

Swagelok nylon hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC10), MS-06-62. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.


For tools for field assembly, see page 86. POLYETHYLENE
Caution: Nonperforated covers may

blister in gas service.
Bulk Hose
Hose Series
7P
Nominal Hose Ordering Size, in. Number 1/4 7P-4 3/8 7P-6 1/2 7P-8 3/4 7P-12 1 7P-16
Reel Length ft (m) 250 (76) 125 (38) 50 (15)
See next page for custom hose assemblies.
78
7P Series Polyethylene Hose

5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Options
SS - 7P 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 F
71CM-F
End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel S = Carbon steel

2 Hose
See End Connection Designator column in tables on pages 73 to 75. Add designators in reverse alphanumeric order.
5 Overall Length Inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Include CM as shown for centimeter lengths.
For hose lengths specified in centimeters, add a dash prior to the Option designator. Add designators in alphanumeric order. CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN F = Fire jacket F1 = Thermosleeve S = 302 SS spring guard, hose-length S2 = 302 SS spring guard, 6 in.-length T = Lanyard tag T2 = Two lanyard tags W = Hydrostatic test Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
7P = 7P series polyethylene hose

4 6 8 12 16
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
POLYETHYLENE
79
PB Series Rubber Hose

Features
Ozone-resistant, general-purpose, rubber hose with push Cover is flame-resistant in accordance with 30CFR Part 18. Designed for use in general-purpose, compressed air
on connections.
Smooth-bore, Buna N core. Size range of 1/4 to 3/4 in. and working pressures up to
applications and oil transfer.

350 psig (24.1 bar).

Internal fiber reinforcement enhaces hose pressure rating

Standard hose color is blue; other hose colors include black,
and ensures connection retention.

Buna N cover resists abrasion.
green, grey, red, and yellow.

Options include tags. See page 83 for details.
Buna N cover
Rayon reinforcement
Buna N core
316 SS and brass end conections
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.26 (6.6) 0.39 (9.9) 0.50 (12.7) 0.76 (19.3) Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.51 (12.8) 0.67 (17.0) 0.75 (19.1) 1.07 (27.2) Minimum Inside Bend Radius in. (cm) 2.50 (6.35) 3.00 (7.62) 5.00 (12.7) 7.00 (17.8) 40 to 200
(40 to 93)

(40 to 20C) psig (bar)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1400 (96.4) 1200 (82.6) 1200 (82.6) 1200 (82.6)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.09 (0.13) 0.14 (0.20) 0.14 (0.20) 0.25 (0.37)
350 (24.1) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6)
Ratings maintain a minimum factor of 4:1 between working pressure and minimum burst pressure.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 40 (40) to 70 100 150 200
(20) (37) (65) (93)

Swagelok PB series rubber hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Each custom hose assembly is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed. Bulk rubber hose is packaged and shipped in reels.
Users must evaluate
compatibility in systems containing heated water-based fluidssome conditions may affect the Buna N core.
3/8, 1/4 1/2, 3/4 Working Pressure psig (bar) 350 315 210 100
(24.1) (21.7) (14.4) (6.8)
300 270 180 80
(20.6) (18.6) (12.4) (5.5)
RUBBER
80

For bulk hose, see below; for end connections for field assembly, see next page. For custom hose assemblies, see page for 82 for hose sizes, end connections,

For hose cutters for field assembly, see page 85.
Bulk Hose
Bulk hose is available in 250 ft (76 m) reels; the standard color is blue. Select an ordering number from the table below left. Example: PB-4 For hose of a color other than blue, add a hose color designator from the table below right. Example PB-4-BK
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Rubber Hose Color Black Gray Green Red Yellow Designator -BK -GY -GR -RD -YW
Ordering Number PB-4 PB-6 PB-8 PB-12
Reels contain up to three lengths of hose.
End Connections for Field Assembly

Select a basic ordering number and add SS for 316 SS or B for brass. Example: SS-PB4-SL4 To determine the cut ength of bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall length. Polyethylene finishing cap

B
Tube Fitting Size in. 1/4 3/8

A
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-SL4 -PB6-SL6 -PB8-SL8
A 1.97 (50.0) 2.11 (53.6) 2.47 (62.7)
End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8
1/2
RUBBER
81

B
Tube Adapter Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 6 8 10 12 18
Nominal Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 3/4 in.
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-TA4 -PB6-TA6 -PB8-TA8 -PB12-TA12 -PB4-TM6 -PB4-TM8 -PB6-TM8 -PB6-TM10 -PB8-TM12 -PB12-TM18
A 1.93 (49.0) 2.03 (51.6) 2.47 (62.7) 3.14 (79.8) 49.0 (1.93) 48.8 (1.92) 52.1 (2.05) 51.6 (2.03) 62.7 (2.47) 79.8 (3.14)
Dimensions Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.17 (29.7) 1.16 (29.5) 1.42 (36.1) 1.47 (37.3) 29.7 (1.17) 29.5 (1.16) 30.0 (1.18) 29.5 (1.16) 36.1 (1.42) 37.3 (1.47) 0.15 (3.8) 0.24 (6.1) 0.34 (8.7) 0.57 (14.5) 3.8 (0.15) 4.1 (0.16) 5.6 (0.22) 6.9 (0.27) 8.1 (0.32) 8.6 (0.34)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.67 (17.0) 0.83 (21.1) 0.98 (24.9) 1.23 (31.3) 17.0 (0.67) 17.0 (0.67) 21.1 (0.83) 21.1 (0.83) 24.9 (0.98) 1.23 (31.3)
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA12 TM6 TM8 TM8 TM10 TM12 TM18

A

B
NPT and ISO/BSP Nominal Tapered Hose Size Size in. in. 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Dimensions, in. (mm) Basic Ordering Number -PB4-PM4 -PB6-PM4 -PB6-PM6 -PB8-PM8 -PB12-PM12 -PB4-MT4 -PB6-MT6 -PB8-MT8 -PB12-MT12 Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.1) 0.27 (6.9) 0.27 (6.9) 0.37 (9.5) 0.61 (15.6) 4.1 (0.16) 6.9 (0.27) 6.9 (0.27) 9.5 (0.37) Maximum Outside Diameter 0.67 (17.0) 0.83 (21.1) 0.83 (21.1) 1.02 (25.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.67 (17.0) 0.83 (21.1) 1.02 (25.9) 1.31 (33.3) End Connection Designator PM4 PM4 PM6 PM8 PM12 MT4 MT6 MT8 MT12
A NPT 1.68 (42.7) 1.80 (45.7) 1.80 (45.7) 2.19 (55.6) 2.81 (71.4) 1.68 (42.7) 1.80 (45.7) 2.19 (55.6) 2.81 (71.4)
B 0.92 (23.4) 0.93 (23.6) 0.93 (23.6) 1.14 (29.0) 1.14 (29.0) 0.92 (23.4) 0.93 (23.6) 1.14 (29.0) 1.14 (29.0)
1/4
A
3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
ISO/BSP Tapered
Unions
B
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8

A
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-6 -PB6-6 -PB8-6 -PB12-6
A 2.07 (52.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.61 (66.3) 3.85 (97.8)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Minimum Inside B Diameter 1.31 (33.3) 1.38 (35.1) 1.56 (39.6) 2.16 (54.9) 0.16 (4.1) 0.27 (6.9) 0.37 (9.5) 0.61 (15.6)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.67 (17.0) 0.83 (21.1) 0.87 (22.1) 1.23 (31.3)
1/2 3/4
See next page for custom hose asemblies.
RUBBER
82

5
in.
6
or
5
cm
6 Hose Color
SS - PB 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - BK
7 1 C M - B K - CRN
End Connections SS = 316 stainless steel B = Brass

2 Hose
See End Connection Designator column in tables on page 80. Add designators in reverse alphanumeric order.
5 Overall Length Inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Include CM as shown for centimeter lengths.
PB = PB series rubber hose

None = Blue, standard hose color -BK = Black -GR = Green -GY = Gray -RD = Red -YW = Yellow
7 Options Add designators in alphanumeric order.
4 6 8 12
= = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
-CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN -T = Lanyard tag -T2 = Two lanyard tags -W = Hydrostatic test Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag Text table, page 84. See page 83 for detailed descriptions of options.
RUBBER
83
Options
Covers
Covers do not change hose technical data.
Fire Jacket
Woven fiberglass coated with specially
Spiral Guard
Helical HDPE plastic. Highly flexible, protects against
compounded aerospace-grade silicone rubber.

Resists many hydraulic fluids and
abrasion.
Covers entire length of hose. Operating temperature: 180 to 250F
lubricating oils.

Operating temperature: 65 to 500F (53 to 260C) with
(117 to 121C).
Standard colors are blue, black, and yellow.
short-term flame exposure to 2000F (1093C) .
316 Stainless Steel Braid Material

Replaces standard 304 stainless steel
Thermosleeve
Braided fiberglass with saturated
overbraid.
Provides greater corrosion resistance.
synthetic material coating.

Creates a barrier that prevents direct
contact with the hose and resists abrasion.

Protects hose from weld splatter and
Spring Guard
Helical 302 stainless
resists effects of UV light.

Operating temperature: up to 1000F (537C).
steel.
Highly flexible, protects
Armor Guard
Interlocking, flexible 302 stainless steel. Highly flexible, protects against kinking
against kinking and abrasion.

Hose-length version
Hose-Length Spring Guard
and abrasion.
Covers entire length of hose. Operating temperature: 325 to 750F
covers entire length of hose.
6-in. Long Spring Guard
Six-inch-long version protects ends of hose. Operating temperature: 325 to 850F (198 to 454C).
(198 to 398C).
Testing
These tests are in addition to the standard testing performed on each hose series.
Helium Leak Testing

Inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of
Nitrogen Pressure Testing

Nitrogen gas bubble leak test at 100 psig (6.8 bar) or
1 10 9 std cm3/s.
Test certification included with order.
customer-specified test pressure, not to exceed 1.5 times the rated working pressure of the hose at 70F (20C) with no visible leakage.
Hydrostatic Testing
Hydrostatic pressure test to 1.5 times the rated working
pressure of the hose at 70F (20C) with no visible leakage.

See next page for tags and approval options.
84
Options
Tags
Lanyard Tag
Stainless steel tag with customer-
Mat Tag
Polyester tag with customer-specified
specified text. See Hose Tag Text table for details.

Attached to the hose with a
text. See Hose Tag Text table for details.

Operating temperature range:
stainless steel lanyard and aluminum clamp.

Specify a quantity of 1 or 2.
40 to 302F (40 to 150C)

Attached to the hose with an adhesive. Standard colors are blue, green, red,
Lanyard Tag with CRN

Stainless steel tag with customer-provided, national or
white, and yellow.
Perma Tag
Polyester tag encapsulated in
provincial Canadian Registration Number (CRN number).

Attached to the hose with a stainless steel lanyard and
aluminum clamp.
Clamp Tag
Stainless steel tag with customer-
plantinum-cured silicone with customer-specified text. See Hose Tag Text table for details.
Attached to the hose with an adhesive. Designed for sterilization-in-place
specified text.
See Hose Tag Text table for details.
(SIP), clean-in-place (CIP), and autoclave applications.

Standard colors are blue, green, red,
Limited to 2 lines of text.

Attached to the hose with two metal
white, black, yellow, gray, brown, purple, and pink. Hose Tag Text Specify up to 5 lines of text with 25 characters per line including spaces and commas. Exception: Clamp tag is limited to 2 lines of text.
Line Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. For Example Ordering number Process line Location Supplier phone number Date of manufacture
bands.
Approvals
Alternative Fuels-Type Approval
Select T series hose assemblies and 8R series hose assemblies are available tested, tagged, and approved to ECE R110. See the table for the nominal sizes and end connections available. T Series Carbon Black-filled PTFE Hose Assemblies:
Operating temperature 40 to 248F (40 to 120C) Maximum working pressure 435 psig (30 bar); pressure 1/4 in. End Connection Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Fractional Swagelok tube adapter Metric Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT Male ISO/7 Male JIC (AN) 37 flare Male SAE/MS (ECE R110approved O-ring) Hose Nominal Size 3/8 in. 1/2 in. End Connection Designators SL6, SL8, SL4, SL5 SL6 SL10 SM10, SM12, SM6, SM8 SM8, SM10 SM16 TA6, TA8, TA4, TA5 TA6 TA10 TM10, TM12, TM6, TM8 TM8, TM10 TM16 PM4 MT4 AN4 ST2, ST4 PM4, PM6 MT4, MT6 AN6 ST4, ST6, ST8 PM6, PM8 MT6, MT8 AN8 ST6, ST8, ST10
classification 1. 8R Series Hose Assemblies:

Operating temperature 40 to 185F (40 to 85C) Maximum working pressure 3770 psig (260 bar); pressure
classification 0.
85
Options
Availability
Availability of options by hose series are shown below, but may be limited by hose size. Applications, hose operating parameters, and hose length must be considered when selecting options.
Hose Series Options Fire jacket Thermosleeve Armor guard Covers Spiral guard Spring guard Hose length Spring guard 6 in. long 316L SS braid Testing Helium leak testing Hydrostatic testing Nitrogen pressure testing Lanyard tag Two lanyard tags Tags Lanyard tag, CRN Clamp tag Mat tag Perma tag Approval Alternative fuel-type ECE R110 Metal Hose Core PFA PTFE Std Polyethylene Rubber Nylon Std Std FM FJ FL CT T B X S C N W F U NG 7R 8R 7N 8N 7P PB
Available in all sizes. Available in select hose sizes.

Cutting Tools for Hose and Soft Tubing
Light-Duty Tube Cutter
Use to cut rubber hose or plastic tubing to desired length for field assembly.
Cuts hose and tubing with up to
Heavy-Duty Hose Cutter

Use to cut nylon or polyethylene hose to the desired length for field assembly.
Cuts hose with up to 1 in. (25 mm)
1 in. (25 mm) outside diameter. Ordering number: MS-FT-TC
outside diameter. Ordering number: MS-HC-SC-1
See next page for assembly tools for nylon and polyethylene hose.
86

Assembly Tools for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose
Hand Swager
Portable, manually operated tool for attaching end connections to hose.
Attaches Swagelok end
Power Swager
Stationary, electrically powered tool for attaching end connections to hose.
Attaches Swagelok end
connections to 1/4 to 1 in. hose.

Constructed of rugged,
connections to 1/4 to 1 in. hose.

Bench mounting
die-cast aluminum.
Can be bench mounted. Weight: 8 lb (3.6 kg).
required.
Height: 30 in. (76 cm)
Ordering number: MS-HSR For more information, see the Swagelok Hand Swager Users Manual, MS-13-211.
Width: 19 in. (48 cm) Depth: 28 in. (71 cm) Weight: 140 lb (64 kg) Motor: Single phase 1 hp, 60 Hz, 115/208/230 V. Ordering number: MS-PSR-110 For more information, see the Swagelok Power Swager Manual and Thermoplastic Hose Assembly Instructions, users manual, MS-13-144.
Case Can accommodate hand swager and other tools and accessories. Ordering number: MS-HSR-CASE
The Swagelok power swager is designed expressly
for swaging Swagelok end connections and hose using the appropriate Swagelok dies and pushers. Swagelok Company cannot be responsible for property damage or personal injury that may result from swaging other brands of end connections and hose, nor from the intentional misuse of the swager.
Accessories for Hand and Power Swagers

Swage Dies
Use to attach end connections to nylon and polyethylene hose. Ordering numbers based on nominal hose size. See Pushers and Swage Dies for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose tables, page 87.
Pushers
Use to push and position end connections while swaging, and used with vise blocks to assist in inserting end connections into nylon and polyethylene hose. Ordering numbers based on nominal hose size. See Pushers and Swage Dies for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose tables, page 87.
Lubricant
Use to lubricate the swage collar and swage dies during swaging of nylon and polyethylene hose end connections. Ordering number: MS-TP-LUBE
Depth Insertion Gauges

Use to mark nylon and polyethylene hose to proper fitting insertion depth. Ordering numbers: MS-IGB-1 for hose size designators 4, 6, and 8 MS-IGB-2 for hose size designators 12 and 16.
Vise Blocks
Use to clamp nylon and polyethylene hose during end connection insertion. Ordering numbers: MS-VB-1 for hose size designators 4, 6, and 8 MS-VB-2 for hose size designators 12 and 16.
87

Pushers and Swage Dies for Nylon and Polyethylene Hose
Tube Nominal Adapter Hose Size Size Dimensions, in. 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-TA4 MS-P-4TA6 MS-P-TA6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-8TA10 MS-P-TA12 MS-P-TA16 Swage Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-7R8R-8 MS-8R-12 MS-8R-16 / MS-7P-16 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
Male Pipe Threads, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Nominal Hose Pusher Size Ordering in. Number 1/4 MS-P-MS4 3/8 MS-P-MS6 1/2 MS-P-MS8
Swage Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
60 Male Cone, Female Swivel, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread

60 Male Cone, Female Swivel, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, mm 6 1/4 in. MS-P-TA4 8 1/4 in. MS-P-4TM8 10 3/8 in. MS-P-TA6 12 1/2 in. MS-P-SLTA8

Tube Nominal Pusher Fitting Hose Ordering Size Size Number Dimensions, in. 1/4 1/4 MS-P-SL4 3/8 3/8 MS-P-SL6 1/2 1/2 MS-P-SLTA8 Dimensions, mm 6 8 10 12 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. MS-P-SL4 MS-P-4SM8 MS-P-SL6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 Swage Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
Nominal Hose Pusher Size Ordering in. Number 1/4 MS-P-BM4 3/8 MS-P-BM6 1/2 MS-P-BM8
30 Female Cone, Female Swivel ISO/BSP Parallel Thread

30 Female Cone, Female Swivel, ISO/BSP Parallel Nominal Thread Hose Size Size in. in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
MS-P-4SM10 MS-7R8R-4
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-BS4 MS-P-BS6 MS-P-BS8

Swivel Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Nominal Hose Pusher Size Ordering in. Number 1/4 MS-P-AS4 3/8 MS-P-AS6 1/2 MS-P-AS8
Universal Globe Seal, Metric Female Swivel Nut

Swage Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 Universal Globe Seal, Metric Female Nominal Swivel Nut Hose Pusher Size Size Ordering mm in. Number 14 1/4 MS-P-MC14 18 3/8 MS-P-MC18 22 1/2 MS-P-MC22
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered Thread

NPT, ISO/BSP Tapered Nominal Thread Hose Size Size in. in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-PM4 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM8
Swage Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
Additional Products
Tube Fittings
Pipe Fittings
See the Swagelok Pipe Fittings catalog, MS-01-147, for more information.
Quick-Connects
See the Swagelok Quick- Connects catalog, MS-01-138, for more information.
See SAE J1273, Recommended Practices for Hydraulic Hose Assemblies, for information on installation and use of hose. www.sae.org
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company DuPont, TeflonTM E.I. duPont de Nemours and Company Only DuPont makes Teflon 2009 Swagelok Company June 2009, R0
www.swagelok.com
H o s e Connectors, Accessories, a n d H ose Adapters

Hose Connectors
Swagelok hose connectors allow easy installation of soft plastic or rubber tubing.
316 stainless steel or brass. Shank design holds tubing inside
Add SS for 316 stainless steel or B for brass to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2-HC-1-2 diameter securely.
Reusable.
F hex flat L E1 B A Hose ID in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 0.87 3/8 1/2 Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-7-2 -2-HC-7-4 -3-HC-7-2 -3-HC-7-4 -4-HC-7-2 -4-HC-7-4 -4-HC-7-6 -5-HC-7-4 -5-HC-7-6 -6-HC-7-4 -6-HC-7-6 -6-HC-7-8 -8-HC-7-8 E D A Dimensions, in. A 1.11 1.26 1.29 1.44 1.47 1.64 1.71 1.73 1.82 1.69 1.78 2.03 2.13 D 0.15 0.23 0.30 0.38 0.45 0.60 E 0.08 0.12 0.19 0.19 0.30 0.38 F 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 9/16 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 L 0.40 0.59 0.79 0.87 0.87 0.94
Male Connectors
NPT
Female Connectors
F hex flat
L E D
Hose ID in. 1/8 3/16
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1 3/4 1
Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-1-2 -2-HC-1-4 -3-HC-1-2 -3-HC-1-4 -4-HC-1-2 -4-HC-1-4 -4-HC-1-6 -4-HC-1-8 -5-HC-1-2 -5-HC-1-4 -5-HC-1-6 -5-HC-1-8 -6-HC-1-4 -6-HC-1-6 -6-HC-1-8 -8-HC-1-4 -8-HC-1-6 -8-HC-1-8 -10-HC-1-6 -10-HC-1-8 -10-HC-1-12 -12-HC-1-8 -12-HC-1-12 -12-HC-1-16 -16-HC-1-12 -16-HC-1-16
Dimensions, in. A 1.08 1.26 1.27 1.45 1.47 1.65 1.66 1.85 1.55 1.73 1.74 1.96 1.73 1.74 1.96 1.80 1.81 2.03 1.88 2.07 2.07 2.14 2.14 2.43 2.38 2.57 B 0.38 0.56 0.38 0.56 0.38 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.38 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.56 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.94 0.75 0.94 D 0.15 0.23 E 0.08 0.12 E1 0.19 0.28 0.12 0.28 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.47 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.47 0.30 0.28 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.47 0.63 0.47 0.63 0.88 0.63 0.88 F 7/16 9/16 7/16 9/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 9/16 11/16 7/8 11/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 L 0.40 0.59
1/4
0.30
0.19
0.79
5/16
0.38
0.19
3/8
0.45
0.30
0.87
1/2
0.60
0.38 0.50 0.47 0.50 0.63 0.88
0.94
Tube Adapters
E1 B
F hex flat L E D A
5/8
0.75
0.98
3/4 1
0.90 1.20
1.05 1.19 Hose Pipe ID Size in. in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/8 6 mm Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-A-201 -2-HC-A-401 -4-HC-A-401 -4-HC-A-601 -4-HC-A-6MTA -6-HC-A-401 -6-HC-A-601 -6-HC-A-811 -8-HC-A-601 -8-HC-A-811
Dimensions, in. A 1.36 1.46 1.85 1.91 1.88 1.93 1.99 2.25 2.06 2.32 B D E E1 F L 0.54 0.09 5/16 0.15 0.08 0.40 0.64 0.19 3/8 0.64 0.19 0.70 0.30 0.19 0.28 7/16 0.79 0.64 0.18 0.64 0.17 0.70 0.45 0.30 0.28 0.96 0.39 0.70 0.28 0.60 0.38 0.96 0.39 9/16 9/16 0.87 5/8 11/16 0.94
ISO R7/1
Hose ID in. 1/8 1/4 Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-HC-1-2RT -4-HC-1-2RT -4-HC-1-4RT -4-HC-1-6RT -6-HC-1-4RT -6-HC-1-6RT -6-HC-1-8RT -8-HC-1-8RT Dimensions, in. A 1.28 1.47 1.65 1.66 1.73 1.74 1.96 2.03 B 0.38 0.38 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.75 D 0.15 0.30 E 0.08 0.19 E1 0.19 0.19 F 7/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 L 0.40 0.79
5/16 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 -5-HC-A-401 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 1
1.93 0.64 0.37 0.19 0.19 7/16 0.87
3/8 1/2
0.45 0.60
0.30 0.38
0.30 0.47
0.87 0.94
3/4 -12-HC-A-1211 2.49 1.02 0.90 0.63 0.59 1 3/16 1.05 -16-HC-A-1611 3.02 1.30 1.20 0.88 0.80 1 3/8 1.19
Swagelok tube adapters are to be used only with Swagelok tube fittings.
G hex flat
F hex flat
H L E D E1
Accessories
Hose Connector Sleeves
Used to secure soft
B C Hose Tube ID Size in. in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number
plastic or rubber tubing to Swagelok hose connectors.

Constructed of aluminum. Easily installed with a
G 7/16 7/16 9/16 H 1.17 1.56 1.63 L 0.40 0.79 0.87 0.94 L E
Dimensions, in. A B 0.60 0.70 0.76 0.86 D 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60 E 0.08 0.09 0.19 0.19 0.30 0.38 E1 0.08 0.19 0.30 0.41 F 7/16 7/16 9/16
wrench.
Reusable.
F hex flat Hose Hose ID OD Ordering in. in. Number 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 7/16 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 7/16 1/2 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 1 A-2-L-4 A-4-L-6 A-4-L-7 A-4-L-8 A-5-L-7 A-6-L-8 A-6-L-9 A-7-L-10 A-8-L-11 A-12-L-16 Dimensions, in. E 0.26 0.41 0.46 0.52 0.48 0.55 0.61 0.69 0.76 1.10 F 3/8 9/16 5/8 11/16 5/8 11/16 3/4 13/16 7/8 1 1/4 L 0.40 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.94 0.94 1.07
1/8 -2-HC-1-200 1.46 1/8 -4-HC-1-200 1.85 1/4 -4-HC-1-400 1.94 1/4 -6-HC-1-400 2.01 3/8 -6-HC-1-600 2.06 1/2 -8-HC-1-810 2.24
9/16 9/16 1.70 3/4 11/16 1.77 7/8 7/8 1.84
Sanitary Clamp Fittings

Adapt to typical sanitary clamp fitting. Smooth internal finish (20 in. Ra) and tapered orifice
reduce entrapment and facilitate cleaning.
Hose Clamps
Nonmagnetic, corrosion resistant. 4-corner clinched saddle and housing.
30
E D
No spot welds to corrode or break. Smooth inside diameter surface
A Hose Size in. 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 Clamp Size in. 1/2 Dimensions, in. A 1.10 1.28 1.36 1.44 1.50 D 0.23 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.23 0.30 0.45 0.60 E 0.12 0.19 0.30 0.38 0.12 0.19 0.30 0.38 F 0.98
provides high sealing pressure with no pressure points and reduces torque on screw.
Ordering Number SS-3-HC-8SC SS-4-HC-8SC SS-6-HC-8SC SS-8-HC-8SC SS-3-HC-16SC SS-4-HC-16SC SS-6-HC-16SC SS-8-HC-16SC
Materials
Band, saddle, housing: 302-SS Screw: 305 SS
Ordering Number MS-HCC-6 MS-HCC-8 MS-HCC-10 MS-HCC-12 MS-HCC-16 Bend Marking 6 8 10 12 16
Min Max Hose OD Hose OD in. in. 7/16 25/32 1/2 29/32 9/16 1 1/16 11/16 1 1/4 13/16 1 1/2
1.98
Without 30 inside diameter taper.
Vinyl Tubing
Tubing with Swagelok HC Connector
Hose Adapters
Adapt JIC (AN) female swivel to male NPT or SAE straight thread. Add SS for 316 SS or S for steel to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-4-AN-1-4
JIC Thread Size 7/16-20 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 Pipe Size in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number -4-AN-1-4 -6-AN-1-4 -6-AN-1-6 -8-AN-1-8 -12-AN-1-12 -16-AN-1-16 -4-SAE-1-4AN -6-SAE-1-6AN -8-SAE-1-8AN -12-SAE-1-12AN -16-SAE-1-16AN E B
F body hex J tube flare C
Temperature range: 40 to 165F (40 to 73C) See the Swagelok Vinyl Tubing catalog, MS-01-108.
J 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Dimensions, in. A NPT 1.40 1.43 1.43 1.75 1.99 2.30 SAE 1.19 1.26 1.44 1.87 1.98 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.75 0.75 0.94 0.36 0.39 0.44 0.59 0.59 0.55 0.56 0.56 0.66 0.86 0.91 0.55 0.56 0.66 0.86 0.91 0.17 9/16 0.28 5/8 0.30 11/16 0.39 7/8 0.61 1 1/8 0.84 1 3/8 0.17 9/16 0.29 11/16 0.39 7/8 0.61 1 1/4 0.84 1 1/2 B C E F
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your authorized Swagelok representative. Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 2007, R8 MS-01-27
7/16-20 7/16 9/16-18 9/16 3/4-16 3/4 1 1/16-12 1 1/16 1 5/16-12 1 5/16
www.swagelok.com
Hose
Hose As semblies, Bulk Hose, and End Connections

PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided Metal flexible Multipurpose push-on Thermoplastic Conductive core
Hose
Contents
PTFE-Lined, Stainless Steel Braided Hose . . . . . . . . . . 3 Multipurpose Push-On Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Working pressures ambient to 3000 psig (06 bar) Temperatures from 65 to 450F (53 to 30C) End connection sizes from 1/8 to 1 1/ in. and 6 to 5 mm Standard and custom-length assemblies
Working pressures ambient to 350 psig (4.1 bar) Temperatures from 40 to 00F (40 to 93C) End connection sizes from 1/4 to 3/4 in. and 6 to 18 mm Bulk hose, end connections, and custom-length assemblies
High-Pressure, Metal Flexible Hose (FM Series) . . . . .
Thermoplastic Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Working pressures from vacuum up to 3100 psig (13 bar) Temperatures from 35 to 850F (00 to 454C) End connection sizes from 1/4 to in. and 6 to 1 mm Standard and custom-length assemblies
Working pressures ambient to 5000 psig (344 bar) Temperatures from 40 to 00F (40 to 93C) End connection sizes from 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to mm Bulk hose, end connections, and custom-length assemblies
Low-Pressure, Metal Flexible Hose (FL Series) . . . . . . 13
Conductive Core Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Working pressures from vacuum up to 1500 psig (103 bar) Temperatures from 35 to 850F (00 to 454C) End connection sizes from 1/4 to 1/ in. and 6 to 1 mm Standard and custom-length assemblies
Working pressures ambient to 5000 psig (344 bar) Temperatures from 40 to 150F (40 to 65C) End connection sizes of 1/4 and 3/8 in. and 8 and 10 mm Custom-length assemblies
ECE R110-Approved Hose Assemblies

TC Series Stainless Steel Braided Hose
TC series (carbon black-filled) hose assemblies of the nominal sizes and with the end connections shown are approved to ECE R110: operating temperature 40 to 48F (40 to 10C); maximum working pressure 435 psig (30 bar); pressure classification 1. To order, add -093 to an eligible hose assembly ordering number created as shown on page 5. Example: SS-TC4TA4TA4-8-093 See page 3 for more information about TC series hose.
End Connection Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Fractional Swagelok tube adapter Metric Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT Male ISO/7 Male JIC (AN) 37 flare Male SAE/MS (ECE R110approved O-ring ) Hose Nominal Sizes 3/16 in . (TC) 5/16 in . (TC) 13/32 in . (TC) 1/4 in . (8R) 3/8 in . (8R) 1/2 in . (8R) End Connection Designators SL4, SL5 SM6, SM8 TA4, TA5 TM6, TM8 PM4 MT4 AN4 ST, ST4 SL6 SM8, SM10 TA6 TM8, TM10 PM4, PM6 MT4, MT6 AN6 ST4, ST6, ST8 SL6, SL8, SL10 SM10, SM1, SM16 TA6, TA8, TA10 TM10, TM1, TM16 PM6, PM8 MT6, MT8 AN8 ST6, ST8, ST10
8R Series Thermoplastic Hose

8R series hose assemblies of the nominal sizes and with the end connections shown are approved to ECE R110: operating temperature 40 to 185F (40 to 85C); maximum working pressure 3770 psig (60 bar); pressure classification 0. To order, add -093 to an eligible hose assembly ordering number created as shown on page 4. Example: SS-8R4TA4TA4-8-093 See page 1 for more information about 8R series hose.
Hose
PTFE-Lined, Stainless Steel Braided Hose (TH Series)

304 SS overbraid 303 SS sleeve 316 SS Swagelok tube adapter end connection shown; other end connections available
Smooth virgin PTFE core tube
316 SS collar
Features
Stainless steel end connections are available in 1/8 to PTFE is a nonconductive material. In applications that require
1 1/ in. and 6 to 5 mm sizes. Select end connections are available in other alloys; contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Lightweight construction allows easy handling and installation. Standard and custom lengths are available. PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 1CFR Part
conductivity to help prevent static-electric discharge, PTFElined hose with carbon black-filled core tube (TC series) is available. Select assemblies are ECE R110 approved; see ECE R110-Approved Hose Assemblies, page .
PTFE-lined hose with alloy 400 end connections and
177.1550 for contact with water, food, and beverages.
overbraid (TL4 series) is available. The pressure rating is 1500 psig (103 bar) at 70F (0C).
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 3/16 (4.8) 5/16 (7.9) 13/3
(10.3)
Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.50 (3.81) 3.50 (8.89)
4.50 (11.4)
Dynamic .00 (5.08) 5.00 (1.7) 6.00 (15.) 7.50 (19.0) 11.3 (8.7)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3000 (06) 500 (17) 000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1 000 (86) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 6 000 (413) 4 000 (75)
Measured to inside of bend. hermal cycling of hose may T
affect its ability to maintain a leak-tight seal.
to verify suitability in actual operating conditions .
65 to 450
(53 to 30)
5/8 (15.9) 7/8 (.)
6.00 (15.) 9.00 (.9)
esting should be performed T
To determine pressure-temperature ratings at elevated temperatures, follow these steps: 1. Find the working pressure at 70F (0C) in the Technical Data table above. . Multiply this by the appropriate factor listed in the Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors table. Example: 3/16 in. TH series hose at 300F (148C) 1. The working pressure rating at 70F (0C) is 3000 psig (06 bar). . The temperature factor for 300F (148C) is 0.5: 3000 (06) 3 0.5 = 1560 psig (107 bar). The 3/16 in. TH series hose pressure rating at 300F (148C) is 1560 psig (107 bar).
Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors Ratings maintain a minimum factor of 4:1 between working pressure and minimum burst pressure.
Factor TH, TC TL4 Series Series 0.75 1.00 0.58 0.5 0.48 0.46 0.87 0.81 0.79 0.78 1.00
Testing
Every Swagelok PTFE-lined hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1.5 times the working pressure to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature.
Temperature F (C) 65 (53) 0 (17) 100 (37) 00 (93) 300 (148) 400 (04) 450 (30)

Swagelok PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
PTFE is a permeable material. Gases, vapors, and liquids can migrate through the PTFE core tube. The rate of permeation is affected by many application-specific variables.
Hose
PTFE-Lined Hose Standard Assemblies

Select an ordering number. Tube Adapter End Connections
Nominal Hose Size Tube OD Minimum Inside Diameter Maximum Outside Diameter Ordering Number
(0.3) (35.6) (50.8) (66.0) (96.5) (17) (157) (188) (310) (35.6) (50.8) (66.0) (96.5) (17) (157) (188) (49) (310) (36.8) (67.3) (97.8) (18) (159) (189) (67.3) (97.8) (100) (131) (14.0) (6.0) (38.0) (6.5) (38.5)
A in. (cm) 8.00 14.0 0.0 6.0 38.0 50.0 6.0 74.0 1 14.0 0.0 6.0 38.0 50.0 6.0 74.0 98.0 1 14.5 6.5 38.5 50.5 6.5 74.5 6.5 38.5 39.5 51.5 cm (in.) 35.6 66.0 96.5 67.3 97.8
L 5.97 1.0 18.0 4.0 36.0 48.0 60.0 7.0 10 11.8 17.8 3.8 35.8 47.8 59.8 71.8 95.8 10 11.8 3.8 35.8 47.8 59.8 71.8 3.8 35.8 36.0 48.0 30. 60.7 91. 60.5 90.9
(15.) (30.5) (45.7) (61.0) (91.4) (1) (15) (183) (305) (30.0) (45.) (60.5) (90.9) (11) (15) (18) (43) (305) (30.0) (60.5) (90.9) (11) (15) (18) (60.5) (90.9) (91.4) (1) (11.9) (3.9) (35.9) (3.8) (35.8)
3/16
1/4
0.16
(4.1)
0.54
(13.7 )
5/16
3/8
0.7
(6.9)
0.73
(18.5)
13/3
1/
0.36
(9.1)
0.86
(1.8)
5/8 7/8
3/4 1
0.53
(13.5)
1.04
(6.4)
0.80
(0.3)
1.36
(34.5)
SS-4BHT-6 SS-4BHT-1 SS-4BHT-18 SS-4BHT-4 SS-4BHT-36 SS-4BHT-48 SS-4BHT-60 SS-4BHT-7 SS-4BHT-10 SS-6BHT-1 SS-6BHT-18 SS-6BHT-4 SS-6BHT-36 SS-6BHT-48 SS-6BHT-60 SS-6BHT-7 SS-6BHT-96 SS-6BHT-10 SS-8BHT-1 SS-8BHT-4 SS-8BHT-36 SS-8BHT-48 SS-8BHT-60 SS-8BHT-7 SS-1BHT-4 SS-1BHT-36 SS-16BHT-36 SS-16BHT-48 SS-4MBHT-1 SS-4MBHT-4 SS-4MBHT-36 SS-8MBHT-4 SS-8MBHT-36
Dimensions, mm (in.) 3/16 in. 6 4.1

(0.16)
13.7
(0.54)
13/3 in.
1
8.3
(0.33)
1.8
(0.86)
VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting End Connections

Nominal Hose Size in. 3/16 VCO Size in. 1/4 Minimum Maximum Inside Outside Diameter in. Dimension, (mm) Hex Flat 0.16
(4.1)
11/16 in.
13/3
1/
0.36
(9.1)
1 in.
A in. (cm) 13.5 (34.3) 5.5 (64.8) 37.5 (95.3) 13.5 (34.3) 5.5 (64.8) 37.5 (95.3) 49.5 (16)
Ordering Number SS-4BHO-1 SS-4BHO-4 SS-4BHO-36 SS-8BHO-1 SS-8BHO-4 SS-8BHO-36 SS-8BHO-48
L in. (cm) 1.1 (30.7) 4.1 (61.) 36.1 (91.7) 1.1 (30.7) 4.1 (61.) 36.1 (91.7) 48.1 (11)
Hose
PTFE-Lined Hose Custom Assemblies

Typical Ordering Number Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
SS - TH 4 TA4 TA4 - 28
End Connection Material SS = 316 stainless steel C20 = Alloy 0 M = Alloy 400 INC = Alloy 600 HC = Alloy C-76 TI = Titanium 1st 2nd End Connections
or
71CM
in . cm Overall Length Must be in whole number increments.
See tables below.
Hose Series TH = PTFE hose TC = PTFE hose, carbon black filled TL = 1/4 in. PTFE hose with alloy 400 overbraid
Hose Size 4 = 3/16 in. (only size available for TL series) 6 = 5/16 in. 8 = 13/3 in. 12 = 5/8 in. 16 = 7/8 in.
Tube Adapters
Tube OD
A
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1) 0.53 (13.5) 0.56 (14.) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (0.3)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.54 (13.7) 0.73 (18.5) 0.86 (1.8) 1.04 (6.4) 1.36 (34.5) 1.34 (34.0) 1.36 (34.5) 13.7 13.7 18.5 1.8 6.4 34.5
(0.54) (0.54) (0.73) (0.86) (1.04) (1.36)
Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 8 1 16 1 16 4 4 6 8 1 16
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA1 TA16
A 1.64 (41.7) 1.81 (46.0) .7 (57.7) .19 (55.6) .7 (69.1) 3.9 (83.6) .99 (75.9) 3.57 (90.7) 4. 50.5 54.1 65.3 69.1 88.6
(1.66)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 4.1 (0.16) 8 4.1 (0.16) 10 6.9 (0.7) 1 8.4 (0.33) 18 13.5 (0.53) 5 19.0 (0.75)
TM6 TM8 TM10 TM1 TM18 TM5
(1.99)
(.13) (.57)
(.7) (3.49)
VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings, Female Swivel
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.63 (16.0) 0.80 (0.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 in. 1 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
Hose Size Designator 4 6 8 1 16 16
A in. (mm) 1.69 (4.9) 1.83 (46.5) 1.95 (49.5) .1 (56.1) .71 (68.8) .68 (68.1)
3/4 1
Hose
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.10 (.5) 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 4.1 (0.16) 6.9 (0.7) 9.1 (0.36) 14.7 (0.58) Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 9/16 in. 9/16 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in. 1 1/8 in. 9/16 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in. 30 mm

Fitting Size in.
A
Hose Size Designator 4 4 6 8 1 4 6 8 1
End Connection Designator SL SL4 SL6 SL8 SL1 SM6 SM10 SM1 SM18
A in. (mm) 1.94 (49.3) 1.97 (50.0) .7 (57.7) .43 (61.7) .87 (7.9) 49.8 (1.96) 44.7 (1.76) 61.7 (.43) 7.9 (.87)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 6 10 1 18
Female Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in.
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.16 (4.1) 0.36 (9.1)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat
Hose Size Designator 4 6 6 8 1 4 8
A in. (mm) 1.88 (47.8) 1.96 (49.8) .0 (51.3) .4 (61.5) .57 (65.3) 1.88 (47.8) .4 (61.5)
Female NPT
A
1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1/4 1/
3/4 in. 7/8 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 5/16 in. 3/4 in. 1 1/16 in.
PF4 PF6 PF8 PF1 FT4 FT8
Female BSP/ISO Tapered
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in.
A
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16 (4.1)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat
Hose Size Designator 4
A in. (mm) 1.88 (47.8)
Male NPT 1/4 0.7 (6.9) 0.8 (7.1) 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.58 (14.7) 0.63 (16.0) 0.80 (0.3) 0.16 (4.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (0.3) 11/16 in. 7/8 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/8 in. 1 3/8 in. 11/16 in. 7/8 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 3/8 in. 11/16 in. 6 8 6 8 8 1 1 16 16 4 8 1 16 PM6 PM8 PM1 PM16 MT4 MT8 MT1 MT16 PM4 1.98 (50.3) .10 (53.3) 1.98 (50.3) .10 (53.3) .3 (58.9) .47 (6.7) .47 (6.7) .99 (75.9) 3. (81.8) 1.88 (47.8) .3 (58.9) .47 (6.7) 3. (81.8)
Male BSP/ISO Tapered
Hose VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings, Female Swivel

Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16 (4.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (0.3) Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 3/4 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Hose Size Designator 4 8 1 16
A in. (mm) 1.87 (47.5) .17 (55.1) .5 (64.0) 3.35 (85.1)
Male JIC (AN) 37 Flare

Fitting Size in. 1/4
A
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.36 (9.1)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 in. 5/8 in. 7/8 in.
Hose Size Designator 4 6 8
End Connection Designator AN4 AN6 AN8
A in. (mm) 1.88 (47.8) 1.98 (50.3) .3 (58.9)
3/8 1/
Female JIC (AN) 37, Female Swivel
Fitting Size in. 1/4 3/8
Hose Size Designator 4 6 8
A in. (mm) 1.6 (41.1) 1.8 (46.) .09 (53.1)
1/
Sanitary Flanges
Fitting Size in. 1/
A
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.36 (9.1) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (0.3) 0.80 (0.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension in. (mm) 0.99 (5.1) 1.00 (5.4) 1.06 (6.9) 1.98 (50.3)
Hose Size Designator 6 1 16 16
End Connection Designator SC8 SC1 SC16 SC4
A in. (mm) .08 (5.8) .3 (56.6) .91 (73.9) .35 (59.7)
3/4 1 1 1/
Maximum pressure rating is 300 psig (0.6 bar). Working pressure and temperature ratings of hoses with sanitary flange end connections may be limited by the gasket material and clamp.

Options and accessories do not change hose technical data. Hose operating parameters must be considered when selecting a cover.
Clear PVC Cover

resists abrasion withstands temperatures from 40 to 165F (40 to 73C).

maintains flexibility down to 65F
(53C). To order, add F to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-TH4TA4TA4-8F
To order, add V to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-TH4TA4TA4-8V
Polyolefin Cover
resists moisture withstands temperatures from 65 to 75F (53 to 135C).
302 Stainless Steel Spring Guard

covers entire hose to
To order, add P to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-TH4TA4TA4-8P
protect against kinking and abrasion. To order, add S to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-TH4TA4TA4-8S

resists abrasion and UV light.
To order, add F1 to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-TH4TA4TA4-8F1
Hose
High-Pressure, Metal Flexible Hose (FM Series)

316/316L SS overbraid 316L SS core tube 316 SS Swagelok tube adapter end connection shown; other end connections available
316 SS weld ring
Features
Hose can be used in vacuum and positive pressure service. Stainless steel end connections are available in 1/4 to in. End connections are welded in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

Standard and custom lengths are available.
and 6 to 1 mm sizes.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (5.4) 1 1/4 (31.8) 1 1/ (38.1) (50.8) Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) Static .5 (5.7) 3.00 (7.6) 4.50 (11.4) 6.00 (15.) 6.75 (17.1) 4.50 (11.4) 5.5 (13.3) 6.75 (17.1) Dynamic 10.0 (5.4) 1.0 (30.5) 16.0 (40.6) 17.0 (43.) 0.0 (50.8) 3.0 (58.4) 6.0 (66.0) 3.0 (81.3) 35 to 850
(00 to 454)
Working Pressure at Minimum 325 to 100F Burst Pressure (200 to 37C) at 70F (20C) psig (bar) psig (bar) 3100 (13) 000 (137) 1800 (14) 1500 (103) 100 (8.7) 950 (65.4) 900 (6.0) 500 (34.4) 1 400 (854) 8 000 (551) 7 00 (496) 6 000 (413) 4 800 (330) 3 800 (61) 3 600 (48) 000 (137)
Hose Series FM4 FM6 FM8 FM1 FM16 FM0 FM4 FM3
Measured to inside of bend.
To determine pressure-temperature ratings at elevated temperatures, follow these steps: 1. Find the working pressure at 70F (0C) in the Technical Data table above. . Multiply this by the appropriate factor listed in the Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors table. Example: 1/4 in. hose at 500F (60C) 1. The working pressure rating at 70F (0C) is 3100 psig (13 bar). . The temperature factor for 500F (60C) is 0.65: 3100 (13) 3 0.65 = 015 psig (138 bar). The 1/4 in. hose pressure rating at 500F (60C) is 015 psig (138 bar).
Temperature F (C) 35 (00) 100 (37) 00 (93) 300 (148) 400 (04) 500 (60) 600 (315) 700 (371) 800 (46) 850 (454) Factor 1.00 1.00 0.84 0.76 0.70 0.65 0.6 0.59 0.57 0.56
Testing
Every Swagelok FM series metal flexible hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 5 std cm3/s. Helium leak testing to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 9 std cm3/s is available. See Custom Assemblies, page 10.

Swagelok FM series metal flexible hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed or crated.
DO NOT SuBJECT METAL FLExIBLE HOSE TO SySTEM PRESSuRE

SuRGES, SHOCk, OR PuLSATIONS GREATER THAN 50 % OF THE WORkING PRESSuRE RATING .
Hose
FM Series Metal Flexible Hose Standard Assemblies

Select an ordering number. Swagelok Tube Fitting to Male NPT End Connection
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4
A L
Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19

(4.8)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 15/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
A in. (cm) 1.0 (30.5) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (1) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (1) 4.0 (61.0) 60.0 (15)
Ordering Number SS-FM4SL4PM4-1 SS-FM4SL4PM4-36 SS-FM6SL6PM6-18 SS-FM6SL6PM6-36 SS-FM8SL8PM8-18 SS-FM8SL8PM8-48 SS-FM1SL1PM1-18 SS-FM1SL1PM1-48 SS-FM16SL16PM16-4 SS-FM16SL16PM16-60
Hose Series FM4 FM6 FM8 FM1 FM16
L in. (cm) 8.6 (1.0) 3.3 (8.0) 14. (36.1) 3. (81.8) 13.6 (34.5) 43.6 (111) 13.4 (34.0) 43.4 (110) 18.8 (47.8) 54.8 (139)
0.8
(7.1)
0.40
(10.)
0.6
(15.7)
0.87
(.1)

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19
(4.8)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 15/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
A in. (cm) 1.0 (30.5) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 36.0 (91.4) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (1) 18.0 (45.7) 48.0 (1) 4.0 (61.0) 60.0 (15)
Ordering Number SS-FM4SL4SL4-1 SS-FM4SL4SL4-36 SS-FM6SL6SL6-18 SS-FM6SL6SL6-36 SS-FM8SL8SL8-18 SS-FM8SL8SL8-48 SS-FM1SL1SL1-18 SS-FM1SL1SL1-48 SS-FM16SL16SL16-4 SS-FM16SL16SL16-60
Hose Series FM4 FM6 FM8 FM1 FM16
L in. (cm) 8.1 (0.6) 3.1 (81.5) 14.0 (35.6) 3.0 (81.3) 13.5 (34.3) 43.5 (110) 13.3 (33.8) 43.3 (110) 18.7 (47.5) 54.7 (139)
0.8
(7.1)
0.40
(10.)
0.6
(15.7)
0.87
(.1)
Tube Adapter End Connections

Tube OD in. Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19
(4.8)
Maximum Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.81

(0.6)
A in. (cm) 1.0 (30.5) 4.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (1)
Ordering Number SS-FM4TA4TA4-1 SS-FM4TA4TA4-4 SS-FM4TA4TA4-36 SS-FM4TA4TA4-48
Hose Series
L in. (cm) 8.48 (1.5) 0.5 (5.1) 3.5 (8.6) 44.5 (113)
1/4
FM4
See Custom Assemblies, next page, for other end connections.
10
Hose
FM Series Metal Flexible Hose Custom Assemblies

SS - FM4 TA4 TA4 - 28

Material Hose and end connections 316 stainless steel 1st 2nd End Connections
or
71CM H
Options H = Inboard helium leak testing to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 109 std cm3/s See Options and Accessories, page 1, for additional choices.
in . cm Overall Length
Hose Series See tables below.
See tables below.

Cap Weld Style 1 in . and under Fitting Size 1/4 3/8
A
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.19 (4.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (1.7) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (.4) 1.09 (7.7) 1.34 (34.0) 1.88 (47.8) 4.8 (0.19) 6.4 (0.5) 7.9 (0.31) 9.7 (0.38)
Maximum Outside Dimension 13/16, hex flat 13/16, hex flat 15/16, hex flat 1 1/16, hex flat 1 1/16, hex flat 1 1/, hex flat 1 3/4, hex flat , hex flat 1/4, hex flat 3, hex flat 0.6 (0.81), dia 0.6 (0.81), dia 4, hex flat 7, hex flat
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM4 FM6 FM8 FM8 FM1 FM16 FM0 FM4 FM3 FM4 FM4 FM6 FM8
End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8 SL10 SL1 SL16 SL0 SL4 SL3 SM6 SM8 SM10 SM1
A 1.94 (49.3) .00 (50.8) .0 (51.3) .4 (56.9) .7 (57.7) .35 (59.7) .64 (67.1) 4.04 (103) 4.75 (11) 5.7 (145) 6. (.45) 63. (.49) 51.6 (.03) 56.9 (.4)
1/ 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/
Manual Weld Style Over 1 in .
Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 8 10 1
Tube Adapters
Tube OD
A
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.16 (4.1) 0.7 (6.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.58 (14.7) 0.80 (0.3) 4.1 (0.16) 7.1 (0.8) 8.9 (0.35)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.81 (0.6) 0.98 (4.9) 1.06 (6.9) 1.44 (36.6) 1.75 (44.4) 0.6 (0.81) 4.9 (0.98) 6.9 (1.06)
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM6 FM8 FM1 FM16 FM4 FM6 FM8
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TA1 TA16 TM6 TM10 TM1
A 1.76 (44.7) 1.8 (46.) . (56.4) .35 (59.7) .69 (68.3) 44.4 (1.75) 47.0 (1.85) 57. (.5)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 6 10 1
Hose Female NPT

Pipe Size in.
A
11
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.8 (7.1) 0.7 (18.3)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 1 1/ in.
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM1
End Connection Designator PF4 PF1
A in. (mm) 1.81 (46.0) .1 (56.1)
1/4 3/4
Male Pipe Threads

Cap Weld Style 1 in . and under Pipe Size in.
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 15/16 in. 15/16 in. 7/8 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in. 1 3/4 in. 1/8 in. 3/4 in. 13/16 in. 1 1/16 in.
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM6 FM6 FM4 FM8 FM1 FM16 FM0 FM4 FM3 FM4 FM8
A in. (mm) 1.80 (45.7) 1.81 (46.0) 1.81 (46.0) 1.99 (50.5) .15 (54.6) . (56.4) .54 (64.5) 3.06 (77.7) 3.7 (94.5) 4.19 (106) 1.80 (45.7) .16 (54.9)
Male NPT 1/4

A
0.8 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.8 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.63 (16.0) 0.88 (.4) 1.09 (7.7) 1.34 (34.0) 1.81 (47.8) 0.8 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9)
PM4 PM6 PM8 PM1 PM16 PM0 PM4 PM3 MT4 MT8
3/8 1/
Manual Weld Style Over 1 in .
3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/
Male BSP/ISO Tapered 1/4 1/
Fitting Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 15/16 in. 1 1/16 in.
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM6 FM8
A in. (mm) 1.87 (47.5) 1.97 (50.0) .15 (54.6)
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.18 (4.6) 0.41 (10.4)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 in. 1 in.
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM8
A in. (mm) .11 (53.6) .14 (54.4)
1
Hose
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19 (4.8) 0.40 (10.) 0.65 (16.5) 0.87 (.1) Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings, Female Swivel
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM8 FM1 FM16
A in. (mm) .00 (50.8) .16 (54.9) 4.14 (105) 4.76 (11)
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings, Male Swivel
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.19 (4.8) 0.40 (10.) 0.65 (16.5) 0.87 (.1)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 13/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/ in. 1 3/4 in.
Hose Series Designator FM4 FM8 FM1 FM16
A in. (mm) .60 (66.0) .16 (54.9) 4.14 (105) 4.76 (11)
3/4 1



To order, add F1 to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-FM4TA4TA4-8F1
(53C). To order, add F to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-FM4TA4TA4-8F
Hose
13
Low-Pressure, Metal Flexible Hose (FL Series)

31 SS overbraid 316L SS core tube Weld 316 SS Swagelok tube adapter end connection shown; other end connections available
Features
Hose can be used in vacuum and positive pressure service. Stainless steel end connections are available in 1/4 to End connections are welded in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

Standard and custom lengths are available.
1/ in. and 6 to 1 mm sizes.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 1/ (1.7) Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) Static 1.00 (.54) 1.75 (4.44) Dynamic 5.50 (14.0) 7.00 (17.8) Temperature Range F (C) 35 to 850
(00 to 454)

Impulse Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 500 (34.4) 400 (7.5)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 6000 (413) 4800 (330)
Hose Series FL4 FL8
1500 (103) 100 (8.6)
Measured to inside of bend. Rapid changes in pressure above or below normal base pressure can cause excessive wear between overbraid and core tube convolutions
and is often associated with reciprocating-type pumps.
To determine pressure-temperature ratings at elevated temperatures, follow these steps: 1. Find the working pressure at 70F (0C) in the Technical Data table above. . Multiply this by the appropriate factor listed in the Pressure-Temperature Rating Factors table. Example: 1/4 in. hose at 500F (60C) 1. The working pressure rating at 70F (0C) is 1500 psig (103 bar). . The temperature factor for 500F (60C) is 0.65: 1500 (103) 3 0.65 = 975 psig (67.1 bar) The 1/4 in. hose pressure rating at 500F (60C) is 975 psig (67.1 bar).
Temperature F (C) 35 (00) 100 (37) 00 (93) 300 (148) 400 (04) 500 (60) 600 (315) 700 (371) 800 (46) 850 (454) Factor 1.00 1.00 0.84 0.76 0.70 0.65 0.6 0.59 0.57 0.56
Testing
Every Swagelok FL series metal flexible hose assembly is inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 5 std cm3/s. Helium leak testing to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 10 9 std cm3/s is available. See Custom Assemblies, next page.

Swagelok FL series metal flexible hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
14
Hose
FL Series Metal Flexible Hose Standard Assemblies

Select an ordering number. Tube Adapter End Connections
Tube OD Minimum Inside Diameter Maximum Outside Diameter Ordering Number SS-FL4TA4TA4-1 SS-FL4TA4TA4-4 SS-FL4TA4TA4-36 SS-FL4TA4TA4-48 SS-FL8TA8TA8-1 SS-FL8TA8TA8-4 SS-FL8TA8TA8-36 SS-FL8TA8TA8-48 SS-FL4TM6TM6-50CM SS-FL4TM6TM6-100CM SS-FL4TM6TM6-150CM SS-FL8TM1TM1-50CM SS-FL8TM1TM1-100CM SS-FL8TM1TM1-150CM FL8 FL4 FL8 FL4 Hose Series
A in. (cm) 1.0 (30.5)
L 8.48 (1.5) 0.5 (5.1) 3.5 (8.6) 44.5 (113) 7.50 (19.0) 19.5 (49.5) 31.5 (80.0) 43.5 (110) 41.1 (16.) 91. (35.9) 141 (55.6) 38.6 (15.) 88.6 (34.9) 139 (54.7)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 0.15

(3.8)
1/4
0.67
(17.0)
4.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (1) 1.0 (30.5)
1/
0.37
(9.4)
1.0
(5.8)
4.0 (61.0) 36.0 (91.4) 48.0 (1) cm (in.)
Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 3.8

(0.15) 17.0
(0.67)
50.0 (19.7) 100 (39.4) 150 (59.1) 50.0 (19.7) 100 (39.4) 150 (59.1)
1
8.9
(0.35)
5.9
(1.0)
FL Series Metal Flexible Hose Custom Assemblies

SS - FL4 TA4 TA4 - 28

End Connection Material 316 stainless steel 1st 2nd End Connections
or
71CM H
Options H = Inboard helium leak testing to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 109 std cm3/s See Options and Accessories, page 16, for additional choices.
Hose Series FL4 or FL8 See following tables. See following tables.
Hose Swagelok Tube Fittings

Fitting Size
A
15
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.18 (4.6) 0.8 (7.1) 0.40 (10.) 4.6 (0.18) 7.9 (0.31) 9.9 (0.39)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 11/16 1 1/16 1 1/16
Hose Series Designator FL4 FL8 FL8 FL4 FL8 FL8
End Connection Designator SL4 SL6 SL8 SM6 SM10 SM1
A 1.94 (49.3) . (56.4) .33 (59.) 49.3 (1.94) 56.4 (.) 59. (.33)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/ 6 10 1
Tube Adapters
Tube OD
A
Minimum Inside Diameter 0.15 (3.8) 0.7 (6.9) 0.37 (9.4) 3.8 (0.15) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 8.9 (0.35)
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.67 (17.0) 0.67 (17.0) 1.0 (5.9) 1.0 (5.9) 17.0 (0.67) 17.0 (0.67) 17.0 (0.67) 5.9 (10) 5.9 (10)
Hose Series Designator FL4 FL4 FL8 FL8 FL4 FL4 FL4 FL8 FL8
End Connection Designator TA4 TA6 TA8 TM6 TM8 TM10 TM1
A 1.76 (44.7) 1.79 (45.5) .03 (51.6) .5 (57.) 44.4 (1.75) 45. (1.78) 45. (1.78) 51.3 (.0) 57.4 (.6)
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1/4 3/8 1/ 6 8 10 1
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in.
A
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.8 (7.1) 0.37 (9.4) 0.47 (11.9) 0.8 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9)
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 1 1/16 in. 11/16 in. 1 1/16 in.
Hose Series Designator FL4 FL8 FL8 FL4 FL8
End Connection Designator PM4 PM6 PM8 MT4 MT8
A in. (mm) 1.80 (45.7) .0 (51.3) .1 (56.1) 1.80 (45.7) .1 (56.1)
Male NPT 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 1/
VCO Size in. 1/4 1/
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.)
Maximum Outside Dimension in. (mm) 11/16, hex flat 1.0 (5.9), dia
Hose Series Designator FL4 FL8
A in. (mm) .50 (63.5) .39 (68.3)
16
Hose
Minimum Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.18 (4.6) 0.40 (10.) Maximum Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.67 (17.0) 1.0 (5.9)
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings, Female Swivel
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/
End Connection Designator RF4 RF8
A in. (mm) .00 (50.8) .1 (56.1)
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings, Male Swivel
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 3/4 in. 1 1/16 in.
End Connection Designator RM4 RM8
A in. (mm) .60 (66.0) .88 (73.)
Tube Butt Welds

Tube OD in.
A
(19.0 mm)
Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.049
Maximum Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.67 (17.0) 1.0 (5.9)
End Connection Designator TB4 TB8
A in. (mm) 1.90 (48.3) .09 (53.1)
1/4 1/
0.75 in.



To order, add F1 to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-FL4TA4TA4-8F1
(53C). To order, add F to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-FL4TA4TA4-8F
Hose
17
Multipurpose Push-On Hose (PB Series)

Buna N cover Rayon fiber reinforcement Buna N core tube
Features
Cover is flame-resistant in accordance with 30CFR, Part 18. Single-braid rayon fiber reinforcement is woven for End connections are reusable. Assembly does not require clamps or special tools. Hose is available in blue, black, green, gray, red, and yellow.
maximum strength and end connection retention.

Stainless steel and brass end connections are available in
1/4 to 3/4 in. and 6 to 18 mm sizes.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 3/4 (19.0) Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) .50 (6.35) 3.00 (7.6) 5.00 (1.7) 7.00 (17.8) 40 to 00
(40 to 93)
Temperature Range F (C) Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 350 (4.1) 300 (0.6) 300 (0.6) 300 (0.6) Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1400 (96.4) 100 (8.6) 100 (8.6) 100 (8.6)
Ratings maintain a minimum factor of 4:1 between working pressure and minimum burst pressure.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature F (C) 40 (40) 70 (0) 100 (37) 150 (65) 00 (93) 3/8, 1/4 1/2, 3/4 Working Pressure psig (bar) 350 (4.1) 300 (0.6) 350 (4.1) 300 (0.6) 315 (1.7) 70 (18.6) 10 (14.4) 180 (1.4) 100 (6.8) 80 (5.5)
Measured to inside of bend.

Swagelok PB series multipurpose push-on hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Caution:
Do not reuse hose .

Bulk Multipurpose Push-On Hose
To order a 50 ft (76 m) reel of standard blue hose, select an ordering number. Example: PB-4 For hose of another color, add a hose color designator. Example PB-4-Bk
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 Ordering Number PB-4 PB-6 PB-8 PB-1 Hose Color Black Gray Green Red Yellow Designator -BK -GY -GR -RD -YW
Reels may contain more than one piece of hose.
18
Hose
Multipurpose Push-On Hose End Connections

Select a basic ordering number and add SS for 316 SS or B for brass. Example: SS-PB4-SL4 To determine the length to cut bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall assembly length. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Swagelok Tube Fittings
A B
Polyethylene finishing cap
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-SL4 -PB6-SL6 -PB8-SL8
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.97 (50.0) .11 (53.6) .47 (6.7) B 1.1 (30.7) 1.4 (31.5) 1.4 (36.1)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight.
Tube Adapters
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 6 8 10 1 18
Nominal Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. 3/4 in.
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-TA4 -PB6-TA6 -PB8-TA8 -PB1-TA1 -PB4-TM6 -PB4-TM8 -PB6-TM8 -PB6-TM10 -PB8-TM1 -PB1-TM18
Maximum Outside Diameter 0.68 (17.3) 0.84 (1.3) 0.99 (5.1) 1.7 (3.3) 17.3 (0.68) 17.3 (0.68) 1.3 (0.84) 1.3 (0.84) 5.1 (0.99) 3.3 (1.7)
A 1.93 (49.0) .03 (51.6) .47 (6.7) 3.14 (79.8) 49.0 (1.93) 48.8 (1.9) 5.1 (.05) 51.6 (.03) 6.7 (.47) 79.8 (3.14)
B 1.17 (9.7) 1.16 (9.5) 1.4 (36.1) 1.48 (37.6) 9.7 (1.17) 9.5 (1.16) 30.0 (1.18) 9.5 (1.16) 36.1 (1.4) 37.6 (1.48)
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in.
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/ 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-PM4 -PB6-PM4 -PB6-PM6 -PB8-PM8 -PB1-PM1 -PB4-MT4 -PB6-MT6 -PB8-MT8 -PB1-MT1
Maximum Outside Diameter in. (mm) Male NPT 0.68 (17.3) 0.84 (1.3) 0.84 (1.3) 0.99 (5.1) 1.7 (3.3) 0.68 (17.3) 0.84 (1.3) 0.99 (5.1) 1.7 (3.3)
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.68 (4.7) 1.80 (45.7) 1.80 (45.7) .19 (55.6) .81 (71.4) 1.68 (4.7) 1.80 (45.7) .19 (55.6) .81 (71.4) B 0.9 (3.4) 0.93 (3.6) 0.93 (3.6) 1.14 (9.0) 1.15 (9.) 0.9 (3.4) 0.93 (3.6) 1.14 (9.0) 1.15 (9.)
1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4
Hose unions
Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 Maximum Outside Diameter in. (mm) 0.68 (17.3) 0.84 (1.3) 0.99 (5.1) 1.7 (3.3) Dimensions in. (mm) A .07 (5.6) .5 (57.) .61 (66.3) 3.83 (97.3) 0.51 (13.0) B 0.55 (14.0)
19
Basic Ordering Number -PB4-6 -PB6-6 -PB8-6 -PB1-6
Multipurpose Push-On Hose Assembly
Ensure hose is pushed

fully into finishing cap .
1. Cut a clean, square edge on end of hose.
. Cover first barb of end connection with hose. (Lubricating fitting stem with light oil [10W40] may ease assembly.)
3. Hold end connection against flat surface. Grip hose and push with a steady force until hose seats into blue finishing cap.
Do not use a hose

clamp .
Multipurpose Push-On Hose Disassembly

1. Slit hose lengthwise from blue finishing cap to end of barb. Do not damage barbs. . Bend hose to expose barbs, then remove hose with a quick pull.
Do not reuse hose .

Assembly and disassembly illustrated with old-style, roundbody Swagelok tube adapter end connections.
Tools
Hose Cutter
For use with push-on hose or soft plastic tubing. Ordering number: MS-HC-SC
See Custom Assemblies, next page, for assembled hoses.
0
Hose
Multipurpose Push-On Hose Custom Assemblies
SS - PB 4 TA4 TA4 - 28
End Connection Material SS = 316 stainless steel B = Brass Hose Series PB Nominal Hose Size 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/ in. 12 = 3/4 in. Type SL SM TA TM PM MT 1st 2nd End Connections
or
7 1 C M - Bk
Hose Color No designator = blue -Bk = Black -GR = Green -Gy = Gray -RD = Red -yW = Yellow Must be in whole number increments.
= = = = = =
Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Fractional tube adapter Metric tube adapter Male NPT Male BSP/ISO tapered thread
Size Fractional 4 = 1/4 6 = 3/8 8 = 1/ 12 = 3/4
in. in. in. in.
Metric 6= 8= 10 = 12 = 18 =
6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 1 mm 18 mm
See End Connections tables for fitting dimensions.
Hose
1
Thermoplastic Hose (7R, 8R, 7N, and 7P Series)

Polyurethane cover Fiber reinforcement Core tube
Features
Stainless steel and carbon steel end connections are
available in 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to mm sizes.

Polyurethane cover resists abrasion and does not postcure.
Nonconductive Nylon Core Hose (7N Series)

Nylon core tube is designed for use with petroleum-based
and synthetic hydraulic fluids.

Hose passes electrical conductivity test of SAE J343/
Nylon Core Hose (7R and 8R Series)

Nylon core tube is designed for use with petroleum-based
and synthetic hydraulic fluids.

Black polyurethane cover is perforated to prevent
SAE J517 100R7. Hose is not intended for exposure to continuous electrical current.
Orange polyurethane nonperforated cover helps prevent
blistering.
Select 8R series hose assemblies are ECE R110 approved;
moisture from entering the hose.
Polyethylene Core Hose (7P Series)

Polyethylene core material used in th core tube is in
see ECE R110-Approved Hose Assemblies, page .
accordance with 1 CFR 177.150 and NSF-51.

Cover is nonperforated blue polyurethane.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (5.4) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/ (1.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (5.4) Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) 1.5 (3.18) .00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.6) .00 (5.08) .50 (6.35) 4.00 (10.) 6.50 (16.5) 10.0 (5.4) 1.5 (3.18) .00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.6) 1.5 (3.18) .00 (5.08) 3.00 (7.6) 5.00 (1.7) 8.00 (0.3) Temperature Range F (C) 40 to 00
(40 to 93)
Description Nylon core hose (7R series)
Specification SAE J517 100R7
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 750 (189) 50 000 5000 4000 3500 50 000 750
(155) (137) (344) (75) (41) (155) (137) (189)
Nylon core hose (8R series)
SAE J517 100R8
40 to 00
(40 to 93)
Nonconductive SAE J517 nylon core 100R7 (7N series) (nonconductive)
40 to 00
(40 to 93)
50 (155) 000 (137) 750 (189) 50 000 1500 1500
(155) (137) (103) (103)
Polyethylene core hose (7P series)
10 to 150
(3 to 65)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (60) 8 000 (551) 0 000 (1378) 16 000 (110) 14 000 (964) 9 000 (60) 8 000 (551) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (60) 8 000 (551) 11 000 (757) 9 000 (60) 8 000 (551) 6 000 (413) 6 000 (413)
Measured to inside of bend. For additional pressure-temperature data, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.

Swagelok thermoplastic hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Caution: Nonconductive hoses can be conduits for electricity

if they contain conductive fluids . Verify fluid conductive properties prior to use .
Nonperforated covers may blister in gas service. user must evaluate compatibility in systems containing heated, water-based fluidssome conditions may affect the nylon core .

Hose

Bulk Thermoplastic Hose
Hose Series 7R Nominal Hose Ordering Size, in. Number 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 8R
Coils of nominal hose sizes smaller than 1 in. may contain more than one piece of hose.
Reel Length ft (m) 50 (76)
Hose Series 7N
Nominal Hose Ordering Size, in. Number 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 7N-4 7N-6 7N-8 7P-4 7P-6 7P-8 7P-1 7P-16
Reel Length ft (m) 50 (76)
7R-4 7R-6 7R-8 8R-4 8R-6 8R-8 8R-1 8R-16 15 (38) 50 (15) 50 (76) 7P
3/8 1/ 3/4 1
50 (76) 15 (38) 50 (15)
1/ 3/4 1
Thermoplastic Hose End Connections

Select an ordering number and add SS for 316 stainless steel or S for carbon steel. Example: SS-TP4-TA4 For field assembly, also select the corresponding pusher and die ordering numbers. Examples: MS-P-TA4 and MS-7R8R-4 To determine the length to cut bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall assembly length. Tube Adapters
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 1 6 8 10 1 Nominal Hose Size 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. Basic Ordering Number -TP4-TA4 -TP4-TA6 -TP6-TA6 -TP8-TA8 -TP8-TA10 -TP1-TA1 -TP16-TA16 -TP4-TM6 -TP4-TM8 -TP6-TM10 -TP8-TM1

B
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 11/16 3/4 15/16 15/16 1 1/8 1 3/8 11/16 in. 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in.
A .49 (63.) .49 (63.) .81 (71.4) 3.35 (85.1) 3.35 (85.1) 3.65 (9.7) 4.43 (113) 63. (.49) 63. (.49) 71.4 (.81) 85.1 (3.35)
B 1.43 (36.3) 1.43 (36.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.79 (45.5) 1.79 (45.5) 1.89 (48.0) .18 (55.4) 36.3 (1.43) 36.3 (1.43) 38.1 (1.50) 45.5 (1.79)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-TA4 MS-P-4TA6 MS-P-TA6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-8TA10 MS-P-TA1 MS-P-TA16 MS-P-TA4 MS-P-4TM8 MS-P-TA6 MS-P-SLTA8
Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-7R8R-8 MS-8R-1 MS-8R-16 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8

Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/ 6 8 10 1 Nominal Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. Basic Ordering Number -TP4-SL4 -TP6-SL6 -TP8-SL8 -TP4-SM6 -TP4-SM8 -TP4-SM10 -TP6-SM10 -TP8-SM1
Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 3/4 15/16 11/16 in. 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in.
A .60 (66.0) .94 (74.7) 3.30 (83.8) 66.0 (.60) 66.3 (.61) 7.6 (.86) 74.9 (.95) 83.8 (3.30)
B 1.54 (39.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.7 (43.7) 39.1 (1.54) 39.4 (1.55) 45.7 (1.80) 41.7 (1.64) 44. (1.74)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-SL4 MS-P-SL6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-SL4 MS-P-4SM8 MS-P-SL6 MS-P-SLTA8
Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
MS-P-4SM10 MS-7R8R-4
Hose Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in. Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ Basic Ordering Number -TP4-PM4 -TP6-PM4 -TP6-PM6 -TP8-PM8 -TP4-MT4 -TP6-MT6 -TP8-MT8 -TP4-MS4 -TP6-MS6 -TP8-MS8 Maximum Outside Dimension, Hex Flat 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in. 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 15/16 in. 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 1 1/16 in. Dimensions in. (mm) A Male NPT 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ .31 (58.7) .65 (67.3) .65 (67.3) 3.09 (78.5) .31 (58.7) .65 (67.3) 3.09 (78.5) .56 (65.0) .69 (68.3) 3.00 (76.) 1.5 (31.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.53 (38.9) 1.5 (31.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.53 (38.9) 1.50 (38.1) 1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6) MS-P-PM4 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM8 MS-P-PM4 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM8 MS-P-MS4 MS-P-MS6 MS-P-MS8 B Pusher Ordering Number Die Ordering Number
3
MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
Male BSP/ISO Parallel
Basic Ordering Number -TP4-AS4 -TP6-AS6 -TP8-AS8
Dimensions in. (mm) A .65 (67.3) 3.03 (77.0) 3.34 (84.8) B 1.59 (40.4) 1.71 (43.4) 1.77 (45.0)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-AS4 MS-P-AS6 MS-P-AS8
Die Ordering Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8
Measured with swivel nut pulled toward hex.
60 Male Cone, Female Swivel (BSP/ISO Parallel Thread)
Basic Ordering Number -TP4-BM4 -TP6-BM6 -TP8-BM8
Dimensions in. (mm) A .48 (63.0) .87 (7.9) 3.3 (8.0) B 1.4 (36.1) 1.57 (39.9) 1.67 (4.4)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-BM4 MS-P-BM6 MS-P-BM8
30 Female Cone, Female Swivel (BSP/ISO Parallel Thread)
Basic Ordering Number -TP4-BS4 -TP6-BS6 -TP8-BS8
Dimensions in. (mm) A .59 (65.8) 3.00 (76.) 3.38 (85.9) B 1.53 (38.9) 1.69 (4.9) 1.81 (46.0)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-BS4 MS-P-BS6 MS-P-BS8
universal Globe Seal, Metric Female Swivel Nut
Fitting Size mm 14 18
Basic Ordering Number -TP4-MC14 -TP6-MC18 -TP8-MC
Dimensions in. (mm) A .41 (61.) .77 (70.4) 3.08 (78.) B 1.35 (34.3) 1.46 (37.1) 1.5 (38.6)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-MC14 MS-P-MC18 MS-P-MC
See Custom Assemblies, next page, for assembled hoses.
4
Hose
Thermoplastic Hose Custom Assemblies
SS - 7R 4 TA4 TA4 End Connection Material SS = 316 stainless steel S = Carbon steel Hose Series 7R = SAE 100R7 8R = SAE 100R8 7N = SAE 100R7 (nonconductive) 7P = Polyethylene core Nominal Hose Size 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/ in. 12 = 3/4 in. 16 = 1 in. 1st 2nd End Connections
28
or
71CM
Type TA TM SL SM PM MT MS AS BM
Fractional tube adapter Metric tube adapter Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Male NPT Male BSP/ISO tapered thread Male BSP/ISO parallel thread JIC (AN) 37 flare, female swivel 60 male cone, female swivel nut (BSP/ISO parallel thread) BS = 30 female cone, female swivel nut (BSP/ISO parallel thread) MC = Universal globe seal with metric female swivel nut
= = = = = = = = =
Size Fractional 4 = 1/4 in. 5 = 5/16 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/ in. 12 = 3/4 in. 16 = 1 in. Metric 6 = 6 mm 8 = 8 mm 10 = 10 mm 12 = 1 mm 18 = 18 mm 22 = mm
See End Connections tables for fitting dimensions.
Hose
5

302 Stainless Steel Spring Guards

Hose-Length Spring Guard
covers entire hose to

protect against kinking and abrasion. To order, add S to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-7R4TA4TA4-8S 6 in . Long Spring Guard
protects ends of hose.
To order, add F1 to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-7R4TA4TA4-8F1

(53C). To order, add F to a hose assembly ordering number. Example: SS-7R4TA4TA4-8F
To order, add S2 to the hose assembly ordering number.
For hose size designators 4 and 6 .
Example: SS-7R4TA4TA4-8S2
Assembly Tools
Hand Swager
Assembles 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to mm
Dies See End Connections tables for ordering numbers.
Pushers See End Connections tables for ordering numbers.
end connections.
Is constructed of rugged, die-cast
aluminum.
Can be bench mounted. Weight: approximately 8 lb (3.6 kg).
Ordering number: MS-HSR Case Can accommodate hand swager and other tools and accessories. Ordering number: MS-HSR-CASE
Depth Insertion Gauges Ordering numbers: MS-IGB-1 for hose size designators 4, 6, and 8 MS-IGB-2 for hose size designators 1 and 16. Vise Blocks Ordering numbers: MS-VB-1 for hose size designators 4, 6, and 8
Hand Cutter
Ordering number: MS-HC-SC-1
Lubricant
Power Swager
Assembles 1/4 to 1 in. and 6
to mm end connections.
Is ready to use; instructions
MS-VB-2 for hose size designators 1 and 16.
Ordering number: MS-TP-LuBE
included.
Opens and closes dies
automatically.
Can be bench mounted. Height: 30 in. (76 cm)
Width: 19 in. (48 cm) Depth: 8 in. (71 cm) Weight: approximately 140 lb (64 kg) Motor: Single-phase 1 hp, 60 Hz, 115/08/30 V. Ordering number: MS-PSR-110
6
Hose
Conductive Core Hose

30 SS spring guard Fiber reinforcement 316 SS end connections
Polyurethane cover
Electrically conductive core tube
Features
Single, twin, and vent hoses are available in custom lengths. Stainless steel end connections are available in 1/4 and Single hose
3/8 in. and 8 and 10 mm sizes.

Electrically conductive core tube and 316 SS end
connections maintain electrical continuity while in use.

Polyurethane cover resists abrasion. Blue stripe provides easily visible indicator of conductive
Twin hose (high-pressure vent)
core tube hose, differentiating it from other Swagelok thermoplastic hose.
Vent hose (low-pressure vent)
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.7) 1/4 (6.4) Vent 3/8 (9.7) Inside Diameter in. (mm) 0.6 (6.6) 0.38 (9.7) 0.6 (6.6) 0.38 (9.7) Fill 0.6 (6.6) Vent 0.6 (6.6) Fill 0.38 (9.7) Vent 0.6 (6.6) Minimum Bend Radius in. (cm) .00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.) .00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.) .00 (5.08) 4.00 (10.) 40 to 150
(40 to 65)
Hose Style Single Twin
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 5000 (344) Fill and vent 5000 (344) Fill 5000 (344) Vent 1500 (103)
Minimum Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 0 000 (1378) Fill and vent 0 000 (1378) Fill 0 000 (1378) Vent 6 000 (413)
Hose Series NGS NGT
NGV
Measured to inside of bend. For additional pressure-temperature data, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. ow-pressure vent line does not have conductive core tube. L
Testing
Every Swagelok conductive core hose assembly is factory tested for electrical conductivity.
Warning: All equipment must be properly grounded to prevent

static sparking .

Swagelok conductive core hose components are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Each hose is bagged individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and boxed.
Spring guards must be firmly attached to couplings on both ends of hose . Electrical resistance must not exceed 5 M .
Hose
7
Conductive Core Hose Custom Assemblies
S S - N G T 4 - A C A C - 4 0 - N 5 D 8
End Connection Material 316 stainless steel Hose Series NGS = Single hose NGT = Twin hose NGV = Vent hose Nominal Fill Hose Size 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. Fill Hose End Connections Vent Hose Overall Extension Lengths Vent Fill Length, in . (NGT or NGV Series) (NGT N = Nozzle side Must be in or NGV Series) whole number D = Dispenser side increments. Positive Negative Vent Hose Vent Hose 1 = in. A = in. 2 = 4 in. B = 4 in. 3 = 6 in. C = 6 in. 4 = 8 in. D = 8 in. 5 = 10 in. E = 10 in. 6 = 1 in. F = 1 in. 7 = 15 in. G = 15 in. 8 = 18 in. H = 18 in. 9 = 1 in. J = 1 in. 0 = 4 in. k = 4 in. Nozzle Dispenser Nozzle Dispenser x = None See tables below.
Conductive core hose is supplied with a spring guard at each end connection. Spring guards may be omitted for static nondispensing applications. To order hose without spring guards, replace the dash following the fill hose overall length designator with x . Example: SS-NGT4-ACAC-8xN5D8

Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 8 10 Nominal Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/4 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum End Outside Connection Dimension, Designator Hex Flat C D G H 11/16 3/4 11/16 in. 3/4 in.
A .60 (66.0) .94 (74.7) 66.3 (.61) 74.9 (.95)
Tube Adapters
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 Nominal Hose Size 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum End Outside Connection Dimension, Designator Hex Flat B A A E F 11/16 11/16 3/4 11/16 in. 3/4 in.
A 2.49 (63.2) 2.49 (63.2) 2.81 (71.4) 63.2 (2.49) 71.4 (2.81)
Dimensions, mm (in.) 8 10
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 Nominal Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8
Maximum End Outside Connection Dimension, Designator Hex Flat Male NPT M N K L 11/16 in. 3/4 in. 11/16 in. 3/4 in.
A in. (mm) 2.31 (58.7) 2.65 (67.3) 2.31 (58.7) 2.65 (67.3)

Nozzle End Components
Kit contains vent tube, cover plate, and label. Ordering number: NG-COVER-KIT
Cover Plate, Label Vent Tube Complete Assembly Cover plate Vent tube
Swagelok 83 series ball valvesold separately
See SAE J1273, Recommended Practices for Hydraulic Hose Assemblies, for information on installation and use of hose.
See NAHAD ASC 001.01, Flexible Metal Hose Assembly Standard, for common hose routing guidelines.
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 2008, R7 MS-01-167
www.swagelok.com
IGC II Integrated Gas Components

Substrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, a n d A s s e m b l y H a rd w a re
IGC II Series
I I I
1.5 in. (38.1 mm) c-ring modular design Compact footprint minimizes space requirements Lightweight, easy-to-assemble components
IGC II Integrated Gas Components: Substrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, and Assembly Hardware
Contents
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The IGC II System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Substrate Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Substrate Components Surface Mount Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Substrate End Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Mass Flow Controller Connectors
Jumper Tube Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Spacer Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Drop-Down Connector and Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Manifold Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Manifold Components Tee Connectors Elbow-to-Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Elbow-to-Female H Type VCR Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Elbow-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Elbow-to-Butt Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Female H Type VCR-to-Female H Type VCR Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Female H Type VCR-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Female H Type VCR-to-Butt Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Male H Type VCR-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Male H Type VCR-to-Butt Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Butt Weld-to-Butt Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Parallel Manifold Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Parallel Manifold Components Jumper Tube Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Caps and Conversion Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Support Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Assembly Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Technical Data
Service Ratings Pressure rating: 3000 psig (206 bar) at 70F (21C) for substrate and manifold components Temperature rating: 120C (248F) operating; 150C (302F) bakeout. Materials of Construction Wetted flow components: 316L VIM/VAR stainless steel Non-wetted components: aluminum (hard-coat anodized, alloy 2024-T351), stainless steel (316, 303, and alloy A286), and plastic (polyethersulfone) Internal Surface Finish Wetted components: electropolished 5 in. (0.13 m) Ra avg Cleaning and Processing Wetted components: Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01)
The IGC II System

A typical IGC II system consists of three layersa substrate assembly, a manifold assembly, and mounting components. The manifold and substrate assemblies are combined to form the conduit for the process gas and can be customized for any flow configuration. The IGC II system is assembled with simple mounting components and standard hardware. The IGC II system accepts any 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) c-ring surface mount component. See Swagelok Modular Surface Mount Components and Seals catalog for details. The Swagelok IGC II System Configurator is available on CD-ROM software to simplify the layout, selection, and ordering of IGC II components.
Flow components
Substrate Assembly
The assembly provides the flow path for the process gas through the gas stick. The substrate assembly consists of a substrate channel and a variety of drop-in flow components. The substrate channels are available in a variety of lengths to accommodate up to 14 surface-mount components. See pages 4 through 7 for ordering numbers.
Substrate channel
Manifold Assembly
The manifold assembly provides the flow path between two or more parallel gas sticks. The manifold assembly consists of a manifold channel and a variety of drop-in flow components. The manifold channels are available in a variety of lengths to accommodate up to 10 parallel gas sticks. Optional parallel manifold assemblies are available to provide an additional flow path parallel to the gas stick. See pages 7 through 11 for ordering numbers.
Manifold channel Flow component
Substrate-Manifold Assembly
The substrate assembly bolts over the manifold assembly. A c-ring gasket assembly (not visible) provides a leak-tight seal between the substrate component and the manifold below. The substrate-manifold assembly accepts any 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) c-ring surface mount component.
Substrate assembly
Mounting Components and Caps

A foot block bolts to each end of the gas stick, providing panel-mount capability. A support block provides mid-line support for longer gas sticks. A conversion plate provides the mounting capacity for a mass flow controller. A cap is available to cover an unused position on a substrate or manifold. A tube port is available to provide a 1/4 inch vertical tube port on a manifold or substrate. See pages 11 and 12 for ordering numbers.
Manifold assembly
Support Foot
Conversion plate
Cap
Substrate Channels
Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.53
(38.9)
Typ.
Ordering Number A-IG2-SB-01 A-IG2-SB-02 A-IG2-SB-03 A-IG2-SB-04 A-IG2-SB-05 A-IG2-SB-06 A-IG2-SB-07 A-IG2-SB-08 A-IG2-SB-09 A-IG2-SB-10 A-IG2-SB-11 A-IG2-SB-12 A-IG2-SB-13 A-IG2-SB-14
A in. (mm) 2.60 (66.0) 4.13 (105) 5.66 (144) 7.19 (183) 8.72 (221) 10.2 (259) 11.8 (300) 13.3 (338) 14.8 (376) 16.4 (416) 17.9 (455) 19.4 (493) 21.0 (533) 22.5 (572) 0.88
(22.3)
1.51
(38.4)
Port Descriptions for Substrate Components

Side Center or Manifold Side Typical 3-port surface mount Center or Manifold Side Typical 2-port surface mount
From left to right: Port 1 corresponds to the connection port on the first surface mount component. Port 2 corresponds to the connection port on the second surface mount component.
Bottom View of Surface Mount Components
Port 1
Substrate Components
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHSH
A B
Port 2
Surface Mount Connectors

N-ELD-711
N-ELD-710
0.18 (4.6) Dia. Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHSH 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHLG A 1.22 (31.0) B 0.92 (23.4) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 0.69 (4.4) 0.86 (5.5) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.031 (0.51) 0.039 (0.64)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHLG
Description Port 2 Side Center
Cutaway
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHDT
Port 1
N-ELD- 712
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHDE
N-ELD-713
Side
Center and manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-SHDT
1.53 (38.9)
1.23 (31.2)
1.18 (7.6)
0.054 (0.89)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGLG
N-ELD-709
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGDT
N-ELD-714
Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-SHDE
1.15 (7.4)
0.052 (0.85)
Center
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGDE
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGLG
1.03 (6.7)
0.047 (0.76)
N-ELD-715
Center
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTDT
Center and manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGDT
1.36 (8.7)
0.062 (1.0)
N-ELD-716
Manifold
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTDE
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGDE 1.83 (46.5) 6LVV-IG2-WS-DTDT 1.53 (38.9)
1.32 (8.5)
0.060 (0.97)
N-ELD-717
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEDE
Center N-ELD-718 and manifold
Center and manifold
1.68 (10.8)
0.078 (1.3)
Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTDE
1.65 (10.6)
0.075 (1.2)
Manifold Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEDE
1.61 (10.3)
0.073 (1.2)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHVM WITH CALLOUTS
N-ELD-728A
Port 1
A B
Port 2 0.18 (4.6) Dia.
Substrate End Connectors

SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHVM
N-ELD-728
Description Cutaway
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGVM
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHVM A 2.31 (58.7) B 2.16 (54.9)
Port 1
N-ELD-729
Port 2 Side
Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.31 (8.4)
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.059 (0.96)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTVM
N-ELD-730
Center Center and manifold Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGVM
1.48 (9.5)
0.067 (1.1)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEVM
N-ELD-731
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTVM
2.61 (66.3)
2.46 (62.5)
1.80 (11.6)
0.082 (1.3)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS VMMA
N-ELD-732
1/4 in. male VCR fitting
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEVM
1.77 (11.4)
0.080 (1.3)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS VMMB
N-ELD-733
Standard MFC Compact MFC
6LVV-IG2-WS-VMMA
2.36 (59.9)
2.18 (55.4)
1.54 (9.9)
0.070 (1.1)
6LVV-IG2-WS-VMMB
2.60 (66.0)
2.42 (61.5)
1.68 (10.8)
0.076 (1.2)
Side
6LVV-IG2-WS-SHVF
2.31 (58.7)
2.16 (54.9)
1.31 (8.4)
0.059 (0.96)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTVF
N-ELD-786
Center Center and manifold Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGVF
1.48 (9.5)
0.067 (1.1)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEVF
N-ELD-787
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTVF
2.61 (66.3)
2.46 (62.5)
1.80 (11.6)
0.082 (1.3)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS VFMA
N-ELD-784
1/4 in. female VCR fitting
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEVF
1.77 (11.4)
0.080 (1.3)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS VFMB
N-ELD-783
6LVV-IG2-WS-VFMA
2.36 (59.9)
2.18 (55.4)
1.54 (9.9)
0.070 (1.1)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHEC
N-ELD-740
6LVV-IG2-WS-VFMB
2.60 (66.0)
2.42 (61.5)
1.68 (10.8)
0.076 (1.2)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGEC
N-ELD-741
Side
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTEC
6LVV-IG2-WS-SHEC
1.48 (37.6)
1.33 (33.8)
0.84 (5.4)
0.038 (0.62)
N-ELD-742
Center
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEEC
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGEC
1.01 (6.5)
0.045 (0.74)
N-ELD-743
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS ECMA
N-ELD-744
1/4 0.035 in. butt Manifold weld
Center and manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTEC
1.78 (45.2)
1.63 (41.4)
1.33 (8.6)
0.061 (0.99)
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEEC
1.30 (8.4)
0.059 (0.96)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS ECMB
N-ELD-745
6LVV-IG2-WS-ECMA
1.53 (38.9)
1.35 (34.3)
1.08 (6.9)
0.048 (0.79)
6LVV-IG2-WS-ECMB
1.77 (45.0)
1.59 (40.4)
1.21 (7.8)
0.054 (0.89)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGMA WITH CALLOUTS
N-ELD-720A
Port 1 A B Port 2
Mass Flow Controller Connectors

SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHMA
0.18 (4.6) Dia. Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHMA A 1.27 (32.2) B 0.94 (23.9) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 0.93 (5.9) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.042 (0.68)
N-ELD-719
Description Port 1 Port 2 Side
Cutaway
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGMA
N-ELD-720
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTMA
N-ELD-721
Center
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGMA
1.10 (7.1)
0.050 (0.81)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEMA
N-ELD-722
Center and manifold Standard MFC Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTMA
1.58 (40.1)
1.25 (31.8)
1.42 (9.2)
0.065 (1.1)
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEMA
1.39 (8.9)
0.063 (1.0)
Standard 6LVV-IG2-WS-MAMA MFC

SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHMB
1.33 (33.8)
0.97 (24.6)
1.17 (7.5)
0.053 (0.87)
N-ELD-723
Compact 6LVV-IG2-WS-MAMB MFC

SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LGMB
1.58 (40.1)
1.21 (30.7)
1.30 (8.4)
0.059 (0.97)
N-ELD-724
Side
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DTMB
6LVV-IG2-WS-SHMB
1.51 (38.4)
1.18 (30.0)
1.06 (6.8)
0.048 (0.78)
N-ELD-725
Center
6LVV-IG2-WS-LGMB
1.23 (7.9)
0.056 (0.91)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS DEMB
N-ELD-726
Center and Compact manifold MFC
6LVV-IG2-WS-DTMB
1.82 (46.2)
1.49 (37.8)
1.56 (10.0)
0.071 (1.2)
Manifold
6LVV-IG2-WS-DEMB
1.52 (9.8)
0.069 (1.1)
N-ELD-727
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHTB**LG
Compact 6LVV-IG2-WS-MBMB MFC
1.83 (46.5)
1.45 (36.8)
1.43 (9.2) A B
0.065 (1.1)
Port 1
Port 2 0.18
(4.6)
Jumper Tube Connectors

Number of Surface Mount Positions Skipped 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB01LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB02LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB03LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB04LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB05LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB06LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB07LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB08LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB09LG 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTB010LG A 3.06 (77.7) 4.59 (116) 6.12 (155) 7.65 (194) 9.18 (233) 10.7 (272) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.3 (389) 16.8 (427) B 2.76 (70.1) 4.28 (109) 5.82 (148) 7.34 (186) 8.88 (226) 10.4 (264) 11.9 (302) 13.5 (343) 15.0 (381) 16.5 (419) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.73 (11.1) 2.59 (16.7) 3.46 (22.3) 4.32 (27.9) 5.19 (33.5) 6.05 (39.0) 6.92 (44.6) 7.78 (50.2) 8.65 (55.8) 9.51 (61.4) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.078 (1.3) 0.12 (1.9) 0.16 (2.5) 0.20 (3.2) 0.23 (3.8) 0.27 (4.5) 0.31 (5.1) 0.35 (5.7) 0.39 (6.4) 0.43 (7.0)
Dia.
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHTASH
N-ELD-795A
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHTASH
Port 1
1.23
(31.2)
A B
Port 2 0.18 (4.6) Dia.
N-ELD-795
Spacer Connectors
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SHTALG
N-ELD-796
Description Port 1 Port 2 Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTASH

(69.9)
Cutaway
B 1.23
(31.2)
Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.06

(10.3)
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.072

(1.2)
Side Side
Side
Center 6LVV-IG2-WS-SHTALG
3.06
(77.7)
1.53
(38.9)
1.77
(11.4)
0.080
(1.3)
Drop-down Connector and Plugs

Wetted Surface Area in. (mm) in.2 (cm2) A 0.86
(21.8)
SWAGELOK IGC II components DOWN PLUG FOR MANIFOLD PORT 6LVV-IG2-WC-DP
N-ELD-775A
Cutaway
Description Drop-down connector for substrate-to-manifold connection Plug for manifold port with a substrate component above Plug for manifold port with no substrate component above
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-WC-DD
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.022

(0.36)
0.49 (3.2)
6LVV-IG2-WC-PG
0.50
(12.7)
0.030 (0.19)
0.86 SWAGELOK 6LVV-IG2-WC-DP IGC II COMPONENTS MB -** 0.030 (0.19)

(21.8)
N-ELD-746
Manifold Channels
Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.60 Ordering Number A-IG2-MB-01 A-IG2-MB-02 A-IG2-MB-03 A-IG2-MB-04 A-IG2-MB-05 A-IG2-MB-06 A-IG2-MB-07 A-IG2-MB-08 A-IG2-MB-09 A-IG2-MB-10 A in. (mm) 1.68 (42.7) 3.28 (83.3) 4.88 (124) 6.48 (164) 8.08 (205) 9.68 (246) 11.3 (287) 12.9 (328) 14.5 (368) 16.1 (409) 1.60 A 0.31 (7.9) Dia. 0.18 (4.6) Dia. Typ. A Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT01ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT02ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT03ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT04ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT05ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT06ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT07ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT08ME in. (mm) 2.04 (51.8) 3.64 (92.5) 5.24 (133) 6.84 (174) 8.44 (214) 10.0 (254) 11.6 (295) 13.2 (335) 14.8 (376) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.59 (10.3) 3.15 (20.3) 4.68 (30.2) 6.23 (40.2) 7.76 (50.1) 9.30 (60.0) 10.9 (70.0) 12.4 (80.0) 13.9 (89.9) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.10 (1.7) 0.22 (3.7) 0.34 (5.6) 0.46 (7.5) 0.58 (9.5) 0.70 (11.4) 0.82 (13.4) 0.93 (15.3) 1.05 (17.2) 0.80
(20.3)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MEMT**ME
(40.6) Typ.
1.51
(38.4)
N-ELD-747
Manifold Components Tee Connectors

Elbow-to-Elbow
Number of Surface Mount Positions Skipped 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(40.6) Typ.
1.60 0.18
(4.6) Dia. (40.6) Typ.

A 2.10
(53.3)
Elbow-to-Female H Type VCR Fitting

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A in. (mm) 2.32 (58.9) 3.92 (99.6) 5.52 (140) 7.12 (181) 8.72 (221) 10.3 (262) 11.9 (302) 13.5 (343) 15.1 (384) 16.7 (424) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.86 (12.0) 3.41 (22.0) 4.94 (31.9) 6.49 (41.8) 8.03 (51.8) 9.57 (61.7) 11.1 (71.7) 12.7 (81.7) 14.2 (91.9) 15.7 (102) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.12 (2.0) 0.24 (4.0) 0.36 (5.9) 0.48 (7.9) 0.60 (9.8) 0.72 (11.7) 0.84 (13.7) 0.95 (15.6) II COMPONENTS MEMT**MM SWAGELOK IGC 1.07 (17.6) 1.19 (19.5)
0.31 (7.9) Dia.
0.25
(6.4) Dia.
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT01MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT02MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT03MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT04MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT05MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT06MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT07MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT08MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT09MF
N-ELD-749
0.18
(4.6) Dia.
1.60
(40.6) Typ.
2.10
(53.3)
Elbow-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A in. (mm) 2.32 (58.9) 3.92 (99.6) 5.52 (140) 7.12 (181) 8.72 (221) 10.3 (262) 11.9 (302) 13.5 (343) 15.1 (384) 16.7 (424) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.86 (12.0) 3.41 (22.0) 4.94 (31.9) 6.49 (41.8) 8.03 (51.8) 9.57 (61.7) 11.1 (71.7) 12.7 (81.7) 14.2 (91.6) 15.7 (102) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.12 (2.0) 0.24 (4.0) 0.36 (5.9) 0.48 (7.9) 0.60 (9.8) 0.72 (11.7) 0.84 (13.7) 0.95 (15.6)
SWAGELOK IGC II 1.07 (17.6) COMPONENTS MEMT**MC
0.31 (7.9) Dia.
0.25
(6.4) Dia.
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT01MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT02MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT03MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT04MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT05MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT06MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT07MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT08MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT09MM
N-ELD-750
1.19 (19.5)
0.18
(4.6) Dia.
1.60
(40.6) Typ.
A 0.81 (20.6) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. 0.375 (9.6) Dia.
Elbow-to-Butt Weld
Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A in. (mm) 1.02 (25.9) 2.62 (66.5) 4.22 (107) 5.82 (148) 7.42 (188) 9.02 (229) 10.6 (269) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.4 (391) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 0.80 (5.1) 2.35 (15.2) 3.88 (25.1) 5.43 (35.0) 6.97 (45.0) 8.51 (54.9) 10.1 (64.9) 11.6 (74.8) 13.1 (84.8) 14.7 (94.7) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.052 (0.86) 0.17 (2.81) 0.29 (4.73) 0.41 (6.68) 0.53 (8.62) 0.64 (10.6) 0.76 (12.5) 0.88 (14.5) 1.00 (16.4) 1.12 (18.3)
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT01MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT02MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT03MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT04MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT05MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT06MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT07MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT08MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEMT09MC
IGC II Integrated Gas Components: Substrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, and AssemblyN-ELD-751 Hardware
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MFMT**MF

0.18 (4.6)
Dia.
A 1.60
(40.6) Typ.
2.10
(53.3) Typ.
0.25
Female H Type VCR-to-Female H Type VCR Fitting

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 10 A Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT01MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT02MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT03MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT04MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT05MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT06MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT07MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT08MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT09MF 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT10MF in. (mm) 4.21 (107) 5.81 (148) 7.41 (188) 9.01 (229) 10.6 (269) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.4 (391) 17.0 (432) 18.6 (472) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 3.68 (23.7) 5.24 (33.8) 6.80 (43.8) 8.36 (53.9) 9.91 (63.9) 11.5 (74.0) 13.0 (84.1) 14.6 (94.1) 16.2 (104) 17.7 (114) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.26 (4.24) 0.38 (6.21) 0.50 (8.18) 0.62 (10.1) 0.74 (12.1) 0.86 (14.1) 0.96 (16.1) 1.10 (18.0) 1.22 (20.0) 1.35 (22.0)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MFMT**MM
0.31 (7.9) Dia.
(6.4) Dia.
N-ELD-754
1.60 0.18 (4.6)

Dia. (40.6) Typ.
A 2.10
(53.3)
0.25
Female H Type VCR-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT01MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT02MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT03MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT04MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT05MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT06MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT07MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT08MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT09MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT10MM in. (mm) 4.21 (107) 5.81 (148) 7.41 (188) 9.01 (229) 10.6 (269) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.4 (391) 17.0 (432) 18.6 (472) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 3.68 (23.7) 5.24 (33.8) 6.80 (43.8) 8.36 (53.9) 9.91 (63.9) 11.5 (74.0) 13.0 (84.1) 14.6 (94.1) 16.2 (104) 17.7 (114) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.26 (4.24) 0.38 (6.21) 0.50 (8.18) 0.62 (10.1) 0.74 (12.1) 0.86 (14.1) 0.96 (16.1) 1.10 (18.0)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MFMT**MC
0.31 (7.9) Dia.
(6.4) Dia.
N-ELD-755
1.22 (20.0) 1.35 (22.0)
2.10
(53.3)
A 1.60
(40.6) Typ.
0.25 (6.4) Dia.
0.81 (20.6) 0.18 (4.6) Dia. Typ. 0.31 (7.9) Dia.
Female H Type VCR Fitting-to-Butt Weld

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT01MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT02MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT03MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT04MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT05MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT06MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT07MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT08MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT09MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MFMT10MC in. (mm) 2.91 (73.9) 4.51 (114) 6.11 (155) 7.71 (196) 9.31 (236) 10.9 (277) 12.5 (318) 14.1 (358) 15.7 (399) 17.3 (439) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.06 (6.80) 2.61 (16.8) 4.14 (26.7) 5.69 (36.7) 7.23 (46.6) 8.77 (56.6) 10.3 (66.6) 11.8 (76.5) 13.4 (86.5) 14.9 (96.4) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.07 (1.17) 0.19 (3.12) 0.31 (5.05) 0.43 (7.00) 0.55 (8.93) 0.66 (10.9) 0.78 (12.8) 0.90 (14.8) 1.02 (16.7) 1.14 (18.6)
0.375 (9.6) Dia.
10
A 2.10
(53.3)

0.18 (4.6)
Dia.
1.60
(40.6) Typ.
0.25
(6.4) Dia.
Male H Type VCR-to-Male H Type VCR Fitting

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A in. (mm) 4.21 (107) 5.81 (148) 7.41 (188) 9.01 (229) 10.6 (269) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.4 (391) 17.0 (432) 18.6 (472) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 3.68 (23.7) 5.24 (33.8) 6.80 (43.8) 8.36 (53.9) 9.91 (63.9) 11.5 (74.0) 13.0 (84.1) 14.6 (94.1) 16.2 (104) 17.7 (114) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.26 (4.24) 0.38 (6.21) 0.50 (8.18) 0.62 (10.1) 0.74 (12.1) 0.86 (14.1) 0.96 (16.1) 1.10 (18.0) 1.22 (20.0)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MMMT**ML
0.31 (7.9) Dia.
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT01MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT02MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT03MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT04MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT05MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT06MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT07MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT08MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT09MM 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT10MM
1.35 (22.0)
N-ELD-752
2.10 (53.3) 0.25 (6.4) Dia. 0.18 (4.6) Dia.
1.60
(40.6) Typ.
A 0.81 (20.6) 0.375 (9.6) Dia. 0.31 (7.9) Dia.
Male H Type VCR Fitting-to-Butt Weld

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT01MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT02MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT03MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT04MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT05MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT06MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT07MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT08MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT09MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MMMT10MC A in. (mm) 2.91 (73.9) 4.51 (114) 6.11 (155) 7.71 (196) 9.31 (236) 10.9 (277) 12.5 (318) 14.1 (358) 15.7 (399) 17.3 (439) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.06 (6.80) 2.61 (16.8) 4.14 (26.7) 5.69 (36.7) 7.23 (46.6) 8.77 (56.6) 10.3 (66.6) 11.8 (76.5) 13.4 (86.5) 14.9 (96.4) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.07 (1.17) 0.19 (3.12) 0.31 (5.05) 0.43 (7.00) 0.55 (8.93) 0.66 (10.9) 0.78 (12.8) 0.90 (14.8)
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MCMT**MC
1.02 (16.7) 1.14 (18.6)
N-ELD-753
1.60 0.18 (4.6) Dia.

(40.6) Typ.
A 0.81 (20.6) Typ. 0.375 (9.6) Dia. Typ. 0.31 (7.9) Dia.
Butt Weld-to-Butt Weld

Number of Surface Mount Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A in. (mm) 1.61 (40.9) 3.21 (81.5) 4.81 (122) 6.41 (163) 8.01 (203) 9.61 (244) 11.2 (284) 12.8 (325) 14.4 (366) 16.0 (406) Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 1.55 (10.0) 3.09 (19.9) 4.63 (29.9) 6.17 (39.8) 7.71 (49.7) 9.26 (59.8) 10.8 (69.7) 12.3 (79.6) 12.3 (79.6) 15.4 (99.5) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.12 (2.0) 0.24 (3.9) 0.36 (5.8) 0.47 (7.8) 0.59 (9.7) 0.71 (11.7) 0.83 (13.6) 0.95 (15.5) 1.07 (17.5) 1.18 (19.4)
Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT01MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT02MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT03MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT04MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT05MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT06MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT07MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT08MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT09MC 6LVV-IG2-MS-MCMT10MC
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS PB -**
11
N-ELD-757
Parallel Manifold Channels

Number of Surface Mount Positions 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1.53 Ordering Number A-IG2-PB-03 A-IG2-PB-04 A-IG2-PB-05 A-IG2-PB-06 A-IG2-PB-07 A-IG2-PB-08 A-IG2-PB-09 A-IG2-PB-10 A-IG2-PB-11 A-IG2-PB-12 A in. (mm) 4.47 (114) 6.00 (152) 7.53 (191) 9.06 (230) 10.6 (269) 12.1 (307) 13.6 (345) 15.2 (386) 16.7 (424) 18.2 (462) A B
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MEPT**ME
(38.9) Typ.
1.51
(38.4)
0.73
(18.5)
N-ELD-758
Parallel Manifold Components

Number of Surface Mount Positions 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT01ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT02ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT03ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT04ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT05ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT06ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT07ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT08ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT09ME 6LVV-IG2-MS-MEPT10ME A 3.50 (88.9) 5.03 (128) 6.56 (167) 8.09 (205) 9.62 (244) 11.1 (282) 12.7 (322) 14.2 (361) 15.7 (499) 17.3 (439) B
Port 1
Port 2 0.18 (4.6) Dia.
0.31 (7.9) Dia. Wetted Surface Area in.2 (cm2) 3.00 (19.4) 4.47 (28.8) 5.94 (38.3) 7.41 (47.8) 8.87 (57.3) 10.3 (66.7) 11.8 (76.2) 13.3 (85.7) 14.8 (95.1) 16.2 (105) Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.21 (3.5) 0.32 (5.3) 0.44 (7.1) 0.55 (9.0) 0.66 (10.8) 0.77 (12.7) 0.88 (14.5) 1.01 (16.3) 1.11 (18.2) 1.22 (20.0)
3.06 (77.7) 4.59 (116) 6.12 (155) 7.65 (194) 9.18 (233) 10.7 (272) 12.2 (310) 13.8 (350) 15.3 (389) 16.8 (427)
Caps and Conversion Plate

Item Description Ordering Number Function Provides mounting capability for MFC Material
Conversion plate
6LVV-IG2-DM-01
Substrate cap
6LVV-IG2-DM-04
Covers unused position on substrate
Manifold cap
6LVV-IG2-DM-05
Covers unused position on manifold
316L VIM/VAR SS
Substrate tube port
6LVV-IG2-DM-06
Provides a vertical tube port on a substrate Provides a vertical tube port on a manifold
Manifold tube port
6LVV-IG2-DM-07
Support Blocks
Item Description Ordering Number Function Bolts to bottom of a substrate to provide mid-line support to a substrate channel with five or more positions Material
Support
A-IG2-MH-01
Foot
A-IG2-MH-02
Bolts to each end of a gas stick to provide mounting capability to the base platex
Aluminum alloy 2024-T351
Tube support
A-IG2-MH-15
Adapts the Swagelok tube support system to the centerline of the substrate
The base plate is a customer-supplied plate to which the assembled gas stick(s) is mounted.
Assembly Hardware
Item Description Lock-down plate Ordering Number SS-IG2-MH-03 Function Secures the substrate components at each end of the substrate channel Provides horizontal alignment of substrate components in a channel Provides horizontal alignment of manifold components in a channel Provides horizontal alignment of manifold end connections and parallel manifold components in a channel Provides seal between a substrate drop-down component and the manifold Secures MFC conversion plate to substrate assembly Secures surface mount to substrate assembly Secures substrate assembly to manifold assembly Secures MFC component with 25 or 26 mm flange thickness to MFC conversion plate Secures substrate assembly to foot Secures MFC component with 32 mm flange thickness to MFC conversion plate Secures foot to base plate 303 SS Alloy A286 Material 303 SS
Substrate clip
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MANIFOLD CLIP PES-IG2-MH-04
PES-IG2-MH-04
Polyethersulfone
N-ELD-760
Manifold clip #1
PES-IG2-MH-05
Polyethersulfone
Manifold clip #2
PES-IG2-MH-17
Polyethersulfone
C-ring gasket assembly Hex socket cap screw, 10-32 0.50 in. Torx head cap screw, 10-32 0.75 in. Hex socket cap screw Hex socket cap screw, 10-32 1.00 in. Torx head cap screw, 10-32 1.25 in. Hex socket cap screw, 10-32 1.375 in. Torx head cap screw, 10-32 1.50 in. Torx head cap screw Hex socket cap screw, 1/4-20 0.75 in.
SS-IG2-MH-07
316L SS
A286-IG2-MH-10 A286-IG2-MH-11 A286-IG2-MH-12 A286-IG2-MH-13 A286-IG2-MH-20 A286-IG2-MH-25 SS-IG2-MH-14
Designed for use with 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) c-ring surface mount components with a 0.312 in. (7.9 mm) base thickness.
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company Torx TM Textron Inc. 2001, 2003 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A. GLL July 2003, R2 MS-02-134
www.swagelok.com
I n d us t ri al E x ces s Flo w Valv es

Stop uncontrolled release of system media if downstream line ruptures
XS Series
Pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures up to 400F (204C) 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm end connections Stainless steel construction
Industrial Excess Flow Valves Slotted poppet

improves performance and reliability provides high-flow capacity eliminates nuisance tripping.
Features
Open Position
Flow
Choice of tube, pipe, or face seal end connections eases installation increases system versatility lowers overall cost.
Spring-loaded actuation
eases operation allows valve to work in any
orientation, enhancing system safety.
Tripped Position
Bleed vent eliminates complex bypass mechanisms allows spring to reset poppet automatically.
All metal seat improves durability requires no maintenance.
Operation
The spring-loaded poppet remains in the open position during normal system operation. Should an excess flow condition occur downstream, the poppet rapidly moves to the tripped position, stopping uncontrolled release of system media. When the system pressure equalizes through the bleed vent, the spring automatically resets the poppet to the open position. The flow through the bleed vent is less than 1 % of the flow rate in the trip range.
Ratings based on fluorocarbon FKM O-rings. See Optional O-ring Materials, page 4. Ratings limited to:
5000 psig (344 bar) for XS series valves with 3/8 in. female
NPT end connections.

4600 psig (316 bar) for XS series valves with 1/2 in. female
NPT end connections.

ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature, F (C) 10 (23) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148) 400 (204) 2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure, psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4280 (294)
For more information about valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Pressure ratings of valves with VCR or VCO fitting end connections are based on the ratings of the mating fitting; see the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-24, or the Swagelok VCO O -ring Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-28.
Industrial Excess Flow Valves
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Component 1 Inlet body 2 Identification ring 3 Poppet 4 Spring 5 O-ring 6 Backup ring 7 Outlet body Lubricant
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 Polyetherimide 316 SS/A479 302 SS/A313 Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 Silicone-based
Testing
Every XS series valve is factory tested for proper operation.

Swagelok XS series valves with VCR or VCO end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok XS series valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
Wetted components listed in italics. PEEK also available; see Ordering Information, page 4.

Springs with lower trip ranges are available. See the Swagelok XS Series Excess Flow Valve technical report, MS-06-11.
XS4 Series Air

Air Flow, std L/min
XS6 Series Air

Air Flow, std L/min
Inlet Pressure, bar
Open Trip Range Tripped
Trip Range
Tripped
XS8 Series Air

Air Flow, std L/min
XS4, XS6, XS8 Series Water

Series XS4
Open
Cv 0.5 1.1
Trip Range U.S. gal/min (L/min) 3.9 to 5.8 (14.7 to 21.9) 8.2 to 10.0 (31.0 to 37.8) 11.2 to 14.9 (42.3 to 56.3)
XS6 Inlet Pressure, bar XS8

Trip Range
Tripped
Inlet Pressure, bar
Open

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Select an ordering number.
B1 hex flat B2 hex flat
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. Male/female NPT 3/8 in. 1/2 in. Male ISO Female ISO Male SAE/MS Female SAE/MS Male VCR fitting Male VCO fitting 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1/2 in. Series XS4 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS6 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS4 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS4 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS6 XS8 XS4 XS8 XS8 XS8 XS8 XS4 XS8 XS4 XS8
Ordering Number SS-XSS4 SS-XSS6 SS-XSS8 SS-XSS6MM SS-XSS8MM SS-XSS10MM SS-XSS12MM SS-XSF2 SS-XSF4 SS-XSF6 SS-XSF8 SS-XSM2 SS-XSM4 SS-XSM6 SS-XSM8 SS-XSM4S4 SS-XSM6S6 SS-XSM8S8 SS-XSM4F4 SS-XSM6F6 SS-XSM8F8 SS-XSM4RT SS-XSM8RT SS-XSF8RT SS-XSM8ST SS-XSF8ST SS-XSVCR4 SS-XSVCR8 SS-XSVCO4 SS-XSVCO8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.43 (61.7) 2.75 (69.9) 2.97 (75.4) 2.43 (61.7) 2.70 (68.6) 2.80 (71.1) 2.96 (75.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.12 (53.8) 2.55 (64.8) 3.03 (77.0) 1.79 (45.5) 2.17 (55.1) 2.36 (59.9) 2.73 (69.3) 2.30 (58.4) 2.56 (65.0) 2.85 (72.4) 2.13 (54.1) 2.46 (62.5) 2.89 (73.4) 2.17 (55.1) 2.74 (69.6) 3.29 (83.6) 2.48 (63.0) 2.74 (69.6) 2.28 (57.9) 2.73 (69.3) 1.98 (50.3) 2.36 (59.9) 1 1 1 1/16 1 11/16 1 11/16 1 11/16 1 1 1/16 11/16 1 11/16 1 11/16 1 1 1/16 11/16 1 B1 11/16 1 11/16 B2
Female NPT
Optional O-Ring Materials

Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard. For an optional O-ring material, add a designator to the ordering number.
(40 to 121)
O-ring Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Kalrez Neoprene
Designator -BU -EP -KZ -NE
50 to 300
(45 to 148)
10 to 400
(23 to 204)
40 to 250
(40 to 121)
Example: SS-XSS4-BU
PEEK Backup Ring

For a PEEK backup ring, add -PK to the ordering number. Example: SS-XSS4-PK
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. See specifications: ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN 2999, JIS B0203.
Special Cleaning and Packaging

Swagelok XS series valves with VCR or VCO end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for XS series valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-XSS4-SC11

Swagelok, VCR, VCOTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2007, R7 MS-01-110
www.swagelok.com
Industr ial Pre ssure Transduce rs

Standard Industrial (S Model) E x plosion-Proof (E Mode l)
Fe ature s
Accuracy 0.5 % of span limit point calibration (0.25 % of span best fit straight line) Broad selection of pressure ranges, engineering units in psi, bar, MPa, kg/cm2, and kPa.
Pressure references of compound, gauge, or absolute

Available with a variety of electrical connections and output signals Available with a variety of process connections including flush diaphragm and
Swagelok tube adapter
Industrial Pressure Transducers
Contents
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Models S Model: Standard Industrial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E Model: Explosion-Proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Range Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 8 2 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Accessories Attachable Indicator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remote Panel Mount Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cooling Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Weld Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Swagelok industrial pressure transducers provide electronic monitoring of system pressure for general industrial applications, including hazardous locations. All models feature stainless steel construction and offer a variety of pressure ranges, process connections, electrical connections, and output signals. Thin film and piezoresistive sensor technology help provide repeatability, reliability, and stability.
Component Internal diaphragm Process connection Flush diaphragm Flush diaphragm, O-ring Transducer body Flush diaphragm internal fluid Piezoresistive sensor internal fluid S Model Wetted 316 SS 316 Ti Buna N Nonwetted 304 SS Synthetic oil Elgiloy 316 Ti Buna N 304 SS Synthetic oil E Model
Calibration
Every Swagelok pressure transducer is factory calibrated to ensure conformance to its stated accuracy.
Model Selection Guide

Models Approvals Process Connection Type S Model Standard Industrial CE and CSA Standard Flush diaphragm E Model Explosion-Proof FM and CSA Standard In hazardous locations requiring explosion-proof design Flush diaphragm Slurries, crystallizing media, or highviscosity media requiring explosionproof design
Application
Wide variety of general industrial applications
Slurries, crystallizing media, or highviscosity media
Accuracy Pressure Range Vacuum psi to . . . Vacuum bar to . . . Vacuum MPa to . . . Vacuum kg/cm2 to . . . ;
0.5 % of span limit point calibration (LPC) (0.25 % best fit straight line [BFSL]) 15 000 psi 1 000 bar 100 MPa 1 000 kg/cm2 9 000 psi 600 bar 60 MPa 600 kg/cm2 15 000 psi 1000 bar 100 MPa 1 000 kg/cm2 9 000 psi 600 bar 60 MPa 600 kg/cm2 60 000 kPa
Vacuum kPa to . . . Pressure Reference Output Signal
100 000 kPa
60 000 kPa
100 000 kPa
Gauge, absolute, compound 4 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V
Thermal Effect Display Options Special cleaning ASME B40.1 Level IV 3.1.B 11-Point Calibration Certificate traceable to DKD 3.1.B Inspection Certificate of Material 2.2 Quality Assurance Certificate EPDM or fluorocarbon FKM O-rings Integral cooling element Alloy C-276 diaphragm Cable lengths 9 ft (3 m), 16 ft (5 m), 32 ft (10 m) X
0.2 % of span per 18F (10C) change on zero point. 0.2 % of span per 18F (10C) change on span within compensated temperature range from 32 to 176F (0 to 80C) See Accessories, page 12. X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X
See Pressure Range Designators, page 8. Pressure ranges 0.1 and 0.16 bar thermal effect 0.4 % of span per 18F (10C). 10 ft (3 m), 20 ft (6 m), 30 ft (9 m).
S Model: Standard Industrial

The Swagelok S Model is engineered for use in a wide variety of general industrial applications such as machine control, process control, laboratory and testing equipment, and hydraulics and pneumatics. The case and wetted components feature stainless steel construction and a robust, compact design that is resistant to pressure spikes, shock, and vibration.
Features
Accuracy 0.5 % LPC (0.25 % BFSL) Temperature compensated to ensure accuracy and long-
term stability when exposed to temperature variations

Wide variety of pressure and electrical connections,
pressure ranges, pressure units, as well as signal outputs to fulfill many application requirements
Adjustable zero and span Available in flush diaphragm for use with viscous fluids and
slurries
Technical Data
Accuracy: 0.5 % LPC of span (0.25 % BFSL) Hysteresis: 0.1 % of span Repeatability: 0.05 % of span Long-term stability: 0.2 % of span per year Zero/span adjustability: 10 % (internal potentiometers) Response time: 1 ms Shock resistance: 1000 g in accordance with IEC 770 Direct wire 4 ft (1.5 m) cable, zero and span not adjustable
(IP68/NEMA 5)
L-plug, 1/2 in. female conduit, DIN EN 175301-803
(IP65/NEMA 5)
L-plug, PG9 cable gland, DIN EN 175301-803 (IP65/NEMA 5)
Output Signals
4 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V (dc) 0 to 10 V (dc)
(mechanical shock)
Vibration resistance: 20 g in accordance with IEC 770
(vibration under resonance)

Power supply: 10 to 30 V (dc) (14 to 30 V [dc] with 0 to 10 V
output signal)
Wiring protection against reverse polarity, over voltage, and
Temperature Ratings
Without integral cooling element
Media: 22 to 212F (30 to 100C) Ambient: 4 to 176F (20 to 80C) Storage: 40 to 212F (40 to 100C) Compensated range: 32 to 176F (0 to 80C)
short circuit
Ingress protection varies by type of electrical connector
10 ms with flush diaphragm.
Process End Connections

Internal diaphragm type 1/4, 3/8 and 1/2 in.; 6, 10, and 12 mm Swagelok
With cooling element (ush diaphragm only)

Media: 4 to 302F (20 to 150C) Ambient: 4 to 176F (20 to 80C) Storage: 4 to 212F (20 to 100C)
tube adapter
1/4 and 1/2 in. male NPT G1/4B EN (1/4 RG) and G1/2B EN (1/2 RG) G1/4B PF (1/4 RJ) and G1/2B PF (1/2 RJ) R1/4 PT (1/4 ISO7 taper) and R1/2 PT (1/2 ISO7 taper) Flush diaphragm type G1/2B EN G1B EN
Temperature coefcients in compensated temperature range

TC of zero 0.2 % of span per 18F (10C) TC of span 0.2 % of span per 18F (10C)
Pressure ranges 0.1 and 0.16 bar thermal effect 0.4 % of span
per 18F (10C).
Approvals / Compliance
CSA approval: C22.2 0, 0.5, and 142
Electrical Connectors
4-pin circular connector M12
1 (IP67/NEMA 4)
CE conformity: 89/336/EEC (EMC) and 97/23/EC (PED)
Bendix 4-pin MIL plug (IP67/NEMA 4) Bendix 6-pin MIL plug (IP67/NEMA 4) Direct wire 4 ft (1.5 m) cable (IP67/NEMA 4)
Build an S Model transducer ordering number by adding the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PT I S NG160 1 5 AO E
Product Function
Pressure transducer
Options
Application
Industrial
Model
Standard
A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 Level IV C = 3.1.B 11-Point Calibration Certificate traceable to DKD D = 2.2 Quality Assurance Certificate E = 3.1.B Material Test Certificate T = 9 ft (3 m) cable Y = 16 ft (5 m) cable Z = 32 ft (10 m) cable Flush Diaphragm Type U = Integral cooling element V = Alloy C-276 diaphragm W = EPDM O-ring X = Fluorocarbon FKM O-ring
When special cleaning is ordered with a flush
diaphragm process connection or with a piezoresistive sensor range, a halocarbon fluid is included.
Pressure Range
See page 8 and 9.
Output Signal
1 = 4 to 20 mA 2 = 0 to 5 V (dc) 3 = 0 to 10 V (dc)
Electrical Connector
1 3 8 2 7 6 5 = = = = = = = 4-pin circular connector, M12 1, IP67/NEMA 4 Bendix 4-pin MIL plug, IP67/NEMA 4 Bendix 6-pin MIL plug, IP67/NEMA 4 Direct wire 4 ft (1.5 m) cable, IP67/NEMA 4 Direct wire 4 ft (1.5 m) cable, IP68/NEMA 5 zero and span not adjustable L-plug, 1/2 in. female conduit, DIN EN175301-803, IP65/NEMA 5 L-plug, PG9 cable gland, DIN EN175301-803, IP65/NEMA 5
Process End Connection

Internal Diaphragm Type AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AR = 1/2 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AT = 12 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/2 in. male NPT AV = G1/4B EN (1/4 RG) AW = G1/2B EN (1/2 RG) AX = G1/4B PF (1/4 RJ) AZ = G1/2B PF (1/2 RJ) BD = R1/4 PT (1/4 ISO7 taper) BE = R1/2 PT (1/2 ISO7 taper) Flush Diaphragm Type BV = G1/2B EN flush diaphragm BJ = G1B EN flush diaphragm
Can be used with Swagelok RG adapter
fittings.
Can be used with Swagelok RJ adapter

fittings.
E Model: Explosion-Proof
The Swagelok E Model is specifically designed to meet durability and performance demands of industrial applications where explosion-proof ratings are required, such as wellhead monitoring, refining, petrochemical, offshore oil and gas, and gas measurement.
Features
Accuracy 0.5 % LPC (0.25 % BFSL), available in 4 to
20 mA, 2-wire or 1 to 5 V (dc), 3-wire low power output signals

Resistant to pressure spikes, vibration, and moisture
intrusion to IP67/NEMA 4X
Temperature compensated to ensure accuracy and long-
term stability when exposed to temperature variations

Available in flush diaphragm version for use with viscous
fluids and slurries
Technical Data
Accuracy: 0.5 % LPC of span (0.25 % BFSL) Hysteresis 0.1 % of span Repeatability 0.05 % of span Long-term stability 0.2 % of span per year Response time 1 ms Shock resistance 1000 g in accordance with IEC 770
Electrical Connections
1/2 in. male conduit with 6 ft (1.8 m) shielded cable
(IP67/NEMA 4X)
Output Signals
4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V (dc)
(mechanical shock)
Vibration resistance 20 g in accordance with IEC 770
Temperature Ratings
Media: 22 to 212F (30 to 100C) Ambient: 22 to 212F (30 to 100C) Storage: 40 to 221F (40 to 105C) Compensated range: 32 to 176F (0 to 80C)
(vibration under resonance)

Power supply 10 to 30 V (dc) for 4 to 20 mA output; 6 to
30 V (dc) for 1 to 5 V (dc) output

Wiring protection against reverse polarity, over voltage, and
short circuit
Ingress protection in accordance with IP67/NEMA 4X
10 ms with flush diaphragm.
Temperature coefcients in compensated temperature range

TC of zero 0.2 % of span per 18F (10C) TC of span 0.2 % of span per 18F (10C)
Pressure ranges 0.1 and 0.16 bar thermal effect 0.4 % of span.
per 18F (10C)

Internal diaphragm type 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in.; 6, 10, and 12 mm Swagelok tube
adapter
1/4 and 1/2 in. male NPT R1/4 PT (1/4 ISO7 taper) and R1/2 PT (1/2 ISO7 taper) G1/4B EN (1/4 RG) and G1/2B EN (1/2 RG) R1/4 PT (1/4 ISO7 taper) and R1/2 PT (1/2 ISO7 taper) Flush diaphragm type G1/2B EN G1B EN
Approvals / Compliance
FM and CSA approval
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, and D Class III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G Class III, Div. 1
Temperature class
T6 at maximum ambient 140F (60C) T4 at maximum ambient 221F (105C)

CE conformity: 89/336/EEC (EMC) and 97/23/EC (PED)
Build an E Model transducer ordering number by adding the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PT I E NG160 1 9 AQ AE
Product Function
Pressure transducer
Options
Application
Industrial
Model
Explosion-proof
A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 Level IV C = 3.1.B 11-Point Calibration Certificate traceable to DKD D = 2.2 Quality Assurance Certificate E = 3.1.B Material Test Certificate T = 10 ft (3 m) cable Y = 20 ft (6 m) cable Z = 30 ft (9 m) cable Flush Diaphragm Type V = Alloy C-276 diaphragm W = EPDM O-ring X = Fluorocarbon FKM O-ring
When special cleaning is ordered with a flush
diaphragm process connection or with a piezoresistive sensor range, a halocarbon fluid is included.
Pressure Range
See page 8 and 9.
Output Signal
1 = 4 to 20 mA 4 = 1 to 5 V (dc)
1/2 in. male NPT conduit with 6 ft (1.8 m) shielded cable, IP67/NEMA 4X
Process End Connection

Internal Diaphragm Type AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AR = 1/2 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AT = 12 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/2 in. male NPT BD = R1/4 PT (1/4 ISO7 taper) BE = R1/2 PT (1/2 ISO7 taper) AV = G1/4B EN (1/4 RG) AW = G1/2B EN (1/2 RG) AX = G1/4B PF (1/4 RJ) AZ = G1/2B PF (1/2 RJ) Flush Diaphragm Type BV = G1/2B EN flush diaphragm BJ = G1B EN flush diaphragm
Can be used with Swagelok RG adapter
fittings.
Can be used with Swagelok RJ adapter

fittings.
Pressure Range DesignatorsAll Models

psi
Working Pressure Rating Minimum Maximum Designator psi Gauge 0 NC0 30 NC30 60 NC60 Vacuum 100 NC100 30 in Hg 160 NC160 200 NC200 300 NC300 5 NG5 10 NG10 15 NG15 25 NG25 30 NG30 50 NG50 60 NG60 100 NG100 160 NG160 200 NG200 250 NG250 300 NG300 0 400 NG400 500 NG500 600 NG600 750 NG750 1 000 NG1000 1 500 NG1500 2 000 NG2000 3 000 NG3000 5 000 NG5000 8 000 NG8000 10 000 NG10K 15 000 NG15K 15 25 50 100 250 500 Overpressure Burst Sensor Rating Rating Type Reference 72 87 140 170 140 170 140 170 500 600 500 600 500 600 72 87 72 87 72 87 Piezoresistive 72 87 72 87 140 170 240 290 240 290 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 1 160 1 390 1 160 5 800 1 740 7 970 1 740 7 970 2 900 11 600 4 640 14 500 Metal thin film 4 640 14 500 7 250 17 400 11 600 24 650 17 400 34 800 21 750 43 500 21 750 43 500 87 87 170 290 600 5 800
bar
Overpressure Burst Sensor Minimum Maximum Designator Rating Rating Type bar Gauge Reference 0 AC0 1 2 0.6 AC.6 4 4.8 3 AC3 17 20.5 Vacuum 5 AC5 35 42 1 9 AC9 35 42 15 AC15 80 96 25 AC25 50 250 0.1 AG.1 1 2 0.16 AG.16 1.5 2 0.25 AG.25 2 2.4 Piezoresistive 0.4 AG.4 2 2.4 0.6 AG.6 4 4.8 1 AG1 5 6 10 12 1.6 AG1.6 2.5 AG2.5 10 12 4 AG4 17 20.5 6 AG6 35 42 10 AG10 35 42 0 16 AG16 80 96 25 AG25 50 250 40 AG40 80 400 60 AG60 120 400 100 AG100 200 800 160 AG160 320 1 000 Metal thin film 250 AG250 500 1 200 400 AG400 800 1 500 600 AG600 1 200 1 500 1 000 AG1000 1 500 3 000 0.25 0.4 0.6 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 10 16 bar Absolute AA.25 2 AA.4 2 AA.6 4 AA1 5 AA1.6 10 AA2.5 10 AA4 17 AA6 35 AA10 35 AA16 80 2.4 2.4 4.8 6 12 Piezoresistive 12 20.5 42 42 96 Working Pressure Rating
psi Absolute NA15 72 NA25 72 NA50 140 NA100 240 NA250 500 NA500 1 160
Piezoresistive
Metal thin film
Maximum for G1B EN flush diaphragm. Maximum for 3/8 and 1/2 in.; 10 and 12 mm Swagelok tube adapter. Maximum for G1/2B EN flush diaphragm. Maximum for 1/4 in. and 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter and 1/4 in. NPT.
MPa
Overpressure Burst Minimum Maximum Designator Rating Rating MPa Gauge Reference 0.04 MG.04 0.2 0.24 0.06 MG.06 0.4 0.48 0.1 MG.1 0.5 0.6 0.16 MG.16 1 1.2 0.25 MG.25 1 1.2 0.4 MG.4 1.7 2 0.6 MG.6 3.5 4.2 1 MG1.0 3.5 4.2 1.6 MG1.6 8 9.6 0 2.5 MG2.5 5 25 4 MG4 8 40 6 MG6 12 40 10 MG10 20 80 16 MG16 32 100 25 MG25 50 120 40 MG40 80 150 150 60 MG60 120 100 MG100 150 300 0 MC0 0.1 0.2 0.06 MC.06 0.4 0.48 0.15 MC.15 1 1.2 0.3 MC.3 1.7 2 Vacuum 0.1 0.6 MC.6 3.5 4.2 0.9 MC.9 3.5 4.2 1.5 MC1.5 8 9.6 2.5 MC2.5 5 25 Working Pressure Rating Sensor Type
kg/cm2
Working Pressure OverRating pressure Burst Sensor Minimum Maximum Designator Rating Rating Type kg/cm2 Gauge Reference 0.6 CG.6 4 4.8 1 CG1 5 6 10 12 1.6 CG1.6 2.5 CG2.5 10 12 4 CG4 17 20.5 Piezoresistive 6 CG6 35 42 10 CG10 35 42 16 CG16 80 96 0 25 CG25 50 250 40 CG40 80 400 60 CG60 120 400 100 CG100 200 800 160 CG160 320 1 000 Metal 250 CG250 500 1 000 thin film 400 CG400 800 1 500 600 CG600 1 200 1 500 1 000 CG1000 1 500 3 000 0 CC0 1 2 0.6 CC.6 4 4.8 1 CC1 5 6 1.6 CC1.6 10 12 3 CC3 17 20.5 Vacuum Piezoresistive 1 4 CC4 17 20.5 5 CC5 35 42 9 CC9 35 42 15 CC15 80 96 25 CC25 50 250
Piezoresistive
Metal thin film
Piezoresistive
kPa
Working Pressure OverRating pressure Burst Sensor Minimum Maximum Designator Rating Rating Type kPa Gauge Reference 40 JG40 200 240 60 JG60 400 480 100 JG100 500 600 1 000 1 200 160 JG160 250 JG250 1 000 1 200 Piezoresistive 400 JG400 1 700 2 000 600 JG600 3 500 4 200 1 000 JG1000 3 500 4 200 1 600 JG1600 8 000 9 600 0 2 500 JG2500 5 000 25 000 4 000 JG4000 8 000 40 000 6 000 JG6000 12 000 40 000 10 000 JG10K 20 000 80 000 16 000 JG16K 32 000 100 000 Metal 25 000 JG25K 50 000 120 000 thin film 31 500 JG31.5K 50 000 120 000 40 000 JG40K 80 000 150 000 60 000 JG60K 120 000 150 000 100 000 JG100K 150 000 300 000 0 JC0 100 200 60 JC60 400 480 300 JC300 1 700 2 000 Vacuum Piezoresistive 100 500 JC500 1 700 2 000 900 JC900 3 500 4 200 1 500 JC1500 8 000 9 600
Maximum for G1B EN flush diaphragm. Maximum for 3/8 and 1/2 in.; 10 and 12 mm Swagelok tube adapter. Maximum for G1/2B EN flush diaphragm. Maximum for 1/4 in. and 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter and 1/4 in. NPT.
10
Dimensions
Choose electrical connector, body type, and end connection, and add together for overall height of transducer. Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Body
Process Connection
0.33
(8.5)
A Electrical Connector
1.06
(27.0)
1.34
(33.9)
1.34
(33.9)
1.34
(33.9)
0.71 1.00
(25.4) (18.0)
0.39
(9.9)
0.39
(9.9)
Direct Wire Zero and Span Nonadjustable
Direct Wire Zero and Span Adjustable
Bendix 4-pin MIL Plug Connector
Bendix 6-pin MIL Plug Connector
2.03
(51.5)
1.87
(47.6)
0.42 1.14
(29.0) (10.7)
1.34
(33.9)
1.19
(30.3)
L Plug with PG9 Cable Gland
L Plug with 1/2 in. Female Conduit
4-pin Circular Connector M 12 1
B Body
S Model E Model
1/2 in. male NPT conduit with cable
3.30
(83.8)
1.77
(45.0)
1.52
(38.5)
0.33
(8.5)
1.06
(27.0)
1.06
(27.0)
Standard Body Dimensions
Body Dimensions for Direct Wire Zero and Span Nonadjustable
0.75
(19.1)
1.06 (27.0) hex 1/2 in. male NPT
11
C Process Connection
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.61
(41.0) hex
1.06 1.79
(27.0) hex (45.5)
1.61 1.79
(41.0) hex
1.18
(29.9)
1.22
(31.0)
(45.5)
G1/2B EN Flush Diaphragm (without cooling ribs)
G1B EN Flush Diaphragm (without cooling ribs)
G1/2B EN Flush Diaphragm (with cooling element)
G1B EN Flush Diaphragm (with cooling element)
1.06
(27.0) hex (22.6)
1.06
(27.0) hex
(27.0) hex
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.06
0.89
1.21
(30.6)
(26.5)
1.04
(32.5)
1.28
G1/4B EN (1/4 RG)
G1/2B EN (1/2 RG)
G1/4B PF (1/4 RJ)
G1/2B PF (1/2 RJ)
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.34
(33.9)
1.39
(35.4)
1.65
(42.0)
1/4 in. and 6 mm Swagelok Tube Adapter
1.06
(27.0) hex
1.06
(27.0) hex
0.81
(20.6)
1.05
(26.6)
1/4 in. Male NPT and 1/4 in. Male ISO7 Taper
1/2 in. Male NPT and 1/2 in. Male ISO7 Taper
12
Options
Ordered by adding a designator at the end of the transducer ordering number
Cables
Optional cable lengths are available. See Ordering Information for available lengths.
2.2 Quality Assurance Certificate

Certified results of inspections and tests in accordance with EN 10 204 -2.2.
EPDM O-Ring
An EPDM O-ring is available for flush diaphragm types only.
3.1.B Material Certificate

Certified results of inspections and tests carried out or supervised by authorized personnel, independent of manufacturing. These results include chemical composition and mechanical testing of all wetted components.
Fluorocarbon FKM O-Ring

A fluorocarbon FKM O-ring is available for flush diaphragm types only.
Special Cleaning to ASME B40.1 Section 5

Special cleaning is available as an option. Transducer internals are cleaned in accordance with ASME B40.1, Section 5. The transducer is then capped and bagged to maintain cleanliness. NOTE: When special cleaning is ordered with a ush diaphragm process connection or with a piezoresistive sensor range, a halocarbon uid ll is included.
3.1.B 11-Point Calibration Certificate Traceable to DKD

An 11-point pressure calibration traceable to Deutscher Kalibreirdienst (DKD), German Calibration Service.
Alloy C-276 Diaphragm

An Alloy C-276 diaphragm is available for flush diaphragm types only, for additional corrosion resistance.
Accessories
Ordered as separate ordering numbers
Attachable Indicator Display

This LCD, 4-digit digital display attaches directly to S Model transducers using an L-plug connector and 4 to 20 mA output signals. The display provides local readout of system pressure with simultaneous signal transmission.
Features
Retrofitable to transducers already in use Adjustable and programmable with flush mounted keys
below the front cover

Rugged, compact plastic case meets ingress
Temperature Rating
Ambient: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Storage: 22 to 176F (30 to 80C) Influence on display: 0.1 % per 18F (10C)
protection IP65/NEMA 4X
CE conformity to 89/335/EMC Integrated self-diagnosing circuit monitoring
Performance
Accuracy: 0.2% of span 1 digit Scale adjustment: manually programmed, menu driven
Dimensions
3.62
(91.9)
Display
Range: 1999 to 9999 Pick-up rate: 3/s 4-digit LCD, 0.40 in. (10.2 mm) high
1.61
1.54
(39.2)
1.97
(50.0)
Housing
Material: ABS plastic
(40.9)
1.97
(50.0)
Electrical Data
Input/output signal: supplied by the 4 to 20 mA loop Voltage drop: 3 V Maximum current rating: 40 mA Power supply: supplied by the 4 to 20 mA loop
2.05
(52.0)
Ordering Number
PTI-AI = Attachable indicator display
13
Accessories
Remote Panel Mount Display
The Swagelok compact remote panel meter digital indicator can accept many types of signal inputs and requires a supply voltage of 9 to 28 V (dc). The panel meter is fully user adjustable and programmable. The user-adjustable digital filtering improves readability during rapid pressure changes.
Features
Two programmable switching outputs Ingress protection IP54 Alarm delay Accurate to 0.2 % of span to 1 digit to match
transducer accuracy
User-programmable EASYBUS interface, galvanically isolated CE conformity to 89/335/EMC
Front protection IP65 when properly installed in panel by using the
provided seals.
Switching Outputs
Number: Two individually adjustable Function: Minimum/maximum adjustable by setting
hysteresis
Adjustable: Within configured measurement range Hysteresis: Adjustable Response time: 20 ms Accuracy: Actual value by means of digital control Contacts: Two separate transistor switching outputs
Input Signals
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 0 to 1 V, 0 to 2 V, 0 to 10 V 0 to 50 mV
< 0.3 % of span 1 digit accuracy.
(selectable switching mode)

Low-side (NPN) or High-side (PNP) or Push Pull Low-side: Maximum 28 V/1A High-side: Maximum power supply (Ub/200 mA)
Power Supply
9 to 28 V (dc) Current consumption: Maximum 30 mA
Dimensions
1.89
(48.0) (65.0)
(without alarm output)
Display
Type: LED, 4 digits, 0.40 in. (10.2 mm) high Range: 1999 to 9999 Refresh rate: 100 readings per second Decimal point: freely programmable Accuracy: 0.2 % of span 1 digit
0.94
(24.0)
2.56
0.28
(7.0)
0.35
(9.0)
Temperature
Operating 4 to 122F (20 to 50C) Storage 22 to 158F (30 to 70C)
0.85
(21.7)
1.77
(45.0)
Wiring
Screw terminals, maximum wiring diameter 1.5 mm,
Panel Hole Size
two separate terminal blocksone for power, switching output, transmitter, and one for Easybus
Ordering Number
PTI-PM = Remote panel mount display
Accessories
Cooling Elements
Thread-on cooling element adapters are available for use with G1/2B EN (1/2 RG) process connections on the S Model. These cooling adapters increase the media temperature ratings.
Cables and Connectors
Description G1/2B EN (1/2 RG), 302F (150C) media, 80F (30C) ambient G1/2B EN (1/2 RG), 392F (200C) media, 86F (30C) ambient
Ordering Number PTI-CE150-AW PTI-CE200-AW
Weld Adapters
Field installed weld adapters with factory machined mating port are available for the G1/2B EN and G1B EN flush diaphragm process connections.
Mating Connector Bendix, 9 ft (3 m) cable, 4-wire, UL listed Bendix, no cable, 4-pin 1, 6 ft (2 m) cable, straight, 4-wire M12 1, 16 ft (5 m) cable, straight, 4-wire M12 1, 6 ft (2 m) cable, 90 angled, 4-wire M12 1, no cable, straight, 4-pin M12 1, no cable, 90 angled, 4-pin M12 1, 6 ft (2 m) cable, straight, 5-wire, UL listed M12 1, 16 ft (5 m) cable, straight, 5-wire, UL listed M12 1, 6 ft (2 m) cable, 90 angled, 5-wire, UL listed M12 1, 16 ft (5 m) cable, 90 angled, 5-wire, UL listed M12 1, no cable, straight, 5-pin M12 1, no cable, 90 angled, 5-pin M12 1 male, no cable, 90 angled, 4-pin, M12 1, 32 ft (10 m) cable, 90 angled, 4-wire, UL listed M12
Ordering Number PTU-MC-1 PTU-MC-2 PTU-MC-3 PTU-MC-4 PTU-MC-5 PTU-MC-6 PTU-MC-7 PTU-MC-8 PTU-MC-9 PTU-MC-10 PTU-MC-11 PTU-MC-12 PTU-MC-13 PTU-MC-14 PTU-MC-15
Description G1/2B EN flush diaphragm weld adapter G1B EN flush diaphragm weld adapter
Ordering Number PTI-WA-BV PTI-WA-BJ
UL style 2164/1061, temperature rating 176F (80C). UL style 20549/1061, temperature rating 176F (80C).
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company FM TM FM Global CSATM Canadian Standards Association ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2007, R3 MS-02-225
www.swagelok.com
I n s t r ument Isolat ion Valves

Block and Bleed and Double Block and Bleed Valves
V Series
Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures up to 450F (232C) with PTFE packing;
up to 1200F (648C) with Grafoil packing
100 % factory tested
Instrument Isolation Valves
Features
Compact instrument isolation valves with integral block 316 stainless steel stop pin design is vibration tested to
and bleed functions offer advantages over congurations with multiple valves and ttings:
cost savings from fewer components required minimal space needed for installation and operation reduced potential for leakage.
MIL-STD 167-1, Sections 5.1.3.3.1, 5.1.3.3.2, and 5.1.3.3.3.

Metal-to-metal body-to-bonnet seal eliminates the need for
O-ring or elastomer seals.

PTFE (standard) and Grafoil (optional) stem packing are
externally adjustable in the open position.
Packing nut permits stem packing adjustment. PTFE stem packing seals system uid to atmosphere. Rolled stem threads enhance cycle life. Safety back seating seals in the fully open position, providing a secondary stem seal.
Bleed Valve
Stainless steel handle features a divot point set screw to resist loosening due to vibration.
Hardened stainless steel, nonrotating ball stem tip provides consistent shutoff.
Packing bolt permits stem packing adjustment.

Rolled stem threads enhance cycle life. PTFE packing is below stem threads to isolate threads from system uid.
Safety back seating seals in the fully open position, providing a secondary stem seal.
Block Valve
Technical Data
Orifice Size Bleed valves0.125 in. (3.2 mm) Block valves0.156 in. (4.0 mm) Block and bleed valves 2.75 to 3.00 lb (1.25 to 1.36 kg) Double block and bleed valves 3.10 to 3.35 lb (1.41 to 1.52 kg)
Ratings based on optional Grafoil stem packing. Ratings limited to 450F (232C) with standard PTFE packing.
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (204) 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
(232) (260) (260) (315) (343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482) (510) (537) (565) (593) (621) (648)
2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4470 (307) 4280 (294) 4130 (284) 3980 (274) 3870 (266) 3760 (259) 3700 3600 3520 3460 3380 3280 3220 3030 3000 2685 2285 1715
(254) (248) (242) (238) (232) (225) (221) (208) (206) (184) (157) (118)
Weight
Testing
Every Swagelok instrument isolation valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed with a liquid leak detector to a requirement of no detectable leakage.

Every Swagelok instrument isolation valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok standard cleaning and packaging specication (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Instrument Isolation Valves
Materials for pressure-containing wetted parts are in compliance with ASME B31.1.
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification
Block and Bleed Valves

Block Valve Instrument Side
1 2
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Handles Set screws Packing bolts Packing nuts Upper glands Jam nuts Packings Lower glands Bonnets
316 SS/A479
Process Side
3 6 7 12 9 9 10a 10a 10b 11 7

Bleed Valve
Block Valve 316 SS/A276 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A240 or A167 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based
1 4 5 8 12 2
10a Stems 10b Ball tips 11 12 Bodies Stop pins Lubricants
10b
Bleed Valve
Block valve handles are blue enamel coated.
Double Block and Bleed Valves

Instrument Side Block Valve
Block Valve
1 2
Block Valve Process Side
3 6 7 12 9
Bleed Valve
10a
Bleed Valve
10b 7 5 8 9 10a 10b
12
11

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Select an ordering number. To order an instrument isolation valve with optional Grafoil packing, insert -G into the ordering number. Example: SS-V2NBM8-F8-G-11486
Block and Bleed Valves

Inlet End Connection Ordering Number Front
(50.8)
Side
4.00
(102)
2.00
1/2 in. male NPT SS-V2NBM8-F8-11486 3/4 in. male NPT SS-V2NBM12-F8-11486
(92.5)
Block Valve
3.64
Top
open 6.22 1.56 open

(158)
Male NPT inlet
(19.8)
0.78
(39.6)
(44.4)
1.75
1/2 in. female NPT outlet
1/4 in. female NPT bleed port 1.25
Bleed Valve
(31.8)
Double Block and Bleed Valves

Inlet End Connection Ordering Number Front
Block Valve
Side
4.00
(102)
1/2 in. male NPT SS-V3NBM8-F8-11421 3/4 in. male NPT SS-V3NBM12-F8-11421 Top
Bleed Valve
Block Valve Male NPT inlet
4.33
(110)
(31.8)
1.25
(50.8)
2.00
(44.4)
1.75
(19.8)
0.78
(39.6)
1.56
1/4 in. female NPT bleed port
3.64 (92.5) open 6.22 (158) open
1/2 in. female NPT outlet
Packing adjustments may be required during the

service life of the valve.
Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time

may have a higher initial actuation torque.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2006, R1 MS-02-317
www.swagelok.com
Instr ume nt Manifolds
V, V B, a nd V L S e r i e s
2-, 3-, and 5-valve instrument manifolds All 316 stainless steel construction with PTFE packing Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures up to 1200F (648C) with Grafoil valve packing
Instrument ManifoldsV, VB, and VL Series
Contents
Page Manifold Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . Pressure-Temperature Ratings. . . 2-Valve Manifolds. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction V Series VL Series
Manifold Features
2 3 3 3 3 3 4 Swagelok offers a variety of 2-, 3-, and 5-valve instrument manifolds. The 2-valve manifolds are designed for static pressure and liquid level applications; the 3- and 5-valve manifolds are designed for differential pressure applications. The V, VB, and VL series manifolds feature a horizontal body design. Manifold connections include 1/2 in. and 12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting, 1/2 in. female pipe (NPT and ISO 228/1), and flange (MSS SP-99).
Flange Connections
Flange design meets the
requirements of MSS SP-99.

Standard flange seal is a
fluorocarbon FKM O-ring.

Flange seals and flange bolts
3-Valve Manifolds. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction V Series
are included with manifold.
Safety Stop Pin

316 stainless steel pin
5-Valve Manifolds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction V Series VB Series
prevents detachment of the bonnet from the body due to vibration.

Design is vibration tested
Bonnet-to-Body Seal
Metal-to-metal seal
eliminates the need for O-ring seals.
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
High-Temperature Packing Flange Seal Materials Flange Fasteners Mounting Hole Center Line Hydrostatic Testing
to MIL-STD 167-1, Sections 5.1.2.4.2 through 5.1.2.4.6.
Mounting Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Mounting Bracket Kit Steam-Trace Block Kits
Maintenance Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Flange Seal and Bolt Kits
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Eccentric Flanges Concentric and Eccentric
Body Design
One-piece construction
Mounting Options
2 1/8 in. (54 mm) port
provides strength.
Pipe Nipples
DP Transmitter Calibration
center lines for direct instrument mounting with flange connections.

Remote mounting
Fittings
Gauge Adapters Positionable Gauge Adapters
All 316 stainless steel construction. Designed with 4:1 design factor.
with female Swagelok tube fitting and NPT connections.
Internal Finish
Burr-free threads and internal
surfaces reduce leaks, promoting accurate transmitter readings.
Packing adjustments may be required during the service life of the valve. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
Valve Features
The flow through a Swagelok manifold is controlled by a series of stainless steel needle valves. Each valve has a specific functionto block pressure, to bleed off pressure, or to equalize pressuredepending on its location on the manifold. The control of all these functions is shared by two needle valve designsa large-bonnet needle valve for manifold orifices of 0.156 in. (4.0 mm) and a small-bonnet needle valve for manifold orifices of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm). On both designs, the stem packing is externally adjustable in the open position. PTFE is the standard packing material; optional Grafoil packing is available for high-temperature applications.
LargeBonnet Valve
SmallBonnet Valve
Packing nut permits stem packing adjustment. PTFE stem packing seals the system fluid to atmosphere. Rolled stem threads enhance cycle life. Safety back seating seals in the fully open position, providing a secondary stem seal.
Stainless steel handle features a divot point set screw to resist loosening due to vibration. Hardened stainless steel, nonrotating ball stem tip provides consistent shutoff.
Packing bolt permits stem packing adjustment. Rolled stem threads enhance cycle life. PTFE packing is below stem threads to isolate threads from system fluid. Safety back seating seals in the fully open position, providing a secondary stem seal.
Technical Data
Orifice Size (block valve) 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) for all 2-valve V series 0.156 in. (4.0 mm) for all others 2-valve: 2.0 to 3.5 lb (0.9 to 1.6 kg) Weight 3-valve: 3.2 to 6.4 lb (1.5 to 2.9 kg) 5-valve: 6.0 to 8.0 lb (2.7 to 3.6 kg)
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (204) 450 (232) 500 (260) 550 (260) 600 (315) 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
(343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482) (510) (537) (565) (593) (621) (648)
2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4470 (307) 4280 (294) 4130 (284) 3980 (274) 3870 (266) 3760 (259) 3700 3600 3520 3460 3380 3280 3220 3030 3000 2685 2285 1715
(254) (248) (242) (238) (232) (225) (221) (208) (206) (184) (157) (118)
Testing
Every Swagelok instrument manifold is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed with a liquid leak detector to a requirement of no detectable leakage.

Every Swagelok instrument manifold is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Ratings based on optional Grafoil packing. Ratings limited to:

20 to 450F (28 to 232C) with standard fluorocarbon FKM flange seals. 450F (232C) with standard PTFE packing. 1000F (537C) with Grafoil packing and MSS flange end connection.
2-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Process side Instrument side
VL Series
Process side
Instrument side
Block valve Bleed valve
Block valve
Allows for block and bleed (or calibration) of static pressure
Block valve
Designed for liquid level applications Consists of two block valves operating in parallel to shut
transmitter or gauge
Consists of one block valve and one bleed valve End connections1/2 in. and 12 mm female Swagelok tube
off either one of the two process lines through the manifold
No equalizer passage through the manifold End connections1/2 in. female pipe (NPT) to flange Horizontal body style Direct instrument mount
fitting; 1/2 in. female pipe (NPT); flange (MSS)

Horizontal body style Direct instrument mount and remote mount
V Series
1 Materials of Construction
2 3 4 5 6 7 10
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Handle Set screw Packing nut Upper gland Packing Lower gland Bonnet
316 SS/A479
PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A240 or A167 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM B8M CL.2B/A193 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based
8a Stem 8b Ball tip 9 10 Body Stop pin Flange seals (not shown) Flange bolts (not shown) Lubricants
8a
8b
2-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Direct Instrument Mount Manifolds with Flange Connections
Side Top
Bleed valve 1.25
(31.8)
Process side
Instrument side
Front
Block valve B
G open E 1.63
(41.4)
(2) mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia
2.19
(55.6)
A open
Process connection
Bleed connection
Instrument connection
Manifolds with Female Swagelok Tube Fitting and Pipe Connections
Process side
Instrument side
Top
F 1.88
(47.8)
Side
Bleed valve C Process connection Block valve 1.25
(31.8)
Front
Process side Instrument side Instrument connection
G open D B
0.58
(14.7)
Bleed connection
A open
0.62
(15.7)
End Connections Process Instrument 1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting Flange (MSS) 1/4 in. female NPT Bleed
Ordering Number SS-V2BFS8 SS-V2BFS8-FL SS-V2BFS12MM SS-V2BFS12MM-FL SS-V2BF8

(106)
B 1.89
(48.0)
C 0.44
(11.2)
D 2.48
(63.0)
E 1.31
(33.3)
F 2.75
(69.9)
G 3.02
(76.7)
3.33
(84.6)
1.31
(33.3)
0.90
(22.9)
1.63
(41.4)
1.25
(31.8)
3.46
(87.9)
3.46
(87.9)
12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting 12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting Flange (MSS) 1/2 in. female NPT 1/2 in. female NPT Flange (MSS) 1/4 in. female NPT 1/4 in. female NPT
4.19
(106)
1.89
(48.0)
0.44
(11.2)
2.48
(63.0)
1.31
(33.3)
2.75
(69.9)
3.02
(76.7)
3.33
(84.6)
1.31
(33.3)
0.90
(22.9)
1.63
(41.4)
1.25
(31.8)
3.46
(87.9)
3.46
(87.9)
3.82
(97.0)
1.62
(41.1)
0.31
(7.9)
2.12
(53.8)
1.31
(33.3)
2.50
(63.5)
3.02
(76.7)
SS-V2BF8-FL
3.33
(84.6)
1.31
(33.3)
0.90
(22.9)
1.63
(41.4)
1.25
(31.8)
3.48
(88.4)
3.46
(87.9)
2-Valve Manifolds
VL Series
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM B8M CL.2B/A193 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 Handle Set screw Packing bolt Jam nut Packing Bonnet
8 7b 7a 9
6 5 4 3 1

Process side
Instrument side
Top
1.25
(31.8)
Block valve
Side
2.125
(54.0)
Front
(2) process connections Process side 1.25 Instrument side
1.69
(42.9)
1.63
(41.4)
3.38
(85.9)
(31.8)
8.91 (226) open 0.90

(22.9)
0.63
(16.0)
3.48
(88.4)
(2) instrument connections
End Connections
Block valve 2.19
(55.6)
Process 1/2 in. female NPT
Instrument Flange (MSS)
Ordering Number SS-VL2NBF8-FL
3-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Equalizer valve
Block valve Block valve
Designed for mounting on differential pressure transmitters
with 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) center-to-center connections

Consists of two block valves and one equalizer valve End connections1/2 in. and 12 mm female Swagelok tube
fitting, 1/2 in. female pipe (NPT), and flange (MSS)

V Series
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM B8M CL.2B/A193 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based
1 2 3 4 5
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 Handle Set screw Packing bolt Jam nut Packing Bonnet
7a
7b 8
3-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Top Side
1.60 (2) mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia 2.00
(50.8)
Process side
Instrument side
Equalizer valve
Front
(42.9)
Process side G open D Block valve Block valve 0.59

(15.0)
Instrument side
1.63 H
(41.4)
2.125
(54.0)
(2) process connections
A open Manifold with female Swagelok tube fitting-to-flange connections shown. K
F (2) instrument connections
SS-V3NBF8: 1.75 (44.4).
End Connections Process Instrument
Ordering Number SS-V3NBF8 SS-V3NBF8-FL SS-V3NBFS8 SS-V3NBFS8-FL SS-V3NBFS12MM SS-V3NBFS12MM-FL SS-V3NBFL

(229)
C 0.31 (7.9) 0.90

(22.9)
1/2 in. female NPT 1/2 in. female NPT Flange (MSS)
D 3.50
(88.9)
E 1.31
(33.3)
F 2.50
(63.5)
G 4.08
(104)
H 0.66
(16.8)
K 1.88
(47.8)
1.25
(31.8)
3.48
(88.4)
4.51
(115)
0.63
(16.0)
2.19
(55.6)
1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting Flange (MSS)
0.46
(11.7)
1.31
(33.3)
3.04
(77.2)
4.08
(104)
0.66
(16.8)
1.88
(47.8)
0.90 8.91
(226) (22.9)
1.25 3.38
(85.9) (31.8)
3.48
(88.4)
4.51
(115)
0.63
(16.0)
2.19
(55.6)
12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting 12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting Flange (MSS)
0.46
(11.7)
1.31
(33.3)
3.04
(77.2)
4.08
(104)
0.66
(16.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.25 0.90
(22.9) (31.8)
3.48
(88.4)
4.51
(115)
0.63
(16.0)
2.19
(55.6)
Flange (MSS)
2.40
(61.0)
4.07
(103)
4.55
(116)
1.20
(30.5)
5-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Equalizer valves
VB Series
Equalizer valve
Process side
Instrument side
Bleed valve
Bleed valve Block valve
Bleed valve Block valve
Block valve
Block valve
where a double-equalize function is required

Consists of two block valves, two equalizer valves, and one
where a double-bleed function is required.

Consists of two block valves, two bleed valves, and one
bleed valve
End connections1/2 in. and 12 mm female Swagelok tube
equalizer valve
End connections1/2 in. and 12 mm female Swagelok tube
fittings, 1/2 in. female pipe (NPT), and flange (MSS)

fittings, 1/2 in. female pipe (NPT), and flange (MSS)

V Series
Component
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Handle Set screw Packing bolt Packing nut Upper gland Jam nut Lower gland Packing Bonnet 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A240 or A167 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM B8M CL.2B/A193 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS/A479
4 5 7 9 8 12
10a
10b
3 1
12 8
10a
10b
11
10
5-Valve Manifolds
V Series
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Direct Instrument Mount Manifolds with Flange Connections
Top Side
Bleed valve Equalizer valve 1.13
(28.7)
Process side
Instrument side
Front
Equalizer valve Block valve Process side G open E H 1.25
(31.8)
Block valve (1) bleed connection
Instrument side
3.38
(85.9)
2.00
(50.8)
1.63
(41.4)
2.125
(54.0)
(2) process connections
F (2) instrument connections
8.91 (226) open
Manifolds with Female Swagelok Tube Fitting and Pipe Connections

Top Side
(2) mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia Bleed valve Equalizer valve Block valve Bleed connection 3.38
(85.9)
Front
Equalizer valve Block valve 0.59 G E H
(15.0)
Process side
1.25
(31.8)
Instrument side
2.00
(50.8)
2.125 C 1.13
(28.7) (54.0)
(2) process
connections
8.91 (226) open (2) instrument connections
End Connections Process Instrument Bleed
Ordering Number SS-V5NBFS8 SS-V5NBFS8-FL SS-V5NBFS12MM
Dimensions, in. (mm) C 1.28

(32.5)
1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting Flange (MSS)
E 1.31
(33.3)
F 3.55
(90.2)
G 3.65
(92.7)
H 0.63
(16.0)
2.88
(73.2)
1.49
(37.8)
4.43
(114)
3.64
(92.5)
0.75
(19.1)
12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting 12 mm female Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. female NPT Flange (MSS)
1.28
(32.5)
1.31
(33.3)
3.55
(90.2)
3.65
(92.7)
0.63
(16.0)
SS-V5NBFS12MM-FL SS-V5NBF8 SS-V5NBF8-FL 1/8 in. female NPT SS-V5NBFL
2.88
(73.2)
1.49
(37.8)
4.43
(114)
3.64
(92.5)
0.75
(19.1)
1/2 in. female NPT 1/2 in. female NPT Flange (MSS)
1.42 (36.0) 2.88

(73.2)
1.31
(33.3)
3.62
(91.9)
3.07
(78.0)
0.63
(16.0)
1.49
(37.8)
4.47
(114)
0.75 3.66
(93.0) (19.1)
Flange (MSS)
2.98 (75.7)
1.50
(38.1)
5.00
(127)
11
5-Valve Manifolds
VB Series
Materials for pressurecontaining wetted parts are in compliance with ASME-B31.1.
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Handle Set screw Packing bolt Packing nut Upper gland Jam nut Lower gland Packing Bonnet
316 SS/A479
316 SS/A276 316 SS/A240 or A167 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM B8M CL.2B/A193 Fluorinated base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide Hydrocarbon-based
1 4 5 7 9 8 12
10a
2 1
10b 11
12
10a
10b

Top Side
Equalizer valve
Front
K C Bleed valve Block valve 1.69
(42.9)
Bleed valve Block valve (2) process connections
Process side 0.59 G open (15.0) E H
1.25
(31.8)
Instrument side Bleed connection
3.38
(85.9)
2.00
(50.8)
1.63
(41.4)
2.125 (2) mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia

(54.0)
8.91 (226) open
End Connections Process

Manifold with female Swagelok tube fitting-to-flange connections shown.
Instrument
Bleed
Ordering Number SS-VB5NBF8
Dimensions, in. (mm) C 1.21

(30.7)
1/2 in. female NPT 1/2 in. female NPT Flange (MSS) 1/8 in. female NPT
E 1.31
(33.3)
F 3.62
(91.9)
G 4.08
(104)
H 0.61
(15.5)
K 1.88
(47.8)
SS-VB5NBF8-FL SS-VB5NBFS8 SS-VB5NBFS8-FL
0.94
(23.9)
1.49
(37.8)
4.47
(114)
4.76
(121)
0.71
(18.0)
1.35
(34.3)
1/2 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. female Flange Swagelok tube fitting (MSS)
1.22
(31.0)
1.31
(33.3)
3.55
(90.2)
4.08
(104)
0.61
(15.5)
1.88
(47.8)
0.94
(23.9)
1.49
(37.8)
4.43
(113)
4.71
(120)
0.75
(19.1)
1.35
(34.3)
12
Options
High-Temperature Packing
Grafoil valve packing material for high-temperature service.
MSS Flange Fasteners

Optional long studs or short bolts are available for special
See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page 3.

Includes Grafoil flange seals on MSS flanges.
flange mounting applications. See table below for flange fastener length comparison.
All fasteners are stainless steel with 7/16-20 threads. Optional fasteners are available for all V, VB, and VL series
To order a manifold with optional Grafoil packing, add -G to the manifold ordering number. Example: SS-V3NBF8-FL-G
manifolds with MSS flanges. To order a manifold with optional flange fasteners, add a fastener designator to the manifold ordering number.
MSS Flange Fasteners Standard hex head bolt Long stud with hex nut Short hex head bolt Length in. (mm) 1.0 (25.4) 2.6 (66.0) 0.875 (22.2) Hex Size in. 5/8 11/16 5/8 Fastener Designator -LGB -SHB
Flange Seal Materials

MSS flange seals are available in Grafoil, virgin PTFE, and
reinforced PTFE for system compatibility.

Temperature ratings are included in the table below.
To order a manifold with an optional MSS flange seal material, add a material designator to the manifold ordering number. Example: SS-V3NBF8-FL-T
MSS Flange Seal Material Material Designator Fluorocarbon FKM Grafoil Virgin PTFE Reinforced PTFE -G -T -TRL Lubricant/ Sealant Silicone base Fluorinated base Silicone base Temperature Rating F (C) 20 to 450
(28 to 232)
Packing Material PTFE Grafoil PTFE PTFE
Example: SS-V3NBF8-FL-LGB
Mounting Hole Center Line

Elongated mounting holes on the instrument flange allow
65 to 1000
(53 to 537)
65 to 250
(53 to 121)
for center line installations between 2 1/8 and 2 1/4 in. (54.0 and 57.2 mm).
Available on 3- and 5-valve V and VB series manifolds with
MSS flanges.
Pressure rating is 3600 psig at 100F (248 bar at 37C) and
2480 psig at 450F (170 bar at 232C).
Mounting Kits
Mounting Bracket Kit
Kit contains stainless steel bracket, U-bolts, cap screws, nuts, lock washers, spacer, and instructions. Kit does not fit 3-valve manifolds with flangeto-flange end connections. Ordering number: SS-MB-VBK
To order, add -EH to the manifold ordering number. Example: SS-V5NBF8-FL-EH
Hydrostatic Testing
Hydrostatic testing is available as an option. To order, add -W20 to the manifold ordering number. Example: SS-V2BF8-W20
Maintenance Kits
Steam-Trace Block Kits
Kit contains plated steel trace block with two 1/4 in. female NPT ports, cap screws, nuts, lock washers, block retainer plate, heat transfer gasket, and instructions.
Kit Ordering Number S-MB-M3SK S-MB-M5SK Flange Seal Material Fluorocarbon FKM Grafoil Virgin PTFE Reinforced PTFE Kit Ordering Number 2-Valve SS-MK-V2V SS-MK-V2G SS-MK-V2T SS-MK-V2R 3- and 5-Valve SS-MK-V3V SS-MK-V3G SS-MK-V3T SS-MK-V3R
Flange Seal and Bolt Kits

Kit contains flange seals,
flange bolts, lubricant, and instructions.

Select a kit ordering number
from the tables below based on the manifold series, flange style, and seal material.
Manifold Styles 3-valve, flange 3-valve, pipe-to-pipe 3-valve, tube-to-tube 5-valve, all styles
V, VB, and VL Series with MSS Flanges
13
Accessories
Eccentric Flanges
Used with flange-to-flange manifolds to allow the
connection of process flange taps or process root valves.

Offered with Swagelok tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe
butt weld connections.

Provide an offset connection of 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) from the
bolt hole center line.
Eccentric View
Swagelok Tube Fitting
Female NPT
Pipe Butt Weld
Dimensions
1.22
(31.0)
Kit includes two (2) flanges, two (2) flange seals, four (4) 7/16-20 hex bolts,
lubricant, and instructions.

Flange seal material is fluorocarbon FKM with a temperature rating of
20 to 450F (28 to 232C).
1.31
(33.3)
0.063 2.45
(62.2) (1.6)
eccentricity
Eccentric Flange Seal Kits

A 1.03
(26.2)
Material Grade/ASTM Specification CF8M SS/ ASTM A351 CF3M SS/ ASTM A351
End Connection Size 1/4 in. 1/2 in. Type Female NPT Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT
Kit Ordering Number SS-MKV-V3F4 SS-MKV-V3S8 SS-MKV-V3F8
Bolt Material
End Connection Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Pipe butt weld
A, in. (mm) 2.25 (57.2) 1.03 (26.2) 1.55 (39.4)
316 SS
1/2 in. Pipe butt weld SS-MKV-V3W8P
Optional Eccentric Flange Seal Materials To order an eccentric flange seal kit with an optional seal material, replace MKV in the kit ordering number with a seal designator.
Flange Seal Material Virgin PTFE Reinforced PTFE Grafoil Seal Designator -MKT -MKR -MKG Temperature Rating F (C) 65 to 250 (53 to 121) 65 to 1000 (53 to 537)
Example: SS-MKT-V3F4
14
Accessories
Concentric and Eccentric Pipe Nipples
Used with eccentric flanges to adapt Concentric Pipe Nipples Eccentric Pipe Nipples
to different flange tap spacings.

Provide an offset of 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)
from center line.

Offered with 1/2 in. male NPT end
connections.
Available in 316 stainless steel and
carbon steel.
Order pipe nipples as individual
3.00
(76.2)
0.38
(9.6)
0.45
(11.4)
0.33 3.00
(76.2) (8.4)
dia
dia
dia
components.
See ordering number in the
Pipe Nipple Selection table below.

7/8 hex 0.063
(1.6)
eccentricity
15/16 hex
Pipe Nipple Selection

Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316 SS/A276 Concentric Carbon steel/A108 316 SS/A276 Eccentric Carbon steel/A108 S-ELNM8 6 000 (413) S-CLNM8 SS-ELNM8 8 000 (551) 7 500 (516) Ordering Number SS-CLNM8 Pressure Rating at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 10 000 (689) Temperature Rating F (C) 65 to 1200
(53 to 648)
Type
Pressure Rating at Maximum Temperature 2850 psig at 1200F

(196 bar at 648C)
20 to 350
(28 to 176)
6970 psig at 350F

(480 bar at 176C)
65 to 1200
(53 to 648)
2140 psig at 1200F

(147 bar at 648C)
20 to 350
(28 to 176)
5230 psig at 350F

(360 bar at 176C)
Optional Center Line Distances

A variety of center line distances
can be obtained by using various combinations of eccentric flanges and pipe nipples.
The illustrations at the right show
Two Female NPT Eccentric Flanges with Two Concentric Pipe Nipples
Two Female NPT Eccentric Flanges with One Concentric Pipe Nipple and One Eccentric Pipe Nipple
Two Female NPT Eccentric Flanges with Two Eccentric Pipe Nipples
these combinations using female NPT eccentric flanges.

2.125
(54.0)
2.125
(54.0)
2.125
(54.0)
typ
typ
typ
2.00 to 2.25
(50.8 to 57.2)
1.94 to 2.31
(49.3 to 58.7)
1.88 to 2.38
(47.7 to 60.4)
center line distance
15
Accessories
DP Transmitter Calibration Fittings
Speed transmitter calibration by reducing the number of
Gauge Adapters
Adapt female BSP/ISO parallel thread
steps in the traditional calibration.

Allow rapid access to the cell for calibrationonly the bleed
to male NPT threads.

Are offered in 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in.
port tap requires removal to access transmitter ports.

Prevent possible galling of transmitter NPT body threads
male NPT sizes.

Are available in 316 stainless steel
straight threads on the calibration tube fitting screw directly into plug/bleed port fittings.
Choice of fitting with 5/16-24 in. thread and 1/4 in. tubing or
material. For more information, see the Swagelok Pipe Fittings catalog, MS-01-147.
1/4-28 in. thread and 1/4 in. tubing, depending on the bleed port size of the transmitter plug.
Are available in 316 stainless steel material.
Positionable Gauge Adapters

Allow 360 orientation of
pressure gauges.
Are offered with 1/2 in. male
Ordering number for fitting with 5/16-24 thread: SS-400-1-0253
NPT inlet connection.

Are available with 1/2 in. NPT
and ISO parallel gauge connections.

Are all 316 stainless steel material.
Ordering number for fitting with 1/4-28 thread: SS-400-1-0257
For more information, see the Swagelok Pressure Gauges, Industrial and ProcessPGI Series catalog, MS-02-170.
Dimensions
Calibration Fitting with 5/16-24 in. Thread
9/16 nut hex 30 0.06 (1.5) min opening
Additional Manifold Products

For direct-mount manifolds, see the Swagelok DirectMount Manifolds VE Series catalog, MS-02-308. For remote-mount manifolds, see the Swagelok RemoteMount Manifold Two Valve catalog, MS-02-330.
Direct-Mount Manifold
Remote-Mount Manifold
0.40
(10.2)
0.60
(15.2)
0.41
(10.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.25 (6.4) dia
2.32
(58.9)
Calibration Fitting with 1/4-28 in. Thread

9/16 nut hex 30 0.06 (1.5) min opening
For bellows-sealed 3-valve manifolds, Bellows-Sealed see the Swagelok 3-Valve Manifold Bellows-Sealed 3-Valve Manifolds V3 Series catalog, MS-02-07. The manifolds use B or U series bellows-sealed valves for systems with difficult fluid containment requirements.
0.43
(10.9)
0.60
(15.2)
0.78
(19.8)
0.20 (5.1) dia
1.69
(42.9)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2007, R4 MS-01-178
www.swagelok.com
Instr ume ntation Blowdown Valves

6DB Series
Features
316 stainless steel materials Union-bonnet construction for safety Grafoil packing for high-
Testing
Every 6DB series valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
temperature performance
Swagelok tube fitting, female NPT,
and tube or pipe socket weld end connections

Orifice of 0.250 in. (6.4 mm); flow

Every 6DB series valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
coefficient (Cv) of 0.86

Designed to be used in the fully open
or fully closed position
Component 1 Handle Handle pin Set screw 2 Packing bolt 3 Jam nut 4 Packings 5 Union nut 6 Bonnet 7 Stem Ball stem tip 8 Body Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Anodized aluminum 2024T/B211 Nickel-cadmium plated steel/A108 Nickel-cadmium plated steel 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 Grafoil 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 with chrome plating/B177 316 SS/A479 Fluorinated-based with PTFE and tungsten disulfide; ball tiphydrocarbonbased
1 2
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
(37) (93) (121) (148) (176) (204) (232) (260) (315) (343) (371) (398) (426) (454) (482) (510) (537) (565) (593) (621) (648)
2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 5160 4910 4660 4470 4280 4130 3980 3760 3700 3600 3520 3460 3380 3280 3220 3030 3000 2685 2285 1715
(413) (355) (338) (321) (307) (294) (284) (274) (259) (254) (248) (242) (238) (232) (225) (221) (208) (206) (184) (157) (118)
3 4 5
Lubricant
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Maximum ratings for steam applications: 700F (371C) at 3000 psig (206 bar).

2.50
(63.5)
3.70
(94.0)
Socket weld end connection
B A
0.50
(12.7)
End Connections Type Female NPT Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. 10 mm 12 mm Tube socket weld Pipe socket weld 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in.
Ordering Number SS-6DBF4 SS-6DBF6 SS-6DBS6 SS-6DBS8 SS-6DBS10MM SS-6DBS12MM SS-6DBSW6T SS-6DBSW8T SS-6DBSW4P
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.25 (57.2) 2.83 (71.9) 3.04 (77.2) 2.85 (72.4) 3.04 (77.2) 2.25 (57.2) B 1.12 (28.4) 1.41 (35.8) 1.52 (38.6) 1.42 (36.1) 1.52 (38.6) 0.31 (7.9) 1.12 (28.4) 0.38 (9.7) J
Packing adjustment may be required during the valves service life. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 2000, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI January 2007, R3 MS-02-118
www.swagelok.com
I n t e g ral-Bonnet N e e d le Valves
O, 1, 18 , 20, and 26 Series

Live-loaded packing system Compact design Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures up to 600F (315C)
Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves
Features
Stem Designs
Veeall series Soft-seatall series RegulatingO, 1, and 18 series
Live-Loaded Packing System

Packing nut enables easy external adjustments -piece chevron packing with disc springs improves seal reduces friction wear compensates for wear reduces operating torque
Orifice Sizes
From 0.080 to 0.375 in.
(.0 to 9.5 mm)
Flow Coefficients (Cv)

From 0.09 to 1.80
Flow Patterns
Straight, angle, and cross patterns
Fully supported packing reduces need for adjustment
Panel Mounting
O, 1, and 18 series
O, 1, and 18 Series Round handle shown; bar handle available Vee stem shown; regulating stem and soft-seat stem with PCTFE tip available
20K Series Knob handle
20V and 26 Series Bar handle shown; round handle available Vee stem shown; softseat stem with PCTFE tip available
Soft-seat stem with PCTFE tip
Ratings are limited to: 00F (93C) max with soft-seat stem with PCTFE stem tip. 50F (11C) max with UHMWPE packing. 450F (3C) max with PFA packing. 600F (315C) max with PEEK packing. To order a valve with soft-seat stem and PCTFE stem tip, see Ordering Information and Dimensions, page 4 and 6. To order a valve with UHMWPE or PEEK packing, see Options and Accessories, page 7.
O, 1, and 18 Series
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 0 (8) 0 (8) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (04) 450 (3) 500 (60) 600 (315) 2080 2.2 316 SS 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 495 (95) 4085 (81) 3875 (66) 3715 (55) 3560 (45) 3435 (36) 3310 (8) 3130 (15) Brass N/A N/A Steel Working Pressure, psig (bar) 3000 (06) 3000 (06) 3000 (06) 350 (161) 730 (188) 00 (151) 695 (185) 050 (141) 660 (183) 1470 (101) 615 (180) 390 (6) 1500 3.4 Alloy 400 3000 (06) 3000 (06) 640 (181) 555 (176) 470 (170) 430 (167) 390 (164) 380 (163) 375 (163)
20 and 26 Series
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 450 500 600
(04) (3) (60) (315)
2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (31) 4470 (307) 480 4130 3980 3760
(94) (84) (74) (59)
Valve Body Materials
1a
Component 1a Bar handle Series 18 O and 1
Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316 SS Brass Steel/A108 Nickel cadmium-plated steel Phenolic with brass insert Nickel cadmium-plated steel Anodized aluminum 7129/B221 Nickel cadmiumplated steel 16 SS/A276 S17400/A564 16 SS/A276 Brass 60/ B16 12L14/ A108 Alloy 400/ B164 Steel Alloy 400 Anodized aluminum 2024/B221 or A209
1b
Handle pin Set screw 1b Round handle Set screw
1c
1c Knob handle 20K Set screw 1d Bar handle Handle pin, set screw
1d
20V and 26 All O, 1, and 20 All All All All O, 1, and 18 All All O, 1, and 18 O, 1, and 18 20 and 26 All
2 9a 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11a 9b 9c
2 3 4 5
Packing nut Gland Packing springs Packing gland
04 SS/A240, A167 S17700/A69 16 SS/A240, A276, B78 PFA/D3307 316 SS/A240 Alloy 400/ B127 Alloy 400/ B164
6 Upper packing 7 Lower packing 8 Lower gland 9a Regulating stem 9b Vee stem 9c Soft-seat stem Stem tip 10 Panel nut
Chrome-plated 316 SS/A276
316 SS/A276
PCTFE/D1430 16 SS Brass 60/ B16 Brass 377/ B283 16 SS Cadmiumplated 11L17/ A108 Alloy 400/ B564
11a Body
316 SS/A182
11b
11b Body Lubricant
316 SS/A479
Tungsten disulfide- and fluorocarbon-based
Wetted components listed in italics. Valve series listed with standard handles. For handle options, see Handles, page 8. 1 series valves with orifice of 0.172 in. (4.4 mm). O, 20 and 1 series with orifice of 0.172 (4.4 mm)2 springs; 18, 26, and 1 series with orifice of 0.250 (6.4 mm) springs. Regulating and vee stem tip and threads; soft-seat stem threads.
Testing
Every integral-bonnet needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All integral-bonnet needle valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-6, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G9 Level C are available as an option.

O and 1 Series
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem
Orifice 0.250 in.
(6. mm)

O, 1, and 18 Series
Regulating Stem
F
Orifice 0.250 in.

(6. mm)
Straight pattern
H open G panel hole D E A D B1 Panel mount thickness 1/8 to 1/
(3.2 to 6.)
0.172 in.
(. mm)
0.172 in.
(. mm)
0.080 in.
(2.0 mm)
0.080 in.
(2.0 mm)
18 Series
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem Regulating Stem
Angle pattern
B1
B2
H open G panel hole
Orifice 0.375 in.

(9.5 mm)
F E Orifice 0.375 in.

(9.5 mm)
Panel mount thickness 1/8 to 1/

(3.2 to 6.)
Stainless Steel Valves with Regulating Stems

Alloy 400, Brass, and Steel Valves with Regulating Stems

Replace SS in the ordering number with a material designator. Example: M-ORS2
Material Alloy 00 Brass Steel
Designator M B S
20 and 26 Series
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem Vee Stem Soft-Seat Stem
Vee and Soft-Seat Stems

Orifice 0.250 in.
(6. mm)
Replace R in the ordering number with V for a vee stem or K for a soft-seat stem with PCTFE stem tip. Examples: SS-OVS2 SS-OKS2
Orifice 0.125 in.
(3.2 mm)
Angle-Pattern Valves
Add -A to the ordering number.
0.080 in.
(2.0 mm)
Example: SS-ORS2-A
Cross-Pattern Valves
Certain 1 series valves are available with cross-pattern bodies, which provide continuous flow between the side ports and on-off or regulating flow through the bottom port. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 0.73 1/ in. 1/ in. 3/4 in. 3 mm 6 mm 0.37 Metric Swagelok tube fittings 8 mm 10 mm 0.73 1 mm 1 mm 18 mm 1/8 in. 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. 1/8 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT 0.37 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. 1/8 in. Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. 1/4/ 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8/ 1/ in. Male/ female NPT 1/4 in. 1/ in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/ in. 0.73 1.80 0.73 1.80 0.73 0.73 1.80 0.09 0.37 1.80 0.09 0.37 0.73 1.80 0.09 1.80 0.09 Cv 0.09 0.37
Orifice in. (mm) 0.080

(.0)
Ordering Number SS-ORS SS-1RS4 SS-1RS6 SS-1RS8 SS-18RS8 SS-18RS1 SS-ORS3MM SS-1RS6MM SS-1RS8MM SS-1RS10MM SS-1RS1MM SS-18RS1MM SS-18RS18MM SS-ORF SS-1RF SS-1RF4 SS-18RF6 SS-18RF8 SS-ORM SS-1RM SS-1RM4 SS-1RM6 SS-18RM8 SS-ORM-S SS-1RM4-S4 SS-1RM4-S6

(49.3)
B1
B2
0.98 (4.9) 1.13 (8.7) 1.9 (3.8) 1.40 (35.6) 1.90 (48.3) 0.98 (4.9) 1.13 (8.7) 1.17 (9.7) 1.30 (33.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.90 (48.3) 0.94 (3.9) 0.81 (0.6) 1.06 (6.9) 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.81 (0.6) 0.98 (4.9) 1.1 (8.4) 1.50 (38.1) 0.98
(4.9)
C 1.9
(3.8)
D 0.44
(11.)
E 0.31
(7.9)
F 1.00
(5.4)
G 0.47
(11.9)
H .8
(57.9)
0.17
(4.4)
.7
(57.6)
1.51
(38.4)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.53
(13.5)
.50
(63.5)
.58
(65.5)
1.79
(45.5)
0.50
(6.4)
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
.80
(71.1)
1.90
(48.3)
0.375
(9.5)
3.80
(96.5)
.65
(67.3)
0.75 (19.1) 0.31

(7.9)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.91
(99.3)
0.080
(.0)
1.94
(49.3)
1.9
(3.8)
1.00
(5.4)
0.48
(1.)
.8
(57.9)
.7
(57.6)
1.51
(38.4)
0.44
(11.)
0.17
(4.4)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.53
(13.5)
.50
(63.5)
.34
(59.4)
1.54
(39.1)
.60
(66.0)
1.80
(45.7)
0.50
(6.4)
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
.80
(71.1)
1.90
(48.3)
0.375
(9.5)
3.80
(96.5)
.65
(67.3)
0.75 (19.1) 0.31 0.44

(11.) (7.9)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.91
(99.3)
0.080
(.0)
1.88
(47.8)
1.5
(31.8)
1.00
(5.4)
0.47
(11.9)
.8
(57.9)
0.17
(4.4)
1.6
(41.1)
1.19
(30.)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.53
(13.5)
.50
(63.5)
Female NPT
0.50
(6.4)
.1
(53.8)
1.56
(39.6)
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
0.375
(9.5)
3.00
(76.)
.5
(57.)
0.75 (19.1) 0.31

(7.9)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.88
(98.6)
0.080
(.0)
1.50
(38.1)
1.06
(6.9)
1.00
(5.4)
0.47
(11.9)
.8
(57.9)
1.6
(41.1)
1.19
(30.)
0.44
(11.)
0.17
(4.4)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.53
(13.5)
.50
(63.5)
1.97
(50.0)
1.36
(34.5)
0.50
(6.4)
.5
(6.5)
1.6
(41.1)
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
0.375
(9.5)
3.00
(76.)
.5
(57.)
0.75 (19.1) 0.31 0.44

(11.) (7.9)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.88
(98.6)
0.080
(.0)
1.73
(43.9)
0.75
(19.1)
1.9
(3.8)
1.00
(5.4)
0.47
(11.9)
.8
(57.9)
0.17
(4.4)
1.95
(49.5)
1.13
(8.7)
0.98
(4.9)
1.51
(38.4)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.53
(13.5)
.50
(63.5)
.4
(61.5)
1.9
(3.8)
1.79 1.1
(8.4) (45.5)
0.50
(6.4)
SS-1RM6-S6 SS-1RM6-S8
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
.5
(64.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.90
(48.3)
0.50
(6.4)
SS-1RM4-F4 SS-18RM8-F8 SS-1RF4RT SS-18RF6RT SS-18RF8RT
.19
(55.6)
1.06
(6.9)
1.1
(8.4)
1.56
(39.6)
0.55
(14.0)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
0.375
(9.5)
3.00
(76.)
1.50 (38.1) 1.06 (6.9) 1.50 (38.1)
.5
(57.)
0.75 (19.1) 0.55

(14.0)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.88
(98.6)
0.50
(6.4)
.1
(53.8)
1.56
(39.6)
0.50
(1.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.78
(19.8)
.97
(75.4)
Female ISO
0.375
(9.5)
3.00
(76.)
.5
(57.)
0.75 (19.1)
3.00
(76.)
1.03
(6.)
3.88
(98.6)
Dimensions determined using valves with regulating stems and standard handles. Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 106-1, DIN-999, JIS B003.

20 and 26 Series
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Select an ordering number. For soft-seat stems and PCTFE stem-tips in valves that are standard with vee stems, replace V with K. Example: SS-0KS4
H open H open
Straight pattern
F
Angle pattern
F
Angle-pattern bodies are available for valves with C dimensions listed. To order, add -A to the ordering number. Example: SS-0KM4-F4-A
A B1
E B3
B
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female NPT Male NPT Male/ female NPT Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 0.09 Cv
Orifice in. (mm)
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B1 B2 B3 C E F H
20 series with soft-seat stem and PCTFE stem tip 1.88 0.94 SS-0KF4 (47.8) (3.9) 0.080 1.94 0.97 SS-0KM4
(.0) (49.3) (4.6)
1.44
(36.6)
0.4
(10.7)
1.1
(8.4)
1.66
(4.)
SS-0KM4-F4
1.91
(48.5)
0.94
(3.9)
1.00
(5.4)
1.03
(6.)
1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in.
0.1
0.15
(3.)
20 and 26 series with vee stem 1.3 1.13 .46 SS-0VS4

(6.5) (31.)
1.16
(9.5)
1.57
(39.9)
0.4
(10.7)
1.75
(44.4)
1.66
(4.)
(8.7)
0.73 1/ in. 1/4 in. 0.1 0.73
0.50
(6.4)
SS-6VS6 SS-6VS8 SS-0VF4 SS-6VF6 SS-6VF8 SS-0VM4
3.08
(78.)
1.54
(39.1)
3.30
(83.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.44
(36.6)
0.66
(16.8)
.50
(63.5)
.31
(58.7)
0.15
(3.)
1.88
(47.8)
0.94
(3.9)
1.00 (5.4) 1.41 (35.8) 1.13

(8.7)
0.4
(10.7)
1.75
(44.4)
1.66
(4.)
Female NPT Male NPT Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fittings
3/8 in. 1/ in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 0.1
0.50
(6.4)
.50
(63.5)
1.5
(31.8)
.06
(5.3)
0.66
(16.8)
.50
(63.5)
.31
(58.7)
1.94
(49.3)
0.97
(4.6)
1.00
(5.4)
1.57
(39.9)
0.4
(10.7)
1.75
(44.4)
0.15
(3.)
SS-0VM4-S4 SS-0VM4-F4 SS-6VM6-F6
1.91
(48.5)
0.94
(3.9)
0.4
(10.7)
1.66
(4.)
1.00
(5.4)
1.03
(6.)
1.44
(36.6)
1.75
(44.4)
Male/ female NPT
3/8 in. 1/ in. 3/4 to 1/ in. 0.73 0.50

(6.4)
.50
(63.5)
1.5
(31.8)
1.41
(35.8)
1.
(31.0)
0.6
(5.3)
SS-6VM8-F8 SS-6VM1-F8
.55
(64.8)
1.5
(31.8)
1.41 (35.8)
0.66
(16.8)
.50
(63.5)
.31
(58.7)
.50
(63.5)
1.5
(31.8)
0.4
(10.7)
Female ISO
1/4 in. 1/ in.
0.1 0.73
0.15
(3.)
SS-0VF4RT SS-6VF8RT
1.88
(47.8)
0.94
(3.9)
1.75
(44.4)
1.66
(4.)
0.50
(6.4)
.50
(63.5)
1.5
(31.8)
0.66
(16.8)
.50
(63.5)
.31
(58.7)
Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 106-1, DIN-999, JIS B003.

Stem Packing Materials
Two-piece chevron-style PFA packing is standard. For an optional stem packing, add -P for UHMWPE or -PK for PEEK to the ordering number. See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page , for ratings of valves with optional stem packings. See the table at right for lubricants used with optional stem packing materials. Examples: SS-ORS-P SS-0KF4-PK
Valve Series O 1 18 0 6
Orifice in. (mm) All 0.17 (4.4) 0.50 (6.4) All All All
Stem Packing Material, Kit Ordering Number PFA PFA-91K-O PFA-91K-14 PFA-91K-16 PFA-91K-18 PFA-91K-0 PFA-91K-16 Tungsten disulfide and fluorocarbon based UHMWPE PE-91K-O PE-91K-14 PE-91K-16 PE-91K-18 PE-91K-0 PE-91K-16 Molybdenum disulfide and hydrocarbon based PEEK PK-91K-O PK-91K-14 PK-91K-16 PK-91K-18 PK-91K-0 PK-91K-16 Molybdenum disulfide, tungsten disulfide, and fluorocarbon based
Stem Packing Kits

PFA, UHMWPE, and PEEK packing kits are available. Kits contain stem packings, springs, lubricant, and instructions.
Lubricant
O-Ring Stem Seals

Gland Backup ring O-ring
O-ring Material Buna C Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Kalrez Silicone 0 to 50 (8 to 11) Temperature Rating F (C) 65 to 50 (53 to 11) O-ring Designator -BC -B -E -V -KZ 0 to 50 (8 to 11) -SI Kit Designator BC70 BN70 EP70 VA70 KZ70 SI70 Kit Basic Ordering Number -9K-O (O and 0 series) -9K-14 (1 series, 0.17 in. orifice) -9K-16 (1 series, 0.50 in. orifice) -9K-18 (18 series)
0 to 450 (8 to 3)
O-ring stem seals include:

316 SS/ASTM A76 gland for
316 SS, steel, and alloy 400 valves, or brass 360 gland for brass valves
PTFE/ASTM D1710 backup ring
Valves with O-Ring Stem Seals

Add an O-ring designator to the ordering number. Examples: SS-ORS-BC SS-0KF4-B
O-Ring Maintenance Kits

Maintenance kits contain O-ring, backup ring, lubricant, and instructions. To order, add a kit designator to a kit basic ordering number. Example: BC70-9K-O
and silicone-based lubricant for all O-rings except ethylene propylene, which requires a polyethylene/ ASTM D400 backup ring, and molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon-based lubricant
O-ring.
Handles
O and 1 series valvesblack phenolic round handles are 0K series valvesanodized black aluminum knob handles
standard; colored phenolic, 316 SS bar, and anodized black aluminum bar handles are optional.
18 series valvesanodized black aluminum bar handles
are standard; phenolic round, 316 SS bar, and anodized black aluminum bar handles are optional.
0V and 6 series valves316 SS bar handles are standard;
are standard; phenolic round and 316 SS bar handles are optional.
phenolic round and anodized black aluminum bar handles are optional.
Valves with Optional Handles

Add a handle designator to the ordering number.
Designator Designator (O and 1 (18, 20, and Kit Color Series) 26 Series) Designator -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW -SH -BKB -BKP -BLP -GRP -OGP -RDP -YWP -SH -BKB -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW
Handle Kits
Handle kits contain handle and instructions. Select a handle kit ordering number. For colored phenolic handles, replace BK in the ordering number with a kit color designator.
Handle Kit Ordering Numbers Valve Series O 1 18 0 6 Orifice in. (mm) All Black Phenolic PH-5K-OK-BK Black Aluminum Bar A-5K-14B-BK A-5K-6NB-BK A-5K-18B-BK A-5K-6NB-BK 316 SS Bar SS-5K-14B SS-5K-6NB SS-5K-7B SS-5K-14B SS-5K-6NB
Handle Black phenolic Blue phenolic Green phenolic Orange phenolic Red phenolic Yellow phenolic 316 SS bar Anodized black aluminum bar
0.17 (4.4) PH-5K-14K-BK 0.50 (6.4) PH-5K-4K-BK All All All PH-5K-7K-BK PH-5K-4K-BK
PH-5K-14K-BK A-5K-14B-BK
Examples: SS-ORS-BL SS-0KF4-SH
Example: PH-5K-OK-BL To order an anodized black aluminum knob handle kit for the 0K series valve, use ordering number A-5S-20K-BK.
Sour Gas Service

Integral-bonnet needle valves with female NPT, female ISO, and male NPT end connections are available for sour gas service. Stem and lower gland are alloy 400 or alloy R-405. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ ISO 15156. See the NACE specification for information on stainless tube fitting reqirements. To order, add -SG to the ordering number. Example: SS-ORF-SG


To order integral-bonnet needle valves cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-ORS-SC11

valves service life.

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 001, 00, 003, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI March 008, R7 MS-01-164
www.swagelok.com
Inte grated Te st Valve Asse mbly with Universal Mount

For Steam Traps
T VA Se r ie s
Offers fast visual monitoring of steam trap performance Includes universal mount for steam trap Service rating: 250 psig (17.2 bar) at 417F (213C) 316 and 316L stainless steel materials Universal mount without test valves available separately Service rating: 600 psig (41.3 bar) at 750F (400C)
Integrated Test Valve Assembly with Universal Mount Isolation valve with oval handle provides quick, quarter-turn shut off Universal mount allows quick, easy installation of a steam trap component
Test valve allows visual monitoring of steam trap performance with quarter-turn operation
Flow direction arrow
Optional locking handle can lock valve open or closed

accommodates shackle
diameters smaller than 0.344 in. (8.7 mm)
Strainer cap provides access to strainer element. Optional strainer cap with integral Swagelok tube adapter is available. See Ordering Information, Strainer Cap, for tube adapter sizes.
Test valve vent shown facing down. See Ordering Information for other vent locations.
Optional Swagelok tube adapter strainer cap allows direct mounting of a blowdown valve to the assembly. Shown is a Swagelok 1 series needle valve.
Features
Integrated Test Valve Assembly with Universal Mount
Assembly consists of two stainless steel 63 series ball
Isolation and Test Ball Valves

Valve end connection options include Swagelok tube
valves and a universal mount; two mounting bolts to mount steam trap are included. Steam trap is not included.
Compact design reduces space requirements; flange of
fittings (1/2 and 3/4 in., and 12 mm), female NPT (1/2 in.) and female ISO 7/1 (1/2 in.)
Oval handle types include locking, nonlocking, and latch-
locking.
Locking handles enable compliance with OSHA
universal mount bolts directly to the ball valve body.

Choice of left or right flow direction with a flow direction
arrow on the universal mount.
Lockout/Tagout, Standard 29 CFR Part 1910.147 Control Of Hazardous Energy.

Choice of test valve vent locations includes facing towards
Universal Mount
Two-bolt, universal design offers quick, easy installation of
the steam trap, facing away from steam trap, and facing down.
See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and
a steam trap.
Cast body material is CF3M and includes an integral
20-mesh (840 m) strainer.

Optional strainer cap with integral Swagelok tube adapter
Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for stainless steel 63 series valve technical data, including materials of construction and other options.
allows direct mounting of blowdown valve.

See page 5 for more information on the universal mount,
including materials of construction.
Integrated Test Valve Assembly

Technical Data
Pressure rating: 600 psig (41.3 bar) at 70F (20C) Temperature rating: 450F (232C) at 100 psig (6.8 bar) Service rating: 250 psig (17.2 bar) at 417F (213C) Valve seat and seal options can affect service ratings.

All Swagelok integrated test valve assemblies are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Accessories
To order the universal mount component separately, see page 6.
Testing
Every Swagelok integrated test valve assembly is factory tested with nitrogen at 600 psig (41.3 bar). Valve seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Maintenance Kits
For the valves, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General
Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146.

For the universal mount component, see page 6.
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only, and are subject to change.
End Connection Type Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Female ISO 7/1 Size 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 12 mm 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 0.49
(12.4)
A in. (mm) 1.16

(29.5)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts fingertight, where applicable. See specifications ISO 7, BS 21, and JIS B0203.
3.94
(100)
2.95
(74.9)
Latch-lock handles
Lock (shown) and no-lock handles
0.25
(6.4)
2.16
(54.9)
7.07
(180)
2.83
(71.9)
Integrated Test Valve Assembly

To create an ordering number, select designators in the sequence shown.
SS - TV L 1 - T - S8 - H1 - SX
Material 316 stainless steel Series Test valve assembly Flow Direction (See below.) L = Left R = Right Strainer Cap 1 = standard, no fitting 2 = 3/8 in. tube adapter fitting 3 = 1/2 in. tube adapter fitting Packing/Seat Material Reinforced PTFE Test Valve Vent Location SX = Toward trap XP = Away from trap XB = Downward Oval Handles Isolation Valve / Test Valve H1 = Locking / locking H2 = Locking / nonlocking H3 = Latch-lock / latch-lock H4 = Latch-lock / nonlocking H5 = Nonlocking / nonlocking End Connection Size and Style (Same inlet and outlet) S8 = 1/2 in. Swagelok tube fitting S12 = 3/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting S12MM = 12 mm Swagelok tube fitting F8 = 1/2 in. female NPT F8RT = 1/2 in. female ISO 7/1 To specify different inlet and outlet end connections, insert a designator for the inlet connection followed by a designator for the outlet connection. Example: SS-TVL1-T-S8F8-H1-SX
Flow Direction: Right (Outlet on the right) Flow Direction: Left (Outlet on the left)
Flow Direction Options
See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for additional stainless steel 63 series valve end connection options.
Universal Mount
Features
Two-bolt universal mount offers quick, easy installation
Flow direction arrow

Front
of a steam trap
Swagelok tube fitting end connections for tubing
systems (1/2 and 3/4 in., and 12 mm)

Female pipe thread end connections for piping
systems (1/2 and 3/4 in. NPT and ISO tapered)

Integral 20-mesh (840 m) strainer Carbon steel mounting bolts (3/8-16 threads) included Choice of left or right flow direction options
CF3M body with integral strainer
Back
Flow Direction: Right (Outlet on the right)
Flow Direction: Left (Outlet on the left)
Two-bolt, flush pattern universal mount
Technical Data
Maximum pressure rating: 600 psig (41.3 bar) Maximum temperature rating: 750F (400C) Service rating: 600 psig (41.3 bar) at 750F (400C)
Component 1 Body 3 Strainer gasket 4 Strainer cap 5 Bolts Lubricants Material Grade/ ASTM Specification CF3M/A351 Silver-plated 316 SS/A240 316 SS A479 Grade B7 carbon steel/A193 Fluorinated-based and molybdenum disulfide-based
2 Strainer element 316 SS/A240 with silver solder
1 2 5 3
Optional integral Swagelok tube adapter strainer cap
Testing
Every Swagelok universal mount is factory shell tested with nitrogen at 600 psig (41.3 bar) using a liquid leak detector with a requirement of no detectable leakage.

All Swagelok universal mounts are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Universal Mount
End Connection Type Size 1/2 in. Swagelok tube fitting 3/4 in. 12 mm 1/2 in. Female NPT 3/4 in. 1/2 in. Female ISO 7/1 3/4 in. Flow Direction Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Ordering Number SS-MB-UM-S8-R SS-MB-UM-S8-L SS-MB-UM-S12-R SS-MB-UM-S12-L SS-MB-UM-S12MM-R SS-MB-UM-S12MM-L SS-MB-UM-F8-R SS-MB-UM-F8-L SS-MB-UM-F12-R SS-MB-UM-F12-L SS-MB-UM-F8RT-R SS-MB-UM-F8RT-L SS-MB-UM-F12RT-R SS-MB-UM-F12RT-L
3.58
(90.9)
1.88 4.36
(111) (47.8)
0.94
(23.9)
3.48
(88.4)
2.16
(54.9)
2.00 (50.8) bolt circle
Swagelok Tube Fitting Ends

Female Pipe (NPT and ISO) Ends
Options
Integral Swagelok Tube Adapter Strainer Cap
To order a universal mount with factory-assembled integral Swagelok tube adapter strainer cap, add a strainer cap designator to the ordering number.
Tube Stainer Cap Adapter Size Designator 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 2 3 Kit Ordering Number SS-UM-TA6 SS-UM-TA8
Maintenance Kits
Bolt and Strainer Kit
Kit includes two mounting bolts, a strainer, a strainer gasket, and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-3K-UM-4F
Strainer Gasket Kit

Kit includes a strainer gasket and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-UM-K3
Example: SS-MB-UM-S8-R2 Strainer cap kits for field assembly are available. The kits contain an integral tube adapter strainer cap, strainer gasket, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number from the table above.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2004, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI November 2006, R1 MS-02-221
w w w.swagelok.com
Who Should At tend

Welders with orbital welding experience who wish to
upgrade their skills or obtain ASMe qualification

Welders without orbital welding experience who would
Inte nsi ve, ha nds- o n training for Ma x imum Re sults
like to learn the technique

Supervisors of orbital welding operations engineers who design systems that include orbital
welding
Quality assurance and quality control personnel
Swagelok, Micro-Fit Swagelok Company 2001, 2003, 2007, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in u.S.A., GlI october 2008, R3 MS-02-139
CouRSe oveRvIeW
the four-day course consists of a series of lectures and hands-on activities to develop an understanding of orbital welding principles. upon completion of the program, a theoretical and a practical exam will be administered. A certificate of completion will be granted when both exams have been successfully completed. An optional day is offered at the end of the fourday course for participants who wish to test for ASMe Section IX qualification. this can be used to fulfill QA/QC requirements for the participants company. upon completion of the course, students will each receive a reference workbook, users manual, and signed certificate of completion.
CouRSe objeCtIveS
Four-day Course
this course will instruct the entry-level orbital welder and enhance the welding skill knowledge for the experienced orbital welder in the following areas:
basic welding background information basic metallurgy for orbital welding tungsten electrodes Shielding and backing purge gases and
trusted training From A Respected Source

Industry has relied on Swagelok for advanced solutions in fluid handling components for more than 60 years. Swagelok welding systems were added to the companys ever-expanding product line in 1987. today, with the global presence of Swagelok, our support and training complement the premium quality of our products that meet the needs of manufacturers in numerous industries. this training program reflects our commitment to provide the highest quality fluid system components and services. because of the complexity of the skills required to consistently achieve acceptable orbital welds, it is critical that welders obtain up-to-date and accurate training. the Swagelok approach to learning the theories and skills of GtAW orbital welding includes comprehensive classroom instruction and valuable hands-on training. our four-day course provides:
An understanding of welding principles Instructions for setup and operation of the orbital
procedures
Setup and operation of orbital welding
equipment
Preventive maintenance troubleshooting Industry weld specifications orbital weld evaluation A variety of weld procedures through hands-on
orbital welding experience on applications from Micro-Fit fittings to 4 in. diameter tubing
welding system
troubleshooting for frequently encountered welding
problems
An emphasis on operational issues through hands-on
exam Requirements
Participants must receive a minimum grade of 80 % to pass the theoretical exam. to pass the practical exam, participants must demonstrate the ability to prepare and weld a tubing system according to a specific drawing without the aid of a facilitator or peer.
experience
Instructor Qualifications
All program instructors have earned the qualifications of Certified Weld Inspector (CWI) and Certified Weld educator (CWe) and have a minimum of five years experience in orbital welding instruction.
www.swagelok.com
ISO 5211- Compliant Actuators for Swage lok Ball Valve s
40 G, 40, 6 0, a nd 83 Se r ie s; a nd AFS Ball Valve s

Pneumatic rack and pinion actuators Actuators meet industry standards for interface: ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 Available factory assembled or in kits for field assembly
ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves
Contents
IS0 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Service Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40G Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 3 3 60 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Valves . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Bracket Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5 5 6 7 8

Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are suitable for general applications . They are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes on straight and anglepattern valves . Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assemblies including valves, actuators, sensors, bracket kits, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 . Valve-actuator assemblies listed in this catalog are based on:
Panel nut Solenoid
Position indicator
Actuator
Wall mounting bracket
Hex nuts
Lock washers Mounting bracket Grounding springs Cap screws
[10 to 37C])
Coupling
calculated operating torque . For information on valve operating torque calculation, see the Swagelok Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide, ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-02-136 .
Set screw
Coupling
Stem nut Lock tab
Valve Valve
40G, 40, 83, H83 Series AFS Ball Valves
60 Series 4-Bolt Cast Stainless Steel
Actuator Service Ratings

Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8 .0 bar) .
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176 (20 to 80) 5 to 302 (15 to 150) 40 to 176 (40 to 80) Ordering Designator -HT -LT
Actuator Materials of Construction

Component Housing End cap Plug O-rings Drive shaft Spring cartridge Cap screws Position indicator Material Aluminum Cast aluminum Buna N Buna Nstandard Fluorocarbon FKM (FPM)high temperature Siliconelow temperature Alloy C-22 SiCr spring alloy steel 304 SS Glass-reinforced polypropylene
Certifications
Factory-assembled Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant actuators can be ATEX certified on request at the time of order quotation . ATEX certification is not available for field assemblies .
Additional materials may be available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
40G and 40 Series Valves

For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok One-Piece Instrumention Ball Valves40G Series catalog, MS-02-331, and the Swagelok Instrument Ball Valves40 Series catalog, MS-01-60 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order a 40G series or 40 series ball valve factory assembled with actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalogs listed above . Example: SS-43GS4-A15C3 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-3-DIN and SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M
For field assembly to ISO 5211-compliant actuators, 40 series ball valves must contain a two-flat, K-style stem. To order a 40 series valve with a K-style stem and no handle, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43S4-K-NH
40G Series
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Actuator Spring Double Normally Normally Double Model Return Acting Closed Open Acting A15 A15 A15 A15 36 (2 .5) 43 (3 .0) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) -A15C3 -A15C3 -A15O3 -A15O3 Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN
Valve Series 41G, 42G 43G 41G, 42G 43G
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M
2-Way Valves -A15D MS-A15-3-DIN -A15D MS-A15-3-DIN 3-Way Valves -A15XD -A15XD
42G series valves with VCO or VCR end connections mounted to an actuator are only available factory assembled .
40 Series
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Actuator Spring Double Normally Normally Double Model Return Acting Closed Open Acting 2-Way Valves 41 42 43 PTFE, UHMWPE, PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) A15 A15 A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A30 A60 A60 36 (2 .5) 43 36 36 50 50 43 65 50 43
(3 .0) (2 .5) (2 .5) (3 .5) (3 .5) (3 .0) (4 .5) (3 .5) (3 .0)
Valve Series
Seat Material
Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number
36 (2 .5)
-A15C3
-A15O3
-A15D
MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN
SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M
36 (2 .5)
-A15C3 -A15C4 -A30C4 -A30C3 -A30C4 -A60C4 -A60C3
-A15O3 -A15O4 -A30O4 -A30O3 -A30O4 -A60O4 -A60O3
-A15D -A15D -A15D -A15D -A30D -A30D -A30D
MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-3-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-3-DIN
SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-44-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-44-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-44-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
44
36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5)
45
3-Way Valves 41 42 43 44 A15 A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A30 36 (2 .5) 36 50 43 36 50 50
(2 .5) (3 .5) (3 .0) (2 .5) (3 .5) (3 .5)
-A15XD
MS-A15-XDA-DIN SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M
-A15XD
45
-A30XD
42 series valves with VCO or VCR end connections mounted to an actuator are only available factory assembled .
60 Series Valves
For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are:
for standard 4-bolt cast stainless steel valve bodies with
reinforced PTFE seats and packing

based on a 20 to 100F (28 to 37C) system temperature
and the valve cycling at least once per day but not more than once per hour . For other valve body and seat materials or if your application falls outside of this scope, contact your Swagelok sales and service representative . For more information on actuated ball valves and torque, see the Swagelok Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide, ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-02-136 .
To order a 60 series ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146 . Example: SS-62TS4-A15C4 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-4-DIN and SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Spring Double Normally Normally Double Return Acting Closed Open Acting 2-Way Valves 62 63 65 67 68 A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A220 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A220 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 72 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .2) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 72 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .2) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 43 (3 .0) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 58 (4 .0) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) 43 (3 .0) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 58 (4 .0) -A15S4 -A30S4 -A60S5 -A100S5 -A150S4 -A150S5 -A220S4 -A15C4 -A30C4 -A60C5 -A100C5 -A150C4 -A150C5 -A220C4 -A15O4 -A30O4 -A60O5 -A15D -A30D -A60D MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN
Valve Series
Actuator Model
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M
-A100O5 -A100D -A150O4 -A100D -A150O5 -A100D -A220O4 -A100D -A15XD -A30XD -A60XD -A100XD -A100XD
MS-A100-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A220-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A30-XDA-DIN MS-A60-XDA-DIN
3-Way Valves 62 63 65 67 68 62 63 65 67 68
MS-A100-XDA-DIN SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M MS-A100-XDA-DIN SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M
3-Way Valves with L Flow Pattern -A15D -A30D -A60D -A100D -A100D -A100D -A100D
MS-A100-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A220-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN
83 Series Valves
For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Trunnion Ball Valves83 Series catalog, MS-01-166 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order an 83 series ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalog listed above . Example: SS-83KF4-A15C3 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-DA-DIN and SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Valve Series 83, H83 83, H83 Actuator Model A15 A15 Spring Return 43 (3 .0) Double Acting 36 (2 .5) 36 (2 .5) Actuator Designators Spring Return Normally Normally Closed Open -A15C3 -A15O3 Double Acting -A15D -A15XD Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN
Swagelok 83 series valve with actuator .
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M
2-Way Valves 3-Way Valves
Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Ball Valves

For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Ball Valves for High-Pressure, High-Flow Applications catalog, MS-02-303 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order an AFS ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalog listed above . Example: SS-AFSS6-A30C4 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A30-4-DIN and SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Double Return Acting 55 (3 .8) 40 (2 .8) Actuator Designators Spring Return Normally Normally Closed Open -A30C4 -A30O4 Double Acting -A30D Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN
Swagelok AFS ball valve with actuator .
Valve Series AFS
Actuator Model A30
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change . See appropriate product catalog for valve dimensions .
Valve-Actuator Assembly
E D 1 .57 F G G F E
(40 .0)
L A 2 mounting holes 0 .34 (8 .6) dia

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
J K
A220 model: 2 .56 (65 .0) . 60 series valves: 0 .53 (13 .5) .
40, 40G, 83, H83 Series, AFS Ball Valves Side
J K
60 Series Side
Valve Series 41G, 41 42G, 42 43G, 43 44 45 62 63 65 67
Actuator Model A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A60 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A150 A100 A150 A220 A15 A30
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .12 3 .56 3 .88 4 .20 4 .54 3 .73 4 .12 5 .80 6 .06 6 .55 6 .79 6 .70 6 .93 7 .14 3 .43 4 .27
(79 .2) (90 .4) (98 .6) (107) (115) (94 .7) (105) (147) (154) (166) (172) (170) (176) (181) (87 .1) (108)
B 2 .00 (50 .8) 2 .00 (50 .8) 2 .00 (50 .8) 2 .19 (55 .6) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114)
C 2 .15 (54 .5) 2 .15 2 .15 2 .46 2 .46 2 .80 2 .15 2 .46 2 .80 3 .05 3 .05 3 .29 3 .05 3 .29 4 .02 2 .15 2 .46
(54 .5) (54 .5) (62 .5) (62 .5) (71 .1) (54 .5) (62 .5) (71 .1) (77 .5) (77 .5) (83 .5) (77 .5) (83 .5) (102) (54 .5) (62 .5)
D 5 .51 (140) 5 .51 5 .51 6 .22 6 .22 8 .27 5 .51 6 .22 8 .27 9 .76 9 .76 10 .6 9 .76 10 .6 12 .4 5 .51 6 .22
(140) (140) (158) (158) (210) (140) (158) (210) (248) (248) (268) (248) (268) (315) (140) (158)
E 2 .78 (70 .5) 2 .78 2 .78 3 .27 3 .27 3 .72 2 .78 3 .27 3 .72 4 .17 4 .17 4 .84 4 .17 4 .84 5 .55 2 .78 3 .27
(70 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (83 .0) (94 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (94 .5) (106) (106) (123) (106) (123) (141) (70 .5) (83 .0)
F 2 .32 (59 .0) 2 .32 2 .32 2 .83 2 .83 3 .33 2 .32 2 .83 3 .33 3 .84 3 .84 4 .37 3 .84 4 .37 5 .00 2 .32 2 .83
(59 .0) (59 .0) (72 .0) (72 .0) (84 .5) (59 .0) (72 .0) (84 .5) (97 .5) (97 .5) (111) (97 .5) (111) (127) (59 .0) (72 .0)
G 1 .14 (29 .0) 1 .14 1 .14 1 .42 1 .42 1 .67 1 .14 1 .42 1 .67 1 .95 1 .95 2 .20 1 .95 2 .20 2 .52 1 .14 1 .42
(29 .0) (29 .0) (36 .0) (36 .0) (42 .5) (29 .0) (36 .0) (42 .5) (49 .5) (49 .5) (56 .0) (49 .5) (56 .0) (64 .0) (29 .0) (36 .0)
J 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .72 (43 .7) 1 .72 (43 .7) 2 .90 (73 .7) 2 .92 (74 .2) 3 .30 (83 .8) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .72 (43 .7)
K 3 .07 (78 .0) 3 .07 3 .07 3 .57 3 .57 3 .77 4 .61 4 .77
(78 .0) (78 .0) (90 .7) (90 .7) (95 .8) (117) (121)
L 2 .03 (51 .6) 2 .02 2 .18 2 .49 2 .59 2 .93 2 .18 2 .50 3 .62 3 .88 4 .12 4 .36 4 .12 4 .36 4 .71 2 .14 2 .59
(51 .3) (55 .4) (63 .2) (65 .8) (74 .4) (55 .4) (63 .5) (91 .9) (98 .6) (105) (111) (105) (111) (120) (54 .4) (65 .8)
2-Way Valves
5 .41 (137) 5 .98 6 .21 5 .81 6 .21 6 .61 3 .07 3 .57

(152) (158) (148) (158) (168) (78 .0) (90 .7)
68 83, H83 AFS 41G, 41 42G, 42 43G, 43 44 45 62 63 65 67 68 83, H83
4 .50 (114) 2 .00 (50 .8) 2 .19 (55 .6)
3-Way Valves A15XD A15XD A15XD A30XD A15XD A30XD A60XD A100XD A100XD A15XD 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .12 3 .56 4 .20 3 .73 4 .12 5 .80 6 .55 6 .93 3 .43
(79 .2) (90 .4) (107) (94 .7) (105) (147) (166) (176) (87 .1)
2 .00 (50 .8) 2 .00 2 .00 2 .19 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 2 .00
(50 .8) (50 .8) (55 .6) (114) (114) (114) (114) (114) (50 .8)
2 .15 (54 .5) 2 .15 2 .15 2 .46 2 .15 2 .46 2 .80 3 .05 3 .05 2 .15
(54 .5) (54 .5) (62 .5) (54 .5) (62 .5) (71 .1) (77 .5) (77 .5) (54 .5)
7 .76 (197) 7 .76 7 .76 8 .70 7 .76 8 .70 11 .7 13 .7 13 .7 7 .76

(197) (197) (221) (197) (221) (298) (348) (348) (197)
2 .78 (70 .5) 2 .78 2 .78 3 .27 2 .78 3 .27 3 .72 4 .17 4 .17 2 .78
(70 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (70 .5) (83 .0) (94 .5) (106) (106) (70 .5)
2 .32 (59 .0) 2 .32 2 .32 2 .83 2 .32 2 .83 3 .33 3 .84 3 .84 2 .32
(59 .0) (59 .0) (72 .0) (59 .0) (72 .0) (84 .5) (97 .5) (97 .5) (59 .0)
1 .14 (29 .0) 1 .14 1 .14 1 .42 1 .14 1 .42 1 .67 1 .95 1 .95 1 .14
(29 .0) (29 .0) (36 .0) (29 .0) (36 .0) (42 .5) (49 .5) (49 .5) (29 .0)
1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 1 .44 1 .72 2 .90 2 .92 3 .30 3 .58 3 .58 1 .44
(36 .6) (36 .6) (43 .7) (73 .7) (74 .2) (83 .8) (90 .9) (90 .9) (36 .6)
3 .07 (78 .0) 3 .07 3 .07 3 .57 4 .61 4 .77 5 .41 5 .98 5 .98 3 .07
(78 .0) (78 .0) (90 .7) (117) (121) (137) (152) (152) (78 .0)
2 .03 (51 .6) 2 .02 2 .18 2 .59 2 .18 2 .50 3 .62 4 .12 4 .12 2 .14
(51 .3) (55 .4) (65 .8) (55 .4) (63 .5) (91 .9) (105) (105) (54 .4)
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters) and pounds (kilograms), are for reference only and are subject to change .
Actuator Housing
Actuator Weights
2-Way Valves
1 .18
3-Way Valves
Weight lb (kg) 2 .2 (1 .0) Actuator Ordering Number MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A30-XDA-DIN MS-A60-XDA-DIN 3 .5 (1 .6) 6 .0 (2 .7) 6 .4 (2 .9) 6 .6 (3 .0) 6 .8 (3 .1) 8 .4 (3 .8) 9 .3 (4 .2) 9 .5 (4 .3) 14 .3 (6 .5) 20 .7 (9 .4) MS-A100-XDA-DIN Weight lb (kg) 4 .6 (2 .1) 7 .5 (3 .4) 13 .0 (5 .9) 18 .5 (8 .4)
(30 .0)
3 .15 (80 .0)
Top VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR) Interface
M5 8 (A15 model: M5 4)
Actuator Ordering Number MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A30-3-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN MS-A60-3-DIN MS-A60-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN
M5 8
(16 .0)
MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A100-4-DIN MS-A100-5-DIN

Port 2 Port 4
0 .63
MS-A150-5-DIN MS-A220-4-DIN
A 0 .63 0 .47 (12 .0) 0 .47 (12 .0) G1/8 (A150 and A220 models: G1/4)
(16 .0)

40G, 40, 83, H83 Series Valves; AFS Ball Valves
Kits contain:
Side VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR) Interface
D 45 45
four A4 stainless steel socket head cap screws (A4 is
approximately equivalent to AISI 316 .)

Coupling 40G seriespowdered metal 300 series stainless steel 40 and 83 series and AFS ball valves316 stainless
steel
C B square
A4 stainless steel set screw instructions .
Bottom ISO 5211 Interface ISO 5211 Flange Size F04 F05 F05 F07 F07 F07
60 Series Valves (4-Bolt Cast Stainless Steel)

Kits contain:
D M5 8 M6 9 M6 9 M8 12 M8 12 M8 12 316 stainless steel mounting bracket that meets ISO 5211 C 1 .65 (42) 1 .97 (50) 1 .97 (50) 2 .76 (70) 2 .76 (70) 2 .76 (70)
Actuator Model A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A220
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .04 (26 .5) 1 .18 (30 .0) 1 .20 (30 .5) 1 .28 (32 .5) 1 .48 (37 .5) 1 .68 (42 .5) B 0 .43 (11) 0 .55 (14) 0 .55 (14) 0 .67 (17) 0 .67 (17) 0 .67 (17)

316 stainless steel coupling 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket two 316 stainless steel lock washers 302 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs 316 stainless steel lock tab two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts lubricant and MSDS instructions .
For 60 series valves with other body materials and for 8-bolt 60 series valves, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Options
Solenoid Valves
Attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly .
Position Indicators
Provide visual status of a valve .
Limit Switches and Proximity Sensors

Indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal . They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof) . All electrical components listed above meet North American NEMA and European CE/CENELEC requirements . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for ordering information .
aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2006, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI August 2009, R2 MS-02-337
www.swagelok.com
ISO 5211- Compliant Actuators for Swage lok Ball Valve s
40 G, 40, 6 0, a nd 83 Se r ie s; a nd A FS Ball Val ve s

Pneumatic rack and pinion actuators Actuators meet industry standards for interface: ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 Available factory assembled or in kits for field assembly
Contents
IS0 511-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Service Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40G Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 60 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Series Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Valves . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Bracket Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5 5 6 7 8

Swagelok ISO 511-compliant rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are suitable for general applications . They are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes on straight and anglepattern valves . Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assemblies including valves, actuators, sensors, bracket kits, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 511, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845 . Valve-actuator assemblies listed in this catalog are based on:
Panel nut Solenoid
Position indicator
Actuator
Wall mounting bracket
Hex nuts
Lock washers Mounting bracket Grounding springs Cap screws
[10 to 37C])
Coupling
calculated operating torque . For information on valve operating torque calculation, see the Swagelok Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide, ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-0-136 .
Set screw
Coupling
Stem nut Lock tab
Valve Valve
40G, 40, 83, H83 Series AFS Ball Valves
60 Series 4-Bolt Cast Stainless Steel

Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8 .0 bar) .
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176 (0 to 80) 5 to 30 (15 to 150) 40 to 176 (40 to 80) Ordering Designator -HT -LT
Actuator Materials of Construction

Component Housing End cap Plug O-rings Drive shaft Spring cartridge Cap screws Position indicator Material Aluminum Cast aluminum Buna N Buna Nstandard Fluorocarbon FKM (FPM)high temperature Siliconelow temperature Alloy C- SiCr spring alloy steel 304 SS Glass-reinforced polypropylene
Certifications
Factory-assembled Swagelok ISO 511-compliant actuators can be ATEX certified on request at the time of order quotation . ATEX certification is not available for field assemblies .
Additional materials may be available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
40G and 40 Series Valves

For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok One-Piece Instrumention Ball Valves40G Series catalog, MS-0-331, and the Swagelok Instrument Ball Valves40 Series catalog, MS-01-60 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order a 40G series or 40 series ball valve factory assembled with actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalogs listed above . Example: SS-43GS4-A15C3 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-3-DIN and SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M
For field assembly to ISO 5211-compliant actuators, 40 series ball valves must contain a two-flat, K-style stem. To order a 40 series valve with a K-style stem and no handle, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43S4-K-NH
40G Series
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Actuator Spring Double Normally Normally Double Model Return Acting Closed Open Acting A15 A15 A15 A15 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) -A15C3 -A15C3 -A15O3 -A15O3 Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN
Valve Series 41G, 4G 43G 41G, 4G 43G
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M
2-Way Valves -A15D MS-A15-3-DIN -A15D MS-A15-3-DIN 3-Way Valves -A15XD -A15XD
4G series valves with VCO or VCR end connections mounted to an actuator are only available factory assembled .
40 Series
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Actuator Spring Double Normally Normally Double Model Return Acting Closed Open Acting 2-Way Valves 41 4 43 PTFE, UHMWPE, PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) PTFE UHMWPE PTFE (-1466) A15 A15 A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A30 A60 A60 36 ( .5) 43 36 36 50 50 43 65 50 43
(3 .0) ( .5) ( .5) (3 .5) (3 .5) (3 .0) (4 .5) (3 .5) (3 .0)
Valve Series
Seat Material
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number
36 ( .5)
-A15C3
-A15O3
-A15D
MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN
SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M
36 ( .5)
-A15C3 -A15C4 -A30C4 -A30C3 -A30C4 -A60C4 -A60C3
-A15O3 -A15O4 -A30O4 -A30O3 -A30O4 -A60O4 -A60O3
-A15D -A15D -A15D -A15D -A30D -A30D -A30D
MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-3-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-3-DIN
SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-44-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-44-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-44-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
44
36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5)
45
3-Way Valves 41 4 43 44 A15 A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A30 36 ( .5) 36 50 43 36 50 50
( .5) (3 .5) (3 .0) ( .5) (3 .5) (3 .5)
-A15XD
-A15XD
45
-A30XD
4 series valves with VCO or VCR end connections mounted to an actuator are only available factory assembled .
60 Series Valves
For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are: for standard 4-bolt cast stainless steel valve bodies with reinforced PTFE seats and packing based on a 0 to 100F (8 to 37C) system temperature and the valve cycling at least once per day but not more than once per hour . For other valve body and seat materials or if your application falls outside of this scope, contact your Swagelok sales and service representative . For more information on actuated ball valves and torque, see the Swagelok Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide, ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-0-136 .
To order a 60 series ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146 . Example: SS-6TS4-A15C4 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-4-DIN and SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M
Actuator Designators Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Return Spring Double Normally Normally Double Return Acting Closed Open Acting 2-Way Valves 6 63 65 67 68 A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A0 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A150 A0 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 7 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 50 (3 .5) 7 (5 .0) 65 (4 .5) 61 (4 .) 65 (4 .5) 50 (3 .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 58 (4 .0) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) 43 (3 .0) 43 (3 .0) 58 (4 .0) 58 (4 .0) -A15S4 -A30S4 -A60S5 -A100S5 -A150S4 -A150S5 -A0S4 -A15C4 -A30C4 -A60C5 -A100C5 -A150C4 -A150C5 -A0C4 -A15O4 -A30O4 -A60O5 -A15D -A30D -A60D MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN
Valve Series
Actuator Model
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-6-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-6-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M
-A100O5 -A100D -A150O4 -A100D -A150O5 -A100D -A0O4 -A100D -A15XD -A30XD -A60XD -A100XD -A100XD
MS-A100-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A100-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A0-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A30-XDA-DIN MS-A60-XDA-DIN
3-Way Valves 6 63 65 67 68 6 63 65 67 68
MS-A100-XDA-DIN SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M MS-A100-XDA-DIN SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN SS-MB-6-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M
3-Way Valves with L Flow Pattern -A15D -A30D -A60D -A100D -A100D -A100D -A100D
MS-A100-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A100-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A150-5-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A0-4-DIN MS-A100-DA-DIN
83 Series Valves
For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Trunnion Ball Valves83 Series catalog, MS-01-166 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order an 83 series ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalog listed above . Example: SS-83KF4-A15C3 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A15-DA-DIN and SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Double Return Acting 43 (3 .0) 36 ( .5) 36 ( .5) Actuator Designators Spring Return Normally Normally Closed Open -A15C3 -A15O3 Double Acting -A15D -A15XD Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-XDA-DIN
Swagelok 83 series valve with actuator .
Valve Series 83, H83 83, H83
Actuator Model A15 A15
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M
2-Way Valves 3-Way Valves
Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Ball Valves

For valve features, materials of construction, and technical data, see the Swagelok Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Ball Valves for High-Pressure, High-Flow Applications catalog, MS-0-303 . Valve-actuator assemblies on this page are based on: maximum valve pressure ambient temperature (50 to 100F [10 to 37C])
To order an AFS ball valve factory-assembled with an actuator and mounting bracket, add an actuator designator to a valve ordering number from the catalog listed above . Example: SS-AFSS6-A30C4 To order an actuator and mounting bracket kit for field assembly, select both an actuator ordering number and a corresponding mounting bracket kit for each valve . Example: MS-A30-4-DIN and SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Spring Double Return Acting 55 (3 .8) 40 ( .8) Actuator Designators Spring Return Normally Normally Closed Open -A30C4 -A30O4 Double Acting -A30D Actuator Ordering Numbers Spring Double Return Acting MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN
Swagelok AFS ball valve with actuator .
Valve Series AFS
Actuator Model A30
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change . See appropriate product catalog for valve dimensions .
Valve-Actuator Assembly
E D 1 .57 F G G F E
(40 .0)
L A
mounting holes 0 .34 (8 .6) dia
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
B A0 model: .56 (65 .0) .
J K
40, 40G, 83, H83 Series, AFS Ball Valves Side
J K
60 Series Side
Valve Series 41G, 41 4G, 4 43G, 43 44 45 6 63 65 67
Actuator Model A15 A15 A15 A30 A30 A60 A15 A30 A60 A100 A100 A150 A100 A150 A0 A15 A30
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .1 3 .56 3 .88 4 .0 4 .54 3 .73 4 .1 5 .80 6 .06 6 .55 6 .79 6 .70 6 .93 7 .14 3 .43 4 .7
(79 .) (90 .4) (98 .6) (107) (115) (94 .7) (105) (147) (154) (166) (17) (170) (176) (181) (87 .1) (108)
B .00 (50 .8) .00 (50 .8) .00 (50 .8) .19 (55 .6) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114) 4 .50 (114)
C .15 (54 .5) .15 .15 .46 .46 .80 .15 .46 .80 3 .05 3 .05 3 .9 3 .05 3 .9 4 .0 .15 .46
(54 .5) (54 .5) (6 .5) (6 .5) (71 .1) (54 .5) (6 .5) (71 .1) (77 .5) (77 .5) (83 .5) (77 .5) (83 .5) (10) (54 .5) (6 .5)
D 5 .51 (140) 5 .51 5 .51 6 . 6 . 8 .7 5 .51 6 . 8 .7 9 .76 9 .76 10 .6 9 .76 10 .6 1 .4 5 .51 6 .
(140) (140) (158) (158) (10) (140) (158) (10) (48) (48) (68) (48) (68) (315) (140) (158)
E .78 (70 .5) .78 .78 3 .7 3 .7 3 .7 .78 3 .7 3 .7 4 .17 4 .17 4 .84 4 .17 4 .84 5 .55 .78 3 .7
(70 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (83 .0) (94 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (94 .5) (106) (106) (13) (106) (13) (141) (70 .5) (83 .0)
F .3 (59 .0) .3 .3 .83 .83 3 .33 .3 .83 3 .33 3 .84 3 .84 4 .37 3 .84 4 .37 5 .00 .3 .83
(59 .0) (59 .0) (7 .0) (7 .0) (84 .5) (59 .0) (7 .0) (84 .5) (97 .5) (97 .5) (111) (97 .5) (111) (17) (59 .0) (7 .0)
G 1 .14 (9 .0) 1 .14 1 .14 1 .4 1 .4 1 .67 1 .14 1 .4 1 .67 1 .95 1 .95 .0 1 .95 .0 .5 1 .14 1 .4
(9 .0) (9 .0) (36 .0) (36 .0) (4 .5) (9 .0) (36 .0) (4 .5) (49 .5) (49 .5) (56 .0) (49 .5) (56 .0) (64 .0) (9 .0) (36 .0)
J 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .7 (43 .7) 1 .7 (43 .7) .90 (73 .7) .9 (74 .) 3 .30 (83 .8) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) 3 .58 (90 .9) 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .7 (43 .7)
K 3 .07 (78 .0) 3 .07 3 .07 3 .57 3 .57 3 .77 4 .61 4 .77
(78 .0) (78 .0) (90 .7) (90 .7) (95 .8) (117) (11)
L .03 (51 .6) .0 .18 .49 .59 .93 .18 .50 3 .6 3 .88 4 .1 4 .36 4 .1 4 .36 4 .71 .14 .59
(51 .3) (55 .4) (63 .) (65 .8) (74 .4) (55 .4) (63 .5) (91 .9) (98 .6) (105) (111) (105) (111) (10) (54 .4) (65 .8)
2-Way Valves
5 .41 (137) 5 .98 6 .1 5 .81 6 .1 6 .61 3 .07 3 .57

(15) (158) (148) (158) (168) (78 .0) (90 .7)
68 83, H83 AFS 41G, 41 4G, 4 43G, 43 44 45 6 63 65 67 68 83, H83
4 .50 (114) .00 (50 .8) .19 (55 .6)
3-Way Valves A15XD A15XD A15XD A30XD A15XD A30XD A60XD A100XD A100XD A15XD 3 .05 (77 .5) 3 .1 3 .56 4 .0 3 .73 4 .1 5 .80 6 .55 6 .93 3 .43
(79 .) (90 .4) (107) (94 .7) (105) (147) (166) (176) (87 .1)
.00 (50 .8) .00 .00 .19 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 4 .50 .00
(50 .8) (50 .8) (55 .6) (114) (114) (114) (114) (114) (50 .8)
.15 (54 .5) .15 .15 .46 .15 .46 .80 3 .05 3 .05 .15
(54 .5) (54 .5) (6 .5) (54 .5) (6 .5) (71 .1) (77 .5) (77 .5) (54 .5)
7 .76 (197) 7 .76 7 .76 8 .70 7 .76 8 .70 11 .7 13 .7 13 .7 7 .76

(197) (197) (1) (197) (1) (98) (348) (348) (197)
.78 (70 .5) .78 .78 3 .7 .78 3 .7 3 .7 4 .17 4 .17 .78
(70 .5) (70 .5) (83 .0) (70 .5) (83 .0) (94 .5) (106) (106) (70 .5)
.3 (59 .0) .3 .3 .83 .3 .83 3 .33 3 .84 3 .84 .3
(59 .0) (59 .0) (7 .0) (59 .0) (7 .0) (84 .5) (97 .5) (97 .5) (59 .0)
1 .14 (9 .0) 1 .14 1 .14 1 .4 1 .14 1 .4 1 .67 1 .95 1 .95 1 .14
(9 .0) (9 .0) (36 .0) (9 .0) (36 .0) (4 .5) (49 .5) (49 .5) (9 .0)
1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .44 1 .44 1 .7 .90 .9 3 .30 3 .58 3 .58 1 .44
(36 .6) (36 .6) (43 .7) (73 .7) (74 .) (83 .8) (90 .9) (90 .9) (36 .6)
3 .07 (78 .0) 3 .07 3 .07 3 .57 4 .61 4 .77 5 .41 5 .98 5 .98 3 .07
(78 .0) (78 .0) (90 .7) (117) (11) (137) (15) (15) (78 .0)
.03 (51 .6) .0 .18 .59 .18 .50 3 .6 4 .1 4 .1 .14
(51 .3) (55 .4) (65 .8) (55 .4) (63 .5) (91 .9) (105) (105) (54 .4)
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters) and pounds (kilograms), are for reference only and are subject to change .
Actuator Housing
Actuator Weights
2-Way Valves
1 .18
3-Way Valves
Weight lb (kg) . (1 .0) Actuator Ordering Number MS-A15-XDA-DIN MS-A30-XDA-DIN MS-A60-XDA-DIN 3 .5 (1 .6) 6 .0 ( .7) 6 .4 ( .9) 6 .6 (3 .0) 6 .8 (3 .1) 8 .4 (3 .8) 9 .3 (4 .) 9 .5 (4 .3) 14 .3 (6 .5) 0 .7 (9 .4) MS-A100-XDA-DIN Weight lb (kg) 4 .6 ( .1) 7 .5 (3 .4) 13 .0 (5 .9) 18 .5 (8 .4)
(30 .0)
3 .15 (80 .0)
Top VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR) Interface
M5 8 (A15 model: M5 4)
Actuator Ordering Number MS-A15-DA-DIN MS-A15-3-DIN MS-A15-4-DIN MS-A30-DA-DIN MS-A30-3-DIN MS-A30-4-DIN MS-A60-DA-DIN MS-A60-3-DIN MS-A60-4-DIN MS-A60-5-DIN
M5 8
(16 .0)
MS-A100-DA-DIN MS-A100-4-DIN MS-A100-5-DIN

Port Port 4
0 .63
MS-A150-5-DIN MS-A0-4-DIN
A 0 .63 0 .47 (1 .0) 0 .47 (1 .0) G1/8 (A150 and A0 models: G1/4)
(16 .0)

40G, 40, 83, H83 Series Valves; AFS Ball Valves
Kits contain:
Side VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR) Interface
D 45 45

Coupling 40G seriespowdered metal 300 series stainless steel 40 and 83 series and AFS ball valves316 stainless
steel
C B square
A4 stainless steel set screw instructions .
Bottom ISO 5211 Interface ISO 5211 Flange Size F04 F05 F05 F07 F07 F07
60 Series Valves (4-Bolt Cast Stainless Steel)

Kits contain:
D M5 8 M6 9 M6 9 M8 1 M8 1 M8 1 316 stainless steel mounting bracket that meets ISO 511 C 1 .65 (4) 1 .97 (50) 1 .97 (50) .76 (70) .76 (70) .76 (70)
Actuator Model A15 A30 A60 A100 A150 A0
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .04 (6 .5) 1 .18 (30 .0) 1 .0 (30 .5) 1 .8 (3 .5) 1 .48 (37 .5) 1 .68 (4 .5) B 0 .43 (11) 0 .55 (14) 0 .55 (14) 0 .67 (17) 0 .67 (17) 0 .67 (17)

316 stainless steel coupling 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket two 316 stainless steel lock washers 30 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs 316 stainless steel lock tab two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts lubricant and MSDS instructions .
For 60 series valves with other body materials and for 8-bolt 60 series valves, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
Options
Solenoid Valves
Attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly .
Position Indicators
Provide visual status of a valve .
Limit Switches and Proximity Sensors

Indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal . They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof) . All electrical components listed above meet North American NEMA and European CE/CENELEC requirements . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for ordering information .
aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI October 008, R1 MS-0-337
www.swagelok.com
Jacketed Tubing and Insulated Tubing
Fe ature s
1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm tubing sizes available in 316/316L stainless steel
and copper
Seamless and welded tubing available in stainless steel Low-temperature PVC jacket helps protect tubing from external corrosion and abrasion Fibrous glass insulation reduces heat loss and helps protect personnel
Jacketed Tubing
Swagelok jacketed tubing helps provide increased protection against galvanic and atmospheric corrosion. In addition, it helps protect the tubing against wear and abrasion.
Features
316/316L stainless steel and copper instrumentation tubing 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm tubing sizes Low-temperature, UV-resistant PVC jacket Service temperatures from 40 to 220F (40 to 104C)
Technical Data
Fractional
Pressure Rating at Min Service 20 to 100F Nominal and (28 to 37C) Tube Wall Max Process Installation psig (bar) OD Thickness Temperature Temperature in. in. F (C) F (C) Seamless Welded 1/4 3/8 1/2 5100 (351) 220 (104) 40 (40) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 3700 (254) 1400 (96.4) 220 (104) 40 (40) 900 (62.0) 800 (55.1) 1100 (75.7) 8.00
(20.3)
Support Min Centers Bend ft (m) Radius in. (cm) Horiz Vert
Weight lb/ft
(kg/m)
Jacket OD in. (mm)
Max Bulk Length ft (m) Seamless 2200 (671) 1000 (305) Welded
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213 (TP 316/316L) 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.030 0.032 0.035 0.049 4080 (281) 2640 (181) 2080 (143) 2960 (203) 8.00
(20.3)
0.12 (0.18) 0.32 (8.1) 6.00

(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
0.19 (0.28) 0.45 (11.4) 1300 (396) 0.25 (0.37) 0.31 (0.46) 0.57 (14.5)
2500 (762) 800 (244)
750 (229) 1000 (305) 2600 (792)
Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.12 (0.18) 0.32 (8.1) 6.00
(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
0.18 (0.27) 0.45 (11.4) 2000 (610) 0.26 (0.39) 0.33 (0.49) 0.57 (14.5) 1000 (305)
Metric
Pressure Rating at Min Service 28 to 37C Nominal and (10 to 100F) Tube Wall Max Process Installation bar (psig) OD Thickness Temperature Temperature mm mm C (F) C (F) Seamless Welded 6 10 12 6 10 12 1.0 104 (220) 40 (40) 420 (6095) 336 (4876) 240 (3483) 192 (2786) 200 (2902) 160 (2322) Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 1.0 1.0 94.0 (1364) 104 (220) 40 (40) 60.0 (870) 54.0 (783) 20.3
(8.00)
Support Min Centers Bend m (ft) Radius cm (in.) Horiz Vert
Weight kg/m
(lb/ft)
Jacket OD mm (in.)
Max Bulk Length m (ft) Seamless Welded
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213 (TP 316/316L) 0.18 (0.12) 20.3
(8.00)
7.9 (0.31) 610 (2000) 305 (1000) 90 (295)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
0.32 (0.22) 11.7 (0.46) 335 (1100) 0.38 (0.26) 13.7 (0.54) 275 (902) 0.18 (0.12) 7.9 (0.31) 915 (3000) 305 (1000)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
0.32 (0.22) 11.7 (0.46) 0.38 (0.26) 13.7 (0.54)
Tolerance for bulk-length tubing is 10 %. Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness. Seamless metric
sizes also meet DIN 17458 test 1 class material 1.4401/1.4404.
Not recommended for use with tube fittings in gas service.
For jacket properties information, see page 4.
Tubing Data
For additional information, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Insulated Tubing
Swagelok insulated tubing is designed for use in applications such as steam supply, condensate return, and gas and liquid transport lines, where weatherproofing and energy conservation are important. Swagelok insulated tubing helps protect personnel from hot process and steam lines, reduces heat loss, and offers a costeffective alternative to field-installed insulation of small-diameter tubing systems.
Features
316/316L stainless steel and copper instrumentation tubing 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm tubing sizes Low-temperature, UV-resistant PVC jacket Absorption-resistant fibrous glass insulation Insulation contains less than 100 ppm of water-soluble chlorides Marked with part number and batch number
Technical Data
Fractional
Pressure Rating at Nominal Min 400F (204C) Tube Wall Max Process Service psig (bar) OD Thickness Temperature Temperature in. in. F (C) F (C) Seamless Welded 1/4 3/8 1/2 4896 (337) 400 (204) 30 (34) 3168 (218) 2496 (171) 3552 (244) 700 (48.2) 400 (204) 30 (34) 450 (31.0) 400 (27.5) 550 (37.8) 8.00
(20.3)
Support Min Centers Bend ft (m) Radius in. (cm) Horiz Vert
Weight lb/ft
(kg/m)
Nominal OD in. (mm)
Max Bulk Length ft (m) Seamless Welded
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213 (TP 316/316L) 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.030 0.032 0.035 0.049 3916 (269) 2534 (174) 1996 (137) 2841 (195) 8.00
(20.3)
0.20 (0.30) 1.00 (25.4) 1100 (335) 6.00

(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
0.30 (0.45) 1.13 (28.7) 1300 (396) 0.45 (0.67) 1.25 (31.8) 1000 (305)
1250 (381) 800 (244)
750 (229) 1000 (305)
Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.26 (0.39) 1.00 (25.4) 1300 (396) 6.00
(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
0.34 (0.51) 1.13 (28.7) 0.43 (0.64) 0.50 (0.74) 1.25 (31.8) 1000 (305)
Metric
Pressure Rating at Nominal Min 204C (400F) Tube Wall Max Process Service bar (psig) OD Thickness Temperature Temperature mm mm C (F C (F) Seamless Welded 6 10 12 6 10 12 1.0 204 (400) 34 (30) 403 (5849) 322 (4673) 230 (3338) 184 (2670) 192 (2786) 153 (2220) Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 1.0 1.0 47.0 (682) 204 (400) 40 (40) 30.0 (435) 27.0 (391) 20.3
(8.00)
Support Min Centers Bend m (ft) Radius cm (in.) Horiz Vert
Weight kg/m
(lb/ft)
Nominal OD mm (in.)
Max Bulk Length m (ft) Seamless Welded
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213 (TP 316/316L) 0.40 (0.27) 24.9 (0.98) 610 (2000) 305 (1000) 20.3
(8.00)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
0.57 (0.38) 28.7 (1.13) 335 (1100) 0.63 (0.42) 30.7 (1.21) 275 (902) 0.40 (0.27) 24.9 (0.98) 455 (1490)
90 (295)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
0.55 (0.37) 28.7 (1.13) 0.64 (0.43) 30.7 (1.21)
305 (1000)
Tolerance for bulk-length tubing is 10 %. Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness. Seamless metric sizes also meet DIN 17458
test 1 class material 1.4401/1.4404.
The maximum jacket surface temperature is 140F (60C) with a process temperature of 400 F (204C)
and an ambient temperature of 80F (26C) and a 10 mph (16 km/h) of wind. 10F (23C) installation temperature. Not recommended for use with tube fittings in gas service.
Seal insulation ends to prevent contamination of the insulation.
For jacket properties information, see page 4.
Tubing Data
For additional information, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Insulated Tubing Heat Loss

The information presented represents typical performance data for low-temperature PVC and urethane jackets for the conditions given. Actual results may vary with the conditions of installation. Heat loss calculated with 25 mph (40 km/h) wind.
1/4 in. and 6 mm Tubing

Ambient Temperature, C
100 90 80 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 80 70

100 90 80 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 80 70
Heat Loss, Kcal/hm
Heat Loss, Btu/hft
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
50 40 30 20 10 0
Heat Loss, Btu/hft
70
70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
50 40 30 20 10 0
Ambient Temperature, F

50 100 90 70 80 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 80
Legend
200 psig (13.7 bar) steam 388F (197C) 125 psig (8.6 bar) steam 353F (178C) 50 psig (3.4 bar) steam 299F (148C) 15 psig (1.0 bar) steam 250F (121C) Heat Loss, Kcal/hm
Heat Loss, Btu/hft
70 60 50 40 30
60 50 40 30 20
20 10 0 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 10 0
Jacket Properties
Jacket Properties Tensile strength Elongation Hardness, Shore A Maximum temperature Minimum installation temperature Minimum service temperature Halogenated (chlorides) Water absorption Flame resistance UV resistance
10F (23C) for insulated tubing. 30F (34C) for insulated tubing.
Low-Temperature PVC 2200 psi (151 bar) 350 % 80 220F (104C) 40F (40C) 40F (40C) Yes 0.10 % 24 rating in accordance with ASTM D2863 750 h in accordance with UL-1581
Optional Urethane 3800 psi (261 bar) 700 % 80 200F (93C) 40F (40C) 60F (51C) No 1.2 to 1.4 % V2 in accordance with UL94 2000 h in accordance with QUV aging test
Heat Loss, Kcal/hm
60
60
Stainless Steel Tubing
Build a stainless steel jacketed or insulated tubing ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
SS ST 4 S 035 100
Material 316/316L stainless steel Type JT = Jacketed ST = Insulated Tube OD and Wall Seamless Fractional 4-S-035 = 1/4 6-S-035 = 3/8 8-S-035 = 1/2 Metric 6M-S-1.0M = 6 10M-S-1.0M = 10 12M-S-1.0M = 12 Thickness Welded Fractional 4-W-035 = 1/4 0.035 in. 6-W-035 = 3/8 0.035 in. 8-W-035 = 1/2 0.035 in. Metric 6M-W-1.0M = 6 1.0 mm 10M-W-1.0M = 10 1.0 mm 12M-W-1.0M = 12 1.0 mm Package Length Fractional 100 = 100 ft (30.5 m) 250 = 250 ft (76.2 m) 500 = 500 ft (152 m) xxxx = Bulk length Metric 30M = 30 m (98.4 ft) 75M = 75 m (246 ft) 150M = 150 m (492 ft) xxxx = Bulk length
Packaged length tolerance is 0 to +0.5 %. See pages 2 and 3 for the maximum bulk
length of tubing.
0.035 in. 0.035 in. 0.035 in. 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm
Copper Tubing
Build a copper jacketed or insulated tubing ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
CU JT 4 030 100
Material Copper Type JT = Jacketed ST = Insulated Tube OD and Wall Thickness Metric Fractional 6M-1.0M 4-030 = 1/4 0.030 in. 10M-1.0M 6-032 = 3/8 0.032 in. 12M-1.0M 8-035 = 1/2 0.035 in. 12M-1.5M 8-049 = 1/2 0.049 in. Package Length Fractional 100 = 100 ft (30.5 m) 250 = 250 ft (76.2 m) 500 = 500 ft (152 m) xxxx = Bulk length Metric 30M = 30 m (98.4 ft) 75M = 75 m (246 ft) 150M = 150 m (492 ft) xxxx = Bulk length
Packaged length tolerance is 0 to +0.5 %. See pages 2 and 3 for the maximum bulk
length of tubing.
= = = =
6 1.0 mm 10 1.0 mm 12 1.0 mm 12 1.5 mm
Options
Urethane Jacket (Insulated Tubing)
This optional jacket material is a nonhalogenated thermoplastic urethane that has excellent low- and high-temperature characteristics. It also offers improved resistance to abrasion, aromatic hydrocarbons, and UV light. See page 4 for jacket properties. To order, add -U to the ordering number. Example: SS-ST4-S-035-100-U
Jacket Colors (Insulated Tubing)

The standard jacket is black. For other colors, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Tubing Material and Size (Jacketed Tubing and Insulated Tubing)

Other materials and sizes are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Accessories
Bending Tool
Similar to a common electrical conduit bender, this tool is compact and easy to use and has the required 8 in. (20.3 cm) minimum bending radius. A 3/4 in. NPT threaded handle is needed. Ordering number: MS-BBT
Jacket Patch Kit

The jacket patch kit can be used to seal a splice in tubing or to repair any incidental field damage to insulation and jacket. Each kit contains thermal insulation, fiberglass tape, and a self-sealing patch. Ordering number: MS-JP-KIT
Heat-Shrink End-Seal Boots

Made of thermally stabilized, modified polyolefin, these heat-shrinkable boots provide a weatherproof end seal for all sizes of insulated tubing and protect against moisture ingress. Each kit contains 20 end-seal boots. Ordering number: MS-HSB-KIT
Caps
Protective end caps for temporarily sealing tubing ends during storage and installation. Each kit contains 20 caps.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 mm 6 10 12
Ordering Number MS-46-CAP-KIT MS-8-CAP-KIT
Silicone Sealant
This silicone RTV sealant can be used to seal ends of insulated tubing from moisture, and offers excellent resistance to weather, oil, and many chemicals. One tube will seal approximately 10 ends; each kit contains 8 tubes. Service Temperature: 60 to 400F (51 to 204C) Cure Time: approximately 24 h at 77F (25C) and 50 % relative humidity Ordering number: MS-RTV-SEAL-KIT
Weatherproof Strip Insulation

Weatherproof strip insulation provides an effective method of temporarily insulating components. The jacketed insulation is universal and easy to install. It is approximately 4 in. (102 mm) wide and 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) thick and is available in standard lengths of 10, 30, and 50 ft (3.0, 9.1, and 15.2 m) packages.
Insulation Item 10 ft (3.0 m) insulation strip 30 ft (9.1 m) insulation strip 50 ft (15.2 m) insulation strip 25 insulation tie straps Ordering Number MS-SI-10 MS-SI-30 MS-SI-50 MS-SITS-KIT
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2007, R5 MS-02-188
www.swagelok.com
L if t C heck Val ves

50 Series
Swagelok lift check valves limit reverse flow under pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) and temperatures up to 900F (482C). Forward flow lifts the poppet, opening the valve. Reverse flow seats the poppet against the orifice, closing the valve. The lift check valve is gravity assisted and must be mounted horizontally, with bonnet nut on top.
Features
Rugged, all-stainless
steel construction
Reverse flow
coefficient less than 0.1 % of forward flow coefficient

No springs or
Union bonnet design Metal-tometal seal
elastomers
Compact size
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (204) 450 (232) 500 (260) 600 (315) 650 (343) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (426) 850 (454) 900 (482) 2500 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (321) 4470 (307) 4280 (294) 4130 (284) 3980 (274) 3760 (259) 3700 (254) 3600 (248) 3520 (242) 3460 (238) 3380 (232) 3280 (225)
1
Testing
Every Swagelok lift check valve is factory tested for proper operation.

2
All Swagelok lift check valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
3 4

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13.
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 S17400/A564 316 SS/A479 Nickel-based
Component 1 Bonnet nut 2 Bonnet 3 Poppet 4 Body Lubricant

Air
Air Flow, std L/min
Water
Water Flow, L/min
Inlet Pressure, bar
56 58
56 58

C flat
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size Cv
1/4 in. 0.30 3/8 in. 0.64

(4.0)
Ordering Number SS-53S4 SS-56S6 SS-58S8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series 53 56 A 2.40

(61.0)
B 1.01
(25.7)
C 7/8 1 1/4
D 1.47
(37.3)
E 0.39
(9.9)
0.250
(6.4)
2.83
(71.9)
1.31
(33.3)
1.85
(47.0)
0.50
(12.7)
Swagelok 1/2 in. tube fittings 3/4 in. E
2.20
0.437
(11.1)
58 SS-58S12 SS-53S6MM SS-53F2 53 SS-53F4 SS-56F4 SS-58F6 58 SS-58F8 SS-53SW4T SS-56SW6T 56 SS-56SW8T SS-58SW8T SS-53S4-F4 58 53 53 56 53
3.92
(99.6)
2.19
(55.6)
1 1/2
2.44
(62.0)
0.62
(15.7)
6 mm 0.30 B A 1/8 in. 0.30 1/4 in. Female NPT 1/4 in. 0.64 3/8 in. 2.20 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 0.30 Tube 3/8 in. socket weld 0.64 or pipe butt 1/2 in. weld 1/2 in. 2.20 Swagelok tube fitting/ 1/4 in. 0.30 female NPT
0.156
(4.0)
2.40
(61.0)
1.01
(25.7)
7/8
1.47
(37.3)
0.39
(9.9)
2.00
(50.8)
1.00
(25.4)
0.156
(4.0)
Options
To order lift check valves cleaned and packaged in accordance with Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-53S4-SC11
2.06
(52.3)
0.94
(23.9)
7/8
1.47
(37.3)
0.39
(9.9)
0.250
(6.4)
2.25
(57.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1 1/4
1.85
(47.0)
0.50
(12.7)
0.437
(11.1)
3.12
(79.2)
1.86
(47.2)
1 1/2
2.44
(62.0)
0.62
(15.7)
0.156
(4.0)
1.81
(46.0)
0.90
(22.9)
7/8
1.47
(37.3)
0.39
(9.9)
0.250
(6.4)
2.25
(57.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1 1/4
1.85
(47.0)
0.50
(12.7)
Special Alloys
Many valve bodies are available in other alloys. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
0.437
(11.1)
3.13
(79.5)
1.88
(47.8)
1 1/2 7/8
2.44
(62.0)
0.62
(15.7)
0.156
(4.0)
2.23
(56.6)
0.97
(24.6)
1.47
(37.3)
0.39
(9.9)

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI May 2007, R7 MS-01-98
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
53 Series
53 Series
www.swagelok.com
Limit Switches
Swagelok limit switches indicate the position of a valve by means of an electrical signal. The signal can also be used to actuate other components, such as fail-safe alarm systems. Limit switch
Features
s Limit switch can be used with any Swagelok ball valve
pneumatic actuator assembly and with manual 63, 65, 67, and 68 series ball valves.
s Cam arrangement allows switch actuation at any point in
valve cycle.
s Cam position and switch sequence can be adjusted without
tools.
s Either switch can be adjusted independently of the other. s Self-lifting, captive pressure plates provide quick and secure
electrical connections.
s Stainless steel mounting bracket supports entire valve-
actuator-limit switch assembly.

s O-ring seals for cap and shaft protect internal components
Swagelok actuator
from rain, dust, and oil.

s Limit switch assembly meets specifications for NEC Class I
(NEMA 7), Division I, Groups C and D; and NEC Class II (NEMA 9), Division I, Groups E, F, and G.
s Limit switch is UL listed and CSA certified.
Technical Data
Temperature Rating
13 to 185F (25 to 85C)
Swagelok valve
(60 series valve shown)
Electrical Data
Two switches; single-pole, double-throw circuit
Component Housing Coupling Actuator bracket O-rings Material Epoxy-coated aluminum Anodized aluminum Stainless steel Buna N
Electrical Ratings
UL/CSA rating: L23 20 A; 120, 240, or 480 V (ac), inductive and resistive 1 hp, 120 V (ac); 2 hp, 240 V (ac) 0.5 A, 125 V (dc); 0.25 A, 250 V (dc) resistive
Wiring
Conduit should be installed in accordance with NEC 501-4 and 501-5.
Dimensions
A C 4.00
(102)
B 0.61
(15.5)
4.00
(102)
3/4 in. NPT conduit connection D 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 2.00

(50.8) (50.8)
2 mounting holes, 0.34 (8.6) dia
H F 1.75
(44.4)
Swagelok Actuator Model 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155
Kit Ordering Number MS-LSK-A1-131 MS-LSK-A1-133 MS-LSK-A1-135
Dimensions, in. (mm) A (S) 3.45 (87.9) 5.70 (145) 8.75 (222) B 1.56 (37.1) 2.16 (54.9) 3.16 (80.3) C (D) 2.63 (66.9) 3.73 (95.1) 5.26 (134) D 7.22 (183) 7.65 (195) 8.40 (214) E 3.92 (99.6) 4.36 (111) 5.11 (130) F 2.12 (53.8) 2.56 (65.0) 3.31 (84.1) G 1.73 (43.9) 2.32 (58.9) 3.27 (83.1) H 3.12 (79.2) 3.56 (90.4) 4.31 (110)
(S) = spring return; (D) = double acting.
Limit Switch Kits
Limit switch kits include limit switch, actuator bracket, coupling, and mounting plate. Select an ordering number from the Dimensions table above.
Factory-Assembled Valves with Limit Switches

To order a limit switch on any Swagelok ball valve pneumatic actuator assembly or on manual 63, 65, 67, and 68 series ball valves, add -L1 to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-45F8-33C-L1 for a 45 series valve with normally closed pneumatic actuator and limit switch SS-63TS8-L1 for a manual 63 series valve with limit switch
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2002, R1 MS-06-39-E
www.swagelok.com
Limit Switches
Swagelok limit switches indicate the position of a valve by means of an electrical signal. The signal can also be used to actuate other components, such as fail-safe alarm systems. Limit switch
Features
s Limit switch can be used with any Swagelok ball valve
pneumatic actuator assembly and with manual 63, 65, 67, and 68 series ball valves.
s Cam arrangement allows switch actuation at any point in
valve cycle.
s Cam position and switch sequence can be adjusted without
tools.
s Either switch can be adjusted independently of the other. s Self-lifting, captive pressure plates provide quick and secure
electrical connections.
s Stainless steel mounting bracket supports entire valve-
actuator-limit switch assembly.

s O-ring seals for cap and shaft protect internal components
Swagelok actuator
from rain, dust, and oil.

s Limit switch assembly meets specifications for NEC Class I
(NEMA 7), Division I, Groups C and D; and NEC Class II (NEMA 9), Division I, Groups E, F, and G.
s Limit switch is UL listed and CSA certified.
Technical Data
Temperature Rating
13 to 185F (25 to 85C)
Swagelok valve
Electrical Data
Two switches; single-pole, double-throw circuit
Component Housing Coupling Actuator bracket O-rings Material Epoxy-coated aluminum Anodized aluminum Stainless steel Buna N
Electrical Ratings
UL/CSA rating: L23 20 A; 120, 240, or 480 V (ac), inductive and resistive 1 hp, 120 V (ac); 2 hp, 240 V (ac) 0.5 A, 125 V (dc); 0.25 A, 250 V (dc) resistive
Wiring
Conduit should be installed in accordance with NEC 501-4 and 501-5.
Dimensions
A C 4.00
(102)
B 0.61
(15.5)
4.00
(102)
3/4 in. NPT conduit connection D 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 2.00

(50.8) (50.8)
H F 1.75
(44.4)
Swagelok Actuator Model 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155
Kit Ordering Number MS-LSK-A1-131 MS-LSK-A1-133 MS-LSK-A1-135
Dimensions, in. (mm) A (S) 3.45 (87.9) 5.70 (145) 8.75 (222) B 1.56 (37.1) 2.16 (54.9) 3.16 (80.3) C (D) 2.63 (66.9) 3.73 (95.1) 5.26 (134) D 7.22 (183) 7.65 (195) 8.40 (214) E 3.92 (99.6) 4.36 (111) 5.11 (130) F 2.12 (53.8) 2.56 (65.0) 3.31 (84.1) G 1.73 (43.9) 2.32 (58.9) 3.27 (83.1) H 3.12 (79.2) 3.56 (90.4) 4.31 (110)
(S) = spring return; (D) = double acting.
Limit Switch Kits
Limit switch kits include limit switch, actuator bracket, coupling, and mounting plate. Select an ordering number from the Dimensions table above.
Factory-Assembled Valves with Limit Switches

To order a limit switch on any Swagelok ball valve pneumatic actuator assembly or on manual 63, 65, 67, and 68 series ball valves, add -L1 to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-45F8-33C-L1 for a 45 series valve with normally closed pneumatic actuator and limit switch SS-63TS8-L1 for a manual 63 series valve with limit switch
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2002, R1 MS-06-39-E
www.swagelok.com
L ive -Loaded 40 Se rie s Ball Valve s

For Low-Te mpe rature Se r v ice
Features
Live-loaded 40 series ball valves can be used in temperatures from 65 to 150F (53 to 65C). They are available in:
Brass and alloy 400 on-off (2-way) and
Directional handle indicates position of orifice.
on-off switching (3-way) flow patterns in 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 series sizes.
Stainless steel on-off (2-way) and on-
off switching (3-way) flow patterns in 44 and 45 series sizes. For live-loaded stainless steel 41G, 42G, and 43G series valves, see the Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-02-331.
All materials in switching (5-way and
Packing springs maintain load, resist thermal effects. One-piece ball stem ensures alignment of stem and orifice.
Capsule seat packing is available in PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes). Panel nut secures valve to panel or actuator.
7-way) and crossover (4-way and 6-way) flow patterns.
One-piece body eliminates multiple seal points.
1 2
41, 42, 44, 45 series
Stainless Steel Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw Powdered metal 300 series SS or 316 SS/A276, A479
Valve Body Materials Brass Nylon with brass insert S17400 SS/A564 Brass CDA 360/B16 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification
43 series
3 Packing bolt 4 Springs
Molybdenum disulfide-coated S17700 SS/A693 Powdered metal 300 series SS 40T: PFA/D3307; 40E: UHMWPE/D4020 316 SS/A276 and A479 40T: fluorocarbon-coated powdered metal 300 series SS/B783; 40E: 300 series powdered metal SS/B783 Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 316 SS/A276, A479 Alloy 400/B164 Fluorocarbon-coated alloy 400 powdered metal Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 Alloy 400/B164
5 Gland 6 Upper packing 7 Ball stem 8 Side rings 9 Side discs 10 Lower packing
5 6 9 8 9 7 10 11 12 8
40T: PFA/D3307; 40E: UHMWPE/D4020 Brass CDA 360/B16 Brass CDA 360/B16
11 Panel nut 12 Body Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricant
40T: hydrocarbon- and silicone-based; 40E: hydrocarbon-based Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
Wetted components listed in italics. 41 and 42 series8 springs; 43 series6 springs; 44 and 45 series4 springs. 40T body with VCO fittings has fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; 40E body with VCO fittings has ethylene propylene O-rings. 44T and 45Thydrocarbon-based and silicone- and fluorinated-based.
Important Information About Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are designed to be used in a
fully open or fully closed position.
1. Select a 40 series basic ordering number from the Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-02-331. 2. Add a material designator. Examples: B-42S4 SS-44XS6 3. Add a seat packing material designator. Examples: B-42ES4 for a brass, 2-way, live-loaded 42 series ball valve with UHMWPE packing
Material Valve Series Designator 316 SS Alloy 400 Brass 44, 45 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 SS M B

service life of the valve to prevent leakage. Service instructions are shipped with each live-loaded 40 series ball valve. Live-loaded 40 series ball valves are adjusted for factory testing with nitrogen at 1000 psig and 70F (69 bar and 20C), or the rated pressure if lower than 1000 psig (69 bar). Packing must be readjusted for service at higher than test pressure. Valves exposed to dynamic temperature conditions before installation may lose their initial packing load. Packing adjustment may be needed. Live-loaded 43 series ball valves require an adapter to adjust the packing bolt. Ordering number: MS-WK-43
Material Valve Series Designator 41, 42, 43, PFA T 44, 45 UHMWPE 41, 42, 43 E
SS-44XTS6 for a stainless steel, 3-way, live-loaded 44 series ball valve with PFA packing.
Pressure ratings are the same as those listed in the Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-02-331. Live loading extends the low-temperature rating for 40T and 40E series valves cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62, to 65F (53C). Special cleaning of live-loaded valves in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, changes the low-temperature rating from 65F (53C) to 30F (34C).
Pneumatic Actuators
Live-loaded 40 series ball valves can be mounted to springreturn or double-acting pneumatic actuators in single (one valve) or dual (two valve) configurations. To order, see the Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-02-331.
Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure

Spring Return Valve Series 41, 42 41X, 42X 43, 43Y 43X 44 44X 45, 45Y 45X Actuator Model 31 (90) 51 (180) 31 (90) 33 (90) 51 (180) 53 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180) Single 65 (4.5) 65 (4.5) 70 (4.9) 65 (4.5) 80 (5.6) 75 (5.2) Dual 80 (5.6) 85 (5.9) 75 (5.2) Double Acting Single 25 (1.8) 25 (1.8) 60 (4.2) 25 (1.8) 60 (4.2) 25 (1.8) 40 (2.8) 40 (2.8) 65 (4.5) 65 (4.5) Dual 45 (3.2) 45 (3.2) 100 (6.9) 40 (2.8) 100 (6.9) 40 (2.8) 75 (5.2) 75 (5.2)
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)

All live-loaded 40 series valves are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Special cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, is available as an option. To order, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: B-42S4-SC11
Flow Data, Testing, and Options

See the Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-02-331.
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y-designates crossover (4-way) valve.

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygenenriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13. Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
For information about ISO 5211-compliant actuators, see the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-02-337.
Swagelok, VCOTM Swagelok Company 2007, 2008 Swagelok Company April 2008, R9 MS-02-109-E
www.swagelok.com
Medium-Pre s sure Ball Valve s

FK B Se r ie s
Innovative stem and end connection seal design (patent-pending): maintains full pressure rating throughout the entire operating temperature range
reduces seal wear that can lead to shell
leakage.
Positionable handle with unique stop disk: provides flexibility in component layout, enabling reduced system footprint.
Bottom-loaded stem design: eliminates stem blowout and enhances operator safety. Trunnion-style ball with innovative direct-load design (patent-pending): seals consistently across a full range of pressures, even if system is depressurized and repressurized ensures reliable operation for improved actuation of control systems.
Swagelok mediumpressure tube fitting end connections: reduce valve installation time and cost provide robust tube grip and vibration resistance.
Swagelok FKB series trunnion-style ball valves offer lowtorque, quarter-turn operation in a compact design providing positive shutoff in applications up to 15 000 psig (1034 bar). Other features include:
Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.44 to 1.5 Gaugeable Swagelok medium-pressure tube fitting and
O-Ring Material Fluorocarbon FKM Perfluorocarbon FFKM
female NPT end connections

2-way (on-off) and 3-way (switching) flow patterns Nitrogen seat and helium shell tested to ensure product
Temperature F (C) 0 (17) to 250 (121) 20 (6) to 185 (85)
HNBR
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 15 000 (1034) 15 000 (1034) 15 000 (1034
integrity
Positionable bar handle and ISO 5211-compliant pneumatic
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with medium-pressure tube fitting end connections, see the Swagelok Medium-Pressure Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-02-335.
actuators
Manual valve panel and shoulder mounting are available as
options.
Important Information About Swagelok Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are designed to be used in a

FKB Series Medium-Pressure Ball Valves
3 4 5 19 20
21
23
25
27
28
22
24
26
2-Way Valve 3-Way Valve Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A479 with blue electrostatic powder coating and white epoxy ink 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 PEEK PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM, HNBR, or perfluorocarbon FFKM Reinforced PEEK 316 SS/A479 PEEK 316 SS/A276 PEEK Fluorocarbon FKM, HNBR, or perfluorocarbon FFKM PTFE PEEK 316 SS/A479 Reinforced PEEK 316 SS/A276 17-7PH/A673 Fluorocarbon FKM, HNBR, or perfluorocarbon FFKM PTFE PEEK 316 SS PEEK Fluorocarbon FKM, HNBR, or perfluorocarbon FFKM 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Silicone-based, tungsten disulfide and fluorinated-based Hydrocarbon-based
6 7 9
Component
8 10
1 Handle 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set screw Hub Stop disk Body Stem guide Primary stem backup ring Secondary stem backup ring
11
9 Stem O-ring 10 11 12 13 14 Stem bearing Stem Trunnion bearings Ball Bottom end screw support ring
12
13
15 Bottom end screw O-ring
14 15 17
3-Way
16
2-Way
16 17 18 19 20 21
Secondary bottom end screw backup ring Primary bottom end screw backup ring Plug (2-way only) Seats Seat carriers Seat springs
22 End screw O-ring
29
18
23 24 25 26
Secondary end screw backup ring Primary end screw backup ring Seat carrier guides Seat carrier backup rings
27 Seat carrier O-ring 28 End screw 29 Bottom end screw (3-way only) Wetted lubricants Nonwetted lubricants
Testing
Every Swagelok medium-pressure ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (68.9 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All Swagelok medium-pressure ball valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Select an ordering number from the table below. Valve ordering numbers specify fluorocarbon FKM O-rings. To order valves with optional O-ring materials, add -H for HNBR (hydrogenated nitrile butadiene rubber) or -C for perfluorocarbon FFKM to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6FKBFK4-H Valve ordering numbers specify the standard positionable handle. To order valves with locking handles, add -LH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6FKBFK4-H-LH
2-Way (On-Off) Valve
(92.7)
3-Way (Switching) Valve

(92.7)
3.65
3.65
Side (3-Way Valve Shown)
1 3/8 (35.1) panel hole drill 0.88
(70.9)
2.79
1 3/8 (35.1) panel hole drill

(22.4)
(70.9)
2.79
0.88
(22.4)
(34.3)
1.35
C 5/16 (7.9) panel hole drill A 0.59 0.38

(9.7)
5/16 panel hole drill 2.68

(7.9)
C 0.38
(9.7)
(68.1)
2.68
(15.0)
(15.0)
0.59
(31.8)
1.25
(68.1)
B A
Top End Connections Type Swagelok mediumpressure tube fitting Female NPT Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.44 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 Valve Ordering Number SS-6FKBFK4 SS-6FKBFK6 SS-6FKBFK8 SS-6FKBF4 SS-6FKBF6 SS-6FKBF8 SS-6FKBXFK4 SS-6FKBXFK6 SS-6FKBXFK8 SS-6FKBXF4 SS-6FKBXF6 SS-6FKBXF8 Dimensions, in. (mm) A 4.09 (104) 4.74 (120) 4.74 (120) 4.22 (107) 4.34 (110) 4.78 (121) 4.09 (104) 4.74 (120) 4.74 (120) 4.22 (107) 4.34 (110) 4.78 (121) B 2.05 (52.1) 2.37 (60.2) 2.37 (60.2) 2.11 (53.6) 2.17 (55.1) 2.39 (60.7) 2.05 (52.1) 2.37 (60.2) 2.37 (60.2) 2.11 (53.6) 2.17 (55.1) 2.39 (60.7) C 2.05 (52.1) 2.38 (60.5) 2.38 (60.5) 2.11 (53.6) 2.18 (55.4) 2.40 (61.0)
9/32 (7.1) panel hole drill 1.02
26.0
0.28 (7.1)
On-Off (2-Way) Valves, 0.209 in. (5.31 mm) Orifice
Switching (3-Way) Valves, 0.209 in. (5.31 mm) Orifice Swagelok mediumpressure tube fitting Female NPT

Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes. On-off (2-way) valves require 90 actuation; switching (3-way) valves require 180 actuation. Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assembliesincluding valves, actuators, sensors, bracket kits, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845. For technical data, including actuator materials of construction and weight, see the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves, MS-02-337.
Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8.0 bar). See Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum actuator pressures.
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature Actuator Service Designator HT LT Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176 (20 to 80) 5 to 302 (15 to 150) 40 to 176 (40 to 80)

Spring Return Double Model Designators Acting Normally Normally Actuator Model Closed Open Model Designator On-Off (2-Way) Valves A30 (90) -A30D -A60C5 -A60O5 A60 (90) -A60D Switching (3-Way) Valves A30 (180) -A30XD A60 (180) -A60XD Actuation Mode Spring Double Return Acting Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) 72 (5.0) 72 (5.0) 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5) 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5)
Actuator Model A30 (90) A60 (90) A30 (180) A60 (180)
Dimensions
E D 1.57 F G
(40.0)
L A 2 mounting holes 0.34 (8.6) dia
J K
Actuator Model A30 (90) A60 (90) A30 (180) A60 (180)
A 4.55 (116) 4.89 (124) 4.55 (116) 4.89 (124)
C 2.46 (62.5) 2.80 (71.1) 2.46 (62.5) 2.80 (71.1)
2.00 (50.8)
Dimensions, in. (mm) D E F On-Off (2-Way) Valves 6.22 (158) 3.27 (83.0) 2.83 (72.0) 8.27 (210) 3.72 (94.5) 3.33 (84.5) Switching (3-Way) Valves 8.70 (221) 3.27 (83.0) 2.83 (72.0) 11.7 (298) 3.72 (94.5) 3.33 (84.5)
G 1.42 (36.0) 1.67 (42.5) 1.42 (36.0) 1.67 (42.5)
K 3.57 (90.7) 5.93 (150) 3.57 (90.7) 3.77 (95.8)
L 2.67 (67.8) 3.70 (94.0) 2.67 (67.8) 3.00 (76.2)
1.72 (43.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1.72 (43.7)

SS-6FKBFK8 -A60C5 HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuator Service
Based on actuation mode and flow pattern, select actuator designator. See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 4.

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve. Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number
MS - A60-DA - DIN -HT

A Actuator Model B Coupling Drive Type C Actuator Service
Based on actuation mode and flow pattern, select actuator designator. See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 4, and Actuator Model Designators table below. Actuator Model Designators
Spring Return Actuator Model A30 (90) A60 (90) A30 (180) A60 (180) Spring Return Double Model Acting Designator Model On-Off (2-Way) Valves A30 (90) A60S5 A60 (90) Switching (3-Way) Valves A30 (180) A60 (180)
DIN

Double Acting Model Designator A30-DA A60-DA A30-XDA A60-XDA
Mounting bracket kit ordering number: SS-MB-6FKB-F05-14DIN-M Swagelok ISO 5211 mounting bracket kits contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket Four 316 stainless steel socket head
cap screws
Powdered metal 300 series stainless
steel coupling
316 stainless steel set screw Instructions.
Options
Handle Colors
Stainless steel bar handles with blue electrostatic powder coating are standard. Other colors are available. To order, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6FKBFK4-BK
Handle Color Black Green Orange Red Yellow Designator -BK -GR -OG -RD -YW

Solenoid Valves
attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly.

Position Indicators
provide visual status of a valve.

Limit Switches
indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal. They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof). All electrical components listed above meet North American NEMA and European CE/CENELEC requirements. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for ordering information.
Accessories
Locking Handle Kits
Locking handle kits are available. Each kit contains a locking bracket, bracket screw, lock disk, and instructions. 2-way valve kit ordering number: SS-5DK-6FKB-LH 3-way valve kit ordering number: SS-5DK-6FKBX-LH
Related Products
Fittings
See the Swagelok Medium-Pressure Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-02-335, for more information.
Panel Nut Kits

Panel nut kits are available for manual valves. Panel thickness minimum is 0.12 in. (3.0 mm); maximum is 0.50 in. (12.7 mm). Each kit contains a panel nut and instructions. Ordering number: SS-7K-6FKB
Cap Screw Kits

Cap screw kits are available for panel mounting manual valve body shoulders to a panel 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) thick. Each kit contains four 1/4-20, 3/8 in. (9.7 mm) long cap screws and instructions. Ordering number: SS-6SCK-0882
Tubing
See the Swagelok MediumPressure TubingHeavy-Wall Annealed and Cold-Drawn 1/8-Hard catalog, MS-02-334, for more information
Stop Disk Kits

Replacement stop disk kits are available. Each kit contains a replacement stop disk and instructions. 2-way valve kit ordering number: SS-5DK-6FKB 3-way valve kit ordering number: SS-5DK-6FKBX
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2009 Swagelok Company October 2009, R1 MS-02-354-E
www.swagelok.com
Swagelok Medium-Pre ssure, Gauge able Tube Fit tings and Adapte r Fit tings
For Pressure s up to 15 0 0 0 psig (1034 ba r)
Easy installation, no special tools required Assembly by one full turn Can also be assembled by torque Leak-tight gas seal with initial installation and with each reassembly Consistent gaugeability upon initial installation Simple two-piece construction, body and cartridge Leak-tight performance on heavy-wall annealed or cold-drawn
1/8-hard stainless steel tubing
Medium-Pressure Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings
Features
The simple two-piece design of the Swagelok mediumpressure tube fittings and adapters consists of a female fitting body and preassembled cartridge containing the male nut and color-coded front and back ferrules on a disposable plastic arbor. The preassembled cartridge ensures installers correct ferrule orientation, visual confirmation of ferrule presence, and proper installation into the female body. Components are released only after the nut is threaded finger-tight on the fitting body. The Swagelok medium-pressure tube fitting offers a leaktight gas seal and vibration resistance in applications up to 15 000 psig (1034 bar). Additional features of this novel tube fitting technology include:
Patented low-temperature case hardening processing
Arbor Preassembled cartridge
Female body Male nut Front and back ferrules
of the ferrules and nut, plus the specially designed ferrule geometry, promotes a patent-pending hinging colleting action
Robust tube grip for a variety of installation practices Enhanced vibration protection Strain-hardened stainless steel bodies offer
lightweight, space-saving designs

Extensive Swagelok product test reports and third-
party test reports

4:1 design factor.
Male nut Back ferrule Gaugeable upon initial installation by torque or by one full turn
Robust tube grip for a variety of installation practices and enhanced vibration protection
Dynamic wedge allows remakeable pull-ups by torque Female body Front ferrule
Leak-tight gas seal upon initial installation and each remake
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Ratings and Tubing Information . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 4 4

Straight Fittings 90 Elbows Union, 6 Reducing Union, 6
Union, 5 Reducing Union, 5
Bulkhead Union, 5
Tees Union, 7
Male Connector Male NPT Thread, 5
Male Branch, NPT, 7
Male ConnectorHeavy-Duty Male SAE/MS Straight Thread, 5
Union Cross, 7
Cone and Thread Adapter, 6
Caps and Plugs, 6
All medium-pressure ttings are provided with a preassembled cartridge containing the male nut and front and back ferrules on a disposable plastic arbor, one cartridge per medium-pressure end connection.
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nut and Ferrules Cartridge
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tools and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Gap Inspection Gauge Pipe Thread Sealants Preswaging Tool Tube Benders Tubing Products Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Pressure Ratings and Tubing Information

Pressure ratings are dependent on the end connection or system component with the lowest pressure rating. Ratings for the end connections used in this catalog are identified below. Swagelok medium-pressure tube fittings listed in this catalog are rated to the pressure rating of the tubing for typical applications (see tubing tables below). All pressures are calculated from equations in ASME B31.3, Process Piping. Calculations are based on maximum outside diameter and minimum wall thickness. Pressure rating calculations for cold-drawn 1/8-hard 316 stainless steel tubing are based on an allowable stress of 35 000 psi (241 MPa).
Pressure Ratings for Swagelok Medium-Pressure Tube Fittings Used with Heavy-Wall Annealed and Cold-Drawn 1/8-Hard Stainless Steel Tubing
Swagelok medium-pressure ends are rated to the working pressure of the tubing as listed below and in Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Heavy-Wall Annealed 316 Stainless Steel Tubing

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Wall Thickness in. 0.095 0.134 0.188 Working Pressure psig (bar) 15 000 (1034) 15 000 (1034) 15 000 (1034)
Heavy-Duty SAE/MS Pressure Ratings

Heavy-duty SAE/MS end connections listed in this catalog (1/4 and 3/8 in.) are rated to 63 MPa (9137 psig) according to SAE J1926/2.
Male NPT Pipe End Pressure Ratings

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number SS-4FK0-3TTM SS-4FK0-1-4 SS-6FK0-3TTM SS-6FK0-1-4 SS-8FK0-1-4 SS-8FK0-3TTM SS-8FK0-1-8 Pressure Rating psig (bar) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551)
No allowance is made for corrosion, erosion, or elevated temperatures. Pressure rating based on special wall thickness tolerance 10 % for
heavy-wall annealed 316 stainless steel tubing.
Suggested Ordering Information

Fully annealed, high-quality type 316 stainless steel tubing ASTM A269 or A213, or equivalent. Hardness 90 HRB or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Cold-Drawn 1/8-Hard 316 Stainless Steel Tubing

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Wall Thickness in. 0.065 0.083 0.109 15 000 (1034) Working Pressure psig (bar)
No allowance is made for corrosion, erosion, or elevated temperatures.
Elevated Temperature Factors

Temperature F 300 400 600 800 1000 C 148 204 315 426 537 316 SS Tubing Material 1.00 0.96 0.85 0.79 0.76
No allowance is made for corrosion or erosion.

Cold-drawn 1/8-hard high-quality type 316 stainless steel tubing. OD tolerance 0.005 in. and wall thickness tolerance of 10 %. Minimum tensile strength 105 000 psi (723 MPa), yield strength 75 000 psi (517 MPa), minimum elongation 20 %, hardness 26 HRC or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Component Body, front ferrule Nut, back ferrule Material/Specification 316 SS/ASTM A276 316 SS/ASTM A276
Swagelok Tubing
For Swagelok heavy-wall annealed and cold-drawn 1/8-hard tubing products, see the Swagelok Medium-Pressure Tubing catalog, MS-02-334.
Wetted components listed in italics. Molybdenum disulfide-based lubricant.

All medium-pressure fittings are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. All medium-pressure fittings are provided with a preassembled cartridge containing the male nut and front and back ferrules on a disposable plastic arbor, one cartridge per mediumpressure end connection.

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight . All fitting bodies are provided with a preassembled cartridge containing the male nut and front and back ferrules on a disposable plastic arbor, one cartridge per medium-pressure and connection.
Straight Fittings
Union
A D D
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-6 SS-6FK0-6 SS-8FK0-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.25 (57.2) 2.81 (71.5) 3.36 (85.3) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.4) E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
Fx flat
F flat
1/2
Reducing Union
A Dx D
Tube OD, in. T 3/8

T
Tx 1/4 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-6FK0-6-4 SS-8FK0-6-4 SS-8FK0-6-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.90 (73.8) 3.19 (81.0) D Dx E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) F 3/4 1 Fx G 9/16 11/16 2.64 (67.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.08 (27.4) 0.13 (3.2) 1.59 (40.4) 1.34 (34.0) 11/16 9/16 7/8
Tx G flat
1/2
E F flat Fx flat
Bulkhead Union
A D
Dimensions, in. (mm) Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 Ordering Number SS-4FK0-61 SS-6FK0-61 SS-8FK0-61 Panel Maximum Hole Panel Size Thickness 49/64 0.50 (12.7) 0.66 (16.7) 0.75 (19.0)
Fx 9/16 7/8
G 15/16
2.25 (57.2) 1.08 (27.4) 2.81 (71.5) 1.34 (34.0) 3.38 (85.8) 1.59 (40.4)
0.13 (3.2) 15/16 0.28 (7.1) 1 5/16
0.21 (5.3) 1 1/16 11/16 1 1/16 57/64 1 5/16 1 9/64
Fx flat
F flat
G flat
1/2
Male ConnectorNPT
A D E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
NPT Size in. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-1-4 SS-6FK0-1-4 SS-8FK0-1-4 SS-8FK0-1-8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A D E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8 1.74 (44.1) 1.08 (27.4) 2.03 (51.6) 1.34 (34.0) 2.33 (59.1) 2.52 (64.0) 1.59 (40.4)
NPT Maximum Pressure Rating psig (bar) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 10 000 (689)
F flat
Fx flat
1/2
Male ConnectorHeavy-Duty Male SAE/MS Straight Thread

A D E
Tube SAE/MS OD Thread in. Size

F flat Fx flat
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-1-4STH SS-4FK0-1-6STH SS-6FK0-1-4STH SS-6FK0-1-6STH
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.61 (40.8) 1.65 (41.8) 1.91 (48.6) 1.95 (49.6) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) E 0.13 (3.2) 0.20 (5.2) 0.21 (5.3) F 5/8 3/4 3/4 Fx 9/16
SAE/MS Maximum Pressure Rating psig (bar)
1/4 3/8
7/16-20 9/16-18 7/16-20 9/16-18
9137 (629) 11/16
Straight Fittings
Cone and Thread Adapter
A B D
S F flat Fx flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Cone and Thread Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-1-4CW SS-6FK0-1-6CW SS-8FK0-1-9CW
S Thread Size 1/4-28 LH 3/8-24 LH 9/16-18 LH
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B D E F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8 2.70 (68.5) 0.31 (7.9) 3.22 (81.8) 0.39 (9.9) 1.08 (27.4) 0.11 (2.7) 1.34 (34.0) 0.21 (5.3)
Maximum Pressure Rating psig (bar) 15 000 (1034)
4.04 (103) 0.47 (11.9) 1.59 (40.4) 0.28 (7.1)
Caps and Plugs

Caps
A D
Plugs
A
F flat
Fx flat
Fx flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-C SS-6FK0-C SS-8FK0-C
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.33 (33.7) 1.74 (44.2) 2.05 (52.0) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.4) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-P SS-6FK0-P SS-8FK0-P
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.03 (26.2) 1.26 (32.0) 1.45 (36.7) Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
90 Elbows
Union
A D
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A D E F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8 1.26 (31.9) 1.08 (27.4) 0.13 (3.2) 1.58 (40.2) 1.34 (34.0) 0.21 (5.3) 1.87 (47.5) 1.59 (40.4) 0.28 (7.1)
E F flat
Fx flat
Reducing Union
Tx Ax Fx flat Dx G flat A
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8

T
Tx 3/8 1/2 1/2
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A Ax D 1.08 (27.4) Dx 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.4) E 0.13 (3.2) Ex 0.28 (7.1) F 1 1 Fx 7/8 7/8 G 9/16 11/16 0.21 (5.3) 3/4 11/16
SS-6FK0-9-4 1.61 (40.9) 1.48 (37.5) SS-8FK0-9-4 1.91 (48.5) 1.69 (42.8)
SS-8FK0-9-6 1.91 (48.5) 1.82 (46.3) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.4) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1)
Ex F flat E D
Tees
Union
A D E F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8

Ax
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.51 (63.8) 3.17 (80.4) 3.74 (94.9) Ax 1.26 (31.9) 1.58 (40.2) 1.87 (47.5) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.4) E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
1/2
Fx flat
Male Branch, NPT

A Ax D
H F flat E
Fx flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-4FK0-3TTM SS-6FK0-3TTM SS-8FK0-3TTM
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.51 (63.8) 3.17 (80.4) 3.74 (94.9) Ax 1.26 (31.9) 1.58 (40.2) 1.87 (47.5) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.5) E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1) H 0.78 (19.8) 0.97 (24.6) 1.18 (30.0) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
NPT Maximum Pressure Rating psig (bar) 10 000 (689)
Union Cross
A D
Tube OD in. 1/4

F flat
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.51 (63.8) 3.17 (80.4) 3.74 (94.9) D 1.08 (27.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.59 (40.5) E 0.13 (3.2) 0.21 (5.3) 0.28 (7.1) F 5/8 3/4 1 Fx 9/16 11/16 7/8
3/8 1/2
Fx flat
Swagelok Instructions for Medium-Pressure Tube Fittings

Fig. 1
Preassembled cartridge Body
1. Thread the preassembled cartridge (nut, ferrules, and plastic arbor) into the fitting body until finger-tight (Fig. 1). For temperatures above 400F (204C), Silver Goop hightemperature thread lubricant is recommended for use on fitting nut threads. 2. Remove the plastic arbor (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
3. Insert tubing into the tting (Fig. 3).

4. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the shoulder of
Plastic arbor
the fitting body (Fig. 4). 5. Hold the body steady and tighten the nut to the specified torque (Fig. 5).
Fig. 3
Fitting
Tube Size in. 1/4

Tubing
Required Torque ftlb 25 45 110 Nm 35 60 150
3/8 1/2
Shoulder
Fig. 4
Alternatively, mark the nut, then tighten the nut one full turn.
Tubing
Fig. 5
Body Nut
Fig. 6
Body Nut
Gaugeability
On initial installation, the Swagelok medium-pressure gap inspection gauge assures the installer or inspector that a fitting has been sufficiently tightened. Position the Swagelok medium-pressure gap inspection gauge next to the gap between the nut and body.
If the gauge will not enter the gap, the fitting is sufficiently
Swagelok medium-pressure gap inspection gauge
tightened (Fig. 6).

If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is
required.
Swagelok Instructions for Medium-Pressure Tube Fittings

Fig. 7
Tubing with preswaged ferrules Body
Fig. 8
Nut
You may disassemble and reassemble the tube fitting many times. 1. Insert tubing with preswaged ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats (Fig. 7, 8). 2. Rotate the nut with a wrench and tighten to the specified torque in the torque table (Fig. 9). Alternatively, rotate the nut with a wrench to the previously pulled-up position; at this point a signicant increase in resistance will be encountered, then tighten slightly with a wrench. Note: Do not use a gap inspection gauge with reassembled fittings.
Fig. 14
Preswaging tool Nut
Fig. 15
Tubing with preswaged ferrules
Fig. 9
Nut
Cap
Installation Instructions See medium-pressure tube fitting instructions (see page 8).
Plug
Installation Instructions Hold the body steady and tighten the plug to the specified torque. Alternatively, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from the nger-tight position.
Fig. 10
Preswaging tool Preassembled Cartridge
Nut
Fig. 16
Tubing with preswaged ferrules Body
Preswaging Tool
Installation Instructions 1. Thread the preassembled cartridge (nut, ferrules, and plastic arbor) into the preswaging tool until finger-tight (Fig. 10). 2. Remove the plastic arbor (Fig. 11). 3. Insert the tubing into the preswaging tool (Fig 2). 4. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the shoulder of the preswaging tool body (Fig. 13). 5. Hold the preswaging tool steady and tighten the nut to the specified torque (Fig. 14). Alternatively, mark the nut and tighten the nut three-quarters turn. 6. Loosen the nut. 7. Remove the tubing with preswaged ferrules from the preswaging tool (Fig. 15). NOTE: If the tubing sticks in the preswaging tool, remove the tubing by gently rocking it back and forth. Do not turn the tubing. 8. Insert tubing with preswaged ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats (Fig. 16). 9. Rotate the nut with a wrench and tighten to the specified torque (Fig. 17). Note: Do not use a gap inspection gauge with fittings that were assembled using the preswaging tool.
Fig. 17
Nut
Fig. 11
Plastic arbor
Fig. 12
Preswaging tool
Tubing
Fig. 13
Shoulder
Tubing
Replacement Parts
Nut and Ferrules Cartridge
To order replacement ferrules and nut, see ordering information below. Each cartridge contains a front ferrule, back ferrule, and male nut. Do not use medium-pressure nut and ferrules with any other Swagelok tube ttings.
H
Tube OD in.
D
Ordering Number SS-4FK-NFSET SS-6FK-NFSET SS-8FK-NFSET
Dimensions, in. (mm) D 0.69 (17.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.00 (25.4) H 1.43 (36.4) 1.72 (43.6) 1.97 (49.9)
1/4 3/8 1/2

Medium-Pressure Gap Inspection Gauge
The Swagelok medium-pressure gap inspection gauge assures the installer or inspector that the fitting has been sufficiently pulled up on initial installation, whether using torque wrench or standard wrench tightening. Ordering number: MS-IG-FK0 The medium-pressure gap inspection gauge is different than the gap gauge for all other Swagelok tube ttings.
Preswaging Tool
Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number MS-ST-4FK0 MS-ST-6FK0 MS-ST-8FK0
Tube Benders
For tube benders, see the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169.

A thread sealant should always be used when assembling tapered threads. SWAK anaerobic pipe thread sealant and Swagelok PTFE tape are available. See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169.
Tubing Products
Swagelok offers mediumpressure tubing. For more information about heavy-wall annealed and cold-drawn 1/8-hard stainless steel tubing, see the Swagelok Medium-Pressure Tubing catalog, MS-02-334.
Swagelok, Silver Goop, SWAKTM Swagelok Company 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI November 2007, R1 MS-02-335
www.swagelok.com
Me dium-Pre ssure Tubing

He av y-Wall A nne ale d Cold-D rawn 1/8-Ha rd
Sizes 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. outside diameter Working pressures up to 15 000 psig (1034 bar) 316 / 316L stainless steel Marked to indicate size, material, condition, and heat number
Medium-Pressure Tubing
Technical Data
Material Standards and Mechanical Properties
Cold-drawn 1/8-hard tubing is more robust and allows for reduced wall thickness and enhanced flow through the same diameter tube.
Heavy-Wall Annealed 316 / 316L Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing

Grade 316 / 316L, 1.4401 / 1.4404 SUS 316LTP / SUS 316TP UNS S31600 / S31603 Specification ASTM A13, A69 ASME SA13 EN 1016-5 JIS G3459
Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness. Appearance in accordance with ASTM / ASME standards.
Cold-Drawn 1/8-Hard 316 / 316L Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing

Yield Strength at 0.2 % Offset ksi 75 to 110 Tensile Strength ksi 105 to 140 Elongation in 2 inches % min 0
Grade 316 / 316L, 1.4401 / 1.4404
UNS S31600 / S31603
Specification ASTM A13, A69 ASME SA13 EN 1016-5
Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness. Appearance in accordance with ASTM / ASME standards. Exception to the standards.
Specification ASTM / EN Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur 16.5 to 18.0 11.0 to 13.0 .00 to .50 JIS 16.0 to 18.0 1.0 to 14.0 .00 to 3.00 Composition, wt. %
Bend Radius
Minimum tube length, bend radius, and wall thickness limits required to make a 90 bend in heavy-wall annealed or colddrawn 1/8-hard stainless steel seamless tubing are listed below.
Wall Thickness Dimensions, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 7.0 (178) 1.4 (35.6) Minimum Tube Length in. (mm) Minimum Bend Radius in. (mm) Heavy-Wall Cold-Drawn Annealed 1/8-Hard Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Seamless Seamless 0.095 0.134 0.188 0.065 0.083 0.109
.00 max 1.00 max 0.030 max
Do not use hand tube bender for bending heavy-wall

annealed or cold-drawn 1/8-hard stainless steel tubing. Use steel bend shoes with the Swagelok bench top tube bender.
Medium-Pressure Tubing

Heavy-Wall Annealed 316 / 316L Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing
ASTM / EN Tubing
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.095 0.134 0.188 0.095 0.134 0.188
Ordering Number SS-T4FK-S-095-0-S SS-T6FK-S-134-0-S SS-T8FK-S-188-0-S
Nominal Length ft 0 m
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.16 (0.4) 0.35 (0.5) 0.64 (0.95) kg/m (lb/ft) 0.4 (0.16) 0.5 (0.35) 0.95 (0.64)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 15 000 (1034) bar (psig) 1034 (15 000)
Fractional Length
Metric Length SS-T4FK-S-095-6M-S SS-T6FK-S-134-6M-S SS-T8FK-S-188-6M-S
JIS Tubing
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.095 0.134 0.188 Nominal Length m 4 4 4 Pressure Rating bar (psig)
Ordering Number SS-T4FK-S-095-MJ-S SS-T4FK-S-095-4MJ-S SS-T6FK-S-134-MJ-S SS-T6FK-S-134-4MJ-S SS-T8FK-S-188-MJ-S SS-T8FK-S-188-4MJ-S
Weight kg/m (lb/ft) 0.4 (0.16) 0.5 (0.35) 0.95 (0.64)
1034 (15 000)
Cold-Drawn 1/8-Hard 316 / 316L Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing

ASTM / EN Tubing
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/ Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.065 0.083 0.109
Ordering Number SS-T4FK-SH-065-0-S SS-T6FK-SH-083-0-S SS-T8FK-SH-109-0-S
Nominal Length ft 0 m
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.13 (0.19) 0.6 (0.39) 0.47 (0.70) kg/m (lb/ft) 0.19 (0.13)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 15 000 (1034) bar (psig)
Fractional Length
Metric Length SS-T4FK-SH-065-M-S 1/4 0.065 SS-T4FK-SH-065-4M-S SS-T4FK-SH-065-6M-S SS-T6FK-SH-083-M-S 3/8 0.083 SS-T6FK-SH-083-4M-S SS-T6FK-SH-083-6M-S SS-T8FK-SH-109-M-S 1/ 0.109 SS-T8FK-SH-109-4M-S SS-T8FK-SH-109-6M-S
4 6 4 6 4 6 0.70 (0.47) 0.39 (0.6) 1034 (15 000)

Bench Top Tube Bender
For optimal bending ability, use the Swagelok bench top bender with steel bend shoes. See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169, for more information.
Fittings
See the Swagelok MediumPressure Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-0-335, for more information.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI March 008, R1 MS-0-334
www.swagelok.com
M e t e ring Valves
S, M, L, and 31 Series
Straight-pattern flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.004 to 0.16 Low- and high-pressure service Repeatable vernier handles available Brass and 316 stainless steel materials
Metering Valves
Features
Low-Pressure Valves (S, M, and L Series)
Straight-pattern flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.004 to 0.16 Forged-body 316 SS or brass construction Straight, angle, cross, and double patterns Panel mounting Knurled, round, vernier, slotted, and adjustable-torque handles Swagelok tube fitting, male NPT, and integral VCR fitting
Lock screw locks in flow settings (knurled and slotted handles)
Stem threads are isolated from system fluid
end connections
Technical Data
Pressure-Temperature Ratings Working Temperature Pressure F (C) psig (bar) 10 to 400 fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; 10 to 300
(3 to 148) (3 to 04)
Handle stop helps prevent damage to stem and orifice Tapered stem tip accurately controls gas and liquid flow rates Stem O-ring contains system fluid
Series S M L
Stem Taper Orifice Shutoff (Included in. (mm) Service Angle) 0.03
(0.81)
000 (137)
No No Yes
1 3 6
0.056 1000 (68.9)

(1.4)
S, M, and L Series
S series valve shown.
Buna N O-rings
0.18
(3.5)
Downstream pressure 500 psig (34.4 bar) max when valve requires adjustment at pressure due to strength limitations of the fine-pitch threads and high operating torque. Stainless steel L series valves are not recommended for shutoff in vacuum or gas service, or for repetitive shutoff in liquid service.
High-Pressure Valves (31 Series)

Flow coefficient of 0.04; orifice of 0.06 in. (1.6 mm) 316 SS bar stock body Straight and angle patterns Metal-to-metal shutoff stem taper (included angle) Panel mounting Round phenolic handle Swagelok tube fitting and female NPT end connections
Packing nut permits simple external adjustment 440C SS regulating stem hardened for enhanced service life Packing fully contained by 316 SS glands to prevent extrusion Metal-to-metal shutoff
Ratings based on optional Grafoil packing. Ratings limited to 450F (3C) at 3435 psig (36 bar) with standard PTFE packing.
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 300 (148) 400 (04) 450 (3) 500 (60) 600 (315) 650 (343) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (46) 850 (454) 2080 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure, psig (bar) 5000 (344) 495 (95) 3875 (66) 3560 (45) 3435 (36) 3310 (8) 3130 (15) 3080 (1) 3000 (06) 930 (01) 880 (198) 815 (193)
31 Series
Tapered stem tip accurately controls gas and liquid flow rates
Metering Valves
Low-Pressure Valves (S, M, and L Series)
1a 2 1a 2 4 8 7 9 6 5 7 9 9 10 3 4 5 8 1b 2 2 3 4 8 9 7 8 6 3 4 5
High-Pressure Valves (31 Series)

1
S Series
M Series Valve Body Materials Brass
L Series Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Phenolic/D4617 Nickel-cadmium plated steel 316 SS/A76 PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A276 440C SS/A276 316 SS/B783 316 SS/A76 316 SS/A479 Nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier
316 SS
Component 1 Handle Set screw 2 Packing nut 3 Upper gland 4 Packing 5 Lower gland 6 Stem 7 Panel nut 8 Union nut 9 Bonnet 10 Body
Component 1a Handle Handle screw Lock screw 1b Handle Handle screw 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Panel mount nut Bonnet sleeve Bonnet Stem guide ring Body extension Body seal Stem O-rings 9 Body Lubricants
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Silver-mist chrome-plated 300 SS/A76 brass 360/B16 Black oxide and light oil-coated alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Green anodized aluminum 6061-T651/B11 Black oxide and light oil-coated alloy steel/ANSI 18.3 Silver-mist chrome-plated brass 360/B16 Silver-mist chrome-plated brass 345/B453 Glass-filled PTFE Silver-mist chrome-plated brass 345/B453 Buna N S17400 SS/A564S; 316 SS/A479M, L Buna N Silver-mist chrome-plated brass 377/B283 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM Hard chrome-plated S17400 SS/A564S; Hard chrome-plated 316 SS/A479M, L Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS/A182 316 SS/A479S, M; 316 SS/B783L
Sintered 316 SS 316 SS/A479
Lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide-based; silicone-based
Wetted components listed in italics. Anaerobic-type adhesive. Straight and double-pattern M series valves.
Testing
Every Swagelok S, M, and L series metering valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Every Swagelok L series metering valve is tested for bubbletight seat shutoff at 100 psig (6.8 bar) differential pressure. Every Swagelok 31 series needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min.

Swagelok metering valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. Swagelok metering valves with other end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6; special cleaning and packaging are available as an option.
Metering Valves

S Series
Maximum Flow0.004 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min
(std L/min)
S, M, and L Series
For brass S, M, and L series valves, replace SS with B. Example: B-SS1
Straight Pattern
E

(L/min)
0.04 (1.1) 0.10 (.8) 0.0 (5.6)
0.01 (0.03) 0.0 (0.07) 0.04 (0.15)
Factory Flow Setting

The handle stop is set at 4 to 10 std cm3/min with 15 psig (1.0 bar) inlet pressure.
G panel hole
Adjusting stop to lower flow setting

can damage valve and stem tip.
SWAGELOK
M Series
SWAGELOK
Maximum Flow0.03 Cv
(std L/min)
B M series valve shown. S series0.16 in. (4.1 mm) maximum panel thickness. M and L series0.13 in. (3.3 mm) maximum panel thickness.

(L/min)
0.33 (9.3) 0.90 (5.4) 1.5 (4.4)
0.09 (0.34) 0.1 (0.79) 0.30 (1.1)
31 Series
For angle-pattern 31 series valves, add -A to the ordering number. Example: SS-31RS4-A
Straight Pattern
L Series
0.180
Maximum Flow0.16 Cv
(std L/min)
(35.1)
1.38
0.160 0.140 0.120 0.100 0.080 0.060 0.040 0.020 0 0 2 4 6 8 10

(L/min)
.0 (56.6) 6.4 (181) 11.4 (33)
0.51 (1.9) 1. (4.5) 1.7 (6.4)
0.38 (9.6) max panel thickness
open 0.59 (15.0) panel hole
(91.4)
3.60
(7.7)
1.09
31 Series
Maximum Flow0.04 Cv
(std L/min)
0.38
(9.6)

(L/min)
0.45 (1.7) 1. .1

(33.9) (59.4)
0.1 (0.45) 0.8 (1.0) 0.40 (1.5)
Metering Valves
Dimensions
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size
Angle Pattern
E
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number A B D E S series straight pattern 1/16 in. SS-SS1 1.56 (39.6) 1/8 in. SS-SS 1.90 (48.3) Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-SS4 .04 (51.8) tube fittings 0.38 .34 (59.4) 1.90 (48.3) 3 mm SS-SS3MM (9.6) 6 mm SS-SS6MM .04 (51.8) Male VCR 1/4 in. SS-SVR4 .06 (5.3) fittings 1/16 in. Swagelok 1/8 in. tube fittings 1/4 in. 3 mm Male NPT/ Swagelok 1/8 in. tube fitting S series angle pattern SS-SS1-A 3. (81.8) 0.81 (0.6) SS-SS-A 3.3 (84.3) 0.98 SS-SS4-A 3.36 (85.3) 1.0 SS-SS3MM-A 3.3 (84.3) 0.98 (4.9) SS-SM-S-A 3.07 (78.0) 0.88 (.4)
(4.9) (5.9)
0.45
(11.4)
0.9
(3.4)
G panel hole N
0.99 (5.1)
0.38
(9.6)
0.45
(11.4)
0.9
(3.4)
0.98 (4.9)
1/8 in. Swagelok 1/4 in. tube fittings 3 mm 6 mm 1/8 in. Male NPT 1/4 in. Female NPT 1/8 in. Male VCR 1/4 in. fittings 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3 mm 6 mm 1/8 in. 1/4 in.
M series straight pattern SS-MG .0 (51.3) SS-4MG .0 (55.9) SS-3MG-MM .0 (51.3) SS-6MG-MM .0 (55.9) .78 (70.6) 1.50 (38.1) SS-MG SS-4MG SS-MG4 SS-MGVR4 M SS-MA SS-4MA SS-3MA-MM SS-6MA-MM SS-MA SS-4MA SS-MA1 SS-MA4 1.96 (49.8) 1.94 (49.3) .06 (5.3) series angle pattern 3.30 (83.8) 1.01 3.39 (86.1) 1.10 3.30 (83.8) 1.01 3.39 (86.1) 1.10 3.04 (77.) 0.75 3.7 (83.1) 0.98 (4.9)
0.50
(1.7)
0.58
(14.7)
1.56
(39.6)
(5.7) (7.9) (5.7) (7.9) (19.1)
Swagelok tube fittings Angle Pattern

(35.1)
Male NPT
0.50
(1.7)
0.58
(14.7)
1.07
(7.)
1.0 (5.9)
1.38
Male NPT/ Swagelok 1/8 in. tube fitting Female NPT 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 6 mm
3.04 (77.) 1.01 (5.7) 0.75 (19.1) 3.6 (8.8) 0.97 (4.6)
H open 0.59 (15.0) panel hole
Swagelok tube fittings Male NPT
L series straight pattern SS-4L .34 (59.4) SS-6L .46 (6.5) .8 (71.6) SS-6L-MM .34 (59.4) SS-4L .00 (50.8) L series angle pattern SS-4LA SS-6LA-MM 3.77 95.8)
1.13
(8.7)
0.58
(14.7)
1.6
(3.0)
1.17 (9.7)
1.13
(8.7)
0.58
(14.7)
1.04
(6.4)
B
End Connections Type Size Swagelok tube fitting
Ordering Number
A B 31 series .40
(61.0)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B1 B2 C 1.16

(9.5)
D 1.09
(7.7)
H 3.60
(91.4)
0.38
(9.6)
B1
1/4 in. SS-31RS4 6 mm SS-31RS6MM 1/8 in. SS-31RF 1/4 in. SS-31RF4
1.0
(30.5)
1.48
(37.6)
1.54
(39.1)
.00
(50.8)
1.00
(5.4)
Female NPT
0.91
(3.1)
1.00
(5.4)
.06
(5.3)
1.03
(6.)
1.8 (3.5)
3.80
(96.5)
Metering Valves

Cross Pattern
S and M Series
Fluid flows between side ports
G panel hole E
around stem in any stem position.

Flow through branch port can be
A N
metered in both directions.
S series valve shown. E
Double Pattern
S and M Series
Inlet valve handle can be set and
G panel hole A N
locked at desired maximum flow.

Outlet valve handle can be used for
fine flow control up to the preset maximum of the inlet valve.
M series valve shown.

Select an ordering number. For brass valves, replace SS with B. Example: B-SS-X Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
Valve Pattern Cross Double Cross Double End Connections Type Swagelok tube fitting Size 1/8 in. 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Cv 0.004 0.001 0.03 0.06 Ordering Number SS-SS-X SS-SS-D SS-4MX SS-4MGD Dimensions, in. (mm) A S series 3.3 (84.3) .34 (59.4) M series Swagelok tube fitting 3.39 (86.1) .78 (70.6) 1.10 (7.9) .0 (55.9) 0.50 (1.7) 0.58 (14.7) 1.07 (7.) 1.56 (39.6) 1.96 (49.8) 1.90 (48.3) 0.98 (4.9) 0.38 (9.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.9 (3.4) B D E G N
Metering Valves

Vernier Handle
S, M, and L Series
(1.0)
Adjustable-Torque Handle
S Series
(1.)
Slotted Handle
S and M Series
B
0.83
0.48
open
(46.)
1.8
open
(36.1)
1.4
A open
M series valve shown.
Helps ensure repeatable flow
Enhances control for setting flows. Features PTFE packing and two top-
Allows flow setting adjustment with a
adjustments.
Provides readings accurate to
screwdriver.
Is for use in installations where
mounted torque adjustment screws.

Is available in stainless steel material
1/5 turn. To order, add -VH to an S series ordering number or -MH to an M or L series ordering number. Examples: SS-SS1-VH SS-MG-MH Vernier Handle Kits Kits contain all parts necessary to add a vernier handle to an existing valve.
Series S M L Kit Ordering Number NY-5K-S NY-M-K6
handle is not easily accessible.

Is available in stainless steel material
on stainless steel valves and in chrome-plated brass on brass valves, as standard. To order, add -OH to the ordering number. Example: SS-SS1-OH Adjustable-Torque Handle Kits Kits contain all parts necessary to add an adjustable-torque handle to an existing valve.
Valve Material Stainless steel Brass Kit Ordering Number SS-5K-S-OH B-5K-S-OH
on stainless steel valves and in chrome-plated brass on brass valves, as standard.

Allows valve to be panel mounted
without removing handle. To order, add -SL to the ordering number. Example: SS-SS1-SL
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series S M A 1.4 (36.1) 1. (31.0) B 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (1.7)
Slotted Handle Kits
Colored Handles
31 Series
Black phenolic handles are standard. To order colored phenolic handles, add a handle color designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-31RS4-BL Handle Kits Handle kits contain handle, brass insert, and instructions. To order a black phenolic handle, use kit ordering number PH-5K-14K-BK. For colored phenolic handles, replace -BK in the kit ordering number with a handle color designator. Example: PH-5K-14K-BL
Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red Yellow Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW
Kits contain all parts necessary to add a slotted handle to an existing valve.
Series S M Kit Ordering Number SS-5K-S-SL SS-M-K5-SL

Stem O-Ring Materials
S, M, and L Series
Buna N O-rings are standard for brass valves; fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard for stainless steel valves. For an optional stem O-ring, add the desired O-ring material designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-SS1-BU
O-ring Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Kalrez Neoprene Designator -BU -EP -VI -KZ -NE Temperature Rating F (C) 10 to 300 (3 to 148) 10 to 400 (3 to 04) 0 to 300 (17 to 148) 10 to 50 (3 to 11)

All Series
Swagelok metering valves with VCR end connections are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order special cleaning and packaging for metering valves with other end connections, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-SS1-SC11

High-Temperature Stem Packing Material

31 Series
Grafoil packing extends the temperature rating to 850F (454C) and requires fluorinated tungsten disulfide-based lubricant. To order, add -G to the ordering number. Example: SS-31RS4-G Stem Packing Kits PTFE and Grafoil packing kits are available. Kits include packing, lubricant, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
Stem Packing Material and Kit Ordering Number PTFE T-9K- Lubricant: nickel antiseize, hydrocarbon carrier Grafoil G-9K- Lubricant: fluorinated tungsten disulfide-based

Swagelok, VCR, WhiteyTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. KalrezTM DuPont 003, 004, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 008, R8 MS-01-14
www.swagelok.com
Modular Instr ume ntation Syste m
Ke nmac Se r ie s Modula r 85 S yste m

Provides a standard modular instrumentation interface and mounting system:
2- and 4- valve pressure and differential pressure manifolds Instrument monoflanges for isolation and vent functions Single and double purge blocks Electric heaters, steam trace blocks, seal pots, filling connectors, protective
shade, mounting plates, and ancillary components (transmitter not included)
Modular Instrumentation System
Modular 85 System
A standard series of 2- and 4- valve manifolds for pressure
and differential pressure measurement

Instrument monoflanges provide isolation and vent
functions for local instrument or indicator mounting

Metal-to-metal seals and parallel threads in accordance
with BS 2779 (ISO 228/1)

Allows pre-assembly that can reduce field installation time
and cost
Hydrostatic test certificates complete with full chemical
and physical material certifications available
Instrument Manifolds
Features
Bar handle on isolating valves Equalizing and venting valves fitted with antitamper feature All valves color coded and labeled PTFE stem packing is standard Process and vent connection: 1/4 in. ISO parallel thread Factory installed and tested Swagelok tube fittings with
locking pin and gasket available

Pressure-temperature ratings:
6000 psig (413 bar) at 100F (37C) 4000 psig (275 bar) at 400F (204C)
Unless otherwise noted, metal components supplied for the
(G1/4) with locking pin feature

Supplied complete with locking pins, gaskets, and four
modular 85 system are manufactured from 316 stainless steel. Other materials may be specified upon request.
Instrument mounting face in accordance with DIN 19213 Cast manifold body CF8M/ASTM A351
M8 mounting plate screws
Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and locknut
Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation
Stem threads above packing protected from system media
Safety back seating needle seals in fully open position and provides blowout protection
Choice of packing and bonnet seal materials For isolating or throttling of media flow; nonrotating, hardened needle for positive shutoff
Four-Valve Differential-Pressure Manifold
Two isolating, one equalizing, and one venting valves Direct mounting to instrument on 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) centers
Instrument Side I = Isolating E = Equalizing V = Venting V E I I
and mounting plate

Installation allows vent port to be higher than the process
ports for liquid service, and below for gas service; manifolds marked for liquid and gas service
Bolt and seal kit K7179 included with each
manifold purchased
Description G1/4 (as shown) G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings installed G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fittings installed Bolt and seal kit Ordering Number M5156S0001 M5156S0003 M5156S0005 K7179
Process Side
Four-Valve Differential-Pressure Manifold

For applications where cross-contamination of process
fluids is not permitted

Two isolating and two venting valves Direct mounting to instrument on 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) centers
Instrument Side I = Isolating V = Venting I V V I
and mounting plate

ports for liquid service, and below for gas service; manifolds marked for liquid and gas service
manifold purchased
Process Side
Description G1/4 G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings installed G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fittings installed (as shown) Bolt and seal kit Ordering Number M5705S0001 M5705S0003 M5705S0005 K7179
Two-Valve Pressure Manifold
For absolute and gauge pressure transmitters One isolating and one venting valve Installation allows vent port to be higher than the process
Instrument Side I = Isolating V = Venting V I
port for liquid service, and below for gas service; manifolds marked for liquid and gas service
manifold purchased
Process Side
Two-Valve Differential Pressure Manifold

For low-pressure applications and level measure on
atmospheric tanks with differential pressure cell

One isolating and one venting valve Direct mounting to instrument on 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) centers,
and mounting plate

port for liquid service, and below for gas service; manifolds marked for liquid and gas service
manifold purchased
Process Side
Pressure Manifold
For direct connecting to pressure transmitters or pressure
gauges and mounting plates

One isolating and one venting valve Integral gauge adapter, 1/2 in. NPT for 360 positioning,
1/2 in. ISO parallel thread (G1/2) option
Description G1/4 (process), 1/2 in. positionable male NPT (instrument) G1/4 (process), 1/2 in. positionable female NPT (instrument) G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. male NPT) (as shown) G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. female NPT) Ordering Number M5713S1001
Process Side
M5713S2001
M5713S1003
M5713S2005
Instrument Monoflanges
Two-Valve Isolating and Venting Instrument Monoflange Gauge Block
Suitable for direct connection to horizontal and vertical pipes 1/2 in. ASME B16.5 flange Low-pressure version: 150/300/600 lb rating
V I Process Side I = Isolating V = Venting
1440 psig (99.2 bar) at 100F (37C) 1030 psig (71.0 bar) at 400F (204C) High-pressure version: 900/1500/2500 lb rating 6000 psig (413 bar) at 100F (37C) 4280 psig (294 bar) at 400F (204C)
Integral gauge adapter, 1/2 in. female NPT or 1/2 in.
ISO parallel thread (G1/2) for 360 positioning

Supplied complete with 0.08 in. (2.0 mm) thick mounting
Description G1/4 (1/2 in. female NPT) G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. female NPT) G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. female NPT) G1/4 (1/2 in. female NPT) G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. female NPT) G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fitting installed (1/2 in. female NPT) Ordering Number M7101S1212C M7101S1212H Low-Pressure Monoflanges
strip for name plate, fixing screws

Factory installed and tested Swagelok tube fittings with

Vent connection: 1/4 in. ISO parallel thread (G1/4) or 1/4 in.
NPT option
Cast manifold body CF8M/ASTM A351
M7101S1212K
High-Pressure Monoflanges M7101S2212C M7101S2212H
M7101S2212K
Purge Blocks
Features
Complete with one venting valve, one integral filter, one or Process connections: 10 mm or 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting Purge supply and vent connection: 1/4 in. ISO parallel
two soft-seated check valves

Suitable for connecting to instrument impulse lines on
2 1/8 in. (54 mm) centers

Brackets and fixing bolts supplied for mounting to 2 in.
thread (G1/4) or 1/4 in. NPT option with locking pin and gasket
pipe stand
Venting valve fitted with antitamper feature Integral filter screen: 750 m. Check valve spring: nickel alloy
Factory installed and tested Swagelok tube fittings with
locking pin and gasket
Self-Venting Single Purge Block

For pressure measurement and differential pressure measurement
Description Ordering Number G1/4 inlet and vent G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube M5709S3001 fitting installed outlet G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok M5709S3003 tube fittings installed G1/4 inlet and vent G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube M5709S5001 fittings installed outlet G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok M5709S5005 tube fittings installed
To Impulse Line V = Venting
V Purge Side
Self-Venting Double Purge Block

Suitable for differential pressure measurement and for connecting to instrument impulse lines on 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) centers To Impulse Line V = Venting
Description Ordering Number G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok M5708S3003 tube fittings installed G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok M5708S5005 tube fittings installed
Purge Side
Accessories
Seal Pot with Integral Vent Valve
Liquid chamber of 50 cm3 Valve fitted with high-temperature
Filling Connector
With integral, soft-seated
nonreturn valve
Suitable for direct bolting to
graphite packing and seals

Process and vent connections:
the flange face of pressure transmitters

6 mm or 1/4 in. tube fitting with
1/4 in. ISO parallel thread (G1/4) with locking pins and gasket
retained cap
Supplied complete with 2
Factory-installed and tested Swagelok
7/16-20 bolts, PTFE flange seal, plug, and retaining chain 6000 psig (413 bar) at 100F (37C) 4000 psig (275 bar) at 400F (204C)
tube fittings with locking pin and gasket available
Description G1/4 with 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting installed G1/4 with 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting installed Ordering Number K5837S0003 K5837S0005
Description G1/4 ISO parallel thread G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings installed G1/4 with 10 mm with Swagelok tube fittings installed Ordering Number S5986S0001 S5986S0003
S5986S0005
Mounting Plate Assembly (Type A)

Allows mounting of manifold,
Electric Heater Block

For use where heating of manifolds and instrument bodies
is required for winterization purposes

Nominal voltage: 110/230 V (ac) Power: 250 W max Area classification: Zone 1 Gas Group
connection box, or air filter/ regulator, nameplate, and protection shade to a 2 in. pipe stand
Supplied complete with fasteners,
clamps, and brackets

Drilled to suit all components as indicated in the modular
IIA, IIB, and IIC

Type of Protection: Explosion proof
system, process connections, and steam tracer tubing, etc. Ordering number: K5839S
ATEX certified II 2 G EExd IIC T3 and T4 Ordering number: S900001
Steam Tracing Block

For use where heating of transmitter
Mounting Plate Assembly (Type B)

Allows mounting of manifold,
bodies and manifold is required.

Bolts directly to manifold body 10 mm or 3/8 in. Swagelok tube
connection box, or air filter/ regulator, and nameplate to a 2 in. pipe stand
Supplied complete with fasteners,
fitting
clamps, and brackets

Drilled to suit all components as
290 psig (19.9 bar) at 410F (210C)

Factory-installed and tested Swagelok tube fittings with
indicated in the modular system, process connections, and steam tracer tubing, etc. Ordering number: K6261S
Description G1/4 ISO parallel thread G1/4 with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings installed G1/4 with 10 mm Swagelok tube fittings installed Ordering Number K5829S1001 K5829S1003 K5829S1005
Accessories
Port Protector
1/4 in. ISO parallel thread (G1/4) plug
Protective Shade
For extra protection of
with integral 750 m filter screen Ordering number: K5840S
electronic instruments against environmental conditions

Mounts directly to mounting
plate assembly
Purge Orifice Nipple

Restricted orifice nipple and data
Fire-retardant fiberglass
tag plate supplied for 6 and 10 mm; 1/4 and 3/8 in. tubing
Specify orifice size requirements
construction with stainless steel fasteners Ordering number: K5983-06
when ordering
Tube Size 6 mm 10 mm 3/8 in. 1/4 in. Ordering Number K5981S-1M K5981S-3M K5981S-3D K5981S-2D
Antitamper Key
Fits all vent and equalizing valves
within the system

Order separately
Ordering number: S004468
Manifold Kidney Flange Blank

For protecting process lines when
removing the differential pressure instrument. Ordering number: K5982S
Tube Fittings
See the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140, for information.
Tubing
For information on Swagelok stainless steel or super duplex tubing, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Packing adjustment may be required during the service life of the valve. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 2006, R4 MS-02-208
www.swagelok.com
Modular Plat for m Compone nts (MPC)

Sur face -Mount Compone nts, Substrate s, Ma nifolds, Mounting Compone nts, a nd As se mbl y Ha rdwa re
MPC Se r ie s
ANSI/ISA 76.00.02-compliant design, 38.2 mm (1.5 in.) platform Easy to configure, assemble, and maintain Valves, filters, regulators, and pressure gauges, as well as
adapters for additional surface-mount components
Modular Platform Components (MPC)
Contents Modular Platform Systems, 4 Swagelok Surface-Mount Components

Ball Valves, 42T Series, 9
Swagelok Surface-Mount Components

Toggle Valves, OG Series, 11
Typical Swagelok MPC Assembly, 4
ANSI/ISA 76.00.02 Specification, 5

Check Valves, CH Series, 10 Pneumatically Actuated Shutoff Valves, T2A Series, 12
Technical Data, 5
Swagelok MPC Assembly Process, 6
Swagelok MPC System Configurator, 8
Metering Valves, M Series, 10
Pneumatically Actuated Switching Valves, PSV Series, 13
NonrotatingStem Needle Valves, D Series, 11 Proportional Relief Valves, R Series, 14
Contents Swagelok Surface-Mount Components

Springless Diaphragm Valves, DP Series, 15

Back-Pressure Regulators, KCB Series, 19
Swagelok Substrate and Manifold Components

Substrate Channels, 22
Stream Selector Valves, SSV Series, 16
Tee-Type Filters, TF Series, 20
Substrate Flow Components, 22
Manifold Flow Components, 24 Surface-Mount Adapters, 21
Pressure Gauges, M Model, 17
Manifold Channels, 25
Substrate Caps, 21 PressureReducing Regulators, KCP Series, 18
Seals, Mounting Blocks, Assembly Hardware, 26
Modular Platform Systems

The Swagelok modular platform component system is a system for use within process analyzer, sample-handling, and fluid distribution systems. The Swagelok MPC system includes a complete selection of MPC series components and a complementary configuration tool called the MPC System Configurator (page 8).
Swagelok Modular Platform Components

The components consist of a variety of Swagelok surface-mount components, which are ANSI/ISA 76.00.0-compliant, and a large selection of substrate and manifold flow components, which create the fluid distribution system. Standard O-rings provide leak-tight seals between each surface-mount and substrate flow component and between the substrate and manifold flow components. An MPC series assembly provides a compact fluid-distribution system with a reduced footprint for efficient use of component space. Modular technology allows the user to customize each system for a specific application and reduces installation and maintenance time. Surface-mount components can be serviced easily from the top of the assembly without disturbing any other components. Surface-mount components, adapters, and caps are interchangeable on any surface-mount position because of the modularity of components and the use of the standard ANSI/ISA 76.00.0 interface.
Typical Swagelok MPC Assembly

The system below consists of a five-position assembly with a manifold layer assembled below Position . At this position, flow is diverted in two directionsup to the surface-mount component and down into the manifold layer. Position 1 -port check valve Position 2 Position 3 -port -port pneumatically toggle valve actuated valve Position 4 -port filter Position 5 -port metering valve
O-ring seal Flow components
Surfacemount layer
Substrate layer O-ring seal Foot Flow Path Foot Manifold layer
To manifold layer, where flow runs perpendicular to the substrate layer
ANSI/ISA 76.00.02 Specification

Modular Component Interfaces for Surface-Mount Fluid Distribution Components
This specification establishes properties and physical dimensions that define the interface for surface-mount fluid distribution components with elastomeric sealing devices used within the process analyzer and sample-handling systems. The interface controls the dimensions and location of the sealing surfaces to allow changes of just one element of the system without modification of the entire system. This is what makes the system modular from both a design and a maintenance standpoint. The Swagelok modular platform component system meets all the requirements of this specification for the 8. mm (1. in.) footprint. The standard dimensions of a typical Swagelok MPC series surface-mount component are shown at right.
38.2 mm (1.5 in.) Platform
Flange thickness 0. (6.) Center line of adjacent surface mount 1. (8.9) Mounting holes through holes, 0.09 (.) dia Center port 0.11 (.8) dia max Side port 0.11 (.8) dia max Port location 0.0 (7.7) typ
Mounting hole location 0.9 (1.1) typ
Side port 1 0.11 (.8) dia max
Flange size 1.0 (8.) square
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Technical Data
Surface-Mount Components
See specific component for pressure-temperature ratings.
Testing
Every Swagelok MPC surface-mount component is factory
Substrate and Manifold Components

Pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperature rating: Standard fluorocarbon FKM seals: 0 to 00F
tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or at its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Special testing options are available on request. Contact
(6 to 18C)
Optional Kalrez seals: 0 to 00F (6 to 18C)
your authorized Swagelok representative.
See specific component for wetted materials of construction.

All Swagelok MPC components are cleaned and packaged
in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.

Special cleaning options are available on request. Contact
Substrate and Manifold Components

Wetted materials: 16L SS (ASTM A76 or A79) and
your authorized Swagelok representative.
fluorocarbon FKM or optional Kalrez

Nonwetted materials: aluminum (alloy 0-T1,
Assembly Process
For information on the assembly of Swagelok MPC
hard-coat anodized) and 00 series stainless steel
components, see pages 6 and 7.

For detailed assembly and service instructions, see MPC
Seals, Mounting Blocks, and Assembly Hardware

See page 6.
Series Modular Platform Components Assembly and Service Instructions, MS-1-9.
Swagelok MPC Assembly Process

A typical MPC system consists of three layersa substrate layer, a manifold layer, and a surface-mount layer.
The substrate layer provides flow through the The surface-mount layer provides shutoff,
system from one component to another.

The manifold layer provides flow from one substrate
flow control, pressure regulating, and filtering capabilities for the system fluid. The complete MPC fluid system is assembled with simple mounting components and standard hardware.
to another. Together, the substrate and manifold layers form the conduit for the system fluid, and they can be customized for any flow configuration.
Substrate Layer
The substrate layer provides the main flow path between the surface-mount components.
The substrate layer consists of a substrate
channel and a variety of drop-in substrate flow components.

The substrate layer is built by aligning locator pins
Substrate flow components
on the flow components into locating holes in the channel. This feature locks flow components into the channel, making assembly fast and error free.
Substrate channels are available in a variety of
Locator pin Substrate channel
lengths to accommodate up to 1 surface-mount positions.
Manifold Layer
The manifold layer provides the flow path between two or more parallel substrates.
The manifold layer consists of a manifold
channel and a variety of drop-in manifold flow components.

The manifold layer is also built with locator pins on
Manifold flow components Locator pin
the flow components that align in locating holes in the channel.

Manifold channels are available in a variety
of lengths to accommodate up to six parallel substrates.
Manifold channel
Substrate-Manifold Assembly
The substrate layer bolts over the manifold layer to create the substrate-manifold assembly.
An O-ring (not visible) provides a leak-tight seal
Substrate layer
between the substrate and manifold layers.
Manifold layer
Swagelok MPC Assembly Process

Swagelok MPC Components
Swagelok surface-mount components are designed, manufactured, and tested to the same stringent quality requirements as conventional Swagelok fluid system components. They provide reliable Swagelok performance and value in a compact, ANSI/ISA 76.00.0-compliant interface. Swagelok substrate flow components are made by butt welding two elbows together, elimininating entrapment zones and the need for O-ring seals between positions. This exclusive Swagelok design requires fewer O-ring seals than other modular platform systems, easing assembly and reducing the number of potential leak points.
Surface-Mount Layer
Surface-mount components, which feature all porting through a single surface, bolt to the top of the substrate-manifold assembly to complete the fluid system.
O-rings provide leak-tight seals between surface-
Surface-mount component O-rings
mount components and the substrate layer.

Surface-mount components are available in a variety
of shutoff, switching, metering, pressure regulating, and filtering styles with - or -port bodies.
The porting and bolt pattern are open architecture,
compliant with ANSI/ISA 76.00.0.
Surface-Mount Adapters and Caps

Adapters and caps are designed to bolt to the top of the substrate layer with the same footprint as a surface-mount component.
Adapters provide a direct connection to the
substrate layer and are available in several fitting styles and sizes to provide ANSI/ISA 76.00.0 interface for a variety of fluid control components.
Caps cover and protect unused positions on the
Adapters
Caps
substrate layer.
O-rings provide leak-tight seals.
Mounting Blocks
Feet bolt to each end of the substrate layer,
Foot
providing panel-mount capability.

Supports bolt underneath the substrate layer,
providing mid-line support for longer substrates.

Spacer feet bolt two substrate assemblies
Spacer foot Support
together end to end, maintaining standard surface-mount spacing between them.
Swagelok MPC System Configurator

MPC system component selection and the assembly process are simplified with the use of the MPC System Configurator, a free Windows-based software program that can be downloaded from www.swagelok.com. The Configurator allows the user to create a customized system by defining, placing, and connecting surface-mount components on a layout grid. Once the layout is complete, the Configurator identifies the MPC series flow connectors (including substrates, manifolds, seals, and assembly hardware) that are necessary to build the complete system. A bill of material is generated for ease of ordering components, and an assembly diagram is produced to facilitate assembly.
Configurator Screen with Layout
Features
Standard Windows menus and icon buttons Easy drag-and-drop interface for creating the layout Expandable grid for unlimited configurations Bill of material with itemized part numbers, exportable to
a text file for editing or e-mailing

Overall size and system weight calculations included Assembly diagram (not shown) for easy reference
For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Swagelok
Item Number
Channel
Qty
Part Number
Part Description
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 Flow Components 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Hardware 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 1 1 16 2 2 6
A-MPC-MB-02 A-MPC-SB-01 A-MPC-SB-02 A-MPC-SB-05 6L-MPC-MS-MEME 6L-MPC-WS-DD 6L-MPC-WS-LGS4 6L-MPC-WS-SHLG 6L-MPC-WS-SHS4 6L-MPC-WS-SHSH 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB01SH A-MPC-MH-FOOT A-MPC-MH-SPCR A-MPC-MH-SPRT KZ-7075-OR-006 SS-MPC-MH-0500 SS-MPC-MH-1000 SS-MPC-MH-LBAR
Manifold Length 2 Substrate Length 1 Substrate Length 2 Substrate Length 5 Manifold Elbow - Manifold Elbow Drop Down Long - 1/4 in. Swagelok Short - Long Short - 1/4 in. Swagelok Short - Short Short - Tube1 - Short End Foot Spacer Foot Middle Support Kalrez O-Ring 006 10-32 x 1/2 in. Screw - 20 per bag 10-32 x 1 in. Screw - 10 per bag Lock Down Bar
Bill of Material
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Surface Mount 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 1 1 1 2 1 PGI-40M-PG100-CAQX SS-MPC-PSV-3-SC SS-MPC-42T-2-KZ SS-MPC-DM-2-S4 SS-MPC-ODK-2-KZ SS-SSV-K-2-MPC Inches 10.800 6.400 5.27 2-Port Gauge, 0 to 100 psi 3-Way Side Pneumatic Valve 2-Port 42T Manual Ball Valve - Kalrez 2-Port Adapter, 1/4 in. Swagelok 2-Port D (Kalrez Seals) 2 Stream SSV (Kalrez Seals) cm 27.432 16.256 13.39
Envelope Dimensions & Weight Weight: 7 lbs 3 kg Length: Width: Height:
Actual O-Ring Qty: 16 Actual 2 inch Bolt Qty: 4 Actual 1 inch Bolt Qty: 12
Actual 1/2 inch Bolt Qty: 26

Ball Valves, 42T Series
Features
Pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperature rating: 6 to 00F ( to 18C) Flow coefficient: 0.11 On-off (-way) and switching (-way) valves Wetted components: CFM body 16 SS ball stem PFA packing powdered metal 00 series SS side rings and side discs fluorocarbon FKM side plug seal
(8.6)
1.
(8.6)
1.
silicone-based lubricant
Switching (3-Way) Valve Flow Paths

Common Center Port
(1.6)
.0
(1.6)
.0
On-Off (2-Way) Valve
Switching (3-Way) Valve
1 (side port)
3 (side port)
1 (side port)
3 (side port)
2 (common center port)
2 (common center port) Flow is from port 2 to port 1
For additional information, see the Swagelok One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-0-1.
Flow is from port 2 to port 3
Common Side Port
1 (common side port) 2 (center port)
3 (side port)
1 (common side port) 2 (center port)
3 (side port)
Flow Configuration On-off (-way) Switching (-way) Common Port Center Side Ordering Number SS-MPC-T- SS-MPC-XT- SS-MPC-XTL--SC Orifice in. (mm) 0.090 (.) 0.090 (.) 0.00 (1.0)
Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of fluorocarbon FKM side plug seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-T--KZ
10

Check Valves, CH Series
Features
Pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperature rating: 0 to 00F
O-ring
(17 to 18C)
Flow coefficient: 0.09 Wetted components: CFM body;
Spring Poppet Poppet stop Body
16 SS poppet and poppet stop; 0 SS spring; fluorocarbon FKM seals
Cracking pressure: 0 to psi (0 to
(.7)
1.01
0.0 bar); minimum reseal pressure: 6 psi (0.1 bar) back pressure
For additional information, see the Swagelok Check ValvesC, CA, CH, CP, and CPA Series catalog, MS-01-176.
2-Port Valve SS-MPC-CH- 3-Port Valve SS-MPC-CH-
Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-CH--KZ
Metering Valves, M Series
Features
(17 to 18C)
Flow coefficient: 0.0 max Wetted components: CFM body;
16 SS stem; fluorocarbon FKM stem seals

Knurled, vernier, and slotted handles
available
Handle Knurled Vernier Slotted 2-Port Valve SS-MPC-M- SS-MPC-M--SL 3-Port Valve SS-MPC-M- SS-MPC-M--SL A, in. (mm) .6 (67.) .6 (67.)
SS-MPC-M--MH SS-MPC-M--MH . (8.)
Kalrez Seal Option

A open
Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-M--KZ
Knurled Handle
Vernier Handle
Slotted Handle
For additional information, see the Swagelok Metering Valves S, M, L, and 31 Series catalog, MS-01-1.
11

Nonrotating Stem Needle Valves, D Series
Features
Pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperature rating: 0 to 00F (17 to 9C) with PCTFE
stem tip; 0 to 00F (17 to 18C) with PEEK stem tip

Flow coefficient: 0.10 Wetted components: CFM body; 16 SS stem;
fluorocarbon FKM stem seal; PCTFE or PEEK stem tip

Nonrotating stem provides repetitive shutoff.
Stem Tip PEEK
open
(1.)
Visual Indicator Option

3-Port Valve
2-Port Valve
PCTFE SS-MPC-ODK- SS-MPC-ODK- SS-MPC-ODP- SS-MPC-ODP- Color Blue Green Orange Red Yellow Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW
.0
An optional red band under the handle provides visual indication of the open position. To order, add -PI to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-ODK--PI Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-ODK--KZ Multiple Options Add designators in alphabetical order. Example: SS-MPC-ODK--KZ-PI-YW
Handle Color Option Standard handle color is black. To order an optional color, add a color designator to the ordering number.
For additional information, see the Swagelok Nonrotating Stem Needle ValvesD Series catalog, MS-01-.
Example: SS-MPC-ODK--YW
Toggle Valves, OG Series
Features
Pressure rating: 00 psig (0.6 bar) Temperature rating: 0 to 00F (17 to 9C) Flow coefficient: 0.11 Wetted components: CFM body; 16 SS stem; PTFE stem tip;
fluorocarbon FKM stem seal

Toggle handle is rotatable to desired position. Handle positioner option allows fixed positioning of handle. Spring-return pin option helps prevent handle from being locked open.
(1.6)
Handle Positioner Option To order, add -TGP to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-OG--TGP Spring-Return Pin Option To order, add -SPR to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-OG--SPR Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-OG--KZ Multiple Options Add designators in alphabetical order. Example: SS-MPC-OG--GR-KZ-TGP
.0
2-Port Valve SS-MPC-OG-

.9
3-Port Valve SS-MPC-OG- Color Blue Green Orange Red Yellow Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW
open
(9.)
(7.7)
Handle Color Option Standard handle color is black. To order an optional color, add a color designator to the ordering number.
1.9
closed
Example: SS-MPC-OG--RD For additional information, see the Swagelok Toggle ValvesOG and 1G Series catalog, MS-01-.
1

Pneumatically Actuated Shutoff Valves, T2A Series
Features
Flow coefficient: 0.07 Wetted components: CFM body; 16 SS stem;
fluorocarbon FKM seals

Optional indicator switch and visual indicator for normally
closed valves
Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open
all models
(0.)
Working Pressure psig (bar) 1 (8.6) 1 (8.6) 00 (0.6)
Actuator Pressure psig (bar) 0 to 100 (.8 to 6.8) 0 to 100 (.8 to 6.8) 6 to 100 (. to 6.8)
Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT
(17 to 18)
1.99
Cycle life may be reduced when operated below 0F (6C).
Normally Closed Model
Normally Open Model
Component Grade/ASTM Specification Aluminum with black anodize (normally closed); aluminum with green anodize (normally open) S17700 SS (normally closed); 0 SS (normally open) 316 SS/A276 or A479 Fluorocarbon FKM CF3M/A351 PTFE-based
1 4 2 3 4 2 5 3
1 Cap
2 Spring 3 Stem
4 O-rings 5 Body Lubricant
Ordering Information 5
Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open 2-Port Valve 3-Port Valve SS-MPC-TA--C SS-MPC-TA--C SS-MPC-TA--O SS-MPC-TA--O
Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM O-ring material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-TA--C-KZ
Options for Normally Closed Valves

Visual Indicator Indicator Switch
Indicator Switch The indicator switch provides electronic indication of the valves open position.
Single-pole, single-throw switch
Visual Indicator The visual indicator provides visual indication of the valves open position with a pop-up button. To order, add -PI to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-TA--C-PI Multiple Options Add designators in alphabetical order. Example: SS-MPC-TA--C-KZ-PI
rated at 1/ A for 11 V (ac) resistivity.

in. (61 cm) wire lead with inline clip.
To order, add M to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-TA--CM
1

Pneumatically Actuated Switching Valves, PSV Series
Features
Flow coefficient: 0.06 Wetted components: CFM body; 16 SS stem and bonnet
cylinder; fluorocarbon FKM seals

Optional visual indicator
Working Pressure psig (bar) 00 (0.6) Temperature F (C) 0 to 00
(17 to 18)
Actuator Pressure psig (bar) 0 to 100

(.8 to 6.8)
Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT
Component 1 Cap 2 Spring 3 Piston 4 Bonnet cylinder 5 O-rings 6 Stem 7 Body Lubricant
Grade/ASTM Specification Aluminum S17700 Aluminum 316 SS/A276 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS/A276 CF3M/A351 PTFE-based
(76.)
.86
2 3
Common Port Ordering Number SS-MPC-PSV--CC SS-MPC-PSV--SC
Switching Valve Flow Paths

Common Center Port
Bottom
COMMON
Center Side
Flow Schematics Normal Actuated
Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM O-ring material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-PSV--CC-KZ Visual Indicator Option The visual indicator provides a visual indication of the open position of the valve with a pop-up button. To order, add -PI to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-PSV--CC-PI Multiple Options Add designators in alphabetical order. Example: SS-MPC-PSV--CC-KZ-PI
NO
NC
Flow is from common to NO
Flow is from common to NC
Visual Indicator
Common Side Port

Bottom
COMMON
Flow Schematics Normal Actuated
NO
NC
Flow is from common to NO
Flow is from common to NC
1

Proportional Relief Valves, R Series
Features
Valves OPEN when system pressure
reaches the set pressure and CLOSE when system pressure falls below the set pressure.
Wetted components: 16 SS bonnet, body, stem, seat,
insert, and retainers

fluorocarbon FKM and PTFE-
coated fluorocarbon FKM and 16 SS seals

molybdenum disulfide-based dry
film and paste and silicone-based lubricants Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 Series)
Swagelok proportional relief Some system applications
(1 to 1C)
One spring for the full set pressure
valves should never be used as code safety relief devices. require relief valves to meet specific safety codes. The system designer and user must determine when such codes apply and whether these relief valves conform to them. relief valves are not Safety Accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. a period of time, initial relief pressure may be higher than the set pressure.
range (10 to psig [0.68 to 1. bar]) High-Pressure Valves (R3A Series)
Pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Temperature rating: to 0F
.8
(1)
( to 11C)
Multiple springs for a selection of set
pressure ranges
Swagelok proportional
Applications
R series relief valves are proportional relief valves that open gradually as the pressure increases. Consequently, they do not have a capacity rating at a given pressure rise (accumulation), and they are not certified to ASME or any other codes.
For valves not actuated for
(0.6)
1.60
Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 Series) Valve contains spring; set pressure must be adjusted. Select a valve ordering number and corresponding adapter ordering number. High-Pressure Valves (R3A Series) Valve does not contain spring. Select a valve ordering number, corresponding adapter ordering number, and spring kit ordering number. RA series spring kits include a spring, label, 0 SS lock wire with seal, spring support, and installation instructions. Add the spring designator for the desired set pressure range to basic kit ordering number 177-R3A-K1-. Example: 177-RA-K1-A For additional information, see the Swagelok Proportional Relief ValvesR Series catalog, MS-01-11.
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Swagelok tube fittings Size 1/ in. 6 mm Ordering Number SS-RLS SS-RLS6MM Orifice in. (mm) 0.19
(.8)
Adapter Ordering Number SS-MPC-DM--T SS-MPC-DM--T6MM
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Swagelok tube fittings Size 1/ in. 6 mm
Ordering Number SS-RA SS-6RA-MM

(.6)
Adapter Ordering Number SS-MPC-DM--T SS-MPC-DM--T6MM
Set Pressure Range psig (bar) 0 to 0 (. to .1) 0 to 70 (.1 to 1.7) 70 to 100 (1.7 to 10)
Spring Designator A B C
Spring Color Blue Yellow Purple
Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez material is available in place of wetted fluorocarbon FKM seal material. To order, add -KZ to the ordering number. Example: SS-RLS-KZ
1

Springless Diaphragm Valves, DP Series
Pneumatically Actuated Low-Pressure Valves
Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT
Features
Pressure rating: 0 psig (17. bar) Temperature rating: 0 to 10F
(17 to 6C)
Flow coefficient: 0.10 Wetted components: 16L SS body;
Elgiloy diaphragms; PCTFE seat

(7.9)
.87
pneumatic actuators (normally open actuators are marked with a green ring on top of the cylinder)
Actuation Mode Normally closed Normally open 2-Port Valve SS-MPC-DP--C SS-MPC-DP--O 3-Port Valve SS-MPC-DP--C SS-MPC-DP--O
Manual High-Pressure Valves

Features
(17 to 6C)
Flow coefficient: 0.10 Wetted components: 16L SS body;
Directional Handle
Elgiloy diaphragms; PCTFE seat

Directional handlequarter-turn
actuation with visual indication of open and closed position

Integral lockout handlequarter-turn
actuation with lockout safety feature to prevent actuation (can be locked in the closed position only)
Handle
open
(89.) (80.8)
2-Port Valve SS-MPC-DPH- SS-MPC-DPHL-
3-Port Valve SS-MPC-DPH- SS-MPC-DPHL-
.18
Directional Integral lockout
.1
open
(7.9)
.8
closed/ locked
Handle Color Options Standard handle color is black. To order an optional color, add a color designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-MPC-DPHL--RD
Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow
Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -WH -YW
For additional information, see the Swagelok Springless Diaphragm Valves for High PerformanceDP Series catalog, MS-01-16.
16

Stream Selector Valves, SSV Series
Features
Pressure rating: 250 psig (17.2 bar) Temperature rating: 20 to 300F (6 to 148C) Flow coefficient: 0.20 in all streams Wetted components: CF3M body; 316 SS flange and insert;
fluorocarbon FKM seals; PTFE-based lubricant

Double block-and-bleed functionality in each module Distinctive vented air gap prevents mixing of pneumatic
actuator supply and system fluid

Compact design saves cabinet space and reduces internal
volume
Actuation pressure range: 40 to 150 psig (2.8 to 10.3 bar) Atmospheric reference vent option ensures a constant
sample pressure in repetitive analyses.

Cutaway, 1 SSV Module, Access Ports Not Shown
(105)
Number of Streams 2 3
4.12
Ordering Numbers With Atmospheric SSV System Reference Vent SS-SSV-V-2-MPC SS-SSV-V-3-MPC SS-SSV-V-4-MPC SS-SSV-V-5-MPC SS-SSV-V-6-MPC SS-SSV-V-7-MPC SS-SSV-V-8-MPC SS-SSV-V-9-MPC SS-SSV-V-10-MPC SS-SSV-V-2-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-3-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-4-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-5-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-6-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-7-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-8-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-9-MPC-ARV SS-SSV-V-10-MPC-ARV
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Inlet
Outlet
Vented Air Gap Threaded Test Port Option

Bottom, 3 SSV Modules Shown
Conventional mounting holes, 4 shown, not used with MPC configuration
A 1/8 in. female NPT threaded test port is available for the vented air gap. To order a Swagelok SSV system with threaded test ports, insert T into the valve ordering number as shown. Example: SS-SSV-VT-2-MPC Kalrez Seal Option Kalrez seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order, replace V in the valve ordering number with K. Example: SS-SSV-K-2-MPC Simriz Seal Option Simriz seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order, replace V in the valve ordering number with Z. Example: SS-SSV-Z-2-MPC
Temperature F (C) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (20) 300 (148) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (20) 250 (121) Working Pressure psig (bar) 100 (6.8) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 200 (13.7) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) Simriz Seals
MPC mounting holes, 6 shown Inlets Outlet
Kalrez Seals
For additional information, see the Swagelok Stream Selector System for Process Analyzer Applications SSV Series catalog, MS-02-326.
17

Pressure Gauges, M Model
Features
0 mm (1 1/ in.) dial size Miniature size allows placement in compact spaces. Snap-in lens saves space compared to twist-on lens.
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Movement Lens
(9.9)
Material 316 SS 0 SS Stainless steel Acrylic Aluminum
1.7
Dial Pointer
(70.9)
.79
For additional information, see the Swagelok Pressure Gauges, Industrial and ProcessPGI Series catalog, MS-0-170.
Technical Data
Ranges
Compound gauges Vacuum to 1 psi through vacuum
Dial Range in psi, 1/4 in. Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connection Insert a dial range designator from the table below into basic ordering number PGI-40M-______-CAQX Example: PGI-0M-PC15-CAQX
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Vacuum 0.0 in. Hg Maximum 1 0 60 1 0 60 0 100 00 00 00 1000 Designator PC1 PC0 PC60 PG1 PG0 PG60 PG100 PG00 PG00 PG00 PG1000 0
Dial Range in bar, 6 mm Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connection Insert a dial range designator from the tables below into basic ordering number PGI-40M-______-CASX Example: PGI-0M-BC.6-CASX
Dial Range, bar (primary scale: bar; secondary scale: psi) Minimum Vacuum 1 bar Maximum 0.6 1. 1 . 10 16 60 Designator BC.6 BC1. BC BG1 BG. BG BG10 BG16 BG BG60
to 60 psi
Vacuum to 0.6 bar through vacuum
to bar
Positive-pressure gauges 0 to 1 psi through 0 to 1000 psi 0 to 1 bar through 0 to 60 bar
Accuracy
. % of span (ASME B0.1
Grade C, EN 87-1 Class ., JIS B70 Class .) Configuration

Center-back mount
End Connections
1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter
Operating Temperature
Ambient 0 to 10F (0 to 60C) Media 1F (100C) maximum
A surface-mount adapter is required. Ordering number: SS-MPC-DM-2-S6MM
A surface-mount adapter is required. Ordering number: SS-MPC-DM-2-S4
See Surface-Mount Adapters, page 1, for more information.
Temperature Error
0. % for every 18F (10C)
temperature change from 68F (0C)
18

Pressure-Reducing Regulators, KCP Series
Features
Maximum inlet pressure: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Pressure control ranges: 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar)
through 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar)

Maximum operating temperature: 176F (80C) Flow coefficients: 0.02 and 0.06 Wetted components: 316 SS body, seat retainer, piston S17400 SS poppet 302 SS poppet spring PCTFE seat fluorocarbon FKM or Kalrez seals PTFE-based lubricant
(84.1)
3.31
For additional information, see the Swagelok Pressure Regulators catalog, MS-02-230.
Build a KCP series pressure regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
KCP 1
4 Body Material
M A
1 = 316 SS
5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 25 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 3.4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar) L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) 6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
8 Ports M = MPC platform 9 Seat, Seal Material A = PCTFE, fluorocarbon FKM B = PCTFE, Kalrez 10 Flow Coefficient (Cv)
12 Handle
1 = Thumbwheel
13 Isolation Valves
0 = No valves
14 Cylinder Connections
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
1 = 0.02 2 = 0.06
0 = No gauges
16 Options
11 Sensing Mechanism
P = 316 SS piston Port Configurations

2-Port Regulator Designator
F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) J = 500 psig (34.4 bar) L = 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
For better resolution and control, select a
pressure that closely matches system pressure.
0 = No options
3-Port Regulator
Designator
7 Port Configuration
Inlet Outlet
5, 6 See Port Configurations, right.
Outlet
Outlet
Inlet
19

Back-Pressure Regulators, KCB Series
Features
Maximum inlet pressure: equal to pressure control range Pressure control ranges: 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar)
through 0 to 0 psig (17. bar)

Maximum operating temperature: 176F (80C) Flow coefficient: 0.10 Wetted components: 16 SS body, seat retainer, piston fluorocarbon FKM or Kalrez seat and piston seal PCTFE retainer seal PTFE-based lubricant
(8.1)
.1
For additional information, see the Swagelok Pressure Regulators catalog, MS-0-0.
Build a KCB series back-pressure regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
KCB 1
4 Body Material
M A
1 = 16 SS
5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 0 psig (0 to . bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 0 psig (0 to 17. bar) 6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
9 Seat, Seal Material A = Fluorocarbon FKM, PCTFE B = Kalrez, PCTFE 10 Flow Coefficient (Cv)
13 Valves
0 = No valves
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
= 0.10
0 = No gauges
16 Options
P = 16 SS piston
12 Handle
0 = No options
0 = Not applicable (equal to pressure control range)

1 = Thumbwheel

8 Ports M = MPC platform
Port Configurations
2-Port Regulator Designator 3-Port Regulator Designator
Outlet Inlet
Inlet
Inlet
Outlet
0

Tee-Type Filters, TF Series
Features
(17 to 18C)
Wetted components: 16L SS body;
16 SS bonnet, elements, and gasket (silver plated); 0 SS spring

Replaceable elements in a variety of
nominal pore sizes

Element Nominal Pore Size m 0. 7 1 60 90 0, 10, 0, 0 0.8 () 1.
()
Inlet Pressure, psig (bar) 5 (0.34) 0.1 (.6) 0.9 (11) 0. (1) 0.61 (17) 0.76 (1) 10 (0.68) 0.0 (.6) 0.9 (16) 0.8 () 0.9 (6) 1.
()
Pressure Drop, psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 0.0 (0.1) 0.1 (0.9) 0.19 (0.71) 0.1 (0.79) 0.6 (0.98) 0.8 (1.0) 50 (3.4) 0.10 (0.7) 0.0 (1.1) 0. (1.) 0.7 (1.7) 0.8 (.1) 0.6 (.) 100 (6.8) 0.1 (0.) 0. (1.) 0.9 (.) 0.66 (.) 0.8 (.1) 0.88 (.) Water Flow, U.S. gal/min (L/min)
15 (1.0) 0.6 (7.) 0.77 (1) 1.1 1. 1. 1.6

(1) () () ()
(.9)
1.7
Air Flow, std ft/min (std L/min)
For additional information, see the Swagelok FiltersFW, F, and TF Series catalog, MS-01-9.
Element Nominal Pore Size m 0. 7 1 60 90 0 10 0 0
2-Port Filter Sintered Elements SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF-- SS-MPC-TF--7 SS-MPC-TF--1 SS-MPC-TF--60 SS-MPC-TF--90 SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF--10 SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF--0
3-Port Filter SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF-- SS-MPC-TF--7 SS-MPC-TF--1 SS-MPC-TF--60 SS-MPC-TF--90 SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF--10 SS-MPC-TF--0 SS-MPC-TF--0
Strainer Elements
1

Surface-Mount Adapters
Female NPT
Features
Material: CFM Surface-mount component designed with a vertical port on
the top of the adapter and a choice of one or two ports to the substrate layer below
Vertical ports available with Swagelok tube fitting, female
NPT, or tube stub connections
Swagelok Tube Fitting Vertical Port Tube Stub Type Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Tube stub Size 1/8 in. 1/ in. mm 6 mm 1/8 in. 1/ in. 1-Port 2-Port 1-Port Adapter SS-MPC-DM-1-S SS-MPC-DM-1-S SS-MPC-DM-1-SMM SS-MPC-DM-1-S6MM SS-MPC-DM-1-F SS-MPC-DM-1-F 2-Port Adapter SS-MPC-DM--S SS-MPC-DM--S SS-MPC-DM--SMM SS-MPC-DM--S6MM SS-MPC-DM--F SS-MPC-DM--F SS-MPC-DM--T 1.0 (8.) SS-MPC-DM--T6MM Height in. (mm) 1.0 (0.) 1.0 (.0) 1.0 (0.) 1.0 (.0) 0.78 (19.8)
1/ SS-MPC-DM-1-T 0.0 in. 6 SS-MPC-DM-1-T6MM 1.0 mm
Substrate Caps
Features
Material: CFM Surface-mount component designed to cover an unused
position on the substrate layer

Choice of a zero-port cap to block flow across the surfaceZero-Port 2-Port
mount position, or a two-port cap to provide a flow path across the surface-mount position
Zero-Port Cap SS-MPC-DM-0-CAP 2-Port Cap SS-MPC-DM--CAP


Substrate Channels
Number of SurfaceMount Positions 1 6 7 Ordering Number A-MPC-SB-01 A-MPC-SB-0 A-MPC-SB-0 A-MPC-SB-0 A-MPC-SB-0 A-MPC-SB-06 A-MPC-SB-07 A in. (mm) .60 (66.0) .1 (10) .66 (1) 7.19 (18) 8.7 (1) 10. (9) 11.8 (00) Number of SurfaceMount Positions 8 9 10 11 1 1 1
1. (8.9)
Ordering Number A-MPC-SB-08 A-MPC-SB-09 A-MPC-SB-10 A-MPC-SB-11 A-MPC-SB-1 A-MPC-SB-1 A-MPC-SB-1
A in. (mm) 1. (8) 1.8 (76) 16. (17) 17.9 () 19. (9) 1.0 () . (7)
(1.)
(8.)
1.1
A 0.
Substrate Flow Components

Surface-Mount Connectors
Description Cutaway Port 1 Port 2 Side Ordering Number 6L-MPC-WS-SHSH in. (mm) 1. (1.0) A
Port 1 0. A Port
(10.7)
Center Side Center and manifold Manifold
6L-MPC-WS-SHLG
6L-MPC-WS-SHDT
1. (8.9)
6L-MPC-WS-SHDE
Center Center and manifold Manifold Center and manifold Manifold
6L-MPC-WS-LGLG
Center
6L-MPC-WS-LGDT
6L-MPC-WS-LGDE 1.8 (6.) 6L-MPC-WS-DTDT
Center and manifold
6L-MPC-WS-DTDE
Manifold
Manifold
6L-MPC-WS-DEDE


Substrate Flow Components

Substrate End Connectors
Description Port 1 Port 2 Side 1/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting Center Center and manifold Manifold Side 1/ in. Swagelok tube fitting Center Center and manifold Manifold Side mm Swagelok tube fitting Center Center and manifold Manifold Side 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting Center Center and manifold Manifold Ordering Number 6L-MPC-WS-SHS 6L-MPC-WS-LGS 6L-MPC-WS-DTS 6L-MPC-WS-DES 6L-MPC-WS-SHS 6L-MPC-WS-LGS 6L-MPC-WS-DTS 6L-MPC-WS-DES 6L-MPC-WS-SHSMM 6L-MPC-WS-LGSMM 6L-MPC-WS-DTSMM 6L-MPC-WS-DESMM 6L-MPC-WS-SHS6MM 6L-MPC-WS-LGS6MM 6L-MPC-WS-DTS6MM 6L-MPC-WS-DES6MM .01
(1.1)

(.)
D Port 1
B 1.6
(9.6)
A B
Port 0.
(10.7)
0.0 .01
(1.1)
1.86
(7.)
(1.7)
Side 1.71
(.)
1.6
(9.6)
0.60 .01
(1.1)
Center
1.86
(7.)
(1.)
1.71
(.)
1.6
(9.6)
Center and Manifold
0.0 .01
(1.1)
1.86
(7.)
(1.7)
Manifold
1.71
(.)
1.6
(9.6)
0.60 1.86
(7.) (1.)
Port 1 0.
Port 0.
(10.7)
0.0
(7.6)
(10.7)

Number of Surface-Mount Positions Skipped 1 6 7 8
Drop-Down Connector and Plug

Cutaway Description Drop-down connector for substrate to manifold Plug for manifold port with no substrate component above Ordering Number 6L-MPC-WS-DD
Ordering Number 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB01SH 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB01LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB0LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB0LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB0LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB0LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB06LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB07LG 6L-MPC-WS-SHTB08LG
A in. (mm) .7 (69.8) .06 (77.7) .9 (117) 6.1 (1) 7.6 (19) 9.18 () 10.7 (7) 1. (10) 1.8 (1)
6L-MPC-WS-DP
Used with SSV stream selector valve outlet.


Manifold Flow Components

Tee Connectors
Elbow-to-Elbow
Number of SurfaceMount Positions 6 7 8 9 10
(1.0)
1.60 (0.6) 0.1
1.60 (0.6)
Ordering Number 6L-MPC-MS-MEME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT01ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT06ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT07ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT08ME
A in. (mm) .00 (0.8) .60 (91.) .0 (1) 6.80 (17) 8.0 (1) 10.0 () 11.6 (9) 1. () 1.8 (76)
Elbow-to-Swagelok Tube Fitting

1.60 (0.6)
1.8 (.1)
Number of SurfaceMount Positions 1 6 7 8 9 10
Basic Ordering Number 6L-MPC-MS-ME 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT01 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT0 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT06 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT07 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT08 6L-MPC-MS-MEMT09
in. (mm) 1.8 (0.1) .18 (80.8) .78 (11) 6.8 (16) 7.98 (0) 9.60 () 11. (8) 1.8 () 1. (66) 16.0 (06)
(1.0)
0.1
To order, add a Swagelok tube fitting size designator to a basic ordering number. Example: 6L-MPC-MS-MES4
Swagelok Tube Fitting Size 1/8 in. 1/ in. mm 6 mm
Designator S S SMM S6MM
D in. (mm) 0.0 (1.7) 0.60 (1.) 0.0 (1.7) 0.60 (1.)
Swagelok Tube Fitting-to-Swagelok Tube Fitting

Number of SurfaceMount Positions 1 6 7 8 9 10 Basic Ordering Number 6L-MPC-MS-___MT01 6L-MPC-MS-___MT0 6L-MPC-MS-___MT0 6L-MPC-MS-___MT0 6L-MPC-MS-___MT0 6L-MPC-MS-___MT06 6L-MPC-MS-___MT07 6L-MPC-MS-___MT08 6L-MPC-MS-___MT09 6L-MPC-MS-___MT10
1.8 (.1)
1.8 (.1)
A in. (mm) .01 (76.) .61 (117) 6.1 (18) 7.81 (198) 9.0 (9) 11.0 (79) 1.6 (0) 1. (61) 1.8 (01) 17. ()
To order, insert a Swagelok tube fitting size designator as shown and add the same designator to a basic ordering number.
Swagelok Tube Fitting Size 1/8 in. 1/ in. mm 6 mm
Designator S S SMM S6MM
D in. (mm) 0.0 (1.7) 0.60 (1.) 0.0 (1.7) 0.60 (1.)
Example: 6L-MPC-MS-S4MT01S4


Manifold Channels
Number of SurfaceMount Positions 1 6 7 8 9 10 Ordering Number A-MPC-MB-01 A-MPC-MB-0 A-MPC-MB-0 A-MPC-MB-0 A-MPC-MB-0 A-MPC-MB-06 A-MPC-MB-07 A-MPC-MB-08 A-MPC-MB-09 A-MPC-MB-10 A in. (mm) 1.9 (0.) .19 (81.0) .79 (1) 6.9 (16) 7.99 (0) 9.9 () 11. (8) 1.8 () 1. (66) 16.0 (06)
(1.7)
1.60 (0.6)
(7.9)
1.10
0.0
Parallel Manifold Channels

Number of SurfaceMount Positions 6
1.10
1. (8.9)
Ordering Number A-MPC-PB-0 A-MPC-PB-0 A-MPC-PB-0 A-MPC-PB-06
in. (mm) .0 (109) .8 (18) 7.6 (187) 8.89 (6)
(1.7)
(7.9)
0.0
Parallel Manifold Components

Number of SurfaceMount Positions 6
Port 1 A Port
Ordering Number 6L-MPC-MS-METB01ME 6L-MPC-MS-METB0ME 6L-MPC-MS-METB0ME 6L-MPC-MS-METB0ME
in. (mm) .0 (88.9) .0 (18) 6.6 (167) 8.09 (0)
(1.0)
0.1
6
Seals, Mounting Blocks, and Assembly Hardware

Seals
Item Description O-ring Ordering Number FC-7-MPC-006 (0 per bag) KZ-707-OR-006 (quantity of 1) Function Seals the surface-mount component to the substrate and manifold Material Fluorocarbon FKM (7 durometer) Kalrez 707 compound
AGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS SUPPORT
Mounting Blocks
Item
N-ELD-766
Description Support
Ordering Number A-MPC-MH-SPRT
Function Bolts to the bottom of a substrate channel to provide midline support to a channel with five or more surface-mount positions Bolts to each end of the substrate channel to provide mounting capability to the base plate Bolts two inline substrates together to maintain standard surface-mount spacing
Material
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS FOOT
N-ELD-767
Foot
A-MPC-MH-FOOT
Aluminum alloy 0-T1
Spacer foot
A-MPC-MH-SPCR
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS LOCKDOWN
Assembly Hardware
N-ELD-762
Item
N-ELD-763-12
Description Lockdown bar Hex socket cap screw, 10- 0.0 in. Hex socket cap screw, 10- 1.00 in.
Ordering Number SS-MPC-MH-LBAR
Function Holds down the substrate components at each end of the substrate channel Secures the substrate assembly to the manifold assembly and secures the surface-mount component to the substrate assembly Secures the substrate assembly to the foot
Material 00 series stainless steel
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS Hex socket CAP SCREW 10-32 x 1.00 in.
SS-MPC-MH-000 (0 per bag)
16 series stainless steel
SS-MPC-MH-1000 (10 per bag)
7
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company WindowsTM Microsoft Corp. ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals KalrezTM DuPont SimrizTM Freudenberg-NOK 2007, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A. GLI February 2008, R5 MS-02-185
www.swagelok.com
Modular Sur face-Mount Compone nts and Se als
1.5 in. (38.1 mm) C-seal modular design Valves: manual and pneumatic diaphragm and bellows-sealed designs Regulators: manual and preset, high-flow models Gauges: ultrahigh-purity Bourdon tube pressure gauges Gaskets: C-seal style for 1-, 2-, and 3-port configurations
Modular Surface-Mount Components and Seals
Low-Pressure Diaphragm Valves, DP Series
Features
Pressure rating: 145 psig (10 bar) Temperature rating: 10 to 150F (3 to 65C) Directional handlequarter-turn actuation with visual
indication of open and closed position

Toggle handlespring-loaded toggle with lockout
capability (can be locked in the closed position only)

Integral lockout handlequarter-turn actuation with
lockout safety feature to prevent actuation (can be locked in the closed position only)
Interchangeable pneumatic and manual actuators
Directional Locking
Ordering Numbers Manual Actuators Directional Integral lockout Toggle Pneumatic Actuators Normally closed Normally open 2-Port 6LVV-MSM-DP--P 6LVV-MSM-DPL--P 6LVV-MSM-DP--P 2-Port 3-Port 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPL-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPT-3-P 3-Port
6LVV-MSM-DP--P-C 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P-C 6LVV-MSM-DP--P-O 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P-O
Handle Color Options

Standard handle color is blue. To order an optional color, add a color designator to the ordering number. Pneumatic Example: 6LVV-MSM-DPT--P-RD
Handle Color Designator Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow -BL -GR -OG -RD -WH -YW
Toggle
Indicator Switch Option

To order a normally closed pneumatically actuated valve with an indicator switch, add M to the ordering number. Example: 6LVV-MSM-DP--P-CM
For additional information, see the Swagelok Springless Diaphragm Valves for High PerformanceDP Series catalog, MS-01-165.
Bellows-Sealed Metering Valves, BM Series
Features
Pressure rating: 700 psig (48. bar) Temperature rating: 0 to 600F (8 to 315C) Micrometer handle for precise, repeatable flow settings
Ordering Numbers 2-Port 6LVV-MSM-BM- 3-Port 6LVV-MSM-BM-3
For additional information, see the Swagelok Bellows-Sealed Metering ValvesBM Series catalog, MS-01-3.
Modular Surface-Mount Components and Seals
High-Flow Regulators, HF Series
Features
Inlet pressure rating: 1000 psig (68.9 bar) for preset models; 500 psig (34.4 bar)
for manual models

Outlet pressure rating: vacuum to 150 psig (10.3 bar) for preset models; 100 psig
(6.8 bar) for manual models

Temperature rating: 10 to 150F (3 to 65C) Flow rates up to 00 std L/min Preset models can be factory-charged to a specific delivery pressure or set up
for remote adjustment of delivery pressure.

Manually adjustable models are offered with a choice of three spring ranges for
delivery pressure.
Regulators For additional information, see the Swagelok Compact, High-Flow Gas RegulatorsHF Series catalog, MS-01-156, for preset models, and the Swagelok High-Flow Manual Gas RegulatorsHF Series catalog, MS-0-157, for manual models.
Basic Ordering Number Model Preset Manual 2-Port SS-MSM-HFD3B-PXX SS-MSM-HFM3B-P
Spring Kits for Manual Models

Pressure Range psig (bar) Vacuum to 5 (1.7) 5 to 50
(0.34 to 3.4)
Kit Ordering Number 177-13K-HFM-A 177-13K-HFM-B 177-13K-HFM-C
For a complete ordering number, change XX to
a factory-set outlet pressure of 10, 20, 30, or 50 psig (0.69, 1.3, .0, or 3.4 bar). Example: SS-MSM-HFD3B-P10 o order a complete assembly, order a T regulator and a spring kit. See Spring Kits for Manual Models table at right for ordering numbers.
10 to 100
(0.68 to 6.8)
Pressure Gauges, UltrahighPurity, PGU Series
Features
Pressure range: 30 in. Hg to maximum pressures listed below Temperature rating, ambient: 40 to 140F (40 to 60C);
temperature rating, media: 40 to 1F (40 to 100C)

Accuracy: ASME B40.1 Grade B ( 3 % / % / 3 % of span)
The selected dial range should be approximately two times the system working pressure, and the system working pressure should be in the middle half (5 to 75 %) of the dial range. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative if the system working pressure will exceed 75 % of the dial range.
Maximum Pressure psig (bar) 30 () 60 (4) 100 (6.8) Ordering Number 2-Port PGU-40-PC30-C-4MSM PGU-40-PC60-C-4MSM PGU-40-PC100-C-4MSM Maximum Pressure MPa 0. 0.4 0.7 Ordering Number 2-Port PGU-40-MC0-C-4MSM PGU-40-MC04-C-4MSM PGU-40-MC07-C-4MSM
For additional information, see Swagelok Pressure Gauges, UltrahighPurity and Clean Dry AirPGU and PGC Series catalog, MS-0-163.
Gaskets and Gasket Assemblies

C-seal for a 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) modular system 316L stainless steel material of construction
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS N-ELD-759-A Helium leak-tight integrity to less than 1 3 10 GASKETS SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS C-RING GASKETS 9 3
Flow-Through Cap
Two-port surface mount cap provides continuous flow
across a surface mount position std cm /s

Pressure rating: N-ELD-792-A (06 bar) at 70F (0C) 3000 psig Orifice size: 0.16 in. (4.1 mm) Ordering number: 6LVV-MSM-CAP-2-P
C-ring Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and Gaskets are subject to change.
0.186 (4.7) 3-Port Surface Mount 1.50 1.50 Manifold Cap
IGC II Integrated Gas Components

For a complete selection of IGC II integrated gas components, including substrates, manifolds, assembly hardware, and mounting accessories, see the Swagelok IGC II Integrated Gas Components, Substrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, and Assembly Hardware catalog, MS-03-134.
(38.1)
(38.1)
IGC II System Configurator

1.188
(30.)
2-port Surface Mount
Substrate Cap
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS MANIFOLD C-RING SS-IGC II-MH-07
N-ELD-0847
Mass Flow Controller 0.50
Drop-Down Gasket Assembly
The IGC II System Configurator is a free Windows-based software program that can be downloaded from www. swagelok.com. It simplifies the layout, selection, ordering, and assembly of IGC II integrated gas components. It automates the process of converting a conventional gas distribution design into a IGC II-based design, and produces a bill of materials and an assembly diagram.
(1.7)
Gasket Description 3-port surface mount -port surface mount Mass flow controller Manifold cap Substrate cap Drop-down gasket assembly
Ordering Number 01097
Assembly Requirements 1 for each 3-port surface-mount component 1 for each -port surface-mount component for each mass flow controller 1 for each manifold cap 1 for each substrate cap 1 for each dropdown component
01096 01098 01105 0110 SS-IG-MH-07
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange surface-mount component parts with those of other manufacturers.
Swagelok, IGCTM Swagelok Company WindowsTM Microsoft Corp. 008 Swagelok Company September 008, R3 MS-0-135-E
www.swagelok.com
Multihead (MHSU)
I Swages Swagelok tube fitting ferrules onto tubing
prior to assembly
I Is available in two unit sizes, with a choice of interchangeable
fractional or metric tooling for: 1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing and tube adapters 1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing and tube adapters
I Reduces makeup torque and installation time
Features
I Preswages Swagelok ferrules onto tubing I Provides Swagelok tube fitting connections that are 100 %
Technical Data
I DimensionsMHSU case I Height22 in. (55.9 cm) I Width24 in. (61.0 cm) I Depth8.75 in. (22.2 cm) I Weight I Up to 1 in. (25 mm) MHSU in case with tooling kit and
gaugeable upon initial installation. Use MHSU gap inspection gauges supplied with the unit.
I Is available in two unit sizes, with a choice of interchangeable
fractional or metric tooling for: 1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing and tube adapters 1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing and tube adapters
I Places no initial strain on nut or fitting body threads or on
support base40 lb (18.1 kg)

I 1 in. (25 mm) and over MHSU in case with tooling kit
body seal surfaces

I Must be used to install 1 14, 1 12, and 2 in. and 28, 30, 32,
and support base55 lb (24.9 kg)

I Construction I High-strength stainless steel tooling for durability and
38, and 50 mm Swagelok tube fittings

I Is standard with a tube marking feature to indicate when
tube is properly bottomed in the unit

I Is available with a support base I Fits neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case I Reduces assembly and installation time and operator error.
corrosion resistance
Components
MHSU
I Multihead hydraulic swaging unit I Hydraulic hose2 ft (0.6 m) with all units except 1 in.
(25 mm) and over unit without support base, which contains 6 ft (1.8 m) hose
I Retaining ring pliers I Safety glasses I Gap inspection gauges I Chamfer block (Up to 1 in. [25 mm] sizes only) I Operating instructions I Carrying case
Tooling Kits
I Die head sets and MHSU gap inspection gauges for
Swagelok tube fitting sizes:

I Fractional, up to 1 in.1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, and 1 in. I Fractional, 1 in. and over1, 1 14, 1 12, and 2 in. I Metric, up to 25 mm 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 20, 22,
and 25 mm
I Metric, 25 mm and over25, 28, 30, 32, and 38 mm I 50 mm tooling available separately
Option
I Support base
Hydraulic Swaging Unit
Select an MHSU ordering number.
MHSU Ordering Number
Operating Instructions
MHSU ordering numbers include English instructions. For other languages, replace E with a language designator. Examples: MS-MHSU-U-C MS-MHSU-U-C-FKIT-M
Language Chinese French German Japanese Spanish Designator C F G J S
MHSU Only (Tooling Required, Ordering Numbers Below) MS-MHSU-U-E Up to 1 in. (25 mm) unit 1 in. (25 mm) and over unit MS-MHSU-O-E MHSU with Tooling Kit MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M Fractional, up to 1 in. Fractional, 1 in. and over Metric, up to 25 mm Metric, 25 to 38 mm MS-MHSU-O-E-FKIT-M MS-MHSU-U-E-MKIT-M MS-MHSU-O-E-MKIT-M
Support Base
Add -B to the ordering number. Examples: MS-MHSU-U-E-B MS-MHSU-U-FKIT-M-B
For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in./25 mm
and over unit and SAF 2507 tooling. The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under. 50 mm tooling available separately.
Tooling and MHSU Gap Inspection Gauges

Up to 1 in. / 25 mm
Size 1/2 in. 5/8 in. 3/4 in. 7/8 in. 1 in. 5/8 in. 3/4 in. 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Tooling Ordering Number Fractional MS-MHSUT-U-810-M MS-MHSUT-U-1010-M MS-MHSUT-U-1210-M MS-MHSUT-U-1410-M MS-MHSUT-U-1610-M Gap Inspection Gauge Ordering Number MS-MHSU-IG-810 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1
1 in. / 25 mm and Over

Size 1 in. 1 14 in. 1 12 in. 2 in. 25 28 30 32 38 50 mm mm mm mm mm mm Tooling Ordering Number Fractional MS-MHSUT-O-1610-M MS-MHSUT-O-2000-M MS-MHSUT-O-2400-M MS-MHSUT-O-3200-M Metric MS-MHSUT-O-25M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-28M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-30M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-32M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-38M0-M MS-MHSUT-O-50M0-M Gap Inspection Gauge Ordering Number MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2000-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2400-1 MS-MHSU-IG-3200-1 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 MS-MHSU-IG-28M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-30M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-32M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-38M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-50M0-1
Fractional, SAF 2507 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1010-M MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1010 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1210-M MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1210 Metric MS-MHSUT-U-12M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-14M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-15M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-16M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-18M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-20M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-22M0-M MS-MHSUT-U-25M0-M MS-MHSU-IG-810 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1
The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under. For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in./25 mm and over unit and
SAF 2507 tooling and gauges.
Accessories
Retaining Rings and Pliers
Unit Size Ordering Number Retaining Ring Up to 1 in./25 mm 1 in./25 mm and over MS-MHSU-N5000-200-H MS-MHSU-N5000-315-H
Retaining Ring Pliers Up to 1 in./25 mm 1 in./25 mm and over MS-MHSU-0504 MS-MHSU-0700
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2002, 2003 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL August 2003, R2 MS-02-154

Setup and Operating Instructions
Up to 1 in./5 mm MHSU with base
1 in./5 mm and over MHSU with base (also for use with 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 507TM super duplex fittings)
READ AND UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING THE MHSU. Definitions
Statements and symbols are used in this document to identify safety concerns. Read the definitions below before setting up and operating the MHSU. WARNING Statements that identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life. CAUTION Statements that identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the equipment or other property.
Safety Precautions
WARNING, EYE PROTECTION

Safety glasses must be worn when setting up and operating the MHSU. CAUTION Do not tamper with or alter any components of the MHSU.
CAUTION Return the MHSU to your independent Swagelok sales and service representative if any signs of hydraulic fluid leakage or malfunction occur. CAUTION Pumping after the indicator knob releases may cause over-swaging, which causes the tube to stick and may affect gaugeability.
Components (Unit with Body Die Heads and Base)

Hydraulic hand pump Pump bypass valve Indicator knob Retaining ring & Locating pin
Chamfer blocks
Gap inspection gauges
Safety glasses
Base
Die heads
MHSU hydraulic housing Retaining ring pliers
Setup
1. Remove the retaining ring from the hydraulic housing using the retaining ring pliers. See Fig. 1. CAUTION Use caution when releasing the retaining ring from the pliers.
Align grooves on housing and body die.
Step 5, Install
Step , Remove Step 1, Remove Step 6, Reinstall
Fig. Body Die Removal / Installation
Fig. 1 Retaining Ring Removal / Reinstallation
. Remove the previously installed die head from the hydraulic housing. See Fig. . 3. Select the appropriate size die head. 4. Check the die head piston for movement by depressing the piston before inserting the die head into the hydraulic housing.
5. Install the selected die head into the hydraulic housing and align the notch on the die head with the locating pin on the hydraulic housing. See Fig. . 6. Reinstall the retaining ring into the hydraulic housing using the retaining ring pliers. See Fig. 1. Note: Visually verify that the retaining ring is fully inserted into the hydraulic housing. 7. Refer to the Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU table in the Troubleshooting section for information on recommended tubing size.
Operation
1. Open the pump bypass valve by turning the handle counterclockwise at least 1/ to 1 turn. It may be necessary to first close the valve completely by turning the handle clockwise until it stops. . Prepare tube ends by deburring or using the Swagelok chamfer block as follows. Note: The chamfer block procedure should be followed when using up to and including one inch tubing. A. Cut tubing squarely. Use of a Swagelok tube saw guide is recommended. B. Remove any burrs. Use of Swagelok tube deburring tools is recommended. Note: Deburring is important for proper fitting function as well as for clean, leak-free systems. Burrs on the OD of the tubing could prevent the tube from being fully inserted through the nut, ferrules or against the shoulder of the fitting body. ID burrs could break off and cause damage in other parts of the system. C. For the up to and including one inch MHSU, use the chamfer blocks provided. Insert cut end of tubing into the chamfer block and while firmly holding the tubing, strike the chamfer block with a hammer to coin the end (as shown on the instruction decal in the MHSU case). D. If a file is used on the OD, make a 10 x 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) chamfer. 3. Insert tubing into the Swagelok end fitting to be pre-swaged. Disassemble the nut from the end connection, leaving the nut and ferrules on the tubing. The orientation of the nut, rear ferrule, and front ferrule should be as shown in Fig. 3. 5. Push the indicator knob forward until it snaps into place. The knob shoulder should be flush with the hydraulic housing. See Fig. 4.
Knob shoulder is flush with housing.
Fig. 4 Indicator Knob in Swaging Position
Note: If the indicator knob does not snap into place or is not flush with the housing the piston may not be fully retracted. This problem may be caused by the bypass valve being closed or by the piston binding. Do not proceed until unit is functioning properly. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for further assistance. 6. Close the pump bypass valve to the finger-tight position by rotating valve handle clockwise until it stops. 7. While holding the tubing against the piston shoulder, increase the hydraulic pressure by using the hand pump until the indicator knob is released. CAUTION Do not keep pumping after the indicator knob releases. Stop pumping immediately after the indicator knob releases. 8. Mark the tubing at the back of the nut. Note: This mark will be used later to ensure the nut has been sufficiently hand tightened when assembled to the fitting body. 9. Open the pump bypass valve by turning the handle 1/ to 1 turn counterclockwise. 10. Unthread the Swagelok nut and remove the preswaged assembly from the housing.
Fig. 3 Nut and Ferrule Orientation
4. Insert the tubing into the die head until it rests firmly against the piston shoulder. Tighten the nut until finger-tight and all die threads are covered by the nut.
11. Inspect the tube end for a radial indentation bottoming mark (see Fig. 5). This indentation indicates the tubing was properly bottomed in the MHSU. If there is not a visible indentation, the preswaged assembly should not be used.
Tube face Tube bottoming mark
Depending upon tube end squareness, the mark may be intermittent.
14. Mark the nut at the 6 o'clock position. Hold the fitting body stable and tighten the nut 1/ turn with a wrench. See Fig. 7.
Fig. 5 Tube Bottoming Mark
Fig. 7 Tighten Nut with Wrench
Note: The MHSU should only be used to preswage a set of ferrules one time. If the ferrules were insufficiently preswaged, they should be discarded and the process started again with a new set of ferrules. 1. Fittings over 1 in. or 5 mm only: Lubricant must be applied when installing Swagelok tube fittings in these sizes. A packet of lubricant is provided with the fitting. Apply the lubricant sparingly to the Swagelok tube fitting body threads. Apply a similar amount of lubricant to the rear surface of the back ferrule. 13. Install the preswaged assembly into the fitting body. Turn the nut onto the fitting body until it is finger-tight. See Fig. 6.
CAUTION Use the Swagelok MHSU gap inspection gauge to ensure the fitting has been sufficiently tightened.
Gauging Instructions
Position the Swagelok MHSU gap inspection gauge adjacent to the gap between the nut and body hex. See Fig. 8 If the gauge will not enter the gap, the fitting is sufficiently tightened. If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is required.
Fig. 8 Using MHSU Gap Inspection Gauge
Fig. 6 Installing Preswaged Assembly into Fitting Body
Note: The line marked on the tubing in step 8 should now be visible. If not visible, tighten the nut with a wrench until the line is visible.
Troubleshooting
1. If tubing is difficult to remove from the MHSU after preswaging, rock the tubing back and forth. Refer to the Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness table swaging tubing below the recommended minimum wall may result in tube sticking. CAUTION Do not rotate the tubing. . If the indicator knob does not release or oil is leaking, return the unit to your independent Swagelok sales and service representative. 3. If the die head piston is binding, contact your independent Swagelok sales and service representative. 4. If the Swagelok nut does not cover all of the die head threads, verify that the bypass valve is open and the piston is not binding in the body die. 5. If the pump fails to build pressure, check the oil level in the pump by removing the dipstick and checking for a proper amount of oil. Too much or too little oil will prevent the pump from operating properly. 6. The pump manufacturer specifies using 10W, AW-46 grade hydraulic oil or equivalent with an antifoaming additive. Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU CAUTION Use of tubing below the recommended minimum wall thickness may result in the tube sticking in the die head.
Fractional Tubing Tubing Wall, in. Tooling Size in. 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/ 0.083 0.095 Metric Tubing Tubing Wall, mm Tooling Size mm 1 14 15 16 18 0 5 8 30 3 38 50 . .5 . .0 .0 1.5 1.8 Steel Stainless Steel 1.5 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 Steel 0.049 Stainless Steel
0.065
SAF 2507 Super Duplex Fittings

1/4 through 1/ in. fittingsnot approved for use with MHSU 5/8 and 3/4 in. fittingsuse 1 in./5 mm and over MHSU with appropriate 5/8 and 3/4 in. super duplex dies
The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty Swagelok and its authorized distributors hereby warrant to the purchaser of their Products that the non-electrical components shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for the life of the Products. All electrical components installed in or on the Product are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for twelve months from the date of purchase. The purchasers remedies shall be limited to replacement and installation of any parts that fail through a defect in material or workmanship. All customer-specified components carry the applicable manufacturer's warranty. ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WARRANTY, OR LIABILITY RELATING TO THE CONDITION OR USE OF THE PRODUCT ARE SPECIFICALLY DISAVOWED, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL SWAGELOK AND ITS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER, OR ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
www.swagelok.com
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company SAF 507TM Sandvik AB 00, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A July 008, R4 MS-1-37
www.swagelok.com
Multipur pose Ball Valve s
SK Se r ie s
Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Temperatures from 40 to 302F (40 to 150C) High-flow capacity in a compact design 1/4 to 3/8 in. and 6 to 8 mm end connections 316 stainless steel construction
SK Series Ball Valves
Features
Directional handle offers quarter-turn operation indicates flow direction indicates open/closed position
O-ring stem seal requires no packing adjustment provides leak-tight seal to atmosphere
KOLEGAWS SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
Spring-loaded PEEK seats provide chemical compatibility provide leak-tight integrity in both lowand high-pressure systems
Stainless steel floating ball reduces wear and extends cycle life
Swagelok SK series ball valves offer low-torque, quarterturn operation in a compact design providing positive shutoff in applications up to 6000 psig (413 bar). Other features include:
Flow coefficients (Cv) of 0.9 to 1.4 Swagelok gaugeable tube fitting, NPT and ISO pipe, and
Low-temperature SK series valves are available. See page 5.
Temperature F (C) 0 (17) to 50 (11) 30 (150) Working Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 3000 (06)
Swagelok male VCO end connections

Standard panel mounting Bidirectional flow Field rebuildable with seal kit
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Pressure ratings of valves with VCO fitting end connections are based on the ratings of the mating fitting; see the Swagelok VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-8.
Testing
Every Swagelok SK series valve is factory tested in both flow directions with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All Swagelok SK series ball valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Special cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, is available as an option. See Process Options, page 4.
Important Information About Swagelok Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are designed to be used in a

Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Packing bolt 4 Packing bolt gasket 5 Stem thrust washer 6 Chamfered backup ring 7 Stem backup ring 8 Stem O-ring 9 Stem 10 Panel nut 11 Body 12 Ball 13 Seat (2) 14 Seat gland (2) 15 Seat backup ring (4) 16 Seat O-ring (2) 17 Seat spring (2) 18 End screw gasket (2) 19 End screw (2) Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricant Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Nylon with powdered metal 300 series SS insert S17400 SS / A564 316 SS / A479 Silver-plated 316 SS / A240 PEEK PEEK PTFE / D1710 Low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A479 Powdered metal 300 series SS / B783 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A276 PEEK 316 SS / A479 PTFE / D1710 Low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A240 Silver-plated 316 SS / A240 316 SS / A479 PTFE-based Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
1 2 3 4 6 8 5 7 9
10 11 12 14 16
17
19
13 15 18

End Connections Type Swagelok tube fitting Female NPT Female ISO Male NPT Male VCO fitting Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Ordering Number SS-4SKPS4 SS-4SKPS6 SS-4SKPS6MM SS-4SKPS8MM SS-4SKPF4 SS-4SKPF4RT SS-4SKPM4 SS-4SKPVCO4 Dimensions, in. (mm) Cv 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.3 1. 1. 1.1 0.9 0.188 (4.8) Orifice A 3.60 (91.4) 3.73 (94.7) 3.60 (91.4) 3.68 (93.5) .91 (73.9) .91 (73.9) 3.3 (8.0) 3.15 (80.0) B 1.80 (45.7) 1.86 (47.) 1.80 (45.7) 1.84 (46.7) 1.46 (37.1) 1.46 (37.1) 1.6 (41.1) 1.58 (40.1)
SWAGELOK
(38.9)
1.53
(63.5)
.50
5/3 panel hole

(19.8)
SWAGELOK
B A
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. SK series valves can be ordered with two different end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for ordering information. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 106-1, DIN-999, and JIS B003. VCO fittings on standard valves include low-temperture fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
(38.1)
1.50
(11.) (10.9)
0.44
(49.0)
1.93
0.43
(.9)
0.90
Handle Options
Factory-Assembled Handles
Nylon Directional
Black is standard. For other colors, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-BL
Handle Kits for Field Assembly

Kits include handle and set screw.
Nylon Directional NY-5K-43G-BK Nylon Oval NY-5K-43GK-BK Stainless Steel Directional SS-5K-43GPM
rdering number specifies a black handle. For a handle of another O
color, replace -BK with a handle color designator from the table at left. Example: NY-5K-43G-BL
Nylon Oval
Add -K to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-K
Locking Bracket
Designed to lock valve in the
open and closed position

Fits padlocks with 3/16
Stainless Steel Directional

Ideal for continuous elevated
ambient temperatures Add -SHD to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-SHD
to 9/3 in. (4.8 to 7.1 mm) shackle diameters

For nylon and stainless steel
directional handles onlynot panel mountable

To order the locking bracket factory-assembled on a valve,
No Handle
Add -NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-NH
add -LH to the valve ordering number.

Example: SS-4SKPS4-LH To order the locking bracket for field assembly, use kit
ordering number: SS-51K-4SK-LH
Options
Low-Temperature Service
SK series valves are available for low-temperature service, with a temperature rating of 40 to 00F (40 to 93C) at listed pressures. Low-temperature valves have Buna C O-rings. All other materials and ratings are the same as those of standard valves. To order, insert L into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-L4SKPS4
PTFE-Coated Stainless Steel Ball

SK series valves are available with a PTFE-coated stainless steel ball to promote service life in applications subject to lubricant washout. To order, add -TC to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-TC
Ethylene Propylene O-Rings

SK series valves Temperature Working Pressure are available with F (C) psig (bar) ethyelene propylene 0 (8) to 150 (65) 6000 (413) O-rings, with ratings 50 (11) 1700 (117) shown at right. To order, add -E to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-E
Process Options
Hydrostatic Testing
SK series valves are available with optional hydrostatic shell testing. Valves are hydrostatically tested with deionized water at 1.5 times the rated pressure of the valve. No visible leakage is permitted. To order, add -W20 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-W20
Sour Gas Service

SK series valves for Component Material sour gas service are End screw, available. Materials packing bolt, Alloy 400/B164 are selected in stem, and ball accordance with Stem O-ring and Ethylene propylene NACE MR0175/ seat O-ring ISO 15156. See the Seat springs Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 NACE specification Wetted components listed in italics. for information on stainless steel tube fitting requirements. To order, replace SS with MX and add -SG to the valve ordering number. Example: MX-4SKPF4-SG

SK series valves are available with optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C. To order, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-SC11

For information about hazards and risks of oxygen-enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety technical report, MS-06-13.
Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Service Designator HT LT NF Maximum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) Temperature Range At 100F At Maximum F (C) (37C) Temperature 0 to 00 (8 to 93) 165 (11.3) 0 to 400 (17 to 04) 100 (6.8) 00 (13.7) 40 to 00 (40 to 93) 165 (11.3) 0 to 00 (8 to 93) 165 (11.3)
Actuator Service Standard High-temperature Low-temperature Nonfluorocarbon

Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.
Minimum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) Actuation Mode Single Dual Double acting 45 (3.) 80 (5.6) Normally closed, normally open 70 (4.9)
Two valves mounted to one actuator.
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air. For technical data, including pressure-temperature ratings and materials of construction, see the Swagelok Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-06-87.
Dimensions
4.91 (15) (spring return) 4.09 (104) (double acting) 1.5
(31.8)
3.04 (77.)
(37.1)
0.31
(7.9)
1.46
(33.3)
1.31
Actuated assemblies must
be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in leakage or premature valve failure.
mounting holes
(8.6) dia
0.34
1/8 in. NPT
(15.)
0.60
(43.9)
1.73
(13.)
0.5
(44.4)
1.75
1/8 in. NPT
0.34
(8.6)
(45.7) (73.9)
1.80
1/8 in. NPT
Factory-Assembly
0.34 (8.6) dia mounting holes

SWAGELOK
.91
SWAGELOK
(50.8)
.00
SS-4SKPS4 - 31 D HT
Valve Ordering Number Actuator Model Actuation Mode D = Double acting C = Normally closed spring return O = Normally open spring return Example: SS-4SKPS4-31D
For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one actuator), insert DM into the ordering number. Example: SS-4SKPS4-31DDMHT
Field Assembly
Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.
Kit Ordering Number Actuator MS-131-SR Mounting Bracket
Actuator Service None = Standard HT = Hightemperature LT = Lowtemperature NF = Nonfluorocarbon
Actuator Mode Spring return
Actuator Service Standard
High-temperature MS-131-SR-HT Low-temperature MS-131-SR-LT Nonfluorocarbon Standard MS-131-SR-NF MS-131-DA SS-MB-4SK
Double acting
High-temperature MS-131-DA-HT Low-temperature MS-131-DA-LT Nonfluorocarbon MS-131-DA-NF

Actuator Service Standard High-temperature Low-temperature Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176 (0 to 80) 5 to 30 (15 to 150) 40 to 176 (40 to 80) 116 (7.9) Maximum Actuator Pressure psig (bar)

Actuation Modes Actuator Model A15 Double Acting 0 (1.4) Spring Return 36 (.5) Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)
Swagelok ISO 511-compliant rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes. Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assemblies including valves, actuators, sensors, bracket kits, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 511, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845.
Dimensions
(70.5)
.78
5.51
(140) (40.0)
1.57
(59.0) (9.0)
.3
1.14
(54.5)
.15
(51.3)
.0

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
(79.3)
3.1
(50.8)
.00
(36.6)
1.44
(78.0)
3.07
Factory Assembly
Field Assembly
Kit Ordering Number Mounting Actuator Bracket MS-A15-3-DIN SS-MB-4SKF04-11DIN-M
SS-4SKPS4 - A15 D HT
Valve Ordering Number Actuator Model Actuation Mode D = Double acting C3 = Normally closed spring return O4 = Normally open spring return Actuator Service None = Standard HT = Hightemperature LT = Lowtemperature
Actuator Mode Spring return
Actuator Service Standard
High-temperature MS-A15-3-DIN-HT Low-temperature MS-A15-3-DIN-LT Standard MS-A15-DA-DIN High-temperature MS-A15-DA-DIN-HT Low-temperature MS-A15-DA-DIN-LT
Double acting
ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits

Swagelok ISO 511 mounting bracket kits contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket Four A4 stainless steel, socket head cap screws

1. Determine the base start and base end torque at
system pressure from Table 1, below.

. Determine the temperature factor from Table , below. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque:
(A4 is similar to 316 SS) Powdered metal 300 series stainless steel coupling
A4 stainless steel set screw Instructions
Base torque temperature factor Example: SK series valve is operated with nitrogen at 3000 psig and 70F (0C). 1. According to Table 1, the base start torque is 1 in. lb and the base end torque is 10 in. lb. . According to Table , the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 1 in. lb 1.0 = 1 in. lb End torque = 10 in. lb 1.0 = 10 in. lb.
1. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 511 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. . Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number.


System Pressure, psig (bar) 0 (0) Start End 3000 (206) Start End 6000 (413) Start End Base Torque, in.lb (Nm) 14 (1.6) 10 (1.1) 1 (.4) 10 (1.1) 6 (.9) 10 (1.1)

Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) .0 0 (17) .0 70 (20) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0 302 (150) 1.0
Options for ISO 5211-Compliant and Swagelok Pneumatic Actuators

Solenoid Valves attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly. For more information on
ISO 511-compliant actuators, contact your authorized
Limit Switches indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal. They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof). For more information on
ISO 511-compliant actuators, contact your authorized
Swagelok representative.
Swagelok actuators, see the Swagelok Solenoid Valves
for Electropneumatically Actuated Ball Valves catalog, MS-0-41. Position Indicators provide visual status of a valve.
Swagelok representative.
Swagelok actuators, see the Swagelok Limit Switches
catalog, MS-06-39.
Maintenance Kits
Seat Seal Kit
The seat seal kit contains two seats, low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM seat O-rings, seat backup rings, seat springs, end screw gaskets, gland assembly tool, lubricant with Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-9K-4SK
Stem and Seal Kit

The stem and seal kit contains a packing bolt gasket, stem thrust washer, chamfered backup ring, stem backup ring, low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM stem O-ring, two seats, low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM seat O-rings, seat backup rings, seat springs, end screw gaskets, gland assembly tool, lubricant with Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-91K-4SK
Swagelok, VCOTM Swagelok Company 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 008, R3 MS-0-345
www.swagelok.com
N o n rotating-Stem Needle Valves
D Series
Pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar) Temperatures up to 450F (232C) with PEEK stem tip Stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 materials
Nonrotating-Stem Needle Valves Positive stem retraction promotes consistent flow control Safety back seating seals in fully open position Nonrotating stem provides repetitive shutoff Actuation threads isolated from system fluid enhance thread life O-ring stem seal needs no adjustment Replaceable stem tip facilitates maintenance
Features
Compact, rugged design is available
in straight and angle flow patterns.

Protective handle prevents
contaminants from entering functional valve parts.

Orifice sizes from 0.093 to 0.18 in.
(.4 to 5.6 mm) are available.

Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.1 to
0.53 are available.
Female NPT, male NPT, Swagelok
tube fitting, and mixed end connections are available.
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Component 1 Handle Set screw 2 Retaining ring 3 Spool Brass Material Grade/ASTM Specification Anodized aluminum/B1 Nickel cadmium-plated steel Zinc-plated steel Aluminum/B09, B11 Molybdenum disulfide-coated 316 SS/A276 Molybdenum disulfide-coated brass 360/B16 PTFE/D1710 Fluorocarbon FKM Fluorocarbon-coated Fluorocarbon-coated Aluminum 5052/B209 316 SS/A167 alloy 400/B127 316 SS/A276 PCTFE/D1430 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A182 Brass 377/B283 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B564 Alloy 400/B164 Molybdenum disulfide-coated alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400
2 3
4 Packing bolt 5 Backup ring 6 O-ring 7 Washer
8 Stem Stem tip Machine screw
5 6 7
9 Body Lubricants
Molybdenum disulfide in hydrocarbon carrier; O-ringsilicone-based; machine screwhydrocarbon thread lock
Ratings are limited to:
50F (11C) max with Buna N, silicone, and ethylene propylene O-rings. 65 to 50F (53 to 11C) with Buna C O-rings. ASME Class Material Group Material Name Stem Tip Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (8) to 100 150 00 50 300 350 400 450
(37) (65) (93) (11) (148) (176) (04) (3)
1250 2.2 316 SS PCTFE 3000 (06) 790 (19) 580 (177) PEEK 3000 790 580 455 330 35 140 065
(06) (19) (177) (169) (160) (153) (147) (14)
N/A N/A Brass PCTFE 3000 (06) 675 (184) 350 (161) PEEK 3000 675 350 00
(06) (184) (161) (151)
1500 3.4 Alloy 400 PCTFE 3000 (06) 80 (194) 640 (181) PEEK 3000 80 640 555 470 430 390 380
(06) (194) (181) (176) (170) (167) (164) (163)
050 (141) 10 (84.0) 390 (6.8)
Nonrotating-Stem Needle Valves

Orifice 0.18 in.
Testing
Every Swagelok nonrotating-stem needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
(5.6 mm)

0.156 in.
(4.0 mm)
0.093 in.
(.4 mm)
Every Swagelok nonrotating-stem needle valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.

Stainless Steel Valve
Straight Pattern
F
Angle Pattern
B H open
Alloy 400 or Brass Valves

Replace SS with M for alloy 400 or B for brass. Example: M-ODKS
H open C
B1
F E
PEEK Stem Tip

Replace K with P. Example: SS-ODPS
B A B1 E
Select a valve with a C dimension listed and add -A to the ordering number. Example: SS-ODKS-A
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Swagelok tube fittings Female NPT Male NPT Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/8 to 1/4 in. Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Cv 0.1 0.7 0.53 0.7 0.53 0.7 0.53 0.1
Orifice in. (mm) 0.093 (.4) 0.156 (4.0) 0.18 (5.6) 0.156 (4.0) 0.18 (5.6) 0.156 (4.0) 0.18 (5.6) 0.093 (.4) 0.156 (4.0) 0.18 (5.6) 0.156 (4.0) 0.093 (.4) 0.18 (5.6)
Ordering Number SS-ODKS SS-14DKS4 SS-16DKS6 SS-14DKS6MM SS-16DKF4 SS-14DKM4 SS-16DKM4 SS-16DKM6 SS-ODKM-S4 SS-14DKM4-S4 SS-16DKM4-S6 SS-14DKM4-S6MM SS-ODKM-F SS-16DKM4-F4
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .0 (55.9) .7 (57.6) .58 (65.5) .7 (57.6) .1 (53.8) 1.97 (50.0) .5 (57.) B B1 C E F H 1.10 (7.9) 1.13 (8.7) 1.9 (3.8) 1.13 (8.7) 1.06 (6.9) 0.98 (4.9) 1.1 (8.4) 1.41 (35.8) 0.31 (7.9) 1.51 (38.4) 0.38 (9.7) 1.51
(38.4)
1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.)
1.79 (45.5) 0.50 (1.7) 1.5 (31.8) .0 (51.3) 0.38 (9.7) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.) 1.5 (31.8) .0 (51.3) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.) 0.50 (1.7) 1.5 (31.8) .0 (51.3) 0.50 (1.7) 0.56 (14.)
1.36 (34.5) 0.38 (9.7)
1.85 (47.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.10 (7.9) 1.4 (36.1) 0.31 (7.9) .1 (53.8) 0.98 (4.9) 1.13 (8.7) 1.51 (38.4) 0.38 (9.7)
1/4 in. 0.7 1/4 to 0.53 3/8 in. 1/4 in. to 0.7 6 mm 1/8 in. 0.1 0.53 1/4 in. 1/ to 1/4 in.
.38 (60.5) 1.1 (8.4) 1.6 (3.0) 1.79 (45.5) 0.50 (1.7) 1.5 (31.8) .0 (51.3) .1 (53.8) 0.98 (4.9) 1.13 (8.7) 1.51 (38.4) 0.38 (9.7) 1.69 (4.9) 0.75 (19.0) 0.94 (3.9) 1.5 (31.8) 0.31 (7.9) .19 (55.6) 1.1 (8.4) 1.06 (6.9) 1.56 (39.6) 0.50 (1.7) .50 (63.5) 1.5 (31.8) 1.81 (46.0) 0.56 (14.) 1.5 (31.8) .0 (51.3) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.) 1.1 (8.4) 1.86 (47.)
Male/female NPT
SS-16DKM8-F4
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight.

Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard. For an optional O-ring material, add an O-ring designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-ODKS-BC
Handles
Black aluminum knob handles are standard. For handles of other colors, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-ODKS-BL
Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red Yellow
Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW
O-Ring Kits
O-ring kits contain O-ring, backup ring, washer, retaining ring, lubricant, and instructions. To order, add a kit designator to a kit basic ordering number. Example: BC70-9K-OD
O-ring Material Buna C Buna N Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM Kalrez Silicone O-ring Designator -BC -B -E -KZ -SI Kit Designator BC70 BN70 EP70 VA70 KZ70 SI70 -9K-OD (OD, 14D series) -9K-16D (16D series) Kit Basic Ordering Number
Handle Kits
Select a handle kit ordering number. For kits with handles of colors other than black, replace -BK with a handle color designator. Example: A-5K-14D-BL
Valve Series OD, 14D 16D Kit Ordering Number A-5K-14D-BK A-5K-16D-BK
Valves with Rupture Discs
Be sure to use the correct pressure relief device for

the gas being used.
Stem Tip Kits

Kits contain stem tip, machine screw, and instructions. To order, select a kit basic ordering number and add SS for a 316 SS or brass valve, or M for an alloy 400 valve. Examples: SS-3BK-14DK M-3BK-14DP
Valve Series OD, 14D 16D Kit Basic Ordering Number PCTFE Tip -3BK-14DK -3BK-16DK PEEK Tip -3BK-14DP -3BK-16DP
16D Series
Certain 16D series valves can be configured as valves with rupture discs. For more information, see the Swagelok Sample Cylinders, Accessories, and Outage Tubes catalog, MS-01-177.
Rupture disc
Outage Tubes
14D and 16D Series
Certain 14D and 16D series valves can be configured as valves with outage tubes. For more information, see the Swagelok Sample Cylinders, Accessories, and Outage Tubes catalog, MS-01-177.
Outage tube welded to male NPT end
Seal Maintenance Kits

Kits contain stem tip, machine screw, retaining ring, washer, fluorocarbon FKM O-ring, backup ring, lubricants, and instructions. To order, select a kit basic ordering number and add SS for a 316 SS or brass valve, or M for an alloy 400 valve. Examples: SS-91K-14DK M-91K-14DP
Valve Series OD, 14D 16D Kit Basic Ordering Number PCTFE Tip -91K-14DK -91K-16DK PEEK Tip -91K-14DP -91K-16DP
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 001, 00, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 008, R5 MS-01-4
www.swagelok.com
O ne -Pie ce Instr ume ntation Ball Valve s
40 G Se r ie s a nd 40 Se r ie s
On-off, switching, and crossover flow paths Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar) Temperatures from 65 to 300F (53 to 148C) Environmental and heated-process applications 1/16 to 3/4 in. and 3 to 12 mm end connections
Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series
Contents
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Important Information About Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Flow Data at 70F (20C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 On-Off (2-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching (3-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Switching (5-Way and 7-Way) Valves (40 Series) . . . . 10 Crossover (4-Way and 6-Way) Valves (40 Series) . . . 11 Handle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Vent Port and Stem Extension Options . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . 18 Options for Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Process Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Flow Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Ordering Multiple Options and Accessories . . . . . . . 27
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves

Swagelok one-piece instrumentation ball valves have been well accepted and widely used in a variety of industries for many years. Both the original Swagelok 40 series and the newer 40G series valves accommodate a wide range of actuator, flow path, and handle options, as well as offer ease of packing adjustment while inline.
40G Series and 40 Series Comparison

Valve Series Feature Valve Body Materials Packing Materials Working Pressure psig (bar) Temperature Rating F (C) Flow Coefficients (Cv) End Connection Sizes 41G, 42G, 43G Stainless steel Modified PTFE or UHMWPE 41, 42, 43 Brass, alloy 400 44, 45 Stainless steel, brass, alloy 400 PTFE
Up to 3000 (206), depending on valve size. See page 5. 65 to 300

(53 to 148)
50 to 150
(10 to 65)
0.08 to 2.4
0.05 to 2.4
1.5 to 12 3/8 to 3/4 in.; 8 to 12 mm On-off (2-way); switching (3-way and 5-way); crossover (4-way)
1/16 to 3/8 in.; 3 to 8 mm On-off (2-way); switching (3-way, 5-way and 7-way); crossover (4-way and 6-way)
Flow Patterns
On-off (2-way); switching (3-way)
Live-loaded PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes)
packing are available to extend the low-temperature rating to 65F (53C). See the Swagelok Live-Loaded 40 Series Ball Valves for LowTemperature Service catalog, MS-02-109.
Important Information About Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are
Service instructions are shipped with 41G and 42G series valves require
designed to be used in a fully open or fully closed position. for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
each 40G series and 40 series valve.

40G and 40 series valves are factory
Valves that have not been cycled Packing adjustment may be
required during the service life of the valve to prevent leakage.
tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar), or the rated pressure if lower than 1000 psig (69 bar). 40 series valve packing must be readjusted for service at higher than test pressure. See page 5 for standard production tests and page 22 for optional production tests.
Instrumentation ball valves exposed
an 8 mm deep-well socket and 43G series valves require a 9 mm deepwell socket to adjust the packing bolt.
41 and 42 series valves require a
3/8 in. open-ended wrench; 44 series valves require a 1/2 in. open-ended wrench; and 45 series valves require a 5/8 in. open-ended wrench to adjust the packing bolt.
43 series valves require an adapter
to adjust the packing bolt. Ordering number: MS-WK-43
to dynamic temperature conditions before installation may lose their initial packing load. Packing adjustment may be needed.
Features
40G Series
Directional handle with double-flat stem indicates position of orifice. Top-loaded, live-loaded design reduces need for packing adjustment allows adjustment with the valve in-line compensates for wear improves thermal cycle performance. Single-piece, patent-pending encapsulated packing is constructed of modified PTFE reduces potential leak points does not require system pressure to seal has virtually no dead space allows bidirectional flow is easily cleaned and purged.
Balanced-trunnion, patent-pending design supports packing, reducing the need for packing adjustment reduces packing volume, minimizing thermal effects minimizes packing extrusion improves thermal cycle performance.
One-piece ball stem ensures alignment of stem and orifice.
40 Series
Directional handle indicates position of orifice. Top-loaded design allows adjustment with the valve in-line. Capsule seat packing is constructed of PTFE does not require system pressure to make a seal has virtually no dead space allows bidirectional flow is easily cleaned and purged.
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
One-piece ball stem ensures alignment of stem and orifice.
Drop-in Replacement
Swagelok 41G, 42G, and 43G series valves easily replace original stainless steel 41, 42, and 43 series valves.
Equivalent dimensions Comparable materials of construction
Couplings must be replaced on actuated valves. See pages 17 and 20. Swagelok 44 and 45 series valves remain available in stainless steel; the full range of 40 series sizes is available in brass and alloy 400.
40G Series
Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Packing bolt 4 Springs 5 Gland 6 Ball stem 7 Packing 8 Side rings 9 Side discs 10 Panel nut 11 Body Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricant Stainless Steel Valve Body Material Material Grade/ASTM Specification Nylon with powdered metal 300 series SS insert S17400/A564 Powdered metal 300 series SS S17700/A693 Powdered metal 300 series SS 316 SS/A276 Modified PTFE/D1710 type 1, Grade 1, Class B or UHMWPE/D4020 Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 316 SS/A276 and A479 Silicone-based Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
1 2 3
6 9 8 8 9 7 10 11
Wetted components listed in italics. 41G and 42G series: 8 springs; 43G series: 6 springs. B783 specification not available on 41G and 42G series; standard on 43G series. Bodies with VCO end connections and modified PTFE packing have fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; bodies with with VCO end connections and UHMWPE packing have ethylene propylene O-rings.
40 Series
1 2
41, 42, 44, 45 series
Stainless Steel Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Packing bolt Powdered metal 300 series SS or 316 SS/A276, A479 316 SS/A240
Valve Body Materials Brass Nylon with brass insert S17400 SS/A564 Brass CDA 360/B16 41, 42, 45 series: brass 260/B36; 43, 44 series: 316 SS/A240 PTFE/D1710 Powdered metal 300 series SS 316 SS/A276 Fluorocarbon-coated powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 316 SS/ A276, A479 Brass CDA 360/B16 PTFE/D1710 Brass CDA 360/B16 Fluorocarbon-coated brass powdered metal PTFE/D1710 Brass CDA 360/B16 Brass CDA 360/B16 Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B164 Fluorocarbon-coated alloy 400 powdered metal Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400 Material Grade/ASTM Specification
3 4 5 6
43 series
4 Upper gland 5 Bushing 6 Lower gland
Alloy 400/B127
7 8 10 9 9 10 11 12 13
7 Upper packing 8 Ball stem 9 Side rings 10 Side discs 11 Lower packing 12 Panel nut 13 Body Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricant
41, 42, 43 series: silicone-based; 44, 45 series: silicone- and fluorinated-based Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
Wetted components listed in italics. 4-way, 5-way, 6-way, and 7-way valves contain stainless steel stem, rings, and discs. Bodies with VCO end connections have fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
The 40G series valve is designed for thermal cycling in both environmental and heated-process applications. Ratings shown below apply to on-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) valves. Ratings for switching (5-way and 7-way) and crossover (4-way and 6-way) valves are shown on page 10 and 11, respectively.
Series Packing Material Modified PTFE 41G, 42G Valve Size
(Configuration) (Straight, Angle, 3-Way); 43G (Angle, 3-Way)
40G UHMWPE 41G, 42G 43G

(Straight) (Straight, Angle, 3-Way); 43G (Angle, 3-Way)
40 PTFE 41, 42 (Straight, Angle, 3-Way); 43 (Angle, 3-Way); 44, 45 (Straight)
43G
(Straight)
43
(Straight)
44, 45
(Angle, 3-Way)
Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 50 (10) 50 (10) to 150 (65) 200 (93) 250 (121) 300 (148)
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
(172) (172) (172) (172) (172)
3000 3000 2800 2650 2500
(206) (206) (193) (182) (172)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 3000 (206)
3000 (206)
1500 (103)
Pressure ratings for valves with Swagelok tube fitting ends may be lower due to the tubing pressure rating. See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Live-loaded PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes) packing are available to extend the low-temperature rating to 65F (53C). See the Swagelok Live-Loaded 40 Series Ball Valves for Low-Temperature Service catalog, MS-02-109.

Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p), psi (bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.4 2.6 3.0 3.5 3.8 4.6 6.0 6.3 6.4 12 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 1.5 (42) 1.8 (50) 2.1 (59) 2.4 (67) 3.0 (84) 4.5 (120) 6.0 (160) 9.0 (250) 10 (280) 15 (420) 18 (500) 21 (590) 22 (620) 24 (670) 27 (760) 36 (1000) 42 (1100) 45 (1200) 48 (1300) 51 (1400) 60 (1600) 72 (2000) 78 (2200) 90 (2500) 100 (2800) 110 (3100) 140 (3900) 180 (5000) 190 (5300) 190 (5300) 2.6 (73) 3.2 (90) 3.7 (100) 4.3 (120) 5.3 (150) 8.0 (220) 11 (310) 16 (450) 19 (530) 27 (760) 32 (900) 37 (1000) 40 (1100) 42 (1100) 48 (1300) 64 (1800) 74 (2000) 80 (2200) 85 (2400) 90 (2500) 100 (2800) 120 (3300) 140 (3900) 160 (4500) 180 (5000) 200 (5600) 240 (6700) 320 (9000) 330 (9300) 340 (9600) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Water Flow U. S. gal/min (std L/min) 0.3 (1.1) 0.4 (1.5) 0.5 (1.8) 0.6 (2.2) 0.7 (2.6) 1.0 (3.7) 1.4 (5.2) 2.1 (7.9) 2.4 (9.0) 3.5 (13) 4.2 (15) 4.9 (18) 5.3 (20) 5.6 (21) 6.4 (24) 8.5 (32) 9.9 (37) 11 (41) 11 (41) 12 (45) 14 (52) 17 (64) 18 (68) 21 (79) 25 (94) 27 (100) 33 (120) 42 (150) 45 (170) 45 (170) 85 (320) 0.5 (1.8) 0.6 (2.2) 0.7 (2.6) 0.8 (3.0) 1.0 (3.7) 1.5 (5.6) 2.0 (7.5) 3.0 (11) 3.5 (13) 5.0 (18) 6.0 (22) 7.0 (26) 7.5 (28) 8.0 (30) 9.0 (34) 12 (45) 14 (52) 15 (56) 16 (60) 17 (64) 20 (75) 24 (90) 26 (98) 30 (110) 35 (130) 38 (140) 46 (170) 60 (220) 63 (230) 64 (240) 120 (450)
Testing
Every 40G series and 40 series ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or at its maximum rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar). Seat tests have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min.
0.6 (16) 0.7 (19) 0.8 (22) 0.9 (25) 1.1 (31) 1.7 (48) 2.3 (65) 3.4 (96) 4.0 (110) 5.6 (150) 6.8 (190) 7.9 (220) 8.5 (240) 9.0 (250) 10 (280) 14 (390) 16 (450) 17 (480) 18 (500) 19 (530) 22 (620) 27 (760) 29 (820) 34 (960) 39 (1100) 43 (1200) 52 (1400) 68 (1900) 71 (2000) 72 (2000) 130 (3600)
0.1 (0.3) 0.2 (0.7) 0.2 (0.7) 0.3 (1.1) 0.3 (1.1) 0.4 (1.5) 0.6 (2.2) 0.9 (3.4) 1.1 (4.1) 1.6 (6.0) 1.9 (7.1) 2.2 (8.3) 2.3 (8.7) 2.5 (9.4) 2.8 (10) 3.8 (14) 4.4 (16) 4.7 (17) 5.0 (18) 5.3 (20) 6.3 (23) 7.6 (28) 8.2 (31) 9.5 (35) 11 (41) 12 (45) 15 (56) 19 (71) 20 (75) 20 (75) 38 (140)

All 40G series and 40 series valves are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Special cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, is available as an option. See Process Options, page 22.
360 (10 000) 640 (18 000)

Flow Patterns
Straight and Angle Patterns for On-Off Service
Straight Pattern
40G Series Valves
Select a 40G series ordering number from the 40G Series Complete Ordering Number column, shaded blue. Example: SS-41GS1 To order a valve with UHMWPE packing, insert E into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-41GES1
40 Series Valves
Add a material designator to a 40 series basic ordering number from the 40 Series Basic Ordering Number column, shaded gray.
Material Valve Series 316 SS Alloy 400 Brass 44, 45 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 Designator SS M B
Examples: M-42S4 SS-44S6
On
Off
Angle-pattern valves have the same options and accessories as straight-pattern valves; the pressure-temperature ratings (page 5), flow coefficients, and dimensions are different. To order an angle-pattern valve, add -A to ordering number of a valve with the C dimension listed. Examples: SS-43GS4-A SS-44S6-A
Angle Pattern
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
Straight Pattern
F G max panel thickness
Angle Pattern
On
Off
H panel hole
D E B A C
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness.

End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/16 in. 1/8 in. 0.10 0.20 0.60 Fractional Swagelok tube fittings 1/4 in. 1.4 1.5 3/8 in. 6.0 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 3 mm 12 6.4 0.20 0.60 Metric Swagelok tube fittings 6 mm 1.4 8 mm 10 mm 1.5 6.0 0.90 0.90 2.0 4.6 0.30 0.70 0.75 1.7 1.5 3.5 SS-43GS6MM SS-43GS8MM SS-42GF2 SS-43GF2 SS-43GF4 SS-43GF4RT 0.75 0.75 0.35 0.90 0.35 0.90 SS-43GM4 SS-43GM4-S4 SS-42GVCO4 SS-43GVCO4 SS-42GVCR4 SS-43GVCR4 12
Not recommended for panel mounting.
Cv Straight Angle 0.15 0.35 0.90 0.90 2.0 4.6 3.8 0.15 0.35
40G Series Complete Ordering Number SS-41GS1 SS-41GS2 SS-42GS4 SS-43GS4 SS-43GS6 SS-41GS3MM SS-42GS6MM
40 Series Basic Ordering Number -41S1 -41S2 -42S4 -43S4 -43S6 -44S6 -45S8 -45S12 -41S3MM -42S6MM -43S6MM -43S8MM -44S10MM -45S12MM -42F2 -43F2 -43F4 -44F4 -44F6 -45F8 -43F4RT -44F6RT -45F8RT -43M4 -43M4-S4 -42VCO4 -43VCO4 -42VCR4 -43VCR4 -44VCR8 -45VCR8
Orifice in. (mm) A B 0.052 1.68 0.84

(1.32) (42.7) (21.3)
Dimensions in. (mm) C D E F 0.34 0.28 1.12

(8.6) (8.6) (8.6) (7.1) (7.1) (7.1) (9.7) (9.7) (28.4) (28.4) (28.4) (38.9) (38.9)
G 1/4
(6.4)
H J W 19/32 1.36 0.58

(15.1) (15.1) (15.1) (19.8) (19.8) (28.6) (38.1) (38.1) (15.1) (15.1) (19.8) (19.8) (28.6) (38.1) (15.1) (19.8) (19.8) (28.6) (28.6) (38.1) (19.8) (28.6) (38.1) (19.8) (19.8) (34.5) (14.7) (34.5) (14.7) (34.5) (14.7) (37.3) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8) (52.6) (28.4) (61.7) (38.1) (61.7) (38.1) (34.5) (14.7) (34.5) (14.7)
0.093
(2.36)
2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12

(51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2)
1/4
(6.4)
19/32 1.36 0.58 19/32 1.36 0.58
0.125
(3.18)
2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
(6.4) (4.8) (4.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
(60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2)
0.187
(4.75)
2.58
(65.5)
1.29 (32.8)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78

(11.2)
0.281
(7.14)
3.05 1.52 1.43

(77.5) (38.6) (36.3)
0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5) 0.69 (17.5)

(8.6) (8.6) (7.1) (7.1) (9.7) (9.7)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.5)
1 1/8 2.07 1.12 1 1/2 2.43 1.50 1 1/2 2.43 1.50 19/32 1.36 0.58 19/32 1.36 0.58 1.47 0.78
(37.3) (19.8)
0.406
(10.3)
3.92 1.96 1.74

(99.6) (49.8) (44.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.5)
0.406
(10.3)
3.92 1.96 1.74

(99.6) (49.8) (44.2) (51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2)
3.00
(76.2) (28.4) (28.4) (38.9) (38.9)
3/8
(9.5)
0.093
(2.36)
2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12 2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
(6.4)
0.125
(3.18)
1/4
(6.4) (4.8) (4.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32

(60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2) (62.5) (31.2) (30.5) (11.2)
0.187
(4.75)
2.46 1.23 1.20 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 3.07 1.53 1.43
(78.0) (38.9) (36.3)
1.47 0.78
(37.3) (19.8) (52.6) (28.4) (61.7) (38.1) (34.5) (14.7) (37.3) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8) (52.6) (28.4) (52.6) (28.4) (61.7) (38.1) (37.3) (19.8) (52.6) (28.4) (61.7) (38.1) (37.3) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
0.281
(7.14)
0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5)

(8.6) (11.2) (11.2) (7.1) (9.7) (9.7)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.5)
1 1/8 2.07 1.12 1 1/2 2.43 1.50 19/32 1.36 0.58
12 mm 12 0.50 1/8 in. 1.2 Female NPT 0.90 1/4 in. 3.0 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. Female ISO/BSP tapered Male NPT Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting VCO fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 2.6 6.3 0.90 2.6 6.3 1.2 1.6 0.60 1/4 in. 2.4 0.60 1/4 in. Integral male VCR fittings 1/2 in. 2.4 6.0
0.406
(10.3)
3.92 1.96 1.74

(99.6) (49.8) (44.2)
3.00
(76.2) (28.4) (38.9) (38.9)
3/8
(9.5)
0.125
(3.18)
1.63
(41.4)
0.81 (20.6) 1.00 (25.4) 1.03 (26.2) 1.25 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 1.56 (39.6)
0.34 0.28 1.12
1/4
(6.4) (4.8) (4.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.00
(50.8)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78 0.56 (14.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5)
(11.2) (9.7)
0.187
(4.75)
2.06
(52.3)
0.281
(7.14)
2.50
(63.5)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.5)
1 1/8 2.07 1.12 1 1/8 2.07 1.12 1 1/2 2.43 1.50
0.281
(7.14)
2.50
(63.5)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.5)
0.406
(10.3)
3.12
(79.2)
3.00
(76.2) (38.9)
3/8
(9.5) (4.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.06 1.03
(52.3) (26.2)
0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78 0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5)
(9.7) (9.7)
0.281
(7.14)
2.50 1.25
(63.5) (31.8)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.5)
1 1/8 2.07 1.12 1 1/2 2.43 1.50
0.406
(10.3)
3.12 1.56
(79.2) (39.6)
3.00
(76.2) (38.9) (38.9)
3/8
(9.5) (4.8) (4.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.00 1.00 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
(50.8) (25.4) (26.2) (11.2) (55.9) (30.5) (26.2) (11.2)
0.187
(4.75)
2.20 1.20 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78 1.75 0.88 0.94 1.12 1/8 19/32 1.36
0.125
(3.18)
0.187
(4.75)
(44.4) (22.4) (23.9) 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78 (11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8) 1.88 0.94 (47.8) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (23.9)
0.125
(3.18)
0.187
(4.75)
1.12 1/8 19/32 1.36 2.13 1.06 1.09 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78 (54.1) (26.9) (27.7) (11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
(38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3)
0.281
(7.14)
2.88 1.44
(73.2) (36.6)
0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5)
2.00
(50.8)
1 1/8 2.07 3/8

(9.5) (28.6) (52.6) 1.50 1 1/2 2.43 (38.1) (38.1) (61.7)
0.406
(10.3)
3.12 1.56
(79.2) (39.6)
3.00
(76.2)

Flow Pattern
On-Off Switching Service
Center-Off Position
40GX Series Valves
Select a 40GX series ordering number from the 40GX Series Complete Ordering Number column, shaded blue. Example: SS-41GXS1 To order a valve with UHMWPE packing, insert E into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-41GXES1
40X Series Valves

Add a material designator to a 40X series basic ordering number from the 40X Series Basic Ordering Number column, shaded gray.
Material Valve Series 316 SS Alloy 400 Brass 44X, 45X 41X, 42X, 43X, 44X, 45X 41X, 42X, 43X, 44X, 45X Designator SS M B
Examples: M-42XS4 SS-44XS6
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
F G max panel thickness J D
H panel hole On Off On
Side
Side
C
B A
Bottom
1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness

End Connections Side/Bottom Size 1/16 in. 1/8 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fittings Cv 0.08 0.15 0.35 1/4 in. 0.90 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 3 mm 2.0 4.6 3.8 0.15 0.35 Metric Swagelok tube fittings 6 mm 0.90 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. 0.80 2.0 4.6 0.30 0.75 Female NPT 1/4 in. 1.7 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. Female ISO/BSP tapered Swagelok tube fittings/ Male NPT Integral male VCR fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1.5 3.5 0.75 1.5 3.5 0.80 0.35 1/4 in. 0.90 SS-43GXVCR4 -43XVCR4 SS-43GXF4RT -44XF4 -44XF6 -45XF8 -43XF4RT -44XF6RT -45XF8RT SS-43GXS6MM SS-43GXS8MM SS-42GXF2 SS-43GXF4 -43XS6MM -43XS8MM -44XS10MM -45XS12MM -42XF2 -43XF4 SS-43GXS4 SS-41GXS3MM SS-42GXS6MM -43XS4 -44XS6 -45XS8 -45XS12 -41XS3MM -42XS6MM 40GX Series Complete Ordering Number SS-41GXS1 SS-41GXS2 SS-42GXS4 40X Series Basic Ordering Number -41XS1 -41XS2 -42XS4 Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.68
(42.7)

(1.32)
B 0.84
(21.3)
C 0.81
(20.6)
D 0.34
(8.6)
F 1.13
(28.7)
G 1/4
(6.4)
H J 19/32 1.36
(15.1) (15.1) (15.1) (19.8) (34.5) (34.5) (34.5) (37.3)
W 0.58
(14.7)
0.093 (2.36) 0.125

(3.18)
2.01
(51.1)
1.01
(25.7)
0.97
(24.6)
0.34
(8.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1/4
(6.4)
19/32 1.36 19/32 1.36
0.58
(14.7)
2.21
(56.1)
1.10
(27.9)
1.07
(27.2)
0.34
(8.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1/4
(6.4) (4.8)
0.58
(14.7)
0.187
(4.75)
2.39
(60.7)
1.20
(30.5)
1.17
(29.7)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47 3/8

(9.7)
0.78
(19.8)
0.281
(7.14)
2.89
(73.4)
1.45
(36.8)
1.43
(36.3)
0.56
(14.2)
2.00
(50.8)
1 1/8
(28.7)
2.07
(52.6)
1.12
(28.4)
0.406
(10.3)
3.48
(88.4)
1.74 (44.2) 1.74 (44.2) 1.01

(25.7)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7)
1 1/2
(38.1)
2.43
(61.7)
1.50
(38.1)
0.406
(10.3)
3.48
(88.4)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7)
1 1/2
(38.1) (15.1) (15.1) (19.8) (19.8)
2.43
(61.7) (34.5) (34.5) (37.3) (37.3)
1.50
(38.1)
0.093 (2.36) 0.125

(3.18)
2.01
(51.1)
0.97
(24.6)
0.34
(8.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1/4
(6.4)
19/32 1.36 19/32 1.36
0.58
(14.7)
2.21
(56.1)
1.10
(27.9)
1.07
(27.2)
0.34
(8.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1/4
(6.4) (4.8) (4.8)
0.58
(14.7)
0.187
(4.75)
2.39
(60.7)
1.20
(30.5)
1.17
(29.7)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47 3/16 25/32 1.47 3/8

(9.7)
0.78
(19.8)
0.187
(4.75)
2.46
(62.5)
1.23
(31.2)
1.20
(30.5)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
0.78
(19.8)
0.281
(7.14)
2.89
(73.4)
1.45
(36.8)
1.43
(36.3)
0.56
(14.2)
2.00
(50.8)
1 1/8
(28.7)
2.07
(52.6)
1.12
(28.4)
0.406
(10.3)
3.48
(88.4)
1.74 (44.2) 0.81 (20.6) 1.03 (26.2) 1.25 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 1.56 (39.6) 1.03 (26.2) 1.25 (31.8) 1.56 (39.6) 1.20
(30.5)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7)
1 1/2
(38.1) (15.1) (19.8)
2.43
(61.7) (34.5) (37.3)
1.50
(38.1)
0.125
(3.18)
1.63
(41.4)
0.34
(8.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1/4
(6.4) (4.8)
19/32 1.36
0.58
(14.7)
0.187
(4.75)
2.06
(52.3)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47 3/8

(9.7)
0.78
(19.8)
0.281
(7.14)
2.50
(63.5)
0.56
(14.2)
2.00
(50.8)
1 1/8
(28.7)
2.07
(52.6)
1.12
(28.4)
0.281
(7.14)
2.50
(63.5)
0.56
(14.2)
2.00
(50.8)
3/8
(9.7)
1 1/8
(28.7)
2.07
(52.6)
1.12
(28.4)
0.406
(10.3)
3.13
(79.5)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7) (4.8)
1 1/2
(38.1) (19.8)
2.43
(61.7) (37.3)
1.50
(38.1)
0.187
(4.75)
2.06
(52.3)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47 3/8

(9.7)
0.78
(19.8)
0.281
(7.14)
2.50
(63.5)
0.56
(14.2)
2.00
(50.8)
1 1/8
(28.7)
2.07
(52.6)
1.12
(28.4)
0.406
(10.3)
3.13
(79.5)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7) (4.8)
1 1/2
(38.1) (19.8) (15.1) (19.8)
2.43
(61.7) (37.3) (34.5) (37.3)
1.50
(38.1)
SS-43GXS4-S4-M4 -43XS4-S4-M4 SS-42GXVCR4 -42XVCR4
0.187
(4.75)
2.39
(60.7)
1.03
(26.2)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47 1/8

(3.2) (4.8)
0.78
(19.8)
0.125
(3.18)
1.13 2.13
(54.1)
19/32 1.36 0.78

(19.8)
1.06
(26.9)
1.09
(27.7)
0.44
(11.2)
(28.7)
0.187
(4.75)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16 25/32 1.47
10
Switching (5-Way and 7-Way) Valves (40 Series)

Features
Capsule seat packing allows reliable switching. Flow can be switched from a single inlet to multiple outlets 5-Way Valve
or from multiple inlets to a common outlet.

43Z and 43Z6 series valves have a spring-loaded detent for
exact port positioning.

Detent handle components:
Handle: nylon with brass insert Set screw: S17400 stainless steel Pins, detent plate: nickel-plated steel Springs: steel/ASTM A228
Valve Series 43Z (5-way) 45Z (5-way) 43Z6 (7-way) Temperature F (C) 50 to 150 Working Pressure psig (bar) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 500 (34.4)
7-Way Valve
(10 to 65)

Add a material designator to a 40 series basic ordering number.
Material 316 SS Alloy 400 Brass Designator SS M B 5-Way Valve
H panel hole F G max panel thickness J D F G max panel thickness J
H panel hole
7-Way Valve
Example: SS-43ZFS2 Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
C B A
End Connections Inlets/Outlets Female Swagelok tube fittings Female NPT 1/2 in. Size 1/8 in. 1/8 in.
40 Series Basic Ordering Number -43ZFS2 -43ZF2 -45ZF8-ND
Cv 0.07 0.07 3.5
Orifice in. (mm)
Dimensions in. (mm) A B C D 0.44

(11.2)
F 1.53
(38.9)
G 5/32
(4.1)
H 29/32
(23.1)
J 1.69
(42.9)
5-Way Valves 1.94 0.062

(1.57) (49.3)
0.97 (24.6) 0.88

(22.4)
0.062
(1.57)
1.55
(39.4)
0.78
(19.8)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
5/32
(4.1)
29/32
(23.1)
1.69
(42.9)
0.406
(10.3)
3.13
(79.5)
1.56 (39.6)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8 (9.7)
1 1/2
(38.1)
2.43
(61.7)
Female Swagelok tube fittings
1/16 in. -43Z6FS1 1/8 in. -43Z6FS2
0.05 0.07
7-Way Valves 0.052 1.94

(1.32) (49.3)
0.97 (24.6) 0.97 (24.6)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
5/32
(4.1)
29/32
(23.1)
1.69
(42.9)
0.062
(1.57)
1.94
(49.3)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
5/32
(4.1)
29/32
(23.1)
1.69
(42.9)
Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.049 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-43ZF2-049 Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.093 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-45ZF8-ND-093
11
Crossover (4-Way and 6-Way) Valves (40 Series)

Features
Capsule packing allows crossover of two or three streams. Machined stops provide positive port positioning. Stop plate material: aluminum/ASTM B209 or B211. 4-Way Valve
Valve Series 43Y (4-way) 45Y (4-way) 43Y6 (6-way) Temperature F (C) 50 to 150 Working Pressure psig (bar) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 500 (34.4) 6-Way Valve
(10 to 65)

Add a material designator to a 40 series basic ordering number.
Material 316 SS Alloy 400 Brass Designator SS M B
H panel hole F G max panel thickness J F
H panel hole
G max panel thickness J
D D B A B A
D D
Example: SS-43YFS1 Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
40 Series Basic Ordering Number -43YFS1 -43YFS2 -43YF2 -45YF8 4-Way Valve
6-Way Valve
End Connections Inlets/Outlets Size 1/16 in. 1/8 in. 1/8 in. 1/2 in.
Cv 0.06 0.08 0.08 1.6
Orifice in. (mm)
Dimensions in. (mm) A B 0.78

(19.8)
D 0.44
(11.2)
F 1.53
(38.9)
G 3/16
(4.8)
H 29/32
(23.1)
J 1.68
(42.7)
4-Way Valves 1.55 0.052

(1.32) (39.4)
0.062
(1.57)
1.95
(49.5)
0.98
(24.9)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16
(4.8)
29/32
(23.1)
1.68
(42.7)
0.062
(1.57)
1.55
(39.4)
0.78
(19.8)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16
(4.8)
29/32
(23.1)
1.69
(42.9)
Female NPT
0.281
(7.14)
3.13
(79.5)
1.56
(39.6)
0.69
(17.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3/8
(9.7)
1 1/2
(38.1)
2.43
(61.7)
1/16 in. 1/8 in.
-43Y6FS1 -43Y6FS2
0.06 0.08
6-Way Valves 0.052 1.95

(1.32) (49.5)
0.97
(24.6)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16
(4.8)
29/32
(23.1)
1.68
(42.7)
0.062
(1.57)
1.95
(49.5)
0.97
(24.6)
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
3/16
(4.8)
29/32
(23.1)
1.68
(42.7)
Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.049 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-43YFS2-049 Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.093 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-45YF8-093
12
Handle Options
Factory-Assembled Handles
Nylon Directional
Black is standard. For other colors, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-BL B-43S4-BL
Metal
Ideal for continuous elevated ambient temperatures
Stainless Steel Directional
Aluminum Bar
(40G Series) Add -SHD to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43GS4-SHD
316 Stainless Steel Bar
Add -BKB to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-44S6-BKB B-43S4-BKB
No Handle
Add -NH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43GS4-NH B-43S4-NH See page 20 for 40G series valves with no handle and no handle stop, typically specified for valves to be field assembled to pneumatic actuators.
Nylon Oval
Add -K to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-K B-43S4-K
Add -SH to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-44S6-SH B-43S4-SH
Handle Kits for Field Assembly

Kits include handle and set screw.
Valve Series 41G, 41GX, 42G, 42GX 43G, 43GX 41, 41X, 42, 42X 43, 43X, 43Y 43Z 44, 44X 45, 45X, 45Y Nylon Directional NY-5K-42G-BK NY-5K-43G-BK BZ-5K-42-BK BZ-5K-43-BK BZ-5K-43Z-BK BZ-5K-44-BK BZ-5K-45-BK Nylon Oval NY-5K-42GK-BK NY-5K-43GK-BK Stainless Steel Directional SS-5K-42GPM SS-5K-43GPM Stainless Steel Bar SS-5K-42B SS-5K-43B SS-5K-44B SS-5K-45B Aluminum Bar A-5K-42B-BK A-5K-43B-BK A-5K-44B-BK A-5K-45B-BK
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4-way) valve; Z designates switching (5-way) valve. Ordering number specifies a black handle. For another color, replace -BK with a handle color designator from the table above.
Example: BZ-5K-42-BL
Nylon oval handles are only available factory assembled on 40 series valves. Handle kits for 40GX series 3-way valves with L or H flow paths also require a powdered metal 300 series SS stop insert, which
can be ordered separately. Use ordering numbers: SS-5SI-42G for 41GX and 42GX series valves; and SS-5SI-43G for 43GX series valves. To order handle kits for 40X series 3-way valves with L or H flow paths, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Locking Brackets (41G/41, 42G/42, and 43G/43 Series)

Allows lockout of 2-way, straight To order the locking bracket factory-
pattern valves with directional handles in the open or closed position with a standard lock.
Additional small-diameter hole can
assembled on a valve, add -LH to the valve ordering number.

Example: SS-42GS4-LH To order the locking bracket for field
be used to tether locking mechanism to bracket or attach ID tag.

Brackets cannot be used on valves
with integral VCO and VCR fitting end connections or with panel mounting.
assembly, use kit ordering numbers: SS-51K-41G-LH for 41G/41 and 42G/42 series valves; SS-51K-43G-LH for 43G/43 series valves
13
Handle Options
Latch-Lock Handles (43G Series; 43, 44, 45 Series)
Lock on-off valves open and closed
Dimensions
B 0.34
(8.6)
or closed only
Lock switching valves at each port,
(including center-off position on 3-way model)

Lock crossover valves in both
positions
Confirm handle position with positive
detent
Assist compliance with lockout/
tagout programs
Fit padlocks with 3/16 to 5/16 in.
(4.8 to 7.9 mm) shackle diameters.
Component Handle Material Reinforced nylon 304 SS Powdered metal 300 series SS S17700 SS S17400 SS Hydrocarbon-based
Caution:
Locking mechanism Detent base, handle base, handle pin stop Spring Set screw Lubricant
These handles are designed to prevent unintentional valve operation. They are not tamper resistant and can be removed, even when locked.
Valve Series 43G 43GX 43 43X 43Z 43Y 43Y6 43Z6 44 44X 45 45X 45Y
Dimensions in. (mm) Type On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way Switching (5-way) Crossover (4-way) Crossover (6-way) Switching (7-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) Crossover (4-way) A 2.27
(57.7)
B 3.02
(76.7)
2.30
(58.4)
3.02
(76.7)
2.63
(66.9)
3.96
(101)
2.85
(72.4)
3.96
(101)
Factory Assembled 1. Select a 43G, 43, 44, or 45 series valve ordering number. Example: SS-43GS4 2. To order a valve with a black latchlock handle, add a handle designator. Example: SS-43GS4-LL 3. To order a handle color other than black, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number, keeping the handle and color designators in alphabetical order. Examples: SS-43GS4-BL-LL SS-43GS4-LL-RD Kits for Field Assembly 1. Tor order a black handle kit, select a handle kit basic ordering number. Example: NY-5K-43GLL-BK 2. For another handle color, replace BK with a handle color designator from the table at right. Example: NY-5K-43GLL-BL
Factory Assembly Handle Designators Open/ Closed Closed Only -LL -LLC -LLC -LL -LLC -LLC Field Assembly Handle Kit Basic Ordering Numbers Open/ Closed Closed Only NY-5K-43GLL-BK NY-5K-43GXLL-BK NY-5K-43LL-BK NY-5K-43XLL-BK NY-5K-43YLL-BK NY-5K-43Y6LL-BK NY-5K-43ZLL-BK NY-5K-43Z6LL-BK NY-5K-44LL-BK NY-5K-44XLL-BK NY-5K-45LL-BK NY-5K-45XLL-BK NY-5K-45LL-BK NY-5K-43GLLC-BK NY-5K-43LLC-BK NY-5K-44LLC-BK NY-5K-45LLC-BK Handle Color Blue Green Orange Red Yellow Designator BL GR OG RD YW
Valve Series 43G 43GX 43 43X 43Y 43Y6 43Z 43Z6 44 44X 45 45X 45Y
Type On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) Crossover (4-way) Crossover (6-way) Switching (5-way) Switching (7-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) On-off (2-way) Switching (3-way) Crossover (4-way)
14
Vent Port and Stem Extension Options

Vented Valves
Pressure rating for vented valves is 500 psig (34.4 bar).
Stem Extensions (Manual Valves)

Standard lengths are 2, 4, and 6 in.
2-Way, Straight-Pattern Valves

When the valve is closed, the downstream port vents to atmosphere through a vent hole in the side of the valve body.
Factory Assembled
To order a factory-assembled stem extension, add the stem extension designator to the valve ordering number
Stem Extension Length, in. (mm) 2 (50.8) 4 (102) 6 (152) Stem Extension Designator -SE2 -SE4 -SE6
2-Way, Angle-Pattern and 3-Way Valves

When the valve is closed, the bottom port vents to atmosphere through a vent hole in the side of the valve body.
To order a vented valve, insert V into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43GVS4 B-43VS4
Warning: Cross-vent flow may occur in vented valves.

To eliminate cross-vent flow, specify a smaller ball orifice. Add a designator from the table below to the valve ordering number.
Valve Series 41G, 41GX, 41, 41X, 42G, 42GX, 42, 42X 43G, 43X, 43, 43X, 44, 44X, 45, 45X 45, 45X Orifice in. (mm) 0.040 (1.02) 0.049 (1.24) 0.093 (2.36) Designator -040 -049 -093
Examples: SS-43GS4-SE2 SS-44S6-SE4

To order a stem extension kit for field assembly, add a dash and the stem extension length (2, 4, 6) in inches to the kit basic ordering number.
Valve Series 41G, 42G 43G 41, 42 43 44 45 Stem Extension Kit Basic Ordering Number MS-SE-42G MS-SE-43G MS-SE-42 MS-SE-43 MS-SE-44 MS-SE-45
Examples: SS-41GVS1-040 B-42VS4-040
Welded Vent Port Connections

Stainless steel vented valves are available with a Swagelok tube fitting or a tube stub welded to the vent port. See the table below. 40G Series Ordering Information To order a 40G series vented valve with a welded vent port connection, add the connection designator to the vented valve ordering number.
Vent Port Connection Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting Fractional tube stub Metric tube stub Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 3 mm 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 0.049, 2 in. long 6 1.0, 50 mm long Swagelok Tube Fitting Connection Welded to Vent Port
Examples: MS-SE-42G-2" MS-SE-44-4"
Accessories
Directional Name Plates
Indicate the direction of flow. Available for all 40G series and
40 series valves.
Matte surface accepts ink or labels.
Designator -WVS2 -WVS4 -WVS6 -WVS3M -WVS6M -WVS8M -WV4T49-2 -WV6MT10-50M
To order, add -WN1 (blank nameplate) or -WN2 (marked nameplate) to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-WN1 B-42VS4-WN2 Directional name plate kits are also available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Available for 43G series valves only.
Example: SS-43GVS4-WVS4 40 Series Ordering Information To order a 40 series vented valve with welded vent port connection, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
15
Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Service Designator HT LT NF Temperature Range F (C) 20 to 200
(28 to 93)
Maximum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) At 100F At Maximum (37C) Temperature 165 (11.3) 100 (6.8) 200 (13.7) 165 (11.3) 165 (11.3)
0 to 400
(17 to 204)
40 to 200
(40 to 93)
20 to 200
(28 to 93)

Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are compact, lightweight, and easily mountable. The actuators are available in spring-return and double-acting modes. Straight, anglepattern, and 4-way valves require 90 actuation; 3-way valves require 180 actuation. For technical data, including actuator materials of construction, air displacement, and weight, see the Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-06-87. Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.
Actuation Modes Actuator Model Designator -31 -51 -31 -33 -51 -53 -33 -53 -33 -53 Spring Return Single 60 (4.2) 60 (4.2) 80 (5.6) 65 (4.5) 70 (4.9) 65 (4.5) 70 (4.9) 70 (4.9) 90 (6.3) 85 (5.9) Dual 70 (4.9) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) 70 (4.9) 90 (6.3) 80 (5.6) Double Acting Single 25 (1.8) 25 (1.8) 50 (3.5) 20 (1.4) 50 (3.5) 20 (1.4) 25 (1.8) 25 (1.8) 60 (4.2) 60 (4.2) Dual 35 (2.5) 35 (2.5) 80 (5.6) 35 (2.5) 80 (5.6) 35 (2.5) 50 (3.5) 50 (3.5) 100 (6.9) 100 (6.9)
Valve Series 41G, 42G, 41, 42 41GX, 42GX, 41X, 42X 43G, 43, 43Y 43GX, 43X 44
Actuator Model 31 (90) 51 (180) 31 (90) 33 (90) 51 (180) 53 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180)
44X 45, 45Y 45X
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4-way) valve.
See next page for Dimensions and Ordering Information.
16
Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and subject to change.
O (spring return) N (double acting ) M 2 mounting holes 0.34 (8.6) dia K L G H J E F
1/8 in. NPT 2 mounting holes 0.34 (8.6) dia
1/8 in. NPT B A Q
Valve Series 41G, 42G, 41, 42, 41GX, 42GX, 41X, 42X 43G, 43, 43GX, 43X, 43Y 44, 44X 45, 45X, 45Y
Actuator Model 31 (90) 51 (180) 31 (90) 51 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180) 33 53 33 53 (90) (180) (90) (180)

(71.4)
B 0.34
(8.6)
C 2.00
(50.8)
D 1.75
(44.5)
2.91
(73.9)
0.34
(8.6)
1.75 2.00
(50.8) (44.5)
3.47
(88.1)
0.48
(12.1)
2.31
(58.7)
E 3.04 (77.2) 3.04 (77.2) 4.07

(103)
F 1.73
(43.9)
G 1.31
(33.3)
H 0.60
(15.2)
J 0.52
(13.2)
K 0.31
(7.9)
L 1.46
(37.1)
M 1.25
(31.8)
N 4.09
(104)
O 4.91
(125)
Q 1.80
(45.7)
1.73
(43.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.60
(15.2)
0.52
(13.2)
0.31
(7.9)
1.46
(37.1)
1.25
(31.8)
4.09
(104)
4.91
(125)
1.80
(45.7)
2.32
(58.9)
1.75
(44.5)
0.75
(19.1)
0.81
(20.6)
0.44
(11.2)
2.16
(54.9)
1.56
(39.6)
5.89
(150)
7.86
(200)
2.30
(58.4)
4.13
(104)
0.48
(12.1)
2.00
(50.8)
2.31
(58.7)
4.07
(103)
2.32
(58.9)
1.75
(44.5)
0.75
(19.1)
0.81
(20.6)
0.44
(11.2)
2.16
(54.9)
1.56
(39.6)
5.89
(150)
7.86
(200)
2.56
(65.0)
4.25
(108)
0.48
(12.1)
2.19
(55.6)
2.31
(58.7)
4.07
(103)
2.32
(58.9)
1.75
(44.5)
0.75
(19.1)
0.81
(20.6)
0.44
(11.2)
2.16
(54.9)
1.56
(39.6)
5.89
(150)
7.86
(200)
2.56
(65.0)
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4-way) valve.
SS - 43GS4 -31 D HT
Based on valve series, select actuator designator. See Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure table, page 15. -31 = 90 actuation -33 = 90 actuation -51 = 180 actuation -53 = 180 actuation
C = Spring return, normally closed D = Double acting O = Spring return, normally open S = Spring return, 3-way and 4-way valves
HT = High temperature LT = Low temperature NF = Nonfluorocarbon None = Standard
For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one actuator), add DM to the ordering number. Example: SS-43GS4-31DDM
17
Pneumatic Actuators
MS-1 31 - DA -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, select actuator model. See Dimensions table, page 16. 31 = 90 actuation 33 = 90 actuation 51 = 180 actuation 53 = 180 actuation Mounting Bracket Kits Mounting bracket kits contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket Four 18-8 stainless steel socket head
DA = Double acting SR = Spring return
-HT = High temperature -LT = Low temperature -NF = Nonfluorocarbon None = Standard
Valve Series 41G, 42G 41GX, 42GX 43G 43GX 41, 42 41X, 42X 43 43X 43Y 44 44X 45 45X 45Y
Actuator Model 31 (90) 31 (90) 33 (90)
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G SS-MB-43G SS-MB-43G-133
Coupling Kits Coupling kits enable replacement of 41, 42, or 43 series valves mounted to Swagelok pneumatic actuators with equivalent 41G, 42G, or 43G series valves. Coupling kits contain:
304 stainless steel coupling S17400 stainless steel coupling pin 18-8 stainless steel lock nut instructions. Coupling Kit Ordering Number 304-5K-41G-131 304-5K-43G-131 304-5K-43G-133
cap screws
Coupling 40G series304 stainless steel 40 seriescarbon steel Coupling pin 40G seriesS17400 stainless steel 40 seriescarbon steel 18-8 stainless steel lock nut instructions.
51 (180) SS-MB-41G
51 (180) SS-MB-43G 53 (180) SS-MB-43G-133 31 (90) 31 (90) 33 (90) MS-MB-41 MS-MB-43 MS-MB-43-133 51 (180) MS-MB-41
Valve Series 41G, 42G 41GX, 42GX 43G 43GX
Actuator Model 31 (90) 31 (90) 33 (90)
51 (180) MS-MB-43 53 (180) MS-MB-43-133 31 (90) 33 (90) 33 (90) 33 (90) 33 (90) MS-MB-43Y MS-MB-43Y-133 MS-MB-44 MS-MB-45 MS-MB-45Y
51 (180) 304-5K-41G-131
51 (180) 304-5K-43G-131 53 (180) 304-5K-43G-133
53 (180) MS-MB-44 53 (180) MS-MB-45
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y

designates crossover (4-way) valve.
X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y

designates crossover (4-way) valve.
42G series and 42 series valves with VCO or
VCR end connections mounted to a Swagelok pneumatic actuator are only available factory assembled. 44 series valves with VCR end connections require kit MS-MB-44-VCR.
18

Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8.0 bar). See Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum actuator pressures.
Actuator Service Designator HT LT Temperature Range F (C) 4 to 176
(20 to 80)
Actuator Service Standard High temperature Low temperature
5 to 302
(15 to 150)
40 to 176
(40 to 80)
These Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are ISO 5211 compliant and are suitable for general applications. They are available in spring-return and double-acting modes. Straight and angle-pattern valves require 90 actuation; 3-way valves require 180 actuation. For technical data, including actuator materials of construction and weight, see the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves, MS-02-337. For additional information on selecting and sizing ISO 5211-compliant actuators, see the Actuated Ball Valve Selection GuideISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-02-136.

Actuation Modes Valve Series 41G, 42G, 41, 42 41GX, 42GX, 41X, 42X 43G, 43 43GX, 43X 44 44X 45 45X Actuator Model A15 (90) A15 (180) A15 (90) A15 (180) A15 (90) A15 (180) A30 (90) A30 (180) Actuator Model Designator -A15 -A15 -A15 -A15 -A15 -A15 -A30 -A30 Spring Return Double Acting Minimum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) 36 (2.5) 43 (3.0) 50 (3.5) 65 (4.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5)
X designates switching (3-way) valve.
Certifications
Factory-assembled valve assemblies with ISO 5211-compliant actuators are available with ATEX conformity on request at the time of order quotation. ATEX certification is not available for field assemblies.
For field assembly to ISO 5211-compliant actuators, 40 series valves must contain a two-flat, K-style stem. To order a 40 series valve with a K-style stem and no handle, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number. Example: B-43S4-K-NH Standard 40G series valves are assembled with a two-flat stem.
19

Dimensions
D
(40.0)
E F G 1.57
L A 2 mounting holes 0.34 (8.6) dia

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
J K
Valve Series 41G, 42G, 41, 42 41GX, 42GX, 41X, 42X 43G, 43 43GX, 43X 44 44X 45 45X
Actuator Model A15 (90)
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C D E F G J K L 3.05 (77.5) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 5.51 (140) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.03 (51.6)
A15 (180) 3.05 (77.5) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 7.76 (197) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.03 (51.6) A15 (90) A15 (90) A30 (90) 3.12 (79.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 5.51 (140) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.02 (51.3) 3.56 (90.4) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 5.51 (140) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.18 (55.4) 4.20 (107) 2.19 (55.6) 2.46 (62.5) 6.22 (158) 3.27 (83.0) 2.83 (72.0) 1.42 (36.0) 1.72 (43.7) 3.57 (90.7) 2.59 (65.8)
A15 (180) 3.12 (79.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 7.76 (197) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.02 (51.3) A15 (180) 3.56 (90.4) 2.00 (50.8) 2.15 (54.5) 7.76 (197) 2.78 (70.5) 2.32 (59.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.44 (36.6) 3.07 (78.0) 2.18 (55.4) A30 (180) 4.20 (107) 2.19 (55.6) 2.46 (62.5) 8.70 (221) 3.27 (83.0) 2.83 (72.0) 1.42 (36.0) 1.72 (43.7) 3.57 (90.7) 2.59 (65.8)
SS - 43GS4 -A15 D HT
Based on valve series, select actuator designator. See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 18. -A15 = A15 -A30 = A30
C3 = Normally closed, spring return (41G, 42G, 43G, 41, 42, 43 series 2-way valves) O3 = Normally open, spring return (41G, 42G, 43G, 41, 42, 43 series 2-way valves) C4 = Normally closed, spring return (44, 45 series 2-way valves) O4 = Normally open, spring return (44, 45 series 2-way valves) D = Double acting (2-way valves) XD = Double acting (3-way valves) S3 = Spring return (all 3-way valves with H and L flow paths)
See next page for Kits for Field Assembly.
20

MS - A15 - DA - DIN -HT

A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
Based on valve series, select actuator designator. See Minimum Actuator Pressure table, page 18. A15 = A15 A30 = A30
DA = Double acting (2-way valves) XDA = Double acting (3-way valves) 3 = Spring return
C Coupling Drive Type
DIN
Mounting Bracket Kits Swagelok ISO 5211 mounting bracket kits contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket Four A4 stainless steel socket head
Valve Mounting Bracket Kit Series Ordering Number 41G, 41GX, SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M 42G, 42GX 43G, 43GX 41, 41X, 42, 42X 43, 43X 44, 44X 45, 45X SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-44-F04-11DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
Couplings and Set Screws Replacement of 41, 42, or 43 series valves mounted to ISO 5211-compliant pneumatic actuators with equivalent 41G, 42G, or 43G series valves requires new couplings and set screws. To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
cap screws (A4 is approximately equivalent to 316 SS)

Coupling 40G seriespowdered metal
300 series stainless steel

40 series316 stainless steel A4 stainless steel set screw Instructions
X designates switching (3-way) valve. 42G series and 42 series valves with VCO or
VCR end connections mounted to a Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant pneumatic actuator are only available factory assembled.

Solenoid Valves Valve with No Handle Stop and No Handle (40G Series)
attach to the actuator to create an electropneumatically actuated ball valve assembly. For more information, see the Swagelok Solenoid Valves for Electropneumatically Actuated Ball Valves catalog, MS-02-41.
Position Indicators
provides increased accessibility to packing bolt. To order, add -NHS to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-43GS4-NHS For more information on actuator options, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
provide visual status of a valve. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Limit Switches
indicate actuator position by means of an electrical signal. They meet a variety of NEMA ratings such as NEMA 4 (weatherproof) and NEMA 7 (explosion proof). For more information, see the Swagelok Limit Switches catalog, MS-06-39.
21
Electric Actuators
Dimensions
(90.4)
3.56
141 series, 4.12

(105);
142 series, 5.25

(133)
Swagelok electric actuators can be used to control the position of Swagelok instrumentation ball valves; alternatingand direct-current models are available. An electrical signal is used to change valve position from remote locations. Integral limit switches provide an output signal of the valve position, even between positions. The drive shaft of these actuators rotates in one direction.
0.20 0.47 0.36 (9.1) 2.34 (59.4) 4.78

(121)
1 1/8 hex 0.96

(14.2)
(11.9)
0.44 0.17 (11.2)

(4.3)
(5.1) (32.0)
1.26
0.56
(24.4)
See the Swagelok Electric Actuators catalog, MS-01-35, for features, testing, materials of construction, technical data, and dimensions.
Electric actuators are not available on angle-pattern valves and vented valves.
DO NOT USE THESE ACTUATORS ON VENTED BALL VALVES. THE DRIVE SHAFT OF THESE ACTUATORS ROTATES IN ONE DIRECTION.
Not CE marked.
1. Choose the actuator series that corresponds with the selected valve series.
Valve Series Actuator Series 41G, 41GX, 42G, 42GX, 41, 41X, 42, 42X 43G, 43GX, 43, 43X, 44, 44X 141

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve. 1. Identify the valve series. 2. Follow steps 1 through 3 in the Factory-Assembled Valve and Actuator ordering information. 3. Replace the dash in the actuator designator with MS-1. Example: MS-141AC 4. Select the mounting bracket kit ordering number from the table below. Kits include mounting brackets, cap screws, coupling, and instructions.
Valve Series 41G, 41GX, 42G, 42GX 43G, 43GX 41, 41X, 42, 42X 43, 43X 44, 44X Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-41G SS-MB-43G MS-MB-41 MS-MB-43 MS-MB-44-131
142
Example: A 41G series valve requires a 141 series actuator. 2. See the Actuator Specifications table in the Swagelok Electric Actuators catalog, MS-01-35. Based on the actuator series, select the preferred voltage/frequency/ conduit connection for the required actuator. Example: 120 V (ac)/60 Hz/1/2 in. NPT 3. Identify the valve flow path. Example: 2-way 4. Add the actuator designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-41GS2-41AC
X designates switching (3-way) valve. 42G series and 42 series valves with VCO
or VCR end connections mounted to a Swagelok electric actuator are only available factory assembled.
22
Process Options
Production Tests
To specify an optional production test in place of the standard testing, add a designator from the table at right to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-PT B-43S4-PT
-W20 Test Designator -PT Production Test Description Valves are tested with nitrogen at a customerspecified pressure. Test pressure must not exceed the rated pressure of the valve. Maximum allowable leak rate depends on test pressure. 40G seriesvalves are hydrostatically tested with deionized water at 1.5 times the rated pressure of the valve. No visible leakage is permitted. 40 seriesvalves are hydrostatically tested with deionized water at the rated pressure of the valve. No visible leakage is permitted. Valves are helium leak tested at a pressure of 1 104 Torr. The maximum allowable leak rate is 4 109 std cm3/s.
-W31

40G series and 40 series valves are available with optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C.
Valves Assembled Without Lubrication

40G series and 40 series ball valves assembled without lubrication are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63.
40G Series
40G series valves assembled without lubrication have a pressure rating of 500 psig (34.4 bar).
40G Series
Special cleaning of 40G series valves changes the lowtemperature rating from 65F (53C) to 30F (34C).
40 Series
40 series valves assembled without lubrication have a pressure rating of 200 psig (13.7 bar). Brass valves are assembled with stainless steel rings, discs, and ball stem.
40 Series
Special cleaning of 40 series valves does not affect the temperature rating.
To order, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-SC11 B-43S4-SC11
To order, add -1466 to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-43GS4-1466 B-43S4-1466

44 and 45 series valves assembled without
lubrication have a significantly higher actuation torque than valves assembled with lubrication.
Service Options
40G Series
The standard 40G series valve low-temperature rating is 65F (53C).
Sour Gas Service

40G series and 40 series valves for sour gas service are available. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-42GF2-SG SS-44F4-SG
40 Series
Live-loaded PFA (all sizes) and UHMWPE (41, 42, and 43 series sizes) packing are available to extend the low-temperature rating to 65F (53C). See the Swagelok Live-Loaded 40 Series Ball Valves for Low-Temperature Service catalog, MS-02-109.
23
Flow Path Options

Two-Port Paths Three-Port Paths
1 3 2 2 L Flow Path
Angle porting can transfer a sample from port 1 to port 2.
1 2
1 L Flow Path
Turn 90
Offtrap sample from port 1
Switchtransfer sample to port 2
Angle porting allows switching of port 1 to port 2 or port 1 to port 3 when the handle is rotated 90. THERE IS NO OFF POSITION.
Turn 90
3 1 Port 1 to port 2
3 1 Port 1 to port 3
Valve Series
Orifice in. (mm)
Approx Ball Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.0004 (0.007) 0.0005 (0.008) 0.0012 (0.020) 0.0013 (0.021) 0.0073 (0.120) 0.0473 (0.775)
Flow Path Designator
41G, 41 0.040 (1.02) 42G, 42 0.047 (1.19) 43G 43 44 45 0.062 (1.57) 0.062 (1.57) 0.125 (3.18) 0.281 (7.14)
H Flow Path
Tee porting with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) allows ports 1, 2, and 3 to be open or closed at the same time.
2500 (172) L 1500 (103)
Turn 90
3 1 All ports open
3 1 All ports closed
HL Flow Path
Tee porting is used for inline, on-off service when fluid must not be trapped in the stem cavity. System fluid can be evacuated through port 2 when the valve is in the off position.
Valve Series 41G, 41 42G, 42 43G, 43 44 45 Orifice in. (mm) 0.093 (2.36) 0.125 (3.18) 0.187 (4.75) 0.281 (7.14) 0.406 (10.3) 1500 (103) Valve Series 41GX, 41X 42GX, 42X 43GX, 43X 44X 45X Orifice in. (mm) 0.093 (2.36) 0.125 (3.18) 0.187 (4.75) 0.281 (7.14) 0.406 (10.3) 2500 (172) HL
HL Flow Path
Turn 90
Turn 90
Turn 90
On
Off 3 2 1 3 1 Ports 1, 2, and 3 open 2 3 1 Ports 1 and 3 open 2
Flow Path Designator
Ports 1 and 2 open
Tee porting with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) enables selection of ports 1 and 2; 1 and 3; or 1, 2, and 3. THERE IS NO OFF POSITION.
Flow Path Designator L = Angle H = Tee (all ports open or closed) HL = Tee (no off position)
Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in two- and

three-port valves with L and HL flow paths and orifices larger than 0.049 in. (1.24 mm). To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice. See Ordering Information, page 26.
1500 (103)
24
Flow Path Options (40 Series)

Four-Port Paths
4 L Flow Path
Angle porting provided with four ports and 360 handle rotation; two adjacent ports are connected and the other two are closed.
HL Flow Path
Turn 90
2 2
Turn 90
Turn 90
3 1 3 1 3 1 3
4 Ports 1 and 2 open
4 Ports 1, 2, and 3 open
H Flow Path
Straight-pattern porting can switch two streams on and off alternately or transfer a sample from ports 1 and 3 to ports 2 and 4.
Tee porting provided with four ports and 360 rotation of the handle; three adjacent ports can be connected at the same time and the remaining port is off.
Turn 90
HH Flow Path
3
Crossover ports allow continuous flow through ports 1 and 3 and continuous flow through ports 2 and 4.
Turn 90
Valve Series 43Y 45Y
Orifice in. (mm) 0.062 (1.57) L, H, HL: 0.281 (7.14) HH: 0.161 (4.09)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) L H HL HH
Flow Path Designator = = = = Angle Straight Tee Crossover
Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in four-port

valves. To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice. See Ordering Information, page 26.
25
Flow Path Options (40 Series)

Five-Port Paths
5 2
L Flow Path
Angle porting with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) allows two adjacent side ports to be open and the remaining two side ports to be closed. Switching can be done in 90 increments with 360 handle rotation.
Turn 90
HL Flow Path
Tee porting in the ball with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) permits three side ports to be open while the fourth side port is closed. Switching can be done in 90 increments with 360 handle rotation.
Turn 90
4 1
4 1
4 1
4 1
3 Ports 1, 2, 3, and 5 open
Turn 90
Turn 90
Turn 90
Turn 90
4 1
4 1
4 1
4 1
H Flow Path
Tee porting in the ball with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) allows selection of ports 2 and 4 or 3 and 5 with 360 handle rotation.
Valve Series
Turn 90
Orifice in. (mm) 0.062 (1.57) 0.281 (7.14)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 2500 (172) 1500 (103)
Flow Path Designator L = Angle H = Tee ( 2 ports close) HL = Tee (1 port closes)
43Z 45Z
4 1 3 Ports 1, 2 and 4 open
4 1
3 Ports 1. 3, and 5 open
Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in five-port

valves. To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice. See Ordering Information, page 26.
26
Flow Path Options

40G Series
Two- and three-port flow paths are available. Insert a flow path designator into a 40G series ordering number as shown. Examples: SS-41GLS2 for a two-port 41G series valve with L flow path SS-43GXHLS4 for a three-port 43G series valve with HL flow path
40 Series
Two-and three-port paths are available for brass and alloy 400 valves. Four-and five-port paths are available for stainless steel, brass, and alloy 400 valves. Add a material designator and insert a flow path designator into a 40 series basic ordering number as shown. Examples: B-41LS2 for a brass two-port 41 series valve with L flow path SS-44XHS6 for a stainless steel three-port 44 series valve with H flow path
Material 316 SS Valve Series Designator 43Y, 43Z, 44, 44X, SS 45, 45X, 45Y, 45Z M
41, 41X, 42, 42X, 43, 43X, 43Y, 43Z, Alloy 400 44, 44X, 45, 45X, 45Y, 45Z Brass 41, 41X, 42, 42X, 43, 43X, 43Y, 43Z, 44, 44X, 45, 45X, 45Y, 45Z
Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in some sizes

and flow paths. To eliminate cross-port flow, specify an orifice of:
0.049 in. for 41G, 42G, 43G, 41, 42, and 43 series valves
whose standard orifice is larger than 0.049 in. (1.24 mm).

Examples: SS-43GHLS4-049
B-43XLS4-049
0.093 in. for 44 and 45 series valves whose standard orifice
is larger than 0.093 in. (2.36 mm).

Examples: SS-44LS6-093
SS-45YHS8-093
27
Ordering Multiple Options and Accessories

Swagelok 40G series and 40 series instrumentation ball valves are available with a wide variety of options and accessories that enable valve configurations customized to meet specific system requirements. Just insert or add designators as shown.
SS - 43G E V L S4 -LL-RD
1 Body Material 5 Optional Flow Path 7 Options and Accessories
B = Brass (40 series only) M = Alloy 400 (40 series only) SS = 316 stainless steel (40G series, 44 series, 45 series)
2 Valve Series
H, L, HH, HL (page 23)

6 End Connections, Size
On-Off (2-Way) (page 6) 41G, 42G, 43G, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 Switching (3-Way) (page 8) 41GX, 42GX, 43GX, 41X, 42X, 43X, 44X, 45X Switching (5-Way) (page 10) 43Z, 45Z Switching (7-Way) (page 10) 43Z6 Crossover (4-Way) (page 11) 43Y, 45Y Crossover (6-Way) (page 11) 43Y6
3 Packing Material
40G Series E = UHMWPE None = modified PTFE 40 Series None = PTFE

4 Optional Vent Port
V = Vent port (page 14)
Swagelok Tube Fittings Fractional, in. S1 = 1/16 S2 = 1/8 S4 = 1/4 S6 = 3/8 S8 = 1/2 S12 = 3/4 Metric, mm S3MM = 3 S6MM = 6 S8MM = 8 S10MM = 10 S12MM = 12 Female NPT F2 = 1/8 in. F4 = 1/4 in. F6 = 3/8 in. F8 = 1/2 in. Female ISO/BSP Tapered F4RT = 1/4 in. F6RT = 3/8 in. F8RT = 1/2 in. Male NPT M4 = 1/4 in. Male NPT to Swagelok Tube Fitting M4-S4 = 1/4 in. VCO Fittings VCO4 = 1/4 in. Integral Male VCR Fittings VCR4 = 1/4 in. VCR8 = 1/2 in.
Add multiple designators in alphanumeric order. Not all options available for all valves. See pages cited below. -A = Angle-pattern body (page 6) -BL, -GR, -OG, -RD, -YW = Nylon directional handle colors (page 12) -K, -SHD, -SH, -BKB, -NH, -NHS, -LH, -LL, -LLC = Handle options (pages 12 and 20) -WVS2, -WVS4, . . . -WVS8M = Swagelok tube fitting vent port connections (page 14) -WV4T49-2, -WV6MT10-50M = Tube stub vent port connections (page 14) -SE2, -SE4, -SE6 = Stem extensions (page 14) -WN1, -WN2 = Directional name plates (page 14) -PT, -W20, -W31 = Production tests (page 22) -SC11 = Special cleaning and packaging (page 22) -1466 = No lubrication/special cleaning and packaging (page 22)

SS-43GEVS4-LL-PT-RD for a 43G series valve with: UHMWPE packing vent port 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting end connections red latch-lock handle testing to a customer-specified pressure SS-44XLF6-SH-WN1-1466 for a 3-way 44 series valve with: L flow path 3/8 in. female NPT end connections 316 stainless steel bar handle blank directional nameplate assembly without lubrication
Swagelok, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2005, 2007, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2009, R5 MS-02-331
www.swagelok.com
O r bital We lding Syste m

Micro We ld He ads
Se r ie s 4 a nd Se r ie s 8
Available for tube outside diameters ranging from 1/16 to 1/2 in. and 2 to 12 mm Features a compact size for easy access to confined welding areas Weld head includes arc gap gauge, centering gauge, micro fixture tool, tool package,
and tungsten electrodes
Orbital Welding SystemSeries 4 and Series 8
Features
Miniature design permits access to conned welding areas Optical speed controlno tachometer or calibration required Improved productivity from the ability to set up one xture
Series 4
For weld joint outside diameters of 1/16 to 1/4 in.
and 2 to 6 mm
Rigid- or exible-drive weld head for ultimate versatility
while welding with another xture
Series 8
For weld joint outside diameters of 1/8 to 1/2 in. and
3 to 12 mm
Technical Data
Weld Joint Weld Nominal Outside Head Diameter Series 1/16 to 1/4 in.; 4 2 to 6 mm 1/8 to 1/2 in.; 8 SWAGELOK SERIES 4 WELD HEAD 3 to 12 mm Minimum Axial Clearance in. (mm) 0.490 (12.4) 1.00 (25.4)
SWAGELOK SERIES 8 WELD HEAD
Minimum Radial Clearance in. (mm) 0.84 (21.3)
Maximum Average Weld Current 30 A
Maximum Welds per Hour 10 to 12
38 A CA-ELD-0301 12
Based on welding 1/4 0.035 in. 316L tubing. Based on welding 1/2 0.049 in. 316L tubing.
Dimensions
Series 4
Rigid Drive with Motor Module
(33.2)
CA-ELD-0304
0.49
S 4 WELD HEAD
CA-ELD-0303
0.24 (6.1) to center of electrode
Series 8
Weld Head with Fixture
(23.6) (40.6) (27.9)
(12.4)
1.60
1.10
1.31
0.82
(11.4)
0.45
0.93
(20.8)
0.24 (6.1) to center of electrode 4.00

(102)
(60.9)
2.40
Fixture
Rigid-Drive Weld Head

1.10
0.49 (12.4) 1.13
Fixture
3.30 1.60
(28.7)
(33.0)
1.30
(27.9)
(83.8) (47.2)
R 0.84
1.86
(21.3)
5.00
(40.6) (43.1)
CA-ELD-0302
(35.6)
(127)
1.70 R 1.00
(25.4)
(20.0)
0.79
Rigid-Drive Weld Head

1.90
(48.2)
1.40
(27.9)
1.10
(20.0)
0.79
FlexibleDrive Weld Head

(35.5)
(45.7)
1.80
1.40
Weld Head
2.60
(66.0)
Motor Module
(45.7)
1.80
6.00
(152) (305)
12.0
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
Orbital Welding SystemSeries 4 and Series 8
Swagelok Series 4 and Series 8 micro weld heads are shipped with an arc gap gauge, centering gauge, tool package, xture tool, assorted electrode packages, and users manual.
Series 4 Flexible-Drive Weld Head
Micro Weld Heads

Series 4 8 Weld Head Drive Rigid Flexible Rigid Ordering Number SWS-4MRH-B SWS-4MFH-B SWS-8MRH-B Series 8 Weld Head Series 4 Rigid-Drive Weld Head
Motor Modules
Only one motor module is necessary to operate either
series weld head model.

Has polarized power connectors to ensure proper weld
head/power supply connections

Description Motor module Ordering Number SWS-M-MTR-B Motor Module
Micro Weld Head Fixtures

Front-load scissor action provides access to conned
areas for close-coupled welding

Cantilever design xture collets compensate for tube
outside diameter variations of 0.005 in. (0.13 mm)

Laser-inscription on the xtures assists user with parts
orientation
Split-base design provides component alignment
adjustment
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number SWS-4MFB-01 SWS-4MFB-02 SWS-4MFB-03 SWS-4MFB-04 SWS-8MFA-02 SWS-8MFA-04 SWS-8MFA-06 SWS-8MFA-08 Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter mm 2 3 4 6 5 6 8 9 10 11 12
Series 4 Fixture
Series 8 Fixture
Ordering Number SWS-4MFB-2MM SWS-4MFB-3MM SWS-4MFB-4MM SWS-4MFB-6MM
Series 4 Weld Head
Series 4 Weld Head
Series 8 Weld Head
Series 8 Weld Head SWS-8MFA-5MM SWS-8MFA-6MM SWS-8MFA-8MM SWS-8MFA-9MM SWS-8MFA-10MM SWS-8MFA-11MM SWS-8MFA-12MM
Accessories
Arc Gap Gauges
Swagelok arc gap gauges position the electrode precisely in the rotor for repeatable welds. The easyto-use gauge helps eliminate errors associated with sight and feeler gauge adjustments. One arc gap gauge comes with the weld head.
Bench Mounting Brackets

Swagelok bench mounting brackets attach rigid- or exible-micro weld heads to a work bench. The Series 4 bracket features a quick-release mechanism for convenient operation.
Series 4 8 Ordering Number CWS-4MBB CWS-8MBB
Series 4 8
Ordering Number CWS-4MAG CWS-8MAG
Centering Gauges
The micro weld head centering gauge ensures accurate centering of weld components in the micro xture. One centering gauge comes with the weld head.
Series 4 8 Ordering Number CWS-4MCG CWS-8MCG
Weld Head Extension Cables

Swagelok weld head extension cables, in combination with the standard motor module, provide weld head operation of up to 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply. Cables are available in lengths of 12.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).
Extension Cable, ft (m) 12.5 (3.8) 37.5 (11.4)
Ordering Number SWS-WHEC-B-12.5FT SWS-WHEC-B-37.5FT
Micro Fixture Tool

This tool engages the xture latch for easy opening and closing of the micro weld head xture. One micro xture tool comes with the weld head.
Description Micro fixture tool Ordering Number CWS-MFP-FIXTL
Tungsten Electrodes
L Swagelok electrodes, available in packages of ten, provide consistent, D repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specications.
Cooling Plates
Swagelok cooling plates quickly absorb heat away from the micro weld head fixture and components after welding.
Series 4 8 Ordering Number CWS-4MCP CWS-8MCP
Weld Joint Nominal Electrode Electrode Outside Diameter Diameter (D) Length (L) in. mm in. (mm) in. (mm) Series 4 Weld Head 1/16, 1/8, 3/16 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 2, 3, 4 6 3, 5 6, 8, 9 10, 11 12 0.040 (1.0) 0.040 (1.0)
Ordering Number
0.405 (10.3) CWS-C.040-.405-P 0.325 (8.26) CWS-C.040-.325-P
Series 8 Weld Head 0.450 (11.4) CWS-C.040-.450-P 0.405 (10.3) CWS-C.040-.405-P 0.325 (8.26) CWS-C.040-.325-P 0.281 (7.14) CWS-C.040-.281-P
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI February 2006, R2 MS-02-130
www.swagelok.com

Q uick Refe re nce Guide
Arc gap and centering gauges Pipe and tube collets and fixtures Tungsten electrodes Weld head and power supply accessories Internal purge pressure kits Stainless steel flux Tube facing tools
Orbital Welding SystemQuick Reference Guide
Power Supplies
Contents
Arc Gap Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centering Gauges Series 4, Series 8, Series 5, Series 10, Series 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 8HPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Collets 3 3 3
See these Swagelok orbital welding system catalogs:

M100 Power Supply, MS-02-102 M100 High-Purity Power Supply, MS-02-305 D100 Power Supply, MS-02-54
Series 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tube Collets Series 5, Series 10, Series 20, Series 40 . . . . . . . . Special-Purpose Tube Collets
4 4
Weld Heads
Series 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Facing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thin Collets Series 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Fixtures Series 4, Series 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 5, Series 10, Series 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 8HPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 6
7 7 8
See these Swagelok orbital welding system catalogs:

Micro Weld HeadsSeries 4 and Series 8, MS-02-130
Special-Purpose Fixtures Series 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tungsten Electrodes Series 4, Series 8, Series 5, Series 10 Series 20, Series 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Series 8HPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Weld Head Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Power Supply Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Carrying Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Internal Purge Pressure Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Stainless Steel Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Tube Facing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 8 9
For outside diameters from 1/16 to 1/2 in. and 2 to 12 mm

Series 5, MS-02-129

High-Performance Series 8HPH, MS-02-304

Series 10, MS-02-131
For outside diameters from 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to 25 mm

For outside diameters from 1/2 to 2 in. and 12 to 52 mm

For outside tube diameters from 1 1/2 to 4 in. (38.1 to 104 mm) and JIS pipe diameters from 1 1/4 to 4 in. (42.4 to 114.3 mm)
Arc Gap Gauges

Series 4, Series 8, Series 5, Series 10, and Series 20
Swagelok arc gap gauges promote precise positioning of the electrode in the rotor to help ensure repeatable welds. The easy-to-use gauges eliminate errors associated with sight and feeler gauge adjustments.
Description Micro arc gap gauge Arc gap gauge Series 4 8 5 10 20 Ordering Number CWS-4MAG CWS-8MAG CWS-5AG-A CWS-10AG CWS-20AG
Centering Gauges
Series 4, Series 8, Series 5, Series 10, and Series 20
The Swagelok micro weld head centering gauge (Series 4 and 8) promotes accurate centering of weld components in the micro xture. Swagelok centering gauges (Series 5, 10, and 20) provide accurate centering of weld components for high-quality welds. A exible wire lanyard makes it easy to attach the gauge to the xture block.
Description Micro centering gauge Centering gauge Series 4 8 5 10 20 Ordering Number CWS-4MCG CWS-8MCG CWS-5CG CWS-10CG SWS-20CG-A
Series 8HPH
The weld head centering gauge assures the operator that the weld components are centered in the xture. One centering gauge is included with each high-performance weld head, based on the xture size specied. To order an additional centering gauge, select an ordering number from the tables below.
Fractional
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Metric
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter mm 3 6 8 10 12
Ordering Number SWS-8HPCG-02 SWS-8HPCG-04 SWS-8HPCG-06 SWS-8HPCG-08
Ordering Number SWS-8HPCG-3MM SWS-8HPCG-6MM SWS-8HPCG-8MM SWS-8HPCG-10MM SWS-8HPCG-12MM
Pipe Collets
Pipe collets are available for use with the Series 20 and Series 40 weld head and xtures. The cantilever design enables the collet to compensate for variations in nominal pipe diameter. Two collet haves are required per side plate.
Series 20
Fractional
Nominal Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 Ordering Number CWS-20UCI-04P CWS-20UCI-06P CWS-20UCI-08P CWS-20UCI-12P CWS-20UCI-16P CWS-20UCI-20P CWS-20UCI-24P
Metric
Nominal Pipe Size mm 10.2 13.5 17.2 21.3 26.9 33.7 42.4 48.3 Ordering Number CWS-20UCI-10.2MMP CWS-20UCI-13.5MMP CWS-20UCI-17.2MMP CWS-20UCI-21.3MMP CWS-20UCI-26.9MMP CWS-20UCI-33.7MMP CWS-20UCI-42.4MMP CWS-20UCI-48.3MMP
Japanese (JIS)
Nominal Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 Ordering Number CWS-20UCI-04PJ CWS-20UCI-06PJ CWS-20UCI-08PJ CWS-20UCI-12PJ CWS-20UCI-16PJ CWS-20UCI-20PJ CWS-20UCI-24PJ
Series 40
Nominal Pipe Size in. 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Optional support extensions shown above (page 12).
mm (JIS) 42.2 48.3 60.3 60.5 (50A) 73.0 76.3 (65A) 88.9 89.1 (80A) 101.6 (90A) 114.3 (100A)
Ordering Number SWS-40CI-20P SWS-40CI-24P SWS-40CI-32P SWS-40CI-60.5MMP SWS-40CI-40P SWS-40CI-76.3MMP SWS-40CI-48P SWS-40CI-89.1MMP SWS-40CI-56P SWS-40CI-64P
2 1/2 3 3 1/2 4
Standard Tube Collets

Series 5, Series 10, Series 20, and Series 40
Swagelok stainless steel tube collets rigidly hold components for welding and are easily changed for varying outside diameters, from 1/8 to 4 in. (3 to 104 mm). Two collet halves are required per side plate. The patented UCI collet design (Series 5, 10, and 20) accommodates components with a 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) tube outside diameter variation.
Fractional
Nominal Tube Size in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 9/16 5/8 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 3 1/2 4 Collet Half Ordering Number Series 5 CWS-5UCI-02 CWS-5UCI-03 CWS-5UCI-04 CWS-5UCI-05 CWS-5UCI-06 CWS-5UCI-08 CWS-5UCI-09 CWS-5UCI-10 Series 10 CWS-10UCI-04 CWS-10UCI-05 CWS-10UCI-06 CWS-10UCI-08 CWS-10UCI-10 CWS-10UCI-12 CWS-10UCI-14 CWS-10UCI-16 Series 20 CWS-20UCI-08 CWS-20UCI-10 CWS-20UCI-12 CWS-20UCI-14 CWS-20UCI-16 CWS-20UCI-18 CWS-20UCI-20 CWS-20UCI-24 CWS-20UCI-32 Series 40 SWS-40CI-24 SWS-40CI-32 SWS-40CI-40 SWS-40CI-48 SWS-40CI-56 SWS-40CI-64
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 22 23 25 Collet Half Ordering Number Series 5 CWS-5UCI-03MM CWS-5UCI-04MM CWS-5UCI-06MM CWS-5UCI-08MM CWS-5UCI-10MM CWS-5UCI-12MM CWS-5UCI-14MM CWS-5UCI-16MM Series 10 CWS-10UCI-06MM CWS-10UCI-08MM CWS-10UCI-10MM CWS-10UCI-12MM CWS-10UCI-14MM CWS-10UCI-15MM CWS-10UCI-16MM CWS-10UCI-18MM CWS-10UCI-19MM CWS-10UCI-20MM CWS-10UCI-22MM CWS-10UCI-23MM CWS-10UCI-25MM
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 35 40 52 38.1 42.4 44.5 48.3 50.8 54.0 60.3 63.5 76.2 88.9 102 104 Collet Half Ordering Number Series 20 CWS-20UCI-12MM CWS-20UCI-14MM CWS-20UCI-16MM CWS-20UCI-18MM CWS-20UCI-20MM CWS-20UCI-22MM CWS-20UCI-25MM CWS-20UCI-28MM CWS-20UCI-35MM CWS-20UCI-40MM CWS-20UCI-52MM Series 40 SWS-40CI-24 SWS-40CI-42.4MM SWS-40CI-44.5MM SWS-40CI-48.3MM SWS-40CI-32 SWS-40CI-54MM SWS-40CI-60.3MM SWS-40CI-40 SWS-40CI-48 SWS-40CI-56 SWS-40CI-64 SWS-40CI-104MM
Special-Purpose Tube Collets

Series 5
For Fitting Side Plates 1 and 2
Side plates shown on page 9. These collets eliminate the need to change xture blocks/ side plates depending on welding conguration. Fractional
Nominal Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UFCI-02 CWS-5UFCI-04 CWS-5UFCI-06 CWS-5UFCI-08 CWS-5UFCI-10
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 3 6 8 10 12 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UFCI-03MM CWS-5UFCI-06MM CWS-5UFCI-08MM CWS-5UFCI-10MM CWS-5UFCI-12MM
For Fitting Side Plate 2 and Swagelok Micro-Fit Fittings Adapter Inserts
Side plate and inserts shown on page 9. Swagelok stainless steel collets provide rigid holding of components for welding. They are easily changed for varying outside diameters. Two collet halves are required per side plate.
Micro-Fit Fitting Sizes 1/8 in., 1/4 in., 6 mm 3/8 in., 8 mm, 10 mm 1/2 in. and 12 mm Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5MWCI-04 CWS-5MWCI-06 CWS-5MWCI-08
For Fitting Side Plate 3

Side plate shown on page 9. No tools are required to insert or remove these collets. Fractional
Nominal Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5F3UCI-02 CWS-5F3UCI-04 CWS-5F3UCI-06 CWS-5F3UCI-08
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 3 6 8 12 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5F3UCI-03MM CWS-5UF3CI-06MM CWS-5UF3CI-08MM CWS-5F3UCI-12MM
Tube Facing Tool

For use with the Swagelok tube facing tool only.
Fractional
Nominal Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-20UCI-02 CWS-20UCI-04 CWS-20UCI-06 CWS-20UCI-08 CWS-20UCI-12 CWS-20UCI-16 CWS-20UCI-20 CWS-20UCI-24 CWS-20UCI-32
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 3 6 8 10 12 18 20 22 25 28 35 52 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-20UCI-3MM CWS-20UCI-6MM CWS-20UCI-8MM CWS-20UCI-10MM CWS-20UCI-12MM CWS-20UCI-18MM CWS-20UCI-20MM CWS-20UCI-22MM CWS-20UCI-25MM CWS-20UCI-28MM CWS-20UCI-35MM CWS-20UCI-52MM
Thin Collets
Series 20
Swagelok stainless steel thin collets for use with the Series 20 weld head and xtures are specially designed for use with thin side plates and are easily changed for varying outside diameters. Two collets are required per side plate.
Fractional
Nominal Tube Size in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Collet Half Ordering Number SWS-20UCI-08TN SWS-20UCI-12TN SWS-20UCI-16TN SWS-20UCI-20TN SWS-20UCI-24TN SWS-20UCI-32TN
Metric
Nominal Tube Size mm 12 18 20 22 25 28 35 52 Collet Half Ordering Number SWS-20UCI-12MMTN SWS-20UCI-18MMTN SWS-20UCI-20MMTN SWS-20UCI-22MMTN SWS-20UCI-25MMTN SWS-20UCI-28MMTN SWS-20UCI-35MMTN SWS-20UCI-52MMTN
Standard Fixtures
Series 4 and Series 8
Micro Fixtures
Series 5, Series 10, and Series 20

Fixture Blocks
Series 5 10 20 Ordering Number CWS-5TFB CWS-10TFB SWS-20TFB-A Capacity in. 1/8 to 5/8 1/4 to 1 1/2 to 2 mm 3 to 16 6 to 25 12 to 52
Fractional
Micro Fixture Size in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Metric
Micro Fixture Size mm 2 3 4 6 5 6 8 9 10 11 12
Fixture Side Plates and Plenums

Description Ordering Number Series 4 SWS-4MFB-2MM SWS-4MFB-3MM SWS-4MFB-4MM SWS-4MFB-6MM Series 8 SWS-8MFA-5MM SWS-8MFA-6MM SWS-8MFA-8MM SWS-8MFA-9MM SWS-8MFA-10MM SWS-8MFA-11MM SWS-8MFA-12MM Series 5 Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Plenum Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Plenum Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Plenum CWS-5TSPL CWS-5TSPR CWS-5PLEN Series 10 CWS-10TSPL CWS-10TSPR CWS-10PLEN Series 20 SWS-20TSPL-A SWS-20TSPR-A SWS-20BPLEN Ordering Number
Ordering Number Series 4 SWS-4MFB-01 SWS-4MFB-02 SWS-4MFB-03 SWS-4MFB-04 Series 8 SWS-8MFA-02 SWS-8MFA-04 SWS-8MFA-06 SWS-8MFA-08
Standard Fixtures
Series 8HPH
Fixture kits are available for outside weld joint diameters of 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 3 to 12 mm.
Each xture kit includes one xed plate, two moveable
plates, and a centering gauge.

One xture kit is included with each high-performance weld
head, specied in the original weld head ordering number. To order an additional fixture kit, select the kit ordering number from the tables below.
Fractional
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Metric
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter mm 3 6 8 10 12
Ordering Number SWS-8HPH-SP-02 SWS-8HPH-SP-04 SWS-8HPH-SP-06 SWS-8HPH-SP-08
Ordering Number SWS-8HPH-SP-3MM SWS-8HPH-SP-6MM SWS-8HPH-SP-8MM SWS-8HPH-SP-10MM SWS-8HPH-SP-12MM
Special-Purpose Fixtures
Series 20
Ferrule Mandrels
Position and hold short-tangent sanitary ferrules on center in the weld xture.
Sanitary Ferrule Size 1/2 and 3/4 in. 1 and 1 1/2 in. 2 in. Ordering Number SWS-32MANDREL-812 SWS-32MANDREL-1624 SWS-32MANDREL-32
Thin Side Plates

For use with thin collets (page 7).
Thin Side Plate Left Right Ordering Number SWS-20FSP1L SWS-20FSP1R
Mandrel Collets
Mandrel collets hold the mandrels used to position shorttangent sanitary ferrules. Two collect halves are required. Collet half ordering number: SWS-20UCI-MC
Special-Purpose Fixtures
Series 5
Fitting Side Plate 1
Fitting side plate 1 is for use with Swagelok VCR and VCO ttings with captured male or female nuts and weld extension lengths of less than 0.75 in. (19 mm). A centering gauge (page 3) must be used with this tting side plate.
Can be used with all other Series 5 xture side plates
Valve Side Plate

The valve side plate is used to hold Swagelok BN, DF, DL, DP, DS, and HB (manual actuator only) series valve bodies with 1/4 in., 3/8 in., and 6 mm tube butt weld end connections.
End Connection Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm Ordering Number Left SWS-5FSP4L-04 SWS-5FSP4L-06 SWS-5FSP4L-6MM Right SWS-5FSP4R-04 SWS-5FSP4R-06 SWS-5FSP4R-6MM
Ordering number: CWS-5FSP1 Adapter Inserts for Use with Fitting Side Plate 1 Adapter inserts are used to hold and accurately align the ttings as well as to protect the sealing surfaces during welding.
Maximum Overall Length in. (mm) Ordering Number
Extended Plenum
The extended plenum is designed to work with all combinations of Series 5 side plates and xture blocks. It can be secured in a bench-top vise.
Description Extended plenum only Ordering Number SWS-5PLEN-EXT
Fitting 1/4 in. VCR gland with captured male nut or 1/4 in. male VCO fitting 1/4 in. VCR gland with captured female nut 1/4 in. VCO gland with captured female nut
1.12 (28.4)
CWS-5MBVCO-04
0.72 (18.2)
CWS-5FVCR-04
Extended plenum with stand SWS-5PLEN-STAND
0.77 (19.6)
CWS-5FBVCO-04
Fixture Collets for Use with Fitting Side Plate 1 The xture collets hold adapter inserts. Two collets are required for each insert. Ordering number: CWS-5UFCI-.95

Fitting side plate 2 is for use with Swagelok Micro-Fit ttings and tubing. A centering gauge must be used with this tting side plate.
Can be used with all other Series 5 xture side plates
Ordering number: CWS-5FSP2 Tube collets for use with Series 5 tting side plate 2 are also available. See page 6.

Fitting side plate 3, which simplies the xturing and welding of components with a 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) tangent/tube extension, can be used with either the standard or extended plenum. The unique colleting system eliminates the need for tools since collets snap in and out of place.
Description Fitting side plate 3left Fitting side plate 3right Ordering Number SWS-5FSP3L SWS-5FSP3R
Tube collets for use with Series 5 tting side plate 3 are also available. See page 6.
10
Tungsten Electrodes
Series 4, Series 8, Series 5, Series 10, Series 20, and Series 40
Swagelok electrodes, available in multiples of 10, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specications. Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/16, 1/8, 3/16 1/4 1/8, 3/16 1/4, 5/16 3/8, 1/2 5/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8 3/4, 7/8, 1 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 1, 1 1/8, 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4, 2 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 3 1/2 4 mm 3, 4 6 3 6, 8 10, 12 14, 15 16 Series 8 3, 4 6, 8, 9 10, 11 12 Series 10 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 23, 25, 28 35 40, 52 Series 40 38.1 42.4 44.5 48.3 50.8 54.0 60.3 63.5 76.2 88.9 102 104 0.094 (2.29) 2.615 (66.4) 2.530 (64.3) 2.489 (63.2) 2.414 (61.3) 2.365 (60.1) 2.302 (58.5) 2.178 (55.3) 2.115 (53.7) 1.865 (47.4) 1.615 (41.0) 1.365 (34.7) 1.318 (33.5) SWS-C.094-2.615-P SWS-C.094-2.530-P SWS-C.094-2.489-P SWS-C.094-2.414-P SWS-C.094-2.365-P SWS-C.094-2.302-P SWS-C.094-2.178-P SWS-C.094-2.115-P SWS-C.094-1.865-P SWS-C.094-1.615-P SWS-C.094-1.365-P SWS-C.094-1.318-P 0.062 (1.5) 0.062 (1.5) Series 20 1.630 (41.4) 1.380 (35.1) 1.105 (28.1) 0.855 (21.7) CWS-C.062-1.630-P CWS-C.062-1.380-P CWS-C.062-1.105-P CWS-C.062-.855-P 1.105 (28.1) 0.855 (21.7) CWS-C.062-1.105-P CWS-C.062-.855-P 0.040 (1.0) 0.450 (11.4) 0.405 (10.3) 0.325 (8.26) 0.281 (7.14) CWS-C.040-.450-P CWS-C.040-.405-P CWS-C.040-.325-P CWS-C.040-.281-P 0.040 (1.0) Electrode Diameter (D) in. (mm) Series 4 0.040 (1.0) Series 5 0.705 (17.9) 0.605 (15.4) 0.555 (14.1) 0.450 (11.4) 0.405 (10.3) CWS-C.040-.705-P CWS-C.040-.605-P CWS-C.040-.555-P CWS-C.040-.450-P CWS-C.040-.405-P 0.405 (10.3) 0.325 (8.26) CWS-C.040-.405-P CWS-C.040-.325-P Electrode Length (L) in. (mm)
L D
Ordering Number
11
Tungsten Electrodes
Series 8HPH
Swagelok electrodes, available in multiples of 10, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specications
Electrodes are for use with argon shielding gas. Other
0.040
(1.02)
0.012
(0.30)
shielding gas mixtures may require electrodes with tip diameters other than 0.012 in. (0.30 mm). Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Fractional
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in.
Metric
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter mm
Nominal Gap in. (mm) 0.020 (0.51) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14)
Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) 0.533 (13.5 ) 0.528 (13.4) 0.523 (13.3) 0.518 (13.2) 0.465 (11.8) 0.460 (11.7) 0.455 (11.6) 0.450 (11.4) 0.403 (10.2) 0.398 (10.1) 0.393 (10.0) 0.388 (9.9) 0.335 (8.5) 0.330 (8.4) 0.325 (8.3) 0.320 (8.1)
Ordering Number SWS-C.040-.533-.012-P SWS-C.040-.528-.012-P SWS-C.040-.523-.012-P SWS-C.040-.518-.012-P SWS-C.040-.465-.012-P SWS-C.040-.460-.012-P SWS-C.040-.455-.012-P SWS-C.040-.450-.012-P SWS-C.040-.403-.012-P SWS-C.040-.398-.012-P SWS-C.040-.393-.012-P SWS-C.040-.388-.012-P SWS-C.040-.335-.012-P SWS-C.040-.330-.012-P SWS-C.040-.325-.012-P SWS-C.040-.320-.012-P
Nominal Gap in. (mm) 0.020 (0.51) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14)
Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) 0.536 (13.6) 0.531 (13.5) 0.526 (13.4) 0.521 (13.2) 0.472 (12.0) 0.467 (11.9) 0.462 (11.7) 0.457 (11.6) 0.433 (11.0) 0.428 (10.9) 0.423 (10.7) 0.418 (10.6) 0.388 (9.9) 0.383 (9.7) 0.378 (9.6) 0.373 (9.5) 0.349 (8.9) 0.344 (8.7) 0.339 (8.6) 0.334 (8.5)
Ordering Number SWS-C.040-.536-.012-P SWS-C.040-.531-.012-P SWS-C.040-.526-.012-P SWS-C.040-.521-.012-P SWS-C.040-.472-.012-P SWS-C.040-.467-.012-P SWS-C.040-.462-.012-P SWS-C.040-.457-.012-P SWS-C.040-.433-.012-P SWS-C.040-.428-.012-P SWS-C.040-.423-.012-P SWS-C.040-.418-.012-P SWS-C.040-.388-.012-P SWS-C.040-.383-.012-P SWS-C.040-.378-.012-P SWS-C.040-.373-.012-P SWS-C.040-.349-.012-P SWS-C.040-.344-.012-P SWS-C.040-.339-.012-P SWS-C.040-.334-.012-P
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
10
12
12
Weld Head Accessories

Tool Package
Includes nylon brush, metal brush, tweezers, screwdriver, electrode cleaning tool, hex key set, and a jewelers screwdriver. Ordering number: CWS-WHTOOLPKG
Cooling Plates
Series 4, Series 8
The faster weld xtures cool, the more efcient your production can be. Swagelok cooling plates quickly absorb heat away from the micro weld head xture and components after welding, helping to speed your process.
Weld Head Series 4 Series 8 Ordering Number CWS-4MCP CWS-8MCP
Remote Pendant
The full functioning Swagelok pendant provides remote push-button operation of the power supply. The pendant, which has a standard cable length of 15 ft (4.6 m), can be lengthened with a 10 ft (3 m) or 35 ft (10.7 m) extension.
Bench-Mounting Bracket
Series 4, Series 8
Swagelok bench mounting brackets attach rigid- or exible-micro weld heads to a work bench. The Series 4 bracket features a quick-release mechanism for convenient operation.
Description Remote pendant 10 ft (3 m) extension 35 ft (10.7 m) extension Ordering Number SWS-M-RPEND SWS-M-RPEND-10EXT SWS-M-RPEND-35EXT Weld Head Series 4 Series 8 Ordering Number CWS-4MBB CWS-8MBB

Swagelok weld head extension cables, when combined with the standard weld head, provide weld head operaton of up to a maximum of 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply.
Extension Cable ft (m) 12.5 (3.8) 37.5 (11.4) Ordering Number SWS-WHEC-B-12.5FT SWS-WHEC-B-37.5FT
Motor Modules
Series 4, Series 8
Description Ordering Number Series 4 For use with SWS-4MRH-B and SWS-M-MTR-B SWS-4MFH-B Series 8 For use with SWS-M-MTR-B SWS-8MRH-B
Work Support System Support Extensions

Series 40
Use support extensions with collets when welding vertical runs of pipe. The support extensions minimize angular misalignment and provide maximum rigidity. Use in sets of either 4 or 8 pieces.
Description Support extension Ordering Number SWS-40CI-EXT
Series 8HPH
The Swagelok work support system provides a variety of expandable congurations for work support of tubing runs and valves.
The left kit contains the work support slide base, work
support rails, thumb screws, and work support left brace.

The right kit contains the work support slide base, work
support rails, thumb screws, and work support right brace.

The full kit contains all left and right work support kit
components.
Micro Fixture Tool

Series 4, Series 8
Engages the xture latch for easy opening and closing of the micro weld head xture. Ordering number: CWS-MFP-FIXTL
Description Left kit Right kit Full kit
Ordering Number SWS-8HPH-WS-LT SWS-8HPH-WS-RT SWS-8HPH-WS
13
Power Supply Accessories

Power Supply Cords
Replacement power supply cords are available. See the Swagelok Electrical Power Cord and Plug Options catalog, MS-02-79, for more information.
Geographic Region North America Voltage 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz Japan/Taiwan United Kingdom Continental Europe/Korea Australia/New Zealand 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz Plug Type NEMA 5-15 NEMA 5-20 NEMA 6-15 NEMA 5-15 NEMA L6-20 IEC-309 BS 1363 CEE 7/7 AS 3112 Cord/ Wire Type AWG/SJT AWG/SJT AWG/SJT Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Power Cord Designator 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Additional Accessories
Description Data memory card Series M100, M100 high-purity M100, M100 high-purity Ordering Number SWS-PCCARD-1MB
PC direct SWS-PC-CABLE interface cable Printer paper package M100, D100 CWS-DRP-PAPER (10 rolls) Cleanroom printer paper M100 high-purity SWS-DRP-PAPER-HP package (10 rolls)
Included with power supply.
Carrying Cases
Rugged plastic cases are suitable for shipping or storage of Swagelok orbital welding system components.
Description Purge kit case Facing tool case Cutting inserts case Collet case Power supply case Weld head case series 40 Weld head case generic
Ordering Number SWS-CASE-3 SWS-CASE-4 SWS-CASE-5 SWS-CASE-6 SWS-CASE-7B SWS-CASE-8 CWS-WH-CASE
14
Internal Purge Pressure Kits

Proper internal purging plays a critical role in ensuring highquality, uniform orbital welds, especially in ultrahigh-purity and sanitary applications. The Swagelok internal purge pressure kit contains the components needed to set the ow rate of purge gas so that sufcient internal pressure is created in the weld area.
Features
Magnehelic gauge for measuring internal pressure from
0 to 5 in.H2O (0 to 12.4 mbar)

Swagelok tube ttings with knurled nuts for 1/4, 3/8, and
1/2 in. weld ttings

Flow restrictors Length of 1/4 in. Tygon tubing Two cases for spare parts Carrying case with cavities for optional ttings Instructions Internal Purge Pressure Kit for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 In. Tubing
Magnehelic gauge
Optional tting packages available in 1/16, 1/8, 3/4, and 1 in. sizes.
Component Internal purge pressure kit for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. tubing 1/16 in. fitting package 1/8 in. fitting package 3/4 in. fitting package 1 in. fitting package Ordering Number SWS-PURGE-KIT SWS-PURGE-KIT-01 SWS-PURGE-KIT-02 SWS-PURGE-KIT-12 SWS-PURGE-KIT-16
Flow meter
Flow restrictor Tee tting Tygon tubing Regulator
Inert gas source
Stainless Steel Flux

Thicker walls require more heat during gas tungsten arc welding. Swagelok stainless steel ux serves as a reactive agent with the arc, enabling operators to signicantly reduce bead width and increase penetration by as much as 300 %. By using Swagelok ux, an operator will be able to reduce the amount of heat required for full penetration and maintain the critical phase balance of the SAF 2507. Weld without ux Weld with Swagelok stainless steel flux
Features
Provides deeper penetration, reduced bead width, and
reduced heat-affected zone when welding thick-walled tubing.

Is ideally suited for use with Sandvik SAF 2507 and other
Ordering number: SWS-FLUX-1
super-duplex stainless steels.

Allows operators to autogenously weld SAF 2507 and
maintain critical phase balance.

Kit includes 1 oz (30 mL) stainless steel ux, brush, and
measuring cup.
15
Tube Facing Tools

A crucial step toward consistently acceptable welds is ensuring tube ends are properly prepared for welding. The Swagelok tube facing tool is designed to machine at, smooth, square, burr-free and chamfer-free tube ends. The tool can be used on 316 stainless steel, carbon steel, titanium, and most nickel-based alloys.
Features
For tube outside diameter sizes 1/8 to 2 in. and 3 to 52 mm For wall thicknesses from 0.02 to 0.109 in. (0.5 to 2.8 mm) Chip deector works in conjunction with cutting insert to
prevent chips from curling into tube inside diameter

Heavy-duty industrial motor with easy speed (r/min)
adjustment and control

Graduated spindle advance for controlled material removal Clear plastic safety shield protects operator from the
Specifications
Power Requirements Weight Length Width Diameter Minimum Tangent Length 115 V (ac) 230 V (ac) Approx 12 lb (5.4 kg) 18 in. (45.7 cm) 8.5 in. (21.6 cm) 4.5 in. (11.4 cm) 1 in. (25.4 mm)
cutting area
Cutting insert and spindle designed for fast, easy setup
and insert change

Standard Swagelok welding system UCI collets provide
rigid holding of components

CE marked Storage and shipping cases for facing tool and optional
bench-mount stand; collets; and cutting inserts included
Geographic Region North America United Kingdom Continental Europe Ordering Number Description 115 V (ac), 2-pronged plug 115 V (ac), 3-pronged plug 230 V (ac), 2-pronged plug Facing Tool Only SWS-232EP-1 SWS-232EP-5 SWS-232EP-7 Facing Tool With Stand SWS-232EP-1-BMB SWS-232EP-5-BMB SWS-232EP-7-BMB
Use in other geographic regions may require an adapter.

Cutting Inserts
Replacement cutting inserts, available in multiples of 10, come in a case. One cutting insert is included with the facing tool. Ordering number: SWS-232-BIT-HST
Bench-Mount Stand
The bench-mount stand features a quick-release latch that requires no tools. This makes conversion from portable to bench-top use fast and easy. Ordering number: SWS-232BMB
Swagelok, VCR, VCO, Micro-FitTM Swagelok Company SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB TygonTM Norton Company MagnehelicTM Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 2006 Swagelok Company May 2006, R2 MS-02-143-E
www.swagelok.com
Orbital We lding System

We ld Head, Fix ture Blocks, Side Plate s, Ple num, a nd C ollets
Se rie s 5
Available for outside diameters ranging from 1/8 to 5/8 in. and 3 to 16 mm Offers versatility for use in a variety of industries Weld head includes arc gap gauge, tool package, and tungsten electrodes
Orbital Welding SystemSeries 5
Series 5 Weld Head

Is for outside weld joint diameters from 1/8 to 5/8 in. and
Series 5 Fixture Blocks, Side Plates, and Plenum

Design offers improved productivity from the ability to set
3 to 16 mm
up one fixture while welding with another fixture

Modular design provides multiple fixture combinations Alignment adjustment compensates for varying component
head/power supply connection

Is suitable for prototypes Features optical speed controlno tachometer or
tolerances
Removable collets allow for easy component size changes Fixture block includes centering gauge
calibration required

Weld Head
6.00
(152)
Fixture Block
2.75
(69.8)
0.75
(19.0)
2.94 2.00 5.63

(143) (50.8) (74.7)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
0.49
(12.4)
2.38
(60.5)
Fixture Side Plates and Plenum
0.44 Side Plate Left 1.25

(31.8) (11.2)
Side Plate Right
0.53
(13.5)
Plenum
4.13
(105)
R 2.30 2.20
(55.9) (58.4)
Shown with fixture attached
Description Weld head
Ordering Number SWS-5H-C
Description Fixture block Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Plenum
Ordering Number CWS-5TFB CWS-5TSPL CWS-5TSPR CWS-5PLEN
Tube Collets
Are removeable to allow for easy size

Special-Purpose Fixture Side Plates and Adapter Inserts
Fitting side plate 1 is for use with Swagelok VCR and VCO fittings with captured male or female nuts and weld extension lengths of less than 0.75 in. (19.0 mm). A centering gauge must be used with this fitting side plate.
Can be used with all other
changes
Hold components rigidly during welding Unique universal collet design holds
components with a 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) tube outside diameter variation.

Two collet halves are required per side plate.
Fractional
Collet Size in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 9/16 5/8 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UCI-02 CWS-5UCI-03 CWS-5UCI-04 CWS-5UCI-05 CWS-5UCI-06 CWS-5UCI-08 CWS-5UCI-09 CWS-5UCI-10
Metric
Collet Size mm 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UCI-03MM CWS-5UCI-04MM CWS-5UCI-05MM CWS-5UCI-06MM CWS-5UCI-08MM CWS-5UCI-09MM CWS-5UCI-10MM CWS-5UCI-11MM CWS-5UCI-12MM CWS-5UCI-14MM CWS-5UCI-15MM CWS-5UCI-16MM
Series 5 fixture side plates

Adapter inserts and fixture
collets are also available Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
2.94
(74.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.25
(57.2)
1.00
(25.4)
Description Fitting side plate 1
Ordering Number CWS-5FSP1
Adapter Inserts for Use with Fitting Side Plate 1 Adapter inserts are used to hold and accurately align the fittings as well as to protect the sealing surfaces during welding.
Maximum Overall Length in. (mm) 1.12 (28.4) Ordering Number CWS-5MBVCO-04
Fitting 1/4 in. VCR gland with captured male nut 1/4 in. VCR gland with captured female nut 1/4 in. VCO gland with captured female nut
0.72 (18.2)
CWS-5FVCR-04
0.77 (19.6)
CWS-5FBVCO-04
Fixture Collets for Use with Fitting Side Plate 1 The fixture collets hold adapter inserts. Two collets are required for each insert.
Description Fixture collets Ordering Number CWS-5UFCI-.95

Fitting side plate 2 is for use with Swagelok Micro-Fit fittings and tubing. A centering gauge must be used with this fitting side plate.
Can be used with all other Series 5 fixture side plates Tube collets are also available.
Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
3.19
(81.0)
2.94
(74.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.25
(57.2)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
(74.7)
1.94
(49.3)
Description Fitting side plate 2
Ordering Number CWS-5FSP2
Micro-Fit Fitting Collets for Use with Fitting Side Plate 2

Micro-Fit Fitting Sizes Collet Half Ordering Number
Tube Collets for Use with Fitting Side Plates 1 and 2 Tube collets eliminate the need to change fixture blocks/ side plates. To order tube collets for fitting side plate 1 or 2, select an ordering number. Fractional
Collet Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UFCI-02 CWS-5UFCI-04 CWS-5UFCI-06 CWS-5UFCI-08 CWS-5UFCI-10
1/8 in., 1/4 in., 6 mm CWS-5MWCI-04 3/8 in., 8 mm, 10 mm CWS-5MWCI-06 1/2 in. and 12 mm CWS-5MWCI-08
Metric
Collet Size mm 3 6 8 10 12 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5UFCI-03MM CWS-5UFCI-06MM CWS-5UFCI-08MM CWS-5UFCI-10MM CWS-5UFCI-12MM

Fitting side plate 3, which simplifies the fixturing and welding of components with a 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) tangent/ tube extension, can be used with either the standard or extended plenum. The unique colleting system eliminates the need for tools since collets snap in and out of place. Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Tube Collets for Use with Fitting Side Plate 3

2.94
(74.7)
2.00
(50.8)
To order tube collets for fitting side plate 3, select an ordering number. Fractional Metric
Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5F3UCI-02 CWS-5F3UCI-04 CWS-5F3UCI-06 CWS-5F3UCI-08 Collet Size mm 3 6 8 12 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-5F3UCI-03MM CWS-5UF3CI-06MM CWS-5UF3CI-08MM CWS-5F3UCI-12MM
2.25
(57.2)
3.00
(76.2)
0.56
(14.2)
3.72
(94.5)
Collet Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Description Fitting side plate 3left Fitting side plate 3right
Ordering Number SWS-5FSP3L SWS-5FSP3R
Valve Side Plate

The valve side plate is used to hold Swagelok BN, DL, DP, DS, and HB (manual actuator only) series valve bodies with 1/4 in., 3/8 in., and 6 mm tube butt weld end connections. The valve side plate can hold valves, completely assembled, to maintain product cleanliness, or disassembled. It can be used with other Series 5 fixture side plates and is available in both a left and right option for greater configuration flexibility and for welding valve-to-valve. Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
2.94
(74.7)
1.38
(35.1)
2.25
(57.2)
End Connection Size 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 6 mm
Ordering Number Left SWS-5FSP4L-04 SWS-5FSP4L-06 SWS-5FSP4L-6MM Right SWS-5FSP4R-04 SWS-5FSP4R-06 SWS-5FSP4R-6MM

Extended Plenum
The extended plenum is designed to work with all combinations of Series 5 side plates and fixture blocks. The extended plenum can be secured in a bench-top vise. The plenum stand allows the assembly to be secured to a workbench. In both cases, the extended plenum provides maximum support for fixturing, holding, and welding large and heavy components. Ordering Information and Dimensions Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
3.00 2.25
(57.2)
0.44
(11.2)
Description Extended plenum only
Ordering Number SWS-5PLEN-EXT
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
Extended plenum with stand SWS-5PLEN-STAND
3.00
(76.2)
4.00
(102)

Swagelok weld head extension cables, in combination with the standard weld head, provide weld head operation of up to 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply. Cables are available in lengths of 12.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).
Tungsten Electrodes
Swagelok electrodes, available in packages of ten, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specifications.
L D
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/8, 3/16 1/4, 5/16 3/8, 1/2 5/8 mm 3 6, 8 10, 12 14, 15 16
Electrode Diameter (D) in. (mm)
Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) 0.705 (17.9) 0.605 (15.4)
Ordering Number CWS-C.040-.705-P CWS-C.040-.605-P CWS-C.040-.555-P CWS-C.040-.450-P CWS-C.040-.405-P
0.040 (1)
0.555 (14.1) 0.450 (11.4) 0.405 (10.3)
Swagelok, VCO, VCR, Micro-FitTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI November 2006, R2 MS-02-129
www.swagelok.com

We ld He ad, Fi x ture Blocks, Side Plate s, Ple num, a nd Collets
Se r ie s 10
Available for tube outside diameters from 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to 25 mm Offers versatility for use in a variety of industries Weld head includes arc gap gauge, tool package, and tungsten electrodes
ELOK STANDARD WELD HEAD SERIES 5 & 20 COVER

2 Orbital Welding SystemSeries 10
Series 10 Weld Head

Is for outside weld joint diameters of 1/4 to 1 in. and
6 to 25 mm
Offers optical speed controlno tachometer or calibration

Are for outside weld joint diameters of 1/4 to 1 in. and
6 to 25 mm
Offer improved productivity from the ability to set up one
required
Has polarized power connectors to ensure proper
xture while welding with another xture

Fixture block includes centering gauge
weld head/power supply connection

Is suitable for prototypes

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters) are for reference only and are subject to change.
HEAD SERIES 5 & 20 COVER Weld Head

6.00
(152)
CA-ELD-0288
Fixture Block
(23.6)
(105)
4.13
0.93
5.00 7.38
(187) (88.9)
3.50
(127)
(94.7)
3.73
(82.6)
3.25
(46.7)
1.84
(18.0)
0.71
0.78 Side Plate Left
(19.8)
Side Plate Right
(49.3)
1.94
(13.5)
0.53
Plenum
4.00
(102) (66.0)
R 3.80 2.60 Shown with fixture attached
(96.5)
Ordering Number SWS-10H-B
Description Fixture block Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Plenum
Ordering Number CWS-10TFB CWS-10TSPL CWS-10TSPR CWS-10PLEN
Swagelok automatic tube weld and tube
butt weld fittings with 0.75 in. (19.1 mm) tube extensions can be welded with the fixture block and counter-bored collets. A 0.93 in. (23.6 mm) tube extension is required for all other fittings.
Tube Collets
Are removable to allow for easy component size changes Hold components rigidly during welding Unique universal collet design holds components with
a 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) tube outside diameter variation.

Are offered in counter-bored and noncounter-bored styles
for a full range of applications
Counter-bored collets shown
Counter-Bored Collets
Counter-bored collets offer greater clearance for welding components. Two collet halves are required per side plate.
Collet Size in. 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-10UCI-04 CWS-10UCI-05 CWS-10UCI-06 CWS-10UCI-08 CWS-10UCI-10 CWS-10UCI-12 CWS-10UCI-14 CWS-10UCI-16 Collet Size mm 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 22 23 25 Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-10UCI-06MM CWS-10UCI-08MM CWS-10UCI-10MM CWS-10UCI-12MM CWS-10UCI-14MM CWS-10UCI-15MM CWS-10UCI-16MM CWS-10UCI-18MM CWS-10UCI-19MM CWS-10UCI-20MM CWS-10UCI-22MM CWS-10UCI-23MM CWS-10UCI-25MM
NonCounter-Bored Collets
Noncounter-bored collets provide ease of alignment. Two collet halves are required per side plate. To order, add T to the ordering number. Example: CWS-10UCI-04T

Swagelok weld head extension cables, in combination with SWAGELOK SERIES 8 WELD HEAD the standard weld head, provide weld head operation of up to 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply. Cables are available in lengths of 12.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).
CA-HRPH-1
Tungsten Electrodes
Swagelok electrodes, available in packages of ten, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specications.
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/4 through 5/8 3/4 through 1 mm 6 through 16 18 through 25 Electrode Diameter (D) in. (mm) 0.062 (1.5) Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) 1.105 (28.1) 0.855 (21.7)
D
Ordering Number CWS-C.062-1.105-P CWS-C.062-.855-P
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2003, 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI October 2005, R2 MS-02-131
www.swagelok.com

We ld Head, Tube and Pipe Collets, a nd Tungste n Ele ctrode s
Se r ie s 40 We ld He ad
Is available for outside tube diameters ranging from 1 1/2
to 4 in. (38.1 to 104 mm), and pipe diameters ranging from 1 1/4 to 4 in. (42.2 to 114 mm)
Provides an ideal welding solution in the bioprocessing and
semiconductor industries, among others

Includes an integral fixture block Is compact and portable, due to air cooling Includes viewing port, allowing the operator to line up the
weld for ultimate reliability

required.

2.80
(71.1)
8.00
(203)
1.40 (35.6) to center of electrode
Viewing port
Cable Length ft (m) 15 (4.6) 25 (7.6) 50 (15.2)
Ordering Number SWS-40H-15FT SWS-40H-25FT SWS-40H-50FT
Weld Head Weight lb (kg) 12.8 (5.8)
4.00
(102)
Weight does not include collets or cable. Can be used with 37.5 ft (11.4 m) or 12.5 ft (3.8 m)
extension cable.
Can be used with 12.5 ft (3.8 m) extension cable.

Interchangeable collets
Tube and Pipe Collets and Tungsten Electrodes

Tube Collets
Hold components rigidly
Tungsten Electrodes
Swagelok electrodes, available in packages of 10, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specifications.
during welding.
Are easily changed for
varying outside diameters.

Tube Collet Size in. mm 38.1 42.4 2 2 1/2 3 44.5 48.3 50.8 54.0 60.3 63.5 76.2 88.9 101.6 104.0 Ordering Number Collet Half SWS-40CI-24 SWS-40CI-42.4MM SWS-40CI-44.5MM SWS-40CI-48.3MM SWS-40CI-32 SWS-40CI-54MM SWS-40CI-60.3MM SWS-40CI-40 SWS-40CI-48 SWS-40CI-56 SWS-40CI-64 SWS-40CI-104MM Tungsten Electrodes SWS-C.094-2.615-P SWS-C.094-2.530-P SWS-C.094-2.489-P SWS-C.094-2.414-P SWS-C.094-2.365-P SWS-C.094-2.302-P SWS-C.094-2.178-P SWS-C.094-2.115-P SWS-C.094-1.865-P SWS-C.094-1.615-P SWS-C.094-1.365-P SWS-C.094-1.318-P
Pipe Collets
Design compensates for
1 1/2
pipe size variation.

Pre-tacking of weld joint
is required.

Weld Head Extension Cable
Swagelok weld head extension cables, in combination with the standard weld head, provide weld head operation up to a maximum of 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply. Cables are available in lengths of 12.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).
Extension Cable ft (m) 37.5 (11.4) 12.5 (3.8)
3 1/2 4
Pipe Collet Size in. 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 mm (JIS) 42.2 48.3 60.3 60.5 (50A) 73.0 76.3 (65A) 88.9 89.1 (80A) 101.6 (90A)
Ordering Number Collet Half SWS-40CI-20P SWS-40CI-24P SWS-40CI-32P SWS-40CI-60.5MMP SWS-40CI-40P SWS-40CI-76.3MMP SWS-40CI-48P SWS-40CI-89.1MMP SWS-40CI-56P Tungsten Electrodes SWS-C.094-2.530-P SWS-C.094-2.414-P SWS-C.094-2.168-P SWS-C.094-2.164-P SWS-C.094-1.918-P SWS-C.094-1.853-P SWS-C.094-1.605-P SWS-C.094-1.601-P SWS-C.094-1.355-P SWS-C.094-1.105-P
Ordering Number SWS-WHEC-B-37.5FT SWS-WHEC-B-12.5FT
3 1/2 4
114.3 (100A) SWS-40CI-64P
Support Extensions
Use support extensions when welding vertical runs of pipe. The support extensions minimize angular misalignment and provide maximum rigidity. Use in sets of either 4 or 8 pieces.
Description Support extension Ordering Number SWS-40CI-EXT
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2004, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI November 2006, R4 MS-02-140
www.swagelok.com

High-Pe r for mance We ld He ad
Se rie s 8HPH
Accommodates outside diameters ranging from 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 3 to 12 mm Bench top mounted fixture Optical speed controlno tachometer or calibration required Cycle life: 10 000 welds mean-time-to-maintenance (MTTM) for 1/4 in. diameter;
3000 welds MTTM for 1/2 in. diameter

Welding capability: 60 welds per hour for 1/4 in. diameter; 30 welds per hour for 1/2 in. diameter Adjustable centering gauge included Integrated work support system available
Orbital Welding SystemHigh-Performance Weld Head
High-Performance Weld HeadSeries 8HPH Technical Data

Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 mm 3 6, 8 10 12
0.035 in. 316L tubing. 0.049 in. 316L tubing.
Minimum Radial Clearance in. (mm) Maximum Average Weld Current 30 A
Minimum Axial Clearance in. (mm)
High-Performance Weld Head

Maximum Welds per Hour 60 30
0.48 (12.2)
1.04 (26.4) 38 A
The Swagelok Series 8HPH high-performance weld head is shipped with a fixture kit, a tool package, an electrode package, a 12.5 ft extension cable, and a users manual. To order a Swagelok Series 8HPH weld head, add a fixture size designator to basic ordering number SWS-8PH-. Example: SWS-8HPH-02
Nominal Outside Diameter 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Fixture Size Designator 02 04 06 08 3MM 6MM 8MM 10MM 12MM
Fractional, in.
Based on welding 1/4 Based on welding 1/2
Metric, mm 3 6 8 10 12
Dimensions
Right Side
1.16 (29.5) 2.48 (63.0) 1.79 (45.5) 1.04 (26.4) 0.80 (20.3) Wire harness 2.13 (54.1) 13.8 (351)
Fixture Kits
Fixture kits are available for outside weld joint diameters of 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 3 to 12 mm.
Each fixture kit includes one
fixed plate, two moveable plates, and a centering gauge.

One fixture kit is included with
each high-performance weld head.

0.73 (18.5) 0.48 (12.2)
Front
To order an additional fixture kit, select the kit ordering number from the table below.
Nominal Outside Diameter Fixture Kit Ordering Number SWS-8HPH-SP-02 SWS-8HPH-SP-04 SWS-8HPH-SP-06 SWS-8HPH-SP-08 Metric, mm 3 6 8 SWS-8HPH-SP-3MM SWS-8HPH-SP-6MM SWS-8HPH-SP-8MM SWS-8HPH-SP-10MM SWS-8HPH-SP-12MM
8.14 (207)
Fractional, in. 1/8 1/4 3/8

6.18 (157) 0.74 (18.8)
1/2
Left Side
5.40 (137) 1.00 (25.4) 0.68 (17.3) 1.99 (50.5) 6.36 (162) 2.60 (66.0)
10 12
Orbital Welding SystemHigh-Performance Weld Head
Accessories
Centering Gauge
The weld head centering gauge assures the operator that the weld components are centered in the fixture. One centering gauge is included with each highperformance weld head, based on the fixture size specified. To order an additional centering gauge, select an ordering number from the table at right.
Nominal Outside Diameter 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3 6 8 10 12 Centering Gauge Ordering Number SWS-8HPCG-02 SWS-8HPCG-04 SWS-8HPCG-06 SWS-8HPCG-08 Metric, mm SWS-8HPCG-3MM SWS-8HPCG-6MM SWS-8HPCG-8MM SWS-8HPCG-10MM SWS-8HPCG-12MM
Fractional, in.
Tungsten Electrodes
Swagelok electrodes provide consistent, repeatable welds.
Electrodes consist of 2 % ceriated tungsten, axially ground
0.040
(1.02)
to rigid specifications.
Electrodes are for use with argon shielding gas. Other
0.012
(0.30)
shielding gas mixtures may require electrodes with tip diameters other than 0.012 in. (0.30 mm).
Electrodes must be ordered in multiples of ten. Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter
Nominal Gap in. (mm) 0.020 (0.51)
Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) Fractional, in. 0.533 (13.5 ) 0.528 (13.4) 0.523 (13.3) 0.518 (13.2) 0.465 (11.8) 0.460 (11.7) 0.455 (11.6) 0.450 (11.4) 0.403 (10.2) 0.398 (10.1) 0.393 (10.0) 0.388 (9.9) 0.335 (8.5) 0.330 (8.4) 0.325 (8.3) 0.320 (8.1)
Ordering Number SWS-C.040-.533-.012-P SWS-C.040-.528-.012-P SWS-C.040-.523-.012-P SWS-C.040-.518-.012-P SWS-C.040-.465-.012-P SWS-C.040-.460-.012-P SWS-C.040-.455-.012-P SWS-C.040-.450-.012-P SWS-C.040-.403-.012-P SWS-C.040-.398-.012-P SWS-C.040-.393-.012-P SWS-C.040-.388-.012-P SWS-C.040-.335-.012-P SWS-C.040-.330-.012-P SWS-C.040-.325-.012-P SWS-C.040-.320-.012-P
Nominal Gap in. (mm) 0.020 (0.51)
Electrode Length (L) in. (mm) Metric, mm 0.536 (13.6) 0.531 (13.5) 0.526 (13.4) 0.521 (13.2) 0.472 (12.0) 0.467 (11.9) 0.462 (11.7) 0.457 (11.6) 0.433 (11.0) 0.428 (10.9) 0.423 (10.7) 0.418 (10.6) 0.388 (9.9) 0.383 (9.7) 0.378 (9.6) 0.373 (9.5) 0.349 (8.9) 0.344 (8.7) 0.339 (8.6) 0.334 (8.5)
Ordering Number SWS-C.040-.536-.012-P SWS-C.040-.531-.012-P SWS-C.040-.526-.012-P SWS-C.040-.521-.012-P SWS-C.040-.472-.012-P SWS-C.040-.467-.012-P SWS-C.040-.462-.012-P SWS-C.040-.457-.012-P SWS-C.040-.433-.012-P SWS-C.040-.428-.012-P SWS-C.040-.423-.012-P SWS-C.040-.418-.012-P SWS-C.040-.388-.012-P SWS-C.040-.383-.012-P SWS-C.040-.378-.012-P SWS-C.040-.373-.012-P SWS-C.040-.349-.012-P SWS-C.040-.344-.012-P SWS-C.040-.339-.012-P SWS-C.040-.334-.012-P
1/8
0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14)
0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.025 (0.64) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14) 0.030 (0.76) 0.035 (0.89) 0.040 (1.02) 0.045 (1.14)
1/4
3/8
1/2
10
12
Accessories
Swagelok weld head extension cables provide weld head operation up to 50 ft (15.2 m) away from the power supply.
Cables are available in
Work Support System
lengths of 12.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).

One 12.5 ft extension cable is supplied with each
Series 8HPH high-performance weld head.

The Swagelok work support system provides a variety of expandable configurations for work support of tubing runs and valves.
The left work support kit contains the work support slide
base, work support rails, thumb screws, and work support left brace.
The right work support kit contains the work support slide
base, work support rails, thumb screws, and work support right brace.
Swagelok Orbital Welding System

For a complete Swagelok orbital welding system, order a Series 8HPH high-performance weld head and a Swagelok M100 power supply. See the Swagelok Orbital Welding System M100 Power Supply catalog, MS-02-102.
The full work support kit contains all left and right work
support kit components.

Work Support Kit Description Left Right Full Ordering Number SWS-8HPH-WS-LT SWS-8HPH-WS-RT SWS-8HPH-WS
Shown: Swagelok Series 8HPH high-performance weld head with Swagelok M100 high-purity power supply
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2005, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 2006, R2 MS-02-304
www.swagelok.com

M10 0 High-Pur it y Powe r Suppl y
Microprocessor controller with high-resolution 5.5 in.
(140 mm) LCD

Auto weld schedule program generation or manual entry Real-time monitoring and recording of weld output
performance
Weld data storage for QA/QC purposes: to nonvolatile internal storage to data memory card to printer to PC via serial port Multiple- or single-level capability Fractional/metric conversion Internal thermal printer with nonshedding
clean room paper

Step programming capability Ramping between levels Pulse rates from 1 to 99 pulses per second Tacking capability Password protected Operator limited access Smooth, white powder-coated finish for clean rooms 0.3 m HEPA filter on exhaust fan Nonmarking acetal feet

Select a basic ordering number and add a power cord designator. Example: SWS-M100-HP-1-1
Power Input 115 V (ac) 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 20 A 230 V (ac) 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 15 A Output Direct current 2 to 100 A Basic Ordering Number SWS-M100-HP-1SWS-M100-HP-2Duty Cycle 30 % 100 A 7V 60 % 35 A 7V 30 A 7V 100 % 15 A 9V Dimensions, in. (mm) Height 9.0
(229)
Width 16.4
(417)
Depth 19.4
(493)
Weight lb (kg) 44 (20) 47 (21.3)
For 100 V (ac) input applications, the maximum output capabilities may be reduced.
Geographic Region North America
Voltage 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz
Plug Type NEMA 5-15 NEMA 5-20 NEMA 6-15 NEMA 5-15 NEMA L6-20 IEC-309 BS 1363 CEE 7/7 AS 3112
Cord/ Wire Type AWG/SJT AWG/SJT AWG/SJT Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized
Power Cord Designator 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Japan/Taiwan United Kingdom Continental Europe/Korea Australia/New Zealand
110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz
For more information, see the Swagelok Electrical Power Cord / Plug Options catalog, MS-02-79. For any power plug/service not listed, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.

Remote Pendant
The full-functioning pendant provides remote push-button operation of the power supply. The remote pendant comes with a 15 ft (4.6 m) cable.
Cleanroom Printer Paper

One roll of nonshedding cleanroom paper is included with the M100 high-purity power supply. Additional packages of rolls can be ordered separately. Each package contains 10 rolls.
Description Clean room printer paper Ordering Number SWS-DRP-PAPER-HP
Description Remote pendant
Ordering Number SWS-M-RPEND
Remote Pendant Extension Cable

The standard cable can be lengthened with a 10 ft (3 m) or 35 ft (10.7 m) extension cable.
Extension Cable ft (m) 10 (3) 35 (10.7) Ordering Number SWS-M-RPEND-10EXT SWS-M-RPEND-35EXT
PC Direct Interface Cable

With the PC direct interface cable, the user can download weld data directly to a PC via a serial port connection. One interface cable is included with the M100 high-purity power supply. Additional cables can be ordered separately.
Description PC direct interface cable Ordering Number SWS-PC-CABLE
Data Memory Card

Data memory cards let users store and retrieve weld schedule programs and historical data right from the M100 high-purity power supply. Download data after shift changes for QA/QC analysis. One data memory card is included with the M100 high-purity power supply. Additional data memory cards can be ordered separately.
Description Data memory card Ordering Number SWS-PCCARD-1MB
Power Cord
A 12 ft (3.7 m) power cord is included with the M100 high-purity power supply. To order a separate power cord, add a power cord designator from the table on page 1 to the basic ordering number.
Description Power cord Basic Ordering Number CWS-CORD-
HEPA Filter
One HEPA filter is installed with the M100 high-purity power supply. Replacement 0.3 m HEPA filters can be ordered separately.
Description 0.3 m HEPA filter Ordering Number SWS-HF-5524-HP
Example: CWS-CORD-1
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2004, 2006 Swagelok Company March 2008, R1 MS-02-305-E
www.swagelok.com

M10 0 Powe r Supply
Microprocessor controller with high-resolution
5.5 in. (140 mm) LCD

Auto weld schedule program generation or
manual entry
Real-time monitoring and recording of weld
output performance
Weld data storage for QA/QC purposes: to nonvolatile internal storage to data memory card to printer to PC via serial port Multiple- or single-level capability Fractional/metric conversion Internal thermal printer Step programming capability Ramping between levels Pulse rates from 1 to 99 pulses per second Tacking capability Password protected Operator-limited access

Select a basic ordering number and add a power cord designator. Example: SWS-M100-1-1
Power Input 115 V (ac) 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 20 A 230 V (ac) 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 15 A Output Basic Ordering Number SWS-M100-1Direct current 2 to 100 A 100 A SWS-M100-2- 32.3 A 25 A 44 6.4 9.0
(229)
Duty Cycle 6.25 % 60 % 100 %
Welder Efficiency %
Idling to Dimensions, in. (mm) Rated Current, % Height Width Depth
Weight lb (kg) 42 (19)
15.5
(394)
19.4
(493)
45 (20.4)
For 100 V (ac) input applications, the maximum output capabilities may be reduced. CCC compliant.
Geographic Region North America
Voltage 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz
Plug Type NEMA 5-15 NEMA 5-20 NEMA 6-15 NEMA 5-15 NEMA L6-20 IEC-309 BS 1363 CEE 7/7 AS 3112
Cord/ Wire Type AWG/SJT AWG/SJT AWG/SJT Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized Harmonized
Power Cord Designator 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Japan/Taiwan United Kingdom Continental Europe/Korea Australia/New Zealand/China
110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz
For more information, see the Swagelok Electrical Power Cord / Plug Options catalog, MS-02-79. For any power plug/ service not listed, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.

Remote Pendant
The full-functioning pendant provides remote push-button operation of the power supply. The remote pendant comes with a 15 ft (4.6 m) cable.
Printer Paper
One roll of paper is included with the M100 power supply. Additional packages of rolls can be ordered separately. Each package contains 10 rolls.
Description Printer paper Ordering Number CWS-DRP-PAPER
Description Remote pendant
Ordering Number SWS-M-RPEND
Remote Pendant Extension Cable

The standard cable can be lengthened with a 10 ft (3 m) or 35 ft (10.7 m) extension cable.
Extension Cable ft (m) 10 (3) 35 (10.7) Ordering Number SWS-M-RPEND-10EXT SWS-M-RPEND-35EXT
PC Direct Interface Cable

With the PC direct interface cable, the user can download weld data directly to a PC via a serial port connection. One interface cable is included with the M100 power supply. Additional cables can be ordered separately.
Description PC direct interface cable Ordering Number SWS-PC-CABLE
Data Memory Card

Data memory cards let users store and retrieve weld schedule programs and historical data right from the M100 power supply. Download data after shift changes for QA/QC analysis. One data memory card is included with the M100 power supply. Additional data memory cards can be ordered separately.
Description Data memory card Ordering Number SWS-PCCARD-1MB
Power Cord
A 12 ft (3.7 m) power cord is included with the M100 power supply. To order a separate power cord, add a power cord designator from the table on page 1 to the basic ordering number.
Basic Ordering Number CWS-CORD-
Description Power cord
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 2006, R4 MS-02-102
www.swagelok.com

We ld He ad, Fi x ture B locks, Side Plate s, Ple num, a nd Collets
Se r ie s 20
Is available for outside diameters ranging from 1/2 to 2 in. and 12 to 52 mm Offers versatility for use in a variety of industries Weld head includes arc gap gauge, tool package, and tungsten electrodes
Series 20 Weld Head

Is for outside weld joint diameters of 1/ to in. and
1 to 5 mm

Are for outside diameter weld joints of 1/ to in.
required
and 1 to 5 mm
Offer improved productivity from the ability to set up one
head/power supply connection

Is suitable for prototypes.
fixture while welding with another fixture

Modular design provides multiple fixture combinations. Fixture block includes centering gauge.

Weld Head
6.00
(15)
Fixture Block
5.50
(140) (36.8)
1.45
6.00
(105)
4.13
(15)
8.60
(18)
4.60
(117)
4.00
(10)
(73.4)
.89
(4.1)
0.95 0.96

(4.4)
Thin Side Plate

0.9
(7.4)
0.97
(4.6)
(50.5)
1.99
Side Plate Left
Plenum
Side Plate Right
Description Fixture block

(89.4)
Ordering Number SWS-0TFB-A SWS-0TSPL-A SWS-0TSPR-A SWS-0FSP1L SWS-0FSP1R SWS-0BPLEN
3.5
R 4.50
(114) (9.)
Fixture side plateleft Fixture side plateright Thin fixture side plateleft
3.63
Shown with fixture attached
Thin fixture side plateright Plenum
Ordering Number SWS-0H-C
Tube Collets
Are removable to allow for easy size changes Hold components rigidly during welding Unique universal collet design holds components with
a 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) tube outside diameter variation

Tube Collets
Thin Collets
For use with thin side plates only.
Collet Size in. 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/
Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-0UCI-08 CWS-0UCI-1 CWS-0UCI-16 CWS-0UCI-0 CWS-0UCI-4 CWS-0UCI-3
Collet Size mm 1 18 0 5 8 35 5
Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-0UCI-1MM CWS-0UCI-18MM CWS-0UCI-0MM CWS-0UCI-MM CWS-0UCI-5MM CWS-0UCI-8MM CWS-0UCI-35MM CWS-0UCI-5MM
Collet Size in. 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/
Collet Half Ordering Number SWS-0UCI-08TN SWS-0UCI-1TN SWS-0UCI-16TN SWS-0UCI-0TN SWS-0UCI-4TN SWS-0UCI-3TN
Collet Size mm 1 18 0 5 8 35 5
Collet Half Ordering Number SWS-0UCI-1MMTN SWS-0UCI-18MMTN SWS-0UCI-0MMTN SWS-0UCI-MMTN SWS-0UCI-5MMTN SWS-0UCI-8MMTN SWS-0UCI-35MMTN SWS-0UCI-5MMTN
Pipe Collets
Ferrule Mandrels
Position and hold
Collet Size in. 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/
Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-0UCI-04P CWS-0UCI-08P CWS-0UCI-1P CWS-0UCI-16P CWS-0UCI-0P CWS-0UCI-4P
Collet Size mm 10. 13.5 17. 1.3 6.9 33.7 4.4 48.3
Collet Half Ordering Number CWS-0UCI-10.MMP CWS-0UCI-13.5MMP CWS-0UCI-17.MMP CWS-0UCI-1.3MMP CWS-0UCI-6.9MMP CWS-0UCI-33.7MMP CWS-0UCI-4.4MMP CWS-0UCI-48.3MMP
short tangent sanitary (Swagelok TS series) ferrules on-center in the weld fixture.
Are for 1/ to in.
fittings with ferrules 0.5 in. (1 mm) in overall length.
Ferrule Size in. 1/ and 3/4 1 and 1 1/ Ordering Number SWS-3MANDREL-81 SWS-3MANDREL-164 SWS-3MANDREL-3
Welding of pipe is limited to a maximum wall thickness of 0.109 in. (.8 mm). For JIS pipe sizes, add J to the ordering number. Example: CWS-0UCI-04PJ
Ferrule mandrels must be used with fixture
block SWS-0TFB-A or with fixture side plate SWS-0TSPL-A or SWS-0TSPR-A. Special collets are required to hold the mandrel in the fixture. Two collet halves are required.
Description Mandrel collet
Ordering Number SWS-0UCI-MC
Examples of Fixture Side Plate Combinations and Configurations That Can Be Welded
Tube to Short Sanitary Ferrule

Standard fixture block SWS-20TFB-A with SWS-32MANDREL
Tubing
(36.8)
1.45
1.45
(36.8)
Ferrule mandrel
Short Sanitary Ferrules and Standard Tangent Elbow

Standard side plate SWS-20TSPR-A and thin side plate SWS-20FSP1L using SWS-32MANDREL
(19.6)
0.77
1.45
(36.8)
Ferrule mandrel
(73.4)
.89
(56.3)
.
Alignment adjustment acrews
Tube to Tube
Standard fixture block SWS-20TFB-A
Tubing
(36.8)
1.45
1.45
(36.8)
Tubing
Standard Tangent Elbow to Standard Tangent Tee

Thin side plate fixture block SWS-20FSP1L and SWS-20FSP1R
(19.6)
0.77
0.77
(19.6)
(73.4)
.89
(39.4)
1.55

Swagelok weld head extension cables, in combination with the standard weld head, provide weld head operation of up to 50 ft (15. m) away from the power supply. Cables are available in lengths of 1.5 and 37.5 ft (3.8 and 11.4 m).
Tungsten Electrodes
L Swagelok electrodes, available in packages of D ten, provide consistent, repeatable welds. Electrodes consist of % ceriated tungsten, axially ground to rigid specifications.
Weld Joint Nominal Outside Diameter in. 1/, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 1, 1 1/8, 1 1/4 1 1/ 1 3/4,
Electrode Electrode Diameter Length (D) (L) Ordering mm in. (mm) in. (mm) Number 1, 14, 16, 1.630 CWS-C.06-1.630-P 18, 0, (41.1) 1.380 3, 5, 8 CWS-C.06-1.380-P (35.1) 0.06 (1.5) 1.105 35 CWS-C.06-1.105-P
(8.1) (1.7)
40, 5
0.855
CWS-C.06-.855-P
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 001, 003, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 008, R MS-0-18
www.swagelok.com
P FA P lug Valves
43 Series
Features
Quarter-turn operation and full flow design. Light in weight. High-purity PFA material with low extractables for chemical
resistance.
1/4 in. Swagelok PFA tube fitting end connections for
consistent performance. Oval handle indicates open or closed position
Positive handle stop ensures correct orifice position
Unique plug design provides full flow eliminates dead space does not require system pressure to create a seal is easily cleaned and purged
Component Material Grade/ ASTM Specification PFA 440-HP
Bottom-loaded stem is blowout-proof for safety
One-piece body eliminates multiple seal points
1 Handle insert 2 Screw 3 Handle 4 Body, ferrules Virgin PFA 440-HP/ D3307 PFA 440-HP Virgin PTFE/ D1710 PTFE-based
Technical Data
Ordering Number PFA-43S4 Orifice in. (mm) 0.156 (4.0) Cv 1.8 Pressure Rating at 70F (20C) 60 psig (4.1 bar)
5 Nut 6 Stem Lubricant
Temperature F (C) 0 (17) to 50 (10) 50 (10) to 70 (20) 100 (37) 150 (65) 200 (93) Liquid Service 60 (4.1) 60 (4.1) 50 (3.4) 30 (2.0) 10 (0.68) Gas Service 60 (4.1) 50 (3.4) 30 (2.0) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
Wetted components listed in italics. Blue dyed.
5 6
Testing
Operation in a stable temperature environment will maximize valve life and performance.
Every 43 series PFA plug valve is factory tested with nitrogen at two times the rated pressure for leakage at the seat to a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Body seals are tested with helium at two times the rated pressure to a maximum allowable leak rate of 1 3 10 3 std cm3/s.

Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p) psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 30 (2.0) 60 (4.1) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 20 (566) 37 (1047) 62 (1755) Water Flow U.S. gal/min (L/min) 5.7 (21.5) 9.9 (37.4) 14.0 (52.9)

Every 43 series PFA plug valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Ordering Number: PFA-43S4 Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
(50.8)
Accessories
Panel Mount Bracket
316 stainless steel bracket enables back or front mounting. To order a Swagelok PFA plug valve with back mount assembly, add -PM to the ordering number. Example: PFA-43S4-PM
Panel Hole Drill Dimensions
(31.8)
To order a field assembly kit with mounting bracket and instructions, use ordering number SS-MB-P43.
2.00
1.25
7/32 (5.6) TYP

Not required for back mount assembly (23.8)
0.38
(9.7)
0.94
(42.9) (21.4)
1.69
(64.3)
2.53
Back Mount Assembly Front Mount Assembly
0.84
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts positioned prior to swaging.
Combined panel thickness and screw head height above panel must not exceed 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
Other Swagelok PFA Products

For more information about Swagelok PFA tube fittings and tubing, see the Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings and PFA Tubing catalog, MS-01-05. For more information about Swagelok PFA needle valves, see the Swagelok PFA Needle Valves catalog, MS-01-69.
PFA Tubing
PFA Tube Fittings
PFA Needle Valve
PFA tubing MUST be grooved. Use the Swagelok grooving tool.

1. Insert grooved PFA tubing into the Swagelok PFA tube fitting until a clicking sound is heard. 2. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the blue nut until there is no gap between the nut and body hexes. 3. Continue tightening until the nut and body hexes are aligned.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI December 2007, R6 MS-01-56
www.swagelok.com
PFA Tube Fit tings

a nd PFA Tubing
Temperatures from 70 to 400F (20 to 204C) Working pressures up to 275 psig (18.9 bar) Tube fitting sizes from 1/8 to 1/2 in.; tubing sizes from 1/8 to 1 in. and 6 to 12 mm
PFA Tube Fittings and Tubing
Features
Audible click ensures tubing is inserted properly. Visual indication of proper pull-up:
Materials
FittingsMolded PFA/ASTM D3307 Type I TubingPFA/ASTM D3307 Type II
no gap between body hex and hex nut hex at alignment.

Smooth, molded internal wetted surfaces reduce potential
for system contamination.

Grooved tubing allows for higher working pressure. Wrench make-up avoids the potentially unsafe practices of
hand make-up and disassembly.
Pressure ratings are for Swagelok PFA tube ttings used with properly grooved Swagelok PFA tubing and for Swagelok PFA tubing used with metal Swagelok tube ttings. It is not necessary to groove tubing for use with metal ttings.
Fractional Tube Fittings and Tubing

Tubing Wall in. Size, in. Temperature F (C) 70 (20) 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) 400 (204) Fittings and Tubing 0.030 0.047 1/8 1/4 0.062 1/4 3/8 1/2 Working Pressure psig (bar) 275 180 125
(18.9) (12.4) (8.6)
Metric Tubing
Tubing 3/4 1 Tubing Wall mm Size, mm Temperature C (F) 20 (70) 50 (122) 100 (212) 150 (302) 200 (392) 6 8 1 10 12 6 8 Working Pressure bar (psig) 7.0 5.7 19 14
(101) (82) (275) (203)
1.5 10 12
275
(18.9)
200
(13.7)
83
(5.7)
61
(4.2)
12
(174)
8.9
(129)
11
(159)
8.9
(129)
245
(16.8)
180
(12.4)
245
(16.8)
155
(10.6)
115
(7.9)
73
(5.0)
54
(3.7)
9.7
(140)
7.1
(103)
5.5
(79)
4.6
(66)
15
(217)
11
(159)
8.7
(126)
7.1
(103)
145
(9.9)
110
(7.5)
145
(9.9)
93
(6.4)
68
(4.6)
43
(2.9)
32
(2.2)
6.1
(88)
4.4
(63)
3.4
(49)
2.8
(40)
9.5
(137)
6.9
(100)
5.3
(76)
4.4
(63)
87
(5.9)
64
(4.4)
87
(5.9)
48
(3.3)
32
(2.2)
19
(1.3)
13
(0.89)
3.8
(55)
2.5
(36)
1.8
(26)
1.4
(20)
5.9
(85)
4.0
(58)
2.9
(42)
2.2
(31)
47
(3.2)
34
(2.3)
47
(3.2)
11
(0.75)
11
(0.75)
5.0
(0.34)
3.0
(0.20)
2.2
(31)
1.3
(18)
0.8
(11)
0.6
(8.7)
3.4
(49)
2.0
(29)
1.3
(18)
0.9
(13)

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts nger-tight. E dimensions refer to the minimum opening.
Unions
F flat E D
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number PFA-220-6 PFA-420-6 PFA-620-6 PFA-820-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.45 (36.8) 1.70 (43.2) 1.80 (45.7) 2.05 (52.1) D 0.50 (12.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1
Bulkhead Unions
F flat
Tube Size in. 1/4
Ordering Number PFA-420-61
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.42 (61.5) Ax 1.41 (35.8) D 0.60 (15.2) E 0.19 (4.8) F 7/8
E D
Panel hole size is 0.70 in. (17.8 mm); maximum panel thickness is 0.44 in. (11.2 mm).
Ax
PFA Tube Fittings and Tubing
Reducing Unions
F flat
Tube Size in. 3/8 to 1/4 1/2 to 1/4 1/2 to 3/8
Ordering Number PFA-620-6-4 PFA-820-6-4 PFA-820-6-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.77 (45.0) 1.91 (48.5) 1.94 (49.3) D 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) 0.90 (22.9) Dx 0.60 (15.2) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) F 13/16 1 1
E Dx
Union Elbows
E D F wrench pad
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.91 (23.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.45 (36.8) D 0.50 (12.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1
Union Tees
E F wrench pad Ax A D Ax
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.82 (46.2) 2.26 (57.4) 2.46 (62.5) 2.90 (73.7) Ax 0.91 (23.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.45 (36.8) D 0.50 (12.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1
Male Connectors
F flat E D
PFA MALE ELBOW MS-01-05
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/8

C-ELD-0200
Ordering Number PFA-220-1-2 PFA-420-1-2 PFA-420-1-4 PFA-620-1-4 PFA-620-1-6 PFA-820-1-6 PFA-820-1-8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.21 (30.7) 1.36 (34.5) 1.54 (39.1) 1.60 (40.6) 1.74 (44.2) 1.93 (49.0) D 0.50 (12.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1
1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
3/8 1/2
Male Elbows
E D A H
Size C-ELD-0026-D F wrench in. pad 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Tube
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number PFA-220-2-2 PFA-420-2-2 PFA-420-2-4 PFA-620-2-4 PFA-620-2-6 PFA-820-2-6 PFA-820-2-8
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.91 (23.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.45 (36.8) D 0.50 (12.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.67 (17.0) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.41 (10.4) F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 H 0.67 (17.0) 0.78 (19.8) 0.96 (24.4) 1.03 (26.2) 1.14 (29.0) 1.33 (33.8)
Back Ferrules
Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number PFA-424-1 PFA-624-1 PFA-824-1
Front Ferrules
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Plugs
Ordering Number T-203-1 PFA-423-1 PFA-623-1 PFA-823-1
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number PFA-220-P PFA-420-P PFA-620-P PFA-820-P
1/8 in. back ferrule

integral with nut.
PTFE material.
Nuts
1/8 in. G flat
Tube Size in. 1/8
Dimensions in. (mm) G 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 L 0.57

(14.5)
Caps
F flat
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number PFA-220-C PFA-420-C PFA-620-C PFA-820-C
Dimensions, in. (mm) A D F 1/2 5/8 13/16 1 0.83 (21.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.98 (24.9) 0.60 (15.2) 1.04 (26.4) 0.67 (17.0) 1.18 (30.0) 0.90 (22.9)
L 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 in. G flat
1/4 3/8 1/2
0.65
(16.5)
3/8 1/2
0.68
(17.3)
0.79
(20.1)
1/8 in. back ferrule integral with nut.

L
PFA Tubing
Nominal Size Dimensions 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Dimensions 6 8 10 12 PFA-T6M-1M-30M PFA-T6M-1.5M-30M PFA-T8M-1M-30M PFA-T8M-1.5M-30M PFA-T10M-1M-30M PFA-T10M-1.5M-30M PFA-T12M-1M-30M PFA-T12M-1.5M-30M Ordering Number PFA-T2-030-100 PFA-T2-030-500 PFA-T4-047-100 PFA-T4-062-100 PFA-T6-062-50 PFA-T6-062-100 PFA-T8-062-50 PFA-T8-062-100 PFA-T12-062-50 PFA-T16-062-50 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.030 0.047 0.062 0.062 0.062 0.062 0.062 mm 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 Length ft (m) 100 (30.5) 500 (152) 100 (30.5) 50 100 50 100 50 50
(15.2) (30.5) (15.2) (30.5) (15.2) (15.2)
Accessories
Groove Cutters
Groove PFA tubing for use with Swagelok PFA tube ttings.
Tube Size in. 1/8 1/4 For 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. tubing For 1/8 in. tubing 3/8 1/2 Ordering Number MS-GC-2 MS-GC-4 MS-GC-6 MS-GC-8
Tube Cutter
A tube cutter for plastic tubing up to 1 in. outside diameter is available. Ordering number: MS-FT-TC
m (ft)
30 (98.4)
Installation PFA tubing MUST be grooved for use with PFA tube
ttings. Use the Swagelok groove cutter tool. 1. Insert grooved PFA tubing into the Swagelok PFA tube tting until a clicking sound is heard. 2. While holding tting body steady, tighten the blue nut until there is no gap between the nut and body hexes. 3. Continue tightening until the nut and body hexes are aligned.
High-purity PFA tubing with low extractables is available in other wall thicknesses, sizes, and lengths. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2005, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI January 2006, R5 MS-01-05
www.swagelok.com
P i n c h Va l v e s
A Series
I Straight-through flow for enhanced draining and cleaning I Working pressures up to 125 psig (8.6 bar) I Temperatures up to 285F (140C) I Easy conversion between manual and pneumatic actuation
Pinch Valves
Features
Swagelok pinch valves offer positive control of fluids in sterile pharmaceutical and biotechnical applications. Red silicone and EPDM pinch tube elements comply with 21CFR Part 177.2600. I Swagelok TS series sanitary fitting end connections offer an average surface finish of 15 in. (0.38 m) Ra. See the Sanitary Fittings catalog for more information. I Valve offers excellent drainability when properly oriented. I Compact, three-piece construction allows space-efficient system layout. I Lightweight (1.75 lb [0.79 kg]), highstrength PEEK body provides low thermal conductivity and resists corrosion. I Valve offers secondary packing/body seal leakage detection port (see Vent Port). Manual actuator shown; pneumatic actuators available. Spring-loaded stem controls closing force, enhancing pinch tube element service life. Boreline seals virtually eliminate entrapment areas.
Straight-through flow: I reduces cell shear I eases draining and cleaning I provides high Cv, uniform flow.
with telltale
Technical Data
Valve Standard Highpressure Orifice in. (mm) 0.370
(9.4)
Vent Port
A 1/8 in. female NPT leak detection/vent port with snubber plug enables monitoring of the pinch element. To vent to a drain, replace the plug with a fitting for plumbing. Keep the vent port at atmospheric pressure for the pinch element to function properly.
Cv 12
Temperature Rating F (C)

(17 to 140)
Working Pressure psig (bar) 50 (3.4) 125 (8.6)
Autoclave Rating 300 F (148C) at 0 psig with valve open
0 to 285
The low-temperature rating of standard valves with optional Aflas pinch tube
elements is 50F (10C).
1
1 2 3 Component Handle Label Actuator bearing Stem, piston Stem spring(s), spring retainer, stem screw, retaining ring Bearing O-rings Piston spring Body Handle stop Handle screws (3) Upper casing Pinch tube element Support rings (2) Tube reinforcement Cover
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification PEEK Aluminum Stainless steel PEEK Stainless steel PTFE-coated stainless steel EPDM Stainless steel PEEK Stainless steel PEEK Red silicone 316 SS/A167 Nylon PTFE PEEK EPDM 316L SS/A479, A182, or A276; CF3M/A351 316 SS, B8M/A193 316 SS 316 SS, 8M/A194 316 SS Silicone based
3
4 5 6 7 8 9
5 7 8 11 6
10 Lower casing 11 O-rings (secondary, flange seals, 2)
12 15 14
13 10 16
12 Flanges (2) 13 14 15 16 Body bolts (4) Lock washers (4) Body nuts (4) Snubber plug Lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics. Standard valves1 spring; high-pressure valves2 springs.
Pinch Valves

14
Testing
Every Swagelok pinch valve is factory tested with nitrogen at its maximum pressure rating to a maximum leak rate of 0.04 std cm3/min at the seat and shell. Body seals are tested with helium at 10 psig (0.68 bar) to a maximum leak rate of 1 10 5 std cm3/s.

Every Swagelok pinch valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Specification SC-10.
12 10 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

From fully closed handle position.

Standard Valve
2.28
(57.9)
High-Pressure Valve
To order a valve with a standard red silicone or optional EPDM pinch tube element and a pressure rating up to 125 psig (8.6 bar), add H to the ordering number. Example: SS-HA3STBM8
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. 0.94 (23.9) 0.92
(23.4)
Valve with Optional Pinch Tube Element

To order a valve with an optional pinch tube element, replace S in the ordering number with E for EPDM or F for Aflas. Example: SS-A3ETBM8
End Connections Type 1/2 Tube butt weld 1/2 3/4 12 B type VCO fitting TS series sanitary fitting Sanitary clamp fitting Swagelok tube fitting
3.25
(82.6)
4.18
(106)
Size 0.049 in. SS-A3STBLM8 0.065 in. SS-A3STBM8 0.065 in. SS-A3STBM12 1 mm 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 1/2 in. 12 mm SS-A3STBC12MM SS-A3SBVCO8 SS-A3STS8 SS-A3SSC8 SS-A3SS8 SS-A3SS12MM
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 4.62 (117) 4.96 (126) 4.62 (117) 4.18 (106) 5.00 (127) 5.30 (135) B 2.31 (58.7) 2.48 (63.0) 2.31 (58.7) 2.09 (53.1) 2.50 (63.5) 2.65 (67.3)
B A
Tube Butt Weld
B Type VCO Face Seal Fitting
Sanitary Clamp Fitting
Vertical mounting required for drainability. L-rings must be ordered separately. See the Swagelok B Type VCO L-ring Face Seal Fittings catalog.
Options
Steam Ports
L-flange and T-flange end configurations minimize the dead leg between the pinch shutoff and steam purge ports to facilitate in-line steam cleaning. To order, add a designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-A3STBLM8-TTBLM88
Flange Type L-flange Tube Butt Weld Size Designator 1/2 0.049 in. -LTBLM8 1/2 12 1/2 T-flange 1/2 12 0.065 in. 1 mm 0.049 in. 0.065 in. 1 mm -LTBM8 -LTBC12MM -TTBLM8 -TTBM8 -TTBC12MM
0.77
(19.6 )
L-Flange
0.31 1.73
(43.9 ) (7.9)
T-Flange
1.53 (38.9)
0.31
(7.9)
1.73 0.64
(16.3) (43.9 )
3.46
(87.9)
0.77
(19.6 )
Side
Top
Valve Body Seal Kits

Kits include pinch element assembly, four O-rings, lubricant, Material Safety Data Sheet, and instructions.
Pinch Element Material Aflas EPDM Red silicone
Kit Ordering Number FZ-91K-A3 EP-91K-A3 SI-91K-A3
Pneumatic Actuators
Features
I Are compact, lightweight1.9 lb (0.86 kg) total I Operate with low-pressure shop air I Include position indicator feature I Are available factory assembled or in kits for field assembly.
Component Cap, union nut, air clamp Springs, pins O-rings Position indicator Material PEEK Stainless steel EPDM Polycarbonate, stainless steel, PTFE, PES
Actuator Pressure Required at System Pressure

Maximum actuator pressure rating for all models is 125 psig (8.6 bar).
Normally Open Valve Standard High-pressure 35 (2.5) 50 (3.5) Double Acting 25 (1.8) 40 (2.8)
2.29
(58.2)
Normally Closed, Standard 50 (3.5)
Normally Closed, HighPressure 85 (5.9)
Dimensions
2.15
(54.6)
0.50 (12.7) 1.56
2.29
(58.2)
(39.6)
1.20
(30.5 )
1.20
(30.5 )
1.30
(33.0)
7.85 5.37 (199) 5.17 3.05 (131)

(77.5 )
5.17 3.05 (131)

(77.5 )
(136)
1.32
(33.5)
1.32
(33.5)
Normally Open
Double Acting
Normally Closed, Standard and Normally Closed, High-Pressure Actuator Model Normally open Double acting Normally closed, standard Normally closed, highpressure Actuator Designator -O -D -C Kit Ordering Number MS-A3K-O MS-A3K-D MS-A3K-C
Add an actuator designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-A3STBLM8-O
Pneumatic Actuator Kits

Kits include actuator, lubricant, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
-CHP
MS-HA3K-CHP
Swagelok, VCOTM Swagelok Company AflasTM Asahi Glass 1991, 1996, 1997, 2002 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI December 2002, R2 MS-01-65
www.swagelok.com
P i p e F i tti n gs
1/16 to 1 in. sizes 316 stainless steel, brass, and carbon steel NPT, ISO/BSP, and SAE threads
Pipe Fittings
Contents
Nipples
Page 4
Crosses
Page 14 Add a material designator to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2-CN
Material 316 stainless steel Brass Designator SS B S
Adapters, Gaskets
Carbon steel
Page 6
Heavy-wall fittings are available only in 316 stainless steel.
Union Ball Joints
The basic ordering numbers for these fittings include the material designator. Page 14
SAE/MS fittings are not available in brass. Minimum order quantities may apply to certain materials
and configurations.
Reducing Bushings, Reducers Page 9 Pipe Caps

Page 15
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service
representative for information about additional sizes and special alloys.
Materials
Material Standards Couplings
Page 10
Material 316 stainless steel Brass Carbon steel Bar Stock ASME SA479, ASTM A276 ASME B16, ASTM B453 ASTM A108 Forgings ASME SA182, ASTM A182 ASTM B283
Pipe Plugs
Page 15
Elbows
Page 11
Hollow Hex Plugs
Plating and Coating

Page 15 To resist corrosion, all carbon steel fittings are treated with an electrodeposited zinc plating.
Dimensions
Tees
Page 13
Hex Head Plugs
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to
change. Page 15
E dimensions refer to the minimum opening.
Cleaning
Components are cleaned to remove oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.

Always use a pipe thread sealant when assembling tapered threads. SWAK anaerobic pipe thread sealant, PTFE-FREE pipe thread sealant, and Swagelok PTFE Tape are available. See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog, MS-01-169, for more information.
Pipe Fittings
Pressure Ratings Basis

Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
Material 316 stainless steel Brass Carbon steel Allowable Stress Value 20 000 psig (1378 bar) 10 000 psig (689 bar) 20 000 psig (1378 bar)
Features
All fittings have a high-quality appearance. Every fitting is marked with manufacturers name for
easy source tracing.

Male threads are capped for protection.
Straight fittings are manufactured from quality bar stock for strength.
To determine pressure ratings in accordance with B31.1,
Power Piping:
stainless steel materialmultiply by 0.94 carbon steel materialmultiply by 0.85.
Brass material ratings remain the same.

To determine MPa, multiply bar by 0.10.
Temperature Ratings
System temperatures may be limited by the thread sealant or, when applicable, the gasket or O-ring material. Burr-free internal surfaces. NPT threads are based on requirements of ASME B1.20.1 and SAE AS71051.
Fitting Materials
Material 316 stainless steel Brass Carbon steel Maximum Temperature F (C) 1000 (537) 400 (204) 375 (190)
Shaped fittings are manufactured from forgings.
Gasket, O-ring Materials

Maximum Temperature F (C) 230 (110) 400 (204) 400 (204) 400 (204) Minimum Temperature F (C) 13 (25) 5 (15) 325 (198) 20 (28)
Marking identifies material, heat code for material traceability, and ISO end connection.
Component RS gaskets RG, RP gaskets SAE O-rings
Material Buna N Fluorocarbon FKM Copper Fluorocarbon FKM
Thread Specifications
Thread Type NPT ISO/BSP (parallel) (based on DIN 3852) (Swagelok RP and RS fittings) ISO/BSP (tapered) (based on DIN 3852) (Swagelok RT fittings) ISO/BSP (gauge) (based on EN 837-1 and 837-3) (Swagelok RG fittings) Unified (SAE) (Swagelok ST fittings) Specification ASME B1.20.1, SAE AS71051 ISO 228, JIS B0202 ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, JIS B0203 ISO 228, JIS B0202 ASME B1.1
Smooth thread flanks provide optimum sealing and minimize galling. Angles on elbows, tees, and crosses are rigidly controlled for accurate piping layout.
Pipe Fittings
Close Nipples
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4
E
Basic Ordering Number -2-CN -4-CN -6-CN -8-CN -12-CN -16-CN
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.75 (19.1) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.88 (47.8) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4)
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) 7 300 (502) 5 300 (365) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261) 3600 (248) 2600 (179)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Hex Nipples
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/16 Basic Ordering Number -1-HN -2-HN -4-HN -6-HN -8-HN -12-HN -16-HN SS-4-HN-10K SS-8-HN-10K Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.01 (25.6) 1.01 (25.6) 1.40 (35.6) 1.43 (36.3) 1.84 (46.7) 1.84 (46.7) 2.32 (58.9) 1.40 (35.6) 1.84 (46.7) E 0.12 (3.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.39 (9.9) F 5/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 9/16 7/8 Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 11 000 (757) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) 7 300 (502) 5 300 (365) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) Brass 5500 (378) 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261) 3600 (248) 2600 (179)
F flat
1/8 1/4
E
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2
Heavy-Wall Male NPT
Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-HN-RT -4-HN-RT -6-HN-RT -8-HN-RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.01 (25.6) 1.40 (35.6) 1.43 (36.3) 1.84 (46.7) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) F 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261)
Male NPT to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number -2-HN-2RT -4-HN-4RT -6-HN-6RT -8-HN-8RT -12-HN-12RT -16-HN-16RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.01 (25.6) 1.40 (35.6) 1.43 (36.3) 1.84 (46.7) 1.84 (46.7) 2.32 (58.9) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) F 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) 7 300 (502) 5 300 (365) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261) 3600 (248) 2600 (179)
Pipe Fittings
Hex Nipples
Male NPT to Male ISO Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO NPT Thread Size Size in. in. 1/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number -2-HN-2RS -4-HN-4RS -6-HN-6RS -8-HN-8RS Dimensions in. (mm) A B C E F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1.09 (27.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.54 (13.7) 0.16 (4.1) Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 11 400 (785) 10 300 (709) 10 300 (709) 7 600 (523) 7 300 (502) 7 400 (509) Brass 5700 (392) 5100 (351) 5100 (351) 3800 (261) 3600 (248) 3700 (254)
F flat
C dia
1/4 3/8
E
1.45 (36.8) 0.44 (11.2) 0.71 (18.0) 0.23 (5.8) 1.48 (37.6) 0.44 (11.2) 0.85 (21.6) 0.31 (7.9)
1/2 3/4 1
1.75 (44.4) 0.56 (14.2) 1.02 (25.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16
-12-HN-12RS 1.93 (49.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1.26 (32.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1 5/16 -16-HN-16RS 2.23 (56.6) 0.72 (18.3) 1.53 (38.9) 0.78 (19.8) 1 5/8
B A
For gasket information, see page 7. Pressure ratings are for the NPT end connections. Pressure ratings for the male ISO end connections are dependent on the selected gasket. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more pressure-temperature ratings.
Hex Reducing Nipples
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 to 1/16 1/4 to 1/8 3/8 to 1/8 3/8 to 1/4
E
Basic Ordering Number -2-HRN-1 -4-HRN-2 -6-HRN-2 -6-HRN-4 -8-HRN-2 -8-HRN-4 -8-HRN-6 -12-HRN-4 -12-HRN-8 -16-HRN-4 -16-HRN-8 -16-HRN-12 SS-8-HRN-4-10K
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.01 (25.6) 1.22 (31.0) 1.25 (31.8) 1.43 (36.3) 1.47 (37.3) 1.65 (41.9) 1.65 (41.9) 1.65 (41.9) 1.84 (46.7) 1.94 (49.3) 2.13 (54.1) 2.13 (54.1) 1.65 (41.9) E 0.12 (3.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.23 (5.8) F 7/16 9/16 11/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 7/8
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 11 000 (757) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 700 (530) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 8 000 (551) 7 700 (530) 5 300 (365) 7 700 (530) 7 300 (502) 10 000 (689) Brass 5500 (378) 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3800 (261) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 4000 (275) 3800 (261) 2600 (179) 3800 (261) 3600 (248)
F flat
1/2 to 1/8 1/2 to 1/4 1/2 to 3/8 3/4 to 1/4 3/4 to 1/2 1 to 1/4 1 to 1/2 1 to 3/4 1/2 to 1/4
Heavy-Wall Male NPT
Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Thread Size in. 3/8 to 1/4 1/2 to 1/8 1/2 to 3/8 Basic Ordering Number -6-HRNT-4RT -8-HRNT-2RT -8-HRNT-6RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.43 (36.3) 1.47 (37.3) 1.65 (41.9) E 0.28 (7.1) 0.19 (4.8) 0.38 (9.6) F 11/16 7/8 7/8 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 7800 (537) 7700 (530) 7800 (537) Brass 3900 (268) 3800 (261) 3900 (268)
Hex Long Nipples

E
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 A (Available Lengths) in. 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 6.00 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions in. (mm) E F 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) 7 300 (502) 5 300 (365) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261) 3600 (248) 2600 (179)
-2-HLN- 0.19 (4.8) -4-HLN- 0.28 (7.1) -6-HLN- 0.38 (9.6) -8-HLN- 0.47 (11.9) -12-HLN- 0.62 (15.7) -16-HLN- 0.88 (22.4)
F flat
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
To order, insert the material designator as a prefix and the available length as a suffix to the basic ordering number. Example: SS-2-HLN-1.50
Pipe Fittings
Adapters
Female to Male NPT

NPT Size in. 1/8
F flat
Basic Ordering Number -2-A -4-A -6-A -8-A -12-A -16-A SS-4-A-10K SS-8-A-10K
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.10 (27.9) 1.40 (35.6) 1.51 (38.4) 1.94 (49.3) 2.02 (51.3) 2.28 (57.9) 1.43 (36.3) 2.02 (51.3) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.39 (9.9) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 1 1 1/2
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 500 (447) 6 600 (454) 5 300 (365) 4 900 (337) 4 600 (316) 4 400 (303) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2300 (158) 2200 (151)
1/4 3/8
E
1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2
Heavy-Wall Female to Male NPT
Female to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-A-RT -4-A-RT -6-A-RT -8-A-RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.09 (27.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.95 (49.5) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165)
Female NPT to Male ISO Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO NPT Thread Size Size in. in. 1/8
F flat C dia
Basic Ordering Number -2-A-2RS -4-A-4RS -6-A-6RS -8-A-8RS
Dimensions in. (mm) A B C E F 9/16 3/4 7/8 0.99 (25.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.54 (13.7) 0.16 (4.1)
Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) 4600 (316) 4400 (303) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2300 (158) 2200 (151)
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 3/8
E
1.32 (33.5) 0.44 (11.2) 0.71 (18.0) 0.23 (5.8) 1.41 (35.8) 0.44 (11.2) 0.85 (21.6) 0.31 (7.9)
1/2 3/4 1
1.74 (44.2) 0.56 (14.2) 1.02 (25.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16
-12-A-12RS 1.89 (48.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1.26 (32.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1 5/16 -16-A-16RS 2.10 (53.3) 0.72 (18.3) 1.53 (38.9) 0.78 (19.8) 1 5/8
For gasket information, see page 7. Pressure ratings are for the NPT end connection. Pressure ratings for the male ISO end connections are dependent on the selected gasket. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more pressure-temperature ratings.
Female NPT to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO NPT Thread Size Size in. in. 1/8
F flat
Basic Ordering Number -2-A-2RT -4-A-4RT -6-A-6RT -8-A-8RT
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.09 (27.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.94 (49.3) D 0.38 (9.6) 0.56 (14.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) 4600 (316) 4400 (303) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2300 (158) 2200 (151)
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1/4 3/8
E D
1/2 3/4 1
-12-A-12RT 2.02 (51.3) -16-A-16RT 2.30 (58.4)
Pipe Fittings
Adapters
Female ISO Tapered Thread to Male NPT

ISO Thread NPT Size Size in. in. Basic Ordering Number -4-AT-4 -6-AT-6 -8-AT-8 Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.43 (36.3) 1.51 (38.4) 1.96 (49.8) D 0.56 (14.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) E 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) F 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) Brass 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165)
F flat
1/4 3/8
E D
1/4 3/8 1/2
1/2
Male SAE/MS Straight Thread to Female NPT

SAE/MS Thread Size in.
F flat O-ring E
NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Basic Ordering Number -4-SAE-7-4 -6-SAE-7-6 -8-SAE-7-8 -12-SAE-7-12 -16-SAE-7-16
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.32 (33.5) 1.39 (35.3) 1.76 (44.7) 1.99 (50.5) 2.12 (53.8) B 0.36 (9.1) 0.39 (9.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) E 0.20 (5.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.42 (10.7) 0.66 (16.7) 0.88 (22.4) F 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 1 3/8 1 5/8
Pressure Uniform Ratings O-ring 316 SS, Steel Size psig (bar) -904 -906 -908 -912 -916 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 3600 (248) 2900 (199)
7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12
B A
O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.
Male SAE/MS Straight Thread to Male NPT

SAE/MS Thread NPT Size Size in. in.
F flat O-ring E
Basic Ordering Number -4-SAE-1-4 -6-SAE-1-6 -8-SAE-1-8
Dimensions in. (mm) A B C E F 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/2 1.20 (30.5) 0.36 (9.1) 1.26 (32.0) 0.36 (9.1) 0.56 (14.2) 0.20 (5.1) 0.56 (14.2) 0.28 (7.1)
Pressure Uniform Ratings O-ring 316 SS, Steel Size psig (bar) -904 -906 -908 -912 -916 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 3600 (248) 2900 (199)
7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1.53 (38.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.42 (10.7)

(22.4)
-12-SAE-1-12 1.75 (44.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.62 (15.7) 1 1/4 -16-SAE-1-16 2.00 (50.8) 0.59 (15.0) 0.94 (23.9) 0.88
B A
Adapter Gaskets
Copper Gasket for Male RS or RP Fittings

Ordering Number CU-2-RP-2
H
Steel Gasket for Male RS Fittings

Basic Ordering Number S-2-RS-2__
H
Dimensions in. (mm) E 0.39

(9.9)
Dimensions in. (mm) E 0.41

(10.4) (13.7)
E Tx
H 0.04
(1.0)
Tx 0.59
(15.0)
E Tx
H 0.08
(2.0)
Tx 0.63
(16.0)
CU-4-RP-2 CU-6-RP-2 CU-8-RP-2 CU-12-RP-2 CU-16-RP-2
0.53
(13.5)
0.06
(1.5)
0.74
(18.8)
Pressure ratings for male ISO end connections are dependent on the selected gasket. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for pressure-temperature ratings.
0.67
(17.0)
0.06
(1.5)
0.90
(22.9)
0.84
(21.3)
0.06
(1.5)
1.06
(26.9)
1.05
(26.7)
0.08
(2.0)
1.30
(33.0)
Gasket consists of a fluorocarbon FKM or Buna inner ring bonded to a carbon steel outer ring. To order, add V for fluorocarbon FKM or B for Buna to the basic ordering number. Example: S-8-RS-2V
Pressure ratings for male ISO end connections are dependent on the selected gasket. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for pressure-temperature ratings.
0.54 S-4-RS-2__ S-6-RS-2__ S-8-RS-2__ S-12-RS-2__ S-16-RS-2__ 0.68
0.08
(2.0)
0.81
(20.6)
0.08
(2.0)
0.94
(23.9)
(17.3)
0.85
(21.6)
0.10
(2.5)
1.13
(28.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.10
(2.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.32
(33.5)
0.08
(2.0)
1.57
(39.9)
1.33
(33.8)
0.10
(2.5)
1.69
(42.9)
For use with RS end connections only. Also available with fluorocarbon FKM inner ring bonded to stainless steel outer ring. To order, replace S with SS in the basic ordering number. Example: SS-8-RS-2V
Pipe Fittings
Gauge Adapters
Female ISO Parallel (Gauge) Thread to Male NPT

ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 NPT Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.19 (30.2) 1.27 (32.2) 1.68 (42.7) D 0.56 (14.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) E 0.22 (5.6) 0.26 (6.6)
0.28 (7.1)
F flat
Ordering Number SS-4-AG-4 SS-6-AG-6 SS-8-AG-8
F 3/4 15/16 1 1/16
Pressure Ratings 316 SS psig (bar) 5700 (392) 5700 (392) 3900 (268)
E D
Gauge Adapter Gaskets
Copper Gasket for AG Gauge Adapters

Ordering Number CU-4-RG-2
H
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.30

(7.6)
E Tx
H 0.07
(1.8)
Tx 0.42
(10.7)
CU-6-RG-2 CU-8-RG -2
0.34
(8.6)
0.09
(2.3)
0.56
(14.2)
0.36
(9.1)
0.10
(2.5)
0.70
(17.8)
Reducing Adapters
Female to Male NPT

Female NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4
F flat
Male NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/4
Basic Ordering Number -2-RA-1 -4-RA-2 -6-RA-2 -6-RA-4 -8-RA-2 -8-RA-4 -8-RA-6 -12-RA-4 -12-RA-6 -12-RA-8 -16-RA-4 -16-RA-8 -16-RA-12 SS-8-RA-4-10K
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.09 (27.7) 1.26 (32.0) 1.33 (33.8) 1.50 (38.1) 1.58 (40.1) 1.76 (44.7) 1.75 (44.4) 1.85 (47.0) 1.82 (46.2) 2.02 (51.3) 1.96 (49.8) 2.16 (54.9) 2.17 (55.1) 1.81 (46.0) E 0.12 (3.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.23 (5.8) 1 1/2 1 5/8 1 5/16 1 1/16 F 9/16 3/4 7/8
Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 500 (447) 6 600 (454) 5 300 (365) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179)
3/8
E
1/2
A
4 900 (337)
2400 (165)
3/4
3/8 1/2 1/4
4 600 (316)
2300 (158)
1/2 3/4
4 400 (303)
2200 (151)
Heavy-Wall Female to Male NPT 1/2 1/4 10 000 (689)
Female to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

Female ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Male ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.26 (32.0) 1.50 (38.1) 1.76 (44.7) 1.75 (44.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) F 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) Brass 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165)
Basic Ordering Number -4-RAT-2RT -6-RAT-4RT -8-RAT-4RT -8-RAT-6RT
Pipe Fittings
Reducing Bushings
Male to Female NPT

Male NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 Female NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 1 3/8 1/2 3/4 Basic Ordering Number -2-RB-1 -4-RB-2 -6-RB-2 -6-RB-4 -8-RB-2 -8-RB-4 -8-RB-6 -12-RB-4 -12-RB-6 -12-RB-8 -16-RB-4 -16-RB-6 -16-RB-8 -16-RB-12 1.85 (47.0) 1.37 (34.8) Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.03 (26.2) 1.06 (26.9) 0.86 (21.8) 1.19 (30.2) 1.08 (27.4) 1.41 (35.8) 1.08 (27.4) 1.63 (41.4) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.34 (8.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.47 (11.9) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.62 (15.7) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.73 (18.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1 3/8 1 1/16 7/8 F 7/16 9/16 11/16 3/4 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 700 (461) 6 500 (447) 9 200 (633) 6 600 (454) 12 200 (840) 8 300 (571) 5 300 (365) 12 000 (826) 8 200 (564) 4 900 (337) 14 500 (999) 11 600 (799) 8 600 (592) 5 300 (365) Brass 3300 (227) 3300 (227) 4700 (323) 3300 (227) 6200 (427) 4400 (303) 2600 (179) 6000 (413) 4300 (296) 2400 (165) 7400 (509) 5900 (406) 4300 (296) 2600 (179)
F flat
3/8
E A
1/2
Male to Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

Male Female ISO ISO Thread Thread Size Size in. in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.06 (26.9) 1.19 (30.2) 1.08 (27.4) 1.41 (35.8) E 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.44 (11.2) 0.47 (11.9) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 8300 (571) 5300 (365) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 4400 (303) 2600 (179)
Basic Ordering Number -4-RBT-2RT -6-RBT-4RT -8-RBT-4RT -8-RBT-6RT
Reducers
Male to Female SAE /MS Straight Thread (ST)

Male Thread Size in. 9/16-18 Female Thread Size in. 7/16-20 7/16-20 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 3/4-16 Basic Ordering Number -6-RBST-4 -8-RBST-4 -8-RBST-6 -10-RBST-6 -10-RBST-8 -12-RBST-8 Dimensions in. (mm) A B E 0.28 (7.1) F 13/16 7/8 1 1 1 3/16 1 1/4 1 5/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 1.12 (28.4) 0.39 (9.9) Pressure Uniform Ratings O-ring 316 SS, Steel Size psig (bar) -906 -908 -908 -910 -910 -912 -916 -920 -924 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 4500 (310) 3600 (248) 3600 (248) 3600 (248) 2900 (199) 2300 (158) 2300 (158)
O-ring
F flat
3/4-16
E B
0.98 (24.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.39 (9.9) 1.19 (30.2) 0.44 (11.2) 0.42 (10.7) 1.10 (27.9) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 1.42 (36.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 1.27 (32.3) 0.59 (15.0) 0.65 (16.5)
7/8-14
A
1 1/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12
1 5/16-12 1 1/16-12 -16-RBST-12 1.61 (40.9) 0.59 (15.0) 0.87 (22.1) 1 5/16-12 -20-RBST-16 1.98 (50.3) 0.59 (15.0) 1.09 (27.7) 1 5/16-12 -24-RBST-16 1.27 (32.3) 0.59 (15.0) 1.23 (31.2)
10
Pipe Fittings
Hex Couplings
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 Basic Ordering Number -2-HCG -4-HCG -6-HCG -8-HCG -12-HCG -16-HCG SS-4-HCG-10K SS-8-HCG-10K Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.81 (20.6) 1.19 (30.2) 1.31 (33.3) 1.56 (39.6) 1.62 (41.1) 2.00 (50.8) 1.19 (30.2) 1.56 (39.6) E 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.73 (18.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.17 (29.7) 0.45 (11.4) 0.73 (18.5) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 1 1 1/2 Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 500 (447) 6 600 (454) 5 300 (365) 4 900 (337) 4 600 (316) 4 400 (303) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2300 (158) 2200 (151)
F flat
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Heavy-Wall Female NPT 1/4 1/2
Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Thread Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -2-HCG-RT -4-HCG-RT -6-HCG-RT -8-HCG-RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 0.81 (20.6) 1.19 (30.2) 1.31 (33.3) 1.56 (39.6) E 0.33 (8.4) 0.44 (11.2) 0.58 (14.7) 0.72 (18.3) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337) Brass 3200 (220) 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165)
Hex Reducing Couplings
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/4 to 1/8 3/8 to 1/4 1/2 to 1/8 1/2 to 1/4 1/2 to 3/8 3/4 to 1/4 3/4 to 1/2 1 to 1/2 1 to 3/4 1/2 to 1/4 Basic Ordering Number -4-HRCG-2 -6-HRCG-4 -8-HRCG-2 -8-HRCG-4 -8-HRCG-6 -12-HRCG-4 -12-HRCG-8 -16-HRCG-8 -16-HRCG-12 SS-8-HRCG-4-10K Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.22 (31.0) 1.38 (35.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.75 (44.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.81 (46.0) 2.06 (52.3) 2.19 (55.6) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.4) E 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.45 (11.4) 0.73 (18.5) 0.73 (18.5) 0.94 (23.9) 0.45 (11.4) F 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1/2 Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 600 (454) 5 300 (365) 4 900 (337) 4 900 (337) 4 900 (337) 4 600 (316) 4 600 (316) 4 400 (303) 4 400 (303) 10 000 (689) Brass 3300 (227) 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2400 (165) 2400 (165) 2300 (158) 2300 (158) 2200 (151) 2200 (151)
F flat
Heavy-Wall Female NPT

ISO Thread Size in. 3/8 to 1/4 1/2 to 1/4 1/2 to 3/8 Basic Ordering Number -6-HRCGT-4RT -8-HRCGT-4RT -8-HRCGT-6RT Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.38 (35.1) 1.75 (44.4) 1.78 (45.2) E 0.44 (11.2) 0.44 (11.2) 0.58 (14.7) F 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 5300 (365) 4900 (337) 4900 (337) Brass 2600 (179) 2400 (165) 2400 (165)
Pipe Fittings
11
Elbows
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
L
Basic Ordering Number -2-E -4-E -6-E -8-E -12-E -16-E SS-4-E-10K SS-8-E-10K
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.73 (18.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.17 (29.7) 0.45 (11.4) 0.73 (18.5) L 1.04 (26.4) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.92 (48.8) 1.91 (48.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1.97 (50.0) F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 1 1/4 1 11/16 1 1 11/16
L E
F flat

ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -4-E-RT -6-E-RT -8-E-RT Dimensions in. (mm) E 0.44 (11.2) 0.58 (14.7) 0.72 (18.3) L 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) F 11/16 13/16 1 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) Brass 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192)
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8
L E L F flat
Basic Ordering Number -2-ME -4-ME -6-ME -8-ME
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) L 0.88 (22.4) 1.05 (26.7) 1.17 (29.7) 1.45 (36.8) F 7/16 1/2 11/16 13/16
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261)
1/2
12
Pipe Fittings
Street Elbows
Female to Male NPT

NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 Basic Ordering Number -1-SE -2-SE -4-SE -6-SE -8-SE -12-SE -16-SE Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.12 (3.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) L 0.86 (21.8) 1.04 (26.4) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.92 (48.8) 1.91 (48.5) S 0.88 (22.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.26 (32.0) 1.56 (39.6) 1.67 (42.4) 1.94 (49.3) F 7/16 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 1 1/4 1 11/16 Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 9200 (633) 6200 (427) 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) 5100 (351) 5300 (365) Brass 4600 (316) 3100 (213) 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192) 2500 (172) 2600 (179)
F flat
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Reducing Street Elbows
Female to Male NPT

Female NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 Male NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 Basic Ordering Number -2-RSE-1 -4-RSE-2 -6-RSE-4 -8-RSE-4 -8-RSE-6 Dimensions in. (mm) E 0.12 (3.0) 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) L 1.04 (26.4) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6) S 0.87 (22.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.26 (32.0) 1.38 (35.1) 1.38 (35.1) F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6200 (427) 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) Brass 3100 (213) 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192) 2800 (192)
F flat
1/2
S E
Pipe Fittings
13
Tees
Female NPT
L F flat L
Basic Ordering Number -2-T -4-T -6-T -8-T -12-T -16-T SS-4-T-10K SS-8-T-10K
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.08 (52.8) 2.34 (59.4) 2.84 (72.1) 3.12 (79.2) 3.84 (97.5) 3.82 (97.0) 3.12 (79.2) 3.94 (100) E 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.73 (18.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.17 (29.7) 0.45 (11.4) 0.73 (18.5) L 1.04 (26.4) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.92 (48.8) 1.91 (48.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1.97 (50.0) F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 1 1/4 1 11/16 1 1 11/16
3/8 1/2 3/4 1

L

ISO Thread Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Number -4-T-RT -6-T-RT -8-T-RT Dimensions in. (mm) A 2.34 (59.4) 2.84 (72.1) 3.12 (79.2) E 0.44 (11.2) 0.58 (14.7) 0.72 (18.3) L 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) F 11/16 13/16 1 Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) Brass 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192)
Male NPT
L E L F flat L
Basic Ordering Number -2-MT -4-MT -6-MT -8-MT
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.76 (44.7) 2.10 (53.3) 2.34 (59.4) 2.90 (73.7) E 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.6) 0.47 (11.9) L 0.88 (22.4) 1.05 (26.7) 1.17 (29.7) 1.45 (36.8) F 7/16 1/2 11/16 13/16
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 10 000 (689) 8 000 (551) 7 800 (537) 7 700 (530) Brass 5000 (344) 4000 (275) 3900 (268) 3800 (261)
3/8 1/2
Branch Tees
Male and Female NPT

NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 Basic Ordering Number -2-BT -4-BT -6-BT -8-BT Dimensions, in. (mm) A E L S F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 2.08 (52.8) 0.19 (4.8) 2.34 (59.4) 0.28 (7.1) 2.84 (72.1) 0.38 (9.6) 3.12 (79.2) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0) Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6 200 (427) 7 200 (496) 5 600 (385) 5 600 (385) Brass 3100 (213) 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192)
F flat L
1/2
0.47 (11.9) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6)
E A
14
Pipe Fittings
Street Tees
Male and Female NPT

NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2
E
Basic Ordering Number -2-ST -4-ST -6-ST -8-ST -12-ST
Dimensions, in. (mm) A E L S F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 1 1/4 1.91 (48.5) 0.19 (4.8) 2.34 (59.4) 0.28 (7.1) 2.68 (68.1) 0.38 (9.6) 3.12 (79.2) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0)
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6200 (427) 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) 5100 (351) Brass 3100 (213) 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192) 2500 (172)
F flat S
0.47 (11.9) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6)
3/4
3.59 (91.2) 0.62 (15.7) 1.92 (48.8) 1.67 (42.4)
Crosses
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
F flat L A L
Basic Ordering Number -2-CS -4-CS -6-CS -8-CS -12-CS -16-CS
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.08 (52.8) 2.34 (59.4) 2.84 (72.1) 3.12 (79.2) 3.84 (97.5) 3.82 (97.0) E 0.34 (8.6) 0.45 (11.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.73 (18.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.17 (29.7) L 1.04 (26.4) 1.17 (29.7) 1.42 (36.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.92 (48.8) 1.91 (48.5) F 1/2 11/16 13/16 1 1 1/4 1 11/16
Pressure Ratings, psig (bar) 316 SS, Steel 6200 (427) 7200 (496) 5600 (385) 5600 (385) 5100 (351) 6400 (440) Brass 3100 (213) 3600 (248) 2800 (192) 2800 (192) 2500 (172) 3200 (220)
Union Ball Joints
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Basic Ordering Number SS-2-UBJ SS-4-UBJ SS-6-UBJ SS-8-UBJ SS-12-UBJ SS-16-UBJ Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.81 (46.0) 2.34 (59.4) 2.50 (63.5) 2.69 (68.3) 3.12 (79.2) 3.56 (90.4) E 0.27 (6.8) 0.36 (9.1) 0.52 (13.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.03 (26.2) F1 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 1/8 2 1/2 F2 15/16 1 3/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 1 7/8 2 3/8 Pressure Ratings 316 SS, Steel psig (bar) 8400 (578) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 6000 (413) 4600 (316) 6800 (468)
F2 flat
F1 flat
Union ball joint nuts are silver plated. A lubricant is utilized for assembly.
Pipe Fittings
15
Pipe Caps
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8 Basic Ordering Number -2-CP -4-CP -6-CP -8-CP -12-CP -16-CP SS-4-CP-10K SS-8-CP-10K Dimensions in. (mm) A 0.75 (19.1) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.62 (41.1) 1.11 (28.2) 1.58 (40.1) F 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
Pipe Plugs
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 Basic Ordering Number -1-P -2-P -4-P -6-P -8-P -12-P -16-P Dimensions in. (mm) A 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.96 (24.4) 0.99 (25.1) 1.21 (30.7) 1.21 (30.7) 1.50 (38.1) F 5/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8
F flat
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
F flat
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
1 1/4 1/2
Heavy-Wall Female NPT 1 1 1/2
For pipe plugs with male ISO/BSP parallel threads (RS), contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Hollow Hex Plugs
Male SAE /MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS Thread Size in. 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 Basic Ordering Number -4-HPST -6-HPST -8-HPST -12-HPST -16-HPST Dimensions in. (mm) A 0.45 (11.4) 0.48 (12.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) B 0.36 (9.1) 0.39 (9.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) C 0.56 (14.2) 0.69 (17.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) F 3/16 1/4 5/16 9/16 5/8 Uniform O-ring Size -904 -906 -908 -912 -916
O-ring
F flat
B A
Male NPT
NPT Size in. 1/8
F flat C B A
Basic Ordering Number SS-2-HP SS-4-HP SS-6-HP SS-8-HP
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.41 (10.4) 0.61 (15.5) 0.59 (15.0) 0.76 (19.3) B 0.29 (7.4) 0.49 (12.4) 0.47 (11.9) 0.64 (16.2) C 0.37 (9.4) 0.48 (12.1) 0.62 (15.7) 0.76 (19.3) F 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8
1/4 3/8 1/2
Hex Head Plugs
Male SAE/ MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS Thread Size in. 7/16-20 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 Basic Ordering Number -4-PST -6-PST -8-PST -12-PST -16-PST Dimensions in. (mm) A 0.76 (19.3) 0.82 (20.8) 0.89 (22.6) 1.12 (28.4) 1.18 (30.0) B 0.36 (9.1) 0.39 (9.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) F 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 Uniform O-ring Size -904 -906 -908 -912 -916
O-ring
F flat
O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM. B A
Swagelok, SWAKTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI April 2007, R9 MS-01-147
www.swagelok.com
Plug Valve s
P4T a n d P6T S e r i e s
Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar) Swagelok tube fitting and NPT and ISO tapered pipe end connections 1/8 through 1/2 in. and 6 through 12 mm sizes Brass and 316 stainless steel materials
Plug Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Pressure-Temperature Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Materials of Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Flow Data at 70F (20C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Locking Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Features
Swagelok plug valves offer low-torque, quarterturn operation in a simple, compact design that provides positive shutoff of forward flow with up to 3000 psig (206 bar) pressure.
Straight-through flow path Forward-flow throttling Simple design, easy to clean and maintain One-piece body Replaceable plug assembly O-ring seal to atmosphere.
Based on PTFE-coated fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Series Material Temperature, F (C) 10 (23) to 100 150 200 250
(37) (65) (93) (121)
P4T, P6T 316 SS 3000 3000 3000 2000

(206) (206) (206) (137)
P4T Brass 3000 2500 2000 1500

(206) (172) (137) (103)
P6T

(137) (137) (137) (103)
300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (204)
1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9)
1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 400 (27.5)
1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 400 (27.5)
Differential pressure is limited to 150 psig (10.3 bar) maximum if reverse flow
occurs. Reverse-flow throttling may damage O-ring.
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Component 1 Handle 2 Pin 3 Plug 4 O-rings 5 Pin 6 Body 7 Snap ring Lubricant
Brass
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Polyetherimide 316 SS PTFE-coated 316 SS/A479 316 SS 316 SS/A479 PH 15-7 Mo Brass/B453 SS PTFE-coated brass/B453
1 2 3
PTFE-coated fluorocarbon FKM
Silicone-based
Plug Valves
Operation
Open Forward-Flow Throttling Closed

Pressure Drop to Atmosphere, psi (bar) End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fittings 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm Metric Swagelok tube fittings 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. Female NPT 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male/female NPT Female ISO 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/2 in. Cv 0.10 1.6 1.1 6.4 4.4 1.6 6.4 4.8 1.2 0.9 4.3 2.7 1.0 2.4 0.9 1.0 0.9 2.7 Series P4T P4T P4T P6T P6T P4T P6T P6T P4T P4T P6T P6T P4T P6T P4T P4T P4T P6T 1 (0.068) 0.3 (8.4) 6.0 (160) 4.1 (110) 23 16
(650) (450)
5 (0.34) 0.8 (22) 13 52 35 13 52 39

(360)
10 (0.68) 1.1 (31) 18 12 72 49 18 72 54 13 10 48 30 11 27 10 11 10 30

(500) (330) (2030) (1380) (500) (2030) (1520) (360) (280) (1350) (840) (310) (760) (280) (310) (280) (840)
1 (0.068) 0.1 (0.37) 1.6 (6.0) 1.1 (4.1) 6.4 (24) 4.4 (16) 1.6 (6.0) 6.4 (24) 4.8 (18) 1.2 (4.5) 0.9 (3.4) 4.3 (16) 2.7 (10) 1.0 (3.7) 2.4 (9.0) 0.9 (3.4) 1.0 (3.7) 0.9 (3.4) 2.7 (10)
5 (0.34) 0.2 (0.75) 3.6 (13) 2.5 (9.4) 14

(52)
10 (0.68) 0.3 (1.1) 5.1 (19) 3.5 (13) 20 13

(75) (49)
Air Flow, std
ft3/min (std L/min)
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min (L/min)
8.9 (250)
(1470) (990) (360) (1470) (1100)
9.8 (37) 3.6 (13) 14 10

(52) (37)
6.0 (160) 23 17
(650) (480)
5.1 (19) 20 15
(75) (56)
4.4 (120) 3.3 (93) 16 10

(450) (280)
9.7 (270) 7.3 (200) 34 21

(960) (590)
2.7 (10) 2.0 (7.5) 9.6 (36) 6.0 (22) 2.2 (8.3) 5.4 (20) 2.0 (7.5) 2.2 (8.3) 2.0 (7.5) 6.0 (22)
3.8 (14) 2.8 (10) 13

(49)
8.5 (32) 3.2 (12) 7.6 (28) 2.8 (10) 3.2 (12) 2.8 (10) 8.5 (32)
3.7 (100) 9.0 (250) 3.3 (93) 3.7 (100) 3.3 (93) 10
(280)
8.1 (220) 19
(530)
7.3 (200) 8.1 (220) 7.3 (200) 21

(590)
Testing
Every Swagelok plug valve is factory tested for shutoff at 600 psig (41.3 bar).

Every Swagelok plug valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Plug Valves

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
P4T Series P6T Series
0.75
(19.1)
1.12
(28.4)
1.89 1.14
(29.0) (48.0)
2.47 1.50
(38.1) (62.7)
0.37
(9.4)
1.54
(39.1)
0.56
(14.2)
2.14
(54.4)
B A
0.46
(11.7)
B A
0.66
(16.8)
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fittings 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm Metric Swagelok tube fittings 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. Female NPT 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male/female NPT Female ISO 1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/2 in.
Ordering Numbers Stainless Steel SS-2P4T SS-4P4T SS-6P4T SS-6P6T SS-8P6T SS-6P4T-MM SS-8P6T-MM SS-10P6T-MM SS-12P6T-MM SS-2P4T4 SS-4P4T4 SS-4P6T4 SS-8P6T4 SS-2P4T2 SS-4P4T2 SS-8P6T2 SS-4P4T1 SS-4P4T5 SS-4P4T4-RT SS-8P6T4-RT Brass B-2P4T B-4P4T B-6P4T B-6P6T B-8P6T B-6P4T-MM B-8P6T-MM B-10P6T-MM B-12P6T-MM B-2P4T4 B-4P4T4 B-4P6T4 B-8P6T4 B-2P4T2 B-4P4T2 B-8P6T2 B-4P4T1 B-4P4T5 B-4P4T4-RT B-8P6T4-RT Series P4T P4T P4T P6T P6T P4T P6T P6T P6T P4T P4T P6T P6T P4T P4T P6T P4T P4T P4T P6T Orifice
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.99 (50.5) 2.17 (55.1) 2.29 (58.2) 2.66 (67.6) 2.88 (73.2) 2.17 (55.1) 2.66 (67.6) 2.68 (68.1) 2.96 (75.2) 1.78 (45.2) 2.09 (53.1) 2.38 (60.5) 2.88 (73.2) 1.53 (38.9) 1.90 (48.3) 2.64 (67.1) 2.03 (51.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.21 (56.1) 3.14 (79.8) B 0.98 (24.9) 1.08 (27.4) 1.14 (29.0) 1.33 (33.8) 1.44 (36.6) 1.08 (27.4) 1.30 (33.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 0.89 (22.6) 1.05 (26.7) 1.19 (30.2) 1.44 (36.6) 0.76 (19.3) 0.95 (24.1) 1.32 (33.5) 0.95 (24.1) 0.95 (24.1) 1.11 (28.2) 1.57 (39.9) 0.093 (2.3) 0.172 (4.4) 0.172 (4.4) 0.283 (7.2) 0.283 (7.2) 0.172 (4.4) 0.283 (7.2) 0.283 (7.2) 0.283 (7.2) 0.172 (4.4) 0.172 (4.4) 0.283 (7.2) 0.283 (7.2) 0.172 (4.4) 0.172 (4.4) 0.283 (7.2) 0.172 (4.4) 0.172 (4.4) 0.172 (4.4) 0.283 (7.2)
See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN 2999, and JIS B0203.
Plug Valves
Options
Optional Handle Colors
Dark green is standard. For an optional color, add a handle color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4T-BL Other colors are available; contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Handle Color Black Blue Red Designator -BK -BL -RD

PTFE-coated fluorocarbon FKM is standard. For an optional material, add an O-ring material designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4T-KZ
O-Ring Material Kalrez PTFE-coated Buna N PTFE-coated ethylene propylene PTFE-coated neoprene
Designator -KZ -TB -TE -TN
Optional Body Materials

Valve bodies and plugs of other alloys are available in some P4T models. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Downstream Vents
Vented plug and valve body allow pressure release to atmosphere when the valve is closed.
150 psig (10.3 bar) maximum
Valve Open
Plug vent
Valve Closed
operating pressure
Red polyetherimide handle standard
To order, replace T with V in the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4V
Body vent
Vent to atmosphere
Metal Handles
Removing the roll pin protects against accidental actuationthe valve opens and closes with a wrench.
300 series stainless steel or
Roll pin
aluminum To order, add -M1 for stainless steel or -M2 for aluminum to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4T-M1
Plug Valves
Locking Handles
Features
Lever locks to plate to secure valve open or closed.
Fits 1/4 in. (P4T series) and 1/2 in.
(P6T series) plug valves.

Meets OSHA Lockout/Tagout
Lever Plate
Standard 29 CFR Part 1910.147, Control of Hazardous Energy.

Accommodates padlock shackle
length of 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum and diameter of 1/4 to 3/8 in. (6.4 to 9.5 mm).
Component Handle, coupling, cap Handle insert Lever Plate, mounting bracket Screws Grade/ ASTM Specification Nylon Brass 316 SS/A167 316 SS/A240 Stainless steel
Mounting bracket
All other components listed in Materials of Construction, page 2.

C B
Factory-Assembled Locking-Handle Valves

To order a plug valve with a locking handle, add -LD to a valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4T-LD The standard handle color is green. For an optional color, add a handle color designator from the table at right. Example: SS-2P4T-LD-BK
Color Black Blue Red Designator -BK -BL -RD
D 0.39
(9.9)
Locking-Handle Kits for Field Assembly

Kits include plug subassembly (plug, coupling, handle, pin, screw, cap, and O-rings), lock lever, lock plate, mounting bracket and screws, retaining ring, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series P4T P6T A B C D E 2.07 (52.9) 1.14 (29.0) 1.88 (47.8) 2.32 (58.9) 2.24 (56.9) 2.57 (65.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.48 (63.0) 2.70 (68.6) 2.69 (68.4)
Kit Ordering Numbers Valve Material Brass Stainless steel P4T Series B-5LDK-P4T-GR SS-5LDK-P4T-GR P6T Series B-5LDK-P6T-GR SS-5LDK-P6T-GR
For an optional handle color, replace GR in the kit ordering number with a handle color designator. Example: B-5LDK-P4T-BK
Plug Valves
Panel Mounting
Features
Valve can be mounted on panels from 1/16 to 3/8 in. (1.6 to 9.6 mm) thick. The mounting bracket fits:
Swagelok 1/4 in. (P4T series) plug
valves with Swagelok tube fitting, female pipe, and up to 1/8 in. male pipe end connections
Swagelok 1/2 in. (P6T series) valves
Mounting bracket Mounting hole template
with Swagelok tube fitting, female pipe, and up to 3/8 in. male pipe end connections. Screws
Component Handle, coupling, cap Handle insert Mounting bracket, mounting screws Indicator label Grade Nylon Brass Stainless steel Polycarbonate
Label
All other components listed in Materials of Construction, page 2.

E D
Factory-Assembled Panel-Mounting Valves

To order a plug valve with a panel-mount handle, add -PM to a valve ordering number. Example: SS-2P4T-PM The standard handle color is green. For an optional color, add a handle color designator from the table at right. Example: SS-2P4T-PM-BK
OPEN
F C
B A
Color Black Blue Red
Designator -BK -BL -RD
Series P4T P6T
CLOSED
(49.5)
Panel-Mounting Kits for Field Assembly

Kits include plug subassembly (plug, coupling, handle, pin, screw, cap, and O -rings), mounting bracket and screws, retaining ring, indicator label, mounting hole template, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
Kit Ordering Numbers Valve Material Brass Stainless steel P4T Series B-5PMK-P4T-GR SS-5PMK-P4T-GR P6T Series B-5PMK-P6T-GR SS-5PMK-P6T-GR
B 1.46
(37.1)
C 0.37
(9.4)
D 1.14
(29.0)
E 1.88
(47.8)
F 2.13
(54.1)
2.45
(62.3)
1.79
(45.5)
0.56
(14.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.48
(63.0)
2.75
(69.9)
For an optional handle color, replace GR in the kit ordering number with a handle color designator. Example: B-5PMK-P4T-BK
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont PH 15-7 MoTM AK Steel Corp. 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 2007, R7 MS-01-59
www.swagelok.com
Ele ctr ical Powe r Cord and Plug O ptions

Optional electrical power cords and plugs can be used on the Swagelok welding power supply, tube benders, and tube facing tool.
Electrical Service 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz North America PlugNEMA 5-15 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 1 Electrical Service 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz North America PlugNEMA 6-15 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 2 Continental Europe/Korea PlugCEE 7/7 WireHarmonized cord Designator 7
Japan/Taiwan (not pictured) PlugNEMA 5-15 with ground wire adapter WireHarmonized cord Designator 3 North America PlugNEMA 5-20 WireAWG/SJT cord Designator 9
Japan/Taiwan PlugNEMA L6-20 WireHarmonized cord Designator 4
Australia/New Zealand PlugAS 3112 WireHarmonized cord Designator 8
United Kingdom PlugBS 1363 WireHarmonized cord Designator 6
United Kingdom PlugIEC-309 WireHarmonized cord Designator 5
To order an optional power cord and plug, see the following Swagelok catalogs: Tools and Accessories, MS-01-169 Orbital Welding System, Tube Facing Tool, MS-02-104-SCS Orbital Welding System, M100 Power Supply, MS-02-102 Orbital Welding System, M100 High-Purity Power Supply, MS-02-305 Some power cords are not available with the Swagelok tube facing tool. For more information, see the Orbital Welding System, Tube Facing Tool catalog, MS-02-104-SCS.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2001, 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company, April 2006, R4, MS-02-79-E
www.swagelok.com
Pre -Insulated Tubing Bundle s

Ele ctr ic-Trace d a nd Ste a m-Trace d
Features
Simplified field installation 1/8 to 3/4 in. and 6 to 12 mm seamless or welded tubing sizes 316 / 316L stainless steel, copper, and PFA tube materials
Pre-Insulated Tubing Bundles
Table of Contents
Swagelok Bundled Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacket Material Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tubing Bundle Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric-Traced Bundled Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam-Traced Bundled Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Steam-Traced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Steam-Traced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 3 4 7 7 7 9
Tubing Material and Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Additional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Swagelok Bundled Tubing

Swagelok pre-insulated traced tubing bundles provide reliable process temperature maintenance in a variety of analytical and process instrumentation applications, including impulse lines, sample lines, and process lines. It is used to connect process lines to pressure transmitters and analyzers. The rugged elastomeric jacket offers excellent resistance to abrasion and many chemicals. Swagelok pre-insulated tubing bundles provide an economical choice compared to eld tracing and insulating. The parallel congurationprocess and tracer lines are parallel inside the bundleallows all tubes to bend together in as little as an 8 in. (20.3 cm) radius in tubing sizes up to 3/4 in. or 12 mm, so the bundle is easier to route and connect in the eld than cabled bundles. Choose from light steam-traced, heavy steam-traced, and electric-traced bundles for freeze protection, viscosity control, and process temperature maintenance.
Jacket Material Specifications

PVC Jacket
This jacket material is an economical choice when ambient installation temperature is above 10F (23C). It offers UV, corrosion, and abrasion resistance.
Urethane Jacket
This jacket material is a nonhalogenated thermoplastic urethane that can be installed in ambient temperatures as low as 40F (40C). It also offers improved resistance to abrasion, aromatic hydrocarbons, and UV light.
Jacket Colors
The standard jacket color is black. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for other available colors.
Jacket Properties Tensile strength, psi (bar) Elongation Hardness, Shore A UL 94 flammability rating UV resistance PVC 2200 (151) 350 % 80 V2 750 h UL-1581 Urethane 3800 (261) 700 % 80 V2 2000 h in accordance with QUV aging test
Insulation Features
Water soluble chlorides less than 100 ppm Absorption-resistant fibrous glass insulation Resists wicking
Tubing Bundle Technical Data

Fractional
PVC Jacket Temperature Ratings Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.035 0.049 0.035 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.049 0.065 0.049 0.030 0.032 0.035 0.049 0.049 220 (104) 30 (34) 10 (23) 220 (104) 30 (34) 10 (23) Max Jacket Rating F (C) Min Ambient Min Ambient Service Installation Rating Rating F (C) F (C) Pressure Rating at 20 to 100F
Seamless 10 900 (751) 5 100 (351) 7 500 (516) 3 300 (227) 4 800 (330) 2 600 (179) 3 700 (254) 5 100 (351) 2 400 (165) 1 400 (96.4) 900 (62.0) 800 (55.1) 1 100 (75.7) 700 (48.2) PFA 155 (10.6)
Welded 4080 (281) 2640 (181) 2080 (143) 2960 (203)
Min Bend Radius in. (cm)
Support Centers ft (m) Horiz Vert
Max Continuous Length ft (m) Seamless 900 (274) 2200 (671) 1300 (396) Welded 2500 (762) 2500 (762) 2000 (610) 1000 (305)
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213) TP 316/316L
8.00
(20.3)
6.00
(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
1000 (305) 750 (229) 250 (76.2)
Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 2600 (792) 8.00
(20.3)
6.00
(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
2000 (610) 1000 (305) 500 (152)
0.030 0.062
220 (104)
30 (34)
10 (23)
95 (6.5) 97 (6.6)
8.00
(20.3)
6.00
(1.80)
15.0
(4.60)
1000 (305)
Metric
PVC Jacket Temperature Ratings Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 Nominal Wall Thickness mm Max Jacket Rating C (F) Min Ambient Min Ambient Service Installation Rating Rating C (F) C (F) Pressure Rating at 28 to 37C
(20 to 100F) bar (psig)
Seamless 420 (6095) 310 (4499) 240 (3483) 400 (5805) 200 (2902) 330 (4789) 94.0 (1364)
Welded
Min Bend Radius cm (in.)
Support Centers m (ft) Horiz Vert
Max Continuous Length m (ft) Seamless 300 (984) Welded
Stainless Steel (ASTM A269, A213) TP 316/316L 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 104 (220) 34 (30) 23 (10) 210 (688) 20.3
(8.00)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
165 (541) 150 (492) 120 (393) 600 (1968) 455 (1492) 300 (984)
160 (2322)
300 (984)
Copper (ASTM B68, B68M, B75, UNS 12200) 6 8 12 1.0 104 (220) 34 (30) 23 (10) 60.0 (870) 54.0 (783) 20.3
(8.00)
1.80
(6.00)
4.60
(15.0)
The bundle is designed so that the jacket surface temperature will not exceed
140F (60C) with a process temperature of 400F (204C), an ambient temperature of 80F (26C), and a 10 mph (16 km/h) wind. The maximum jacket rating for urethane is 250F (121C). 60F (51C) urethane jacket. 40F (40C) urethane jacket. For elevated pressure-temperature ratings, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
Standard tolerance for continuous length tubing is 5 %. Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness. Seamless metric
sizes also meet DIN 17458 test 1 class material 1.4401/1.4404.
Not recommended for use with tube fittings in gas service. Not recommended for use with Swagelok groove cutter tool or PFA fittings
due to minimum wall thickness.
Electric-Traced Bundled Tubing

A simple and economical choice for applications where electric tracing is preferred, Swagelok electric-traced bundled tubing maintains consistent temperatures in long, continuous lengths of impulse and sample lines for freeze protection, temperature maintenance, or viscosity control. The standard Raychem self-regulating tracer lowers heat output as the bundle gets warmer. For more precise temperature control, an optional line-sensing thermostat is available.
Features
Raychem self-regulating electric tracers Tinned copper braided shield Fluoropolymer tracer jacket ATEX, FM, and CSA approved tracer for use in hazardous
areas
Maintains process temperatures up to 250F (121C) One or two process tubes available as standard
Technical DataTracer Specifications

High-Temperature Tracers
High-temperature tracers are used to maintain process temperatures or for viscosity control up to 250F (121C). They are also used for freeze protection or if the tracers will be exposed to intermittent temperatures up to 420F (215C), such as during steam cleaning.
Maximum Maximum Intermittent Process Exposure Tracer Voltage Temperature Temperature Code V (ac) F (C) F (C)
Low-Temperature Tracers
Low-temperature tracers are used for freeze protection or maintaining temperatures up to 100F (37C) and can be exposed to continuous process temperatures of 150F (65C).
Tracer Type
Power W/ft
(W/m)
T Rating T3 T2D
Approvals FM Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III CSA Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Class III ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx e II FM Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III CSA Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx e II
5 (16) H1 Hightemperature H2 240 120 250 (121) 420 (215) 10 (32) 15 (49) 20 (65) 5 (16) 10 (32) 15 (49) 20 (65) 5 (16) L1 Lowtemperature L2 240 120 8 (25) 10 (32) 150 (65) 185 (85) 5 (16) 8 (26) 10 (32)
The temperature that the electric tracer can be exposed to for 100 h during its lifetime. The entire system requires approval for FM compliance.
T3 T2C
T6
Dimensions and Weight

A A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Bundle Description A 1.10 (27.9) 1.30 (33.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.30 (33.0) 1.50 (38.1) 1.70 (43.2) B 1.00 (25.4) 1.10 (27.9) 1.20 (30.5) 1.40 (35.6) One 1/4 in. process tube One 3/8 in. process tube One 1/2 in. process tube Two 1/4 in. process tubes Two 3/8 in. process tubes Two 1/2 in. process tubes
Nominal Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.3 (0.45) 0.4 (0.60) 0.5 (0.74) 0.4 (0.60) 0.6 (0.89) 0.8 (1.19)
One Process Tube
Two Process Tubes
Maximum Tracer Length Versus Circuit Breaker Rating

Example: Given a nominal tracer power output of 10 W/ft (32 W/m), a startup temperature of 0F (17C), and a voltage of 120 V (ac) with a breaker size of 20 A, the maximum tracer length will be 130 ft (39.6 m). To determine maximum tracer length in meters: m = ft 0.3048.
Nominal Tracer Power Output W/ft (W/m) Startup Temperature 15 A F (C) 50 (10) 5
(16)
Circuit Breaker Voltage 120 V (ac) Circuit Breaker Size 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 15 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A Maximum Tracer Length, ft High-Temperature 180 160 155 150 110 95 95 90 76 66 63 60 60 55 53 51 230 150 130 150 105 95 115 70 60 240 215 210 200 145 130 125 120 101 88 84 80 80 73 71 69 270 200 175 200 140 125 150 95 85 360 325 315 305 220 195 190 180 151 133 126 120 119 109 106 103 270 265 255 245 201 176 168 160 159 145 141 137 220 210 200 190 182 176 171 270 380 380 360 320 305 295 220 195 185 175 151 132 126 120 115 104 101 97 460 270 270 300 260 295 210 210 195 170 180 165 230 180 150 135 480 425 410 390 295 260 245 235 202 177 168 161 153 139 134 130 540 400 345 390 260 230 305 200 180 720 640 615 590 440 390 370 355 302 265 252 241 229 208 201 195 540 520 495 475 403 353 336 321 305 277 268 259 425 420 401 360 347 335 324 540 765 765 0 (17) 20 (28) 40 (40) 50 (10) 10
(32)
240 V (ac)
0 (17) 20 (28) 40 (40) 50 (10)
15
(49)
0 (17) 20 (28) 40 (40) 50 (10)
20
(65)
0 (17) 20 (28) 40 (40) 50 (10) 0 (17) 20 (28) 50 (10) 0 (17) 20 (28) 50 (10) 0 (17) 20 (28)
Low-Temperature 5
(16)
270 260 210 185 180 145 125
540 520 420 390 340 360 300 270
540
540
8
(25)
420
420
10
(32)
360
360
Electric-Traced Bundled Tubing Ordering Number Reference

This ordering information is for reference only. To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. See page 3 for available process tubing sizes and page 4 for available electric tracers.
SSE1 4W1 L1SAF FP4

Material
SS = Stainless steel CU = Copper P = PFA
Spooling Option
1 = Continuous length, 5 % tolerance 2 = Exact length, 0.5 % tolerance 3 = Continuous length with exact length 0.5 % tolerance 4 = Standard length tolerance 5 %
May contain more than one length of no less
than 100 ft (30.5 m) each.
Bundle Type
Electric-traced
Number of Process Tubes

1 or 2
Three and four process tubes may be available.
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Bundle Jacket Material

P = PVC U = Urethane
Process Tube OD
Fractional 2 = 1/8 in. 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/2 in. 12 = 3/4 in.
jacket material.
Units of Measure (Length)

F = Feet M = Meters
Metric 6m = 6 mm 8m = 8 mm 10m = 10 mm 12m = 12 mm
Tracer Jacket Material

Fluoropolymer
3/4 in. process tubes require urethane
Tracer Nominal Power Output

A = 5 W/ft (16 W/m) B = 8 W/ft (26 W/m) C = 10 W/ft (32 W/m) D = 15 W/ft (49 W/m) E = 20 W/ft (65 W/m)
Process Tubing Construction

S = Seamless (SS, CU) W = Welded (SS) E = Extruded (PFA)
Process Tubing Wall Thickness

1 = 0.035 in. 2 = 0.049 in. 3 = 0.065 in. 4 = 0.030 in. 5 = 1.0 mm 6 = 1.5 mm 7 = 0.032 in. 8 = 0.062 in.
Tracer Type
Self-regulating
Voltage
1 = 100 to 130 V 2 = 200 to 277 V
Temperature
L = Low-temperature H = High-temperature
Steam-Traced Bundled Tubing

Light Steam-Traced
Swagelok light steam-traced bundled tubing is typically used for freeze protection of instrument impulse lines and analyzer transport lines. It can also maintain temperatures in smallerdiameter process lines. The process and tracer tubes are individually insulated to reduce the heat transfer rate, providing a more consistent tube temperature over long tubing lengths.
Features
Maintains process temperatures from 50 to 200F (10 to 93C) Individually wrapped process and tracer tubes reduce
heat transfer
One or two process tubes available as standard

A A
Process Tube Size in. 3/8
Tracer Tube Size in. 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A One Process Tube 1.60 (40.6) 1.90 (48.3) 1.10 (27.9) 1.20 (30.5) B
Nominal Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.5 (0.74) 0.6 (0.89) 0.7 (1.04) 0.6 (0.89) 0.8 (1.19) 0.9 (1.34)
1/2 1/2
Two Process Tubes One Process Tube Two Process Tubes 3/8 1/2 1/2 2.30 (58.4) 2.60 (66.0) 1.20 (30.5) 1.30 (33.0)
Heavy Steam-Traced
Swagelok heavy steam-traced bundled tubing is typically used to maintain higher process temperature or for viscosity control. Applications can include impulse, sampling, and process lines. The process tubing is in direct contact with the tracer, providing maximum heat transfer to help maintain higher process temperatures.
Features
Maintains process temperatures from 200 to 400F
(93 to 204C)
Maximum tracer temperature of 400F (204C) Process and tracer tubes are in direct contact to maximize
higher heat transfer

One or two process tubes available as standard

A A
Process Tube Size in. 3/8
Tracer Tube Size in. 3/8 3/8 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A One Process Tube 1.50 (38.1) 1.60 (40.6) 1.70 (43.2) 1.20 (30.5) B
Nominal Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.5 (0.74) 0.6 (0.89) 0.7 (1.04) 0.6 (0.89)
1/2 1/2
One Process Tube
Two Process Tubes Two Process Tubes 3/8 1/2 1/2 2.00 (50.8) 2.10 (53.3) 1.20 (55.9) 1.20 (30.5) 0.7 (1.04) 0.8 (1.19)
Steam-Traced Bundled Tubing Ordering Number Reference

This ordering information is for reference only. To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. See page 7 for available process and tracer tubes.
SSL2 4S1 CU4S4 FP4

Material
SS = Stainless steel CU = Copper P = PFA
Spooling Option
1 = Continuous length, 5 % tolerance 2 = Exact length, 0.5 % tolerance 3 = Continuous length with exact length 0.5 % tolerance 4 = Standard length tolerance 5 %
May contain more than one length of no less
than 100 ft (30.5 m) each.
Bundle Type
L = Light traced H = Heavy traced
Number of Process Tubes

1 or 2
Three and four process tubes may be available.
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Bundle Jacket Material

P = PVC U = Urethane
Units of Measure (Length)

F = Feet M = Meters
Process Tube OD
Fractional 2 = 1/8 in. 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/2 in. 12 = 3/4 in.
jacket material.
Metric 6m = 6 mm 8m = 8 mm 10m = 10 mm 12m = 12 mm
Tracer Wall Thickness

1 = 0.035 in. 2 = 0.049 in. 3 = 0.065 in. 4 = 0.030 in. 5 = 1.0 mm 6 = 1.5 mm 7 = 0.032 in.
3/4 in. process tubes require urethane
Process Tubing Construction

S = Seamless (SS, CU) W = Welded (SS) E = Extruded (PFA)
Tracer Tube Construction

S = Seamless (SS, CU) W = Welded (SS)
Tracer Tube OD
Fractional 4 = 1/4 in. 6 = 3/8 in. 8 = 1/2 in. Metric 6m = 6 mm 8m = 8 mm 10m = 10 mm 12m = 12 mm
Process Tubing Wall Thickness

1 = 0.035 in. 2 = 0.049 in. 3 = 0.065 in. 4 = 0.030 in. 5 = 1.0 mm 6 = 1.5 mm 7 = 0.032 in. 8 = 0.062 in.
Tracer Tube Material

SS = Stainless steel CU = Copper

Bending Tools
Similar to a common electrical conduit bender, this tool is compact and easy to use and has the required 8 or 12 in. (20.3 or 30.5 cm) minimum bend radius. A 3/4 in. NPT threaded handle is needed. Ordering numbers: MS-BBT (8 in. [20.3 cm]) MS-BBT-12 (12 in. [30.5 cm])
Use MS-BBT-12 when:
the bundle contains two or more 3/4 in. tubes the smallest bundle dimension is >1.75 in. (44.4 mm) the bundle contains a tube 1 in. (25.4 mm) OD.
Jacket Patch Kit

The jacket patch kit can be used to seal a splice in tubing or to repair any incidental eld damage to the insulation and jacket. Each kit contains thermal insulation, berglass tape, and a self-sealing patch. Ordering numbers: MS-JP-KIT-1 (8 by 12 in. [20.3 by 30.5 cm]) MS-JP-KIT-2 (8 by 96 in. [20.3 by 24.4 cm])
Center Line Tool

This tool brings the process tubes to the proper 2 1/8 in. center line to connect a standard transmitter. Ordering number: MS-CLT
Heat-Shrink End-Seal Boots

Made of thermally stabilized, modied polyolen, these heat-shrink end-seal boots provide a weatherproof end seal. They are recommended for all exposed ends to protect against moisture ingress. To order, see the table below to locate the proper designator based on process and tracer tube type and size and add it to basic ordering number MS-HSB-. Example: MS-HSB-D2 for a heavy steam-traced bundle with one 1/4 in. process tube and one 1/4 in. tracer tube
Tracer Tube, in. Process Tube Sizes, in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Electric-Traced 1 Process Tube D2 C2 C2 2 Process Tubes B3 B3 A3 Heavy Steam-Traced 1 Process Tube D2 D2 D2 C2 D2 C2
Heat-Shrink Entry-Seal Boots

Made of thermally stabilized, modied polyolen, these heat-shrinkable entry-seal boots provide a waterproof seal where the tubing enters an enclosure.
Maximum panel thickness A
D2 B3
C2 A3
C maximum bundle dimension
B mounting hole diameter
Dimensions, in. (mm) D2 C2 C2 C2 C2 L2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A 0.50 (12.7) B 2.00 (50.8) 2.38 (60.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (88.9) 4.50 (114) C 0.75 to 1.60
(19.0 to 40.6)
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
D2 D2 D2 C2 B3 B3 B3 A3
Ordering Number MS-HSS-4-KIT MS-HSS-4S-KIT MS-HSS-5-KIT MS-HSS-6X-KIT
C2 C2 C2 C2 2 Process Tubes B3 B3 A3 B3 B3 A3 B3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
0.75 to 2.10
(19.0 to 53.3)
1.43 to 2.75
(36.3 to 69.8)
1.50 to 3.50
(38.1 to 88.9)
1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Light Steam-Traced 1 Process Tube C2 D2 L2 C2 L2 L2 2 Process Tubes A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Silicone Sealant
C2 L2 L2 A3 A3 A3
This silicone RTV sealant can be used to seal ends of bundled tubing from moisture and offers excellent resistance to weather, oil, and many chemicals. One tube will seal approximately 10 ends; each kit contains 8 tubes. Service Temperature: 60 to 400F (51 to 204C) Cure Time: approximately 24 h at 77F (25C) and 50 % relative humidity. Ordering number: MS-RTV-SEAL-KIT
10

Power Connection Kits
Power connection kits provide a junction for connecting an electric tracer to the power source.
Compatible Tracers Approvals FM and CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G NEMA 4X FM and CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 4X All ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx e II Fitting and seals to connect to customer-supplied junction box with M25 hub MS-PC-A-KIT Junction box with surface mounting feet and bundle mounting bracket with adjustable straps Kit Contents Ordering Number
Low-temperature
MS-PC-F-C-KIT
High-temperature
Tracer Termination Kits

Tracer termination kits are used to seal off the tracer end opposite the power connection.
Compatible Tracers Approvals FM and CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 4X Low-temperature High-temperature ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx e II Sleeves to heat shrink onto the tracer MS-ETT-LT-A-KIT MS-ETT-HT-A-KIT Kit Contents Seal housing that is fastened together with two supplied screws Ordering Number
All
MS-ETT-F-C-KIT
Tracer Splice / Tee Connection Kit

The tracer splice/tee kit provides an enclosure to join two or three electric tracers together.
Compatible Tracers Approvals FM and CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA 4X ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx e II Ordering Number
All
MS-ETST-F-C-A-KIT
11

Controllers
Controllers provide for local temperature control of Swagelok traced bundled tubing in nonhazardous areas. This compact digital controller can display set point or actual temperature. A single temperature sensor input and dual outputs use autotune PID features and may be programmed for heat, cool, alarm, or timer functions.
MS DC 120 J E
Voltage
120 = 120 V (ac), 30 A SPDT relay 240 = 240 V (ac), 30 A DPST relay
Thermocouple Input
J = Type J K = Type K 2 = 2-wire RTD (DIN)
Specifications
Housing: NEMA 4X Input: Type J or K thermocouple and 100 2-wire RTD (DIN) Output: 120 V (ac), 30 A SPDT or 240 V (ac), 30 A DPST relay Operating Environment: 32 to 150F (0 to 65C) Cords and connections are not supplied as standard.
Options
-E = Optional cord set with integral 20 A GFCI and 5-pin connector
Only available for use with 120 V relay.
Thermostats
Thermostats with a stainless steel sensor are available to monitor the temperature of the process tubes or monitor the ambient temperature. The set point can be adjusted to control the power to an electric tracer to achieve the desired temperature.
Adjustable Set-Point Temperature Description F (C)
Sensor Exposure Limits F (C)
Switch Rating A
Voltage V (ac)
Switch Type
Capillary Length
Approval FM, CSA, and UL Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA 4, 7, and 9 ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx emia IIC T6 FM, CSA, and UL Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA 4, 7, and 9
Ordering Number
15 to 140 Ambient sensing

(8 to 60)
40 to 160
(40 to 71)
22
125 250 480
MS-AST-F-C
32 to 120
(0 to 48)
58 to 131
(50 to 55)
16
110 230 254
MS-AST-A
SPDT
40 to 420 Process line sensing 25 to 325

(3 to 162) (40 to 215)
22
125 250 480
9 ft
(2.7 m)
MS-LST-F-C
58 to 419
(50 to 215)
250
(9.84 ft)
3m
ATEX Group II, Category 2G, EEx IIC T6
MS-LST-A
Class III does not apply to UL approval.
Tubing Material and Size

Other materials and sizes of tubing and tracers are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Additional Products
For information on additional products, see the following Swagelok catalogs:
Jacketed Tubing and Insulated Tubing, MS-02-188 Integrated Test Valve Assembly with Universal Mount,
MS-02-221
Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings, MS-01-140 Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company RaychemTyco Electronics Corp. FMTM FM Global CSATM Canadian Standards Association ULUnderwriters Laboratories Inc. 2004, 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI December 2005, R2 MS-02-316
www.swagelok.com
Pre s sure Gauge s

For Pa ne l Builde rs PBG Se r ie s
Monitor vacuum and positive system
pressures up to 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, or 100 000 kPa

2 1/2 in. (63 mm) dial size Fits industry-standard 2 9/16 in.
(65.0 mm) panel hole cutout

316 SS wetted components Glycerin-lled case Socket restrictor included for
pulsation control
Crimped, tamper-resistant ring
provides a permanent seal of gauge case to lens
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Positive-Pressure Gauges
0 to 15 psi through 0 to 15 000 psi 0 to 1 bar through 0 to 1000 bar 0 to 60 kPa through 0 to 100 000 kPa
Panel-Mount Features
Fill port offset for ease of installation Low prole
Compound Gauges
Vacuum to 0 psi through vacuum
Integral Swagelok tube adapter shown; male NPT available
Laminated safety glass
to 200 psi
Vacuum to 0 bar through vacuum
to 9 bar
Vacuum to 0 kPa through vacuum
to 2500 kPa
Accuracy
2 % / 1 % / 2 % of span in accordance with ASME B40.100, Grade A
Welded construction
End Connections
1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter 1/4 in. male NPT
Component End connection, Bourdon tube, socket restrictor Case Fill fluid Movement Lens Lens gasket Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Glycerin Stainless steel Laminated safety glass Buna N Aluminum
Testing and Calibration

Every Swagelok PBG series pressure gauge is factory calibrated.
Ambient
4 to 140F (20 to 60C)
Media
212F (100C) maximum
Temperature Error
0.4 % for every 18F (10C) temperature change from 68F (20C)
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Swagelok 1/4 in. tube adapter end connection shown; dimensions for 1/4 in. male NPT end connection are identical.
bolt circle
(75.0)
2.95
(21.9)
0.86
2.24 (56.8) 1.81 (46.0)
(88.1)
3.47
(18.5)
0.73
Build a PBG gauge model ordering number by combining the designators as shown below.
PBG - 63 - NG100 - AQ
Panel builders gauge Dial size
Dial Range, psi Maximum Designator 0 NC0 15 NC15 30 NC30 Vacuum 60 NC60 30 in. Hg 100 NC100 160 NC160 200 NC200 15 NG15 30 NG30 60 NG60 100 NG100 160 NG160 200 NG200 300 NG300 400 NG400 600 NG600 0 800 NG800 1 000 NG1000 1 500 NG1500 2 000 NG2000 3 000 NG3000 5 000 NG5000 6 000 NG6000 10 000 NG10K 15 000 NG15K Minimum
Available only with NPT end connections.
Dial Range See below.

Dial Range, bar Maximum Designator 0 AC0 0.6 AC.6 1.5 AC1.5 3 AC3 9 AC9 1 AG1 1.6 AG1.6 2.5 AG2.5 4 AG4 6 AG6 10 AG10 16 AG16 25 AG25 40 AG40 60 AG60 100 AG100 160 AG160 250 AG250 400 AG400 600 AG600 1000 AG1000
Fitting Size and Type AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT
Dial Range, kPa Maximum 0 60 150 300 Vacuum 100 KPa 500 900 1 500 2 500 60 100 160 250 400 600 1 000 1 600 0 2 500 4 000 6 000 10 000 16 000 25 000 40 000 60 000 100 000
Minimum
Minimum
Vacuum 1 bar
Designator JC0 JC60 JC150 JC300 JC500 JC900 JC1500 JC2500 JG60 JG100 JG160 JG250 JG400 JG600 JG1000 JG1600 JG2500 JG4000 JG6000 JG10K JG16K JG25K JG40K JG60K JG100K
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2006, R1 MS-02-333
www.swagelok.com
P re s s ure Gauges
Industr ial a nd Proce s s
PGI Se r ie s
40, 50, 63, 100, 115, and 160 mm (1 1/2, 2, 2 1/2, 4, 4 1/2 and 6 in.) dial sizes Accuracy in accordance with ASME, EN, and JIS Available with a variety of end connections, including Swagelok tube adapters Center-back, lower-back, and lower mount configurations Stainless steel and reinforced thermoplastic construction Available unfilled or liquid filled
Industrial and Process Pressure Gauges
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Tube Adapters Solve Alignment Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Industrial Gauge Models Stainless Steel Cases and Wetted Components B Model: General-Purpose Gauge with Adjustable Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C Model: General-Purpose Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Model: Solid-Front Safety Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 8
M Model: Miniature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 L Model: Low-Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Process Gauge Model Glass-Reinforced Thermoplastic Case and Stainless Steel, Brass, or Alloy 400 Wetted Components P Model: Industrial Process Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Dial Range Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Features
Monitor vacuum and positive system pressures up to

Every Swagelok industrial pressure gauge is factory calibrated and pressure tested.
15 000 psi, 1000 bar, or 100 MPa

Manufactured in accordance with industry standards Available with Swagelok tube adapter end connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters Solve Alignment Problems

Swagelok tube adapters can help eliminate difficult alignment problems and can be used with any Swagelok tube fitting. Typical Alignment Problem
When installing a gauge with a pipe fitting end connection, it is often difficult to align the dial to the desired position without damaging the gauge.
50
5
100 150
10 14

Gauges with integral Swagelok tube adapters eliminate alignment problems.
200
1. Insert the gauge with integral Swagelok tube adapter into a Swagelok tube fitting. . Align the gauge dial to the desired position. 3. Install the fitting.
Swagelok tube adapters are to be used ONLY in
Swagelok tube fittings. Use in fittings made by other manufacturers may result in leakage or slippage.
Process Connections
Connection Maximum Pressure Specification Swagelok Tube Adapter 10 000 psi, 600 bar, 1/4 in. and 6 mm 60 MPa 3/8 in. and 1/ in. 6000 psi, 400 bar, 10 mm and 1 mm 40 MPa Male NPT 6000 psi, 400 bar, 40 MPa 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, 100 MPa
1/8 in. 1/4 and 1/ in.
ASME B1.0.1
Male ISO Parallel Gauge Thread (EN) 6000 psi, 400 bar, G1/8B (EN) 40 MPa EN 837-1 EN 837-3 G1/4B (EN) 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, G1/B (EN) 100 MPa Male ISO Parallel Gauge Thread (JIS) G1/4B (PF) 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, JIS B7505 G1/B (PF) 100 MPa Male ISO Tapered Thread 6000 psi, 400 bar, 40 MPa 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, 100 MPa
R1/8 (PT) R1/4 (PT) R1/ (PT)
ISO 7/1 JIS B003
G1/8B (EN), G1/4B (EN), and G1/B (EN) are for use with Swagelok RG adapter fittings. G1/8B (PF), G1/4B (PF), and G1/B (PF) are for use with Swagelok RJ adapter fittings.
Model Selection Guide

Dial Range Positive pressures: 0 to 10 psi, 400 mbar, or 50 kPa Compound pressures: Vacuum to 00 psi, 9 bar, or 1.5 MPa Positive pressures: 0 to 5000 psi, 50 bar, or 5 MPa Dial Size mm (in.) 63
( 1/)
Accuracy 1.5 % of span ASME B40.1 Grade B, EN 837-3 Class 1.6, JIS B7505 Class 1.6 .5 % of span ASME B40.1 Grade C, EN 837-1 Class .5, JIS B7505 Class .5 1.5 % of span ASME B40.1 Grade B, EN 837-1 Class 1.6, JIS B7505 Class 1.6 1 % of span ASME B40.1 Grade 1A, EN 837-1 Class 1.0 JIS B7505 Class 1.0
Adjustable Pointer
Solid Front
Liquid Fillable
Configurations LBM Yes CBM LM Yes Yes Model L
100
(4)
40
(1 1/)
Yes
Yes
50
()
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
S B C S B C B P
Compound pressures: Vacuum to 00 psi, 9 bar, or 1.5 MPa Positive pressures: 0 to 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, or 100 MPa
63
( 1/)
100
(4)
160 (6) Compound pressures: Vacuum to 400 psi or 500 kPa Positive pressures: 0 to 15 000 psi or 100 000 kPa 115
(4 1/)
160
(6)
0.5 % of span ASME B40.1 Grade A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes P
Configurations: LBM = lower-back mount
CBM = center-back mount LM = lower mount.
Optional. Liquid-fillable model available in lower mount configuration only.
Glycerin- and silicone-filled gauges cannot be used

where strong oxidizing agents are present.
B Model: General-Purpose Stainless Steel Gauge with Adjustable Pointer

Features
63, 100, and 160 mm ( 1/, 4, and 6 in.) dial sizes are
available.
Adjustable pointer is standard. Bayonet ring allows easy access to pointer. Lens is constructed of safety glass for additional protection. Design is liquid fillable.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
End Connections
63 mm (2 1/2 in.) Dial Size
1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
Ambient
Unfilled: 40 to 140F (40 to 60C) Glycerin-filled: 4 to 140F (0
to 00 psi

1/4 in. male NPT G1/4B (EN) G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT)
to 9 bar
Vacuum to 0 MPa through vacuum
to 60C)
Low-temperature glycerin-filled:
to 1.5 MPa Positive-Pressure Gauges

0 to 15 psi through 0 to 15 000 psi 0 to 1 bar through 0 to 1000 bar 0 to 0.1 MPa through 0 to 100 MPa
9-to 140F (34 to 60C)

Silicone-filled: 40 to 140F (40
100 mm (4 in.) Dial Size

1/ in. and 1 mm Swagelok tube
to 60C) Media
Unfilled: 39F (00C) maximum Liquid-filled: 1F (100C) maximum
adapter
1/4 and 1/ in. male NPT G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT)
Accuracy
63 mm ( 1/ in.): 1.5 % of span
Temperature Error
(ASME B40.1 Grade B, EN 837-1 Class 1.6, JIS B7505 Class 1.6)
00 and 160 mm (4 and 6 in.): 1

1/ in. male NPT G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT)
1.0 % of span (ASME B40.1 Grade 1A, EN 837-1 Class 1.0, JIS B7505 Class 1.0)
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Fill fluid (if ordered) Movement Lens Lens gasket Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Glycerin, lowtemperature glycerin, or silicone Stainless steel Laminated safety glass Buna N Aluminum
Configurations
63 mm ( 1/ in.): center-back and
lower mount
100 and 160 mm (4 and 6 in.): lower-
back and lower mount
See page 18 for options and accessories for field installation.
Dimensions
Lower Mount
C
Dial Size mm (in.)
End Connection Type Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/4 in. G1/4B (EN) G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT) 3/8 in. Swagelok tube 6 mm adapter 10 mm 1/4 in. Male NPT Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/ in. G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT) Swagelok tube 1 mm adapter Male NPT G1/B (EN) 1/ in. G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT) Size A .6 (57.3)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B .39 (60.8) C D E
63
( 1/)
.09 (53.0)
.4 (57.0)
1.30
(33.0)
0.39
(10.0)
.31 (58.8) .6 (57.3) .31 (58.8) 3.15 (80.0) 3.60 (91.4)
.45 .39 .45 3.7
(6.3) (60.8) (6.3) (83.0)
3.44 (87.4) 1.97 1.18

(30.0)
Center-Back Mount
B
Lower-Back Mount
B
100
(4)
3.43 (87.0)
3.7 (83.0)
(50.0)
0.63
(16.0)
3.60 (91.4)
3.44 (87.4)
160
(6)
4.65 (118)
3.7 (83.0)
(50.0)
1.97
1.97
(50.0)
B is 3.90 in. (99.0 mm) and C is .60 in. (66.0 mm) for gauges with lower-back mount and pressure
ratings of 1500 psi, 10 MPa, 100 bar or higher.
Build a B model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 63B - PG100 - L AQ X - ABH J

Product Function and Type
Pressure gauge, industrial
Pointer
Standard adjustable pointer
Options (see page 18) Dial Size and Model

63B = 63 mm ( 1/ in.) dial 100B = 100 mm (4 in.) dial 160B = 160 mm (6 in.) dial A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration E = Material certification F = Panel-mount clamp G = Front flange H = Rear flange I = Maximum indicating pointer (replaces adjustable pointer) N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm])
Available for unfilled gauges only. Not available in lower mount gauge configuration. Not available with dial range maximums lower
than 54 psi (3.7 bar, 0.37 MPa).
Dial Range
See page 16.
Process Connection Location

L = Lower mount (all dial sizes) C = Center-back mount (63 mm [ 1/ in.] dial size only) B = Lower-back mount (100 and 160 mm [4 and 6 in.] dial sizes only)
Liquid Fill Fluid

X = Unfilled 1 = Glycerin 2 = Low-temperature glycerin 3 = Silicone 100 mm (4 in.) Dial Size AR = 1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter AT = 1 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/ in. male NPT AW = G1/B (EN) AZ = G1/B (PF) BE = R1/ (PT) 160 mm (6 in.) Dial Size AP = 1/ in. male NPT AW = G1/B (EN) AZ = G1/B (PF) BE = R1/ (PT)
Fitting Size and Type

63 mm (2 1/2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AV = G1/4B (EN) AX = G1/4B (PF) BD = R1/4 (PT)
C Model: General-Purpose Stainless Steel Gauge

Features
63 and 100 mm ( 1/ and 4 in.) dial sizes are available. Crimped ring provides a permanent seal of gauge case
to lens.
Lens is constructed of clear acrylic plastic. Design is liquid fillable.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
Configurations
63 mm ( 1/ in.): center-back and
Ambient
lower mount
100 mm (4 in.): lower-back and lower
to 00 psi
mount
to 60C)
to 9 bar
End Connections
1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
9-to 140F (34 to 60C)



1/4 in. male NPT
to 60C) Media 1F (100C) maximum

Temperature Error
Accuracy
63 mm ( 1/ in.): 1.5 % of span
adapter
1/4 and 1/ in. male NPT
100 mm (4 in.): 1.0 % of span
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Fill fluid (if ordered) Movement Lens Lens gasket Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Glycerin, lowtemperature glycerin, or silicone Stainless steel Acrylic Buna N Aluminum
(ASME B40.1 Grade 1A, EN 837-1 Class 1.0, JIS B7505 Class 1.0)
Dimensions
Lower Mount
C
Center-Back Mount
B
Lower-Back Mount
B
Dial Size mm (in.)
End Connection Type Swagelok tube adapter 1/4 in. Male NPT 3/8 in. Swagelok tube 6 mm adapter 10 mm 1/4 in. Male NPT Swagelok tube adapter 1/ in. Male NPT Swagelok tube 1 mm adapter Size A . (56.3) .09 (53.0) .8 (57.8) . (56.3) .8 (57.8) 3.15 (80.0) 3.64 (9.4) 3.43 (87.0) 3.64 (9.4)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B .37 (60.3) .4 (57.0) .43 (61.8) .37 (60.3) .43 (61.8) 3.7 (83.0) 3.48 (88.4) 3.7 (83.0) 3.48 (88.4)
(33.0)
63
( 1/)
1.30
0.39
(10.0)
100
(4)
1.97
(50.0)
0.63
(16.0)
1.18
(30.0)
1.10 (8.0) for center-back mount.
Build a C model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 63C - PG100 - L AQ X - ABH

Options (see page 18)

A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration E = Material certification F = Panel-mount clamp G = Front flange H = Rear flange I = Maximum indicating pointer N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm])
Available for unfilled gauges only. Not available in lower mount gauge
configuration.
Dial Size and Model

63C = 63 mm ( 1/ in.) dial 100C = 100 mm (4 in.) dial
Dial Range
See page 16.

L = Lower mount (all dial sizes) C = Center-back mount (63 mm [ 1/ in.] dial size only) B = Lower-back mount (100 mm [4 in.] dial size only)
Not available with dial range maximums

lower than 54 psi (3.7 bar, 0.37 MPa).
Liquid Fill Fluid

X = Unfilled 1 = Glycerin 2 = Low-temperature glycerin 3 = Silicone 100 mm (4 in.) Dial Size AR = 1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter AT = 1 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/ in. male NPT

63 mm (2 1/2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT
S Model: Solid-Front Stainless Steel Safety Gauge

Features
63 and 100 mm ( 1/ and 4 in.) dial sizes are available. Lower mount configuration is liquid fillable. Solid front and blowout back for severe service. Design meets safety requirements of ASME B40.1
and EN 837-1.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
Configurations
Lower-back and lower mount
Ambient
to 00 psi
End Connections
1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
to 60C)
to 9 bar

1/4 in. male NPT G1/4B EN G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT)
9-to 140F (34 to 60C)


to 60C) Media
Unfilled: 39F (00C) maximum Liquid-filled: 1F (100C) maximum

Accuracy
63 mm ( 1/ in.): 1.5 % of span
adapter
1/4 and 1/ in. male NPT G1/B EN G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT)
Temperature Error
100 mm (4 in.): 1.0 % of span
(ASME B40.1 Grade 1A, EN 837-1 Class 1.0, JIS B7505 Class 1.0)
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Fill fluid (if ordered) Movement Lens Lens gasket Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Glycerin, lowtemperature glycerin, or silicone Stainless steel Laminated safety glass Buna N Aluminum
Dimensions
Lower Mount
C
Dial Size mm (in.)
End Connection Type Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/4 in. G1/4B (EN) G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT) 3/8 in. Swagelok tube 6 mm adapter 10 mm 1/4 in. Male NPT Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/ in. G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT) Swagelok tube 1 mm adapter Size A .6 (57.3)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B .59 (65.8) C D E
63
( 1/)
.13 (54.0)
.48 (63.0)
1.65
(4.0)
0.71
(18.0)
0.71
(18.0)
.31 (58.8) .6 (57.3) .31 (58.8) 3.15 (80.0) 3.44 (87.4)
.65 (67.3) .59 (65.8) .65 (67.3) 3.66 (93.0) 3.83 (97.4) .8 0.94
(4.0)
Lower-Back Mount
B
100
(4)
1.18
(30.0)
3.43 (87.0)
3.66 (93.0)
(58.0)
3.44 (87.4)
3.83 (97.4)
Build an S model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 63S - PG100 - L AQ X - ABG


A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration E = Material certification G = Front flange I = Maximum indicating pointer J = Adjustable pointer N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm])
configuration.
Dial Size and Model

63S = 63 mm ( 1/ in.) dial 100S = 100 mm (4 in.) dial
Dial Range
See page 16.
available with dial range maximums lower than 54 psi (3.7 bar, 0.37 MPa). Not available with maximum indicating pointer.
Not available with adjustable pointer; not

L = Lower mount B = Lower-back mount
Liquid Fill Fluid

(Lower mount configuration only) X = Unfilled 1 = Glycerin 2 = Low-temperature glycerin 3 = Silicone 100 mm (4 in.) Dial Size AR = 1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter AT = 1 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/ in. male NPT AW = G1/B (EN) AZ = G1/B (PF) BE = R1/ (PT)

63 mm (2 1/2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AV = G1/4B (EN) AX = G1/4B (PF) BD = R1/4 (PT)
10
M Model: Stainless Steel Miniature Gauge

Features
40 and 50 mm (1 1/ and in.) dial sizes are available. Miniature size allows placement in compact spaces. Snap-in lens saves space when compared to twist-on lens.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
Configurations
Center-back and lower mount
to 00 psi
End Connections
1/4 in. and 6 mm Swagelok tube
to 9 bar
adapter
1/8 in. male NPT G1/8B (EN) R1/8 (PT)

0 to 15 psi through 0 to 5000 psi 0 to 1 bar through 0 to 50 bar 0 to 0.1 MPa through 0 to 5 MPa
Temperature Error

1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Movement Lens Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Stainless steel Acrylic Aluminum
Accuracy
.5 % of span (ASME B40.1 Grade C, EN 837-1 Class .5, JIS B7505 Class .5)

11
Dimensions
Lower Mount
C
Dial Size mm (in.)
End Connection Size 1/8 in. Type Male NPT G1/8B (EN) R1/8 (PT) A 1.54 (39.0)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B .09 (53.0) 0.98 (5.0) 1.67 (4.3) 1.98 (50.3) .0 (55.8) .4 (56.8) 0.35 (9.0) C D
40
(1 1/)
50
() D
Center-Back Mount
B
1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/4 in. G1/4B (EN) G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT) 3/8 in. Swagelok tube 6 mm adapter 10 mm
1.85 (47.0)
.13 (54.0)
1.06 (7.0)
0.39 (10.0)
.04 (51.8) 1.98 (50.3) .04 (51.8)
.30 (58.3) .4 (56.8) .30 (58.3)
in. (56.3 mm) for gauges with front flange. .
Build an M model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 50M - PG100 - L AQ X - ABE


A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration E = Material certification F = Panel-mount clamp G = Front flange L = Glass lens with friction ring N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm])
Not available in lower mount gauge
configuration. Available factory installed only.
Dial Size and Model

40M = 40 mm (1 1/ in.) dial 50M = 50 mm ( in.) dial
Dial Range
See page 16.

C = Center-back mount L = Lower mount
Liquid Fill FluidNot Available

Unfilled

40 mm (1 1/2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter AN = 1/8 in. male NPT AU = G1/8B (EN) BC = R1/8 (PT) 50 mm (2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AV = G1/4B (EN) AX = G1/4B (PF) BD = R1/4 (PT)
1
L Model: Stainless Steel Low-Pressure Gauge

Features
63 and 100 mm ( 1/ and 4 in.) dial sizes are available. Diaphragm capsule design offers low-pressure
measurement capability.
A zero adjustment screw is on the dial. Lens is constructed of safety glass for additional protection.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
0 to 15 in. HO through 0 to
Configurations
63 mm ( 1/ in.): lower mount 100 mm (4 in.): lower-back and lower
00 in. HO
mount
0 to 5 psi through 0 to 10 psi 0 to 40 mbar through 0 to 400 mbar 0 to 4 kPa through 0 to 50 kPa
End Connections
1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
Temperature Error
Accuracy
1.5 % of span (ASME B40.1 Grade B, EN 837-3 Class 1.6, JIS B7505 Class 1.6)

Component End connection Diaphragm capsule Case Movement Lens Dial Pointer Material 316 SS 304 SS Stainless steel Laminated safety glass Aluminum

adapter
1/4 and 1/ in. male NPT G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT)
13
Dimensions
Lower Mount
C
Dial Size mm (in.)
End Connection Type Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/4 in. G1/4B (EN) G1/4B (PF) R1/4 (PT) 3/8 in. Swagelok tube 6 mm adapter 10 mm 1/4 in. Male NPT Swagelok tube adapter Male NPT 1/ in. G1/B (EN) G1/B (PF) R1/ (PT) Swagelok tube 1 mm adapter Size A .6 (57.3)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B C D E
63
( 1/)
.05 (5.0)
1.65
(4.0)
0.35
(9.0)
.31 (58.8) .6 (57.3) .31 (58.8) 3.15 (80.0) 3.60 (91.4)
3.7 (83.0) 3.44 (87.4) .8 0.63

(16.0)
Lower-Back Mount
B
100
(4)
1.18
(30.0)
3.43 (87.0)
3.7 (83.0)
(58.0)
3.60 (91.4)
3.44 (87.4)
Build an L model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 63L - IG30 - L AQ X - ABH


A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration E = Material certification F = Panel-mount clamp G = Front flange H = Rear flange I = Maximum indicating pointer N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm])
Not available in lower mount gauge
configuration.
Dial Size and Model

63L = 63 mm ( 1/ in.) dial 100L = 100 mm (4 in.) dial
Dial Range
See page 17.
Available for 100 mm (4 in.) dial size only. Not available with dial range maximums

L = Lower mount (all dial sizes) B = Lower-back mount (100 mm [4 in.] dial size only) Unfilled
lower than 1.5 psi (103 mbar, 10.3 kPa, 41.5 in. HO).
Liquid Fill FluidNot Available

63 mm (2 1/2 in.) Dial Size AQ = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube adapter BG = 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter AS = 6 mm Swagelok tube adapter BH = 10 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AV = G1/4B (EN) AX = G1/4B (PF) BD = R1/4 (PT) 100 mm (4 in.) Dial Size AR = 1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter AT = 1 mm Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/ in. male NPT AW = G1/B (EN) AZ = G1/B (PF) BE = R1/ (PT)
14
P Model: Reinforced Thermoplastic Industrial Process Gauge

Features
115 and 160 mm (4 1/ and 6 in.) dial sizes are available. Solid front and blowout back for severe service. Design meets safety requirements of ASME B40.1. Adjustable pointer is standard. Threaded cover ring allows easy access to pointer. Lens is constructed of clear acrylic plastic. Design is liquid fillable.
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
Configurations
Lower-back mount and lower mount
Ambient
to 400 psi
Vacuum to 0 kPa through vacuum
End Connections
1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter 1/4 and 1/ in. male NPT
to 60C)
to 500 kPa Positive-Pressure Gauges

0 to 15 psi through 0 to 15 000 psi 0 to 60 kPa through 0 to 100 000 kPa
to 60C) Media
1F (100C) maximum Maximum media temperature for the

1/ in. male NPT
Accuracy
0.5 % of span (ASME B40.1 Grade A)
Weather Protection
Weather resistant (NEMA 3/IP54)
brass process gauge is 140F (60C)
dry case
Weather-tight (NEMA 4X/IP56)
Temperature Error
liquid-fillable case
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Fill fluid (if ordered) Movement Lens Lens gasket Dial Pointer Material 316 SS Black glassreinforced thermoplastic Glycerin, lowtemperature glycerin, or silicone Stainless steel Acrylic Buna N Aluminum
Wetted components listed in italics. ower mount gauge configurations are also L available in brass and alloy 400 materials. Performance criteria for these gauges are consistent with stainless steel except where noted.
15
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Lower Mount
C
Lower-Back Mount
B
E A A
Dial Size mm (in.) 115

(4 1/)
End Connection Size 1/ in. 1/4 in. 1/ in. Male NPT Type Swagelok tube adapter A 4.7 (108) B
Dimensions, in. (mm) C D E 4.95 (16) 1.57 (40.0) 1.1 (8.5)
3.8 (97.0) 4.50 (114) 3.31 (84.0) 4.06 (103) 4.8 (13) 4.74 (10) 4.86 (13) 3.46 (88.0)
160
(6)
1/ in.
Build a P model gauge ordering number by combining the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGI - 115P - OG160 - L AR X - BN J

Pointer
Standard adjustable pointer
Dial Size and Model

115P = 115 mm (4 1/ in.) dial 160P = 160 mm (6 in.) dial

A = Cleaned to ASME B40.1 level IV B = Certificate of calibration F = Panel-mount clamp I = Maximum indicating pointer K = Safety glass M = Liquid-fill membrane N = Orifice (0.03 in. [0.58 mm]) Q = Brass (wetted components) R = Alloy 400 (wetted components) S = Mark pointer
configuration. Available on 115 mm (4 1/ in.) dial size only. Not available on gauges with maximum indicating or mark pointer. Membrane factory installed on liquid-filled gauges.
Dial Range
See page 16 and 17.

L = Lower mount B = Lower-back mount

115 mm (4 1/2 in.) Dial Size AR = 1/ in. Swagelok tube adapter AO = 1/4 in. male NPT AP = 1/ in. male NPT BT = 1/ in. long Swagelok tube adapter
For use with female Swagelok end connections.
160 mm (6 in.) Dial Size AP = 1/ in. male NPT
Liquid Fill Fluid

X = Unfilled 1 = Glycerin 2 = Low-temperature glycerin 3 = Silicone
16
Dial Range Designators

The selected dial range should be approximately two times the system working pressure, and the system working pressure should be in the middle half (5 to 75 %) of the dial range. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative if the system working pressure will exceed 75 % of the dial range. Maximum pressure is limited by the end connection. Not all dial ranges and end connections are available on all models.
S, B, C, and M Models
Dial Range, bar (primary scale: bar; secondary scale: psi) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 BC0 0.6 BC.6 Vacuum 1.5 BC1.5 1 bar 3 BC3 9 BC9 1 BG1 1.6 BG1.6 .5 BG.5 4 BG4 6 BG6 10 BG10 16 BG16 5 BG5 0 40 BG40 60 BG60 100 BG100 160 BG160 50 BG50 400 BG400 600 BG600 1000 BG1000
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 MC0 0.06 MC.06 0.15 MC.15 Vacuum 0.30 MC.3 0.1 MPa 0.50 MC.5 0.90 MC.9 1.5 MC1.5 0.1 MG.1 0.16 MG.16 0.5 MG.5 0.40 MG.4 0.60 MG.6 1 MG1 1.6 MG1.6 .5 MG.5 0 4 MG4 6 MG6 10 MG10 16 MG16 5 MG5 40 MG40 60 MG60 100 MG100
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; secondary scale: kgf/cm) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 LC0 0.06 LC.06 0.15 LC.15 Vacuum 0.30 LC.3 0.1 MPa 0.50 LC.5 0.90 LC.9 1.5 LC1.5 0.1 LG.1 0.16 LG.16 0.5 LG.5 0.40 LG.4 0.60 LG.6 1 LG1 1.6 LG1.6 .5 LG.5 0 4 LG4 6 LG6 10 LG10 16 LG16 5 LG5 40 LG40 60 LG60 100 LG100
S, B, C, M, and P Models
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 PC0 15 PC15 30 PC30 Vacuum 60 PC60 0.30 in. Hg 100 PC100 160 PC160 00 PC00 15 PG15 30 PG30 60 PG60 100 PG100 160 PG160 00 PG00 300 PG300 400 PG400 600 PG600 0 800 PG800 1 000 PG1000 1 500 PG1500 000 PG000 3 000 PG3000 5 000 PG5000 6 000 PG6000 10 000 PG10K 15 000 PG15K
S, B, C, M, and P Models
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: kPa) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 OC0 15 OC15 30 OC30 Vacuum 60 OC60 0.30 in. Hg 100 OC100 160 OC160 00 OC00 15 OG15 30 OG30 60 OG60 100 OG100 160 OG160 00 OG00 300 OG300 400 OG400 600 OG600 0 800 OG800 1 000 OG1000 1 500 OG1500 000 OG000 3 000 OG3000 5 000 OG5000 6 000 OG6000 10 000 OG10K 15 000 OG15K
17

The selected dial range should be approximately two times the system working pressure, and the system working pressure should be in the middle half (5 to 75 %) of the dial range. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative if the system working pressure will exceed 75 % of the dial range. Maximum pressure is limited by the end connection. Not all dial ranges and end connections are available on all models.
L Model
Dial Range, kPa (primary scale: kPa; secondary scale mm HO) Minimum Maximum Designator 4 RG4 5 RG5 7 RG7 0 10 RG10 15 RG15 0 RG0 50 RG50
L Model
Dial Range, kPa (primary scale: kPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 4 JG4 5 JG5 7 JG7 0 10 JG10 15 JG15 0 JG0 50 JG50
L Model
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Maximum Designator 5 PG5 0 10 PG10
L Model
Dial Range, in. H2O (primary scale: in. HO; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 15 IG15 0 IG0 30 IG30 0 60 IG60 100 IG100 00 IG00
L Model
Dial Range, mbar (primary scale: mbar; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 40 FG40 60 FG60 100 FG100 0 160 FG160 50 FG50 400 FG400
P Model
Dial Range, KPa (primary scale: KPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 JC0 60 JC60 150 JC150 300 JC300 Vacuum 100 KPa 500 JC500 900 JC900 1 500 JC1500 500 JC500 60 JG60 100 JG100 160 JG160 50 JG50 400 JG400 600 JG600 1 000 JG1000 1 600 JG1600 500 JG500 0 4 000 JG4000 6 000 JG6000 10 000 JG10K 16 000 JG16K 5 000 JG5K 40 000 JG40K 60 000 JG60K 100 000 JG100K
Pressure range may be limited by materials of
construction of the wetted components.
P Model
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 NC0 15 NC15 30 NC30 60 NC60 Vacuum 100 NC100 0.30 in. Hg 160 NC160 00 NC00 300 NC300 400 NC400 15 NG15 30 NG30 60 NG60 100 NG100 160 NG160 00 NG00 300 NG300 400 NG400 600 NG600 0 800 NG800 1 000 NG1000 1 500 NG1500 000 NG000 3 000 NG3000 5 000 NG5000 6 000 NG6000 10 000 NG10K 15 000 NG15K
P Model
Dial Range, psi (primary scale: psi; secondary scale kgf/cm) Minimum Maximum Designator 0 QC0 15 QC15 30 QC30 60 QC60 Vacuum 100 QC100 0.30 in. Hg 160 QC160 00 QC00 300 QC300 400 QC400 15 QG15 30 QG30 60 QG60 100 QG100 160 QG160 00 QG00 300 QG300 400 QG400 600 QG600 0 800 QG800 1 000 QG1000 1 500 QG1500 000 QG000 3 000 QG3000 5 000 QG5000 6 000 QG6000 10 000 QG10K 15 000 QG15K
18

Factory-installed options are specified in gauge ordering numbers, as shown in Ordering Information for each gauge model. Some items are available only as factoryinstalled options; others are available for field installation, as described below.
Liquid Fill
Liquid-filled gauges enhance the reliability and integrity of the measuring system for long periods under extreme operating conditions. B, C, S, and P model gauges are available liquid filled. Because the type of liquid used to fill the gauge may vary with the application, Swagelok offers glycerin, low-temperature glycerin, and silicone. Glycerin and low-temperature glycerin fill liquid are available as accessories for field installation.
Adjustable Pointers
Gauges are available with adjustable pointers that allow resetting to zero. B, S, and P model gauges are available with adjustable pointers.
Glycerin Ordering Numbers

Fill Liquid Glycerin Low-temperature glycerin Size 8 oz (36 mL) squirt bottle 1 gal (3.8 L) bottle 1 gal (3.8 L) bottle Ordering Number PGI-GLY-8 PGI-GLY-18 PGI-GLY-18-LT
Orifices
Orifices are used to restrict flow, reducing the immediate effect of pulsations and pressure spikes. All Swagelok industrial and process gauges are available with orifices as factory-installed options. Threaded orifices (0.03 in. [0.58 mm] inside diameter) are available for P model industrial process gauges as accessories for field installation.
Panel-Mount Clamps
P Model Threaded Orifice Kits

Orifice Material Stainless steel Brass Alloy 400 Ordering Number PGI-P-ORIFICE PGI-P-ORIFICE-Q PGI-P-ORIFICE-R
Special Cleaning
Special cleaning is available as an option for unfilled gauges. Internal components are cleaned in accordance with ASME B40.1, Section 5, which states that the gauge shall be free of visually detectable moisture and foreign matter (chips, slivers, weld slag or splatter, shop soil, greases, oils, or other contaminants) that could be mechanically detrimental to proper function of the gauge. The gauge is then capped and bagged to maintain cleanliness. Stainless steel panel-mount clamps are available for flush mounting Swagelok industrial gauges. The panel-mount clamp is easily installed on the gauge. This option is not available on lower mount or S model gauges. Panel-mount clamps on M model gauges must be factory installed and are available as accessories for field installation on B, C, L, and P model gauges.
Certificates of Calibration
This option provides the user with a calibration sheet and a serial-numbered gauge, which has been calibrated with a gauge that is traceable to the national standard of the country of origin. Certificates of calibration are available for all Swagelok gauges.
Panel-Mount Clamp Kits

Gauge Model B model 63 mm ( 1/ in.) size C model 63 mm ( 1/ in.) size B, C, and L models 100 mm (4 in.) size P model 115 mm (4 1/ in.) size Ordering Number PGI-63B-PMC PGI-63C-PMC PGI-100BCL-PMC PGI-P-115-PMC
Material Certifications
This option provides the user with a typical material certification. A typical material certification states that the gauges were manufactured from material purchased and certified as being in accordance with the specifications listed in this catalog. Material certifications are available for B, C, S, M, and L model gauges.
19

Front Flanges Maximum Indicating Pointers
Maximum indicating pointers (MIP), available for S, B, C, L, and P models, identify pressure spikes in a system and are helpful during system startup and troubleshooting. The MIP adds an additional 1 % error to the gauge because of the increased load on the bourdon tube. This option must be factory installed on C model gauges and is available for field installation on S, B, L, and P model gauges.
Polished stainless steel front flanges are available for flush panel mounting of Swagelok industrial gauges. This option is not available on lower mount or P model gauges and must be factory installed on C and M model gauges.
S, B, and L Model Front Flange Kits

Gauge Size 63 mm ( 1/ in.) 100 mm (4 in.) Ordering Number PGI-63SBL-FF PGI-100SBL-FF
Maximum Indicating Pointer Kits

Gauge Model S, B, and L 63 mm ( 1/ in.) size S, B, and L 100 mm (4 in.) size P 115 mm (4 1/ in.) size Ordering Number PGI-63-MIP-SG PGI-100-MIP-SG PGI-P-115-MIP-A
Rear Flanges
Coil Steam Siphons

Siphons protect pressure instruments in live steam service or other high-temperature vapor applications. The vapor condenses inside the coil of the siphon, preventing the hightemperature vapors from reaching the sensing element of the pressure instrument. Siphons are available in carbon and stainless steel.
Coil Steam Siphon Kits

Stainless steel rear flanges are available for mounting on the front of the panel. This option is not available on M, S, and P model gauges. Rear flanges are available factory installed on B, C, and L model gauges and as accessories for field installation.
Material End Connection 1/4 in. NPT Steel 1/ in. NPT Wall Schedule 40 80 80 160 80 160 Ordering Number PGI-4-CSS-S-SC40 PGI-4-CSS-S-SC80 PGI-8-CSS-S-SC80 PGI-8-CSS-S-SC160 PGI-8-CSS-SS-SC80 PGI-8-CSS-SS-SC160
B, C, and L Model Rear Flange Kits

Gauge Size 63 mm ( 1/ in.) 100 mm (4 in.) Ordering Number PGI-63BCL-RF PGI-100BCL-RF Stainless steel
Strap Wrenches
Strap wrenches are used to remove the bayonet ring of the S, B, and L model gauges. Strap wrench ordering number: PGI-SB-CRR
0

Additional items for P model gauges can be ordered for field installation.
Kit Safety glass, 115 mm (4 1/ in.) size Safety glass, 160 mm (6 in.) size Cover ring remover, 115 mm (4 1/ in.) size Liquid-fill kit lower mount (includes membrane and plug) Liquid-fill kit lower-back mount (includes membrane and plug) Mark pointer Ordering Number PGI-P-115-SGLASS PGI-P-160-SGLASS PGI-P-115-CRR PGI-P-FILLKIT-LM PGI-P-FILLKIT-LBM PGI-P-115-MARK-A
Positionable Gauge Adapters
Features
Positionable gauge adapter allows 360 orientation of
pressure gauges.
Inlet connection is 1/ in. male NPT. Available with 1/ in. NPT and ISO parallel gauge
connections.
All 316 stainless steel construction. Optional gauge siphon/snubber helps protect the
instrument from steam and vapor and dampens pressure fluctuations.
Component Connector Gauge nut, coupling Seal washer Siphon tube, damper tube, plug
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316, 316L/A479 316, 316L/A479 Annealed 316 SS 316 SS
Select a gauge adapter ordering number.
Pressure Rating Outlet Connection 1/ in. female NPT 1/ in. male NPT G1/ female ISO (RG) 6000 psig (413 bar) ASN44N6 ASN4N46 ASN44P6 10 000 psig (689 bar) ASN44N10 ASN4N410 ASN44P10 Gauge Adapter Ordering Numbers
To order an optional gauge siphon/snubber, add -SN to the gauge adapter ordering number. Example: ASN44N6-SN
1

Snubber FittingsGauge Protectors
Swagelok snubber fittings protect gauges and instruments from system pressure surges and shocks. Pressure damping (snubbing) is accomplished through the use of a porous sintered 316 stainless steel element. Installing a Swagelok snubber fitting upstream from the gauge reduces the gauges response rate. The response rate generally varies with the initial pressure drop across the porous element of the snubber fitting and allows the gauge to reach line pressure smoothly. Snubber fittings should be used only to protect against pressure shocks, impulses, and surges. Systems requiring control of contaminants should use filters suited to the application. See the Swagelok Filters catalog, MS-01-9.
Typical Installation
Effective Element Area

Fittings with 1/8 in. Male NPT Ends 0.019 in. (1.3 mm) All Other Fittings 0.06 in. (40.0 mm)
Elements
With five basic elements available, snubber fittings can meet the requirements of fluid applications ranging from light gases to liquids with viscosities above 1000 SUS (Saybolt universal seconds) (0 cSt [mm/s]). Element designators are stamped on all fittings for proper identification.
Component Fitting body Ferrules, nut Sleeve Element
Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316 SS/A276 or brass/B453 316 SS/A76 or brass/B453 316 SS/A276 316 SS
Sintered 316 stainless steel element (magnified 133) Press-fit sleeve holds element in place
Average Fluid Flow Estimate L/min 0.05 at 5 psig (1.7 bar) .4 at 5 psig (1.7 bar) 3.3 at 5 psig (1.7 bar) 1.3 at 10 psig (0.68 bar) 0.9 at 10 psig (0.68 bar) Element Designator G

Pressure ratings are based on ASME Code for Process Piping B31.3, at 70F (0C).
Maximum Differential Pressure

Stainless Steel Fittings with 1/8 in. Male NPT Ends 5000 psig (344 bar) All Other Fittings Stated working pressures
Fluid Light gases from 69 to 79 SUS

(13 to 16 cSt [mm/s])
Air-steam from 75 to 119 SUS

(15 to 5 cSt [mm/s])
Water, light oils from 75 to 50 SUS

(15 to 54 cSt [mm/s])
Pressure must be applied only in the direction of the

flow arrow.
Oils from 50 to 1000 SUS

(54 to 0 cSt [mm/s])
Temperature Ratings
L Fitting Material H Brass 316 SS Maximum Operating Temperature F (C) 400 (04) 1000 (538)
Oils of 1000 SUS (0 cSt [mm/s]) and above
Product is tested with air at ambient temperature. Flow estimate

is the average air flow multiplied by a ratio of nominal kinematic viscosities (air/fluid). Not available for ordering number -4-SRA-.
See next page for Ordering Information and Dimensions.


Snubber FittingsGauge Protectors
Select a basic ordering number from the tables below. Example: -4-SA-E Add a body material designator.
Material 316 SS Brass Designator SS B
CA-PH-0214-DIM
LOK Snubber Fittings Adapter MS-01-96
Example: SS-4-SA-E Add an element designator from the table on page 1. Example: SS-4-SA-EG
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only, and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. Adapter
F flat
NPT Male/ Female Pipe Size in. 1/4 1/

A
Basic Ordering Number -4-SA-E -8-SA-E
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.40 (35.6) 1.94 (49.3) F 3/4 1 1/16
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) Brass 00 (151) 400 (165) 316 SS 4400 (303) 4900 (337)
Reducing Adapter
SWAGELOK Snubber Fittings Swagelok Tube Fitting MS-01-96
F flat
Female Pipe Size in. 1/4 1/
NPT CA-PH-0227-DIM
NPT Male Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8
Basic Ordering Number -4-SRA--E -8-SRA-4-E -8-SRA-6-E
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.6 (3.0) 1.76 (44.7) 1.83 (46.5) F 3/4 1 1/16
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) Brass 3300 (7) 00 (151) 400 (165) 316 SS 6600 (454) 4400 (303) 4900 (337)
Maximum differential pressure: 5000 psig (344 bar).
Male NPT to Swagelok Tube Fitting

F flat C
NPT Male Pipe Size in. 1/4
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Dimensions in. (mm) A C 0.70 (17.8) 0.76 (19.3) F 9/16 5/8 G 9/16 11/16
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) Brass 00 (151) 316 SS 4400 (303)
-4-SM-A-400 1.48 (37.6) -4-SM-A-600 1.57 (39.9)
For more information about pressure ratings of Swagelok tube fittings, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107.
G flat A
3
Additional Products
Pressure Regulators
Swagelok offers as full range of pressure regulators: Pressure-reducing models Back-pressure models Gas cylinder changeover model Vaporizing models For more information, see the Swagelok Pressure Regulators catalog, MS-0-30.
Tube Fittings
Swagelok gaugeable tube fittings and adapter fittings are available in sizes from 1/16 to in. and to 50 mm in a wide variety of materials and configurations. For more information, see the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140.
Pressure Gauges For Panel Builders

Swagelok panel builders gauges monitor vacuum and positive system pressures up to 15 000 psi, 1000 bar, or 100 000 kPa and fit industrystandard 9/16 in. (65.0 mm) panel hole cutout. For more information, see the Swagelok Pressure Gauges for Panel BuildersPBG Series catalog, MS-0-333.
Tubing Products
Swagelok offers a wide variety of tubing products. For more information, see these Swagelok catalogs:
Stainless Steel Seamless
Tubing, Fractional Sizes, MS-01-153-SCS

Stainless Steel Welded Tubing, MS-01-161-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Metric Sizes, MS-01-157-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Imperial Sizes, MS-01-159-SCS
Transducers
Swagelok industrial pressure transducers electronically monitor fluid system pressure in a variety of analytical and process applications. For more information, see the Swagelok Industrial Pressure Transducers catalog, MS-0-5.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 00, 003, 004, 006, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI November 008, R9 MS-0-170
www.swagelok.com
Pre s sure Gauge s

Ultra high-Pur it y a nd Cle a n D r y A ir
PGU a nd PGC Se r ie s
40 and 50 mm (1 1/2 and 2 in.) dial sizes Accuracy in accordance with ASME B40.1 316L VAR end connections (PGU series) Center-back and lower mount configurations
Ultrahigh-Purity and Clean Dry Air Pressure Gauges
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Testing and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Materials of Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Dimensions and Dial Ranges PGU Series: Ultrahigh-Purity Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PGC Series: Clean Dry Air Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features
Swagelok offers Bourdon tube pressure gauges to monitor positive system pressure and vacuum. Gauges are available for use in a wide range of applications, from bulk gas distribution to process tool applications.
Materials Ultrahigh-Purity Clean Dry Air (PGU Series) (PGC Series) 316L VAR, 316 SS electropolished 316L SS 304 SS Stainless steel Snap-in acrylic (40 mm [1 1/2 in.] dial) Twist-lock polycarbonate (50 mm [2 in.] dial) Twist-lock polycarbonate (50 mm [2 in.] dial) 316 SS
Technical Data
Dial Ranges
Compound Gauges
Vacuum to 15 psi (1 bar) through vacuum to 200 psi
Component End connection Bourdon tube Case Movement Lens Dial Pointer
(13.6 bar)
Vacuum to 0.1 MPa through vacuum to 1.4 MPa
0 to 15 psi (1 bar) through 0 to 3000 psi (200 bar) 0 to 0.1 MPa through to 21 MPa
Aluminum
Accuracy
50 mm (2 in.) dial size: 2 % / 1 % / 2 % of span
Process Connections
Connection Ultrahigh-Purity (PGU Series) 1/4 in. female VCR face seal fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR face seal fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR face seal fitting 1.5 in. flow-through surface-mount (IGC II-compatible) Clean Dry Air (PGC Series) 4FSF Designator
(ASME B40.1, Grade A, EN 837-1 Class 2.5, JIS B7505 Class 2.5)
40 mm (1 1/2 in.) dial size: 3 % / 2 % / 3 % of span
(ASME B40.1, Grade B, EN 837-1 Class 4, JIS B7505 Class 4)
Ambient: 40 to 140F (40 to 60C) Media: 40 to 212F (40 to 100C)
4FSM
4FFM
Temperature Error
4MSM

Every ultrahigh-purity and clean dry air gauge is 100 % factory calibrated and helium leak tested to a maximum rate of 2 10 9 std cm3/s.
1/4 in. male NPT
4NPT

Ultrahigh-purity gauges are assembled, cleaned, and packaged in a Class 10 work area; gauges are double bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags and meet ASME B40.1, level IV. Clean dry air gauges are assembled, cleaned, and packaged in a Class 100 cleanroom and meet ASME B40.1, level IV.
See the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-24, for more information about VCR tting end connections. See the Swagelok Modular Surface-Mount Components and Seals catalog, MS-02-135, for more information about ow-through surface-mount end connections. NPT end connections comply with ASME B1.20.1.
Dimensions and Dial Ranges

PGU Series: Ultrahigh-Purity Gauges

50 mm (2 in.) Lower Mount Gauges
(10.9)
0.43
1.14

Dial Range, psi (bar) (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Maximum Designator 15 (1) 30 (2) 30 in. Hg
(1 bar)
(29.0)
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0.1 0.2 0.1 MPa 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 0 MPa 1.1 1.4 2.1 4.0 7.0 21 MC01 MC02 MC04 MC07 MC11 MC14 M01 M02 M04 M07 M11 M14 M21 M40 M70 M210
(57.9)
2.28
(50.8)
2.00
PC15 PC30 PC60 PC100 PC160 PC200 P15 P30 P60 P100 P160 P200 P300 P600 P1000 P3000
A
(18.5)
60 (4) 100 (6.8) 160 (11) 200 (13.6) 15 (1) 30 (2)
0.73
End Connection Type Female VCR face seal fitting Rotatable male VCR face seal fitting Integral male VCR face seal fitting Size
in. (mm) 2.32 0 psi

(0 bar)
60 (4) 100 (6.8) 160 (11) 200 (13.6) 300 (20) 600 (40) 1000 (68) 3000 (200)
1/4 in.
(58.9)
(47.8)
1.88
50 mm (2 in.) Center-Back Mount Gauges

Dial Range, psi (bar) (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum
1.14
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0.2 0.4 0.1 MPa 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.2 0 MPa 0.4 0.7 MC02 MC04 MC07 MC11 MC14 M02 M04 M07
Maximum Designator 15 (1) PC15 PC30 PC60 PC100 PC160 PC200 P30 P60 P100 30 (2)
(10.9)
0.43
(29.0)
30 in. Hg
(1 bar)
60 (4) 100 (6.8) 160 (11) 200 (13.6)
(57.9) (14.0)
2.28
(50.8)
2.00
0.55
0 psi
(0 bar)
30 (2) 60 (4) 100 (6.8)
End Connection Type Female VCR face seal fitting Rotatable male VCR face seal fitting Integral male VCR face seal fitting Size
A in. (mm) 2.59
1/4 in.
(65.8)
(56.6)
2.23

PGU Series: Ultrahigh-Purity Gauges

40 mm (1 1/2 in.) Center-Back Mount Gauges
1.07 0.50 1.50
(27.2)
(12.7)
(38.1)
(39.1)
1.54
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
0.55
(14.0)
(46.0)
1.81
End Connection Type Female VCR face seal fitting Rotatable male VCR face seal fitting Flow through surface-mount Size 1/4 in.

in. (mm) 2.57 A Dial Range, psi (bar) (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum 30 in. Hg
(1 bar)
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum 0.1 MPa Maximum Designator 0.2 0.4 0.7 MC02 MC04 MC07
(65.3)
Maximum Designator 30 (2) 60 (4) 100 (6.8) PC30 PC60 PC100
1.5 in.
(73.2)
2.88
PGC Series: Clean Dry Air Gauges

50 mm (2 in.) Center-Back Mount Gauges
(10.9)
0.43
1.14

Pressure Range, psi (bar) (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Maximum Designator 15 (1) 30 (2) 30 in. Hg 60 (4) 100 (6.8) 160 (11) 200 (13.6) 0 psi
(0 bar)
(29.0)
0.55
(57.9)
(14.0)
Pressure Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0.2 0.4 0.1 MPa 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.2 0 MPa 0.4 0.7 MC02 MC04 MC07 MC11 MC14 M02 M04 M07
2.28
(50.8)
2.00
PC15 PC30 PC60 PC100 PC160 PC200 P30 P60 P100
(55.1)
2.17
(1 bar)
30 (2) 60 (4) 100 (6.8)

PGC Series: Clean Dry Air Gauges

50 mm (2 in.) Lower Mount Gauges
(10.9)
0.43
1.14

Dial Range, psi (bar) (primary scale: psi; secondary scale: bar) Minimum Maximum Designator 15 (1) 30 (2) 30 in. Hg
(1 bar)
(29.0)
Dial Range, MPa (primary scale: MPa; no secondary scale) Minimum Maximum Designator 0.1 0.2 0.1 MPa 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 0 MPa 1.1 1.4 2.1 4.0 7.0 21 MC01 MC02 MC04 MC07 MC11 MC14 M01 M02 M04 M07 M11 M14 M21 M40 M70 M210
(49.3)
1.94
(57.9)
2.28
(50.8)
2.00
PC15 PC30 PC60 PC100 PC160 PC200 P15 P30 P60 P100 P160 P200 P300 P600 P1000 P3000
0.55 0.73
60 (4) 100 (6.8) 160 (11) 200 (13.6) 15 (1) 30 (2) 60 (4) 100 (6.8)
(14.0) (18.5)
0 psi
(0 bar)
160 (11) 200 (13.6) 300 (20) 600 (40) 1000 (68) 3000 (200)
Build a gauge ordering number by adding the designators as shown below. List option designators alphabetically.
PGU - 50 - PC100 - L - 4FSF - BF

Series
PGU = Pressure gauge, ultrahigh-purity (PGU series) PGC = Pressure gauge, clean dry air (PGC series)

B = Certificate of calibration E = Mill certificate F = Panel-mount clamp (50 mm [2 in.] dial size only) G = Front flange (50 mm [2 in.] dial size only) M = Alarm contact switch N = Orifice (PGC series only)
Dial Size
40 = 40 mm (1 1/2 in.) dial (PGU series only) 50 = 50 mm (2 in.) dial
Dial Range
See pages 3 and 4 for PGU series. See pages 4 and 5 for PGC series.

PGU Series 4FSF = 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 4FSM = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 4FFM = 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 4MSM = 1.5 in. flow-through surfacemount (40 mm dial size only) PGC Series 4NPT = 1/4 in. male NPT

C = Center-back mount (required for 4MSM fittings) L = Lower mount (50 mm [2 in.] dial size only)

Certificates of Calibration
This option provides the user with a calibration sheet and a serial-numbered gauge, which has been calibrated with a gauge that is traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology.
Alarm Contact Switches

The alarm contact switch option is available for the 50 mm (2 in.) dial size. The factory-assembled switch has one adjustable set point, which can be used for high- or lowpressure indication.
Mill Certificates
These documents certify that the material composition of the wetted components has been tested by representatives independent from the factory.
Specifications
Operating Voltage Residual Ripple No-Load Current Maximum Switching Current Leakage Current Voltage Drop at IMAX Switching Frequency
10 to 30 V (dc) 10 % 10 mA 100 mA 10 A 0.7 V 1000 Hz 25 to 70C (13 to 158F) Normally open (closed and red LED ON when pressure less than set point) NPN Approx 55 % of insert depth IP 67 1 m (3.2 ft)
Panel-Mount Clamps
Factory-installed stainless steel panel-mount clamps are available for ush mounting 50 mm (2 in.) gauges.
0.73
(18.5) (70.9)
Ambient Temperature Output Function Output Type Switch Point Protection Class (DIN 40050) Cable Length
2.79
(66.8)
2.63
Panel mount clamp
Wiring Diagram
BN = (brown) BU = (blue) BK = (black) RL = load + A
Front Flanges
Polished stainless steel front anges are available for ush panel mounting of 50 mm (2 in.) gauges.
0.14 (3.6) dia 2.57 (65.3) dia
(18.5)
0.73
Orifices
Orices are used to restrict ow, reducing the immediate effect of pulsations and pressure spikes. Threaded 316 stainless steel orices (0.032 in. [0.81 mm] inside diameter) are available on PGC series gauges.
(76.2)
3.00
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI February 2006, R3 MS-02-163
www.swagelok.com
Pre s sure Re gulators
Pressure-reducing models Back-pressure models Gas cylinder changeover model Vaporizing models
Pressure Regulators
Swagelok Pressure Regulator Features

Stem Fine-pitch threads enable precise spring adjustment with low torque.
Stop Plate This disc provides positive backup to the diaphragm in case of diaphragm overpressure.
Range Spring Turning the handle compresses the spring, pushing the poppet away from the seat and increasing outlet pressure.
Convoluted Diaphragm The all-metal diaphragm acts as the sensing mechanism between the inlet pressure and the range spring. The convoluted, nonperforated design ensures greater sensitivity and longer life. A piston sensing mechanism (shown below) can accommodate higher pressures. Inlet Gauze Inlet Filter Regulators are susceptible to damage from system particles. Swagelok pressure-reducing regulators include a 5 m filter held in the inlet port by a retaining ring. It can be removed easily for cleaning or to use the regulator in liquid service.
Retaining Ring
Two-Piece Cap The two-piece design provides linear load on the diaphragm seal when the cap ring is tightened, eliminating torque damage to the diaphragm during assembly.
Outlet Poppet Damper The poppet damper keeps the poppet aligned and reduces vibration and resonance.
Filter Filter Ring
Venting Options The self-vent option allows excess outlet pressure to vent through the body cap. This can occur when downstream flow is suddenly reduced or when the handle is adjusted to a lower pressure with little or no flow downstream. The captured-vent option includes a 1/8 in. female NPT connection and stem seal in the body cap to allow monitoring of the diaphragm or piston sensing mechanism. It also allows containment of hazardous gas or liquid media should a diaphragm or piston rupture. Self-vent and captured-vent options can be ordered together so that hazardous gas or liquid media can be contained if vented.
The captured-vent port is in the bottom of the KHR series body.
Piston Sensing Mechanism

Piston sensing mechanisms typically are used to regulate higher pressures than a diaphragm can withstand. They are also more resistant to damage caused by pressure spikes and have a short stroke to maximize cycle life. Fully-Contained Piston The piston is contained by a shoulder in the regulator body cap to prevent piston blowout if the regulator outlet is overpressurized.
Pressure Regulators
Pressure Regulator Operation

Regulators reduce the pressure of a gas or liquid from a source, such as a cylinder or compressor, to a lower value needed by a device, such as an analyzer. A pressure regulator provides better resolution and control when its inlet and control range pressures closely match the pressure requirements of the fluid handling system. Resolution is the number of handle turns needed to adjust a regulator from its lowest to highest outlet pressure setting. Control is the ability of the regulator to hold a given outlet pressure set point.
Pressure-Reducing Regulators
Pressure-reducing regulators control outlet pressure by balancing an adjustable spring force against the forces caused by inlet and outlet pressures. The spring force is adjusted by turning the stem/handle, which sets the desired outlet pressure. As inlet pressure decreases, the force balance changes. To compensate, outlet pressure will increase. This supply-pressure effect (SPE) is a function of the design and type of regulator. If a regulator is subjected to fluctuating inlet pressure, and outlet pressure variations are not desirable, a two-stage regulator is available.
Specialty Pressure-Reducing Regulators

Gas Cylinder Changeover
A two-stage gas cylinder changeover model automatically switches between two sources.
Vaporizing
Vaporization regulators are available with electric and steam heat to vaporize liquid samples or to preheat gas samples.
Pressure Regulator Selection

Maximum Inlet Pressure psig (bar) Compact, MPC Platform Gas Cylinder Changeover Diaphragm Sensing Electrical Vaporizing Steam Vaporizing
Pressure C 0 to .... 500

(34.4)
Piston Sensing
2 Stage
Series KPR KCY KLF KHF KCP KPP KPF KHP KHR
2
(0.13)
10
(0.68)
25
(1.7)
50
(3.4)
100
(6.8)
250
(17.2)
375
(25.8)
750
(51.6)
Pressure
6000
(41)
600
(48)
6000
(41)
10 000
(689)
Speci KCM KSV KEV 600

(48)
Back-P KBP KFB KCB KPB KHB
Equal to pressure control range
Outlet pressures up to 500 psig (4.4 bar) require diaphragm sensing mechanism; outlet pressures above 500 psig (4.4 bar) require piston sensing mechanism.
Pressure Regulators

Back-Pressure Regulators
Back-pressure regulators control inlet pressure by balancing an adjustable spring force against the force of the inlet pressure. The spring force is adjusted by turning the stem/ handle, which sets the desired inlet pressure. When the force caused by the inlet pressure rises above the force of the spring, the regulator opens until the spring force and inlet pressure are balanced again. Every Swagelok regulator is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Cleaning and packaging to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G9 Level E is available for brass and stainless steel Swagelok regulators. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-6, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G9 Level C is available for select KPR, KCY, KCP, KBP, and KCB series regulators.
Swagelok pressure regulators are not Safety Do not use the regulator as a shutoff device. Testing
Accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.

Every Swagelok regulator is pressure tested with nitrogen.
Control Ranges, psig (bar) 10 to 1500

(0.68 to 103)
1000
(68.9)
1500
(103)
2000
(137)
3000
(206)
3600
(248)
4000
(275)
15 to 2500
(1.0 to 172)
25 to 3600
(1.7 to 248)
50 to 100 to 6000 10 000

(3.5 to 413) (6.8 to 689)
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 0.02 0.06 0.10 0.20 0.25 0.50 1.0 Page 6 8 10
e-Reducing Models
1 14 16
18 0
ialty Regulators 4 6 8
Pressure Models 4 6 8 0
Pressure Regulators
Contents
Features, 2 Operation, 3 Selection, 3 Testing, 4 Cleaning and Packaging, 4 Pressure-Reducing High-Pressure (KHP Series), 20 High-Flow (KPF Series), 18 High-Pressure (KHB Series), 32
Specialty Pressure-Reducing Gas Cylinder Changeover (KCM Series), 34
General-Purpose (KPR Series), 6
Two-Stage (KCY Series), 8
High-Pressure Hydraulic (KHR Series), 22
Steam-Heated Vaporizing (KSV Series), 36 Back-Pressure High-Sensitivity (KLF Series), 10 General-Purpose (KBP Series), 24
Electrically Heated Vaporizing (KEV Series), 38
High-Flow, High-Sensitivity (KHF Series), 12
High-Flow, High-Sensitivity (KFB Series), 26
Compact (KCP Series), 14
Compact (KCB Series), 28 Flow Data Pressure-Reducing Regulators, 41 Back-Pressure Regulators, 49
Medium- to High-Pressure (KPP Series), 16
Medium- to High-Pressure (KPB Series), 30
Port Configurations, 52 Options and Accessories, 53 Maintenance Kits, 57
Pressure Regulators
General-Purpose Diaphragm-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KPR Series)

The KPR series is a compact regulator with excellent accuracy, sensitivity, and setpoint pressure stability.
Features
Convoluted, nonperforated diaphragm Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal Low internal volume Two-piece cap design provides linear

0.06 and 0.0 See page 41 for flow graphs. 0.0 and 0.50 also available
Maximum Operating Temperature

176F (80C) with PCTFE seat 9F (00C) with PEEK seat 1F (100C) with PEEK seat and
load on the diaphragm seal

High-flow, dual-gauze type filter
positively retained in inlet port
Technical Data
Maximum Inlet Pressure
600 psig (48 bar) 6000 psig (41 bar) with PEEK seat
maximum inlet pressure greater than 600 psig (48 bar) Weight
.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Pressure Control Ranges

0 to 10 psig (0.68 bar) through
Ports
1/4 in. female NPT inlet, outlet, and
0 to 500 psig (4.4 bar)
gauge ports (all body materials)

1/4 in. tube stub inlet, outlet, and gauge
ports (16 SS body material only)

1/4 in. VCR inlet, outlet, and gauge
Cover Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Seat Knob handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Seat retainer Poppet Poppet spring
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts VCR nuts Nonwetted lubricant Seat retainer Seat Filter, retaining ring Diaphragm Poppet Poppet spring Poppet damper, filter ring Self-vent seal Body Tube stub ports, VCR gland ports Wetted lubricant 316 SS
Brass Alloy CW721R Alloy 400 C-276 Material Nylon with 16 SS insert Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS or zinc-plated steel, depending on configuration 16 SS
16 SS 316 SS
Hydrocarbon-based Alloy 400 Alloy C-276
Inlet
Filter ring, filter, retaining ring Body
Outlet
Poppet damper
PCTFE or PEEK 316 SS Alloy C-22 Alloy X-750 or alloy C-276 Alloy S17400 SS Alloy 400 C-276 Alloy Alloy X-750 C-276 PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM Brass Alloy 316 SS Alloy 400 CW721R C-276 316L SS PTFE-based
Wetted components listed in italics. ot required in all configurations. N Not shown. Regulators with control ranges higher than 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
Dimensions
Female NPT Ports
Panel 0.9 (10.0) thick maximum with lock nuts Panel 0.6 (16.0) thick maximum with 1 lock nut Panel cutout 1.8 (5.0) dia
(76.) (54.0)
Tube Stub Ports

(1.)
0.84
.00
.1 dia
(55.0)
.16 dia
(19.0)
0.75
VCR Ports
(19.0)
0.75
(1.)
0.84
4.61
(117)
Mounting holes 10-, 0. deep

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.00
(17)
(94.0)
.70
Build a KPR series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KPR 1
1 = 16 SS 2 = Brass CW71R 4 = Alloy 400 5 = Alloy C-76 A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned B = Brass, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned C = 16 SS, SC-11cleaned D = Brass, SC-11cleaned C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
Not available with maximum inlet pressure
greater than 600 psig (48 bar). Not available with flow coefficient greater than 0.06.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 Body Material
12 Handle, Mounting
A, B, C, E, F, H, K, L, M, N See Port Configurations, page 52.

8 Ports
5 Pressure Control Range
4 = 1/4 in. female NPT T = 1/4 in. 3 0.05 in. tube stub V = 1/4 in. VCR gland, no nuts X = 1/4 in. rotatable female VCR fitting Y = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting
Available only with 16 SS body material in A
and F port configurations; does not contain a filter. Not available with maximum inlet pressure greater than 600 psig (48 bar). Not available ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned. For use with VCR split-nuts, which can be ordered separately. See the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-4.
2 = Knob 3 = 16 SS antitamper nut 6 = Knob, panel mount 7 = 16 SS antitamper nut, panel mount For knob handle color options, see page 56.
13 Isolation and Relief Valves
0 = No valves For isolation and relief valve options, see page 54.
0 = No connections For CGA cylinder connection options, see page 53.

15 Gauges
F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) J = 500 psig (4.4 bar) L = 1000 psig (68.9 bar) P = 000 psig (06 bar) R = 600 psig (48 bar) T = 451 psig (00 bar) W = 6000 psig (41 bar)

6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
9 Seat Material
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
10 Flow Coefficient (Cv)
0 = No gauges For inlet and outlet gauge options, see page 54.
16 Options
1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06
5 = 0.0 7 = 0.50
11 Sensing Mechanism, Vent
pressure that closely matches system pressure. Available for regulators assembled with CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose only. Not available for regulators assembled with CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose. Available only with 16 SS body material and PEEK seat material. Not available with SC-11 cleaning. Not available for regulators assembled with isolation valves.
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent C = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self vent E = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, captured vent, no self vent F = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self and captured vent H = Alloy C-76 diaphragm, no vent
Available only with 16 SS and brass body
materials and 0.06 and 0.0 Cv.
0 = No options H = Inboard helium leak test to a maximum leak rate of 1 3 105 std cm/s 3 = ft, 1/4 in. FM series metal flexible hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet 4 = ft, 1/4 in. TH series PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet For more information about hoses, see page 56.
Hoses are not available for ASTM G9 Level E
cleaned and SC-11 cleaned regulators.
Select KPR series regulators are available that meet the testing requirements of ASTM G175, Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Ignition Sensitivity and Fault Tolerance of Oxygen Regulators Used for Medical and Emergency Applications. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Pressure Regulators
Two-Stage Diaphragm-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KCY Series)

The KCY series is designed for use in applications requiring constant outlet pressure even with wide variations in inlet pressure. This two-stage regulator is comparable to two single-stage regulators connected in series. The first stage is factory set to reduce the inlet pressure to 500 psig (4.4 bar). The second stage can be adjusted with the handle to achieve the required outlet pressure. This two-stage arrangement minimizes the supply-pressure effect caused by fluctuating inlet pressure, such as with a depleting gas cylinder. As inlet pressure drops below the setting of the first stage, the regulator then functions as a single-stage regulator. The first-stage pressure setting can be reduced while monitoring the pressure at the interstage port, but lower flow may result.
Features
Convoluted, nonperforated diaphragm Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal Excellent set-point stability Supply-pressure effect of
approximately 0.01 %
Technical Data
Maximum Inlet Pressure 600 psig (48 bar) 6000 psig (41 bar) with PEEK seat Pressure Control Ranges 0 to 10 psig (0.68 bar) through 0 to 500 psig (4.4 bar)
Flow Coefficient (Cv ) 0.06 and 0.0 See page 42 for flow graphs. 0.50 also available Maximum Operating Temperature 176F (80C) with PCTFE seat 9F (00C) with PEEK seat 1F (100C) with PEEK seat and maximum inlet pressure greater than 600 psig (48 bar) Weight 4. lb (1.9 kg) Ports 1/4 in. female NPT inlet, outlet, and gauge ports
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Seat Interstage port plug Poppet damper Cover
Component Knob handle, cover Spring buttons Spring stabilizer Range springs Stems, stem nut, cap rings, stop plates, body caps, panel nuts, antitamper nut Nonwetted lubricant Seat retainers, filter, retaining ring Seats Diaphragms, poppet springs Poppets Poppet dampers, filter ring Interstage port plug Self-vent seal Body Wetted lubricant
316 SS
Knob handle Spring button nd stage range spring Body cap Seat retainer Poppet Poppet spring
Brass CW721R Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (1st stage) Zinc-plated steel (nd stage) 01 SS
16 SS (0 to 10 through 0 to 100 psig control ranges) Zinc-plated steel (0 to 50 and 0 to 500 psig control ranges) 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PCTFE or PEEK Alloy X-750 S17400 SS PTFE 316 SS with PTFE tape Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS Brass CW721R PTFE-based
Inlet
Filter ring, filter, retaining ring
Outlet
Body
Antitamper nut
1st stage range spring
Wetted components listed in italics. ot required in all configurations. N Regulators with control range 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) and 0.0 Cv have zinc-plated steel range spring. Not shown. Regulators with control ranges higher than 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
Dimensions
Second-stage panel mounting
(86.5)
First-stage panel mounting .41
(54.0)
.1 dia
(55.0)
.16 dia
8.5 (1) 8.74 () for panel-mount option Panel cutout 1.8 (5.0)
Build a KCY series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KCY 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
1 = 16 SS 2 = Brass CW71R A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned B = Brass, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned C = 16 SS, SC-11cleaned D = Brass, SC-11cleaned
5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
Not available with maximum inlet pressure
greater than 600 psig (48 bar). Not available with flow coefficient greater than 0.06.
4 = 1/4 in. female NPT

9 Seat Material
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0 7 = 0.50
0 = No connections For CGA cylinder connection options, see page 53.

15 Gauges
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, C = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, E = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, vent, no self vent F = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, captured vent
through second stage only.
no vent self vent captured self and
16 Options
P = 000 psig (06 bar) R = 600 psig (48 bar) T = 451 psig (00 bar) W = 6000 psig (41 bar)
Available for regulators assembled with CGA
cylinder connection or inlet hose only.
Available with 0.06 and 0. Cv only. Self vent
12 Handle, Mounting
Not available for regulators assembled with

CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose.
Available only with 16 SS body material and

PEEK seat material. Not available with SC-11 cleaning. Not available for regulators assembled with isolation valves.
Knob Antitamper nut Knob, second-stage panel mount Antitamper nut, second-stage panel mount 9 = Knob, first-stage panel mount For knob handle color options, see page 56.
First stage assembled with antitamper nut.
2 3 6 7
= = = =
0 = No options 3 = ft, 1/4 in. FM series metal flexible hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet 4 = ft, 1/4 in. TH series PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet For more information about hoses, see page 56.
cleaned and SC-11 cleaned regulators.
A, B, C, E, F, H, K, L, M, N See Port Configurations, page 52. Select KCY series regulators are available that meet the testing requirements of ASTM G175, Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Ignition Sensitivity and Fault Tolerance of Oxygen Regulators Used for Medical and Emergency Applications. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
10
Pressure Regulators
High-Sensitivity Diaphragm-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KLF Series)

The KLF series provides high-sensitivity pressure control of gases or liquids with minimum droop in both low-flow and low-pressure applications.
Features
Large-diameter convoluted,
Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar)
nonperforated diaphragm for increased pressure sensitivity

Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal High-flow, dual-gauze type filter

0 to .0 psig (0.1 bar) through
0 to 50 psig (17. bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv )

0.0 and 0.06 See page 43 for flow graphs. 0.0 and 0.50 also available

176F (80C) with PCTFE seat 9F (00C) with PEEK seat
Weight
4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
Ports
gauge ports
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Seat retainer Seat Poppet Poppet spring Knob handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Cover
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring Seat Diaphragm, poppet spring Poppet Poppet damper, filter ring Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS or zinc-plated steel, depending on configuration 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PCTFE or PEEK Alloy X-750 S17400 SS PTFE PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet damper Body
Wetted components listed in italics. ot required in all configurations. N ot shown. N Regulators with control range 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
11
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(80.0)
.15 dia
(19.0)
0.75
(19.0)
0.75

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
4.76
(11)
5.08
(19)
Build a KLF series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KLF 1
4 Body Material
B C
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = 16 SS A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned

5 Pressure Control Range B = 0 to .0 psig (0 to 0.1 bar) C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar)
Available with 15 psig (1.0 bar) maximum inlet
pressure only.

8 Ports

9 Seat Material
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
0 = No connection For CGA cylinder connection options, see page 53.

15 Gauges
6 Maximum Inlet Pressure C = 15 psig (1.0 bar) F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) J = 500 psig (4.4 bar) L = 1000 psig (68.9 bar) P = 000 psig (06 bar) R = 600 psig (48 bar)
For better resolution and control, select a Available with 0 to .0 psig (0 to 0.1 bar)
1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0 7 = 0.50
16 Options
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent E = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, captured vent, no self vent
12 Handle, Mounting
pressure control range only. Available for regulators assembled with CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose only. Not available for regulators assembled with CGA cylinder connection or inlet hose.
Hoses are not available for ASTM G9 Level Ecleaned regulators.
1
Pressure Regulators
High-Flow, High-Sensitivity Diaphragm-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KHF Series)

The KHF series combines the high-flow capabilities1.0 Cv of a bulk distribution regulator with the high sensitivity and accuracy of a point-of-use regulator.
Features
Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar)

Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal Balanced poppet for supply-pressure

effect of approximately 0. %

High-flow dual-gauze type filter

1.0
See page 44 for flow graphs. Maximum Operating Temperature

Weight
4.4 lb (.0 kg)
Ports
1/ in. female NPT inlet and outlet;
1/4 in. female NPT gauge port
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Poppet Poppet spring Knob handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Seat retainer Seat Spring retainer Cover
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, spring retainer, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring, poppet seal retainer Seat Diaphragm Poppet Poppet spring Poppet seal, filter ring Poppet seal spring Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 50 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS 16 SS (0 to 10 and 0 to 5 psig control ranges) Zinc-plated steel (0 to 50 through 0 to 50 psig control ranges) 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PCTFE or PEEK Alloy X-750 S17400 SS 302 SS PTFE Elgiloy PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet seal retainer Poppet seal and spring
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with 0 to50 psig (0 to 17. bar) control range. ot shown. N Regulators with control range 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
1
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(80.0)
.15 dia
(19.0)
0.75
(4.5)
0.96

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.00
(17)
5.9
(17)
Build a KHF series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KHF 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports

5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) 6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
8 = 1/ in. female NPT inlet and outlet; 1/4 in. female NPT gauge port
9 Seat Material
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
8 = 1.0
F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) J = 500 psig (4.4 bar) L = 1000 psig (68.9 bar) R = 600 psig (48 bar)
12 Handle, Mounting
16 Options
0 = No options
14
Pressure Regulators
Compact, Piston-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KCP Series)

The KCP series is a compact, piston-sensing pressure regulator with a short stroke to minimize wear in high-cycling applications.
Features
Low internal volume Fully contained piston High-flow, dual-gauze type filter
Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar)


ANSI/ISA 76.00.0-compliant
0 to 1500 psig (10 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv)

0.06 and 0.0
modular platform component (MPC) configuration available; MPC platform regulator does not contain a filter
See page 45 for flow graphs.

0.0 and 0.50 also available

Weight
1.0 lb (0.45 kg)
Ports
gauge ports
MPC platform
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Thumbwheel handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Piston seal Piston Seat Seat retainer Poppet
Component Thumbwheel handle Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, piston, filter, retaining ring Piston seal Seat Poppet Poppet spring Filter ring Wetted lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics. Not shown. MPC platform regulator does not contain a filter.
Material Anodized aluminum Nylon with 16 SS insert Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS or zinc-plated steel, depending on configuration 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS Fluorocarbon FKM or Kalrez PCTFE or PEEK S17400 SS 302 SS PTFE PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet spring Body
Pressure Regulators
15
Dimensions
Panel 0.50 (1.7) thick maximum between two nuts Panel cutout 1.8 (5.0) dia
(46.0)
1.81 dia
(7.8)
1.49 dia
(.0)
1.6 dia
0.8
(9.5)
(1.4)
1.4
.64
(7.0)

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(84.0)
.1
Build a KCP series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KCP 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 Handle, Mounting
1 = 16 SS A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned C = 16 SS, SC-11cleaned
A, B, C, E, F, H, K, L, M, N, 5, 6 See Port Configurations, page 52.

8 Ports
C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) M = 0 to 1500 psig (0 to 10 bar)
Not available with MPC platform port
configuration.
2 = 1/8 in. female NPT M = MPC platform

9 Seat, Seal Material
1 = Thumbwheel 2 = Knob 3 = 16 SS antitamper nut 5 = Thumbwheel, panel mount 6 = Knob, panel mount 7 = 16 SS antitamper nut, panel mount For knob handle color options, see page 56.
13 Isolation Valves
A B C D
= = = =
PCTFE, fluorocarbon FKM PCTFE, Kalrez PEEK, fluorocarbon FKM PEEK, Kalrez
0 = No valves For isolation valve options, see page 54.

pressure that closely matches system pressure. Not available with MPC platform port configuration.
1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0 7 = 0.50
0 = No connections
15 Gauges

configuration.
16 Options
P = 16 SS piston
0 = No options
16
Pressure Regulators
Medium- to High-Pressure Piston-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KPP Series)

The KPP series meets the demands of a wide range of gas or liquid applications in a lightweight, compact installation footprint. These features make the KPP pressure regulator an ideal pressure control solution within high-density OEM equipment.
Features
Lightweight, compact design Live-loaded body seals Low internal volume High-flow, dual-gauze type filter
Technical Data
6000 psig (41 bar)


0.0 and 0.06

9F (00C) with 000 psig
(17 bar) maximum inlet pressure

1F (100C) with maximum inlet
pressure greater than 000 psig (17 bar) Weight

.5 lb (1. kg)
Ports
gauge ports
Cover Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Range spring Body cap Piston Seat retainer Poppet Poppet spring
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring, piston, piston guide Seat, piston seal retainer Poppet Poppet spring Piston seal spring, body seal spring Poppet damper, filter ring, piston seal, body seal Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 000 and 0 to 600 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS Zinc-plated steel 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PEEK S17400 SS Alloy X-750 Elgiloy PTFE PTFE-based
Knob handle Spring button
Piston seal and spring Piston seal retainer Cap ring Piston guide Body seal and spring Seat
Inlet
Filter, ring filter, retaining ring
Outlet
Poppet damper Body
Wetted components listed in italics. 16 SS in regulators with 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) control range with 6000 psig (41 bar) inlet pressure and regulators with 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) control range, 4000 psig (75 bar) inlet pressure, and 0.06 Cv . Not included in regulators with 16 SS spring button. Not shown.
Pressure Regulators
17
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(55.0)
.16 dia
(19.0)
0.75
5.00
(17)
(19.0)
0.75

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.00
(17)
Build a KPP series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KPP 1
4 Body Material
L W A
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 Handle, Mounting


8 Ports
L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) M = 0 to 1500 psig (0 to 10 bar) N = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) P = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 06 bar) R = 0 to 600 psig (0 to 48 bar)
Not available with 000 psig (17 bar)
maximum inlet pressure.

13 Isolation Valves
= PEEK, PTFE

1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06
N = 000 psig (17 bar) S = 4000 psig (75 bar) W = 6000 psig (41 bar)
0 = No connections
P = 16 SS piston, no vent V = 16 SS piston, captured vent, no self vent
15 Gauges
16 Options
0 = No options
18
Pressure Regulators
High-Flow Piston-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KPF Series)

The KPF series provides minimum droop across the flow range with high accuracy of outlet pressure.
Features
High flow coefficient (Cv = 1.0) Balanced poppet for minimal supply-
Technical Data
6000 psig (41 bar)
pressure effect


1.0

Weight
4.5 lb (.1 kg)
Ports
1/4 in. female NPT gauge ports
Cover Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Range spring Piston Piston guide Body seal Seat retainer Seat Knob handle Spring button Piston seal and spring Piston seal retainer Body cap Cap ring Spring retainer Poppet
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, spring retainer, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring, piston, piston guide, poppet seal retainer Seat, piston seal retainer Poppet Poppet spring Filter ring, piston seal, poppet seal Piston seal spring, poppet seal spring Body seal Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 000 and 0 to 4000 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS Zinc-plated steel 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based
316 SS
PCTFE or PEEK S17400 SS 302 SS PTFE Elgiloy Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet spring Poppet seal retainer Poppet seal and spring
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with 16 SS spring button. Not shown.
Pressure Regulators
19
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(80.0)
.15 dia
(19.0)
0.75
5.9
(17)
0.96
(4.5)

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.9
(17)
Build a KPF series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KPF 1
4 Body Material
L W A
8 Ports
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
13 Isolation Valves

8 = 1/ in. female NPT inlet and outlet; 1/4 in. female NPT gauge ports
9 Seat, Body Seal Material A = PCTFE, fluorocarbon FKM C = PEEK, fluorocarbon FKM 10 Flow Coefficient (Cv)

L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) N = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) P = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 06 bar) S = 0 to 4000 psig (0 to 75 bar)
6 Maximum Inlet Pressure W = 6000 psig (41 bar) 7 Port Configuration
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
8 = 1.0
16 Options
P = 16 SS piston, no vent V = 16 SS piston, captured vent, no self vent

12 Handle, Mounting
0 = No options
0
Pressure Regulators
High-Pressure Piston-Sensing, Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KHP Series)

The KHP series provides control of supply pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar). The self-venting capability enables downstream pressure reduction in closed-loop systems.
Features
Thrust roller bearing eases operation Panel-mounting configuration
Technical Data
10 000 psig (689 bar)
available

100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv)

0.06 and 0.5
See page 46 and 47 for flow graphs. Maximum Operating Temperature

1F (100C)
Weight
5.7 lb (.6 kg)
Ports
gauge ports
Knob handle retainer Knob handle Vent screw spring Upper spring button set screw Range spring Body cap Piston seal Lower spring button Piston guide Self-vent seat Body seal Poppet Poppet spring Cover Vent screw Thrust roller bearing Upper spring button Stem Stem nuts Vent rod Piston Piston seal backup ring Self-vent poppet Self-vent poppet spring Self-vent seat retainer Seat retainer Seat
Component Knob handle, cover Spring buttons, upper spring button set screw, knob handle retainer, vent screw, stem nuts, body cap Vent screw spring Vent rod Stem Thrust roller bearing Range spring Piston seal backup ring Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring, piston, piston guide, self-vent seat retainer Seat, self-vent seat Poppet, self-vent poppet Poppet spring Poppet damper, filter ring Self-vent poppet spring Body seal, piston seal Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert
16 SS
0 SS 41 SS CZ114 bronze Hardened carbon steel Chrome vanadium steel PTFE Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PEEK S17400 SS Alloy X-750 PTFE 302 SS Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet damper Body
Pressure Regulators
1
Dimensions
Panel-mount assembly shown
Clearance hole dia 0.1 (8.0)
Panel cutout minimum dia .5 (57.)
(19.0)
0.75
(81.0)
.19
(56.0)
.0 dia
.8
(7.0)
dia

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(4.5)
0.96
.94 to 5.0
(100 to 1)
7.6
(187)
allowable
Build a KHP series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KHP 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 Handle, Mounting


8 Ports
J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) K = 0 to 750 psig (0 to 51.6 bar) T = 10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 10 bar) U = 15 to 500 psig (1.0 to 17 bar) V = 5 to 600 psig (1.7 to 48 bar) W = 50 to 6000 psig (.4 to 41 bar) X = 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
isolation valves.
2 = Knob 6 = Knob, panel mount For knob handle color options, see page 56.
13 Isolation Valves

C = PEEK, fluorocarbon FKM


2 = 0.06 6 = 0.5
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
X = 10 000 psig (689 bar)
P = 16 SS piston, no vent S = 16 SS piston, self vent
16 Options
0 = No options

Pressure Regulators
High-Pressure Piston-Sensing, Hydraulic Pressure-Reducing Regulators (KHR Series)

The KHR series provides control of pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) for both liquid and gas applications. Metal or polymer seats are available.
Features
Self-venting Captured vent port in bottom of body Panel-mounting configuration available Thrust roller bearing eases operation High-flow, dual-gauze type filter
Technical Data
10 000 psig (689 bar)

100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv)

0.06

0.5 also available

1F (100C)
Weight
6.1 lb (.75 kg)
Ports
1/4 in. female NPT inlet, outlet, vent,
and gauge ports
Knob handle retainer Knob handle Vent screw spring Upper spring button set screw Range spring Body cap Lower spring button Vent rod nut Piston seals Piston guide Self-vent seat Body seals Poppet Poppet spring Cover Vent screw Thrust roller bearing Upper spring button Stem Stem nuts Vent rod Piston Piston seal backup ring Self-vent poppet Self-vent poppet spring Self-vent seat retainer Seat retainer Seat
Component Knob handle, cover Spring buttons, upper spring button set screw, knob handle retainer, vent screw, stem nuts, vent rod nut, body cap Vent screw spring Vent rod Stem Thrust roller bearing Range spring Piston seal backup ring Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, filter, retaining ring, piston, piston guide, self-vent seat retainer Self-vent seat Seat Poppet, self-vent poppet Poppet spring Poppet damper, filter ring Self-vent poppet spring Body seals, piston seals Wetted lubricant
16 SS
0 SS 41 SS CZ114 bronze Hardened carbon steel Chrome vanadium steel PEEK Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PEEK PEEK or 316 SS S17400 SS Alloy X-750 PTFE 302 SS Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Poppet damper
Captured vent port (shown off center for clarity)
Pressure Regulators

Dimensions
(19.0)
0.75
VENT
(81.0)
.19
(56.0)
.0 dia
(7.0)
.8 dia

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(4.5)
0.96
4.41 to 5.67
(11 to 144)
7.8
(199)
allowable
Build a KHR series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KHR 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12 Handle, Mounting

A, B, C, F, M See Port Configurations, page 52.

8 Ports
J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) K = 0 to 750 psig (0 to 51.6 bar) T = 10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 10 bar) U = 15 to 500 psig (1.0 to 17 bar) V = 5 to 600 psig (1.7 to 48 bar) W = 50 to 6000 psig (.4 to 41 bar) X = 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
isolation valves.
13 Isolation Valves

C = PEEK, fluorocarbon FKM J = 16 SS, fluorocarbon FKM

Not suitable for gas service.

0 = No connections
2 = 0.06 6 = 0.5
15 Gauges
X = 10 000 psig (689 bar)
U = 16 SS piston, self and captured vent
16 Options
0 = No options
4
Pressure Regulators
General-Purpose Diaphragm-Sensing Back-Pressure Regulators (KBP Series)

The KBP series is a high-sensitivity, general-purpose regulator designed to control back-pressure levels in analytical or process systems upstream of the regulator. The convoluted diaphragm provides excellent sensitivity and set-point repeatability. The metal-to-metal diaphragm seal minimizes the potential for leakage.
Features
Convoluted, nonperforated

0.0
diaphragm
Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal Low internal volume Two-piece cap design provides linear

176F (80C) with PCTFE retainer seal 9F (00C) with PEEK retainer seal
load on the seal
Weight
.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Technical Data
Ports

gauge ports (all body materials)

1/4 in. tube stub inlet, outlet, and gauge
0 to 500 psig (4.4 bar)

1/4 in. VCR inlet, outlet, and gauge
Cover Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Knob handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Seat Seat retainer Retainer seal
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts VCR nuts Nonwetted lubricant Seat retainer Retainer seal Seat Diaphragm Body Tube stub ports, VCR gland ports Wetted lubricant
316 SS
Brass CW721R Material
Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 500 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS 16 SS (0 to 10 through 0 to 50 psig control ranges) Zinc-plated steel (0 to 100 through 0 to 500 psig control ranges) 16 SS 16 SS 316 SS PCTFE or PEEK Fluorocarbon FKM or Kalrez Alloy X-750 316 SS 316L SS PTFE-based Brass CW721R
Hydrocarbon-based
Inlet
Body
Outlet
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with 0 to 500 psig (0 to4.4 bar) control range. Not shown. Regulators with control ranges higher than 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Pressure Regulators
5
Dimensions
(76.) (54.0)
Tube Stub Ports

(1.)
0.84
.00
.1 dia
(55.0)
.16 dia
(19.0)
0.75
VCR Ports
(19.0)
0.75 Mounting holes 10-, 0. deep

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(1.)
0.84
4.61
(117)
5.00
(17)
(94.0)
.70
Build a KBP series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KBP 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
12 Handle, Mounting
1 = 16 SS 2 = Brass CW71R A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned B = Brass, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned C = 16 SS, SC-11cleaned D = Brass, SC-11cleaned
4 = 1/4 in. female NPT T = 1/4 in. 3 0.05 in. tube stub V = 1/4 in. VCR gland, no nuts X = 1/4 in. rotatable female VCR fitting Y = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting
Available only with 16 SS body material in A
port configuration. Not available ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned. For use with VCR split-nuts, which can be ordered separately. See the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-4.
13 Valves
C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
0 = No valves
0 = No connections
15 Gauges

A B C D
= = = =
Fluorocarbon FKM, PCTFE Kalrez, PCTFE Fluorocarbon FKM, PEEK Kalrez, PEEK
0 = No gauges For inlet gauge options, see page 54.

16 Options
5 = 0.0
0 = No options
A, D, G, V See Port Configurations, page 52.
6
Pressure Regulators
High-Flow, High-Sensitivity Diaphragm-Sensing Back-Pressure Regulators (KFB Series)

The KFB series regulator is designed to maintain back-pressure control in high-flow applications with a Cv of 1.0.
Features
Technical Data

Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal


1.0

176F (80C) with PCTFE retainer seal 9F (00C) with PEEK retainer seal
Weight
4.4 lb (.0 kg)
Ports
1/4 in. female NPT gauge port
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Knob handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Seat Seat retainer Retainer seal Cover
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer Retainer seal Seat Diaphragm Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 50 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS 16 SS (0 to 10 and 0 to 5 psig control ranges) Zinc-plated steel (0 to 50 through 0 to 50 psig control ranges) 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PCTFE or PEEK Fluorocarbon FKM Alloy X-750 PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with 0 to50 psig (0 to 17. bar) control range. N ot shown. Regulators with control range 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Body
Pressure Regulators
7
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(80.0)
.15 dia
(19.0)
0.75
5.00
(17)
(4.5)
0.96

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.9
(17)
Build a KFB series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KFB 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
12 Handle, Mounting

5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) 6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
8 = 1/ in. female NPT inlet and outlet; 1/4 in. female NPT gauge port
9 Seat, Seal Material A = Fluorocarbon FKM, PCTFE C = Fluorocarbon FKM, PEEK 10 Flow Coefficient (Cv)
13 Valves
8 = 1.0
0 = No valves

0 = No connections
15 Gauges

16 Options
0 = No options
8
Pressure Regulators
Compact Piston-Sensing Back-Pressure Regulators (KCB Series)

The KCB series provides high sensitivity back-pressure control of sampling conditioning systems. It is ideally suited for use in portable or laboratory analytical systems as well as being embedded in the instrument bays of OEM equipment or sampling cabinets.
Features
Low internal volume Fully contained piston Excellent flow characteristics with
Technical Data

a Cv of 0.0
ANSI/ISA 76.00.0-compliant
0 to 75 psig (5.8 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv )

0.0
modular platform component (MPC) configuration available

0.10 also available with MPC platform

176F (80C) with PCTFE retainer
seal
9F (00C) with PEEK retainer seal
Weight
1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
Ports
1/8 in. female NPT inlet and outlet(s) MPC platform
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Thumbwheel handle Spring button Range spring Body cap Seat Piston seal Piston Seat retainer Retainer seal
Component Thumbwheel handle Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, piston Seat, piston seal Retainer seal Wetted lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics. Not shown.
Material Anodized aluminum Nylon with 16 SS insert Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS (0 to 10 through 0 to 50 and 0 to 75 psig control ranges) Zinc-plated steel (all other control ranges) 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS Fluorocarbon FKM or Kalrez PCTFE or PEEK PTFE-based
Inlet
Body
Outlet
Pressure Regulators
9
Dimensions
Panel 0.50 (1.7) thick maximum between two nuts Panel cutout 1.8 (5.0) dia
(46.0)
1.81 dia
(7.8)
1.49 dia
(.0)
1.6 dia
0.8
(9.5)
(1.4)
1.4
.64
(7.0)

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(84.0)
.1
Build a KCB series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KCB 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
13 Valves
1 = 16 SS A = 16 SS, ASTM G9 Level E-cleaned C = 16 SS, SC-11cleaned
2 = 1/8 in. female NPT M = MPC platform

9 Seat, Retainer Seal Material
0 = No valves
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) H = 0 to 75 psig (0 to 5.8 bar)
A B C D
= = = =
Fluorocarbon FKM, PCTFE Kalrez, PCTFE Fluorocarbon FKM, PEEK Kalrez, PEEK

16 Options
4 = 0.10 (MPC platform only) 5 = 0.0 (1/8 in. female NPT ports only)
0 = No options

P = 16 SS piston
12 Handle, Mounting
A, D, G, V, 7, 8 See Port Configurations, page 52.
1 = Thumbwheel 2 = Knob 3 = 16 SS antitamper nut 5 = Thumbwheel, panel mount 6 = Knob, panel mount 7 = 16 SS antitamper nut, panel mount For knob handle color options, see page 56.
Not available with 0 to 75 psig (0 to 5.8 bar)
pressure control range.
0
Pressure Regulators
Medium- to High-Pressure Piston-Sensing Back-Pressure Regulators (KPB Series)

The KPB series provides back-pressure control in gas or liquid applications. This compact and lightweight regulator provides an ideal pressure-control solution within high-density compact OEM equipment, as well as other applications.
Features
Integral high-pressure overrange
Technical Data
protection
Lightweight, compact design

0 to 4000 psig (75 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv )

0.06 and 0.

Weight
.5 lb (1. kg)
Ports
gauge ports
Stem nut Stem Spring stabilizer Range spring Body cap Poppet spring Piston Piston guide Poppet Seat retainer Seat retainer seal Knob handle Spring button Poppet retainer Piston seal and spring Piston seal retainer Cap ring Body seal and spring Seat Seat support Cover
Component Knob handle, cover Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Stem, stem nut, cap ring, body cap, panel nuts Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, seat support, poppet retainer, piston, piston guide Seat, seat retainer seal Piston seal retainer Poppet Poppet spring Piston seal, body seal Piston seal spring, body seal spring Wetted lubricant
Material Nylon with 16 SS insert 16 SS (0 to 500 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 01 SS 16 SS (0 to 000 and 0 to 4000 psig range) Zinc-plated steel (all other ranges) 16 SS Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS
PCTFE or PEEK PEEK S17400 SS 302 SS PTFE Elgiloy PTFE-based
Inlet
Outlet
Body
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with 0 to 000 psig (0 to 06 bar) and 0 to 4000 psig (0 to 75 bar) control ranges. Not shown.
Pressure Regulators
1
Dimensions
(54.0)
.1 dia
(55.0)
.16 dia
(19.0)
0.75
(19.0)
0.75
5.00
(17)

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
5.00
(17)
Build a KPB series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KPB 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
13 Valves


0 = No valves
L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) N = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) P = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 06 bar) S = 0 to 4000 psig (0 to 75 bar)
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0

16 Options

P = 16 SS piston
12 Handle, Mounting
0 = No options

Pressure Regulators
High-Pressure Piston-Sensing Back-Pressure Regulators (KHB Series)

The KHB series provides control of back pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) with high sensitivity across the control range.
Features
Thrust roller bearing eases operation Panel-mounting configuration
Technical Data
available

100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv )

0.06 and 0.5

1F (100C)
Weight
5.7 lb (.6 kg)
Ports
gauge ports
Knob handle retainer Knob handle Cover Thrust roller bearing Upper spring button Stem Stem nuts Piston Piston seal backup ring Poppet retainer seal Poppet retainer Seat retainer Seat Seat support
Component Knob handle, cover Spring buttons, upper spring button set screw, knob handle retainer, stem nuts, body cap Stem Thrust roller bearing Range spring Piston seal backup ring Nonwetted lubricant Body, poppet retainer, seat retainer, seat support, piston, piston guide Seat Poppet retainer seal Poppet Poppet spring Piston seal, body seal, seat support seal Wetted lubricant
16 SS
CZ114 bronze Hardened carbon steel Chrome vanadium steel PEEK Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PEEK or 316 SS PEEK S17400 SS 302 SS Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
Upper spring button set screw Range spring Body cap Piston seal Lower spring button Piston guide Poppet spring Body seal Poppet Seat support seal
Inlet
Outlet
Body
Pressure Regulators

Dimensions
(19.0)
0.75
(81.0)
.19
(56.0)
.0 dia
.8
(7.0)
dia

(M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
(4.5)
0.96
.94 to 5.0
(100 to 1)
7.6
(187)
allowable
Build a KHB series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KHB 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
13 Valves


9 Seat, Piston/Body/Seat Support
0 = No valves
J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4. bar) K = 0 to 750 psig (0 to 51.6 bar) T = 10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 10 bar) U = 15 to 500 psig (1.0 to 17 bar) V = 5 to 600 psig (1.7 to 48 bar) W = 50 to 6000 psig (.4 to 41 bar) X = 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
Seal Material C = PEEK, fluorocarbon FKM J = 16 SS, fluorocarbon FKM

Not suitable for gas service.
0 = No connections
15 Gauges

16 Options
2 = 0.06 6 = 0.5
0 = No options

P = 16 SS piston
12 Handle, Mounting
4
Pressure Regulators
Gas Cylinder Changeover Regulator (KCM Series)

The KCM series is a two-stage gas delivery system that ensures continuous flow of gases in critical applications. When one supply drops below the changeover pressure, the selector regulator automatically switches the gas feed from the depleted supply to an alternate supply. The automatic operation of the KCM series eliminates costly system downtime and maintenance expense of continuously monitoring the gas supply.
Features

diaphragm for strength and improved pressure response

Metal-to-metal diaphragm seals on
0 to 500 psig (4.4 bar) Nominal Changeover Pressures

100, 50, and 500 psig
all stages
Supply-pressure effect of
(6.8, 17., and 4.4 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv )

0.06
approximately 0.01 %
Bracket mount

Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar) 000 psig (06 bar) with hose and
Weight
7.5 lb (. kg)
cylinder connection option
Ports
gauge ports
Shown with Swagelok tube fittings, not included.
Operation
The KCM series can be ordered to switch from one supply to another at one of three different inlet pressures100, 50, and 500 psig (6.8, 17., and 4.4 bar) called changeover pressures.
Line regulator
To system
The KCM series gas changeover uses Swagelok KPR series pressure-reducing regulators. For more information, see General-Purpose Diaphragm Sensing, PressureReducing Regulators (KPR Series), page 6.
Selector regulator Supply 1 Supply
The table below lists additional components not shown in the KPR series section.
Component Interstage fitting Line-regulator mounting block Line-regulators mounting screws, mounting bracket Material 316 SS with PTFE tape Aluminum 16 SS
The selector regulator (first stage) is factory-set to reduce the supply pressure to the nominal changeover pressure ordered. The line regulator (second stage) can be adjusted with the handle to achieve the required system pressure. This two-stage arrangement minimizes the supply-pressure effect caused by depleting gas supplies (cylinders, tank farm, etc.). When one supply drops below the changeover pressure, the selector regulator automatically switches the gas feed from the depleted supply to an alternate supply. If both supplies drop below the changeover pressure, the assembly functions as a single-stage regulator, depleting both supplies at the same time. See the Approximate Supply Depletion Pressures table at right for pressures at which this occurs. The Swagelok KCA series continuous gas delivery system is a panel-mounted gas changeover assembly that can be configured for many applications. For more information, see the Swagelok KCA Series Continuous Gas Delivery System catalog, MS-18-01.
Approximate Supply Depletion Pressures

Nominal Changeover Pressure psig (bar) 100 (6.8) 50 (17.) 500 (4.4) Supply 1 Depletion Pressure psig (bar) 150 (10.) 00 (0.6) 500 (4.4) Supply 2 Depletion Pressure psig (bar) 90 (6.) 0 (15.8) 450 (1.0)
Supply can deplete below some of the available pressure control range limits. Setting the line regulator near the nominal changeover pressure will cause flow to the system to decrease or stop as the supply nears depletion.
Pressure Regulators
5
Dimensions
mounting holes, 0.50 (1.7) dia Outlet 9.65

(45)
Outlet
6.0
(160)
5.00
(17)
(40.0)
1.57
(6.0)
.48
Inlet 8.46
(15)
(76.0)
.99 7.68
(195)
Inlet
Build a KCM series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KCM 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports


9 Seat Material
Not available with 100 psig (6.8 bar)
changeover pressure. Only available with 500 psig (4.4 bar) changeover pressure.
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
0 = No connections Cylinder connections available only with hose option. For CGA cylinder connection options, see page 53.
15 Gauge Scale
= 0.06
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent C = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self vent

Self vent through line regulator only.
1 = psig (bar) (North America only) 2 = bar (psig) 3 = psig (bar) 4 = MPa 5 = psig (kPa) For more information, see page 54.
16 Options
6 Nominal Changeover Pressure
12 Line Regulator Handle
F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) G = 50 psig (17. bar) J = 500 psig (4.4 bar)
Inlet pressure must exceed changeover pressure for automatic switching to occur.
D = Knob E = 16 SS antitamper nut Selector regulator has knob handle. For knob handle color options, see page 56.
7 Port Configuration B, C, L
See Port Configurations, below.
cleaned regulators.
Port Configurations
Configuration
I Go/R Go/R
Designator
I I Go/R R
Configuration
Go Go/R Go/R II I
Designator
Go/R R I Go I
Configuration
R Go I
Designator
Go = Outlet gauge. Go/R = Outlet gauge or relief valve. R = Relief valve. I = Isolation valve.
Inlet from selector regulator
6
Pressure Regulators
Steam-Heated Vaporizing, Diaphragm-Sensing Pressure-Reducing Regulator (KSV Series)

The KSV series is a steam-heated vaporizing regulator with a low internal volume. It can be used to vaporize liquid samples or to preheat gas samples to prevent them from condensing.
Features
Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar)
diaphragm
Metal-to-metal diaphragm seal Low internal volume
Outlet Pressure Ranges

0 to 500 psig (4.4 bar) Flow Coefficient (Cv)

0.06 or 0.0
Maximum Steam Pressure and Temperature

650 psig (44.7 bar) and 500F (60C)
Maximum Regulator Operating Temperature

9F (00C)
Weight
. lb (1.5 kg)
Ports
1/8 in. female NPT inlet; 1/4 in.
female NPT outlet(s)

Steam tube 1/ in. outside diameter,
0.049 in. wall
Antitamper nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Seat
Body cap Spring button Range spring Seat retainer Poppet Poppet spring
Component Antitamper nut, stem, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, panel nuts Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, steam tube Seat Diaphragm, poppet spring Poppet Wetted lubricant
Material 16 SS Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS or zinc-plated steel, depending on configuration Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS PEEK Alloy X-750 S17400 SS PTFE-based
Outlet
Body
Wetted components listed in italics. ot shown. N ot required in all configurations. N Regulators with control ranges higher than 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Steam tube
Inlet
Pressure Regulators
7
Dimensions
(5.4)
1.00
(44.5)
1.75
(19.0)
0.75
9.0
(9)
(55.0)
.17 dia
5.0
(1)
(19.0)
0.75
Mounting holes 10-, 0. deep (M5 3 0.8, 8.5 deep)
0.50 dia
(1.7)
Build a KSV series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KSV 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 Ports
12 Handle, Mounting

5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) 6 Maximum Inlet Pressure
= 1/8 in. female NPT inlet; 1/4 in. female NPT outlet(s)
9 Seat Material
3 = Antitamper nut 7 = Antitamper nut, panel mount

13 Valves
= PEEK
0 = No valves
2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
0 = No gauges
16 Options
0 = No options
Port Configurations
Configuration
Inlet in bottom of body
Designator
Configuration
Inlet in bottom of body
Designator
Steam tubes
Steam tubes
8
Pressure Regulators
Electrically Heated Vaporizing Pressure-Reducing Regulator (KEV Series)

The KEV series is an electrically heated vaporizing regulator with a low internal volume. It can be used to vaporize liquid samples or to preheat gas samples to prevent them from condensing. It features a heating element that is in direct contact with the process fluid for maximum thermal efficiency and is removable for easy cleaning. The KEV regulator has an integral temperature controller and is rated for use in hazardous areas, as identified below.
Features
Technical Data
600 psig (48 bar)
Electrical
Supply10 and 40 V (ac) ( 10 %),
diaphragm for control ranges up to 500 psig (4.4 bar)

Stainless steel piston for control

50/60 Hz
Heater ratings50, 100, 150,
ranges from 1000 to 600 psig (68.9 to 48 bar)

ATEX, IECEx, and CSA certified for

0.0 or 0.06
and 00 W
Control temperature range
critical/hazardous environments
T temperature classification for all
75 to 80F ( to 19C)

Explosive atmosphere/hazardous
Weight
Side mounted8.8 lb (4.0 kg) Base mounted7.7 lb (.5 kg)
heater ranges
CE conformity: 89/6/EEC (EMC) Horizontally or vertically mounted One-piece body eliminates potential
location certification:
ATEX (Europe) and IECEx
Ports
1/8 in. female NPT inlet; 1/4 in.
leak paths
Low-volume vapor chamber for fast
female NPT outlet
(international)Group II, Category G, Exd IIB+H; T Ambient temperatures: 4 to 140F (0 to 60C)
CSA (Canada and U.S.A.)
response
Heater in direct contact with process
media for maximum thermal efficiency

Removable heater simplifies cleaning Side and base inlet options
Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, and D; T; CSA Encl Type 4 Ambient temperatures: 58 to 1F (50 to 50C)
Do not use process fluids that are

above their lower explosive limit.
Pressure Regulators
9
Antitamper nut Stem Spring stabilizer Stop plate Cap ring Diaphragm Seat Body cap Spring button Range spring Seat retainer Poppet Poppet spring Body Heater sheath
Component Antitamper nut, stem, cap ring, stop plate, body cap, retainer nut, flange, flange bolts, lock nut, connector tube, panel nuts Spring button Spring stabilizer Range spring Connector tube seal Nonwetted lubricant Body, seat retainer, heater sheath Heater sheath seal Seat Diaphragm Poppet Poppet spring Wetted lubricant Piston seal, body seal Piston, piston guide Piston seal retainer Piston seal spring, body seal spring
Material
16 SS
Zinc-plated steel 01 SS 16 SS or zinc-plated steel, depending on configuration Nitrile Hydrocarbon-based 316 SS Alloy 718 PEEK Alloy X-750 S17400 SS 302 SS PTFE-based PTFE 316 SS PEEK Elgiloy
Inlet
Heater sheath seal Connector tube seal
Outlet
Retainer nut Flange (bolts not shown) Lock nut Connector tube
Piston Sensing Components
Piston Sensing Mechanism
Wetted components listed in italics. Not included in regulators with piston sensing mechanism. Not shown. Not required in all configurations. Regulators with control ranges 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) and 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) are assembled with two diaphragms.
Piston seal and spring Piston seal retainer
Piston Piston guide Body seal and spring
Dimensions
Side-Mounted
5.71
(145)
Base-Mounted
5.71
(145)
9.76
(48) (10)
5.1
5.79
(95.0) (78.0)
5.5
(16)
(0)
1.6
.74 .07
(147)
(78.0)
.07
(141)
5.55 .60 0.87

(.0)
(91.5)
40
Pressure Regulators
Build a KEV series regulator ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KEV 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
13 Valves

5 Pressure Control Range Diaphragm Sensing
Side MountA, X, 1, 2 Base MountA, B, X, Y, Z See Port Configurations, below.

8 Ports
0 = No valves
0 = No connections
15 Gauges
Piston Sensing
= 1/8 in. female NPT inlet; 1/4 in. female NPT outlet(s)
9 Seat Material
0 = No gauges
16 Heater, Controller 75 to 380F 75 to 380F (23 to 193C), 120 V (23 to 193C), 240 V
= PEEK
L = 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) M = 0 to 1500 psig (0 to 10 bar) N = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 17 bar) P = 0 to 000 psig (0 to 06 bar) R = 0 to 600 psig (0 to 48 bar)
1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06
G = 50 W H = 100 W J = 150 W K = 00 W
6 = 50 W 7 = 100 W 8 = 150 W 9 = 00 W
only. pressure that closely matches system pressure.
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm (outlet pressures up to 500 psig [4.4 bar]) P = 16 SS piston (outlet pressures above 500 psig [4.4 bar])
12 Handle, Mounting W = Antitamper nut, side mount X = Antitamper nut, base mount
Available with diaphragm sensing mechanism
Port Configurations
Outlet and auxiliary ports on the same face.
Side-Mount View
Side Mount
Designator Configuration
Base inlet
BaseMount View
Base Mount
Designator Y Configuration
Base inlet
A A X X
Regulator is rotatable
60 in relation to terminal box.
B
Aux
Pressure Regulators
41
Pressure-Reducing Regulator Flow Data

The graphs illustrate the change or droop in outlet pressures as the flow rate increases.
KPR Series
Flow Coefficient 0.06; Maximum Inlet Pressure 3600 psig (248 bar)
0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) 0 to 25 psig (0 to 1.7 bar)
0 25 1.5 40 80
Pressure Control Range
0 to 25 psig (0 to 1.7 bar)
Nitrogen Flow, std L/min

120 160 200 240 280
100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
15 10
20
1.0
USA -
0.5 5.0
100 psig (6.8 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar)

0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min Pressure Control Ranges

0 80 200 400 600
Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min Pressure Control Range 8,0 4,0 6,0
0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)
0 1,5 0 5.0 80 1,0
2,0
10 25 20
0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)

800 1000

200 400 600 800
60
100 psig (6.8 bar)
4.0
60 0,5
10 4.0 5,0 3.0 0 2.0
40
500 psig (4.4 bar)
3.0 2.0
USA - KPR 0.06 Cv

40
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar)
15 5.0
EURO
USA
20
100 psig (6.8 bar)

0 5.0
500 psig (4.4 bar)

10 15 20
00 psig (151 bar)

25 30 std ft/min 35 40
0 20
40
80
120
160
200
1.0 0
100 psig (6.8 bar)

0 0.15 5.0 10 15 20
500 psig (4.4 bar)
240
280 1.0 0
25
30
35
Nitrogen Flow,
Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min Pressure Control Range 10 15 20 25

0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar)

0 5,0 4,0 400 0 400 5,0 10 15 0 to 250 psig 20 (0 to 17.2 bar) 800 25 0 to 30 psig 500 35 40 80
0 0.10 5,0 4,0 0.05
5,0
30
35 80
(0 to 34.4 bar)
1600
JAPA

1200 60 25
60
300 2,0 200 1,0
500 psig (4.4 bar)
2,0 0
40
80
120
psig 240 16000200 (151 bar) 280

20
Inlet Pressure
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
20 15 10 0
USA - KPR 0.06 Cv 1,0
0 0 0 200 2.0 400 4.0 600 6.0 800 8.0 10
100 0
500 psig 200 (4.4 bar)
400
1000 psig (68.9 bar)

30
600
00 psig (151 bar)

50
800
1000
5.0 0
1.5
500 psig (4.4 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
0.15
10
20
40
60
70 1.0 0.5 0.4 400 0.5 0.3 JAPAN - KPR 0.06 Cv 0.2 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 0.05
Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min

0.5 0.4 0 25 0.3 20 0.2 300 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
40 20
3,0
3,0 EURO - KPR 0.06 Cv
40
EUR
0.10
CHIN
JAPA
0
4
Pressure Regulators

KCY Series
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 600, 1000 psig (41., 68.9 bar) 00 psig (151 bar)
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 600 psig (41. bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)

Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min Pressure Control Range

0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)
Inlet Pressure 600 psig (41. bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar) 00 psig (151 bar)
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 600 psig (41. bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
600 psig (41. bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)

0 400

0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar)

400 800 1200 1600 25
Inlet Pressure 600 psig (41. bar)
00 psig (151 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
300
20 15
00 psig (151 bar)
200
USA -
600 psig 00 psig (41. bar) 1000 psig (151 bar) (68.9 bar)
100
600 psig (41. bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
10 5.0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60

0 25 20 10

20 30 40 50 60 400
300
Pressure Regulators
4

KLF Series
0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar)
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 00 psig 500 psig (151 bar) (4.4 bar)


Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar)
00 psig (151 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)

0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar)

0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
44
Pressure Regulators

KHF Series
KPF Series
0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar) 0 to 2000 psig (0 to 137 bar)
Inlet Pressure 00 psig (151 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar)
000 psig (17 bar)
000 psig (06 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)


0 to 3000 psig (0 to 206 bar) 0 to 4000 psig (0 to 275 bar)

Inlet Pressure 5000 psig (44 bar) 500 psig (41 bar)
00 psig (151 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar) 000 psig (06 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar)

0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
Pressure Regulators
45

KCP Series

100 psig (6.8 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar) 00 psig (151 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
100 psig (6.8 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
00 psig (151 bar)


500 psig (4.4 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar)
1500 psig (10 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
00 psig (151 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
00 psig (151 bar)

100 psig (6.8 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar) 500 psig (4.4 bar) 00 psig (151 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
1500 psig (10 bar)
500 psig (4.4 bar)
00 psig (151 bar)
46
Pressure Regulators

KHP Series
Flow Coefficient 0.06; Maximum Inlet Pressure 10 000 psig (689 bar)

10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 103 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar) 8000 psig (551 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar) 5000 psig (44 bar)
1500 psig (10 bar)

15 to 2500 psig (1.0 to 172 bar) 25 to 3600 psig (1.7 to 248 bar)

50 to 6000 psig (3.4 to 413 bar) 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)

500 psig (41 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar) 000 psig (06 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar) 5500 psig (78 bar)
Pressure Regulators
47

KHP Series
0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar) 10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 103 bar)
KHR Series

Inlet Pressure 8000 psig (551 bar) 5000 psig (44 bar) 1500 psig (10 bar)
Water Flow, L/min

Inlet Pressure 8000 psig (551 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar) 5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar) 5000 psig (44 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar)

25 to 3600 psig (1.7 to 248 bar)
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min Pressure Control Ranges

10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 103 bar) 15 to 2500 psig (1.0 to 172 bar)
Water Flow, L/min
5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar)
1500 psig (10 bar)
5000 psig (44 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar)

100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar) 25 to 3600 psig (1.7 to 248 bar)
Water Flow, U.S. gal/min Pressure Control Ranges

50 to 6000 psig (3.4 to 413 bar) 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
Water Flow, L/min
5500 psig (78 bar) 500 psig (41 bar)
8000 psig (551 bar) 8000 psig 5000 psig (551 bar) (44 bar)
48
Pressure Regulators

KPP Series
000 psig (17 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar)
0 to 2000 psig (0 to 137 bar)

500 psig (41 bar) 5000 psig (44 bar) 000 psig (06 bar)
000 psig (17 bar)
Pressure Regulators
49
Back-Pressure Regulator Flow Data

The graphs illustrate the change in inlet pressure as the flow rate increases.
KBP Series
Flow Coefficient 0.20
Pressure Control Range 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
KFB Series
Inlet Pressure, bar
0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)
0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar)
KCB Series
Pressure Control Range 0 to 75 psig (0 to 5.8 bar) 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar)
Inlet Pressure, bar
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Control Range 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)
50
Pressure Regulators

KPB Series

Inlet Pressure, bar
0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar)
0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar)
Nitrogen Flow, std ft/min Nitrogen Flow, std L/min
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Control Range 0 to 4000 psig (0 to 75 bar)
Inlet Pressure, bar
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Regulators
51

KHB Series

Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Control Range 10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 10 bar) 0 to 750 psig (0 to 51.6 bar) 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
10 to 1500 psig (0.68 to 10 bar)
0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar)
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Control Range 5 to 600 psig (1.7 to 48 bar)
Pressure Control Range 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
15 to 500 psig (1.0 to 17 bar)
Pressure Control Range 100 to 10 000 psig (6.8 to 689 bar)
Inlet Pressure, bar
Inlet Pressure, bar
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Control Range 5 to 600 psig (1.7 to 48 bar)
5
Pressure Regulators
Go Gi
Gi
Port Configurations
Go Port configurations are available as shown in the regulator ordering information Reducing right-to-left Pressure pages. The symbols indicate the port location of factory-assembled accessories. R For alternative accessory locations, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Pressure Reducing right-to
Port Configuration Symbols

Inlet Filtered inlet Outlet Gi Inlet gauge R Relief valve GoPressure Reducing Go/R Outlet gauge or Outlet gaugePressureright-to-left right-to-left Reducing Pressure Reducing right-to-left relief valve
Select regulators are available on special order with additional port configurations. Contact your Go/R authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Go/R
Factory-assembled cylinder connections are placed on a filtered inlet port; isolation valves are placed on an outlet port 180 from the cylinder connection. Go/R
Gi Go/R Go/R GoGo/R
G Go/Ro Gi
ure Reducing right-to-left Pressure Regulators Pressure-ReducingReducing right-to-left
Go/R Go/R
Go/R Gi
Gi
Right-to-Left Flow
Pressure Reducing left-to-right left-to-right Pressure Reducing left-to-right Pressure Reducing

Go/R Go/R Go/R Gi G Go/R Go Gi GoGo/R Go oGiGi Go Gi Go Gi Go Gi Go Go/R Go/R Go/R R
F HGo/R
Go Gi
Configuration
Go/R
Designator A C
Gi
Go/R Gi
E
Gi
RR
K
Pressure Reducing left-to-right Pressure Reducing left-to-right

o i
Go/R Go/R L
Go/R
Left-to-Right Flow G G
Go/R
Go o i Gi o oGiGi Go Gi G G GG Gi
G Go o GiGo
Go Gi Go Gi Go Gi Go
Gi
Gi Go/R GoGi /R Back Pressure right-to-left Back Pressure right-to-left Configuration R Gi Go/R
Designator
Gi G o Gi Go Gi Go R RR R
Go/R Go/R Gi Go
E
Go Gi
Go Go Gi
Gi
Go/R Go/R Gi Gi
M
R
N
G G R Back Pressure Back-Pressureright-to-left right-to-left Back Pressure i Regulators Back Pressure i right-to-left
G i G o Gi G o R
Gi Go Gi Go
MPC Port Configurations

Pressure Reducing
R Gi
Configuration 2-Port
Right-to-Left Flow
Go/R
Configuration
Go/R
Gi
Gi
Go
Gi
Go
Go Gi
R Gi
Inlet Outlet
Outlet Outlet Inlet
R R Back Pressure left-to-right Back Pressure left-to-right

Designator A D V Designator
3-Port 6
Go Left-to-Right Flow Go Gi Gi
Back Pressure
Outlet Inlet Inlet Inlet
Back Pressure Back Pressure left-to-right left-to-right Back Pressure left-to-right

Designator A G
Configuration
Configuration
Outlet
Gi
Gi
Designator
2-Port 7
3-Port 8
Gi
Gi
Gi
Gi
Gi
Gi
Pressure Regulators
5

Regulator accessories are available separately or mounted on Swagelok regulators. Some accessories limit regulator pressure or temperature ratings. Additional materials, options, and accessories are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
Cylinder Connections
Available in a variety of CGA connections Stainless steel construction
Insert a designator into the ordering number as shown in the appropriate regulator ordering information pages.
Cylinder Gases and Connections

Gas Air, industrial Ammonia, anhydrous Argon Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Chlorine Ethane Ethylene Helium Hydrogen Hydrogen chloride Hydrogen sulfide Krypton Methane, natural gas Methyl chloride Methyl mercaptan Neon Nitric oxide Nitrogen Nitrogen dioxide Oxygen Phosgene Refrigerant14 Refrigerant Sulfur dioxide Sulfur hexafluoride Xenon
authorized Swagelok representative.
CGA Connection 590 660 580 0 50 660 50 50 580 50 0 0 580 50 660 0 580 660 580 660 540 660 580 660 660 590 580
Connection Designator H J G B D J D D G D C C G D J C G J G J F J G J J H G
These cylinder connections are rated to 000 psig (06 bar) maximum, so the maximum inlet pressure designator P must be used in the ordering number when a regulator is assembled with a cylinder connection. See the ordering information for each regulator for details.
Available only on select KPR and KCY series regulators. Contact your
DIN, BS, and JIS cylinder connections are also available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information.
54
Pressure Regulators

Isolation Valves
Allow isolation from
downstream equipment
Working pressures up to
5000 psig (44 bar)

16 stainless steel construction Swagelok integral-bonnet
needle valve (1 series)

Used in conjunction with an
adjustable regulator relief valve See the Swagelok Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves catalog, MS-01-164, for more information.
Pressure Gauges
Provides measure of inlet
Isolation Valve and Relief Valve Ordering Information

Isolation valves are available factory assembled on KCP, KPP, KPF, KHP, KHR, and KHB series regulators. Isolation and adjustable regulator relief valves are available factory assembled on KPR, KCY, KCM, KLF, and KHF series regulators. To order a regulator factory assembled with an isolation valve or isolation valve and adjustable regulator relief valve, insert a designator from the table below into the ordering number as shown in the appropriate regulator ordering information pages.
Valve Designator Isolation Relief Isolation and Only Only Relief 1 A
pressure, outlet pressure, or both

1/ in. (6 mm) dial size with
1/4 in. male NPT connection

1 1/ in. (40 mm) dial size with
1/8 in. male NPT connection

Stainless steel cases and
wetted components See the Swagelok Pressure Gauges, Industrial and Process catalog, MS-02-170, for more information.
Cleaning
Gauges assembled to ASTM G9 Level E or SC-11cleaned regulators are cleaned in accordance with ASME B40.1 level IV.
Description Kenmac KVV series adjustable regulator relief valve 1/4 in. male NPT inlet 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting outlet angle pattern isolation valve 1/4 in. male NPT inlet 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting outlet angle pattern isolation valve 1/4 in. male NPT inlet 1/4 in. female NPT outlet angle pattern isolation valve 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting inlet and outlet straight pattern isolation valve 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting inlet and outlet straight pattern isolation valve /8 in. Swagelok tube fitting inlet 1/4 in. female NPT outlet straight pattern isolation valve
To order a regulator assembled with gauges, insert a designator from the table below into the ordering number as shown in the appropriate regulator ordering information pages. The maximum gauge pressures are appropriate for the maximum inlet pressure and/or control pressure ordered.
Gauge Scale primary unit (secondary unit) psig (bar) (North America only) psig (bar) psig (kPa) bar (psig) MPa Gauge Designator Inlet and Inlet Outlet Outlet Only Only 1 5 4 A C E B D G J L H K
C E
Gauge Model C B C B B
KCP and KCB series regulators are assembled with M model gauges.
ot available on KPR, KCY, KCM, KLF, and KHF series regulators, because a N
relief valve is needed to protect the diaphragm sensing mechanism. with 1/8 and 1/ in. female NPT ports).
Not available for KCP and KCB series regulators.
ncludes male NPT to Swagelok tube adapter fitting (required for regulators I
Pressure Regulators
55

Kenmac Adjustable Regulator Relief Valves (KVV Series)
Provide nonsafety-related
pressure protection for Swagelok regulators
Technical Data
Relief Pressure Ranges
Based on the regulator control range Regulator Control Range psig (bar) 0 to 10 (0 to 0.68) 0 to 5 (0 to 1.7) 0 to 50 (0 to .4) 0 to 100 (0 to 6.8) Relief Pressure Range psig (bar)
Flow Data
The graph illustrates the discharge characteristics of the Kenmac adjustable regulator relief valve.
Air Flow, std L/min
0 to 100 (0 to 6.8) 50 to 00 (.4 to 1.7)
0 to 50 (0 to 17.) 150 to 500 (10. to 4.4) 0 to 500 (0 to 4.4)
50 to 00 psig (.4 to 1.7 bar) 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar)

9F (00C)
Weight
0.6 lb (0.1 kg)
Air Flow, std ft/min
Ports
1/4 in. NPT male inlet and female outlet
Component Body, poppet, spring button, adjusting screw Seal Range spring Material 316 SS Fluorocarbon FKM 302 SS
To order a KVV adjustable regulator relief valve separately, select an ordering number from the table below.
Relief Pressure Range psig (bar) 0 to 100 (0 to 6.8) 50 to 00 (.4 to 1.7) 150 to 500 (10. to 4.4) Ordering Number KVV11DE1 KVV11DG1 KVV11DI1
For valves not actuated for
a period of time, initial relief pressure may be higher than the set pressure. relief valves are not safety accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. require relief valves to meet specific safety codes. The system designer and user must determine when such codes apply and whether these relief valves conform to them.
Kenmac adjustable regulator
Testing
Every KVV series regulator relief valve is factory tested at its maximum rated pressure, then set to zero when assembled to the regulator.
Some system applications
Reset relief pressure to
the desired value before pressurizing the system.
Inlet Pressure, bar
Relief Pressure Range 150 to 500 psig (10. to 4.4 bar)
56
Pressure Regulators

Hoses
Hoses are available assembled to the inlet of the regulator to allow connection to remote gas cylinders. Hose options, rated to 000 psig (06 bar), include:
ft long Swagelok 1/4 in. high-pressure, metal flexible hose
(FM series), 1/4 in. female NPT inlet, 1/4 in. male NPT outlet connected to regulator: SS-FM4PM4PF4-6
ft long Swagelok 1/4 in. PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided
hose (TH series), 1/4 in. female NPT inlet, 1/4 in. male NPT outlet connected to regulator: SS-TH4PM4PF4-6 See the Swagelok, HoseHose Assemblies, Bulk Hose, and End Connections catalog, MS-01-167, for more information.
Cleaning
Hoses are not available assembled to ASTM G9 Level E or SC-11 specially-cleaned regulators.
Handles
Knob, thumbwheel, and antitamper handles are available. The green plastic knob handle is standard for most Swagelok regulators. Other colors are available; add a handle color designator to a regulator ordering number.
Color Black Blue Orange Red Yellow Designator BK BL OR RD YW Antitamper Thumbwheel
Knob
Example: KPR1FRF41A0000BK The metal thumbwheel handle is available for the compact KCB and KCP series regulators. The metal antitamper nut is available to prevent inadvertent pressure adjustment.
Wall Mounting Brackets

Stainless steel wall mounting brackets are available for many Swagelok regulators.
Wall Mounting Bracket Kits

Regulator Series KPR, KLF, KHF, KCP, KPP, KPF, KHP, KBP, KFB, KCB, KPB, KHB KCY Ordering Number 9R0079 9R0149
KCY Series Mounting Bracket Requires 1st stage panelmount option. See page 9.
KPR, KLF, KHF, KCP, KPP, KPF, KHP, KBP, KFB, KCB, KPB, and KHB Series Mounting Bracket
Pressure Regulators
57
Maintenance Kits
Filter Replacement Kits
Filter replacement kits are available for KPR, KCM, KCP, KCY, KPP, KHP, KLF, and KHR series regulators. Filter replacement kits include:
five sets of filters, filter rings, and filter retaining rings instructions. Regulator Series KCP KPR, KCM, KCY, KPP, KHP, KLF, KHR Inlet Size 1/8 in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT Ordering Number REG-FILTER--KIT5 REG-FILTER-4-KIT5
KPR, KCP, AND KBP Series Maintenance Kits

Maintenance kits include:
all wetted components, except for
KCY series regulators can be rebuilt with two KPR series maintenance kits.
The second-stage kit should be
the regulator body and piston, if applicable

wetted lubricant with MSDS instructions.
configured for the desired pressure control range.

The first-stage kit should specify
designator J for the pressure control range and designator 0 for the ports (filter size). All other options should match those of the second-stage kit.
Build a maintenance kit ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
1 2 3
10
11
12 13 14 15 16
KPR
1 2 3 Regulator Series KPR = KPR KCP = KCP KBP = KBP 4 Body Material, Cleaning
- K I
0 = Not applicable
0 = Not applicable
8 Ports (Filter Size)
1 = 0.0 2 = 0.06 5 = 0.0 7 = 0.50

configuration.
1 = 16 SS and brass C = 16 SS and brass, SC-11 cleaned

Required for KBP series.
KPR Series 4 = 1/4 in. female NPT 0 = All other end connections KBP Series 0 = Not applicable KCP Series 2 = 1/8 in. female NPT M = MPC platform
KPR and KBP Series D = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) and 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) F = 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar) and 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) J = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) and 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar) KCP Series G = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar), 0 to 5 psig (0 to 1.7 bar), 0 to 50 psig (0 to .4 bar), 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar), and 0 to 50 psig (0 to 17. bar) M = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 4.4 bar), 0 to 1000 psig (0 to 68.9 bar), and 0 to 1500 psig (0 to 10 bar)
configuration.
11 Sensing Mechanism, Vent KPR Series A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent and captured vent E = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self vent
KBP Series A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent and captured vent KCP Series P = 16 SS piston
12 Handle, Mounting
KPR Series 1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK KBP and KCP Series A = Fluorocarbon FKM, PCTFE B = Kalrez, PCTFE C = Fluorocarbon FKM, PEEK D = Kalrez, PEEK
0 = Not applicable
Additional Products
Filters
Swagelok offers a variety of filters, filter elements, and sizes.
16 SS and brass materials Sintered and strainer elements Tee type, inline, and all-welded models
For more information about Swagelok filters, see the FiltersFW, F, and TF Series catalog, MS-01-9.
Transducers
Swagelok industrial pressure transducers electronically monitor fluid system pressure in a variety of analytical and process applications.
Accurate and repeatable readings Swagelok tube adapter end connections
available for ease of installation and maintenance

CE compliant
For more information about Swagelok industrial pressure transducers, see the Industrial Pressure Transducers catalog, MS-0-5.
Swagelok pressure regulators are not Safety Do not use the regulator as a shutoff device.
Accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Swagelok, Kenmac, VCRTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Limited Partnership KalrezTM DuPont 005, 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MIG August 008, R MS-0-0
www.swagelok.com
Pre s sure Transduce rs

Ultra high-Pur it y
P T U Se r ie s
Single-end, flow-through, and modular surface-mount models Positive pressure ranges to 5000 psig, 400 bar, and 40 MPa;
compound pressure ranges to 500 psig, 250 bar, and 25 MPa
Excellent long-term stability and repeatability for reliability and low maintenance 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel and Elgiloy wetted components VCR metal gasket face seal, Micro-Fit weld tee, tube butt weld,
and modular surface-mount end connections
Pressure Transducers, Ultrahigh-Purity
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Effects . . . . . . . . Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical and Electronic Data . Materials of Construction . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 Models Modular Surface-Mount Model. . . . . . . . . . Flow-Through Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-End Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Range Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Display Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Display Indicator Ordering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 9
The Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer provides electronic monitoring of system pressure for ultrahigh-purity applications. The PTU series pressure transducer is available with a variety of pressure ranges, process connections, electrical connectors, and output signals. The configurable and renewable electronics allow the conversion of the output signal from voltage (dc) to milliamps (mA) without removing the unit from the system. In addition, a direct-mount digital display indicator is available to provide a visual display.
Performance Data
Accuracy (Limit-Point Calibration) Linearity Hysteresis Repeatability Reproducibility Long-Term Stability Zero Adjustability Response Time Vibration Resistance Shock Resistance Total Zero-Point Variation 0.5 % of span, limit-point calibration, for pressure 0 psig ( 0.5 BFSL); 1.5 % of span for pressure 0 psig ( 0.75 BFSL) 0. % of span 0.03 % of span 0.05 % of span 0.15 % of span 0. % of span per year 5 % of span milliseconds 10 g in accordance with IEC 770 (vibration under resonance) 500 g in accordance with IEC 770 (mechanical shock) 1.5 % of span
Features
Metal thin-film sensing technology, which consists of a
metal thin film resistor bridge on an Elgiloy diaphragm, enables PTU series transducers to maintain reliable readings over a wide range of temperatures. The consistent, accurate performance minimizes routine maintenance and helps eliminate unplanned system shutdowns. Modular construction and configurable, renewable electronics that enable interchangeability of internal components provide flexibility, reduce inventory, and make any required maintenance quick and simple. All wetted components are 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel and Elgiloy to promote corrosion resistance and clean operation, minimizing component replacement costs through extended service life. Genuine Swagelok VCR face seal fitting end connections provide reliable, leak-tight performance, helping to eliminate leakage-related system shutdown. The standard transducer enclosure meets Ingress Protection IP65/NEMA4 or IP54/NEMA3, designed to protect internal electronics from moisture and dust. No span adjustment is required after zero-point correction, so installation of field-replaceable electronics is quick and simple. Low internal volume minimizes dry-down and purge time, helping reduce qualification time.
Applies to 1.5 in. modular surface-mount model with W-seal.
Temperature Effects
Temperature Coefficient (TC) of Zero in Compensated Temperature Range TC of Span in Compensated Temperature Range Compensated Temperature Range Ambient Temperature Range Storage and Medium Temperature 0.3 % of span per 18F (10C) 0.15 % of span per 18F (10C) 4 to 176F (0 to 80C) 4 to 185F (0 to 85C) 40 to 1F (40 to 100C)
Technical Data
Overpressure Limit full scale to 3000 psig, 50 bar, 5 MPa 1.5 full scale > 3000 psig, 50 bar, 5 MPa 10 full scale to 500 psig, 40 bar, 4.0 MPa 9 full scale to 1000 psig, 60 bar, 6.0 MPa 7. full scale to 1500 psig, 100 bar, 10 MPa 4.5 full scale to 000 psig, 160 bar, 16 MPa .8 full scale to 3000 psig, 50 bar, 5 MPa 1.8 full scale to 5000 psig, 400 bar, 40 MPa Electropolished 7 in. (0.18 m) Ra avg Liquid, gas, and vapor IP65 /NEMA4 or IP54/NEMA3
Operation
The Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer uses metal thin-film sensing technology to measure system pressure. This sensing technology consists of a strain gauge formed on the Elgiloy diaphragm using semiconductor deposition and etching techniques. As system pressure changes and deflects the sensor, the electrical resistance of the strain gauge changes. The change in resistance is detected, amplified, and converted to a usable electronic output signal. This signal is then sent to output devices that monitor or control system pressure.
Burst Pressure
Wetted Surface Finish Service Protection Class
Electrical and Electronic Data

Dielectric Withstand Electromagnetic Capability Electrical Protections Load Capacitance Maximum Current Output 500 V (dc) max CE-conformity, EN6136, SEMI E33-94 Reverse polarity, short circuit signal 0.1 F max < 30 mA (4 to 0 mA signal) < 1 mA (0.1 to 5.1 and 0.1 to 10.1 [dc] signals)
Testing
Every Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer is factory inboard vacuum tested with helium to a maximum leak rate of 10 9 std cm3/s.
Calibration
Every Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer receives a five-point pressure calibration to ensure proper operation over the designated pressure range. A certificate of calibration is supplied with each transducer.
Component End connections, body Diaphragm Housing
Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316L VIM-VAR SS/A479 Elgiloy/AMS 5876 300 series stainless steel

Every Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer is assembled, cleaned, and packaged in a Class 100 cleanroom.
Models
Modular Surface-Mount Model
1.5 in. modular surface-mount C-seal
Input Power Supply (Excitation)

10 to 30 V (dc) (4 to 0 mA) 10 to 30 V (dc) (0.1 to 5.1 V) 14 to 30 V (dc) (0.1 to 10.1 V)
(IGC II-compatible)
1.15 in. modular surface-mount C-seal 1.5 in. modular surface-mount W-seal
Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug (IP65/NEMA4) M1 1, 4-pin circular connector
Internal Volume
< 1.5 cm3 (0.09 in.3)
Pressure Rating
Positive Pressure
(IP65/NEMA4)
Direct wire, 1.5 or 3 m flying lead
(IP65/NEMA4)
15-pin sub-D connector (IP54/NEMA3) Tajimi circular connector R03-R6F
0 to 500 psig 0 to 40 bar 0 to 4.0 MPa

Compound Pressure
(IP54/NEMA3)
Output Signals
4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
30 in. Hg to 500 psig 1 to 40 bar 0.1 to 4.0 MPa See page 7 for complete listing of available pressure ranges.
Dimensions
(19.0)
0.75 dia A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Electrical Connectors 15-pin M12 Direct sub-D A B 3.66 A B 3.85 A B 4.44
Bottom
C Shown with an M1 electrical connector
End Connection 1.5 in. modular surface-mount 1.15 in. modular surface-mount
Bendix A B 3.6
Tajimi A B 3.59 C 0.63
0.39 (91.9) 0.43 (93.0) 0.63 (97.8) 1.0 (113) (9.9) 3.44 (10.9) 3.48 (16.0) 3.68 (30.5) 4.5
(87.4) (88.4) (93.5) (108)
0.35 (91.) (16.0) (8.9) 3.40 0.44

(86.4) (11.)
See Ordering Information, page 6.
Flow-Through Model
1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting to

female VCR fitting

1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting to
Internal Volume
< 1.0 cm3 (0.06 in.3)
female VCR fitting

1/4 0.035 in. tube butt weld
Pressure Rating
Positive Pressure
0 to 5000 psig 0 to 400 bar 0 to 40 MPa

Compound Pressure
(IP65/NEMA4)
(IP65/NEMA4)
Tajimi circular connector R03-R6F
30 in. Hg to 500 psig 1 to 50 bar 0.1 to 5 MPa See page 7 for complete listing of available pressure ranges.
(IP54/NEMA3)
Output Signals
4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
Dimensions
0.75 dia
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection (Inlet and Outlet) Size

A
(19.0)
Electrical Connectors Bendix A B 3.30

(83.8)
M12 A B 3.34
(84.8)
Direct A B 3.54
(89.9)
Tajimi A B 4.65
(118)
Type Integral male VCR Rotatable male VCR
C .4
(56.9)
3.14
(79.8)
3.18
(80.8)
3.38
(85.9)
4.5
(108)
3.05
(77.5)
Female VCR
(11.4)
0.45
1/4 in.
0.39
(9.9)
0.43 3.30
(83.8) (10.9)
0.63 3.34
(84.8) (16.0)
0.35 3.54
(89.9) (8.9)
Integral male VCR to female VCR Rotatable male VCR to female VCR Tube butt weld
4.05
(103)
.65
(67.3)
3.05 3.14
(79.8)
3.18
(80.8)
3.38
(85.9)
4.6
(117)
(77.5)
C Shown with direct wire (flying lead) electrical connector and 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR end connection.
1.85
(47.0)
Single-End Model
1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 0.035 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. Micro-Fit tee

Internal Volume
< 1.5 cm3 (0.09 in.3)
Pressure Rating
Positive Pressure
(IP65/NEMA4)
(IP65/NEMA4)
Tajimi circular connector R03-R6F
0 to 5000 psig 0 to 400 bar 0 to 40 MPa

Compound Pressure
(IP54/NEMA3)
Output Signals
4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
30 in. Hg to 500 psig 1 to 50 bar 0.1 to 5 MPa See page 7 for complete listing of available pressure ranges.
Dimensions
0.75 dia A
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection (Inlet and Outlet) Size Type Rotatable male VCR
B
(19.0)
Electrical Connectors Bendix A B 4.5

(108)
M12 A B 4.9
(109)
Direct A B 4.48
(114)
Tajimi A B 4.65
(118)
C 1.06
(6.9)
Female VCR 1/4 in. Tube butt weld
3.85 0.39
(9.9) (97.8)
3.88 0.43
(10.9) (98.6)
4.08 0.63
(16.0) (104)
4.5 0.35
(8.9) (108)
0.66
(16.8)
3.65
(9.7)
3.69
(93.7)
3.89
(98.8)
4.05
(103)
0.46
(11.7)
Micro-Fit tee
4.06
(103)
4.10
(104)
4.30
(109)
4.6
(117)
1.03
(6.)
Shown with Bendix electrical connector and 1/4 in. female VCR fitting end connection.
Transducer Ordering Information

Build a Swagelok pressure transducer ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
PTU F NC300 1 1 AE C
Product
Pressure transducer, ultrahigh-purity
Options
See below. C = 13-point calibration with DKD certificate D = Typical material certification E = Material mill certification, heat-code traceable T = 3 m cable for flying lead
Model
M = Modular surface-mount F = Flow-through S = Single-end
Pressure Range
See Pressure Range Designators, page 7.
Swagelok pressure transducers are manufactured for psig,
bar, and MPa pressure units. For kg/cm and kPa pressure units, use the digital display indicator (see page 8) to convert and display the preferred units.
Process Connections
Modular Surface-Mount Model AJ = 1.5 in., C-seal BP = 1.5 in., W-seal BM = 1.15 in., C-seal Single-End Model (Inlet Only) AC = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR AD = 1/4 in. female VCR AA = 1/4 0.035 in. tube butt weld BL = 1/4 in. Micro-Fit tee Flow-Through Model AF = 1/4 in. integral male VCR AG = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR AI = 1/4 in. female VCR BK = 1/4 in. integral male VCR to female VCR AH = 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR to female VCR AE = 1/4 0.035 in. tube butt weld
Output Signal
1 = 4 to 0 mA 2 = 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 3 = 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
3 = Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug (compatible with digital display indicator) 2 = Direct wire (1.5 m flying lead standard) 1 = M1 1, 4-pin circular connector (compatible with digital display indicator) 4 = 15-pin sub-D connector (modular surfacemount only) A = Tajimi circular connector R03-R6F
Options
13-point pressure calibration traceable to Deutscher
Kalibreirdienst (DKD), German Calibration Service.

Typical material certification (part number and purchase
order number specific).

Material Mill 3.1B Certification, which provides heat
traceability and verifies the chemical and mechanical properties of the wetted components, is available.
Pressure Range Designators

psig
Minimum Maximum 45 60 Vacuum 30 in. Hg 100 160 50 300 500 60 100 160 50 300 0 500 1000 1500 000 3000 5000
mount model.
Accessories
bar Replaceable Electronics
Maximum 3 6 9 15 Vacuum 1 bar 5 40 60 100 160 50 4 7 10 16 5 0 40 60 100 160 50 400 Designator AC3 AC6 AC9 AC15 AC5 AC40 AC60 AC100 AC160 AC50 AG4 AG7 AG10 AG16 AG5 AG40 AG60 AG100 AG160 AG50 AG400 Minimum
Designator NC45 NC60 NC100 NC160 NC50 NC300 NC500 NG60 NG100 NG160 NG50 NG300 NG500 NG1000 NG1500 NG000 NG3000 NG5000
The complete electronic module of the Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer is fieldreplaceable to extend the service life or to change the output signal. Kit includes the electronic module and installation instructions.
Output Signal 4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) Kit Ordering Number PTU-EM-1 PTU-EM- PTU-EM-3
Replacement Electrical Connectors

Connectors Male Bendix Flying lead with m cable Male M1 1 Ordering Number PTU-RC- PTU-RC-3 PTU-RC-1
Maximum pressure rating for modular surface-
MPa
Minimum Maximum 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 Vacuum 0.1 MPa 1.5 .5 4.0 6.0 10 16 5 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.6 .5 0 4.0 6.0 10 16 5 40
mount model.
Designator MC.3 MC.5 MC.6 MC.7 MC.9 MC1.5 MC.5 MC4 MC6 MC10 MC16 MC5 MG.4 MG.7 MG1 MG1.6 MG.5 MG4 MG6 MG10 MG16 MG5 MG40
mount model.
Mating Connectors
Mating Connector Bendix, 3 m cable, 4-wire, UL listed Bendix, no cable, 4-pin M1 1, m cable, straight, 4-wire M1 1, 5 m cable, straight, 4-wire M1 1, m cable, 90 angled, 4-wire M1 1, no cable, straight, 4-pin M1 1, no cable, 90 angled, 4-pin M1 1, m cable, straight, 5-wire, UL listed M1 1, 5 m cable, straight, 5-wire, UL listed M1 1, m cable, 90 angled, 5-wire, UL listed M1 1, 5 m cable, 90 angled, 5-wire, UL listed M1 1, no cable, straight, 5-pin M1 1, no cable, 90 angled, 5-pin M1 1 male, no cable, 90 angled, 4-pin, M1 1, 10 m cable, 90 angled, 4-wire, UL listed Ordering Number PTU-MC-1 PTU-MC- PTU-MC-3 PTU-MC-4 PTU-MC-5 PTU-MC-6 PTU-MC-7 PTU-MC-8 PTU-MC-9 PTU-MC-10 PTU-MC-11 PTU-MC-1 PTU-MC-13 PTU-MC-14 PTU-MC-15
UL style 164/1061, temperature rating 80C. UL style 0549/1061, temperature rating 80C.
Digital Display Indicator

A digital display indicator is available to mount directly to the Swagelok PTU series pressure transducer for local and remote indication of pressure.
Performance Data
Accuracy Display Accuracy Switching Point Zero Adjustment Switching Point Number Switching Point Function Switching Point Adjustment Response Time Switch Influence of Supply Voltage Switching Current Thermal Error Display Thermal Error Switches Dielectric Withstand Electromagnetic Capability Vibration Resistance Shock Resistance < 0.5 % of span, 1 digit 0.5 of span 1 digit 10 % of span NPN open-collector 1 NPN open collector for Bendix MIL plug Normally open/normally closed 1 to 99 % of span < 15 milliseconds < 0.1 % per 10 V 300 mA max < 0.1 % of span per 18 F (10C) 500 V (dc) max CE-conformity, EN 6136, SEMI E33-94; CE declaration of conformity available on request. 5 g: 10 to 000 Hz No damage up to 100 g
Features
Provides LED display
of pressure in user-configurable units including psig, bar, kg/cm, kPa, and MPa Offers display accuracy of 0.5 % to 1 digit to match transducer accuracy Uses input signals of milliamps or volts Includes two programmable set points (one programmable set point with Bendix connector) Displays up to four digits Offers choice of front or top display window for viewing flexibility Meets Ingress Protection IP65/NEMA 4 Is loop powered, no extra power supply required
Electrical and Electronic Data

Input Signal
4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
Temperature Rating
Ambient Storage Compensated Range to 185F (30 to 85C) 4 to 176F (0 to 80C)
Electrical Connectors to Transducer

Female M1 1, 4-pin circular connector Female Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug
Output Signal
4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) Display (LED red), 4 digit, 7 mm digit height High and low set points
Display
Type Units Refresh Rate Digit Range LED, 4 digits psig, bar, kg/cm, MPa, kPa 3 times per second 999 to 6000
Power Supply
16 to 30 V (dc) for 4 to 0 mA 10 to 30 V (dc) for 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 15 to 30 V (dc) for 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc)
Programming
Type Programmable Parameters Menu-driven programming via external pushbuttons Change of measuring units, setting switching points, adjustable decimal point, adjustable measuring range, adjustable zero point
Electrical Protection
Reverse polarity
Protection Class
IP65/NEMA 4
Housing
Material Housing Dimensions Top View Model with Electrical Connector Front View Model with Electrical Connector ABS plastic 1.5 by 1. by 1.5 in. max
(38 by 9 by 38 mm max)
Output Electrical Connector

M1 1, 5-pin circular connector Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug Direct wire (flying lead)
1.5 by .0 by .6 in. max

(38 by 51 by 66 mm max)
1.5 by 3.1 by 1.5 in. max

(38 by 77 by 38 mm max)

Every Swagelok PTU series digital display indicator is packaged in a Class 100 cleanroom.
Digital Display Indicator Ordering Information

Electrical Connections Input (to Transducer) Output
Output Signal 4 to 0 mA
Ordering Number PTU-DF-111 PTU-DF-11 PTU-DF-311 PTU-DF-133 PTU-DF-33 PTU-DF-333 PTU-DF-13 PTU-DF-131 PTU-DT-111 PTU-DT-11 PTU-DT-311 PTU-DT-133 PTU-DT-33 PTU-DT-333 PTU-DT-13 PTU-DT-131
Front Display Window M1 1, 4-pin M1 1, 5-pin 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug 3 m flying lead, 5-wire M1 1, 5-pin 4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) 4 to 0 mA
Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug
Top Display Window 4 to 0 mA M1 1, 4-pin M1 1, 5-pin 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug 3 m flying lead, 5-wire M1 1, 5-pin 4 to 0 mA 0.1 to 5.1 V (dc) 0.1 to 10.1 V (dc) 4 to 0 mA
Bendix, 4-pin MIL plug
Swagelok, VCR, Micro-Fit, IGCTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals 003, 004, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 008, R5 MS-0-16
www.swagelok.com
Proce s s Ball Valve Handle O ptions
Ha ndle K its a nd Factor y-Installe d Ha ndle s

Lever and oval handles Locking brackets for lever and oval handles Oval latch-lock handles
Process Ball Valve Handle Options
60 Series Valve Handles

Lever handles are standard for 60 series ball valves. Also available are:
oval handles locking brackets for lever and oval handles oval latch-lock handles replacement vinyl sleeves.
Lever and Oval Sleeve Color Designators

Sleeve Color Black Blue Green Designator BK BL GR Sleeve Color Orange Red Yellow Designator OG RD YW
Lever Handles
A B
Valve Series 62
Kit Ordering Number SS-51K-62-BK SS-51K-62X-BK SS-51K-63-BK SS-51K-63X-BK SS-51K-63 SS-51K-W63-BK SS-51K-65-BK SS-51K-65X-BK SS-51K-65 SS-51K-W65-BK SS-51K-67-BK SS-51K-67X-BK SS-51K-67

(60.2)
B 0.69
(17.5)
C 0.98
(24.9)
Lever handles with vinyl sleeves are standard on Swagelok 60 series valves, except for thermal service (T60M) valve handles, which have no sleeves.
62 3-way 63 63 3-way T63M W63 65 65 3-way T65M W65 67, 68 67, 68 3-way T67M, T68M
1.46 4.50
(114)
Lever Handle Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve stop plate (not required for 62 or W60 series valves) stem spring (not required for 62 series valves).
0.88
(22.4)
(37.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.69 6.00
(152)
1.12
(28.4)
(42.9)
1.45
(36.8)
9.14
(232)
1.38
(35.1)
2.50
(63.5)
Lever Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For sleeve colors other than black, replace BK in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-62-BL
Lever-Handle Valves with Colored Sleeves

To order valves with sleeves of colors other than black, add a dash and a sleeve color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-62TS4-BL
Replacement Vinyl Lever-Handle Sleeves

Select a kit ordering number and add a color designator.
Valve Series 62 62 3-way 63, W63 63 3-way Basic Kit Valve Basic Kit Ordering Number Series Ordering Number VNL-51K-6265, W65 VNL-51K-65VNL-51K-62X65 3-way VNL-51K-65XVNL-51K-6367, 68 VNL-51K-67VNL-51K-63X67, 68 3-way VNL-51K-67X-
Example: VNL-51K-62-BK
Oval Handles
A B
Oval handles are available for 60 series valves. The standard sleeve color is orange, except for thermal service (T60M) handles, which have no sleeves.
Valve Series 62 62 3-way 63 63 3-way T63M W63 65 65 3-way T65M W65 67, 68
Kit Ordering Number SS-51K-62K-OG SS-51K-62XK-OG SS-51K-63K-OG SS-51K-63XK-OG SS-51K-63K SS-51K-W63K-OG SS-51K-65K-OG SS-51K-65XK-OG SS-51K-65K SS-51K-W65K-OG SS-51K-67K-OG

(53.1)
B 1.59
(40.4)
C 0.88
(22.4)
Oval Handle Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve stop plate (not required for 62 or W60 series valves) stem springs (not required for 62 series valves) stem nut (62 series valves only) instructions.
2.07 4.09
(104)
2.34
(59.4)
(52.6)
2.06
(52.3)
2.43 4.72
(120)
2.46
(62.5)
(61.7)
2.45
(62.2)
67, 68 3-way SS-51K-67XK-OG T67M, T68M SS-51K-67K
5.59
(142)
2.59
(65.8)
2.79
(70.9)
Oval Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For sleeve colors other than orange, replace OG in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-62K-BK
Oval-Handle Valves
To order 60 series valves with oval handles and orange vinyl sleeves, add -JK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-62TS4-JK For other colors, add a dash and a sleeve color designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-62TS4-JK-BK
Replacement Vinyl Oval-Handle Sleeves

Valve Series 62 62 3-way 63, W63 63 3-way Basic Kit Valve Basic Kit Ordering Number Series Ordering Number VNL-51K-62K65, W65 VNL-51K-65KVNL-51K-62XK65 3-way VNL-51K-65XKVNL-51K-63K67, 68 VNL-51K-67KVNL-51K-63XK- 67, 68 3-way VNL-51K-67XK-
Example: VNL-51K-62K-BK
Handle Extensions
Two- and four-inch handle extensions are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Locking Brackets for Lever and Oval Handles

A, B, and C dimensions of valves with locking brackets are the same as those of standard valves.
Locking Bracket/Handle Kits for 62 Series Valves

Kits include lever or oval handle. Select a kit ordering number. For a sleeve color other than black for lever handles or orange for oval handles, replace BK or OG in the kit ordering number with a sleeve color designator.
Valve Series 62 62 3-way Lever Handle Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-62L-BK SS-51K-62XL-BK 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S62L-BK
Locking brackets can lock valves open or closed and accommodate shackle diameters smaller than:
0.344 in. (8.7 mm)62, 63, and 65 series 0.375 in. (9.5 mm)67 and 68 series
Valve Series 62 62 3-way
Oval Handle Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-62LK-OG SS-51K-62XLK-OG 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S62LK-OG
Valves with locking brackets cannot be panel mounted.
Locking Bracket Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel locking bracket stainless steel stop lock plate (not required for
Examples: SS-51K-62L-BL for a locking bracket kit with lever handle and blue sleeve SS-51K-62LK-GR for a locking bracket kit with oval handle and green sleeve
62 series valves)
stem spring (not required for 62 series valves) body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits only) body fasteners (all 4-bolt valve kits and 62 series
Locking Bracket Kits for 63, 65, 67, and 68 Series Valves
Kits are for use for valves with either lever or oval handles. Select a kit ordering number.
Valve Series 63 63 3-way 65 65 3-way 67 67 3-way 68 68 3-way Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-63L SS-51K-63XL SS-51K-65L SS-51K-65XL SS-51K-67L SS-51K-67XL SS-51K-68L SS-51K-68XL 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S63L SS-51K-S65L SS-51K-S67L SS-51K-S68L
8-bolt valve kits)

stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve
(62 series lever-handle valves only)

stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve
(62 series oval-handle valves only)

instructions.
Lever-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets

To order 60 series lever-handle valves with locking brackets, add -JL to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-62TS4-JL For a sleeve color other than black, add a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-62TS4-JL-BL
Oval-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets

To order 60 series oval-handle valves with locking brackets, add -JLK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-62TS4-JLK For a sleeve color other than orange, add a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-62TS4-JLK-BL
Oval Latch-Lock Handles

A B
Oval latch-lock handles are available for 63 and 65 2-way series valves. The handles can lock valves open or closed and accommodate shackle diameters smaller than 0.328 in. (8.3 mm). Valves with oval latch-lock handles cannot be panel mounted.
Valve Series 63 W63 65 W65
Kit Ordering Numbers 8-Bolt and 4-Bolt Valves Welded Valves Lock in open and closed position SS-51K-63LLK-OG SS-51K-65LLK-OG SS-51K-S63LLK-OG SS-51K-W63LLK-OG SS-51K-S65LLK-OG SS-51K-W65LLK-OG Lock in open position
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C 3.05 4.09

(104)
2.34
(59.4)
(77.5)
2.06
(52.3)
Latch-Lock Kits
Kits include:
stainless steel oval handle with
3.35 4.72 (120) 2.46 (62.5)

(85.1)
2.45
(62.2)
trigger mechanism and orange vinyl sleeve

stainless steel stop lock-plate
63 65
SS-51K-63LLKO-OG SS-51K-65LLKO-OG
SS-51K-S63LLKO-OG SS-51K-S65LLKO-OG Lock in closed position
4.09
(104)
2.34
(59.4)
3.05
(77.5)
bracket (not required for W60 series valves)

body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits
4.72
(120)
2.46
(62.5)
3.35
(85.1)
only)
body fasteners (4-bolt valve kits
63 W63 65 W65
SS-51K-63LLKC-OG SS-51K-65LLKC-OG
SS-51K-S63LLKC-OG SS-51K-W63LLKC-OG SS-51K-S65LLKC-OG SS-51K-W65LLKC-OG
3.05 4.09
(104)
2.34
(59.4)
(77.5)
2.06
(52.3)
only)
stem spring instructions. 4.72
(120)
3.35 2.46
(62.5) (85.1)
2.45
(62.2)
Oval Latch-Lock Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For a sleeve color other than orange, replace OG in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-63LLK-BL
Valves with Oval-Latch-Lock-Handles

To order 60 series valves with oval latch-lock handles, add -LLK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-63TS8-LLK For a sleeve color other than orange, insert a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-63TS8-BL-LLK
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 2009, R6 MS-01-137
www.swagelok.com
Proce ss Ball Valve Handle O ptions
Ha ndle K its a nd Factor y-Installe d Ha ndle s

Lever and oval handles Locking brackets for lever and oval handles Oval latch-lock handles
60 Series Valve Handles

Lever handles are standard for 60 series ball valves. Also available are:
oval handles locking brackets for lever and oval handles oval latch-lock handles replacement vinyl sleeves.
Lever and Oval Sleeve Color Designators

Sleeve Color Black Blue Green Designator BK BL GR Sleeve Color Orange Red Yellow Designator OG RD YW
Lever Handles
A B
Valve Series 6
Kit Ordering Number SS-51K-6-BK SS-51K-6X-BK SS-51K-63-BK SS-51K-63X-BK SS-51K-63 SS-51K-W63-BK SS-51K-65-BK SS-51K-65X-BK SS-51K-65 SS-51K-W65-BK SS-51K-67-BK SS-51K-67X-BK SS-51K-67
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .37

(60.)
B 0.69
(17.5)
C 0.98
(4.9)
Lever handles with vinyl sleeves are standard on Swagelok 60 series valves, except for thermal service (T60M) valve handles, which have no sleeves.
6 3-way 63 63 3-way T63M W63 65 65 3-way T65M W65 67, 68 67, 68 3-way T67M, T68M
1.46 4.50
(114)
0.88
(.4)
(37.1)
Lever Handle Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve stop plate (not required for 6 or W60 series valves) stem spring (not required for 6 series valves).
1.31
(33.3)
1.69 6.00
(15)
1.1
(8.4)
(4.9)
1.45
(36.8)
9.14
(3)
1.38
(35.1)
.50
(63.5)
Lever Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For sleeve colors other than black, replace BK in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-6-BL
Lever-Handle Valves with Colored Sleeves

To order valves with sleeves of colors other than black, add a dash and a sleeve color designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6TS4-BL
Replacement Vinyl Lever-Handle Sleeves

Example: VNL-51K-6-BK
Oval Handles
A B
Oval handles are available for 60 series valves. The standard sleeve color is orange, except for thermal service (T60M) handles, which have no sleeves.
Valve Series 6 6 3-way 63 63 3-way T63M W63 65 65 3-way T65M W65 67, 68
Kit Ordering Number SS-51K-6K-OG SS-51K-6XK-OG SS-51K-63K-OG SS-51K-63XK-OG SS-51K-63K SS-51K-W63K-OG SS-51K-65K-OG SS-51K-65XK-OG SS-51K-65K SS-51K-W65K-OG SS-51K-67K-OG
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .09

(53.1)
B 1.59
(40.4)
C 0.88
(.4)
Oval Handle Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve stop plate (not required for 6 or W60 series valves) stem springs (not required for 6 series valves) stem nut (6 series valves only) instructions.
.07 4.09
(104)
.34
(59.4)
(5.6)
.06
(5.3)
.43 4.7
(10)
.46
(6.5)
(61.7)
.45
(6.)
67, 68 3-way SS-51K-67XK-OG T67M, T68M SS-51K-67K
5.59
(14)
.59
(65.8)
.79
(70.9)
Oval Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For sleeve colors other than orange, replace OG in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-6K-BK
Oval-Handle Valves
To order 60 series valves with oval handles and orange vinyl sleeves, add -JK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6TS4-JK For other colors, add a dash and a sleeve color designator to the ordering number. Example: SS-6TS4-JK-BK
Replacement Vinyl Oval-Handle Sleeves

Example: VNL-51K-6K-BK
Handle Extensions
Two- and four-inch handle extensions are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Locking Brackets for Lever and Oval Handles

A, B, and C dimensions of valves with locking brackets are the same as those of standard valves.
Locking Bracket/Handle Kits for 62 Series Valves

Kits include lever or oval handle. Select a kit ordering number. For a sleeve color other than black for lever handles or orange for oval handles, replace BK or OG in the kit ordering number with a sleeve color designator.
Valve Series 6 6 3-way Lever Handle Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-6L-BK SS-51K-6XL-BK 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S6L-BK
Locking brackets can lock valves open or closed and accommodate shackle diameters smaller than:
0.344 in. (8.7 mm)6, 63, and 65 series 0.375 in. (9.5 mm)67 and 68 series
Valve Series 6 6 3-way
Oval Handle Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-6LK-OG SS-51K-6XLK-OG 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S6LK-OG
Valves with locking brackets cannot be panel mounted.
Locking Bracket Kits

Kits include:
stainless steel locking bracket stainless steel stop lock plate (not required for
Examples: SS-51K-6L-BL for a locking bracket kit with lever handle and blue sleeve SS-51K-6LK-GR for a locking bracket kit with oval handle and green sleeve
6 series valves)
stem spring (not required for 6 series valves) body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits only) body fasteners (all 4-bolt valve kits and 6 series
Locking Bracket Kits for 63, 65, 67, and 68 Series Valves
Kits are for use for valves with either lever or oval handles. Select a kit ordering number.
Valve Series 63 63 3-way 65 65 3-way 67 67 3-way 68 68 3-way Kit Ordering Numbers 4-Bolt Valves SS-51K-63L SS-51K-63XL SS-51K-65L SS-51K-65XL SS-51K-67L SS-51K-67XL SS-51K-68L SS-51K-68XL 8-Bolt Valves SS-51K-S63L SS-51K-S65L SS-51K-S67L SS-51K-S68L
8-bolt valve kits)

stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve
(6 series lever-handle valves only)

stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve
(6 series oval-handle valves only)

instructions.
Lever-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets

To order 60 series lever-handle valves with locking brackets, add -JL to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6TS4-JL For a sleeve color other than black, add a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-6TS4-JL-BL
Oval-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets

To order 60 series oval-handle valves with locking brackets, add -JLK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-6TS4-JLK For a sleeve color other than orange, add a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-6TS4-JLK-BL
Oval Latch-Lock Handles

A B
Oval latch-lock handles are available for 63 and 65 -way series valves. The handles can lock valves open or closed and accommodate shackle diameters smaller than 0.38 in. (8.3 mm). Valves with oval latch-lock handles cannot be panel mounted.
Valve Series 63 W63 65 W65
Kit Ordering Numbers 8-Bolt and 4-Bolt Valves Welded Valves Lock in open and closed position SS-51K-63LLK-OG SS-51K-65LLK-OG SS-51K-S63LLK-OG SS-51K-W63LLK-OG SS-51K-S65LLK-OG SS-51K-W65LLK-OG Lock in open position
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C 3.05 4.09

(104)
.34
(59.4)
(77.5)
.06
(5.3)
3.35 4.7 (10) .46 (6.5)

(85.1)
Latch-Lock Kits
Kits include:
stainless steel oval handle with
.45
(6.)
trigger mechanism and orange vinyl sleeve

stainless steel stop lock-plate
63 65
SS-51K-63LLKO-OG SS-51K-65LLKO-OG
SS-51K-S63LLKO-OG SS-51K-S65LLKO-OG Lock in closed position
4.09
(104)
.34
(59.4)
3.05
(77.5)
4.7
(10)
.46
(6.5)
3.35
(85.1)
bracket (not required for W60 series valves)

body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits 63 W63 65 W65 SS-51K-63LLKC-OG SS-51K-65LLKC-OG
SS-51K-S63LLKC-OG SS-51K-W63LLKC-OG SS-51K-S65LLKC-OG SS-51K-W65LLKC-OG
3.05 4.09
(104)
only)
body fasteners (4-bolt valve kits
.34
(59.4)
(77.5)
.06
(5.3)
only)
stem spring instructions.
3.35 4.7
(10)
.46
(6.5)
(85.1)
.45
(6.)
Oval Latch-Lock Handle Kits

Select a kit ordering number. For a sleeve color other than orange, replace OG in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-51K-63LLK-BL
Valves with Oval-Latch-Lock-Handles

To order 60 series valves with oval latch-lock handles, add -LLK to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-63TS8-LLK For a sleeve color other than orange, insert a dash and a sleeve color designator. Example: SS-63TS8-BL-LLK
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 00, 004, 005, 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI January 008, R5 MS-01-137
www.swagelok.com
Proce ss Ball Valve Ve nt O ptions

E x te r nal a nd Inte r nal Ball Ve nts
For valve ordering information, pressure ratings, and other technical data, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146.
External Ball Vents4-Bolt, 2-Way Valves

Purpose
The vent port evacuates trapped pressure from the system directly to atmosphere when the valve is closed. The ball contains a vent passage isolated from the ball orice to prevent continuous leakage from the body vent port when the valve is open. The downstream vent provides an escape path for system uid downstream of the valve. The upstream vent provides an escape path for system uid upstream of the valve.
Operation
External Downstream Vent (DV)
When the valve is open, system uids ow through the valve. No venting occurs because the vent passage is isolated from the ow path. Vent passage Valve Open
Vent passage
External Upstream Vent (UV)

When the valve is open, system uids ow through the valve. No venting occurs because the vent passage is isolated from the ow path.
Valve Open
Upstream
Vent port
Downstream
Upstream
Vent port
Downstream Vent passage
When the valve is closed, shutoff occurs only on the upstream side. Downstream uids ow through the vent passage to the vent port and are released to atmosphere. W-ELD-340 Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28
Valve Closed
When the valve is closed, shutoff occurs only on the downstream side. Upstream uids ow through the vent passage to the vent port and are released to atmosphere. W-ELD-340 Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28
Valve Closed
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Downstream
Process Ball Valve Vent Options
Ratings for 60 series valves with external ball vents are the same as those of switching (3-way) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Valves with External Ball Vents
Valves contain a vent port on the pad side of the valve body. To order, select a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, and insert DV for downstream vent or UV for upstream vent. Example: SS-62TDVS4 Balls with external vents are not available in chlorine series (C60V) valves or in any other valves with internal vents.
Testing
Valves with Reinforced PTFE, Carbon/Glass PTFE, Polyethylene, and Virgin PTFE Seats
Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at its maximum pressure rating. Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
Valves with External Ball Vents and Vent Tubes

Valve Body (side view)
Pad side
Swing-out side
Valves with PEEK Seats

Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 psig (3.4 bar) for leak-tight integrity of the seats as specied by FCI 70-2 Specication Class VI. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
Vent tube
Vent tube
Bottom Vent tube Tubes welded to vent ports allow controlled release or recovery of vented uids.
Vent tubes are 2 in. (50.8 mm) long with 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
outside diameter and 0.049 in. (1.24 mm) wall thickness. Stainless steel valves have 316L vent tubes; brass valves have copper vent tubes. For information about vent tube materials used with other valve body materials, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Up to three vent tubes can be ordered and their locations
specied for each valve.

A vent tube on the swing-out side of the valve does not
interfere with the swing-out feature. To order optional vent tubes, add a vent tube designator to the ordering number.
Number of Vent Tubes 1 Vent Tube Location Swing-out side Pad side Bottom Swing-out and pad sides Pad and bottom sides Swing-out and bottom sides Swing-out, pad, and bottom sides Designator -SX -XP -XB -SP -PB -SB -SPB
2 3
Example: SS-62TDVS4-SX
Caution: When installing a Swagelok externally vented valve, position the vent port or tube so that system uid is directed away from operating personnel. Operating personnel must take suitable measures to protect themselves from exposure to system uids.
Internal Ball Vents2-Way Valves

Purpose
The internal vent equalizes pressure in the ball and body to that of the system, protecting the valve from temperatureinduced overpressurization. The ball contains a vent passage that intersects the ball orice at a 90 angle. There are no external vent ports. The downstream vent equalizes pressure in the ball and body to that of the downstream system in the closed position. The upstream vent equalizes uid pressure to that of the upstream system in the closed position.
Vent passage
Operation
Internal Downstream Vent (NDV)
When the valve is open, system uids ow through the valve. The vent passage allows pressure inside the valve to remain equal to system pressure.
Internal Upstream Vent (NUV)

Valve Open
Vent passage
Valve Open
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Vent passage
Downstream
When the valve is closed, the vent passage faces downstream, allowing pressure to equalize between the body and the downstream system.
Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28 W-ELD-340
When the valve is closed, the vent passage faces upstream, allowing pressure to equalize between the body and the upstream system.Vented 60 Series MS-02-28 Whitey W-ELD-340
Valve Closed
Valve Closed
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Downstream
Valves with Upstream Internal Vents
Ratings for 60 series valves with upstream internal ball vents are the same as those of standard 2-way (on-off) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Select a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, and insert NDV for downstream vent or NUV for upstream vent. Example: SS-62TNDVS4 Balls with internal vents are standard in re series (A60T) and chlorine series (C60V) valves.
Valves with Downstream Internal Vents

Ratings for 60 series valves with downstream internal ball vents are the same as those of switching (3-way) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Testing
Every 60 series ball Valve Vent Test Pressure valve with internally Series Option psig (bar) vented ball is factory 62, 63, Upstream and 1000 (69) tested with nitrogen at 65 downstream the pressures shown Downstream 500 (34.4) 67, 68 in the table at right. Upstream 1000 (69) Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.

Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 psig (3.4 bar) for leaktight integrity of the seats as specied by FCI 70-2 Specication Class VI. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1995, 1996, 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2006, R3 MS-02-28
www.swagelok.com
Proce ss Ball Valve Ve nt O ptions

E x te r nal a nd Inte r nal Ball Ve nts
For valve ordering information, pressure ratings, and other technical data, see the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146.
External Ball Vents4-Bolt, 2-Way Valves

Purpose
The vent port evacuates trapped pressure from the system directly to atmosphere when the valve is closed. The ball contains a vent passage isolated from the ball orice to prevent continuous leakage from the body vent port when the valve is open. The downstream vent provides an escape path for system uid downstream of the valve. The upstream vent provides an escape path for system uid upstream of the valve.
Operation
External Downstream Vent (DV)
When the valve is open, system uids ow through the valve. No venting occurs because the vent passage is isolated from the ow path. Vent passage Valve Open
Vent passage
External Upstream Vent (UV)

When the valve is open, system uids ow through the valve. No venting occurs because the vent passage is isolated from the ow path.
Valve Open
Upstream
Vent port
Downstream
Upstream
Vent port
Downstream Vent passage
When the valve is closed, shutoff occurs only on the upstream side. Downstream uids ow through the vent passage to the vent port and are released to atmosphere. W-ELD-340 Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28
Valve Closed
When the valve is closed, shutoff occurs only on the downstream side. Upstream uids ow through the vent passage to the vent port and are released to atmosphere. W-ELD-340 Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28
Valve Closed
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Downstream
Ratings for 60 series valves with external ball vents are the same as those of switching (3-way) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Valves with External Ball Vents
Valves contain a vent port on the pad side of the valve body. To order, select a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, and insert DV for downstream vent or UV for upstream vent. Example: SS-62TDVS4 Balls with external vents are not available in chlorine series (C60V) valves or in any other valves with internal vents.
Testing
Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at its maximum pressure rating. Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
Valves with External Ball Vents and Vent Tubes

Valve Body (side view)
Pad side
Swing-out side

Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 psig (3.4 bar) for leak-tight integrity of the seats as specied by FCI 70-2 Specication Class VI. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
Vent tube
Vent tube
Bottom Vent tube Tubes welded to vent ports allow controlled release or recovery of vented uids.
Vent tubes are 2 in. (50.8 mm) long with 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
outside diameter and 0.049 in. (1.24 mm) wall thickness. Stainless steel valves have 316L vent tubes; brass valves have copper vent tubes. For information about vent tube materials used with other valve body materials, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Up to three vent tubes can be ordered and their locations
specied for each valve.

A vent tube on the swing-out side of the valve does not
interfere with the swing-out feature. To order optional vent tubes, add a vent tube designator to the ordering number.
Number of Vent Tubes 1 Vent Tube Location Swing-out side Pad side Bottom Swing-out and pad sides Pad and bottom sides Swing-out and bottom sides Swing-out, pad, and bottom sides Designator -SX -XP -XB -SP -PB -SB -SPB
2 3
Example: SS-62TDVS4-SX
Caution: When installing a Swagelok externally vented valve, position the vent port or tube so that system uid is directed away from operating personnel. Operating personnel must take suitable measures to protect themselves from exposure to system uids.
Internal Ball Vents2-Way Valves

Purpose
The internal vent equalizes pressure in the ball and body to that of the system, protecting the valve from temperatureinduced overpressurization. The ball contains a vent passage that intersects the ball orice at a 90 angle. There are no external vent ports. The downstream vent equalizes pressure in the ball and body to that of the downstream system in the closed position. The upstream vent equalizes uid pressure to that of the upstream system in the closed position.
Vent passage
Operation
Internal Downstream Vent (NDV)
Internal Upstream Vent (NUV)

Valve Open
Vent passage
Valve Open
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Vent passage
Downstream
When the valve is closed, the vent passage faces downstream, allowing pressure to equalize between the body and the downstream system.
Whitey Vented 60 Series MS-02-28 W-ELD-340
When the valve is closed, the vent passage faces upstream, allowing pressure to equalize between the body and the upstream system.Vented 60 Series MS-02-28 Whitey W-ELD-340
Valve Closed
Valve Closed
Upstream
Downstream
Upstream
Downstream
Valves with Upstream Internal Vents
Ratings for 60 series valves with upstream internal ball vents are the same as those of standard 2-way (on-off) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Select a valve ordering number from the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, and insert NDV for downstream vent or NUV for upstream vent. Example: SS-62TNDVS4 Balls with internal vents are standard in re series (A60T) and chlorine series (C60V) valves.
Valves with Downstream Internal Vents

Ratings for 60 series valves with downstream internal ball vents are the same as those of switching (3-way) valves containing the same seat material. See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for complete pressure-temperature ratings.
Testing
Every 60 series ball Valve Vent Test Pressure valve with internally Series Option psig (bar) vented ball is factory 62, 63, Upstream and 1000 (69) tested with nitrogen at 65 downstream the pressures shown Downstream 500 (34.4) 67, 68 in the table at right. Upstream 1000 (69) Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.

Every 60 series ball valve with externally vented ball is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 psig (3.4 bar) for leaktight integrity of the seats as specied by FCI 70-2 Specication Class VI. Shell testing with nitrogen at the maximum rated pressure is performed on 62, 63, and 65 series valves to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. Shell testing with water at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is performed on 67 and 68 series valves.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1995, 1996, 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI May 2006, R3 MS-02-28
www.swagelok.com
Proce ss Inte r face Valve s
Ke nmac Se r ie s Proce s s Inte r face Val ve s a nd Proce s s Monof la nge s

Stainless steel, carbon steel, and duplex stainless steel materials Pressure ratings in accordance with ASME B16.5 Flanged connections compatible with ASME B16.5 Ball valve bore sizes from 3/8 to 2 in. (9.5 to 50.8 mm)
Process Interface Valves
Contents
Process Instrumentation and Piping
Markets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball Valve Module Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . Needle Valve Module Advantages . . . . . . . .
Flange Connections
3 3 3 3 4 4
Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 5

VB03 Series

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sour Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 6 6 6 6 7
VB04 Series
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Process Monoflanges
MN02 Series
Process Monoflanges
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Sour Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MN03 Series Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
MN04 Series
Accessories
Antitamper Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Swagelok process instrumentation and piping products enable a smooth transition from the process piping system to instrumentation in a single configuration, providing fewer potential leak points, lower installed weight, and a smaller space envelope .
Markets
Oil and gas Chemical Petrochemical Power generation
Applications
Process piping
isolation points
Direct mount to
instruments
Close coupling of
instruments
Chemical injection and
sampling points
Double block and bleed
isolation
Vents and drains
Mark Karrass/Corbis .
Installation Advantages
Compact size and
reduced weight minimize space envelope and support structure required .

Installation of a single
26.5 in. (67.3 cm)
24 in. (61 cm)
valve unit is faster than multiple valves .

Single valve unit reduces
the number of joints and potential leak paths .

Single-source unit
12 in. (30.5 cm) 9.5 in. (24 cm)
reduces maintenance time and costs .
Traditional 3-Valve Assembly (left) and Swagelok VB04 Series Double Block and Bleed Valve (right)
Globe-Gauge Root Valve Assembly (left) and Swagelok Process Monoflange Valve (right)
Custom Configurations
Swagelok process interface valves and process monoflanges can be configured to suit a variety of special applications . In addition to double block and bleed assemblies, single block and block and bleed combinations are available . Block and bleed globe valve module options are also available for all configurations . Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for assistance with any special requirements .

Ball Valve Module Advantages
Ball valves act as primary and secondary isolation valves in process interface assemblies .
Lockable handle option prevents inadvertent actuation .
Independent handle nuts lock stem assembly in place if handle is removed . Live-loaded stem seal ensures positive sealing across the pressure and temperature range . Internally loaded stem protects against blowout . Live-loaded seats maintain system seal through changes in pressure and temperature .
Stainless steel handle and external trim for improved corrosion resistance . Stem and body shoulders are separated by PEEK thrust bearing to ensure smooth, low-torque actuation .
Body seals protect threads from system media .
Cavity pressure relief prevents overpressurization from thermal expansion of system media when the valve is closed .
Needle Valve Module Advantages

Needle valves act as primary and secondary isolation valves in process monoflanges and as vent valves in monoflange and process interface assemblies . Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and lock nut to ensure positive actuation . Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation . Two-piece knuckle joint provides nonrotating needle feature . Joint is located above the packing, protected from system media . Bolted bonnet shown; outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) bolted and screwed bonnets available . Nonrotating needle for positive shutoff .
Shroud protects stem threads against ingress of dirt and dust .
Stem threads above packing, protected from system media .
Choice of packing and bonnet seal materials for monoflanges .
Safety back-seating needle seals in fully open position .
Flange Connections
Swagelok process instrumentation and piping products carry the pressure-temperature ratings of their flange end connections, which meet ASME B16 .5 dimensional specifications and pressure ratings in a range of flange sizes and pressure classes . Ratings shown below are taken from ASME B16 .5-003, Tables - . and F- . . Ratings are for F316/F316L stainless steel . For valve working temperature ratings, see page 6 for process interface valves and page 1 for process monoflanges .
Working Pressure by Class, psig

ASME Class Temperature F 0 to 100 00 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 150 75 35 15 195 170 140 15 110 95 80 65 300 70 60 560 515 480 450 440 435 45 40 40 600 1440 140 110 105 955 900 885 870 855 845 835 900 160 1860 1680 1540 1435 1355 135 1305 180 165 155 1500 3600 3095 795 570 390 55 10 170 135 110 090 2500 6000 5160 4660 480 3980 3760 3680 360 3560 350 3480 Working Pressure, psig
Working Pressure by Class, bar

ASME Class Temperature C 9 to 38 50 100 150 00 50 300 35 350 375 400 45 450 150 19 .0 18 .4 16 . 14 .8 13 .7 1 .1 10 . 9 .3 8 .4 7 .4 6 .5 5 .5 4 .6 300 49 .6 48 .1 4 . 38 .5 35 .7 33 .4 31 .6 30 .9 30 .3 9 .9 9 .4 9 .1 8 .8 600 99 .3 96 . 84 .4 77 .0 71 .3 66 .8 63 . 61 .8 60 .7 59 .8 58 .9 58 .3 57 .7 900 148 .9 144 .3 16 .6 115 .5 107 .0 100 .1 94 .9 9 .7 91 .0 89 .6 88 .3 87 .4 86 .5 1500 48 . 40 .6 11 .0 19 .5 178 .3 166 .9 158 .1 154 .4 151 .6 149 .4 147 . 145 .7 144 . 2500 413 .7 400 .9 351 .6 30 .8 97 . 78 .1 63 .5 57 .4 5 .7 49 .0 45 .3 4 .9 40 .4 Working Pressure, bar
Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change .
Class 150
Nominal Flange Size in . 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/ Dimensions in . (mm) A 3 .50
(88 .9)
Class 300/Class 600

Mounting Holes D Nominal Flange Size in . 1/ 3/4 1 4 1 1/ 3 Dimensions in . (mm) A 3 .75
(95 .)
Mounting Holes D 4 4 4 4 8 8
C dia, D number of holes
B .38
(60 .5)
C 0 .6
(15 .7)
B .6
(66 .5)
C 0 .6
(15 .7)
3 .88
(98 .6)
.75
(69 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
4 .6
(117)
3 .5
(8 .6)
0 .75
(19 .0)
4 .5
(108)
3 .1
(79 .)
0 .6
(15 .7)
4 .88
(14)
3 .50
(88 .9)
0 .75
(19 .0)
5 .00
(17)
3 .88
(98 .6)
0 .6
(15 .7)
6 .1
(155)
4 .50
(114)
0 .88
( .4)
6 .00
(15)
4 .75
(11)
0 .75
(19 .0)
6 .50
(165)
5 .00
(17)
0 .75
(19 .0)
7 .50
(190)
6 .00
(15)
0 .75
(19 .0)
8 .5
(10)
6 .6
(168)
0 .88
( .4)
Class 900/Class 1500

Nominal Flange Size in . 1/ 3/4 1
T dimension depends on series and configuration .
Class 2500
Mounting Holes D 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 Nominal Flange Size in . 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/ Dimensions in . (mm) A 5 .5
(134)
Dimensions in . (mm) A 4 .75

(11)
Mounting Holes D 4 4 4 4 8
B 3 .5
(8 .6)
C 0 .88
( .4)
B 3 .50
(88 .9)
C 0 .88
( .4)
5 .13
(130)
3 .50
(88 .9)
0 .88
( .4)
5 .50
(140)
3 .75
(95 .)
0 .88
( .4)
5 .88
(149)
4 .00
(10)
1 .00
(5 .4)
6 .5
(159)
4 .5
(108)
1 .00
(5 .4)
1 1/ 3 (cl 900) 3 (cl 1500)
7 .00
(178)
4 .88
(14)
1 .13
(8 .7)
8 .00
(03)
5 .75
(156)
1 .5
(31 .8)
8 .50
(16)
6 .50
(165)
1 .00
(5 .4)
9 .5
(35)
6 .75
(171)
1 .13
(8 .7)
9 .50
(41)
7 .50
(190)
1 .00
(5 .4)
10 .5
(67)
8 .00
(03)
1 .5
(31 .8)

Swagelok process interface valves provide a smooth transition from process to instrumentation systems in a single, compact assembly . Benefits include fewer leak points and reduced size and weight compared to traditional systems .
Ball Ball
Features
Process interface in one compact ball/needle/ball valve
Needle
assembly
Three-piece, bolted-body (VB03 series)
or one-piece forged body (VB04 series) construction

Bore sizes available: 1, 1 1/, and in . (5, 38, and 50 mm)
VB04 Series with Female NPT Outlet
(VB03 series)
3/8, 1/, and 3/4 in . (9 .5, 14, and 0 mm)
VB03 Series
(VB04 series)
Flange connections in accordance with
ASME B16 .5 RF and RTJ; NPT connections in accordance with ASME B1 .0 .1
Antiblowout valve stems and needles Nonrotating needle vent valve Hydrostatic test certificates complete with full chemical
Working Pressures
Class 150 to class 500, up to working temperatures listed below, in accordance with ASME B16 .5; see page 5 .
VB04 Series with Flange Outlet
Valve Working Temperatures

58 to 400F (50 to 04C) for stainless steel and duplex
Stainless Steel Component Body Balls, ball valve stems, ball valve end connections, needle valve bonnet Ball valve seat Ball valve lip seals Needle Body seals, needle valve packing, needle valve bonnet seal Body bolts (VB03 series) All other components B8M/A30 Valve Body Materials Carbon Duplex Steel Stainless Steel
valve assemblies
50 to 400F (46 to 04C) for carbon steel valve
assemblies
Testing
Every process interface valve is factory tested hydrostatically to a requirement of no visible leakage . A shell test is performed at 1 .5 times maximum rated working pressure and a seat test is performed at 1 .1 times maximum rated working pressure, in accordance with BS EN 166-1 and API 598 . A low-pressure gas seat test is performed in accordance with BS EN 166-1 and API 598 .
Material Grade/Specification Stainless steel/ Duplex Carbon steel/ ASTM A182 stainless steel/ ASTM A350 LF2 F316, F316L SS ASTM A182 F51
316 SS, 316L SS/ ASTM A479
S31803/ ASTM A479
Sour Gas Service

Process interface valves for sour gas service are available . Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ ISO 15156 . To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
PEEK PTFE outer jacket, Elgiloy spring S17400 SS/A564 condition H1150D
Graphite

L7M/A30 316 SS
PTFE-coated L7M/A30


Dimensions, VB03 Series
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change . For additional flange dimensions, see page 5 .
C Block Valve A B
Block Valve
Raised-Face (RF) Flange Process and Outlet Connections Shown

T
VENT
Bleed Valve
Full-Bore
Flange Size in . Dimensions, in . (mm) Bore in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300 600 900/1500 500 150 300 600 900/1500 500 150 300 600 900/1500 RF Flanges A B 4 .09 (104) 4 .1 (107) 4 .49 (114) 5 .87 (149) 6 .14 (156) 5 .55 (141) 5 .67 (144) 5 .98 (15) 6 .38 (16) 7 .56 (19) 5 .87 (149) 6 .0 (153) 6 .38 (16) 7 .64 (194) C L 10 .7 (7) 11 .0 (79) 11 .5 (9) 14 .3 (364) 14 .8 (377) 14 . (361) 14 .4 (367) 15 .1 (384) 15 .8 (40) 18 . (463) 15 .4 (390) 15 .7 (398) 16 .4 (416) 18 .9 (481) T 0 .64 (16 .) 0 .77 (19 .5) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .71 (43 .5) 0 .77 (19 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .08 (5 .9) 0 .83 (1 .1) 0 .98 (4 .9) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .83 (46 .5) RTJ Flanges L 11 . (85) 11 .5 (9) 14 .3 (364) 14 .8 (377) 14 .7 (374) 15 .1 (384) 15 .8 (40) 18 .3 (466) 15 .8 (403) 16 .5 (419) 19 .1 (484) T 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .71 (43 .5) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .14 (54 .4) 1 .08 (7 .5) 1 .39 (35 .3) 1 .89 (48 .0) Weight lb (kg) 33 .1 (15 .0) 36 .8 (16 .7) 38 .6 (17 .5) 46 .7 (1 .) 53 .4 (4 .) 54 .5 (4 .7) 59 .7 (7 .1) 61 .5 (7 .9) 77 .4 (35 .1) 100 (45 .5) 106 (48 .) 111 (50 .3) 113 (51 .1) 147 (66 .8)
1 (DN 5)
1
(5 .4)
11 .7 (98)
5 .0 (13)
1 1/ (DN 40)
1 1/
(38 .1)
1 .8 (35)
5 .79 (147)
(DN 50)

(50 .8)
17 .8 (45)
6 .69 (170)
Reduced-Bore
Flange Size in . Dimensions, in . (mm) Bore in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300 600 900/1500 500 150 300 600 900/1500 500 150 300 600 900 1500 RF Flanges A B 4 .1 (107) 4 .33 (110) 4 .65 (118) 6 .0 (153) 6 .50 (165) 5 .63 (143) 5 .75 (146) 6 .10 (155) 6 .61 (168) 7 .80 (198) 6 .06 (154) 6 .6 (159) 6 .61 (168) 6 .85 (174) 8 .03 (04) C L 11 .0 (79) 11 . (85) 11 .9 (301) 14 .6 (370) 15 .6 (396) 14 .3 (364) 14 .6 (37) 15 .4 (390) 16 .3 (415) 18 .7 (475) 15 .7 (400) 16 .1 (410) 16 .9 (48) 17 .4 (441) 19 .7 (500) T 0 .77 (19 .5) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .08 (5 .9) 0 .83 (1 .1) 0 .98 (7 .9) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .83 (46 .5) .33 (59 .) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 . (30 .9) 1 .58 (40 .) 1 .83 (46 .5) .1 (56 .) RTJ Flanges L 11 .5 (9) 11 .9 (301) 14 .6 (370) 15 .7 (399) 14 .8 (377) 15 .5 (393) 16 .5 (418) 18 .8 (478) 16 .3 (413) 17 .0 (431) 17 .5 (444) 19 .8 (503) T 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .14 (54 .4) 1 .08 (7 .5) 1 .39 (35 .3) 1 .89 (48 .0) .39 (60 .7) 1 .7 (3 .3) 1 .64 (41 .7) 1 .89 (48 .0) 1 .03 (57 .7) Weight lb (kg) 36 .1 (16 .4) 44 .5 (0 .) 46 .3 (1 .0) 57 .8 (6 .) 80 .7 (36 .6) 56 .7 (5 .7) 65 .7 (9 .8) 68 .8 (31 .) 96 .6 (43 .8) 17 (57 .5) 116 (5 .7) 15 (56 .7) 19 (58 .7) 15 (68 .9) 187 (84 .7)
1 1/ (DN 40)
1
(5 .4)
11 .7 (98)
5 .0 (13)
(DN 50)
1 1/
(38 .1)
1 .8 (35)
5 .79 (147)
3 (DN 80)

(50 .8)
17 .8 (45)
6 .69 (170)

Dimensions, VB04 Series
Raised-Face (RF) Flange Process and Outlet Connections All Bore Sizes
A B open
Block Valve C Block Valve Bleed Valve
Vent Port T L T Vent Port
Raised-Face (RF) Flange Process Connection, 1/2 in. Female NPT Outlet Connection 3/8 and 1/2 in. (9.5 and 14 mm) Bore Sizes
D A B open Block Valve Block Valve C Bleed Valve
Vent Port T L Vent Port

3/8 in. (9.5 mm) Bore
Flange Size in . 1/ (DN 15) Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class A B C D RF Flanges RTJ Flanges Flange/NPT 150 6 .41 (163) 6 .41 (163) 5 .91 (150) 300/600 6 .81 (173) 6 .81 (173) 900/1500 7 .99 (03) 7 .99 (03) 6 .69 (170) 500 150 6 .41 (163) 6 .41 (163) 5 .91 (150) 300/600 6 .81 (173) 6 .81 (173) 900/1500 7 .99 (03) 7 .99 (03) 6 .69 (170) 500 150 6 .41 (163) 6 .61 (168) 5 .91 (150) 300/600 4 .0 3 .78 3 .41 5 .79 7 .01 (178) 7 .01 (178) 900/1500 (10) (96 .0) (86 .5) (147) 10 .3 (61) 10 .3 (61) 7 .00 (178) 500 10 .7 (73) 10 .7 (73) 150 8 .90 (6) 9 .49 (41) 7 .00 (178) 300/600 9 .89 (51) 9 .89 (51) 900/1500 11 .5 (91) 11 .5 (91) 7 .64 (194) 500 1 .4 (316) 1 .4 (316) 150 9 .09 (31) 9 .49 (41) 7 .00 (178) 300/600 10 .1 (56) 10 .3 (61) 900/1500 1 .0 (306) 1 .0 (306) 7 .64 (194) 500 13 .6 (346) 13 .6 (346) 8 .03 (04) L T RF Flange 0 .5 (13 .) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .5 (38 .6) 0 .58 (14 .7) 0 .95 (4 .1) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) 0 .63 (16 .) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .71 (43 .5) 0 .77 (19 .5) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .08 (5 .9) 0 .83 (1 .1) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .83 (46 .5) .33 (59 .) RTJ Flange 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .5 (38 .6) 0 .95 (4 .1) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .71 (43 .5) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) .14 (54 .4) 1 .08 (7 .5) 1 .39 (35 .3) 1 .89 (48 .0) .39 (60 .7) Weight lb (kg) Flanges 9 .3 (4 .) 10 .1 (4 .6) 15 .4 (7 .0) 0 .1 (9 .1) 9 .9 (4 .5) 1 .6 (5 .7) 17 .9 (8 .1) .3 (10 .1) 11 .0 (5 .0) 14 .1 (6 .4) 5 .4 (11 .5) 31 .5 (14 .3) 16 .3 (7 .4) 4 .3 (11 .0) 36 .4 (16 .5) 56 .9 (5 .8) 0 .7 (9 .4) 8 . (1 .8) 56 .0 (5 .4) 80 .7 (36 .6) Flange/NPT 7 .3 (3 .3) 7 .5 (3 .4) 10 .4 (4 .7) 1 .8 (5 .8) 7 .7 (3 .5) 8 .6 (3 .9) 11 .7 (5 .3) 13 .9 (6 .3) 8 . (3 .7) 9 .5 (4 .3) 14 .6 (6 .6) 17 .4 (7 .9) 10 .8 (4 .9) 14 .1 (6 .4) 0 .1 (9 .1) 9 .8 (13 .5) 1 .8 (5 .8) 16 .1 (7 .3) 9 .5 (13 .4) 41 .4 (18 .8)
3/4 (DN 0)
1 (DN 5)
1 1/ (DN 40)
(DN 50)
1/2 in. (14 mm) Bore

Flange Size in . 1 (DN 5) Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 300/600 900/1500 500 L A B C D Flanges 9 .10 (31) 9 .49 (41) 10 .3 (61) 10 .7 (73) 9 .49 (41) 9 .88 (51) 11 .5 (91) 1 .4 (316) 9 .49 (41) 10 .3 (61) 1 .0 (306) 13 .6 (346) T Flange/NPT RF Flange RTJ Flange 0 .63 (16 .) 0 .89 ( .6) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .0 (5 .9) 7 .76 (197) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .45 (36 .8) 1 .71 (43 .5) 1 .71 (43 .5) 0 .77 (19 .5) 1 .0 (5 .9) 8 .15 (07) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) 1 .58 (40 .) 8 .35 (1) .08 (5 .9) .14 (54 .4) 0 .83 (1 .1) 1 .08 (7 .5) 8 .15 (07) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .39 (35 .3) 8 .35 (1) 1 .83 (46 .5) 1 .89 (48 .0) 8 .74 () .33 (59 .) .39 (60 .7) Weight lb (kg) Flanges Flange/NPT 17 .0 (7 .7) 8 . (3 .7) 19 .4 (8 .8) 9 .5 (4 .3) 8 .0 (1 .7) 14 .6 (6 .6) 34 . (16 .5) 17 .4 (7 .9) 0 .1 (9 .1) 10 .8 (4 .9) 7 .1 (1 .3) 14 .1 (6 .4) 39 .0 (17 .7) 0 .1 (9 .1) 59 .5 (7 .0) 9 .8 (13 .5) 4 .1 (10 .9) 1 .8 (5 .8) 31 .1 (14 .1) 16 .1 (7 .3) 58 .6 (6 .6) 9 .5 (13 .4) 83 .3 (37 .8) 41 .4 (18 .8)
1 1/ (DN 40)
4 .80
(1)
3 .98
(101)
3 .88
(98 .5)
6 .79
(177)
(DN 50)
3/4 in. (20 mm) Bore

Flange Size in . 1 1/ (DN 40) Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 300/600 900/1500 500 T A B C L 10 .7 (73) 11 .7 (98) 1 .7 (33) 10 .7 (73) 1 .5 (318) 14 .7 (373) RF Flange RTJ Flange 0 .77 (19 .5) 1 .0 (5 .9) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .1 (30 .8) 1 .58 (40 .) 1 .58 (40 .) .08 (5 .9) .14 (54 .4) 0 .83 (1 .1) 1 .08 (7 .5) 1 .33 (33 .8) 1 .39 (35 .3) 1 .83 (46 .5) 1 .89 (48 .0) .33 (59 .) .39 (60 .7) Weight lb (kg) 9 .5 (13 .4) 35 .1 (15 .9) 46 .1 (0 .9) 66 .1 (30 .0) 33 .5 (15 .) 38 .4 (17 .4) 65 .9 (9 .9) 91 .7 (41 .6)
7 .1
(181)
4 .5
(108)
5 .55
(141)
(DN 50)
10

Build a process interface valve ordering number by combining the designators as shown below .
VB03 Series
VB03 01 SA D 1 C 1 3 C A
A Configuration D ASME Class G Outlet Connection
01 = Full-bore ball/needle/ball (block/bleed/block) 02 = Reduced-bore ball/needle/ball (block/bleed/block)

B Materials
SA = 316 stainless steel CA = Carbon steel DA = Duplex stainless steel

C Seats, Body Seals, Stem Seals
1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 900 (3 in . flange size F only) 5 = 900/1500 (1, 1 1/, or in . flange size C, D, or E) 5 = 1500 (3 in . flange size F only) 6 = 500 (configuration 01, flange size C or D only; configuration 02, flange size D or E)
E Process Connection Flange Size
3 = Flange (same as process)

H Bleed Connection
C = 1/ in . female NPT

J Handle Options
D = PEEK, graphite, PTFE
C = 1 in . (DN 5) (full bore only; select configuration 01) D = 1 1/ in . (DN 40) E = in . (DN 50) F = 3 in . (DN 80) (reduced bore only; select configuration 02)
F Process Connection Flange Type
A = Block, nonlockable levers; bleed, antitamper B = Block, lockable levers; bleed, antitamper C = Block, nonlockable levers; bleed, bar D = Block, lockable levers; bleed, bar
ntitamper key sold separately . See A
page 17 .
1 = RF smooth (3 . to 6 .3 m) 2 = RF serrated (6 .3 to 1 .5 m) 3 = RTJ
VB04 Series
VB04 01 SA D 1 A 1 C C A
A Configuration E Process Connection Size G Outlet Connection
Ball/needle/ball (block /bleed /block) 01 = 3/8 in . (9 .5 mm) bore (all process connection sizes) 02 = 1/ in . (14 mm) bore (1, 1 1/, or in . process connections; select size C, D, or E) 03 = 3/4 in . (0 mm) bore (1 1/ or in . process connections; select size D or E)
B Materials
A = 1/ in . (DN 15) B = 3/4 in . (DN 0) C = 1 in . (DN 5) D = 1 1/ in . (DN 40) E = in . (DN 50)
F Process Connection Type
C = 1/ in . female NPT (3/8 and 1/ in . [9 .5 and 14 mm] bore only; select configuration 01 or 02) 3 = Flange
H Bleed Connection
SA = 316 stainless steel CA = Carbon steel DA = Duplex stainless steel

C Seats, Body Seals, Stem Seals
D = PEEK, graphite, PTFE

D ASME Class
1 = 150 3 = 300/600 5 = 900/1500 6 = 500
1 = Flange, RF smooth (3 . to 6 .3 m) 2 = Flange, RF serrated (6 .3 to 1 .5 m) 3 = Flange, RTJ N = Female NPT (3/8 in . [9 .5 mm] bore and 1/ in . [DN 15] size only; select configuration 01 and process connection size A) M = Male NPT (3/8 in . [9 .5 mm] bore and 1/ in . [DN 15] size only; select configuration 01 and process connection size A)
C = 1/ in . female NPT

J Handle Options
A = Block, nonlockable levers; bleed, antitamper B = Block, lockable levers; bleed, antitamper C = Block, nonlockable levers; bleed, bar D = Block, lockable levers; bleed, bar
ntitamper key sold separately . See A
page 17 .
11

Options
Integral Check Valves
Integral check valves are available on both flange and NPT connections . The metal-seated check valve is ideal for chemical injection applications in oil and gas production . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .
NPT Connection with Integral Check Valve
Spring Poppet
Chemical Injection and Process Sampling Options

Select process interface valves may be ordered in optional injection or sampling valve configurations, providing double block and bleed protection for specialized applications .
Injection Valve with Integral Check Valve and NPT Connection
Injection Flow
Optional support collar
Injection Valve Flow Compared with Sampling Valve Flow
Sampling Flow
Retaining spring
Retaining Spring Stabilizes Probe in Valve Body (shown partially inserted for demonstration purposes)
A process interface valve fitted with an injection probe and a check valve allows fluids to be dispersed into the process stream while providing protection against back flow of process fluids . The sampling valve probe draws process fluid from the flow stream .
Injection and sampling probes are available on VB03 series valves with 1 and 1 1/ in . (5 .4 and 38 mm) bores and on VB04 series valves with 3/8 and 1/ in . (9 .5 and 14 mm) bores . They are limited to process connection sizes 1 1/ in . (DN40) and larger . To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative . Probe length, nominal bore size, end preparation, and support collar size and location, if required, must be provided .
1
Process Monoflanges
Swagelok process monoflanges replace multivalve assemblies with single, flange-mounted manifold configurations . The main advantages over a typical system include compactness and weight savings, which can reduce stress from loading and vibration; fewer potential leak points; and reduced installation and maintenance times .
MN02 Series MN04 Series
Features
Compact block, block and bleed, and double
block and bleed assemblies with minimal potential leak points

Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) bolted-bonnet
MN03 Series
(MN0 series), bolted-bonnet (MN04 series), and integral screwed-bonnet (MN03 series) construction
Flange connections from 1/ to in . (DN 15 to DN 50 in
accordance with ASME B16 .5 RF and RTJ

Antiblowout valve stems and nonrotating needles Hydrostatic test certificates complete with full chemical
Working Pressures
Class 150 to class 500, up to working temperatures listed below, in accordance with ASME B16 .5; see page 5 .
Valve Body Materials Stainless Steel Component Body Carbon Steel Duplex Stainless Steel Material Grade/Specification Stainless steel/ASTM Carbon steel/ Duplex stainless steel/ A182 F316, F316L SS ASTM A350 LF2 ASTM A182 F51 316 SS, 316L SS/ASTM A479 S31803/ASTM A479 (all MN03 and MN04 series valves and (MN03 and MN04 series); MN02 series secondary block and bleed valves); J92205/ASTM A890 CF8M/ASTM A351 (MN02 series) (MN02 series primary block valve) 316 SS, 316L SS/ASTM A479 Graphite or PTFE S17400 SS/A564 condition H1150D or alloy K-500 B8M/ ASTM A30 316 SS S17400 SS/A564 condition H1150D; alloy K-500; or duplex stainless steel/ ASTM A182 F51 PTFE-coated L7M/ ASTM A30 S31803/ASTM A479
Valve Working Temperatures

Valve Body Material Stainless steel Carbon steel Duplex stainless steel Packing Material PTFE Graphite Stem Bonnet seal, gland packing Working Temperature, F (C) 58 to 400 58 to 850
(50 to 04) (55 to 454)
Bonnet
50 to 400
(46 to 04)
50 to 850
(46 to 454)
58 to 400
(50 to 04)
58 to 600
(50 to 315)
Needle
Testing
Every process monoflange is factory tested hydrostatically to a requirement of no visible leakage . A shell test is performed at 1 .5 times maximum rated working pressure and a seat test is performed at 1 .1 times maximum rated working pressure, in accordance with BS EN 166-1 and API 598 .
Bonnet bolts (MN0 and MN04 series) All other components


Sour Gas Service

Process monoflanges for sour gas service are available . Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 . To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .

13
Process Monoflanges
Configurations
Process monoflanges comprise:
A primary block valve of OS&Y bolted-bonnet needle, bolted-bonnet needle, or
integral screwed-bonnet needle valve construction

As ordered, a secondary block valve and a bleed valve of integral screwed-
bonnet needle valve construction . OS&Y bolted-bonnet (MN0 series) monoflanges are shown; configurations are also available in bolted-bonnet (MN04 series) and integral screwed-bonnet (MN03 series) monoflanges .
Block Valve
OS&Y bolted-bonnet, bolted-bonnet,
or screwed-bonnet primary isolating process valve
Block and Bleed Valve


Needle valve vent (bar or antitamper
handle)
Double Block and Bleed Valve


Secondary isolating valve (bar or
antitamper handle)
Needle valve vent (bar or antitamper
handle)
14
Process Monoflanges
Dimensions, Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) Bolted-Bonnet Assemblies (MN02 Series)
(51 .0)
.00
Block Valve C open Bleed Valve
Block Valve
NPT
Block Valve 1/ in . NPT Bleed Valve Block Valve

(44 .0)
1 .73
B open
T E
Flange Size in . 1/ (DN 15)
Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 RF Flange A 3 .94 (100) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .96 (16) 4 .33 (110) 4 .7 (10) 5 .1 (130) 5 .35 (136) 4 .7 (10) 5 .35 (136) 5 .75 (146) 6 .30 (160) 5 .35 (136) 6 .54 (166) B 4 .33 (110) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 5 .8 (134) 4 .65 (118) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .43 (138) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) C 4 .88 (14) 5 .51 (140) 5 .75 (146) 5 .1 (130) 5 .51 (140) 5 .75 (146) 5 .1 (130) 5 .51 (140) 6 .06 (154) 5 .51 (140) 6 .06 (154) 7 .4 (184) 6 .06 (154) 6 .4 (163) 7 .4 (184) 7 .76 (197) D 1 .69 (43 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) 1 .97 (50 .0) .17 (55 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) .05 (5 .0) .17 (55 .0) .36 (60 .0) 1 .97 (50 .0) .17 (55 .0) .76 (70 .0) .95 (75 .0) .36 (60 .0) .95 (75 .0) 3 .35 (85 .0) 3 .74 (95 .0) .95 (75 .0) 3 .1 (80 .0) 4 .13 (105) 4 .33 (110) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .67 (67 .9) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .4 (61 .5) .88 (73 .4) .0 (55 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .44 (61 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .87 (47 .5) .03 (51 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .67 (67 .9) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .4 (61 .5) .88 (73 .4) .0 (55 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .44 (61 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .87 (47 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) .03 (51 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) E T RTJ Flange E .03 (51 .5) T 1 .63 (41 .5) Weight lb (kg) 4 .4 ( .0) 4 .6 ( .1) 7 .0 (3 .) 9 .0 (4 .1) 4 .8 ( .) 7 .0 (3 .) 8 .4 (3 .8) 10 .4 (4 .7) 6 .0 ( .7) 7 .9 (3 .6) 11 .7 (5 .3) 13 . (6 .0) 8 .6 (3 .9) 13 .0 (5 .9) 17 .4 (7 .9) 7 .8 (1 .6) 1 .8 (5 .8) 15 .0 (6 .8) 8 .0 (1 .7) 36 .4 (16 .5)
3/4 (DN 0)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 (DN 5)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 1/ (DN 40)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
(DN 50)
300/600 900/1500 500
15
Process Monoflanges
Dimensions, Integral Screwed-Bonnet Assemblies (MN03 Series)
B open
(44 .0)
1 .73
Block Valve
NPT
Block Valve 1/ in . NPT Bleed Valve Block Valve 1 .73
(44 .0)
B open
T E
Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 RF Flange A 3 .94 (100) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .96 (16) 4 .33 (110) 4 .7 (10) 5 .1 (130) 5 .35 (136) 4 .7 (10) 5 .35 (136) 5 .75 (146) 6 .30 (160) 5 .35 (136) 6 .54 (166) B 4 .33 (110) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 5 .8 (134) 4 .65 (118) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .43 (138) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) C 4 .5 (108) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 5 .8 (134) 4 .65 (118) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 5 .04 (18) 5 .67 (144) 6 .07 (154) 6 .61 (168) 5 .67 (144) 6 .85 (174) D 1 .57 (40 .0) .17 (55 .0) .36 (60 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) .17 (55 .0) .36 (60 .0) .56 (65 .0) 1 .97 (50 .0) .36 (60 .0) .76 (70 .0) .95 (75 .0) .36 (60 .0) .95 (75 .0) 3 .35 (85 .0) 3 .94 (100) .95 (75 .0) 3 .1 (80 .0) 4 .13 (105) 4 .53 (115) E 1 .73 (44 .0) 1 .73 (44 .0) 1 .93 (48 .9) 1 .73 (44 .0) 1 .73 (44 .0) .00 (50 .9) 1 .73 (44 .0) .00 (50 .9) .00 (50 .9) 1 .73 (44 .0) 1 .81 (46 .0) .08 (5 .9) .38 (60 .4) 1 .81 (46 .0) 1 .89 (48 .0) .38 (60 .4) .59 (65 .9) T 1 .4 (31 .5) 1 .3 (33 .5) 1 .51 (38 .4) 1 .4 (31 .5) 1 .3 (33 .5) 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .4 (31 .5) 1 .51 (38 .4) 1 .71 (43 .4) 1 .4 (31 .5) 1 .3 (33 .5) 1 .59 (40 .4) .16 (54 .9) 1 .4 (31 .5) 1 .3 (33 .5) 1 .89 (47 .9) .44 (61 .9) RTJ Flange E 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .93 (48 .9) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .79 (45 .5) .00 (50 .9) 1 .79 (45 .5) .00 (50 .9) .00 (50 .9) 1 .79 (45 .5) 1 .87 (47 .5) .08 (5 .9) .38 (60 .4) 1 .87 (47 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .38 (60 .4) .59 (65 .9) T 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .38 (35 .0) 1 .51 (38 .4) 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .38 (35 .0) 1 .59 (40 .4) 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .51 (38 .4) 1 .71 (43 .4) 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .38 (35 .0) 1 .59 (40 .4) .16 (54 .9) 1 .30 (33 .0) 1 .38 (35 .0) 1 .89 (47 .9) .44 (61 .9) Weight lb (kg) 4 .0 (1 .8) 4 . (1 .9) 6 .4 ( .9) 8 . (3 .7) 4 .4 ( .0) 6 .4 ( .9) 7 .5 (3 .4) 9 .3 (4 .) 5 .3 ( .4) 7 .0 (3 .) 10 .6 (4 .8) 11 .9 (5 .4) 7 .7 (3 .5) 11 .7 (5 .3) 15 .7 (7 .1) 4 .9 (11 .3) 11 .5 (5 .) 13 .4 (6 .1) 5 .1 (11 .4) 3 .8 (14 .9)
3/4 (DN 0)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 (DN 5)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 1/ (DN 40)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
(DN 50)
300/600 900/1500 500
16
Process Monoflanges
Dimensions, Bolted-Bonnet Assemblies (MN04 Series)
(51 .0)
.00
Block Valve
NPT
Block Valve 1/ in . NPT Bleed Valve Block Valve

(44 .5)
1 .75
B open
T E
Dimensions, in . (mm) ASME Class 150 300/600 900/1500 500 150 RF Flange A 3 .94 (100) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .17 (106) 4 .57 (116) 4 .7 (10) 4 .96 (16) 4 .33 (110) 4 .7 (10) 5 .1 (130) 5 .35 (136) 4 .7 (10) 5 .35 (136) 5 .75 (146) 6 .30 (160) 5 .35 (136) 6 .54 (166) B 4 .33 (110) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 4 .49 (114) 4 .88 (14) 5 .04 (18) 5 .8 (134) 4 .65 (118) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .43 (138) 5 .04 (18) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) 5 .43 (138) 5 .67 (144) 6 .61 (168) C 4 .7 (10) 5 .35 (136) 5 .59 (14) 4 .96 (16) 5 .35 (136) 5 .59 (14) 4 .96 (16) 5 .35 (136) 5 .91 (150) 5 .35 (136) 5 .91 (150) 7 .09 (180) 5 .91 (150) 6 . (158) 7 .09 (180) 7 .56 (19) D 1 .69 (43 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) 1 .97 (50 .0) .17 (55 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) .05 (5 .0) .17 (55 .0) .36 (60 .0) 1 .97 (50 .0) .17 (55 .0) .76 (70 .0) .95 (75 .0) .36 (60 .0) .95 (75 .0) 3 .35 (85 .0) 3 .74 (95 .0) .95 (75 .0) 3 .1 (80 .0) 4 .13 (105) 4 .33 (110) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .67 (67 .9) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .4 (61 .5) .88 (73 .4) .0 (55 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .44 (61 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .87 (47 .5) .03 (51 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .03 (51 .5) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .67 (67 .9) .11 (53 .5) .19 (55 .5) .4 (61 .5) .88 (73 .4) .0 (55 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .95 (49 .5) .44 (61 .9) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) 1 .87 (47 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) .03 (51 .5) 1 .63 (41 .5) E T RTJ Flange E .03 (51 .5) T 1 .63 (41 .5) Weight lb (kg) 4 .4 ( .0) 4 .6 ( .1) 7 .0 (3 .) 9 .0 (4 .1) 4 .8 ( .) 7 .0 (3 .) 8 .4 (3 .8) 10 .4 (4 .7) 6 .0 ( .7) 7 .9 (3 .6) 11 .7 (5 .3) 13 . (6 .0) 8 .6 (3 .9) 13 .0 (5 .9) 17 .4 (7 .9) 7 .8 (1 .6) 1 .8 (5 .8) 15 .0 (6 .8) 8 .0 (1 .7) 36 .4 (16 .5)
3/4 (DN 0)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 (DN 5)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
1 1/ (DN 40)
300/600 900/1500 500 150
(DN 50)
300/600 900/1500 500
17
Process Monoflanges
Build a process monoflange ordering number by combining the designators as shown below .
MN 02 01 SA A 1 A 1 C A A
A Series E ASME Class J Bleed Connection
02 = OS&Y bolted-bonnet needle valve (primary block) 03 = Integral screwed-bonnet needle valve (primary block) 04 = Bolted-bonnet needle valve (primary block)
B Configuration
1 = 150 3 = 300/600 5 = 900/1500 6 = 500

F Process Connection Size
A = 1/4 in . female NPT C = 1/ in . female NPT

K Handles Configuration 01 B = Block, bar D = Block, handwheel Configuration 02 A = Block, bar; bleed, antitamper B = Block and bleed, bar C = Block, handwheel; bleed, antitamper D = Block, handwheel; bleed, bar Configuration 03 A = All block, bar; bleed, antitamper B = All handles, bar C = 1st block, handwheel; nd block, bar; bleed, antitamper D = 1st block, handwheel; nd block, bar; bleed, bar
Antitamper key sold separately .
01 = Block 02 = Block and bleed 03 = Double block and bleed

C Materials
A = 1/ in . (DN 15) B = 3/4 in . (DN 0) C = 1 in . (DN 5) D = 1 1/ in . (DN 40) E = in . (DN 50)
G Process Connection
SA = 316 SS body and bonnet CA = Carbon steel body, 316 SS bonnet DA = Duplex SS body and bonnet
D Needle, Seals
A = S17400 SS, PTFE B = S17400 SS, graphite C = Alloy K-500, PTFE D = Alloy K-500, graphite E = Needle same as body material, PTFE seals (duplex SS body and bonnet only; select DA materials) F = Needle same as body material, graphite seals (duplex SS body and bonnet only; select DA materials)
1 = FlangeRF smooth (3 . to 6 .3 m) 2 = FlangeRF serrated (6 .3 to 1 .5 m) 3 = FlangeRTJ (not available with ASME class 150 1/ and 3/4 in . [DN 15 and DN 0] process connection sizes)
H Outlet Connection
C = 1/ in . female NPT 2 = Monoflange wafer (thru holes)
Accessories
Antitamper Key
For Process Interface Valves and Process Monoflanges
Fits all Swagelok antitamper
handles .
Order separately .
Ordering number: S004468
Flange Adapters
See the Swagelok Flange Adapters catalog, MS-0-00, for more information .
Instrumentation Ball Valves

See the Swagelok One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves40G Series and 40 Series catalog, MS-0-331, for more information .
Pressure Gauges
See the Swagelok Pressure Gauges, Industrial and ProcessPGI Series catalog, MS-0-170, for more information .
Ball Valves
See the Swagelok Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application60 Series catalog, MS-01-146, for more information .
Tubing
Swagelok can provide a variety of stainless steel tubing in fractional, metric, and Imperial sizes . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .

See the Swagelok Forged-Body Needle Valves, 10 000 psig (689 bar)F10 Series catalog, MS-0-15, for more information .
Swagelok, KenmacTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI March 008, R1 MS-0-340
www.swagelok.com
Propor tional Relief Valves
R Series
Liquid or gas service Set pressures from 10 to 6000 psig (0.68 to 413 bar) 1/4 and 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm end connections
Proportional Relief Valves
Spring adjusts to provide desired set pressure
Cap provides easy external set pressure adjustment Label identifies set pressure range
Lock nut maintains cap position, ensuring set pressure adjustment
Lock wire capability secures cap to maintain set pressure adjustment
Quad seal eliminates leakage around stem during relief mode
O-ring provides elastomer-to-metal seal for positive shutoff at seat. (Other series use bonded disc. See Materials of Construction)
End connections include gaugeable Swagelok tube fittings and NPT or ISO pipe threads
R3A series valve shown.
Features
High-Pressure Valves
Service up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Multiple springs for a selection of set pressure ranges 1/4 in. and 6 and 8 mm end connectionsR3A series 1/2 in. and 12 mm end connectionsR4 series
Applications
R series relief valves are proportional relief valves that open gradually as the pressure increases. Consequently, they do not have a capacity rating at a given pressure rise (accumulation), and they are not certified to ASME or any other codes. Some system applications require relief valves to meet specic safety codes. The system designer and user must determine when such codes apply and whether these relief valves conform to them.
Low-Pressure Valves
Service up to 300 psig (20.6 bar) One spring for the full set pressure range 1/4 in. and 6 and 8 mm end connectionsRL3 series 1/2 in. and 12 mm end connectionsRL4 series
Operation
R series relief valves OPEN when system pressure reaches the set pressure and CLOSE when system pressure falls below the set pressure.
High-pressure R3A and R4 seriesselect and install the
spring that covers the required set pressure; apply the matching label to the cap.
Low-pressure RL3 and RL4 seriesthe spring is already
installed. For valves not actuated for a period of time, initial relief pressure may be higher than the set pressure.
Technical Data
Series Working Pressure at 70F (20C) Set Pressure Outlet Pressure Fluorocarbon FKM R3A 6000 psig (413 bar); up to 8000 psig (551 bar) during relief 50 to 6000 psig (3.4 to 413 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) Neoprene Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM R4 6000 psig (413 bar) 50 to 1500 psig (3.4 to 103 bar) 2500 psig (172 bar) Neoprene Ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon FKM RL3 and RL4 300 psig (20.6 bar) 10 to 225 psig (0.68 to 15.5 bar) 225 psig (15.5 bar) Neoprene Ethylene propylene
Seal Material Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 30 (34) 10 (23) 0 (17) 10 (12) 25 (4) 30 (1) 50 (10) 150 (65) 200 (93) 250 (121) 275 (135) 300 (148)
Buna N
Buna N
Buna N
Maximum Set Pressure, psig (bar) 6000

(413)
6000 6000
(413) (413)
6000
(413)
5580
(384)
5580
(384)
5580
(384)
5580
(384)
225 1500
(103)
225
(15.5)
225
(15.5)
225
(15.5)
5160
(355)
5160
(355)
5160
(355)
5160
(355)
1500 1500
(103) (103)
1500
(103)
(15.5)
4910
(338)
4910
(338)
4910
(338)
4910
(338)
4660
(321)
The pressure-temperature ratings are based upon laboratory testing to ensure that the cracking pressure does not deviate by more than 20 % from the initial
room-temperature set pressure.
Outlet pressure should not exceed inlet pressure.
Set Pressure and Resealing Pressure

Set pressure is the upstream pressure at which the first
Back Pressure
High-Pressure Valves (R3A and R4 Series)
The effect of system back pressure is minimized by the design of these high-pressure valves.
indication of flow occurs. Set pressure of each valve after initial relief is repeatable within 5 % at room temperature.
Resealing pressure is the upstream pressure at which there
is no indication of flow. Resealing pressure is always lower than set pressure.
Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 and RL4 Series)

System back pressure increases the set pressure of the valve. To compensate, multiply the back pressure by 0.8 and subtract the result from the desired set pressure. Use the result to pre-set the valve while back pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure. Example: Desired set pressure is 120 psig. System back pressure is 40 psig. Step 1. Multiply back pressure by 0.8. 40 psig 0.8 = 32 psig. Step 2. Subtract result from desired set pressure. 120 psig 32 psig = 88 psig. Step 3. Pre-set proportional relief valve to 88 psig.
Testing
Every R series proportional relief valve is tested for set and resealing performance.
Minimum Resealing Pressure as a Percentage of Set Pressure, % 50 91 50 84
Series RL3, RL4 R3A, R4
Test Set Pressure psig (bar) 10 to 20 (0.68 to 1.3) 175 to 225 (12.0 to 15.5) 100 to 200 (6.8 to 13.7) 850 to 1000 (58.5 to 68.9)

All Swagelok R series relief valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.

RL3 and R3A 1 2 3 4
RL3 only
RL4 and R4 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
Component Plug Cap Label Lock nut Spring Sleeve Spring support Bonnet O-ring Quad seal Retainer Stem Bonded disc Seat Gasket Seat retainer O-ring Insert Body Lubricants
Material Grade/ASTM Specification RL3, R3Anickel-plated brass; RL4, R4brass 316 SS/A479 Polyester RL3, R3Apowdered metal 300 series SS/B783; RL4, R4316 SS/A276 S17700 SS/AMS 5678 304 SS/A240 RL3, R3Apowdered metal 300 series SS/B783; RL4, R4316 SS/A276 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-coated fluorocarbon FKM RL3, R3A316 SS/A666; RL4, R4316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM-bonded 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A479 PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240 316 SS/A479 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A182 Molybdenum disulfide-based dry film and paste; silicone-based
7 8
6 7 8 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
19 R3A only RL4 only
9 10 11 12
12a Bonded stem
13 14 15
12
16 17 18 19
16 17 18
9 10 11 12
R4 only
Wetted components listed in italics. Material Safety Data Sheet for bonding agents available on request.
12a
13 19
RL3
R3A
RL4
R4

Air
RL3 and RL4 Series
Air Flow, std L/min
Set Pressure 225 psig (15.5 bar)
Water
RL3 RL4
RL3 and RL4 Series

Water Flow, L/min
RL3 RL4
R3A and R4 Series

Air Flow, std L/min
Set Pressure 5500 psig (378 bar)
R3A
R3A and R4 Series

Water Flow, L/min
R3A
Inlet Pressure, bar
4500 psig (310 bar)
4500 psig (310 bar)
3500 psig (241 bar)
Air Flow, std ft3/min Water Flow, U.S. gal/min Air Flow, std L/min
R3A R4
Water Flow, L/min
R3A R4
Inlet Pressure, bar
2600 psig (179 bar)
2000 psig (137 bar)
2000 psig (137 bar)
1000 psig (68.9 bar) 1000 psig (68.9 bar)
Air Flow, std ft3/min Water Flow, U.S. gal/min Air Flow, std L/min R3A R4 Water Flow, L/min R3A R4
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
350 psig (24.1 bar)
350 psig (24.1 bar)
200 psig (13.7 bar)
200 psig (13.7 bar)
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
Dimensions

End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size Ordering Number Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C D E H
RL3 series: 0.19 in. (4.8 mm) fully open orifice

0.06 in.
(1.5 mm)
1/4 in. SS-RL3S4 Swagelok tube fittings

A max
lock wire hole
6 mm SS-RL3S6MM 8 mm SS-RL3S8MM
1.44
(36.6)
1.60
(40.6)
4.14
(105)
0.09 in.
(2.2 mm)
lock wire hole
E max
Male NPT/ Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-RL3M4-S4 tube fitting Male NPT/ 1/4 in. SS-RL3M4-F4 female NPT Male ISO/ 1/4 in. SS-RL3M4F4-RT female ISO Swagelok tube fittings Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male NPT/ female NPT 1/2 in. SS-RL4S8 12 mm SS-RL4S12MM 1/2 in. SS-RL4M8S8 1/2 in. SS-RL4M8F8
2.70
(68.6)
1.19
(30.2)
1.60
(40.6)
0.43
(10.9)
3.89
(98.8)
4.09
(104)
1.19
(30.2)
1.17
(29.7)
3.89
(98.8)
1.19
(30.2)
1.17
(29.7)
3.89
(98.8)
RL4 series: 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) fully open orifice 1.83 (46.5) 4.09
(104)
5.92
(150)
Outlet Inlet
1.43
(36.3)
1.83
(46.5)
0.50
(12.7)
5.52
(140)
5.37
(136)
1.43
(36.3)
1.43
(36.3)
5.52
(140)

End Connections Inlet/Outlet
H max 0.06 in.
(1.5 mm)
Size
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C D E H
R3A series: 0.14 in. (3.6 mm) fully open orifice 1/4 in. SS-4R3A Swagelok tube fittings 6 mm SS-6R3A-MM 8 mm SS-8R3A-MM Male NPT/ Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-4R3A1 tube fitting Male NPT/ 1/4 in. SS-4R3A5 female NPT Male ISO/ 1/4 in. SS-4R3A5-RT female ISO Swagelok tube fittings
Outlet Inlet
1.44
(36.6)
1.60
(40.6)
4.14
(105)
lock wire hole
2.70
(68.6)
1.19
(30.2)
1.60
(40.6)
0.43
(10.9)
3.89
(98.8)
4.09
(104)
0.09 in.
(2.2 mm)
1.19
(30.2)
1.17
(29.7)
3.89
(98.8)
lock wire hole
1.19
(30.2)
1.17
(29.7)
3.89
(98.8)
R4 series: 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) fully open orifice 1/2 in. SS-R4S8 12 mm SS-R4S12MM 1/2 in. SS-R4M8S8 1/2 in. SS-R4M8F8 4.09
(104)
1.83 (46.5) 1.43

(36.3)
5.92
(150)
Valve with Manual Override Handle
Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Male NPT/ female NPT
1.83
(46.5)
0.50
(12.7)
5.52
(140)
5.37
(136)
1.43
(36.3)
1.43
(36.3)
5.52
(140)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, and JIS B0203.
Valve contains spring; set pressure must be adjusted. Select a valve ordering number.

Seal Materials
Fluorocarbon FKM is the standard seal material. Buna N, ethylene propylene, and neoprene are available. To order a valve with an optional seal material, add a valve seal material designator to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-4R3A-BU SS-RL3S4-BU To order a replacement seal kit, insert a seal kit material designator as a prefix (R3A series) or suffix (all others) to the seal kit basic ordering number. Examples: BU-R3A-K2 SS-3K-RL3-BN
RL3 Series SS-3K-RL3O-ring, quad seal, bonded disc, retainer, instructions R3A Series -R3A-K2 RL4 Series SS-3K-RL4R4 Series SS-3K-R4Seal Material Buna N Ethylene propylene Neoprene Fluorocarbon FKM Designator Valves -BU -EP -NE Seal Kits BN EP NE VI
Spring Kits
Spring kits include spring and installation instructions. Select a spring kit ordering number.
Spring Kit Ordering Number 177-13K-RL3 177-13K-RL4 Set Pressure Range psig (bar) 10 to 225 (0.68 to 15.5)
Series RL3 RL4
Use BU for R3A series seal kits.

Valve does not contain spring. Select a valve ordering number and a spring kit ordering number.
Spring Kits
Spring kits include spring, label, 302 SS lock wire with seal, spring support, and installation instructions. Select a spring kit basic ordering number and add the spring designator for the desired set pressure range. Examples: 177-R3A-K1-F 177-13K-R4-C
Set Pressure Range psig (bar) 50 to 350 (3.4 to 24.1) 350 to 750 (24.1 to 51.7) 750 to 1500 (51.7 to 103) 1500 to 2250 (103 to 155) 2250 to 3000 (155 to 206) 3000 to 4000 (206 to 275) 4000 to 5000 (275 to 344) 5000 to 6000 (340 to 413) 50 to 350 (3.4 to 24.1) 350 to 750 (24.1 to 51.7) 750 to 1500 (51.7 to 103) Spring Designator A B C D E F G H A B C Spring Color Blue Yellow Purple Orange Brown White Red Green Blue Yellow Purple
Seal kit basic ordering number Seal kit contents O-ring, O-rings (2), quad seal, quad seal, bonded disc, retainer, retainer, instructions instructions
O-ring, quad seal, bonded stem, instructions
R3A series spring kit: basic ordering number 177-R3A-K1-
Manual Override Handles

A manual override handle opens the valve without changing the set pressure. For use with:
RL3 and RL4 series
Phenolic handle 316 SS pull rod
standard spring
R3A seriesA, B, and C
R4 series spring kit: basic ordering number 177-13K-R4-
springs only
R4 seriesA spring only.
316 SS spring support

To order R series relief valves processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-RL3S4-SC11
Handle diameter is 1.50 in. (38.1 mm). Maximum overall height of valve with handle in closed position:
5.16 in. (131 mm) for R3A
and RL3 series

6.78 in. (172 mm) for R4
and RL4 series. To order, add -MO to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-RL3S4-MO
Manual Override Handle Kits
Series
Manual Override Kit Ordering Number SS-R3A-K5 SS-R4-K5
Kits contain handle, pull RL3, R3A rod, spring support, and RL4, R4 instructions. To order, select the desired kit ordering number.
Swagelok proportional relief valves should never be used as safety relief devices.
Swagelok proportional relief valves are not Safety Accessories as dened in the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI May 2007, R9 MS-01-141
Power Swager Manual

and Thermoplastic Hose Assembly Instructions
This manual contains information necessary for the proper operation of the Swagelok power swager and assembly of thermoplastic hose products. The manual must be read and understood by the person(s) responsible for the setup and the use of this equipment.
Model MS-PSR-110 110V Single Phase/60 Hz
www.swagelok.com
Power Swager
Table of Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Operating Instructions for Swagelok Power Swager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Assembly Procedures for Swagelok Thermoplastic Hose using Power Swager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 End Connections, Pushers, and General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Operators Safety Summary

READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING POWER SWAGER. This device is electrically powered and must be operated in a safe environment to avoid risk of fire, explosion, or electric shock.
Safety Information
! ~ F a G l p .
Caution! Indicates cautionary information.
Warning! Pinch Points! Keep hands, loose clothing, and long hair away from rotating or moving parts. Serious injury can occur.
Warning! Electrical Shock. Read all enclosed safety instructions and manuals prior to operation.
Warning! Keep Dry. Equipment and components are not waterproof.
Warning! Fire or explosion. Do not use equipment in a combustible or explosive atmosphere.
Warning! Eye protection. Eye protection must be worn while operating or working near the equipment.
Warning! Ear protection. Ear protection may be required if operating or working near the equipment for prolonged periods of time.
Warning! Hot surface. The surface temperature of the oil reservoir and adjacent parts will increase during normal use. The temperature increase may be excessive if proper maintenance is not performed.
Overview Power Swager Model MS-PSR-110

No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 06A 07 08 09 10 Description Plug Trip rod Trip rod collar Trip latch Trip latch eccentric Die lifting guide arm with insertion depth block(s) mounting holes Die lifting guide arm Eccentric guide bushings Thumb screw Die lifting finger R.H. Die lifting finger L.H. Part No. 453C-22013 453C-22014 453C-22015 453C-22016 453C-22047 453C-22036 453C-22037 453C-23004 453C-23005 453C-23006 No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Description Die detent pins Pal nut Spring plunger Reservoir replacement kit Switch toggle on/off Hydraulic cylinder 453C-00012 Decal, oil specification Decal, name (Swagelok) Breather cap Valve handle Frame Manual control valve
Power Swager
Part No. 453C-23007 453C-23009 453C-23013 453C-40008 453C-41015 453C-11009 0112-49016 453C-40010 453C-40014 453C-24006
Frame consists of top bar, guide bars, pusher block, angle iron supports, and die bowl.
J, L
16
19
13
11
12
Die bowl
14 21 22
Angle iron supports
Power Swager
Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L
Description Bolt hex 1/4-24 UNC 1.75 long Nut hex 1/4 UNC Lock washer 1/4 in. Bolt hex 5/16-18 UNC 2.00 long Bolt hex 5/16-18 UNC 1.50 long Nut hex 5/16-18 UNC Lock washer 5/16 in. Washer, flat 5/16 in. Washer, star 5/16 in. Bolt hex 1/2-13 UNC 2.00 long Socket head cap screw 5/16-18 UNC 1.00 long Lock washer 1/2 in. Top bar
18
Guide bar
Guide bar
Pusher block
17 D, F, G, H
6A 15 20 A, B, C
10
Die bowl
E, F, G, I
Power Swager
Section I Swagelok Power Swager Operating Instructions

Note: The swager may be lifted by rigging a suitable fabric sling around the guide bars and hydraulic cylinder below the top bar.
Valve Handle Installation

The handle is shipped in the bag attached to the swager. 1. Raise and secure the trip rod mechanism (2, 3, 4, 8, and 12) out of the way of the swager.
! Caution
Do not lift or move the swager by its die lifting fingers, arms, or hydraulic hoses.
Valve stem
Roll pin
Valve handle
Setup
1. Place the swager on a sturdy platform or table. 2. Position the swager so the die bowl clears the platform or table to allow clearance for the moving parts of the swager. 3. Secure the swager with suitable fasteners through the bolt holes located in the angle iron supports on the base of the swager.
Roll pin hole
Electrical Requirements
s The electrical requirements for the swager are as follows:
Note: The valve is on the left side of the swager. 2. Position the valve handle so that the hole is in line with the roll pin in the valve stem. (See drawing above.) 3. Use a hammer to carefully tap the roll pin down through the hole in the handle until the pin is flush with the top of the stem.
110/220 V (ac) 13/6 A 1 phase 60 Hz, wired for 110 V s The swager must be grounded to guard against electrical shock. The unit is equipped with a three-wire conductor and three-prong plug to fit a grounded receptacle. s When turning on the swager unit for the first time, verify that the motor is rotating in the direction of the arrow on the motor. s A swagers voltage can be changed from 110 to 220 V using the wiring diagram on the inside of the switch cover. (It is recommended that a qualified electrician perform this task.)
s s s
Dies and Pushers

Use the chart in Section II to determine the proper dies and pushers needed for each end connection. The dies have been adapted to fit in the die lifting fingers on the swager.
Adjustment of the Automatic Return Stop Position

1. Install the proper dies and pusher for the hose and end connection desired. 2. Turn on the swager. 3. Pull the valve handle toward you to bottom the pusher onto the dies. 4. Push the valve handle in the opposite direction, raising the pusher. 5. Insert the hose and end connection assembly up between the dies and so that it can be held in the pusher. Note: See Section II for hose pre-assembly instructions. 6. Push or pull the valve handle so that the bottom of the end connection shell is 3/4 to 1 in. (19 to 25 mm) above the top of the dies. 7. Loosen the thumb screw on the trip rod collar. 8. Allow the trip rod collar and trip rod to descend to the lowest position. 9. Tighten the thumb screw. 10. Remove the hose and connection. 11. Run the swager a full cycle to make sure the trip rod properly releases the valve handle. The swager is now ready for use. Note: Different sizes and types of hose and end connections may require additional adjustments.
! Caution
Never connect the green or green/yellow wire to a live terminal!
Breather Cap Installation

The breather cap is shipped in the bag attached to the swager. 1. Remove the plug from the oil reservoir. Note: Do not discard the plug. To reduce loss of hydraulic oil through the breather cap, reinstall the plug when shipping the swager or when tilting it or placing it on its side. 2. Check the hydraulic fluid level. It should be 1 to 1 1/2 in. (25 to 38 mm) below the breather hole. Note: The swager is shipped with the proper type and amount of oil in the reservoir. However, if additional fluid is required, it should be equivalent to Mobil D.T.E. 26 (325 SUS at 100F, 37C) 3. Install the breather cap.
! Caution
Do not operate the swager without the breather cap in place.
! Caution
Always adjust the trip rod collar so that the return stop functions before the pusher block retracts into the bottom of the cylinder. The swager may be damaged otherwise.
! Caution
The motor should always be disconnected from the power source whenever servicing the machine or performing troubleshooting.
Power Swager
Alignment of Dies in the Swager Die Bowl

The dies are aligned at the factory. However, if at any time the dies are not of equal height when seated in the die bowl, they must be readjusted. To readjust the dies: 1. Loosen the four (4) mounting bolts on the die lifting fingers. 2. Push each die lifting finger assembly down as far as the bolt holes will allow. 3. Turn on the swager. 4. Pull the valve handle until the pusher bottoms on the dies, leaving the pusher in contact with the dies. 5. Retighten the bolts.
Proper Cut
Cut Plane Hose Axis
Improper Cut
Cut Plane Hose Axis
Cut Plane
Cut Plane
Cut is square and perpendicular with hose axis.
Cut is not square and perpendicular with hose axis.
End Connection Preparation

Remove all plastic caps, plugs, nuts, and ferrules prior to swaging an end connection.
Adjustment of Eccentric Guide Bushings

This adjustment is made at the factory. However, the eccentric guide bushings may be readjusted if the dies are catching on the top edge of the frame. To adjust: 1. Place the swager in the full downward position. 2. Locate the eccentric guide bushings on the lower outside bars of the frame. 3. Loosen the mounting bolts. 4. Rotate the bushings counter-clockwise to tighten. Note: The die lifting arms must slide freely.
Inserting End Connections

1. Mark each hose end with the correct insertion depth. 2. Use the appropriate depth insertion gage: s MS-IGB-1 for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. hose. s MS-IGB-2 for 3/4 and 1 in. hose. 3. Insert hose until it bottoms out. 4. Mark the hose. Note: The bottom of the mark should line up with the top of the insertion gage.
depth insertion gage
Section II Assembly Procedures for Swagelok 7N, 7P, 7R, and 8R Thermoplastic Hose using the Power Swager
Pre-Assembly
1. Be sure the hose and all components are in good condition. Note: The lead end of the hose should be cut squarely. 2. Verify that the swager is in proper working order as outlined in Section I.
Proper Mark Position
Improper Mark Position
Cutting Bulk Hose

1. Determine the desired hose and end connection size and type. 2. Determine the desired hose assembly overall length. 3. See the End Connections and Pushers chart on page 8 to determine the fitting cut-off length. 4. Subtract the desired fitting cut-off lengths from each end of the hose assembly overall length. Note: The result is the overall cut length. 5. Measure and mark the hose at the overall cut length. 6. Cut the hose squarely at the mark.
5. If acceptable for the application, apply a thin coat of clean, SAE 20 weight lubricating oil to approximately the first 1/2 in. (12 mm) depth of the hose ID.
! Caution!
Never use oil in 7P (poly pure) hose.
Power Swager
6. Insert the hose into the end connection up to, but not past, the insertion depth mark. Note: The bottom of the mark should line up with the edge of the shell. Proper Insertion
shell
Selecting Die Sets and Pushers

1. Select the appropriate matched swaging die sets.
Hose Size in. Die Set Number MS-7R8R-4 MS-7R8R-6 MS-7R8R-8 MS-8R-12 MS-8R-16 MS-7P-16
Hose Series 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P 8R, 7P 8R 7P
1/4 3/8 Improper Insertions

1
Not inserted enough
1/2 3/4
Inserted too far
If insertion is difficult, the following accessories may be required: s Vise blocks (MS-VB-1 for 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. hose or MS-VB-2 for 3/4 and 1 in. hose) s Pusher s Vise s Rubber mallet 1. Clamp the vise block slot around the hose, leaving at least twice the distance of the insertion depth mark exposed. 2. Insert the end connection into the hose. 3. Place the pusher over the end connection. (See the End Connections and Pushers chart for the correct pusher ordering number.) 4. Tap the pusher with the mallet to insert the hose into the end connection up to, but not past, the insertion depth mark.
2. Select the correct pusher for the end connection type and size. (See the End Connections and Pushers chart for the correct pusher selection.) Note: For end connections that do not appear in the chart, contact your Swagelok sales representative. 3. Secure the pusher in the swager.
! Caution
Each die set consists of two matching halves, each of which is stamped with the same identification number. Failure to use matching die halves may result in improper swaging, leading to hose failure. Die set must match appropriate hose series and size.
Die Set and Fitting Lubrication

Before the initial swage, apply a light coat of lubricant to the die halves. Note: The suggested lubricant is MS-TP-LUBE.
Power Swager
Lubricant Hints Lubrication will increase die life and improve the shells surface appearance. Before using any lubricant, read all labels and instructions. MS-TP-LUBE When applying MS-TP-LUBE on non-lubricated die sets, apply a light coating to the entire surface of both die halves. Lubrication transferred from lubed swage shells during the swaging process will keep the dies lubricated. Swage Shells When applying MS-TP-LUBE to swage shells, liberally coat the bottom half of the external surface of the swage shell.
Swaging Process
1. Verify that the hose is inserted properly into the end connection. 2. Insert the hose through the die halves and end connection inside the pusher. Note: Make sure that the end of the shell is 3/4 to 1 in. (19 to 25 mm) from the top of the die halves. If it is not, see Section 1, Adjustment of the Automatic Return Stop Position. 3. Begin the swaging process while applying upward force on the hose. Note: The swaging process is complete when the pusher bottoms on top of the die surfaces.
! Caution
Do not pinch hose between die halves. 4. Return the swager to the starting position. 5. Remove the swaged hose. 6. Turn off the swager. 7. Measure the swage diameter and bell dimensions to verify that the hose is assembled properly. Note: Measurements must be within the limits listed in Table A.
Insert lubricated die halves securely within the swager die fingers.
Measuring Swage Diameter

Begin at a point between 1/4 to 1/2 in. (6 to 13 mm) from the end of the swage shell and measure 360 around the shell. Do not measure at the parting lines.
Parting Line Swage Diameter
Swager Start-Up
~ Warning!
Keep hands and fingers away from all moving parts
Measuring Bell Length

Measure from behind the hex to the point where the bell stops or where the swage diameter ends.
Manual Valve Handle Operation

1. Pull the control handle to start the swaging process. Note: The pusher block will move downward. 2. Release the control handle to stop the swaging process. 3. Push the handle to return the swager to the full up position. Note: The trip latch, if adjusted properly, will automatically disengage the swager. 4. Turn on the swager. 5. Cycle the swager once or twice, stopping just before the pusher makes contact with the die surfaces. 6. Turn off the swager. 7. Verify that the dies are seated evenly and securely within the die base. Note: If the die halves are not aligned, see Section I, Alignment of Dies in the Die Bowl. 8. Turn on the swager. 9. Cycle through a full swaging stroke. Note: If the die halves are still not aligned, repeat steps 1 through 4. 10. Return the swager to the full up position.
Bell Length
Table A
Hose Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 8R, 7P 8R 7P 7N, 7R, 8R, 7P Hose Type Swage Diameter in. (mm) 0.563 to 0.573
(14.2 to 14.5)
Bell Length in. (mm) 0.66 to 0.72

(16.8 to 18.3)
0.689 to 0.699
(17.5 to 17.8)
0.843 to 0.853
(21.3 to 21.6)
0.72 to 0.78
(18.3 to 19.8)
1.155 to 1.170
(29.5 to 29.7)
1.483 to 1.493
(37.6 to 37.8)
0.91 to 0.97
(23.1 to 24.6)
1.450 to 1.460
(36.8 to 37.1)
0.78 to 0.84
(19.8 to 21.3)
8. Repeat the swaging process, steps 1 through 6, to complete the hose assembly. 9. Verify that the hose meets overall length requirements.
Power Swager
End Connections and Pushers

End Connection Type Size, in. 1/4 in. fractional 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 5/8 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 6 mm metric 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm fractional 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm metric 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm
37
Hose Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -TP4-TA4 -TP4-TA6 -TP6-TA6 -TP8-TA8 -TP8-TA10 -TP12-TA12 -TP16-TA16 -TP4-TM6 -TP4-TM8 -TP6-TM10 -TP8-TM12 -TP4-SL4 -TP6-SL6 -TP8-SL8 -TP4-SM6 -TP4-SM8 -TP4-SM10 -TP6-SM10 -TP8-SM12 -TP4-AS4 -TP6-AS6 -TP8-AS8 -TP4-BM4 -TP6-BM6 -TP8-BM8 -TP4-BS4 -TP6-BS6 -TP8-BS8 -TP4-MC14 -TP6-MC18 -TP8-MC22 -TP4-PM4 -TP6-PM4 -TP6-PM6 -TP8-PM8 -TP4-MT4 -TP6-MT6 -TP8-MT8 -TP4-MS4 -TP6-MS6 -TP8-MS8
Cut-Off Length in. (mm) 1.43 (36.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.79 (45.5) 1.89 (48.0) 2.18 (55.4) 1.43 (36.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.79 (45.5) 1.54 (39.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.72 (43.7) 1.54 (39.1) 1.55 (39.4) 1.80 (45.7) 1.64 (41.7) 1.74 (44.2) 1.59 (40.4) 1.71 (43.4) 1.77 (45.0) 1.42 (36.1) 1.57 (39.9) 1.67 (42.4) 1.53 (38.9) 1.69 (42.9) 1.81 (46.0) 1.35 (34.3) 1.46 (37.1) 1.52 (38.6) 1.25 (31.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.53 (38.9) 1.25 (31.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.53 (38.9) 1.50 (38.1) 1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6)
Pusher Ordering Number MS-P-TA4 MS-P-4TA6 MS-P-TA6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-8TA10 MS-P-TA12 MS-P-TA16 MS-P-TA4 MS-P-4TM8 MS-P-TA6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-SL4 MS-P-SL6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-SL4 MS-P-4SM8 MS-P-4SM10 MS-P-SL6 MS-P-SLTA8 MS-P-AS4 MS-P-AS6 MS-P-AS8 MS-P-BM4 MS-P-BM6 MS-P-BM8 MS-P-BS4 MS-P-BS6 MS-P-BS8 MS-P-MC14 MS-P-MC18 MS-P-MC22 MS-P-PM4 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM8 MS-P-PM4 MS-P-PM6 MS-P-PM8 MS-P-MS4 MS-P-MS6 MS-P-MS8
Swagelok tube fitting
1/4 in.
JIC/AN 37 female swivel

60 male cone female swivel BSP/ISO parallel 30 female swivel BSP/ISO/JIS parallel Universal metric female swivel
3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 14 mm 18 mm 22 mm 1/4 in.
60
30
Male NPT
3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in.
Male BSP/ISO tapered (RT) Male BSP/ISO parallel (RS)
3/8 in. 1/2 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in.
60
For a complete ordering number, add SS for 316 stainless steel or S for steel as a prefix to the basic ordering number.
To determine the correct length of hose, subtract the cut-off length for each end connection from the overall length of the assembly. Lengths are for reference only, subject to change.
Section III General Maintenance

s After use, clean dies, pusher, and other swager s Periodically check the oil reservoir fluid level. The oil should be
components with isopropyl alcohol to remove lubricant. s Periodically check the hoses for cuts, tears, or bagginess in the outer cover. Replace any hose assembly that has such damage.
about 1 to 1 1/2 in. (25 to 38 mm) below the breather cap hole when the machine is turned off (see Section II, Breather Cap Installation). s Periodically check the mechanical moving parts on the swager. Replace any parts that are bent, loose, or show excessive wear.
Power Swager
Section IV Troubleshooting
! Caution: Before performing any adjustments, make
sure the power is turned off and properly locked out. If the swager begins producing improperly swaged connections: s Confirm that the assembly procedure is being followed. Proper lubrication of dies and fitting shells is especially critical. (Refer to Section II.) s Inspect the swage dies. Swage dies have a finite life. Axial scratches on fitting shells after swaging may indicate worn dies.
Condition:
There is a gap or movement between the cylinder and frame. This gap is caused by a loose cylinder mounting bolt.
Solution:
Tighten the cylinder mounting bolt until the gap is eliminated (as shown below).
Condition:
There is a gap between the pusher block and piston shaft. This gap is caused by a loose socket screw within the pusher block cavity.
gap
Solution:
Tighten the socket head cap screw within the pusher cavity until the gap is eliminated (as shown below).
Condition:
The die lifting arms do not pivot freely.
Solution:
Adjust accordingly per instructions in Section I. gap
Condition:
The swage die halves are uneven when they are seated in the base. (Improper die alignment is shown below.) Note: Die alignment must be checked before the pusher touches the dies.
Solution:
See Section I of this manual for the proper adjustment.
Condition:
The dies have vertical wear lines that appear as scratches. Wear lines can be felt on the finish of the swaged fitting and dies
Solution:
Replace dies.
Condition:
There is not proper clearance for the die lifting arms to slide freely between the eccentric guide bushings and the swager frame during the full swaging cycle.
Solution:
See Section I of this manual for adjustment instructions to obtain proper clearance (as shown to the right).
10
Power Swager
11
Warning The Swagelok power swager is designed expressly for swaging Swagelok end connections and hose using the appropriate Swagelok dies and pushers. Swagelok Company cannot be responsible for property damage or personal injury that may result from swaging other brands of end connections and hose, nor from the intentional misuse of the swager.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company MobilTM Mobil Oil Corporation 2001 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL April 2001, R0 MS-13-144
www.swagelok.com
Q uick- Conne cts
QC, Q F, Q M, a nd QT M Se r ie s
No twisting, turning, or wrenching necessary Single-end shutoff, double-end shutoff, and full-flow models
Quick-Connects
Contents
Instrumentation Quick-Connects QC Series (Standard and Keyed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Miniature Quick-Connects QM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Full-Flow Quick-Connects QF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PTFE-Sealed Quick-Connects QTM Series (Standard and Keyed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Swagelok Quick-Connects
Coupling
Any quick-connect stem will t any quick-connect body of the same series and size. Examples: Any QC4 stem will t any QC4 body. Any QC8 stem will t any QC8 body.
Operation of Swagelok Quick-Connects

Use lters ahead of quick-connects. Use body and stem protectors or dust caps on
uncoupled bodies and stems.

Align bodies and stems when coupling or uncoupling. Couple and uncouple quick-connects at room
Single- and Double-End Shutoff Stems

Single-end shutoff (SESO) stems have no valves and remain open when uncoupled. Double-end shutoff (DESO) stems have valves and shut off when uncoupled.
temperature.
Couple and uncouple quick-connects during system
cleaning operations.
Support hanging hoses or other equipment to prevent
side load.
Relubricate stem seal O-rings periodically.
Spillage
Spillage is the amount of system uid that escapes when a quick-connect is uncoupled (DESO only).
Warning:
Pressure rating restrictions apply when coupling
Air Inclusion
Air inclusion is the amount of air trapped between the body and stem that enters the system when a quickconnect is coupled (DESO only).
and uncoupling.
Do not uncouple single-end shutoff quick-connects
under pressure.

Cv is an average value and may vary 10 %. Cv is based on like end connections on stem and body. For unlike end connections, average the two Cv values.
Caution:
Do not rotate quick-connects while coupled. Do not insert foreign objects into uncoupled bodies or
stems.
End Connections
Additional end connections such as ISO parallel and tapered thread, AN thread, pipe weldare available. Where these end connections are not listed, a tube adapter can be used to create a twopiece assembly. For more information on tube adapters, see the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140.
Quick-Connects
Instrumentation Quick-Connects QC Series

Features
Redesigned
Stem
Single-End Shutoff (SESO)

Locking dogs
Stem seal O-ring Insert seal O-ring Body valve O-ring
stem insert requires just one O-ring seal, yet improves O-ring containment.
New-design stems and bodies
SWAGELOK
interchange with old-design stems and bodies.

Locking dog mechanism with large
SWAGELOK
Stem sleeve
Body sleeve
Housing
Body
contact area retains stem.

Push-to-connect coupling enables
DESO valve O-ring
Flow Direction
quick, easy operation.

Wide variety of options, including
Double-End Shutoff (DESO)Red Stem Sleeve
keyed quick-connects, are available.

Heavy-duty sleeve shields open end
of body.
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
Material Component Body, housing, stem Body valve, body insert, DESO valve, DESO retainer SESO stem insert O-rings Springs Snap rings Body sleeve DESO stem sleeve SESO stem sleeve Locking dogs Lubricants Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS 316 SS Powdered metal Brass C36000 300 series SS Polyurethane enamel- Polyurethane enamelcoated brass C36000 coated 316 SS 316 SS Brass C36000 Xylan-coated 316 SS powdered metal Silicone- and PTFE-based 316 SS 316 SS Brass Brass C36000 Brass C36000 Brass C26000 Buna N
316 SS with Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings Temperature F (C) QC4 QC6 QC8 QC4 Brass with Buna N O-rings QC6 QC8
Pressure Rating, psig (bar) 3000

(206)
70 (20) 250 (121) 400 (204) 70 (20)
Coupled 750 1500

(103) (51.6)
2000
(137)
1000
(68.9)
500
(34.4)
250 (17.2)
Uncoupled and When Coupling and Uncoupling 250 (17.2)

For brass with Buna N O-rings. For 316 SS with fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Maximum Flow Rate

at 70F (20C)
(L/min)
Wetted components listed in italics. Other O-ring materials and lubricants available. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Series QC4 QC6 QC8
Spillage and Air Inclusion

Series QC4 QC6 QC8 Spillage cm3 0.3 1.0 3.0 Air Inclusion cm3 0.3 1.0 3.0
4 (15) 6 (22) 10 (37)
Quick-Connects
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QC Series

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Select a basic ordering number and add a material designator.
A F flat
Example: SS-QC4-S-200
Stems
Fitting Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 6 10 12
Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QC4-S-200 -QC4-S-400 -QC6-S-600 -QC8-S-810 -QC4-S-6M0 -QC6-S-10M0 -QC8-S-12M0 DESO -QC4-D-200 -QC4-D-400 -QC6-D-600 -QC8-D-810 -QC4-D-6M0 -QC6-D-10M0 -QC8-D-12M0 Series QC4 QC4 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO 0.08 0.3 1.0 2.4 0.3 1.0 2.4 DESO 0.08 0.2 0.5 1.5 0.2 0.5 1.5 Full Flow 0.08 0.4 1.5 3.3 0.4 1.5 3.3 SESO
Dimensions A DESO 2.77 (70.4) 2.42 (61.5) 2.64 (67.1) 3.16 (80.3) 61.5 (2.42) 70.4 (2.77) 80.3 (3.16) F, in. 5/8 5/8 3/4 15/16 5/8 3/4 15/16
Dimensions, in. (mm) 2.32 (58.9) 2.36 (59.9) 2.52 (64.0) 2.96 (75.2) 59.9 (2.36) 67.3 (2.65) 75.2 (2.96)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. -QC4-D-200 is a two-piece assembly.
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QC4-S-2PM -QC4-S-4PM -QC6-S-4PM -QC6-S-6PM -QC8-S-8PM -QC4-S-4MT -QC6-S-6MT -QC8-S-8MT DESO -QC4-D-2PM -QC4-D-4PM -QC6-D-4PM -QC6-D-6PM -QC8-D-8PM -QC4-D-4MT -QC6-D-6MT -QC8-D-8MT Series QC4 QC4 QC6 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO NPT 0.3 0.3 0.9 0.8 2.0 0.3 0.8 2.0 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 1.3 0.2 0.5 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.5 1.6 3.1 0.4 1.6 3.1 DESO Full Flow
Dimensions, in. (mm) A SESO 2.07 2.22 2.32 2.35 2.84

(52.6) (56.4) (58.9) (59.7) (72.1)
DESO 2.13 2.28 2.44 2.47 3.04

(54.1) (57.9) (61.9) (62.7) (77.2)
F 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 15/16 5/8 3/4 15/16
ISO/BSP Tapered 2.22 (56.4) 2.35 (59.7) 2.84 (72.1) 2.28 (57.9) 2.47 (62.7) 3.04 (77.2)
Female Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QC4-S-2PF -QC4-S-4PF -QC6-S-4PF -QC6-S-6PF -QC8-S-8PF -QC4-S-4FT -QC6-S-6FT -QC8-S-8FT DESO -QC4-D-2PF -QC4-D-4PF -QC6-D-4PF -QC6-D-6PF -QC8-D-8PF -QC4-D-4FT -QC6-D-6FT -QC8-D-8FT Series QC4 QC4 QC6 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO NPT 0.3 0.3 0.9 0.8 2.0 0.3 0.8 2.0 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 1.3 0.2 0.5 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.5 1.6 3.1 0.4 1.6 3.1 DESO Full Flow
Dimensions, in. (mm) A SESO 2.01 (51.1) 2.26 (57.4) 2.35 (59.7) 2.35 (59.7) 2.82 (71.6) 2.26 (57.4) 2.35 (59.7) 2.82 (71.6) DESO 2.07 (52.6) 2.32 (58.9) 2.47 (62.7) 2.47 (62.7) F 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8
3.02 (76.7) 1 1/16 2.32 (58.9) 2.47 (62.7) 3/4 7/8
ISO/BSP Tapered
3.02 (76.7) 1 1/16
Quick-Connects
Insertion Depth
To calculate overall length in the coupled position, subtract the insertion depth from any overall stem and body combination length.
Depth, in. (mm)
H
Series QC4 QC6 QC8
SESO
DESO
1.09 (27.7) 1.15 (29.2) 1.18 (30.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.48 (37.6) 1.68 (42.7)
Bodies
Fitting Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 6 10 12
Basic Ordering Number -QC4-B-200 -QC4-B-400 -QC6-B-600 -QC8-B-810 -QC4-B-6M0 -QC6-B-10M0 -QC8-B-12M0
Dimensions Series QC4 QC4 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8 A 2.26 (57.4) 2.30 (58.4) 2.58 (65.5) 3.09 (78.5) 58.4 (2.30) 68.1 (2.68) 78.5 (3.09) H 0.91 (23.1) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) 23.1 (0.91) 26.2 (1.03) 30.7 (1.21)
Full-Flow Quick-Connects
A full-ow QC series quick-connect consists of a SESO stem and a full-ow body. To order a SESO stem, select a basic ordering number and add a material designator. Example: SS-QC4-S-200 To order a full-ow body, select a basic ordering number and add a material designator and MB. Example: SS-QC4-B-200MB
Male Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QC4-B-2PM -QC4-B-4PM -QC6-B-4PM -QC6-B-6PM -QC8-B-8PM -QC4-B-4MT -QC6-B-6MT -QC8-B-8MT
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series NPT QC4 QC4 QC6 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8 2.01 (51.1) 2.16 (54.9) 2.38 (60.5) 2.38 (60.5) 2.97 (75.4) 2.16 (54.9) 2.38 (60.5) 2.97 (75.4) 0.91 (23.1) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) A H
ISO/BSP Tapered
Female Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QC4-B-2PF -QC4-B-4PF -QC6-B-4PF -QC6-B-6PF -QC8-B-8PF -QC4-B-4FT -QC6-B-6FT -QC8-B-8FT
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series NPT QC4 QC4 QC6 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8 2.16 (54.9) 2.42 (61.5) 2.54 (64.5) 2.57 (65.3) 3.22 (81.8) 2.42 (61.5) 2.57 (65.3) 3.22 (81.8) 0.91 (23.1) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) A H
ISO/BSP Tapered
See next page for bulkhead end connections.
Quick-Connects
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QC Series

Bulkhead Stems
A F flat
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2

C-PH-377 DIM
Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QC4-S1-400 -QC6-S1-600 -QC8-S1-810 -QC4-S1-6M0 -QC6-S1-10M0 -QC8-S1-12M0 DESO -QC4-D1-400 -QC6-D1-600 -QC8-D1-810 -QC4-D1-6M0 -QC6-D1-10M0 -QC8-D1-12M0 Series QC4 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8 SESO 2.74 (69.6) 2.92 (74.2) 3.43 (87.1) 69.6 (2.74) 77.7 (3.06) 87.1 (3.43)
Dimensions A DESO 2.80 (71.1) 3.07 (78.0) 3.63 (92.2) 71.1 (2.80) 78.7 (3.10) 92.2 (3.63) F 5/8 3/4 15/16 16 22 24 Dimensions, in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 15/32 (11.9) 0.27 (6.9) 19/32 (15.1) 0.26 (6.6) 25/32 (19.8) 6.4 (0.25) 6.9 (0.27) 6.6 (0.26) 11.5 (29/64) 16.7 (21/32) 19.6 (49/64) Max Min Panel Panel Thickness Hole Dia
Dimensions, mm (in.) 6 10 12
SWAGELOK QUICK CONNECTS- MS-01-138
Bulkhead Bodies
A
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 6 10 12
Basic Ordering Number -QC4-B1-400 -QC6-B1-600 -QC8-B1-810 -QC4-B1-6M0 -QC6-B1-10M0 -QC8-B1-12M0
Series QC4 QC6 QC8 QC4 QC6 QC8
A 2.67 (67.8) 2.98 (75.7) 3.56 (90.4) 67.8 (2.67) 75.9 (2.99) 90.4 (3.56)
Dimensions Max Min Panel Panel H Thickness Hole Dia 0.91 (23.1) 1.03 (26.2) 1.21 (30.7) 23.1 (0.91) 26.2 (1.03) 30.7 (1.21) 0.25 (6.4) 15/32 (11.9) 0.27 (6.9) 19/32 (15.1) 0.26 (6.6) 25/32 (19.8) 6.4 (0.25) 6.9 (0.27) 6.6 (0.26) 11.9 (15/32) 16.7 (21/32) 19.6 (49/64)
Options, QC Series
Stem and Body Protectors
Stem and body protectors guard against damage and contaminants when bodies and stems are uncoupled. Protectors are not pressurecontaining devices; for pressureretaining protectors, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Stem Protectors
Materials
Component Protector Lanyard Lanyard clamps Material 316 SS or plated brass C36000 302 SS 304 SS
Ordering Information To order, select a basic ordering number and add SS for stainless steel or B for brass.
Basic Ordering Numbers Stem Body Protector Protector -QC4-SP -QC6-SP -QC8-SP -QC4-BP -QC6-BP -QC8-BP
Series QC4 Body Protectors QC6 QC8
Example: SS-QC4-SP Keyed Protectors

Standard Keyed Standard Keyed
To order a keyed protector, add a key designator from the table on page 7 to the ordering number. Example: SS-QC4-SPK1
Quick-Connects
Options, QC Series
Keyed QC Series
Swagelok keyed quick-connects provide a positive mechanical lockout system to prevent accidental intermixing of different lines in multiuid or multipressure systems. Features
Keyed quick-connects will not interchange
Keyed sleeve
with any other Swagelok keyed quickconnects

If an attempt is made to couple unlike keys,
the valve system will not open.

Stems and bodies are color coded and
numbered for easy identication. QC Series Key Numbers and Sleeve Outside Diameters for use in calculating alignment positions when panel mounting
Key Number and Designator K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 Sleeve Outside Diameter, in. (mm) QC4 Body Stem Body QC6 Stem Body QC8 Stem
Key Color Black Orange Green Yellow Blue White Purple Brown
0.96 (24.4) 0.82 (20.8) 1.13 (28.7) 0.99 (25.1) 1.26 (32.0) 1.10 (27.9) 0.99 (25.1) 0.85 (21.6) 1.16 (29.5) 1.02 (25.9) 1.29 (32.8) 1.14 (29.0) 1.02 (25.9) 0.88 (22.4) 1.19 (30.2) 1.05 (26.7) 1.32 (33.5) 1.17 (29.7) 1.05 (26.7) 0.91 (23.1) 1.22 (31.0) 1.08 (27.4) 1.35 (34.3) 1.20 (30.5) 1.08 (27.4) 0.94 (23.9) 1.24 (31.5) 1.11 (28.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.23 (31.2) 1.11 (28.2) 0.97 (24.6) 1.28 (32.5) 1.14 (29.0) 1.41 (35.8) 1.26 (32.0) 1.14 (29.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.31 (33.3) 1.17 (29.7) 1.44 (36.6) 1.29 (32.8) 1.17 (29.7) 1.03 (26.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.20 (30.5) 1.47 (37.3) 1.32 (33.5)
Bulkhead Bodies with Two Panel Nuts

G nut hex B2 bulkhead female NPT
Low-Profile Sleeve
Low-profile sleeve
Additional End Connections

Other end connections may be available from the factory as two-piece components. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for information.
Dimensions
Dimensions, in. (mm) Max Panel Min Panel Thickness Hole Dia 0.20 (5.1) 0.25 (6.4) 0.31 (7.9) 23/32 (18.3) 27/32 (21.4) 1 1/32 (26.2)
This option is available for use in areas where space is limited. Ordering Information To order, add IS to the ordering number. Example: SS-QC4-B-400IS
Series QC4 QC6 QC8
G 7/8 15/16 1 1/8
Ordering Information To order, replace B in the ordering number with B2. Example: SS-QC4-B2-400 B2 style bulkhead body is available only with low-prole IS sleeve.
Quick-Connects
Full Flow Quick-Connects QF Series

Features
Compact coupling offers full ow without orice restrictions. O-ring is easily replaced without disassembling body.
Material
C-PH-418A DIM Component
316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS Fluorocarbon FKM
Brass Brass C36000
Body, stem Spring, snap ring, locking balls Sleeve O-ring Lubricants
Brass C36000 Buna N
Silicone- and PTFE-based
Bidirectional flow
Wetted components listed in italics. Other O-ring materials and lubricants available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QF Series

A F flat
Example: SS-QF4-S-400
Stems
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 6
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-S-400 -QF4-S-600 -QF8-S-600 -QF8-S-810 -QF12-S-1210 -QF16-S-1610 -QF4-S-6M0
Flow Coefficient Series (Cv)
Dimensions F in. 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 9/16
Min Orifice 0.19 0.24 0.28 0.41 0.62 0.88

(4.8) (6.1) (7.1) (10.4) (15.7) (22.4)
Dimensions, in. (mm) QF4 2.2 1.77 (45.0) QF4 2.8 1.77 (45.0) QF8 2.9 1.88 (47.8) QF8 13.0 1.99 (50.5) QF12 26.0 2.15 (54.6) QF16 45.0 2.45 (62.2) Dimensions, mm (in.) QF4 2.2 45.0 (1.77)
4.8 (0.19)
Female Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-S-4PF -QF4-S-6PF -QF8-S-6PF -QF8-S-8PF -QF12-S-12PF -QF16-S-16PF -QF4-S-4FT -QF8-S-8FT -QF4-S-4FS -QF8-S-8FS
Flow Coefficient Series (Cv) QF4 QF4 QF8 QF8 QF12 QF16 NPT 1.7 1.7 7.1 11.5 23.6 39.0
Dimensions, in. (mm) Min A F Orifice 1.60 1.67 1.59 1.82 2.08 2.49
(40.6) (42.4) (40.4) (46.2) (52.8) (63.2)
3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 3/4 1 1/16 3/4 1 1/16
0.24 0.24 0.47 0.50 0.72 0.88
(6.1) (6.1) (11.9) (12.7) (18.3) (22.4)
ISO/BSP Tapered QF4 1.7 1.60 (40.6) QF8 11.5 1.82 (46.2) QF4 QF8 ISO/BSP Parallel 1.7 1.60 (40.6) 11.5 1.82 (46.2)
0.24 (6.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.24 (6.1) 0.50 (12.7)
Quick-Connects
316 SS with Brass with Fluorocarbon QUICK CONNECTS- MS-01-138 Buna N FKM SWAGELOK O-rings O-rings Temperature QF4 F (C) QF8 QF12 QF16 QF4 Coupled 4000
(275)
C-PH-421B DIM
QF8 QF12 QF16
Pressure Rating, psig (bar) 4000 3000

(275) (206)
70 (20) 250 (121) 400 (204)
6000
(413)
2000
(137)
100 (6.8)
Warning: Do not uncouple under pressure.
Pressure ratings may be limited by end connections. For brass with Buna N O-rings. For 316 SS with fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Insertion Depth
A F flat
Series QF4 QF8 QF12 QF16
Depth in. (mm) 0.78 (19.8) 0.81 (20.6) 0.90 (22.9) 0.94 (23.9)
Bodies
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 6
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-B-400 -QF4-B-600 -QF8-B-600 -QF8-B-810 -QF12-B-1210 -QF16-B-1610 -QF4-B-6M0
Series
Dimensions F in. S 0.87 0.87 1.30 1.30 1.66 1.88

(22.1) (22.1) (33.0) (33.0) (42.2) (47.8)
Min Orifice 0.19 (4.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.88 (22.4) 4.8 (0.19)
Dimensions, in. (mm) QF4 1.80 (45.7) 11/16 QF4 1.81 (46.0) 11/16 QF8 2.17 (55.1) 1 1/16 QF8 2.23 (56.6) 1 1/16 QF12 2.45 (62.2) 1 1/2 QF16 2.75 (69.9) 1 11/16 Dimensions, mm (in.) QF4 45.7 (1.80) 11/16
22.1 (0.87)
Female Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-B-4PF -QF4-B-6PF -QF8-B-6PF -QF8-B-8PF -QF12-B-12PF -QF16-B-16PF -QF4-B-4FT -QF8-B-8FT -QF4-B-4FS -QF8-B-8FS
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QF4 QF4 QF8 QF8 QF12 QF16 A NPT 1.50 (38.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.73 (43.9) 1.73 (43.9) 1.89 (48.0) 2.12 (53.8) F 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/2 1 11/16 S 0.87 (22.1) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.66 (42.2) 1.88 (47.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) Min Orifice 0.38 0.38 0.59 0.63 0.88 1.06
(9.7) (9.7) (15.0) (16.0) (22.4) (26.9)
ISO/BSP Tapered QF4 1.50 (38.1) 3/4 QF8 1.73 (43.9) 1 11/16 QF4 QF8 ISO/BSP Parallel 1.50 (38.1) 3/4 1.73 (43.9) 1 11/16
0.38 (9.7) 0.63 (16.0) 0.38 (9.7) 0.63 (16.0)
10
Quick-Connects
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QF Series

Stems
Male Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 1 1/4 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-S-4PM -QF4-S-6PM -QF8-S-6PM -QF8-S-8PM -QF12-S-12PM -QF16-S-16PM -QF4-S-4MT -QF8-S-8MT -QF16-S-16MT -QF4-S-4MS -QF8-S-8MS
Flow Coefficient Series (Cv) NPT QF4 QF4 QF8 QF8 QF12 QF16 QF4 QF8 QF16 QF4 QF8 1.7 1.7 7.1 11.5 23.6 39.0 1.7 11.5 39.0 1.7 11.5
Dimensions, in. (mm) Min A F Orifice 1.59 (40.4) 1.59 (40.4) 1.65 (41.9) 1.84 (46.7) 2.03 (51.6) 2.35 (59.7) 1.59 (40.4) 1.84 (46.7) 2.35 (59.7) 1.60 (40.6) 1.82 (46.2) 9/16 11/16 7/8 7/8 1 1/16 1 3/8 9/16 7/8 1 3/8 3/4 1 1/16 0.24 (6.1) 0.24 (6.1) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.72 (18.3) 0.88 (22.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.88 (22.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.50 (12.7)
ISO/BSP Tapered
ISO/BSP Parallel
Include a female 60 cone profile. They accept a 60 male cone with female swivel nut.
Bodies
Male Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 1/2 1 1/4 1/2
Basic Ordering Number -QF4-B-4PM -QF4-B-6PM -QF8-B-6PM -QF8-B-8PM -QF12-B-12PM -QF16-B-16PM -QF4-B-4MT -QF8-B-8MT -QF16-B-16MT -QF4-B-4MS -QF8-B-8MS
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QF4 QF4 QF8 QF8 QF12 QF16 QF4 QF8 QF16 QF4 QF8 A NPT 1.57 (39.9) 1.57 (39.9) 1.83 (46.5) 2.08 (52.8) 2.33 (59.2) 2.65 (67.3) 1.57 (39.9) 2.08 (52.8) 2.65 (67.3) 1.80 (45.7) 2.08 (52.8) 11/16 11/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/2 1 11/16 11/16 1 1/16 1 11/16 3/4 1 11/16 0.87 (22.1) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.66 (42.2) 1.88 (47.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) 1.88 (47.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.30 (33.0) 0.25 (6.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.41 (10.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.72 (18.3) 0.88 (22.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.88 (22.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.47 (11.9) F S Min Orifice
ISO/BSP Tapered
ISO/BSP Parallel
Options, QF Series
Stem and Body Protectors
Stem and body protectors guard against damage and contaminants when bodies and stems are uncoupled. Protectors are not pressurecontaining devices; for pressureretaining protectors, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. Materials
Component Protector Lanyard Lanyard clamps Stem Protector Material 316 SS or plated brass C36000 302 SS 304 SS Series Body Protector QF4 QF8 QF12 QF16
Ordering Information To order, select a basic ordering number and add SS for stainless steel or B for brass.
Basic Ordering Number Stem Body Protector Protector -QF4-SP -QF8-SP -QF12-SP -QF16-SP -QF4-BP -QF8-BP -QF12-BP -QF16-BP
Example: SS-QF4-SP
Quick-Connects
11
Miniature Quick-Connects QM Series

Features
Lightweight, compact design offers
Stem
Adapter seal O-ring
Body sleeve
Stem seal O-ring
Body valve O-ring
Body
ngertip operation.
Low dead volume reduces spillage
and air inclusion.
DESO valve spring
DESO valve O-ring
Housing
Body valve spring
Material Component Body, body insert, DESO adapter, stem, body valve, DESO valve, housing SESO stem insert, valve stop DESO stem fin, springs O-rings Sleeve Locking balls, snap rings Lubricants 316 SS 316 SS
Flow Direction
Brass with Buna N O-rings
Brass Brass C36000 316 SS with Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings Coupled 70 (20) Brass C26000 316 SS 250 (121) 400 (204) 70 (20) 4000 (275) 100 (6.8) 2000 (137)
316 SS
Temperature F (C)
Pressure Rating, psig (bar)
316 SS
Uncoupled and When Coupling and Uncoupling Buna N Brass C36000 100 (6.8)
For brass with Buna N O-rings. For 316 SS with fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Fluorocarbon FKM
Silicone- and PTFE-based
Maximum Flow Rate
C-PH-420A DIM SWAGELOK QUICK CONNECTS- MS-01-138
C-PH-811 DIM
Wetted components listed in italics. Other O-ring materials and lubricants available.
1 U.S. gal/min (3.8 L/min) water at 70F (20C)

0.1 cm3
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QM Series

SESO
A F flat A F flat
DESO
Example: SS-QM2-S-100
Stems
Basic Fitting Ordering Numbers Size in. SESO DESO 1/16 -QM2-S-100 -QM2-D-100 1/8 -QM2-S-200 -QM2-D-200
Flow Coefficient (Cv) Series QM2 SESO 0.06 DESO 0.05 Full Flow 0.06
Dimensions, in. (mm) A SESO 1.18 (30.0) 1.29 (32.8) DESO 1.76 (44.7) 1.87 (47.5) F 7/16
12
Quick-Connects
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QM Series

Stems
Male NPT
Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QM2-S-1PM -QM2-S-2PM
C-PH-420B DIM
Flow Coefficient (Cv) DESO 0.05 Full Flow 0.06
Dimensions, in. (mm) A SESO 1.03 (26.2) DESO 1.61 (40.9) F 7/16
DESO -QM2-D-1PM -QM2-D-2PM
Series QM2
SESO 0.06
Female NPT
NPT Size in. 1/16 1/8 Basic Ordering Numbers SESO -QM2-S-1PF -QM2-S-2PF DESO -QM2-D-1PF -QM2-D-2PF Series QM2
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO 0.06 DESO 0.05 Full Flow 0.06
Dimensions, in. (mm) A SESO 1.03 (26.2) DESO 1.61 (40.9) 1.81 (46.0) F 7/16 7/16
Bodies
A F flat
Fitting Basic Size Ordering in. Number 1/16 -QM2-B-100 1/8 -QM2-B-200
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QM2 A 1.50 (38.1) 1.70 (43.2) F 7/16
Insertion Depth
Depth, in. (mm) SESO DESO
0.53 (13.5)

C-PH-406A DIM
Male NPT
Basic Ordering Number -QM2-B-1PM -QM2-B-2PM
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QM2 A 1.42 (36.1) 1.44 (36.6) F 7/16
0.47 (11.9)
Female NPT
Basic Ordering Number -QM2-B-1PF -QM2-B-2PF
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QM2 A 1.43 (36.3) 1.62 (41.1) F 7/16 9/16
Full-Flow Quick-Connects
A full-ow QM series quick-connect consists of a SESO stem and a full-ow body. To order a SESO stem, select a basic ordering number and add a material designator.
A F flat
Example: SS-QM2-S-200 To order a full-ow body, select a basic ordering number and add a material designator and MB.
Swagelok Bulkhead Tube Fitting
Example: SS-QM2-B-200MB
Fitting Size in. 1/8 Basic Ordering Number -QM2-B1-200 Dimensions, in. (mm) Series QM2 A 2.09 (53.1) F 7/16
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. Maximum panel thickness is 0.25 in. (6.4 mm); minimum panel hole diameter is 21/64 in. (8.3 mm).
Quick-Connects
13
PTFE-Sealed Quick-Connects QTM Series

Features
Product qualication tests are based
Slide
Slide hook Body valve seal DESO valve seal
on ANSI B93.51M.
Flush valve design reduces air
inclusion and spillage.

Locking dog mechanism with large
contact area retains stem.

Seals are recessed for protection. Keyed option is available. Push-to-connect design enables
quick, simple operation.

Stem seal Locking dogs Adapter seal
Packing seal
QTM2
w al flo ction idire B
Material Component Body Slide, stem, stem adapter, body valve, DESO valve Packing gland, body bolt, body valve cap, DESO valve cap, DESO stem fins Eyelet, body insert, DESO valve post Snap rings Body fin (QTM4 only) Springs Packing seal, stem seal, adapter seal Body valve seal, DESO valve seal Packing backup ring Locking dogs Rear sleeve, front sleeve Slide hooks Lubricants
316 SS Alloy 400 Xylan-coated alloy R-405 Alloy R-405 Temperature F (C) 0 to 120
(17 to 48)
Alloy 400 QTM8 QTM2
316 SS Xylan-coated 316 SS
QTM4 Coupled
Pressure Rating, psig (bar) 4500

(310)
3200
(220)
3200
(220)
Uncoupled 316 SS Alloy 400/R-405 Alloy X-750 PTFE-coated powdered metal 300 series SS 316 SS and Elgiloy Alloy X-750 and Elgiloy 0 to 120
(17 to 48)
1000
(68.9)
1000
(68.9)
When Coupling And Uncoupling 70 (20) 250 (17.2) 100 (6.8) 50 (3.4) 250 (17.2)
Pressure ratings may be limited by end connections.
Maximum Flow Rate

at 70F (20C)
(L/min)
Dyneon TFM 1600 Virgin PTFE Filled PTFE 316 SS or CF8M 316 SS M-35-1 Alloy R-405 Alloy 400/R-405 PTFE-based
Series QTM2 QTM4 QTM8
15 (56) 35 (130) 50 (180)

Series QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 Spillage cm3 0.1 0.2 1.0 Air Inclusion cm3 0.1 0.4 2.0
14
Quick-Connects
Ordering Information and Dimensions, QTM Series

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Select an ordering number.
A F flat
Stems
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 SESO
Ordering Numbers DESO Series Dimensions, in. (mm) SS-QTM2-D-400 QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-400 QTM4 SS-QTM2-D-600 QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-600 QTM4 SS-QTM8-D-810 SS-QTM8-D-1210 SS-QTM8-D-1610 QTM8 QTM8 QTM8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO 0.7 0.9 0.9 1.7 4.2 6.7 9.0 DESO 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.6 3.1 6.5 7.8 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.6 3.1
Dimensions A 2.02 2.61 2.08 2.67

(51.3) (66.3) (52.8) (67.8)
F 5/8 15/16 11/16 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 3/8 16 24 11/16 in. 24 35
SS-QTM2-S-400 SS-QTM4-S-400 SS-QTM2-S-600 SS-QTM4-S-600 SS-QTM8-S-810 SS-QTM8-S-1210 SS-QTM8-S-1610 SS-QTM2-S-6M0 SS-QTM4-S-6M0 SS-QTM2-S-8M0 SS-QTM4-S-10M0 SS-QTM8-S-12M0
3.06 (77.7) 3.06 (77.7) 3.27 (83.1) 51.3 (2.02) 66.3 (2.61) 53.1 (2.09) 68.1 (2.68) 77.7 (3.06)
6 8 10 12
Dimensions, mm (in.) SS-QTM2-D-6M0 QTM2 0.7 SS-QTM4-D-6M0 QTM4 0.9 SS-QTM2-D-8M0 SS-QTM4-D-10M0 SS-QTM8-D-12M0 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 0.9 1.7 4.2
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. To order alloy 400 with PTFE seals, replace SS in the ordering number with M. Example: M-QTM2-S-400
Male Pipe Threads

Pipe Size in. SESO
Ordering Numbers DESO Series NPT SS-QTM2-D-4PM QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-4PM QTM4 SS-QTM2-D-6PM QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-6PM QTM4 SS-QTM8-D-8PM SS-QTM8-D-12PM SS-QTM8-D-16PM QTM8 QTM8 QTM8
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO 0.2 1.4 0.7 1.8 5.1 8.5 0.2 1.4 5.1 0.5 0.6 1.2 4.8 4.2 DESO 0.2 1.4 0.6 1.7 4.4 7.8 0.2 1.4 4.4 0.4 0.6 1.2 3.9 2.7
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.91 2.46 2.04 2.46

(48.5) (62.5) (51.8) (62.5)
F 5/8 15/16 3/4 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 3/8 5/8 15/16 1 5/16 5/8 3/4 15/16 1 5/16 15/16 1 5/16
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
SS-QTM2-S-4PM SS-QTM4-S-4PM SS-QTM2-S-6PM SS-QTM4-S-6PM SS-QTM8-S-8PM SS-QTM8-S-12PM SS-QTM8-S-16PM SS-QTM2-S-4MT SS-QTM4-S-4MT SS-QTM8-S-8MT SS-QTM2-S-2MS SS-QTM2-S-4MS SS-QTM4-S-4MS SS-QTM8-S-8MS SS-QTM4-S-4AN SS-QTM8-S-8AN
2.78 (70.6) 2.78 (70.6) 3.03 (77.0) 1.91 (48.5) 2.46 (62.5) 2.78 (70.6) 1.73 (43.9) 2.04 (51.8) 2.48 (63.0) 2.78 (70.6) 2.48 (63.0) 2.78 (70.6)
1/4 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2
ISO/BSP Tapered SS-QTM2-D-4MT QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-4MT QTM4 SS-QTM8-D-8MT SS-QTM2-D-2MS SS-QTM2-D-4MS SS-QTM4-D-4MS SS-QTM8-D-8MS SS-QTM4-D-4AN SS-QTM8-D-8AN QTM8 QTM2 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 QTM4 QTM8 ISO/BSP Parallel
JIC 37 Flare
To order alloy 400 with PTFE seals, replace SS in the ordering number with M.
Example: M-QTM2-S-4PM
For Cv, contact your authorized Swagelok representative. Include a female 60 cone profile. They accept a 60 male cone with female swivel nut.
Quick-Connects
15
A F flat
Insertion Depth
Dimensions Series A D 1.12 1.68 1.12 1.68
(28.4) (42.7) (28.4) (42.7)
D dia
Bodies
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Ordering Number
F 9/16 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 15 24 15 24 30
Series QTM2 QTM4 QTM8
Depth in. (mm) 1.26 (32.1) 0.95 (24.0) 1.15 (29.1)
Dimensions, in. (mm) SS-QTM2A-B-400 QTM2 3.16 (80.3) SS-QTM4A-B-400 QTM4 4.08 (104) SS-QTM2A-B-600 QTM2 3.25 (82.6) SS-QTM4A-B-600 QTM4 4.08 (104) SS-QTM8A-B-810 SS-QTM8A-B-1210 SS-QTM8A-B-1610 QTM8 QTM8 QTM8 4.30 (109) 4.30 (109) 4.58 (116)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 28.4 (1.12) 42.7 (1.68) 28.4 (1.12) 42.7 (1.68) 50.8 (2.00)
6 8 10 12
Dimensions, mm (in.) SS-QTM2A-B-6M0 QTM2 80.3 (3.16) SS-QTM4A-B-6M0 QTM4 104 (4.08) SS-QTM2A-B-8M0 SS-QTM4A-B-10M0 SS-QTM8A-B-12M0 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 80.3 (3.16) 104 (4.09) 109 (4.31)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. To order alloy 400 with PTFE seals, replace SS in the ordering number with M. Example: M-QTM2-B-400
Male Pipe Threads
Pipe Size in.
Ordering Number SS-QTM2A-B-4PM SS-QTM4A-B-4PM SS-QTM2A-B-6PM SS-QTM4A-B-6PM SS-QTM8A-B-8PM SS-QTM8A-B-12PM SS-QTM8A-B-16PM SS-QTM2A-B-4MT SS-QTM4A-B-4MT SS-QTM8A-B-8MT SS-QTM2A-B-4MS SS-QTM4A-B-4MS SS-QTM8A-B-8MS SS-QTM4A-B-4AN SS-QTM8A-B-8AN
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series A

(76.7) (98.8) (78.0) (98.8)
D 1.12 1.68 1.12 1.68

(28.4) (42.7) (28.4) (42.7)
F 9/16 7/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 7/8 1 1/8
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
NPT QTM2 3.02 QTM4 3.89 QTM2 3.07 QTM4 3.89 QTM8 QTM8 QTM8
4.20 (107) 4.19 (106) 4.48 (114)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.68 (42.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.68 (42.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.68 (42.7) 2.00 (50.8)
1/4 1/2
ISO/BSP Tapered QTM2 3.07 (78.0) QTM4 3.89 (98.8) QTM8 4.20 (107) ISO/BSP Parallel QTM2 2.96 (75.2) QTM4 3.89 (98.8) QTM8 QTM4 QTM8 4.20 (107) 3.89 (98.8) 4.20 (107) JIC 37 Flare
1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2
Example: M-QTM2A-B-4PM
Quick-Connects
16

Stems
Female Pipe Threads
Pipe Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 SESO
Ordering Numbers DESO NPT SS-QTM2-S-2PF SS-QTM2-S-4PF SS-QTM4-S-4PF SS-QTM2-S-6PF SS-QTM4-S-6PF SS-QTM8-S-8PF SS-QTM8-S-12PF SS-QTM8-S-16PF SS-QTM2-S-4FT SS-QTM4-S-4FT SS-QTM8-S-8FT SS-QTM2-S-2FS SS-QTM2-S-4FS SS-QTM4-S-4FS SS-QTM8-S-8FS SS-QTM2-D-2PF SS-QTM2-D-4PF SS-QTM4-D-4PF SS-QTM2-D-6PF SS-QTM4-D-6PF SS-QTM8-D-8PF SS-QTM8-D-12PF SS-QTM8-D-16PF QTM2 QTM2 QTM4 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 QTM8 QTM8 Series
Flow Coefficient (Cv) SESO 0.7 0.2 1.4 0.7 1.8 5.1 8.5 0.2 1.4 5.1 0.5 0.6 1.2 4.8 DESO 0.7 0.2 1.4 0.6 1.7 4.4 7.8 0.2 1.4 4.4 0.4 0.6 1.2 3.9
Dimensions in. (mm) A 1.73 (43.9) 2.04 2.36 2.14 2.48

(51.8) (59.9) (54.4) (63.0)
F 5/8 3/4 15/16 7/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 3/4 5/16 1 5/16 5/8 3/4 5/16 1 5/16
2.66 (67.6) 2.66 (67.6) 3.17 (80.5) 2.04 (51.8) 2.36 (59.9) 2.66 (67.6) 1.73 (43.9) 2.04 (51.8) 2.62 (66.5) 2.66 (67.6)
1/4 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/2
ISO/BSP Tapered SS-QTM2-D-4FT QTM2 SS-QTM4-D-4FT QTM4 SS-QTM8-D-8FT SS-QTM2-D-2FS SS-QTM2-D-4FS SS-QTM4-D-4FS SS-QTM8-D-8FS QTM8 QTM2 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 ISO/BSP Parallel
Example: M-QTM2-S-4PF
For Cv, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Bodies
Female Pipe Threads
Pipe Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS-QTM2A-B-2PF SS-QTM2A-B-4PF SS-QTM4A-B-4PF SS-QTM2A-B-6PF SS-QTM4A-B-6PF SS-QTM8A-B-8PF SS-QTM8A-B-12PF SS-QTM8A-B-16PF
Dimensions, in. (mm) Series NPT QTM2 QTM2 QTM4 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 QTM8 QTM8 2.60 (66.0) 2.99 3.35 3.04 3.35
(75.9) (85.1) (77.2) (85.1)
D 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 1.68 1.12 1.68

(28.4) (42.7) (28.4) (42.7)
F 9/16 3/4 7/8 7/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 9/16 3/4 7/8 1 1/8
3.53 (89.7) 4.02 (102) 4.40 (112)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.68 (42.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.68 (42.7) 2.00 (50.8)
1/4 1/2 1/8 1/4 1/2
ISO/BSP Tapered SS-QTM2A-B-4FT QTM2 2.99 (75.9) SS-QTM4A-B-4FT QTM4 3.35 (85.1) SS-QTM8A-B-8FT SS-QTM2A-B-2FS SS-QTM2A-B-4FS SS-QTM4A-B-4FS SS-QTM8A-B-8FS QTM8 QTM2 QTM2 QTM4 QTM8 3.92 (99.6) 2.60 (66.0) 2.99 (75.9) 3.35 (85.1) 3.53 (89.7) ISO/BSP Parallel
Example: M-QTM2-S-4PF
See next page for bulkhead end connections.
17
Quick-Connects

Bulkhead Stems
A F flat
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8

Ordering Numbers SESO SS-QTM4-S1-400 SS-QTM4-S1-600 SS-QTM8-S1-810 SS-QTM4-S1-6M0 SS-QTM4-S1-10M0 SS-QTM8-S1-12M0 DESO SS-QTM4-D1-400 SS-QTM4-D1-600
C-PH-654C DIM SS-QTM8-D1-810
Flow Coefficient (Cv) Series QTM4 QTM4 QTM8 QTM4 QTM4 QTM8 SESO 0.9 1.7 4.2 0.9 1.7 4.2 DESO 0.8 1.6 3.1 0.8 1.6 3.1 A 3.05 (77.5) 3.05 (77.5) 3.54 (89.9) 77.5 (3.05) 77.7 (3.06) 89.9 (3.54) Dimensions, in. (mm)
Dimensions Max Panel F Thickness 15/16 15/16 1 5/16 24 24 35 0.15 (3.8) 0.15 (3.8) 0.19 (4.8) 3.8 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15) 4.8 (0.19)
Min Panel Hole Dia 29/64 (11.5) 37/34 (14.7) 49/64 (19.4) 11.5 (29/64) 16.7 (21/32) 19.4 (49/64)
1/2 6 10 12
Dimensions, mm (in.) SS-QTM4-D1-6M0 SS-QTM4-D1-10M0 SS-QTM8-D1-12M0
Bulkhead Bodies
A F flat
Fitting Size 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number SS-QTM2A-B1-400 SS-QTM4A-B1-400 SS-QTM4A-B1-600 SS-QTM8A-B1-810 SS-QTM2A-B1-6M0 SS-QTM4A-B1-6M0 SS-QTM4A-B1-10M0 SS-QTM8A-B1-12M0
Series
Dimensions Max Panel F Thickness
Min Panel Hole Dia
Dimensions, in. (mm) QTM2 3.16 (80.3) 1.12 (28.4) 9/16 QTM4 4.42 (112) 1.68 (42.7) 7/8 QTM4 4.51 (115) 1.68 (42.7) Dimensions, mm (in.) QTM2 80.3 (3.16) 28.4 (1.12) QTM4 112 (4.42) 42.7 (1.68) QTM4 115 (4.52) 42.7 (1.68) QTM8 121 (4.77) 50.8 (2.00) 7/8 QTM8 4.78 (121) 2.00 (50.8) 1 1/8 15 24 24 30
0.65 (16.5) 1 13/64 (30.6) 0.15 (3.8) 29/64 (11.5) 0.15 (3.8) 0.19 (4.8) 37/64 (14.7) 49/64 (19.4)
D dia
6 10 12 QTM2 Integral Bulkhead
16.5 (0.65) 30.6 (1 13/64) 3.8 (0.15) 11.5 (29/64) 3.8 (0.15) 16.7 (21/32) 4.8 (0.19) 19.4 (49/64)
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. To order alloy 400 with PTFE seals, replace SS in the ordering number with M. Example: M-QTM2A-B1-400 QTM2 bodies have an integral bulkhead, as shown at left.
Male NPT
Pipe Size 1/4 Ordering Number SS-QTM2A-B1-4PM Series A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Max Panel D F Thickness
Min Panel Hole Dia
QTM2 3.02 (76.7) 1.12 (28.4) 9/16
0.65 (16.5) 1 13/64 (30.6)
Example: M-QTM2A-B1-4PM
Female NPT
Pipe Size 1/8 1/4 Ordering Number SS-QTM2A-B1-2PF SS-QTM2A-B1-4PF Series A
Dimensions, in. (mm) Max Panel D F Thickness
Min Panel Hole Dia
QTM2 2.60 (66.0) 1.12 (28.4) 9/16 QTM2 2.96 (75.2) 1.12 (28.4) 3/4
0.65 (16.5) 1 13/64 (30.6) 0.65 (16.5) 1 13/64 (30.6)
Example: M-QTM2A-B1-4PF
Options, QTM Series

Keyed QTM Series
Swagelok keyed quick-connects provide a positive mechanical lockout system to prevent accidental intermixing of different lines in multiuid or multipressure systems. Features
Keyed quick-connects will not
Body and Stem Protectors

Keyed sleeve Body and stem protectors are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Bodies with Release Button

QTM series bodies are available with an optional release button to prevent accidental uncoupling. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
interchange with any other Swagelok keyed quick-connects

If an attempt is made to couple
unlike keys, the valve system will not open.

Stems and bodies are color coded and numbered for easy
identication. QTM Series Key Numbers QTM2 series quick-connects are available in keys K1 through K8. QTM4 and QTM8 series quickconnects are available in keys K1 through K4 only (black, orange, green, or yellow). Keyed QTM series sleeve dimensions are the same as the standard QTM sleeve dimensions given in the Ordering Information and Dimensions tables.
Key Number and Designator K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
Key Color Black Orange Green Yellow Blue White Purple Brown
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company Dyneon, TFMTM Dyneon ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals XylanTM Whitford 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2007, R8 MS-01-138
www.swagelok.com
Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators f o r S w a g e l o k B a l l Va l v e s

130 and 150 Series
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are designed to actuate Swagelok ball valves. The actuators are compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air.
Features
I Sized for positive actuation I 90 actuation for 2-way (straight and angle),
3-way (40 series XL and XH special flow paths), and 4-way flow paths
I 180 actuation for other 3-way flow paths I Spring-return and double-acting models available I Special service actuators I High temperature I Low temperature I Nonfluorocarbon I Available low-pressure spring-return actuators for
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuator

(spring-return model cutaway shown)
Swagelok ball valve

lower-pressure air. Consult your independent Swagelok sales and service representative.
Technical Data
Temperature Range F (C) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 0 to 400 (17 to 204) 40 to 200 (40 to 93) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 200
(13.7)
Maximum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) At 100F (37C) At Maximum Temperature 165 (11.3) 100 (6.8) 165 (11.3)
Actuator Service Designator -HT -LT -NF
For minimum required actuator operating pressures, see individual Swagelok ball valve product catalogs.
Air Displacement
Actuator Model 131 133 135 151 153 155 Volume in.3 (cm3) 1.5 (24.6) 4.9 (80.3) 15.5 (254) 3.0 (49.2) 9.6 (157) 30.5 (500)
Approximate Weight
Actuator and mounting kit
Actuator Model 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155 Weight lb (kg) 1.5 (0.7) 3.8 (1.7) 12.5 (5.7) 1.3 (0.6) 2.5 (1.1) 9.7 (4.4)
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are available factory assembled to valves or in kits for field assembly. See the following Swagelok ball valve catalogs for complete ordering instructions. Multipurpose Ball Valves33 Series Instrument Ball Valves40 Series Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application 60 Series Trunnion Ball Valves83 and H83 Series
90 Actuation
Spring Return
180 Actuation
Double Acting
Actuator Service Standard Component Body, cap Piston Output shaft O-rings Spring Internal screw Cap screws Retaining rings Roll pin (131, 133, 151, and 153 series) Wall mount bracket Lubricant Multipurpose hydrocarbon Buna N High Temperature Low Temperature Nonfluorocarbon
Material Anodized cast aluminum alloy with black urethane exterior finish Cast aluminum alloy Hardened 416 SS Fluorocarbon FKM Buna C Ethylene propylene
Zinc phosphate-plated alloy steel 131, 133, 151, and 153 seriescadmium-plated steel; 135 and 155 seriessteel Cadmium-plated steel Cadmium- or zinc-plated steel 420 SS Stainless steel PTFE-based Hydrocarbonbased Silicone-based
www.swagelok.com
Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators f o r S w a g e l o k B a l l Va l v e s

130 and 150 Series
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are designed to actuate Swagelok ball valves. The actuators are compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air.
Features
I Sized for positive actuation I 90 actuation for 2-way (straight and angle),
3-way (40 series XL and XH special flow paths), and 4-way flow paths
I 180 actuation for other 3-way flow paths I Spring-return and double-acting models available I Special service actuators I High temperature I Low temperature I Nonfluorocarbon I Available low-pressure spring-return actuators for
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuator

(spring-return model cutaway shown)
Swagelok ball valve

lower-pressure air. Consult your independent Swagelok sales and service representative.
Technical Data
Temperature Range F (C) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 0 to 400 (17 to 204) 40 to 200 (40 to 93) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 200
(13.7)
Maximum Actuator Pressure psig (bar) At 100F (37C) At Maximum Temperature 165 (11.3) 100 (6.8) 165 (11.3)
Actuator Service Designator -HT -LT -NF
For minimum required actuator operating pressures, see individual Swagelok ball valve product catalogs.
Air Displacement
Actuator Model 131 133 135 151 153 155 Volume in.3 (cm3) 1.5 (24.6) 4.9 (80.3) 15.5 (254) 3.0 (49.2) 9.6 (157) 30.5 (500)
Approximate Weight
Actuator and mounting kit
Actuator Model 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155 131, 151 133, 153 135, 155 Weight lb (kg) 1.5 (0.7) 3.8 (1.7) 12.5 (5.7) 1.3 (0.6) 2.5 (1.1) 9.7 (4.4)
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are available factory assembled to valves or in kits for field assembly. See the following Swagelok ball valve catalogs for complete ordering instructions. Multipurpose Ball Valves33 Series Instrument Ball Valves40 Series Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application 60 Series Trunnion Ball Valves83 and H83 Series
90 Actuation
Spring Return
180 Actuation
Double Acting
Actuator Service Standard Component Body, cap Piston Output shaft O-rings Spring Internal screw Cap screws Retaining rings Roll pin (131, 133, 151, and 153 series) Wall mount bracket Lubricant Multipurpose hydrocarbon Buna N High Temperature Low Temperature Nonfluorocarbon
Material Anodized cast aluminum alloy with black urethane exterior finish Cast aluminum alloy Hardened 416 SS Fluorocarbon FKM Buna C Ethylene propylene
Zinc phosphate-plated alloy steel 131, 133, 151, and 153 seriescadmium-plated steel; 135 and 155 seriessteel Cadmium-plated steel Cadmium- or zinc-plated steel 420 SS Stainless steel PTFE-based Hydrocarbonbased Silicone-based
www.swagelok.com
R e m o te-Mount Manifold
Two Valve
Features
Non-rotating hardened needle design for leak-tight shutoff
and long service life

Angled vent valve for panel mounting Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) All stainless steel construction with PTFE packing and seals Color-coded valve label rings for easy valve identication Available graphite packing and seals for high-temperature
service
Instrument Side
Process Side
Stainless steel handle with square drive stem and locknut to ensure positive actuation
Shroud protects stem threads against ingress of dirt and dust Stem threads above packing protected from system media
Stem threads are cold rolled for high strength and smooth operation Two-piece knuckle joint provides nonrotating needle feature. Joint is located above the packing, protected from system media
Choice of packing and bonnet seal materials Safety back seating needle seals in fully open position
Non-rotating, hardened needle for positive shutoff
Valve Packing PTFE Graphite Pressure psig (bar) 6000 (413) 4000 (275) 6000 (413) 3000 (206) Temperature F (C) 200 (93) 400 (204) 200 (93) 850 (454)
Testing
Every remote-mount, 2-valve manifold is factory tested hydrostatically. A shell test is performed at 1.5 times maximum rated working pressure and a seat test is performed at 1.1 times maximum rated working pressure, in accordance with BS EN 12266-1 (formerly BS 6755 part 1).
Component Body Bonnets Needles Packings Bonnet seals Bonnet seal rings Gland nuts Shrouds Glands Handles Handle locknuts Handle washers Stems Locking pins Gland locknuts Lubricant Material / ASTM Specification 316/316L SS / A479 S17400 SS / A564 Condition H1150D PTFE
MSBG4NAT
Material
S = Stainless steel C = Carbon steel
End Connections, Female NPT

2N = 1/4 in. 4N = 1/2 in.
Packing / Bonnet Seal

316 SS
Packing adjustment may be required during the service Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time
Molybdenum disulde in hydrocarbon carrier
life of the valve to prevent leakage.
Dimensions
open
(82.6)
3.25
open
(48.3)
1.9
2 clearance holes for 1/4 in. dia. bolts
4.00 1/4 FNPT vent open 0.75

(102)
(19.0)
(26.2)
1.03
(52.1)
2.05
(21.3)
0.84
(35.8) (63.5)
1.41
2.5
(31.8)
1.25

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2005 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A. April 2005, R0 MS-02-330
www.swagelok.com
Rising Plug Valve s
4P a nd 5P Se r ie s
Roddable, straight-through orifice for maximum flow Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Packing below the threads Replaceable seat and stem tip design
Rising Plug Valves
Features
1 2
Packing below the threads prevents lubricant washout Positive stem retraction prevents sticking Straight-through orifice is roddable for easy cleaning
Internal wiper ring protects threads from external contamination
Nonrotating stem tip creates positive seal
Replaceable seals and seat
6 7 8
Valves are standard with acetal seats, fluorocarbon FKM O-rings, and PTFE backup rings. Ratings are limited to:
50F (11C) max for fluids compatible with acetal seat material, except for water Component 1 Handle Set screw 2 Wiper ring 3 Bonnet 4 Lock nut 5 Stem shank 6 Stem tip PFA
(51.6) (43.0) (31.0) (0.6) (13.7) (6.8)
Valve Body Materials 316 SS Alloy 400 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316 SS/A76 S17400/A564 Glass-reinforced PTFE 316 SS/ A479 Alloy 400/ B164
and steam, which are not recommended for temperatures greater than 00F (93C). Ratings extend to:
65F (53C) with Buna C O-rings. 400F (04C) with PEEK or PFA seat material and fluorocarbon FKM or
Kalrez
O-rings. To order PEEK or PFA seats, see Ordering Information and Dimensions. To order optional O-ring materials, see Options and Accessories, page 4.
Material Seat Material Acetal 316 SS PEEK PFA Acetal Alloy 400 PEEK
(344) (06) (110)
316 SS/B783 S17400/A564 316 SS/ A276 Alloy 400/ B164
Temperature, F (C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) 0 (8) to 100 (37) 6000 (413) 6000 (413) 750 (51.6) 5000 (344) 5000 00 (93) 650 (18) 3000 (06) 65 (43.0) 650 (18) 3000 50 (11) 1000 (68.9) 1600 (110) 450 (31.0) 1000 (68.9) 1600 300 (148) 1300 (89.5) 300 (0.6) 1300 350 (176) 100 (8.6) 00 (13.7) 100 400 (04) 1000 (68.9) 100 (6.8) 1000
ackup B rings O-ring
PTFE/D1710 Fluorocarbon FKM Acetal/D4181 316 SS/ A479 Alloy 400/ B164
750 65 450 (89.5) 300 (8.6) 00 (68.9) 100
7 Seat 8 Body Wetted lubricant Nonwetted lubricants
Silicone-based Tungsten disulfide- and fluorocarbon-based
Rising Plug Valves

Testing
Every 4P and 5P series rising plug valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Stem and body seals are tested to a requirement of no detectable leakage using a liquid leak detector.
5P Series

4P Series
All Swagelok 4P and 5P series rising plug valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.

(56.4)
.
(56.4)
.

Alloy 400 Valves (5P Series)

Replace SS with M. Example: M-5PDF8
D open
D open
Optional Seat Materials

Acetal seats are standard. For optional seat materials, replace D in the ordering number with P for PEEK or T for PFA. Example: SS-4PPF4
Female NPT gauge port
B1
B A
B1
Standard model End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female NPT Size 1/4 in. 1/ in. 1/4 in. 1/ to 1/4 in. Male/ female NPT 1/ in. 3/4 to 1/ in. 1.80 0.63 Cv 0.63 1.80 Orifice in. (mm) Ordering Number Series 4P 0.187 SS-4PDF4
(4.8)
Gauge port model Dimensions, in. (mm)
Model Standard Gauge port Standard Gauge port Standard Standard Gauge port Standard Gauge port Standard Gauge port
A .4 (56.9) .87 (7.9) .66 (67.6) 3.58 (90.9) .90 (73.4) 3.01 (76.5) 4.87 (14) 3.49 (88.6) 5.58 (14) 3.49 (88.6) 5.58 (14)
B 1.1 (8.4) 1.33 (33.8) 1.78 (45.) 1.89 (48.0) 3.1 (79.) .16 (54.9) 3.33 (84.6) .16 (54.9) 3.33 (84.6)
B1 1.1 (8.4) 1.75 (44.4) 1.33 (33.8) .5 (57.) 1.1 (8.4) 1.75 (44.4) 1.33 (33.8) .5 (57.) 1.33 (33.8) .5 (57.)
C 0.44 (11.) 0.50 (1.7) 0.56 (14.) 0.44 (11.) 0.50 (1.7)
D 3.77 (95.8) 3.83 (97.3)
SS-4PDGF4
4P 5P 5P 4P 4P 4P 5P 5P 5P 5P
0.50 SS-5PDF8 (6.4) SS-5PDGF8 0.187

(4.8)
SS-4PDM4-F4 SS-4PDM8-F4 SS-4PDGM8-F4 SS-5PDM8-F8
3.77 (95.8)
0.50 SS-5PDGM8-F8 (6.4) SS-5PDM1-F8 SS-5PDGM1-F8
0.56 (14.)
3.83 (97.3)
Gauge ports on 316 SS bodies match outlet size; alloy 400 bodies have 1/4 in. gauge ports. Has in. (50.8 mm) lagging extension body for insertion through pipe insulation.

Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard. For other O-ring materials, add a designator to the valve ordering number.
O-ring Material Buna C Buna N Ethylene propylene Kalrez Silicone Designator -BC -B -E -KZ -SI Temperature Rating F (C) 65 to 50 (53 to 11) 0 to 50 (8 to 11) 0 to 400 (8 to 04) 0 to 50 (8 to 11)
Panel Mounting
Panel mounting is available. A stainless steel panel nut is assembled onto a threaded bonnet. The maximum panel thickness is 1/ in. (1.7 mm), and the panel hole size is 5/3 in. (19.8 mm). To order, add -PM to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4PDF4-PM
Example: SS-4PDF4-BC
Seal Maintenance Kits

Maintenance kits contain stem tip, fluorocarbon FKM O-ring, PTFE backup rings, seat, lubricants, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
Seat Material Acetal/ASTM D4181 PFA/ASTM D3307 PEEK Kit Ordering Number SS-9K-5PD SS-9K-5PT SS-9K-5PP
Sour Gas Service

Both 4P and 5P series rising plug valves are available for sour gas service. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156.
Materials
Body, bonnet: annealed 316 SS O-ring: ethylene propylene, silicone-based lubricant Stem shank: strain-hardened 316 SS/ASTM A176 with tungsten disulfide and fluorinated-based lubricant on threads Stem tip: alloy 400/ASTM B164 All other components are the same as standard product.
To order kits for alloy 400 valves (5P series only), replace SS with M. Example: M-9K-5PD

To order 4P and 5P series rising plug valves cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4PDF4-SC11
Ratings are the same as standard 316 SS valves with acetal or PEEK seats and ethylene propylene O-rings.
To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-4PDF4-SG

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 00, 003, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI September 008, R11 MS-01-49
www.swagelok.com
SAF 2507 Se amle ss Supe r Duplex Tubing

TM
Fractional Size s
Features
SAF 2507 material provides excellent corrosion resistance
Material Standards
Grade SAF 2507 (PRE 42.5) UNS S32750 ASTM A789
in chloride-containing environments.
All SAF 2507 tubing, tube fittings, and weld fittings offered
by Swagelok are made from a controlled-chemistry SAF 2507 material with a minimum pitting resistance equivalent (PRE) value of 42.5.
Sizes include 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, and 1 in. outside
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur Phosphorous Nitrogen Composition wt. % 25.0 7.0 4.0 1.2 max 0.8 max 0.030 max 0.02 0.035 max 0.3
diameter.
Tubing nominal wall thickness meets ASTM A789. Tube markings include size, material type/grade,
specifications, heat number, and other information.
Ordering Information, Dimensions, and Pressure Ratings

Tube OD in. 1/4 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.049 3/8 0.065 0.083 0.065 1/2 0.083 0.095 5/8 0.083 0.095 0.083 3/4 0.095 0.109 1 0.109 0.120 Nominal Length ft (m) ASME B31.3 ASME B31.3 Chapter IX Pressure Rating psig (bar) 10 000 (690) 15 000 (1040) 19 800 (1370) 10 100 (700) 12 700 (880) 16 800 (1160) 10 100 (700) 12 900 (890) 15 300 (1060) 10 100 (700) 12 100 (840) 8 500 (590) 10 000 (690) 11 100 (770) 8 100 (560) 9 100 (630) 12 300 (850) 19 000 (1310) 26 200 (1810) 12 400 (860) 15 800 (1090) 21 400 (1480) 12 400 (860) 16 200 (1120) 19 400 (1340) 12 400 (860) 15 000 (1040) 10 400 (720) 12 400 (860) 13 900 (960) 10 000 (690) 11 100 (770)
Ordering Number 2507-T4-S-035-20 2507-T4-S-049-20 2507-T4-S-065-20 2507-T6-S-049-20 2507-T6-S-065-20 2507-T6-S-083-20 2507-T8-S-065-20 2507-T8-S-083-20 2507-T8-S-095-20 2507-T10-S-083-20 2507-T10-S-095-20 2507-T12-S-083-20 2507-T12-S-095-20 2507-T12-S-109-20 2507-T16-S-109-20 2507-T16-S-120-20
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.08 (0.12) 0.10 (0.15) 0.13 (0.19) 0.17 (0.25) 0.21 (0.31) 0.26 (0.39) 0.30 (0.45) 0.36 (0.54) 0.41 (0.61) 0.48 (0.71) 0.53 (0.79) 0.58 (0.86) 0.66 (0.98) 0.74 (1.10) 1.02 (1.52) 1.12 (1.67)
20 (6.1)
Pressure ratings based on special wall thickness tolerance for Swagelok SAF 2507 tubing. Not suitable for use with Swagelok tube fittings. Swagelok tube fittings not available.
Fittings
See the Swagelok Gaugeable SAF 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings and Swagelok SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings catalogs, MS-01-174 and MS-01-173, for more information.

See the Swagelok Orbital Welding System Quick Reference Guide, MS-02-143, for more information.

Do not mix components of other materials with SAF 2507 super duplex tubing. Steel bend shoes are required to bend SAF 2507 super duplex tubing with a Swagelok bench top tube bender.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2001, 2004, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 2006, R2 MS-02-151
www.swagelok.com
High-Pre ssure Fit tings
Fe ature s
Pressures to 60 000 psi (4134 bar) Weep holes for instant leak detection
Features
Fittings are machined from 316 stainless steel. Back ferrule is manufactured from S17400 hardened
stainless steel to ensure a secure grip on hardened or annealed tubing.

Weep holes allow instant leak detection. Unique ferrule action helps prevent excessive deformation
Weep hole
of the seal area of tube end and body.

Fitting does not reduce tube wall thickness. Fittings can be made, disconnected, and remade easily to
provide a reliable leak-tight seal.

Bleed slot on male thread connectors facilitates purging of
Bleed slot
fluid before operation.
Pressure Ratings
High-Pressure Fitting
connectors is determined with Swagelok hardened tubing at room temperature.

Component Back ferrule All other components Material S17400 SS 316 SS
connectors with annealed tubing is 30 000 psig (2067 bar) at room temperature.
Pipe Fitting
Pipe thread pressure rating is based on laboratory testing
with both male and female threads manufactured by Swagelok Company.

High-Pressure Tube Fitting to High-Pressure Male Thread Connectors

F flat G E D A Bleed slot
Tube OD in. 1/4
Uniform Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-440-1-44M SS-440-1-64M SS-640-1-44M SS-640-1-64M SS-940-1-64M SS-940-1-94M

(49.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8
G 3/4
2.32
(58.9)
13/16 60 000
(4134)
2.24
(56.9)
0.09 1.04
(26.4) (2.3)
3/8 3/4-16 3/4-16 9/16 1 1/8-12
2.41
(61.2)
0.12
(3.0)
13/16
15/16
3.01
(76.5)
0.12 1.45
(36.8) (3.0)
3.19
(81.0)
0.19
(4.8)
1 1/4
1 3/8
Union Tees
F flat G D E D
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(70.6)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
3.48
(88.4)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
5.04
(128)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

Unions
F flat G D E A
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(57.2)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.70
(68.6)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
3.69
(93.7)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Reducing Unions
Tube OD, in.
F flat
T
TxGx
Tx 1/4 1/4

(66.3)
D 1.04
(26.4)
Dx 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
Gx 3/4 3/4
G T
3/8
13/16 15/16
3.22
(81.8)
0.82 1.45
(36.8) (20.8)
0.09
(2.3)
60 000
(4134)
E A
Dx
9/16 3/8
3.42
(86.9)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
1 1/4
1 3/8 15/16
Bulkhead Unions
F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4

(83.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 15/16
G 3/4
Hole Drill Size 0.78

(19.8)
Panel Thickness Max in. (mm)
G D E A D
3/8 9/16
3.72
(94.5)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
1 1/16 15/16 1 5/8 1 3/8
0.91
(23.1)
0.50
(12.7)
60 000
(4134)
5.07
(129)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
1.34
(34.0)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to High-Pressure Female Thread Connectors

F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number SS-440-7-44F SS-640-7-64F SS-940-7-94F

(47.5)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.26
(57.4)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
G D E A
3.13
(79.5)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Union Elbows
F flat G D E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(35.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 11/16 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.74
(44.2)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Male Thread to Coned Tube Stub Adapters

Bleed slot F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-441 SS-64M-A-641 SS-94M-A-941

(51.1)
D 1.00
(25.4)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4

(4134)
2.47
(62.7)
1.25
(31.8)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
E D A
9/16
3.34
(84.8)
1.76
(44.7)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
High-Pressure Male Thread Unions

Bleed slot F flat Bleed slot
Uniform Thread Size 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-44M-6

(43.4)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8

(4134)
Caps
F flat G D A E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number SS-440-C SS-640-C SS-940-C

(34.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.80
(45.7)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
Port Connectors
E D
Tube OD in. 1/4
Ordering Number SS-441-PC SS-641-PC SS-941-PC

(47.0)
D 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.06
(1.5)

(4134)
3/8 9/16
2.33
(59.2)
0.68
(17.3)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)
3.41
(86.6)
1.06
(26.9)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Coned Tube Stub Reducers

F flat E1 GT D E Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 3/8 9/16 3/8
Ordering Number SS-440-R-641 SS-640-R-941 SS-940-R-641

(64.3)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
E1 0.12
(3.0)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8

(4134)
3.28
(83.3)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
0.19
(4.8)
45 000
(3100)
3.31
(84.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
0.12
(3.0)
60 000
(4134)

Plugs
G
Tube OD in. 1/4

A
Ordering Number SS-440-P SS-640-P SS-940-P

(24.1)
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
3/8 9/16
1.18
(30.0)
60 000
(4134)
1.66
(42.2)
Nuts
G
Tube OD in. 1/4

A

(20.6)
Front Ferrules
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Back Ferrules
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16
Ordering Number 174PH-444-1 174PH-644-1 174PH-944-1
3/8 9/16
0.97
(24.6)
1.44
(36.6)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Male Pipe Thread Connectors

F flat G D E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(46.7)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.09
(53.1)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
2.80
(71.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Male Pipe Thread Elbows

A G E D F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 9/16

(38.1)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 7/8 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
1.74
(44.2)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
2.52
(64.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Female Pipe Thread Connectors

F flat
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8

(52.6)
D 0.82
(20.8)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8
2.36
(59.9)
1.04
(26.4)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
9/16
D E A
2.99
(75.9)
1.45
(36.8)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Tube Fitting to Swagelok Tube Fitting Unions

F flat G T D E A Dx Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 1/8 1/4 3/8

(47.8)
D 0.82
(20.8)
Dx 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 3/4 15/16 1 3/8

(751)
2.21
(56.1)
1.04
(26.4)
0.60
(15.2)
0.12
(3.0)
10 200
(702)
2.80
(71.1)
1.45
(36.8)
0.66
(16.8)
0.19
(4.8)
7 500
(516)
Coned Tube Stub to Male Pipe Thread Adapters

F flat E
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8

(46.7)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 9/16 11/16 7/8
2.12
(53.8)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
9/16
2.85
(72.4)
0.19
(4.8)
Coned Tube Stub to Swagelok Tube Fitting Adapters

F flat E T D Tx G
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 9/16 Tx 1/4 3/8 1/2

(50.0)
D 0.60
(15.2)
E 0.06
(1.5)
F 1/2 5/8 13/16
G 9/16 11/16 7/8

(702)
2.31
(58.7)
0.66
(16.8)
0.12
(3.0)
7 500
(516)
2.96
(75.2)
0.90
(22.9)
0.19
(4.8)
6 700
(461)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Male Pipe Connectors

Bleed slot F flat
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16

(39.4)
D 0.56
(14.2)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
1.78
(45.2)
0.56
(14.2)
0.12
(3.0)
30 000
(2067)
E A
1 1/8-12
2.30
(58.4)
0.75
(19.0)
0.19
(4.8)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Female Pipe Connectors

Bleed slot F flat
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16

(42.2)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 7/8 1 1 1/4
1.94
(49.3)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
E A
1 1/8-12
2.48
(63.0)
0.19
(4.8)

High-Pressure Male Thread to Swagelok Tube Fitting Adapters

Bleed slot F flat
Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4

G
Thread Size 9/16-18 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/8-12
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-200 SS-44M-A-400 SS-64M-A-600 SS-94M-A-810

(40.8)
D 0.50
(12.7)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 5/8 13/16 1 1/4
G 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8

(751)
1.70
(43.1)
0.60
(15.2)
0.09
(2.3)
10 200
(702)
E A D
3/8 1/2
1.97
(50.0)
0.66
(16.7)
0.12
(3.0)
7 500
(516)
2.41
(61.2)
0.90
(22.9)
0.19
(4.8)
6 700
(461)
High-Pressure Male Thread to Tube Socket Weld Adapters

Bleed slot F flat T Tx E A D
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tx 1/2 5/8 3/4
Thread Size 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/8-12
Ordering Number SS-44M-A-4TSW SS-64M-A-6TSW SS-94M-A-8TSW

(33.0)
D 0.28
(7.1)
E 0.09
(2.3)
F 5/8 13/16 1 1/4

(1378)
1.60
(40.6)
0.31
(7.9)
0.12
(3.0)
20 000
(1378)
1.99
(50.5)
0.38
(9.7)
0.19
(4.8)
15 000
(1033)
Instructions for High-Pressure Cone and Ferrule Tube Fittings

InstallationHardened Tubing
The pre-setting tool (see page 8) must be used for proper initial installation of high-pressure tube ttings with hardened tubing. 1. Install the nut and ferrules onto the pre-setting tool. 2. Insert the coned tubing into the pre-setting tool. 3. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the tapered shoulder of the pre-setting tool body. 4. Tighten the nut until the tubing cannot be turned by hand. 5. Scribe the nut at the 6 oclock position. 6. While holding the pre-setting tool steady, tighten the nut one and one-fourth turns to the 9 oclock position. 7. Loosen the nut and remove the tubing with pre-set ferrules from the pre-setting tool. 8. Insert tubing with pre-set ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats. 9. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 10. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut three-eighths turn for 3/8 and 9/16 in. tubing and one-fourth turn for 1/4 in. tubing.
InstallationAnnealed Tubing
The pre-setting tool is suggested for proper installation of high-pressure tube fittings with annealed tubing. When the pre-setting tool is used, use the instructions for hardened tubing. When the pre-setting tool is not used, use the following instructions: 1. Insert coned tubing into the tube fitting. 2. Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the tapered shoulder of the tube fitting body. 3. Tighten the nut until the tubing cannot be turned by hand. 4. Scribe the nut at the 6 oclock position. 5. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut one and one-fourth turns to the 9 oclock position.
InstallationHigh-Pressure Male and Female Threads

1. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 2. Tighten the nut one-eighth turn.
You may disassemble and reassemble a Swagelok highpressure tube fitting. 1. Insert tubing with pre-set ferrules into the fitting body until the front ferrule seats. 2. Make sure that the nut is finger-tight. 3. While holding fitting body steady with a backup wrench, tighten the nut three-eighths turn for 3/8 and 9/16 in. tubing and one-fourth turn for 1/4 in. tubing.

Pre-Setting Tool
The pre-setting tool is suggested for initial assembly of Swagelok highpressure tube fittings when used with annealed tubing. The pre-setting tool must be used for initial assembly of these tube fittings when used with Swagelok hardened tubing.
Tube OD/ Tool Size, in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 Ordering Number MS-440-PT MS-640-PT MS-940-PT Minimum OD Required, in. 0.250 0.375 0.562
N
Visual Tube Inspection

A proper cone has ends that are faced and smooth. The cone should be free of any scratches and
leave-off marks.
Tube Preparation T, in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 N, in. 1/8 7/32 9/32
56 to 59 T
For tubing tolerance requirements, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Pre-Coned Tubing
Pre-coned tube lengths of hardened or annealed tubing are available from 2 to 120 in. (5 to 305 cm) in length. Tube lengths are precisely coned with a high-quality finish. Annealed tubing is rated to 30 000 psig (2067 bar). Hardened tubing is rated to 60 000 psig (4134 bar).
Tube OD in. Ordering Numbers Hardened Annealed Tubing Tubing SS-483-T-2 SS-483-T-4 SS-483-T-8 SS-483-T-12 SS-495-T-4 SS-495-T-8 SS-495-T-12 SS-612-T-3 SS-612-T-4 SS-612-T-8 SS-612-T-12 SS-918-T-4 SS-918-T-8 SS-918-T-12 SS-483-A-2 SS-483-A-4 SS-483-A-8 SS-483-A-12 SS-495-A-4 SS-495-A-8 SS-495-A-12 SS-612-A-3 SS-612-A-4 SS-612-A-8 SS-612-A-12 SS-918-A-4 SS-918-A-8 SS-918-A-12 0.187
(4.7)
Coning Tool
High-pressure tubing used with Swagelok high-pressure tube fittings should be prepared with a Swagelok coning tool. The Swagelok coning tool cuts a smooth, concentric cone on the tube end to help ensure reliable sealing in the fitting body. It is designed to prepare 1/4, 3/8, and 9/16 in. outside diameter heavy wall tubing. Each coning tool comes in a carrying case with Rapid Tap cutting lubricant; 1/4, 3/8, and 9/16 in. collets and tool bits; and inside-diameter deburring tool. Ordering number: MS-469-CT For operating instructions, see the Coning Tool Users Manual, MS-CRD-CONING.
Length in. (cm) 2 (5.0) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3)
Wall Thickness in. (mm)
0.083
(2.1)
1/4
12 (30.5) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3) 12 (30.5) 3 (7.6) 4 (10.2) 8 (20.3) 12 (30.5) 4 (10.2)
0.095
(2.4)
3/8
0.125
(3.2)
Replacement Parts
To order additional items separately, select an ordering number.
Description Cutting lubricant 1/4 in. collet 1/4 in. tool bit 3/8 in. collet 3/8 in. tool bit 9/16 in. collet 9/16 in. tool bit Deburring tool
Ordering Number MS-469CT-LUBE MS-469CT-2-4 MS-469CT-7-4 MS-469CT-2-6 MS-469CT-7-6 MS-469CT-2-9 MS-469CT-7-9 MS-44CT-27 9/16
8 (20.3) 12 (30.5)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company Rapid TapTM Relton Corporation 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI December 2006, R3 MS-01-34
www.swagelok.com
S A F 2 5 0 7 TM S u p e r D u p l e x We l d F i t t i n g s
Excellent corrosion resistance in chloride-containing environments Compact, high-flow SAF 2507 tube system connections Available in sizes from 1/4 to 1 in.
2 SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings
Swagelok Components for SAF 2507 Fluid Systems

A new line of Swagelok weld fittings, manufactured using Sandvik SAF 2507 super duplex, provide a compact solution for joining SAF 2507 tube systems. They can be joined to SAF 2507 components using the Swagelok welding system and flux in the autogenous SAF 2507 welding processno filler material or special shielding gases are required. Available in sizes from 1/4 to 1 in., Swagelok SAF 2507 weld fittings deliver flow and service ratings that are comparable to larger, heavier SAF 2507 weld fittings that require filler-type welding. All Swagelok SAF 2507 weld fittings are manufactured from a special grade of SAF 2507 material that has a minimum pitting resistance equivalent (PRE) value of 42.5 for maximum durability in chloride-containing environments.
1/4 to 1/2 in.

Compact design reduces system weight and footprint.
Radius internal junction smoothly transitions flow.
5/8 to 1 in.
Square, pre-finished tube weld ends simplify alignment and welding.
Material type marked by laser-etch.
Roll-stamped material type and material heat code ensures raw material traceability.
Pressure Ratings
Pressure ratings for a fluid system are determined by the end connection or system component with the lowest pressure rating.
Tube Butt Weld Ends

Table 1Pressure Ratings for Swagelok SAF 2507 Tube Butt Weld Ends used with SAF 2507 Tubing
Pressure ratings based on special wall thickness
tolerance for Swagelok SAF 2507 tubing. Pressure ratings calculated from S values (53 300 psi [367 MPa]), according to ASME B31.3 Chapter IX. Pressure ratings for metal temperatures from 20 to 100F (28 to 37C). SAF 2507 tubing, fully annealed, meets ASTM A789 or equivalent. Contact your independent Swagelok sales and service representative for available tubing sizes.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 0.035 12 300
(850)
0.049 19 000 12 400
0.065 26 200
(1 810)
0.083
0.095
0.109
0.120
Pressure Rating, psig (bar)

(1 310) (860)
21 400
(1 480)
19 400 15 000 12 400

(1 340) (1 040) (860)
13 900
(960)
11 100
(770)
15 800
(1 090)
12 400
(860)
16 200
(1 120)
12 400 10 400
(860) (720)
10 000
(690)
Medium-Pressure End Connections

Medium-pressure end connections listed in this catalog are manufactured to API-6A Specification for Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment tolerances, Autoclave Engineers and Butech Pressure Systems catalog dimensions, and are rated to 20 000 psig (1380 bar) for 1/4, 3/8 and 9/16 in. sizes and 10 000 psig (690 bar) for 3/4 and 1 in. sizes.
Elevated Temperature Factors

Table 2Swagelok 2507 Weld Fitting Pressure Ratings Factors
ASME B31.3, Chapter IX Factors F 200 300 400 500 600 C 93 148 204 260 315 Factor 0.87 0.81 0.76 0.73 0.71
SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings 3
Reducing Union (Butt Weld to Butt Weld)
W W1
T Tube OD in. 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4
W Wall Thickness in. 0.049 0.083 0.065 0.095 0.065 0.095
T1 Tube OD in.
W1 Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.065 0.035 0.065 0.049 0.083 0.065 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083
Ordering Number 2507-6MW-6-4-10K 2507-6MW-6-4-20K 2507-8MW-6-4-10K 2507-8MW-6-4-20K 2507-8MW-6-6-10K 2507-8MW-6-6-20K 2507-10TB-6-8-10K 2507-12TB-6-4-10K 2507-12TB-6-6-10K 2507-12TB-6-8-10K 2507-16TB-6-8-10K 2507-16TB-6-12-10K
A in. (mm)
1/4
T1
0.75
(19.0)
3/8 1/2
0.083
1/4 3/8 1/2
1.60
(40.6)
0.109
3/4
Elbow
L B W T F
T Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4MW-9-035 2507-4MW-9-065 2507-6MW-9-049 2507-6MW-9-083 2507-8MW-9-065 2507-8MW-9-095 2507-10TB-9-083 0.25
(6.4)
F Body Cube 5/16 7/16 9/16
L 0.41
(10.4)
0.47
(11.9)
0.53
(13.5)
1.42 0.80
(20.3)
0.083 3/4 1 0.109 2507-12TB-9-083 2507-16TB-9-083
13/16
(36.1)
1.41
(35.8)
1 1/16
1.49
(37.8)
Tee
B L W T F A
T Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4MW-3-035 2507-4MW-3-065 2507-6MW-3-049 2507-6MW-3-083 2507-8MW-3-065 2507-8MW-3-095 2507-10TB-3-083 A 0.82
(20.8)
F Body Cube 5/16
L 0.41
(10.4)
0.94
(23.9)
0.25
(6.4)
7/16 9/16
0.47
(11.9)
1.06
(26.9)
0.53
(13.5)
2.84
(72.1)
1.42 0.80
(20.3)
0.083 3/4 1 0.109 2507-12TB-3-083 2507-16TB-3-109
2.82
(71.6)
13/16
(36.1)
1.41
(35.8)
2.98
(75.7)
1 1/16
1.49
(37.8)
SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings 4
Tube Butt Weld to Medium-Pressure Male Adapter

A B GE W
T Tube OD in. 0.25

(6.4)
W Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.065 0.049 0.083 0.065 0.095 0.083 0.083 0.109
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4-MP-3-4TB-035 2507-4-MP-3-4TB-065 2507-6-MP-3-6TB-049 2507-6-MP-3-6TB-083 2507-9-MP-3-8TB-065 2507-9-MP-3-8TB-095 2507-12-MP-3-10TB-083 2507-12-MP-3-12TB-083 2507-16-MP-3-16TB-109 A 1.85
(47.0)
B 0.34
(8.6)
E 0.11
(2.8)
G 0.14
(3.6)
0.37
(9.4)
2.00 2.25 2.70 2.70 3.20
0.44 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.78
0.21
(5.3)
0.25
(6.4)
(50.8) (11.2)
0.50
(12.7)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
29
(57.2) (12.7)
3/4 3/4 1
0.62
(15.7)
0.45 0.45 0.56
0.56 0.56 0.72
(68.6) (15.7) (11.4) (14.2) (68.6) (15.7) (11.4) (14.2) (86.3) (19.8) (14.2) (18.3)
0.74
(18.8)
0.99
(25.1)
Long Tube Butt Weld to Medium-Pressure Male Adapter
B G E
29
MediumPressure Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 9/16 3/4 3/4 1
T Tube OD in. 0.25

(6.4)
W Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.065 0.049 0.083 0.065 0.095 0.083 0.083 0.109
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4-MP-3L-4TB-035 2507-4-MP-3L-4TB-065 2507-6-MP-3L-6TB-049 2507-6-MP-3L-6TB-083 2507-9-MP-3L-8TB-065 2507-9-MP-3L-8TB-095 2507-12-MP-3L-10TB-083 2507-12-MP-3L-12TB-083 2507-16-MP-3L-16TB-109 A 2.65
(67.3)
B 0.34
(8.6)
E 0.11
(2.8)
G 0.14
(3.6)
0.37
(9.4)
2.85 3.10 3.65 3.65 4.15
0.44 0.50 0.62 0.62 0.78
0.21
(5.3)
0.25
(6.4)
(72.4) (11.2)
0.50
(12.7)
0.31
(7.9)
0.41
(10.4)
(78.7) (12.7)
0.62
(15.7)
0.45 0.45 0.56
0.56 0.56 0.72
(92.7) (15.7) (11.4) (14.2) (92.7) (15.7) (11.4) (14.2) (105) (19.8) (14.2) (18.3)
0.74
(18.8)
0.99
(25.1)
Medium-Pressure Male Nut

A

F
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4-MP-4 2507-6-MP-4 2507-9-MP-4 2507-12-MP-4 2507-16-MP-4 Thread Size 7/16-20 UNF-2 9/16-18 UNF-2 13/16-16 UN-2 3/4-14 NPSM 1 3/8-12 UNF A 0.58
(14.7)
F Flat 9/16 5/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8
0.72
(18.3)
0.80
(20.3)
Thread size
3/4 1
0.94
(23.9)
1.35
(34.3)
5 SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings
Tube Butt Weld to MediumPressure Female Connector

30 E1
A B b C W
E T
Thread size F
Weep hole
MediumPressure Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8
T W Tube OD Wall Thickness in. in. 1/4 3/8 0.035 0.065 0.049 0.083 0.065
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number 2507-4-MP-3A-4TB-035 2507-4-MP-3A-4TB-065 2507-6-MP-3A-6TB-049 2507-6-MP-3A-6TB-083 2507-9-MP-3A-8TB-065 13/16-16 UN-2 2507-9-MP-3A-8TB-095 Thread Size 7/16-20 UNF-2 9/16-18 UNF-2 A 1.47 1.57 B 0.50 0.62 b 0.35
(8.9)
C 0.80
(20.3)
E1 0.20
(5.1)
E 0.11
(2.8)
F Flat 11/16 7/8
(37.3) (12.7)
0.39
(9.9)
0.76
(19.3)
0.32
(8.1)
0.21
(5.3)
(39.9) (15.7)
0.38 2.05 0.75 0.49 1.00 0.51

(9.7) (52.1) (19.0) (12.4) (25.4) (13.0)
9/16
1/2 0.095
1 1/16 0.31
(7.9)
Tools for Use with SAF 2507 Weld Fittings

The Swagelok welding system is a powerful (100 A) gas-tungsten arc orbital welding system. Compared to manual or filler-based welding methods for SAF 2507 material, this autogenous orbital welding system can reduce weld cycle time, improve weld consistency and quality, and help manage the total welding process. The Swagelok welding system is supported by a comprehensive package of equipment, training, accessories, and technical service.
Features
Microprocessor control Easy programming and program sharing Real-time data logging Lightweight, portable design
Swagelok Welding System Flux

Swagelok welding flux (SWS-FLUX-1) is required in the autogenous SAF 2507 welding process developed for use with the Swagelok welding system. The flux helps to ensure that proper austenite/ferrite phase balance, nitrogen content, and weld penetration are achieved in welded SAF 2507 connections.
Swagelok Welding System Tube Facing Tool

The Swagelok tube facing tool (SWS-232EP) machines the smooth, square, burr-free tube ends needed for maximum reliability and performance in orbitally welded and mechanical fitting connections. The tube facing tool can be used on a wide range of tubing materials, including SAF 2507. A heavy-duty motor, adjustable speed control, and the unique cutting insert design and holding arrangement make it ideal for facing heavier walls and harder materials.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company Sandvik, SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2001, 2004 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL January 2004, R2 MS-01-173
www.swagelok.com
Sample C ylinders, Accessories, and Outage Tubes
Fe ature s
Sizes from 10 to 3785 cm3 (1 gal) Working pressures up to 5000 psig (344 bar) 304L and 316L stainless steel and alloy 400
Sample Cylinders, Accessories, and Outage Tubes
Sample Cylinders
Features
Body made of seamless tubing provides consistent wall
Double-Ended Cylinders
Sizes from 40 to 3785 cm3 (1 gal) Working pressures up to 5000 psig (344 bar) 304L and 316L stainless steel materials resist intergranular
thickness, size, and capacity.

Smooth internal neck transition allows easy cleaning and
eliminates trapped fluids.

Cold-formed female NPT threads provide greater strength. Heavy-wall end connections provide strength and
corrosion.
304L and 316L stainless steel double-ended cylinders are
available with dual certification to DOT and TC requirements.
resist flaring.
Full-penetration gas tungsten arc-weld construction
Testing
Each DOT cylinder is hydrostatically tested to at least 5/3 the working pressure. All testing of DOT cylinders is witnessed by a DOT-approved independent inspection agency. DOT-3E 1800/TC-3EM 124 cylinders are hydrostatically proof tested at 3050 psig (210 bar). One cylinder of each lot is burst tested. DOT-3A 1800 and 5000/TC-3ASM 124 and 344 cylinders are marked with a serial number. Volumetric expansion of each cylinder during hydrostatic testing must be within the limits set by DOT Specification 3A and TC Specification 3ASM. DOT-3A 1800/TC-3ASM 124 cylinders are hydrostatically proof tested at 3000 psig (206 bar) minimum. DOT-3A 5000/TC-3ASM 344 cylinders are hydrostatically proof tested at 8500 psig (586 bar) minimum. DOT-SP7458 1800 cylinders are hydrostatically proof tested at 3000 psig (206 bar). It is the responsibility of the party lling the cylinder to have it retested by an approved facility, at the required intervals, in accordance with DOT and TC regulations.
provides leak-tight sample containment.

Swagelok DOT sample cylinders conform to 49 CFR Part
178, Specifications for Packagings.

Swagelok Transport Canada (TC) sample cylinders conform
to CAN/CSA B339, Cylinders, Spheres, and Tubes for the Transportation of Dangerous Goods.
Single-Ended Cylinders
150, 300, and 500 cm3 sizes meet
a variety of sampling needs.

304L stainless steel construction
resists intergranular corrosion.
Testing
DOT-4B 500 cylinders are hydrostatically proof tested at 1000 psig (69 bar) minimum.
Ratings up to 100F (37C) are determined by DOT code. Ratings limited to 300F (148C) max with PTFE internal coating. Ratings may be limited by individual country government regulations.
Material Specification Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700
(37) (93) (148) (204) (260) (315) (343) (371)
316L SS DOT-3A 5000 TC-3ASM 344 5000 3960 3570 3290 3060 2920 2870 2810
(344) (272) (245) (226) (210) (201) (197) (193)
316L SS, 304L SS DOT-3E 1800 TC-3EM 124 1800 1360 1230 1130 1050 1000 980 970
(124) (93.7) (84.7) (77.8) (72.3) (68.9) (67.5) (66.8)
304L SS DOT-3A 1800 TC-3ASM 124 1800 1360 1230 1130 1050 1000 980 970
(124) (93.7) (84.7) (77.8) (72.3) (68.9) (67.5) (66.8)
Alloy 400 DOT-SP7458 1800 1800 1580 1490 1430 1420 1420 1420 1420
(124) (108) (102) (98.5) (97.8) (97.8) (97.8) (97.8)
316 SS None 1000 840 760 700 650 620 610 590
(68.9) (57.8) (52.3) (48.2) (44.7) (42.7) (42.0) (40.6)
304L SS DOT-4B 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
(34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4)
750 (398) 800 (426) 850 (454)
2750 (189) 2700 (186) 2640 (181)
950 (65.4) 930 (64.0)
950 (65.4) 930 (64.0)
1410 (97.1)
580 (39.9) 570 (39.2) 560 (38.5)
500 (34.4) 500 (34.4)
Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive (TPED)

The Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive (TPED) provides requirements relating to the design, manufacture, and testing of transportable pressure vessels and accessories, including sample cylinders and rupture discs. The intent of the directive is to provide a uniform level of product safety throughout the European Union countries. For information about TPED-compliant Swagelok products, see the Swagelok Products Compliant with the Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive catalog, MS-02-193.
Sample Cylinders
Ordering Information, Technical Data, and Dimensions
Single-Ended Cylinders
T minimum wall thickness
Double-Ended Cylinders
P female NPT size
Pboth ends female NPT size
Material Grade/ Pressure Cylinder Rating Specification psig (bar)
Internal Volume cm3 5 % 150
P in.
Ordering Number Single-Ended 304L-05SF4-150
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 4.88 (124) 2.00 (50.8) 8.62 (219) 13.6 (345) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 3.88 (98.6) 3.75 (95.2) 4.94 (125) 5.25 (133) 2.00 (50.8) 8.94 (227) 11.4 (290) 13.8 (351) 3.50 (88.9) 10.9 (277) 17.2 (437) 4.00 (102) 26.7 (678) 5.25 (133) 2.00 (50.8) 8.94 (227) 13.8 (351) 8.00 (203) 1.90 (48.2) 14.5 (368) 23.5 (597) 5.25 (133) 2.00 (50.8) 8.94 (227) 13.8 (351) 0.093 (2.4) 0.240 (6.1) 0.093 (2.4) 0.206 (5.2) 0.180 (4.6) 0.093 (2.4) 0.070 (1.8) 0.093 (2.4) T
Weight lb (kg) 1.1 1.8 2.7

(0.50) (0.82) (1.2)
304L SS/ DOT-4B 500
500
(34.4)
300 500 40 50 75
1/4
304L-05SF4-300 304L-05SF4-500
Double-Ended 1/8 304L-HDF2-40 304L-HDF4-50 304L-HDF4-75 1/4 304L-HDF4-150 304L-HDF4-300 304L-HDF4-400 304L-HDF4-500 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 304L-HDF4-1000 304L-HDF8-1000 304L-HDF4-2250 304L-HDF8-2250 304L-HDF4-1GAL 304L-HDF8-1GAL 316L-HDF4-150 316L-HDF4-300 316L-HDF4-500 316L-50DF4-150 1/4 316L-50DF4-300 316L-50DF4-500 M-HDF4-150 M-HDF4-300 M-HDF4-500 0.31 (0.14) 0.38 (0.17) 0.62 (0.28) 0.94 (0.43) 1.6 2.1 2.6 6.5 14 21
(0.73) (0.95) (1.2) (2.9)
304L SS/ DOT-3E 1800 TC-3EM 124
1800 (124)
150 300 400 500 1000
304L SS/ DOT-3A 1800 TC-3ASM 124
1800 (124)
2250 3785 (1 gal)
(6.4)
(9.5)
316L SS/ DOT-3E 1800 TC-3EM 124 316L SS/ DOT-3A 5000 TC-3ASM 344 Alloy 400/ DOTSP7458 1800
150 1800 (124) 300 500 150 5000

(344)
0.94 (0.43) 1.6 2.6 3.0 5.6 9.1 1.8 2.9

(0.73) (1.2) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1)
300 500 150
0.94 (0.43)
(0.82) (1.3)
1800 (124)
300 500
Overpressure Protection
Compressed gas cylinders must be equipped with pressure relief devices in accordance with United States DOT regulations and CGA S-1.1. The CGA standard lists devices that can be used with specific gases. It also contains information on other types of pressure relief devices. Be sure to use the correct pressure-relief device for the gas being used. Proper lling of the cylinder according to DOT specications, or other local regulations, is critical in preventing overpressurization.
Rupture Disc Precautions

1. Do not use rupture disc devices in a location where the release of the cylinder contents might create a hazard. The rupture disc vents to the atmosphere through six radial holes in the body. Pressure is released suddenly with a loud noise, and gases escape at high velocity. 2. Know the burst pressure. (This rating is marked on the end face of the rupture disc unit, as required by CGA S-1.1.) 3. Be sure the maximum burst pressure does not exceed the cylinder test pressure. 4. Be sure the minimum burst pressure is at least 40 % higher than the cylinder filling pressure. 5. Inspect rupture discs regularly. The strength of rupture discs deteriorates with time due to temperature, corrosion, and fatigue. Pulsating pressure, vacuum/ pressure cycling, heat, and corrosive fluids and atmospheres can reduce the discs burst pressure. 6. Do not use rupture discs to protect vessels with volumes greater than 3 gal (11 355 cm3) for compressed gases or 1 1/2 gal (5677 cm3) for liquefied gases. 7. Provide suitable means to isolate the sample cylinder from the system in case the rupture disc bursts while taking a sample. 8. In cylinders with liquefied gases, a small temperature increase during transportation or storage will cause the liquid to expand and may cause the rupture disk to release its contents. See local regulations and other appropriate guidelines for safe filling limits for your application.
Rupture Disc Units

Swagelok rupture disc units protect sample cylinders from overpressurization by venting the cylinder contents to atmosphere. The rupture disc is welded to a body that is threaded into a valve body or a rupture disc tee and sealed by an elastomer O-ring. The rupture disc can be easily replaced without removing the valve or the tee from the cylinder.
Component Body, inlet ring O-ring Rupture disc Material Grade/ASTM Specification 316L/A479 or A213 Fluorocarbon FKM Alloy 600/B168
Nominal Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) 2850 psig 150 psig 196 bar 10.3 bar 1900 psig 100 psig 130 bar 6.8 bar Ordering Number SS-RDK-16-2850 SS-RDK-16-1900
Rupture Disc Tees

These compact assemblies are designed for use with various Swagelok valves. Tees are made of 316 stainless steel. Each tee includes a rupture disc unit.
Nonrotating-Stem Needle Valves with Rupture Disc Units

End Connections Flow Valve Ordering Inlet Outlet Pattern Number With 2850 psig (196 bar) Rupture Disc Straight SS-16DKM4F4-2 1/4 in. 1/4 in. male NPT SS-16DKM4F4-A-2 female Angle 1/2 in. NPT SS-16DKM8-F4-A-2 male NPT With 1900 psig (130 bar) Rupture Disc Straight SS-16DKM4-F4-1 1/4 in. 1/4 in. male NPT SS-16DKM4-F4-A-1 female Angle 1/2 in. NPT SS-16DKM8-F4-A-1 male NPT
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. B A
C D
Orifice in. (mm)

End Connections Inlet Outlet Ordering Number Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C D
0.218 (5.5) 1/4 in. male NPT 1/2 in. male NPT 1/4 in. male NPT 1/2 in. male NPT
With 2850 psig (196 bar) Rupture Disc 1/4 in. female NPT SS-RTM4-F4-2 1.88
(47.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.50
(12.7)
SS-RTM8-F4-2
2.19
(55.6)
1.22
(31.0)
1.19
(30.2)
0.56
(14.2)
0.218 (5.5)
With 1900 psig (130 bar) Rupture Disc 1/4 in. female NPT SS-RTM4-F4-1 1.88
(47.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.50
(12.7)
For more information, see the Swagelok Nonrotating-Stem Needle Valves catalog, MS-01-42. Other Swagelok valves are available for use with sample cylinders. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for details.
SS-RTM8-F4-1
2.19
(55.6)
1.22
(31.0)
1.19
(30.2)
0.56
(14.2)
Options
PTFE Coating
Internal cylinder surfaces can be coated with PTFE to provide a nonstick surface, which aids in cleaning. To order, add -T to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF4-300-T
Additional Marking
Cylinders can be furnished roll stamped or laser etched to meet specific identification requirements, such as company name, address, serial number, or order number. Swagelok will not mark cylinders with the intended contents. Roll StampingTo order, add -RS to the cylinder ordering number, followed by the specific information. Example: 304L-HDF4-300-RS Company Name and Address DOT-3E, -4B, and -SP7458 cylinders are roll stamped on the cylinder wall. DOT-3A cylinders are roll stamped on the crown. Laser EtchingTo order, add -LE to the cylinder ordering number, followed by the specific information. Example: 304L-HDF4-300-LE Company Name and Address This information will be laser etched on the cylinder wall. Cylinders with the above options conform to DOT specifications.
Electropolishing
Electropolishing provides a clean internal surface with a high degree of passivation. To order, add -EP to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF4-300-EP
Accessories
End Caps
End caps protect valves from damage. Each cap threads onto a neck ring that has been peened to the cylinder neck. End caps are made from plated carbon steel and are available for use on 2250 and 3785 cm3 (1 gal) cylinders. Swagelok angle-pattern valves can be used on cylinders with end caps. To order, add C to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF8-2250C
Carrying handle Neck ring End cap
Carrying Handle
This accessory provides a convenient way to carry sample cylinders.The handle is made from 304 stainless steel and is available for use on 400 cm3 and larger cylinders, as well as 300 cm3 cylinders rated to 5000 psig (344 bar). To order a sample cylinder to be shipped with a carrying handle, add H to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF4-300H To order a carrying handle as a separate component, use one of the following ordering numbers:
Cylinder OD in. (mm) 1.9, 2
(48.2, 50.8)
Ordering Number MS-5K-CY-2 MS-5K-CY-4
3.5, 4
(88.9, 102)
Caps and Plugs

Caps and plugs protect Swagelok tube fitting or NPT end connections on valves during cylinder transport. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
Customer-supplied ring shown
To order a 2250 or 3785 cm3 (1 gal) sample cylinder with factory-assembled end caps and neck rings to be shipped with a carrying handle, add CH to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF8-2250CH
Tube fitting plug
Pipe cap
Pipe plug
Outage Tubes
Features
Made from 316 stainless steel or alloy 400 tubing Offered in 1/4 or 1/2 in. NPT sizes Marked Outage Tube for identification
Construction
Outage tubes are welded to the male inlet end of an adapter or tee. This adapter or tee is then threaded into the female port Outage tube adapter of a sample cylinder.
Tube Length
L
Outage tube length (L) is measured from the end of the pipe fitting to the end of the tube. Standard tube length is 10.4 in. (26.4 cm). Tubing can be cut to a desired length; instructions are included.
Outage tube welded to male NPT end
Outage tubes can also be welded directly to the male inlet of a Swagelok nonrotating stem needle valve. The valve is then threaded into the female port of a sample cylinder.
Purpose
Outage tubes provide a vapor space of the desired volume in cylinders containing liquefied gases, so that liquid in the cylinder can expand if the temperature increases. Without enough vapor space, a small temperature increase can cause the liquid to expand and increase the pressure dramatically. See local regulations and other appropriate guidelines for safe filling limits for your application.
Use
Outage is the vapor space in the cylinder expressed as a percentage of the total volume of the cylinder. % outage = (vapor space/total volume) 100 The cylinder is held vertically with the outage tube at the top, as shown. The length of the outage tube determines the amount of vapor space. Sampling methods and the use of the outage tube are described in technical publications such as ASTM D1265, Standard Practice for Sampling Liqueed Petroleum (LP) Gases (Manual Method).
Outage tube
Vapor space Total volume
Liquid
Outage Tubes
Adapters with Outage Tubes
Select an adapter ordering number. For alloy 400 material, replace SS with M. Example: M-DTM4-F4-104
End Connections Inlet 1/4 in. male NPT Outlet Adapter Ordering Number Tube Length in. (cm) 10.4
(26.4)
Outage Tube Lengths

Minimum Outage, % 10 Tube OD 1/4 in. Tube OD 5/16 in. 1/2 in. 304L-HDF4-75 304L-HDF4-150 304L-HDF4-300 5/16 in. 304L-HDF4-400 Valve Ordering Number Tube Length in. (cm) 10.4
(26.4)
20
30
40
50
Cylinder Ordering Number 304L-HDF2-40 304L-HDF4-50 0.87 009 0.85 009 1.02 010 1.12 011 1.65 017 2.00 020 2.26 023 2.31 023 3.30 033 4.62 046 2.21 022 3.20 032 4.52 045 1.12 011 1.65 017 2.26 023 1.12 011 1.65 017 2.26 023 1.09 010 1.59 016 2.16 022 1.62 016 2.74 027 4.39 044
Tube Length, in. 1.11 011 1.07 011 1.34 013 1.45 015 2.32 023 2.90 029 3.38 034 3.06 031 4.59 046 6.79 068 2.96 030 4.49 045 6.69 067 1.45 015 2.32 023 3.38 034 1.45 015 2.32 023 3.38 034 1.43 014 2.27 023 3.30 033 2.17 022 3.84 038 6.21 062 Designator 1.35 1.59 014 016 1.28 1.50 013 015 1.66 1.98 017 020 1.79 2.13 018 021 2.99 3.67 030 037 3.79 4.69 038 047 4.50 5.62 045 056 3.81 4.56 038 046 5.88 7.17 059 072 8.96 11.14 090 111 3.71 4.46 037 045 5.78 7.07 058 071 8.86 11.04 089 110 1.79 2.13 018 021 2.99 3.67 030 037 4.50 5.62 045 056 1.79 2.13 018 021 2.99 3.67 030 037 4.50 5.62 045 056 1.77 2.12 018 021 2.96 3.65 030 037 4.45 5.60 045 056 2.71 3.26 027 033 4.93 6.03 049 060 8.04 9.86 080 099 1.84 018 1.71 017 2.31 023 2.46 025 4.34 043 5.59 056 6.74 067 5.31 053 8.46 085 13.31 133 5.21 052 8.36 084 13.21 132 2.46 025 4.34 043 6.74 067 2.46 025 4.34 043 6.74 067 2.46 025 4.34 043 6.74 067 3.81 038 7.12 071 11.68 117
SS-DTM4-F4-104 1/4 in. 1/2 in. male NPT female NPT SS-DTM8-F4-104
Nonrotating Stem Needle Valves with Outage Tubes

Select a valve ordering number. For alloy 400 material, replace SS with M. Example: M-14DKM4-104
End Connections Inlet 1/4 in. male NPT Outlet 1/4 in. female NPT 1/4 in. male NPT Tube OD 5/16 in. 1/2 in.
304L-HDF4-500 304L-HDF4-1000 304L-HDF4-2250 304L-HDF4-1GAL 304L-HDF8-1000 1/2 in. 304L-HDF8-2250 304L-HDF8-1GAL 316L-HDF4-150 316L-HDF4-300 316L-HDF4-500 M-HDF4-150 M-HDF4-300 M-HDF4-500 5/16 in. 304L-05SF4-150 304L-05SF4-300 304L-05SF4-500
SS-14DKM4-104 SS-16DKM4-F4-104
Valves do not include rupture disc units. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for information about valves with outage tubes and rupture disc units.
Factory-Cut Tube Lengths

Follow the example below to determine how to order outage tubes cut at the factory to a length other than 10.4 in. (26.4 cm). Sample cylinder ordering number is 304L-HDF4-150. Outage required is 30 %. See Outage Tube Lengths table at right: 1. Find 304L-HDF4-150, the cylinder ordering number. 2. Read across to the 30 % column. 3. Tube length is 1.79 in. 4. Designator is 018. 5. Replace 104 in the outage tube adapter or valve ordering number with 018. Examples: SS-DTM4-F4-018 SS-16DKM4-F4-018
Caution: Tolerances on cylinder volume, dimensions, and thread t can change the outage obtained by as much as 20 %. To obtain an exact outage, each outage tube and cylinder assembly should be calibrated by a suitable method.
316L-50DF4-150 316L-50DF4-300 316L-50DF4-500
Miniature Sample Cylinders

Miniature sample cylinders with 3/8 in. Swagelok tube adapter end connections allow transport of low volumes of fluids. The tube adapter ends can be connected to 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings or welded to 1/4 or 3/8 in. tubing.
Features
Single-ended or double-ended designs Corrosion-resistant 316 stainless steel construction Pressure rating of 1000 psig (68.9 bar) Sizes include 10, 25, and 50 cm3 capacities Smooth internal port transition for easy cleaning Volume is closely controlled Full-penetration butt weld construction
Cleaning and Testing

Every miniature sample cylinder is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63. Every miniature sample cylinder is proof tested at 1667 psig (114 bar) with dry nitrogen gas.

3/8 (9.5) OD for tube fitting or butt weld connection

0.065 (1.7) nominal thickness
1.00
(25.4)
1/4 (6.4) ID for tube socket weld connection
Cylinder Model Singleended Doubleended
Internal Volume cm3 10 25 50 10 25 50
Volume Tolerance 10 % 5 % 10 % 5 %
Ordering Number SS-4CS-TW-10 SS-4CS-TW-25 SS-4CS-TW-50 SS-4CD-TW-10 SS-4CD-TW-25 SS-4CD-TW-50
A in. (mm) 2.19 (55.6) 3.69 (93.7) 6.25 (159) 2.75 (69.8) 4.25 (108) 6.81 (173)
1000
(68.9)
Average Weight oz (g) 2.2 (62) 3.2 (91) 5.6 (159) 1.9 (54) 3.3 (94) 5.1 (145)
Existing DOT and TC specifications do not cover miniature cylinders of this size, construction, and pressure rating.
Additional Products
N Series Needle Valves
Swagelok N series severe-service unionbonnet needle valves can handle working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) and are available in straight and angle patterns. For more information, see the Swagelok Severe-Service Union-Bonnet Needle ValvesN Series and HN Series catalog, MS-01-168.
Quick-Connects
Swagelok quick-connects are available in single- and double-end shutoff stem models and can be keyed to prevent accidental intermixing of different lines in multifluid or multipressure systems. For more information, see the Swagelok Quick-Connects catalog, MS-01-138.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2001, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 2007, R4 MS-01-177
www.swagelok.com
S c re w e d - B o n n e t N e e d l e Va l v e s
JB Series
Features
Stem threads isolated from system fluid Standard nonrotating ball stem tip (shown); optional regulating stem tip available
Externally adjustable PTFE packing Metal-to-metal shutoff
Ratings are based on PTFE packing. Optional packing materials will affect the temperature rating. See Grafoil Stem Packing, page 2.
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 1250 2.2 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 3000 2580 2330 2140
(206) (177) (160) (147)
s Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar) s Temperatures up to 400F (204C) with standard PTFE
packing; up to 600F (315C) with optional Grafoil packing

s Straight and angle-pattern valves
40 (40) to 100 200 300 400
(37) (93) (148) (204)
For more information about ASME classes, material groups, and ratings, see the Swagelok Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings technical bulletin.
2 3
Set screw 2 Panel mount nut 3 Bonnet 4 Lock nut 5 Glands (2) 6 Outer packing (2) 7 Inner packing 8 Stem
Component 1 Handle
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Anodized aluminum 2024-T4/B211 Alloy steel/ ANSI B18.3 316 SS/A479 316 SS 316 SS/A240 Reinforced PTFE Virgin PTFE 316 SS/A479 S17400/A564 316 SS/AMS 5648 316 SS/A182 Silicone based; molybdenum disulfide based

Standard Ball Stem Tip
The JB series ball stem is designed to be used in a fully open or fully closed position. See Dimensions for flow coefficients.
Optional Regulating Stem Tip

0.3
6 6
4 5 7 5
0.2
Regulating Stem 0.24 Cv max
8 9
9 Disc Ball insert 10 Body Lubricants
0.1
0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
10
Ordering Information / Dimensions

1.50
(38.1)
Testing
Every JB series needle valve is factory tested for bubble-tight shutoff at 100 psi (6.8 bar) differential pressure. Shell testing is performed on a sampling basis at 3000 psig (206 bar) to a requirement of no detectable leakage.
1.50
(38.1)
1/4 (6.4) max panel thickness 2.49

(63.2)
1/4 (6.4) max panel thickness 2.36

(59.9)

Every JB series needle valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Specification SC-10.
open 1.41
(35.8)
open 1.29
(32.8)
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK

Outlet Inlet B3 C
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
B A
B1
0.38
(9.7)
B2
Insert A after JB in an ordering number with B2, B3, and C dimensions listed. Example: SS-2JBA
0.38
(9.7)
Ball Stem Tip Material

C
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) Cv 0.09 Orifice

(2.1)
A 2.26
(57.4)
B1
B2
B3
Add -CC for 440C SS or -ST for cobaltbased alloy to the ordering number. Example: SS-2JB-CC
1/8 in. SS-2JB 1/4 in. SS-4JB Swagelok tube fitting 3/8 in. SS-6JB 6 mm SS-6JB-MM 8 mm SS-8JB-MM 1/8 in. SS-2JB2 Male NPT 1/4 in. SS-4JB2 Male NPT to Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-4JB1 tube fitting Male NPT to 1/4 in. SS-4JB2-RT male ISO Female NPT 1/8 in. SS-2JB4
0.082
1.13 (28.7)
1.06 1.07 1.44

(26.9) (27.2) (36.6)
Regulating Stems
Valves with 316 SS regulating stems have a maximum flow coefficient (Cv) of 0.24 (0.09 with 1/8 in. tube fitting end connections). Insert R in the ordering number. Examples: SS-2JBR; SS-2JBAR2
2.33
(59.2)
1.17 (29.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.17 (29.7) 1.24

(31.5)
1.54
(39.1)
2.46 0.166 0.39 (straight pattern)

(4.2) (62.5)
1.60
(40.6)
2.33
(59.2)
1.54
(39.1)
2.47
(62.7)
0.156
(4.0)
1.75
(44.5)
0.88
(22.4)
Grafoil Stem Packing

1.37
(34.8)
2.00 0.58 (angle pattern) 0.166

(4.2) (50.8)
1.00 (25.4)
2.16 1.00 1.16

(54.9) (25.4) (29.5)
One-piece Grafoil packing extends temperature ratings to 600F (315C) at 1880 psig (129 bar). Add -HT to the ordering number. Example: SS-2JB-HT
2.00
(50.8)
1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 0.88 (22.4)
1.37
(34.8)
Stem Packing Kits

Stem Packing Three-piece PTFE One-piece Grafoil Ordering Number T-4JB-K1 G-4JB-K1
1.25 (31.8)
Angle-pattern valve orifice is 0.094 in. (2.4 mm). See specifications ISO 7/1, BS21, DIN-2999, and JIS B0203.
Stainless Steel Bar Handles

Add -BG to the ordering number. Example: SS-2JB-BG
Packing adjustment may be required during the valves service life. Safe Product Selection
Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
Handle Kits
Handle Ordering Number A-4JB-K7-GR SS-4JB-K7 Standard green anodized aluminum bar 316 SS bar
When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 2001, 2002 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 2002, R3 MS-01-84
www.swagelok.com
S c re w e d - B o n n e t N e e d l e Va l v e s
JN Series
Features
Stem threads isolated from system fluid Externally adjustable PTFE packing
Bonnet lock nut PTFE-coated stem tip for repetitive shutoff
Material Name s Working pressures up to 600 psig (41.3 bar) s Temperatures up to 300F (148C) s Straight and angle patterns s Vee stem standard; regulating stem available s Swagelok tube fitting and male and female NPT and Temperature F (C) 40 (40) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 300 (148) Brass Working Pressure psig (bar) 600 (41.3) 425 (29.2) 250 (17.2)
ISO pipe end connections

s Green handle standard; optional colors available s Optional panel mounting

0.5
Vee Stem, Angle Pattern 0.43 Cv max

0.4
Component 1 Handle Set screw
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Green phenolic Alloy steel/ANSI B18.3 Brass 360/B16 Silicone bronze 661/B98 Brass 260/B36 Virgin PTFE Brass 377/B283 Silicone based; molybdenum disulfide based
Vee Stem, Straight Pattern 0.30 Cv max

0.3
2 3 4
0.2
2 Bonnet 3 Lock nut 4 Stem 5 Glands (2) Packing 6 Body Lubricants
Regulating Stem 0.12 Cv max

0.1
0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Wetted components listed in italics. Stem tip is PTFE coated.

Straight-Pattern Valves
Select an ordering number. Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
Straight Pattern
1.00 (25.4)
Testing
Every JN series needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 100 psig (6.8 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed with nitrogen at 100 psig (6.8 bar) on a sampling basis to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Insert A after JN in an ordering number with C, D, and E dimensions listed. Example: B-2JNA
Angle Pattern
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK

1.00 (25.4)
1.77
(45.0)
B
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
C E
SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
Every JN series needle valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Specification SC-10.
D 0.30
(7.6)
0.99 (25.1)

1.96 (49.8)
Regulating Stem
Insert R after JN or JNA in the ordering number. Examples: B-2JNR B-4JNAR
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) Orifice

(2.1)
A 2.27
(57.7)
C 1.45
(36.8)
1/8 in. B-2JN Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. B-4JN 3/8 in. B-6JN 6 mm Female NPT B-6JN-MM
0.082
1.14 (29.0) 1.17 (29.7) 1.21 (30.7) 1.17 (29.7)
2.33
(59.2)
1.47 1.18
(30.0) (37.3)
2.42 0.156
(4.0) (61.5)
1.51
(38.4)
Handle Colors
Add a designator to the valve ordering number. Example: B-2JN-BK
Color Black Blue Red Yellow Designator -BK -BL -RD -YW
2.33
(59.2)
1.47
(37.3)
1/4 in. B-4JN4 1/8 in. B-2JN2

(3.2)
2.13
(54.1)
1.13
(28.7)
0.125
1.75
(44.4)
1.18 1.18
(30.0) (30.0)
0.88 (22.4)
Male NPT 1/4 in. B-4JN2 Female ISO 1/4 in. B-4JN4-RT 1/8 in. B-2JN2-RT Male ISO 1/4 in. B-4JN2-RT Male NPT to Swagelok tube fitting Male to female NPT 1/8 to B-2/4JN1 1/4 in. 1/4 to B-4JN1 1/4 in. 1/4 to B-4JN5 1/4 in.
1.84 0.156
(4.0) (46.7)
1.22
(31.0)
Panel Mounting
0.92 (23.4)
2.13
(54.1)
1.13
(28.7)
(3.2)
0.125
1.75
(44.4)
1.18
(30.0)
0.88 (22.4) 0.92 (23.4) 0.92

(23.4)
1.84
(46.7)
1.22 1.18
(30.0) (31.0)
Panel mounting adds 0.37 in. (9.4 mm) to the overall height of the valve. Add -PM to the ordering number. Example: B-2JN-PM
0.45 in.
(11.4 mm)
panel hole 0.25 in.

(6.4 mm)
2.01 0.156
(4.0) (51.1)
1.18
(30.0)
0.88
(22.4)
max panel thickness
2.09
(53.1)
1.47
(37.3)
0.92
(23.4)
1.17
(29.7)
2.13
(54.1)
1.13
(28.7)
Packing adjustment may be required during the valves service life. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. Orifice is the diameter of the most restricting flow path. Angle-pattern valve orifice is 0.094 in. (2.4 mm). Angle-pattern valve orifice is 0.156 in. (4.0 mm). See specifications ISO 7/1, DIN-2999, BS21, and JIS B0203.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI April 2002, R3 MS-01-85
www.swagelok.com
Seve re-Se r vice Union-Bonnet Ne e dle Valve s
N Se r ie s a nd HN Se r ie s
Working pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) Temperatures from 65 to 450F (53 to 232C) with PTFE packing;
up to 1200F (648C) with Grafoil packing
316 stainless steel; alloys 400, 20, 600, and C-276; and titanium materials
Severe-Service Union-Bonnet Needle Valves
Features
Stem Designs
Ball tip (NB)3N, 6N, 1N, and 6HN Regulating (NR)all models PCTFE soft-seat regulating (NKR)all models PTFE soft-seat regulating (NTR)3N, 6N, 3HN,
Packing bolt design permits packing adjustments in the open position Rolled and plated 316 SS stem threads enhance cycle life Union-bonnet construction prevents accidental valve disassembly Safety back seating seals in fully open position Nonrotating ball stem tip (shown) provides repetitive, leak-tight shutoff; regulating stem tip available
and 6HN
Orifice Sizes
0.156 in. (4.0 mm)3N and 3HN 0.50 in. (6.4 mm)6N and 6HN 0.437 in. (11.1 mm)1N
Flow Coefficients (Cv)

From 0.35 to .4
Flow Patterns
Straightall models Angle3N, 6N, and 1N
Ratings are based on manual valves with optional Grafoil packing. Ratings are limited to:
00F (93C) max with PCTFE stem tip (NKR). 50F (11C) max with UHMWPE stem packing. 450F (3C) max with PTFE stem tip (NTR) or stem packing. 600F (315C) max with PEEK stem packing and 316 SS, alloy 0, alloy 600, alloy C-76, or titanium; 500F (60C) max with
PEEK stem packing and alloy 400 (alloy 400 available in N series only). See Stem Packing Materials, page 9, for more information about packing materials.
N Series
ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature, F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (04) 450 (3) 500 (60) 600 (315) 650 (343) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (46) 850 (454) 900 (48) 950 (510) 1000 (537) 1050 (565) 1100 (593) 1150 (61) 100 (648) 6000 (413) 5160 (355) 4910 (338) 4660 (31) 4470 (307) 2.2 316 SS 3.4 Alloy 400 5000 (344) 4400 (303) 460 (93) 410 (83) 4050 (79) 2500 3.1 Alloy 20 5000 (344) 4640 (319) 4500 (310) 4360 (300) 4185 (88) 3.5 N/A N/A N/A Alloy 600 Alloy C-276 Titanium 6000 (413) 5600 (385) 5460 (376) 530 (366) 50 (359) 510 (35) 5030 (346) 4940 (340) 4780 (39) 4700 (33) 4640 (319) 4430 (305) 430 (91) 4060 (79) 3745 (58) 75 (187) 1800 (14) 1155 (79.5) 770 (53.0) 565 (38.9) 515 (35.4) 6000 6000 6000 6000 5975 5880 5710 5540 5040 4905 4730 4430 430 4060 3745 30 3030 3000 685 85 1545
(413) (413) (413) (413) (411) (405) (393) (381) (347) (337) (35) (305) (91) (79) (58) (1) (08) (06) (184) (157) (106)
HN Series (High Pressure)

ASME Class Material Group Material Name Temperature F (C) 65 (53) to 100 (37) 00 (93) 50 (11) 300 (148) 350 (176) 400 (04) 450 (3) 500 (60) 600 (315) 650 (343) 700 (371) 750 (398) 800 (46) 850 (454) 900 (48) 950 (510) 1000 (537) 1050 (565) 1100 (593) 1150 (61) 100 (648) N/A N/A 316 SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 10 000 (689) 9 90 (640) 8 840 (609) 8 390 (578) 8 045 (554) 7 705 (530) 7 435 (51) 7 165 (493) 6 770 (466) 6 660 (458) 6 480 (446) 6 335 (436) 6 30 (49) 6 085 (419) 5 905 (406) 5 795 (399) 5 450 (375) 5 400 (37) 4 835 (333) 4 115 (83) 3 085 (1)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) 3570 (45) 3110 (14) 840 (195) 570 (177) 385 (164) 00 (151) 055 (141) 1885 (19) 165 (111)
480 (94) 3980 (74) 4010 (76) 4130 (84) 3970 (73) 3955 (7) 3980 (74) 3960 (7) 3900 (68) 3760 (59) 3790 (61) 3700 (54) 3600 (48) 350 (4) 3460 (38) 3380 (3) 380 (5) 30 (1) 3030 (08) 3000 (06) 685 (184) 85 (157) 1715 (118) 3750 (58) 3710 (55) 3665 (5) 3600 (48)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Pressure ratings of valves with VCR or VCO fitting end connections are based on the ratings of the mating fitting; see the Swagelok VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-4, and Swagelok VCO O-ring Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-8 (VCR and VCO fittings available in N series only).
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 11 14a 13 14b 12a 3
316 SS Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Handle Handle pin Set screw Lock nut Panel nut Union nut Packing bolt Gland Packing supports Packing Bonnet Alloy 400/ B164 Alloy 400/ B164 316 SS/ A76 Alloy 400/ B164 Alloy 400 Valve Body Material Alloy 20 Alloy 600 Alloy C-276 Titanium Material Grade/ASTM Specification Anodized aluminum 04T4/B11 Nickel cadmium-plated steel/A108 Nickel cadmium-plated steel 316 SS/A76 or A479 316 SS/B783 316 SS/A76 Alloy 0/ B473 Alloy 600/ B166 Alloy C-76/ Ti grade 4/ B574 B348
Glass-filled PTFE PTFE/D1710 Alloy 20/ B473 Alloy 20/ B473 Alloy 600/ B166 Alloy 600/ B166 Alloy C-276/ Ti grade 4/ B574 B348 Alloy C-276/ Ti grade 4/ B574 B348
316 SS/ A479 12a NTR or NKR Silversoft-seat regulating plated stem shank 316 SS/A276 12b Soft-seat tip 13 NR regulating stem 14a NB ball tip stem shank 14b NB ball stem tip Silverplated 316 SS/A276
NTR stemPTFE/D1710; NKR stemPCTFE Alloy 400/ B164 Alloy 20/ B473 Alloy 600/ B166 Alloy C-276/ Ti grade 4/ B574 B348
Cobalt-based Material must be selected; see Ball Stem Tip Materials, page 5. alloy 316 SS/ A479 Alloy 400/ B164, B127, or B564 Alloy 20/ B462, B463, or B473 Alloy 600/ B166 or B564 Alloy C-276/ B564 Ti grade 4/ B348 or Ti grade F4/B381
15
Body
12b
Lubricant
Nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier (all valves); hydrocarbon-based (NB ball tip)
15

NR, NTR, and NKR Regulating Stems
Testing
Every N series and HN series needle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
1N Series

All N series and HN series needle valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C are available as an option.
6N, 6HN Series
3N, 3HN Series
NB Ball Stem Tip

The NB stem is designed to be used in a fully open or fully closed position. See Dimensions for flow coefficients.

F
Dimensions
Angle pattern
N Series
Straight pattern
G panel hole drill Panel thickness 1/16 (1.6) min, 3/8 (9.5) max H open
G panel hole drill
Panel thickness 1/16 (1.6) min, 3/8 (9.5) max
H open
D
D1 B
E1
E
B1
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 6 mm 8 mm 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Cv Ordering Number SS-3NBF SS-3NBF4 SS-3NBM4 SS-3NBM4-F4 0.35 SS-3NBS4 SS-3NBS6MM SS-3NBS8MM SS-3NBSW4T SS-3NBVCO4 SS-3NBVCR4 A B B1 B2 C D1
Dimensions, in. (mm) D2 E1 0.38

(9.7)
E2
H H Straight Angle
Female NPT Male NPT Male/ female NPT Swagelok tube fittings Tube socket welds Male VCO fittings Male VCR fittings
3N Series: 0.156 in. (4.0 mm) Orifice .00 1.00 (50.8) (5.4) 0.89 1.7 1.8 (3.3) (3.5) .06 1.03 (.6) (5.3) (6.) 1.00 1.09 .00 1.00 1.00 (5.4) 1.38
(50.8) (5.4) (5.4) (35.1) (7.7) (3.5)
3.3
(8.0)
0.39
(9.9)
0.38 0.38
(9.7) (9.9) (9.7)
3.04
(77.)
.03 1.03 0.89

(51.6) (6.) (.6)
1.7
(3.3)
1.8 0.39 1.09 1.75 19/3

(44.4) (15.1)
3.3 3.04
(77.) (8.0)
(61.0) (30.5)
1.16 1.48 1.54 1.09 .40 1.0 (9.5) (37.6) (39.1) (7.7) (7.7) 1.09
(7.7)
3.04
(77.)
0.38
(9.7)
3.04
(77.)
1.8 0.91
(46.) (3.1) 0.88 1.19 1.5 (.4) (30.) (31.8)
0.38
(9.7)
0.8 (7.1)
.06 1.03
(5.3) (6.)
6N Series: 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) Orifice 1/4 in. Female NPT 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings 1/ in. 10 mm 1 mm Tube socket welds Pipe socket welds Male VCO fittings Male VCR fittings 3/8 in. 1/ in. 1/4 in. 1/ in. 1/ in. SS-6NBF6 SS-6NBS6 SS-6NBS8 SS-6NBS10MM 0.86 SS-6NBS1MM SS-6NBSW6T SS-6NBSW8T SS-6NBSW4P SS-6NBVCO8 SS-6NBVCR8 3.1 1.56
(79.) (39.6)
SS-6NBF4
.5 1.1 1.00 1.1 1.50

(57.) (8.4) (5.4) (8.4) (38.1)
1.47
(37.3)
3.8
(97.0)
3.70 .83 1.41 1.9 1.66 1.79

(71.9) (35.8) (3.8) (4.) (45.5)
1.
(31.0)
(94.0)
3.57
(90.7)
3.04 1.5 1.40 1.65 1.90

(77.) (38.6) (35.6) (41.9) (48.3)
1.34
(34.0)
3.70
(94.0)
.85 1.4 1.30 1.55 1.80
1.35
0.50
3.69
(93.7)
3.71
(94.)
(7.4) (36.1) (33.0) (39.4) (45.7) 1.34 (34.3) 0.50 (1.7) (1.7) 3.04 1.5 1.40 1.65 1.90 (34.0) .50 5/3 (77.) (38.6) (35.6) (41.9) (48.3) (63.5) (19.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.5 (31.8)
3.70
(94.0)
0.31
(7.9)
1.00 1.00 1.50

(57.) (8.4)
1.40
(35.6)
3.70
(94.0)
3.76
(95.5)
.5 1.1 (5.4) (5.4) (38.1) 1.1

(8.4)
0.38
(9.7)
1.47
(37.3)
3.8
(97.0)
1.53
(38.9)
0.6
(15.7)
3.88
(98.6)
N Series
Select an ordering number. To order other valve body materials, replace SS in the ordering number with a material designator. Example: M-3NBF
Material Alloy 400 Alloy 0 Alloy 600 Alloy C-76 Titanium Designator M C0 INC HC TI
Ball Stem Tip Materials

Ordering numbers specify a cobaltbased alloy ball stem tip. N series valves of 316 SS are standard with this stem tip and require no designator. To specify ball stem tip material for valves of other materials, add a designator to the ordering number. Example: INC-6NBF4-HC
Ball Stem Tip Material/ ASTM Specification Cobalt-based alloy 440C SS/A76 Alloy 400/B17 or B164 Alloy 0/B463 or B473 Alloy C-76/B574 or B575 Titanium/B348 or B65
Designator -STE -440C -M -C0 -HC -TI
Ordering numbers that list C dimensions are available in angle patterns. To order, add -A to the ordering number. Example: SS-1NBF8-A

See page 9 for information about optional stem packings, stem designs, handles, and sour gas valves.
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/ in. Female NPT 3/4 in. 1 in. 1/ in. Male/ female NPT 3/4 in. 1 in. 1/ in . .1 3/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 1 in. .4 1.9 .4 Cv Ordering Number SS-1NBF8 SS-1NBF1 SS-1NBF16 SS-1NBM8-F8 SS-1NBM1-F1 SS-1NBM16-F16 SS-1NBS8 SS-1NBS1 SS-1NBS16 SS-1NBS1MM SS-1NBSW8T . 3/4 in. .4 . 1.9 SS-1NBSW1T SS-1NBSW8P SS-1NBVCO1 SS-1NBVCR8 A B B1 B2 C D1
Dimensions, in. (mm) D2 E1 E2 F G H H Straight Angle 4.78

(11)
12N Series: 0.437 in. (11.1 mm) Orifice 3.1 1.56 1.31 1.56 .00 1.8 .00 0.6 0.69
(79.) (39.6) (33.3) (39.6) (50.8) (46.) (50.8) (15.7) (17.5)
4.97
(16)
3.5 1.6
(8.6) (41.1)
1.91
(48.5)
0.78
(19.8)
4.88
(14)
3.6 1.81
(91.9) (46.0)
.13
(54.1)
1.00
(5.4)
5.10
(19)
4.97
(16)
3.1 1.56 1.31 1.56 .00 1.8 .00 0.6 0.69

(79.) (39.6) (33.3) (39.6) (50.8) (46.) (50.8) (15.7) (17.5)
4.78
(11)
3.5 1.6
(8.6) (41.1)
1.91
(48.5)
0.78
(19.8)
4.88
(14)
3.6 1.81
(91.9) (46.0)
.13
(54.1)
1.00
(5.4)
5.10
(19)
3.9 1.96 1.68 .08 .37 1.8 1.88 0.6 0.69

(99.6) (49.8) (4.7) (5.8) (60.) (46.) (47.8) (15.7) (17.5)
3.50 1 13
(88.9) (6.)
4.09 .04
(104) (51.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.88
0.69
(17.5)
4.85 4.78
(11) (13)
1 mm 1.9 Tube socket welds 1/ in.
3.9 1.96 1.68 .08 .37

(99.6) (49.8) (4.7) (5.8) (60.)
0.69 1.31 1.69 .00 1.8 (47.8) 0.6 (17.5)

(15.7)
0.38
(9.7)
(33.3) (4.9) (50.8) (46.)
4.85
(13)
4.97
(16)
0.44
(11.)
Pipe socket 1/ in. welds Male VCO 3/4 in. fittings Male VCR 1/ in. fittings
3.1 1.56 1.31 1.56 .00 1.88 .00 0.69 0.69

(79.) (39.6) (33.3) (39.6) (50.8) (47.8) (50.8) (17.5) (17.5)
0.38
(9.7)
1.8
(46.)
0.6
(15.7)
4.78
(11)
HN Series (High Pressure)
Select an ordering number. Ordering numbers specify a regulating stem tip. Cobalt-based alloy ball stem tips are available for 6HN series valves. To order, replace NR in the ordering number with NB. Example: 6HNBF4
Dimensions
HN Series
E

See page 9 for information about optional stem designs, stem packings, and sour gas valves.
F panel hole drill
Panel thickness 1/4 (6.4) max H open
D B A B J
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Ordering Number SS-3HNRF SS-3HNRF4 SS-3HNRM4 SS-3HNRM4-F4 SS-3HNRS4 SS-3HNRSW4T .8
(71.6)
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C D E F H J 3HN Series: 0.156 in. (4.0 mm) Orifice; 0.35 Cv
Female NPT Male NPT Male/ female NPT Swagelok tube fittings Tube socket welds
.5
(57.)
1.13
(8.7) (35.1)
1.38
(1.7)
0.50
(63.5)
.50
(0.6)
0.81
(84.1)
3.31
1.41
(35.8)
0.8
(7.1)
.5
(57.)
1.13
(8.7)
1/4 in. Female NPT 1/ in. Male NPT Male/ female NPT 1/ in. 1/ in.
SS-6HNRF4 SS-6HNRF8
6HN Series: 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) Orifice; 0.86 Cv 3.13 1.56 1.81 0.63
(79.5) (39.6) (46.0) (16.0)
4.13
(105)
3.5
(8.6)
1.63
(41.4)
1.94
(49.3)
0.78
(19.8)
4.5 3.50
(88.9)
1.06
(6.9)
(108)
SS-6HNRM8 SS-6HNRM8-F8
3.13
(79.5)
1.56
(39.6)
1.81
(46.0)
0.63
(16.0)
4.13
(105)
3.5
(8.6)
1.63
(41.4)
1.94
(49.3)
0.78
(19.8)
4.5
(108)
Pneumatic Actuators
Swagelok 3N and 6N series valves can be equipped with pneumatic actuators in normally closed, normally open, and double-acting models.

Minimum actuator pressures and maximum system pressures shown in the graphs below are based on factory adjustment of packing and stems lubricated with a silicone-based lubricant. Packing nut adjustment may affect actuator performance. If the load is too low, the packing may leak. If the load is too high, the actuator may stall and the valve will not cycle.
Actuator Technical Data

Normally closed: 150 psig at 0 to 300F (10.3 bar at 8 to 148C) Normally open and double acting: 150 psig at 0 to 400F (10.3 bar at 8 to 04C)
Normally Closed Actuators

Adjustment of the actuator stem drive nut affects actuator spring force, which in turn affects:
the maximum system pressure
Dimensions
C D
that can be shut off by the valve

the minimum actuator pressure
required to open the valve. Figures 1 and 2 show the minimum actuator pressure required to open a normally closed actuator at system pressure. Maximum system pressure for a 3N valve with normally closed actuator:
NR, NTR, or NKR stem
Stem drive nut
1/8-7 NPT F 3/8 in. 4 mounting holes for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) dia bolts at 90
3000 psig (06 bar).

NB stem4400 psig (303 bar).
(9.5 mm)
Normally Closed
Maximum system pressure for a 6N valve with normally closed actuator:

NR, NTR, or NKR stem
3600 psig (48 bar).

NB stem4600 psig (316 bar).
Fig. 13N Series with Normally Closed Actuator

Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig Normally Closed
1/8-7 NPT C D 1/8-7 NPT C D
System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
Full Open
NR, NTR, NKR
NB
E 3/8 in.
B A
B A
(9.5 mm)
Fig. 2 6N Series with Normally Closed Actuator

Normally Open Double Acting Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig System Pressure, bar
Full Open
NR, NTR, NKR
NB
Valve Series 3N 6N
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 4.

(107)
B 5.91
(150)
C 3.75
(95.3)
D 3.5
(8.6)
E 1.1
(8.4)
F 8.47
(15)
4.47
(114)
6.
(158)
4.5
(108)
3.81
(96.8)
1.19
(30.)
9.41
(39)
To order a 3N or 6N series valve equipped with a pneumatic actuator, add a designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-3NBS4-95C
Valve Series 3N 6N Normally Closed -95C -96C
Actuator Designator Normally Double Open Acting -95O -96O -95D -96D
Normally Open Actuators

The amount the stem orifice opens beyond the crackedopen position depends on system pressure, flow characteristics, and valve packing nut adjustment. Figures 3 and 4 show the minimum actuator pressure required to close a normally open actuator at system pressure. Minimum system pressure required to assist the spring in opening the valve:
3N series with normally
Double-Acting Actuators
Figures 5 and 6 show the minimum actuator pressure required to open or close a 3N or 6N series valve with a double-acting actuator at system pressure.
open actuator1000 psig (69.0 bar).

6N series with normally
open actuator500 psig (34.5 bar).
Normally Open
Double Acting
Fig. 33N Series with Normally Open Actuator

Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
Fig. 53N Series with Double-Acting Actuator

Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
PEEK Stem Packing
PTFE or UHMWPE Stem Packing
Fig. 46N Series with Normally Open Actuator

Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, bar
Fig. 66N Series with Double-Acting Actuator

Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig System Pressure, bar
PEEK Stem Packing
PTFE or UHMWPE Stem Packing

N Series and HN Series
Stem Packing Materials
PTFE packing is standard. Stem Packing To order an optional stem Material Designator packing material, add a UHMWPE -P stem packing material PEEK -PK designator to the valve Grafoil -G ordering number. See page for pressure-temperature ratings of valves with optional stem packing materials. UHMWPE (ultrahigh-molecular weight polyethylene) is intended for service where fluorocarbons are not acceptable. UHMWPE packing is lubricated with nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier; it does not require packing supports. PEEK (polyetheretherketone) packing material is a -piece chevron design including PEEK packing supports and molybdenum disulfide, fluorinated tungsten disulfide-based lubricant. PEEK packing is not available in normally open or normally closed pneumatically actuated N series valves. Grafoil is a high-temperature packing material that does not require packing supports. Factory assemblies contain fluorinated tungsten disulfide-based lubricant and nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier; stem packing replacement kits contain only nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier. Grafoil is not available in pneumatically actuated N series valves. Examples: SS-3HNRF4-P SS-6NBS8-PK SS-1NBF8-G
Stem Designs
N series valve ordering numbers specify NB ball stem tips. HN series valve ordering numbers specify NR regulating stem tips. To order valves with other stem designs, replace NB or NR in the ordering number with the desired stem design designator. Examples: SS-3NRF SS-3HNKRF
Stem Design Regulating PCTFE soft-seat regulating PTFE soft-seat regulating Designator NR NKR NTR
Not intended for repetitive
shutoff in gas applications.
Not available in 1N series.
Sour Gas Valves

Valves with female pipe ends are available for sour gas service. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. The body and bonnet are annealed 316 stainless steel; the stem is alloy 400. To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-3NBF-SG SS-3HNRF-SG

To order N series and HN series valves with optional cleaning and packaging to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-3NBF-SC11
Stem Packing Kits

PTFE, UHMWPE, PEEK, and Grafoil stem packing kits are available. Kits contain stem packing(s), lubricant, and instructions.
Valve Series 3N, 3HN 6N, 6HN 1N Seal Material and Kit Ordering Number PTFE T-9K-3N T-9K-6N UHMWPE PE-9K-3N PE-9K-6N Grafoil G-9K-3N G-9K-6N PEEK PK-9K-3N PK-9K-6N PK-9K-1N Molybdenum disulfide-, fluorinated tungsten disulfidebased
T-9K-1N PE-9K-1N G-9K-1N
Lubricant
Nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier

N Series Handles
Anodized black aluminum bar handles are standard. Colored phenolic (with brass insert) and 316 stainless steel bar handles are available. To order, add a handle designator to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-3NBS4-BKP SS-1NBF8-SH
Handle Black phenolic knob Blue phenolic knob Green phenolic knob Orange phenolic knob Red phenolic knob Yellow phenolic knob Stainless steel bar Designator -BKP -BLP -GRP -OGP -RDP -YWP -SH
HN Series Ball Stem Tip Materials

Cobalt-based alloy is standard. To specify other ball tip materials, add a ball stem tip material designator to the valve ordering number: Example: SS-6HNBF4-M
Ball Tip Material/ ASTM Specification 440C SS/A76 Alloy 400/B17 or B164 Alloy 0/B463 or B473 Alloy C-76/B574 or B575
Designator -440C -M -C0 -HC



Swagelok, VCR, VCOTM Swagelok Company GrafoilTM UCAR Carbon Company Inc. 00, 003, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI June 008, R7 MS-01-168
www.swagelok.com
Small-Bore Piping Solutions

Simpler, Safer, Faster - more reliable connections
Unfailing reliability from people you rely on.
SM
Swagelok
small-bore
piping solutions
How can a Swagelok small-bore piping system solution offer performance benefits along with a lower total installed cost? Your independent Swagelok sales and service representative has the answeralong with the training, tools, and support needed to make your next small-bore piping project simpler, safer, fasterand more reliablethan any you have completed before.
Reduce installation and operating costs.

Consider the requirements for a typical piping project: If it is threaded pipe, there are the pipe stands, dies, cutting oils, sealants, and tapes. Then there is the sequential assembly, testing, sequential disassembly, rework, and reassembly. For a welding job, there is the need to obtain a qualified welder, welding equipment, and consumables. Then depending on the job, there can be the need for weld permits, air tests, firebox, tacking, weld quenching, finish welding, purging, passivation, and inspections. Either way, planning and managing a project to be on time and on budget is complicated and time consuming. If you are an engineer, manager, pipe fitter, plant professional or contractor who is feeling the squeeze of tight budgets, short staff and increasing workloads as you strive to provide the fluid system your organization needs, Swagelok has three words for you.
Simpler
In minutes, anybody in your plant can learn to assemble and install Swagelok tube fittings correctly the first time. Swagelok small-bore solutions eliminate the oils, sealants, dies, complicated equipment, fire boxes, and air tests. Sequential assembly and fitting alignment issues are eliminated. Properly installed Swagelok tube fittings can eliminate leakage. This means rework and clean up are minimized.
Safer Faster
Swagelok tube fittings will provide vibration-tolerant, leak-tight seals to the working pressure of the tubing. Because small-bore piping systems use no heat or weld gases and are so simple and fast to install, they are well suited for installation in hazardous areas and confined spaces. Using Swagelok small-bore solutions can dramatically improve productivity. Tube fittings are fast to install. Bending tubing reduces the number of connections in the system. Remakeable Swagelok fittings reduce the time to maintain or modify systems. This means that you can install more system in less time.
Fluid
system components
Fittings and tubing

Tube fittings and tubingThe Swagelok tube fitting is the original two-ferrule fitting and the benchmark to which all other tube fittings are compared. Swagelok tube fittings are available in a wide range of shapes, materials, and sizes up to 2 inch (50.8 mm), along with a complementary line of tubing for use in your small-bore fluid systems.
Swagelok VCO face seal fittingsZero clearance fittingsO-ring face seal for rapid make-up of terminal end connections. Clamp-style fittingsSwagelok Kwik-Clamp sanitary fittings are used in heavy solids applications; simple disassembly and reassembly makes cleaning easy.
Ball valves
60 series three-piece ball valvesup to 2 inch (50.8 mm); on-off and 3-way switching service; manually, pneumatically, or electrically actuated. Options are available for steam, fire, and chlorine service.
Tools and more
Installation toolsManual and electric tube benders and hydraulic swaging units reduce installation time and effort. Orbital welding systemFor outside diameters up to 4 inches or 104 mm, the Swagelok welding system provides costeffective, automated gas tungsten arc weldseven in confined areas.
Flange adaptersFlanges with integral Swagelok tube fitting connections allow easy transition from flanged connections in piping systems to tube systems. Available in ANSI, DIN, EN and JIS configurations.
Weld adaptersConvenient transition from welded piping systems to tube. Tube supportsEnsure sturdy mounting of your tubing system. Pressure gaugesAvailable with Swagelok tube adapter connections for easy, leak-tight installation in any position. Hose and quick connectsFor flexibility in your fluid system.
A small-bore
piping solution from Swagelok can provide:
Simple three-step installation
1 Pre-swage the Swagelok nut and

ferrules onto the tube using the hydraulic swaging unit;
align and insert the tube into the
3 turn the nut hand-tight, then

tighten one half turn with a wrench.
Swagelok fitting;
Swagelok tube benders make routing easier. They bend tubing to any angle up to 180 degrees. 45 and 90 degree fittings are replaced by tubing bent exactly as you need it. Routing can be more precise. Offsets and odd angles are no longer a problem. The flow improves and space is conserved.
Compared to a piping system of comparable strength, tubing systems are substantially lighter. This means that tube systems are easier to install and to support.
Headquartered in Solon, Ohio, U.S.A., Swagelok Company is a major developer and manufacturer of fluid system component technologies for the research, analytical instrumentation, process instrumentation, pharmaceutical, oil and gas, power, petrochemical, and semiconductor industries. Swagelok products are delivered through one of the worlds largest manufacturing and industrial distribution networks. More than 25 Swagelok manufacturing, research, technical support, and distribution facilities support a global network of more than 200 independent, local sales and service centers on 6 continents. For more information about Swagelok, visit the companys Web site at www.swagelok.com.
Unfailing reliability from people you rely on SM SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2003, 2004 Swagelok Company, Printed in U.S.A., GLL, February 2004, R1, MS-04-145
www.swagelok.com
Smooth-Bore PTFE Hose

Coref lex Se r ie s B- COR
Features
304 SS overbraid PTFE core
65 to 450F (53 to 230C)
temperature rating
Smooth-bore PTFE core: Chemically inert Easy to clean Nonaging, nonstick surface Ultralow extractibles Nonabsorbent; will not impart taste

(0.38 m) Ra
or odor.
Easy to bend Drains easily Can be autoclaved and sterilized 300 series stainless steel overbraid: Protects core from abrasion Enhances hose pressure rating.

Optional PET polyester film hose
identification tag:

Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/8 (3.2) Hose ID in. (mm) 0.125 (3.2) Hose OD in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) Static Temperature Bend Radius Range in. (cm) F (C) 65 to 450 1.50 (3.81)
(53 to 230)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3500 (241)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 15 000 (1033)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.05 (0.07)

Every B-COR hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature. Each hose is cleaned of any assembly debris and hand wiped clean. Each hose is bagged with the following:

02 BC 10 EP 10 EP MT - 48
02 = 1/8
2 Hose Series
BC = B-COR PTFE hose
End connection size matches nominal hose size except as noted below. 02 = Female JIC 03 = Male NPT 06 = Female NPT 07 = Female NPT union 08 = Male NPT union 10 = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 10U = 1 1/2 in. Kwik-Clamp 11 = 1/2 in. Kwik-Clamp 11U = 3/4 in. Kwik-Clamp 32RNG = Tube stub, no hex or groove (annealed) 32URNG = 1/4 in. tube stub

Omit for no tag. MT = PET polyester film tag Specify color and text; see Hose Identification Tag, below.
8 Overall Length
Add length in inches.

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Color 02BC10EP10EPMT-48 ABC Company Process Line Building 2 DOM: 1/1/2008 Telephone Black

perform welding.

exceed 450F (230C).
www.swagelok.com
Smooth-Bore PTFE Hose

Coref lex Se r ie s BX- COR
Features
304 SS overbraid Fiberglass braid PTFE core
65 to 450F (53 to 230C)
Fiberglass braid: Bonded to the core with a patent-
temperature rating
Smooth-bore PTFE core: Chemically inert Easy to clean Nonaging, nonstick surface Ultralow extractibles Nonabsorbent; will not impart taste
identification tag:
pending process
Aids hose hoop strength to reduce
kinking.
300 series stainless steel overbraid: Protects core from abrasion Enhances hose pressure rating. 316 stainless steel end connections

or odor.
Easy to bend Drains easily Can be autoclaved and sterilized Optional carbon black PTFE core

(0.38 m) Ra
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) Hose ID in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) Hose OD in. (mm) 0.46 (11.7) 0.57 (14.5) 0.76 (19.3) 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5) Static Temperature Bend Radius Range in. (cm) F (C) 1.25 (3.18) 1.75 (4.44) 2.50 (6.35) 3.50 (8.89) 5.50 (14.0) 65 to 450
(53 to 230)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 2000 (137) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.12 (0.18) 0.18 (0.27) 0.30 (0.45) 0.46 (0.68) 1.1
(1.6)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for elevated pressure-temperature ratings. Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiberglass braid reinforcement.

Every BX-COR hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature. Each hose is cleaned of any assembly debris and hand wiped clean. Each hose is bagged with the following:

04 BX 11 EP 11 EP MT - 48
04 06 08 12 16
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
2 Hose Series
BX = BX-COR PTFE hose BXB = BX-COR PTFE hose with static dissipative core

perform welding.
End connection size matches nominal hose size except as noted below. 02 = Female JIC 03 = Male NPT 06 = Female NPT 07 = Female NPT union 08 = Male NPT union 10 = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 10L = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 10L45 = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 10U = Step-up 1 1/2 in. Kwik-Clamp 10UU = Step-up Kwik-Clamp, 1 in. barb 2 in. face 11 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 11L = Mini Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 11L45 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 11U = Step-up 3/4 in. Kwik-Clamp 12 = 150 lb lap joint flange 16 = Female cam and groove 17 = Male cam and groove 32RNG = Tube stub, no hex or groove (annealed) 41 = Tube butt weld
1/2 in. for 1/4 and 3/8 in. hoses; not available for 1 in. hoses. Not available for 3/4 and 1 in. hoses.

Omit for no tag. MT = PET polyester film tag Specify color and text; see Hose Identification Tag, below.
8 Overall Length

Example Tag Specificatiion
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Color 04BX11EP11EPMT-48 ABC Company Process Line Building 2 DOM: 1/1/2008 Telephone Black

exceed 450F (230C).
www.swagelok.com
Smooth-Bore, Silicone- Cove red PFA Hose

Coref lex Se r ie s U- COR
Features
65 to 450F (53 to 230C) 300 series stainless steel overbraid: Protects core from abrasion Enhances hose pressure rating. Silicone cover: Smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
temperature rating
Smooth-bore PFA core: Chemically inert Easy to clean Nonaging, nonstick surface Ultralow extractibles Nonabsorbent; will not impart taste
to-clean surface

Traceable lot number visible on
or odor.
4 to 6 in. in. (0.10 to 0.15 m) Ra
layline.
surface finish
Lightweight, easy to bend Can be autoclaved and sterilized Optional carbon black PFA core
with 304 stainless steel radially crimped collars Sanitary end connections:
Heat traceable 316L stainless steel Surface finish not to exceed 15 in.
identification tag encapusulated in platinum-cured silicone:



Silicone reinforcement: Bonded to the core with a patent-
(0.38 m) Ra
pending process
Aids hose hoop strength to reduce
FDA 21CFR Part 177.1550 USDA USP Class VI, 87, 88 3-A
kinking.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) 1 1/2 (38.1) 2 (50.8) Hose ID in. (mm) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) Hose OD in. (mm) 0.80 (20.3) 1.24 (31.5) 1.52 (38.6) 1.93 (49.0) 2.57 (65.3) Static Temperature Bend Radius Range in. (cm) F (C) 1.50 (3.81) 2.50 (6.35) 4.00 (10.2) 7.00 (17.8) 7.00 (17.8) 65 to 450
(53 to 230)
Burst Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 1200 (82.6) 1200 (82.6) 1000 (68.9) 800 (55.1) 600 (41.3)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.20 (0.50) 0.43 (0.64) 0.57 (0.85) 0.98 (1.5) 1.3
(1.9)
PFA is a permeable material. Gases, vapors, and liquids can migrate through the PFA core. The rate of permeation is affected by many application-specific variables.

Every U-COR hose assembly is pressure tested with air for 30 to 60 seconds at 225 psig (15.5 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 225 psig (15.5 bar) and submerged in water for 30 to 60 seconds to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature. Each hose is cleaned of any assembly debris and hand wiped clean. Silicone covers are wiped clean with a 50 % isopropyl alcohol / 50 % water mixture. Each hose is bagged with the following:
Certification of Compliance (Hose)FDA; USDA; USP
Class VI, 87, 88; and 3-A compliant, including PFA lot number.
08 UC 11 EP 11 EP PT - 48
08 12 16 24 32
= = = = =
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
2 Hose Series
UC = U-COR silicone-covered PFA hose UB = U-COR silicone-covered PFA hose with static dissipative core
End connection size matches nominal hose size except as noted below. 02 = Female JIC 03 = Male NPT 06 = Female NPT 07 = Female NPT union 08 = Male NPT union 10 = Kwik-Clamp 10L = Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 10L45 = Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 10U = Step-up Kwik-Clamp 11 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 11L = Mini Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 11L45 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 11U = Step-up Kwik-Clamp 12 = 150 lb lap joint flange 16 = Female cam and groove 17 = Male cam and groove 32RNG = Tube stub, no hex or groove (annealed) 41 = Tube butt weld
1 in. for 1/2 and 3/4 in. hoses. 1 1/2 in. for 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. hoses; 2 in. for 1 1/2 in. hoses; 2 1/2 in. for 2 in. hoses. Not available for 1, 1 1/2, and 2 in. hoses. 3/4 in. for 1/2 in. hoses; not available for 3/4, 1, 1 1/2, and 2 in. hoses.

Omit for no tag. PT = PET polyester film hose tag encapsulated in platinum-cured silicone Specify color and text; see Hose Identification Tag, below.
8 Overall Length

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Color 08UC11EP11EPPT-48 ABC Company Process Line Building 2 DOM: 1/1/2008 Telephone Black

perform welding.
PFA core hose should not

exceed 450F (230C).
www.swagelok.com
Smooth-Bore, Silicone- Cove red PTFE Hose

Coref lex Se r ie s S- COR
Features
Silicone cover 304 SS braid Fiberglass braid PTFE core
65 to 450F (53 to 230C)
300 series stainless steel overbraid: Protects core from abrasion Enhances hose pressure rating. Silicone cover: Smooth, noncontaminating, easy Optional PET polyester film hose
temperature rating Smooth-bore PTFE core: Chemically inert Easy to clean Nonaging, nonstick surface Ultralow extractibles Nonabsorbent; will not impart taste or odor. Easy to bend Drains easily Can be autoclaved and sterilized Optional carbon black PTFE core available for applications that require static dissipation Fiberglass braid: Bonded to the core with a patentpending process Aids hose hoop strength to reduce kinking.
to-clean surface Provides insulation from internal system fluid temperature extremes. 316 stainless steel end connections with 304 stainless steel radially crimped collars Sanitary end connections: Heat traceable 316L stainless steel Surface finish not to exceed 15 in. (0.38 m) Ra Internally chamferedsmooth transition between hose and end connections.
identification tag encapusulated in platinum-cured silicone:

ordering number plus up to five lines of customer-specified text. Can be autoclaved and sterilized; does not hinder hose flexibility.
Technical Data
Nominal Hose Size in. (mm) 1/4 (6.4) 3/8 (9.6) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.0) 1 (25.4) Hose ID in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.6) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) Hose OD in. (mm) 0.55 (14.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.86 (21.8) 1.12 (28.4) 1.55 (39.4) Static Temperature Bend Radius Range in. (cm) F (C) 1.25 (3.18) 1.75 (4.44) 2.50 (6.35) 3.50 (8.89) 5.50 (14.0) 65 to 450
(53 to 230)
Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig (bar) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9)
Weight lb/ft (kg/m) 0.16 (0.24) 0.19 (0.29) 0.25 (0.37) 0.50 (0.74) 1.2
(1.8)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for elevated pressure-temperature ratings. Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiberglass braid reinforcement.

Every S-COR hose assembly is pressure tested with water for 30 to 60 seconds at 1000 psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) to a requirement of no visible leakage at ambient temperature. Each hose is cleaned of any assembly debris and hand wiped clean. Silicone covers are wiped clean with a 50 % isopropyl alcohol / 50 % water mixture. Each hose is bagged with the following:

04 SC 11 EP 11 EP PT - 48
04 06 08 12 16
= = = = =
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
2 Hose Series
SC = S-COR silicone-covered PTFE hose SB = S-COR silicone-covered PTFE hose with static dissipative core

perform welding.
End connection size matches nominal hose size except as noted below. 02 = Female JIC 03 = Male NPT 06 = Female NPT 07 = Female NPT union 08 = Male NPT union 10 = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 10L = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 10L45 = 1 in. Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 10U = Step-up 1 1/2 in. Kwik-Clamp 10UU = Step-up Kwik-Clamp, 1 in. barb 2 in. face 11 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 11L = Mini Kwik-Clamp 90 elbow 11L45 = Mini Kwik-Clamp 45 elbow 11U = Step-up 3/4 in. Kwik-Clamp 12 = 150 lb lap joint flange 16 = Female cam and groove 17 = Male cam and groove 32RNG = Tube stub, no hex or groove (annealed) 41 = Tube butt weld
1/2 in. for 1/4 and 3/8 in. hoses; not available for 1 in. hoses. Not available for 3/4 and 1 in. hoses.

Omit for no tag. PT = PET polyester film hose tag encapsulated in platinum-cured silicone Specify color and text; see Hose Identification Tag, below.
8 Overall Length Add length in inches.

Example Tag
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Color 04SC11EP11EPPT-48 ABC Company Process Line Building 2 DOM: 1/1/2008 Telephone Black

exceed 450F (230C).
www.swagelok.com
Sole noid Valve s

For Ele ctropne umatic all y Actuate d B e llows a nd D ia phragm Val ve s
The 3-way solenoid valve opens when it receives an electrical signal, allowing air to enter the actuator. When the signal stops, the solenoid valve closes and vents pressure from the actuator. It can be used with any valve/actuator assembly that requires 100 psig (6.8 bar) or less actuation pressure, as listed in specific valve catalogs. Two solenoid valves are required to operate double-acting assemblies. Additional plumbingrequired to provide mounting space for solenoid valves on Swagelok 3D, 4D, 8D, and DR series double-acting valve actuatorsis not included.
Features
Indicator light Voltage surge suppressor Manual override button for greater
operator control
24 in. (61 cm) leads with plug-in
connector
Alternating- or direct-current
operating voltages
Low power consumption Direct mounting to Swagelok bellows
or diaphragm valve actuators with threaded adapter

Lightweight, compact design All ports 10-32/M5 3 0.8 internal
threads
Technical Data
Temperature Range Max Operating Pressure Media Flow Coefficient (Cv) Power Consumption Inrush Holding 25 to 120F (3 to 48C) 100 psig (6.8 bar) Filtered air (lubricated or oil free) Inlet0.034; exhaust0.05 ac: 4.5 4.2 ac: 3.5 3.0 VA VA VA VA (50 (60 (50 (60 Hz) dc: Hz) Hz) dc: 1.8 W Hz) 2.1 W (with LED)
Component Body Internal seals Adapter, spacer Adapter O-ring Material Die cast zinc Buna N Aluminum Fluorocarbon FKM
Operating Voltage 24 V (ac) 110/120 V (ac) 220/240 V (ac) 5 V (dc) 12 V (dc) 24 V (dc) Valve Series BN MS-SOL-3K-BN MS-SOL-2K-BN MS-SOL-5K-BN MS-SOL-6K-BN MS-SOL-4K-BN MS-SOL-1K-BN All Others MS-SOL-3K MS-SOL-2K MS-SOL-5K MS-SOL-6K MS-SOL-4K MS-SOL-1K
Voltage Tolerance Weight
15 % to +10 % of rating 2.45 oz (70 g)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2000, 2003, 2007 Swagelok Company, December 2007, R4, MS-02-70-E
www.swagelok.com
S o l e n o i d Va l v e s
F o r E l e c t ro p n e u m a t i c a l l y A c t u a t e d B a l l Va l v e s
Features
An electropneumatically actuated ball valve-actuator assembly consists of:
I a Swagelok ball valve I a Swagelok pneumatic actuator I a solenoid valve for use with: I a spring-return pneumatic actuator (3-way, 2-position) or I double-acting pneumatic actuator (4-way, 2-position).
Swagelok pneumatic actuator
Technical Data
Actuation Pressure
25 to 150 psig (1.7 to 10.3 bar)
25 psig (1.7 bar) is the minimum requirement for the solenoid valve. See
valve product catalogs for minimum actuator pressure requirements.
Solenoid valve
Swagelok ball valve

Temperature Range
0 to 120F (17 to 48C)
Electrical Data
I NEMA type 4 solenoid enclosure I General-purpose, class A coil, continuous duty, encapsulated I 18 AWG lead wires, 18 in. (46 cm) long I 1/2 in. female NPS electrical conduit connection (enclosure) I 1/4 in. female NPT pneumatic ports
Operating Modes
Air pressure is required to cycle the ball valve. See valve product catalogs for minimum actuator pressure requirements.
Valve Position Actuator/ Solenoid Mode Normally closed spring-return actuator/ solenoid energized to open 90 Normally open spring-return actuator/ solenoid energized to close 90 Spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to switch 180 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to open 90 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to close 90 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to switch 180 Solenoid Energized Open Closed Opposite port Open Closed Opposite port Solenoid De-energized Closed Open Initial position Closed Open Initial position
Component Solenoid body, spool, poppet Spool O-ring Fasteners Lubricants Material Aluminum Buna N Zinc-plated alloy steel Silicone- and PTFE-based
Solenoid valves are assembled with brass Swagelok fittings. Copper tubing is used with double-acting actuators.
Warning: Following a significant loss of actuator air pressure, the ball valve will return to the solenoid de-energized position, whether the solenoid is energized or not. Following a significant loss of actuator air pressure, the ball valve may cycle.
1. Select a 33, 40, 60, or 83 series valve ordering number from the product catalog. Example: SS-63TS8 2. Using the catalog, determine the actuator model. Add an actuator designator to the valve ordering number.
Valve Flow Pattern 2-way (90 actuation) 3-way (180 actuation) Actuator Model 131 133 135 151 153 155 Designator -31 -33 -35 -51 -53 -55
Options
UL-listed, CSA-certified, and explosion-proof solenoid valves are available. Contact your independent Swagelok sales and service representative for information.
Example: SS-63TS8-33 3. Determine the actuator/solenoid mode and add a designator to the valve ordering number.
Valve Flow Pattern Actuator/ Solenoid Mode Normally closed spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to open Normally open spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to close Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to open Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to close 3-way (180 actuation) Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to switch Spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to switch Designator C O DC DO D S
2-way (90 actuation)
Example: SS-63TS8-33C 4. Determine the solenoid voltage required for the solenoid valve and add a designator to the valve ordering number.
Solenoid Voltage 12 V (dc) 24 V (dc) 110, 120 V (ac) 220, 240 V (ac) Designator B C D E
Example: SS-63TS8-33CB
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1989, 1990, 1995, 1998, 2003 Swagelok Company March 2003, R2 MS-02-41-E
www.swagelok.com
S o l e n o i d Va l v e s
F o r E l e c t ro p n e u m a t i c a l l y A c t u a t e d B a l l Va l v e s
Features
An electropneumatically actuated ball valve-actuator assembly consists of:
I a Swagelok ball valve I a Swagelok pneumatic actuator I a solenoid valve for use with: I a spring-return pneumatic actuator (3-way, 2-position) or I double-acting pneumatic actuator (4-way, 2-position).
Swagelok pneumatic actuator
Technical Data
Actuation Pressure
25 to 150 psig (1.7 to 10.3 bar)
25 psig (1.7 bar) is the minimum requirement for the solenoid valve. See
valve product catalogs for minimum actuator pressure requirements.
Solenoid valve
Swagelok ball valve

Temperature Range
0 to 120F (17 to 48C)
Electrical Data
I NEMA type 4 solenoid enclosure I General-purpose, class A coil, continuous duty, encapsulated I 18 AWG lead wires, 18 in. (46 cm) long I 1/2 in. female NPS electrical conduit connection (enclosure) I 1/4 in. female NPT pneumatic ports
Operating Modes
Air pressure is required to cycle the ball valve. See valve product catalogs for minimum actuator pressure requirements.
Valve Position Actuator/ Solenoid Mode Normally closed spring-return actuator/ solenoid energized to open 90 Normally open spring-return actuator/ solenoid energized to close 90 Spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to switch 180 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to open 90 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to close 90 Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to switch 180 Solenoid Energized Open Closed Opposite port Open Closed Opposite port Solenoid De-energized Closed Open Initial position Closed Open Initial position
Component Solenoid body, spool, poppet Spool O-ring Fasteners Lubricants Material Aluminum Buna N Zinc-plated alloy steel Silicone- and PTFE-based
Solenoid valves are assembled with brass Swagelok fittings. Copper tubing is used with double-acting actuators.
Warning: Following a significant loss of actuator air pressure, the ball valve will return to the solenoid de-energized position, whether the solenoid is energized or not. Following a significant loss of actuator air pressure, the ball valve may cycle.
1. Select a 33, 40, 60, or 83 series valve ordering number from the product catalog. Example: SS-63TS8 2. Using the catalog, determine the actuator model. Add an actuator designator to the valve ordering number.
Valve Flow Pattern 2-way (90 actuation) 3-way (180 actuation) Actuator Model 131 133 135 151 153 155 Designator -31 -33 -35 -51 -53 -55
Options
UL-listed, CSA-certified, and explosion-proof solenoid valves are available. Contact your independent Swagelok sales and service representative for information.
Example: SS-63TS8-33 3. Determine the actuator/solenoid mode and add a designator to the valve ordering number.
Valve Flow Pattern Actuator/ Solenoid Mode Normally closed spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to open Normally open spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to close Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to open Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to close 3-way (180 actuation) Double-acting actuator/solenoid energized to switch Spring-return actuator/solenoid energized to switch Designator C O DC DO D S
2-way (90 actuation)
Example: SS-63TS8-33C 4. Determine the solenoid voltage required for the solenoid valve and add a designator to the valve ordering number.
Solenoid Voltage 12 V (dc) 24 V (dc) 110, 120 V (ac) 220, 240 V (ac) Designator B C D E
Example: SS-63TS8-33CB
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1989, 1990, 1995, 1998, 2003 Swagelok Company March 2003, R2 MS-02-41-E
www.swagelok.com
Sole noid Valve s

For Ele ctropne umatic all y Actuate d B e llows a nd D ia phragm Val ve s
The 3-way solenoid valve opens when it receives an electrical signal, allowing air to enter the actuator. When the signal stops, the solenoid valve closes and vents pressure from the actuator. It can be used with any valve/actuator assembly that requires 100 psig (6.8 bar) or less actuation pressure, as listed in specific valve catalogs. Two solenoid valves are required to operate double-acting assemblies. Additional plumbingrequired to provide mounting space for solenoid valves on Swagelok 3D, 4D, 8D, and DR series double-acting valve actuatorsis not included.
Features
Indicator light Voltage surge suppressor Manual override button for greater
operator control
24 in. (61 cm) leads with plug-in
connector
Alternating- or direct-current
operating voltages
Low power consumption Direct mounting to Swagelok bellows
or diaphragm valve actuators with threaded adapter

Lightweight, compact design All ports 10-32/M5 3 0.8 internal
threads
Technical Data
Temperature Range Max Operating Pressure Media Flow Coefficient (Cv) Power Consumption Inrush Holding 25 to 120F (3 to 48C) 100 psig (6.8 bar) Filtered air (lubricated or oil free) Inlet0.034; exhaust0.05 ac: 4.5 4.2 ac: 3.5 3.0 VA VA VA VA (50 (60 (50 (60 Hz) dc: Hz) Hz) dc: 1.8 W Hz) 2.1 W (with LED)
Component Body Internal seals Adapter, spacer Adapter O-ring Material Die cast zinc Buna N Aluminum Fluorocarbon FKM
Operating Voltage 24 V (ac) 110/120 V (ac) 220/240 V (ac) 5 V (dc) 12 V (dc) 24 V (dc) Valve Series BN MS-SOL-3K-BN MS-SOL-2K-BN MS-SOL-5K-BN MS-SOL-6K-BN MS-SOL-4K-BN MS-SOL-1K-BN All Others MS-SOL-3K MS-SOL-2K MS-SOL-5K MS-SOL-6K MS-SOL-4K MS-SOL-1K
Voltage Tolerance Weight
15 % to +10 % of rating 2.45 oz (70 g)
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2000, 2003, 2007 Swagelok Company, December 2007, R4, MS-02-70-E
www.swagelok.com
Spr ingle ss D iaphragm Valve s (1.125 in.)

For High Pe r for ma nce DP Se r ie s
1.125 in. C-seal and W-seal designs Available in two- and three-port congurations Compact pneumatic and manual actuators Normally Closed Actuator Normally Open Actuator Lockout Handle
Features
Seat
Fully contained PFA seat design provides:
enhanced purity and
Body
316L VIM-VAR stainless
steel body material for ultrahigh-purity applications

Fully swept flow path minimizes entrapment
improved thermal stability

excellent helium leak test
performance
minimal particle generation long cycle life
area
facilitates purging maximizes flow
capacity
Diaphragm
Elgiloy material for
Actuators
Normally closed and
strength and corrosion resistance

Optimal design for long
normally open pneumatic models

Quick, quarter-turn manual
cycle life
actuator lockable in the CLOSED position
Technical Data
Working Pressure psig (bar) Operating Pneumatic Lockout Vacuum to 125
(8.6)
Flow Short-Term Coefficient Orifice Burst Pneumatic Lockout Bakeout (Cv) in. (mm) Operating 4500 10 to 302 10 to 150
(310)
Temperature Rating F (C)
Pneumatic Actuator Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) Actuation Pressure psig (bar) Air Displacement in.3 (cm3) 0.03
(0.49)
Vacuum to 250
(17.2)
392 (200) (23 to 150) (23 to 65) (valve open)
0.30
0.16
(4.1)
0.078 (1.28) Normally closed (2-port) 65 to 120 (4.5 to 8.2) 0.105 (1.72) Normally open (3-port) 65 to 80 (4.5 to 5.5)
Maximum operating temperature with electronic actuator-position sensor, page 2, is 158F (70C). Sensors rated up to 212F (100C) are available. Contact
your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specication (SC-01), MS-06-61, for details on process, process controls, and process verication.
Cleaning Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with a continuously monitored, deionized water, ultrasonic cleaning system Assembly and Packaging Performed in ISO Class 4 work areas; valves are double bagged and vacuum sealed in cleanroom bags Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra) Electropolished and finished to an average of 5 in. (0.13 m) Testing Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 1 109 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals
Component Bonnet nut Bonnet Support diaphragm Diaphragm Seat Body Lubricant Handle Handle pin Button Button spring Cylinder, cap Pistons Base O-rings Guide rings Springs Grade / Specification 316 SS / ASTM A479 S17400 Silver-plated Elgiloy / AMS 5876 Elgiloy / AMS 5876 Type II, high-purity grade PFA / ASTM D3307 316L VIM-VAR SS / ASTM A479 PTFE-based Lockout Handle Powder-coated aluminum 400 series SS 316 SS S17700 SS Pneumatic Actuator Aluminum Powdered metal 300 series SS normally open (1 piston); aluminumnormally closed (1 piston), normally open (2 pistons) Powdered metal 300 series SSnormally open; nonenormally closed Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE S17700 SS
Pneumatic actuator
Bonnet nut Bonnet Diaphragm Body Support diaphragm Seat


Pneumatic Actuator 1.125
(28.6)
Air inlet 10-32 (M5)
Lockout Handle 1.125

(28.6)
0.29 (7.4) dia hole
C-Seal Bottom 1.125

(28.6)
1.125 closed and locked

(81.3) (90.2)
3.55
(28.6)
Electronic Actuator-Position Sensor

Transmits a signal to an electrical device indicating the open
Four through holes, 0.17 (4.4) dia 1.125

(28.6)
3.20
position of a pneumatically actuated valve.

To order an actuator-position sensor factory assembled to
open
(81.8)
3.22
a valve, add S to the valve ordering number. Example: 6LVV-MSM-DPE-2-P-CS
1.125
(28.6)
Sensor Technical Information

Turck Part Number Connection Output Voltage Output Function Operating Temperature Normally closed actuator: Bi 1-EH04-AP6X with modified cable; Normally open actuator: Bi 1-EG05-AP6X with modified cable Turck picofast snap lock, 3-pin (PKG 3Z cable) 3-wire V (dc)transistor (current-sourcing) 10 to 30 V (dc) polarity protectedpulsed SCP Normally open (NO) 23 to 70C (10 to 158F)
BN BU BK Load +
W-Seal Bottom
To order a valve with a manual (lockout) handle, select an ordering number. To order a valve with pneumatic actuation, add -C for a normally closed actuator or -O for a normally open actuator. Example: 6LVV-MSM-DPE-2-P-C
Seal Design C-seal W-seal C-seal W-seal
Ordering Number 6LVV-MSM-DPE-2-P 6LVV-MSM-DPE-W2-P 6LVV-MSM-DPE-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPE-W3-P
2-Port Manual (Lockout)
3-Port Manual (Lockout)
Wiring Diagram

Kits include two diaphragms and replacement instructions. Kit ordering number: E-3DK-DPE
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Limited Partnership picofastTM Hans Turck KG 2005 Swagelok Company December 2005, R0 MS-02-325
www.swagelok.com
Spr ingle ss D iaphragm Valve s

for High Pe r for ma nce
DP Se r ie s
Suitable for ultrahigh-purity applications 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body Low-pressure and high-pressure models VCR, tube butt weld, and modular surface-mount end connections Manual or pneumatic actuation
DP Series Diaphragm Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information and Dimensions Low-Pressure Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Pressure Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IGC II Modular Surface-Mount Valves . . . . . . . . . . . Multiport and Elbow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 7 8 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3
Multivalve Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Maintenance Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Actuation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Features
Seat
Fully contained PCTFE seat design provides:
excellent resistance to swelling and
Models
Low-Pressure
Pressure rating: 50 psig (17. bar) Temperature rating: 10 to 150F
(3 to 65C)
Flow coefficient: 0.7
contamination
improved helium leak test performance minimal particle generation long cycle life.
High-Pressure
Pressure rating: 3045 psig (10 bar) Temperature rating: 10 to 150F
Diaphragm
Elgiloy material for strength and
(3 to 65C)
Flow coefficient: 0.0
corrosion resistance
Optimal design for long cycle life
Body
316L VIM-VAR stainless steel body
material for ultrahigh-purity applications

Fully swept flow path minimizes entrapment areas facilitates purging maximizes flow capacity.
Technical Data
Working Pressure psig (bar) Model Lowpressure Highpressure Operating Vacuum to 50 (17.) Vacuum to 3045 (10) Burst 300
(0)
Temperature Rating F (C) Short-Term Operating Bakeout 10 to 150

(3 to 65)
Flow Coefficient (Cv ) 0.7 0.0

(4.1)
Internal Volume in.3 (cm3) 0.086 (1.4) (body with BW4 ends)
Pneumatic Actuator Actuation Air Pressure Displacement psig (bar) in.3 (cm3) 60 to 10 0.09
(4. to 8.) (1.5)
1 00
(840)
30 (150) (valve open)
70 to 10
(4.9 to 8.)
0.47
(7.7)
See Options and Accessories, page 1, for high-temperature seat materials.
Component Body and integral end connections Welded VCR end connections Swagelok tube fittings Seat Diaphragm Support diaphragm Washer Bonnet
Bonnet nut
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Low-Pressure High-Pressure 316L VIM-VAR SS/ SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity 316L VAR SS/ SEMI F20-0305 High-Purity 316 SS/A276 PCTFE/D1430 Elgiloy/AMS 5876 Silver-plated Elgiloy /AMS 5876 S17400 SS 316 SS Pneumatic Actuator Aluminum Buna N S17700 SS 316 SS Manual Actuator Actuator Button Directional handle Integral lockout handle 316 SS 316 SS Nylon with stainless steel insert Glass-filled nylon with stainless steel base Polyester with stainless steel insert 316 SS with epoxy coating S17700
Pneumatic actuator
Bonnet nut Cylinder, cap, pistons O-rings Springs Button
Bonnet Button Washer Support diaphragm Diaphragm Seat Body End connections
Round handle Toggle handle
High-Pressure Pneumatic Actuator Shown
Wetted components listed in italics. O-rings are lubricated with PTFE-based lube; no lubricants on wetted components. 0 % minimum elongation allowed.
See Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61, and Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, for details on processes, process controls, and process verification.
Assembly and Packaging Process Designator P Process Specification UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01) Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Wetted Surface Roughness (Ra)
Cleaning
Testing Inboard helium leak tested to a rate of 1 3 109 std cm3/s at the seat, envelope, and all seals. The DP series design has been helium leak tested to maximum leak rate of 1 3 1010 std cm3/s.
Ultrahigh-purity cleaning with Performed in ISO Class 4 a continuously monitored, work areas; valves are double deionized water, ultrasonic bagged and vacuum sealed cleaning system in cleanroom bags. Special cleaning with nonozone-depleting chemicals Performed in specially cleaned areas; valves are individually bagged.
Electropolished and finished to an average of 5 in.

(0.13 m)
P1
See the DP Series Diaphragm Valve Technical Report, MS-06-15, for more information on helium leak testing, particle counting, moisture analysis, hydrocarbon analysis, ionic cleanliness, and lab cycle testing data.
Flow Data
Low-Pressure Models Cv = 0.27 Pressure Drop to Water Air Atmosphere U.S. gal/min std ft3/min psig (bar) (L/min) (std L/min) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) 0.85 (3.) 1.9 (7.) .7 (10.) 3.0 (86) 8.1 (30) 14.3 (410) High-Pressure Models Cv = 0.20 Water Air U.S. gal/min std ft3/min
(L/min) (std L/min)
0.63 (.4) 1.4 (5.4) .0 (7.6)
.3 (64) 6.0 (170) 10.6 (300)
Actuation Options
Manual Actuators
Low-pressure valves have blue handles as standard. High-pressure valves have white handles as standard. Seven handle colors are available; see Options and AccessoriesHandle Colors, page 1.
Directional
Quick, quarter-turn
Integral Lockout
Quick, quarter-turn
actuation
Handle shape provides
actuation
Lockable in the CLOSED
visual indication of OPEN and CLOSED position

Available on high- and
position for safety

Handle shape and window
low-pressure models
indicator provides visual indication of OPEN and CLOSED position.

Available on high- and low-
pressure models
Round
Quick, quarter-turn actuation Handle with window provides
Toggle
Spring-loaded toggle design for
quick actuation
Lockable in the CLOSED
visual indication of OPEN and CLOSED positions

Available on high- and low-
position for safety

Handle position provides
pressure models
visual indication of OPEN and CLOSED positions

Narrow handle profile allows
close parallel mounting of valves

Available on low-pressure
models with PCTFE seats
Pneumatic Actuators
Normally open pneumatic actuators are marked with a
IGC II Modular Surface-Mount Valves

1.5 in. C-seal design Low-pressure valves: directional, Low-Pressure Pneumatic Actuator
green ring on top of the cylinder.

High-Pressure Pneumatic Actuator
integral lockout, round, toggle, and pneumatic actuators

High-pressure valves: directional
and integral lockout handles

Available in two- or three-port
configurations
For more information on IGC II
integrated gas components, see the IGC II Integrated Gas ComponentsSubstrates, Manifolds, Mounting Components, and Assembly Hardware catalog, MS-0-135.

DP Series Low-pressure Pneumatically Actuated Male Integral VCR, normally closed MS-01-165
Ordering Information and Dimensions N-ELD-0663

Low-Pressure Valves
Pneumatic Actuator
(37.8)
DP Series Low-pressure BW Butt Weld, manual actuator, REV 03-16-01 MS-01-165
N-ELD-664
Round Handle
1.49
(37.8)
Directional Handle
1.49
(37.8)
Toggle Handle
1.80
1.49
Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT
radius R 0.0 (5.1) 0.31 (7.9) minimum shank diameter
(45.7)
4.55 open
(116)
(85.9)
3.38
NUPRO DF SERIES BOTTOM VIEW
0.5
open
(7.1)
.84
closed
(84.1)
3.31
N-ELD-444
(6.4)
DP Series Low-pressure Female VCR with Locking Handle, open position MS-01-165 0.44 H DP Series Low-pressure Female VCR with Locking Handle, open position (11.) MS-01-165
0.30 N-ELD-0665 (7.6) N-ELD-0665
0.44
(11.)
H
N-ELD-0666
(11.)
0.44
Integral Male VCR Fittings
DP Series Low-pressure Female VCR with Locking Handle, locked position MS-01-165
Tube Butt Weld Ends
Rotatable Male VCR Fittings
1.49 (37.8)
Bottom
(6.9)
1.06
0.33 (8.4) hole, 0.18 (4.6) minimum shank diameter open

(94.7)
(6.9)
1.06
4.07 3.73 closed and locked

(103)
Four mounting holes, M5 3 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) bolt circle. M5 3 0.8-6H holes are compatible with 10-3 mounting screws.
(11.)
0.44
Female VCR Fittings
End Connection Inlet and Outlet 1/4 in. tube butt weld 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. tube butt weld 0.6 in. (6.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting
Basic Ordering Number 6LVV-DPBW4-
in. (mm) 1.74 (44.)
To order, add a process designator, P or P1 (see page 3), to the basic ordering number, then specify the actuator style as shown:
For a directional handle, no additional designators
are required.
6LVV-DPBW4S6LVV-DPBW6M6LVV-DPFR46LVV-DPMR46LVV-DPVR46LVV-DPS4- 6LVV-DPS6M- .78 (70.6) .30 (58.4) .46 (6.5) .45 (6.) 1.61 (40.9) 1.74 (44.) Example: 6LVV-DPBW4-P For an integral lockout handle, insert L. Example: 6LVV-DPLBW4-P For a round handle, insert R. Example: 6LVV-DPRBW4-P For a toggle handle, insert T. Example: 6LVV-DPTVR4-P For a pneumatic actuator, add -C for normally closed
actuation or -O for normally open actuation.

Example: 6LVV-DPBW4-P-C
Low-pressure valves have blue handles. For other colors, see Options
and AccessoriesHandle Colors, page 1. ordering number.
Not available with P or P1 processing; omit process designator from

DP Series High-pressure BW Butt Weld, pneumatically actuated

High-Pressure Valves
Pneumatic Actuator
(63.0)
MS-01-165 Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
N-ELD-0667
DP Series Low-pressure BW Butt Weld, manual actuator, REV 03-16-01 MS-01-165
N-ELD-664
Round Handle
Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT
MS-01-165
Directional Handle
1.49
(37.8)
.48
1.49 DP Series Migh-pressure Female VCR, Manual Actuator

(37.8)
N-ELD-0668
(98.8)
NUPRO DF SERIES BOTTOM VIEW
3.89
open
(7.1)
.84
N-ELD-444
0.5
(6.4)
0.30
(7.6)
DP Series High-pressure Male Rotatable VCR with Locking Handle, open position N-ELD-0669 DP Series High-pressure Male Rotatable VCR with Locking Handle, open position N-ELD-0669 MS-01-165 DP Series High-pressure Male Rotatable VCR with Locking Handle, locked position MS-01-165 MS-01-165
Tube Butt Weld Ends
(11.)
0.44
Female VCR Fittings
(11.)
0.44
N-ELD-0670
1.49 (37.8)
Bottom
(6.9)
1.06
0.33 (8.4) hole, 0.18 (4.6) minimum shank diameter open

(98.8)
(6.9)
1.06
4.6 3.89 closed and locked

(108)
Four mounting holes, M5 3 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) bolt circle. M5 3 0.8-6H holes are compatible with 10-3 mounting screws.
(11.)
0.44
Rotatable Male VCR Fittings H
End Connection Inlet and Outlet 1/4 in. tube butt weld 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. tube butt weld short 0.6 in. (6.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting 6 mm Swagelok tube fitting
Basic Ordering Number 6LVV-DPHBW4-
in. (mm) 1.74 (44.)
To order, add a process designator, P or P1 (see page 3), to the basic ordering number, then specify the actuator style as shown:
For a directional handle, no additional designators
are required.
6LVV-DPHBW4S6LVV-DPHBW6M6LVV-DPHFR46LVV-DPHMR46LVV-DPHVR46LVV-DPHS4- 6LVV-DPHS6M- .78 (70.6) .30 (58.4) .46 (6.5) .45 (6.) 1.61 (40.9) 1.74 (44.) Example: 6LVV-DPHBW4-P For an integral lockout handle, insert L. Example: 6LVV-DPHLBW4-P For a round handle, insert R. Example: 6LVV-DPHRBW4-P For a pneumatic actuator, add -C for normally closed
actuation or -O for normally open actuation.

Example: 6LVV-DPHBW4-P-C
High-pressure valves have white handles. For other colors, see Options
and AccessoriesHandle Colors, page 1. ordering number.
Not available with P or P1 processing; omit process designator from

IGC II Modular Surface-Mount Valves
Directional and Round Handles

H closed and locked
H open
DP Series toggle handle, MSM Body MS-01-165 01/31/01
H open
NUPRO DF SERIES MSM Bod, BOTTOM VIEW
DP Series Low-pressure Pneumatically Actuated MSM Body MS-01-165
N-ELD-0839
Toggle Handle Pneumatic Actuator

Air inlet 1/8-7 NPT H open H closed .87
Bottom
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1) (7.9)
1.50
Four through holes, 0. (5.6) dia
Dimensions
For other valve dimensions, see Ordering Information and Dimensions for low-pressure or high-pressure valves on pages 5 and 6.
Dimensions, in. (mm) Handle Type Directional and round Integral lockout Toggle Low-Pressure H Open .36
(59.9)
Low-Pressure Models
Ordering Numbers Actuation Directional handle High-Pressure H Open .36
(59.9)
2 Port 6LVV-MSM-DP--P 6LVV-MSM-DPL--P 6LVV-MSM-DPR--P 6LVV-MSM-DPT--P 6LVV-MSM-DP--P-C 6LVV-MSM-DP--P-O
3 Port 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPL-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPR-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPT-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P-C 6LVV-MSM-DP-3-P-O
Integral lockout handle Round handle Toggle handle Pneumatic, normally closed Pneumatic, normally open
H Closed .34
(59.4)
H Closed .34
(59.4)
3.5
(8.6)
3.59
(91.)
3.41
(86.6)
3.78
(96.0)
.83
(71.9)
4.04
(103)
Closed and locked position.
High-Pressure Models
Ordering Numbers Actuation Directional handle Integral lockout handle Round handle 2 Port 6LVV-MSM-DPH--P 3 Port 6LVV-MSM-DPH-3-P
6LVV-MSM-DPHL--P 6LVV-MSM-DPHL-3-P 6LVV-MSM-DPHR--P 6LVV-MSM-DPHR-3-P

To customize a valve to meet your system requirements, select designators for:
multiport or elbow flow path end connections for each port process specification actuator (manual or pneumatic)
Flow Path
Select a flow path as viewed from the top of the valve. Insert the flow path designator in the valve ordering number, as shown on the next page.


Flow Path Ports Schematic Closed Open Designator D 4 E
End Connections
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Insert the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected.
End Connection 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.6 in. (6.6 mm) short tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall Designator
C 1/4 in. female VCR fitting F 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 3

L
Dimensions
Top
Port 4 1.06
(6.9)
Side
square L Port 1 Port 2 L M 0.44
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.6 in. (6.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 6 mm tube butt weld, 1 mm wall 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting L 0.87
(.1)
M 0.76
(19.3)
(11.)
Port 1
Port 2
0.81
(0.6)
0.70
(17.8)
0.87
(.1)
0.76
(19.3)
1.39
(35.3)
1.8
(3.5)
Port 5 L Port 3 L Not shown: Four bottom mounting holes, same as -port body, page 5. Exception: N body, no mounting holes.
1.39
(35.3)
1.63
(41.4)
Build a valve ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown.
6LVV DP C 1 1 3 P C
Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Series Low-Pressure Diaphragm Valve DP = Pneumatic or directional handle DPL = Integral lockout handle DPR = Round handle DPT = Toggle handle Flow Path See page 8. End Connections Port Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4 5 High-Pressure Diaphragm Valve DPH = Pneumatic or directional handle DPHL = Integral lockout handle DPHR = Round handle Actuation Pneumatic C = Normally closed O = Normally open CM = Normally closed with indicator switch Manual (Handle Color) BK = Black RD = Red BL = Blue WH = White GR = Green YW = Yellow OR = Orange
No designator or final dash () is required
for a blue handle on a low-pressure valve or a white handle on a high-pressure valve.
See page 8.
Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average

Ordering Number Material Series Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Port 4 end connection Process Actuator Low-pressure, pneumatic or directional handle -port, R pattern 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Red directional handle 6LVV-DPR22P-RD 6LVV-DPHD1313P1-O 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel High-pressure, pneumatic or directional handle 4-port, D pattern 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Normally open Low-pressure, integral lockout handle 3-port, A pattern 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Blue integral lockout handle 6LVV-DPLA323P
10
To customize a multivalve manifold to meet your system requirements, select designators for:
flow path end connections for each port process actuator (manual or pneumatic).
Flow Path
Select a flow path. Insert the flow path designator in the manifold ordering number, as shown on the next page.
P1, P, and P3 designate port numbers. V1 and V designate valve numbers. Manifold Schematic
P2 V1 V2
End Connections
P1 V1 P1 V1
P2 V2
V1 P3 P1
P2
V2 P3
Select an end connection for each port on the body in numerical order. Place the end connection designator in the valve ordering number in the same sequence it is selected.
P2 V1 P2 V2 V2 P3 P1 P3 V1 V1 P1 V2 V1 P3 P2 P1 V2 P2 P3 V2
Flow Path
V1 P3 P1 P2 V2
Designator
End Connection 1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. (7.6 mm) tube stub, 0.035 in. wall 1/4 in. female VCR fitting
Designator
1V
P3
P1
P2 V1 V2
V1 P1
P2
V2 P3
P1
P3
V
-valve, 3-port double pattern
V1 P1 V2 V1 P3 P2 P1 V2
Front
V1 P2 P3 V2
Side
1D
1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting

DP Series Multivalve Manifold, monoblock MS-01-165
N-ELD-671
DP DP Series Multivalve Manifold, double pattern N-ELD-672 Series Multivalve Manifold, double pattern

MS-01-165 MS-01-165
11
DP Series Multivalve Manifold, double pattern MS-01-165 DP Series Multivalve Manifold, monoblock MS-01-165
Dimensions
N-ELD-672 N-ELD-672
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. 1V and 2V Multivalve Manifolds
Front
(67.8)
N-ELD-671
1D Multivalve Manifold
(37.8)
1.49
.67
Port 2
(37.8)
1.49
End Connection
2-Valve, 3-Port 2-Valve, Double 3-Port Monoblock Pattern L1 L2 .79

(70.9) (103)
L3
L1 0.87
(.1)
(77.) (81.5)
3.04
3.1
1/4 in. tube butt weld, 0.30 in. 1.81 (7.6 mm) tube stub, (46.0) 0.035 in. wall
6.07
(154)
1.81 4.04 (46.0) .66
L
Port 1
L1 L3 .46
Port 3
1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting
.03
(51.6)
(67.6) (99.3)
.03 3.91 (51.6) 1.39

(35.3)
3.35 .39
(60.7) (85.1) (117)
.39 4.60 (60.7)
Bottom
(6.5)
(6.9)
1.06
L1
L1
L1
Bottom
Top
Side
Low-pressure manifold. High-pressure manifold.
Four bottom mounting holes, M5 3 0.8-6H thread, 0.5 (6.4) deep, located 45 from center line, on a 1.00 (5.4) bolt circle. M5 3 0.8-6H holes are compatible with 10-3 mounting screws.
Build a multivalve manifold ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
6LVV PH 1V 3 3 3 P1 A B
Material 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel Series Low-Pressure Diaphragm Valve P = Pneumatic or directional handle PL = Integral lockout handle PR = Round handle PT = Toggle handle High-Pressure Diaphragm Valve PH = Pneumatic or directional handle PHL = Integral lockout handle PHR = Round handle Actuation Add a designator for each valve. Pneumatic A = Normally closed B = Normally open C = Normally closed with indicator switch Manual (Handle Color) T = Black W= Red U = Blue X = White S = Green Y = Yellow V = Orange Process P = Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average P1 = Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11); electropolished, Ra 5 in. (0.13 m) average
Flow Path 1V = -valve, 3-port monoblock 2V = -valve, 3-port monoblock 1D = -valve, 3-port double pattern End Connections Select a designator for each port on the valve. See page 10. Port 1 Port 2 Port 3

Ordering Number Material Series Flow path Port 1 end connection Port end connection Port 3 end connection Process Valve 1 actuator Valve actuator Low-pressure, pneumatic or directional handle valve, 3-port monoblock, V 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Normally closed Normally open 6LVV-P2V323P1-AB 6LVV-PHL1D212P-SW 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel High-pressure, integral lockout handle valve, 3-port double pattern, 1D 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. rotatable male VCR fitting 1/4 in. female VCR fitting Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Green integral lockout handle Red integral lockout handle Low-pressure, toggle handle valve, 3-port monoblock, 1V 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld 1/4 in. tube butt weld Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01) Blue toggle handle Blue toggle handle 6LVV-PT1V333P-UU

Handle Colors (excluding multivalve manifolds)
Seven handle colors are available for color coding of process lines. Select a basic kit ordering number and add a color designator.
Basic Ordering Number NY-5K-DPColor Black Blue Green Orange Red White Yellow Designator BK BL GR OR RD WH YW
High-Temperature Seat MaterialPolyimide

Temperature rating is from 50 to 300F (10 to 150C). Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings in pneumatic actuator are
included.
All other materials and ratings remain the same.
To order, insert V in the valve ordering number. Examples: 6LVV-DPVC111P-C 6LVV-DPHVBW4P-C
Handle Kit Directional
Integral NY-5K-DPLlockout Round handle PY-5QK-DPRreplacement Round handle PY-5K-DPRretrofit
Maintenance Kits
Include two diaphragms and replacement instructions. Are available for high- or low-pressure valves.
Ordering number: E-3DK-DP
Example: NY-5K-DP-RD for a red directional handle kit.
Indicator Switch
device, indicating the open or closed position of the pneumatically actuated valve.
Features a single-pole,
Actuator Replacement Kits

Include actuator and service instructions. Select a kit ordering number:
Actuator Replacement Kit Directional handle Integral lockout handle Round handle Toggle handle Pneumatic normally closed Pneumatic normally open High-temperature pneumatic normally closed High-temperature pneumatic normally open Ordering Numbers Low-Pressure NY-DP-K1-BL NY-DPL-K1-BL PY-DPR-K1-BL SS-DPT-K1-BL A-DP-K1-C A-DP-K1-O A-DPV-K1-C A-DPV-K1-O High-Pressure NY-DPH-K1-WH NY-DPHL-K1-WH PY-DPHR-K1-WH A-DPH-K1-C A-DPH-K1-O A-DPHV-K1-C A-DPHV-K1-O
single-throw switch rated at 1/ A for 115 V (ac).

Includes a 4 in. (61 cm)
wire lead with an inline clip.

Is available assembled
on any normally closed and high-pressure, normally open, pneumatically actuated DP series valve, or as a kit for field assembly.

To order a valve with an indicator switch, add M for a normally open switch or M-2 for a normally closed switch to the valve ordering number. Examples: 6LVV-DPFR4-P-CM 6LVV-DPHBW4-P-CM-2
Do not interchange high- and low-pressure actuators. Oxygen Service Hazards


To order a kit for an existing valve, use ordering number MS-ISK-DP-CM for a normally open switch or MS-ISK-DP-CM-2 for a normally closed switch. Kits include actuator and switch.
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company ElgiloyTM Elgiloy Specialty Metals 00, 004, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 008, R8 MS-01-165
SSV Series
Assembly and Service Instructions
Contents
Tool Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Components and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . 2 Port and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . 3 General SSV Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Mounting MPC-Style Assemblies. . . . . . 5 Adding / Removing Base Blocks . . . . . . 5 Flange Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Cap Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 O-Ring Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Tool Requirements
Torque Wrench, 0 to 45 in.lb (0 to 5.1 Nm) with hex drivers: 7/64 in. 9/64 in. 5/32 in.
O-Ring Pick (or similar tool)
MS-CRD-SSV R0 9-05 CP
Components and Hardware

Base Block Standard Outlet MPC Standard MPC Outlet Flange
ARV Base Block
Cap Ten per bag of chosen color
End Base Block Right Left
Screws Standard MPC mounting Flange Insert
Module DBB ARV
O-Rings Three 9-004 Eight 9-007 One 9-022
Port and Mounting Dimensions

Air gap vent
2.76 (70.1)
Inlet port
0.75 (19.0) 0.80

(20.3)
Inlet View
1.50 1.125
(28.6) (38.1)
0.68 (17.3) to vent port (not shown) 6.37 (162) (add 1.6 in. (40.6 mm) for additional streams)
Top View
4.13
(105)
1.70
(43.2)
Air inlet port
1.05
(26.7)
Outlet port
1.30 (33.0) to vent port (not shown)
0.50 (12.7) 0.98

(24.9)
0.53
(13.5)
1.02 1.60
(40.6) (25.9)
Outlet View
General SSV Assembly

1. Place a left end base block in a vise. Note: For assemblies using an ARV base block, the ARV block is in place of a left end base block.
2. Place a base block on the left end base block, aligning the O-rings (9-007) with the through ports. The square end of the left end base block inserts will be located in the counterbores of the base block. See Fig. 1. 3. Tighten the two base block insert screws to the two left end base block inserts using a 9/64 in. hex torque wrench placed through the base block inserts to 35 to 45 in.lb (4.0 to 5.1 Nm). See Fig. 2. 4. Continue building the base block assembly by repeating steps 2 and 3, tightening the base block insert screws to the adjacent base block inserts. Place the outlet base block in the desired position within the base block assembly.
Through ports O-rings Inserts
Counterbores
Left end base block
Base block
Fig. 1
Base block insert
Fig. 2
Caution
Do not intermix standard and MPC-style base blocks.
Through ports
Note: It is recommended that the outlet base block be assembled close to the center of the assembly for the most consistent flow results. 5. Assemble a right end base block to the assembly, aligning the right end base block O-rings (9-007) with the through ports on the last base block. Tighten the right end base block insert screws to the base block inserts to 35 to 45 in.lb (4.0 to 5.1 Nm) using a 9/64 in. hex torque wrench placed through the end base block. See Fig. 3. 6. Install a DBB module on each base block with the alignment pin fitting into the alignment hole on the DBB module. Using two mounting screws (#10-32 x 1/2 in. with standard 5/32 in. hex drive) tighten the DBB module to the base block to 25 to 35 in.lb (2.8 to 4.0 Nm). See Fig. 4. Note: For ARV assemblies, install only ARV modules to the ARV base blocks.
O-rings
Base block assembly Fig. 3
Right end base block
DBB module
Mounting screw Mounting screw Alignment hole
Alignment pin
Base block
Fig. 4
Mounting MPC-Style Assemblies

For MPC-style assemblies, install the entire SSV assembly to the panel using MPC mounting screws (#10-32 x 2.0 in. with standard 5/32 in. hex head), aligning the fluid port holes on the SSV assembly and the panel. Torque the screws to 25 to 35 in.lb (2.8 to 4.0 Nm). See Fig. 5.
O-rings SSV assembly
Mounting screw Fluid port hole
Panel Fig. 5
Adding / Removing Base Blocks

1. Remove the insert screws from the right end base block. Add (according to step 4 of General SSV Assembly) or remove the desired number of base blocks using a 9/64 in. hex tool.
WARNING
Before servicing any installed valve you must: depressurize the system cycle the valve purge the valve.
2. Replace the right end block according to step 5 of General SSV Assembly. 3. Install any needed DBB modules per step 6 of General SSV Assembly.
Flange Replacement
1. Using a 5/32 in. hex torque wrench, loosen the mounting screws and remove the DBB module from the base block.
DBB module
2. Using a 7/64 in. hex torque wrench, loosen the flange screws and remove the flange from the DBB module. 3. Align the air inlet and alignment pin holes on the new flange with those on the bottom of the DBB module. See Fig. 6.
CAUTION
The air inlet and alignment pin holes on the flange and valve must be oriented correctly for the DBB module to function correctly after reassembly.
Alignment pin hole Air actuation hole Flange screws (4)
4. Replace the flange screws and tighten (10 to 15 in.lb, 1.1 to 1.7 Nm). 5. Attach the DBB module to the base block per step 6 of General SSV Assembly.
Fig. 6
Flange
Cap Replacement
1. Use an O-ring pick or similar tool to remove the existing cap.
Cap Groove Undercut Piston Tabs
2. Press the new cap into the groove so that the tabs are compressed within the undercut of the piston. See Fig. 7.
Fig. 7
O-Ring Replacement
1. To replace base block seals or right end base block seals (9-007), remove block(s) according to Adding/Removing Base Blocks. See Fig. 8.
DBB module face seals
Base block seals
2. To replace the DBB module face seals (9-007), remove the module from the base block according to step 1 of Flange Replacement. See Fig. 8. 3. To replace the DBB module body seal (9-022) or actuation air seal (9-004), remove the module and flange according to steps 1 and 2 of Flange Replacement. See Fig. 9. 4. Remove the O-ring from the counterbore using an O-ring pick or similar tool.
Right end base block seals
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the counterbore surface with the removal tool. System performance could be affected by any scratches.
DBB module body seal
Fig. 8
5. For the DBB module body seal (9-022) only, lubricate the new O-ring with the provided lubricant. 6. Press the new O-ring(s) into the appropriate counterbore. 7. Reassemble the SSV assembly according to the section followed for disassembly.
Air actuation seal Fig. 9
Testing
Perform a shell test and check for proper operation prior to system installation. Safe Product Selection
When selecting a product the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers
Swagelok TM Swagelok Company 2005 Swagelok Company
www.swagelok.com
S t a i n l ess Steel S e a m l ess Tubing

Fractional Sizes
Standard instrumentation tubing Chemically cleaned and passivated tubing Thermocouple-cleaned tubing
Features
Available in sizes from 1/8 to 2 in. outside diameter;
metric sizes available upon request

Marked to indicate size, material, specifications,
and heat number
Pressure Ratings

Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.028 0.035 1/4 0.049 0.065 0.035 3/8 0.049 0.065 0.035 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.120 0.120 0.134 0.134 0.188 0.035 0.035 0.035 Ordering Number SS-T2-S-028-20 SS-T4-S-035-20 SS-T4-S-049-20 SS-T4-S-065-20 SS-T6-S-035-20 SS-T6-S-049-20 SS-T6-S-065-20 SS-T8-S-035-20 SS-T8-S-049-20 SS-T8-S-065-20 SS-T10-S-065-20 SS-T12-S-065-20 SS-T16-S-083-20 SS-T20-S-09-+5-20 SS-T20-S-120-20 SS-T24-S-120-20 SS-T24-S-134-20 SS-T32-S-134-20 SS-T32-S-188-20 304 / 304L Seamless 1/4 3/8 1/2 304L-T4-S-035-20 304L-T6-S-035-20 304L-T8-S-035-20 20 0.080 0.127 0.174 20 Nominal Length ft Weight lb/ft 0.029 0.080 0.105 0.128 0.127 0.171 0.215 0.174 0.236 0.302 0.389 0.476 0.813 1.187 1.473 1.792 1.981 2.705 3.686
Standard Instrumentation Tubing

Material Standards
Grade 316 / 316L 304 / 304L UNS S31600 / S31603 S30400 / S30403 ASTM A213/ A269 A213/ A269 ASME SA213 SA213
316 / 316L Seamless 1/8
Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall thickness.
Material Grade 316 / 316L Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur 16.0 to 18.0 11.0 to 14.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.030 max 304 / 304L 18.0 to 20.0 8.0 to 11.0 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.030 max Composition, wt. %
ubing sizes smaller than 1/2 in. outside diameter T

contain up to 0.040 wt. % carbon.
Chemically Cleaned and Passivated and Thermocouple-Cleaned Tubing

Material Standards
Grade 316L UNS S31603 ASTM A269 ASME SA213

Chemically Cleaned and Passivated Tubing
This tubing complies with ASTM G93, Level A requirement for nonvolatile residue levels and also meets requirements of CGA G4.1. Tubing ends are protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps. Tubing is packed in single polyethylene, heat-sealed bags.
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur (chemically cleaned and passivated) Sulfur (thermocouple-cleaned)
0.040 wt. % carbon.
Composition, wt. % 16.0 to 18.0 10.0 to 15.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.005 to 0.012 (seamless) 0.005 to 0.017 (welded) 0.030 max
Thermocouple-Cleaned Tubing
This tubing meets the cleanliness requirements of ASTM A632-S3. Tubing ends are protected with polyethylene caps. Tubing is bulk packaged in polyethylene, heat-sealed bags.
Product Chemically cleaned and passivated Thermocouplecleaned Inside Diameter Finish 20 in. Ra max 32 in. Ra max Standard finish (see ASTM A269) Process Designator G20 G30 G Satin External Finish
ubing sizes smaller than 1/2 in. outside diameter contain up to T

To order, add a process designator from the table above to a basic ordering number.
Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.035 0.049 0.035 1/2 5/8 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 Basic Ordering Number 316L Seamless 1/8 1/4 3/8 6L-T2-S-020-206L-T2-S-028-20-G 6L-T4-S-035-206L-T4-S-049-206L-T6-S-035-206L-T6-S-049-206L-T8-S-035-206L-T8-S-049-206L-T8-S-065-206L-T10-S-065-206L-T12-S-065-206L-T16-S-065-20-G20 6L-T16-S-083-2020 0.022 0.029 0.080 0.105 0.127 0.171 0.174 0.236 0.302 0.389 0.476 0.649 0.813 Nominal Length Weight ft lb/ft

Tube Fittings

3/4 1
For thermocouple-cleaned tubing only. To order, use ordering number shown. For 20 in. tubing only. To order, use ordering number shown.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2005, 2007, 2008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI March 2008, R10 MS-01-153-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Stainless Steel T i t a n i u m A l l o y e d Tu b i n g
Metric Sizes
Seamless Tubing
3 to 25 mm OD 316L stainless steel titanium alloyed DIN 17458
Steel Grades and Chemical Composition Percentages

AISI 316L (modified) UNS S31635 SS 2350 AFNOR Z6CNDT17-12 W.-NR. 1.4571 C 0.05 Cr 17 Ni 12 Mo 2.1 Ti 0.25 to 0.80
Standards
DIN 17458 TC 1
Nominal OD mm 3 Nominal Wall Thickness, mm 0,5 0,7 1,0 1,5 1,0 1,5 1,0 1,5 1,0 12 1,5 2,0 1,0 16 1,5 2,0 1,0 18 1,5 2,0 20 22 25 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,5 Ordering Number 316TI-T3M-S-0,5M-6ME 316TI-T3M-S-0,7M-6ME 316TI-T6M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T6M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T8M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T8M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T10M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T10M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T12M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T12M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T12M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T16M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T16M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T16M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T18M-S-1,0M-6ME 316TI-T18M-S-1,5M-6ME 316TI-T18M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T20M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T22M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T25M-S-2,0M-6ME 316TI-T25M-S-2,5M-6ME Weight kg/m 0,021 0,027 0,125 0,169 0,175 0,244 0,225 0,319 0,275 0,394 0,500 0,375 0,507 0,651 0,425 0,619 0,801 0,901 1,00 1,15 1,41 Allowable Working Pressure, bar 320 540 430 700 320 530 260 420 210 350 490 160 260 360 140 230 320 290 260 230 290
10
Allowable working pressure based on equations from DIN 2413

and a yield strength of 245 MPa from DIN 17458.
Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings.

See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog for more information. Tube cutter Tube sawing guide Support system
Tube deburring tool Tube bender
Swagelok TM Swagelok Company 1999, 2003 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL May 2003, R2 MS-01-158-SCS
www.swagelok.com
S t a i n l e s s S t e e l Tu b i n g
Fractional Sizes
Standard Instrumentation Tubing Chemically Cleaned and Passivated Tubing Thermocouple Cleaned Tubing

Available in sizes from 1/16 to 1 in. OD;
Material Standards
Grade 316 / 316L UNS Designation S31600/S31603 SS 2353 AFNOR Z2CND17-13 W.-NR. 1.4435 ASTM A213/ A 269
Chemical Composition Percentages

Chemical Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Carbon Grade 316/ 316L 17.0 to 18.0 12.5 to 14.0 2.50 to 3.00 0.030 max

Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. Nominal Length m (ft) Weight kg/m 0.01 0.01 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.16 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.58 0.56 0.71 1.2
Ordering Number SS-T1-S-014-6ME SS-T1-S-020-6ME SS-T2-S-028-6ME SS-T2-S-035-6ME SS-T4-S-035-6ME SS-T4-S-049-6ME SS-T4-S-065-6ME SS-T6-S-035-6ME SS-T6-S-049-6ME SS-T6-S-065-6ME SS-T8-S-035-6ME SS-T8-S-049-6ME SS-T8-S-065-6ME SS-T8-S-083-6ME SS-T10-S-049-6ME SS-T10-S-065-6ME SS-T12-S-049-6ME SS-T12-S-065-6ME SS-T16-S-083-6ME
Pressure Ratings
See Swagelok Tubing Data for pressure ratings.
316 / 316L Seamless 0.014 1/16 0.020 0.028 1/8 0.035 0.035 1/4 0.049 0.065 3/8 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.049 0.065 0.049 0.065 0.083
6 (19.7)
1/2
5/8 3/4 1
Chemically Cleaned and Passivated and Thermocouple Cleaned Tubing

Material Standards
Grade 316L UNS Designation S31603 ASTM A269 ASME SA213

This tubing complies with ASTM G-93, Level A requirement for non-volatile residue levels and also meets requirements of CGA G4.1. Tubing ends are protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps. Tubing is packed in single polyethylene, heat-sealed bags.
Chemical Composition Percentages

Chemical Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur
0.040 % carbon.
Thermocouple Cleaned Tubing

This tubing meets the cleanliness requirements of ASTM A632-S3. Tubing ends are protected with polyethylene caps. Tubing is bulk packaged in polyethylene, heatsealed bags.
ID Finish Cleaning Designator External Finish
Grade 316L 16.0 to 18.0 10.0 to 15.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.030 max
Product Chemically cleaned and passivated
32 in. Ra max
-G30 Satin
Tubing sizes less than 1/2 in. OD contain up to
Thermocouple cleaned
Standard finish (reference ASTM A269)
-G

See the Swagelok Tools and Accessories catalog for more information.

To order, add a cleaning designator to the basic ordering number.
Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. Basic Ordering Number 6L-T2-S-020-206L-T2-S-028-20- 6L-T4-S-035-206L-T4-S-049-206L-T6-S-035-206L-T6-S-049-206L-T8-S-035-206L-T8-S-049-206L-T8-S-065-206L-T10-S-065-206L-T12-S-065-206L-T16-S-083-2020 Nominal Length ft Weight lb/ft 0.022 0.029 0.080 0.105 0.127 0.171 0.174 0.236 0.302 0.389 0.476 0.813
Tube Fittings
See the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog for information.
316L Seamless 0.020 1/8 0.028 1/4 3/8 0.035 0.049 0.035 0.049 0.035 0.049 0.065 5/8 3/4 1 0.065 0.065 0.083

See the Swagelok Welding System catalogs for information.
1/2
For thermocouple cleaned tubing only.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL March 2003, R0 MS-02-191
www.swagelok.com
S t a in les s Steel Tubing

Metric Sizes
Features
3 to 25 mm outside diameter
Material Standards
AISI 316 / 316L UNS S31603 SS 2353 AFNOR Z2CND17-13 W.-NR. 1.4435
seamless tubing
316/316L stainless steel ASTM A213/A269
Nominal wall thickness, not minimum wall
thickness.
Typical Chemical Composition

Element Carbon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Composition wt. % 0.03 17 13 2.6

Nominal OD mm 3 6 8 10 Nominal Wall Thickness mm 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 12 1.5 2.0 1.0 16 1.5 2.0 1.0 18 20 22 25 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 Nominal Length m Allowable Working Pressure bar 340 560 420 710 310 520 240 400 200 330 470 140 230 330 120 200 290 260 230 200 260
Ordering Number SS-T3M-S-0,5M-6ME SS-T3M-S-0,7M-6ME SS-T6M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T6M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T8M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T8M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T10M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T10M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T12M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T12M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T12M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T16M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T16M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T16M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T18M-S-1,0M-6ME SS-T18M-S-1,5M-6ME SS-T18M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T20M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T22M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T25M-S-2,0M-6ME SS-T25M-S-2,5M-6ME
Weight kg/m 0.021 0.027 0.125 0.169 0.175 0.244 0.225 0.319 0.275 0.394
0.500 0.375 0.507 0.651 0.425 0.619 0.801 0.901 1.00 1.15 1.41
Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings. Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings in gas service.

Tube Supports
See the Swagelok Tube Supports catalog, MS-01-109, for more information.
Tube Fittings

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1999, 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 2007, R4 MS-01-157-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Stainle ss Ste e l Tubing

Impe r ial Size s
Standard instrumentation tubing Chemically cleaned and passivated tubing Thermocouple-cleaned tubing
Features
Available in sizes from 1/16 to 1 in. outside diameter;

Material Standards
Grade 316/316L UNS S31603/S31603 SS 2353 AFNOR Z2CND17-13 W.-NR. 1.4435 ASTM A213/A269
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Carbon Composition wt. % 17.0 to 18.0 12.5 to 14.0 2.50 to 3.00 0.030 max

Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.014 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.035 1/4 0.049 0.065 0.035 3/8 0.049 0.065 0.035 1/2 0.049 0.065 0.083 5/8 3/4 1 0.049 0.065 0.049 0.065 0.083 Ordering Number 316 / 316L Seamless 1/16 1/8 SS-T1-S-014-6ME SS-T1-S-020-6ME SS-T2-S-028-6ME SS-T2-S-035-6ME SS-T4-S-035-6ME SS-T4-S-049-6ME SS-T4-S-065-6ME SS-T6-S-035-6ME SS-T6-S-049-6ME SS-T6-S-065-6ME SS-T8-S-035-6ME SS-T8-S-049-6ME SS-T8-S-065-6ME SS-T8-S-083-6ME SS-T10-S-049-6ME SS-T10-S-065-6ME SS-T12-S-049-6ME SS-T12-S-065-6ME SS-T16-S-083-6ME 6
(19.7)
Nominal Length Weight m (ft) kg/m 0.01 0.01 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.16 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.58 0.56 0.71 1.2
Pressure Ratings

Material Standards

This tubing complies with ASTM G93, Level A requirement for nonvolatile residue levels and also meets requirements of CGA G4.1. Tubing ends are protected with polyamide nylon lm and polyethylene caps. Tubing is packed in single polyethylene, heat-sealed bags.
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur (chemically cleaned and passivated) Sulfur (thermocouple-cleaned)
0.040 wt. % carbon.
Composition, wt. % 16.0 to 18.0 10.0 to 15.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.005 to 0.012 (seamless) 0.005 to 0.017 (welded) 0.030 max
Thermocouple-Cleaned Tubing
This tubing meets the cleanliness requirements of ASTM A632-S3. Tubing ends are protected with polyethylene caps. Tubing is bulk packaged in polyethylene, heat-sealed bags.
Product Chemically cleaned and passivated Thermocouplecleaned Inside Diameter Surface Finish 20 in. Ra max 32 in. Ra max Standard finish (see ASTM A269) Process Designator G20 G30 G Satin External Finish
Tubing sizes smaller than 1/2 in. outside diameter contain up to

To order, add a process designator from the table above to a basic ordering number.
Tube OD in. Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.035 0.049 0.035 1/2 5/8 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 Basic Ordering Number 316L Seamless 1/8 1/4 3/8 6L-T2-S-020-6M6L-T2-S-028-6M-G 6L-T4-S-035-6M6L-T4-S-049-6M6L-T6-S-035-6M6L-T6-S-049-6M6L-T8-S-035-6M6L-T8-S-049-6M6L-T8-S-065-6M6L-T10-S-065-6M6L-T12-S-065-6M6L-T16-S-065-6M-G20 6L-T16-S-083-6M6
(19.7)
Nominal Length Weight m (ft) kg/m 0.03 0.04 0.12 0.16 0.19 0.25 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.58 0.71 0.97 1.2
Tube Fittings

3/4 1
For thermocouple-cleaned tubing only. To order, use ordering number shown. For 20 in. tubing only. To order, use ordering number shown.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2006, R7 MS-01-159-SCS
www.swagelok.com
S t a in les s Steel Tub u lar F i tti n gs

Ultrahigh-Purity and Chemically Cleaned and Passivated
Sizes from 1/4 through 4 in. outside diameter Metric sizes available upon request 316L stainless steel construction Available in a variety of configurations, including coaxial Marked to indicate material type and heat code
Stainless Steel Tubular Fittings
Features
Traceability
Each tubular fitting is marked to identify manufacturer, material type, and heat code.
Variety of Configurations
Tubular fittings are available in elbows, tees, reducers, end caps, and coaxial configurations.
Technical Data
Product Inside Diameter Surface Finish 10 in. Ra max; electropolished 10 in. Ra max, except for cold formed and welded areas; electropolished Individual Certification Mill Test Reports Ends are faced Certificate of Conformance and protected Mill Test Reports with polyamide nylon film and Surface Roughness polyethylene caps; Dimensional Tolerances packed in double Helium Leak Test polyethylene bags for welded fittings Packaging Ends are faced and protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps; packed in a single polyethylene bag Process Designator E2 0.035 in. (1/4 and 3/8 in. OD) 0.049 in. (1/2 in. OD) 0.065 in. (3/4 to 3 in. OD) 0.083 in. (4 in. OD) Material Specification Wall Thickness External Finish
Ultrahighpurity
E3 ASTM A269 ASTM A479 ASTM A632
Satin
20 in. Ra max Chemically cleaned and passivated 32 in. Ra max
G20 G30
Process specifications apply to process tube in coaxial tubular fittings. Process specifications are available upon request. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative. Certificate of Conformance for: Surface roughness SEM pits, inclusions, or other raw material defects Dimensional tolerances XPS minimum chromium to iron and chromium oxide to iron oxide ratios Helium leak test for welded fittings DI water cleaning for effluent resistivity Purity test for moisture and particulates
Raw Materials
Swagelok UHP and chemically cleaned tubular fittings are manufactured from 316L stainless steel; controlled sulfur levels of 0.005 to 0.012 % (seamless) and 0.005 to 0.017 % (welded) promote reliable, consistent orbital welding.
Ultrahigh-Purity
Ultrahigh-purity tubular fittings are rinsed with 18 Mcm DI water and purged with filtered nitrogen. Ends are sealed in an ISO Class 4/Federal Class 10 cleanroom.
Chemically Cleaned and Passivated

Chemically cleaned and passivated tubular fittings are manufactured from 316L stainless steel. Nonvolatile residue levels are compliant with ASTM G93, Level A requirements. These fittings also meet requirements of CGA G4.1.
Traceability
UHP and chemically cleaned tubular fittings are fully traceable to the original material supplier. Certificates of compliance are available upon request. Certified material test reports (CMTR) are kept on file.
Markings
UHP and chemically cleaned tubular fittings are marked with material type and heat code or trace identification, using a mechanical etching tool. Fittings having circumferential welds are helium leak-tested and marked with a lot number.

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. To order, add a process designator from the Technical Data table, page 2, to the basic ordering number. Example: 6L-4TW-5-S-035-E2
45 Elbow
A
Concentric Reducer
A B T A B B C Tx
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 3 4
Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number A B Seamless 6L-4TW-5-S-0351.10 (27.9) 0.86 (21.8) 6L-6TW-5-S-0352.00 (50.8) 1.76 (44.7) 6L-8TW-5-S-0492.50 (63.5) 2.18 (55.4) 6L-12TW-5-S-0652.50 (63.5) 2.03 (51.6) 6L-16TW-5-S-0653.12 (79.3) 2.49 (63.3) 6L-24TW-5-S-0652.50 (63.5) 1.50 (38.1) 6L-32TW-5-S-0653.00 (76.2) 1.75 (44.5) Welded 6L-24TW-5-W-0656L-32TW-5-W-0656L-48TW-5-W-0656L-64TW-5-W-0832.50 3.00 3.63 4.50
(63.5) (76.2) (92.2) (114)
T Tube OD in. 3/8 1/2
Tx Tube OD in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 1 1 1/2 2 1 1 1/2 2 3
Basic Ordering Number Seamless 6L-6TW-6-4S-0356L-8TW-6-4S-049-0356L-8TW-6-6S-049-0356L-12TW-6-4S-065-0356L-12TW-6-6S-065-0356L-12TW-6-8S-065-0496L-16TW-6-4S-065-0356L-16TW-6-6S-065-0356L-16TW-6-8S-065-0496L-16TW-6-12S-0656L-24TW-6-4S-065-0356L-24TW-6-6S-065-0356L-24TW-6-8S-065-0496L-24TW-6-12S-0656L-24TW-6-16S-0656L-32TW-6-4S-065-0356L-32TW-6-6S-065-0356L-32TW-6-8S-065-0496L-32TW-6-12S-0656L-32TW-6-16S-0656L-32TW-6-24S-065Welded 6L-48TW-6-16W-0656L-48TW-6-24W-0656L-48TW-6-32W-0656L-64TW-6-16W-083-0656L-64TW-6-24W-083-0656L-64TW-6-32W-083-0656L-64TW-6-48W-083-065-
A 2.75 (69.9) 2.75 (69.9)
Dimensions in. (mm) B 1.37 (34.8) 1.37 (34.8)
C 1.16 0.94 1.16 1.09 1.16 1.23 1.07 1.14 1.21 1.35
(29.5) (23.9) (29.5) (27.7) (29.5) (31.2) (27.2) (29.0) (30.7) (34.3)
3/4
2.75 (69.9)
1.37 (34.8)
1.50 1.75 1.75 2.00
(38.1) (44.5) (44.5) (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
5.50 (140) 1.50 (38.1) 5.00 (127) 1.50 (38.1)
1 1/2
90 Elbow
B A B A
7.75 (197) 1.75 (44.5) 7.25 (184) 5.25 (133) 11.25 9.25 7.50 15.50 13.50 11.75 7.75
(286) (235) (191) (394) (343) (298) (197)
1.50 (38.1)
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 3 4
Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number A B Seamless 6L-4TW-9-S-0352.06 (52.3) 1.50 (38.1) 6L-6TW-9-S-0352.62 (66.5) 2.06 (52.3) 6L-8TW-9-S-0492.62 (66.5) 1.87 (47.5) 6L-12TW-9-S-0652.62 (66.5) 1.50 (38.1) 6L-16TW-9-S-0654.00 (102) 2.50 (63.5) 6L-24TW-9-S-0653.75 (95.3) 1.50 (38.1) 6L-32TW-9-S-0654.75 (121) 1.75 (44.5) Welded 6L-24TW-9-W-0656L-32TW-9-W-0656L-48TW-9-W-0656L-64TW-9-W-0833.75 4.75 6.25 8.00
(95.3) (121) (159) (203)
1.75 (44.5)
1.50 (38.1) 1.75 (44.5) 1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1.50 1.75 1.75 2.00
(38.1) (44.5) (44.5) (50.8)

Reducing Tee
B
Tx
Tee
B T B
T Tube OD in. 3/8 1/2
Tx Tube OD in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 1 1 1/2 2 1 1 1/2 2 3
3/4
1 1/2
Basic Ordering Number Seamless 6L-6TW-3-4S-0356L-8TW-3-4S-049-0356L-8TW-3-6S-049-0356L-12TW-3-4S-065-0356L-12TW-3-6S-065-0356L-12TW-3-8S-065-0496L-16TW-3-4S-065-0356L-16TW-3-6S-065-0356L-16TW-3-8S-065-0496L-16TW-3-12S-0656L-24TW-3-4S-065-0356L-24TW-3-6S-065-0356L-24TW-3-8S-065-0496L-24TW-3-12S-0656L-24TW-3-16S-0656L-32TW-3-4S-065-0356L-32TW-3-6S-065-0356L-32TW-3-8S-065-0496L-32TW-3-12S-0656L-32TW-3-16S-0656L-32TW-3-24S-065Welded 6L-24TW-3-4W-065-035 6L-24TW-3-6W-065-035 6L-24TW-3-8W-065-049 6L-24TW-3-12W-0656L-24TW-3-16W-0656L-32TW-3-4W-065-035 6L-32TW-3-6W-065-035 6L-32TW-3-8W-065-049 6L-32TW-3-12W-0656L-32TW-3-16W-0656L-32TW-3-24W-0656L-48TW-3-16W-0656L-48TW-3-24W-0656L-48TW-3-32W-0656L-64TW-3-16W-083-0656L-64TW-3-24W-083-0656L-64TW-3-32W-083-0656L-64TW-3-48W-083-065-
Dimensions in. (mm) A B 3.50 (88.9) 4.25 (108) 1.75 (44.5) 2.12 (53.8)
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 3 4
4.25 (108)
2.12 (53.8)
Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number A B Seamless 6L-4TW-3-S-0353.50 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) 6L-6TW-3-S-0353.50 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) 6L-8TW-3-S-0494.25 (108) 2.12 (53.8) 6L-12TW-3-S-0654.25 (108) 2.12 (53.8) 6L-16TW-3-S-0655.00 (127) 2.50 (63.5) 6L-24TW-3-S-0654.75 (121) 2.37 (60.2) 6L-32TW-3-S-0655.75 (146) 2.87 (72.9) Welded 6L-24TW-3-W-0656L-32TW-3-W-0656L-48TW-3-W-0656L-64TW-3-W-0834.75 5.75 6.75 8.25
(121) (146) (171) (210)
5.00 (127)
2.50 (63.5)
2.37 2.87 3.37 4.12
(60.2) (72.9) (85.6) (105)
4.75 (121)
2.38 (60.5)
End Cap
5.75 (146)
2.88 (73.2)
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 4
1 1/2
4.75 (121)
2.38 (60.5)
Basic Ordering Number Seamless 6L-4TW-C-S-0356L-6TW-C-S-0356L-8TW-C-S-0496L-12TW-C-S-0656L-16TW-C-S-0656L-24TW-C-S-0656L-32TW-C-S-065Welded 6L-48TW-C-W-0656L-64TW-C-W-083-
A in. (mm) 1.12 (28.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.37 (34.8) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.50 (63.5)
5.75 (146)
2.88 (73.2)
6.75 (171)
3.12 (79.2)
8.25 (210)
3.62 (91.9)

Coaxial 45 Elbow
Process Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 Containment Tube OD in. 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 Basic Ordering Number Seamless 6L-CX4TW-5-S-0356L-CX6TW-5-S-0356L-CX8TW-5-S-0496L-CX12TW-5-S-0656L-CX16TW-5-S-065Dimensions, in. (mm) A B
A B
3.00 2.87 2.87 4.37 4.50
(76.2) (72.9) (72.9) (111) (114)
4.00 3.87 3.87 6.12 6.25
(102) (98.3) (98.3) (155) (159) B A
Coaxial 90 Elbow
A
3.37 3.12 3.25 5.00 5.37
(85.6) (79.2) (82.6) (127) (136)
4.37 4.12 4.25 6.75 7.12
(111) (105) (108) (171) (181) A B
Coaxial Tee
B
2.87 3.00 3.00 4.62 4.75
(72.9) (76.2) (76.2) (117) (121)
3.87 4.00 4.00 6.37 6.50
(98.3) (102) (102) (162) (165)
Coaxial Termination
Containment tube OD A
Process tube OD
Coaxial Sleeve Coupling

A
Process Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Containment Tube OD in. 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4
Ordering Number Seamless 6L-CX4TW-TM-8S 6L-CX6TW-TM-10S 6L-CX8TW-TM-12S 6L-CX12TW-TM-16S 6L-CX16TW-TM-20S
A in. (mm) 1.25 1.25 1.25 2.00 2.00

(31.8) (31.8) (31.8) (50.8) (50.8)
Process Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Ordering Number Seamless 6L-CX4TW-SC-8S 6L-CX6TW-SC-10S 6L-CX8TW-SC-12S 6L-CX12TW-SC-16S 6L-CX16TW-SC-20S
A in. (mm)
4.00 (102)

Coaxial Reducing Tee
T2 T1
D C
Tx T B A A B
T Process Tube OD in. 3/8 1/2
Tx Containment Tube OD in. 5/8 3/4
T1 Process Tube OD in. 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
T2 Containment Tube OD in. 1/2 1/2 5/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1/2 5/8 3/4 1
3/4
1 1/4
Basic Ordering Number Seamless 6L-CX6TW-3-S-46L-CX8TW-3-S-46L-CX8TW-3-S-66L-CX12TW-3-S-46L-CX12TW-3-S-66L-CX12TW-3-S-86L-CX16TW-3-S-46L-CX16TW-3-S-66L-CX16TW-3-S-86L-CX16TW-3-S-12-
A 2.87 2.87 3.00 4.37

(72.9) (72.9) (76.2) (111)
Dimensions in. (mm) B C 3.87 3.87 4.00 6.12

(98.3) (98.3) (102) (155)
D 4.12 4.12 4.12 4.25

(105) (105) (105) (108)
3.12 3.12 3.12 3.25
(79.3) (79.3) (79.3) (82.6)
4.50 (114) 4.37 (111) 4.50 (114) 4.62 (117)
6.25 (159) 6.12 (155) 6.25 (159) 6.37 (162)
3.25 (82.6)
4.25 (108)
3.37 (85.6) 4.87 (124)
4.37 (111) 6.62 (168)
Swagelok Tube Facing Tool and Orbital Welding System

The Swagelok tube facing tool cleanly and consistently squares tube ends in preparation for orbital welding. See the Tube Facing Tool catalog, MS-02-104-SCS, for more information. The Swagelok welding system is designed to streamline welding operations and manage the total welding process. This orbital welding system includes a comprehensive package of equipment, training, accessories, and technical support to provide users with fast, repeatable, high-quality welds. See the Swagelok Orbital Welding System Quick Reference Guide, MS-02-143, for more information.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 2007, R5 MS-02-125-SCS
www.swagelok.com
S t a i n l ess Steel Welded Tubing

Fractional Sizes
Features
Available in sizes from 1/8 to 1 in. outside diameter 304/304L and 316/316L stainless steel Marked to indicate size, material, specication,
Material Standards
Grade 304 / 304L 316 / 316L UNS S30400 / S30403 S31600 / S31603 ASTM A269 A269
and heat number

ASTM A269
Grade 304 / 304L Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon 18.0 to 20.0 8.0 to 11.0 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 316 / 316L 16.0 to 18.0 11.0 to 14.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max Composition, wt. %

To order 304/304L tubing, select an ordering number. To order 316/316L tubing, replace 304L in the ordering number with SS. Example: SS-T2-W-028-20
Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.035 3/8 0.049 0.065 0.035 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 Nominal Length ft Allowable Working Pressure psig 6800 4080 6000 8160 2640 3840 5200 2080 2690 4080 3200 3200 2480
Ordering Number 304L-T2-W-028-20 304L-T4-W-035-20 304L-T4-W-049-20 304L-T4-W-065-20 304L-T6-W-035-20 304L-T6-W-049-20 304L-T6-W-065-20 304L-T8-W-035-20 304L-T8-W-049-20 304L-T8-W-065-20 304L-T10-W-065-20 304L-T12-W-065-20 304L-T16-W-083-20
Weight lb/ft 0.029 0.080 0.105 0.128 0.127 0.171
20
0.215 0.174 0.236 0.302 0.389 0.476 0.813
For more information, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings in gas service.

Tube Fittings

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI January 2006, R2 MS-01-161-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Stre am Se le ctor Syste m

For Proce s s A nal y ze r A pplic ations
SSV Se r ie s
Provides double-block-and-bleed (DBB) operation in a single compact module Conventional NPT and ANSI/ISA 76.00.02 compatible designs System pressures to 250 psig (17.2 bar) with 40 psig (2.8 bar) actuation pressure Integrated flow loop to provide consistent outlet flow Large colored visual indicator ring for open position
Stream Selector System (SSV Series)
The Swagelok stream selector system (SSV series) is a modular assembly designed for process analyzer sampling systems. The SSV series system can accommodate multiple process streams with each stream controlled by a DBB module. Each DBB module features a double block-andbleed design to eliminate cross-contamination of sample streams. The SSV series system also features an integrated flow loop that provides consistent outlet flow and ensures fast and efficient purging.
DBB Module
Each individual DBB module consists of a pneumatic actuator and a flange. Multiple DBB modules are connected with base blocks to create the stream selector system.
Visual indicator ring Colored cap
Features
Modular design offers ease of installation and maintenance. Built-in pneumatic actuator provides repetitive shutoff with
fewer potential leak points than conventional systems.

Distinctive vented air gap prevents mixing of pneumatic
For position only

Vented air gap
actuator supply and system fluid under pressure.

volume.
Stainless steel construction provides enhanced corrosion
resistance.
Inlet and outlet connections are 1/8 in. female NPT or
Bleed valve Block valve Block valve
MPC compatible (ANSI/ISA 76.00.0)

Optional integrated atmospheric reference vent (ARV) is
available.
Technical Data
Pressure Rating, psig (bar) Temperature Range, F (C) Actuation Pressure Range, psig (bar) Bore Size, in. (mm) Flow Coefficient (Cv) (standard system with three streams)
Temperature Ratings.
One-piece, integrated DBB module allows for easy 50 (17.) 0 to 300 (6 to 148) 40 to 150 (.8 to 10.3) 0.15 (3.) Stream 1 = 0.0 Stream = 0.0 Stream 3 = 0.0
removal without the need to disconnect process lines.

Normally closed, double block-and-bleed design
consists of:
Double-block valves that control system fluid
and eliminate cross-contamination of sample streams

Bleed valve that is tied to a common vent for all
ee page 5 for Pressure-Temperature Ratings and Actuation PressureS
DBB modules
Distinctive vented air gap and double seal
Flow Schematic
Outlet with Integrated Flow Loop
between pneumatic actuator air and system fluids to prevent mixing of air and fluid under pressure.
Visual indicator provides easy visual and tactile
indication of open position with large, raised green ring.

Interchangeable colored caps provide stream
identification. (Standard color is blue.)

Outlet
Common vent
Vent
Stream 1
Stream
Stream 3 Inlet
Inlet
Typical SSV Three-Stream System

DBB module stream 1 DBB module stream Indicator ring DBB module stream 3
Colored cap
Common vent port (not shown)
Air actuation ports one for each sample stream (not shown) Common outlet port (not shown)
Left end base block Standard base block
Inlet ports (one for each sample stream)
Access ports for insert and screw system
Base Blocks
Types of base blocks include standard, outlet, end
(left and right), and ARV (optional).

Blocks are attached together with a patent-pending
insert and screw system to create a fluid path.

Blocks contain all the fluid connections in one
location.
Internal Porting
Internal porting of the base blocks is illustrated by three different cross sections shown in detail on page 4.
Outlet section Vent section Inlet section
Inlet Section (Sample Stream Inlet Ports)

1/8 in. female NPT is standard inlet port connector. MPC-compatible (ANSI/ISA 76.00.0) connections are available.
Inlet ports
Inlet ports
Vent Section (Common Vent and Block Connectors)

Vent port has 1/8 in. female NPT for both conventional and MPC configurations. All DBB modules bleed to a common vent line. Insert screws between blocks are tightened separately to ensure proper
assembly and disassembly.

Recessed insert screws are captive within each block for ease of assembly
and to eliminate misplacing.
Vent port
Vent port
Insert screw
Insert
Outlet Section (Integrated Outlet Flow Loop)

Integrated outlet flow loop allows for fast and efficient purging. Provides consistent Cv from one module to another regardless of the
addition of multiple modules.
Outlet flow loop
Outlet flow loop
Temperature F (C) 0 (6) 30 (1) 100 (37) 300 (148) 50 (17.) Working Pressure psig (bar) 00 (13.7)
Testing
Every Swagelok SSV system is factory tested at room temperature with nitrogen at 50 psig (17. bar). Each double block-and-bleed seat has a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Cleaning and Packaging Actuation PressureTemperature Ratings

Temperature F (C) 0 (6) 30 (1) 100 (37) 300 (148) 40 (.8) Minimum Actuation Pressure psig (bar) 45 (3.1)
All Swagelok SSV systems are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.
Component 1 Cap 2 Piston 3 Piston seal 4 Body 5 Upper stem seal 6 Stem 7 Spring 8 Lower stem seal 9 Vent seal 10 Boss seal 11 Body seal 12 Double block seal 13 Flange 14 Base block seal 15 Base block 16 Insert All port plugs (not shown) All cap screws (not shown) Actuation air seals (not shown) Wetted lubricant
Material Grade / ASTM Specification Nylon 316 SS / A479 Fluorocarbon FKM CF3M / A351 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A479 S17700 stainless steel
1 2 3 4 7
5 6
Fluorocarbon FKM
8 9 10 12 14 15 11 13
316 SS / A479 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A479 with PTFE tape 18-8 SS Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
16
Atmospheric Reference Vent Option

The integrated atmospheric reference vent (ARV) is positioned prior to the analyzer and attached to the outlet of the stream selector system. It is designed to equalize the sample loop pressure to atmospheric pressure just prior to the sample injection. This ensures a constant sample pressure in repetitive analyses.
Operation
Vent
All valves are in the off position. The analyzer is open to vent.
ARV module To low-pressure header
From analyzer
To analyzer
Stream 3
Stream
Stream 1
Sample
Outlet section Vent section Inlet section Stream and the ARV module are in the on position, flowing the outlet loop to the low pressure header.
ARV module To low-pressure header Outlet loop
Inlet Section
From analyzer To analyzer
Inlet ports
From To analyzer analyzer Stream 3 Stream Stream 1
Vent Section
Vent
Vent port
Stream is in the on position and the ARV module is in the off position, equalizing the analyzer to the vent pressure.
Insert
Insert screw
Outlet Section
From analyzer
To analyzer
Stream 3
Stream
Stream 1
To low-pressure header
Outlet loop
MPC-Compatible Interface Option

The Swagelok stream selector system with a special
bottom porting can be mounted on an MPC substrate

Interface is compatible with ANSI / ISA 76.00.0 MPC
For SSV system components, see Materials of Construction, page 5. For MPC components, see the Swagelok Modular Platform Components (MPC) catalog, MS-0-185.
platform
MPC option for the SSV system is included in MPC
Configurator 3.0 for design assistance
Cutaway of MPC-Compatible SSV System
Inlet
SWAGELOK
Outlet
SWAGELOK
Note: The DBB module cannot be mounted to MPC substrate without base block.
MPC Configurator Screen with SSV Layout
Bottom View of MPC-Compatible SSV System

Conventional mounting holes, 4 shown (not used with MPC option)
MPC mounting holes, 6 shown Inlet ports Outlet port
MPC Configurator 3.0 is available to download from www.swagelok.com
Dimensions
Top View
1.15
(8.6)
(38.1) (17.3)
1.50
0.68
to 1/8 in. NPT vent port (not shown)
Front View (Inlet side)
Air gap vent
(70.1)
.76
(19.1)
0.75
1.30 (33.0) to 1/8 in. NPT vent port (not shown)
1/8 in. NPT inlet port
(0.3)
0.80
Back View (Outlet side)
(105)
4.13
1/8 in. NPT air inlet port
(43.)
1.70
(1.7)
0.50
(6.7)
1.05
(13.5)
0.53
(40.6)
1.60
(5.9)
1.0
1/8 in. NPT outlet port
(4.9)
0.98

Stream Selector System Assembly

Number of Streams 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 SSV System Ordering Number SS-SSV-V--F SS-SSV-V-3-F SS-SSV-V-4-F SS-SSV-V-5-F SS-SSV-V-6-F SS-SSV-V-7-F SS-SSV-V-8-F SS-SSV-V-9-F SS-SSV-V-10-F SS-SSV-V-11-F SS-SSV-V-1-F in. (mm) 5.15 (131) 6.75 (171) 8.35 (1) 9.95 (53) 11.55 (93) 13.15 (334) 14.75 (375) 16.35 (415) 17.95 (456) 19.55 (497) 1.15 (537) A With Atmospheric Reference Vent A Ordering Number in. (mm) SS-SSV-V--F-ARV SS-SSV-V-3-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-4-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-5-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-6-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-7-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-8-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-9-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-10-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-11-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-1-F-ARV 7.77 (197) 9.37 (38) 10.97 (79) 1.57 (319) 14.17 (360) 15.77 (401) 17.37 (441) 18.97 (48) 0.57 (5) .17 (563) 3.77 (604)
To order a Swagelok SSV system with more than 1 streams, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Options
MPC-Compatible Interface
The Swagelok SSV system is offered with an optional MPCcompatible interface (ANSI / ISA 76.00.0) for up to ten streams. To order the MPC interface option, replace F2 in the valve ordering number with MPC. Example: SS-SSV-V--MPC
Vented Air Gap Threaded Test Port

An optional 1/8 in. female NPT threaded test port is available for the vented air gap. To order a Swagelok SSV system with threaded test ports, insert T into the valve ordering number as shown. Example: SS-SSV-VT--F
Kalrez Seals
Optional Kalrez seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order a Swagelok SSV system with Kalrez seals, replace V in the valve ordering number with K. Example: SS-SSV-K--F
Temperature F (C) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (0) 300 (148) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (0) 50 (11)
Working Pressure psig (bar) 100 (6.8) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 00 (13.7) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 50 (17.)
Kalrez Seals
Simriz Seals
Optional Simriz seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order a Swagelok SSV system with Simriz seals, replace V in the valve ordering number with Z. Example: SS-SSV-Z--F
Simriz Seals
Replacement Part Kits

Kits With Seals
Replacement part kits that include seals contain all fluorocarbon FKM seals. Kalrez seals and Simriz seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see the table on page 9. To order wetted Kalrez or Simriz seals, replace V in the kit ordering number with K for Kalrez or Z for Simriz. Examples: SS-1K-SSVM-K-F-STD SS-1K-1B-SSVM-Z
Stream Assembly Kit

Each kit includes a DBB module assembled to a base block.
Stream Assembly Type Standard Outlet MPC standard MPC outlet ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-STD SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-OUT SS-1K-SSVM-V-MPC-STD SS-1K-SSVM-V-MPC-OUT SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-ARV
Base Block Kit

Each kit includes one base block assembled with inserts and insert screws.
Block Type Standard Outlet Left end Right end MPC standard MPC outlet ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVB-V-STD SS-1K-SSVB-V-OUT SS-1K-SSVB-V-LEF SS-1K-SSVB-V-RIT SS-1K-SSVB-V-MPC-STD SS-1K-SSVB-V-MPC-OUT SS-1K-SSVB-V-ARV
Flange Kit
Each kit includes a flange assembled with O-ring seals. Kit ordering number: SS-1K-1B-SSVM-V
Module Kit
Each kit includes a completely assembled module including the pneumatic actuator and flange.
Module Type DBB ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVM-V SS-1K-SSVM-V-ARV
O-Ring Seal Kit

Each kit includes the seals for one DBB module. Kit ordering number: SS-1K-9-SSVM-V
Kits Without Seals

Cap Kit
This kit includes ten caps of the same color. To order, add the cap color designator to the basic kit ordering number: MS-5K-SSVM Example: MS-5K-SSVM-BL
Cap Color Black Blue Green Orange Red Yellow White
Screw Kit
Designator -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW -WH
This kit includes all cap screws for one stream assembly. Ordering number: SS-6K-SSVM
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont SimrizTM Freudenberg-NOK 005, 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 008, R3 MS-0-36
www.swagelok.com
Stre am Se le ctor Syste m

For Proce s s A nal y ze r A pplic ations
SSV Se r ie s
Provides double-block-and-bleed (DBB) operation in a single compact module Conventional NPT and ANSI/ISA 76.00.02 compatible designs System pressures to 250 psig (17.2 bar) with 40 psig (2.8 bar) actuation pressure Integrated flow loop to provide consistent outlet flow Large colored visual indicator ring for open position
The Swagelok stream selector system (SSV series) is a modular assembly designed for process analyzer sampling systems. The SSV series system can accommodate multiple process streams with each stream controlled by a DBB module. Each DBB module features a double block-andbleed design to eliminate cross-contamination of sample streams. The SSV series system also features an integrated flow loop that provides consistent outlet flow and ensures fast and efficient purging.
DBB Module
Each individual DBB module consists of a pneumatic actuator and a flange. Multiple DBB modules are connected with base blocks to create the stream selector system.
Visual indicator ring Colored cap
Features
Modular design offers ease of installation and maintenance. Built-in pneumatic actuator provides repetitive shutoff with
fewer potential leak points than conventional systems.

Distinctive vented air gap prevents mixing of pneumatic
For position only

Vented air gap
actuator supply and system fluid under pressure.

volume.
resistance.
Inlet and outlet connections are 1/8 in. female NPT or
Bleed valve Block valve Block valve
MPC compatible (ANSI/ISA 76.00.0)

Optional integrated atmospheric reference vent (ARV) is
available.
Technical Data
Pressure Rating, psig (bar) Temperature Range, F (C) Actuation Pressure Range, psig (bar) Bore Size, in. (mm) Flow Coefficient (Cv) (standard system with three streams)
Temperature Ratings.
One-piece, integrated DBB module allows for easy 50 (17.) 0 to 300 (6 to 148) 40 to 150 (.8 to 10.3) 0.15 (3.) Stream 1 = 0.0 Stream = 0.0 Stream 3 = 0.0
removal without the need to disconnect process lines.

Normally closed, double block-and-bleed design
consists of:
Double-block valves that control system fluid
and eliminate cross-contamination of sample streams

Bleed valve that is tied to a common vent for all
ee page 5 for Pressure-Temperature Ratings and Actuation PressureS
DBB modules
Distinctive vented air gap and double seal
Flow Schematic
Outlet with Integrated Flow Loop
between pneumatic actuator air and system fluids to prevent mixing of air and fluid under pressure.
Visual indicator provides easy visual and tactile
indication of open position with large, raised green ring.

Interchangeable colored caps provide stream
identification. (Standard color is blue.)

Outlet
Common vent
Vent
Stream 1
Stream
Stream 3 Inlet
Inlet
Typical SSV Three-Stream System

DBB module stream 1 DBB module stream Indicator ring DBB module stream 3
Colored cap
Common vent port (not shown)
Air actuation ports one for each sample stream (not shown) Common outlet port (not shown)
Left end base block Standard base block
Inlet ports (one for each sample stream)
Access ports for insert and screw system
Base Blocks
Types of base blocks include standard, outlet, end
(left and right), and ARV (optional).

Blocks are attached together with a patent-pending
insert and screw system to create a fluid path.

Blocks contain all the fluid connections in one
location.
Internal Porting
Internal porting of the base blocks is illustrated by three different cross sections shown in detail on page 4.
Outlet section Vent section Inlet section
Inlet Section (Sample Stream Inlet Ports)

1/8 in. female NPT is standard inlet port connector. MPC-compatible (ANSI/ISA 76.00.0) connections are available.
Inlet ports
Inlet ports
Vent Section (Common Vent and Block Connectors)

Vent port has 1/8 in. female NPT for both conventional and MPC configurations. All DBB modules bleed to a common vent line. Insert screws between blocks are tightened separately to ensure proper
assembly and disassembly.

Recessed insert screws are captive within each block for ease of assembly
and to eliminate misplacing.
Vent port
Vent port
Insert screw
Insert
Outlet Section (Integrated Outlet Flow Loop)

Integrated outlet flow loop allows for fast and efficient purging. Provides consistent Cv from one module to another regardless of the
addition of multiple modules.
Outlet flow loop
Outlet flow loop
Temperature F (C) 0 (6) 30 (1) 100 (37) 300 (148) 50 (17.) Working Pressure psig (bar) 00 (13.7)
Testing
Every Swagelok SSV system is factory tested at room temperature with nitrogen at 50 psig (17. bar). Each double block-and-bleed seat has a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Cleaning and Packaging Actuation PressureTemperature Ratings

Temperature F (C) 0 (6) 30 (1) 100 (37) 300 (148) 40 (.8) Minimum Actuation Pressure psig (bar) 45 (3.1)
All Swagelok SSV systems are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.
Component 1 Cap 2 Piston 3 Piston seal 4 Body 5 Upper stem seal 6 Stem 7 Spring 8 Lower stem seal 9 Vent seal 10 Boss seal 11 Body seal 12 Double block seal 13 Flange 14 Base block seal 15 Base block 16 Insert All port plugs (not shown) All cap screws (not shown) Actuation air seals (not shown) Wetted lubricant
Material Grade / ASTM Specification Nylon 316 SS / A479 Fluorocarbon FKM CF3M / A351 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A479 S17700 stainless steel
1 2 3 4 7
5 6
Fluorocarbon FKM
8 9 10 12 14 15 11 13
316 SS / A479 Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A479 with PTFE tape 18-8 SS Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE-based
16
Atmospheric Reference Vent Option

The integrated atmospheric reference vent (ARV) is positioned prior to the analyzer and attached to the outlet of the stream selector system. It is designed to equalize the sample loop pressure to atmospheric pressure just prior to the sample injection. This ensures a constant sample pressure in repetitive analyses.
Operation
Vent
All valves are in the off position. The analyzer is open to vent.
From analyzer
To analyzer
Stream 3
Stream
Stream 1
Sample
Outlet section Vent section Inlet section Stream and the ARV module are in the on position, flowing the outlet loop to the low pressure header.
ARV module To low-pressure header Outlet loop
Inlet Section
From analyzer To analyzer
Inlet ports
From To analyzer analyzer Stream 3 Stream Stream 1
Vent Section
Vent
Vent port
Stream is in the on position and the ARV module is in the off position, equalizing the analyzer to the vent pressure.
Insert
Insert screw
Outlet Section
From analyzer
To analyzer
Stream 3
Stream
Stream 1
To low-pressure header
Outlet loop
MPC-Compatible Interface Option

The Swagelok stream selector system with a special
bottom porting can be mounted on an MPC substrate

Interface is compatible with ANSI / ISA 76.00.0 MPC
For SSV system components, see Materials of Construction, page 5. For MPC components, see the Swagelok Modular Platform Components (MPC) catalog, MS-0-185.
platform
MPC option for the SSV system is included in MPC
Configurator 3.0 for design assistance
Cutaway of MPC-Compatible SSV System
Inlet
SWAGELOK
Outlet
SWAGELOK
Note: The DBB module cannot be mounted to MPC substrate without base block.
MPC Configurator Screen with SSV Layout
Bottom View of MPC-Compatible SSV System

Conventional mounting holes, 4 shown (not used with MPC option)
MPC mounting holes, 6 shown Inlet ports Outlet port
MPC Configurator 3.0 is available to download from www.swagelok.com
Dimensions
Top View
1.15
(8.6)
(38.1) (17.3)
1.50
0.68
to 1/8 in. NPT vent port (not shown)
Front View (Inlet side)
Air gap vent
(70.1)
.76
(19.1)
0.75
1.30 (33.0) to 1/8 in. NPT vent port (not shown)
1/8 in. NPT inlet port
(0.3)
0.80
Back View (Outlet side)
(105)
4.13
1/8 in. NPT air inlet port
(43.)
1.70
(1.7)
0.50
(6.7)
1.05
(13.5)
0.53
(40.6)
1.60
(5.9)
1.0
1/8 in. NPT outlet port
(4.9)
0.98

Stream Selector System Assembly

Number of Streams 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 SSV System Ordering Number SS-SSV-V--F SS-SSV-V-3-F SS-SSV-V-4-F SS-SSV-V-5-F SS-SSV-V-6-F SS-SSV-V-7-F SS-SSV-V-8-F SS-SSV-V-9-F SS-SSV-V-10-F SS-SSV-V-11-F SS-SSV-V-1-F in. (mm) 5.15 (131) 6.75 (171) 8.35 (1) 9.95 (53) 11.55 (93) 13.15 (334) 14.75 (375) 16.35 (415) 17.95 (456) 19.55 (497) 1.15 (537) A With Atmospheric Reference Vent A Ordering Number in. (mm) SS-SSV-V--F-ARV SS-SSV-V-3-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-4-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-5-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-6-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-7-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-8-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-9-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-10-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-11-F-ARV SS-SSV-V-1-F-ARV 7.77 (197) 9.37 (38) 10.97 (79) 1.57 (319) 14.17 (360) 15.77 (401) 17.37 (441) 18.97 (48) 0.57 (5) .17 (563) 3.77 (604)
To order a Swagelok SSV system with more than 1 streams, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Options
MPC-Compatible Interface
The Swagelok SSV system is offered with an optional MPCcompatible interface (ANSI / ISA 76.00.0) for up to ten streams. To order the MPC interface option, replace F2 in the valve ordering number with MPC. Example: SS-SSV-V--MPC
Vented Air Gap Threaded Test Port

An optional 1/8 in. female NPT threaded test port is available for the vented air gap. To order a Swagelok SSV system with threaded test ports, insert T into the valve ordering number as shown. Example: SS-SSV-VT--F
Kalrez Seals
Optional Kalrez seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order a Swagelok SSV system with Kalrez seals, replace V in the valve ordering number with K. Example: SS-SSV-K--F
Temperature F (C) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (0) 300 (148) 30 (1) 40 (4) 70 (0) 50 (11)
Working Pressure psig (bar) 100 (6.8) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 00 (13.7) 50 (17.) 50 (17.) 50 (17.)
Kalrez Seals
Simriz Seals
Optional Simriz seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see table at right. To order a Swagelok SSV system with Simriz seals, replace V in the valve ordering number with Z. Example: SS-SSV-Z--F
Simriz Seals
Replacement Part Kits

Kits With Seals
Replacement part kits that include seals contain all fluorocarbon FKM seals. Kalrez seals and Simriz seals are available in place of the wetted fluorocarbon FKM seals. For pressure-temperature ratings, see the table on page 9. To order wetted Kalrez or Simriz seals, replace V in the kit ordering number with K for Kalrez or Z for Simriz. Examples: SS-1K-SSVM-K-F-STD SS-1K-1B-SSVM-Z
Stream Assembly Kit

Each kit includes a DBB module assembled to a base block.
Stream Assembly Type Standard Outlet MPC standard MPC outlet ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-STD SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-OUT SS-1K-SSVM-V-MPC-STD SS-1K-SSVM-V-MPC-OUT SS-1K-SSVM-V-F-ARV
Base Block Kit

Each kit includes one base block assembled with inserts and insert screws.
Block Type Standard Outlet Left end Right end MPC standard MPC outlet ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVB-V-STD SS-1K-SSVB-V-OUT SS-1K-SSVB-V-LEF SS-1K-SSVB-V-RIT SS-1K-SSVB-V-MPC-STD SS-1K-SSVB-V-MPC-OUT SS-1K-SSVB-V-ARV
Flange Kit
Each kit includes a flange assembled with O-ring seals. Kit ordering number: SS-1K-1B-SSVM-V
Module Kit
Each kit includes a completely assembled module including the pneumatic actuator and flange.
Module Type DBB ARV Ordering Number SS-1K-SSVM-V SS-1K-SSVM-V-ARV
O-Ring Seal Kit

Each kit includes the seals for one DBB module. Kit ordering number: SS-1K-9-SSVM-V
Kits Without Seals

Cap Kit
This kit includes ten caps of the same color. To order, add the cap color designator to the basic kit ordering number: MS-5K-SSVM Example: MS-5K-SSVM-BL
Cap Color Black Blue Green Orange Red Yellow White
Screw Kit
Designator -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW -WH
This kit includes all cap screws for one stream assembly. Ordering number: SS-6K-SSVM
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont SimrizTM Freudenberg-NOK 005, 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 008, R3 MS-0-36
www.swagelok.com
Stre am-Se le ct, Switching, and Shutof f Valve Asse mblie s
T T2 a nd T2 Se r ie s
Provide multiple valve operations in a single, compact unit Require fewer tubing connections than conventional systems Save cabinet space and installation time Include 316 stainless steel valve and actuator
TT and T Series
Features
All Models
Compact design reduces space requirements. Low internal volume enhances purging and cleaning and TT2B1 Normally Closed Module in CloseD Position
carries a smaller sample.

Built-in pneumatic actuators provide positive, repetitive
Threaded rod O-rings Actuator inlet Block valves CLOSED Outlet flow path Threaded rod Stem Piston Glands Vent port Bleed valve OPEN Inlet
shutoff with fewer potential leak points than conventional systems.

resistance.
1/16, 1/8, and 1/4 in. and 3 mm Swagelok tube fitting
and 1/8 in. female NPT end connections facilitate system versatility.
TT2B Models
Modules assemble to provide shutoff or stream selection in
process analyzer sampling systems.

Common vent ports enable detection and control of
fugitive emissions and prevent mixing of system media with actuation media.
Actuator inlets
TT2B1 Normally Closed Module in oPeN Position
Threaded rod O-rings Stem Piston Glands Vent port Bleed valve CLOSED Inlet
End plate Common bleed/vent port
Actuator inlet Block valves OPEN Outlet flow path
Modules Mounting bracket
Threaded rod
Technical Data
orifice in. (mm) End plates: 0.05 (1.3) Modules: 0.070 (1.8) Temperature Rating F (C) 0 to 300 (17 to 148): fluorocarbon FKM O-rings Pressure Rating psig (bar) 100 (6.8) 00 (13.7) 300 (0.6) Actuator Mode Normally closed High-pressure normally closed Normally open and double acting Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) Minimum 50 (3.5) 150 (10.3) 80 (5.6) Maximum
0 to 00 (17 to 93): Body (TA1 and TC1 with 1/8 in. female NPT ethylene propylene O-rings connections and all TD1 0 to 300 (6 to 148): models): 0.110 (.8) Kalrez O-rings
Testing
Every TT and T series valve is factory tested at room temperature with nitrogen at its maximum rated pressure. Block and bleed valve seals have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed on piston, cap, and module seals to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All TT and T series valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6.
TT and T Series
Normally Closed and High-Pressure Normally Closed Actuator
Cap screws Washer Inside piston O-ring Cover plate Piston Outside piston O-ring Upper gland Outside gland O-ring Actuator spring
High-pressure normally closed actuator contains an additional actuator spring.
TT2B Module subassembly

Lock nut
T2A1, T2C1, and T2D1 Normally Closed and Double-Acting Module subassembly
Stem Piston O-ring Upper stem O-ring Lower stem O-ring Stem tip O-ring
Inside gland O-rings Lower gland Outside gland O-ring Vent valve O-ring
Double-Acting Actuator
Cap screws Stem TA1 body shown.
Cover plate Block valve O-ring(s) Alignment pin Alignment pin insert
Component Cap screws Cover plate Actuator spring(s) Lock nut Washer Piston Actuation media O-rings (nonwetted) Body, glands, stem System media O-rings (wetted) Alignment pin
Model All All All TTB All All All
Material 18-8 SS 304 SS 30 SS/ ASTM A313 Nylon 316 SS 416 SS Fluorocarbon FKM 316 SS Fluorocarbon FKM, Kalrez, or ethylene propylene 18-8 SS 416 SS 316 SS
Cover seal O-ring
Normally open Actuator and stem (T2A1, T2C1, and T2D1 only)
Cap screws
Vent O-ring
Outlet O-ring Body Cover plate TTB1 and TTB body shown.
All
Cover seal O-ring Piston O-ring Stem Upper stem O-ring Lower stem O-ring Stem tip O-ring
Alignment pin insert End plate (not shown) Mounting bracket (not shown), threaded rods () (not shown) Nuts (4) (not shown) Lubricant
TTB 304 SS
316 SS All Silicone-based
Actuator spring
TT and T Series

Actuator inlet on each module
TT2B Models
The TTB models are compact assemblies of stream-select modules with built-in pneumatic actuators that can introduce any one of a number of samples to a process analyzer. An assembly consists of two end plates, two mounting brackets, and one or more modules. The number of modules is determined by the number of incoming streams. Modules can be added or removed easily as the number of incoming streams changes. System media connections are available in 1/8-in. and 3-mm female Swagelok tube fittings and 1/8-in. female NPT fittings.
End plate Common bleed/vent port
Three-Module Assemblies, Center Module Actuated
Closed Open Common bleed/ vent port
TT2B1
Normally Closed Module side
Top
stream-select assembly with common bleed/vent port Each module contains:

Two block valves One bleed valve
Actuator inlet To common bleed/vent To common outlet Sample inlet Common outlet Inlet Inlet Inlet External lines to analyzer
Pneumatic actuator.
Common outlet
TT2B2

Bypass
Top
Bypass Bypass Common bleed/ vent port
stream-select assembly with integral bypass and common bleed/vent port Each module contains:
Two block valves One bleed valve Bypass port Pneumatic actuator.
Actuator inlet To common outlet Bypass To common bleed/vent Sample inlet Common outlet
Inlet Inlet Inlet External lines to analyzer
Common outlet
TT2B3
Modular three-way
Top
switching stream-select assembly with common bleed/vent port. Each module contains:
One block valve One bleed valve Pneumatic actuator.
To common outlet Actuator inlet To common bleed/vent Sample inlet Common outlet Inlet Inlet Inlet External lines to analyzer
Common bleed/ vent port
Common outlet
TT and T Series
TT2B4
Two-module assembly
Common actuator inlet
Module 2 side
with common actuator port and common vent port Each module contains:
One block valve One bleed valve.
End plate
Common vent port
Actuator inlet To common vent From process To sample Inject valve
Sample Loop Purge ModeActuated Position

Closed Open To atmospheric reference vent 5
Atmospheric Reference Vent ModeNormal Position

Closed Open To atmospheric reference vent 5
1 From process
To sample inject valve
3 From sample inject valve
4 To process/ vent
1 From process
3 From sample From sample inject valve inject valve
4 To process/ vent
TT2B Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Actuator inlet port: all models, 1/8 in. female NPT.
(87.1)
3.43
(66.4)
.61
0.19 (4.8)
0.0
(5.1)
B A
Model TTB1 TTB TTB3 TTB4
Description Modular double block and bleed stream-select assembly Modular double block and bleed stream-select assembly with bypass port Modular 3-way switching stream-select assembly Two-module sample loop purge and atmospheric reference vent assembly
Basic ordering Number SS-TTB1 SS-TTB
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B C
4.53 (115) .76 (70.1) 1.75 (44.4)
SS-TTB3 SS-TTB4 5.51 (140)
Dimensions for 1-module assembly; for each additional module, add 0.98 in. (4.9 mm).
TT and T Series
T2A1 Model
Positive, repetitive shutoff for gas or liquid service Inlet, outlet, and vent/leak detection available in 1/16 and
T2D1 Model
Three-shutoff-valve assembly is designed for use in
continuous emissions monitoring systems (CEMS).

Design allows reversing flow to clear a sample probe while
1/8 in. and 3 mm female Swagelok tube fittings and 1/8 in. female NPT end connections
Inlet Normally Closed Outlet
simultaneously allowing calibration of an analyzer.

Two end valves are normally closed; center valve is
normally open. In this position, system media begins at port-1, flows through the normally open center valve, and flows out the other side through port .
When valves are actuated, center valve closes and two end
Mounting holes () Actuator inlet 1/8 in. female NPT
valves open. This position allows an analyzer to receive a calibration gas from port 4, while an inert gas from port-3 clears the sample probe.
System media connections are available in 1/4-in. female
Leak detection
Swagelok tube fittings.
Outlet Inlet
Normal Position
1 From sample point To analyzer
T2C1 Model
Two independently actuated shutoff valves are in one body
Closed Open 3 Inert gas 4 Calibration gas
with functions of a 3-way (switching) valve.

Bidirectional flow is possible. All three ports can be open or closed at the same time. System media connections are available in 1/16 and 1/8 in.
Actuated Position
1 From sample point Closed Open 3 Inert gas 4 Calibration gas To analyzer
and 3 mm female Swagelok tube fittings and 1/8 in. female NPT end connections.
Inlet 1 Inlet
Outlet (shown normally closed) Normally Closed
Mounting holes (4) Actuator inlet 1 1/8 in. female NPT Leak detection port 1
Inlet/outlet 1 Common inlet/outlet Inlet/outlet Leak detection port
Actuator inlet 1/8 in. female NPT
TT and T Series
T2D1
Actuator inlet Vent/leak detection Actuator inlet Port 1
Side Center Valve end Valve 1 end Valve 2
Port 1
Port
Front
end Valve 1
Center Valve
Actuator inlet
end Valve 2
Actuator inlet Vent/leak detection To port From port 1 From port 1
Actuator vent Vent/leak detection Port 4 To port
Actuator inlet Vent/leak detection
Port 3
T2A1, T2C1, and T2D1 Dimensions

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Actuator inlet port: all models, 1/8 in. female NPT.
T2A1
C B
T2C1
C B
T2D1
0.0
(5.1)
dia
0.19
(4.8)
0.19
dia
(4.8)
dia
(83.6)
3.9
A .54
A A
(64.5)
Model TA1 TC1 TD1
Description -way shutoff valve, one-piece body Two shutoff valves with common outlet, 3-way switching valve, one-piece body Three shutoff valves in one-piece body for continuous emissions monitoring (CEMS)
Basic ordering Number SS-TA1 SS-TC1 SS-TD1
Dimensions, in. (mm) A .06 (5.3) 3.75 (95.) .31 (58.7) 0.98 (4.9) 1.75 (44.4) 1.75 (44.4) 3.67 (93.) 1.35 (34.3) B C D
ordering Information
To create a TT or T series valve assembly ordering number: 1. . Select a basic ordering number from Dimensions. Example: SS-TTB1 Add a system media (wetted) O-ring material designator. Example: SS-TTB1V
Material Designator Fluorocarbon FKM V Kalrez K Ethylene propylene E
5.
Add an actuator designator(s).

Actuator Normally closed Normally open Double acting High-pressure normally closed Normally closed, normally open, normally closed
Standard for TD1 models.
Designator -C -O -D -H -COC
Availability All models TA1, TC1, TD1 All models TD1
3a. For TA1, TC1, or TD1 models, skip to step 4.
3b. For TTB1, TTB, or TTB3 models, add the desired number of valve modules. Example: SS-TTB1V3 3c. For TTB4 models, add 2 to the ordering number. Example: SS-TTB4V2 4. Add an end connection designator.
end Connection 1/8 in. female NPT 1/16 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 1/8 in. female Swagelok tube fitting 3 mm female Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. female Swagelok tube fitting Designator F FS1 FS FS3MM FS4 Availability TTB1, TTB, TTB3, TTB4, TA1, TC1 TA1, TC1 TTB1, TTB, TTB3, TTB4, TA1, TC1 TD1
Valves with the same actuator require one designator. Example: SS-TTB1V3F-C for all three actuators in the assembly to be normally closed. Valves with different actuators require individual designators. Example: SS-TTB1V3F-CDH for the first actuator to be normally closed, the second to be double acting, and the third to be high-pressure normally closed. Valves with repetitive-pattern actuators can be designated by listing the designators for that pattern only once. Example: SS-TTB1V8F-CD for the first actuator to be normally closed, the second to be double acting, the third to be normally closed, the fourth to be double acting, and so forth through the eight-valve assembly.
Example: SS-TTB1V3F2
Accessories
Maintenance Kits
TT2 and T2 Module Rebuild Kits
Kits include all internal components, plus bleed and outlet O-rings (TTB1, TTB, TTB3 models) or vent and actuator O-rings (TTB4 model). 1. Start with the basic kit ordering number SS-91K-T. . Add a model designator. Example: SS-91K-TT2B1 3. Add an O-ring designator. Example: SS-91K-TTB1V 4. Add an actuator designator. Example: SS-91K-TTB1V-C
after the actuator designator. Example: SS-91K-TTB1K-C-006 Kit rebuilds one valve.
TT2 Module Kits

Kits include complete, tested modules ready for insertion into an existing TB or TTB assembly. 1. Start with basic kit ordering number SS-1K-T. . Add a model designator. Example: SS-1K-TT2B1 3. Add an O-ring designator. Example: SS-1K-TTB1V 4. Add an end connection designator: Example: SS-1K-TTB1VF2 5. Add an actuator designator. Example: SS-1K-TTB1VF-C
Model TTB1, TTB TTB3 TTB4 TA1, TC1, TD1
Designator TB1 TB3 TB4 A1
When ordering a kit with Kalrez O-rings to rebuild a TB module, add -006
safe Product selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 00, 004, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI August 008, R5 MS-0-174
www.swagelok.com
Swagelok Alte rnative Fuel Ser vice (AFS) Ball Valve s

For High-Pressure, High-Flow Applications
Swagelok AFS Ball Valves

Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar) Flow coefficients (Cv) from 4.0 to 13.8 Fractional and metric Swagelok tube fittings; ISO and NPT pipe end connections available 316 stainless steel body and end connections Manual and pneumatic actuation
Swagelok Alternative Fuel Service (AFS) Ball Valves
Ultralow-temperature fluorocarbon material provides sealing capability over full temperature range
Heavy-duty directional handle Field replaceable Locking bracket kit available One-quarter turn actuation
SWAGELOK
Spring-loaded PEEK seats provide: chemical compatibility leak-tight integrity in both low- and highpressure systems
SWAGELOK
PTFE-coated stainless steel floating-ball design provides consistent, low actuation torque
Features
High flowCv from 4.0 to 13.8 All wetted components are
End Connections Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) to 200 (93) 250 (121) 6000 (413) 6000 (413) Swagelok Tube Fittings 3/8, 1/2 in., 3/4 in., 12 mm 16 mm 1 in. 5800 (400) 5742 (395) 4700 (323) 4653 (320) Female Pipe 3/8, 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 6000 (413) 6000 (413) 5532 (381) 5532 (381)
compatible with hydrogen and compressed natural gas (CNG)

Maximum pressure rating: 6000 psig
(413 bar)
Temperature rating: 40 to 250F
(40 to 121C)
Low operating torque No packing adjustment required Field repairable with seal kit
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping. To determine working pressure ratings in accordance with ASME B31.1, Power Piping, for 316 stainless steel, multiply pressure by: 0.94 for temperatures up to 100F (37C) 0.86 for temperatures up to 200F (93C) 0.82 for temperatures up to 250F (121C).
Important Information About Swagelok AFS Ball Valves

Swagelok AFS ball valves are designed to be used in the fully open or fully closed position. Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
Certifications
ANSI / AGA NGV 3.1 / CGA 12.3-M95,
Classification: Manual valve Pressure: 4500 psig (310 bar) Temperature: 40 to 250F (40 to 121C)
ANSI / IAS NGV 4.6 / CSA 12.56-M99,
Classification: Class A Pressure: 4500 psig (310 bar) Temperature: 40 to 185F (40 to 85C)
ECE R110 Manual Service Valve Type Approval
Classification: Class 0 Pressure: 3770 psig (260 bar) Temperature: 40 to 248F (40 to 120C)
Certifications do not include attachments to the valve,
such as actuators or a different handle mechanism.
Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Packing bolt 4 Packing bolt gasket 5 Guide ring (2) 6 Stem backup ring 7 Stem O-ring 8 Thrust washer 9 Stem 10 Panel nut 11 Body 12 Ball 13 End screw gasket (2) 14 Seat (2) 15 Seat O-ring (2) 16 Seat backup ring (2) 17 Seat gland (2) 18 Seat spring (2) 19 End screw (2) Lubricant
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Nylon with brass insert S17400 SS 316 SS / A479 Silver-plated 316 SS / A240 PTFE / D1710 PEEK Ultralow-temperature fluorocarbon / D2000 PEEK 316 SS / A276 316 SS / B783 316 SS / A479 PTFE-coated 316 SS / A276 Silver-plated 316 SS / A240 PEEK Ultralow-temperature fluorocarbon / D2000 PTFE / D1710 316 SS / A479 316 SS / A240 316 SS / A479 PTFE-based
2 3 4 5 8 6 7 9 10 11
12
14
16
18
19
13
15
17

Pressure Drop, bar
0 25 000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 700 000 35 000 0 60

Pressure Drop, bar
120 180 240 300 980 000 840 000 700 000
Nitrogen Flow, std ft3/min
30 000 25 000 20 000 15 000 10 000 5 000
20 000
560 000
15 000
1/2 in. Swagelok tube fittings: Cv 7.2
420 000
560 000 420 000 280 000
10 000
280 000
5 000

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
140 000

1000 2000 3000 4000
140 000 0 5000
0 3500
Pressure Drop, psi
Pressure Drop, psi
Testing
Every Swagelok AFS ball valve is factory tested in both directions with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All Swagelok AFS ball valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
16 mm Swagelok tube fittings: Cv 12.4
16 mm Swagelok tube fittings: Cv 12.4

3.00
(76.2)
End Connections Type Size 3/8 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fitting 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in.
Ordering Number SS-AFSS6 SS-AFSS8 SS-AFSS12 SS-AFSS16
Cv 4.0 7.2 7.1 6.5 5.2 12.4 11.0 13.8 7.8 13.8

(7.1)

(116)
B 2.29
(58.2)
0.406
(10.3)
4.80
(122)
2.40
(61.0)
0.38 (9.7) max panel thickness 1.50 (38.1) panel hole

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
1.50
(38.1)
0.472
(12.0)
4.80
(122)
2.40
(61.0)
0.472
(12.0)
5.10
(130)
2.55
(64.8)
12 mm SS-AFSS12MM Metric Swagelok tube fitting 16 mm SS-AFSS16MM

3.28
(83.3)
0.406
(10.3)
4.40
(112)
2.20
(55.9)
0.472
(12.0)
4.80
(122)
2.40
(61.0)
0.60
(15.2)
3/8 in. Female NPT 1/2 in. 3/4 in. Female ISO 1/2 in. tapered
SS-AFSF6 SS-AFSF8 SS-AFSF12 SS-AFSF8RT
4.00
(102)
2.00
(50.8)
0.472
(12.0)
4.00
(102)
2.00
(50.8)
1.50 0.75
(19.0) (38.1)
4.12
(105)
2.06
(52.3)
0.472
(12.0)
4.00
(102)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
B A
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. Valves can be ordered with two different end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative. Not available with AGA, IAS, and ECE R110 certifications; not recommended for panel mounting. Thread type ISO/BSP (tapered), based on DIN 3852, Swagelok RT fittings. See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN ISO 10226-1, and JIS B0203.

Handle Options
Black nylon directional handles are standard.
To order a
Handle Kits
The replacement handle kit includes a handle with set screw and instructions.
Black nylon directional handle kit
Locking Brackets
directional Color Designator handle of Blue -BL another color, Green -GR add a handle -OG color designator Orange to the valve Red -RD ordering Yellow -YW number. Example: SS-AFSS6-RD
To order a nylon oval
Handle
ordering number: NY-5K-AFS-BK To order a nylon directional handle kit in a color other than black, replace -BK in the kit ordering number with a handle color designator. Example: NY-5K-AFS-RD
Nylon oval handle kit ordering
Designed to lock valve in the open
and closed position

Accommodates shackle diameters
up to 0.344 in. (8.7 mm)

To order the locking bracket factory-
number: NY-5K-AFSK-BK
Black aluminum directional handle kit
handle, add -K to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-AFSS6-K

To order a black aluminum
ordering number: A-5K-AFS-BK
assembled on a valve, add -LH to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-AFSS6-LH To order the locking bracket for field assembly, use kit ordering number: SS-51K-AFS-LH
Stem Seal Material Option

Ultralow-temperature fluorocarbon FKM is standard. Ultralow-temperature nitrile (Buna C) is available as an option to enhance valve cycle life. Valves with ultralow-temperature nitrile have a temperature rating of 40 to 200F (40 to 93C) and are not certied to AGA, IAS, or ECE R110. To order, add -BCS to the valve ordering number. Example. SS-AFSS6-BCS
directional handle, add -AHD to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-AFSS6-AHD
Swagelok Pneumatic Actuators

Actuator Temperature Service F (C) Standard 20 to 200 (28 to 93) High temperature 0 to 400 (17 to 204) Low temperature 40 to 200 (40 to 93)
4500 psig (310 bar).
Maximum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) At 100F At Maximum (37C) Temperature 165 (11.3) 200 100 (6.8) (13.7) 165 (11.3)
Maximum working pressure for valves mounted to low-temperature service actuators is

Required pressures based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.
Actuation Modes Spring Return Actuator Model Single 80 (5.5) Dual
Double Acting Single 40 (2.7) Dual 80 (5.5)
Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) at 100F (37C)
The Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuator is compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air. The actuators are available in springreturn and double-acting modes. For technical data, including materials of construction, air displacement, and weight, see the Swagelok Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-06-87.
133
Dimensions
(200)
7.86 spring return
(11.2) 0.34 (8.6)
5.89 double acting (150) 1.56 (39.6) 2.16 0.44 (54.9)
4.07 1.75
(44.4) (103)
2.32
(58.9)
mounting holes 2.31

(58.7)
0.81
(20.6)
0.75
(19.0)
Actuated assemblies must be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or adequate support of the actuated assembly may result in shorter valve life.
0.48
(12.2)
2.56
(65.0)
1/8 in. NPT
1/8 in. NPT
2.19
(55.6)
4.34
(110)
0.34 (8.6) mounting holes

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
1.75
(44.4)
Factory-Assembled Actuators
Actuators for Field Assembly

Actuator Mode Spring return Actuator Service Standard High temperature Standard Double acting High temperature Kit Ordering Number MS-133-SR MS-133-SR-HT MS-133-DA MS-133-DA-HT
SS-AFSS6 - 33 D HT
Valve Ordering Number Actuator Model Actuator Service None = Standard HT = High temperature LT = Low temperature
Maximum working pressure
for valves mounted to lowtemperature service actuators is 4500 psig (310 bar).
Actuation Mode D = Double acting C = Normally closed spring return O = Normally open spring return
Low temperature MS-133-SR-LT
Low temperature MS-133-DA-LT
Maximum working pressure for valves mounted to lowtemperature service actuators is 4500 psig (310 bar).
Mounting Bracket Kits For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one actuator), add DM to the ordering number. Example: SS-AFSS6-33DHTDM Mounting bracket kit ordering number: MS-MB-AFS-133

Actuator Temperature Range Maximum Actuator Service F (C) Pressure, psig (bar) Standard 4 to 176 (20 to 80) High temperature 5 to 302 (15 to 150) 116 (7.9) Low temperature 40 to 176 (40 to 80)
Maximum working pressure for valves mounted to low-temperature
service actuators is 4500 psig (310 bar).

Actuation Modes Actuator Model A30 Spring Return 55 (3.8) Double Acting 40 (2.8) Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)
Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are available in spring-return and doubleacting modes. Swagelok can provide complete actuated ball valve assemblies including valves, actuators, sensors, bracket kits, and solenoidswith interfaces that meet ISO 5211, NAMUR, and VDI/VDE 3845. For technical data, including actuator materials of construction and weight, see the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves, MS-02-337. For additional information on selecting and sizing ISO 5211-compliant actuators, see the Actuated Ball Valve Selection GuideISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-02-136.
Dimensions
6.24
(158)
3.27 2.83 3.12

(79.2) (71.9) (83.1)
1.42
(36.1)
1.57
(39.9)
2.46
(62.5)
2.67
(67.8)
(55.6)
2.19
4.42
(112)
0.34 (8.6) mounting holes

SWAGELOK SWAGELOK
0.75
(19.0)
1.75
(44.4)
3.60
(91.4)
Actuators for Field Assembly

Actuator Mode Spring return Actuator Service Standard Kit Ordering Number MS-A30-4-DIN
SS-AFSS6 -A30 D HT
Valve Ordering Number Actuator Model Actuator Service None = Standard HT = High temperature LT = Low temperature
Maximum working pressure
for valves mounted to lowtemperature service actuators is 4500 psig (310 bar).
High temperature MS-A30-4-DIN-HT Low temperature MS-A30-4-DIN-LT Standard MS-A30-DA-DIN High temperature MS-A30-DA-DIN-HT Low temperature MS-A30-DA-DIN-LT
Actuation Mode D = Double acting C4 = Normally closed spring return O4 = Normally open spring return
Double acting
Maximum working pressure for valves mounted to lowtemperature service actuators is 4500 psig (310 bar).
Actuated assemblies must be properly aligned and supported. Improper alignment or inadequate support of the actuated assembly may result in shorter valve life.
Mounting Bracket Kits Mounting bracket kit ordering number: SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
ISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits

Swagelok mounting bracket kits contain:

If the valve will be cycled at least once per day, but not more than once per hour: 1. Select the base start and base end torque at system pressure from Table 1, below. 2. Select the temperature factor from Table 2, below. 3. Calculate the start and end operating torque: Base torque temperature factor Example: AFS valve is operated with nitrogen at 4500 psig and 70F (20C). 1. According to Table 1, the base start torque is 61 in. lb and the base end torque is 36 in. lb. 2. According to Table 2, the temperature factor is 1.0. 3. Start torque = 61 in. lb End torque = 36 in. lb 1.0 = 61 in. lb 1.0 = 36 in. lb.
Four 316 stainless steel socket head cap screws for
fractional sizes, or A4 stainless steel for metric sizes (316 SS is similar to A4.)
316 stainless steel coupling A4 stainless steel set screw Instructions.
1. Select the desired AFS valve. Using the Calculating Operating Torque instructions at right, calculate the valve start and end torque. 2. Choose an actuator based on the valve start and end torque. See the actuator manufacturers literature to specify ISO 5211 mounting dimensions, including flange and coupling sizes. 3. Select a mounting bracket kit ordering number.

ISO 5211 Flange Size Coupling Size 11 mm ISO 11 mm ISO 11 mm DIN 11 mm DIN F05 14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN F07 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN Cap Screw Type Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Metric Fractional Bracket Kit Ordering Number SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-11ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-11DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-14ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-F SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F05-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F05-17DIN-F SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-M SS-MB-45-F07-17ISO-F SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-M SS-MB-45-F07-17DIN-F

System Pressure, psig (bar) Valve Operating Torque Start End 0 13 (1.5) 12 (1.4) 1000 (68.9) 23 (2.6) 18 (2.1) 4500 (310) 61 (6.9) 36 (4.1) 6000 (413) 76 (8.6) 41 (4.7) Base Torque, in. lb (N m)

Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) 2.9 70 (20) 1.0 185 (85) 1.0 250 (121) 1.0

For more information on actuator options, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Solenoid Valves Position Indicators
provide visual status of a valve.

Limit Switches
Maintenance Kits
Kit components are of the same materials and grades listed in Materials of Construction, page 3.
Seat Seal Kits

The seat seal kit contains two seats, seat O-rings, seat backup rings, seat springs, end screw gaskets, lubricant with Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-9K-AFS
Stem and Seat Seal Kits

The stem and seat seal kit contains a stem O-ring, two guide rings, stem backup ring, thrust washer, packing bolt gasket, two seats, seat O-rings, seat backup rings, seat springs, end screw gaskets, lubricant with Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and instructions. Kit ordering number: SS-91K-AFS To order a kit with a stem O-ring of optional ultralowtemperature nitrile (Buna C) material, use kit ordering number: SS-91K-AFS-BCS
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2007, R5 MS-02-303
Swagelok Integrated Services
www.swagelok.com
Swagelok KCA Series Continuous Gas Delivery System
The Swagelok KCA series continuous gas delivery system automatically switches between sources to extend gas supply. When one source is depleted below a selected changeover pressure, the continuous gas delivery system automatically switches to a back-up supply. The depleted source can then be changed, in-line, without downtime. This system: provides carrier gas for gas chromatographs both in the field and laboratory enables continuous flow of gases in critical applications is used in process analytical installations, R&D centers, and universities
Features
and Benefits
Proven Swagelok components which are readily available
and provide leak-tight integrity and reliability. The KCA series includes: Swagelok tube fittings Swagelok 43G series ball valves Swagelok gauges Swagelok KPR series regulators Assembly is highly configurable to meet many different industry needs. System clearly identifies source gas pressures and easily controls delivery pressure.
Standard materials of construction for Swagelok 316 stainless steel components all mounted to a 304 stainless steel panel.
Maximum inlet pressure: 3000 psig (206 bar) Outlet pressure range: 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar) Maximum ambient temperature: 140F (60C) Maximum system media temperature: 176F (80C) with

Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable
leakage with a liquid detector at 80 psig (5.5 bar) nitrogen.

All KCA series systems are cleaned in accordance with
Swagelok standard cleaning and packaging specification (SC-10), MS-06-62.

Regulator is 100 % factory tested for changeover pressure.
PCTFE seated regulators, 212F (100C) with PEEK seated regulators.
m Failure to periodically inspect and maintain valve

packing may result in leakage.
m Swagelok ball valves are designed to be used in

the fully open or fully closed position.
For product technical data, including materials of construction, see the following catalogs: Swagelok Gaugable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings, MS-01-140 Swagelok 40G Series Ball Valves, MS-02-331 Swagelok Pressure Gauges, MS-02-170 Swagelok Pressure Regulators, MS-02-230
(266.7)
10.50
4x 0.28
(7.1)
(247.7)
9.75
Outlet 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting
(203.2)
8.00
(304.8)
12.00
(63.5)
2.50
2x Inlet 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting

Vent (2) Connection 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting
Build a KCA series system ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
KCA 1
4 Body Material
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 = 316 SS
5 Pressure Control Range C = 0 to 10 psig (0 to 0.68 bar) D = 0 to 25 psig (0 to 1.7 bar) E = 0 to 50 psig (0 to 3.4 bar) F = 0 to 100 psig (0 to 6.8 bar) G = 0 to 250 psig (0 to 17.2 bar) J = 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.4 bar)
Not available with 100 psig (6.8 bar) nominal
changeover pressure. Only available with 500 psig (34.4 bar) nominal changeover pressure.
8 End Connections B = 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 9 Regulator Seat Material
1 = PCTFE 2 = PEEK
0 = No connections Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for cylinder connections available with optional Swagelok FM and TH series hose.
15 Gauge Scale/Model
2 = 0.06
A = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, no vent C = Alloy X-750 diaphragm, self vent

Self vent through line regulator only.
6 Nominal Changeover Pressure
F = 100 psig (6.8 bar) G = 250 psig (17.2 bar) J = 500 psig (34.4 bar)
Inlet pressure must exceed changeover pressure for automatic switching to occur.
12 Line Regulator Handle
D = Knob E = 316 SS antitamper nut Selector regulator has knob handle.

13 Isolation and Vent Valves
1 = psig (bar)/C model (general purpose gauge)-available only in North America 2 = bar (psig)/B model (general purpose gauge with adjustable pointer) 3 = psig (bar)/B model (general purpose gauge with adjustable pointer) 4 = MPa/B model (general purpose gauge with adjustable pointer) 5 = psig (kPa)/C model (general purpose gauge)-available only in North America
16 Options
7 Configuration B = outlet on top left
K = Swagelok 43G series ball valves inlet, outlet, and vent.
0 = No options 3 = 3 ft, 1/4 in. FM series metal flexible hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet 4 = 3 ft, 1/4 in. TH series PTFE-lined, stainless steel braided hose, 1/4 in. female NPT inlet
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company May 2007, R1 2007 Swagelok Company MS-18-01-E
www.swagelok.com
Swage lok Products Compliant with the Transpor table Pre ssure Equipme nt D ire ctive ( TPED)
Products
Double-ended sample cylinders in 304L and 316L stainless steel Cylinder valves Rupture disc units and rupture disc tees Sample cylinder accessories
Swagelok Products Compliant with the Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive
Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive (TPED)

The Transportable Pressure Equipment Directive (TPED) provides requirements relating to the design, manufacture, and testing of transportable pressure vessels and accessories, including sample cylinders and cylinder valves, used in gas service. The intent of the directive is to provide a uniform level of product safety throughout the countries of the European Union.
General Information on TPED-Compliant Products

Pressure Ratings
The pressure ratings for Swagelok sample cylinders and cylinder valves shown in this catalog are in accordance with the EC-type examination for the product.
Product Markings
Swagelok TPED-compliant sample cylinders and cylinder valves are marked with the pi ( ) symbol and the identification number of the Notified Body which performed the assessment. Swagelok TPED-compliant rupture disc assemblies are marked with the CE ( ) symbol and the identification number of the Notified Body which performed the assessment.
Swagelok Compliance to TPED

Swagelok sample cylinders and cylinder valves comply
with directive 99/36/EC (TPED) as established by a Notified Body and include an EC-type examination.
Swagelok rupture disc assemblies comply with
TPED by meeting the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/3/EC, because TPED does not contain technical requirements specific to this type of product.
Swagelok rupture disc assemblies comply with
Testing
Every TPED-compliant sample cylinder is hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the pressure rating. Every TPED-compliant Swagelok cylinder valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 69 bar (1000 psig). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed at 1.5 times the pressure rating to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
directive 97/3/EC (PED) as established by a Notified Body and include an EC-type examination.

All Swagelok TPED-compliant sample cylinders, rupture disc assemblies, and cylinder valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C are available as an option for cylinder valves. To order, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-16DPF4-BC-PD-SC11
Ordering Numbers
Swagelok TPED-compliant sample cylinder and cylinder valve ordering numbers include a -PD designator.
Documentation
A Declaration of Conformity is available for all Swagelok TPED-compliant products. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Related Information
For information on other Swagelok sample cylinders, overpressure protection devices, and accessories including cylinders compliant with U.S. DOT and Transport Canada requirements, see the Swagelok Sample Cylinders, Accessories, and Outage Tubes catalog, MS-01-177.
Double-Ended Sample Cylinders

Features
304L and 316L stainless steel
Ordering Information, Pressure Ratings, and Dimensions

Dimensions, in millimeters (inches), are for reference only and are subject to change.
materials
40 to 3785 cm3 (1 gal) sizes 1/8 to 1/ in. female NPT and 1/4 in.
female ISO 7/1 end connections

A
Pboth ends thread style and size
Material Grade
Pressure Rating at 50 to 50C

(58 to 122F) bar (psig)
Internal Volume cm3 5 % 40 50 75 150 300 400
P Thread 1/8 in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. ISO 7/1 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. ISO 7/1 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. ISO 7/1 1/4 in. NPT 1/4 in. ISO 7/1 1/ in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT 1/ in. NPT 1/4 in. NPT 1/ in. NPT
Ordering Number 304L-HDF-40-PD 304L-HDF4-50-PD 304L-HDF4-75-PD 304L-HDF4-150-PD 304L-HDF4RT-150-PD 304L-HDF4-300-PD 304L-HDF4RT-300-PD 304L-HDF4-400-PD 304L-HDF4-500-PD 304L-HDF4RT-500-PD 304L-HDF4-1000-PD 304L-HDF4RT-1000-PD 304L-HDF8-1000-PD 304L-HDF4-50-PD 304L-HDF8-50-PD 304L-HDF4-1GAL-PD 304L-HDF8-1GAL-PD 316L-HDF4-150-PD 316L-HDF4-300-PD 316L-HDF4-500-PD
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 31.8 (1.5) 38.1 (1.50) B 98.6 (3.88) 95. (3.75) 15 (4.94) 133 (5.5) 7 (8.94) 90 (11.4) 351 (13.8) .4 (0.093) T 1.8 (0.070)
Weight lb (kg) 0.14 (0.31) 0.17 (0.38) 0.8 (0.6) 0.43 (0.94) 0.73 (1.6) 0.95 (.1) 1.
(.6)
(1885)
130
50.8 (.00)
304L SS 100
(1450)
500
1000
88.9 (3.50)
77 (10.9)
4.6 (0.180)
.9
(6.5)
50 3785 (1 gal) 150 100

(1450)
437 (17.) 10 (4.00) 678 (6.7) 133 (5.5) 50.8 (.00) 88.9 (3.50) 48. (1.90) 7 (8.94) 351 (13.8) 77 (10.9) 03 (8.00) 368 (14.5) 597 (3.5) 6.1 (0.40) 4.6 (0.180) .4 (0.093) 5. (0.06)
6.4 9.5
(14)
(1)
0.43 (0.94) 0.73 (1.6) 1. .9 1.4 .5 4.1

(.6) (6.5) (3.0) (5.6) (9.1)
300 500 1000 1/4 in. NPT 150 300 500
316L SS 300
(4350)
316L-HDF8-1000-PD 316L-50DF4-150-PD 316L-50DF4-300-PD 316L-50DF4-500-PD
Cylinder Valves
D Series Nonrotating-Stem Needle Valve
Features
Orifice size 5.6 mm (0.18 in.). Flow coefficient (Cv) 0.53. Compact, rugged design. Protective handle prevents
Component 1 Handle
1 2 3 8 4 6 5 7 9
Set screw 2 Retaining ring 3 Spool 4 Packing bolt 5 Backup ring 6 O-ring 7 Washer 8 Stem Stem tip Machine screw 9 Body
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Anodized aluminum/ B1 Nickel cadmiumplated steel Zinc-plated steel Aluminum/B09, B11 Molybdenum disulfidecoated 316 SS/A276 PTFE/D1710 Buna C or ethylene propylene Fluorocarbon-coated 316 SS/A167 316 SS/A276 PEEK 316 SS/A276 316 SS/A182 Molybdenum disulfide in hydrocarbon carrier; O-ringsiliconebased; machine screwhydrocarbon thread lock
contaminants from entering functional valve parts.

Valve can be
configured with rupture disc.
Rupture disc
Temperature rating: 0 to 65C
(4 to 150F)
Pressure rating within the range:
17 bar (496 psig)
Lubricants

Dimensions, in millimeters (inches), are for reference only and are subject to change. Angle-Pattern Valves Select a valve with a C dimension listed and insert -A into the ordering number. Example: SS-16DPS6-A-BC-PD Valve with Rupture Disc Units Straight and angle-pattern valves with 1/4 in. female NPT outlets can be assembled with rupture disc units. To order, insert -1 for a 131 bar (1900 psig) rupture disc unit or -2 for a 196 bar (850 psig) rupture disc unit to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-16DPM4-F4-BC-1-PD SS-16DPM8-F4-A-E-2-PD
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female NPT Male NPT Male/ female NPT Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting Swagelok tube fittings Size 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/ to 1/4 in. 1/4 to 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Ordering Number Buna C O-Ring SS-16DPF4-BC-PD SS-16DPM4-BC-PD SS-16DPM6-BC-PD Ethylene Propylene O-Ring SS-16DPF4-E-PD SS-16DPM4-E-PD SS-16DPM6-E-PD A 53.8 (.1) 57. (.5) B Dimensions, mm (in.) B1 6.9 (1.06) 8.4 (1.1) C E 1.7 (0.50) 1.7 (0.50) 14. (0.56)
(.0)
Straight Pattern
(1.5)
Angle Pattern
B open
(.0)
31.8
51.3
51.3
B1 C
(1.5)
open E E B A B1
31.8
SS-16DPM4-F4-BC-PD SS-16DPM4-F4-E-PD SS-16DPM8-F4-BC-PD SS-16DPM8-F4-E-PD SS-16DPM4-S6-BC-PD SS-16DPM4-S6-E-PD SS-16DPS6-BC-PD SS-16DPS6-E-PD
55.6 (.19) 8.4 (1.1) 6.9 (1.06) 39.6 (1.56) 1.7 (0.50) 63.5 (.50) 1.5 (31.8) 46.0 (1.81) 14. (0.56)
60.5 (.38) 8.4 (1.1) 3.0 (1.6) 45.5 (1.79) 1.7 (0.50) 65.5 (.58) 3.8 (1.9) 45.5 (1.79) 1.7 (0.50)
Additional end connections available on request.
Cylinder Valves
N Series Severe-Service Union-Bonnet Needle Valves
Features
Orifice size 4.0 mm (0.156 in.). Flow coefficient (Cv) 0.35. Union-bonnet construction prevents
Component 1 Handle 2 Handle pin 3 Set screw 4 Lock nut 5 Panel nut
Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Stainless steel Nickel cadmiumplated steel/A108 Nickel cadmiumplated steel 316 SS/ A76 or A479 316 SS/B783 316 SS/A76
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 14
accidental valve disassembly.

Packing bolt design permits packing
adjustments in the open position.

Safety back seating seals in fully
6 Union nut 7 Packing bolt 8 Gland 9 Packing supports 10 Upper packing 11 Lower packing 12 Bonnet 13 Soft-seat stem shank Soft-seat stem tip 14 Body Lubricant 316 SS/A479 Silver-plated 316 SS/A276 PEEK 316 SS/A479 Nickel antiseize with hydrocarbon carrier PEEK
open position.
Temperature rating: 0 to 65C
13
(4 to 150F)
Pressure rating within the range:
345 bar (5003 psig)

Dimensions, in millimeters (inches), are for reference only and are subject to change. Angle-Pattern Valves Select a valve with a B dimension listed and insert -A into the ordering number. Example: SS-3NPRF-A-PK-SH-PD
(19/3)
Straight Pattern
(1.75)
Angle Pattern
(1.75)
44.4
44.4
15.1
Panel thickness 1.6 (1/16) min, 9.5 (3/8) max 77.
panel hole drill 7.7
open
(3.04)
panel hole drill D
(19/3)
15.1
Panel thickness 1.6 (1/16) min, 9.5 (3/8) max
H open
(1.09)
B
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Female NPT Male NPT Size
Ordering Number
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 50.8 5.3 50.8 51.6 B 5.4 B1 B2 C 3.3 D E 9.7 H
(0.38)
9.7
B1
1/8 in. SS-3NPRF-PK-SH-PD 1/4 in. SS-3NPRF4-PK-SH-PD 1/4 in. SS-3NPRM4-PK-SH-PD
(.00) (1.00) (.06) (1.03)
.6 6. (0.89) 5.4 6.
(1.7) (1.8)
3.5 (0.38) 8.0 9.9 (3.3)

(0.39)
5.4 5.4 (1.00) 35.1 .6 3.3
7.7 3.5
9.7 9.9
77. 8.0 77.

(3.04)
(.00) (1.00) (1.00) (.03) (1.03) (0.89)
(1.38) (1.09) (0.38) (3.04) (1.7) (1.8) (0.39) (3.3)
Male/ 1/4 in. SS-3NPRM4-F4-PK-SH-PD female NPT 1/4 in. SS-3NPRS4-PK-SH-PD Swagelok 6 mm SS-3NPRS6MM-PK-SH-PD tube fittings 8 mm SS-3NPRS8MM-PK-SH-PD
61.0
(.40) (1.0)
9.5 37.6 39.1 7.7 30.5 (1.16) (1.48) (1.54) (1.09)
9.7
(0.38)
Overpressure Protection
Compressed gas cylinders may require the use of pressurerelief devices depending on the application. The user shall assess the applicable requirements regarding overpressure protection and the selection of pressure-relief devices.
Rupture Disc Units

Swagelok rupture disc units protect sample cylinders from overpressurization by venting the cylinder contents to atmosphere. The rupture disc is welded to a body that is threaded into a valve body or a rupture disc tee and sealed by an O-ring. The rupture disc can be easily replaced without removing the valve or the tee from the cylinder.
Be sure to use the correct pressure-relief device for

the fluid being used.
Proper filling of the cylinder in accordance with
the TPED, ADR/RID, and other local regulations, is critical in preventing overpressurization.
Component Body, inlet ring O-ring Rupture disc Material Grade/ ASTM Specification 316L/A479 or A13 Fluorocarbon FKM Alloy 600/B168
Rupture Disc Precautions

1. Do not use rupture disc devices in a location where the release of the cylinder contents might create a hazard. The rupture disc vents to the atmosphere through six radial holes in the body. Pressure is released suddenly with a loud noise, and gases escape at high velocity. . Know the burst pressure. This rating is marked on the end face of the rupture disc unit. 3. Inspect rupture discs regularly. The strength of rupture discs deteriorates with time due to temperature, corrosion, and fatigue. Pulsating pressure, vacuum/ pressure cycling, heat, and corrosive fluids and atmospheres can reduce the discs burst pressure. 4. Do not use rupture discs to protect vessels with volumes greater than 11 355 cm3 (3 gal) for compressed gases or 5677 cm3 (1 1/ gal) for liquefied gases. 5. Provide suitable means to isolate the sample cylinder from the system in case the rupture disc bursts while taking a sample. 6. In cylinders with liquefied gases, a small temperature increase during transportation or storage will cause the liquid to expand and may cause the rupture disc to release its contents. See local regulations and other appropriate guidelines for safe filling limits for your application.
Nominal Burst Pressure at 20C (70F) 196 bar 10 bar
(850 psig 150 psig)
Ordering Number SS-RDK-16-850 SS-RDK-16-1900
131 bar 6.9 bar

(1900 psig 100 psig)
Rupture Disc Tees

Tees are made of 316 stainless steel. Each tee includes a rupture disc unit.
C D B A

End Connections Inlet 1/4 in. male NPT 1/ in. male NPT 1/4 in. male NPT 1/ in. male NPT Outlet Ordering Number Dimensions, mm (in.) A 47.7
(1.88)
B 6.9
(1.06)
C 3.9
(0.94)
D 1.7
(0.50)
With 196 bar (2850 psig) Rupture Disc 1/4 in. female NPT SS-RTM4-F4-
SS-RTM8-F4-
55.6
(.19)
31.0
(1.)
30.
(1.19)
14.
(0.56)
With 131 bar (1900 psig) Rupture Disc 1/4 in. female NPT SS-RTM4-F4-1 47.7
(1.88)
6.9
(1.06)
3.9
(0.94)
1.7
(0.50)
SS-RTM8-F4-1
55.6
(.19)
31.0
(1.)
30.
(1.19)
14.
(0.56)
Sample Cylinder Options

PTFE Coating
Internal cylinder surfaces can be coated with PTFE to provide a nonstick surface, which aids in cleaning. To order, insert -T into the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF-40-T-PD
Additional Marking
Cylinders can be furnished roll stamped or laser etched to meet specific identification requirements, such as company name, address, serial number, or order number. Swagelok will not mark cylinders with the intended contents. Roll StampingTo order, add -RS to the cylinder ordering number, followed by the specific information on a separate line. Example: 304L-HDF-40-PD-RS Company Name and Address Cylinders 50.8 mm ( in.) or less in diameter or with a pressure rating 14 bar (1800 psig) or lower are roll stamped in the cylinder sidewall below the standard product marking. Cylinders over 50.8 mm ( in.) in diameter or with a pressure rating higher than 14 bar (1800 psig) are roll stamped on the cylinder shoulder on the end opposite the standard product marking. Laser EtchingTo order, add -LE to the cylinder ordering number, followed by the specific information on a separate line. Example: 304L-HDF-40-PD-LE Company Name and Address This information will be laser etched on the cylinder sidewall below the standard product marking.
Electropolishing
Electropolishing provides a clean internal surface with a high degree of passivation. To order, add -EP to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF-40-PD-EP
Sample Cylinder Accessories

End Caps
End caps protect valves from damage. Each cap threads onto a neck ring that has been peened to the cylinder neck. End caps are made from plated carbon steel and are available for use on 50 and 3785 cm3 (1 gal) cylinders. To order, insert C into the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF8-50C-PD
Carrying handle Neck ring End cap
Carrying Handle
This accessory provides a convenient way to carry sample cylinders. The handle is made from 304 stainless steel and is available for use on 400 cm3 and larger cylinders, as well as 300 cm3 cylinders rated to 300 bar (4350 psig). To order a sample cylinder to be shipped with a carrying handle, add H into the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF4-400H-PD To order a carrying handle as a separate component, use one of the following ordering numbers:
Cylinder OD mm (in.) 48., 50.8
(1.9, )
Ordering Number MS-5K-CY- MS-5K-CY-4
88.9, 10
(3.5, 4)
Caps and Plugs

Caps and plugs protect Swagelok tube fitting or NPT end connections on valves during cylinder transport. To order, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
End customer-supplied ring shown
To order a 50 or 3785 cm3 (1 gal) sample cylinder with factory-assembled end caps and neck rings to be shipped with a carrying handle, add CH to the cylinder ordering number. Example: 304L-HDF8-50CH-PD
Tube fitting plug
Pipe cap
Pipe plug
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 008 Swagelok Company March 008, R4 MS-0-193-E
www.swagelok.com
Swagelok We lding Syste m

M20 0 Powe r Suppl y
Fe ature s
Power supply for reliable, consistent orbital gas tungsten arc welding Up to 200 A peak output capability Easy-to-use color touch screen in multiple languages Integrated mass flow controller automatically controls OD shield gas flow Weighs less than 50 lb or 23 kg Compatible with Swagelok welding system weld heads
Swagelok Welding System, M200 Power Supply
Features
The Swagelok welding system M200 power supply offers precision and control combined with easy-to-use touch-screen operation for orbital welding.
High-resolution 12.1 in. (30.7 cm) color
Technical Data
Power
Input: 100 to 230 V (ac); Output: 2 to 200 A (dc)
SVGA industrial touch screen

Simple transition from Swagelok M100
Service Ratings
Input 100 V/20 115 V/20 115 V/30 200 V/20 230 V/16 230 V/16 Average Output 80 A 90 A 110 A 130 A 130 A 160 A Duty Cycle 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 35 %
power supply
Up to 200 A peak output capability Multiple weld procedure data entry A A A A A A
options
Automatic weld procedure generation Simplified manual weld procedure entry Simulated rotary switch mode
resembling Swagelok D100 power supply

Real-time monitoring and recording of weld output performance Low EMI arc start technology Multiple language capability, including Chinese (simplified and traditional),
See the Swagelok M200 Power Supply Users

Manual, MS-13-212, for duty cycle at temperature.
Rating without optional fan filter.
Dimensions
13.5 H by 22.8 W by 15.5 D in. (34.3 by 57.9 by 39.4 cm)
English, French, German, Japanese, Korean, and Spanish

Meets CE and RoHS (EU)
Universal voltage input accepts 100 to 230 V (ac) for worldwide compatibility
Weight
49.7 lb (22.5 kg) Four USB A ports accommodate standard computer devices: flash drive for storage and transfer of weld procedure and weld logs external keyboard and mouse
VGA output (video out) for external monitor
Serial port for data transfer to computer through serial cable
Integrated mass ow controller automatically controls OD shield gas: eliminates the need for an external flow meter ensures shield gas is present at arc start regulates proper shield gas flow throughout the weld cycle Internal, high-speed thermal printer for weld procedure and weld log printout Weld head connection features quick, quarter-turn design
Swagelok Welding System, M200 Power Supply
Operation
The Swagelok M200 power supply offers simple, user-friendly setup and operation.
High-Resolution Touch Screen

The large, high-resolution industrial touch screen enables uncomplicated viewing of information and trouble-free data entry. The screen layouts are simple to follow, and information is readily available for viewing or editing. With the flexibility of multiple language support, the M200 was designed to be a user-friendly power supply.
Weld setup parameters
Weld procedure file name and description
Electrode position
Jogs electrode clockwise OD shield gas visual gauge Jogs electrode counterclockwise Turns on OD shield gas Status indicator Time-remaining counter Weld head installed
Weld procedure parameters
Weld count
One-Touch Adjustments
Weld procedures are easily adjusted. One-touch adjustments can be made to alter the average current value for individual levels. Additionally, values for specific settings can be entered manually. The need to scroll through multiple screen displays is minimized, as all parameter information is just one touch away.
Automatic OD Shield Gas Flow

The integrated mass flow controller automatically controls OD shield gas flow, which promotes consistent weld results and prevents weld head damage caused by a lack of OD shield gas. In addition, a blast purge feature is available, allowing reduced prepurge time and increased production rates.
Automatic or Manual Weld Procedure Creation

The easy-to-use graphic interface, including the Auto Create feature, provides rapid weld procedure creation and execution. Interface similarities with prior multilevel (Swagelok M100) and single-level (Swagelok D100) power supplies enable easy user transition to the M200 power supply.
The Swagelok welding system M200 power supply is shipped in a heavyduty, custom case for ease of storage and transport. Power cord, users manual, 1/4 in. male Swagelok QuickConnect stem, and weld head adapter cable are included. To order an M200 power supply, add a power cord designator and users manual designator to the basic ordering number: SWS-M200Example: SWS-M200-19-E
Power Cord
Region Cord Voltage Australia, 230 V China, 50/60 Hz New Zealand Continental Europe, Korea Japan, Taiwan 230 V 50/60 Hz 100/115 V 50/60 Hz 200/230 V 50/60 Hz 230 V 50/60 Hz 115 V 50/60 Hz 230 V 50/60 Hz 115 V 50/60 Hz 230 V 50/60 Hz Plug Type AS 3112 Designator 18
Users Manual
Language Chinese (simplified) English CEE 7/7 NEMA 5-15 NEMA L5-30 NEMA L6-20 BS 546 NEMA 5-15 NEMA 5-20 NEMA 6-15 IEC 309 BS 1363 17 13 20 14 21 11 19 12 15 16 French German Japanese Korean Spanish Designator -C -E -F -G -J -K -S
India
North America
United Kingdom
Not RoHS (EU) compliant.

Power Cord
A 12 ft (3.7 m) power cord is included with the M200 power supply. To order a separate power cord, add a power cord designator from the table above to the basic ordering number: SWS-M200-CORDExample: SWS-M200-CORD-18
Fan Filter
An optional industrial filter for dusty environments is available. See the Swagelok M200 Power Supply Users Manual, MS-13-212, for information on welder performance with optional fan filter. Ordering number: SWS-M200-IND-FLTR
Weld Head Adapter Cable

The weld head adapter cable allows connection between Swagelok weld heads with multiturn-style connectors to Swagelok power supplies with quarter-turnstyle connectors. One adapter cable is included with the M200 power supply. Additional cables can be ordered separately. Ordering number: SWS-M200-WH-ADPTR
Remote Pendant
The pendant provides nonprogrammable (English language only) remote operation of the power supply. The remote pendant comes with a 15 ft (4.6 m) cable. Extension cable is available. Ordering number: SWS-M-RPEND
Swagelok Weld Heads

See these Swagelok catalogs:
Series 20, MS-02-128 Series 4 and 8, MS-02-130 Series 40, MS-02-140 Series 5, MS-02-129 Series 10, MS-02-131 Series 8 HPH, MS-02-304
Printer Paper
One roll of paper is included with the M200 power supply. Additional packages of rolls can be ordered separately. Each package contains 10 rolls. Ordering number: CWS-DRP-PAPER
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI November 2007, R0 MS-02-342
www.swagelok.com
Te mpe rature Me asure me nt Device s
B imetal T he r momete r s a nd T he r mowe lls

Accurate to 1 % of full scale in accordance with ASME B40.200 Easy-to-read dial sizes with single and dual scales Dampened movement for protection against vibration Stainless steel construction
Temperature Measurement Devices
Contents
Dampened-Movement Bimetal Thermometers Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Materials of Construction . . . . . 2 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . 3 Thermowells Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . 6 Additional Products . . . . . . . . . 7
Dampened-Movement Bimetal Thermometers

Swagelok thermometers are actuated by a bimetal helix coil. Silicone-free gel dampens vibration effects, and cases are hermetically sealed in accordance with ASME B40.200 to prevent fogging and moisture damage to internal components.
Features
Acrylic, glass, polycarbonate, and safety-glass
lenses to meet application requirements

All-welded 304 stainless steel construction
standard; 316 stainless steel process connection and stem available

Adjustable-angle, center-back,
and lower-back mount process connections

External adjustment for field
calibration 50 % over- and under-range protection against damage to internal components up to 500F (260C)
Anti-parallax dial for easy reading
Technical Data
Dial
Temperature measurement ranges: 100 to 150 through 200 to 1000F 70 to 70C through 100 to 540C.
Stem
Stem is welded at tip and process
connection.
Temperature-sensing bimetal helix
Case
Stem angle adjusts more than 180;
case rotates 360.

Maximum ambient operating
is carefully sized and tested, heat treated, and aged to relieve inherent stresses and ensure continued accuracy.
temperature 200F (93C)
Component Stem Case, bezel, staff rod, bellows, bracket, screws Adjustment screw O-ring Dial, pointer Bimetal element Dampening media Lens gasket Material 304 SS 304 SS 303 SS Silicone Aluminum Varies with temperature range Silicone-free inert gel Neoprene (dial ranges 500F [260C] and under); Silicone (dial ranges over 500F [260C]) Acrylic, glass, polycarbonate, or safety glass
Testing
Every Swagelok dampened-movement bimetal thermometer is factory calibrated to meet ASME B40.200.
Lens
Dampened-Movement Bimetal Thermometers

Dimensions
B
(23.9)
0.94
(62.0)
2.44
1/4 in. hex adjustment A stem length C 0.25

(6.4)
1/4 in. hex adjustment 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4)
(47.8)
1.88
1/4 in. hex adjustment
(41.1)
1.62
Center-Back Mount Dial Size in. (mm)
Center of rotation A stem length 0.25

(6.4)
Dimensions, in. (mm) D
A B C Adjustable-Angle Mount 3 (76.2) 2.5 (63.5), 4 (102), 6 (152), 3.31 (84.1) 3.00 (76.2) 9 (229), or 12 (305) 5 (127) 5.25 (133) 5.00 (127) Center-Back Mount 3 (76.2) 2.5 (63.5), 4 (102), 6 (152), 3.25 (82.6) 3.00 (76.2) 9 (229), or 12 (305) 5 (127) 5.25 (133) 5.00 (127)
A stem length 0.25

(6.4)
Adjustable-Angle Mount
Lower-Back Mount
Lower-Back Mount 3 (76.2) 2.5 (63.5), 4 (102), 6 (152), 3.25 (82.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.94 (49.3) 9 (229), or 12 (305) 5 (127) 5.25 (133) 5.00 (127) 2.94 (74.7)
Build a dampened-movement bimetal thermometer ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
T48A - 025 - FS - 01 - G - 8 - NT
1 Dial Size, Mounting T48A = 3 in. (76.2 mm), adjustable angle T48C = 3 in. (76.2 mm), center back T48L = 3 in. (76.2 mm), lower back T80A = 5 in. (127 mm), adjustable angle T80C = 5 in. (127 mm), center back T80L = 5 in. (127 mm), lower back 2 Stem Length 4 Dial Range 5 Lens Material
See below.
Dial Ranges
Fahrenheit (F) 100 to 150 40 to 160 0 to 200 0 to 250 50 to 300 50 to 550 150 to 750 200 to 1000 Celsius (C) 70 to 70 40 to 70 15 to 90 20 to 120 10 to 150 10 to 290 65 to 400 100 to 540 Designator 01 19 05 06 08 16 11 12
A = Acrylic G = Glass (standard) P = Polycarbonate S = Laminated safety glass

6 Process Connection
8 = 1/2 in. male NPT 9 = Male G1/2B

7 Options
025 040 060 090 120
= = = = =
2.5 in. (63.5 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 6 in. (152 mm) 9 in. (229 mm) 12 in. (305 mm)
3 Scale
CS = Celsius DS = Dual Fahrenheit (primary) and Celsius (secondary) FS = Fahrenheit
Dial range not available with silicone liquid fill. Not recommended for continuous use over
800F (426C).
ND = No dampening NT = NIST-traceable calibration certificate SF = Silicone liquid fill (not available with standard dampening, with glass lens options, or for dial ranges over 500F [260C]) SS = 316 stainless steel process connection and stem UN = NPT union lock nut
Thermowells
Thermowells are recommended to protect Swagelok dampened-movement bimetal thermometers from damage that could result from contact with pressurized, corrosive, flowing, viscous, or abrasive process fluids. They also enable removal of thermometers for replacement or service without affecting the process or system.
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. The U dimension is the depth the thermowell is inserted into the fluid system and is specified in the ordering number. See Ordering Information, page 6.
Threaded (TWT) Process Connection

1/2 in. NPSM B U insertion depth 2.50
(63.5)
1 1/8 in. hex
A stem length
0.26 (6.6)
0.25
(6.4)
Lag and Reduced Shank Shown Dimensions, in. (mm)
Features
304 stainless steel construction
standard; 316 stainless steel available

Accommodate 2.5 through 12 in.
(63.5 through 305 mm) thermometer stem lengths in reduced-, straight-, and tapered-shank configurations
Available with lag extensions for use
A C D Stem No With Length Lag Lag R S T R S T 2.5 (63.5) 0.50 4 (102) (12.7) 1.75 3.75 0.62 0.50 0.62 6 (152) (44.4) (95.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.62 (12.7) (15.7) 0.50 (15.7) (12.7) 9 (229) 4.75 (15.7) 12 (305) (121)
1/2 in. Size
3/4 in. Size C R 0.50

(12.7)
D T R S T
0.62 0.50 0.62 0.75 (15.7) 088 (12.7) (15.7) 0.62

(19.0) (22.4) (15.7)
R denotes reduced shank; S denotes straight shank; T denotes tapered shank.
in insulated piping applications
Technical Data
Instrument Connection
12 in. female NPSM straight pipe thread for mechanical joints standard; female G1/2B connection available
Kwik-Clamp (TWS) Process Connection

1/2 in. NPSM B U insertion depth
Process Connection
ASME B16.5 raised-face flange 3-Acompliant sanitary Kwik-Clamp Threaded (NPT) Weld socket
(26.7)
1.05
D C A stem length 0.26 (6.6) 0.25

(6.4)
No Lag and Straight Shank Shown Dimensions, in. (mm) A Stem Length 4 (102) 6 (152) 9 (229) 12 (305) 1.75
(44.4)
B No Lag With Lag 3.75

(95.2)
C R 0.50
(12.7)
D T R S T 0.50 0.88
(22.4) (12.7)
0.50 0.75
(19.0) (12.7)
0.50
(12.7)
0.62
(15.7)
4.75
(121)
Thermowells
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. The U dimension is the depth the thermowell is inserted into the fluid system and is specified in the ordering number. See Ordering Information, page 6.
Raised-Face Flange (TWF) Process Connection

B U insertion depth
Flange Dimensions
C dia, D number of holes
B 1/2 in. NPSM
(63.5)
2.50
(31.8)
1.25
0.26
(6.6)
0.25
(6.4)
A stem length
ASME Class 150

Nominal Flange Size in. 1 D T R 0.50
(12.7)
No Lag and Reduced Shank Shown Dimensions, in. (mm) A Stem Length 4 (102) 6 (152) 9 (229) 12 (305) 2.25
(57.2)

(108)
Mounting Holes D
B 3.12
(79.2)
C 0.62
(15.7)
B No Lag With Lag 4.25 (108) 5.25 (133) 0.88

(22.4)
C R S 0.75
(19.0)
S 0.75
(19.0)
T 0.62
(15.7)
1 1/2 2
5.00
(127)
3.88
(98.6)
0.62
(15.7)
6.00
(152)
4.75
(121)
0.75
(19.0)
0.88
(22.4)
ASME Class 300

Nominal Flange Size in. 1 1 1/2 Dimensions in. (mm) A 4.88
(124)
Mounting Holes D 4 4 8
Weld Socket (TWW) Process Connection

1/2 in. NPSM B U insertion depth D C A stem length 0.26 (6.6) 0.25
(6.4)
B 3.50
(88.9)
C 0.75
(19.0)
6.12
(155)
4.50
(114)
0.88
(22.4)
6.50
(165)
5.00
(127)
0.75
(19.0)
No Lag and Tapered Shank Shown Dimensions, in. (mm) A Stem Length 4 (102) 6 (152) 9 (229) 12 (305) 1.75
(44.4)

D E T 3/4 in. Size 1.05
(26.7)
B No Lag With Lag 3.75

(95.2)
C R 0.62
(15.7)
perform welding.
S 0.75
(19.0)
T 0.88
(22.4)
R 0.50
(12.7)
S 0.75
(19.0)
1 in. Size 1.35

(34.3)
0.62
(15.7)
4.75
(121)
Thermowells
Build a thermowell ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
TWF - 110 - R - 1 - L - 2.00 - CS

1 Process Connection 6 U Dimension 7 Options
TWF TWS TWT TWW
= = = =
ASME B16.5 raised-face flange Sanitary clamp Threaded Weld socket
Connections with Lag Extensions TWF Process Connection 2.00 = 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) (6 in. stem) 4.00 = 4.00 in. (102 mm) (9 in. stem) 7.00 = 7.00 in. (178 mm) (12 in. stem) TWS and TWW Process Connections 2.50 = 2.50 in. (63.5 mm) (6 in. stem) 4.50 = 4.50 in. (114 mm) (9 in. stem) 7.50 = 7.50 in. (190 mm) (12 in. stem) TWT Process Connection 2.50 = 2.50 in. (63.5 mm) (6 in. stem) 4.50 = 4.50 in. (114 mm) (9 in. stem) 7.50 = 7.50 in. (190 mm) (12 in. stem) Connections with No Lag Extensions TWF Process Connection 2.00 = 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) (4 in. stem) 4.00 = 4.00 in. (102 mm) (6 in. stem) 7.00 = 7.00 in. (178 mm) (9 in. stem) 10.0 = 10.0 in. (254 mm) (12 in. stem) TWS and TWW Process Connections 2.50 = 2.50 in. (63.5 mm) (4 in. stem) 4.50 = 4.50 in. (114 mm) (6 in. stem) 7.50 = 7.50 in. (190 mm) (9 in. stem) 10.5 = 10.5 in. (267 mm) (12 in. stem) TWT Process Connection 1.00 = 1.00 in. (25.4 mm) (2.5 in. stem, 1/2 in. connection) 1.63 = 1.63 in. (41.4 mm) (2.5 in. stem, 3/4 in. connection) 2.50 = 2.50 in. (63.5 mm) (4 in. stem) 4.50 = 4.50 in. (114 mm) (6 in. stem) 7.50 = 7.50 in. (190 mm) (9 in. stem) 10.5 = 10.5 in. (267 mm) (12 in. stem)
CS = Protective stainless steel cap and chain G1 = Female G1/2B instrument connection SS = 316 stainless steel material
2 Process Connection Size
TWF Process Connection 110 = 1 in. ASME class 150 115 = 1 1/2 in. ASME class 150 120 = 2 in. ASME class 150 310 = 1 in. ASME class 300 315 = 1 1/2 in. ASME class 300 320 = 2 in. ASME class 300 TWS Process Connection C15 = 1 1/2 in. Kwik-Clamp C20 = 2 in. Kwik-Clamp TWT Process Connection 008 = 1/2 in. male NPT 012 = 3/4 in. male NPT TWW Process Connection P12 = 3/4 in. pipe P16 = 1 in. pipe
3 Shank
R = Reduced S = Straight T = Tapered

Tapered shanks are not available for thermowells
with U dimensions of 4.00 in. (102 mm) or less.
4 Bore Diameter
1 = 0.260 in. (6.6 mm)

5 Lag Extension
L = Lag extension N = No lag extension

Not available for thermometer stems less than
6 in. (152 mm) long. Lag is 2 in. (50.8 mm) for 6 in. (152 mm) thermometer stems and 3 in. (76.2 mm) for thermometer stems longer than 6 in. (152 mm).
Additional Products
Pressure Gauges
Swagelok pressure gauges are available in a variety of industrial and process models, as well as models designed for use in the sanitary industries. For more information, see the Swagelok Pressure Gauges, Industrial and Process PGI Series catalog, MS-02-170, and the Swagelok Pressure Gauges for the Sanitary Industries catalog, MS-03-10.
Flange Adapters
Swagelok flange adapters offer threadless, weldless transition from flanged piping systems to tubing systems. Flange adapters are onepiece integrally machined forged bodies and are available meet ASME, DIN, EN, and JIS standards. For more information, see the Swagelok Flange Adapters catalog, MS-02-200.
Tube Fittings
Swagelok gaugeable tube fittings and adapter fittings are available in sizes from 1/16 to 2 in. and 2 to 50 mm in a wide variety of materials and configurations. For more information, see the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140.
Variable Area Flowmeters

Swagelok glass- and metal (armored)tube variable area flowmeters offer highly accurate measurement with individually calibrated scales. For more information, see the Swagelok Variable Area Flowmeters catalog, MS-02-346.
Sanitary Fittings Tubing Products

Swagelok offers a wide variety of tubing products. For more information, see these Swagelok catalogs:
Stainless Steel Seamless
Swagelok offers a variety of sanitary fittings, including Kwik-Clamp end connections, in 304 and 316L stainless steel construction. For more information, see the Swagelok Stainless Steel Fittings for the Sanitary Industries catalog, MS-03-05.
Tubing, Fractional Sizes, MS-01-153-SCS

Stainless Steel Welded Tubing, MS-01-161-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Metric Sizes, MS-01-157-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Imperial Sizes, MS-01-159-SCS
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2009, R1 MS-02-353
www.swagelok.com
Thread and End Connection

Identification Guide
Introduction
Thread and End Connection Terminology . . . General Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5
Step-by-Step Identification Procedure for Threads and End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thread Identification Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapered Threads
12
TABLES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
End Connections That Use: Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Connections That Use: Unified Screw Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISO 228/1 Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metric (ISO 261) Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPSM Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 28 35 42 49
TAPERED
Appendix
STRAIGHT
End Connection to Thread Matrix . . . . . . . . . Thread to End Connection Matrix . . . . . . . . . Thread Identification Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 51 52 53
APPENDIX
IDENTIFICATION
INTRODUCTION
Contents
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
Thread and End Connection Terminology
Standards are used to help identify threads and end connections . We will use the following definitions in this manual:
Thread Standard
A specific reference to a formal standard (for example, ASME B1 .1, EN 10226-1, or ISO 261) that describes thread form, including a threads angle, pitch, and diameter .
End Connection Standard

A specific reference to a national standard (such as DIN 3852 or JIS R and JIS Rc) or industry group standard (such as SAE J512) that describes an end connections components, seal area, geometry, and nominal sizes . Thread standards are usually referenced in the end connection standard .
Thread Standards and End Connection Standards

Many mechanical end connections have threads . Therefore, thread standards can be used to help define end connection standards .
Pitch
For the purposes of this guide, pitch refers to threads per inch, instead of the distance between the threads, for fractional screw threads and pipe threads . For all metric screw threads, pitch refers to the distance between adjacent threads .
General Terminology
General terms and characteristics, which apply to all end connection threads, are shown below for both male and female threads .
Threads
1. 2. 3. 4. Crest Root Flank Pitch (metric) 4 6 5. 6. 7. 8. Thread flank angle Taper angle Male thread OD Female thread ID
1 23
5 Male Female 1 2 3
End Connections
1. Body size 2. Shoulder 3. Face
End Connection
INTRODUCTION
Step-by-Step Identification Procedure for Threads and End Connections

Step 1: Step 2:
IDENTIFICATION
Determine if the thread is tapered or straight (parallel) . Measure the thread diameter . Determine the thread pitch . Determine the thread standard . Identify the end connection . Even experienced workers sometimes have difficulty identifying threads, regardless of their thread identification procedure and the quality of their gauges.
Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Note:
Details
Step 1: Determine if the thread is T tapered or S straight (parallel).
Use a caliper to measure the nominal male or female thread crest-to-crest diameter on the first, fourth, and last full threads (Fig . 1) . T S If the diameters increase for a male end or decrease for a female end, the thread is tapered . If all the diameters are the same, the thread is straight (parallel) .
Last 4th 1st Fig. 1 Measuring Crest-to-Crest Thread Diameters 6
Last
4th
1st
Last S
4th
1st
Fig. 2 Measuring the Thread Diameters
Step 2: Measure the thread diameter.

Use a caliper to measure the nominal male or female thread diameter from crest-to-crest (Fig . 2) . T S Measure the fourth or fifth full thread . Measure any full thread .
The diameter measurement obtained in this step may not be exactly the same as the listed nominal size for the given thread . The main reason for this variation is industry or manufacturing tolerances .
Step 3: Determine the thread pitch.

To determine the thread pitch, use the Swagelok pitch gauges and check the thread against each form until you find a match . If you prefer to narrow down the choices, use the following procedure: a . On the appropriate thread identification reference table, locate the nominal thread diameter . Note that it is common to have the thread diameter for different threads listed multiple times . Turn to the Tapered Thread Identification Reference Tables beginning on page 12 . Turn to the Straight Thread Identification Reference Tables beginning on page 14 . 7
T S
IDENTIFICATION
b .
For each case, read across the table to the pitch column to determine the possible thread pitches for your thread . Try the appropriate pitch gauge form for the threads identified in Step b . above until you find a match (Fig . 3) .
c .
IDENTIFICATION
1 .5 mm per thread
18 threads per inch
No Match
Match
Fig. 3. Determining the Thread Pitch
Step 4: Determine the thread standard.

Once you have determined the following about a thread, you have all the information required to identify it: Male or female Straight or tapered Nominal male or female diameter Pitch Now, turn to the appropriate thread identification reference table and identify the thread .
Step 5: Identify the end connection.

T a . If the thread is tapered: Locate the end connections that have the tapered thread you identified . (See pages 20 through 25 .) Study the cross-section drawings for these end connections and determine which one matches your end connection .
b .
S a .
If the thread is straight: Locate the end connections that use the straight thread you identified . (See pages 26 through 49 .) Study the cross-section drawings for these end connections and determine which one matches your end connection .
b .
Note: The Swagelok combination seat and pitch gauge set includes 45, 37, and 30 seat angle gauges to assist with end connection identification. (See page 52.) c . d . Select one of the gauges and place its angle against the seat angle of the end connection . If the center line of the fitting and the longitudinal axis of the gauge are parallel, the seat angle and the gauge angle are the same . If not, try another gauge . Longitudinal axis
Center line No Match Seat angle Seat gauge angle
Match Fig. 4 Determining Seat Angle Note: Fittings have seat angles other than 45, 37, and 30. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for additional information. 9
IDENTIFICATION
EXAMPLE: Thread and End Connection Identification (Steps 1 to 5)

You have a male fitting and you need to identify its thread . Step 1:
IDENTIFICATION
Determine if the thread is tapered or straight (parallel). Measure the thread diameter.
You find that the thread is straight . Step 2: You find the thread diameter to be 0 .430 in . Step 3: a . Determine the thread pitch.
Because the thread is straight, turn to the Straight Thread Identification Reference Table, page 14, and locate the thread diameter . See section of table below .
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. 0.375 to 0.363 0.658 0.656 mm 9.53 to 9.22 16.71 16.66 Pitch 24U 18U 19W 24U 20U 20U 14U 14W Page 29 to 34 50 35 to 42 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 50 35 to 42
Nominal Thread Size Designation UNF 3/8 NPSM ISO 228/1 7/16 UNS UNF UNF 1/2 NPSM ISO 228/1
0.436 to 0.429 11.07 to 10.90 0.436 to 0.424 11.07 to 10.77 0.500 to 0.487 12.70 to 12.36 0.818 0.825 20.78 20.96
U = Unified W = Whitworth M = Metric

Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form
b .
Look across the table to find the corresponding pitches . In this case, they are 20 and 24 . Therefore, to determine the pitch of the thread you would use your 20 and 24 pitch gauges .
c .
For the purposes of this example, assume that the pitch is 24 .
10
a . b . c . d .
Male Straight Nominal thread diameter of 0 .430 in . Pitch equals 24
Looking at the cut-out portion of the straight thread identification reference table, you see that the only thread with all of these characteristics is a 7/16 in . UNS thread . Step 5: Identify the end connection. So far you know that you have a 7/16 in . UNS thread . To identify the end connection, you: a . b . Identify the type of seal . Turn to the End Connections That Use Unified Screw Threads section in this manual (pages 28 through 34), and find the configuration that matches your end connection .
11
IDENTIFICATION
Step 4: Determine the thread standard. At this point you know that the thread has the following characteristics:
Thread Identification Reference Tables

T
Note:
TaperedMale
Measured thread diameters may not match table measurements exactly . All threads have tolerances regarding many parts of the threads . The information in this table is not intended to be used as inspection criteria for threaded fittings . It is intended to be used as a guide to help identify various threads .
Nominal Thread Size, in. Designation 1/16 1/8 TABLES 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. 0.304 0.308 0.383 0.401 0.518 0.533 0.656 0.668 0.825 0.832 1.041 1.043 1.305 1.309 1.649 1.650 1.882 1.888 2.347 2.362 mm 7.72 7.84 9.73 10.18 13.16 13.54 16.86 16.98 20.96 21.14 26.44 26.49 33.14 33.25 41.90 41.91 47.80 47.97 59.61 60.00 Pitch 28W 27U 28W 27U 19W 18U 19W 18U 14W 14U 14W 14U 11.5U 11W 11.5U 11W 11W 11.5U 11W 11.5U
M = Metric
Page 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24
U = Unified
Note:
W = Whitworth Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form
1/2 and 3/4 in . ISO 7/1 and NPT threads can be difficult to identify because they are very close in design . Positive identification may not be possible without the use of an optical comparator . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional information .
12
T
Note:
TaperedFemale
Nominal Thread Size, in. Designation 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 1/4 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1 NPT ISO 7/1
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. 0.244 0.258 0.336 0.337 0.436 0.451 0.571 0.589 0.705 0.734 0.914 0.949 1.148 1.193 1.491 1.534 1.730 1.766 2.203 2.231 mm 6.22 6.56 8.54 8.57 11.07 11.45 14.49 14.95 17.90 18.63 23.21 24.12 29.15 30.29 37.87 38.95 43.49 44.85 55.95 56.66 Pitch 27U 28W 27U 28W 18U 19W 18U 19W 14U 14W 14U 14W 11.5U 11W 11.5U 11W 11.5U 11W 11.5U 11W
M = Metric
Page 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 25 23 to 24 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 23 to 24 25 TABLES 25
U = Unified W = Whitworth Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form
Note:
13
S
Note:
StraightMale
Nominal Thread Size Designation Fractional, in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 TABLES 5/16 ISO 228/1 ISO 228/1 NPSM ISO 228/1 NPSM UNF UN UNF 3/8 NPSM ISO 228/1 7/16 UNS UNF UNF 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 NPSM ISO 228/1 UNF UNF ISO 228/1 UN UNS 3/4 UNF NPSM ISO 228/1 13/16 7/8 UN UNF UNS ISO 228/1
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. 0.304 0.383 0.394 0.518 0.522 mm 7.72 9.73 10.01 13.16 13.26 Pitch 28W 28W 27U 19W 18U 24U 28U 24U 18U 19W 24U 20U 20U 14U 14W 18U 18U 14W 16U 18U 16U 14U 14W 16U 14U 18U 14W Page 35 to 41 35 to 41 49 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41
0.313 to 0.301 7.95 to 7.77 0.313 to 0.305 7.95 to 7.75 0.375 to 0.363 9.53 to 9.22 0.658 0.656 16.71 16.66
0.436 to 0.429 11.07 to 10.90 0.436 to 0.424 11.07 to 10.77 0.500 to 0.487 12.70 to 12.36 0.818 0.825 20.78 20.96
0.563 to 0.548 14.29 to 13.92 0.625 to 0.611 15.88 to 15.52 0.902 22.91 0.688 to 0.677 17.46 to 17.19 0.749 to 0.740 19.02 to 18.80 0.750 to 0.734 19.05 to 18.65 1.029 1.041 26.14 26.44
0.813 to 0.802 20.64 to 20.36 0.875 to 0.858 22.23 to 21.79 0.874 to 0.865 22.20 to 21.97 1.189 30.20
U = Unified W = Whitworth M = Metric Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form (continued on next page)
14
StraightMale
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. mm Pitch 14U 11.5U 11W 16U 11W 12U 12U 11.5U 11W 12U 12U 12U 11.5U 11W 12U 11W 12U 12U 11W 11.5U 12U 1.0M 1.0M 1.5M 1.0M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M Page 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 42 to 48 42 to 48 42 to 48 42 to 48 42 to 48 42 to 48 42 to 48 TABLES 35 to 41
Nominal Thread Size Designation Fractional, in. UNS 1 NPSM ISO 228/1 1 1/16 1 1/8 1 3/16 1 1/4 1 5/16 1 3/8 1 7/16 1 1/2 1 5/8 1 11/16 1 3/4 1 7/8 2 2 1/2 Metric, mm 8 10 12 14 16 18 Metric UN UN ISO 228/1 UN UNF NPSM ISO 228/1 UN UNF UN NPSM ISO 228/1 UN UN ISO 228/1 UN UN ISO 228/1 NPSM UN
1.000 to 0.983 25.40 to 24.97 1.287 1.309 32.69 33.25
1.063 to 1.049 27.00 to 26.64 12, 14U 29 to 34 1.063 to 1.051 27.00 to 26.70 1.492 37.90 1.188 to 1.174 30.16 to 29.83 1.250 to 1.231 31.75 to 31.57 1.632 1.650 41.45 41.91
1.313 to 1.299 33.34 to 33.00 1.375 to 1.356 34.93 to 34.44 1.438 to 1.424 36.51 to 36.18 1.871 1.882 47.52 47.80
2.500 to 2.487 63.50 to 63.16 0.310 0.389 0.467 0.468 0.545 0.624 0.703 7.88 9.88 11.85 11.88 13.85 15.85 17.85
U = Unified W = Whitworth M = Metric Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form (continued on next page)
15
StraightMale
Nominal Male Thread Diameter in. 0.781 0.860 0.939 1.018 1.056 1.057 1.174 1.175 1.292 1.293 1.410 1.411 Metric 1.490 1.528 1.530 1.647 1.648 1.765 1.766 1.883 1.884 1.961 2.040 2.041 2.198 2.355 mm 19.85 21.85 23.85 25.85 26.82 26.85 29.82 29.85 32.82 32.85 35.82 35.85 37.85 38.92 38.85 41.82 41.85 44.82 44.85 47.82 47.85 49.82 51.82 51.85 55.82 59.82 Pitch 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M
M = Metric
Nominal Thread Size Designation Metric, mm 20 22 24 26 27 30 33 TABLES 36 38 39 42 45 48 50 52 56 60

U = Unified
Note:
Page
42 to 48
16
S
Note:
StraightFemale
Nominal Thread Size Designation Fractional, in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 5/16 ISO 228/1 ISO 228/1 NPSM ISO 228/1 NPSM UNF UN UNF 3/8 ISO 228/1 NPSM 7/16 UNF UNS UNF 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 ISO 228/1 NPSM UNF UNF ISO 228/1 UN UNS 3/4 UNF ISO 228/1 NPSM 13/16 7/8 UN UNF UNS ISO 228/1
U = Unified
Nominal Female Thread Diameter in. 0.259 0.337 0.361 0.451 0.474 0.277 to 0.267 0.281 to 0.274 0.340 to 0.330 0.589 0.608 mm 6.56 8.57 9.17 11.45 12.04 7.04 to 6.78 7.14 to 6.96 8.64 to 8.38 14.95 15.44 Pitch 28W 28W 27U 19W 18U 24U 28U 24U 19W 18U 20U 24U 20U 14W 14U 18U 18U 14W 16U 18U 16U 14W 14U 16U 14U 18U 14W Page 35 to 41 35 to 41 49 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 TABLES 29 to 34
0.395 to 0.383 10.03 to 9.73 0.402 to 0.392 10.21 to 9.96 0.457 to 0.446 11.61 to 11.33 0.734 0.753 18.63 19.13
0.515 to 0.502 13.08 to 12.75 0.578 to 0.565 14.68 to 14.35 0.811 20.59 0.634 to 0.620 16.10 to 15.75 0.703 to 0.690 17.86 to 17.53 0.707 to 0.682 17.96 to 17.32 0.949 0.964 24.12 24.49
0.759 to 0.745 19.28 to 18.92 0.814 to 0.798 20.68 to 20.27 0.828 to 0.815 21.03 to 20.70 1.098 27.88
W = Whitworth M = Metric Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form (continued on next page)
17
StraightFemale
Nominal Female Thread Diameter in. mm Pitch 12U 14U 11W 11.5U 11W 12U 12U 11W 11.5U 12U 12U 11.5U 11W 12U 11W 12U 12U 11W 11.5U 12U 1.0M 1.0M 1.5M 1.0M 1.5M 42 to 48 Page 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34 29 to 34 49 35 to 41 29 to 34 35 to 41 29 to 34 29 to 34 35 to 41 49 29 to 34
Nominal Thread Size Designation Fractional, in. 15/16 1 1 1/16 1 1/8 1 3/16 1 1/4 TABLES 1 3/8 1 7/16 1 1/2 1 5/8 1 11/16 1 3/4 1 7/8 2 2 1/2 Metric, mm 8 10 12 14
U = Unified
UN UNS ISO 228/1 NPSM UN ISO 228/1 UN UNF ISO 228/1 NPSM UNF UN NPSM ISO 228/1 UN UN ISO 228/1 UN UN ISO 228/1 NPSM UN
1.240 to 1.222 31.50 to 31.04 0.938 to 0.923 23.83 to 23.44 1.193 1.206 1.376 30.29 30.63 34.94
0.990 to 0.972 25.15 to 24.69 12, 14U 29 to 34 1.115 to 1.097 28.32 to 27.86 1.178 to 1.160 29.92 to 29.45 1.534 1.550 38.95 39.37
1.303 to 1.285 33.10 to 32.64 1.365 to 1.347 34.67 to 34.21 1.780 1.766 45.47 44.85
2.428 to 2.410 61.67 to 61.21 0.286 0.356 7.98 9.04 10.92 11.27 12.92
Metric
0.430 0.444 0.509
W = Whitworth M = Metric Labeling on each Swagelok pitch gauge form (continued on next page)
18
StraightFemale
Nominal Female Thread Diameter in. 0.587 0.666 0.745 0.824 0.887 0.966 1.005 1.007 1.125 1.139 1.241 1.243 1.359 Metric 1.361 1.438 1.477 1.479 1.596 1.598 1.694 1.729 1.832 1.834 1.891 1.969 1.989 2.149 2.284 mm 14.92 16.92 18.92 20.92 22.53 24.53 25.53 25.58 28.58 28.92 31.53 31.58 34.53 34.58 36.53 37.53 37.58 40.53 40.58 43.02 43.92 46.53 46.57 48.02 50.02 50.23 54.57 58.02 Pitch 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 1.5M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M 1.5M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M 2.0M 1.5M 2.0M 2.0M
M = Metric
Nominal Thread Size Designation Metric, mm 16 18 20 22 24 26 27 30 33 36 38 39 42 45 48 50 52 56 60

U = Unified
Page
42 to 48
19
TABLES
1.5M
Tapered Threads
The following characteristics and information should be considered when using tapered threads: The seal is designed to take place between the tapered threads . Tapered pipe threads always need a sealant to seal system fluids and reduce the potential for galling of the threads . Products such as Swagelok PTFE tape, SWAK, anaerobic pipe thread sealant with PTFE, and PTFE Free pipe thread sealant perform both the lubricating and sealing functions . If the two pieces of metal are forced against each other without lubrication, galling is possible . After following the sealant and lubricant application instructions, the amount of tightening is discretionary . There is no standard for torque or number of turns .
TAPERED
20
CAJON THREAD ID
Tapered Threads
NPT
(also known as ASME B1 .20 .1) 60
Characteristics
Tapered thread (1 47') Truncation of roots
and crests are flat 60 thread angle Pitch is measured in threads per inch
1 47'
ISO 7/1
(also known as EN 10226-1 and JIS B0203)
55
Characteristics
Truncation of roots and TAPERED Tapered thread (1 47')
1 47'
crests are rounded

55 thread angle Pitch is measured in
threads per inch
21
End Connections That Use
Tapered Threads
NPT NPT
with O-Seal
BSPT Nominal Size in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Note:
Thread Size-Pitch NPT 1/16-27 1/8-27 1/4-18 3/8-18 1/2-14 3/4-14 1-11.5 1 1/4-11.5 1 1/2-11.5 2-11.5 NPT with O-Seal 1/16-27 1/8-27 1/4-18 3/8-18 1/2-14 3/4-14 1-11.5 1 1/4-11.5 1 1/2-11.5 2-11.5 ISO 7/1 1/16-28 1/8-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 3/4-14 1-11 1 1/4-11 1 1/2-11 2-11
TAPERED
1/2 and 3/4 in . BSPT and NPT threads can be difficult to identify because they are very close in design . Positive identification may not be possible without the use of an optical comparator . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional information .
22
Tapered Threads
NPT
Applicable Standards Seal Location On threads (sealant required) Fittings NPT Thread ASME B1.20.1
Male:
The male end has a 1 47' tapered thread with a 60 thread angle .
TAPERED
Female: The female end has a 1 47' tapered thread with a 60 thread angle . Seal: The seal is designed to take place on the tapered thread .
23
Tapered Threads
NPT with O-Seal
TAPERED
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression Fittings None Thread ASME B1.20.1
Male:
The male end has an undersized NPT thread and an O-ring groove on the shoulder of the hex .
Female: The female end has an NPT thread and a smooth, flat surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing the O-ring against the face of the female component .
24
Tapered Threads
BSPT JIS R and JIS Rc DIN 3852 Part 2, Type C
Applicable Standards Seal Location On threads (sealant required) Fittings JIS B8363 BS 5200 DIN 3852 Part 2 Thread ISO 7/1 TAPERED
Male:
The male end has a 1 47' tapered thread with a 55 thread angle .
Female: The female end has a 1 47' tapered thread with a 55 thread angle . Seal: The seal is designed to take place on the tapered thread .
25
Straight Threads
Worldwide, there are many end connections available with straight threads . Each end connection, however, will generally have threads that are one of the three most common: ASME B1 .1 (unified screw thread), ISO 228/1, or ISO 261 straight threads . Because the threads of the mating fittings are parallel to each other, there is no interference between the flanks, crests, and roots . Consequently, the seal must be made with a gasket, O-ring, or some metal to metal contact . A sealant is not required or recommended on straight threads . Depending on the application and materials, thread lubricant may be used .
Unified Screw Thread

(also known as ASME B1 .1)
Characteristics
Straight thread Truncation of roots and
60
crests are flat

60 flank angle Diameter and pitch
measured in inches
Thread Series
UN: Male and female screw thread UNR: Male screw thread only (more rounded crest) UNC/UNRC: Coarse thread series STRAIGHT UNF/UNRF: Fine thread series UNEF/UNREF: Extra-fine thread series UNS/UNRS: Selected special combinations of
diameters, pitches, and lengths of engagement .
26
Straight Threads
ISO 228/1
(also known as BSPP, JIS B0202)
Characteristics
Straight thread Truncation of roots and
55
crests are rounded

55 flank angle Threads are measured
in inches
Metric
(also known as ISO 261, JIS B0205, ASME B1 .13M)
Characteristics
Straight thread Truncation of roots
60
and crests are flat

in millimeters
NPSM
(also known as ASME B1 .20 .1)
Characteristics
Straight thread Truncation of roots
60
STRAIGHT
and crests are flat

in inches
27
Unified Screw Threads

SAE 37 (JIC) SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss Straight Thread O-Seal SAE 45 SAE J1453 O-Ring Face Seal ISO 8434-3 SAE 42 Inverted Flare
SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) Fitting Types

Thread Size-Pitch Nominal Size in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 STRAIGHT 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 O-Ring Boss 3/8-24 1/2-20 3/4-16 7/8-14 Inverted 42 Flare 5/16-28 3/8-24 1/2-20 11/16-16 7/8-14 1 1/4-12
37 3/8-24 1/2-20 3/4-16 7/8-14
O-Seal 3/8-24 1/2-20 3/4-16 7/8-14
45 3/8-24 1/2-20 11/16-16 7/8-14
J1453 1-14 1 7/16-12 1 11/16-12 2-12
5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24 5/16-24
7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 9/16-18 7/16-24 9/16-18 9/16-18 9/16-18 5/8-18 11/16-16 5/8-18 3/4-16 13/16-16 3/4-16
1 1/16-12 1 1/16-12 1 1/16-12 1 1/16-14 1 3/16-12 1 1/16-1 1 3/16-12 1 3/16-12 1 3/16-12 1 1/4-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 5/8-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12 1 7/8-12 1 7/8-12 2 1/2-12 2 1/2-12 2 1/2-12
28

SAE 37 (JIC)
Gland
Tubing
Sleeve
Applicable Standards STRAIGHT Seal Location Mating 37 flared surfaces Fittings SAE J514 Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and a 37 cone taper .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a nut captured on tubing with a mating 37 flare or a 37 tapered gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the male taper and the inside diameter of the tapered gland or flared tubing . 29

SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression Fittings SAE J1926, ISO 11926 Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
STRAIGHT
The male end has a straight thread and an O-ring .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a taper to accept the O-ring . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing the O-ring into the taper .
30

Straight Thread O-Seal
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression Fittings None Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a smooth, flat surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing the O-ring against the face of the female component .
31
STRAIGHT
The male end has a straight thread and an O-ring groove on the shoulder of the hex .

SAE 45
Gland
Tubing
Sleeve
Applicable Standards STRAIGHT Seal Location Mating 45 flared surface Fittings SAE J512 SAE J513 Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a nut captured on tubing with a mating 45 flare or a 45 tapered gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the male taper and the inside diameter of the tapered gland or flared tubing .
32

SAE J1453 O-Ring Face Seal ISO 8434-3
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression face of fitting Fittings SAE J1453 ISO 8434-3 Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and an O-ring in a groove on the face of the fitting .
STRAIGHT
Female: The female end has a straight thread . A gland with a flat face is held against the body by a female nut that threads onto the body . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing the O-ring between the faces of the fitting .
33

SAE 42 Inverted Flare
Without Flared Tubing
With Flared Tubing

STRAIGHT Applicable Standards Seal Location Mating angled and flared surfaces Fittings SAE J512 Thread ASME B1.1
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and can have either a 42 or 45 taper .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a 42 inverted flare seat or gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the taper in the male fitting and flared tubing or directly on the inverted flare seat .
34
ISO 228/1 Threads
BSPP (British Standard Pipe Parallel) JIS Parallel Pipe JIS 30 Flare DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN 3852 Part 2, Type A DIN 3852 Part 2, Type B BS EN ISO 1179
Thread Size-Pitch, in. DIN EN DIN 837-1, 3852 Nominal JIS 30 DIN EN Part 2, Size 837-3 Type A in. BSPP Flare 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 1/8-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 5/8-14 3/4-14 1-11 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 3/4-14 1-11 1/8-28 1/4-19 1/2-14 1/8-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 5/8-14 3/4-14 7/8-14 1-11
DIN 3852 Part 2, Type B 1/16-28 1/8-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 5/8-14 3/4-14 7/8-14 1-11
BS EN ISO 1179 1/8-28 1/4-19 3/8-19 1/2-14 5/8-14 3/4-14 1-11 STRAIGHT
1 1/8-11 1 1/8-11
1 1/4-11 1 1/4-11 1 1/2-11 1 1/2-11 2-11 2-11
1 1/4-11 1 1/4-11 1 1/4-11 1 1/2-11 1 1/2-11 1 1/2-11 1 3/4-11 1 3/4-11 2-11 2-11 2-11
Also known as JIS parallel pipe .
35
ISO 228/1 Threads

BSPP (British Standard Pipe Parallel) JIS Parallel Pipe
Applicable Standards Seal Location Mating 30 angled Surfaces or O-ring Compression Fittings BS 5200 JIS B8363 Thread ISO 228/1
BSPP and JIS parallel pipe fittings are identical in design, appearance, and dimensions .
Male:
STRAIGHT
The male end has a straight thread and a 30 taper .
Female: The female end is a nut with a straight thread captured on a 30 cone tapered gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the taper in the male fitting and the 30 cone tapered gland .
36
ISO 228/1 Threads

JIS 30 Flare
Gland
Tubing
Sleeve
Applicable Standards JIS B8363 ISO 228/1 STRAIGHT Seal Location Mating 30 angled or flared surfaces Fittings Thread
Male:
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a nut captured on tubing with a mating 30 flare or a 30 tapered gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the male taper and the ID of the tapered gland or flared tubing . 37
ISO 228/1 Threads

DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B JIS B0202
Female
Gasket
Female
Counterbore Gasket
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket compression Fittings DIN EN 837-1, 837-3 Thread ISO 228/1, JIS B0202
The male fitting has a straight thread and a spigot which fits through the inside diameter of the gasket . Female: The female has a straight thread and a counterbore in the inside diameter of the fitting to accept a gasket . Female: The female has a straight thread and a counterbore in the inside diameter of the fitting to accept a gasket . The counterbore is larger to help ensure the male end compresses the gasket into a sealing position . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the male and female fittings . 38
Male:
STRAIGHT
ISO 228/1 Threads

DIN 3852 Part 2, Type A
Bonded gasket
Shoulder
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket compression Fittings DIN 3852 Part 2 Thread ISO 228/1
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and a straight shoulder .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a flat, smooth surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the straight shoulder and the flat, smooth surface .
STRAIGHT
Gasket: This gasket could be either all metal or metal with a bonded elastomer on the inside diameter .
39
ISO 228/1 Threads

DIN 3852 Part 2, Type B
All-metal gasket
Shoulder
STRAIGHT
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket metal-to-metal Fittings DIN 3852 Part 2 Thread ISO 228/1
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and an angled shoulder .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a flat, smooth surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the angled shoulder and the flat, smooth surface .
Gasket: Use of a metal gasket is suggested . 40
ISO 228/1 Threads

BS EN ISO 1179
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression Fittings BS EN ISO 1179 Thread ISO 228/1
Male:

STRAIGHT
41
Metric (ISO 261) Threads

DIN 7631 JIS Parallel Pipe Metric DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN 3852 Part 1, Type A DIN 3852 Part 1, Type B ISO 6149-1, ISO 6149-2, and ISO 6149-3
JIS Parallel Pipe Metric M14 1.5 M18 1.5 M22 1.5 M27 2.0 M33 2.0 M42 1.5 M50 2.0 M60 2.0 Thread Size-Pitch DIN EN DIN 837-1, 3852 DIN EN Part 1 837-3 Type A M8 1 M10 1 M10 1 M12 1.5 M12 1.5 M14 1.5 M16 1.5 M18 1.5 M20 1.5 M20 1.5 M22 1.5 M24 1.5 M26 1.5 M27 2.0 M30 1.5 M30 2.0 M30 2.0 M36 1.5 M36 2.0 M38 1.5 M39 1.5 M42 2.0 M42 2.0 M45 1.5 M45 2.0 M48 1.5 M48 2.0 M52 1.5 M52 2.0 M56 2.0 M60 2.0 DIN 3852 Part 1 Type B M8 1 M10 1 M12 1.5 M14 1.5 M16 1.5 M18 1.5 M20 1.5 M22 1.5 M24 1.5 M26 1.5 M27 2.0 M30 1.5 M30 2.0 M30 2.0 M36 1.5 M36 2.0 M38 1.5 M39 1.5 M42 2.0 M42 2.0 M45 1.5 M45 2.0 M48 1.5 M48 2.0 M52 1.5 M52 2.0 M56 2.0 M60 2.0 ISO 6149-1, 6149-2, 6149-3 M8 1 M10 1 M12 1.5 M14 1.5 M16 1.5 M18 1.5 M20 1.5 M22 1.5 M26 1.5 M27 2.0 M30 2.0 M42 2.0 M48 2.0 M50 2.0 M60 2.0
Nominal Size mm M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M22 M24 M26 M27 M30 M33 M36 STRAIGHT M38 M39 M42 M45 M48 M50 M52 M56 M60
DIN 7631 M10 1 M12 1.5 M14 1.5 M16 1.5 M18 1.5 M22 1.5 M26 1.5 M30 1.5 M38 1.5 M45 2.0 M52 1.5
42

DIN 7631
O-ring O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location Globe seal nose tapered angle Fittings DIN 7631 Thread Metric (ISO 261) STRAIGHT
Male:
Female: The female end is a nut with a straight thread captured on a globe seal nose gland . The globe seal nose may contain an O-ring . Seal: The seal takes place between the taper in the male fitting and the globe seal nose .
43

JIS Parallel Pipe Metric
Applicable Standards Seal Location Mating 30 angled surfaces Fittings JIS B8363 Thread Metric (ISO 261)
Male:
Female: The female end is a nut with a straight thread captured on a 30 cone tapered gland . Seal:
STRAIGHT
The seal takes place between the taper in the male fitting and the 30 cone tapered gland .
44

DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B
Female
Gasket
Female
Counterbore Gasket
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket compression Fittings DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3 Thread Metric (ISO 261)
The male fitting has a straight thread and a spigot which fits through the inside diameter of the gasket . Female: The female has a straight thread and a counterbore in the inside diameter of the fitting to accept a gasket . Female: The female has a straight thread and a counterbore in the inside diameter of the fitting to accept a gasket . The counterbore is larger to help ensure the male end compresses the gasket into a sealing position . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the male and female fittings . 45
Male:
STRAIGHT

DIN 3852 Part 1, Type A
Bonded gasket
Shoulder
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket compression Fittings DIN 3852 Part 1 Thread Metric (ISO 261)
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and a straight shoulder .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a flat, smooth surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the straight shoulder and the flat, smooth surface .
STRAIGHT
Gasket: This gasket could be either all metal or metal with a bonded elastomer on the inside diameter .
46

DIN 3852 Part 1, Type B
All-metal gasket
Shoulder
Applicable Standards Seal Location Gasket metal-to-metal Fittings DIN 3852 Part 1 Thread Metric (ISO 261)
Male:
The male end has a straight thread and an angled shoulder .
Female: The female end has a straight thread and a flat, smooth surface . Seal: The seal takes place by compressing a gasket between the angled shoulder and the flat, smooth surface .
Gasket: Use of a metal gasket is suggested . 47
STRAIGHT

ISO 6149-1, ISO 6149-2, AND ISO 6149-3
O-ring
Applicable Standards Seal Location O-ring compression Fittings ISO 6149-1, ISO 6149-2, ISO 6149-3 Thread Metric (ISO 261)
Male:
STRAIGHT
48
NPSM Threads
NPSM
Applicable Standards Fittings NPSM Nominal Size, in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 Thread ASME B1.20.1 NPSM Thread SIze-Pitch 1/8-27 1/4-18 3/8-18 1/2-14 3/4-14 1-11.5 1 1/4-11.5 2-11.5 STRAIGHT 1 1/2-11.5
Male:
Female: The female end is a nut with a straight thread captured on a 30 cone tapered gland . Seal: The seal takes place between the taper in the male fitting and the 30 cone tapered gland .
49
End Connection to Thread Matrix

End Connection BSPP (5200) BS EN ISO 1179 DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN 3852 Part 1, Type A DIN 3852 Part 1, Type B DIN 3852 Part 2, Type A DIN 3852 Part 2, Type B DIN 3852 Part 2, Type C ISO 6149-1, ISO 6149-2, and ISO 6149-3 DIN 7631 JIS 30 Flare (B8363) JIS (B8363) JIS (B8363) JIS (B8363) NPSM NPT SAE J1453 O-Ring Face Seal SAE 37 (JIC) (J514) SAE 42 Inverted Flare (J512) SAE 45 (J512, J513) SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss (J1926) Page 36 41 Thread Standard ISO 228/1 ISO 228/1 Page 27 27
BSP (British Pipe Standard)
DIN (Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.) 38 45 46 47 39 40 25 48 43 37 36 44 25 49 23 33 29 34 32 30 ASME B1.1 26 ISO 228/1 Metric (ISO 261) Metric (ISO 261) Metric (ISO 261) ISO 228/1 ISO 228/1 ISO 7/1 Metric (ISO 261) Metric (ISO 261) ISO 228/1 ISO 228/1 Metric (ISO 261) ISO 7/1 ASME B1.20.1 ASME B1.20.1 27 21 27 21 27 27 27 27
JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard)
NPSM (National Pipe Straight Mechanical) NPT (National Pipe Taper) SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers)
APPENDIX
50
Thread to End Connection Matrix

Thread Standard EN 10226-1 JIS B0203 Page ISO 7/1 21 DIN 3852 Part 2, Type C JIS (B8363) BSPP (5200) DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN 3852 Part 2, Type A DIN 3852 Part 2, Type B JIS B0202 Metric ISO 261 27 ASME B1.13M JIS B0205 ASME B1.20.1 ASME B1.20.1 27 21 NPSM NPT 49 23 DIN EN 837-1 and DIN EN 837-3, Type B DIN 3852 Part 1, Type A DIN 3852 Part 1, Type B DIN 3852 Part 1 DIN 7631 JIS (B8363) 45 46 47 48 43 44 JIS 30 Flare (B8363) JIS (B8363) 25 End Connection Page
ISO 228/1 36 38 39 40 37 36
ISO 228/1 27
Unified Screw Thread ASME B1.1 SAE J1453 O-Ring Face Seal SAE 37 (JIC) (J514) SAE 42 Inverted ASME B1.1 26 Flare (J512) SAE 45 (J512, J513) SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss (J1926)
33 29 34 32 30
51
APPENDIX
Thread Identification Tools

Caliper
A caliper is used to determine the thread diameter . (Calibration of calipers is the responsibility of the end user .)
Combination Seat and Pitch Gauge

Seat and pitch gauges are conveniently combined into one tool . The seat gauge is used to determine end connection seat angles of 45, 37, and 30 . The pitch gauge is used to identify the thread pitch . Note that a pitch gauge may be Unified (threads per inch), Whitworth (threads per inch), or metric (millimeters per thread) as marked on the back of each gauge form . Thread pitch gauges
Seat angle gauges

APPENDIX
52
Glossary
ASME B1 .1 . See Unified Screw Threads. B1 .20 .1 . See NPT. B1 .13M . See ISO 261. British Standard Pipe Parallel per ISO 228/1 . British Standard Pipe Tapered per EN 10226-1 . See ISO 7/1. Deutsche Institut fr Normung e .V . International Standards Organization Specification 228/1, straight threads, reference specification: BSPP, DIN 259, JIS B0202 . International Standards Organization Specification 261, straight threads, metric measurements, often referred to as the pure metric straight fitting, JIS B0205 . International Standards Organization Specification 7/1, tapered threads, imperial measurements, reference specifications: EN 10226-1 (male thread only), JIS B0203 . Japanese Industrial Standard . Japanese Industrial Standard B0202 . See ISO 228/1. Japanese Industrial Standard B0203 . See ISO 7/1. Japanese Industrial Standard B0205 . See ISO 261. See ISO 261.
APPENDIX
BSPP BSPT DIN ISO 228/1
ISO 261
ISO 7/1
JIS JIS B0202 JIS B0203 JIS B0205 Metric
Metric Straight
See ISO 261.
53
Glossary
NPT Pitch National Pipe Tapered . For the purposes of this guide, pitch refers to threads per inch, instead of the distance between the threads, for fractional screw threads and pipe threads . For all metric screw threads, pitch refers to the distance between adjacent threads . Society of Automotive Engineers . Unified Constant-Pitch Thread Series . Unified Coarse Thread Series .
SAE UN UNC/UNRC
UNEF/UNREF Unified Extra-Fine Thread Series . UNF/UNRF UNR UNS/UNRS Unified Fine Thread Series . Male Screw Thread only . Selected special combinations of diameter, pitch, and length of engagement . See ASME B1.1 and ASME B1.20.1. See ISO 228/1 and ISO 7/1.
Unified Whitworth
APPENDIX
54
55
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. The complete catalog contents must be reviewed to ensure that the system designer and user make a safe product selection.
Swagelok, SWAKTM Swagelok Company 1998, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2007, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI September 2009, R5 MS-13-77
www.swagelok.com
Toggle Valve s
O G, 1G, a n d 92 S e r i e s
Manual and pneumatically actuated models Straight, angle, and cross body patterns 316 SS and brass body materials
Toggle Valves
Features
Compact, rugged design Opens and closes quickly Orifice sizes from 0.080 to 0.250 in. (2.0 to 6.4 mm) Flow coefficients (Cv) from 0.11 to 0.70 Straight, angle, and cross flow patterns Pneumatic actuation Swagelok tube fitting, female NPT, male NPT, and
Panel mounting PTFE-coated spring O-ring stem seal needs no adjustment
mixed end connections.
Technical Data
Orifice in. (mm) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) 20 to 200
(28 to 93)
Series OG 1G
Pressure-Temperature Ratings Temperature Working Pressure F (C) psig (bar) 300 (20.6)
Soft-seat shutoff
200 (13.7)
Ratings based on manual valve. See Pneumatic Actuators, page 4, for ratings of valves with pneumatic actuators.
1
Component 1 Handle Roll pin 2 Panel nut 3 Washer 4 Packing nut 5 Spring 6 Stem O-ring Stem tip Stainless steel Nylon 316 SS/A276 Brass 360/B16 PTFE-coated S17700/A313 316 SS/A276 Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A182 Brass 377/B283 Nickel antiseize in hydrocarbon carrier Silicone-based Valve Body Materials 316 SS Nylon 302 SS Brass 360/B16 Brass Material Grade/ASTM Specification
2 3 4
7 Body Nonwetted lubricant Wetted lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics. Contains a clear nylon thrust washer (not shown) between the packing nut and the spring.
Testing
7
Every Swagelok toggle valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 200 psig (13.7 bar) at the seat and seal. There is a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

Every Swagelok toggle valve is cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.
Toggle Valves

Straight Pattern Angle Pattern

B Panel mount thickness 1/8 to 1/4
(3.2 to 6.4)
H open Panel mount thickness 1/8 to 1/4

(3.2 to 6.4)
Brass Valves
Replace SS with B. Example: B-OGS2
H open
B1 C G panel hole
Add -A to the ordering number. Example: SS-OGS2-A
D
E G panel hole
E B A B1
Cross-Pattern Valves
Certain toggle valves are available with cross-pattern bodies, which provide continuous flow between side ports and on-off flow through the bottom port. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for more information.
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size 1/8 in. Fractional 1/4 in. Swagelok tube fittings 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 3 mm 6 mm Metric Swagelok 8 mm tube fittings 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. Female NPT 1/4 in. 1/8 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT 1/4 in. 3/8 in. Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 0.20 0.70 0.11 0.20 0.20 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.125 (3.2) SS-1GM4 SS-1GM6 0.70 0.11 0.20 0.250 (6.4) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) SS-1GF4 SS-OGM2 SS-1GM2 Cv 0.11 0.20 0.70 0.70 0.11 0.20 0.20 0.70 0.70 0.20 Orifice in. (mm) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) 0.250 (6.4) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) 0.250 (6.4) 0.125 (3.2)
Ordering Number SS-OGS2 SS-1GS4 SS-1GS6 SS-1GS8 SS-OGS3MM SS-1GS6MM SS-1GS8MM SS-1GS10MM SS-1GS12MM SS-1GF2

(49.8)
B1
0.98 (24.9) 1.13 (28.7) 1.29 (32.8) 1.40 (35.6) 0.98 (24.9) 1.13 (28.7) 1.11 (28.2) 1.36 (34.5) 1.46 (37.1) 0.81 (20.6) 1.06 (26.9) 0.75 (19.0) 0.86 (21.8) 0.98 (24.9) 1.12 (28.4) 0.75
(19.0)
C 1.29
(32.8)
D 0.92
(23.4)
E 0.31
(7.9)
G 0.53
(13.5)
H 2.87
(72.9)
2.26
(57.4)
1.50
(38.1)
0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
2.81
(71.4)
2.58
(65.5)
1.79
(45.5)
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(12.7)
0.66
(16.8)
3.56
(90.4)
2.80
(71.1)
1.90
(48.3)
1.96
(49.8)
1.29
(32.8)
0.92
(23.4)
0.31
(7.9)
2.87
(72.9)
2.26
(57.4)
1.50
(38.1)
0.53 0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
(13.5)
2.81
(71.4)
2.22
(56.4)
2.72
(69.1)
1.48 (37.6) 1.86

(47.2)
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(12.7)
0.66
(16.8)
3.56
(90.4)
2.92
(74.2)
1.96
(49.8)
1.63
(41.4)
1.19
(30.2)
0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
0.53
(13.5)
2.81
(71.4)
2.12 (53.8) 1.50

(38.1)
1.56
(39.6)
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(12.7)
0.66
(16.8)
3.56
(90.4)
1.06
(27.0)
0.92
(23.4)
0.31
(7.9)
2.87
(72.9)
1.72
(43.7)
1.23
(31.2)
0.53 0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
(13.5)
2.81
(71.4)
1.96
(49.8)
1.36
(34.5)
2.25
(57.2)
1.62
(41.1)
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(12.7)
0.66
(16.8)
3.56
(90.4)
SS-OGM2-S2 SS-1GM4-S4 SS-1GM2-F2
1.73
(43.9)
0.98
(24.9)
1.29
(32.8)
0.92
(23.4)
0.31
(7.9)
2.87
(72.9)
2.11
(53.6)
0.98
(24.9)
1.13
(28.7)
1.50
(38.1)
0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
0.53
(13.5)
2.81
(71.4)
Male/female 1/8 in. NPT
1.63
(41.4)
0.81 (20.6)
1.19
(30.2)
0.86
(21.8)
0.38
(9.5)
2.81
(71.4)
Toggle Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Features
Valve and actuator are fully assembled and factory tested. Positive stem retraction prevents sticking. O-ring stem seal requires no packing adjustment. Rotatable actuator port allows easy installation.
Actuation Modes
Normally closedair opens, spring closes. Normally openair closes, spring opens. Double actingair opens and closes. High-pressure normally closedair opens, spring closes. Normally Closed, High-Pressure Normally Closed, and Double Acting Normally Open
Actuator Types
Standardvalve contains fluorocarbon FKM O-ring, PTFE
stem tip, and silicone-based lubricant.

Low temperaturevalve contains Buna C O-ring, PTFE
Component Housing Spring External hardware O-ring Material Anodized aluminum UNS 17700 18-8 SS Fluorocarbon FKM
stem tip, and lithium-thickened, silicone-based lubricant.

High temperaturevalve contains fluorocarbon FKM O-ring,
PEEK stem tip, and PTFE-based lubricant.

Nonfluorocarbonvalve contains ethylene propylene
O-ring, PEEK stem tip, and silicone-based lubricant.
See page 2 for other materials of construction.
Technical Data
Valve Working Pressure, psig (bar) Temperature Rating F (C) 20 to 200
(28 to 93)
Actuator Type Standard Low temperature High temperature Nonfluorocarbon
Normally Open, Double Acting, High-Pressure Normally Closed Normally Closed
Actuator Pressure Rating psig (bar)
65 to 200
(53 to 93)
450
(31.0)
300
(20.6)
150
(10.3)
20 to 400
(28 to 204)
20 to 250
(28 to 121)

System Pressure, bar Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig
High-Pressure Normally Closed
Normally Closed
Normally Open Double Acting
Toggle Valves
Pneumatic Actuators
Standard Actuators with Stainless Steel Valves

Add an actuation mode designator to the ordering number.
Actuation Mode Designator -C -HPC -O -D
1/8 female NPT
Mounting bracket
Normally closed High-pressure normally closed Normally open Double acting

0.41 (10.4) bolt hole 0.19 (4.8) mounting holes
1.25
(31.8)
0.63
(15.9)
Example: SS-92S2-C
B A
B1
Other Actuator Types

For a low-temperature, hightemperature, or nonfluorocarbon actuator, add an actuator designator to the ordering number.
Actuator Type Low temperature High temperature Nonfluorocarbon Designator -LT -HT -NF
End Connections Inlet/Outlet Size Cv 0.11 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.11 0.20 0.11 0.20
Fractional 1/8 in. Swagelok tube fittings 1/4 in. 6 mm Metric Swagelok tube fittings 8 mm Female NPT 1/8 in. 1/8 in. Male NPT 1/4 in. Male NPT/ Swagelok tube fitting 1/8 in. 1/4 in.

(2.0)
Ordering Number SS-92S2 SS-92S4 SS-92S6MM SS-92S8MM SS-92F2 SS-92M2 SS-92M4 SS-92M2-S2 SS-92M4-S4

(49.8)
B1
0.98 (24.9) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.11 (28.2) 0.81 (20.6) 0.75 (19.0) 0.98 (24.9) 0.75
(19.0)
H 2.21
(56.1)
0.125
(3.2)
2.26
(57.4)
0.125
(3.2)
2.26
(57.4)
2.15
(54.6)
0.125
(3.2)
2.22
(56.4)
Example: SS-92S2-C-LT
0.125
(3.2)
1.63
(41.4)
Actuators with Brass Valves

Replace SS with B.
2.21
(56.1)
0.080
(2.0)
1.50
(38.1)
Example: B-92S2-C
0.125
(3.2)
1.96
(49.8)
2.15
(54.6)
0.080
(2.0)
0.125
(3.2)
1.73 (43.9) 2.11

(53.6)
0.98
(24.9)
2.21
(56.1)
Actuators with Angle-Pattern Valves

Insert -A into the ordering number. Example: SS-92S2-A-C
0.98
(24.9)
1.13
(28.7)
2.15
(54.6)
Valves Without Mounting Brackets

Standard actuator assembly includes a mounting bracket. Removal of the mounting bracket shortens actuator stroke and prevents valve actuation. If the mounting bracket is not used, a spacer washer is required. To order, add -W to the ordering number. Example: SS-92S2-C-W

Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are standard. For other O-ring materials, add a designator to the valve ordering number. Examples: SS-OGS2-BC SS-92S2-C-BC In pneumatically actuated valves, only the stem tip O-ring is changed to the optional material.
O-Ring Material Buna C Buna N Ethylene propylene Kalrez Silicone Designator -BC -B -E -KZ -SI
Handles
Black nylon handles are standard. For other handles, add a designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-OGS2-BL
Handle Blue nylon Green nylon Orange nylon Red nylon Yellow nylon Black urethanepainted aluminum (OG and1G [0.125 in. orifice]) Black anodized aluminum (1G [0.250 in. orifice]) 316 SS
Designator -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW -BKB
Handle Kits
Handle kits contain black nylon handle and roll pin. For nylon handles of other colors, replace -BK with a nylon handle color designator. Example: NY-5K-14G-BL For a black aluminum handle, replace NY with A. Example: A-5K-14G-BK For a stainless steel handle, use ordering number SS-5S-14G for a 0.080 in. (2.0 mm) or 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) orifice size and ordering number SS-5S-16G for a 0.250 in. (6.4 mm) orifice size.
-BKB -SH Handle Kit Ordering Number
O-Ring Kits
O-ring kits contain fluorocarbon FKM O-ring, lubricant, and instructions. Select a kit ordering number.
Valve Series OG 1G Orifice in. (mm) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) O-Ring Kit Ordering Number VA70-9K-008 VA70-9K-011
Valve Orifice Series in. (mm) 0.080 OG

(2.0) (3.2)
0.125 1G 0.250
(6.4)
NY-5K-14G-BK
NY-5K-16G-BK
Handle Positioner
The handle positioner enables setting a valve handle in a desired position and prevents it from rotatingfor example, in panel mounting applications where all handles must point in the same direction. It cannot be used with a spring-return pin. To order, add -TGP to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-OGS2-TGP
Spring-Return Pin
The spring-return pin stops the valve from being left in the open position. It cannot be used with the handle positioner. To order, add -SPR to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-OGS2-SPR
Manual valves with Buna C O-rings, aluminum handles, and lithium-thickened, silicone-based lubricant are available for low-temperature service from 65 to 200F (53 to 93C). To order, add -LT to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-OGS2-LT
Handle Positioner Kits

Kits include handle positioner, panel nut, and instructions. Select a handle positioner kit ordering number.
Valve Series OG 1G Orifice in. (mm) 0.080 (2.0) 0.125 (3.2) 0.250 (6.4) Positioner Kit Ordering Numbers 316 SS Valves Brass Valves SS-5K-14G SS-5K-16G B-5K-14G B-5K-16G
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company KalrezTM DuPont 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 2007, R4 MS-01-54
www.swagelok.com
Products
Electric, bench top, and hand tube benders Hydraulic swaging units, preswaging tool, and gap inspection gauges Tee, ratchet, and open-end wrenches Accessories including tube and hose cutters, deburring tools, liquid leak
detectors, and thread lubricants and sealants
Contents
Tube Benders
Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Bench Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Tube Benders
Swagelok benders provide high-quality bends on fractional and metric tubing made from materials that can be used with Swagelok tube fittings. These easyto-use tube benders reduce installation time and effort as well as the potential for wrinkling or other damage to the tubing during bending.
Electric Tube Benders Features

Electronic control 1 to 110 bending range 1 to 2 in. outside diameter (0.049
Swaging Units
Multihead Hydraulic . . . . . . . . 5 Air-Actuated Hydraulic . . . . . . 6 Preswaging Tool . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Gap Inspection Gauges . . . . . 7 Depth Marking Tool . . . . . . . . 7
to 0.220 in. wall thickness) and 25 to 50 mm outside diameter (1.2 to 5.0 mm wall thickness) tubing range
One bend shoe for 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2,
and 2 in. sizes

One bend shoe for 25, 32, 38, and
50 mm sizes
CE compliant
Wrenches
Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ratchet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Open End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Dimensions
Dimensionsvertical position:
Width29 in. (74 cm) Depth30 in. (76 cm) Height44 in. (112 cm)
Weight420 lb (191 kg)
Accessories
Tube Cutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tube Sawing Guide . . . . . . . . 10 Tube Deburring Tools. . . . . . 10
Power Requirements
MS-TBE-1115 V (ac), 50/60 Hz; maximum current13 A MS-TBE-2230 V (ac), 50/60 Hz; maximum current7 A See Ordering Information, page 4.
Tube Gripper Pad . . . . . . . . . . 10 Groove Cutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Hose Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Tube Support System . . . . . . 11
Technical Data
Minimum tube length, bend radius, and wall thickness limits required to make a 90 bend in annealed tubing are listed below. See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107, for suggested tubing wall thickness for use with Swagelok tube fittings.
Fractional Tubing
Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants

Liquid Leak Detectors . . . . . . 12 Thread Lubricants . . . . . . . . . 13 Pipe Thread Sealants. . . . . . . 14
Tube OD 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Min Tube Length 20.5 22.8 25.5 32.0
Approx Bend Radius 4 5 6 8
Wall Thickness, Min/Max Carbon Steel 0.049/0.120 0.065/0.180 0.083/0.220 0.095/0.220 Stainless Steel 0.065/0.120 0.083/0.156 0.090/0.188 0.109/0.188
Dimensions, in.
Metric Tubing
Tube OD 25 32 38 50 Min Tube Length 520 582 648 810 Approx Bend Radius 103 126 152 203 Wall Thickness, Min/Max Carbon Steel 1.2/3.0 2.0/4.0 2.2/4.5 Stainless Steel 1.8/3.0 2.0/4.0 2.2/4.5 3.0/5.0
Dimensions, mm
Bench Top Tube Benders Features

Rugged, lightweight aluminum construction 1 to 180 bending range 1/4 to 1 1/4 in. outside diameter (0.028 to 0.120 in. wall
thickness) and 12 to 30 mm outside diameter (1.0 to 3.0 mm wall thickness) tubing range
Steel bend shoes required for:
1 in. outside diameter tubing with greater than 0.095 in.
wall thickness
25 mm tubing with greater than 2.4 mm wall thickness all sizes of SAF 2507 tubing all sizes of heavy-wall annealed stainless steel tubing all sizes of cold-drawn 1/8-hard stainless steel seamless
Manual Model
tubing.
Includes grease gun and metal carrying case for storage Manual model can be operated with a 1/2 in. drill motor
using optional torque clutch and support arm.

CE compliant
Electric Model
Dimensions
Dimensionstube bender in case:
Technical Data
Minimum tube length, bend radius, and wall thickness limits required to make a 90 bend in annealed tubing are listed below. See Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107, for suggested tubing wall thickness for use with Swagelok tube fittings.
Width21 in. (53 cm) Depth11 in. (28 cm) Height14 1/2 in. (37 cm)
Weighttube bender in case,
Fractional Tubing
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 8.50 9.75 10.5 12.2 15.0 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.2 4.4 7.00 1.4 Min Tube Length Approx Bend Radius Carbon Steel Wall Thickness, Min/Max Stainless Heavy-Wall Cold-Drawn Steel Annealed SS 1/8-Hard SS 0.065/0.095 0.083/0.134 0.083/0.188 0.028/0.065 0.035/0.083 0.049/0.109
excluding tools: Manual model75 lb (34 kg) Electric model79 lb (36 kg)
Dimensions, in. 0.028/0.065 0.035/0.065 0.035/0.095 0.035/0.083 0.049/0.095 0.035/0.083
Power Requirements
(electric model) MS-BTB-1110 V (ac), 50/60 Hz; maximum current10 A MS-BTB-2230 V (ac), 50/60 Hz; maximum current5 A See Ordering Information and Options and Accessories, page 4.
0.049/0.109 0.049/0.120 0.065/0.120 0.065/0.120 0.083/0.120
Metric Tubing
Tube OD 12 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 Min Tube Length 178 216 248 267 311 381 Approx Bend Radius 36 46 55 67 67 82 112 1.2/3.0 1.8/3.0 2.0/3.0 Wall Thickness, Min/Max Carbon Steel 1.0/2.2 1.0/2.2 1.0/2.5 1.2/2.5 1.2/2.8 1.2/2.8 1.8/3.0 1.0/2.2 Stainless Steel 1.0/2.0
Dimensions, mm
Bench Top and Electric Tube Benders Ordering Information

1. Select a basic ordering number.
Bender Type Manual Electric110 V (ac) Electric230 V (ac) Electric 115 V (ac) 230 V (ac) MS-TBE-1 MS-TBE-2 Ordering Number MS-BTB-M MS-BTB-1 MS-BTB-2
3. Add a users manual language designator.

Users Manual Language Chinese French English Users Manual Language German Japanese Spanish
Bench Top
Designator -C -F -E
Designator -G -J -S
Example: MS-BTB-1-1-E 4. Add a tool kit designator.

Tool Kit Power Cord Designator 1 AWG/ SJT 2 3 4 5 Harmonized 6 7 8 Bench Top Aluminum fractional bend shoes and steel rollers (1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, and 1 in.) Aluminum metric bend shoes and steel rollers (12, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 25 mm) Electric Fractional bend shoe, roller towers, and tube clamps (1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2, and 2 in.) Metric bend shoe, roller towers, and tube clamps (25, 32, 38, and 50 mm) Designator
Example: MS-BTB-1 2. Add a power cord designator (electric models).

Geographic Region Plug Type NEMA 5-15 NEMA 6-15 NEMA 5-15 NEMA L6-20 IEC-309 BS 1363 CEE 7/7 AS 3112 Cord/ Wire Type
-FKIT -MKIT
Voltage 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz North America 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz Japan/ Taiwan 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz 110/120 V (ac) 50/60 Hz United Kingdom 220/240 V (ac) 50/60 Hz Continental 220/240 V (ac) Europe/Korea 50/60 Hz Australia/ 220/240 V (ac) New Zealand 50/60 Hz
-FKIT -MKIT
Example: MS-BTB-1-1-E-FKIT Bench top tube bender only: To substitute a steel bend shoe for a 1 in. or 25 mm aluminum bend shoe, add -S16 to the fractional kit ordering number or -S25M to the metric kit ordering number. Example: MS-BTB-1-1-E-FKIT-S16
Example: MS-BTB-1-1
For more information, see the Swagelok Electrical Power Cord and Plug
Options catalog, MS-02-79.
Bench Top Tube Benders Options and Accessories

Individual tool kits with
aluminum or steel bend shoes may be ordered separately. Steel bend shoes are required for select tubing, as listed on page 3. Example: MS-BTT-K-4
Individual Tool Kit Aluminum Steel

30 mm sizes.
Basic Ordering Number MS-BTT-K- MS-BTT-K-S
Fractional Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4
Size Designator 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20-R112
Metric Size, mm 12 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30
Size Designator 12M 15M-R46 16M 18M 20M 22M 25M 28M 30M
Not available in 1 1/4 in. 28 mm, and
To order, add a size designator from the tables at right.

The tripod provides portable support for the tube bender.
Ordering number: MS-BTB-A-TP

The torque clutch and support arm kit allows the manual
model to be operated with a 1/2 in. drill motor. Ordering number: MS-BTB-A-TCSA
The foot pedal can be used in place of the toggle switch
For additional accessories, see the Swagelok Bench Top Tube Bender Users Manual, MS-13-145.
to operate the electric model. Ordering number: MS-BTB-A-FS
Hand Tube Benders

Swagelok hand tube benders provide consistent, highquality bends in tubing made from materials that can be used with Swagelok tube fittings.
Tube OD 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 6 8 10 12 Bend Radius Dimensions, in. 0.56 0.75 0.94 1.50 15 24 38 MS-HTB-4T MS-HTB-4 MS-HTB-5 MS-HTB-6T MS-HTB-8 MS-HTB-6M MS-HTB-8M MS-HTB-10M MS-HTB-12M Ordering Number
Features
The hand tube bender is available in 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, and
1/2 in., as well as 6, 8, 10, and 12 mm tubing sizes.

Clevis handle design provides enhanced leverage for
bends greater than 90.

Roll dies reduce bending force and tube ovality, as
Dimensions, mm
compared to conventional slide block design.

1 to 180 bending range.
The hand tube bender cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing over 1/4 in. or for medium-pressure tubing.
Swaging Units
Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU) Features
Preswages
Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU
Fractional Tubing Tooling Size in. 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 0.083 0.095 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 Tubing Wall, in. Stainless Steel Steel 0.049 0.065 Metric Tubing Tooling Size mm 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.8 1.5 Tubing Wall, mm Stainless Steel Steel
Swagelok ferrules onto tubing

Provides
Swagelok tube fitting connections that are 100 % gaugeable upon initial installation. Use MHSU gap inspection gauges supplied with the unit.
Is available in two unit sizes, with a choice of
interchangeable fractional or metric tooling for:

1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing and tube adapters 1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing and tube adapters Places no initial strain on nut or fitting body threads or on
body seal surfaces

Must be used to install 1 1/4, 1 1/2, and 2 in. and 28, 30,
Use of tubing below the recommended minimum wall thickness may result in the tube sticking in the die head.
32, 38, and 50 mm Swagelok tube fittings

Is standard with a tube marking feature to indicate when
Ordering Numbers MHSU (Unit, hydraulic hose, retaining ring pliers, safety glasses, and instructions) Up to 1 in./25 mm unit 1 in./25 mm and over unit MS-MHSU-U-E MS-MHSU-O-E
tube is properly bottomed in the unit

Is available with a support base (as shown). To order, add
-B to the ordering number. Example: MS-MHSU-U-E-B

Is available with stainless steel connection tubing in place
of hydraulic hose; support base is required. To order, add -T to the ordering number for an MHSU with support base. Example: MS-MHSU-U-E-B-T
Fits neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case Reduces assembly and installation time and operator error.
MHSU with Tooling Kit (MHSU plus die head sets, chamfer block, and gap inspection gauges) Fractional up to 1 in. unit Fractional 1 in. and over unit Metric up to 25 mm unit Metric 25 to 38 mm unit
50 mm tooling available separately.
MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M MS-MHSU-O-E-FKIT-M MS-MHSU-U-E-MKIT-M MS-MHSU-O-E-MKIT-M
The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under or for medium-pressure tubing. For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in./25 mm and over unit and SAF 2507 tooling and gauges.
See MHSU and AHSU Options and Accessories, page 6.
Swaging Units
Air-Actuated Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU)
Preswaging Tool
Features
Preswages Swagelok ferrules onto tubing Provides Swagelok tube fitting connections that are 100 %
Features
Preswages ferrules onto the tube Enables the installer to work in a more open, safe area Makes it possible to complete the installation by following
gaugeable upon initial installation

Requires only one unit with interchangeable tooling to
retightening instructions for Swagelok tube fittings.
swage 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm Swagelok tube fitting ferrule sizes
Places no initial strain on nut or fitting body threads or on
Tube OD in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1/16 1/4 (mediumpressure) 3/8 (mediumpressure) 1/2 1/2 (mediumpressure) Ordering Number MS-ST-100 MS-ST-200 MS-ST-300 MS-ST-400 MS-ST-500 MS-ST-600 MS-ST-810 MS-ST-1010 MS-ST-2507-1010 MS-ST-1210 MS-ST-2507-1210 MS-ST-1410 MS-ST-1610 Male Nut MS-ST-1F0 MS-ST-4FK0 Tube OD mm 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 Ordering Number MS-ST-3M0 MS-ST-4M0 MS-ST-6M0 MS-ST-8M0 MS-ST-10M0 MS-ST-12M0 MS-ST-14M0 MS-ST-15M0 MS-ST-16M0 MS-ST-18M0 MS-ST-20M0 MS-ST-22M0 MS-ST-25M0
body seal surfaces

Requires no threading of nut on or off the tooling Fits neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case Reduces assembly and installation time and operator error.
Female Nut
Female Nut
The AHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing or for medium-pressure tubing.
Ordering Numbers AHSU (Unit, hex key, adapter plates, safety glasses, and instructions) AHSU only MS-AHSU-E AHSU with Tooling Kit (AHSU plus die head sets and gap inspection gauges) 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 in. unit 6, 8, 10, 12 mm unit MS-AHSU-E-FKIT MS-AHSU-E-MKIT
MHSU and AHSU Options and Accessories

Hydraulic swaging units come with tooling kits and Englishlanguage instructions. To order separate tooling kits, see the Swagelok Hydraulic Swaging UnitMultihead (MHSU) catalog, MS-02-154, or Swagelok Hydraulic Swaging UnitAir-Actuated (AHSU) catalog, MS-02-155, or contact your authorized Swagelok representative. For instructions in other languages, visit swagelok.com/references.
MS-ST-6FK0 MS-ST-8F0 MS-ST-8FK0

If the gauge will not enter the gap, the tting is sufciently tightened.
If the gauge will enter the gap, additional tightening is required.
Female Nut Fitting Size in. 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 mm 12 14, 15, 16 18 20, 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 Ordering Number MS-MHSU-IG-810 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1010 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1210 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 MS-MHSU-IG-28M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-30M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2000-2 MS-MHSU-IG-32M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-38M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-2400-1 MS-MHSU-IG-50M0-1 MS-MHSU-IG-3200-1

Fitting Size in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 1/4, 1/2 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 5/8 (SAF 2507) 3/4 3/4 (SAF 2507) 7/8 1 1/16 1/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 (mediumpressure) mm Female Nut 2, 3 4 6 6, 12 6, 8, 10, 12 8 10 12 14, 15, 16 18 20, 22 25 Male Nut 2, 3 Ordering Number MS-IG-100 MS-IG-200 MS-IG-300 MS-IG-400 MS-IG-468 MS-IG-612M MS-IG-500 MS-IG-600 MS-IG-10M0 MS-IG-810 MS-IG-1010 MS-IG-2507-1010 MS-IG-1210 MS-IG-2507-1210 MS-IG-1410 MS-IG-1610 MS-IG-1F0 MS-IG-2F0 MS-IG-FK0
The MHSU cannot be used for SAF 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under
or for medium-pressure tubing.
For 5/8 and 3/4 in. SAF 2507 tubing, order the 1 in./25 mm and
over unit and SAF 2507 tooling and gauge.
For Installation Using the AHSU

Female Nut Fitting Size in. 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 mm 6, 8, 10, 12 Ordering Number MS-AHSU-IG-468 MS-AHSU-IG-612M
Depth Marking Tool

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Ordering Number MS-DMT-400 MS-DMT-600 MS-DMT-810 MS-DMT-1010 MS-DMT-1210 MS-DMT-1410 MS-DMT-1610 Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 16 18 Ordering Number MS-DMT-6M0 MS-DMT-8M0 MS-DMT-10M0 MS-DMT-12M0 MS-DMT-16M0 MS-DMT-18M0
Wrenches
Tee Wrench
The tee wrench provides positive backup support when installing Swagelok union tees and crosses.
Ratchet Wrench
The ratchet wrench is designed for use on Swagelok nuts for fitting installation.
Features
Allows user to hold fitting body firmly and precisely Is available in a variety of sizes Fits and carries easily in tool box, pouch, or belt Head and handle constructed of stainless steel Features a cushioned vinyl grip and generous gripping area
Features
11 fractional and metric sizes are available. 1/12 turn ratchet facilitates use in close quarters. Heavy-duty construction includes: heat-treated, black oxide-plated steel handle black-oxide plated steel jaws stainless steel spring and fasteners.
for handle
Holds tee in various orientations
For Swagelok Gaugeable Union Tees and Crosses Sizes 1/4 in. and 6 mm 5/16 and 3/8 in. and 8 mm 10 mm 1/2 in. and 12 mm Ordering Number MS-TW-4 MS-TW-6 MS-TW-10M MS-TW-8 Tee Cross
Tube Fitting Size 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 3 6 8 10 12 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. MS-RW-200 MS-RW-300 MS-RW-400 MS-RW-500 MS-RW-600 MS-RW-810 Dimensions, mm MS-RW-3M0 MS-RW-6M0 MS-RW-8M0 MS-RW-10M0 MS-RW-12M0 257 184 136 10.1 7.25 5.38 Wrench Length
Use MS-TW-8 on 10 mm Swagelok crosses.
Ratchet Wrench Pouch

A heavy-duty pouch is available for holding up to six Swagelok ratchet wrenches. Ordering Number: MS-RWP
Wrenches
Open-End Wrenches Features
Swagelok open-end wrenches are available in body and
E
nut styles.
These wrenches are designed to install Swagelok tube
fittings (1 1/4, 1 1/2, and 2 in.; 32, 38, and 50 mm sizes) after assembly using Swageloks hydraulic swaging unit.
The body wrench is box ended and can be used with
Body Wrench
shapes or hex bodies.

The nut wrench has a multiple internal hex to allow easy
fixturing of the nut when space is limited.

The hole in the wrench head enables wrenches to be
C D
secured by a lanyard for installations in elevated areas.

The telescoping feature of the knurled handle provides
Nut Wrench
additional leverage when needed.
Nut Wrench
Fitting Size 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 32 38 50 Dimensions Ordering Number MS-NW-20(1.88) MS-NW-24(2.25) MS-NW-32(3.00) MS-NW-32M(50M) MS-NW-38M(60M) MS-NW-32(3.00) A Dimensions, in. 3.16 3.88 5.06 Dimensions, cm 8.53 10.1 12.9 46.2 66.6 82.6 58.4 84.6 107 1.85 2.51 3.18 18.0 26.1 32.5 22.8 33.2 42.0 0.73 0.99 1.25 C D E Weight lb 3 6 11 kg 1.4 3.2 5.0
Body Wrench
Fitting Size Flat Size 1 11/16 1 3/4 2 2 1/8 2 3/4 46 50 60 2 3/4 in. Dimensions Ordering Number MS-BW-20(1.69) MS-BW-20(1.75) MS-BW-24(2.00) MS-BW-24(2.13) MS-BW-32(2.75) MS-BW-32M(46M) MS-BW-32M(50M) MS-BW-38M(55M) MS-BW-32(2.75) A C D E Weight lb 18.0 26.1 32.5 22.8 33.2 42.0 0.73 0.99 1.25 3 6 11 kg 46.2 66.6 82.6 58.4 84.6 107 1.85 2.51 3.18 1.4 3.2 5.0 Dimensions, in. 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3.16 3.88 5.06
Dimensions, cm 32 38 50 8.53 10.1 12.9
10
Accessories
Tube Cutter
The Swagelok tube cutter cuts stainless steel, soft copper, and aluminum tubing from 3/16 to 1 in. and 4 to 25 mm outside diameter.
Tube Deburring Tools

After use of the tube cutter or tube sawing guide, Swagelok deburring tools deburr stainless steel, steel, and hard alloy tube ends.
Features
Flare-out and work hardening of tube end is reduced. Knobs on handle are spaced in 1/8-turn increments to
Features
For deburring the inside and outside diameters of 3/16 to
1 1/2 in. and 4 to 38 mm tubing

Steel blades for long life Rugged, heavy-duty die-cast housing
provide easy reference when advancing cutter wheel. Ordering Number: MS-TC-308 Replacement Cutting Wheel Ordering Number: MS-TCW-308
Ordering Number: MS-TDT-24
Tube Sawing Guide

The tube sawing guide holds tubing to enable fast, accurate cutting with a hacksaw. The guide helps reduce tubing preparation time, thereby speeding system assembly.
For deburring the inside diameter of 1/4, 3/8, and 9/16 in. stainless steel tubing.
Ordering Number: MS-44CT-27
Features
Specially designed clamp holds tubing accurately, without
Tube Gripper Pad

The Swagelok tube gripper pad allows users to hold tubing with a firm, secure grip while using the tube cutter or tube deburring tool. Ordering Number: MS-07-25
distorting or scratching the tube surface.

Precision guides easily position blade for all cuts. Recess under guide plates provides blade clearance at end
of stroke.
Retractable spring-loaded clamp allows tubing to be
inserted easily.
Guide accepts tubing sizes from 3/16 to 1 in. and 4 to
25 mm outside diameter.
Design permits easy mounting in vise.
Ordering Number: MS-TSG-16
11
Accessories
Groove Cutter
The Swagelok groove cutter grooves PFA tubing used with Swagelok PFA tube fittings.
Tube Support System

The Swagelok tube support system organizes and supports tube and hose runs in sizes from 1/4 to 1 in. (6 to 25 mm) outside diameter.
Features
Stainless steel, carbon steel, and polyethylene construction
For 1/8 in. tubing

Tube OD 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in.
For 1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. tubing

Ordering Number MS-GC-2 MS-GC-4 MS-GC-6 MS-GC-8
Wall- and channel-mounted options Single- and multiple-line support
Hose Cutters
Two hose cutters are available. The Swagelok hose cutter is used to cut push-on hose or soft plastic tubing up to 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) outside diameter. For ordering information, see the Swagelok Tube Supports catalog, MS-01-109. Ordering Number: MS-HC-SC
The Swagelok thermoplastic hose cutter is used to cut Swagelok thermoplastic hose and plastic tubing up to 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) outside diameter. Ordering Number: MS-HC-SC-1
12
Liquid Leak Detectors

Snoop and Real Cool Snoop liquid leak detectors detect gas leaks in hard-to-reach areas.
Snoop Features
Sustained bubble action works even on very small leaks
and vertical surfaces.

Bubble size indicates approximate leak rate. Flexible snooper tube extends for hard-to-reach areas. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, nonflammable formula does not
contain chlorine, aliphatic amines, or ammonium compounds.

Formula dries clean, without staining.
Technical Information
Composition: Deionized water and a surfactant. Temperature rating: Can be used over a temperature
range of 27 to 200F (2 to 93C).

Specications: Meets the performance requirements of: MIL-PRF-25567 Leak Detector Compound, Oxygen
Warning: Use Snoop liquid leak detector only on external surfaces. Do not use on internal surfaces.
Systems, Type I, 1 to 70C (33 to 158F).

NFPA 52 Section 6-12.2 Leak Testing Compressed
Size 2 oz (59 mL) 8 oz (236 mL) 1 gal (3.8 L) Ordering Number MS-SNOOP-2OZ MS-SNOOP-8OZ MS-SNOOP-GAL Snooper Tube 6 in. (15 cm) 12 in. (30 cm)
Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel System.

EPA Part 60, Appendix A, Method 21, Section 4.3.3
Alternative Screening Procedures Using Soap Solutions.
Real Cool Snoop Features

Sustained bubble action works at temperatures as low
as 65F (54C), even on very small leaks and vertical surfaces.

Bubble size indicates approximate leak rate. Flexible snooper tube extends for hard-to-reach areas. Noncorrosive, nonflammable formula does not contain
chlorine, aliphatic amines, or ammonium compounds.

Formula dries clean, without staining.
Composition: Deionized water, a surfactant, and ethylene
glycol to prevent freezing at low temperatures.

Temperature rating: Can be used over a temperature
range of 65 to 200F (54 to 93C).

Specications: Meets the performance requirements of: MIL-PRF-25567 Leak Detector Compound, Oxygen
Warning: Use Real Cool Snoop liquid leak detector only on external surfaces. Do not use on internal surfaces.
Size 8 oz (236 mL) 1 gal (3.8 L) Ordering Number MS-RC-SNOOP-8OZ MS-RC-SNOOP-GAL Snooper Tube 12 in. (30 cm)
Systems, Type II, 54 to 1C (65 to 33F).

NFPA 52 Section 6-12.2 Leak Testing Compressed
Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel System.

EPA Part 60, Appendix A, Method 21, Section 4.3.3
Alternative Screening Procedures Using Soap Solutions.
Material Safety Data Sheets are available from your authorized Swagelok representative or at swagelok.com.
13
Thread Lubricants
Silver Goop
Oil-based thread lubricant for use on stainless steel and high-temperature alloys
PURE Goop
Halocarbon-based thread lubricant for use on titanium, stainless steel, steel, and nickel-based alloys
Blue Goop
Oil-based thread lubricant for use on stainless steel, steel, titanium, aluminum, and nickel-based alloys
Features
Prevents galling Performs in temperatures up to
Features
Resists galling Is chemically nonreactive with a wide
Features
Resists galling Performs in temperatures up to
1500F (815C)
Contains a nonmelting antiseize
range of materials
Performs in temperatures up to
400F (204C)
Resists water washout Is a deep blue color that is not
agent
Lowers torque on threaded parts Stays in place between mating
350F (176C)
Is noncorrosive to metals Resists moisture
affected by water
Contains PTFE
surfaces regardless of force applied

Resists moisture
Size 1 oz (29.5 cm3) tube 1 lb (450 g) can Ordering Number MS-TL-SGT MS-TL-SGC
Warning: Do not use on aluminum or magnesium threads.
Size 2 oz (59 cm3) tube 1 lb (450 g) can 55 lb (25 kg) bucket Ordering Number MS-TL-BGT MS-TL-BGC MS-TL-BGG
Size 1 oz (29.5 cm3) tube 1 lb (450 g) can Ordering Number MS-TL-PGT MS-TL-PGC
VAC Goop
Fluorosilicone-based thread lubricant for use on threads, O-rings, gaskets, glass seals, and metal parts in vacuum systems
Temperature Versus Vapor Pressure
Resists galling Has extremely low vapor pressure Minimizes outgassing problems Is chemically nonreactive with a wide range of materials Performs in temperatures up to 300F (148C) Resists moisture
Size 1 oz (29.5 cm3) tube 1 lb (450 g) can Ordering Number MS-TL-VGT MS-TL-VGC Temperature, C
Vapor Pressure, torr
Features
Request and read the Material Safety Data Sheets before using these products. Material Safety Data Sheets are available from your authorized Swagelok representative or at swagelok.com.
14

SWAK Anaerobic Pipe Thread Sealant Features
Cures to a bond that resists vibration or shock Lubricates threads, preventing costly thread damage due
to galling and seizing during assembly

Allows low breakaway torque for easy-to-break
connections, even after fully cured

Is compatible with a wide range of chemicals Applies quickly and easily Clings to threads and will not shred or tear on assembly
Composition: Resin (containing methacrylic ester) and
PTFE Tape Pipe Thread Sealant Features

Material conforms to Commercial Item Description
PTFE particles
Cure time: At room temperature, allow 24 h minimum
before pressurizing .
Pressure rating: To pipe or fitting working pressure up to
A-A-58092
Temperatures up to 450F (232C)
10 000 psig (689 bar), based on proper thread engagement

Temperature rating: 65 to 350F (53 to 176C) Viscosity: Greater than 100 000 cP, in accordance with
Applications
Plastics Aluminum Stainless steel Ceramic Synthetic rubber Chemicals Corrosives Hydraulic fluids Refrigerants Aromatic fuels
ASTM D1824
Storage temperature: 45 to 85F (7 to 29C) Shelf life: Five years at recommended storage temperature
Cure time and sealing are dependent on many variables, such as storage
conditions, cleanliness of threads, quality of threads, temperature, materials of construction, proper assembly, specific gravity of system media, and system operating pressures.
Carbon steel and special alloys
Tube Size 6 cm3 50 cm3 250 cm3 Ordering Number MS-PTS-6 MS-PTS-50 MS-PTS-250
Caution: Tape should be used only on male tapered pipe threads. Do not use on ared, coned, or tube tting ends.
Male Tapered Pipe Size 1/8, 1/4, and 3/8 in. 1/2 in. and up Tape Size 1/4 by 576 in.
(6.4 mm by 1463 cm)
Ordering Number MS-STR-4 MS-STR-8
Some uids and materials are NOT compatible with SWAK. While not intended to be a complete list, they include the following:
Plastic pipe or valve components other than PTFE Halogens Pure oxygen Hydrazine Freon Ozone Nitrogen dioxide
1/2 by 288 in.

(12.7 mm by 732 cm)
High concentrations of strong acids or bases Food, cosmetic, drug, or water systems for human
consumption
Vacuum systems where any hydrocarbon outgassing will
affect performance
15

PTFE-Free Pipe Thread Sealant Features
Seals immediately Lubricates threads, preventing costly thread damage from
galling and seizing during assembly

Allows low breakaway torque for easy-to-break
connections
Is compatible with a wide range of chemicals Clings to threads and will not shred or tear on assembly
Use with metal pipe threads only.
Composition: Particles of polyolefin resin and filler in a
Sealing Considerations
Proper sealing depends on many variablesquality and cleanliness of threads, temperature, component material, installation torque, specific gravity of system media, and system operating pressures. Do not use Swagelok PTFE-free pipe thread sealant in systems containing a strong oxidizer. A chemical reaction, including spontaneous combustion, can occur.
polymeric plasticizer. Material has lubricating qualities.

Pressure rating: Effective with pipe or fitting working
pressure up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) at room temperature

Temperature rating: 65 to 300F (53 to 148C) Flash point: 355F (179C) Storage: Shelf life is up to 5 years when stored at 45 to
85F (8 to 29C).
Tube Size 1.69 fl oz (50 cm3) Ordering Number MS-TFS-50
Swagelok, SWAK, Silver Goop, Blue Goop, Snoop, Real Cool SnoopTM Swagelok Company SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2003, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI August 2007, R7 MS-01-169
www.swagelok.com
Tr unnion Ball Valve s
83 Se r ie s a nd H83 Se r ie s
Working pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar) 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm Swagelok tube fitting or NPT end connections 316 stainless steel materials
Trunnion Ball Valves
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Important Information About Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Flow Data at 70F (20C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Features
Compact, maximum-flow design Low operating torque 2- or 3-way flow patterns Panel mounting Pneumatic and electric actuators
Heavy-duty handle indicates flow direction.
available
Bottom-loaded stem: prevents stem blowout enhances system safety.
Spring-loaded seats: provide leak-tight integrity in both lowand high-pressure systems contribute to low operating torque reduce seat wear from pressure surges.
Trunnion-style ball: prevents ball blowout contributes to low operating torque.
Important Information About Ball Valves Swagelok ball valves are
Technical Data
Seat Material PCTFE, reinforced nylon PEEK PTFE Temperature Rating F (C) Pressure Rating at 100F (37C) psig (bar) Stainless Steel 83 Series 0 to 250
(17 to 121)
designed to be used in a fully open or fully closed position. for a period of time may have a higher initial actuation torque.
Alloy 400
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 2-way valves 1.0 to 1.6 depending on end connection; 3-way valves 0.75 2-way valves 1.0 to 1.6 depending on end connection; 3-way valves 0.75
Valves that have not been cycled
6000 (413) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) H83 Series 6000 to 10 000 depending on end connection
(413 to 689)
5000 (344) 5000 (344)
0 to 450
(17 to 232)
PEEK
0 to 450
(17 to 232)
83 Series
Pressure-temperature ratings for 83 series valves are based on listed seat materials, fluorocarbon FKM O -rings, and reinforced PTFE backup rings. Low-temperature L83 series ball valves are available. See page 9.
Material Seat Material Temperature, F (C) 0 (17) to 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
(37) (65) (93) (121) (148) (176) (204) (232)
316 SS PCTFE, Nylon 6000 3000 2000 1000

(413) (206) (137) (68.9)
Alloy 400 PEEK 6000 5800 5000 4100 3200 2300 1400 500
(413) (399) (344) (282) (220) (158) (96.4) (34.4)
PTFE 1500 1125 750 625 500 375 250 125

(103) (77.5) (51.6) (43.0) (34.4) (25.8) (17.2) (8.6)
PCTFE, Nylon 5000 3000 2000 1000

(344) (206) (137) (68.9)
PTFE 1500 1125 750 625 500 375 250 125

(103) (77.5) (51.6) (43.0) (34.4) (25.8) (17.2) (8.6)
PEEK 5000 4690 4390 4100 3200 2300 1400 500

(344) (323) (302) (282) (220) (158) (96.4) (34.4)
H83 Series
Pressure-temperature ratings for H83 series valves are based on PEEK seats, fluorocarbon FKM O-rings, and reinforced PTFE backup rings. Low-temperature LH83 series ball valves are available. See page 9.
Material End Connections Temperature, F (C) 0 (17) to 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
(37) 10 000 (689) (65) 7 500 (516) (93) 5 000 (344) (121) 4 100 (282) (148) (176) (204) (232)
316 SS F2, F4, S4, S6MM S10MM 8400 7500 5000 4100
(578) (516) (344) (282)
S6, S8MM 7500 7500 5000 4100 3200 2300 1400 500
(516) (516) (344) (282) (220) (158) (96.4) (34.4)
S8 6700 6700 5000 4100 3200 2300 1400 500

(461) (461) (344) (282) (220) (158) (96.4) (34.4)
S12MM 6600 6600 5000 4100 3200 2300 1400 500

(454) (454) (344) (282) (220) (158) (96.4) (34.4)
3 200 2 300 1 400 500
(220) 3200 (220) (158) 2300 (158) (96.4) 1400 (96.4) (34.4) 500 (34.4)

83 Series 2-Way
0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 1.2 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p) psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 14 (390) 36 (1000) 64 (1800) Water Flow U.S. gal/min (L/min) 3.8 (14) 8.5 (32) 12
(45)
H83 Series 2-Way

0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 1.2 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p) psi (bar) 150 (10.3) 600 (41.3) 1000 (68.9) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 92 (2600) 340 (9600) 570 (16 100) Water Flow U.S. gal/min (L/min) 15 (56) 29 (100) 38 (140)
83 Series 3-Way
0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 0.75 Cv
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p) psi (bar) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 8.0 (220) 23 40
(650) (1100)
H83 Series 3-Way

0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 0.75 Cv
Water Flow U.S. gal/min (L/min) 2.4 (9.0) 5.3 (20) 7.5 (28) Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (p) psi (bar) 150 (10.3) 600 (41.3) 1000
(68.9)
Air Flow std ft3/min (std L/min) 57 (1600) 210 (5900) 350 (9900)
Water Flow U.S. gal/min (L/min) 9.2 (34) 18 24

(68) (90)
Testing
Every Swagelok trunnion ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.

All Swagelok trunnion ball valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C are available as an option for 83 series valves with PCTFE, PTFE, or reinforced nylon seats. See page 9.
83 Series
1 2 3 4 5 15 16 17 22
19 21
18 20
2-Way
3-Way
Valve Body Material Stainless Steel 2-Way Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Panel nut 3-Way Alloy 400 2-Way 3-Way
Material Grade/ASTM Specification Phenolic with brass insert S17400 SS 316 SS/B783 Stainless steel 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164 Alloy 400/B164
7 10 11
8 7 10
4 Stop pin (2-way2; 3-way1) 5 Body 6 Stem 7 Stem O-rings (2-way2; 3-way1)
Fluorocarbon FKM Reinforced PTFE Reinforced PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM PEEK PTFE/D1710 PEEK Reinforced PTFE Reinforced PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM PEEK PTFE/D1710 PEEK
11
8 Primary stem backup ring 9 Secondary stem backup ring 10 Stem bearing
12
13 14
11 Ball 12 Trunnion backup rings (2) 13 Trunnion O-rings (2) 14 Trunnion bearings 15 Seats (2) 16 Seat carriers (2) 17 Seat springs (6 with PTFE; 12 with all others) 18 Seat carrier guides (2) 19 Seat carrier backup rings (4) 20 Seat carrier O-rings (2) 21 End screw seals (2) 22 End screws (2) Lubricants
316 SS/A276 S21800/A276 PEEK
Alloy 400/B164 PEEK
PCTFE/AMS 3650, PTFE/D1710, reinforced nylon, or PEEK 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164
Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164
Reinforced PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 Alloy 400/B164 Fluorinated-based (all valves); tungsten disulfide additive (valves with PEEK seats)
Wetted components listed in italics. Ball trunnions are PTFE coated in 83 series 2-way valve.
H83 Series
1 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 20
17 19
16 18
Component 1 Handle 2 Set screw 3 Panel nut 4 Stop pin (2-way2; 3-way1) 5 Body 6 Stem 7 Stem O-ring 8 Primary stem backup ring 9 Secondary stem backup ring 10 Stem bearing 11 Ball 12 Plug (2-way only) 13 Seats (2) 14 Seat carriers (2)
2-Way 3-Way Material Grade/ ASTM Specification Phenolic with brass insert S17400 SS 316 SS/B783 Stainless steel 316 SS/A479 316 SS/A276 Fluorocarbon FKM PEEK PTFE/D1710 PEEK S21800/A276 316 SS/A276 PEEK 316 SS/A276 Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 316 SS/A276 Reinforced PTFE Fluorocarbon FKM PTFE/D1710 316 SS/A479 Tungsten disulfide and fluorinated-based
8 7 10
2-Way
3-Way
11
11
15 Seat springs (12) 16 Seat carrier guides (2) 17 Seat carrier backup rings (4) 18 Seat carrier O-rings (2) 19 End screw seals (2) 20 End screws (2)
12
Lubricants
Wetted components listed in italics. Ball trunnions are Xylan coated.

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
83 Series 2-Way
(38.1)
83 Series 3-Way
(38.1)
1.50
1.50
(46.7)
1.84
29/32 (23.0) panel hole drill

(46.5)
1.83
(13.0)
0.51
(12.7)
0.50
(14.7)
0.58
(26.9)
1.06
B A B A 1/4 in. female NPT port
H83 Series
(38.1)
1.50
(46.7)
1.84
(12.7)
0.50
(26.9)
1.06
B A
1/4 in. female NPT port

83 Series
Select a valve ordering number from the table below. Valve ordering numbers specify stainless steel material. To order valves of alloy 400 material, replace SS in the ordering number with M. Example: M-83KF2 Valve ordering numbers specify a PCTFE seat. To order valves with other seat materials, replace K in the ordering number with a seat material designator.
Seat Material PTFE Reinforced nylon PEEK Designator T N P
H83 Series
Select a valve ordering number from the table below.
Example: SS-83TF2
Flow Coefficient (Cv) 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.4 1.0 1.6 1.5 1.3 1.0 83 Series Valve Ordering Number SS-83KF2 SS-83KF4 SS-83KF8 SS-83KS4 SS-83KS6 SS-83KS8 SS-83KS6MM SS-83KS8MM SS-83KS10MM SS-83KS12MM SS-83XKF2 SS-83XKF4 SS-83XKS4 0.75 SS-83XKS6 SS-83XKS8 SS-83XKS6MM SS-83XKS8MM SS-83XKS10MM SS-83XKS12MM H83 Series Valve Ordering Number SS-H83PF2 SS-H83PF4 SS-H83PS4 SS-H83PS6 SS-H83PS8 SS-H83PS6MM SS-H83PS8MM SS-H83PS10MM SS-H83PS12MM SS-H83XPF2 SS-H83XPF4 SS-H83XPS4 SS-H83XPS6 SS-H83XPS8 SS-H83XPS6MM SS-H83XPS8MM SS-H83XPS10MM SS-H83XPS12MM
End Connections Type Size 1/8 in. Female NPT 1/4 in. 1/2 in. Fractional Swagelok tube fitting Metric Swagelok tube fitting 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 1/8 in. 1/4 in. 1/4 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 6 mm Metric Swagelok tube fitting 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 3.93 (99.8) 4.25 (108) 4.14 (105) 4.39 (112) 4.60 (117) 4.14 (105) 4.15 (105) 4.41 (112) 4.60 (117) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 3.93 (99.8) 4.14 (105) 4.39 (112) 4.60 (117) 4.14 (105) 4.15 (105) 4.41 (112) 4.60 (117) B 1.47 (37.3) 1.47 (37.3) 1.97 (50.0) 2.13 (54.1) 2.07 (52.6) 2.19 (55.6) 2.30 (58.4) 2.07 (52.6) 2.07 (52.6) 2.20 (55.9) 2.30 (58.4) 1.47 (37.3) 1.47 (37.3) 1.97 (50.0) 2.07 (52.6) 2.19 (55.6) 2.30 (58.4) 2.07 (52.6) 2.07 (52.6) 2.20 (55.9) 2.30 (58.4)
2-Way Valve, 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) Orifice
3-Way Valve, 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) Orifice Female NPT Fractional Swagelok tube fitting
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Not recommended for panel mounting. Bottom port of all 3-way valves is 1/4 in. female NPT.

83 and H83 Series Handles
Black phenolic handles are standard. Colored phenolic, oval, and 316 stainless steel bar handles are available. To order, add a handle designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-83KF2-RD
Handle Black phenolic Blue phenolic Green phenolic Orange phenolic Red phenolic Yellow phenolic Stainless steel bar Oval Designator -BK -BL -GR -OG -RD -YW -SH -K
83 Series Vent Options

A downstream or upstream ball vent is available in 83 series 2-way valves. The vent port in the ball does not intersect the main flow passage, ensuring no leakage of system media from the vent port. When the valve is open, flow is straight through. The pressure rating with a ball vent is reduced to 500 psig (34.4 bar).
Downstream (DV) Vent

When a downstream-vented valve is closed, full shutoff occurs at the upstream seat. Downstream system media passes through the vent hole in the ball trunnion and vents to atmosphere through the bottom of the trunnion. To order, insert DV into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-83KDVF2
Handle Kits
Handle kits contain a handle and set screw.
Standard black phenolic handle kit ordering number: PH-5K-83-BK To order handles in other colors, replace -BK in the kit ordering number with a handle designator. Example: PH-5K-83-RD Oval handles are available factory assembled only. Stainless steel bar handle kit ordering number: SS-5K-83
Upstream (UV) Vent

When an upstream-vented valve is closed, full shutoff occurs at the downstream seat. Upstream system media passes through the vent hole in the ball trunnion and vents to atmosphere through the bottom of the trunnion. To order, insert UV into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-83KUVF2
83 Series Seal Kits

Seal kits contain components of the same materials as new components. See Materials of Construction, page 4, or Low-Temperature Service, page 9. For a complete ordering number, add a seat material designator to a basic seal kit ordering number. Example: SS-9K-83K
Seat Material PEEK PCTFE PTFE Reinforced nylon Basic Seal Kit Ordering Number SS-9K-83 SS-9K-L83 SS-9K-83X SS-9K-L83X Designator P K T N
H83 Series Seal Kits

Seal kits contain components of the same materials as new components. See Materials of Construction, page 5, or Low-Temperature Service, page 9.
instructions stem O -rings backup rings stem bearing Kit Contents Instructions, O-rings, stem bearing, ball, seat subassemblies (seats and seat carriers), seat springs, end screw seals, lubricant, and lubricant Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Instructions, stem, O-rings, backup rings, bearings, ball, seat subassemblies (seats and seat carriers), seat springs, end screw seals, lubricant, and lubricant MSDS ball seat springs end screw seals lubricant lubricant MSDS. Valve Series H83 2-way Lowtemperature H83 2-way H83 3-way Lowtemperature H83 3-way Seal Kit Ordering Number SS-9K-H83P SS-9K-LH83P SS-9K-H83XP SS-9K-LH83XP
Valve Series 83 2-way Lowtemperature 83 2-way 83 3-way Lowtemperature 83 3-way
seat subassemblies (seats and seat carriers)
Seal kit ordering numbers specify stainless steel material. For alloy 400 material, replace SS with M for in the basic ordering number. Example: M-9K-83K
Service Options
83 and H83 Series Low-Temperature Service
Trunnion ball valves for low-temperature service, with a temperature rating of 40 to 200F (40 to 93C), are available. Low-temperature valves have low-temperature Buna C O-rings. All other materials and ratings are the same as those of standard valves. To order a valve for low-temperature service, insert L into the valve ordering number. Example: SS-L83KF2 Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for information about valves for service down to 65F (53C).
L83 Series Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Material Seat Material Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) to 100 (37) 150 (65) 200 (93) 6000 (413) 316 SS PCTFE, Nylon, PEEK Alloy 400 PCTFE, Nylon, PEEK PTFE 5000 (344) 1500 (103)
PTFE 1500 (103)
See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page 3.
LH83 Series Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Material End Connections Temperature, F (C) 40 (40) to 100 (37) 10 000 (689) 150 (65) 200 (93) F2, F4, S4, S6MM S10MM 8400 (578) 316 SS S6, S8MM 7500 (516) S8 6700 (461) S12MM 6600 (454)
Working Pressure, psig (bar) See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page 3.
83 Series Valves With ECE R110-Type Approval

40 to 185F (40 to 85C) Temperature Range
Stainless steel 83 series 2-way and 3-way valves with PEEK seats and Buna C O-rings are available with ECE R110-type approval for use in alternative fuel service.
83 Series Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)

To order optional cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C for 83 series valves with PCTFE, PTFE, or reinforced nylon seats, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-83KF2-SC11
To order, add -11354 to a PEEK-seated, low-temperature valve ordering number. Examples: SS-L83PS8-11354 SS-L83XPS8-11354

40 to 248F (40 to 120C) Temperature Range

Stainless steel 83 series 2-way and 3-way valves with PEEK seats and low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM O-rings are available with ECE R110-type approval for use in alternative fuel service.
To order, add -21265 to a PEEK-seated, low-temperature valve ordering number. Examples: SS-L83PS8-21265 SS-L83XPS8-21265
10
Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Service Designator HT LT NF Temperature Range F (C) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 0 to 400 (17 to 204) 40 to 200 (40 to 93) 20 to 200 (28 to 93) 200 (13.7) Maximum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar) At 100F At Maximum (37C) Temperature 165 (11.3) 100 (6.8) 165 (11.3) 165 (11.3)
83 Series Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure

Actuation Modes System Pressure psig (bar) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) Double Acting Single 90 Actuation 83 2-way 31 33 30 (2.1) 35 (2.5) 15 (1.1) 20 (1.4) 180 Actuation 83 3-way 51 53 35 (2.5) 45 (3.2) 15 (1.1) 20 (1.4) 60 (4.2) 85 (5.8) 25 (1.8) 35 (2.5) 75 (5.2) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) 75 (5.2) 50 (3.5) 60 (4.2) 20 (1.4) 25 (1.8) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) 65 (4.5) 75 (5.2) 80 (5.6) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) Dual Spring Return Single Dual
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic actuators are compact, lightweight, easily mountable, and can be operated with standard shop air. For technical data, including pressuretemperature ratings and materials of construction, see the Swagelok Rack and Pinion Pneumatic Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-06-87.
Valve Series
Actuator Model
90 actuation required for 2-way valves; 180 actuation required for 3-way valves.
H83 Series Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure

Actuation Modes System Pressure psig (bar) 1 500 (103) 31 H83 2-way 33 6 000 (413) 10 000 (689) 1 500 (103) 6 000 (413) 10 000 (689) 1 500 (103) 51 H83 3-way 53 6 000 (413) 10 000 (689) 1 500 (103) 6 000 (413) 10 000 (689) Double Acting Single 90 Actuation 35 (2.5) 45 (3.2) 55 (3.8) 15 (1.1) 20 (1.4) 25 (1.8) 180 Actuation 35 (2.5) 45 (3.2) 55 (3.8) 15 (1.1) 20 (1.4) 25 (1.8) 60 (4.2) 85 (5.9) 100 (6.9) 25 (1.8) 35 (2.5) 45 (3.2) 75 (5.2) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) 80 (5.6) 75 (5.2) 60 (4.2) 85 (5.9) 100 (6.9) 25 (1.8) 35 (2.5) 45 (3.2) 75 (5.2) 70 (4.9) 75 (5.2) 80 (5.6) 75 (5.2) 85 (5.9) 90 (6.3) Dual Spring Return Single Dual
Valve Series
Actuator Model
90 actuation required for 2-way valves; 180 actuation required for 3-way valves.
11
Pneumatic Actuators
0.34 (8.6) mounting holes O N M K L G J H E F
B Q 1/8 in. NPT A 0.34 (8.6) mounting holes
1/8 in. NPT
G C
Actuator Model 31 (90) 51 (180) 33 (90) 53 (180)

(80.5)
B 0.34
(8.6)
C 2.00
(50.8)
D 1.75
(44.4)
E 3.04
(77.2)
F 1.73
(43.9)
G 1.31
(33.3)
H 0.60
(15.2)
J 0.52
(13.2)
K 0.31
(7.9)
L 1.46
(37.1)
M 1.25
(31.8)
N (D) 4.09
(104)
O (S) 4.91
(125)
Q 1.89
(48.0)
4.08
(104)
0.48
(12.2)
2.31
(58.7)
4.07
(103)
2.32
(58.9)
1.75
(44.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.81
(20.6)
0.44
(11.2)
2.16
(54.9)
1.56
(39.6)
5.89
(150)
7.86
(200)
2.56
(65.0)
(D) = double acting; (S) = spring return.
1. Add an actuator model designator to the valve ordering number. Example: SS-83KF2-31 2. Add a factory assembly actuation mode designator. Example: SS-83KF2-31D 3. For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one pneumatic actuator), add DM to the ordering number. Example: SS-83KF2-31DDM 4. Add an actuator service designator, if needed, from the table on page 10. Example: SS-83KF2-31DDMHT
Valve Series 83, H83 2-way 83, H83 3-way
Actuator Model 31 (90) 33 (90) 51 (180) 53 (180)
Designator -31 -33 -51 -53
Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Number MS-MB-83-131 MS-MB-83-133 MS-MB-83-131 MS-MB-83-133 Field Assembly Designator -DA -SR -SR -SR
Actuation Mode Double acting Normally closed spring return Normally open spring return 3-way valve spring return
Factory Assembly Designator D C O S

1. Identify the required actuator model designator. Example: -31 2. Replace the dash in the actuator designator with MS-1. Example: MS-131 3. Add a field assembly actuation mode designator. Example: MS-131-DA 4. Add a dash and an actuator service designator, if needed, from the table on page 10. Example: MS-131-DA-HT
Mounting Bracket Kits Mounting bracket kits must be ordered separately. Kits contain:
316 stainless steel mounting bracket coupling roll pin set screw instructions.
Dual assemblies require two mounting bracket kits.
Pneumatic Actuators
Solenoid Valves

ISO 5211-compliant pneumatic actuators are available. See the ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators for Swagelok Ball Valves catalog, MS-02-337. Mounting bracket kits for ISO 5211-compliant actuators are available. See the Actuated Ball Valve Selection GuideISO 5211-Compliant Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits, MS-02-136.
Position Indicators
provide visual status of a valve. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Limit Switches
Electric Actuators
Electric actuators are available. See the Swagelok Electric Actuators, 141 and 142 Series catalog, MS-01-35.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company XylanTM Whitford Corporation 2007, 2008, 2010 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI January 2010, R9 MS-01-166
www.swagelok.com
TUBE FACING TOOL
USERS MANUAL
The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty

Swagelok hereby warrants to the purchaser of this Product that the non-electrical components of the Product shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for the life of the Product. All electrical components installed in or on the Product are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for twelve months from the date of purchase. The purchasers remedies shall be limited to replacement and installation of any parts that fail through a defect in material or workmanship. MANUFACTURER SPECIFICALLY DISAVOWS ANY OTHER REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WARRANTY, OR LIABILITY RELATING TO THE CONDITION OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL SWAGELOK BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER, OR ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
Table of Contents
Safety Precautions and Information .........................................................................................................2 Identification of Components....................................................................................................................3 Setup Installing or Relocating the Cutting Insert....................................................................................4 Cutting Insert Position Chart........................................................................................................5 Collet Change and Installation.....................................................................................................7 Operation Motor Settings for Non-Guarded Trigger .....................................................................................8 Cutting Techiniques with Speed and Feed Charts ......................................................................9 Facing the Tube.........................................................................................................................10 Bench Mount Stand................................................................................................................................12 Special Adjustment Features .................................................................................................................13 Spare Parts and Accessories.................................................................................................................14 Ordering Information Collets and Inserts ...............................................................................................14 Assembly Drawing .................................................................................................................................15 CE Declaration of Conformity.................................................................................................................16 Warranty Information Form ....................................................................................................................17
About The Tube Facing Tool

Installing or Relocating The Cutting Insert
Your facing tool has been shipped with a cutting insert in position number 1. If you will be facing tubing larger than 3/4 in. (18 mm) O.D. you will need to relocate the cutting insert to a different pocket. Cutting insert life is dependent upon tube material, tube diameter, depth of cut, and operational technique.
Collet Change and Installation

The tube facing tool cuts a wide range of diameters through the use of tube collets. Two collet halves per size are required and must be ordered separately. (See Chart B on page 14)
Motor Settings
The facing tool is driven by a heavy-duty industrial motor. There are three control knobs that must be set properly to maximize the performance of the facing tool.
Facing The Tube

As you prepare to face your tubing there are some factors to consider. The method used to cut the tubing may affect the amount of material needed to be removed. The facing tool has been designed to allow for a random amount of material removal if finished length is not critical. You can also control the amount of material removed if the finished length is important.
Bench Mount Stand

The bench mount stand does not require any tool to remove or secure the facing tool. The base plate will accommodate permanent bench mounting.
Spare Parts and Accessories

Spare part and accessories can be ordered as needed through your Swagelok sales representative.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following is a list of general safety guidelines to be considered when operating this tool. Standard safe machining practices should always be observed when operating this tool.
Before operating this tool, read this Users Manual completely. Inspect tool, cord, and accessories for damage prior to operating. Safety guards have been installed for your protection. DO NOT OPERATE TOOL WITHOUT SAFETY GUARDS IN PLACE. The motor should always be disconnected from the power source whenever servicing the unit or changing cutting inserts, collets, or other components. Refer to the operating/instruction manual for specific safety and operating instructions for the motor included with this tool.
SAFETY INFORMATION
WARNING!
MOVING PARTS. Keep hands, loose clothing, and long hair away from rotating or moving parts. Unplug equipment prior to adjusting or servicing. Serious injury can occur.
WARNING!
ELECTRICAL SHOCK. Read all enclosed safety instructions and manuals prior to operation.
WARNING!
KEEP DRY. Equipment and components are not waterproof.
WARNING!
FIRE OR EXPLOSION. Do not use equipment in a combustible or explosive atmosphere.
WARNING!
EYE PROTECTION. Eye protection must be worn while operating or working near the equipment.
CAUTION!
EAR PROTECTION. Ear protection may be required if operating or working near the equipment for prolonged periods of time
Identification of Components
R/Min/Speed Adjustment 2 Spare Torx Screws (For use with cutting inserts)
Hi/Low Motor Setting
Trigger
Spindle Feed Handle
The following items are included with your facing tool:

A) Shipping/storage case with foam B) Facing tool C) Large storage case for collets and tools
hex keys Torx driver bent needle-nosed pliers
D) Small storage case for extra cutting inserts and

hardware
E D C A
E) Bench stand (optional) F) Users Manual
Torx is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.
Installing or Relocating the Cutting Insert

Make sure motor is unplugged. To relocate the cutting insert: 1. Open top half of fixture and swing completely out of the way as follows: a) Turn lever to 12 oclock position. (See Figure-1) b) Firmly press down on top half of fixture. (See Figure-2) c) Release latch. (See Figure-3) d) Swing open top half. (See Figure-4)
Figure-1 Lever Chip Deflector
Latch
Cutting Insert Figure-2
Figure-3
Figure-4
Installing or Relocating the Cutting Insert (Continued)

2. Loosen chip deflector Torx screw. (See Figure-5) 3. Rotate chip deflector out of the way. (See Figure-6) 4. Loosen cutting insert Torx screw and remove cutting insert. (See Figure-7) 5. Install new cutting insert in appropriate pocket in spindle. Clear pocket of chips and debris before installing cutting insert. (Refer to Chart A below) 6. Reposition chip deflector and tighten. (See Figure-8)

Figure-5
Figure-6
SWAGELOK
INSERT POSITION CHART
Pocket Number 1 2 3* 4* Range Diameter in up to 3/4 7/8 to 1 1/4 1 5/16 to 1 3/4 1-7/8 to 2 Range Diameter mm up to 20 20 to 33 33 to 50 50 to 52 Secondary Insert Pocket Number Not Required Not Required 1 2 Figure-7
CHART A
*See Special Instructions and Figure-10 on page 6.
Figure-8
Installing or Relocating the Cutting Insert (Continued)

7. You may want to install the collet halves at this point while fixture is open. (See Figure-9 and refer to page 7) 8. Close top half of fixture and secure by following Steps 1.a) and 1.b) and secure latch. (Refer to page 4) NOTE: Additonal Torx screws for the cutting inserts are included in the housing. (Refer to tool photo on page 3)
Figure-9
Special Instructions
* When facing tubing with a cutting insert in pocket 3 or 4, it is recommended that a cutting insert be installed in the adjacent pocket. EXAMPLE: When facing 2 in. O.D. tubing with a cutting insert in Pocket 4, a cutting insert should be installed in Pocket 2. The secondary cutting insert blocks the opening and helps prevent any chips from entering the I.D. of the tube. The secondary insert can be a used cutting insert. Do not use the facing tool with cutting inserts installed in all four pockets, or in the following combinations: 1 and 2; 2 and 3; 3 and 4.
Figure-10
Secondary Insert Cutting Insert Insert Pocket Chip Deflector
Collet Change and Installation

1. Open top half of fixture. (See Figures 1 thru 4 on page 4) 2. Install collet halves. (See Figure-11) 3. Secure with socket head cap screw. (See Figure-12) 4. Close top half of fixture and secure by following Steps 1.a) and 1.b) and securing latch. (Refer to page 4)
Figure-11
Figure-12
Motor Settings for Non-Guarded Trigger

1. Set Hi/Low motor setting (See Figure-13) and R/Min (See Figure-14) according to the speed tables found on page 9. Rotate clockwise to go from Turtle to Rabbit (Low to Hi) and counter-clockwise to go from Rabbit to Turtle (Hi to Low). Do not force the switch into or out of gear. If you encounter difficulty engaging or disengaging the switch, rotate the spindle simultaneously while turning the switch. 2. Verify Hammer Switch is in drill mode as shown in Figure-15. 3. Verify reverse switch is in forward mode as shown in Figure-16. NOTE: Operating the Tool with the motor in either mode can cause reduced cutting insert life and could cause damage to the Facing Tool.
Figure-13 Hi/Low Motor Setting
Figure-14 R/Min/Speed Adjustment
Figure-15 Hammer Switch
Figure-16 Reverse Switch
Motor Settings for Guarded Trigger

1. Set torque adjustment to highest setting [+]. (See Figure-13) 2. Set Hi/Low motor setting (See Figure-14) and R/Min (See Figure-15) according to the speed tables found on page 9. Rotate clockwise to go from Turtle to Rabbit (Low to Hi) and counterclockwise to go from Rabbit to Turtle (Hi to Low). Do not force the switch into or out of gear. If you encounter difficulty engaging or disengaging the switch, rotate the spindle simultaneously while turning the switch.
Figure-13 Torque Adjustment
Figure-14 Hi/Low Motor Setting
Figure-15 R/Min/Speed Adjustment
Motor Settings for Guarded Trigger
(Continued)
Motor Settings and Cutting Techniques

This information is for reference only. Actual settings and cutting techniques may vary from these charts depending on the chemical, physical and mechanical properties of the tubing.
Stainless 316L / 316LV
Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >1400 800 to 1400 450 to 700 350 to 500 Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Alloy 400
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting 800 to 1000 600 to 900 450 to 700 350 to 500 Hi/Low Motor Setting
Continuous feed to desired depth. Intermittent feed will help to break chips on deep cut.
Gradual feed may be required to minimize chip thickness. Take caution not to overheat cut zone. If chips are blue, reduce speed and/or feed.
Low Manganese / Low Sulfur Stainless

Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting 600 to 1000 500 to 800 350 to 600 250 to 400 Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Carbon Steel
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >1500 1000 to 1500 600 to 900 450 to 700 Hi/Low Motor Setting
Use very gradual feed to eliminate deformation of material before the material can sheer.
Titanium
Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >1800 1200 to 1500 800 to 1400 600 to 1000 Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Alloy 600
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting 550 to 900 450 to 800 350 to 700 250 to 600 Hi/Low Motor Setting
Caution should be taken not to overheat cut zone. If chips are blue, reduce speed and/or feed.
Continuous feed, take caution not to overheat cut zone.
*Instructions For Facing 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Tubing
1. Insert the tubing approximately 0.05 to 0.06 in. (1.3 to 1.5 mm) past the end of the collet and lock into place. 2. Set motor settings according to appropriate chart above. 3. Fully depress the trigger. 4. Advance the spindle slowly towards the tubing so that when contact is made, the cutting insert lightly touches the tubing.
9
5. Use short interrupted cuts to face the tubing. This seems to achieve a better result than a continuous uninterrupted cut. 6. Remove all chips after each piece of tubing is faced. 7. A very small OD burr (approximately 0.005 in.) may be present after facing the tubing. This burr will be consumed into the weld bead or it can be removed with a deburring tool.
Motor Settings for Non-Guarded Trigger
(Continued)
Motor Settings and Cutting Techniques

This information is for reference only. Actual settings and cutting techniques may vary from these charts depending on the chemical, physical and mechanical properties of the tubing.
Stainless 316L / 316LV
Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >D B to D D to F C to D Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Alloy 400
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting E to G E to G D to F C to D Hi/Low Motor Setting
Gradual feed may be required to minimize chip thickness. Take caution not to overheat cut zone. If chips are blue, reduce speed and/or feed.
Low Manganese / Low Sulfur Stainless

Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting E to G D to F C to E B to D Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Carbon Steel
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >D C to D E to G D to F Hi/Low Motor Setting
Use very gradual feed to eliminate deformation of material before the material can sheer.
Titanium
Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2 Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting >E C to D B to D B to C Hi/Low Motor Setting Tube Diameter in 1/8* to 1/4 5/16 to 3/8 1/2 to 3/4 7/8 to 2
Alloy 600
Tube Diameter mm 3 to 6 8 to 10 12 to 18 20 to 52 RPM Setting D to G D to G C to F B to E Hi/Low Motor Setting
Caution should be taken not to overheat cut zone. If chips are blue, reduce speed and/or feed.
Continuous feed, take caution not to overheat cut zone.
*Instructions For Facing 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Tubing
1. Insert the tubing approximately 0.05 to 0.06 in. (1.3 to 1.5 mm) past the end of the collet and lock into place. 2. Set motor settings according to appropriate chart above. 3. Fully depress the trigger. 4. Advance the spindle slowly towards the tubing so that when contact is made, the cutting insert lightly touches the tubing.
9
5. Use short interrupted cuts to face the tubing. This seems to achieve a better result than a continuous uninterrupted cut. 6. Remove all chips after each piece of tubing is faced. 7. A very small OD burr (approximately 0.005 in.) may be present after facing the tubing. This burr will be consumed into the weld bead or it can be removed with a deburring tool.
Facing the Tube

Cutting Technique: When facing the tube, there are several techniques that can be employed. The two most common are one long continuous cut, and short interrupted cuts. The type of cut used may be determined by material type, material hardness, tube diameter, etc. The cutting technique used can also affect the quality of the face, as well as tool bit life. (Refer to page 9) Operating Tip: Chips will begin to accumulate in the spindle after facing of tubing. Bent needle-nose pliers have been supplied to aid in the removal of these chips, as needed. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS TO REMOVE CHIPS! (See Figure-17)
Figure-17
Random Material Removal

1. Rotate lever to 12 oclock position to open the collets. (See Figure-18) 2. Slowly insert tubing until it gently contacts the spindle/cutting insert. Withdraw tube slightly so that it does not contact the cutting insert.
Figure-18
CAUTION: DO NOT START MOTOR IF TUBE IS CONTACTING SPINDLE/CUTTING INSERT.

3. Rotate lever clockwise to secure tubing. Tubing will be held securely provided enough pressure (force) is applied to the lever. (See Figure-19) 4. Before operating the facing tool, make sure motor settings are correct and plastic safety guard is in place. (See Figure-20 on page 11)
WARNING: A clear plastic safety shield has been attached for your protection. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHIELD. Do not operate tool if shield is damaged or missing. Refer to page 15 for ordering information.
Figure-19
5. Fully depress trigger. (See Figure-21 on page 11) 6. When motor achieves full R/Min, begin to slowly advance the spindle with the spindle feed handle until the tool bit makes contact with the tube. 7. Continue to advance the spindle until desired amount of material is removed. 8. Return handle to home position. 9. Release the trigger to stop the motor and spindle rotation. 10. Release tubing by turning the lever to the 12 oclock position. 11. Remove tubing and insert a new piece of tubing to begin the process over again.
10
Facing The Tube
(Continued)
Figure-20
Controlled Material Removal

1. Rotate lever to 12 oclock position to open the collets. (See Figure-18 on page 10) 2. Slowly insert tubing until it gently contacts the spindle/cutting insert.
CAUTION: DO NOT START MOTOR IF TUBE IS CONTACTING SPINDLE/CUTTING INSERT.

3. With the fixture not secured, slowly advance the spindle and begin to push the tubing back out of the collets. NOTE: Rotate handle clockwise from the 0 position. (See Figure-22) 4. Continue to advance the spindle from the 0 mark until the stationary line lines up with [.00]. (See Figure-23) 5. Rotate lever clockwise to secure tubing. At the same time, the spindle can be returned to the home position 0 mark. The tubing will be held securely provided enough pressure (force) is applied to the lever. (See Figure-19 on page 10) 6. Before operating the facing tool, make sure motor settings are correct and plastic safety guard is in place. (See Figure-20)
WARNING: A clear plastic safety shield has been attached for your protection. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHIELD. Do not operate tool if shield is damaged or missing. Refer to page 15 for ordering information.
Figure-21
7. Fully depress trigger. (See Figure-21) 8. When motor achieves full R/Min, begin to slowly advance the spindle with the spindle feed handle until the tool bit makes contact with the tube. 9. Each graduation on the feed handle represents 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) spindle advance. Continue to rotate handle to advance spindle until desired amount of material is removed. 10. Return handle to home position. 11. Release the trigger to stop the motor and spindle rotation. 12. Release tubing by turning the lever to the 12 oclock position. 13. Remove tubing and insert a new piece of tubing to begin the process over again.
Figure-22
Figure-23
11
Bench Mount Stand

(See Figures-24 thru 27)
Figure-24
1. Assemble vertical piece to base with the two (2) screws provided and secure tightly. 2. Release latch to open top half. 3. Swing top half open. 4. Place barrel of housing into bracket. Align slot in housing with face of vertical plate. 5. Close top half. 6. Secure with latch.
Figure-25
NOTE: Base plate has holes provided for mounting to a bench top.
Figure-26
Figure-27
12
Special Adjustment Features

Fixture Set Screw
There is a set screw located in the top of the hinge of the fixture (See Figure-28). This screw should only require use if you experience problems securing the tubing. If the tubing is undersized and rotates in the collet, the set screw can be turned clockwise. If the tubing is oversized and the latch will not secure the tubing, the set screw can be turned counter-clockwise. If you are still unable to secure the tubing properly after making these adjustments, then the tubing is outside of the size range for the collets.
Figure-28
Motor/Housing Set Screw

There is a set screw located in the underside of the facing tool housing (See Figure-29). The set screw should only be used if the motor and housing are separated, such as if the motor were to be replaced. An adjustment to this set screw may be needed if there is a change to the orientation of the motor handle and spindle feed handle. This set screw provides a centering adjustment between the motor and the housing.
Figure-29
Set Screw Hinge
Housing
Set Screw
13
Spare Parts/Accessories and Ordering Numbers
Torx Drive T-15

(SWS-EP-14108)
Bent Needle Nose Pliers

(SWS-14410)
Hex Keys
(0.050 in. thru 3/16 in.) (CWS-HEX-SET)
Torx Screws
(13329)
Items shown are included with your Facing Tool.
COLLET TABLE
Nominal Outside Diameter
(inches)
Size Designator 02 03 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 32
Nominal Outside Diameter

(mm)
Size Designator 03 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 35 40 52
1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/2 2
3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 25 28 35 40 52
Cutting Inserts
(SWS-232-BIT-HST)
CHART B
Add the designator as a suffix to the Collet Ordering Number. EXAMPLE: CWS-20UCI-04, CWS-20UCI-12mm
14
Replacement Parts Illustration
15
For proper assembly and operation, not all components will be sold separately. Some items will only be available as sub-assemblies.
16
SWAGELOK TUBE FACING TOOL

Warranty Information Form
IMPORTANT
Please complete and return this form to your Swagelok Representative for warranty activation. Date of Delivery: Tube Facing Tool Model Number: Serial Number: Company Name: Distributor Where Purchased:
Market Area (check all that apply)

Semiconductor Oil & Gas Power Other (Please describe) Bioprocess / Pharmaceutical Analytical Instrumentation
User Type (check all that apply)

O.E.M. Fabricator Contractor Other (Please describe) Maintenance Department University or Research and Development Lab Operator Training Program
Intended Use (check all that apply)

Maintenance New Construction Research and Development Other (Please describe) Distributor Use (Rental, Demonstration, Service) Cleanroom Training Class:
1999, 2004 Swagelok Company, All Rights Reserved
17
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 1999, 2004 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., PPI August 2004, R4 SWS-MANUAL-232EP-E
www.swagelok.com
Tu b e Supports
Pipe, tube, and hose supports 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to 25 mm outside diameter 316 stainless steel, carbon steel, and polypropylene Wall- and channel-mounted options Single and multiple lines
Tube Supports
P Clamp Supports
Contents
P Clamp Supports
Page
are an economical way to support tube or hose runs in a
variety of sizes
install easily to a wall or equipment frame using a single
screw or bolt.
Technical Data
Component Clamp Cushion Material 316 SS/AMS 554 Black EPDM/ SAE J00BC715 C1, C0
0.61
Temperature Rating 40 to 1F

(40 to 100C)
Tube Support Strips

Page 3
(15.5)
Cushioned Clamp Tube Supports

Page 3
0.
(5.6)
0.7
(6.9)
dia 0.03
(0.81) (1.7)
0.5
Bolted Plastic Clamp Supports

Page 4

A, Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 mm 6 10 1 0 5 Ordering Number SS-TBP4 SS-TBP6 SS-TBP8 SS-TBP1 SS-TBP16 B in. (mm) 0.53 (13.5) 0.59 (15.0) 0.65 (16.5) 0.84 (1.3) 0.95 (4.1)
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for additional sizes.
Tube Supports
Tube Support Strips

organize multiple tubing or hose runs offer push-in installation install easily to a wall or equipment frame using two screws
A D F E dia C
or bolts.
Technical Data
Component Tube support strip Material Polypropylene Temperature Rating 40 to 00F
(40 to 93C)

Maximum Number of Tubing and Hose Channels 10 10 6
A Tube Size in. 1/4 3/8 1/ mm 10
Ordering Number MS-TSS-4 MS-TSS-6 MS-TSS-8
Dimensions in. (mm) B C D E F 4.50 0.50 4.05 0.18 0.31

(114) (143) (133) (1.7) (15.6) (3.6) (103) (131) (116) (4.6) (4.6) (6.1) (8.0) (11.0) (14.5)
5.6 0.61 5.15 0.18 0.43 5.5 0.93 4.56 0.4 0.57
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes.
Cushioned Clamp Tube Supports

D
B A
provide channel-mounted tube support dampen shock and vibration resist galvanic corrosion.

A, Tube Size Basic Ordering Number TBC4 TBC6 TBC8 TBC1 TBC16 Dimensions, in. (mm) B 0.7
(6.9)
Technical Data
Component Clamp Material Electro-dichromate finished carbon steel or 316 stainless steel Thermoplastic polypropylene-based elastomer Temperature Rating
in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
mm 10 0 5
C 0.98
(4.9)
D 0.6
(15.7)
50 to 75F
(45 to 135C)
0.33
(8.4)
1.13
(8.7)
0.8
(0.8)
Cushion
0.40
(10.)
1.34
(34.0)
0.94
(3.9)
0.5
(13.)
1.68
(4.7)
1.0
(30.5)
0.65
(16.5)
1.95
(49.5)
1.44
(36.6)
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes. Clamp fits any 1 5/8 in. mounting channel.
To order, select a basic ordering number and add a clamp material designator. Example: S-TBC4
Clamp Material Designator Electro-dichromate Sfinished carbon steel 316 stainless steel SS-
Tube Supports
Bolted Plastic Clamp Supports

absorb shock and vibration resist many chemicals and corrosives reduce stress on system components enhance system reliability resist ultraviolet light make system easily accessible for installation and
1 2 3
Single support kit
maintenance. Bolted plastic clamp supports offer versatility for mounting tubing and pipe. Three configurations single, stacking, and twinare available. Bolted plastic clamp supports offer three mounting options:
Weld plate Mounting rail and rail nuts Strut nuts
4 5
Temperature Rating
to 194F (30 to 90C)
Stacking support kit
Component 1 Hex head support bolts 2 Cover plate 3 Support body 4 Lock plate 5 7/16 in. or 10 mm hex head stacking bolts 6 Weld nut 7 Weld plate 8 Mounting rail 9 Rail nut 10 Strut nut Material/Specification 304 SS 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS Virgin polypropylene 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS 304 SS 303 SS/DIN 1.4305 SS 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS 303 SS/DIN 1.4305 SS CF8M/DIN 1.4408 SS Zinc-plated steel
6 7
Weld plate mounting option
9 8
Mounting rail and rail nuts mounting option
316 stainless steel bolts and plates are available (see Options). Polyamide support bodies are available (see Options). 316 stainless steel strut nuts are available (see Options).
10
Strut nut mounting option
Tube Supports
Single-Support Kits
D E
Twin-Support Kits
D
B F A C B E C

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. For hose applications, consult your authorized Swagelok representative.
Pipe Kits Pipe Size A in. Ordering Number Tube Size A in. 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/ 304-S5-PP-1P 304-S5-PP-16P 304-S5-PP-0P 304-S6-PP-4P 1 1/ 304-S5-PP-4T 304-S6-PP-3T Twin Support 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 304-S1T-PP-4T 304-S1T-PP-6T 304-S3T-PP-8T 304-S3T-PP-1T 304-S3T-PP-16T 3 6 8 10 1 304-S1T-PP-6TM 304-S1T-PP-8TM 304-S1T-PP-10TM 304-S1T-PP-1TM 1.93
(49.0)
Tube Kits Tube Ordering Size A Number mm 6 8 10 1 15 16 18 0 5
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number Single Support 304-S1-PP-6TM 304-S1-PP-8TM 304-S1-PP-10TM 304-S1-PP-1TM 304-S3-PP-15TM 304-S3-PP-16TM 304-S3-PP-18TM 304-S3-PP-0TM 304-S3-PP-TM 304-S3-PP-5TM 5 .56
(65.0)
Group
304-S1-PP-4T 304-S1-PP-6T 304-S3-PP-8T 304-S3-PP-10T 304-S3-PP-1T 304-S3-PP-14T 304-S3-PP-16T 304-S5-PP-0T
1.30
(33.0)
0.51
(13.0)
1.34
(34.0)
0.79
(0.0)
1.06
(7.0)
1/
304-S3-PP-8P
1.61
(40.9)
0.67
(17.0)
1.89
(48.0)
1.30
(33.0)
1.38
(35.1)
1 1/4
1.14
(9.0)
.76
(70.1)
.05
(5.1)
.8
(57.9)
.84
(7.1)
1.8
(3.5)
3.39
(86.1)
.60
(66.0)
.60
(66.0)
1.50
(38.1)
0.53
(13.5)
1.4
(36.1)
0.79
(0.1)
0.73
(18.5)
.64
(67.1)
1.4
(36.1)
For overall height, add appropriate mounting option dimension. Threads for single fractional supports are 1/4-0, single metric supports are M6. Threads for group 1 twin supports are 1/4-0, group 3 twin supports are 5/16-18.
Single-Support Stacking Kit

You can stack up to three single bolted plastic clamp supports. The top support uses a cover plate. The lower support(s) uses a lock plate. To order a stacking support kit, add -ST to the single tube kit ordering number. Example: 304-S1-PP-4T-ST
Tube Supports
Mounting Configurations
To order a bolted plastic clamp system, choose from the three mounting options listed.
Weld Plate Mounting Option

Weld plates are available in standard and elongated
lengths.
Weld nuts are welded, not press fit, to the weld plate.
Identify the support kit group number listed in the table. Example: Group 1 Select the corresponding weld plate ordering number. Note: The Group number for the support kit and the weld kit must be the same. Example: 304-S1-WP
To order, select a support kit ordering number from the table on page 5. Example: 304-S1-PP-4T
Single Support Weld Plate
Standard weld plate
Twin Support Weld Plate
Elongated weld plate Top Top

D1 B 0.5 (6.4) dia A D C E B
Side
Side
A or A1
Weld Plate Ordering Information and Dimensions

Ordering Number Standard Group 1 3 5 6 Fractional 304-S1-WP 304-S3-WP 304-S5-WP 304-S6-WP 304-S6-WPE Metric 304-S1-WPM 304-S3-WPM Elongated Fractional Metric A A1 .5
(64.0)
Dimensions, in. (mm) B C D D1 1.97

(50.0)
Single Support Weld Plate 1.4 304-S1-WPE 304-S1-WPEM

(36.1)
304-S3-WPE 304-S5-WPE
304-S3-WPEM
1.97
(50.0)
3.07
(78.0)
.5 1.18
(30.0)
0.1
(3.0)
.83
(71.9)
3.94
(100)
(64.0)
3.87
(98.3)
3.46
(87.9)
4.57
(116)
3.94
(100)
1 3
304-S1T-WP 304-S3T-WP
304-S1T-WPM 304-S3T-WPM
Twin Support Weld Plate 1.46

(37.1)
0.1 1.18
(30.0) (3.0)
0.84
(1.3)
0.56
(14.)
.76
(70.1)
0.0
(5.1)
.04
(51.8)
0.45
(11.4)
Elongated weld plate only.
Tube Supports
Mounting Rail and Rail Nuts Mounting Option

Rail nuts can be added or removed anywhere along the
rail span.
Neoprene cap holds nuts and support body in place. Two rail nuts are required for single support kits;
one rail nut is required for twin support kits. To order, select a support kit ordering number. Example: 304-S1-PP-4T Then, select a mounting rail ordering number. Example: 303-S0-R-3.3 Then, select the corresponding (fractional or metric) rail nut ordering number. Example: pc SS-S0-RN
0.08
(.0) (8.4)
1.1
0.44
(11.)
Mounting Rail Ordering Information

Length, ft (m) 3.3 (1) 6.6 () Ordering Number 303-S0-R-3.3 303-S0-R-6.6
Rail Nuts Ordering Information

Group All 1 3 Ordering Number Fractional Metric SS-S0-RN SS-S0-RN SS-S3T-RN SS-S0-RNM SS-S0-RNM
Single (two nuts required) Twin (one nut required)
Strut Nuts Mounting Option

Strut nuts are for use on 1 5/8 in. (41.3 mm) strut rail
mounting systems.
Strut nuts can be added or removed anywhere along the
strut rail span.

Two strut nuts are required for single support kits;
0.06
(1.5)
one strut nut is required for twin. To order, select a support kit ordering number. Example: 304-S1-PP-4T Then, select the corresponding (fractional or metric) strut nut ordering number(s). Example: pc S-S0-SN
Strut Nuts Ordering Information

Group All 1 3 Ordering Number Fractional Metric SS-S0-SN SS-S0-SN SS-S3T-SN SS-S0-SNM SS-S0-SNM
Single (two nuts required) Twin (one nut required)
Options
Blind Support Body (Undrilled)
To order, replace the tube size designator in the support kit ordering number with BL. Example: 304-S1-PP-BL
Polyamide Support Body

A polyamide support body is available for use in temperatures from 40 to 84F (40 to 140C). To order, replace PP with PA in the support kit ordering number. Example: 304-S1-PA-4T
316 Stainless Steel Bolts and Plates

To order, replace 304 with 316 in the support kit ordering number. Examples: 316-S1-PP-4T 316-S1-WP
316 Stainless Steel Strut Nuts

To order, replace S with SS in the strut nuts ordering number. Example: SS-S0-SN
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 003, 005, 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI July 008, R10 MS-01-109
www.swagelok.com
Tubing Data
Contents
Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Tubing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Suggested Allowable Working Pressure Tables Carbon Steel Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Stainless Steel Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Copper Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Aluminum Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Alloy 400 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Alloy C-276 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Alloy 20 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Alloy 600 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Grade 2 Titanium Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SAF 2507 Super Duplex Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Alloy 825 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Alloy 625 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Elevated Temperature Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Tubing Material
Our suggested ordering instructions for each type of tubing are shown under the respective tables.
Tubing Outside Diameter Hardness

The key to selecting proper tubing for use with metal Swagelok tube ttings is that the tubing must be softer than the tting material. Swagelok tube fittings are designed to work properly with the tubing that is suggested in the ordering instructions. Swagelok stainless steel tube fittings have been repeatedly tested successfully with tubing with hardness up to 200 HV and 90 HRB.
Tubing Wall Thickness

The accompanying tables show working pressure ratings of tubing in a wide range of wall thicknesses. Except as noted, allowable pressure ratings are calculated from S values as specified by ASME B31.3, Process Piping. Swagelok tube fittings have been repeatedly tested in both the minimum and maximum wall thicknesses shown. Swagelok tube fittings are not recommended for tube wall thicknesses outside the ranges shown in the accompanying tables for each size.
Tubing Selection
Proper selection, handling, and installation of tubing, when combined with proper selection of Swagelok tube fittings, are essential to reliable tubing systems. The following variables should be considered when ordering tubing for use with Swagelok tube fittings:
Surface finish Material Hardness Wall thickness.
Tubing Handling
Good handling practices can greatly reduce scratches on tubing and protect the good surface finish that reliable tube manufacturers supply.
Tubing should never be dragged out of a tubing rack or
across a rough surface.

Tube cutters or hacksaws should be sharp. Do not take
deep cuts with each turn of the cutter or stroke of the saw.
Tube ends should be deburred. This helps to ensure that
Tubing Surface Finish

Many ASTM specifications cover the above requirements, but they often are not very detailed on surface finish. For example, ASTM A450, a general tubing specification, reads:
11. Straightness and Finish 11.1 Finished tubes shall be reasonably straight and have smooth ends free of burrs. They shall have a workmanlike finish. Surface imperfections (Note) may be removed by grinding, provided that a smooth curved surface is maintained, and the wall thickness is not decreased to less than that permitted by this or the product specification. The outside diameter at the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so removed.
Note: An imperfection is any discontinuity or irregularity found in the tube.
the tubing will go all the way through the ferrules without damaging the ferrule sealing edge.
Tubing Data
Gas Service
Gases (air, hydrogen, helium, nitrogen, etc.) have very small molecules that can escape through even the most minute leak path. Some surface defects on the tubing can provide such a leak path. As tube outside diameter (OD) increases, so does the likelihood of a scratch or other surface defect interfering with proper sealing. The most successful connection for gas service will occur if all installation instructions are carefully followed and the heavier wall thicknesses of tubing on the accompanying tables are selected. A heavy wall tube resists ferrule action more than a thin wall tube, allowing the ferrules to coin out minor surface imperfections. A thin wall tube offers less resistance to ferrule action during installation, reducing the chance of coining out surface defects, such as scratches. Within the applicable suggested allowable working pressure table, select a tube wall thickness whose working pressure is outside of the shaded areas.
Tubing Installation
Fractional, in. T Tube OD L
T
Metric, mm T Tube OD L 3 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 34 40 46 50 54 63 80 32 19 21 23 25 31
1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4
1/2 23/32 3/4 13/16 7/8 15/16 1 3/16 1 1/4 1 5/16 1 1/2 2 2 13/32 3 1/4
T L
Tube OD Required straight tube length (see table)
5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
R Radius of tubing bend
Required straight tube length.
Tubing properly selected and handled, when combined with the quality of Swagelok fittings, will give you leak-tight systems. Properly installed on such tubing, Swagelok fittings provide reliable service under a wide variety of fluid applications. When installing fittings near tube bends, there must be a sufficient straight length of tubing to allow the tube to be bottomed in the Swagelok fitting (see tables). For maximum assurance of reliable performance, use Swagelok tube fittings assembled in accordance with catalog instructions, and use properly selected and handled highquality tubingsuch as provided by Swagelok.
Hydraulic Swaging Unit

When installing carbon steel or stainless steel Swagelok tube fittings over 1 in. (25 mm), a Swagelok hydraulic swaging unit must be used. This unit provides sufficient pre-swaging of the ferrules onto the tubing for 1 1/4, 1 1/2 and 2 in. and 28, 30, 32, 38, and 50 mm Swagelok tube fittings. Ask your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for a demonstration.
Suggested Allowable Pressure Tables

Figure and tables are for reference only. No implication is made that these values can be used for design work. Applicable codes and practices in industry should be considered. ASME Codes are the successor to and replacement of ASA Piping Codes.
All pressures are calculated from equations in ASME Calculations are based on maximum OD and minimum wall
thickness, except as noted in individual tables. Example: 1/2 in. OD 0.035 in. wall stainless steel tubing purchased to ASTM A269: OD Tolerance 0.005 in. / Wall Thickness 10 % Calculations are based on 0.505 in. OD tubing. 0.0315 in. wall
B31.3, Process Piping. See factors for calculating working pressures in accordance with ASME B31.1, Power Piping.
No allowance is made for corrosion or erosion.
Tubing Data
Suggested Allowable Working Pressure for Carbon Steel Tubing

Table 1Fractional Carbon Steel Tubing
Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 15 700 psi (108 200 kPa) for ASTM A179 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3. Multiply carbon steel rating by 0.85 for working pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 0.028 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 0.148 0.165 0.180 0.220 Working Pressure, psig Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 8000 10 200 5100 6 600 9600 3700 4 800 7000 9600 3 700 5500 7500 3 100 4500 6200 2 300 3200 4500 5900 1 800 2600 3500 4600 5300 2100 2900 3700 4300 5100 1800 2400 3200 3700 4300 1500 2100 2700 3200 3700 4100 1600 2100 2500 2900 3200 3600 4000 4600 5000 1800 2000 2400 2600 2900 3300 3700 4100 5100 1500 1700 1900 2100 2400 2700 3000 3700 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 Swagelok Fitting Series 200 300 400 500 600 810 1010 1210 1410 1610 2000 2400 3200

High-quality, soft annealed seamless carbon steel hydraulic tubing, ASTM A179 or equivalent. Hardness 72 HRB (130 HV) or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Table 2Metric Carbon Steel Tubing

Allowable working pressures are based on equations from ASME B31.3 for DIN 2391 tubing, using a stress value of 1130 bar (16 400 psi) and tensile strength of 3400 bar (49 300 psi).
Tube Wall Thickness, mm Tube OD mm 3 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Working Pressure, bar Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 630 790 290 370 460 590 270 330 430 210 260 330 170 210 270 330 380 420 150 180 230 280 320 350 140 170 210 260 290 330 130 150 200 240 270 300 350 140 170 210 240 270 310 120 160 190 210 240 270 310 110 140 170 190 210 240 280 100 120 150 170 180 210 240 260 150 160 190 210 230 270 140 150 170 200 210 250 130 140 160 180 200 230 270 120 130 150 160 190 230 260 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8 Swagelok Fitting Series 3M0 6M0 8M0 10M0 12M0 14M0 15M0 16M0 18M0 20M0 22M0 25M0 28M0 30M0 32M0 38M0

High-quality, soft annealed carbon steel tubing, DIN 2391 or equivalent. Hardness 130 HV (72 HRB) or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending or flaring.
Tubing Data
Suggested Allowable Working Pressure for Stainless Steel Tubing

Table 3Fractional Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing
Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 20 000 psi (137 800 kPa) for ASTM A269 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3, except as noted. Multiply stainless steel rating by 0.94 for working pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1.
For Welded Tubing

For welded and drawn tubing, a derating factor must be applied for weld integrity: for double-welded tubing, multiply pressure rating by 0.85 for single-welded tubing, multiply pressure rating by 0.80.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/16 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 0.010 0.012 0.014 0.016 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 0.156 0.188 Swagelok Working Pressure, psig Fitting Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 5600 6800 8100 9400 12 000 100 8500 10 900 200 5400 7 000 10 200 300 4000 5 100 7 500 10 200 400 4 000 5 800 8 000 500 7500 3 300 4 800 6 500 600 2 600 3 700 5 100 6700 810 2 900 4 000 5200 6000 1010 2 400 3 300 4200 4900 5800 1210 2 000 2 800 3600 4200 4800 1410 2 400 3100 3600 4200 4700 1610 2400 2800 3300 3600 4100 4900 2000 2300 2700 3000 3400 4000 4900 2400 2000 2200 2500 2900 3600 3200 0.020 0.028
For higher pressures, see the Swagelok Medium-Pressure Fittings catalog, MS-02-335, or the Swagelok High-Pressure Fittings catalog, MS-01-34. Rating based on repeated pressure testing of the Swagelok tube fitting with a 4:1 design factor based upon hydraulic fluid leakage.

Fully annealed, high-quality (Type 304, 316, etc.) (seamless or welded and drawn) stainless steel hydraulic tubing, ASTM A269 or A213, or equivalent. Hardness 90 HRB (200 HV) or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring. Note: Certain austenitic stainless tubing has an allowable ovality tolerance double the OD tolerance and may not fit into Swagelok precision tube fittings.
Table 4 Metric Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing

Allowable working pressures are based on equations from ASME B31.3 for EN ISO 1127 tubing (D4, T4 tolerance for 3 to 12 mm; D4, T3 tolerance 14 to 50 mm), using a stress value of 1370 bar (20 000 psi) and tensile strength of 5170 bar (75 000 psi), except as noted. Multiply stainless steel rating by 0.94 for working pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, mm Tube OD mm 3 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 38 50 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 Working Pressure, bar Swagelok Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. Fitting (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 670 3M0 310 420 540 710 6M0 310 390 520 8M0 240 300 400 510 580 10M0 200 250 330 410 470 12M0 160 200 270 340 380 430 14M0 150 190 250 310 360 400 15M0 170 230 290 330 370 400 16M0 150 200 260 290 320 370 18M0 140 180 230 260 290 330 380 20M0 140 160 200 230 260 300 340 22M0 180 200 230 260 290 320 25M0 180 200 230 260 280 330 28M0 170 180 210 240 260 310 30M0 160 170 200 220 240 290 330 32M0 140 160 190 200 240 270 310 38M0 150 180 210 240 270 50M0 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.8
For Welded Tubing
For welded and drawn tubing, a derating factor must be applied for weld integrity: for double-welded tubing, multiply pressure rating by 0.85 for single-welded tubing, multiply pressure rating by 0.80.
Rating based on repeated pressure testing of the Swagelok tube fitting with a 4:1 design factor based upon hydraulic fluid leakage.

Fully annealed, high-quality (Type 304, 316, etc.) stainless steel tubing, EN ISO 1127 or equivalent. Hardness 200 HV (90 HRB) or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending or flaring.
Tubing Data
Suggested Allowable Working Pressure for Copper Tubing

Table 5Fractional Copper Tubing
Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 6000 psi (41 300 kPa) for ASTM B75 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.028 Tube OD in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 Working Pressure, psig Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 2700 3600 1800 2300 3400 1300 1600 2500 3500 1300 1900 2700 1000 1600 2200 800 1100 1600 2100 900 1200 1600 1900 700 1000 1300 1500 1800 600 800 1100 1300 1500 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 600 800 1000 1100 1300 1400 0.035 0.049 Swagelok Fitting Series 200 300 400 500 600 810 1010 1210 1410 1610 1810

High-quality, soft annealed seamless copper tubing, ASTM B75 or equivalent. Also soft annealed (Temper O) copper water tube, type K or type L to ASTM B88.
Suggested Allowable Working Pressure for Aluminum Tubing

Table 6Fractional Aluminum Tubing
Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 14 000 psi (96 500 kPa) for ASTM B210, Type 6061-T6 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3. Multiply aluminum rating by 0.85 for working pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 Working Pressure, psig Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 8600 5600 8000 4000 5900 3100 4600 2600 3700 1900 2700 3700 1500 2100 2900 1700 2400 3100 1500 2000 1300 1700 2300 2700 0.035 Swagelok Fitting Series 200 300 400 500 600 810 1010 1210 1410 1610

High-quality aluminum alloy drawn seamless tubing, ASTM B210 (Type 6061-T6) or equivalent.
Tubing Data
Suggested Allowable Working Pressure for Additional Alloys

A limited amount of test data is available on Swagelok tube fittings used with special alloy tubing. For sizes not listed in the following tables, we recommend that a sample of the tubing be provided for evaluation before installation. Please include all pertinent information relating to system parameters. Give tubing sample to your authorized Swagelok representative to forward to the factory.
Table 7Fractional Alloy 400 Tubing

Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 18 700 psi (128 800 kPa) for ASTM B165 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.028 Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 7900 3700 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 Working Pressure, psig Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 10 4 3 2 100 800 100 300 7000 4400 3200 2200 9500 6100 4400 3000 2200 0.035 0.049 0.120 Swagelok Fitting Series 200 400 600 810 1210 1610
4000 2900
4600 3400
3900
4300

Fully annealed, quality seamless alloy 400 hydraulic tubing, ASTM B165 or equivalent. Hardness 75 HRB maximum. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Table 8Fractional Alloy C-276 Tubing

Allowable working pressures are based on equations from ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1 for a maximum S value of 20 000 psi (137 800 kPa).
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) 4000 5100 7500 10 200 3300 4800 6 500 2600 3700 5 100 0.028 Swagelok Fitting Series 400 600 810

Fully annealed quality alloy C-276 tubing, ASTM B622 or equivalent. Hardness 100 HRB maximum. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring. OD tolerances not to exceed 0.005 in.

Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig Swagelok Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the Fitting shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 4000 5100 7500 10 200 400 3300 4800 6 500 600 2600 3700 5 100 810 0.028

Fully annealed, seamless or welded and drawn alloy 20 tubing, ASTM B729, B468 or equivalent. Hardness 95 HRB or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring. OD tolerances not to exceed 0.005 in.
Tubing Data

Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig Swagelok Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the Fitting shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 4000 5100 7500 10 200 400 3300 4800 6 500 600 2600 3700 5 100 810 0.028

Cold drawn, fully annealed, #1 temper alloy 600 seamless alloy tubing, ASTM B167 or equivalent. Hardness 92 HRB or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring. Order to outside diameter and wall thickness only, not to inside diameter, average wall specification. OD tolerances not to exceed 0.005 in.
Table 11Fractional Grade 2 Titanium Tubing

Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 16 700 psi (115 000 kPa) for ASTM B338 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3. Multiply grade 2 titanium rating by 0.85 for working pressure in accordance with ASME B31.1.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig Swagelok Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the Fitting shaded area. (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 3500 4500 6700 9100 400 2900 4200 5800 600 2100 3100 4200 810 0.028

Fully annealed seamless or welded and drawn grade 2 titanium tubing, ASTM B338 or equivalent. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending. OD tolerances not to exceed 0.005 in.
Table 12Fractional SAF 2507 Super Duplex Tubing

Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 38 700 psi (266 000 kPa) for ASTM A789 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME B31.3. For tubing suitable for SAF 2507 super duplex weld fittings with working pressures calculated based on ASME B31.3 Chapter IX, see the Swagelok SAF 2507 Super Duplex Weld Fittings catalog, MS-01-173.
Tube Wall Thickness, in. Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 Working Pressure, psig Swagelok Note: For gas service, select a tube wall thickness outside of the shaded area. Fitting (See Gas Service, page 2.) Series 7800 10 000 15 000 400 6 500 10 100 12 700 600 5 000 7 200 10 100 12 900 810 5 800 7 600 10 100 1010 4 700 6 300 8 500 10 000 1210 0.028 0.035
Pressure ratings based on special wall thickness tolerance for Swagelok SAF 2507 tubing.

Fully annealed SAF 2507 super duplex tubing, ASTM A789 or equivalent. Hardness 32 HRC or less. Tubing to be free of scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Table 13Fractional and Metric Alloy 825 Tubing

Allowable working pressures are based on equations from ASME BPV Section 2 Part D.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig 6400 9300 11 600 4100 3000 5900 4300 8 200 5 900 Swagelok Fitting Series 400 600 800 Tube OD mm 6 10 12 Tube Wall Thickness, mm 1.0 1.2 1.5 Working Pressure, bar 530 660 300 370 480 250 300 390 Swagelok Fitting Series 6M0 10M0 12M0
0.8 410
1.8
480
Based on repeated pressure testing of the Swagelok tube fitting

with 4:1 design factor based upon hydraulic fluid leakage.

Fully annealed seamless alloy 825 tubing, ASTM B163 or equivalent. Fully annealed welded alloy 825 tubing, ASTM B704, class 1 or equivalent. Hardness Rockwell 90 (201 HV) maximum on the 15T scale. Tubing to be free scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Table 14Fractional and Metric Alloy 625 Tubing

Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value of 26 700 psi (183 900 kPa) for ASTM B444 Grade 2 tubing at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), as listed in ASME BPV 2001 Section II, Part D, Table 1B; tubing outside diameter and wall thickness tolerances from ASTM B444 for small-diameter tube.
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tube Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 0.049 0.065 Working Pressure, psig 7300 10 700 14 600 4700 6 800 9 400 3500 5 000 6 800 Swagelok Fitting Series 400 600 800 Tube OD mm 6 10 12 Tube Wall Thickness, mm 1.0 1.2 1.5 Working Pressure, bar 610 750 350 430 550 290 350 450 Swagelok Fitting Series 6M0 10M0 12M0
0.8 470
1.8
550

Fully annealed seamless alloy 625 tubing, ASTM B444, Grade 1 or equivalent. Hardness 25 HRC (266 HV) maximum. Tubing to be free scratches, suitable for bending and flaring.
Pressure Ratings at Elevated Temperatures

Table 15Elevated Temperature Factors
Temperature F 200 400 600 800 1000 C 93 204 315 426 537 Al 1.00 0.40 Carbon Copper Steel 304 SS 0.80 0.95 1.00 0.50 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.76 0.69 316 SS 1.00 0.96 0.85 0.79 0.76 Tubing Materials Alloy Alloy Alloy 400 20 C-276 0.87 1.00 1.00 0.79 0.79 0.75 0.96 0.85 0.79 0.96 0.85 0.79 0.76 Alloy 600 1.00 0.96 0.85 0.79 0.35 SAF 2507 0.90 0.82 0.80 Alloy 825 1.00 0.90 0.84 0.81 Alloy 625 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73
Ti 0.86 0.61 0.45
Based on 375F (190C) max. Based on the lower derating factor for stainless steel, in accordance with ASME B31.3.
To determine allowable working pressure at elevated temperatures, multiply allowable working pressures from Tables 1 through 14 by a factor shown in Table 15. Example: Type 316 stainless steel 1/2 in. OD 0.035 in. wall at 1000F 1. The allowable working pressure at 20 to 100F (28 to 37C) is 2600 psig (Table 3, page 4). 2. The elevated temperature factor for 1000F (537C) is 0.76 (Table 15, above): 2600 psig 0.76 = 1976 psig The allowable working pressure for 316 SS 1/2 in. OD 0.035 in. wall tubing at 1000F (537C) is 1976 psig. Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company SAF 2507TM Sandvik AB 2003, 2005, 2006, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI November 2007, R8 MS-01-107
www.swagelok.com
U l t r a h igh-Purity S t a i n l ess Steel Tubing

Fractional Sizes
Features
316L stainless steel Available in sizes from 1/4 to 4 in.
outside diameter; metric sizes available upon request

Coaxial tubing available in sizes from
1/4 to 1 in. outside diameter

Electropolished internal surface
finish of 10 in. Ra (0.25 m) max

Ends prepared for orbital welding Rinsed with 18 Mcm DI water Purged with filtered nitrogen Cleaned and sealed in an ISO
Class 4/Federal Class 10 cleanroom

Marked to indicate size, material
type, and heat code
Material Standards
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Composition wt. % 16.0 to 18.0 10.0 to 15.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.005 to 0.012 (seamless) 0.005 to 0.017 (welded)
Pressure Ratings
Silicon Carbon Sulfur
Tubing sizes smaller than 1/2 in. outside
diameter contain up to 0.040 wt. % carbon.

Tubing
Select a basic ordering number. Add an ultrahigh-purity process designator from the table below to the basic ordering number. Example: 6L-T4-S-035-20-E2
Tube Nominal Wall OD, in. Thickness, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 3 4 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 Basic Ordering Number 316L Seamless 6L-T4-S-035-206L-T6-S-035-206L-T8-S-049-206L-T12-S-065-206L-T16-S-065-206L-T24-S-065-206L-T32-S-065-20316L Welded 6L-T24-W-065-206L-T32-W-065-206L-T48-W-065-206L-T64-W-083-20Nominal Length, ft Weight lb/ft 0.080 0.127 0.236 0.476 0.813 1.00 1.34 0.996 1.34 2.03 3.47 Packaging Ends are faced and protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps; packed in double polyethylene bags Individual Certificates Mill Test Reports Certificate of Conformance Mill Test Reports Surface Roughness Dimensional Tolerances Process Designator E2
20
E3
20
Process specifications are available upon request. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative. Certificate of Conformance for: Surface roughness Dimensional tolerances Helium leak test for welded fittings Purity test for moisture and particulates SEM pits, inclusions, or other raw material defects XPS minimum chromium-to-iron and chromium oxide-to-iron oxide ratios DI water cleaning for effluent resistivity.
Coaxial Tubing
Process tube is 316L seamless. Containment tube is 316L welded. Select an ordering number.
Process Containment Tube OD, Tube OD in. in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 Process Tube Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.065 Containment Tube Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 316L 0.049 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 Ordering Number 6L-CXT4-S-035-20-E2 6L-CXT6-S-035-20-E2 6L-CXT8-S-049-20-E2 6L-CXT12-S-065-20-E2 6L-CXT16-S-065-20-E2 Nominal Length, ft Weight lb/ft 0.320 0.490 0.720 1.29 1.52
20

See the Swagelok Stainless Steel Tubing, Fractional Sizes catalog, MS-02-191, for more information.
Tube Fittings


Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user. Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2002, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI April 2006, R2 MS-01-162-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Ultrahigh-Purit y Gas Filte rs
SCF Se r ie s
Membralox ceramic filtration technology Genuine Swagelok VCR face seal fittings Particle removal rating greater than 99.9999999 % at 0.003 m at maximum flow rate Flow rates to 2700 std L/min
Ultrahigh-Purity Gas Filters
SCF Series UHP Filters

The Swagelok SCF series UHP gas filter is designed to meet the stringent requirements of SEMI E49.8-96. With the proprietary Membralox ceramic element and 316L VAR stainless steel housing, the SCF series UHP filter is a solution for many demanding gas filtering applications.
Membralox Ceramic Filtration Technology

The Membralox ceramic element is a multilayered filter medium. The material is a high-purity alumina with a precisely controlled pore structure. The Membralox ceramic element is an extruded multiflow channel block or tubular structure. The flow channels within the structure are coated with precisely controlled membrane layers. A final sintering process fuses the layers together. The result is a filter element that is designed to minimize particle shedding and provide enhanced flow characteristics. The removal rating of the filter is greater than 99.9999999 % at 0.003 m when tested in accordance with SEMI F38-0699. The Membralox ceramic element provides both high temperature and chemical resistance, along with superior particle removal and outgassing characteristics.
Features
High particle removal efficiency Exceptionally low particle
shedding
Superior moisture dry-down
characteristics
Extremely low outgassing Outstanding chemical
compatibility
High differential pressure rating Inline, all-welded construction Maximum flow rates: 30, 5, 600, 900, and 700 std L/min End connections: 1/4, 1/, and 3/4 in. integral male VCR
face seal fittings; 1/4 in. female VCR face seal fittings
Industry-standard lengths; see Ordering Information and
Dimensions.
Ceramic element: high-purity alumina Gasket: high-density PTFE Housing: 316L VAR stainless steel/SEMI F0-0305 HighPurity, 0 % minimum elongation allowed
The ceramic element is a multichannel block or tubular configuration of highpurity alumina. A scanning electron microscope image shows the two membrane layers of the filter element: ultrafine and fine (as shown from top to bottom).
Technical Data
Maximum Flow Rate at Removal Rating std L/min (std ft3/min) 30 (1.0) 5 (7.9) 600 (1) 900 (31) 700 (95) Filtration Area cm (in.) 10 (1.6) 0 (3.1) 70 (11) 150 (3) 450 (70) 3000
(06)
Pressure Rating at 37C (100F), psig (bar) Working Differential
Temperature Rating C (F)
Gas Flow
Removal Rating
Internal Surface Finish
500
(17)
00
(400)
Electropolished and finished > 99.9999999 % to a roughness at 0.003 m average of 5 in. (0.13 m) Ra
Ultrahigh-Purity Gas Filters
Flow Rate at Pressure Drop

Maximum Flow Rate: 30 std L/min
Nominal Inlet Pressures
14.5 psig (0.9 bar) 58.0 psig (3.9 bar) 29.0 psig (1.9 bar) 72.5 psig (4.9 bar) 43.5 psig (2.9 bar)

14.5 psig (0.9 bar) 58.0 psig (3.9 bar) 29.0 psig (1.9 bar) 72.5 psig (4.9 bar) 43.5 psig (2.9 bar)
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi

30.0 psig (2.0 bar) 90.0 psig (6.2 bar)

30.0 psig (2.0 bar) 90.0 psig (6.2 bar)
Pressure Drop, bar

30.0 psig (2.0 bar) 90.0 psig (6.2 bar) 60.0 psig (4.1 bar)
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi
Pressure Drop, psi
Pressure Drop, bar
Pressure Drop, psi

3 in. (76.2 mm) Filters30 and 225 std L/min
C dia A B hex
All Other Filters

A C dia
B hex
Maximum Flow Rate std L/min
End Connection Inlet and Outlet 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting
Ordering Number 3 in. (76.2 mm) Filters SS-SCF3-VR4-P-30 SS-SCF3-VR4FR4-P-30 SS-SCF3-VR4-P-5 SS-SCF3-VR4FR4-P-5 SS-SCF3-VR8-P-5 SS-SCF3-VR4-P-600 SS-SCF3-VR8-P-600 SS-SCF5-VR4-P-900 SS-SCF5-VR8-P-900
30
1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting and 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting and 1/4 in. female VCR fitting 1/ in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/ in. integral male VCR fitting 1/4 in. integral male VCR fitting 1/ in. integral male VCR fitting
0.88
(.4)
0.80
(0.3)
5
3.31
(84.1)
1.3
(31.)
1.18
(30.0)
600
1.4
(36.1)
1.67
(4.4)
5 in. (127 mm) Filters 900 5.00

(17)
0.93
(3.6)
1.67
(4.4)
11 in. (279 mm) Filters 1/ in. integral male VCR fitting 700 3/4 in. integral male VCR fitting SS-SCF11-VR1-P-700 SS-SCF11-VR8-P-700 0.93 11.
(84) (3.6)
1.67
(4.4)
1.9
(3.8)
Testing
Every SCF series filter is helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 9 3 10 9 std cm3/s. The SCF series filter design has been helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 3 10 10 std cm3/s.

Every SCF series filter is processed in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61.
Swagelok, IGC, VCRTM Swagelok Company MembraloxTM Pall Corporation 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI September 008, R4 MS-0-156
www.swagelok.com
Ultrahigh-Pur it y Stainle ss Ste e l Tubing

Metr ic Size s
Features
316L stainless steel/W.-NR 1.4435 Available in sizes from 6 to 18 mm
outside diameter; imperial sizes available upon request

6 to 12 mm outside diameter
finish of 0.25 m Ra (10 in.) max

Ends prepared for orbital welding Rinsed with 18 Mcm DI water Purged with filtered nitrogen Ends sealed in a Class 10 area Marked to indicate size, material
type, and heat code
Pressure Ratings
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Silicon Carbon Sulfur Composition wt. % 17.0 to 18.5 12.5 to 15.0 2.50 to 3.00 2.00 max 1.00 max 0.030 max 0.005 to 0.010


Packaging Ends are faced and protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps; packed in double polyethylene bags. Individual Certificates Inspection Certificate in accordance with EN1024 3.1.B and PED 97/23/EC
Tubing
Tube OD m 6 8 10 12 18 Nominal Wall Thickness m 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 Ordering Number 316L Seamless 6L-T6M-S-1.0-6M-EP10 6L-T8M-S-1.0-6M-EP10 6L-T10M-S-1.0-6M-EP10 6L-T12M-S-1.0-6M-EP10 6L-T18M-S-1.5-6M-EP10 6 (19.7) 0.125 0.175 0.225 0.275 0.619 Nominal Length m (ft) Weight kg/m
Process specifications are available upon request. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Coaxial Tubing
Process tube is 316L seamless. Containment tube is 316L welded.
Process Process Tube Containment Tube Containment Nominal Wall Tube Nominal OD Tube OD Thickness Wall Thickness mm mm mm mm 316L 6 8 12 10 12 18 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 6L-CXT6M-S-10-6M-EP10 6L-CXT8M-S-12-6M-EP10 6L-CXT12M-S-18-6M-EP10 6 (19.7) 0.350 0.450 0.894 Nominal Length m (ft)
Ordering Number
Weight kg/m

Tube Fittings

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003, 2006 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2006, R1 MS-02-181
www.swagelok.com
Ultrahigh-Pur it y Stainle ss Ste e l Tubing

Impe r ial Size s
Features
316L stainless steel Available in sizes from 1/4 to 4 in.
outside diameter; metric sizes available upon request

1/4 to 1 in. outside diameter

finish of 10 in. Ra (0.25 m) max

Ends prepared for orbital welding Rinsed with 18 Mcm DI water Purged with filtered nitrogen Cleaned and sealed in an ISO
Class 4/Federal Class 10 cleanroom

Marked to indicate size, material
type, and heat code
Material Standards
Element Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Manganese Composition wt. % 16.0 to 18.0 10.0 to 15.0 2.00 to 3.00 2.00 max 0.75 max 0.035 max 0.005 to 0.012 (seamless) 0.005 to 0.017 (welded)
Pressure Ratings
Silicon Carbon Sulfur
Tubing sizes smaller than 1/2 in. outside
diameter contain up to 0.040 wt. % carbon.

To order, add a process designator from the table below to a back ordering number. Example: 6L-T4-S-035-6M-E3
Tubing
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 1 1/2 2 3 4 Nominal Wall Thickness in. 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 Basic Ordering Number 316L Seamless 6L-T4-S-035-6M6L-T6-S-035-6M6L-T8-S-049-6M6L-T12-S-065-6M6L-T16-S-065-6M6L-T24-S-065-6M6L-T32-S-065-6M316L Welded 6L-T24-W-065-6M6L-T32-W-065-6M6L-T48-W-065-6M6L-T64-W-083-6MNominal Length m (ft) Weight kg/m 0.12 0.19 0.35 0.71 1.2 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.2

Packaging Ends are faced and protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps; packed in double polyethylene bags Individual Certificates Mill Test Reports Certificate of Conformance Mill Test Reports Surface Roughness Dimensional Tolerances Process Designator E2
E3
6 (19.7)
6 (19.7)
Process specifications are available upon request. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative. Certificate of Conformance for: Surface roughness Dimensional tolerances Helium leak test for welded fittings Purity test for moisture and particulates SEM pits, inclusions, or other raw material defects XPS minimum chromium-to-iron and chromium oxide-to-iron oxide ratios DI water cleaning for effluent resistivity.
Coaxial Tubing
Process tube is 316L seamless. Containment tube is 316L welded.
Process Containment Tube OD Tube OD in. in. 1/4 1/2 3/8 5/8 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1/4 Process Tube Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.065 Containment Tube Nominal Wall Thickness, in. 0.049 0.049 0.065 0.065 0.065 Basic Ordering Number 6L-CXT4-S-035-6M6L-CXT6-S-035-6M6L-CXT8-S-049-6M6L-CXT12-S-065-6M6L-CXT16-S-065-6MNominal Length m (ft) Weight kg/m 0.48 0.73 1.1 1.9 2.3
6 (19.7)

See the Swagelok Stainless Steel Tubing, Fractional Sizes catalog, MS-01-159-SCS, for more information.
Tube Fittings


www.swagelok.com
Ultrahigh-Purity Stainless S t e e l Tu b u l a r F i t t i n g s
Metric Sizes
I Sizes from 6 through 18 mm OD I Imperial sizes available upon request I 316L stainless steel construction I Available in a variety of configurations, including coaxial I Marked to indicate material type and heat code
Features
I Traceability
Each tubular fitting is marked to identify manufacturer, material type, and heat code.
I Variety of configurations
Tubular fittings are available in elbows, tees, reducers, end caps, and coaxial configurations.
Technical Data
Product ID Finish 0.25 m (10 in.) Ra max except for cold formed and welded areas; electropolished. Packaging Ends are faced and protected with polyamide nylon film and polyethylene caps; packed in double polyethylene bags. Individual Certification Material Specification 316L in accordance with W.-NR 1.4435 Wall Thickness 1 mm (6 to 12 mm OD) 1.5 mm (18 mm OD) External Finish
UltrahighPurity
Inspection Certification Mill Test Reports Surface Roughness
Buffed/ brushed
NOTE: Process specifications apply to process tube in coaxial tubular fittings. Process specifications are available upon request. Contact your local independent Swagelok sales and service representative.
Raw Materials
Swagelok UHP tubular fittings are manufactured from 316L stainless steel; controlled sulfur levels of 0.005 to 0.010 % promote reliable, consistent orbital welding.
Markings
UHP tubular fittings are marked with material type and heat code, using a mechanical etching tool.
Cleaning and Packaging Traceability

UHP tubular fittings are fully traceable to the original material supplier. Certificates of inspection are available upon request. Certified material test reports (CMTR) are kept on file. Ultrahigh-purity tubular fittings are rinsed with 18M cm DI water and purged with filtered nitrogen. Ends are sealed in a Class 10 area.
Pressure Ratings
See Swagelok Tubing Data for pressure ratings.

45 Elbow
A
Concentric Reducer
T B
A Tx C
Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 18
Ordering Number 6L-T6M-5-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T8M-5-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T10M-5-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T12M-5-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T18M-5-S-1.5-EP10
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 80.0 (3.15)
T Tube OD mm 12
25.0 (0.98)
18
Tx Tube OD mm 6 8 6 8 12
Ordering Number 6L-T12M-6-6S-EP10 6L-T12M-6-8S-EP10 6L-T18M-6-6S-EP10 6L-T18M-6-8S-EP10 6L-T18M-6-12S-EP10
Dimensions, mm (in.) A B C
75.0
(2.95)
30.0
(1.18)
35.0
(1.38)
Tee
B
Reducing Tee
B
Tx
T A B
Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 18
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 70.0 (2.76) 108 (4.25) 110 (4.33) 112 (4.41) 118 (4.65) B 35.0 (1.38) 54.0 (2.13) 55.0 (2.17) 56.0 (2.20) 59.0 (2.32)
T Tube OD mm 8 10
12
18
Tx Tube OD mm 6 6 8 6 8 10 6 8 10 12
Ordering Number 6L-T8M-3-6S-EP10 6L-T10M-3-6S-EP10 6L-T10M-3-8S-EP10 6L-T12M-3-6S-EP10 6L-T12M-3-8S-EP10 6L-T12M-3-10S-EP10 6L-T18M-3-6S-EP10 6L-T18M-3-8S-EP10 6L-T18M-3-10S-EP10 6L-T18M-3-12S-EP10
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 108 (4.25) 110 (4.33) B 54.0 (2.13) 55.0 (2.17)
112 (4.41)
56.0 (2.20)
118 (4.65)
59.0 (2.32)
End Cap
A
90 Elbow
B A B A
Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 18
Ordering Number 6L-T6M-C-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T8M-C-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T10M-C-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T12M-C-S-1.0-EP10 6L-T18M-C-S-1.5-EP10
Dimensions, mm (in.) A
35.0 (1.38)
40.0 (1.57)
Tube OD mm 6 8 10 12 18
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 103 (4.06) 105 (4.13) 51.0 (2.01) B 80.0 (3.15)
25.0 (0.98)
Coaxial 90 Elbows
Process Tube OD mm 6 8 12
Containment Tube OD mm 10 12 18
Ordering Number 6L-CXT6M-9-10S-EP10 6L-CXT8M-9-12S-EP10 6L-CXT12M-9-18S-EP10
A
105 (4.13) 116 (4.57) 140 (5.51)
B 140 (5.51) 151 (5.94) 175 (6.89)
A B
Coaxial Tees
Process Containment Tube OD Tube OD mm mm 6 10 8 12 12 18
Ordering Number 6L-CXT6M-3-10S-EP10 6L-CXT8M-3-12S-EP10 6L-CXT12M-3-18S-EP10
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 55.0 (2.17) 56.0 (2.20) 59.0 (2.32) B 88 (3.46) 89 (3.50) 92 (3.62)
A B
A B
Coaxial Sleeve Coupling

A
Process Tube OD mm 6 8 12
Ordering Number 6L-CXT6M-SC-10S 6L-CXT8M-SC-12S 6L-CXT12M-SC-18S
Dimensions, mm (in.) A 90.0 (3.54)
Swagelok Tube Facing Tool and Welding System

The Swagelok tube facing tool cleanly and consistently squares tube ends in preparation for orbital welding. The Swagelok welding system is designed to streamline welding operations and manage the total welding process. This orbital welding system includes a comprehensive package of equipment, training, accessories, and technical support to provide users with fast, repeatable, high-quality welds.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2003 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLL January 2003, R0 MS-02-180
www.swagelok.com
U lt ra -Torr Vacu u m Fittings
Stainless steel construction, fluorocarbon FKM O-ring Reliable, repeatable sealing performance Available in tube sizes from 1/16 to 1 1/2 in.
Features
Seal performance is maintained through repeated disconnects. O-ring seals to glass, metal, or plastic tubing.
Body, nut, and sleeve: stainless steel O-ring: 70 durometer fluorocarbon FKM, wetted with a thin
film of silicone vacuum grease.
Temperature Rating
Standard fluorocarbon FKM O-ring, 25 to 400F (31 to 204C)
Testing
The ultra-torr fitting design has been helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s at ambient temperature. The leak rate increases as temperature increases due to permeation through the O-ring. Knurled nut for easy, finger-tight assembly.

Swagelok ultra-torr vacuum fittings are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease, and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62.

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. The E dimension refers to the smallest nominal inside diameter of the part. To order straight fittings bored through, add -BT to the ordering number.
Example: SS-1-UT-6-BT
Union
A
Tube OD in. 1/16 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number SS-1-UT-6 SS-2-UT-6 SS-4-UT-6 SS-6-UT-6 SS-8-UT-6 SS-10-UT-6 SS-12-UT-6 SS-16-UT-6 SS-24-UT-6
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.23 (31.2) 1.40 (35.6) 1.63 (41.4) 1.81 (46.0) 1.84 (46.7) 1.84 (46.7) 2.05 (52.1) 2.15 (54.6) 2.27 (57.6) D 0.43 (10.9) 0.43 (10.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) 0.84 (21.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) E 0.05 (1.3) 0.09 (2.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.50 (12.7) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.38 (35.1) G 3/8 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 9/16 2 1/16
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/2
Reducing Union
A
Tube OD, in. T 3/8

Tx G1
Tx 1/4
Ordering Number SS-6-UT-6-4 SS-8-UT-6-4
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.72 (43.7) 1.75 (44.4) D 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) D1 0.62 (15.7) E 0.18 (4.6) G 13/16 15/16 G1 11/16
G T
1/2
D E
D1
Union Elbow
L
Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number SS-4-UT-9 SS-6-UT-9 SS-8-UT-9
Dimensions, in. (mm) D 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) E 0.18 (4.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) G 11/16 13/16 15/16 L 1.14 (29.0) 1.36 (34.5) 1.36 (34.5)
E D

Union Tee
A G E D L
Tube OD in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS-2-UT-3 SS-4-UT-3 SS-6-UT-3 SS-8-UT-3 SS-12-UT-3 SS-16-UT-3
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.12 (53.8) 2.30 (58.4) 2.72 (69.1) 2.72 (69.1) 3.30 (83.8) 3.64 (92.4) D 0.43 (10.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) E 0.09 (2.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) G 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/4 1 9/16 L 1.06 (26.9) 1.15 (29.2) 1.36 (34.5) 1.36 (34.5) 1.65 (41.9) 1.82 (46.2)
Male Connector
A
Tube OD in. 1/16

E
NPT Size in. 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS-1-UT-1-2 SS-2-UT-1-2 SS-4-UT-1-2 SS-4-UT-1-4 SS-6-UT-1-2 SS-6-UT-1-4 SS-8-UT-1-6 SS-8-UT-1-8 SS-12-UT-1-12 SS-16-UT-1-16
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.12 (28.4) 1.22 (31.0) 1.35 (34.3) 1.53 (38.9) 1.44 (36.6) 1.62 (41.1) 1.65 (41.9) 1.84 (46.7) 1.96 (49.8) 2.25 (57.2) B 0.38 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.56 (14.2) 0.38 (9.6) 0.56 (14.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) D 0.43 (10.9) 0.43 (10.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) E 0.05 (1.3) 0.09 (2.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.18 (4.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) G 3/8 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/4 1 9/16
1/8 1/4
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Swagelok Tube Fitting Union

A
Tube OD, in. T 1/4 3/8 1/2 Tx 1/4 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number SS-4-UT-6-400 SS-6-UT-6-600 SS-8-UT-6-810
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.66 (42.2) 1.81 (46.0) 1.95 (49.5) D 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) D1 0.60 (15.2) 0.66 (16.8) 0.90 (22.9) E 0.18 (4.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) G 11/16 13/16 15/16
G T
Tx
Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. D E D1
Adapter
A
Tube OD, in. T 1/16

E Tx
Tx 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2
Ordering Number SS-1-UT-A-4 SS-2-UT-A-4 SS-2-UT-A-6 SS-4-UT-A-4 SS-4-UT-A-6 SS-4-UT-A-8 SS-6-UT-A-6 SS-6-UT-A-8 SS-8-UT-A-10 SS-8-UT-A-12 SS-12-UT-A-16 SS-16-UT-A-20 SS-24-UT-A-24
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.12 (28.4) 1.20 (30.5) 1.21 (30.7) 1.34 (34.0) 1.33 (33.8) 1.47 (37.3) 1.47 (37.3) 1.58 (40.1) 1.64 (41.7) 1.69 (42.9) 1.78 (45.2) 1.80 (45.7) 1.98 (50.3) 0.66 (16.8) 0.80 (20.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.28 (7.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.25 (31.8) 13/16 15/16 1 1/4 1 9/16 2 1/16 0.62 (15.7) 0.18 (4.6) 11/16 D 0.43 (10.9) 0.43 (10.9) E 0.05 (1.3) 0.09 (2.3) G 3/8 9/16
G T
1/8
D
1/4
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Not available bored through.

Nuts
Tube OD in. 1/16
G E
Ordering Number SS-1-UTN SS-2-UTN SS-4-UTN SS-6-UTN SS-8-UTN SS-10-UTN SS-12-UTN SS-16-UTN SS-24-UTN
Thread Size 1/4-20 UNC 3/8-20 UN 1/2-20 UNF 5/8-20 UN 3/4-20 UNEF 15/16-20 UNEF 1 1/16-20 UN 1 3/8-20 UN 1 7/8-20 UN
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 0.07 (1.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.26 (6.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.51 (13.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.01 (25.6) 1.51 (38.4) L 0.38 (9.6) 0.41 (10.4) 0.53 (13.5) 0.62 (15.7) 0.62 (15.7) 0.62 (15.7) 0.72 (18.3) 0.72 (18.3) 0.72 (18.3) G 3/8 9/16 11/16 13/16 15/16 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 9/16 2 1/16
1/8 1/4
L
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/2
O-Rings
Tube OD in. 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 1 1/2
Uniform Size Number 001-1/2 006 010 012 014 114 116 120 128
Ordering Number VT-7-OR-001-1/2 VT-7-OR-006 VT-7-OR-010 VT-7-OR-012 VT-7-OR-014 VT-7-OR-114 VT-7-OR-116 VT-7-OR-120 VT-7-OR-128
Not a uniform O-ring size.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 2007, R5 MS-01-32
www.swagelok.com
Va c u um Fittings
Adapter Fittings
KF to VCR metal gasket face seal, VCO O-ring face seal, NPT,
Swagelok tube fitting, and ultra-torr vacuum fitting
CF to VCR metal gasket face seal and Swagelok tube fitting
Vacuum FittingsAdapter Fittings
Contents
KF Adapter Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
KF to Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting KF to Male VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting KF to Female VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting KF to Male VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting KF to Female NPT KF to Male NPT KF to Swagelok Tube Fitting KF to Ultra-Torr Vacuum Fitting
CF Adapter Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CF to Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting CF to Male VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting CF to Swagelok Tube Fitting
Features
Vacuum Range: Copper Seal: 10 1 Torr Elastomeric Seal: 10 8 Torr Operational Temperature Range: Copper Seal: 35 to 84F (00 to 450C) Elastomeric Seal: 4 to 30F (0 to 150C)
Applications
Adapter vacuum products are generally used on vacuum chamber ports to connect vacuum flanges to various fittings.

KF Adapter Fittings
KF to Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting KF to Male VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting
A B
VCR Size in.
1/4
1/
3/4
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWFVCR1014 JNWFVCR1614 JNWFVCR514 JNWFVCR4014 JNWFVCR5014 JNWFVCR1650 JNWFVCR550 JNWFVCR4050 JNWFVCR5050 JNWFVCR575 JNWFVCR4075 JNWFVCR5075 JNWFVCR510 JNWFVCR4010 JNWFVCR5010
Dimensions, in. (mm) A

B
VCR Size in.
1.46 (37.1)
1.96 (49.8)
1/4
1.65 (41.9)
.1 (56.1)
1/
.15 (54.6) .47 (6.7) .37 (60.)
.90 (73.7) 3.39 (86.1) 3.9 (83.6)
3/4
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWMVCR1014 JNWMVCR1614 JNWMVCR514 JNWMVCR4014 JNWMVCR5014 JNWMVCR1650 JNWMVCR550 JNWMVCR4050 JNWMVCR5050 JNWMVCR575 JNWMVCR4075 JNWMVCR5075 JNWMVCR510 JNWMVCR4010 JNWMVCR5010
A in. (mm)
1.46 (37.1)
1.65 (41.9)
.15 (54.6) .47 (6.7) .37 (60.)
KF Adapter Fittings
KF to Female VCO ORing Face Seal Fitting KF to Male VCO ORing Face Seal Fitting
VCO Size in.
1/4
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWFVCO1014 JNWFVCO1614 JNWFVCO514 JNWFVCO4014 JNWFVCO5014 JNWFVCO1650 JNWFVCO550 JNWFVCO4050 JNWFVCO5050
Dimensions, in. (mm) A

B
VCO Size in.
0.9
(3.4)
(3.0)
1.6
1/4
1/
(4.4)
0.96
(33.8)
1.33
1/
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWMVCO1014 JNWMVCO1614 JNWMVCO514 JNWMVCO4014 JNWMVCO5014 JNWMVCO1650 JNWMVCO550 JNWMVCO4050 JNWMVCO5050
A in. (mm)
1.4
(31.5)
1.49
(37.8)
KF to Female NPT
KF to Male NPT
Pipe Size in.
1/8
1/4
1/
3/4
1 1/4 1 1/
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 40 KF 50 KF 40 KF 50 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWFPT1018 JNWFPT1618 JNWFPT518 JNWFPT4018 JNWFPT5018 JNWFPT1014 JNWFPT1614 JNWFPT514 JNWFPT4014 JNWFPT5014 JNWFPT1050 JNWFPT1650 JNWFPT550 JNWFPT4050 JNWFPT5050 JNWFPT575 JNWFPT4075 JNWFPT5075 JNWFPT510 JNWFPT4010 JNWFPT5010 JNWFPT4015 JNWFPT5015 JNWFPT4015 JNWFPT5015 JNWFPT500
A in. (mm)
Pipe Size in.
0.9 (3.4)
1/8
1.07 (7.)
1/4
1.44 (36.6) 1/ 1.39 (35.3)
1.45 (36.8)
3/4
1.57 (39.9)
1.68 (4.7) 1.78 (45.) 1.8 (46.)
1 1/4 1 1/
Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 40 KF 50 KF 40 KF 50 KF 50
Ordering Number JNWMPT1018 JNWMPT1618 JNWMPT518 JNWMPT4018 JNWMPT5018 JNWMPT1014 JNWMPT1614 JNWMPT514 JNWMPT4014 JNWMPT5014 JNWMPT1050 JNWMPT1650 JNWMPT550 JNWMPT4050 JNWMPT5050 JNWMPT575 JNWMPT4075 JNWMPT5075 JNWMPT510 JNWMPT4010 JNWMPT5010 JNWMPT4015 JNWMPT5015 JNWMPT4015 JNWMPT5015 JNWMPT500
A in. (mm)
0.89 (.6)
1.10 (7.9)
1.35 (34.3)
1.35 (34.3)
1.64 (41.7)
1.78 (45.) .00 (50.8) .9 (58.)
KF Adapter Fittings
KF to Swagelok Tube Fitting
To order bored-through fittings, add BT to the ordering number. Examples: JNWSWAG1018BT JNWSWAG103M0BT
Fractional
Tube OD in. Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF 40 50 10 16 5 40 50 5 40 50 5 40 50 40 50 Ordering Number JNWSWAG1018 JNWSWAG1618 JNWSWAG518 JNWSWAG4018 JNWSWAG5018 JNWSWAG1014 JNWSWAG1614 JNWSWAG514 JNWSWAG4014 JNWSWAG5014 JNWSWAG1038 JNWSWAG1638 JNWSWAG538 JNWSWAG4038 JNWSWAG5038 JNWSWAG550 JNWSWAG4050 JNWSWAG5050 JNWSWAG575 JNWSWAG4075 JNWSWAG5075 JNWSWAG4010 JNWSWAG5010 A
Metric
Tube OD mm Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF KF 40 50 10 16 5 40 50 10 16 5 40 50 10 16 5 40 50 10 16 5 40 50 Ordering Number JNWSWAG103M0 JNWSWAG163M0 JNWSWAG53M0 JNWSWAG403M0 JNWSWAG503M0 JNWSWAG104M0 JNWSWAG164M0 JNWSWAG54M0 JNWSWAG404M0 JNWSWAG504M0 JNWSWAG106M0 JNWSWAG166M0 JNWSWAG56M0 JNWSWAG406M0 JNWSWAG506M0 JNWSWAG108M0 JNWSWAG168M0 JNWSWAG58M0 JNWSWAG408M0 JNWSWAG508M0 JNWSWAG1010M0 JNWSWAG1610M0 JNWSWAG510M0 JNWSWAG4010M0 JNWSWAG5010M0 JNWSWAG101M0 JNWSWAG161M0 JNWSWAG51M0 JNWSWAG401M0 JNWSWAG501M0 A mm (in.)
in. (mm)
1/8
1.03
(6.)
34.3
(1.35)
1/4
1.47
(37.3)
35.1
(1.38)
3/8
(41.4)
1.63
(1.64)
41.7
1/
(45.0)
1.77
(1.67)
4.4
3/4
(37.1)
1.46
(44.)
1.74
10
(1.76)
44.7
1
(1.76)
44.7
KF Adapter Fittings
KF to UltraTorr Vacuum Fitting
Tube OD in. Flange Connection KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 10 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 16 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 5 KF 40 KF 50 KF 40 KF 50 Ordering Number JNWUT1014 JNWUT1614 JNWUT514 JNWUT4014 JNWUT5014 JNWUT1038 JNWUT1638 JNWUT538 JNWUT4038 JNWUT5038 JNWUT1650 JNWUT550 JNWUT4050 JNWUT5050 JNWUT575 JNWUT4075 JNWUT5075 JNWUT4010 JNWUT5010 A in. (mm)
1/4
(37.6)
1.48
3/8
(41.1)
1.6
1/
1.79
(45.5)
3/4
1.93
(49.0)
(49.5)
1.95
CF Adapter Fittings
CF to Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting
VCR Size in. 1/4 1/
A B
Flange Connection CF 133 CF 75
Ordering Number JCFFVCR13314 JCFFVCR13350 JCFFVCR7514 JCFFVCR7550
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.36 (34.5) 1.55 (39.4) 1.36 (34.5) 1.55 (39.4) B 1.86 (47.) .11 (53.6) 1.86 (47.) .11 (53.6)
1/4 1/
CF to Male VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting

VCR Size in. 1/4 1/
A
Flange Connection CF 133 CF 75
Ordering Number JCFMVCR13314 JCFMVCR13350 JCFMVCR7514 JCFMVCR7550
A in. (mm) 1.36 (34.5) 1.55 (39.4) 1.36 (34.5) 1.55 39.4)
1/4 1/
CF to Swagelok Tube Fitting

Tube OD in. 1/4 3/8
A
Flange Connection CF 133
Ordering Number JCFSWAG13314 JCFSWAG13338 JCFSWAG13350 JCFSWAG7514
A in. (mm) 1.50 (38.0) 1.66 (4.0) 1.80 (45.6) 1.53 (38.9) 1.69 (4.9) 1.83 (46.5)
1/ 1/4 3/8 1/ CF 75
JCFSWAG7538 JCFSWAG7550
KF Flanges and Fittings

For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Fittings, KF Flanges and Fittings catalog, MS-03-15.
CF Flanges and Fittings

For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Fittings, CF Flanges and Fittings catalog, MS-03-17.
ISO Flanges and Fittings

For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Fittings, ISO Flanges and Fittings catalog, MS-03-16.

For information on the Swagelok welding system, see the Swagelok Orbital Welding System Quick Reference Guide, MS-0-143.
Weld Fittings for Vacuum Service

For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Weld Fittings for Vacuum Service catalog, MS-03-14.
Tubing Products
MS-01-153-SCS
Stainless Steel Welded Tubing, MS-01-161-SCS Stainless Steel Tubing, Imperial Sizes, MS-01-159-SCS
Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance . Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user .
Swagelok, VCR, VCOTM Swagelok Company 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI March 008, R MS-03-18
www.swagelok.com
Va c u um Fittings

3/4 to 4 in. tube sizes CF 133 to CF 600 flange sizes 304 stainless steel ISO 3669 design
Contents
Flanges
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bored CF 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
Half Full Concentric Reducing
Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Equal Reducing
Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Equal Reducing
Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
90 90 Mitered 45
Flange Hardware and Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Flange Hardware CF Gaskets
Features
CF flanges are designed in accordance with ISO 3669 . CF flanges are available in rotatable and nonrotatable
Applications
Typical applications for CF vacuum products include:
Analytical instrumentation, such as electron microscopes,
models, with either through holes or tapped holes .

The CF flange joint consists of an OFHC (oxygen-free,
mass spectrometers, and Auger electron spectrometers

Materials creation or processing High energy physics .
high- conductivity) copper gasket compressed between two sexless flanges secured with stainless steel fasteners .
The seal results from the deformation of the copper gasket
caused by its compression between the knife edges of the flanges . This compression causes the copper material to flow into and fill any surface discontinuities .
The tubular sections of CF products are supplied with
Installation
1 . Apply antiseize compound to the fastener threads . Verify that the flange sealing surfaces are clean and free from nicks and scratches . 3 . Install the gasket in the knife edge counterbore of the nonrotatable flange 4 . Align the hole patterns and leak test grooves of the flanges . 5 . Install the fasteners and tighten until handtight . 6 . Tighten the fasteners in a cross-wise pattern to the recommended torque .
Flange Type CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600 5/16-4 190 (1681) Thread Size 8-3 1/4-8 Recommended Torque in . lb (N m) 8 (48) 110 (973)
a bead-blasted finish .
Systems with copper gaskets may be baked to 93F
(500C) . Fluorocarbon FKM gaskets may be baked to 399F (04C); however, sustained baking above 30F (150C) may result in deterioration of the gasket .
Vacuum Range: Copper: 10 1 Torr Fluorocarbon FKM: 10 8 Torr Operational Temperature Range: Copper: 35 to 84F (00 to 450C) Fluorocarbon FKM: 4 to 30F (0 to 150C)
Flanges
Blank Nonrotatable
A B C
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600
Max Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4
Bolt Holes 6 4 6 8 8 10 16
Ordering Number JCFN133 JCFNT133 JCFN1 JCFNT1 JCFN75 JCFNT75 JCFN338 JCFNT338 JCFN450 JCFNT450 JCFN46 JCFNT46 JCFN600 JCFNT600
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .33 (33 .8) .1 (53 .8) .73 (69 .3) 3 .36 (85 .3) 0 .69 (17 .4) 4 .47 (114) 4 .61 (117) 5 .97 (15) 0 .81 (0 .6) 0 .78 (19 .8) 3 .63 (9 .) 4 .03 (10) 5 .13 (130) B 0 .30 (7 .6) 0 .47 (11 .9) 0 .50 (1 .7) C 1 .06 (7) 1 .63 (41 .3) .31 (58 .7) .85 (7 .4)
Blank Rotatable
A B C
Max Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4
Bolt Holes 6 4 6 8 8 10 16
Ordering Number JCFR133 JCFRT133 JCFR1 JCFRT1 JCFR75 JCFRT75 JCFR338 JCFRT338 JCFR450 JCFRT450 JCFR46 JCFRT46 JCFR600 JCFRT600
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .33 (33 .8) .1 (53 .8) .73 (69 .3) 3 .36 (85 .3) 0 .69 (17 .4) 4 .47 (114) 4 .61 (117) 5 .97 (15) 0 .81 (0 .6) 0 .78 (19 .8) 3 .63 (9 .) 4 .03 (10) 5 .13 (130) B 0 .30 (7 .6) 0 .47 (11 .9) 0 .50 (1 .7) C 1 .06 (7) 1 .63 (41 .3) .31 (58 .7) .85 (7 .4)
Flanges
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change . For flange dimensions, see page 3 .
Bored CF 133 Nonrotatable

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4
Dia or Thread in (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFN13314 JCFNT13314 JCFN13338 JCFNT13338 JCFN13350 JCFNT13350 JCFN13375 JCFNT13375
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .5)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3)
Bored CF 133 Rotatable

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3 0 .17 (4 .37) 8-3
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFR13314 JCFRT13314 JCFR13338 JCFRT13338 JCFR13350 JCFRT13350 JCFR13375 JCFRT13375
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .6)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3)
Bored CF 133 Weld Neck Nonrotatable

1 .33
(33 .8)
0 .75 (19 .0) 0 .63

(16 .0)
Tube OD in . 3/4
Bolt Hole Dia in . (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37)
Bolt Holes 6
Ordering Number JCFNBK13375
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .30
(7 .6)
1 .06 (7 .0)
Bored CF 133 Weld Neck Rotatable

1 .33
(33 .8)
0 .75 (19 .0) 0 .63

(16 .0)
Tube OD in . 3/4
Bolt Hole Dia in . (mm) 0 .17 (4 .37)
Bolt Holes 6
Ordering Number JCFRBK13375
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .30
(7 .6)
1 .06
(7 .0)
Flanges

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFN114 JCFNT114 JCFN150 JCFNT150 JCFN175 JCFNT175 JCFN110 JCFNT110
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .6) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .94 (3 .9) T
0 .17
(4 .3)
0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3) 1 .01 (5 .7)

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFR114 JCFRT114 JCFR150 JCFNRT150 JCFR175 JCFRT175 JCFR110 JCFRT110
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .6) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .65 (16 .5) 0 .94 (3 .9) T
0 .17
(4 .3)
0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3) 1 .01 (5 .7)

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFN7514 JCFNT7514 JCFN7550 JCFNT7550 JCFN7575 JCFNT7575 JCFN7510 JCFNT7510 JCFN7515 JCFNT7515
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .6) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .94 (3 .9) 1 .44 (36 .6) T
0 .1
(5 .3)
0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3) 1 .01 (5 .7) 1 .51 (38 .4)
Flanges

T
Tube OD in . 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 1 1/
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8 0 .65 (6 .73) 1/4-8
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFR7514 JCFRT7514 JCFR7550 JCFRT7550 JCFR7575 JCFRT7575 JCFR7510 JCFRT7510 JCFR7515 JCFRT7515
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 0 .6 (6 .6) 0 .40 (10 .) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .94 (3 .9) 1 .44 (36 .6) T
0 .1
(5 .3)
0 .51 (13 .0) 0 .76 (19 .3) 1 .01 (5 .7) 1 .51 (38 .4)

T
Tube OD in . 1 1/
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFN33815 JCFNT33815 JCFN3380 JCFNT3380
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .94 (49 .3) T 1 .51 (38 .4) .01 (51 .1)
0 .3
(5 .7)

T
Tube OD in . 1 1/
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFR33815 JCFRT33815 JCFR3380 JCFRT3380
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .94 (49 .3) T 1 .51 (38 .4) .01 (51 .1)
0 .3
(5 .7)

T
Tube OD in . 1 1/ 1/
Dia or Thread in . (mm) 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4 0 .33 (8 .43) 5/16-4
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFN45015 JCFNT45015 JCFN4500 JCFNT4500 JCFN4505 JCFNT4505
Dimensions, in . (mm) E 1 .44 (36 .6) 1 .94 (49 .3) .44 (6 .0) T 1 .51 (38 .4) .01 (51 .1) .51 (63 .8)
0 .38
(9 .5)
Flanges
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. For flange dimensions, see page 3.

T
Tube OD in. 1 1/2 2 2 1/2
Dia or Thread in. (mm) 0.332 (8.43) 5/16-24 0.332 (9.43) 5/16-24 0.332 (10.43) 5/16-24
Bolt Holes
Ordering Number JCFR45015 JCFRT45015 JCFR45020 JCFRT45020 JCFR45025 JCFRT45025
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 1.44 (36.6) 1.94 (49.3) 2.44 (62.0) T 1.51 (38.4) 2.01 (51.1) 2.51 (63.8)
0.38
(9.5)

T
Tube OD in. 3
Dia or Thread in. (mm) 0.332 (8.43) 5/16-24
Bolt Holes 10
Ordering Number JCFN46230 JCFNT46230
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 2.94 (4.) T 3.01 (6.5)
0.28
(.1)

T
Tube OD in. 3
Bolt Holes 10
Ordering Number JCFR46230 JCFRT46230
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 2.94 (4.) T 3.01 (6.5)
0.28
(.1)

T
Tube OD in. 4
Bolt Holes 16
Ordering Number JCFN60040 JCFNT60040
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 3.92 (99.6) T 4.01 (102)
0.44
(11.1)

T
Tube OD in. 4
Bolt Holes 16
Ordering Number JCFR60040 JCFRT60040
Dimensions, in. (mm) E 3.92 (99.6) T 4.01 (102)
0.44
(11.1)
Elbows
90
Rotatable
Flange Size CF 133

B A
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCFE133 JCFE1 JCFE75 JCFE338 JCFE450 JCFE46 JCFE600
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .50 (38 .1) 1 .67 (4 .4) .46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 4 .1 (105) 4 .78 (11) 6 .44 (164) B 1 .00 (5 .4) 1 .50 (38 .1) .5 (57 .) 3 .00 (76 .) 3 .75 (95 .3) 4 .50 (114) 6 .00 (15)
CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600
90 Mitered
Rotatable
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75

A
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCFEM133 JCFEM1 JCFEM75 JCFEM338 JCFEM450 JCFEM46 JCFEM600
A in . (mm) 1 .50 (38 .1) .04 (51 .8) .46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7) 4 .31 (109)
CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600
45
A
Rotatable
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCFKL133 JCFKL1 JCFKL75 JCFKL338 JCFKL450 JCFKL46 JCFKL600
A in . (mm) 0 .97 (4 .6) 1 .36 (34 .5) 1 .83 (46 .5) .54 (64 .5) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .97 (101) 5 .5 (133)
A Rotatable
CF 450 CF 46 CF 600
Nipples
Half
Nonrotatable
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1

B
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCF1N133 JCF1N1 JCF1N75 JCF1N338 JCF1N450 JCF1N46 JCF1N600
Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .50 (38 .1) .05 (5 .1) .46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7) 4 .3 (110) B 0 .6 (15 .7) 0 .87 ( .1) 1 .37 (34 .8) 1 .87 (47 .5) .37 (60 .) .87 (7 .9) 3 .83 (97 .3)
CF 75 CF 338 CF 450
CF 46 CF 600
Full
Nonrotatable Rotatable
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCFN133 JCFN1 JCFN75 JCFN338 JCFN450 JCFN46 JCFN600
A in . (mm) 3 .00 (76 .) 4 .10 (104) 4 .9 (15) 6 .44 (164) 6 .76 (17) 7 .06 (179) 8 .64 (19)
CF 46 CF 600
Concentric Reducing
Nonrotatable Rotatable
Flange Size CF 1 CF 133 CF 75 CF 133 CF 75 CF 1 CF 338 CF 1 CF 338 CF 75 CF 450 CF 75 CF 450 CF 338
Tube OD, in . T 1 1 1/ 1/ Tx 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 3 1/ 4 1/ 3
Ordering Number JCFNRC1133 JCFNRC75133 JCFNRC751 JCFNRC3381 JCFNRC33875 JCFNRC45075 JCFNRC450338 JCFNRC4675 JCFNRC46338 JCFNRC46450 JCFNRC600338 JCFNRC600450 JCFNRC60046
A in . (mm) .04 (51 .9) 3 .08 (78 .3) .75 (69 .9) .77 (70 .3) .81 (71 .3) .96 (75 .) .98 (75 .7) 4 .1 (105) 4 .13 (105) 4 .8 (109) 4 .9 (109) 4 .44 (113) 4 .34 (110)
CF 46 CF 75 CF 46 CF 338 CF 46 CF 450 CF 600 CF 338 CF 600 CF 450 CF 600 CF 46
10
Tees
Equal
Rotatable
Flange Size
A
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCF3T133 JCF3T1 JCF3T75 JCF3T338 JCF3T450 JCF3T46 JCF3T600
A in . (mm) 1 .50 (38 .1) .05 (5 .0) .46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7) 4 .31 (109)
CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600
A Nonrotatable
Reducing
Rotatable
Flange Size
B
Tube OD, in . T 1 1/ 1/ 3 Tx 3/4 1 3/4 1 1/ 1 1/ 1/ 1 1/ 4 1/ 3
Ordering Number JCF3TR75133 JCF3TR751 JCF3TR338133 JCF3TR33875 JCF3TR45075 JCF3TR450338 JCF3TR46338 JCF3TR46450 JCF3TR60075 JCF3TR600338 JCF3TR600450 JCF3TR60046
Dimensions, in . (mm)
A B
CF 75 CF 133 CF 75 CF 1 CF 338 CF 133 CF 338 CF 75 CF 450 CF 75
.46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7)
1 .88 (47 .8) .9 (58 .) .1 (53 .8) .71 (68 .8) .96 (75 .) 3 .48 (88 .4) 3 .7 (94 .5) 3 .6 (91 .9) 3 .83 (97 .3) 4 . (107) 4 .1 (105) 4 .03 (10)
A Nonrotatable
CF 450 CF 338 CF 46 CF 338 CF 46 CF 450 CF 600 CF 75 CF 600 CF 338 CF 600 CF 450 CF 600 CF 46
4 .31 (109)
Crosses
Equal
Nonrotatable
Tube OD in . 3/4 1 1 1/ 1/ 3 4
Ordering Number JCF4C133 JCF4C1 JCF4C75 JCF4C338 JCF4C450 JCF4C46 JCF4C600
A in . (mm) 1 .50 (38 .1) .05 (5 .0) .46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7) 4 .31 (109)
Rotatable
11
Crosses
Reducing
Nonrotatable
Flange Size CF 75 CF 133

B
Tube OD, in . T 1 1/ 1/ 3 Tx 3/4 1 3/4 1 1/ 1 1/ 1/ 1 1/ 4 1/ 3
Ordering Number JCF4CR75133 JCF4CR751 JCF4CR338133 JCF4CR33875 JCF4CR45075 JCF4CR450338 JCF4CR46338 JCF4CR46450 JCF4CR60075 JCF4CR600338 JCF4CR600450 JCF4CR60045
A B
CF 75 CF 1 CF 338 CF 133 CF 338 CF 75 CF 450 CF 75 CF 450 CF 338 CF 46 CF 338
.46 (6 .5) 3 . (81 .8) 3 .38 (85 .9) 3 .53 (89 .7)
1 .88 (47 .8) .9 (58 .) .1 (53 .8) .71 (68 .8) .96 (75 .) 3 .48 (88 .4) 3 .7 (94 .5) 3 .6 (91 .9) 3 .83 (97 .3) 4 . (107) 4 .1 (105) 4 .03 (10)
Rotatable
CF 46 CF 450 CF 600 CF 75 CF 600 CF 338 CF 600 CF 450 CF 600 CF 46
4 .31 (109)
Flange Hardware and Gaskets

Flange Hardware for Thru Hole Flanges
Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF 338 CF 450 CF 46 CF 600 Ordering Number JCFB133 JCFB75 JCFB338 JCFB450 JCFB600 Description (5) SS 8-3 0 .75 in . bolts, nuts and washers (5) 1/4-8 1 .5 in . bolts, nuts and washers (5) 5/16-4 1 .75 in . bolts, nuts and washers (5) 5/16-4 in . bolts, nuts and washers (5) 5/16-4 .5 in . bolts, nuts and washers
Flange Hardware for Tapped Hole Flanges

Flange Size CF 133 CF 1 CF 75 CF CF CF CF 338 450 46 600 Ordering Number Description
JCFB133T (5) SS 8-3 0 .6 in . bolts and washers JCFB75T (5) 1/4-8 1 in . bolts and washers
JCFB600T (5) 5/16-4 1 .5 in . bolts and washers
CF Gaskets
Copper gaskets available in packages of 10 . Fluorocarbon FKM gaskets available in packages of five in 1 1/ in . and under gasket sizes . Fluorocarbon FKM gaskets available in packages of one in in . and over gasket sizes .
Flange Size CF133 CF1 CF75 CF338 CF450 CF46 CF600 Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JCFGV133 JCFGV1 JCFGV75 JCFGV338 JCFGV450 JCFGV46 JCFGV600 OFHC Copper JCFG133 JCFG1 JCFG75 JCFG338 JCFG450 JCFG46 JCFG600



Tubing Products
Swagelok offers a wide variety of tubing products . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see these Swagelok catalogs for more information:
MS-01-153-SCS

SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 006, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI April 008, R MS-03-17
www.swagelok.com
Vacu um F i tti n gs

1/2 to 2 in. tube sizes NW 10 to NW 50 flange sizes 304 stainless steel ISO 2861 design
Contents
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Short Weld Long Weld Socket Weld Bored Blank
Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Equal Reducing
Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Equal Reducing
Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Half Full Reducing Concentric Reducing
Clamps and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Aluminum Clamp Aluminum Bulkhead Clamp and Cap Screw Overpressure Ring O-Ring Aluminum Centering Ring with O-Ring Stainless Centering Ring with O-Ring
Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
90 90 Mitered 45
Features
Flanges are designed in accordance with ISO 2861. Flange joint consists of an O-ring supported by a centering
Flange Dimensions
15 0.10 A B
(2.5)
ring, two sexless flanges, and a clamp.

Seal results from the compression of the O-ring by
application of pressure from the clamp through the flanges.

The single wing-nut design of the clamp allows assembly
and disassembly of the joint without hand tools.

Tubular sections of KF products are supplied with a bead0.12
(3.0)
blasted finish.
Systems can be baked to 400F (204C). However,
sustained baking above 302F (150C) may result in deterioration of the O-ring.
Vacuum Range: 10 8 Torr Operational Temperature Range: Fluorocarbon FKM O-rings: 4 to 392F (20 to 200C) Silicone O-rings: 58 to 446F (50 to 230C) Buna O-rings: 22 to 230F (30 to 110C)
Flange Size in. NW 10 NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.57 (40.0) 2.16 (55.0) 2.95 (75.0) B 0.48 (12.2) 0.68 (17.2) 1.03 (26.2) 1.62 (41.2) 2.06 (52.3)
Applications
Roughing lines Vacuum systems requiring frequent disassembly for
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for additional sizes and configurations.
cleaning or modification
Experimental systems found in research laboratories
Welding Notes
GTAW (gas tungsten arc welding) is the preferred process. Welds should be produced without filler wire (autogenous). The weld joint area should be properly cleaned to remove
contaminants such as fibers, fingerprints, oils, and greases prior to welding.

The weld ends of the components should be properly
squared and deburred to minimize the gap in the weld joint.

Welding should be performed with the internal surface of
the joint protected by an inert gas such as argon.

The finished butt weld should have 100 % penetration
without discontinuities such as cracks, voids, and porosity.
Flanges
Short Weld
Bored Flange
E B
0.20
(5.0)
Flange Size NW 10 NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWF10 JNWF16 JNWF25 JNWF40 JNWF50
Dimensions, in. (mm) C 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) E 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 1.87 (47.5)
Flange Size NW 10
Tube OD in. 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 3/8 1/2
Ordering Number JNWB1038 JNWB1050 JNWB1638 JNWB1650 JNWB1675 JNWB2538 JNWB2550 JNWB2575 JNWB2510 JNWB4038 JNWB4050 JNWB4075 JNWB4010 JNWB4015 JNWB5038 JNWB5050 JNWB5075 JNWB5010 JNWB5015 JNWB5020
Dimensions, in. (mm) B 0.38 (9.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.38 (9.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.76 (19.3) 0.38 (9.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.01 (25.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.01 (25.7) 1.51 (38.4) 0.38 (9.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.01 (25.7) 1.51 (38.4) 2.01 (51.1) E 0.33 (8.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.33 (8.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.33 (8.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.90 (22.9) 0.33 (8.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.90 (22.9) 1.40 (35.6) 0.33 (8.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.65 (16.5) 0.90 (22.9) 1.40 (35.6) 1.90 (48.3)
NW 16
Long Weld
NW 25
(40.0)
1.57
NW 40
3/4 1 1 1/2
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWFL10 JNWFL16 JNWFL25 JNWFL40 JNWFL50
E in. (mm) 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 1.87 (47.8) NW 50
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Socket Weld
Blank Flange
C D
(12.7)
0.50
0.20
(5.0)
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWSW10 JNWSW16 JNWSW25 JNWSW40 JNWSW50
Dimensions, in. (mm) C 0.51 (13.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.02 (25.9) 1.52 (38.6) 2.02 (51.3) D 0.61 (15.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) E 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 1.87 (47.5)
Maximum Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWB10 JNWB16 JNWB25 JNWB40 JNWB50
Nipples
Half
Flange Size NW 10 NW 16
C
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW1N10 JNW1N16 JNW1N25 JNW1N40 JNW1N50
Dimensions, in. (mm) C 1.25 (31.8) 1.15 (29.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.40 (61.0) 3.15 (80.0) E 0.37 (9.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.87 (22.1) 1.37 (34.8) 1.87 (47.5)
NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Full
Flange Size NW 10
C
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW2N10 JNW2N16 JNW2N25 JNW2N40 JNW2N50
C in. (mm) 2.50 (63.5) 2.30 (58.4) 4.06 (103) 4.80 (122) 6.30 (160)
NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Reducing
Flange Size NW 25 NW 16 NW 40 NW 16 NW 40 NW 25
C
Tube OD in. 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number JNW2NR2516 JNW2NR4016 JNW2NR4025 JNW2NR5016 JNW2NR5025 JNW2NR5040
C in. (mm) 1.30 (33.0) 1.30 (33.0) 2.18 (55.4) 1.30 (33.0) 2.18 (55.4) 2.55 (64.8)
NW 50 NW 16 NW 50 NW 25 NW 50 NW 40
Concentric Reducing
Flange Size
T Tx
Tube OD, in. T 1 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 2 Tx 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number JNW2NRC2516 JNW2NRC4016 JNW2NRC4025 JNW2NRC5016 JNW2NRC5025 JNW2NRC5040
NW 25 NW 16 NW 40 NW 16 NW 40 NW 25
(40.0)
1.57
NW 50 NW 16 NW 50 NW 25 NW 50 NW 40
Elbows
90
Flange Size
A A
90 Mitered
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 Ordering Number JNW2E10 JNW2E16 JNW2E25 JNW2E40 JNW2E50 A Flange Size
A
in. (mm) 1.25 (31.8) 1.15 (29.2) 1.65 (41.9) 2.40 (61.0) 3.15 (80.0)
A
Tube OD in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW2EM16 JNW2EM25 JNW2EM40 JNW2EM50
A in. (mm) 1.15 (29.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.40 (61.0) 3.15 (80.0)
NW 10 NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
45
A
Flange Size NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Tube OD in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW2K16 JNW2K25 JNW2K40 JNW2K50
A in. (mm) 0.62 (41.1) 0.77 (19.6) 1.08 (27.4) 1.39 (35.3)
Tees
Equal
A
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW3T10 JNW3T16 JNW3T25 JNW3T40 JNW3T50
A in. (mm) 1.25 (31.8) 1.15 (29.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.40 (61.0) 3.15 (80.0)
Reducing
Tx B T A
Flange Size Run NW 25 NW 40 NW 40 NW 50 NW 50 Branch NW 16 NW 16 NW 25 NW 16 NW 40
Tube OD, in. T 1 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 Tx 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1/2
Ordering Number JNW3TR2516 JNW3TR4016 JNW3TR4025 JNW3TR5016 JNW3TR5040
Crosses
Equal
Flange Size NW 10 NW 16 NW 25
A
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNW4C10 JNW4C16 JNW4C25 JNW4C40 JNW4C50
A in. (mm) 1.25 (31.8) 1.15 (29.2) 2.03 (51.6) 2.40 (61.0) 3.15 (80.0)
NW 40 NW 50
Reducing
Tx
Flange Size NW 25 NW 16
B
Tube OD, in. T 1 1 1/2 1 1/2 2 2 Tx 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 1 1/2
Ordering Number JNW4CR2516 JNW4CR4016 JNW4CR4025 JNW4CR5016 JNW4CR5040
NW 40 NW 16 NW 40 NW 25 NW 50 NW 16 NW 50 NW 40
Clamps and Seals

Aluminum Clamp
Flange Size NW 10 and NW 16
A B C
Tube OD in. 1/2 and 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWCP16 JNWCP25 JNWCP40 JNWCP50
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.69 (42.9) 2.17 (55.1) 2.76 (70.1) 3.70 (94.0) B 2.24 (56.9) 2.76 (70.1) 3.39 (86.1) 4.33 (110) C 0.63 (16.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.79 (20.1)
NW 25 NW 40 NW 50
Aluminum Bulkhead Clamp and Cap Screw

Flange Size NW 16 NW 25 NW 40
SWAGELOK IGC II COMPONENTS Hex socket CAP SCREW 10-32 x 1.00 in.
B A Bulkhead Clamp
Tube OD in. 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWBCP16 JNWBCP25 JNWBCP40 JNWBCP50 Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.00 (50.8) 2.37 (60.3) 2.94 (74.6) 3.75 (95.2) Ordering Quantity B 0.36 (9.2) 0.39 (9.9) 0.37 (9.3) 0.41 (10.3)
Number of Cap Screws per Clamp 6 6 6 8
N-ELD-763-12
NW 50
Description Stainless steel socket-head cap screw, 10-32 0.62 in.
Cap Screw
JNWBBCP50
100
Clamps and Seals

Overpressure Ring
Flange Size
B A
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number JNWPR10 JNWPR16 JNWPR25 JNWPR40 JNWPR50
NW 10 NW 16 NW 25
0.14
(3.6)
NW 40 NW 50
O-Ring
Flange Size NW 10 NW 16 NW 25 NW 40 NW 50 Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JNWORV10 JNWORV16 JNWORV25 JNWORV40 JNWORV50 Buna N JNWORB10 JNWORB16 JNWORB25 JNWORB40 JNWORB50 Silicone JNWORS10 JNWORS16 JNWORS25 JNWORS40 JNWORS50
Aluminum Centering Ring with O-Ring

0.31
(8.0)
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JNWCRAV10 JNWCRAV16 JNWCRAV25 JNWCRAV40 JNWCRAV50 Buna N JNWCRAB10 JNWCRAB16 JNWCRAB25 JNWCRAB40 JNWCRAB50
0.21
(5.3)
0.15
(3.9)
dia
Stainless Steel Centering Ring with O-Ring

0.31
(8.0)
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JNWCRSV10 JNWCRSV16 JNWCRSV25 JNWCRSV40 JNWCRSV50 Buna N JNWCRSB10 JNWCRSB16 JNWCRSB25 JNWCRSB40 JNWCRSB50 Silicone JNWCRSS10 JNWCRSS16 JNWCRSS25 JNWCRSS40 JNWCRSS50
0.21
(5.3)
0.15
(3.9)
dia
Adapter Fittings
For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Fittings, Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-03-18.




Tubing Products
Vacuum Flexible Hose, Tubing, and Couplings

For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Flexible Hose, Tubing, and and Couplings catalog, MS-03-19.
MS-01-153-SCS
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2006, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI July 2009, R3 MS-03-15
www.swagelok.com
Vacuum Fit tings
ISO Fla nge s a nd Fit tings

2 1/2 to 6 in. tube sizes ISO 63 to ISO 160 flange size 304 stainless steel ISO 1609 design
ISO Vacuum Fittings
Contents
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Bored and Blank Nonrotatable
Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Equal Reducing
Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
90 90 Mitered 45
Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Equal Reducing
Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Half Full Reducing Concentric Reducing
Clamps and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Single Claw and Double Claw Clamps O-Ring Aluminum Centering Ring with O-Ring and AIuminum
Spacer Ring
Stainless Steel Centering Ring with O-Ring and AIuminum
Spacer Ring
Features
ISO flanges are designed in accordance with ISO 1609. The ISO flange joint consists of an O-ring supported by
Welding Notes
a centering ring, two sexless flanges and a series of clamps.

The seal results from the compression of the O-ring by
application of pressure from the clamps through the flanges.

The tubular sections of ISO products are supplied with


a bead-blasted finish.
Systems may be baked to 302F (150C). Vacuum Range: 10 8 Torr Operational Temperature Range

(based on O-ring material):

Fluorocarbon FKM: 4 to 392F (20 to 200C) Buna: 22 to 230F (30 to 110C)
Applications
ISO vacuum products may be used in various applications such as:
Roughing lines Vacuum systems requiring frequent disassembly for
cleaning or modification
Experimental systems found in research laboratories
ISO Vacuum Fittings
Flanges
Bored and Blank

A B Seal Side A D B C Seal Side
Flange Size ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISOF63 JISOF6325 JISOF80 JISOF8030 JISOF100 JISOF10040 JISOF160 JISOF16060
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 3.74 (95.0) 4.33 (110) 5.12 (130) 7.09 (180) B C 0.47
(12.0)
D 6.02 (153)
2.37 (60.2) 2.51 (63.8) 0.25 (6.3) 2.87 (72.9) 3.01 (76.5) 0.25 (6.3) 5.87 (149) 3.87 (98.3) 4.01 (102) 0.25 (6.3) 0.25 (6.3)
Nonrotatable
A B F Seal Side
Flange Size ISO 63 ISO 80
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISON63 JISON6325 JISON80 JISON8030 JISON100 JISON10040 JISON160 JISON16060
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 5.12 (130) 5.71 (145) 6.50 (165) 8.86 (225) 0.63
(16.0)
D 6.02 (153)
E 0.25 (6.3) 0.37 (9.5)
F 4.33
(110)
Bolt Hole Holes Diameter 4 0.35

(9.0)
2.44 (61.9) 2.51 (63.8) 0.25 (6.3) 0.47

12.0)
A D B C F Seal Side
5.87 (149)
4.92
(125)
2.94 (74.6) 3.01 (76.5) 0.25 (6.3) 3.91 (99.3) 4.01 (102)
ISO 100 ISO 160
5.71
(145)
8 0.43
(11.0)
7.87
(200)
Elbows
90
Flange Size
B A A
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISO2E63 JISO2E80 JISO2E100 JISO2E160
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 4.00 (102) 3.75 (95.3) 4.75 (121) 4.50 (114) 6.25 (159) 6.00 (152) 9.25 (235) 9.00 (229)
ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160
90 Mitered
Flange Size ISO 63
A
45
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6 Ordering Number JISO2EM63 JISO2EM80 A
A
in. (mm) 3.25 (82.6) 3.50 (88.9)

A
Flange Size ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4
Ordering Number JISO2KL63 JISO2KL80
A in. (mm) 3.25 (82.6) 3.94 (100)
ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160
JISO2EM100 4.13 (105) JISO2EM160 5.25 (133)
JISO2KL100 5.06 (129)
ISO Vacuum Fittings
Nipples
Half
3.94
(100)
Full
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6 Ordering Number JISO1N63 JISO1N80 in. (mm) 2.37 (60.2) 2.87 (72.9)
A
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISO2N63 JISO2N80
A in. (mm) 6.50 (165) 7.00 (178)
ISO 100 ISO 160
JISO1N100 3.83 (97.3) JISO1N160 5.78 (147)
JISO2N100 7.76 (197) JISO2N160 10.8 (273)
Reducing
Flange Size ISO 80 ISO 63 ISO 100 ISO 63 ISO 100 ISO 80
A
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 4
Ordering Number JISO2NR8063 JISO2NR10063 JISO2NR10080 JISO2NR16063 JISO2NR16080 JISO2NR160100
A in. (mm)
ISO 160 ISO 63 ISO 160 ISO 80 ISO 160 ISO 100
3.00 (76.2)
Concentric Reducing
Flange Size
T Tx
Tube OD, in. T 3 4 4 Tx 2 1/2 2 1/2 3
Ordering Number JISO2NRC8063 JISO2NRC10063 JISO2NRC10080
A in. (mm) 4.12 (105)
Tees
Equal
A
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISO3T63 JISO3T80 JISO3T100 JISO3T160
A in. (mm) 3.25 (82.6) 3.50 (88.9) 4.13 (105) 5.25 (133)
ISO 100 ISO 160
Reducing
Tx A T
Flange Size Run ISO 80 Branch ISO 63
Tube OD, in. T 3 4 4 6 6 6 Tx 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 4
Ordering Number JISO3TR8063 JISO3TR10063 JISO3TR10080 JISO3TR16063 JISO3TR16080 JISO3TR160100

A B
3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 5.25 (133) 5.25 (133) 5.25 (133) 4.00 (102) 4.00 (102) 5.00 (127) 5.00 (127) 5.13 (130)

A
ISO Vacuum Fittings
Crosses
Equal
A
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISO4C63 JISO4C80
A in. (mm) 3.25 (82.6) 3.50 (88.9)
JISO4C100 4.13 (105) JISO4C160 5.25 (133)
ISO 160
Reducing
Tx B T
Flange Size ISO 80 ISO 63 ISO 100 ISO63 ISO 100 ISO 80 ISO 160 ISO 63
Tube OD, in. T 3 4 4 6 6 6 Tx 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 4
Ordering Number JISO4CR8063 JISO4CR10063 JISO4CR10080 JISO4CR16063 JISO4CR16080 JISO4CR160100

A B
3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 5.25 (133) 5.25 (133) 5.25 (133) 4.00 (102) 4.00 (102) 5.00 (127) 5.00 (127) 5.13 (130)
Clamps and Seals

Aluminum Single-Claw Clamp
A B Thread Size C
Ordering Number
Thread Size
Clamps Required
4 8 8 8
JISOSCP100 0.94 (24.0) 1.16 (29.5) 0.41 (10.5) 5/16-18 UNC
ISO 160 JISOSCP250 1.08 (27.5) 1.24 (31.5) 0.41 (10.5) 5/16-18 UNC
Aluminum Double-Claw Clamp

A
Flange Size
Thread Size
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B
Thread Size
Clamps Required
3 to 4 4 to 8 4 to 8 4 to 8
ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160 JISODCP250 1.08 (27.5) 2.09 (53.0) 5/16-18 UNC JISODCP100 0.94 (24.0) 2.03 (51.5) 5/16-18 UNC
O-Ring
Flange Size ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160 Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6 Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JISOORV63 JISOORV80 JISOORV100 JISOORV160 Buna N JISOORB63 JISOORB80 JISOORB100 JISOORB160
Clamps and Seals

Aluminum Centering Ring with O-Ring and AIuminum Spacer Ring
0.15 (3.9) 0.21 (5.3)
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number Fluorocarbon FKM JISOCRAV63 JISOCRAV80 JISOCRAV100 JISOCRAV160 Buna N JISOCRAB63 JISOCRAB80 JISOCRAB100 JISOCRAB160
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 2.63 (66.8) 2.74 (69.6) 3.14 (79.8) 3.24 (82.3) 3.89 (98.8) 3.99 (101) 5.90 (150) 5.99 (152)
0.31 (7.9)
Stainless Steel Centering Ring with O-Ring and AIuminum Spacer Ring
0.15 (3.9) 0.21 (5.3)
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISOCRSV63 JISOCRSV80
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 2.63 (66.8) 2.74 (69.6) 3.14 (79.8) 3.24 (82.3) 5.99 (152)
JISOCRSV100 3.89 (98.8) 3.99 (101) JISOCRSV160 5.90 (150)
0.31 (7.9)
O-ring material is fluorocarbon FKM.

0.15 (3.9) 0.21 (5.3)
Tube OD in. 2 1/2 3 4 6
Ordering Number JISOCR63 JISOCR80 JISOCR100 JISOCR160
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 2.63 (66.8) 2.74 (69.6) 3.14 (79.8) 3.24 (82.3) 3.89 (98.8) 3.99 (101) 5.90 (150) 5.99 (152)
O-ring material is fluorocarbon FKM.
Tubing Products

MS-01-153-SCS
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2006, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI August 2009, R2 MS-03-16
www.swagelok.com
KF flexible hose, tubing, and couplings ISO flexible hose, tubing, and couplings CF flexible hose, tubing, and couplings Convoluted stainless steel tubing
Flexible Hose, Tubing, and Couplings

Flexible hose, tubing, and couplings typically are used to correct misalignment between static connections or provide vibration isolation.
CF-flanged hose, tubing, and couplings have one rotatable
Material
Bellows: 321 stainless steel Braid: 304 stainless steel (single braid) Tube extensions: 304 stainless steel Flanges: 304 stainless steel
and one nonrotatable end for ease of alignment.

The minimum static bend radius is measured from the hose
or tubing center line while under vacuum.
Vacuum Range
Hose and tubing: 10 5 Torr Coupling Copper seal: 10 12 Torr Elastomeric seal: 10 10 Torr
Dimensions
Select a hose, tubing, or coupling ordering number.
Operational Temperature Range

Copper seal: 325 to 932F (200 to 500C) Elastomeric seal: 4 to 302F (20 to 150C)
KF Flexible Couplings
Flange Size KF 10 L Length in. (mm) Manufactured 3.20 (81.3) 4.20 (107) 5.20 (132) 3.20 (81.3) KF 16 4.20 (107) 5.20 (132) 3.20 (81.3) KF 25 4.20 (107) 5.20 (132) 3.20 (81.3) KF 40 4.20 (107) 5.20 (132) 3.20 (81.3) KF 50 4.20 (107) 5.20 (132) Compressed 3.00 (76.2) 3.80 (96.5) 4.60 (117) 3.00 (76.2) 3.80 (96.5) 4.60 (117) 3.00 (76.2) 3.80 (96.5) 4.60 (117) 3.00 (76.2) 3.80 (96.5) 4.60 (117) 3.00 (76.2) 3.80 (96.5) 4.60 (117) Ordering Number JNW2FC10-3.20 JNW2FC10-4.20 JNW2FC10-5.20 JNW2FC16-3.20 JNW2FC16-4.20 JNW2FC16-5.20 JNW2FC25-3.20 JNW2FC25-4.20 JNW2FC25-5.20 JNW2FC40-3.20 JNW2FC40-4.20 JNW2FC40-5.20 JNW2FC50-3.20 JNW2FC50-4.20 JNW2FC50-5.20 Dimensions, in. (mm) Bellows Wall ID Thickness 0.63
(16.0)
0.63
(16.0)
0.98
(24.9)
0.006
(0.15)
1.57
(39.9)
1.97
(50.0)
KF Flexible Tubing
L Overall Length in. (mm) 12 (305)
L
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JNW2FH16-12.00 JNW2FH16-18.00 JNW2FH16-24.00 JNW2FH16-36.00 JNW2FH25-12.00 JNW2FH25-18.00 JNW2FH25-24.00 JNW2FH25-36.00 JNW2FH40-12.00 JNW2FH40-18.00 JNW2FH40-24.00 JNW2FH40-36.00 JNW2FH50-12.00 JNW2FH50-18.00 JNW2FH50-24.00 JNW2FH50-36.00 2.00
(50.8)
Flange Size
Nominal ID 0.75
(19.1)
Hose OD 1.18
(30.0)
Minimum Wall Static Bend Thickness Radius 0.010

(0.25)
KF 16
18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
1.00
(25.4)
KF 25
1.00
(25.4)
1.48
(37.6)
0.010
(0.25)
1.20
(30.5)
KF 40
1.50
(38.1)
2.09
(53.1)
0.012
(0.30)
1.80
(45.7)
KF 50
2.62
(66.5)
0.012
(0.30)
2.15
(54.6)
KF Flexible Braided Hose

L Overall Length in. (mm) 12 (305) KF 16
L
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JNW2FHB16-12.00 JNW2FHB16-18.00 JNW2FHB16-24.00 JNW2FHB16-36.00 JNW2FHB25-12.00 JNW2FHB25-18.00 JNW2FHB25-24.00 JNW2FHB25-36.00 JNW2FHB40-12.00 JNW2FHB40-18.00 JNW2FHB40-24.00 JNW2FHB40-36.00 JNW2FHB50-12.00 JNW2FHB50-18.00 JNW2FHB50-24.00 JNW2FHB50-36.00 2.00
(50.8)
Flange Size
Nominal ID 0.75
(19.1)
Hose OD 1.25
(31.8)

(0.25)
18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
1.38
(35.1)
KF 25
1.00
(25.4)
1.57
(39.9)
0.010
(0.25)
1.60
(40.6)
KF 40
1.50
(38.1)
2.18
(55.4)
0.012
(0.30)
2.28
(57.9)
KF 50
2.71
(68.8)
0.012
(0.30)
2.73
(69.3)
ISO Flexible Couplings

Flange Size ISO 63 ISO 80 ISO 100 ISO 160 7.00
(178)
L Length in. (mm) Manufactured Compressed
Ordering Number JISO2FC63-7.00
Dimensions, in. (mm) Bellows Wall ID Thickness 2.56

(65.0)
6.20
(158)
JISO2FC80-7.00 JISO2FC100-7.00 JISO2FC160-7.00
3.03
(77.0)
0.008
(0.20)
3.94
(100)
5.83
(148)
ISO Flexible Tubing

L
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JISO2FH63-12.00 JISO2FH63-18.00 JISO2FH63-24.00 JISO2FH63-36.00 JISO2FH80-12.00 JISO2FH80-18.00 JISO2FH80-24.00 JISO2FH80-36.00 JISO2FH100-12.00 JISO2FH100-18.00 JISO2FH100-24.00 JISO2FH100-36.00 4.00
(102)
Flange Size
Nominal ID 2.50
(63.5)
Hose OD 3.39
(86.1)

(0.36)
ISO 63
18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
2.80
(71.1)
ISO 80
3.00
(76.2)
3.91
(99.3)
0.014
(0.36)
4.00
(102)
ISO 100
4.99
(127)
0.016
(0.41)
7.50
(191)
ISO Flexible Braided Hose

L
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JISO2FHB63-12.00 JISO2FHB63-18.00 JISO2FHB63-24.00 JISO2FHB63-36.00 JISO2FHB80-12.00 JISO2FHB80-18.00 JISO2FHB80-24.00 JISO2FHB80-36.00 JISO2FHB100-12.00 JISO2FHB100-18.00 JISO2FHB100-24.00 JISO2FHB100-36.00 4.00
(102)
Flange Size
Nominal ID 2.50
(63.5)
Hose OD 3.51
(89.2)

(0.36)
ISO 63
18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
7.19
(183)
ISO 80
3.00
(76.2)
4.03
(102)
0.014
(0.36)
8.45
(215)
ISO 100
5.11
(130)
0.016
(0.41)
9.93
(252)
CF Flexible Couplings
Rotatable
Flange Size CF 133

L
L Length in. (mm) Manufactured Compressed
Ordering Number JCF2FC133-3.20 JCF2FC212-3.20 JCF2FC275-3.20 JCF2FC338-3.20 JCF2FC450-7.00
Dimensions, in. (mm) Bellows Wall ID Thickness 0.63 (16.0) 0.98 (24.9) 1.57 (39.9) 1.97 (50.0) 2.56 (65.0) 3.03 (77.0) 3.94 (100) 0.006
(0.15)
CF 212 CF 275 CF 338 CF 450
3.20 (81.3)
3.00 (76.2)
Nonrotatable
CF 462 CF 600
7.00 (178)
6.2 158)
JCF2FC462-7.00 JCF2FC600-7.00
CF Flexible Tubing
Rotatable
Flange Size
L Overall Length in. (mm) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JCF2FH133-12.00 JCF2FH133-18.00 JCF2FH133-24.00 JCF2FH133-36.00 JCF2FH212-12.00 JCF2FH212-18.00 JCF2FH212-24.00 JCF2FH212-36.00 JCF2FH275-12.00 JCF2FH275-18.00 JCF2FH275-24.00 JCF2FH275-36.00 JCF2FH338-12.00 JCF2FH338-18.00 JCF2FH338-24.00 JCF2FH338-36.00 JCF2FH450-12.00 JCF2FH450-18.00 JCF2FH450-24.00 JCF2FH450-36.00 JCF2FH462-12.00 JCF2FH462-18.00 JCF2FH462-24.00 JCF2FH462-36.00 JCF2FH600-12.00 JCF2FH600-18.00 JCF2FH600-24.00 JCF2FH600-36.00 4.00
(102) 1.00 (25.4)
Nominal ID 0.75
(19.1)
Hose OD 1.18
(30.0)

(0.25)
CF 133
L
1.00
(25.4)
CF 212
1.48
(37.6)
0.010
(0.25)
1.20
(30.5)
CF 275
Nonrotatable
1.50
(38.1)
2.09
(53.1)
0.012
(0.30)
1.80
(45.7)
CF 338
2.00
(50.8)
2.62
(66.5)
0.012
(0.30)
2.15
(54.6)
CF 450
2.50
(63.5)
3.39
(86.1)
0.014
(0.36)
2.80
(71.1)
CF 462
3.00
(76.2)
3.91
(99.3)
0.014
(0.36)
4.00
(102)
CF 600
4.99
(127)
0.016
(0.41)
7.50
(191)
CF Flexible Braided Hose

Rotatable
Flange Size
L Overall Length in. (mm) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914)
Dimensions, in. (mm) Ordering Number JCF2FHB133-12.00 JCF2FHB133-18.00 JCF2FHB133-24.00 JCF2FHB133-36.00 JCF2FHB212-12.00 JCF2FHB212-18.00 JCF2FHB212-24.00 JCF2FHB212-36.00 JCF2FHB275-12.00 JCF2FHB275-18.00 JCF2FHB275-24.00 JCF2FHB275-36.00 JCF2FHB338-12.00 JCF2FHB338-18.00 JCF2FHB338-24.00 JCF2FHB338-36.00 JCF2FHB450-12.00 JCF2FHB450-18.00 JCF2FHB450-24.00 JCF2FHB450-36.00 JCF2FHB462-12.00 JCF2FHB462-18.00 JCF2FHB462-24.00 JCF2FHB462-36.00 JCF2FHB600-12.00 JCF2FHB600-18.00 JCF2FHB600-24.00 JCF2FHB600-36.00 4.00
(102) 1.00 (25.4)
Nominal ID 0.75
(19.1)
Hose OD 1.25
(31.8)

(0.25)
CF 133
L
1.38
(35.1)
CF 212
1.57
(39.9)
0.010
(0.25)
1.60
(40.6)
CF 275
Nonrotatable
1.50
(38.1)
2.18
(55.4)
0.012
(0.30)
2.28
(57.9)
CF 338
2.00
(50.8)
2.71
(68.8)
0.012
(0.30)
2.73
(69.3)
CF 450
2.50
(63.5)
3.51
(89.2)
0.014
(0.36)
7.19
(183)
CF 462
3.00
(76.2)
4.03
(102)
0.014
(0.36)
8.45
(215)
CF 600
5.11
(130)
0.016
(0.41)
9.93
(252)
Flexible Tubing Without Flanges

B T
(25.4)
1.00
T Hose End OD in.
Dimensions, in. (mm) L Overall Length in. (mm) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) 12 (305) 18 (457) 24 (610) 36 (914) Flexible Hose B Minimum Hose Wall Static Bend OD Thickness Radius 1.18
(30.0)
Ordering Number JFH75-12.00 JFH75-18.00 JFH75-24.00 JFH75-36.00 JFH10-12.00 JFH10-18.00 JFH10-24.00 JFH10-36.00 JFH15-12.00 JFH15-18.00 JFH15-24.00 JFH15-36.00 JFH20-12.00 JFH20-18.00 JFH20-24.00 JFH20-36.00 JFH25-12.00 JFH25-18.00 JFH25-24.00 JFH25-36.00 JFH30-12.00 JFH30-18.00 JFH30-24.00 JFH30-36.00 JFH40-12.00 JFH40-18.00 JFH40-24.00 JFH40-36.00
Nominal ID 0.75
(19.1)
Hose End Wall Thickness 0.065

(1.65)
0.75
L
0.010
(0.25)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
1.00 (25.4)
1.48
(37.6)
0.010
(0.25)
1.20
(30.5)
0.065
(1.65)
(25.4)
1.00
1.50
1.50
(38.1)
2.09
(53.1)
0.012
(0.30)
1.80
(45.7)
0.065
(1.65)
2.00
2.00
(50.8)
2.62
(66.5)
0.012
(0.30)
2.15
(54.6)
0.065
(1.65)
2.50
2.50
(63.5)
3.39
(86.1)
0.014
(0.36)
2.80
(71.1)
0.065
(1.65)
3.00
3.00
(76.2)
3.91
(99.3)
0.014
(0.36)
4.00
(102)
0.065
(1.65)
4.00
4.00
(102)
4.99
(127)
0.016
(0.41)
7.50
(191)
0.083
(2.11)
Adapter Fittings
For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative or see the Swagelok Vacuum Fittings, Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-03-18.




Tubing Products

MS-01-153-SCS
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 2006, 2008, 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI June 2009, R3 MS-03-19
www.swagelok.com
Vacu um Tu bi n g Pro ducts
Convoluted stainless steel tubing Stainless steel adapters Factory-welded end connections
Vacuum Tubing Products
Convoluted Tubing
Material
321 stainless steel
Nominal Wall Thickness

0.006 in. (0.15 mm)
Pressure Rating
1/4 in. outside diameter tubeultrahigh vacuum (10 9 torr)
to 100 psig (6.8 bar)

3/8 through 1 1/2 in. outside diameter tubeultrahigh
vacuum (10 9 torr) to 25 psig (1.7 bar) Convoluted tubing compensates for misalignment between static connections in vacuum or low-pressure applications. During installation, convoluted tubing can be compressed by at least 15 % or extended by up to 50 % of the manufactured length.
Temperature Rating
70 to 1000F (20 to 537C)
Testing
Every convoluted tubing product is inboard helium leak tested to maximum leak rate of 1.8 10 7 std cm3/s at the envelope.
Dimensions
Select a convoluted tubing ordering number.
B
T in.
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1 1/2
Ordering Number 321-4-X-2 321-4-X-4 321-4-X-6 321-4-X-12 321-4-X-24 321-4-X-48 321-6-X-1 321-6-X-3 321-6-X-6 321-6-X-12 321-6-X-24 321-8-X-1 321-8-X-3 321-8-X-6 321-8-X-12 321-8-X-24 321-8-X-36 321-12-X-1 321-12-X-3 321-12-X-6 321-12-X-12 321-12-X-24 321-12-X-36 321-16-X-1 321-16-X-3 321-16-X-6 321-16-X-12 321-16-X-24 321-16-X-36 321-24-X-1 321-24-X-3 321-24-X-6 321-24-X-12 321-24-X-24 321-24-X-36
0.75
(19.1)
0.38
(9.7)
0.75
(19.1)
0.58
(14.7)
1.00
(25.4)
0.71
(18.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.08
(27.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.36
(34.5)
1.00
(25.4)
1.92
(48.8)
Dimensions, in. (mm) L Manufactured Compressed 2.00 (50.8) 1.50 (38.1) 4.00 (102) 3.25 (82.6) 6.00 (152) 4.75 (121) 12.0 (305) 9.00 (229) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 48.0 (1220) 36.0 (914) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 6.00 (152) 4.75 (121) 12.0 (305) 9.00 (229) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 6.00 (152) 4.75 (121) 9.00 (229) 12.0 (305) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 24.0 (610) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 4.75 (121) 6.00 (152) 12.0 (305) 9.00 (229) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 24.0 (610) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 6.00 (152) 4.75 (121) 12.0 (305) 9.00 (229) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 24.0 (610) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.50 (63.5) 6.00 (152) 4.75 (121) 12.0 (305) 9.00 (229) 24.0 (610) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 24.0 (610)
Extended 3.00 (76.2) 6.00 (152) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 72.0 (1830) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 54.0 (1370) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 54.0 (1370) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 54.0 (1370) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114) 9.00 (229) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914) 54.0 (1370)
Maximum Angular Displacement 180
360
90 225 360
L
45 180
360
30 90 180 360 20 90 180 360 15 60 120 240 360

T
Angular displacement based on nominal manufactured length. Angular displacement is not recommended for applications
involving pressure surges.
Vacuum Tubing Products
XBA Adapters
Brazing material XBA adapter
Convoluted tubing ID 0.25 in. C T B A
Dimensions
XBA adapters are brazed or soldered to convoluted tubing for connecting to socket or butt weld fittings, Swagelok tube fittings, or Ultra-Torr fittings.
(6.4 mm)
Material
304 stainless steel
T in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number 304-4-XBA 304-6-XBA 304-8-XBA 304-12-XBA 304-16-XBA 304-24-XBA
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.94 (23.9) 1.00 (25.4) 1.19 (30.2) 1.28 (32.5) 1.56 (39.6) 2.31 (58.7) B 0.69 (17.5) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.03 (26.2) 1.31 (33.3) 2.06 (52.3) C 0.16 (4.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.85 (21.6) 1.35 (34.3)
Pressure Rating
to 100psig (6.8 bar)

3/8 through 1 1/2 in. outside diameter tubeultrahigh
vacuum (10 9 torr) to 25 psig (1.7 bar)
Not recommended for gas service.
Temperature Rating
70 to 1000F (20 to 537C)
When used with Ultra-Torr fittings70 to 400F (20 to 204C)
XOA Adapters
Dimensions
Ultra-Torr fitting Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
XOA adapter
Convoluted tubing ID A
C T 0.12 in.
(3.0 mm)
XOA adapters support the tubing cuff when using convoluted tubing products with Ultra-Torr fittings. XOA adapters provide a leak-tight connection and are reusable.
T in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2
Ordering Number 304-4-XOA 304-6-XOA 304-8-XOA 304-12-XOA 304-16-XOA 304-24-XOA
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.75 (19.1) C 0.16 (4.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.38 (9.7) 1.00 (25.4) 0.60 (15.2) 0.85 (21.6) 1.35 (34.3)
Material
304 stainless steel
Pressure Rating
Ultrahigh vacuum (10 9 torr) to atmospheric pressure.
Temperature Rating
70 to 400F (20 to 204C)
Factory-Welded End Connections
Convoluted tubing is available with factory-welded VCR metal gasket face seal, VCO O-ring face seal, and XBA adapter connections. End connections are assembled using gas tungsten arc welds (GTAW) without filler materials.
Temperature Rating
VCR end connections70 to 1000F (20 to 537C) VCO end connections70 to 400F (20 to 204C), based on
standard fluorocarbon FKM O-ring material

XBA end connections70 to 1000F (20 to 537C)
Material
316 stainless steel
Pressure Rating
When used with Ultra-Torr fittings70 to 400F (20 to 204C)
Testing
Every convoluted tubing product with factory-welded end connections is inboard helium leak tested to maximum leak rate of 1.8 10 7 std cm3/s at the envelope.
to 100 psig (6.8 bar)

3/8 in. through 1 1/2 in. outside diameter tubeultrahigh
vacuum (10 9 torr) to 25 psig (1.7 bar)
Dimensions
Dimensions, in. (mm) End Connection VCR male F flat
T E A
Add an end connection designator to the convoluted tubing ordering number. End connections are available on the convoluted tubing sizes shown in the Dimensions table.
End Connection(s) VCR female one end only VCR female both ends VCR female one end, VCR male other end VCR female one end, XBA adapter other end VCR male one end only VCR male both ends VCR male one end, XBA adapter other end VCO female one end only VCO female both ends VCO female one end, VCO male other end VCO female one end, XBA adapter other end VCO male one end only VCO male both ends XBA adapter one end only XBA adapter both ends Designator FR DFR FMR FRB MR DMR MRB FO DFO FMO FOB MO DMO -B1 -B2
T 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4

E
F 5/8 15/16 3/4 1 1/16 5/8 15/16 11/16 1
1.87 (47.5) 0.18 (4.6) 2.06 (52.3) 0.28 (7.1) 2.25 (57.2) 0.40 (10.2) 1.87 (47.5) 0.18 (4.6) 2.06 (52.3) 0.28 (7.1) 2.25 (57.2) 0.40 (10.2) 2.07 (52.6) 0.18 (4.6) 2.22 (56.4) 0.30 (7.6) 2.40 (61.0) 0.40 (10.2) 1.68 (42.7) 0.12 (3.0) 1.40 (35.6) 0.23 (5.8) 1.81 (46.0) 0.33 (8.4) 1.55 (39.4) 1.58 (40.1) 1.94 (49.3) 2.03 (51.6) 2.31 (58.7) 3.06 (77.7)
VCR female
F flat T
3/8 1/2 1/4
VCO male
T
F flat E A
3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
VCO female
T
F flat E A
XBA adapter
T
1 1 1/2
Examples: 321-4-X-2FR for convoluted tubing with VCR female on one end 321-4-X-2DFR for convoluted tubing with VCR female on both ends.
Swagelok, Ultra-Torr, VCO, VCRTM Swagelok Company 2000, 2002, 2005, 2007 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., MI October 2007, R5 MS-01-31
www.swagelok.com
Valve Lockout Acce ssor y

L imits acce s s to ma nuall y actuate d val ve s
Features
Lockout accessory enables Rugged polypropylene
compliance with OSHA Lockout/ Tagout, Standard 29 CFR Part 1910.147, Control of Hazardous Energy. Bright safety orange color promotes high visibility. Other colors are available. 10 in. (25 cm) plastic beaded chain secures lockout accessory to site when not in use.
construction provides resistance to many chemicals and withstands temperatures from 20 to 300F (28 to 148C). Versatile design accommodates stems or handles from 3/8 to 4 1/4 in. (9.5 to 108 mm) in diameter and padlocks with up to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) shackle diameter and 3/4 in. (19.0 mm) minimum straight shackle length.
Hinged design allows fast, easy installation around valve handle and secures with a lock or tag.
Valve Lockout Accessory Shown on Swagelok Needle Valve

Valve Type Valve Series 41 and 42 (directional and oval handle) 33, 83, H83, 43 (directional and oval handle), 44 and 62 (oval handle) 44 (directional handle), 45 and 63 (oval handle) 4U, 6U, 8U, B, BN, H, HK 12U DF, DP DL DS LD forged- and cast-body valves V (2 valve) V (3- and 5-valve block valves) 31 M, L O, 3N, 4P, 5P, 26, JB 1 (0.172 in. [4.4 mm] orifice), 3HN, 20, 6N, 6P, JN 1 (0.250 in. [6.4 mm] orifice) 18 6DB, 6HN, 12N A3, HA3 P4T P6T Ordering Number MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-3 MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-S-3 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-1 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-S-1 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-3 MS-VL-M-1 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-3
0.39
(9.9)
Select the ordering number that corresponds to the valve series. Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
C B DE A
Ball
Bellows
Diaphragm
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 3.01

(76.5)
C 5.25
(133)
D 0.53
(13.5)
E 1.30
(33.0)
MS-VL-S-1 0.29 (7.4) MS-VL-S-2 0.82 (20.8) MS-VL-S-3 1.23 (31.2) MS-VL-M-1 0.38 (9.7) MS-VL-M-2 0.88 (22.4) MS-VL-M-3 1.89 (48.0)
Manifold Metering
4.25
(108)
6.58
(167)
0.75
(19.0)
2.06
(52.3)
Needle
Pinch Plug
Not available for valves with micrometer handles.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company, 2008 Swagelok Company, September 2008, R6, MS-02-18-E
www.swagelok.com

L imits acce s s to ma nually actuate d valve s
Features

Valve Type Valve Series 41, 41G, 42, 42G (directional and oval handle) SK, 83, H83, 43, 43G (directional and oval handle), 44 and 62 (oval handle) 44 (directional handle), 45 and 63 (oval handle) B, BN, H, HK, 4U, 6U, 8U 12U DF, DP Diaphragm DL DS LD forged- and cast-body valves Manifold Metering V (2 valve) V (3- and 5-valve block valves) 31 JB, O, 26, 3HN, 3N, 4P, 5P, 6P JN, 1 (0.172 in. [4.4 mm] orifice), 20 Needle 1 (0.250 in. [6.4 mm] orifice), 6DB, 6HN, 6N, 12N 18 Pinch Plug

Not Not Not Not available available available available for for for for
Ordering Number MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-3
Select the ordering number that corresponds to the valve series. Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
C B
Ball
MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-S-3 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-1 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-4 MS-VL-S-1 MS-VL-S-4 MS-VL-M-2 MS-VL-M-1 MS-VL-M-3 MS-VL-S-2 MS-VL-S-3 Ordering Number Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 3.01
(76.5) 0.39
(9.9)
D 0.85 (21.6), on MS-VL-S-4 only
Bellows
C 5.25
(133)
D 1.25
(31.8)
MS-VL-S-1 0.29 (7.4) MS-VL-S-2 0.82 (20.8) MS-VL-S-3 1.23 (31.2) MS-VL-S-4 0.29 (7.4) MS-VL-M-1 0.38 (9.7) MS-VL-M-2 0.88 (22.4) MS-VL-M-3 1.87 (47.5) 4.27
(108)
6.58
(167)
2.00
(50.8)
A3, HA3 P4T P6T

valves with toggle handles. 1V and 5V configurations. 1V and 2V configurations. 16LD series.
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 20082009 Swagelok Company December 2009, R7 MS-02-18-E
www.swagelok.com

Features


C B
Ball
(76.5) 0.39
(9.9)
D 0.85 (21.6), on MS-VL-S-4 only
Bellows
C 5.25
(133)
D 1.25
(31.8)
(108)
6.58
(167)
2.00
(50.8)
A3, HA3 P4T P6T

www.swagelok.com

Features


C B
Ball
(76.5) 0.39
(9.9)
D 0.85 (21.6), on MS-VL-S-4 only
Bellows
C 5.25
(133)
D 1.25
(31.8)
(108)
6.58
(167)
2.00
(50.8)
A3, HA3 P4T P6T

www.swagelok.com
Var iable A re a Flowmete rs
G Se r ie s a nd M Se r ie s
Glass and metal (armored) tube models, including miniature armored model Highly accurate measurement with individually calibrated scales based on flow tests Flexible and adaptable to specific system requirements High quality, durability, and repeatability 1/8 to 1 1/4 in. process end connections
Contents
Variable Area Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Right Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 G Series (Glass Tube) Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 G1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 G Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 G3 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 G4 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 GM Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 GP Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 M Series (Metal Tube) Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 M1 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 M Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 M3 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MH Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Custom Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Swagelok variable area flowmeters measure the flow rate of liquids and gases by means of a tapered tube and float . The float is pushed up by increasing fluid flow and pulled down by gravity as fluid flow decreases . Variable area flowmeters do not require external power, but may be ordered with electrical or electronic options . Most Swagelok models contain integral metering valves at the bottom (inlet) process connection; top mounting is available as an option .
Features
Simple installation Easy to read No wearing parts Limit switches available 10-to-1 turndown ratio (the lowest measurement is one
tenth of the full-scale reading); measurement ranges are available in U .S . customary and metric scales .
Meters are marked with the fluid media and unit of measure
for which they are calibrated . Meters can be factory calibrated to customer process specifications .
Calibration and Testing

Every Swagelok variable area flowmeter is factory calibrated to its media, flow range, and accuracy class using clean, dry air for air-flow range models and water for water-flow range models . Meters can be calibrated to user-specific applications .

All Swagelok variable area flowmeters are cleaned to remove dirt, debris, and burrs and are individually boxed . Oil- and grease-free cleaning are available on request .
Installation
Variable area flowmeters must be oriented vertically, except for the MH model, which is mounted horizontally. For complete installation information, see the Swagelok Variable Area Flowmeters Installation Instructions, G Series and M Series, MS-CRD-0111 .
Choosing the Right Flowmeter

Variable area flowmeters are fitted with measuring tubes made of glass or metal .
Swagelok G series models contain glass measuring tubes,
which allow direct viewing of the process fluid and direct reading of the flow .
Swagelok M series models contain metal measuring tubes,
See the Variable Area Flowmeter Selection table below for a wide selection of flowmeters with standard air and water flow scale ranges at 60F (15C) and 14 .7 psig (1 .0 bar) . Fluids with properties different from those of air or water, as well as systems operating at higher pressures or temperatures, may require custom-calibrated flowmeters . See Custom Calibration, page 0, for more information about selecting and specifying Swagelok variable area flowmeters with custom scale ranges .
which are used for difficult operating conditions where pressure, temperature, or both are factors . Because direct readings are not possible with metal tubes, these flowmeters are equipped with mechanical or electronic displays .
Variable Area Flowmeter Selection

Maximum Process Ambient Inlet Temperature Temperature Pressure at Rating Rating 70F (20C) Accuracy F (C) F (C) psig (bar) Class 3 to 1
(5 to 100)
Air Flow Ranges std ft3/h 0 .0 to 0 . through 4 .5 to 45 0 .018 to 0 .18 through 18 to 180 0 .06 to 0 .6 through 3 .0 to 30 0 .06 to 0 .6 through 11 to 110 0 .018 to 0 .18 through 4 .5 to 45 0 .018 to 0 .18 through 18 to 180 0 .18 to 1 .8 through 13 to 130 0 .18 to 1 .8 through 13 to 130 .5 to 5 through 100 to 1000 std L/h 0 .5 to 5 .0 through 10 to 100 0 .5 to 5 .0 through 500 to 5000 1 .6 to 16 through 80 to 800 1 .6 to 16 through 300 to 3000 0 .5 to 5 .0 through 100 to 1000 0 .5 to 5 .0 through 500 to 5000 5 .0 to 50 through 340 to 3400 5 .0 to 50 through 340 to 3400 70 to 700 through 800 to 8 000 1400 to 14 000 through 18 000 to 180 000
Water Flow Ranges U .S . gal/h 0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to 4 0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to 4 0 .13 to 1 .3 through .5 to 5 0 .01 to 0 .1 through .5 to 5 0 .065 to 0 .65 through 1 .1 to 11 0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to 4 0 .08 to 0 .8 through .5 to 5 0 .08 to 0 .8 through .5 to 5 0 .48 to 4 .8 through 5 to 50 L/h 0 .5 to .5 through 16 to 160 0 .5 to .5 through 16 to 160 0 .5 to 5 .0 through 10 to 100 0 .04 to 0 .4 through 10 to 100 0 .5 to .5 through 4 .0 to 40 0 .5 to .5 through 16 to 160 0 .3 to 3 .0 through 10 to 100 0 .3 to 3 .0 through 10 to 100 1 .8 to 18 through 100 to 1000
Process End Connections 1/4 in . NPT 1/4 in . NPT 1/4 in . NPT 1/4 in . NPT G 1/8 (ISO 8) G 1/4 (ISO 8) 1/4 in . NPT 1/4 in . NPT
Model G1 G G3 G4 GM GP M1 M
4 to 1
(0 to 100
145 (10) 145 (10) 145 (10) 145 (10) 58 (4 .0) 58 (4 .0) 1885 (130) 1885 (130)
4 .0 .5 .5 1 .0 4 .0 .5 4 .0 .5
3 to 1
(5 to 100)
4 to 1
(0 to 100)
3 to 1
(5 to 100)
4 to 1
(0 to 100)
3 to 1
(5 to 100)
4 to 1
(0 to 100)
3 to 1
(5 to 100)
4 to 1
(0 to 100)
3 to 1
(5 to 100)
4 to 1
(0 to 100)
40 to 30
(40 to 150)
4 to 158
(0 to 70)
40 to 30
(40 to 150)
4 to 158
(0 to 70)
35 to 57
(00 to 300)
40 to 48
(40 to 10)
888 (199)
1 .6
1/ in . NPT M3 3/4 in . NPT (1/ in . 1/ in . ASME flange diameter 3/4 in . ASME flange tube) 1 in . ASME flange M3 3/4 in . NPT (1 in . 1 in . NPT 3/4 in . ASME flange diameter tube) 1 in . ASME flange MH 3/4 in . NPT 1/ in . ASME flange (1/ in . 3/4 in . ASME flange diameter tube) 1 in . ASME flange MH (1 in . 1 1/4 in . NPT 1 in . ASME flange diameter tube)
5 to 50 through 670 to 6700
13 to 130 through 160 to 1600 .0 to 0 through 64 to 640 35 to 350 through 70 to 700
48 to 480 through 630 to 6300 7 .0 to 70 through 40 to 400 130 to 1300 through 1000 to 10 000
35 to 57
(00 to 300)
40 to 48
(40 to 10)
1393 (96 .0)
1 .6
35 to 57
(00 to 300)
40 to 48
(40 to 10)
888 (199)
1 .6
35 to 57
(00 to 300)
40 to 48
(40 to 10)
1393 (96 .0)
1 .6
Accuracy class and full scale are important components in calculating the
maximum allowable error at a given reading . To calculate the maximum allowable error, use the VDI/VDE 3513 equation: E = (0 .75M + 0 .5F) A/100 where: E = Maximum allowable error at the measured flow rate M = Measured flow rate F = Full scale of the flowmeter A = Accuracy class
Examples: A = 1 .0; F = 100 L/h At 90 L/h E = (0 .75 90 + 0 .5 100) 1 .0/100 = 0 .95 L/h At 0 L/h E = (0 .75 0 + 0 .5 100) 1 .0/100 = 0 .40 L/h Fluid media, temperature, pressure, viscosity, and specific gravity must be considered in selecting a variable area flowmeter . See Custom Calibration, page 0 .
G Series (Glass Tube) Flowmeters G1, G2, G3, G4, GM, and GP Models
Features
Glass tube design Low maintenance Optional factory-installed limit switches Polycarbonate cover for protection Integral fine metering valve
Reading Glass-Tube Flowmeters
Glass-tube flowmeters are read by the position of the float or ball within the flowmeter tube . The flow rate is read at the top edge of the float or ball .
G1, G2, G3, and G4 Models
Component Head piece, foot piece Float (G1, G2, G3) Float (G4) Measuring tube Float stops Head piece gasket, foot piece gasket Protective cover Mounting rail Needle Gaskets O-rings Housing, spring Spindle Spindle lubricant Knob handle Knob handle insert Knob handle set screw
Material / Specification Flowmeter 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 316 stainless steel / EN 1.4401 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 Borosilicate glass PFA with fluorocarbon (FKM) gaskets or PTFE with perfluorocarbon (FFKM) gaskets Fluorocarbon (FKM) or Perfluorocarbon (FFKM) Polycarbonate 304 stainless steel / EN 1 .4301 Metering Valve 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 PTFE Fluorocarbon (FKM) or Perfluorocarbon (FFKM) 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 316L stainless steel / EN 1 .4404 PTFE-based Plastic Brass A stainless steel
G1 Model
This G1 model is suitable for low flow rates in fine-metering applications such as gas chromatography .
Technical Data
Measured Flow Ranges
Air 0 .018 to 0 .18 through 4 .5 to 45 std ft3/h
0 .5 to 5 .0 through 10 to
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C);
Accuracy Class
4 .0
149F (65C) max with limit switches Ambient

4 to 1F (0 to 100C);
Up to two limit switches
100 std L/h Water

0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to

1/4 in . NPT
4 U .S . gal/h
0 .5 to .5 through 16 to
149F (65C) max with limit switches
Weight
0 .8 lb (0 .36 kg)
160 L/h

145 psig (10 bar)
Build a G1 model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - G1 - 01M - 1 - 1 - A
4 Measured Flow Range Air, std ft3/h Air, std L/h 01S = 0 .0 to 0 . 01M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 02S = 0 .03 to 0 .3 02M = 0 .8 to 8 .0 03S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 03M = 1 .6 to 16 04S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 04M = 4 .0 to 40 05S = 0 . to . 05M = 6 .0 to 60 06S = 0 .38 to 3 .8 06M = 10 to 100 07S = 0 .95 to 9 .5 07M = 5 to 50 08S = 1 .9 to 19 08M = 50 to 500 09S = 3 .0 to 30 09M = 80 to 800 10S = 4 .5 to 45 10M = 10 to 100 5 Flowmeter Gasket, 7 Options (See page 0 .)
Valve O-Ring Material 1 = Fluorocarbon (FKM) (standard) 2 = Perfluorocarbon (FFKM)

6 Limit Switches (See page 0 .)
0 1 2 3
Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .065 to 0 .65 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .30 to 3 .0 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .5 to 5 A8S = 3 .0 to 30 A9S = 4 . to 4
Water, L/h A1M = 0 .5 to .5 A2M = 0 .50 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 . to 1 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40 A6M = 6 .0 to 60 A7M = 10 to 100 A8M = 1 to 10 A9M = 16 to 160
None One switch Two switches One switch and a one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) 4 = Two switches and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) 5 = One switch and a one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) 6 = Two switches and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac)
= = = =
A G H J X Z
Add multiple designators in alphabetical order; omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . = Limit switch junction box = 5-point calibration record = Pressure test, certificate = Material certification = Oil- and grease-free cleaning, test report = Top-mounted metering valve
Custom See Custom Calibration, page 0 . GAS = Gas LIQ = Liquid
Dimensions
See page 18 for G1 model dimensions .
G2 Model
Commonly used in analytical instrumentation applications, the G model is appropriate for low to medium flow rates .
Technical Data
Air 0 .018 to 0 .18 through 18 to 180 std ft3/h
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C);
Accuracy Class
.5

4 to 1F (0 to 100C);
5000 std L/h Water

0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to

1/4 in . NPT
4 U .S . gal/h
Weight
0 .89 lb (0 .40 kg)
160 L/h

145 psig (10 bar)
Build a G model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
4
4 Measured Flow Range Air, std ft3/h Air, std L/h 01S = 0 .018 to 0 .18 01M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 02S = 0 .03 to 0 .3 02M = 0 .8 to 8 .0 03S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 03M = 1 .6 to 16 04S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 04M = 4 .0 to 40 05S = 0 . to . 05M = 6 .0 to 60 06S = 0 .38 to 3 .8 06M = 10 to 100 07S = 0 .95 to 9 .5 07M = 5 to 50 08S = 1 .9 to 19 08M = 50 to 500 09S = 3 .0 to 30 09M = 80 to 800 10S = 4 .5 to 45 10M = 100 to 1000 11S = 6 .5 to 65 11M = 180 to 1800 12S = 9 .0 to 90 12M = 40 to 400 13S = 11 to 110 13M = 300 to 3000 14S = 14 to 140 14M = 400 to 4000 15S = 18 to 180 15M = 500 to 5000 5 Flowmeter Gasket,
7
7 Options (See page 0 .)
VAF - G - 01M - 1 - 1 - A
0 1 2 3
Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .065 to 0 .65 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .30 to 3 .0 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .5 to 5 A8S = 3 .0 to 30 A9S = 4 . to 4
Water, L/h A1M = 0 .5 to .5 A2M = 0 .50 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 . to 1 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40 A6M = 6 .0 to 60 A7M = 10 to 100 A8M = 1 to 10 A9M = 16 to 160
= = = =
A G H J X Z
Dimensions
See page 18 for G model dimensions .
G3 Model
The G3 model provides reliable, accurate measurement over the mid ranges of air or water flow .
Technical Data
1 .6 to 16 through 80 to
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C);
Accuracy Class
.5

4 to 1F (0 to 100C);
800 std L/h Water

0 .13 to 1 .3 through .5 to

1/4 in . NPT
5 U .S . gal/h
Weight
0 .98 lb (0 .44 kg)
100 L/h

145 psig (10 bar)
4
4 Measured Flow Range 5 Flowmeter Gasket,
7
VAF - G3 - 01M - 1 - 1 - A
Air, std 01S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 02S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 03S = 0 .1 to .1 04S = 0 .38 to 3 .8 05S = 0 .95 to 9 .5 06S = 1 .9 to 19 07S = 3 .0 to 30 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A2S = 0 .5 to .5 A3S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A4S = 1 .1 to 11 A5S = 1 .6 to 16 A6S = .5 to 5 ft3/h Air, std L/h 01M = 1 .6 to 16 02M = 4 .0 to 40 03M = 6 .0 to 60 04M = 10 to 100 05M = 5 to 50 06M = 50 to 500 07M = 80 to 800 Water, L/h A1M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 A2M = 1 . to 1 A3M = .5 to 5 A4M = 4 .0 to 40 A5M = 6 .0 to 60 A6M = 10 to 100 Valve O-Ring Material 1 = Fluorocarbon (FKM) (standard) 2 = Perfluorocarbon (FFKM)
0 1 2 3
= = = =
A G H J X Z
Dimensions
G4 Model
Suitable for laboratory applications, the large-size G4 model is highly accurate over its full measured flow range .
Technical Data
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C);
Accuracy Class
1 .0

4 to 1F (0 to 100C);
3000 std L/h Water


1/4 in . NPT
5 U .S . gal/h
Weight
1 .35 lb (0 .61 kg)
100 L/h

145 psig (10 bar)
4
4 Measured Flow Range
VAF - G4 - 01M - 1 - 1 - A
5 Flowmeter Gasket,
Air, std 01S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 02S = 0 .095 to 0 .95 03S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 04S = 0 . to . 05S = 0 .35 to 3 .5 06S = 0 .50 to 5 .0 07S = 0 .75 to 7 .5 08S = 1 .1 to 11 09S = 1 .9 to 19 10S = 3 .0 to 30 11S = 4 .5 to 45 12S = 7 .5 to 75 13S = 11 to 110 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .01 to 0 .1 A2S = 0 .016 to 0 .16 A3S = 0 .05 to 0 .5 A4S = 0 .04 to 0 .4 A5S = 0 .065 to 0 .65 A6S = 0 .1 to 1 .0 A7S = 0 .16 to 1 .6 A8S = 0 .5 to .5 A9S = 0 .4 to 4 .0 B1S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 B2S = 1 .0 to 10 B3S = 1 .6 to 16 B4S = .5 to 5
ft3/h
Air, std L/h 01M = 1 .6 to 16 02M = .5 to 5 03M = 4 .0 to 40 04M = 6 .0 to 60 05M = 9 .0 to 90 06M = 14 to 140 07M = 0 to 00 08M = 30 to 300 09M = 50 to 500 10M = 80 to 800 11M = 10 to 100 12M = 00 to 000 13M = 300 to 3000 Water, L/h A1M = 0 .04 to 0 .4 A2M = 0 .063 to 0 .63 A3M = 0 .1 to 1 .0 A4M = 0 .16 to 1 .6 A5M = 0 .5 to .5 A6M = 0 .4 to 4 .0 A7M = 0 .6 to 6 .0 A8M = 1 .0 to 10 A9M = 1 .6 to 16 B1M = .5 to 5 B2M = 4 .0 to 40 B3M = 6 .3 to 63 B4M = 10 to 100

0 1 2 3
= = = =
A G H J X Z
Dimensions
GM Model
This miniature glass-tube model has a plastic head and foot piece and can be panel mounted easily .
Technical Data
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C)
Accuracy Class
4 .0
Ambient
4 to 1F (0 to 100C)

G 1/8 (ISO 8)
1000 std L/h Water

0 .065 to 0 .65 through 1 .1 to

58 psig (4 .0 bar)
Weight
0 .18 lb (0 .08 kg)
11 U .S . gal/h
0 .5 to .5 through 4 .0 to
40 L/h
Component Head piece, foot piece Float Measuring tube Material / Specification Flowmeter PVDF 316 stainless steel / EN 1.4401 Borosilicate glass PFA with fluorocarbon (FKM) gaskets or PTFE with perfluorocarbon (FFKM) gaskets Fluorocarbon (FKM) Polycarbonate Aluminum 6060
Build a GM model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
4
VAF - GM - 01M - Z
Float stops
Head piece gasket, foot piece gasket Protective cover Mounting rail
Metering Valve 316L stainless steel / Needle EN 1.4404 Gaskets O-rings Housing, spring Spindle Spindle lubricant Knob handle Knob handle insert Knob handle set screw PTFE Fluorocarbon (FKM) 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 316L stainless steel / EN 1 .4404 PTFE-based Aluminum 6060 Brass A stainless steel
Air, std 01S = 0 .018 to 0 .18 02S = 0 .03 to 0 .3 03S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 04S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 05S = 0 . to . 06S = 0 .38 to 3 .8 07S = 0 .95 to 9 .5 08S = 1 .9 to 19 09S = 3 .0 to 30 10S = 4 .5 to 45 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .065 to 0 .65 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .3 to 3 .0 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11
ft3/h
Air, std L/h 01M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 02M = 0 .8 to 8 .0 03M = 1 .6 to 16 04M = 4 .0 to 40 05M = 6 .0 to 60 06M = 10 to 100 07M = 5 to 50 08M = 50 to 500 09M = 80 to 800 10M = 100 to 1000 Water, L/h A1M = 0 .5 to .5 A2M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 . to 1 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40
Omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . Z = Top-mounted metering valve
Dimensions
See page 18 for GM model dimensions .
10
GP Model
The GP model offers a plastic head and foot piece, including end connections .
Technical Data
Temperature Ranges
Process
3 to 1F (5 to 100C);
Accuracy Class
.5

4 to 1F (0 to 100C);
5000 std L/h Water

0 .065 to 0 .65 through 4 . to

G 1/4 (ISO 8)
4 U .S . gal/h
Weight
0 .44 lb (0 .0 kg)
160 L/h
Component Head piece, foot piece Float Measuring tube Material / Specification Flowmeter PVDF 316 stainless steel / EN 1.4401 Borosilicate glass PFA with fluorocarbon (FKM) gaskets or PTFE with perfluorocarbon (FFKM) gaskets
Build a GP model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - GP - 01M - 1 - 1 - A
4 Measured Flow Range 5 Flowmeter Gasket,
Float stops
Head piece gasket, Fluorocarbon (FKM) or foot piece gasket Perfluorocarbon (FFKM) Protective cover Mounting rail Polycarbonate 304 stainless steel / EN 1 .4301
Metering Valve 316L stainless steel / Needle EN 1.4404 Gaskets O-rings Housing, spring Spindle Spindle lubricant Knob handle Knob handle insert Knob handle set screw PTFE Fluorocarbon (FKM) or Perfluorocarbon (FFKM) 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 316L stainless steel / EN 1 .4404 PTFE-based Plastic Brass A stainless steel
Air, std Air, std L/h 01S = 0 .018 to 0 .18 01M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 02S = 0 .03 to 0 .3 02M = 0 .8 to 8 .0 03S = 0 .06 to 0 .6 03M = 1 .6 to 16 04S = 0 .15 to 1 .5 04M = 4 .0 to 40 05S = 0 . to . 05M = 6 .0 to 60 06S = 0 .38 to 3 .8 06M = 10 to 100 07S = 0 .95 to 9 .5 07M = 5 to 50 08S = 1 .9 to 19 08M = 50 to 500 09S = 3 .0 to 30 09M = 80 to 800 10S = 4 .5 to 45 10M = 100 to 1000 11S = 6 .5 to 65 11M = 180 to 1800 12S = 9 .0 to 90 12M = 40 to 400 13S = 11 to 110 13M = 300 to 3000 14S = 14 to 140 14M = 400 to 4000 15S = 18 to 180 15M = 500 to 5000 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .065 to 0 .65 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .3 to 3 .0 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .5 to 5 A8S = 3 .0 to 30 A9S = 4 . to 4 Water, L/h A1M = 0 .5 to .5 A2M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 . to 1 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40 A6M = 6 .0 to 60 A7M = 10 to 100 A8M = 1 to 10 A9M = 16 to 160
ft3/h

0 1 2 3
None One switch Two switches One switch and a one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) 4 = Two switches and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) 5 = One switch and a one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) 6 = Two switches and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) Add multiple designators in alphabetical order; omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . = Limit switch junction box = 5-point calibration record = Pressure test, certificate = Oil- and grease-free cleaning, test report = Top-mounted metering valve
= = = =
Dimensions
See page 18 for GP model dimensions .
A G H X Z
11
M Series (Metal Tube) Flowmeters M1, M2, M3, and MH Models

Features
Armored design for extreme operating conditions Measurement in multiple flow directions Ideal for industrial sector applications Metal measuring tube for increased durability Horizontal mounting (MH model) available
M1 and M2 Models
Component Head piece, foot piece, float, measuring tube, upper plug Upper float stop (spring) Plug gasket, lower float stop Indicator housing Metering Valve Needle Gaskets O-rings Housing, spring Spindle Spindle lubricant Knob handle Knob handle insert Knob handle set screw
M3 and MH Models
Material / Specification Flowmeter 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 PTFE Painted aluminum 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 PTFE Fluorocarbon (FKM) or Perfluorocarbon (FFKM) 316Ti stainless steel / EN 1.4571 316L stainless steel / EN 1 .4404 PTFE-based Plastic Brass A stainless steel Component Measuring tube, float, float stops, receiver, guide Flange or NPT end connections Indicator housing
Material / Specification 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 316L stainless steel / EN 1.4404 Painted aluminum
1
M1 Model
The miniature M1 model is compact, yet offers protection against harsh environments and higher pressures with an armored measuring tube .
Technical Data
Temperature Ranges
Process
F (C)

1885 psig (130 bar)
40 to 30
(40 to 150)
Ambient F (C) -4 to 158

(0 to 70)
Accuracy Class
4 .0
3400 std L/h Water

With Limit Switches

Process
F (C)
Up to two limit switches;
5 U .S . gal/h
100 L/h
93 (145) 75 (135) 57 (15)
Ambient F (C) 104 (40) 1 (50) 140 (60)
junction box included

1/4 in . NPT
Weight
1 .53 lb (0 .7 kg)
Build an M1 model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - M1 - 01M - 1 - 1 - F
4 Measured Flow Range Air, std ft3/h Air, std L/h 01S = 0 .18 to 1 .8 01M = 5 .0 to 50 02S = 0 .37 to 3 .7 02M = 10 to 100 03S = 0 .55 to 5 .5 03M = 15 to 150 04S = 1 .5 to 15 04M = 40 to 400 05S = 3 .0 to 30 05M = 80 to 800 06S = 4 .5 to 45 06M = 15 to 150 07S = 7 .5 to 75 07M = 00 to 000 08S = 9 .5 to 95 08M = 50 to 500 09S = 13 to 130 09M = 340 to 3400 5 Valve O-Ring Material 7 Options (See page 0 .)
1 = Fluorocarbon (FKM) (standard) 2 = Perfluorocarbon (FFKM)

6 Limit Switches with Junction Box
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .08 to 0 .8 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .5 to .5 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .0 to 0 A8S = .5 to 5
Water, L/h A1M = 0 .3 to 3 .0 A2M = 0 .5 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 .0 to 10 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40 A6M = 6 .0 to 60 A7M = 8 .0 to 80 A8M = 10 to 100
(See page 0 .) = None = Minimum switch = Maximum switch = Minimum and maximum switch = Minimum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Maximum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Minimum and maximum switch and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Minimum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) = Maximum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) = Minimum and maximum switch and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac)
F G H J X Z
Add multiple designators in alphabetical order; omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . = Certificate of compliance = 5-point calibration record = Pressure test, certificate = Material certification = Oil- and grease-free cleaning, test report = Top-mounted metering valve
Dimensions
See page 18 for M1 model dimensions .
13
M2 Model
The M model offers versatility, with an integral junction box and choice of mechanical or electronic display .
Technical Data
Temperature Ranges
Process
F (C)

1885 psig (130 bar)
40 to 30
(40 to 150)

(0 to 70)
Accuracy Class
.5
3400 std L/h Water

With Limit Switches

Process
F (C)
Up to two limit switches -wire, 4 to 0 mA output
5 U .S . gal/h
100 L/h
30 (150) 57 (15) 1 (100)
Ambient F (C) 104 (40) 1 (50) 140 (60)
signal with LED display available
With 4 to 20 mA Ouput Signal

Process
F (C)

1/4 in . NPT
75 (135) 30 (110) 18 (85)
Ambient F (C) 104 (40) 1 (50) 140 (60)
Weight
. lb (1 .0 kg)
Build an M model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - M - 01M - 1 - 1 - F
4 Measured Flow Range 5 Valve O-Ring Material 7 Options (See page 0 .)
Air, std 01S = 0 .18 to 1 .8 02S = 0 .37 to 3 .7 03S = 0 .55 to 5 .5 04S = 1 .5 to 15 05S = 3 .0 to 30 06S = 4 .5 to 45 07S = 7 .5 to 75 08S = 9 .5 to 95 09S = 13 to 130 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .08 to 0 .8 A2S = 0 .13 to 1 .3 A3S = 0 .5 to .5 A4S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A5S = 1 .1 to 11 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .0 to 0 A8S = .5 to 5
ft3/h
Air, std L/h 01M = 5 .0 to 50 02M = 10 to 100 03M = 15 to 150 04M = 40 to 400 05M = 80 to 800 06M = 15 to 150 07M = 00 to 000 08M = 50 to 500 09M = 340 to 3400 Water, L/h A1M = 0 .30 to 3 .0 A2M = 0 .50 to 5 .0 A3M = 1 .0 to 10 A4M = .5 to 5 A5M = 4 .0 to 40 A6M = 6 .0 to 60 A7M = 8 .0 to 80 A8M = 10 to 100
1 = Fluorocarbon (FKM) (standard) 2 = Perfluorocarbon (FFKM)

6 Limit Switches or Electronic Display
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Dimensions
See page 18 for M model dimensions .
(See page 0 .) = None = Minimum switch = Maximum switch = Minimum and maximum switch = Minimum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Maximum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Minimum and maximum switch and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) = Minimum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) = Maximum switch and a onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) = Minimum and maximum switch and a two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) = LED display of measured flow with 4 to 0 mA output signal
F G H J X Z
Add multiple designators in alphabetical order; omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . = Certificate of compliance = 5-point calibration record = Pressure test, certificate = Material certification = Oil- and grease-free cleaning, test report = Top-mounted metering valve
M2 Model with LED Display
14
M3 Model
This metal-tube flowmeter, with rugged design, is suited for extreme operating conditions and high flow rates .
Technical Data
Air .5 to 5 through 670 to 6700 std ft3/h
70 to 700 through 18 000 to
Temperature Ranges
Process
F (C)
35 to 57
(00 to 300)

(40 to 10)
180 000 std L/h Water

0 .48 to 4 .8 through 160 to
1600 U .S . gal/h
1 .8 to 18 through 630 to 6300 L/h
With Limit Switches or 4 to 20 mA Ouput Signal

Process
F (C)
39 (00) 356 (180)
Ambient F (C) 104 (40) 140 (60)
Ordering Information (M3 Model with 1 in. Measuring Tube)

4
4 Measuring Tube Size
9
8 Output Signal
VAF - M3 - - 1 - 01M - 1 A - F
= 1 in .
5 End Connections
1 = 3/4 in . NPT 2 = 1 in . NPT Air, std ft3/h 01S = 5 to 50 02S = 85 to 850 03S = 130 to 1300 04S = 190 to 1900 05S = 400 to 4000 06S = 670 to 6700 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 13 to 130 A2S = 16 to 160 A3S = to 0 A4S = 5 to 50 A5S = 3 to 30 A6S = 4 to 40 A7S = 45 to 450 A8S = 65 to 650 A9S = 85 to 850 B1S = 110 to 1100 B2S = 160 to 1600
3 = 3/4 in . flange 4 = 1 in . flange Air, std L/h 01M = 1400 to 14 000 02M = 300 to 3 000 03M = 3500 to 35 000 04M = 5000 to 50 000 05M = 11 000 to 110 000 06M = 18 000 to 180 000 Water, L/h A1M = 48 to 480 A2M = 63 to 630 A3M = 8 to 80 A4M = 100 to 1000 A5M = 10 to 100 A6M = 160 to 1600 A7M = 170 to 1700 A8M = 50 to 500 A9M = 30 to 300 B1M = 400 to 4000 B2M = 630 to 6300
0 1 2 3 4
= = = = =
5= 6=
7= 8= 9=
None Minimum switch Maximum switch Minimum and maximum switch Minimum switch with onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Maximum switch with onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Minimum and maximum switch with two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Minimum switch with onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) Maximum switch with onechannel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) Minimum and maximum switch with two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac)
Omit designator if output signal not ordered . A = 4 to 0 mA

F G H J L N P R S X
Add multiple designators in alphabetical order; omit final dash ( - ) if no options are ordered . = Certificate of compliance = 5-point calibration record = Pressure test, certificate = Material certification = Dye penetration test, certificate = X-ray test, report = Hardness test, report = 1/ in . female NPT conduit gland = M0 1 .5 cable gland = Oil- and grease-free cleaning, test report
Dimensions
15
M3 Model
Ordering Information (M3 Model with 1/2 in. Measuring Tube)

1/ in . tube: 888 psig (199 bar) 1 in . tube: 1393 psig (96 .0 bar)
4
4 Measuring Tube Size
VAF - M3 - 1 - 1 - 01M - 1 A - F
Accuracy Class
1 .6
1 = 1/ in .
5 End Connections
Up to two limit switches (M16 1 .5
cable glands standard)

-wire 4 to 0 mA output signal
available
1 2 3 4 5
= = = = =
1/ in . NPT 3/4 in . NPT 1/ in . flange 3/4 in . flange 1 in . flange
0 1 2 3 4
= = = = =
5= 6=

1/ to 1 in . NPT or ASME class 150
flanges
Weight
1/ in . NPT process connections:
4 .4 lb ( .0 kg)
1 in . NPT process connections:
7 .7 lb (3 .5 kg)
1/ in . flange process connections:
7 .1 lb (3 . kg)
1 in . flange process connections:
Air, std ft3/h 01S = .5 to 5 02S = 4 .0 to 40 03S = 5 .5 to 55 04S = 8 .0 to 80 05S = 13 to 130 06S = 0 to 00 07S = 38 to 380 08S = 5 to 50 09S = 65 to 650 10S = 100 to 1000 Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 0 .48 to 4 .8 A2S = 0 .65 to 6 .5 A3S = 0 .8 to 8 .0 A4S = 1 .1 to 11 A5S = 1 .5 to 15 A6S = 1 .6 to 16 A7S = .0 to 0 A8S = .5 to 5 A9S = 3 .0 to 30 B1S = 4 . to 4 B2S = 5 .0 to 50 B3S = 6 .5 to 65 B4S = 9 .0 to 90 B5S = 10 to 100 B6S = 13 to 130 B7S = 16 to 160 B8S = 18 to 180 B9S = 5 to 50
Air, std L/h 01M = 70 to 700 02M = 100 to 1000 03M = 150 to 1500 04M = 0 to 00 05M = 360 to 3600 06M = 550 to 5500 07M = 1000 to 10 000 08M = 1400 to 14 000 09M = 1800 to 18 000 10M = 800 to 8 000 Water, L/h A1M = 1 .8 to 18 A2M = .5 to 5 A3M = 3 .0 to 30 A4M = 4 .0 to 40 A5M = 5 .5 to 55 A6M = 6 .3 to 63 A7M = 8 .0 to 80 A8M = 10 to 100 A9M = 1 to 10 B1M = 16 to 160 B2M = 0 to 00 B3M = 5 to 50 B4M = 35 to 350 B5M = 40 to 400 B6M = 50 to 500 B7M = 63 to 630 B8M = 70 to 700 B9M = 100 to 1000
7= 8= 9=
11 .5 lb (5 . kg)
8 Output Signal

F G H J L N P R S X
Dimensions
16
MH Model
This horizontal model offers liquid flow reading left-to-right or right-to-left to meet system requirements .
Technical Data
Water
.0 to 0 through 70 to
700 U .S . gal/h
7 .0 to 70 through 1000 to 10 000 L/h
Temperature Ranges
Process
F (C)
35 to 57
(00 to 300)

(40 to 10)
With Limit Switches or 4 to 20 mA Ouput Signal

Process
F (C)
Left-to-Right Flow Model
39 (00) 356 (180)
Ambient F (C) 104 (40) 140 (60)
Ordering Information (MH Model with 1 in. Measuring Tube)

Build an MH model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - MH - - 1 - A1M - 1 A - RL - F
4 Measuring Tube Size 7 Limit Switches (See page 0 .)
10
8 Output Signal
= 1 in .
5 End Connections
1 = 1 1/4 in . NPT 2 = 1 in . flange

0 1 2 3 4
= = = = =
Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = 35 to 350 A2S = 55 to 550 A3S = 80 to 800 A4S = 130 to 1300 A5S = 30 to 300 A6S = 70 to 700
Water, L/h A1M = 130 to 1300 A2M = 00 to 000 A3M = 300 to 3000 A4M = 500 to 5000 A5M = 850 to 8500 A6M = 1000 to 10 000
5= 6=
7= 8= 9=
Custom See Custom Calibration, page 0 . LIQ = Liquid

9 Flow Direction RL = Right-to-left LR = Left-to-right 10 Options (See page 0 .)
F G H J L N P R S X
17
MH Model
1/ in . tube: 888 psig (199 bar) 1 in . tube: 1393 psig (96 .0 bar)
Weight
1/ in . NPT process connections:
4 .4 lb ( .0 kg)
1 in . NPT process connections:
Accuracy Class
1 .6
7 .7 lb (3 .5 kg)
1/ in . flange process connections:
Up to two limit switches (M16 1 .5
7 .1 lb (3 . kg)
1 in . flange process connections:
cable glands standard)

-wire 4 to 0 mA output signal
11 .5 lb (5 . kg)

1/ to 1 1/4 in . NPT or ASME class
150 flanges
Dimensions
See page 19 for MH model dimensions .
Ordering Information (MH Model with 1/2 in. Measuring Tube)

Build an MH model variable area flowmeter ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below .
VAF - MH - 1 - 1 - A1M - 1 A - RL - F
4 Measuring Tube Size 7 Limit Switches (See page 0 .)
10
8 Output Signal
1 = 1/ in .
5 End Connections
1 2 3 4
= = = =
3/4 in . NPT 1/ in . flange 3/4 in . flange 1 in . flange
0 1 2 3 4
= = = = =
5= Water, L/h A1M = 7 .0 to 70 A2M = 1 to 10 A3M = 18 to 180 A4M = 8 to 80 A5M = 45 to 450 A6M = 70 to 700 A7M = 10 to 100 A8M = 160 to 1600 A9M = 40 to 400 6=
Water, U.S. gal/h A1S = .0 to 0 A2S = 3 .0 to 30 A3S = 5 .0 to 50 A4S = 8 .0 to 80 A5S = 1 to 10 A6S = 0 to 00 A7S = 3 to 30 A8S = 43 to 430 A9S = 64 to 640
7= 8= 9=
Custom See Custom Calibration, page 0 . LIQ = Liquid
None Minimum switch Maximum switch Minimum and maximum switch Minimum switch with one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Maximum switch with one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Minimum and maximum switch with two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 115 V (ac) Minimum switch with one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) Maximum switch with one-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac) Minimum and maximum switch with two-channel isolated switch amplifier with relay output, 30 V (ac)

9 Flow Direction RL = Right-to-left LR = Left-to-right 10 Options (See page 0 .)
F G H J L N P R S X
18
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change .
G1, G2, G3, G4, and GP Models

(9 .0)
M1 Model
1/4 in . NPT outlet 1/4 in . NPT outlet
1 .14
(4 .0)
1 .65
4 .61 A C B
(117)
(90 .0)
3 .54
(8 .0)
3 .3
1/4 in . NPT inlet
(5 .0) (4 .0)
0 .98
3 .94 (100)
1/4 in . NPT inlet
GP model: G 1/4 .
1 .65
Dimensions, in . (mm) Model G1 G3 G4 A B C 3 .15 (80 .0) 5 .1 (130) 11 .0 (80) 4 .37 (111) 3 .54 (90 .0) 1 .77 (45 .0) 7 .7 (196) 6 .89 (175) 13 .6 (346) 1 .8 (35)
G, GP 5 .75 (146) 4 .9 (15)
GM Model
(4 .0)
M2 Model
(35 .0)
0 .94
1 .38
G 1/8 outlet
1/4 in . NPT outlet
(97 .0)
3 .8
(75 .0)
.95
6 .0
(153)
(37 .6)
1 .48
4 .9
(15)
(65 .0)
.56
G 1/8 inlet
(55 .0)
.17
5 .8
(134)
1/4 in . NPT inlet
19
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change .
M3 Model
Tube Process Dimensions, in . (mm) Size End in . Connection A L 1/
15/25
NPT Flange NPT Flange
11 .8 (300) 9 .84 (50) 11 .8 (300) 9 .84 (50)
4 .1 (107) 4 .69 (119)
5 .43
(138)
15/25
(181)
7 .13
MH Model
A 5 .43
(138)
(181)
7 .13
Right-to-Left Flow Model
Tube Process Dimensions, in . (mm) Size End in . Connection A L 1/ 1 NPT Flange NPT Flange 11 .8 (300) 9 .84 (50) 11 .8 (300) 9 .84 (50) 4 .1 (107) 4 .69 (119)
0
Custom Calibration
Standard Swagelok variable area flowmeters are factory calibrated to their media, flow range, and accuracy class using clean, dry air for air-flow range models and water for water-flow range models . Standard units of measure marked on the scale are at 60F (15C) and 14 .7 psig (1 .0 bar) . Custom-calibrated flowmeters are available for fluids with properties substantially different from those of air or water, as well as systems operating at higher pressures or temperatures . Flowmeters calibrated for one fluid at a specific pressure and temperature can be used to measure other fluids and different pressures and temperatures by using a conversion factor . See the Swagelok Variable Area Flowmeters Installation Instructions, G Series and M Series, MS-CRD-0111, for more information . In liquids, higher temperature can reduce viscosity and density, resulting in lower readings . In gases, higher fluid temperature can increase volume and result in higher readings . Knowing the specific fluid temperature enables us to calibrate the scale more accurately . Increased pressure can compress gases and lead to lower meter readings . Knowing the system pressure enables us to calibrate the scale properly for your application . To order a custom Swagelok variable area flowmeter calibrated to meet your requirements as shown below, use GAS or LIQ as the flow range designator in the desired model ordering number and contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative . You will need to specify: 1 . Fluid to be measured . Fluid viscosity with unit of measure 3 . Fluid specific gravity 4 . Fluid temperature with unit of measure 5 . Fluid pressure with unit of measure 6 . Flow measurement range with unit of measure . Swagelok custom-calibrated variable area flowmeters must maintain a 10-to-1 turndown ratio and are matched as closely as possible to the desired flow measurement range . Custom-calibrated flowmeters are marked with the fluid media and unit of measure for which they are calibrated .
Options
Options are specified in variable area flowmeter ordering numbers as shown in Ordering Information for each model .
Electrical Options
Two electrical options are available with select Swagelok variable area flowmeter models:
discrete limit switch
Junction Boxes
Junction boxes, available on select Swagelok variable area flowmeter models, can be mounted to the flowmeter to facilitate electrical connections between the flowmeter and the control system . Junction boxes are suggested when limit switches are ordered .
outputs for indicating high/low flow

4 to 0 mA output signal .
Threaded Conduit Gland and M20 1.5 Cable Gland (M3 and MH Models)
The standard cable gland assembled onto the flowmeter casing to guide the wiring for electronic options is M16 1 .5 thread . Available options are a 1/ in . female NPT end connection and an M0 1 .5 end connection .
Limit Switches
Optional minimum or maximum limit switches available for most models are compliant with NAMUR IEC 60947-5-6 (EN 60947-5-6) .
Valve Position
An integral metering valve is provided on some products, on the bottom (inlet) side of the flowmeter . Upon request, the valve can be mounted on the top (outlet) side .
Output Signal
Some variable area G Series Flowmeter with Limit Switches, Junction flowmeter models are Box, and Isolated Switch available with a separate Amplifier with Relay Output two-wire 4 to 0 mA output signal . These models require auxiliary power of 14 .8 to 30 V (dc) .
1
Options
Options are specified in variable area flowmeter ordering numbers as shown in Ordering Information for each model .
Certificates and Test Reports

Certificate of Compliance
This document certifies that the products supplied to the customer by the manufacturer are in compliance with the requirements of the order, in accordance with EN 1004 .
Dye Penetration Test and Certificate

A dye penetration test is available for wetted welds . For acceptance criteria, the related material standard is used .
5-Point Calibration Record

The calibration record shows actual flow performance, theoretical performance, and error over the measurement range .
X-Ray Test and Report

An X-ray test is available for wetted welds . The test procedure follows EN 1435-1 Class B . Acceptance criteria are in accordance with ISO 5817 group .
Pressure Test and Certificate

A hydrostatic pressure test based on EN 1004 is available .
Hardness Test and Report

A hardness test on wetted metal components, based on ASTM A956, is available .
Material Certification
This inspection certificate, in accordance with EN 1004, shows the material and heat numbers of the pressure-bearing and wetted materials, as well as the original mill material certifications of the wetted materials .
Oil- and Grease-Free Cleaning and Test Report

An additional degreasing operation is available .
Accessories
Damping Device
For unstable flows or low operating (inlet) pressures, particularly with gas applications, the measuring section can be fitted with a float damping device on some M3 and MH models . This device is self-locating, with working parts of high-tech ceramic to ensure a long service life . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok representative .

Additional Products
Pressure Regulators
Swagelok offers a variety of pressure regulators .
Pressure-reducing regulators Back-pressure regulators Gas cylinder changeover
Metering Valves
Swagelok metering valves offer: Low- and high-pressure service Repeatable vernier handles Brass and 316 stainless steel materials . For more information, see the Swagelok Metering Valves catalog, MS-01-14 .
manifolds
Electrically heated and steam-
heated vaporizing regulators . For more information, see the Swagelok Pressure Regulators catalog, MS-0-30 .
3
SwagelokTM Swagelok Company 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., GLI June 008, R1 MS-0-346
www.swagelok.com
VCO O -Ring Face Se al Fit tings
1/8 to 1 in. sizes 316 or 316L stainless steel Tube, NPT, SAE thread, and weld connections
VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings
Contents
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 Bodies Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Swagelok Tube Fitting Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Tube Fitting Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 5 6 6 NPT Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nuts Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glands Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Tube Fitting Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPT Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Male SAE/MS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Male NPT Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Male SAE/MS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Male SAE/MS Positionable Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 VCO Fitting Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Technical Data
Component Bodies, glands, nuts Automatic tube weld fittings O-ring, VCO bodies O-ring, SAE/MS threads Lubricant Material 316 SS 316L SS Fluorocarbon FKM (70 durometer) Fluorocarbon FKM (90 durometer) Silicone-based
Pressure Ratings
All ratings comply with calculations in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31 .3, Process Piping, and ASME B31 .1, Power Piping .
Temperature Ratings
Temperature ratings for VCO fittings are determined by the O-ring materials .
Temperature Rating F (C) 400 (04) 50 (11) 450 (3) 550 (87) 300 (148)
O-Ring Uniform Size Number

VCO Size in . 1/8 and 1/4 3/8 and 1/ 3/4 1 SAE/MS Thread Size 7/16-0 9/16-18 3/4-16 1 1/16-1 1 5/16-1 O-Ring Uniform Size Number 010 111 116 15 O-Ring Uniform Size Number 904 906 908 91 916
Material Fluorocarbon FKM Buna N PTFE Perfluoroelastomer Ethylene propylene
Features
Swagelok VCO O-ring face seal fittings are designed for rapid assembly in pipe, tube, and welded systems .
Unique design allows easy
installation where space is limited .

No axial clearance is required . Sealing is accomplished with
O-ring contained completely for maximum efficiency
Test ports at two locations for easy leak testing
Female nut threads silver plated for easy assembly VCO Body
a captive O-ring in the body component .

Assemblies can be used from high
pressure to critical vacuum, within a wide range of temperatures .
VCO Gland Smooth finish on gland face ensures positive seal
VCO Nut
Testing
The VCO face seal fitting design has been helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s .

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change . The E dimension refers to the smallest nominal inside diameter of the part .
Nuts
Female
F flat
Blind
F flat
VCO Size in . 1/8 and 1/4 3/8 and 1/ 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-4 SS-8-VCO-4 SS-1-VCO-4 SS-16-VCO-4

(16 .8)
F 11/16 1 1 1/ 1 3/4
VCO Size in . 1/8 and 1/4 3/8 and 1/ 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-4-BL SS-8-VCO-4-BL SS-1-VCO-4-BL SS-16-VCO-4-BL
Dimensions, in (mm) A 0 .44

(11 .)
F 11/16 1 1 1/ 1 3/4
0 .69
(17 .5)
0 .56
(14 .)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .81
(0 .6)
Glands
Union
F flat E F flat
VCO Size in . 1/4 1/
Ordering Number SS-4-WVCO-6-DF SS-8-WVCO-6-DF

(36 .1)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 11/16 1

(70)
1 .61
(40 .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
5 800
(399)
Swagelok Tube Fitting Connector

F flat E
VCO Size in . 1/4
Tube OD in . 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-4-WVCO-6-400 SS-8-WVCO-6-600 SS-8-WVCO-6-810 SS-1-WVCO-6-110 SS-16-WVCO-6-1610

(44 .)
B 0 .70
(17 .8)
C 0 .77
(19 .6)
D 0 .60
(15 .)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 11/16

(70)
1 .87
(47 .5)
0 .76
(19 .3)
0 .66 0 .81
(0 .6) (16 .8)
0 .8
(7 .1)
1/
C A D B
1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
.01
(51 .1)
0 .87
( .1)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
5 800
(399)
.14
(54 .4)
0 .87
( .1)
0 .94
(3 .9)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 1/ 1 3/4
4 000
(75)
.45
(6 .)
1 .04
(6 .4)
0 .98
(4 .9)
1 .3
(31 .)
0 .87
( .1)
3 000
(06)
Tube Adapter
E C A
VCO Size in . 1/4
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-3-4TA SS-8-VCO-3-6TA SS-8-VCO-3-8TA SS-1-VCO-3-1TA SS-16-VCO-3-16TA

(33 .3)
C 0 .64
(16 .3)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)

(70)
1 .38
(35 .1)
0 .70
(17 .8)
0 .7
(6 .8)
6 500
(447)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .6
(41 .1)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .37
(9 .3)
6 700
(461)
1 .80
(45 .7)
1 .0
(5 .9)
0 .58
(14 .7)
5 800
(399)
.05
(5 .1)
1 .30
(33 .0)
0 .80
(0 .3)
4 700
(33)
Glands
Weld
Tx D A E
Tube Socket Weld

VCO Size in . 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 Tube OD in . 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 Ordering Number SS--VCO-3 SS-4-VCO-3 SS-6-VCO-3 SS-8-VCO-3 SS-1-VCO-3 SS-16-VCO-3 Dimensions, in . (mm) A 0 .77
(19 .6)
D 0 .10
( .5)
E 0 .09
( .3)
Tx 0 .38
(9 .7)

(1061)
0 .77
(19 .6)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .38
(9 .7)
6 800
(468)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .60
(15 .)
8 100
(558)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .60
(15 .)
3 000
(06)
0 .94
(3 .9)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .9
(3 .4)
3 700
(55)
0 .98
(4 .9)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .19
(30 .)
3 000
(06)
Tube Socket Weld Reducing

Tx D A E
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-3-TSW SS-8-VCO-3-4TSW

(19 .6)
D 0 .10
( .5)
E 0 .09
( .3)
Tx 0 .9
(7 .4)

(868)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .48
(1 .)
10 700
(737)
Male Tube Weld

Tx C E
VCO Size in . 1/4
Tube OD in . 1/8 1/4 1/4
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-3-MTW SS-4-VCO-3-4MTW SS-8-VCO-3-4MTW SS-8-VCO-3-6MTW SS-8-VCO-3-8MTW

(19 .6)
C 0 .8
(7 .1)
E 0 .06
(1 .5)
Tx 0 .38
(9 .7)

(771)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .41
(10 .4)
0 .1
(3 .0)
0 .91
(3 .1)
0 .1 0 .41
(10 .4) (3 .0)
11 00
(771)
1/
3/8 1/
0 .84
(1 .3)
0 .3
(5 .8)
0 .60
(15 .)
8 00
(564)
1 .06
(6 .9)
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .33
(8 .4)
7 500
(516)
Automatic Tube Weld

D Tx C A E
VCO Size in . 1/4
Dimensions, in . (mm) Ordering Number 316L-4-VCO-3A 316L-8-VCO-3A6 316L-8-VCO-3A 316L-1-VCO-3A 316L-16-VCO-3A A 1 .1
(8 .4)
C 0 .78
(19 .8)
D 0 .0
(0 .51)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
Tx 0 .9
(7 .4)
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065
1 .13
(8 .7)
0 .79
(0 .0)
0 .03
(0 .76)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .41
(10 .4)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 5100 (351) 3300

(7)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .14
(9 .0)
0 .80
(0 .3)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3500
(41)
1 .0
(30 .5)
0 .80
(0 .3)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .65
(16 .5)
0 .80
(0 .3)
00
(151)
1 .41
(35 .8)
1 .00
(5 .4)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .06
(6 .9)
00
(151)
Glands
NPT Connectors
G flat
Male
VCO Size in . 1/4 NPT Size in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1 SS-8-WVCO-1-8 SS-1-WVCO-1-1 SS-16-WVCO-1-16 Ordering Number SS-4-WVCO-1-4 SS-8-WVCO-1-6 Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .59
(40 .4)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
G 11/16
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 9800

(675)
1 .67
(4 .4)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 .87
(47 .5)
5600
(385)
.03
(51 .6)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 1/ 1 3/4
3900
(68)
.36
(59 .9)
0 .87
( .1)
900
(199)
Female
G flat E F flat
VCO Size in . 1/4
NPT Size in . 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-4-WVCO-7-4 SS-8-WVCO-7-6 SS-8-WVCO-7-8 SS-1-WVCO-7-1 SS-16-WVCO-7-16

(39 .9)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 3/4 7/8
G 11/16

(454)
1 .73
(43 .9)
5300 1
(365)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
0 .40
(10 .)
1 .96
(49 .8)
1 1/16 1 5/16 1 1/ 1 5/8 1 3/4
4900
(337)
.1
(53 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
4000
(75)
.9
(58 .)
0 .87
( .1)
3000
(06)
Male SAE/MS Connector

G flat E
VCO Size in . 1/4
Straight Thread Size 7/16-0 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-4-WVCO-1-4ST SS-8-WVCO-1-6ST SS-8-WVCO-1-8ST SS-1-WVCO-1-1ST SS-16-WVCO-1-16ST

(39 .1)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
G 11/16

(310)
1 .64
(41 .7)
1/
A
0 .40
(10 .)
3/4-16 3/4 1 1 1/16-1 1 5/16-1
1 .71
(43 .4)
4500
(310)
.07
(5 .6)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 1/ 1 3/4
3600
(48)
.17
(55 .1)
0 .87
( .1)
900
(199)
Bodies
Unions
F flat
Union
VCO Size in . 1/4 1/ Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-6 SS-8-VCO-6 Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .5
(31 .8)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 5/8 15/16

(985)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .40
(10 .)
11 100
(764)
Bulkhead
F flat
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-61 SS-8-VCO-61
A 1 .88
(47 .8)
C 1 .06
(6 .9)
Dimensions, in . (mm) Panel Hole Max Panel E F Drill Size Thickness 0 .18 0 .36 3/4 37/64
(4 .6) (9 .1)

(985)
C A
.09
(53 .1)
1 .19
(30 .)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 1/16
57/64
0 .40
(10 .)
11 100
(764)
Reducing
F flat
VCO Size in .
E
VCO Size in . 1/4
Ordering Number SS-8-VCO-6-4

(36 .3)
1/
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 15/16

(764)
Elbow
E

A
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-9 SS-8-VCO-9 SS-1-VCO-9 SS-16-VCO-9

(4 .4)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)

(985)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
11 100
(764)
3/4 1
1 .48
(37 .6)
0 .6
(15 .7)
10 900
(751)
1 .56
(39 .6)
0 .87
( .1)
8 800
(606)
Tee
E B

B A
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-T SS-8-VCO-T SS-1-VCO-T SS-16-VCO-T

(48 .8)
B 0 .96
(4 .4)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)

(985)
.5
(64 .0)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
11 100
(764)
3/4 1
.96
(75 .)
1 .48
(37 .6)
0 .6
(15 .7)
10 900
(751)
3 .1
(79 .)
1 .56
(39 .6)
0 .87
( .1)
8 800
(606)
Bodies
Blind
F flat
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-1-BL SS-8-VCO-1-BL SS-1-VCO-1-BL SS-16-VCO-1-BL

(19 .6)
F 5/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
0 .89
( .6)
3/4 1
0 .99
(5 .1)
1 .0
(5 .9)
Swagelok Tube Fitting Connectors

F flat

VCO Size in . 1/4 1/4 SS-4-VCO-6-400 SS-8-VCO-6-600 SS-8-VCO-6-810 SS-1-VCO-6-110 SS-16-VCO-6-1610 Tube OD in . 1/8 Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-6-00 Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .38
(35 .1)
D 0 .51
(13 .0)
E 0 .09
( .3)
F 5/8

(751)
1 .47
(37 .3)
0 .60
(15 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
10 00
(70)
D A
3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .8
(7 .1)
6 500 15/16
(447)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
6 700
(461)
1 .86
(47 .)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 5/16 1 5/8
5 800
(399)
.06
(5 .3)
1 .3
(31 .)
0 .87
( .1)
4 700
(33)
Bulkhead
F flat
Dimensions, in . (mm) VCO Size in .

D
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-A1-400 SS-8-VCO-A1-600 SS-8-VCO-A1-810 SS-1-VCO-A1-110 SS-16-VCO-A1-1610
1/4
A .10
(53 .3)
Ax 1 .3
(33 .5)
D 0 .60
(15 .)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 5/8
Panel Hole Drill Size 9/64 37/64
Max Panel Thickness 0 .40

(10 .)

(70)
Ax A
.34
(59 .4)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .44
(11 .)
6 500
(447)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
.55
(64 .8)
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
15/16 49/64 1 5/16 1 1/64 1 5/8 1 1/64
0 .50
(1 .7)
6 700
(461)
.86
(7 .6)
1 .87
(47 .5)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .66
(16 .8)
5 800
(399)
3 .9
(83 .6)
.6
(57 .4)
1 .3
(31 .)
0 .87
( .1)
0 .75
(19 .1)
4 700
(33)
Swagelok Tube Fitting Elbow

B E C A D
VCO Size in . 1/4
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-9-400 SS-8-VCO-9-600 SS-8-VCO-9-810 SS-1-VCO-9-110 SS-16-VCO-9-1610

(30 .)
B 0 .96
(4 .4)
C 0 .90
( .9)
D 0 .60
(15 .)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)

(70)
1 .39
(35 .3)
0 .66 1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .8
(7 .1)
6 500
(447)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .10
(7 .9)
(16 .8)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
6 700
(461)
1 .80
(45 .7)
1 .48
(37 .6)
1 .40
(35 .6)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .6
(15 .7)
5 800
(399)
.04
(51 .8)
1 .56
(39 .6)
1 .56
(39 .6)
1 .3
(31 .)
0 .87
( .1)
4 700
(33)
Bodies
Weld
F flat
Tube Socket Weld

VCO Size in .
Tx D
Tube OD in . 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
Ordering Number SS--VCO-1 SS-4-VCO-1 SS-6-VCO-1 SS-8-VCO-1 SS-1-VCO-1 SS-16-VCO-1

( .4)
1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
D 0 .10
( .5)
E 0 .09
( .3)
F 5/8 5/8 15/16 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
Tx 0 .9
(7 .4)

(868)
1 .09
(7 .7)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .38
(9 .7)
6 800
(468)
1 .8
(3 .5)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .60
(15 .)
8 100
(558)
1 .34
(34 .0)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .60
(15 .)
3 000
(06)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .9
(3 .4)
3 700
(54)
1 .7
(43 .7)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .19
(30 .)
3 000
(06)
Automatic Tube Weld

F flat D E B A Tx
VCO Size in . 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 1
Tube OD in . 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1
Ordering Number 316L-4-VCO-1A 316L-8-VCO-1A6 316L-8-VCO-1A 316L-1-VCO-1A 316L-16-VCO-1A

(40 .4)
B 0 .78
(19 .8)
D 0 .0
(0 .5)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 5/8 15/16 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
Tx 0 .9
(7 .4)
Wall 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065

(351)
1 .74
(44 .)
0 .79
(0 .0)
0 .03
(0 .8)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300
(7)
1 .75
(44 .4)
0 .80
(0 .3)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3500
(41)
1 .78
(45 .)
0 .80
(0 .3)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .65
(16 .5)
0 .80
(0 .3)
00
(151)
.03
(51 .6)
1 .00
(5 .4)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .06
(6 .9)
00
(151)
NPT Connectors
F flat
Male
VCO Size in .
E
NPT Size in . 1/8
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-1- SS-4-VCO-1-4 SS-8-VCO-1-6 SS-8-VCO-1-8 SS-1-VCO-1-1 SS-16-VCO-1-16

(9 .5)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 5/8

(689)
1/4
A
1/4 3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .34
(34 .0)
13 400
(93)
1 .46
(37 .1)
0 .38
(9 .7)
7 800 15/16
(537)
1 .65 (41 .9) 1 .75

(44 .4)
0 .40
(10 .)
10 000
(689)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 5/16 1 5/8
7 300
(50)
1 .97
(50 .0)
0 .87
( .1)
5 300
(365)
10
Bodies
NPT Connectors
F flat
Female
VCO Size in . 1/4 1/4 SS-4-VCO-7-4 SS-8-VCO-7-6 SS-8-VCO-7-8 SS-1-VCO-7-1 SS-16-VCO-7-16 NPT Size in . 1/8 Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-7- Dimensions, in . (mm) A 1 .5
(31 .8)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 5/8 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8

(578)
1 .39
(35 .3)
6600
(454)
3/8 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .57
(39 .9)
6600
(454)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 .77
(45 .0)
4900
(337)
1 .93
(49 .0)
0 .6
(15 .7)
4600
(316)
.0
(51 .3)
0 .87
( .1)
4400
(303)
Male Elbow
B E
VCO Size in . 1/4

A D
NPT Size in . 1/8 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-- SS-4-VCO--4 SS-8-VCO--6 SS-8-VCO--8 SS-1-VCO--1 SS-16-VCO--16

( .1)
B 0 .96
(4 .4)
D 0 .38
(9 .7)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)

(689)
1 .05
(6 .7)
0 .56
(14 .)
8 000
(551)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .56 1 .6
(3 .0) (14 .)
0 .38
(9 .7)
7 800
(537)
1/ 1/ 3/4 1 3/4 1
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .40
(10 .)
7 700
(530)
1 .67
(4 .4)
1 .48
(37 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .6
(15 .7)
7 300
(50)
1 .94
(49 .3)
1 .56
(39 .6)
0 .94
(3 .9)
0 .87
( .0)
5 300
(365)
Male SAE/MS Connector

F flat
VCO Size in . 1/4
Straight Thread Size 7/16-0 9/16-18 7/16-0
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-1-4ST SS-4-VCO-1-6ST SS-8-VCO-1-4ST SS-8-VCO-1-6ST SS-8-VCO-1-8ST SS-1-VCO-1-1ST SS-16-VCO-1-16ST

(31 .5)
C 0 .36
(9 .1)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 11/16
Pressure Ratings psig (bar) 4500

(310)
1 .17
(9 .7)
0 .39
(9 .9)
1 .36
(34 .5)
0 .36
(9 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
C A
1/
9/16-18 3/4-16
1 .39
(35 .3)
0 .39
(9 .9)
0 .30
(7 .6)
15/16
4500
(310)
1 .47
(37 .3)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 1 3/8 1 5/8 3600

(48)
3/4 1
1 1/16-1 1 5/16-1
1 .73
(43 .9)
0 .59
(15 .0)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .59
(15 .0)
0 .85
(1 .6)
900
(199)
11
Bodies
Male SAE/MS Positionable Elbow
B
VCO Size in . 1/4
Straight Thread Size 7/16-0 9/16-18
Ordering Number SS-4-VCO-9P-4ST SS-8-VCO-9P-6ST SS-8-VCO-9P-8ST SS-1-VCO-9P-1ST SS-16-VCO-9P-16ST

(30 .)
B 0 .96
(4 .4)
B1 0 .39
(9 .9)
E 0 .19
(4 .6)
U 0 .65
(16 .5)

(310)
1 .54
(39 .1)
0 .44 1 .33
(33 .8) (11 .)
0 .30
(7 .6)
0 .79
(0 .1)
1/ 3/4-16
A B1 U washer OD
3600
(48)
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 .01
(5 .7)
3/4 1
1 1/16-1 1 5/16-1
.13
(54 .1)
1 .53
(38 .9)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
1 .44
(36 .6)
900
(199)
.31
(58 .7)
1 .7
(43 .7)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .73
(43 .9)
300
(158)

O-Ring Materials
Perfluoroelastomer, Buna N, PTFE, and ethylene propylene O-rings are available for special applications . Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative for information .
VCO Fitting Installation Instructions

1 Finger-tight
45
Swagelok, VCOTM Swagelok Company 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., MI November 008, R8 MS-01-8
www.swagelok.com
VCR Metal Gasket Face Se al Fit tings
1/16 to 1 in. and 6 to 18 mm sizes High-purity stainless steels The original design, the authentic VCR brand
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings
Contents
Typical VCR Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrahigh-Purity Processing . . . . . . . . Ordering Information, Pressure Ratings, and Dimensions . . Glands Tube Butt Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Male Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bodies Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Female Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swagelok Tube Fitting Connector . . . 8 9 9 4 6 7 7 7 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 Welded Assemblies Male NPT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Female NPT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Swagelok Tube Fitting Connector . . . 13 Rotating Female Union . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Nuts, Caps, and Plugs . . . . . . . . . . 14 High-Flow ConnectionsH Type VCR Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Options and Accessories Flow Restrictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Lock and Tag Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Side-Load Installation Tool and Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . 19
Male Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tube Butt Weld Bulkhead Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Elbows, Tee, Cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Typical VCR Assemblies

Female nut Gland Side-load retainer gasket Gland Male nut
OR Female nut Gland Gasket Body
Features
Swagelok VCR fittings offer the high purity of a metalto-metal seal, providing leak-tight service from vacuum to positive pressure . The seal on a VCR assembly is made when the gasket is compressed by two beads during the engagement of a male nut or body hex and a female nut .
Minimal clearance required for removal
Side-load retainer gasket for easy installation and minimal clearance for removal Standard surface finish on glands and bodies is a roughness average of 10 in . (0 .5 m) Ra
Test port at two locations for easy leak testing
Markings identify manufacturer, material, and when applicable, the appropriate process designator, in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61
No virtual leak zones Precision manufactured gasket for maximum performance
Female threads are silver plated to prevent galling, ensure easy, consistent assembly
Material heat code is stamped on glands and all shapes to ensure raw material traceability
Material Specification Glands, Bodies, and Nuts Bar stock: ASME SA479 ASTM A76 Forged shapes: ASME SA18 ASTM A314 Bar stock: ASME SA479 ASTM A76 Forged shapes: ASME A18 SEMI F0-0305 High-Purity Designator
Pressure Ratings
All ratings comply with calculations in accordance with
ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31 .3, Process Piping .

To determine pressure ratings in accordance with ASME
B31 .1, Power Piping, multiply psig rating by 0 .94 .

Working pressure ratings determined at room temperature
316 stainless steel
SS
with gasket materials shown .
316L stainless steel 316L VAR stainless steel Nickel 316L stainless steel Copper
316L
Temperature Ratings
Components Fittings Material 316 stainless steel 316L stainless steel 316L VAR stainless steel 316L stainless steel Gaskets Nickel Copper 1000 (537) 1000 (537) 600 (315) 400 (04) Temperature, F (C)
6LV Gaskets NI SS CU
ASTM B16 ASTM A40, ASTM A167 ASTM B15
0 % minimum elongation allowed .
Plating
VCR female nuts are silver plated . Avoid chemical processes used for cleaning, electropolishing, and passivation that will remove plating . If the plating is damaged or removed, thread galling may occur, damaging fitting components and preventing a proper seal .
Testing
The VCR fitting design has been helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 9 std cm3/s with silver-plated and copper gaskets and to a maximum leak rate of 4 3 10 11 std cm3/s with unplated gaskets .
Cleaning
Components are cleaned to remove oil, grease, and loose particles . For more information, see Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-6 .
Ultrahigh-Purity Processing
A variety of VCR face seal glands and bodies is available with controlled surface finishes, electropolished, and specially cleaned to meet ultrahigh-purity system requirements . For more information, see Swagelok UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61 .
Ordering Information, Pressure Ratings, and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change . The E dimension refers to the smallest nominal inside diameter of the part . To order fittings manufactured in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61,
add P to the ordering number .

Example: 6LV-4-VCR-3-4TB7P
Glands
E C A
Short Tube Butt Weld

Tube Size Nominal Wall Thickness VCR Size in . 1/8 1/8 0 .08 1/4 6LV-4-VCR-3S-TB7 6LV-4-VCR-3S-4TB 1/4 1/4 0 .035 6LV-4-VCR-3S-4TB7 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3S-4TB7 6LV-8-VCR-3S-6TB 3/8 0 .035 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3S-6TB7 6LV-8-VCR-3S-8TB 1/ 0 .049 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3S-8TB3 6LV-8-VCR-3S-8TB7 Dimensions, mm (in .) 6 8 10 1 18 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 6LV-4-VCR-3S-6MTB7 6LV-4-VCR-3S-8MTB7 6LV-8-VCR-3S-10MTB7 6LV-8-VCR-3S-1MTB7 6LV-1-VCR-3S-18MTB7 9 .5
(1 .16)
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 6LV--VCR-3S-TB7
Dimensions A 1 .08
(7 .4)
Working Pressure E Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8500 8500 6800
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .06
(1 .5)
(585)
(585)
(468)
1 .10
(7 .9)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
0 .60
(15 .)
0 .5
(6 .4)
6LV-4-VCR-3S-4TB3
0 .7
(18 .3)
0 .38
(9 .6)
5100 0 .18
(4 .6) (351)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
1 .10
(7 .9)
0 .75
(19 .1)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .75
(19 .1)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .31
(7 .9)
3300
(7)
3300
(7)
600
(179)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .74
(18 .8)
0 .38
(9 .6)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
800
(19)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .75
(19 .1)
4 .0
(0 .16)
468
(6800)
bar (psig) 468 37

(6800) (5400)
9 .5
(1 .16)
6 .0
(0 .4)
337
(4900)
337
(4900)
337
(4900)
9 .5
(1 .16)
19 .1
(0 .75)
8 .0
(0 .31)
41
(3500)
41
(3500)
19
(800)
9 .5
(1 .16)
10 .0
(0 .39)
13
(3100)
13
(3100)
165
(400)
31 .0
(1 .)
15 .0
(0 .59)
06
(3000)
06
(3000)
165
(400)
Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
Glands
E C A
Long Tube Butt Weld

Tube Size 1/8 Nominal Wall Thickness 0 .08 VCR Size in . 1/8 Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 6LV--VCR-3-TB7 6LV-4-VCR-3-4TB 6LV-4-VCR-3-005 1/4 1/4 0 .035 6LV-4-VCR-3-4TB3 6LV-4-VCR-3-4TB7 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3-4TB7 6LV-8-VCR-3-6TB 3/8 0 .035 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3-6TB7 6LV-8-VCR-3-8TB 1/ 0 .049 1/ 6LV-8-VCR-3-8TB3 6LV-8-VCR-3-8TB7 3/4 1 0 .049 0 .065 3/4 1 6LV-1-VCR-3-1TB7 6LV-16-VCR-3-16TB7 Dimensions, mm (in .) 6 8 10 1 18 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 6LV-4-VCR-3-6MTB7 6LV-4-VCR-3-8MTB7 6LV-8-VCR-3-10MTB7 6LV-8-VCR-3-1MTB7 6LV-1-VCR-3-18MTB7 43 .
(1 .70)
Dimensions A 1 .4
(36 .1)
Working Pressure E Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8500 8500 6800

(585) (585) (468)
C 0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .06
(1 .5)
1 .0
(30 .5)
0 .5
(6 .4)
1 .31
(33 .3)
0 .36
(9 .1)
5100 0 .18
(4 .6) (351)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
1 .3
(33 .5)
0 .38
(9 .6)
1 .70
(43 .)
0 .75
(19 .1)
1 .80
(45 .7)
0 .75
(19 .1)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .9
(3 .8)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .31
(7 .9)
3300
(7)
3300
(7)
600
(179)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .75
(19 .1)
1 .9
(3 .8)
0 .5
(6 .4)
1 .41
(35 .8)
0 .38
(9 .6)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
800
(19)
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .75
(19 .1)
.03
(51 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .65
(16 .5)
400
(165)
400
(165)
1900
(130)
.3
(58 .9)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
400
(165)
1900
(130)
4 .0
(0 .16)
bar (psig) 468 468 37

(6800) (6800) (5400)
43 .
(1 .70)
6 .0
(0 .4)
337
(4900)
337
(4900)
337
(4900)
45 .5
(1 .79)
19 .1
(0 .75)
8 .0
(0 .31)
41
(3500)
41
(3500)
19
(800)
45 .5
(1 .79)
10 .0
(0 .39)
13
(3100)
13
(3100)
165
(400)
51 .6
( .03)
15 .0
(0 .59)
06
(3000)
06
(3000)
165
(400)
Not designed for gasket retainer assembly . May contain internal diameter transitions .
Short Automatic Tube Butt Weld

Tx D C A E
Tube Size 1/4 3/8 1/
Nominal Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
VCR Size in . 1/4 1/ 1/
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 316L-4-VCR-3AS 316L-8-VCR-3AS6 316L-8-VCR-3AS Dimensions, mm (in .)
Dimensions A 1 .1
(8 .4)
Working Pressure Tx 0 .9

(7 .4)
D 0 .0
(0 .5)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
Ni
SS
Cu
psig (bar) 5100 5100 5100

(351) (7) (41) (351) (7) (41) (351) (179) (19)
1 .15
(9 .)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .03
(0 .8)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300 3300 600 3500 3500 800 bar (psig) 468 468 37 337 41 13 337 41 13 337 19 165
1 .16
(9 .5)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .55
(14 .0)
6 8 1 .0 10 1
1/4 1/4 1/ 1/
316L-4-VCR-3-6MAS 316L-4-VCR-3-8MAS 316L-8-VCR-3-10MAS 316L-8-VCR-3-1MAS
30 .0
(1 .18)
0 .5
(0 .0)
4 .0
(0 .16)
6 .8 8 .9 10 .9 13 .
(0 .7) (6800) (6800) (5400) (0 .35) (4900) (4900) (4900) (0 .43) (3500) (3500) (800) (0 .5) (3100) (3100) (400)
30 .
(1 .19)
0 .8 19 .1
(0 .75) (0 .03)
6 .0
(0 .4)
31 .0
(1 .)
0 .8
(0 .03)
8 .0
(0 .31)
30 .5
(1 .0)
1 .0
(0 .04)
10 .0
(0 .39)
Glands
Tx D C A E
Long Automatic Tube Butt Weld

Tube Size Nominal Wall Thickness VCR Size in . 1/4 1/4 0 .035 1/ 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 316L-8-VCR-3A4 316L-8-VCR-3A6 316L-8-VCR-3A 316L-1-VCR-3A 316L-16-VCR-3A Dimensions, mm (in .) 6 1 18 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5 1/4 1/ 3/4 316L-4-VCR-3-6MA 316L-8-VCR-3-1MA 316L-1-VCR-3-18MA 43 .7
(1 .7)
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 316L-4-VCR-3A
Dimensions A 1 .7
(43 .7)
Working Pressure Tx Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 5100 5100 5100
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .0
(0 .5)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .9
(7 .4)
(351) (41)
(351) (41) (7) (41) (165) (165)
(351) (19) (179) (19) (165) (130)
1 .8
(46 .)
3500 3500 800 3300 3300 600

(7) (41) (165) (165)
1 .8
(46 .)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .03
(0 .8)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .41
(10 .4)
1 .83
(46 .5)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3500 3500 800 400 400 400 400 400 1900 bar (psig) 468 468 37 13 06 13 06 165 165
.07
(5 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .65
(16 .5)
0 .80
(0 .3)
.57
(65 .3)
0 .96
(4 .4)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .06
(6 .9)
0 .5
(0 .0)
4 .0
(0 .16)
6 .8 13 . 19 .3
(0 .7) (6800) (6800) (5400) (0 .5) (3100) (3100) (400) (0 .76) (3000) (3000) (400)
46 .5
(1 .83)
19 .1
(0 .75)
1 .0
(0 .04)
10 .0
(0 .39)
5 .6
( .07)
1 .0
(0 .04)
15 .0
(0 .59)
Socket Weld
Tx D A E
Tube Socket Size 1/16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 1
VCR Size 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/ 1/ 5/8 3/4 1
Ordering Number
Dimensions A D E 0 .05
(1 .3)

(3 .3)
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .70 0 .10 SS-1-VCR-3

(17 .8) ( .5) ( .5)
psig (bar) 9000 9000 700

(60) (60) (496)
SS--VCR-3 SS-4-VCR-3 SS-6-VCR-3 SS-8-VCR-3 SS-10-VCR-3 SS-1-VCR-3 SS-16-VCR-3
0 .70
(17 .8)
0 .10 0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .09
( .3)
0 .0
(5 .1)
7100
(489)
7100
(489)
7100
(489)
1 .31
(33 .3)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .35
(8 .9)
5500
(378)
5500
(378)
5500
(378)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .60
(15 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .38
(9 .6)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .60
(15 .)
3000
(06)
3000
(06)
400
(165)
1 .56
(39 .6)
0 .41
(10 .4)
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .7
(18 .3)
800
(19)
800
(19)
00
(151)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .88
( .4)
800
(19)
800
(19)
00
(151)
.
(56 .4)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .87
( .1)
1 .19
(30 .)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
Uses 1/8 in . gasket and nut . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly . Uses 1/ in . gasket and nut .
Short Socket Weld

Tx D A E
Tube Socket Size
VCR Size
Ordering Number
Dimensions A D E Tx
Working Pressure Ni SS psig (bar) Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .50 SS-4-VCR-3- .50LG 1/4 1/4 SS-4-VCR-3- .75LG

(1 .7)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .35
(8 .9)
5500
(378)
5500
(378)
5500
(378)
0 .75
(19 .1)
Glands
E Tx D A
Reducing Socket Weld

Tube Socket Size 1/8 1/4 VCR Size 1/4 1/ Ordering Number Dimensions A D 0 .10
( .5)

(8 .9)
E 0 .09 0 .18
(4 .6)
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .31 SS-4-VCR-3-TSW

(33 .3)
( .3)
psig (bar) 8000 8000 8000

(551) (551) (551)
SS-8-VCR-3-4TSW
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .60
(15 .)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
May contain internal diameter transitions .
Male Weld
E C A
Tube Size
VCR Size 1/8
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) SS--VCR-3-MTW SS-4-VCR-3-MTW SS-4-VCR-3-4MTW SS-8-VCR-3-4MTW SS-8-VCR-3-6MTW SS-8-VCR-3-8MTW SS-1-VCR-3-1MTW SS-16-VCR-3-16MTW
Dimensions A 0 .70
(17 .8)
Working Pressure E Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 11 00 700
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/ 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1/ 1/ 3/4 1
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .06
(60)
(771)
(496)
1 .31
(33 .3)
(1 .5)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1 .31
(33 .3)
8000 0 .41
(10 .4)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
0 .1
(3 .0)
(551)
1 .50
(38 .1)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .41
(10 .4)
0 .8
(7 .1)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
0 .53
(13 .5)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
.
(56 .4)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
Not designed for gasket retainer assembly . May contain internal diameter transitions .
Tube Adapter
E C A
Tube Size 1/4 3/8 1/
VCR Size 1/4 1/ 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C 0 .64
(16 .)
Working Pressure E Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .6 SS-4-VCR-3-4TA SS-8-VCR-3-6TA SS-8-VCR-3-8TA 1 .81
0 .17
(4 .3)
(41 .0) (46 .0)
0 .70
(17 .8)
0 .7 0 .37
(9 .4)
(6 .8)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .94
(49 .3)
0 .96
(4 .4)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
May contain internal diameter transitions .
Blind (Undrilled) Gland

VCR Size
A
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) SS--VCR-3-BL SS-4-VCR-3-BL SS-8-VCR-3-BL SS-1-VCR-3-BL SS-16-VCR-3-BL
A 0 .70 (17 .8) 1 .31 (33 .3) 1 .50 (38 .1) .00 (50 .8) . (56 .4)
1/8 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Bodies
F flat E A C
Male NPT Connector

NPT Size 1/16 VCR Size 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/ 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1/ 1/ 3/4 1 SS-8-VCR-1-4 SS-8-VCR-1-6 SS-8-VCR-1-8 SS-1-VCR-1-1 SS-16-VCR-1-16 SS-4-VCR-1- SS-4-VCR-1-4 Ordering Number Dimensions A C 0 .38
(9 .6)
Working Pressure F 3/8 7/16 5/8 5/8 15/16 15/16 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 9000 700
(60) (60) (496)
E 0 .09
( .3)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .07 SS--VCR-1-1

(7 .)
SS--VCR-1-
1 .07
(7 .)
0 .09 0 .38
(9 .6) ( .3)
9000
(60)
9000
(60)
700
(496)
1 .31
(33 .3)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1 .49
(37 .8)
0 .18 0 .56
(14 .) (4 .6)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .56
(14 .)
0 .38
(9 .6)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .84
(46 .7)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
.19
(55 .6)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
.47
(6 .7)
0 .94
(3 .9)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
Select male connectors are available with ISO/BSP tapered thread (RT) ends . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative . VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly . May contain internal diameter transitions . F flat F1 flat E1 C A D
Male NPT Bulkhead Connector
Dimensions NPT Size VCR Size 1/4 1/4 1/ SS-8-VCR-A1-4M Ordering Number SS-4-VCR-A1-4M A .1
(56 .1)
Working Pressure L Panel Hole Dia Max Panel Thickness Ni SS Cu
E1
F 13/16
F1
.34
(59 .4)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .6 0 .18 (15 .7) (4 .6) 0 .56 0 .8 (7 .1) 0 .75 (14 .) 0 .40
(19 .1) (10 .)
psig (bar) 8000 8000 6400 13/16 1 .4

(31 .5)
1/3
(16 .8)
0 .38
(9 .7)
(551)
(551)
(440)
15/16
3500
(41)
4370
(301)
800
(19)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or
female threaded nuts . F flat
Straight Thread O-Ring Seal Male Connector

E1 D
Straight Thread Size 9/16-18 7/8-14 9/16-18
VCR Size 1/4 1/ 1/
Uniform O-Ring Size 906 910 906
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C 0 .39
(9 .9)
Working Pressure E1 0 .8

(7 .1)
D 0 .5
(6 .4)
E 0 .18
(4 .6)
F 3/4 1 15/16
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .33 SS-4-VCR-1-0003

(33 .8)
psig (bar) 4500 4500 4500

(310) (310) (310)
SS-8-VCR-1-00176 SS-8-VCR-1-01081
1 .66
(4 .)
0 .50
(1 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .59
(15 .0)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
800
(19)
1 .48
(37 .6)
0 .39
(9 .9)
0 .8
(7 .1)
0 .8
(7 .1)
3500
(41)
3500
(41)
800
(19)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to
glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts .
Fluorocarbon FKM is standard, other materials are available . O-rings are assembled with a silicone vacuum grease .
Bodies
F flat
Female NPT Connector

NPT Size 1/16
A
VCR Size 1/8 1/8
Ordering Number
Dimensions A E 0 .09
( .3)
Working Pressure F Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 6700 6700 6700

(461) (461) (461)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .10 SS--VCR-7-1 SS--VCR-7- SS-4-VCR-7- SS-4-VCR-7-4 SS-8-VCR-7-6 SS-8-VCR-7-8 SS-1-VCR-7-1 SS-16-VCR-7-16 1 .19
(7 .9) (30 .)
7/16 9/16 5/8 3/4 15/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
0 .09
( .3)
6500
(447)
6500
(447)
6500
(447)
1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 1
1 .41
(35 .8)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
8000
(551)
6400
(440)
1 .54
(39 .1)
0 .18
(4 .6)
6600
(454)
6600
(454)
500
(358)
1 .76
(44 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .99
(50 .5)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
.36
(59 .9)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
.51
(63 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts .

F flat E D C G flat
Tube Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/
VCR Size 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C D E 0 .09
( .3)
Working Pressure F 5/8 5/8 G 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400
(551) (551) (689) (689) (440) (440)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .60 0 .50 1 .53 SS-4-VCR-6-00

(38 .9) (15 .)
(1 .7)
SS-4-VCR-6-400 SS-8-VCR-6-600 SS-8-VCR-6-810
1 .6
(41 .1)
0 .70
(17 .8)
0 .60
(15 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000 10 000 6400 3500

(41)
1 .84
(46 .7)
0 .76
(19 .3)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .8 0 .40
15/16 (7 .1) 15/16
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .95
(49 .5)
0 .86
(1 .8)
0 .90
( .9)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
(10 .)
Dimensions A, C, and D are typical finger-tight . Swagelok nuts and ferrules are provided assembled, as shown . For tubing maximum pressure ratings for use with Swagelok tube fittings, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . May contain internal diameter transitions .
F flat E
F1 flat
G flat
Swagelok Tube Fitting Bulkhead Connector
Dimensions Tube Size VCR Size Ordering Number SS-4-VCR-A1-400 1/4 1/4 SS-4-VCR-A1S-400 3/8 1/ 1/ 1/ SS-8-VCR-A1-600 SS-8-VCR-A1-810 A .5
(57 .)
Working Pressure G Panel Hole Size Max Panel Thickness 0 .40 Ni SS Cu
F1
1 .88
(47 .8)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .3 (33 .5) 0 .60 0 .18 5/8 (4 .6) 1 .05 (15 .)
(6 .7)
psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (551) (689) (689) (440) (440)
5/8
9/16
15/3
(11 .9)
(10 .)
0 .13
(3 .3)
8000 10 000 6400 3500

(41)
.54
(64 .5)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .8
(7 .1)
15/16
3/4
11/16 7/8
.74
(69 .6)
1 .65
(41 .9)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
15/16 15/16
19/3 (15 .0) 5/3

(19 .8)
0 .44
(11 .)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
0 .50
(1 .7)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
Dimensions A, C, and D are typical finger-tight . Swagelok nuts and ferrules are provided assembled, as shown . For tubing maximum pressure ratings for use with Swagelok tube fittings, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107 . VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts .
10
Bodies
F flat
Male Union
VCR Size 1/8 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 Ordering Number Dimensions A E 0 .09
( .3)
Working Pressure F 3/8 5/8 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 11 00 700

(60) (771) (496)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .13 SS--VCR-6-DM

(8 .7)
SS-4-VCR-6-DM SS-8-VCR-6-DM SS-1-VCR-6-DM SS-16-VCR-6-DM
1 .55
(39 .4)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1 .84
(46 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
.44
(6 .0)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
.59
(65 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These
fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
Male Reducing Union

F flat E1 E
VCR Size 1/4 1/
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number
( .3)
Working Pressure F 5/8 15/16 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
E1 0 .18
(4 .6)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .37 SS-4-VCR-6-DM-

(34 .8)
SS-8-VCR-6-DM-4
1 .71
(43 .4)
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections
should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts .
Male Bulkhead Union

F flat F1 flat
Dimensions VCR Size Ordering Number SS-4-VCR-61 1/4 SS-4-VCR-61S SS-8-VCR-61 1/ SS-8-VCR-61S A C E F F1 Panel Hole Dia Max Panel Thickness 0 .44 19/3
(15 .0) (11 .)
Working Pressure Ni SS psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
E C
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) .3 1 .30 (56 .6) (33 .0) 0 .18 3/4 3/4 1 .8 0 .99 (4 .6)
(46 .) (5 .1)
0 .13
(3 .3)
.57 .14
1 .48 0 .40 1 .11 (10 .) 1 1/16 1 1/16 9/3

(3 .1)
0 .50
(1 .7)
(65 .3) (37 .6) (54 .4) (8 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
0 .13
(3 .3)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during installation . These fitting connections should be
assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts .
F flat E B A
F flat E1 C
Tube Butt Weld Bulkhead Connector
Dimensions Tube Size VCR Size Ordering Number 6LV-4-VCR-61-4TB7 1/4 1/4 6LV-4-VCR-61S-4TB7
rotating male or female threaded nuts .
Working Pressure F Panel Hole Dia Max Panel Thickness 0 .44 Ni SS psig (bar) Cu
E1
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .30 .36 (59 .9) (33 .0) 0 .75 0 .18 (19 .1) (4 .6) 0 .99 1 .95
(49 .5) (5 .1)
0 .
(5 .6)
3/4
19/3
(15 .0)
(11 .)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
5100
(351)
0 .13
(3 .3)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with
11
Bodies
Leak test port F flat
Coupling
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
A
Ordering Number SS--VCR-CG SS-4-VCR-CG SS-8-VCR-CG SS-1-VCR-CG SS-16-VCR-CG
Dimensions A 0 .66 (16 .8) 1 .19 (30 .) 1 .31 (33 .3) 1 .68 (4 .7) .04 (51 .8) F 7/16 3/4 1 1/16 1 1/ 1 3/4
1/ 3/4 1
Female Reducing Union

Leak test ports F flat
VCR Size 1/4
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number
(3 .3)
Working Pressure Y 0 .36

(9 .1)
F 3/4 1 1/16
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .16 SS-4-VCR-6-DF-

(9 .5)
psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
Y A
1/
SS-8-VCR-6-DF-4
1 .41
(35 .8)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .35
(8 .9)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal installation . These fitting
Reducing Adapter
Leak test port F flat E
VCR Size 1/8
VCR Size 1/4 1/
Ordering Number
( .3)

(17 .5)
F 3/4 1 1/16
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .19 SS--VCR-7-4VCRF SS-4-VCR-7-8VCRF 1 .41
psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
(30 .) (35 .8)
1/4
0 .18
(4 .6)
0 .85
(1 .6)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
Reducing Bushing
Leak test port E F flat
VCR Size 1/4
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number
(3 .3)

(19 .3)
F 5/8 15/16
Ni
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .06 SS-4-VCR-7-VCRF

(6 .9)
psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
1/
SS-8-VCR-7-4VCRF
1 .41
(35 .8)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .91
(3 .1)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
Male NPT Elbow

B E C D F flat
NPT Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/
VCR Size 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions B C D 0 .38
(9 .6)
Working Pressure E F 1/ 1/ 13/16 13/16 Ni 8000

(551)
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .87 1 .07 SS-4-VCR--

(7 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
psig (bar) 10 000 6400

(689) (440)
( .1)
SS-4-VCR--4 SS-8-VCR--6 SS-8-VCR--8
1 .07
(7 .)
1 .05
(6 .7)
0 .56
(14 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
8000
(551)
8000
(551)
1 .45
(36 .8)
1 .6
(3 .0)
0 .56
(14 .)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .45
(36 .8)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .75
(19 .1)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1
Bodies
F flat E
Union Elbow
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
B
Ordering Number
Dimensions B E F 7/16 1/ 13/16 1 1/4 1 11/16
Working Pressure Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 11 00 700

(60) (771) (496)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .89 0 .09 SS--VCR-9

( .6) ( .3) (4 .6)
SS-4-VCR-9 SS-8-VCR-9 SS-1-VCR-9 SS-16-VCR-9
1 .07
(7 .)
0 .18 0 .40
(10 .)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1/ 3/4 1
1 .45
(36 .8)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
1 .9
(48 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal
installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
Union Tee
F flat E B
VCR Size 1/8 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B E 0 .09
( .3)
Working Pressure F 7/16 1/ 13/16 1 1/4 1 11/16 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 11 00 700
(60) (771) (496)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .78 0 .89 SS--VCR-T

(45 .) ( .6)
SS-4-VCR-T SS-8-VCR-T SS-1-VCR-T SS-16-VCR-T
.14
(54 .4)
1 .07
(7 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
1/ 3/4 1
.90
(73 .7)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
3 .84
(97 .5)
1 .9
(48 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
4 .00
(10)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal installation .
These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
Union Cross
VCR Size 1/8
B
F flat E
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B E 0 .09
( .3)
Working Pressure F 7/16 1/ 13/16 1 1/4 1 11/16 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 9000 11 00 700
(60) (771) (496)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .78 0 .89 SS--VCR-CS

(45 .)
( .6)
1/4 1/
SS-4-VCR-CS SS-8-VCR-CS SS-1-VCR-CS SS-16-VCR-CS
.14
(54 .4)
1 .07
(7 .)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
10 000
(689)
6400
(440)
.90
(73 .7)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
3/4 1
3 .84
(97 .5)
1 .9
(48 .8)
0 .6
(15 .7)
3000
(06)
3700
(54)
400
(165)
4 .00
(10)
.00
(50 .8)
0 .87
( .1)
400
(165)
3000
(06)
1900
(130)
VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal installation . These
fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating male or female threaded nuts . Not designed for gasket retainer assembly .
13
Welded Assemblies
Leak test port F flat E C B
Male NPT Connector

NPT Size 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/ VCR Size 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/ Ordering Number Dimensions A B C E 0 .18
(4 .6)
Working Pressure F 7/16 9/16 G 3/4 3/4 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 8000 6400
(551) (551) (440)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .38 0 .95 1 .58 SS-4-WVCR-1-

(40 .1) (9 .6)
(4 .1)
SS-4-WVCR-1-4 SS-8-WVCR-1-6 SS-8-WVCR-1-8
1 .79
(45 .5)
0 .56
(14 .)
0 .9
(3 .4)
0 .18
(4 .6)
8000
(551)
8000
(551)
6400
(440)
G flat
1 .89
(48 .0)
0 .56
(14 .)
1 .00
(5 .4)
0 .40
(10 .)
11/16 1 1/16 7/8 1 1/16
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
.09
(53 .1)
0 .75
(19 .1)
1 .01
(5 .6)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
Female NPT Connector

Leak test port E F flat
NPT Size 1/4
VCR Size 1/4 1/ 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C E 0 .18
(4 .6)
Working Pressure F 3/4 7/8 G 3/4 1 1/16 Ni 6600

(454)
SS
Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .9 1 .77 SS-4-WVCR-7-4

(45 .0)
psig (bar) 6600 500

(454) (358)
(3 .4)
G flat
3/8 1/
SS-8-WVCR-7-6 SS-8-WVCR-7-8
1 .95
(49 .5)
1 .06
(6 .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
.18
(55 .4)
1 .04
(6 .4)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 1/16 1 1/16
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)

Leak test port F flat E G1 flat
Tube Size 1/4
VCR Size 1/4 1/4 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C D E 0 .18
(4 .6)
Working Pressure F G 3/4 3/4 G1 9/16 11/16 7/8 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400
(551) (447) (41) (689) (447) (96) (440) (358) (19)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .94 0 .70 0 .60 SS-4-WVCR-6-400

(49 .3) (17 .8)
G flat
D C
(15 .)
1/ 5/8
3/8 1/
SS-4-WVCR-6-600 SS-8-WVCR-6-810
1 .97
(50 .0)
0 .76
(19 .3)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .18
(4 .6)
6500 6500 500 3500 4300 800
.3
(56 .6)
0 .86
(1 .8)
0 .90
( .9)
0 .40
(10 .)
13/16 1 1/16
Dimensions A, C, and D are typical finger-tight . Swagelok nuts and ferrules are provided assembled, as shown . For tubing maximum pressure ratings for use with Swagelok tube fittings, see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107 .
Rotating Female Union

Leak test ports E
VCR Size 1/4

G flat
Ordering Number
(4 .6)
Working Pressure G 3/4 Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
G flat
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .71 SS-4-WVCR-6-DF

(43 .4)
1/
SS-8-WVCR-6-DF
1 .84
(46 .7)
0 .40
(10 .)
1 1/16
3500
(41)
4300
(96)
800
(19)
Elbows, crosses, Micro-Fit fittings, and tees are available with welded male and female ends . For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative .
Female Elbow
Leak test port
(5 .4)
Female Tee
1 .00
(5 .4)
1 .00
Leak test port
Ordering number: 6LV-4-WVCR-9-DF
Ordering number: 6LV-4-WVCR-T-FFF
14
Nuts, Caps, and Plugs

Female Nut
VCR Size 1/8 1/4 Ordering Number Dimensions A F Tx 0 .1
(5 .3)
Cap with Lanyard

Lanyard material is 30 SS . Lanyard length is 6 in . (15 . cm) .
F flat
Tx
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .53 SS--VCR-1 7/16

(13 .5)
SS-4-VCR-1 SS-8-VCR-1 SS-10-VCR-1 SS-1-VCR-1 SS-16-VCR-1
0 .81
(0 .6)
3/4 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 1/ 1 3/4
0 .36
(9 .1)
VCR Size 1/4 1/
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C F 3/4 1 1/16
1/ 5/8 3/4 1
0 .88
( .4)
0 .61
(15 .5)
0 .88
( .4)
0 .74
(18 .8)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .94 0 .44 SS-4-VCR-CP-BP

(3 .9)
(11 .)
1 .1
(8 .4)
0 .89
( .6)
SS-8-VCR-CP-BP
1 .01
(5 .6)
0 .45
(11 .4)
1 .34
(34 .0)
1 .0
(30 .5) F flat
Plug
VCR Size 1/8 1/4 1/ 3/4 1 Ordering Number Dimensions A F 3/8 5/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
Male Nut
F flat Tx
VCR Size 1/8 1/4 1/ 5/8 3/4 1
Ordering Number
Dimensions A F Tx 0 .1
(5 .3) A
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .68 SS--VCR-P SS-4-VCR-P SS-8-VCR-P SS-1-VCR-P SS-16-VCR-P 0 .9
(17 .3) (3 .4)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .50 SS--VCR-4 3/8

(1 .7) (18 .0)
1 .08
(7 .4)
0 .71 SS-4-VCR-4 SS-8-VCR-4 SS-10-VCR-4 SS-1-VCR-4 SS-16-VCR-4 0 .81
5/8 15/16 1 1/16 1 5/16 1 5/8
0 .36
(9 .1)
1 .43
(36 .3)
0 .61
(15 .5)
(0 .6)
1 .5
(38 .6)
0 .81
(0 .6)
0 .74
(18 .8)
1 .00
(5 .4)
0 .89
( .6)
Not designed for gasket retainer

assembly .
Also available as a rotatable plug .

Ordering number: SS-4-VCR-RP
1 .19
(30 .)
1 .0
(30 .5)
A taper at the hex end allows the nut to move

around 90 tube bends .
Plug with Lanyard

Lanyard material is 30 SS . Lanyard length is 6 in . (15 . cm) .
F flat
Short Male Nut

For use with short gland .
F flat Tx
VCR Size
Ordering Number
Dimensions A F Tx
VCR Size 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions A F 5/8 15/16
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .54 SS-4-VCR-4- .54NC 1/4 SS-4-VCR-4- .65NC

(13 .7)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .9 SS-4-VCR-BP

(3 .4)
0 .65
(16 .5)
5/8
0 .36
(9 .1)
1/
SS-8-VCR-BP
1 .08
(7 .4)
Protective Cap
Made of 304 stainless steel and supplied as bead protection during shipping for a variety of VCR face seal fittings processed to Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61.
Cap
VCR Size in . 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
Ordering Number 304-4-VCR-SC 304-8-VCR-SC 304-1-VCR-SC 304-16-VCR-SC
VCR Size 1/8
Ordering Number
Dimensions A C F 7/16 3/4 1 1/16 1 1/ 1 3/4
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .63 0 .30 SS--VCR-CP

(16 .0) (7 .6)
1/4 1/ 3/4 1
SS-4-VCR-CP SS-8-VCR-CP SS-1-VCR-CP SS-16-VCR-CP
0 .94 1 .01 1 .9 1 .54
0 .44 0 .45 0 .54 0 .63
(3 .9) (11 .) (5 .6) (11 .4) (3 .8) (13 .7) (39 .1) (16 .0)
15
Nuts, Caps, and Plugs

Female
A
Split-Nut Assemblies
Male
A
VCR Size
B
Split Nut Type
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B C 0 .81
(0 .6)
D 0 .63
(16 .0)
E 0 .68
(17 .4)
B E
1/4 1/4
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .36 Female SS-4-VCR-1-SN 3/4

(9 .1) (9 .1)
C C
Male
SS-4-VCR-4-SN
5/8
0 .36
0 .60
(15 .)
High-Flow ConnectionsH Type VCR

H Type VCR connections are compatible with 1/4 in . VCR connections and are designed for use with Swagelok high-flow diaphragm valves and gas regulators . For uniform flow, use 1/4 in . side-load retainer style gasket . See page 17 .
Glands
B E1 A E
Tube Butt Weld

Tube Size Nominal Wall Thickness VCR Size Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 6LV-4-HVCR-3- .60SR 3/8 0 .035 1/4 6LV-4-HVCR-3-1 .19SR 6LV-4-HVCR-3-1 .31SR 0 .60
(15 .)
Dimensions A B 0 .41
(10 .4)
Working Pressure E1 Ni SS psig (bar) Cu
1 .19
(30 .)
1 .00
(5 .4)
0 .5
(6 .4)
0 .31
(7 .9)
3300
(7)
3300
(7)
3300
(7)
1 .31
(33 .3)
1 .1
(8 .4)
Bodies
B E1 C F flat
Tube Butt Weld

Tube Size
E
VCR Size 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B C 0 .6
(15 .7)
Working Pressure E1 0 .31

(7 .9)
E 0 .5
(6 .4)
F 5/8
Ni 3300
(7)
SS
Cu
3/8
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .68 0 .75 6LV-4-HVCR-1-6TB7

(4 .7)
psig (bar) 3300 3300

(7) (7)
(19 .1)
Automatic Tube Weld

D Tx E1 C B F flat
Tube Size
E
VCR Size 1/4
Ordering Number 316L-4-HVCR-1A6
Dimensions A B C D E E1 F 5/8 Tx Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .71 0 .75 0 .6 0 .03 0 .5 0 .31
(43 .4) (19 .1) (15 .7) (0 .8) (6 .4) (7 .9)
Working Pressure Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 0 .41 3300 3300 3300

(10 .4) (7) (7) (7)
3/8
16
High-Flow ConnectionsH Type VCR

Bodies
F flat F1 flat E1 B A C
Bulkhead Connector
Dimensions Tube Size 3/8 VCR Size 1/4 Ordering Number 316L-4-HVCR-61-6TB7 A B C E E1 F 3/4 F1 3/4 Panel Hole Dia 19/3
(15 .0)
Working Pressure Max Panel Thickness 0 .44 Ni SS Cu
Dimensions, in . (mm) .36 0 .75 1 .30 0 .31 0 .5

(59 .9) (19 .1) (33 .0) (7 .9) (6 .4)
psig (bar) 3300 3300 3300

(7) (7) (7)
(11 .)
F flat E
Union Elbow
VCR Size 1/4 Ordering Number Dimensions B E F 1/ Working Pressure Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400
(551) (689) (440)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .5 1 .07 SS-4-HVCR-9

(7 .) (6 .4)
F flat E B
Union Tee
VCR Size 1/4 Ordering Number Dimensions A B E 0 .5
(6 .4)
Working Pressure F 1/ Ni SS Cu psig (bar) 8000 10 000 6400

(551) (689) (440)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .07 .14 SS-4-HVCR-T

(54 .4)
(7 .)
Nuts
Female
VCR Size Ordering Number SS-4-HVCR-1SR
A
Dimensions A F Tx 0 .39 0 .81

(0 .6)
Tx
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1/4 SS-4-HVCR-1 3/4

(9 .9)
0 .46
(11 .7)
Male
F flat Tx
VCR Size 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions A F Tx 0 .39
(9 .9)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .71 SS-4-HVCR-4SR 5/8

(18 .0)
17
Gaskets
Specify gasket material by adding a material designator to the basic ordering number .
Material Nickel 316L stainless steel Copper Designator NI SS CU Example NI-4-VCR--VS SS-4-VCR--VS CU-4-VCR-
Options
Blind Gaskets
Blind (undrilled) gaskets are available in nonretained and retainer assembly styles . Blind gaskets have a maximum differential pressure rating (p) of 100 psi (6 .8 bar) . To order, add -BL to a basic ordering number . Example: SS-4-VCR--VS-BL
Nickel and copper gasket retainer assemblies use a 316 stainless steel retainer . Copper gaskets are unplated . However, to order, add CU to a basic ordering number for silver-plated gaskets . Example: CU-4-VCR- . Side-load retainer style gaskets are not available in copper .
Snubber Gaskets
Snubber gaskets in 0 .5 to 60 m sizes for 1/4 through 1 in . VCR fittings are available . Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for more information .
Silver Plated
Nonretained
Cannot be used in a gasket retainer assembly .
0 .08
(0 .7)
Unplated (VS)
VCR Size 1/8 1/4 Basic Ordering Number Dimensions E Tx
Nonretained
0 .08
(0 .7)
VCR Size 1/8
Dimensions E Tx 0 .6
(6 .6)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .6 0 .09 --VCR-

( .3) (5 .6) (6 .6)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .09 --VCR--VS

( .3) (5 .6)
-4-VCR- -8-VCR- -10-VCR- -1-VCR- -16-VCR-
0 . 0 .44
(11 .)
0 .47
(11 .9)
Tx
1/4 1/ 5/8 3/4 1
-4-VCR--VS -8-VCR--VS -10-VCR--VS -1-VCR--VS -16-VCR--VS
0 . 0 .44
(11 .)
0 .47
(11 .9)
Tx
1/ 5/8 3/4 1
0 .78
(19 .8)
0 .78
(19 .8)
0 .58
(14 .7)
0 .91
(3 .1)
0 .58
(14 .7)
0 .91
(3 .1)
0 .66
(16 .8)
1 .14
(9 .0)
0 .66
(16 .8)
1 .14
(9 .0)
0 .89
( .6)
1 .40
(35 .6)
0 .89
( .6)
1 .40
(35 .6)
Gasket Retainer Assembly

Retainer and gasket must be used as an assembly .
0 .08
(0 .7)
VCR Size 1/4 1/ 3/4 1
(1 .7)
Gasket Retainer Assembly

0 .08
(0 .7)
VCR Size 1/4
(1 .7)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .4 -4-VCR--GR

(6 .1)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .4 -4-VCR--GR-VS

(6 .1)
-8-VCR--GR -1-VCR--GR -16-VCR--GR
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .79
(0 .1)
Tx
1/ 3/4 1
-8-VCR--GR-VS -1-VCR--GR-VS -16-VCR--GR-VS
0 .44
(11 .)
0 .79
(0 .1)
Tx
0 .66
(16 .8)
1 .14
(9 .0)
0 .66
(16 .8)
1 .14
(9 .0)
0 .89
( .6)
1 .40
(35 .6)
0 .89
( .6)
1 .40
(35 .6)
Side-Load Retainer
0 .08
(0 .7)
VCR Size 1/4 1/
(11 .4)
Tx
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .4 -4-VCR--ZC-VS

(6 .1)
-8-VCR--ZC-VS
0 .43
(11 .0)
0 .75
(19 .1)
18
Flow Restrictors
This product can be used in liquid or gas delivery systems where repeatable flow reduction or limiting is required .
One piece,

0 .18
(4 .6)
Ex
5/8 in . flat VCR components with fixed threads must remain stationary during normal installation . These fitting connections should be assembled only to glands with rotating female nuts .
(39 .4)
1 .55
compact design saves space

Standard orifice sizes drilled through
a 1/4 in . male VCR union

No dead volume for clean operation Identification of orifice and heat code
marked clearly on the body

Electropolished, cleaned, and
packaged in accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61

Working pressure 10 000 psig
Ex, in . (mm) 0 .010 (0 .54) 0 .01 (0 .305) 0 .015 (0 .381) 0 .017 (0 .43) 0 .00 (0 .508) 0 .03 (0 .584) 0 .05 (0 .635) 0 .06 (0 .660) 0 .07 (0 .686) 0 .030 (0 .76) 0 .035 (0 .889) 0 .040 (1 .016) 0 .045 (1 .143)
Ordering Number 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-010P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-01P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-015P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-017P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-00P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-03P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-05P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-06P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-07P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-030P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-035P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-040P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-045P
Ex, in . (mm) 0 .050 (1 .70) 0 .055 (1 .397) 0 .060 (1 .59) 0 .065 (1 .651) 0 .070 (1 .778) 0 .075 (1 .905) 0 .080 ( .03) 0 .085 ( .159) 0 .090 ( .86) 0 .093 ( .36) 0 .095 ( .413) 0 .100 ( .540)
Ordering Number 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-050P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-055P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-060P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-065P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-070P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-075P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-080P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-085P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-090P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-093P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-095P 6LV-4-VCR-6-DM-100P
(689 bar)
Lock and Tag Devices

These devices help prevent unintentional disassembly of VCR connections . Additionally, both devices include a wire hole to allow for a tag to support identification and quality verification programs .
Fitting Lock Device

This device is intended for use on Swagelok VCR metal gasket face seal assemblies with standard male and female nuts .
Ordering Number SS-4-VCR-FLC SS-8-VCR-FLC
Fitting Lock Device for Valves

This device is intended for use on Swagelok valves with integrally machined male VCR metal gasket face seal end connections .
Ordering Number SS-4-VCR-VLC SS-8-VCR-VLC
Size 1/4 in . 1/ in .
Size 1/4 in . 1/ in .
Side-Load Installation Tool and Tray

Tool
Makes gasket handling easy,
Tray (includes 30 gaskets)

Keeps gaskets secure Keeps gaskets aligned for easy
preserves cleanliness
Enables gasket installation
where space is limited

Is used to easily remove gasket
removal with side-load gasket tool

Cleaned and packaged in
from storage tray Material: Polyethersulfone (PES)

Description Installation tool Tray (nickel gaskets) Tray (SS gaskets) Ordering Number MS-4-VCR-ZC-TL NI-4-VCR--ZCT-VS SS-4-VCR--ZCT-VS
accordance with Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61 Material: Traypolypropylene Lidclean polycarbonate
19
VCR Fitting Installation Instructions
GTAW
3 7 Finger-tight
GTAW
8 5
1/8 SS, turn Ni 1/4 Cu turn
5a
5b
5c
VCR Split-Nut Installation Instructions

Male Female
1 1
2 3

Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance . Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user . Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of other manufacturers .
Swagelok, VCR, Micro-FitTM Swagelok Company 007, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., MI July 008, R9 MS-01-4
www.swagelok.com
Ve r t i c al Flow Sensors
FV4 Series
Senses increasing or decreasing flow in gas systems Actuates an electrical switch at a predetermined flow range Welded 316L SS construction Working pressures up to 5000 psig (344 bar)
FV4 Series Flow Sensors
Features
Models can be selected to sense
Technical Data
Material Temperature F (C) 40 (40) to 100 (37) 175 (79) 316L SS Working Pressure psig (bar) 5000 (344) 4415 (304)
Outlet
either increasing flow or decreasing flow.

Snap-action float provides positive
actuation.
All-welded construction ensures fluid
containment.
1 6 4 7 3
High-strength, permanent magnet
and 316L SS materials enhance durability.

Replaceable switch assembly outside
Flow Coefficient0.5
flow path eases maintenance.
Operation
The Swagelok FV4 series flow sensor contains a float with a calibrated orifice that moves up or down in the float guide as flow increases or decreases. A magnet encased in the float above the orifice alternates electrical continuity between the black and the red leads of the adjacent reed switch.
Increasing FlowFloat Down

During normal flow, the float is down at the bottom of the sensor body and electrical continuity is through the red lead of the switch. Outlet
Float guide
Inlet
When flow increases to within the actuation range:

differential pressure across the float
Red lead
orifice snaps the float up to the top of the float guide

continuity switches to the black lead. Component 1 Body 2 Float guide 3 Float 4 Magnet 5 Retaining ring 6 Capsule 7 Reed switch Samarium cobalt 300 stainless steel Plastic Mixed, including epoxy sealant 316L SS/A479 Material Grade/ ASTM Specification
Float
As flow returns to normal:

the float drops down to the bottom of
Calibrated orifice
Common reed
the sensor body

the magnet draws the common reed
Inlet
to the red lead

continuity switches to the red lead.
Decreasing FlowFloat Up
During normal flow, the float is up at the top of the float guide and electrical continuity is through the black lead of the switch. When flow decreases below the actuation range:
the float drops down to the bottom of
Black lead
Reed Switch Type Single-pole, double-throw, 3-wire/-position Contact Rating Power 3 W max Voltage 100 V (dc) max Switching current 50 mA max Initial contact 0.00 max resistance Cable Leads Wire Jacket Length White Red Black AWG, 7/30, 80C, 300 V PVC 36 in. (91.4 cm) Common Normally closed Normally open
the sensor body

the magnet draws the common reed
to the red lead

continuity switches to the red lead.
As flow returns to normal:

differential pressure across the float
orifice snaps the float up to the top of the float guide

continuity switches to the black lead.
FV4 Series Flow Sensors
Flow, Sizing, and Selection

Sizing to Sense Increasing Flow
Size the float to actuate the switch after flow exceeds the maximum rate.
Sizing to Sense Decreasing Flow

Size the float to actuate the switch before flow drops below the minimum rate.
Increasing Flow
Decreasing Flow
Actuation Range
Example: Nitrogen process gas 8 std L/min maximum system flow rate 100 psig (6.8 bar) system pressure 1. Using the Increasing Flow graph, find the intersection of the system pressure (100 psig [6.8 bar]) and the maximum system flow rate (8 std L/min). . Locate the range directly above the intersection point (Range C). 3. Insert C into the sensor ordering number. Example: 6L-FV4C-S4
Example: Nitrogen process gas 10 std L/min normal system flow rate 4 std L/min minimum system flow rate 20 psig (1.3 bar) system pressure 1. Using the Decreasing Flow graph, find the intersection of the system pressure (0 psig [1.3 bar]) and the minimum system flow rate (4 std L/min). . Locate the range directly above the intersection point (Range C). 3. Using the Increasing Flow graph, find the intersection of the system pressure (0 psig [1.3 bar]) and the normal system flow rate (10 std L/min). Verify that the range identified in Step (Range C) is below the intersection point. 4. Insert C into the sensor ordering number. Example: 6L-FV4C-T4A

All FV4 series flow sensors are are processed in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C.
Testing
Every FV4 series flow sensor is tested for proper operation and is helium leak tested at the envelope to a maximum leak rate of 4 10 9 std cm3/s.
Sizing for Other Gases

To size the float for gases other than nitrogen, multiply the process gas flow rate by the density correction factor (Fd) to obtain equivalent nitrogen flow rates.
Installation m The FV4 series flow sensor must be installed in a

vertical orientation with the arrow pointing up.
Fd =
MWprocess
8
Proceed with sizing as described above.

MWprocess = molecular weight of process gas.
Actuation Range

Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. For a complete ordering number, insert the actuation range designator A, B, C, or D (see graphs on page 3) into the basic ordering number. Example: 6L-FV4A-S4
Basic Ordering Number 6L-FV4__-S4 6L-FV4__-S6M 6L-FV4__-VR4 3.10 1/4 in. 6L-FV4__-FR4-VR4
(78.7) 0.34
(8.6) (5.4)
1.00
0.31
(7.9)
(15.7)
0.6
End Connections Type Swagelok tube fittings Male VCR fittings Female to male VCR fitting Size 1/4 in. 6 mm 1/4 in.
Dimensions in. (mm) H 3.68

(93.4)
J 9/16
(14)
(30.5)
1.0 H
3/4
J hex
1/4 0.035 in. 6L-FV4__-T4A Tube extensions 6L-FV4__-T6MA 6 1 mm
3.19
(81.0)
Accessories
Reed Switch Kit
Replacement switch kit includes switch assembly, retaining ring, assembly tool, and assembly instructions. Ordering number: MS-SRK-FV4

Swagelok VCRTM Swagelok Company 00, 004, 008 Swagelok Company Printed in U.S.A., GLI February 008, R7 MS-0-60-SCS
www.swagelok.com
Vinyl Tubing
Temperature range: -40 to 165F (-40 to 73C)
Ordering Information/Pressure Ratings

Tubing with Swagelok HC Connector
Ordering Number ID in OD in Working Pressure at 70F (20C) psig 40 30 25 15 10 bar 2.7 2.0 1.7 1.0 0.68
LT-2-4 LT-3-5 LT-4-6 LT-6-8 LT-8-10 LT-4-10V LT-6-14V
1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4 3/8
Standard Wall 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 Thick Wall Vacuum 5/8 7/8
used in vacuum service over entire temperature range
Pressure Ratings based on tubing used with a hose connector and secured by a clamp or a Swagelok tube tting/insert
Tubing with metal Insert for use in Swagelok tube tting
Factors used to determine vinyl tubing pressure ratings at elevated temperatures

To determine allowable pressure at elevated temperatures, nd the working pressure from the ordering Information/Pressure Ratings table. Temperature Factor Multiply this by appropriate F C Factor shown. 80 26 0.96 Example: LT-4-6 Tubing at 120F A. Working pressure is 25 psig B. Factor for 120F is 0.60 The allowable working pressure is 15 psig at 120F.
100 120 140 160 165 37 48 60 71 73 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.21 0.16
Features
s Handles a wide variety of laboratory chemicals s Soft and exible for easy routing, bending, and installation s Clearlets user view system uid s Thick-wall tubing can be used in vacuum service over entire
temperature range
Additional information on Swagelok hose connectors and hose clamps can be found in Hose/Quick-Connects subsection. Swagelok tube ttings and Inserts can be found in the Fittings subsection. Caution: Avoid kinking and periodically check tubing for damage.
2002 Swagelok Company, Printed in U.S.A., MI, February 2002, R2, MS-01-108
www.swagelok.com
We ld Fit tings
For Vacuum Se r v ice
Weld fittings are cold formed and vacuum annealed Tubular fitting shapes include elbows, tees, crosses, reducers, and end caps 304 stainless steel construction with bead-blasted finish
Weld Fittings
Contents
Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
45 Short 45 Long 90Mitered Short 90Mitered Short 90 90 180 Return Bend
Crosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Equal Reducing
Reducers and End Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Concentric Reducers End Caps
Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Equal Reducing
Features
Vacuum-annealed, cold-formed tubular fittings minimize
End Connection Sizes

End connections are available in 1/2 to 4 in. sizes. Tube wall thicknesses are shown below.
End Connection Size, in. 1/2 to 3 4 Tube Wall in. 0.065 0.083
likelihood of stress corrosion cracking.

Tees and crosses are fabricated using the pulled-port and
100 % penetration GTAW weld techniques.

Weld fittings are fabricated from 304 stainless steel;
316L stainless steel is available on request.

Weld fittings are provided with a bead blast finish unless
otherwise noted.
Vacuum Range: 10 9 Torr Temperature Range: 325 to 842F (200 to 450C)
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes and configurations.
Applications
High-temperature applications Applications where the number of flanged joints must be
Dimensions
minimized such as roughing lines, permanent vacuum lines, or pump exhaust lines
Welding Notes



Weld Fittings
Elbows
45
A
Short 90
Tube OD in. 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4 Ordering Number J2KS4110 J2KS4115 J2KS4120 J2KS4125 J2KS4130 J2KS4140 Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.19 (30.2) 1.62 (41.1) 2.31 (58.7) 3.00 (76.2) 3.69 (93.7) 4.81 (122) B 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95.3) 4.50 (114) 6.00 (152)
B
Tube OD in.
A
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 0.75 (19.1) 1.12 (28.4) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95.3) 4.50 (114) 6.00 (152)
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
J2SX4150 0.75 (19.1) J2SX4175 1.12 (28.4) J2SX4110 1.50 (38.1) J2SX4115 2.25 (57.2) J2SX4120 3.00 (76.2) J2SX4125 3.75 (95.3) J2SX4130 4.50 (114) J2SX4140 6.00 (152)
Short 45
Tube OD in.
A
B
Ordering Number J2KSX4150 J2KSX4175 J2KSX4110 J2KSX4115 J2KSX4120 J2KSX4125 J2KSX4130 J2KSX4140
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 0.31 (7.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.94 (23.9) 1.25 (31.8) 1.56 (39.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2.50 (63.5) B 0.75 (19.1) 1.12 (28.4) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95.3) 4.50 (114) 6.00 (152)
90
A
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Tube OD in. 1
A
B
Ordering Number J2S4110 J2S4115 J2S4120 J2S4125 J2S4130 J2S4140
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 2.06 (52.3) 2.94 (74.7) 4.06 (103) 5.19 (132) 6.31 (160) 8.31 (211) B 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95.3) 4.50 (114) 6.00 (152)
1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Long 90 Mitered
Tube OD in. 3/4
A
180 Return Bend

Ordering Number J2M4175 J2M4110 J2M4115 J2M4120 J2M4125 J2M4140 A in. (mm) 1.40 (35.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2.39 (60.7) 2.98 (75.7) 3.75 (95.3) 4.87 (124) Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 Ordering Number J2MX4175 J2MX4110 J2MX4115 J2MX4120 J2MX4125 J2MX4130 J2MX4140 A in. (mm) 1.00 (25.4) 1.80 (45.7) 2.25 (57.2) 2.59 (65.8) 3.00 (76.2) 2.97 (75.4) 3.88 (98.6) 2 3 4
A B
1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 4
Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. (mm) A B 0.75 (19.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.75 (95.3) 4.50 (114) 6.00 (152)
J2WU4150 1.50 (38.1) J2WU4175 2.25 (57.2) J2WU4110 3.00 (76.2) J2WU4120 6.00 (152) J2WU4130 9.00 (229) J2WU4140 12.0 (305)
Short 90 Mitered
Tube OD in. 3/4
A
1 1/2 J2WU4115 4.50 (114) 2 1/2 J2WU4125 7.50 (191)
1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Weld Fittings
Tees
Equal
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4
A A
Crosses
Equal
Ordering Number J7W4150 J7W4175 J7W4110 J7W4115 J7W4120 J7W4125 J7W4130 J7W4140 A
A
in. (mm) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.25 (82.6) 3.88 (98.6)
A A A
Tube OD in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Ordering Number J9W4150 J9W4175 J9W4110 J9W4115 J9W4120 J9W4125 J7W4130 J7W4140
A in. (mm) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.25 (82.6) 3.88 (98.6)
1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Reducing
Tx B T A A
Reducing
Tx B T B A A
Tube OD, in. T 1.00 Tx 0.50 0.75 0.50 1.50 0.75 1.00 0.50 2.00 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.50 1.50 2.00 1.50 3.00 2.00 2.50 1.50 4.00 2.00 2.50 3.00
Ordering Number J7WR411050 J7WR411075 J7WR411550 J7WR411575 J7WR411510 J7WR412050 J7WR412075 J7WR412010 J7WR412015 J7WR412515 J7WR412520 J7WR413015 J7WR413020 J7WR413025 J7WR414015 J7WR414020 J7WR414025 J7WR414030
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.88 (47.8) B 1.00 (25.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.25 (31.8) 2.25 (57.2) 1.38 (35.1) 2.12 (53.8) 1.50 (38.1) 1.62 (41.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.38 (60.5) 2.50 (63.5) 2.75 (69.9) 3.25 (82.6) 3.00 (76.2) 3.25 (82.6) 3.50 (88.9) 3.25 (82.6) 3.62 (91.9) 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (102) 3.75 (95.3) 3.75 (95.3)
Tube OD, in. T 1.00 Tx 0.50 0.75 0.50 1.50 0.75 1.00 0.50 2.00 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.50 1.50 2.00 1.50 3.00 2.00 2.50 1.50 4.00 2.00 2.50 3.00
Ordering Number J9WR411050 J9WR411075 J9WR411550 J9WR411575 J9WR411510 J9WR412050 J9WR412075 J9WR412010 J9WR412015 J9WR412515 J9WR412520 J9WR413015 J9WR413020 J9WR413025 J9WR414015 J9WR414020 J9WR414025 J9WR414030
Dimensions, in. (mm) A 1.88 (47.8) B 1.00 (25.4) 1.12 (28.4) 1.25 (31.8) 2.25 (57.2) 1.38 (35.1) 2.12 (53.8) 1.50 (38.1) 1.62 (41.1) 3.00 (76.2) 2.38 (60.5) 2.50 (63.5) 2.75 (69.9) 3.25 (82.6) 3.00 (76.2) 3.25 (82.6) 3.50 (88.9) 3.25 (82.6) 3.62 (91.9) 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (102) 3.75 (95.3) 3.75 (95.3)
Weld Fittings
Reducers and End Caps

Concentric Reducers
Tube OD, in.
T Tx
T 1.00
Tx 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.50 1.50 2.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 2.00
Ordering Number JB31W411050 JB31W411075 JB31W411510 JB31W412010 JB31W412015 JB31W412515 JB31W412520 JB31W413015 JB31W413020 JB31W413025 JB31W414020 JB31W414025 JB31W414030
A in. (mm) 1.38 (35.1) 2.38 (60.5)
1.50 2.00 2.50
2.38 (60.5)
3.00
3.62 (91.9)
4.00
2.50 3.00
End Caps
Tube OD in. 1/2
A
Ordering Number J16W450 J16W475 J16W410 J16W415 J16W420 J16W425 J16W430 J16W440
A in. (mm) 0.25 (6.4) 0.31 (7.9) 0.44 (11.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.75 (19.1) 1.06 (26.9) 1.12 (28.4) 1.25 (31.8)
3/4 1 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Tubing Products
MS-01-153-SCS

www.swagelok.com
We ld F i tti n gs
Ultrahigh-Purity, Specially Cleaned, and Industrial
1/8 to 1 in. and 6 to 18 mm 316, 316L, 316L VAR, and 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel materials Fittings for manual or automatic welding equipment
Weld Fittings
Contents
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Pressure Ratings Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Micro-Fit (Miniature Tube Butt Weld) Fittings . . . . . . 3 Tube Butt Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Automatic Tube Butt Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Automatic Tube Socket Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Tube Socket Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pipe Socket Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pipe Butt Weld Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Swagelok Orbital Welding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Standard
Weld fittings are cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10), MS-06-62 .
Special (SC11)
Weld fittings are available cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements as stated in ASTM G93 Level C . To order, add SC11 to the ordering number . Example: 6LV-4MW-6-2SC11
Photovoltaic (SC06)
Select weld fittings are available cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06), MS-06-64, to meet the process requirements of solar cell production . To order, add SC06 to the ordering number . Example: 6LV-4MW-6-2SC06 SC-06cleaned weld fittings are available with controlled surface finishes and electropolishing . Wetted surfaces are finished to 5 in . (0 .13 m) Ra. To order, add P6 to the ordering number . Example: 6LV-4MW-6-2P6
Material 316 stainless steel 316L stainless steel 316L VIM-VAR stainless steel 316 stainless steel 316L stainless steel Designator Bar Stock SS 316L 6LV Forgings SS 316L ASTM A182/ASME SA182 and ASTM A314 ASTM A479/ASME SA479 and ASTM A276 SEMI F20-0305 Ultrahigh-Purity Specifications
UltrahighPurity (SC01)
Select weld fittings are available with controlled surface finishes, electropolished, and specially cleaned . Wetted surfaces are finished to 5 in . (0 .13 m) Ra. For more information, see Swagelok Ultrahigh-Purity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61 . To order, add P to the ordering number . Example: 6LV-4MW-6-2P
Includes straight configurations and all Micro-Fit weld fittings .

Straight Micro-Fit configurations are 316L VAR stainless steel/SEMI F20-0305 High-Purity, 20 % minimum elongation allowed . 20 % minimum elongation allowed . Includes all elbows, crosses, and tees, excluding Micro-Fit weld fittings .
Cleaning Process Availability

Cleaning Process (Designator) Ultrahigh Photovoltaic Special Purity (SC11 ) (SC06) (P6) (P)
Consult ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, ASME B31 .1, ASME B31 .3, or other applicable codes for information on weld setup, technique, and additional considerations for welded systems . The choice of fitting, pipe, and tubing material being welded is critical . Using the same materials will ensure the same coefficients of expansion and will reduce the possibility of poor welds, out-of-roundness, or dimensional changes that are detrimental to a good weld .
Fitting Type Micro-Fit (miniature tube butt weld) Tube butt weld Automatic tube butt weld Automatic tube socket weld Tube socket weld Pipe socket weld Pipe butt weld
Threaded End Connections

Pipe threads are based on the requirements of ASME B1 .2 .0 .1 (NPT) and SAE AS71051 (ANPT) for tapered pipe threads .

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygenenriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety Technical Report, MS-06-13 .
Weld Fittings

Catalog pressure ratings shown are for temperatures from 20 to 100F (28 to 37C), which are based on an allowable stress value of 20 000 psi (1378 bar) in accordance with ASME B31 .3 and ASME B31 .1 for 316 stainless steel . 316L stainless steel material is controlled in accordance with Swagelok material specifications and possesses minimum room temperature tensile and yield strengths equivalent to 316 stainless steel . Pressure derating factors for applications at temperatures greater than 100F (37C) were determined from these pressure codes and are listed in the table at right .
Material Type Temperature, F (C) 20 (28) to 100 (37) 200 (93) 400 (204) 600 (315) 800 (426) 1000 (537) 1 .00 1 .00 0 .96 0 .85 0 .79 0 .76 316 SS 316L SS Factor 1 .00 0 .83 0 .77 0 .67 0 .62 0 .56
Examples:
A 1/4 in . 316L VIM-VAR reducing union has a pressure rating of 5100 psig (351 bar), as shown in the table below . To obtain the pressure rating at 400F (204C), multiply 5100 psig (351 bar) by 0 .77: 5100 psig (351 bar) 0 .77 = 3927 psig (270 bar) A 1/4 in . 316 SS tube socket weld union has a pressure rating of 10 700 psig (737 bar), as shown in the table on page 13 . To obtain the pressure rating at 400F (204C), multiply 10 700 psig (737 bar) by 0 .96: 10 700 psig (737 bar) 0 .96 = 10 272 psig (707 bar) Alternative elevated-temperature factors may be chosen from ASME B31 .3 or B31 .1 at the users discretion .
ElevatedTemperature Factors
To determine elevated-temperature pressure ratings in accordance with B31 .3 and B31 .1, multiply the pressure ratings provided in the ordering number tables on the pages that follow by the factors in the table at right .
MicroFit (Miniature Tube Butt Weld) Fittings

Compact Design
Accommodates Allows
tubing systems requiring miniaturization
close component spacing flow and service ratings equal to larger weld
Rounded body block helps prevent damage to other components during system fabrication or maintenance . Marking identifies manufacturer, material, and, when applicable, ultrahigh-purity cleaning .
Provides
fittings .

change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order Micro-Fit
Material heat code is roll stamped to ensure raw material traceability .
weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63; Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06), MS-06-64; or UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61 .
Ultrahighpurity cleaning with 5 in . (0 .13 m) Ra surface finish is available . Standard surface finish is 10 in . (0 .25 m) Ra . Square, sharp, burr free tube weld ends enhance alignment, maintain tube wall uniformity, and promote weld repeatability . Radiused junction allows for a smooth flow transition and eliminates pockets and entrapment zones .
Reducing Union
B B1
Tube OD 1/4 3/8
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8
Wall Thickness 0 .028 0 .035 0 .035
Ordering Number 6LV-4MW-6-2 6LV-6MW-6-4 6LV-8MW-6-4 6LV-8MW-6-6
Dimensions A B B1
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .75

(19 .0)
0 .42
(10 .7)
0 .25
(6 .4)
3300 (227) 3700 (254) 3300 (227)
1/2
Weld Fittings

90 Union Elbow
B L A F flat
Tube OD 1/8 1/4

L
Wall Thickness 0 .028 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number 6LV-2MW-9 6LV-4MW-9 6LV-6MW-9 6LV-8MW-9 6LV-6MMW-9
Dimensions A B F 5/16 0 .25 (6 .4) 5/16 7/16 9/16 (5/16) 6 .4 (0 .25) (7/16) (7/16) (9/16) L
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .56 (14 .2) 0 .69 (17 .5) 0 .81 (20 .6) 14 .2 (0 .56) 17 .5 (0 .69) 17 .5 (0 .69) 20 .6 (0 .81)
0 .41 (10 .4) 8500 (585) 0 .41 (10 .4) 5100 (351) 0 .47 (11 .9) 3300 (227) 0 .53 (13 .5) 3700 (254) bar (psig) 10 .4 (0 .41) 420 (6095) 11 .9 (0 .47) 310 (4499) 11 .9 (0 .47) 240 (3483) 13 .5 (0 .53) 200 (2902)
3/8 1/2 6 8 10 12
Dimensions, mm (in .) 6LV-8MMW-9 6LV-10MMW-9 6LV-12MMW-9
1 .0
Reducing 90 Union Elbow

A B L
Tube OD 3/8
Wall Thickness 0 .035
Tube OD 1/4 1/4
Ordering Number 6LV-6MW-9-4 6LV-8MW-9-4
Dimensions A 0 .69
(17 .5)
F 7/16
L 0 .47
(11 .9)

(227)
0 .25 0 .81
(20 .6) (6 .4)
3700 9/16 0 .53

(13 .5) (254)
1/2
A L F flat B
0 .049 3/8
0 .035 6LV-8MW-9-6 Dimensions, mm (in .)
3300
(227)
8 10 1 .0
6 6 1 .0 6
6LV-8MMW-9-6M 6LV-10MMW-9-6M 6LV-12MMW-9-6M 6LV-12MMW-9-8M
17 .5
(0 .69)
(7/16) 6 .4
(0 .25)
11 .9
(0 .47)
bar (psig) 310

(4499)
17 .5
(0 .69)
(7/16)
11 .9
(0 .47)
240
(3483)
12 8
20 .6
(0 .81)
(9/16)
13 .5
(0 .53)
200
(2902)
Extended Leg 90 Union Elbow

B L A
Tube OD
Wall Thickness
Ordering Number
Dimensions A A1 B B1 0 .45
(11 .4)
L1 0 .61
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .76 6LV-4MW-9-03442 0 .56 (19 .3) 0 .25 (14 .2) (6 .4) 0 .81 6LV-4MW-9-03443
L1 A1
0 .41
(10 .4)
(15 .5)
0 .50
(12 .7)
0 .66
(16 .8)
1/4
0 .035 6LV-4MW-9-03444 6LV-4MW-9-03445
(20 .6)
5/16
5100
(351)
F flat
0 .76 (19 .3) 0 .81 (20 .6)
0 .45 (11 .4) 0 .50 (12 .7)
0 .61 (15 .5) 0 .66 (16 .8)
B1
45 Union Elbow
B A L
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number 6LV-4MW-5 6LV-6MW-5 6LV-8MW-5
Dimensions A 0 .47 (11 .9) 0 .56 (14 .2) 0 .64 (16 .3) 0 .25 (6 .4) B F 5/16 7/16 9/16 L
0 .41 (10 .4) 5100 (351) 0 .47 (11 .9) 3300 (227) 0 .53 (13 .5) 3700 (254)
F flat
Weld Fittings

Union Tee
A F flat L B
Tube OD 1/8 1/4
Wall Thickness 0 .028 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Dimensions A B F 5/16 0 .25 (6 .4) 5/16 7/16 9/16 (5/16) 6 .4 (0 .25) (7/16) (7/16) (9/16) L
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .82 (20 .8) 0 .94 (23 .9) 1 .06 (26 .9) 20 .8 (0 .82) 23 .9 (0 .94) 23 .9 (0 .94) 26 .9 (1 .06)
0 .41 (10 .4) 8500 (585) 0 .41 (10 .4) 5100 (351) 0 .47 (11 .9) 3300 (227) 0 .53 (13 .5) 3700 (254) bar (psig) 10 .4 (0 .41) 420 (6095) 11 .9 (0 .47) 310 (4499) 11 .9 (0 .47) 240 (3483) 13 .5 (0 .53) 200 (2902)
3/8 1/2 6 8 10 12
1 .0
Extended Branch Leg Union Tee

B L A
Tube OD 1/4
Ordering Number
(11 .4)
F 5/16
L 0 .41
(10 .4)
L1 0 .61
(15 .5)

(351)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .82 0 .76 0 .25 6LV-4MW-3-03446

(20 .8) (19 .3) (6 .4)
F flat
B1
L1
A1
Extended Run Leg Union Tee

B L A
Tube Wall OD Thickness 1/4 0 .035
Ordering Number
(6 .4)
F 5/16
L 0 .98
L1 0 .41

(351)
F flat
B1
L1
A1
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .96 0 .56 0 .83 6LV-4MW-3-03921
(49 .8) (14 .2) (21 .1)
(24 .9) (10 .4)
There may be a slight mismatch between run ends at drill intersection .
Reducing Tee
A F flat L
Tube Wall Tube Wall OD Thickness OD Thickness

B
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 6LV-6MW-3-6-4
Dimensions A 0 .94
(23 .9)
F 7/16
L 0 .47
(11 .9)

(227)
3/8
L B
0 .035
1/4 1/4 0 .035
6LV-8MW-3-8-4 6LV-8MW-3-8-6 Dimensions, mm (in .)
0 .25 1 .06
(26 .9) (6 .4)
3700 9/16 0 .53

(13 .5) (254)
1/2
0 .049 3/8
3300
(227)
10 1 .0 12
6 6 8 1 .0
6LV-10MMW-3-10M-6M 6LV-12MMW-3-12M-6M 6LV-12MMW-3-12M-8M
23 .9
(0 .94)
(7/16) 6 .4
(0 .25)
11 .9
(0 .47)
bar (psig) 240

(3483)
26 .9
(1 .06)
(9/16)
13 .5
(0 .53)
200
(2902)
Weld Fittings

Union Cross
A F flat
Tube OD 1/8 1/4 3/8
Wall Thickness 0 .028 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Dimensions A B F 5/16 0 .25 (6 .4) 5/16 7/16 9/16 (5/16) 6 .4 (0 .25) (7/16) (7/16) (9/16) L
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .82 (20 .8) 0 .94 (23 .9) 1 .06 (26 .9) 20 .6 (0 .81) 23 .9 (0 .94) 26 .9 (1 .06)
0 .41 (10 .4) 8500 (585) 0 .41 (10 .4) 5100 (351) 0 .47 (11 .9) 3300 (227) 0 .53 (13 .5) 3700 (254) bar (psig) 10 .4 (0 .41) 420 (6095) 11 .9 (0 .47) 310 (4499) 11 .9 (0 .47) 240 (3483) 13 .5 (0 .53) 200 (2902)
1/2 6 8 10 12
1 .0
Tribow
B
Tube OD
L
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B F 5/16 0 .25

(6 .4)
L 0 .41
(10 .4)

(351)
1/4
F flat A
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .56 6LV-4MW-91 6LV-6MW-91 6LV-8MW-91 0 .69
(14 .2) (17 .5)
3/8 1/2
7/16 9/16
0 .47
(11 .9)
3300
(227)
0 .81
(20 .6)
0 .53
(13 .5)
3700
(254)
This unique design has weld ends in three planes at 90 to each other . It permits greater flexibility in designing systems, especially where space is limited .
1 .0
Dimensions, mm (in .) 14 .2 6LV-6MMW-91
6 .4
(0 .25)
(0 .56)
(5/16)
10 .4
(0 .41)
bar (psig) 420

(6095)
Tube Butt Weld Fittings

Tube ends are machined with a square face and corners to enhance alignment and maintain tube wall uniformity .
change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order tube butt
weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11), MS-06-63; Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC-06), MS-06-64; or UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC-01), MS-06-61 .
Standard surface finish is average 10 in . (0 .25 m) Ra . Controlled surface finish is available for ultrahigh-purity systems .
Precisely finished diameter matches tube diameter .

90 Union Elbow
B L F flat
Tube OD 1/4 3/8
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5
Ordering Number 316L-4TB7-9 316L-6TB7-9 316L-8TB7-9 316L-12TB7-9
Dimensions B F 7/16 0 .75 (19 .0) 7/16 11/16 15/16 (7/16) (7/16) 19 .0 (0 .75) (11/16) (11/16) (15/16) L
1 .23 (31 .2) 5100 (351) 1 .20 (30 .5) 3300 (227) 1 .34 (34 .0) 3700 (254) 1 .46 (37 .1) 2400 (165) bar (psig) 31 .2 (1 .23) 420 (6095) 31 .2 (1 .23) 310 (4499) 34 .0 (1 .34) 240 (3483) 34 .0 (1 .34) 200 (2902) 37 .6 (1 .48) 200 (2902)
1/2 3/4 6 8 10 12 18
Dimensions, mm (in .) 316L-6MTB7-9 316L-8MTB7-9 316L-10MTB7-9 316L-12MTB7-9 316L-18MTB7-9
Weld Fittings

Reducing Union
A
Tube OD 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065
Tube OD 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 6 8 6 8 10 6 12
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049
Ordering Number 316L-6TB7-6-4 316L-8TB7-6-4 316L-8TB7-6-6 316L-12TB7-6-8 316L-16TB7-6-8 316L-16TB7-6-12 316L-10MTB7-6-6M 316L-10MTB7-6-8M 316L-12MTB7-6-6M 316L-12MTB7-6-8M 316L-12MTB7-6-10M 316L-18MTB7-6-6M 316L-18MTB7-6-12M
Dimensions A B
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 3300 (227) 3700 (254)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .75
(19 .0)
3300 (227) 2400 (165) 2400 (165) bar (psig) 240 (3483)
Dimensions, mm (in .) 10 1 .0 1 .0
12
1 .0
1 .0
38 .1
(1 .50)
19 .0
(0 .75)
200 (2902)
18
1 .5
1 .5
200 (2902)
Union Tee
L F flat A B
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 6 8 10 12 18
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5
Ordering Number 316L-4TB7-3 316L-6TB7-3 316L-8TB7-3 316L-12TB7-3 316L-6MTB7-3 316L-8MTB7-3 316L-10MTB7-3 316L-12MTB7-3 316L-18MTB7-3
Dimensions A 2 .46 (62 .5) 2 .40 (61 .0) 2 .68 (68 .1) 2 .91 (73 .9) 62 .5 (2 .46) 62 .5 (2 .46) 67 .8 (2 .67) 67 .8 (2 .67) 74 .9 (2 .95) 19 .0
(0 .75)
F 7/16

(19 .0)
1 .23 (31 .2) 5100 (351) 1 .20 (30 .5) 3300 (227) 1 .34 (34 .0) 3700 (254) 1 .46 (37 .1) 2400 (165) bar (psig) 31 .2 (1 .23) 420 (6095) 31 .2 (1 .23) 310 (4499) 34 .0 (1 .34) 240 (3483) 34 .0 (1 .34) 200 (2902) 37 .6 (1 .48) 200 (2902)
7/16 11/16 15/16 (7/16) (7/16) (11/16) (11/16) (15/16)
Dimensions, mm (in .)
Weld Fittings

Reducing Tee
L F flat A B
Tube Wall Tube Wall OD Thickness OD Thickness 3/8 0 .035 1/4 1/4 1/2 0 .049 3/8 3/8 3/4 0 .049 1/4 0 .035
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) 316L-6TB7-3-6-4 316L-8TB7-3-8-4 316L-8TB7-3-8-6 316L-12TB7-3-12-6 316L-12TB7-3-12-4 Dimensions, mm (in .)
Dimensions A 2 .39
(60 .7)
F 7/16
L 1 .20
L1 1 .23 1 .34

(227)
(30 .5) (31 .2)
3700
(254)
L1 B
2 .67
(67 .8)
0 .75
(19 .0)
11/16
(34 .0)
1 .34 (34 .0) 1 .35

(34 .3)
3300
(227)
1 .35 2 .91
(73 .9)
15/16
(37 .1)
1 .46 (34 .3) 1 .48

(37 .6)
2400
(165)
6 6
316L-8MTB7-3-8M-6M 316L-10MTB7-3-10M-6M 1 .0 316L-10MTB7-3-10M-8M 316L-12MTB7-3-12M-6M 316L-12MTB7-3-12M-8M
62 .2
(2 .45)
(7/16)
31 .3 (1 .23)
bar (psig) 310

(4499)
240 67 .8
(2 .67)
10 1 .0 8 6 12 8
19 .0
(0 .75)
(11/16)
34 .0 (1 .34)
(3483)
200
(2902)
67 .8
(2 .67)
(11/16)
34 .0 (1 .34)
200
(2902)
Union Cross
L F flat A
Tube OD 1/4
B
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number 316L-4TB7-4 316L-6TB7-4 316L-8TB7-4 316L-6MTB7-4
Dimensions A B F 7/16 7/16 11/16 (7/16) 19 .0 (0 .75) (7/16) (5/8) (5/8) L
Dimensions, in . (mm) 2 .45 (62 .2) 0 .75 (19 .0) 2 .39 (60 .7) 0 .75 (19 .0) 2 .61 (66 .3) 0 .75 (19 .0) 62 .2 (2 .45) 62 .2 (2 .45) 3/8 1/2
1 .23 (31 .2) 5100 (351) 1 .20 (30 .5) 3300 (227) 1 .34 (34 .0) 3700 (254) bar (psig) 31 .3 (1 .23) 420 (6095) 31 .3 (1 .23) 310 (4499) 34 .0 (1 .34) 240 (3483) 34 .0 (1 .34) 200 (2902)
Dimensions, mm (in .)
L
6 8 10 12 1 .0
316L-8MTB7-4
316L-10MTB7-4 64 .8 (2 .55) 316L-12MTB7-4 64 .8 (2 .55)
ATW Weld Ring

ATW weld rings are used with tube butt weld fittings . The ring helps align weld joints and adds material to the weld zone during manual or orbital welding .
Tube OD 1/4 3/8
Ordering Number
Dimensions E M N Tx 0 .28
(7 .1)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .20 316L-4-ATW-R

(5 .1) (8 .1)
316L-6-ATW-R 316L-8-ATW-R
0 .32 0 .42
(10 .7)
0 .02
(0 .51)
0 .01
(0 .25)
0 .41
(10 .4)
Tx
1/2
N
0 .54
(13 .7)
M typical
Weld Fittings
Automatic Tube Butt Weld Fittings

Precisely finished diameter matches tube diameter.
change.
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order
automatic tube butt weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC11), MS0663; Photovoltaic Process Specification (SC06), MS0664; or UltrahighPurity Process Specification (SC01), MS0661.
Standard surface finish is average 10 in. (0.25 m) Ra. Controlled surface finish is available for ultrahighpurity systems. Integral filler ring aids in alignment.
Locator Union
A B Tx F
Tube OD
D
Wall Thickness 0.035 0.035 0.049
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B D 0.02
(0.51)
F 0.36
(9.1)
Tx 0.29
(7.4)

(351)
1/4 3/8 1/2
Dimensions, in. (mm) 1.69 316L4ATW6L

(42.9)
316L6ATW6L 316L8ATW6L
1.71
(43.4)
0.75
(19.0)
0.03
(0.76)
0.42
(10.7)
0.41
(10.4)
3300
(227)
1.73
(43.9)
0.04
(1.0)
0.60
(15.2)
0.55
(14.0)
3700
(254)
Union
D A Tx
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 6 8 10 12 18
Wall Thickness 0.035 0.035 0.049 0.049 0.065 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5
Ordering Number 316L4ATW6 316L6ATW6 316L8ATW6 316L12ATW6 316L16ATW6 316L6MATW6 316L8MATW6 316L10MATW6 316L12MATW6 316L18MATW6
Dimensions A 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) D 0.02 (0.51) 0.03 (0.76) 0.04 (1.0) 0.04 (1.0) 0.04 (1.0) 0.51 (0.02) 0.76 (0.03) 31.8 (1.25) Tx 0.29 (7.4) 0.41 (10.4) 0.55 (14.0) 0.80 (20.3) 1.06 (26.9) 6.9 (0.27) 8.9 (0.35)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 5100 (351) 3300 (227) 3700 (254) 2400 (165) 2400 (165) bar (psig) 420 (6095) 310 (4499) 240 (3483) 200 (2902) 200 (2902)
0.76 (0.03) 10.9 (0.43) 1.0 (0.04) 13.2 (0.52) 1.0 (0.04) 19.3 (0.76)
Reducing Union
D Tx A B D1 Tx1
Tube Wall Tube Wall OD Thickness OD Thickness 3/8 0.035 1/4 1/4 1/2 0.049 3/8 3/4 0.049 1/2 0.049 0.035 0.035
Ordering Number Dimensions, in. (mm) 316L6ATW64 316L8ATW64 316L8ATW66 316L12ATW68 Dimensions, mm (in.)
Dimensions A B D D1 Tx Tx1

(227)
1.58 0.75 0.03 0.02 0.41 0.29

(40.1) (19.0) (0.76) (0.51) (10.4) (7.4)
0.02
(40.1) (19.0)
0.29
3700
(254)
1.58 0.75 0.04 (0.51) 0.55 (7.4) (1.0) 0.03 (14.0) 0.41
(0.76) (10.4) (20.3) (14.0)
3300
(227)
1.62 0.75 0.04 0.04 0.80 0.55

(41.1) (19.0) (1.0) (1.0)
2400
(165)
8 1.0 12
6 6 8 1.0
316L8MATW66M 316L12MATW66M 316L12MATW68M
39.9
(1.57)
0.76 0.51 0.51
8.9
6.8 6.8
bar (psig) 310

(4499)
(0.03) (0.02) (0.35) (0.27)
40.1 19.0
(1.58) (0.75)
40.4
(1.59)
1.0 (0.02) 13.2 (0.27) (0.04) 0.76 (0.52) 8.9 (0.03) (0.35)
200
(2902)
10
Weld Fittings

Swagelok Tube Fitting to Automatic Tube Weld Connector
A D B Tx D1
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B D 0 .60
(15 .2)
D1 0 .02
(0 .51)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(351)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .74 316L-4-ATW-6-400 316L-6-ATW-6-600 316L-8-ATW-6-810 1 .84
(44 .2)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .66
(16 .8)
0 .03
(0 .76)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300
(227)
(46 .7)
1 .99
(50 .5)
0 .90
(22 .9)
0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3700
(254)
90 Union Elbow
D Tx B L F flat
Tube OD 1/4
L
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065
Ordering Number
Dimensions B D F 7/16 7/16 11/16 15/16 1 1/4 L 1 .25

(31 .8)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(351)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .02 0 .75 316L-4-ATW-9

(19 .0)
(0 .51)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
316L-6-ATW-9 316L-8-ATW-9 316L-12-ATW-9 316L-16-ATW-9
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .03
(0 .76)
1 .23
(31 .2)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300
(227)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .38
(35 .1)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3700
(254)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .80
(20 .3)
2400
(165)
0 .96
(24 .4)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .89
(48 .0)
1 .06
(26 .9)
2400
(165)
Dimensions, mm (in .) 6 8 10 12 18 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5 316L-6-MATW-9 316L-8-MATW-9 316L-10-MATW-9 316L-12-MATW-9 316L-18-MATW-9 19 .0

(0 .75)
0 .51
(0 .02)
(7/16) (7/16) (11/16) (11/16) (15/16)
31 .8
(1 .25)
6 .9
(0 .27)
bar (psig) 351

(5100)
0 .76
(0 .03)
32 .0
(1 .26)
8 .9
(0 .35)
227
(3300)
0 .76
(0 .03)
34 .8
(1 .37)
10 .9
(0 .43)
254
(3700)
1 .0
(0 .04)
35 .1
(1 .38)
13 .2
(0 .52)
199
(2888)
1 .0
(0 .04)
38 .6
(1 .52)
19 .3
(0 .76)
206
(2989)
Union Tee
L F flat A B Tx D
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049 0 .049 0 .065
Ordering Number
(0 .51)
F 7/16 7/16 11/16 15/16 1 1/4
L 1 .25
(31 .8)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(351)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .75 2 .50 316L-4-ATW-3

(63 .5)
(19 .0)
316L-6-ATW-3 316L-8-ATW-3 316L-12-ATW-3 316L-16-ATW-3
2 .46
(62 .5)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .03
(0 .76)
1 .23
(31 .2)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300
(227)
2 .76
(70 .1)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .38
(35 .1)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3500
(241)
3 .00
(76 .2)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .50
(38 .1)
0 .80
(20 .3)
2400
(165)
3 .78
(96 .0)
0 .96
(24 .4)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .89
(48 .0)
1 .06
(26 .9)
2400
(165)
6 8 10 12 18
1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .0 1 .5
Dimensions, mm (in .) 63 .5 316L-6-MATW-3

(2 .50)
0 .51
(0 .02)
(7/16) (7/16) (11/16) (11/16) (15/16)
31 .8
(1 .25)
6 .9
(0 .27)
bar (psig) 454

(6589)
316L-8-MATW-3 316L-10-MATW-3 316L-12-MATW-3 316L-18-MATW-3
64 .0
(2 .52)
0 .76
(0 .03)
32 .0
(1 .26)
8 .9
(0 .35)
323
(4687)
69 .6
(2 .74)
19 .0
(0 .75)
0 .76
(0 .03)
34 .8
(1 .37)
10 .9
(0 .43)
254
(3686)
70 .1
(2 .76)
1 .0
(0 .04)
35 .1
(1 .38)
13 .2
(0 .52)
206
(2989)
77 .2
(3 .04)
1 .0
(0 .04)
38 .6
(1 .52)
19 .3
(0 .76)
206
(2989)
Weld Fittings
11

Reducing Tee
F flat A L B Tx K B Tx1 D
D1
Tube OD 3/8
Wall Tube Wall Thickness OD Thickness 0 .035 1/4 1/4 0 .035 0 .035 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number
Dimensions A B D 0 .03 D1 0 .02 0 .02 2 .76

(70 .1)
F 7/16
K 1 .25 1 .38
L 1 .23
Tx 0 .41
Tx1 0 .29
(7 .4)

(227)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 2 .46 316L-6-ATW-3-6-4

(62 .5)
(0 .76) (0 .51)
(31 .8) (31 .2) (10 .4)
316L-8-ATW-3-8-4 316L-8-ATW-3-8-6 316L-12-ATW-3-12-6 316L-12-ATW-3-12-8
0 .29
3700
(254)
1/2
0 .049 3/8 3/8
0 .75
(19 .0)
(35 .1) 1 .38 0 .55 (7 .4) 0 .04 (0 .51) 11/16 (1 .0) 0 .03 1 .37 (35 .1) (14 .0) 0 .41 (0 .76) (34 .8) (10 .4)
3300
(227)
0 .03 3 .00
(76 .2)
0 .41 2400
(165)
3/4
0 .049 1/2
0 .04 (0 .76) 1 .50 1 .50 0 .80 (10 .4) 15/16 (1 .0) 0 .04 (38 .1) (38 .1) (20 .3) 0 .55
(1 .0) (14 .0)
12
1 .0
1 .0
Dimensions, mm (in .) 70 .1 19 .0 316L-12-MATW-3-12M6M
(2 .76) (0 .75)
0 .51 (0 .02)
(11/16)
34 .5
35 .1
13 .2
6 .9
bar (psig) 200

(2902)
(1 .36) (1 .38) (0 .52) (0 .27)
Manifold Tee
L A F K
Tube Wall OD Thickness

B
Ordering Number
(0 .51)
F 7/16 11/16 11/16
K 1 .23 1 .20 1 .34
L 1 .25 1 .23 1 .38
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(351)
1/4 3/8
L
0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Dimensions, in . (mm) 2 .48 316L-4-ATW-3-4TB7-4A

(63 .0)
(31 .2) (31 .8)
316L-6-ATW-3-6TB7-6A 316L-8-ATW-3-8TB7-8A
2 .43 2 .72
(69 .1)
0 .75
0 .03 0 .04
(1 .0)
0 .41 0 .55
3300
(227)
(61 .7) (19 .0) (0 .76)
(30 .5) (31 .2) (10 .4) (34 .0) (35 .1) (14 .0)
1/2
3700
(254)
Tx
Reducing Tee
F flat
B Tx
K B
Tube OD 3/8
Tube OD 1/4 1/4
Wall Thickness
Ordering Number 316L-6-ATW-3-6A-4TB7
(0 .76)
F 7/16
K 1 .23
(31 .2)
L 1 .23
(31 .2)
Tx 0 .41
(10 .4)

(227)

(62 .5)
0 .035
316L-8-ATW-3-8A-4TB7 316L-8-ATW-3-8A-6TB7
0 .75 2 .76
(70 .1) (19 .0)
1 .36 0 .04
(1 .0)
3700 1 .38
(35 .1)
1/2
0 .049 3/8
11/16
(34 .5)
0 .55
(14 .0)
(254)
1 .35
(34 .3)
3300
(227)
12
Weld Fittings

Union Cross
L A
Tube OD 1/4
Wall Thickness 0 .035 0 .035 0 .049
Ordering Number
(0 .51)
F 7/16 7/16 5/8
L 1 .25
(31 .8)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(351)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 2 .50 316L-4-ATW-4

(63 .5)
F flat
B Tx
3/8 1/2
316L-6-ATW-4 316L-8-ATW-4
2 .46
(62 .5)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .03
(0 .76)
1 .23
(31 .2)
0 .41
(10 .4)
3300
(227)
2 .70
(68 .6)
0 .04
(1 .0)
1 .35
(34 .3)
0 .55
(14 .0)
3700
(254)
6 1 .0 8
Dimensions, mm (in .) 63 .5 316L-6-MATW-4 (2 .50) 19 .0 (0 .75) 64 .0 316L-8-MATW-4

(2 .52)
0 .51
(0 .02)
6 .9 (7/16) 31 .8
(1 .25) (0 .27)
bar (psig) 420

(6095)
0 .76
(0 .03)
8 .9
(0 .35)
310
(4499)
Automatic Tube Socket Weld Fittings

Thin wall reduces weld heat input .
change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order automatic
tube socket weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) . Precise machining of socket ensures proper tube fit .
Union
A E D Tx
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Ordering Number 316L-4-ASW-6 316L-6-ASW-6 316L-8-ASW-6 316L-12-ASW-6
Dimensions A D 0 .28 (7 .1) 1 .00

(25 .4)
E 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .28 (7 .1)
Tx 0 .38 (9 .7)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .31 (7 .9) 0 .38 (9 .7)
0 .50 (12 .7) 4900 (337)
0 .41 (10 .4) 0 .63 (16 .0) 3800 (261)
0 .44 (11 .2) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .88 (22 .4) 2700 (186)
Union Tee
A B Tx E D L L F flat
Tube OD 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Ordering Number 316L-4-ASW-3 316L-6-ASW-3 316L-8-ASW-3 316L-12-ASW-3
Dimensions A B D E 0 .19
(4 .8)
F 7/16 11/16 11/16 15/16
L 1 .23
(31 .2)
Tx 0 .38
(9 .7)

(468)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .28 2 .46

(62 .5) (7 .1)
2 .68
(68 .1)
0 .31 0 .75
(19 .0) (7 .9)
0 .28
(7 .1)
1 .34
(34 .0)
0 .50
(12 .7)
4900
(337)
2 .68
(68 .1)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
1 .34
(34 .0)
0 .63
(16 .0)
3800
(261)
2 .94
(74 .7)
0 .44
(11 .2)
0 .63
(16 .0)
1 .47
(37 .3)
0 .88
(22 .4)
2700
(186)
Weld Fittings
13
Tube Socket Weld Fittings

change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order automatic
tube socket weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) . Precise machining of socket ensures proper tube fit .
Union
D Tx E D
Tube Socket Size 1/4
Ordering Number SS-4-TSW-6 SS-6-TSW-6 SS-8-TSW-6 SS-12-TSW-6 SS-16-TSW-6
Dimensions A 0 .75 (19 .0) 0 .88 (22 .4) 1 .06 (26 .9) D 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .31 (7 .9) 0 .38 (9 .7) E 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .28 (7 .1) Tx Dimensions, in . (mm)
0 .48 (12 .2) 10 700 (737) 0 .60 (15 .2) 8 100 (558) 6 600 (454) 5 900 (406) 5 600 (385)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
0 .41 (10 .4) 0 .73 (18 .5)
1 .31 (33 .3) 0 .44 (11 .2) 0 .63 (16 .0) 1 .04 (26 .4) 1 .44 (36 .6) 0 .62 (15 .7) 0 .88 (22 .4) 1 .36 (34 .5)
Male Connector
F flat
Male NPT Size 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/4
Ordering Number SS-4-TSW-1-4 SS-6-TSW-1-4 SS-6-TSW-1-6 SS-6-TSW-1-8 SS-8-TSW-1-4 SS-8-TSW-1-6 SS-8-TSW-1-8
Dimensions A 1 .15 (29 .2) 1 .25 (31 .8) 1 .47 (37 .3) 1 .31 (33 .3) 1 .53 (38 .9) 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .41 (10 .4) D 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .31 (7 .9) E 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .28 (7 .1) F 9/16 5/8 11/16 7/8 3/4 7/8 Tx Dimensions, in . (mm)
Tx E D
0 .48 (12 .2) 8000 (551) 8000 (551) 0 .60 (15 .2) 7800 (537) 7700 (530) 0 .73 (18 .5) 6600 (454)
3/8
1/2
3/8 1/2
Female Connector
F flat
Female NPT Size 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Ordering Number SS-2-TSW-7-2 SS-4-TSW-7-2 SS-4-TSW-7-4 SS-6-TSW-7-4 SS-8-TSW-7-6 SS-8-TSW-7-8
Dimensions A 0 .83 (21 .1) 1 .05 (26 .7) 1 .18 (30 .0) 1 .24 (31 .5) 1 .36 (34 .5) 1 .59 (40 .4) D 0 .10 (2 .5) 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .31 (7 .9) 0 .38 (9 .7) E 0 .09 (2 .3) 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .41 (10 .4) F 9/16 9/16 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/16 1 5/16 Tx 0 .29 (7 .4) 0 .48 (12 .2) Dimensions, in . (mm)
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 6500 (447) 6500 (447) 6600 (454) 5300 (365) 4900 (337)
Tx E D
1/4
A
3/8 1/2 3/4
0 .60 (15 .2) 6600 (454) 0 .73 (18 .5)
SS-12-TSW-7-12 1 .73 (43 .9) 0 .44 (11 .2) 0 .63 (16 .0)
1 .04 (26 .4) 4600 (316)
14
Weld Fittings

90 Union Elbow
L Tx E D D L F flat
Tube Socket Size 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Dimensions D 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .31 (7 .9) 0 .38 (9 .7) E 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .41 (10 .4) F 7/16 1/2 11/16
1
Tx
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1 .04 (26 .4) 0 .64 (16 .3) 1 .17 (29 .7) 0 .81 (20 .6) 1 .56 (39 .6) 1 .12 (28 .4) 1 .92 (48 .8) 1 .44 (36 .6)
0 .86 (21 .8) 0 .53 (13 .5) 10 700 (737) 8 100 (558) 6 600 (454) 5 900 (406) 5 600 (385)
0 .44 (11 .2) 0 .63 (16 .0) 0 .62 (15 .7) 0 .88 (22 .4)
1 1/4
90 Male Elbow
L Tx E D F flat
Male NPT Size 1/4 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions D E F 1/2 1/2 0 .31

(7 .9)
L 0 .79
(20 .1)
L1 1 .05
(26 .7)
Tx 0 .48
(12 .2)

(551)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .19 0 .28 SS-4-TSW-2-4

(7 .1) (4 .8)
L1
SS-6-TSW-2-4 SS-6-TSW-2-6 SS-6-TSW-2-8 SS-8-TSW-2-8 0 .38

(9 .7)
1 .04
(26 .4)
1 .05
(26 .7)
0 .64
(16 .3)
8000
(551)
3/8
3/8 1/2
0 .28
(7 .1)
11/16 13/16
0 .97
(24 .6)
1 .17
(29 .7)
0 .60
(15 .2)
7800
(537)
1 .02
(25 .9)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .60
(15 .2)
7700
(530)
1/2
1/2
0 .41
(10 .4)
13/16
1 .08
(27 .4)
1 .45
(36 .8)
0 .73
(18 .5)
6600
(454)
90 Female Elbow
L Tx E D L1 F flat
Female NPT Size 1/4 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions D E F L 0 .90
(22 .9)
L1 1 .17
(29 .7)
Tx 0 .48
(12 .2)

(509)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .19 0 .28 SS-4-TSW-8-4

(7 .1) (4 .8)
11/16 11/16 1 1
SS-6-TSW-8-4 SS-6-TSW-8-8 SS-8-TSW-8-8
0 .99
(25 .1)
1 .17
(29 .7)
7400 0 .60
(15 .2) (509)
3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .28
(7 .1)
1 .13
(28 .7)
1 .56
(39 .6)
5700
(392)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
1 .19
(30 .2)
1 .56
(39 .6)
0 .73
(18 .5)
5700
(392)
Union Tee
F flat
Ordering Number SS-2-TSW-3 SS-4-TSW-3 SS-6-TSW-3 SS-8-TSW-3 SS-12-TSW-3 SS-16-TSW-3
Dimensions A D E F 7/16 7/16 1/2 11/16 1 1 1/4 L 0 .59

(15 .0)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(868)
Tx E D D L
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .10 0 .09 1 .18

(30 .0) (2 .5) (2 .3)
1/4 3/8
1 .72
(43 .7)
0 .28
(7 .1)
0 .19
(4 .8)
0 .86
(21 .8)
0 .53
(13 .5)
10 700
(737)
2 .08
(52 .8)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .28
(7 .1)
1 .04
(26 .4)
0 .64
(16 .3)
8 100
(558)
1/2 3/4 1
2 .34
(59 .4)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
1 .17
(29 .7)
0 .81
(20 .6)
6 600
(454)
3 .12
(79 .2)
0 .44
(11 .2)
0 .63
(16 .0)
1 .56
(39 .6)
1 .04
(26 .4)
5 900
(406)
3 .84
(97 .5)
0 .62
(15 .7)
0 .88
(22 .4)
1 .92
(48 .8)
1 .45
(36 .8)
5 600
(385)
Weld Fittings
15

Union Cross
L F
Dimensions A D E F 7/16 1/2 11/16 1 1 1/4 L 0 .86

(21 .8)
Tx 0 .53
(13 .5)

(737)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .28 0 .19 1 .72

(43 .7) (7 .1) (4 .8)
Tx E D
3/8 1/2
A
2 .08
(52 .8)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .28
(7 .1)
1 .04
(26 .4)
0 .64
(16 .3)
8 100
(558)
2 .34
(59 .4)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
1 .17
(29 .7)
0 .81
(20 .6)
6 600
(454)
3/4 1
3 .12
(79 .2)
0 .44
(11 .2)
0 .63
(16 .0)
1 .56
(39 .6)
1 .20
(30 .5)
5 900
(406)
3 .84
(97 .5)
0 .62
(15 .7)
0 .88
(22 .4)
1 .92
(48 .8)
1 .45
(36 .8)
5 600
(385)
Tube Butt Weld to Tube Socket Weld

D
Tube OD 1/4

(2 .0)
Tube Socket Size 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2
Ordering Number Dimensions, in . (mm) SS-4-MTW-A-2TSW SS-6-MTW-A-4TSW SS-8-MTW-A-4TSW SS-8-MTW-A-6TSW SS-12-MTW-A-8TSW SS-16-MTW-A-8TSW
Dimensions A 0 .56
(14 .2)
D 0 .10
(2 .5)
E 0 .09
(2 .3)
Tx 0 .29
(7 .4)

(868)
E A
Tx
3/8
0 .07
(1 .8)
0 .75
(19 .0)
0 .28
(7 .1)
0 .19
(4 .8)
0 .48
(12 .2)
8 200
(564)
0 .28 0 .88
(22 .4) (7 .1)
0 .19
(4 .8)
0 .50
(12 .7)
1/2
0 .09
(2 .2)
7 500
(516)
0 .31
(7 .9)
0 .33
(8 .3)
0 .60
(15 .2)
3/4 1
0 .11
(2 .8)
1 .12
(28 .4)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
0 .75
(19 .0)
6 300
(434)
0 .13
(3 .2)
1 .38
(35 .1)
0 .38
(9 .7)
0 .41
(10 .4)
0 .73
(18 .5)
5 300
(365)
Pipe Socket Weld Fittings

change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order pipe
Quality machining of all surfaces ensures consistent welding to pipe . Heavy wall, plus strength of material, ensures long life in severe service applications .
socket weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) .
Socket depth equals or exceeds requirements of ASME B16 .11 and ensures proper pipe support .
Union
D Px P E D
P Pipe Size 1/4
Ordering Number
Dimensions A D E 0 .36
(9 .1)
Px 0 .88
(22 .4)

(558)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 0 .39 1 .06 SS-4-PSW-6

(26 .9) (9 .9) (9 .9)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1
SS-6-PSW-6 SS-8-PSW-6 SS-12-PSW-6 SS-16-PSW-6
1 .12
(28 .4)
0 .39 0 .39
(9 .9)
0 .49
(12 .4)
1 .03
(26 .2)
7100
(489)
1 .12
(28 .4)
0 .62
(15 .7)
1 .25
(31 .8)
6800
(468)
1 .75
(44 .4)
0 .51
(13 .0)
0 .82
(20 .8)
1 .47
(37 .3)
5800
(399)
1 .75
(44 .4)
0 .51
(13 .0)
1 .05
(26 .7)
1 .86
(47 .2)
6100
(420)
Pipe Butt Weld Fittings

change .
See Cleaning and Packaging, page 2, to order pipe butt
37 1/2 chamfer ensures proper weld (not included on 1/4 in . size) . Male weld end can be butt or socket welded .
weld fittings cleaned in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) .
Tube Socket Weld to Pipe Butt Weld

D Tx A 37 1/2 E
Tube OD
Pipe Size (Sch 80) 1/4 1/2 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 3/4
Ordering Number SS-4-MPW-A-4TSW SS-8-MPW-A-4TSW SS-6-MPW-A-6TSW SS-8-MPW-A-6TSW SS-12-MPW-A-6TSW SS-16-MPW-A-6TSW SS-6-MPW-A-8TSW SS-8-MPW-A-8TSW SS-12-MPW-A-8TSW SS-16-MPW-A-8TSW SS-12-MPW-A-12TSW
Dimensions A 0 .88 (22 .4) 1 .12 (28 .4) 1 .03 (26 .2) 1 .12 (28 .4) 1 .50 (38 .1) 1 .38 (35 .1) 1 .00 (25 .4) 1 .19 (30 .2) 1 .50 (38 .1) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .42 (10 .7) 0 .41 (10 .4) 0 .41 (10 .3) 0 .38 (9 .7) 0 .73 (18 .5) 0 .31 (7 .9) 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .60 (15 .2) D E Tx
Pressure Rating psig (bar) 10 300 (709) 7 800 (537) 8 100 (558) 7 800 (537) 6 600 (454) 6 000 (413) 6 600 (454) 6 600 (454) 6 600 (454) 6 000 (413) 5 900 (406)
Dimensions, in . (mm) 1/4 0 .28 (7 .1) 0 .19 (4 .8) 0 .48 (12 .2)
3/8
1/2
1 .56 (39 .6) 0 .44 (11 .2)
3/4
1 .50 (38 .1) 0 .44 (11 .2) 0 .62 (15 .7) 1 .05 (26 .7)

Safe Product Selection When selecting a product, the total system design must be considered to ensure safe, troublefree performance. Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system designer and user.
Swagelok, Micro-FitTM Swagelok Company 2009 Swagelok Company Printed in U .S .A ., MI October 2009, R7 MS-01-149

Tube Fittings Swagelog

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Tube Fittings Swagelog

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

www.swagelok.

Actuate d Ball Valve Se le ction Guide

40 G, 40, 6 0, 8 3, H 8 3, a n d S K S e r i e s Val ve s A FS B a l l Val ve s

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

40G Series Valves

Swagelok 43G series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.

Valve Operating Torque

Seat or Packing Material

Factors that Affect Operating Torque

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

40G Series Valves

Table 1Base Start and End Torque

Base Torque, in.lb (Nm, cmkg) End 7 7 7 9 10 16

Table 2Temperature Factors

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

Valve Series 41G/42G 41GE/42GE 41G-1466/42G-1466 43G 43GE 43G-1466

41G/ 42G F04

Table 3Media Factors

40G Series Valve Designators

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

Calculating Operating Torque

Table 4Base Start and End Torque

Table 5Temperature Factors

Table 6Media Factors

40 Series Valve Designators

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN

17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

Calculating Operating Torque

Table 7Base Start and End Torque

Table 8Temperature Factors

Table 9Media Factors

60 Series Valve Designators

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

Coupling Size 9 mm ISO 9 mm ISO 9 mm DIN 9 mm DIN

14 mm ISO 14 mm ISO 14 mm DIN 14 mm DIN 17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

83 and H83 Series Valves

Calculating Operating Torque

Table 10Base Start and End Torque

Table 11Media Factors

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

Swagelok 83 series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

AFS Ball Valves

Calculating Operating Torque

Table 12Base Start and End Torque

Table 13Temperature Factors

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

17 mm ISO 17 mm ISO 17 mm DIN 17 mm DIN

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide

Calculating Operating Torque

end torque at system pressure from Table 14.

from Table 15.

Table 14Base Start and End Torque

Table 15Temperature Factors

Base Torque, in. lb (Nm, cmkg)

Mounting Bracket Kit Ordering Numbers

Swagelok SK series valve with ISO 5211compliant actuator.

Actuated Ball Valve Selection Guide